Avaya Multivantage Software Release 1 2 Administrators Guide Administrator's For

: Avaya Avaya-Multivantage-Software-Release-1-2-Administrators-Guide-734401 avaya-multivantage-software-release-1-2-administrators-guide-734401 avaya pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 2026

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Administrator’s Guide for

Avaya MultiVantage™ Software
Volumes 1, 2, and 3

Release 1.2
555-233-506
Issue 5
October 2002

Copyright 2002, Avaya Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document
was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Preventing Toll Fraud
“Toll fraud” is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your
company's behalf). Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud
associated with your system and that, if toll fraud occurs, it can result
in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services.
Avaya Fraud Intervention
If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need
technical assistance or support, in the United States and Canada, call
the Technical Service Center's Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at
1-800-643-2353.
How to Get Help
For additional support telephone numbers, go to the Avaya Web site:
http://www.avaya.com/support/
If you are:
• Within the United States, click Escalation Lists, which includes
escalation phone numbers within the USA.
• Outside the United States, click Escalation Lists then click Global Escalation List, which includes phone numbers for the
regional Centers of Excellence.
Providing Telecommunications Security
Telecommunications security (of voice, data, and/or video communications) is the prevention of any type of intrusion to (that is, either
unauthorized or malicious access to or use of) your company's telecommunications equipment by some party.
Your company's “telecommunications equipment” includes both this
Avaya product and any other voice/data/video equipment that could be
accessed via this Avaya product (that is, “networked equipment”).
An “outside party” is anyone who is not a corporate employee, agent,
subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf. Whereas, a
“malicious party” is anyone (including someone who may be otherwise authorized) who accesses your telecommunications equipment
with either malicious or mischievous intent.
Such intrusions may be either to/through synchronous (time-multiplexed and/or circuit-based) or asynchronous (character-, message-, or
packet-based) equipment or interfaces for reasons of:
• Utilization (of capabilities special to the accessed equipment)
• Theft (such as, of intellectual property, financial assets, or tollfacility access)
• Eavesdropping (privacy invasions to humans)
• Mischief (troubling, but apparently innocuous, tampering)
• Harm (such as harmful tampering, data loss or alteration,
regardless of motive or intent)
Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associated with your system and/or its networked equipment. Also realize
that, if such an intrusion should occur, it could result in a variety of
losses to your company (including but not limited to, human/data privacy, intellectual property, material assets, financial resources, labor
costs, and/or legal costs).

Responsibility for Your Company’s Telecommunications Security
The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment rests with you - Avaya’s customer system administrator, your telecommunications peers, and your managers. Base the
fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and
resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to:
• Installation documents
• System administration documents
• Security documents
• Hardware-/software-based security tools
• Shared information between you and your peers
• Telecommunications security experts
To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment, you and
your peers should carefully program and configure:
• Your Avaya-provided telecommunications systems and their
interfaces
• Your Avaya-provided software applications, as well as their
underlying hardware/software platforms and interfaces
• Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products.
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
If the equipment supports Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) facilities, you may experience certain compromises in performance, reliability and security, even when the equipment performs as warranted.
These compromises may become more acute if you fail to follow
Avaya's recommendations for configuration, operation and use of the
equipment. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU ARE AWARE OF
THESE RISKS AND THAT YOU HAVE DETERMINED THEY
ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR YOUR APPLICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT. YOU ALSO ACKNOWLEDGE THAT, UNLESS
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN ANOTHER AGREEMENT, YOU
ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR (1) ENSURING THAT YOUR
NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS ARE ADEQUATELY SECURED
AGAINST UNAUTHORIZED INTRUSION AND (2) BACKING
UP YOUR DATA AND FILES.
Standards Compliance
Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any radio or television interference
caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than
those specified by Avaya Inc. The correction of interference caused by
such unauthorized modifications, substitution or attachment will be
the responsibility of the user. Pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules, the user is cautioned that
changes or modifications not expressly approved by Avaya Inc. could
void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
The equipment described in this manual complies with standards of
the following organizations and laws, as applicable:
• Australian Communications Agency (ACA)
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
• Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
• Committee for European Electrotechnical Standardization
(CENELEC) – European Norms (EN’s)
• Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS)
• European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA)
• European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
• FCC Rules Parts 15 and 68
• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
• International Special Committee on Radio Interference
(CISPR)
• International Telecommunications Union - Telephony (ITU-T)
• ISDN PBX Network Specification (IPNS)
• National ISDN-1
• National ISDN-2
• Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

Product Safety Standards
This product complies with and conforms to the following international Product Safety standards as applicable:
Safety of Information Technology Equipment, IEC 60950, 3rd Edition
including all relevant national deviations as listed in Compliance with
IEC for Electrical Equipment (IECEE) CB-96A.
Safety of Laser products, equipment classification and requirements:
• IEC 60825-1, 1.1 Edition
• Safety of Information Technology Equipment, CAN/CSAC22.2 No. 60950-00 / UL 60950, 3rd Edition
• Safety Requirements for Customer Equipment, ACA Technical
Standard (TS) 001 - 1997
• One or more of the following Mexican national standards, as
applicable: NOM 001 SCFI 1993, NOM SCFI 016 1993, NOM
019 SCFI 1998
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards
This product complies with and conforms to the following international EMC standards and all relevant national deviations:
Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference of Information Technology Equipment, CISPR 22:1997 and EN55022:1998.
Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics –
Limits and Methods of Measurement, CISPR 24:1997 and
EN55024:1998, including:
• Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2
• Radiated Immunity IEC 61000-4-3
• Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000-4-4
• Lightning Effects IEC 61000-4-5
• Conducted Immunity IEC 61000-4-6
• Mains Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8
• Voltage Dips and Variations IEC 61000-4-11
• Powerline Harmonics IEC 61000-3-2
• Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker IEC 61000-3-3
Federal Communications Commission Statement
Part 15:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Part 68: Answer-Supervision Signaling. Allowing this equipment to
be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer-supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules. This equipment returns
answer-supervision signals to the public switched network when:
• answered by the called station,
• answered by the attendant, or
• routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by
the customer premises equipment (CPE) user.
This equipment returns answer-supervision signals on all direct
inward dialed (DID) calls forwarded back to the public switched telephone network. Permissible exceptions are:
• A call is unanswered.
• A busy tone is received.
• A reorder tone is received.

Avaya attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing
users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use
of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to
block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator
Consumers Act of 1990.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear
of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the
FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for
this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the
telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be
connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line
may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In
most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed 5.0. To be
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as
determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company.
REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities.
Means of Connection
Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the
following table.
Manufacturer’s Port
Identifier

FIC Code

SOC/REN/ Network
A.S. Code Jacks

Off/On premises station

OL13C

9.0F

RJ2GX,
RJ21X,
RJ11C

DID trunk

02RV2-T

0.0B

RJ2GX,
RJ21X

CO trunk

02GS2

0.3A

RJ21X

CO trunk

02LS2

0.3A

RJ21X

Tie trunk

TL31M

9.0F

RJ2GX

Basic Rate Interface

02IS5

6.0F, 6.0Y

RJ49C

1.544 digital interface

04DU9-BN, 6.0F
1KN, 1SN

RJ48C,
RJ48M

120A2 channel service unit

04DU9-DN 6.0Y

RJ48C

If the terminal equipment (for example, the MultiVantageTM Solution
equipment) causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the
telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also,
you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if
you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance
notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain
uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty
information, please contact the Technical Service Center at 1-800-2422121 or contact your local Avaya representative. If the equipment is
causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may
request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is
resolved.

Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) signed by the Vice
It is recommended that repairs be performed by Avaya certified technicians.
The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided
by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject
to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
This equipment, if it uses a telephone receiver, is hearing aid compatible.
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference
Information

President of MultiVantageTM Solutions research and development,
Avaya Inc., can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site:
http://support.avaya.com/elmodocs2/DoC/IDoC/index.jhtml/
Japan
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment
(VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio
disturbance may occur, in which case, the user may be required to take
corrective actions.

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.
This digital apparatus does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise
emission set out in the radio interference regulation of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
Le Présent Appareil Nomérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques
dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils manicures de la class A
préscrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par
le ministére des Communications du Canada.
This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration
number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies
that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity
indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It
does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.
DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
United States FCC Part 68 Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity
(SDoC)
Avaya Inc. in the United States of America hereby certifies that the
equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB-168
label identification number complies with the FCC’s Rules and Regulations 47 CFR Part 68, and the Administrative Council on Terminal
Attachments (ACTA) adopted technical criteria.
Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset-equipped terminal equipment described in this document complies with Paragraph 68.316 of
the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid Compatibility
and is deemed compatible with hearing aids.
Copies of SDoCs signed by the Responsible Party in the U. S. can be
obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site:
http://support.avaya.com/elmodocs2/DoC/SDoC/index.jhtml/
All MultiVantageTM system products are compliant with FCC Part 68,
but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process
was available. A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at:
http://www.part68.org/
by conducting a search using “Avaya” as manufacturer.
European Union Declarations of Conformity

Avaya Inc. declares that the equipment specified in this document
bearing the “CE” (Conformité Europeénne) mark conforms to the
European Union Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive (1999/5/EC), including the Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC). This
equipment has been certified to meet CTR3 Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
and CTR4 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and subsets thereof in CTR12
and CTR13, as applicable.

Network Connections
Digital Connections - The equipment described in this document can
be connected to the network digital interfaces throughout the European Union.
Analogue Connections - The equipment described in this document
can be connected to the network analogue interfaces throughout the
following member states:
Belgium
Germany Luxembourg
Netherlands

Spain

United Kingdom

LASER Product
The equipment described in this document may contain Class 1
LASER Device(s) if single-mode fiber-optic cable is connected to a
remote expansion port network (EPN). The LASER devices operate
within the following parameters:
• Maximum power output –5 dBm to -8 dBm
• Center Wavelength 1310 nm to 1360 nm
• CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 60825-1: 1998
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Contact your Avaya representative for more laser product information.
To order copies of this and other documents:
Call: Avaya Publications Center
Voice 1.800.457.1235 or 1.207.866.6701
FAX 1.800.457.1764 or 1.207.626.7269
Write: Globalware Solutions
200 Ward Hill Avenue
Haverhill, MA 01835 USA
Attention: Avaya Account Management
E-mail: totalware@gwsmail.com

Volume 1

Volume 1

About this document
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

1

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

19
19
19
23
23
26
27
28
28
29

31

Logging into the system
Accessing the S8700 Media Server
Logging in with Access Security Gateway
Logging off the system
Setting command permissions
Establishing daylight savings rules
Setting the system date and time
Setting time of day clock synchronization
Using the bulletin board
Saving translations
Backup via the Web interface
(S8100 Media Server only)

31
33
37
39
40
41
44
45
53
55
58

Introduction to the MultiVantage system
■
■
■
■
■
■

555-233-506

Overview
Intended audience
Using this book
New product names
Related Sources
Conventions used in this document
Trademarks
How to get this book on the web
How to get help
Tell us what you think

System basics
■

2

19

Understanding your configuration
Understanding the dial plan
Controlling the calls your users can make and receive
Controlling the features your users can access
System-wide settings
Changing feature parameters

69
69
71
75
77
77
78

Issue 5 October 2002

5

Features and technical reference

■
■
■
■
■
■
■

3

Managing phones
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

4

Installing new phones
Adding new phones
Using templates to add phones
Using an alias
Customizing your phone
Upgrading phones
Swapping phones
Using ACTR to move phones
Using TTI to move phones
Removing phones
Adding a fax or modem
Adding an IP Telephone
Adding an IP Softphone
Setting up remote office
2420 DCP telephone

Managing phone features
■
■
■
■
■

6

Administering treatment for denied or invalid calls
Setting up Music-on-Hold
Providing service for multiple tenants
Receiving notification in an emergency
Notifying a digital pager of an emergency
Other useful settings
Fiber link administration

Adding feature buttons
Telephone feature buttons
Adding abbreviated dialing lists
Setting up bridged call appearances
Setting up Terminal Self Administration

Issue 5 October 2002

79
80
82
84
87
88
89

91
91
93
96
98
99
100
101
102
104
108
109
110
115
119
127

129
129
131
153
157
160

555-233-506

Volume 1

5

Managing your attendant consoles
■
■
■
■
■
■

6

Managing displays
■
■
■
■
■

7

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Setting up basic call coverage
Setting up advanced call coverage
Setting up call forwarding
Setting up night service
Adding call pickup
Managing hunt groups
Managing vectors and VDNs
Understanding Automatic Call Distribution
Assigning a terminating extension group

Routing outgoing calls
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

555-233-506

Displaying caller information
Displaying ANI calling party information
Displaying ICLID Information
Changing the display language
Setting up directory buttons

Handling incoming calls
■

8

Overview
Adding an attendant console
Attendant console feature buttons
Removing an attendant console
Setting console parameters
Providing backup for an attendant

World class routing
Managing calling privileges
Assigning ARS FAC
Displaying ARS analysis information
Understanding ARS analysis
Setting up multiple locations
Routing with multiple locations
Modifying call routing

163
163
168
170
176
177
178

181
181
181
182
184
187

189
189
193
199
205
218
224
230
243
244

247
247
248
249
249
250
257
259
261

Issue 5 October 2002

7

Features and technical reference

■
■
■
■

9

Managing multimedia calling
■
■
■
■

10

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting
Setting up Personal Station Access
Creating a station security code
Assigning coverage options
Setting up call forwarding
Assigning an extender password
Installing home equipment
Setting up remote access
Training users

Enhancing system security
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

8

Multimedia Applications Server Interface
Multimedia Call Handling
Understanding the multimedia complex
Enhanced Mode MM complex

Setting up telecommuting
■

11

Overriding call restrictions
Defining ARS Partitions
Setting up time of day routing
Location by region

Basic security
Preventing toll fraud
Physical security
System security checklist
Adding logins and passwords
Changing a login
Displaying a login
Removing a login
Using access security gateway
Changing login permissions
Changing passwords
Using busy verify
Setting up security violations notification

Issue 5 October 2002

264
265
268
271

275
275
304
323
337

357
357
360
362
363
364
366
368
370
373

377
378
379
381
382
387
390
392
392
393
397
399
400
401

555-233-506

Volume 1

■
■
■

12

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

411

Tips for working with trunk groups
Adding a CO, FX, or WATS trunk group
Adding a DID trunk group
Adding a DIOD trunk group
Adding a PCOL trunk group
Adding a Tie or Access trunk group
Setting up digital trunks
Adding trunks to a trunk group
Removing trunks from a trunk group
Removing trunk groups
Inserting and absorbing digits
Administering answer detection
Administering trunks for listed directory numbers

411
414
417
419
420
423
426
430
432
433
434
436
437

Managing announcements
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

555-233-506

404
407
409

Managing trunks
■

13

Setting up authorization codes
Using Station Lock
Dealing with security violations

439

Understanding announcements
Adding announcement data modules
Adding announcement extensions
Recording announcements
Saving announcements
Copying announcements
Restoring announcements
Deleting and erasing announcements
Setting up continuous-play announcements
Getting started with the TN2501AP or G700 Virtual VAL
Managing VAL Announcements Using the SAT
Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP
VAL Manager
Troubleshooting VAL Announcements
Non-volatile storage of announcements on VAL

439
439
441
442
445
446
447
448
450
451
453
459
466
467
470

Issue 5 October 2002

9

Features and technical reference

14

Managing group communication
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

15

Managing data calls
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

16

Types of data connections
Data Call Setup
Default Dialing
Alphanumeric Dialing
Data Hotline
Data Privacy
Data Restriction
Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions
Data Modules — general
Administered Connection
Modem Pooling
PC Interface
Wideband Switching
CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface
Setting up CallVisor ASAI
Setting up DEFINITY LAN Gateway

Collecting billing information
■
■
■
■
■
■

10

Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers
Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers
Paging over speakerphones
Paging users who are on active calls
Using phones as intercoms
Setting up automatic answer intercom calls
Observing calls

Collecting information about calls
Recording calls between users on the same switch
Tracking calls by account code
Forcing users to enter account codes
Receiving call-charge information
Viewing call charge information

Issue 5 October 2002

473
473
476
479
481
483
486
487

489
489
490
497
498
499
500
501
502
504
507
513
515
519
532
534
535

537
537
540
541
542
544
547

555-233-506

Volume 2

17

Administering Media Servers
■
■
■
■
■

Overview
G700 Media Gateway administration
Media Server administration
Call-processing administration
SNMP Agents

549
549
549
555
560
564

Volume 2

18

Screen reference
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

555-233-506

AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table
AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table
Abbreviated Dialing List
Access Endpoint
Administered Connection
Alias Station
Alphanumeric Dialing Table
Announcements/Audio Sources
ARS Toll Table
Attendant Console
Audix-MSA Node Names
Authorization Code — COR Mapping
Best Service Routing
Bulletin Board
Call Vector
CAMA Numbering Format
CDR System Parameters
Class of Restriction
Class of Service
Code Calling IDs
Command Permission Categories
Configuration Set
Console Parameters
Coverage Answer Group
Coverage Path
Crisis Alert System Parameters
CTI Link
Data modules
Date and Time

577
577
582
585
593
598
603
604
606
613
614
630
631
633
636
638
644
646
658
672
675
676
680
683
694
696
700
703
707
741

Issue 5 October 2002

11

Features and technical reference

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

12

Daylight Savings Rules
DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen
Dial Plan Analysis Table
Dial Plan Parameters
Digit Absorption
DLG Administration
DS1 Circuit Pack
Extended Pickup Group
Extensions Administered
to have an MCT-Control Button
Feature Access Code
Feature-Related System Parameters
Group Paging Using Speakerphone
Holiday Table
Hospitality
Hunt Group
Intercom Group
Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) Codes
Intra-Switch CDR
IP Address Mapping
IP Codec Set
IP Interfaces
IP Network Region
IP Node Names
IP-Options System Parameters
IP Routing
ISDN trunk group
ISDN Numbering — Private
ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown
ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack
Language Translations
Listed Directory Numbers
List Usage Report for node-name
List Usage Report for ip-address
Locations
Login Administration
Loudspeaker Paging
Media-Gateway
Meet-me Vector Directory Numbers
Mode Code Related System Parameters
Modem Pool Group
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related
System Parameters

Issue 5 October 2002

744
746
748
751
754
756
757
778
780
781
795
858
860
862
875
903
905
906
908
910
912
915
922
923
926
936
970
973
976
985
1015
1016
1017
1018
1020
1027
1031
1034
1034
1038
1045

555-233-506

Volume 3

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

Music Sources
Packet Gateway Board
Partition Route Table
Personal CO Line Group
Pickup Group
PRI Endpoint
QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway
Remote Access
Remote Call Coverage Table
Remote Office
RHNPA Table
Route Pattern
Security-Related System Parameters
Signaling Group
Site Data
Station
System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding
System Parameters Country-Options
System-Parameters Customer-Options
System Parameters OCM Call Classification
Telecommuting Access
Tenant
Terminal Parameters
Terminating Extension Group
TFTP Server
Time of Day Coverage Table
Time of Day Routing Plan
Toll Analysis
Trunk Group
Uniform Dial Plan Report
Uniform Dial Plan Table
Vector Directory Number

1069
1072
1073
1074
1079
1080
1085
1086
1092
1093
1095
1096
1105
1112
1126
1127
1167
1175
1186
1210
1213
1214
1218
1223
1227
1228
1229
1230
1233
1303
1304
1306

Volume 3

19

Command reference
■

555-233-506

Before you start

1317
1317

Issue 5 October 2002

13

Features and technical reference

20

Phone reference
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

21

Features and technical reference
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

14

500 telephones
2420 telephones
2500-series telephones
4600-series IP telephones
6200-series telephones
6400-series telephones
7100-series telephones
7300-series telephones
731x-series hybrid telephones
7400-series telephones
ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s)
8110 telephones
8400-series telephones
CALLMASTER telephones
Cordless telephone
Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones

AAR and ARS partitioning
Abbreviated dialing
Access Security Gateway
Administered connections
Administration change notification
Administrable language displays
Alternate facility restriction levels
Analog busy automatic callback without flash
Announcements
Answer detection
Attendant Features
Audible message waiting
Authorization codes
Automated attendant
Automatic callback
Automatic circuit assurance
Automatic customer telephone rearrangement
Automatic number identification
Automatic routing — general
Barrier codes
Bridged call appearance

Issue 5 October 2002

1387
1388
1388
1388
1389
1391
1395
1399
1399
1403
1408
1425
1430
1430
1437
1441
1444

1447
1447
1449
1452
1454
1459
1460
1461
1463
1464
1468
1470
1478
1479
1484
1486
1490
1492
1497
1499
1504
1505

555-233-506

Volume 3

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

555-233-506

Busy indicator
Busy tone disconnect
Busy verification
Call charge information
Call coverage
Call detail recording
Call forwarding
Call park
Call Pickup
Call waiting termination
Call-by-call service selection
Calling party/billing number
Calling party number restriction
CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support
Class of restriction
Conference
Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network Gateway
Restriction — controlled
Crisis Alert
Dial plan
Distinctive ringing
DS1 trunk service
EC500 Extension to Cellular
Emergency Access to the Attendant
Emergency calls
Emergency Transfer
Extended user administration of redirected calls
Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling
Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks
Generalized route selection
Group paging
Hospitality features
Hunt groups
Incoming Call Line Identification
Intercom
Internal Automatic Answer
ISDN service
Leave Word Calling
Line Lockout
Listed Directory Numbers
Location by region
Look-ahead routing
Loss plans

1521
1521
1522
1527
1532
1553
1612
1620
1623
1628
1629
1635
1636
1637
1641
1647
1650
1652
1653
1656
1658
1659
1664
1668
1671
1672
1673
1678
1684
1687
1690
1693
1715
1723
1724
1726
1730
1744
1746
1747
1749
1750
1753

Issue 5 October 2002

15

Features and technical reference

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

16

Loudspeaker paging
Malicious Call Trace
Misoperation Handling
Modem pooling
Multiappearance Preselection and Preference
Multifrequency signaling
Night Service
Off-Premises Station
PC Interface
Personal Station Access
Priority Calling
Recorded Telephone Dictation Access
Remote Access
Reset Shift Call
Remotely readable electronic phone IDs
Ringer Cutoff
Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed
Security violations notification
Service observing
Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering
Station Hunting
Station Lock
Station security codes
Telephone displays
Temporary Bridged Appearance
Tenant Partitioning
Terminal Translation Initialization
Terminating Extension Group
Time of Day Routing
Time of Day Clock Synchronization
Transfer
Transfer — Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk
Transfer — Trunk-to-Trunk
Trunk Flash
Trunks and trunk groups
Uniform Dial Plan
Voice Message Retrieval
Voice messaging systems
Whisper paging
Wideband Switching
World-Class Tone Detection and Generation

Issue 5 October 2002

1753
1759
1764
1767
1770
1772
1779
1789
1790
1794
1798
1800
1800
1805
1807
1808
1810
1813
1817
1821
1825
1831
1832
1833
1868
1870
1880
1885
1887
1888
1892
1896
1899
1901
1903
1913
1919
1921
1927
1931
1946

555-233-506

Volume 3

GL

Glossary and abbreviations

1949

IN

Index

2003

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

17

Features and technical reference

18

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

About this document

Overview
This document describes the October 2002 release of Avaya MultiVantage™
administration, and includes all incremental releases up to and including this
release. You may also want to see the Avaya Multivantage™ running on a
DEFINITY® Server Change Description to see what is new.
This document provides an overall reference for planning, operating, and
administering your MultiVantage solution.
This document does not contain information about how to install, maintain, repair,
or troubleshoot the switch.

Intended audience
This document is intended for MultiVantage system administrators and managers,
users interested in information about specific features, and Avaya personnel
responsible for planning, designing, configuring, selling, and supporting the
system.

Using this book
Use this document as a guide to completing administrative procedures and as a
reference document. If you are interested in information about a particular task,
screen, or feature, use the index or table of contents to locate the page number
where the information is described.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 19

About this document

The book is divided into three volumes that present information on how to
perform administrative tasks, how to complete administrative screens, and more
detailed information on individual features.
Organization

The first volume of this document provides step-by-step tasks for the
administrative procedures that implement MultiVantage features. The second
volume explains how to fill out MultiVantage screens and defines the values for
the fields on the screens. The third volume explains MultiVantage features and
provides additional detail about switch operations.
The following list describes the sections in this book.
‘‘System basics’’ tells you how to log in and log off, set permissions for others
who use the administration terminal, set daylight savings rules, set the system date
and time, post messages, and back up the information you administer.
‘‘Introduction to the MultiVantage system’’ provides information on system-wide
functions. It explains how to read, use, and make simple changes to your dial plan,
and how to assign feature access codes.
‘‘Managing phones’’ explains how to add, swap, and remove phones on your
system, and how to customize a phone for a switch administrator.
‘‘Managing phone features’’ explains how to administer feature buttons for your
users’ phones.
‘‘Managing your attendant consoles’’ explains attendant console feature buttons,
and tells you how to change, move, or add attendant consoles.
‘‘Managing displays’’ provides information on the messages that appear on the
read-out screen on display phones.
‘‘Handling incoming calls’’ shows you how to set up call coverage for incoming
calls to be sure that incoming calls are answered when the called party is
unavailable.
‘‘Routing outgoing calls’’ explains how the switch handles outgoing calls and
tells you how to modify call restrictions and your routing plan.
‘‘Managing multimedia calling’’ describes the Multimedia Applications Server
Interface (MASI), and provides instructions on administration, monitoring, and
troubleshooting. This section also provides information on Multimedia Call
Handling (MMCH), which enables users to control voice, video, and data
transmissions using a telephone and PC.

20

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using this book

‘‘Setting up telecommuting’’ provides information on switch-wide settings and
individual administration for telecommuting.
‘‘Enhancing system security’’ provides information on analyzing and setting up
basic system security, preventing toll fraud, using logins and permissions and
passwords, and dealing with security violations.
‘‘Managing trunks’’ contains procedures for working with analog and digital
trunks. Specialized trunks such as APLT, tandem, release-link, DMI-BOS and
ISDN trunk groups are not covered in this manual.
‘‘Managing announcements’’ tells you how to record, save, copy, restore and
delete announcements.
‘‘Managing group communication’’ shows you how to administer your system so
users can page other users or use their phones as intercoms. You can also give
specific users permission to monitor other users’ calls or to interrupt active calls
with important messages.
‘‘Managing data calls’’ describes the system features available to enable data
communications.
‘‘Collecting billing information’’ provides information on account codes, and on
tracking and collecting information about calls.
‘‘Administering Media Servers’’ provides information on administering an Avaya
G700 Media Gateway and the S8300 Media Server and the S8700 Media Server.
‘‘Screen reference’’ provides a brief description and a graphic representation of
the screens used for MultiVantage administration. It also lists the valid values for
the fields on the screens, and describes when and why to use each value.
‘‘Command reference’’ Use the commands in these tables to access each
administration screen.
‘‘Phone reference’’ describes many of the telephones that you can connect to the
MultiVantage Solution. It also describes the unique features and buttons for each
phone series to help you administer your user phones.
‘‘Features and technical reference’’ is a comprehensive technical reference for
feature information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

21

About this document

Task-related information

The information for each task is usually presented under the following headings:
■

Task
Identifies the administrative procedure and gives a brief explanation of
what is accomplished by completing the task.

■

Before you start
Lists hardware that must be installed or other tasks that must be completed
before starting the task.

■

Instructions
Begins with a short introduction to set up an example, then provides
step-by step, numbered instructions on how to complete the administrative
task. Screen pictures and background or decision-making information are
provided when appropriate.

■

Fixing problems
This section is not included in all task sections. It provides a brief coverage
of possible problems, possible causes, and suggested solutions.

■

More information
Presents additional technical information that pertains directly to the
completion of the current task.

■

Related topics
Provides cross-references to related tasks or related feature references.

Feature-related information

The information for each feature is usually presented under four headings:
■

Feature title
Gives the name and a brief overview of the feature. Tells what it does or
how it serves the system.

■

Detailed description
Provides more detailed, technical information about a feature. When
appropriate, additional guidelines and examples are provided. In some
cases, expanded technical information is provided on one or several aspects
of the feature.

■

Interactions
Lists and briefly discusses other features that may significantly affect a
feature.

■

Related topics
Provides cross-references to related tasks, features, or screens.

22

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

New product names

New product names
Use Table 1 as a reference for new product names as you read this document.
Table 1. New product names
Previous Product Name

New Product Name

DEFINITY G3csi (or
DEFINITY ProLogix)

Avaya MultiVantage™ software on an Avaya DEFINITY®
Server CSI (hereafter called DEFINITY CSI)
Avaya MultiVantage™ software on an Avaya DEFINITY®

DEFINITY G3si

Server SI (hereafter called DEFINITY SI)
DEFINITY G3r

Avaya MultiVantage™ software on an Avaya DEFINITY®
Server R (hereafter called DEFINITY R)

DEFINITY ECS

Avaya DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server
(hereafter called Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions)

DEFINITY ONE

Avaya™ S8100 Media Server with CMC1 (hereafter called
S8100 Media Server with CMC1)

IP 600

Avaya™ S8100 Media Server with Avaya™ G600 Media
Gateway (hereafter called S8100 Media Server with G600)

N/A - new product

Avaya™ S8300 Media Server with Avaya™ G700 Media
Gateway

N/A - new product

Avaya™ S8700 Media Server for IP Connect
Configurations (hereafter called S8700 IP-Connect)

N/A - new product

Avaya™ S8700 Media Server for Multi-Connect
Configurations (hereafter called S8700 Multi-Connect)

Continued on next page

Related Sources
The following documents provide additional information.
Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide, 555-233-230
DEFINITY® Communications System Generic 2.2 and Generic 3 V2
DS1/CEPT1/ISDN PRI Reference, 555-025-107
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software,
555-233-504

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

23

About this document

Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions,
555-233-116
Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software, 555-233-505
Upgrades and Additions for Avaya DEFINITY® Server R, 555-233-115
DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications Server Release 1.1 Getting Started with
the Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator, 555-233-769
GuestWorks® and DEFINITY® Systems Technician Handbook for Hospitality
Installations, 555-231-743
Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent
Selection (EAS) Guide, 555-230-521
Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers,
555-230-716
Welcome to the Avaya™ S8300 Media Server and Avaya™ G700 Media Gateway,
555-234-200
Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical Reference, 555-230-220

Avaya Business Advocate Release 3 Version 11 User Guide, 585-210-711
User’s Guide P330 Manager
BCS Products Security Handbook, 555-025-600
Access Security Gateway (ASG) Key Release 1.0 User’s Guide, 585-212-012
Overview for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software, 555-233-767
DEFINITY® IP Softphone Getting Started, 555-213-020
DEFINITY® IP Softphone Overview and Troubleshooting, 555-213-201
CentreVu® Advocate User’s Guide, 585-215-953
Avaya MultiVantage™ Application Notes for Type Approval
Installation, Upgrades and Additions for Avaya™ CMC1 Media Gateways,
555-233-118
Maintenance for Avaya DEFINITY® Server CSI, 555-233-119

24

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Related Sources

Maintenance for Avaya DEFINITY® Server R, 555-233-117
Maintenance for Avaya DEFINITY® Server SI, 555-233-123
Avaya DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications Server System Description,
555-233-200
GuestWorks® and Avaya® MultiVantage Enterprise Communications Server
Property Management Interface Specifications, 555-231-601
INTUITY AUDIX System Description or INTUITY AUDIX Administration, and
INTUITY Messaging Solutions Integration with System 75, Generic 1 and 3, and
R5/6
DEFINITY AUDIX System Feature Descriptions, 585-300-206
Avaya DEFINITY® AUDIX® System Administration, 585-300-507
Switch Administration for DEFINITY AUDIX System
DEFINITY AUDIX System Forms Reference
INTUITY Integration with System 75 and DEFINITY Communications System
Switch Administration for the embedded AUDIX System
Switch Administration for AUDIX Voice Messaging
DEFINITY Line-Side ISDN Primary Rate Interface Technical Reference
Avaya Multivantage™ running on a DEFINITY® Server Change Description
ADU User Manual
Call Detail Acquisition and Processing Reference Manual
Maintenance for Avaya™ G700 Media Gateway controlled by an Avaya™ S8300
Media Server or an Avaya™ S8700 Media Server, 555-234-101
Network Call Redirection, 555-233-759
MMCX Technical Reference
Avaya MultiVantage™ Fault and Performance Manager, Installation and
Configuration, 555-233-138

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

25

About this document

Avaya MultiVantage™ System Monitoring and Reporting
Made Easy Tools for DEFINITY® Media Server Configurations

Conventions used in this document
Become familiar with the following terms and conventions. They help you use
this book with your MultiVantage system.
■

Commands are printed in bold face as follows: command.
We show complete commands in this book, but you can usually type an
abbreviated version of the command. For example, list configuration
station can be typed as list config sta.

■

Screen displays and names of fields are printed in constant width as
follows: screen display.
A screen is any form displayed on your computer or terminal monitor.

■

Variables are printed in italics as follows: variable.

■

Keys and buttons are printed as follows: KEY.

■

To move to a certain field, you can use the TAB key, arrows, or the ENTER
key (the ENTER key may appear as the RETURN key on your keyboard).

■

If you use terminal emulation software, you need to determine what keys
correspond to ENTER, RETURN, CANCEL, HELP, NEXT PAGE, etc.

■

In this book we use the terms “telephone” and “voice terminal” to refer to
phones.

■

We show commands and screens from the newest MultiVantage system and
refer to the most current books. Please substitute the appropriate
commands for your system and refer to the manuals you have available.

■

If you need help constructing a command or completing a field entry,
remember to use HELP.
— When you press HELP at any point on the command line, the system
displays a list of available commands.
— When you press HELP with your cursor in a field on a screen, the
system displays a list of valid entries for that field.

■

26

The status line or message line can be found near the bottom of your
monitor display. This is where the system displays messages for you.
Check the message line to see how the system responds to your input.
Write down the message if you need to call our helpline.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trademarks

■

When a procedure requires you to press ENTER to save your changes, the
screen you were working on clears and the cursor returns to the command
prompt.
The message line shows “command successfully completed” to
indicate that the system accepted your changes.
Tip:

Draws attention to information that you may find helpful.
NOTE:

Draws attention to information that you must heed.

! CAUTION:
Denotes possible harm to software, possible loss of data, or possible service
interruptions.

! WARNING:
Denotes possible harm to hardware or equipment.

! DANGER:
Denotes possible harm or injury to your body.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Indicates when system administration may leave your system open to toll
fraud.

Trademarks
All trademarks identified by ® or ™ are registered trademarks or trademarks,
respectively, of Avaya Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

27

About this document

How to get this book on the web
If you have internet access, you can view and download the latest version of the
Administrator’s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software. To view the book, you
must have a copy of Acrobat Reader.
To access the latest version:
1. Access the Avaya web site at http://avaya.com
2. Click Support.
3. Click Online Services.
4. Click Documentation.
5. Click Recent Documents.
6. Scroll down to find the latest release of MultiVantage documents.
7. Search for 555-233-506 (the document number) to view the latest version
of the book.

How to get help
If you need additional help, the following resources are available. You may need
to purchase an extended service agreement to use some of these resources. See
your Avaya representative for more information.
■

DEFINITY Helpline (for help with feature
administration and system applications)

+1-800-225-7585

■

Avaya National Customer Care Center Support
Line (for help with maintenance and repair)

+1-800-242-2121

■

Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention

+1-800-643-2353

■

Avaya Corporate Security

+1-800-822-9009
+1-925-224-3401

28

■

International Technical Assistance Center (ITAC)

■

Avaya Centers of Excellence

1-905-943-8801

— North America

1-800-248-1111

— CALA Hotline (for Caribbean and Latin
America) - for vendor calls only

720-444-9998

— Bahrain

+973-218-266

— Budapest

+36-1238-8334

— Moscow

+7095-363-6701

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tell us what you think

— Saumur

+33-241-534-000

— UK

+44-1483-308-000

— Australia

+612-9352-9151

— Hong Kong

+852-3121-6423

— Japan

+813-5575-8800

— Shanghai

+8621-5459-4590

— Singapore

+65-872-8686

— Canada

1-800-387-4268

Tell us what you think
Let us know what you like or do not like about this book. Although we cannot
respond personally to all your feedback, we promise we will read each response
we receive.
Write to us at:

Avaya Inc.
Product Documentation Group
Room B3-H13
1300 W. 120th St.
Westminster, CO 80234 USA

Fax to:

303-538-1741

Send email to: document@avaya.com

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

29

About this document

30

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System basics

This section provides the basic step-by-step procedures you need to manage your
Avaya MultiVantage solution. It explains how to log in and log off, set
permissions for others who use the administration terminal, set daylight savings
rules, set date and time, post messages, and back up the information you
administer.

Logging into the system
You must log in before you can administer your system. If you are performing
remote administration, you must establish a remote administration link and
possibly assign the remote administration extension to a hunt group before you
log in. The members of this hunt group are the extensions of the data modules
available to connect to the system administration terminal. For information about
setting up remote administration, contact your Avaya representative.
NOTE:

Change your password frequently, at least once a month, to help keep
hackers out of your system. For instructions on how to change your
password, see ‘‘Changing passwords’’ on page 399.
When not using the system, log off for security purposes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 31

System basics

Instructions
Logging into the system

This procedure provides instructions for logging in from the system terminal not a
remote terminal.
To log into the system:
1. Enter your login name and press RETURN.
2. Enter your password and press RETURN.
For security, your password does not display as you type it.
3. Enter the kind of terminal you have or the type your system emulates and
press RETURN.
The Command prompt displays.
NOTE:

If you enter the wrong terminal type, it can lock up your system. If
the system is not responding to keyboard commands, type newterm
and press RETURN. Enter the correct terminal type on the new screen
and press RETURN. If this does not work, turn the power off only on
the terminal and then turn it back on. The terminal reboots and you
can log in again.
Logging in for remote administration

To log in for remote administration:
1. Dial the Uniform Call Distribution (‘‘UCD’’) group extension number.
NOTE:

The UCD group extension number is assigned when you set up
remote administration.
■

32

If you are off-premises, use the Direct Inward Dialing (‘‘DID’’)
number, a Listed Directory Number (LDN) (you must use a phone),
or the trunk number dedicated to remote administration.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Accessing the S8700 Media Server

■

If you are on-premises, use an extension number.
If you dialed a DID number, dedicated trunk number, or extension,
you receive data tone or visually receive answer confirmation.
If an LDN was dialed, the attendant will answer.
a. Ask to be transferred to the UCD group extension number.
You receive data tone or visually receive answer
confirmation.
b. Transfer the voice call to your data terminal.

The Login prompt displays.
2. Complete the steps for ‘‘Logging into the system’’ on page 31.
For information about setting up remote administration, contact your
Avaya representative.
Failed log-ins

You can administer your system for a maximum number of failed login attempts.
For instance, if you set the maximum limit to 4 and there are 4 login failures in 10
minutes or less, the login will be locked out for 5 minutes. An account lockout
event is logged to the security log.

Accessing the S8700 Media Server
To administer the S8700 Media Server, you must be able to access it. Personal
computers and services laptop computers equipped with a network PCMCIA card,
Avaya Site Administration (‘‘ASA’’), and a Web browser are the primary support
access for system initialization, aftermarket additions, and continuing
maintenance.
You can access the S8700 Media Server in one of three ways:
■

directly

■

remotely over the customer’s local area network (‘‘LAN’’)

■

over a modem

A direct connection and over the customer’s LAN are the preferred methods.
Remote access over a modem is for Avaya maintenance access only.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

33

System basics

Accessing the S8700 Media Server Directly

You can access the S8700 Media Server directly by plugging a computer into the
services port which defaults to port 2 (Eth1) on the back of the media server. You
must use a crossover cable with an RJ45 connector on each end. Plug the other
end into the network connector (NIC card) on the your computer. You may need a
NIC card adapter.
Once connected, you can administer the media server using three tools:
■

Media server web interface for server-specific administration.

■

ASA for Avaya MultiVantage software features

■

A command line interface in a Telnet window for Avaya MultiVantage
software features.

Media Server Web Interface

You can access the media server web interface either by connecting directly to the
services port on the media server or connecting over the customer’s network.
Connected to the services port

To use the media server web interface:
1. Open either the Netscape or MS Internet Explorer browser.
2. In the Location/Address field, type 192.11.13.6 and press ENTER.
3. When prompted, log in to administer the S8700 Media Server and the
Avaya MultiVantageTM software features.
Connected to the customer network

To use the media server web interface:
1. Open either the Netscape or MS Internet Explorer browser.
2. In the Location/Address field, type the active server name or IP address
and press ENTER.
3. When prompted, log in to administer the S8700 Media Server and the
Avaya MultiVantageTM software features.
You may also connect directly to an individual server using its name or IP
address.

34

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Accessing the S8700 Media Server

Avaya Site Administration

To use ASA:
1. You must have a PC or laptop with Avaya™ Site Administration on it.
2. You must be connected over a LAN to either:
■

a dedicated LAN port for service technicians, or

■

a customer LAN port

Instructions

1. Start up ASA by double-clicking the ASA icon.
2. In the Target System field, use the pull-down menu to select the desired
system.
If you have not set up the desired switch, click the NEW SWITCH icon (on the
left of the toolbar row). Complete the Add Switch wizard to build the
system record. When completed, the switch record will be available in the
Target System pull-down list.
3. Click Start GEDI.
You now are connected to the desired system.
Accessing the S8700 Media Server Remotely
over the network

You can access the S8700 Media Server from any computer connected through the
LAN. To access either server, use the IP address assigned to the server you want to
access. You can also use the active server address to connect automatically to the
server that is active. Once connected, you can administer the media server using
three tools:
■

Media server web interface for server-specific administration and call
processing features

■

Avaya Site Administration for the MultiVantage software (Only available
on the active server)

■

A command line interface via a Telnet window for Linux shell commands

Installing Avaya Site Administration

If you do not have ASA on your computer, make sure your PC or laptop first
meets the minimum requirements.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

35

System basics

Table 2. Minimum requirements to run ASA

Operating systems
MS Windows 95
MS Windows 98
MS Windows NT 4.0
MS Windows 2000

Processor/RAM
486SL/66/16 MB
Pentium/32 MB
Pentium/64 MB
Pentium-class 300 MHz/64 MB

Graphics adapter

SVGA with minimum screen resolution of 800
x 600

Floppy disk drive

3-1/2 in. 1.44-MB floppy disk drive

CD-ROM

CD-ROM drive (required to install ASA from
CD)

Available hard disk space

A minimum of 100-MB free hard disk space is
required. The requirement for disk space
depends on the size and number of
configuration data sets.

Printer port

Standard PC or network printer port is required
for connecting to a printer to produce station
button labels.

Network adapter

Required for network access to the S8700
Media Server, AUDIX, and other
network-connected systems.

Free serial ports

One free serial port capable of 9600-bps
operation is required for a connection to each
serial device (UPS).
Avaya recommends that PCs have at least a
16550A UART or 16550A UART simulator
(capable of 56 kbps DTE-speed connections).
USB and internal modems should emulate this
hardware.
A second serial port is required for
simultaneous connection to AUDIX through a
serial connection.

You can install ASA on your computer two different ways: from the Avaya Site
Administration CD, or from the S8700 Media Server.

36

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Logging in with Access Security Gateway

From the ASA CD

Place the ASA CD in the CD-ROM drive and follow the installation instructions
in the install wizard.
From the S8700 Media Server

1. Connect to one of the media servers either directly or through the network
from the computer you want ASA to be installed on.
2. Access the media server web interface by typing in the Location/Address
field 192.11.13.6 (direct connect) or the IP address or the domain name of
the media server (over the network).
3. Log in and get to the main menu.
4. Click DOWNLOAD ASA to download Avaya Site Administration to your
computer.
5. Follow the installation instructions in the install wizard.
To start ASA, click
Start > Programs > Avaya Site Administration.
ASA supports a terminal emulation mode, which is directly equivalent to using
SAT commands on a dumb terminal or through a Telnet session. ASA also
supports a whole range of other features, including the graphically enhanced
MultiVantage interface (GEDI) and Data Import. For more information see the
Help, Guided Tour, and Show Me accessed from the ASA Help menu.

Logging in with Access Security
Gateway
Access Security Gateway (‘‘ASG’’) is an authentication interface used to protect
the system administration and maintenance ports and logins on Avaya
MultiVantage solution. ASG uses a challenge and response protocol to validate
the user and reduce unauthorized access.
You can administer ASG authentication on either a port type or login ID. If you
set ASG authentication for a specific port, it restricts access to that port for all
logins. If you set ASG authentication for a specific login ID, it restricts access to
that login, even when the port is not administered to support ASG.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

37

System basics

Authentication is successful only when Avaya MultiVantage and ASG
communicate with a compatible key. You must maintain consistency between the
Access Security Gateway Key and the secret key assigned to the Avaya
MultiVantage login. For more information about ASG, see ‘‘Using access security
gateway’’ on page 393.
Before you start

Before you can log into the system with ASG authentication, you need an Access
Security Gateway Key, and you need to know your personal identification number
(‘‘ASG’’). The Access Security Gateway Key must be pre-programmed with the
same secret key (such as, ASG Key, ASG Passkey, or ASG Mobile) assigned to
the Avaya MultiVantage login.
Verify that the Access Security Gateway (ASG) field on the System-Parameters
Customer Options screen is set to y. If not, contact your Avaya representative.
Instructions

To log into the system with ASG:
1. Enter your login ID and press RETURN.
The system displays the challenge number (for example, 555-1234) and
system Product ID number (for example, 1000000000). The Product ID
provides Avaya Services with the specific Avaya MultiVantage system
identifier.
2. Press ON to turn on your Access Security Gateway Key.
3. Type your PIN and press ON.
The Access Security Gateway Key displays a challenge prompt.
4. At the challenge prompt on the Access Security Gateway Key, type the
challenge number without the “-” character (for example, 5551234) from
your screen and press ON.
The Access Security Gateway Key displays a response number (for
example, 999-1234).
5. At the response prompt on your terminal, type the ASG response number
without the “-” character (for example, 9991234) and press RETURN.
The Command prompt displays.
NOTE:

If you make 3 invalid login attempts, the system terminates the
session. For more information, see the appropriate maintenance book
for your system.

38

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Logging off the system

Fixing problems

When logging in failures occur, if you are a super-user, you can use the list
asg-history command to determine the cause. The ASG history log contains the
last 100 or 250 records depending on your system. This log contains the date and
time, the port mnemonic, the login ID entered (correct or incorrect), and the status
for each session attempt. For specific information about the ASG history log, see
Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software.

Logging off the system
For security, log off any time you leave your terminal. If you use terminal
emulation software to administer the switch, log off the system and exit the
emulation application before switching to another software package.
Instructions

To log off:
1. Type logoff and press RETURN.
If the Facility Test Call or Remote Access features are administered, Alarm
origination is disabled, or if you have busied out resources or active minor
or major alarms, a security screen displays. You may want to take
appropriate action (for example, disable these features or address any
alarms) before you log off.
If none of the above special circumstances exist, the system logs you off.

Facility Test Call Administered
Remote Access Administered
Alarm Origination is currently disabled
Active major/minor alarm detected; be sure to resolve it
Proceed with Logoff? [n]

2. At the Proceed with Logoff prompt, type y to log off.
If you log off with alarm origination disabled and the system generates an
alarm, Avaya support services will not receive any notification of the
alarm. For more information about alarms, see the maintenance book for
your system.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

39

System basics

Setting command permissions
Avaya MultiVantage allows you to modify the permissions associated with a
login. The system maintains default permissions for each level of login, but you
may want to further restrict the login, or at least make sure the defaults are
appropriate for the user. The default values for these fields vary based on the login
type.
When set to y, the permissions on the Command Permission Categories screen
apply for any object that is not restricted. The second and third pages of the
Command Permission Categories screen allow you to restrict the user from any
access to specified objects. If you want to limit a user’s permissions beyond those
on page one, enter the objects in this list. For example, if you want a user to be
able to add and change stations, but not VDNs, you can enter y in the Administer
Stations field and the Additional Restrictions field. Then on page 2 or 3, enter vdn
as a restricted object.
Instructions

In our example, we set the permissions necessary to allow the user to administer
daylight savings time rules.
To change command permissions:
1. Type change permissions sup3ru and press RETURN.
The Command Permission Categories screen displays.

COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
Login Name: sup3ru
COMMON COMMANDS
Display Admin. and Maint. Data? y
System Measurements? y
ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Administer Stations? y
Administer Trunks? y
Additional Restrictions? n
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Maintain Stations? n
Maintain Trunks? n
Maintain Systems? n

Administer Features? y
Administer Permissions? y

Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Process Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Enhanced DS1? n

2. Type y in the Display Admin and Maint Data field.
3. Type y in the Administer Features field.
4. Press ENTER to save your work.

40

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Establishing daylight savings rules

More information

There are 2 types of users — superuser and non-superuser.
■

A superuser provides access to the add, change, display, list, and remove
commands for all customer logins and passwords. The superuser can
administer any mix of superuser/non-superuser logins. The superuser can
administer between 10 and 19 logins depending on your system.
The S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 allows up to 14 simultaneous
connections (logins) (MultiVantage can have 5 connections, AUDIX can
have 4 connections, and the rest of the connections are reserved for shell
commands.)
Logins must be 3 to 6 alphabetic/numeric characters, or a combination of
both.
NOTE:

If several users are logging in and out at the same time, a user may
see the message: Transient command conflict detected;
please try later. After the users have completed logging in or
out, the terminal is available for use.
■

Non-superusers may change their password with permission set by the
superuser. However, once a password has been changed, a non-superuser
must wait 24 hours before changing the password again.

Establishing daylight savings rules
Avaya MultiVantage allows you to set the daylight savings time rules so that
features, such as time-of-day routing and call detail recording (‘‘CDR’’), adjust
automatically to daylight savings time. The correct date and time ensure that CDR
records are correct. You can set daylight savings time rules to transition to and
from daylight savings time outside of normal business hours, so the number of
affected CDR records is small.
You can set up 15 customized daylight savings time rules. This allows
administrators with switches in several different time zones to set up a rule for
each. A daylight savings time rule specifies the exact time when you want to
transition to and from daylight savings time. It also specifies the increment at
which to transition (for example, 1 hour).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

41

System basics

Instructions
Establishing daylight savings rules

In our example, we set daylight savings time rules.
To modify a daylight savings rule:
1. Type change daylight-savings-rules and press RETURN.
The Daylight Savings Rules screen displays.

Rule
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:

Change Day

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES
Month___Date

Time____Increment

No Daylight Savings
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:

first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first

Sunday___
Sunday___
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on

or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or

after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after

April___ 1
October_25
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __

at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at

_2:00
_2:00
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

01:00

2. Complete the Start fields for rule 1.
Rule 1 applies to all time zones in the U.S. and begins on the first Sunday
on or after 1 April at 2:00 a.m. with a 01:00 increment. Daylight Savings
Time stops on the first Sunday on or after 25 October at 2:00 a.m. also with
a 01:00 increment (used as a decrement when switching back to Standard
time.
The increment is added to standard time at the specified start time and the
clock time shifts by that increment (for example, for 01:59:00 to 01:59:59
the clock time shows 01:59 and at 02:00 the clock shows 03:00).
On the stop date, the increment is subtracted from the specified stop time
(for example, for 01:59:00 to 01:59:59 the clock time shows 01:59 and at
02:00 the clock shows 01:00).
a. Type Sunday in the Change Day field.
b. Type April in the Month field.
c. Type 1 in the Date field.
d. Type 2:00 in the Time field.

42

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Establishing daylight savings rules

e. Type 1:00 in the Increment field.
This information specifies the day, month, date, and time and
increment at which you want the system clock to transition to
daylight saving time.
NOTE:

You cannot delete a daylight savings rule if it is in use on either the
Locations or Date and Time screens. However, you can change any
rule except rule 0 (zero).
3. Complete the Stop fields for rule 1.
a. Type Sunday in the Change Day field.
b. Type October in the Month field.
c. Type 25 in the Date field.
d. Type 2:00 in the Time field.
This information specifies the day, month, date, and time you want
the system clock to transition back to standard time.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Displaying daylight savings time rules

To display daylight savings time rules:
1. Type display daylight-savings-rules and press RETURN.
The Daylight Savings Rule screen displays. Verify the information you
entered is correct.
Setting the system date and time

Update the date and time for events such as a leap year, the change to or from
daylight savings time, or a system restart after a power failure. The correct date
and time assure that CDR records are correct. CDR does not work until the date
and time have been entered.
NOTE:

Changing the date and time may modify CDR data by 9 hours and 59
minutes. Therefore, you should change the date and time after normal
business hours. After you change the date and time, review the time settings
for any adjunct (other than AUDIX) linked to your system that uses the
system time.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

43

System basics

Before you start

Before you can set the date and time, you need to know whether it is currently
daylight savings or standard time and know which daylight savings rule number
you want to use. Daylight savings rule numbers are located on the Daylight
Savings Rule screen.

Setting the system date and time
In our example, we set the date and time to Tuesday, November 5 at 8:30 p.m.
standard time.
To set the system date and time:
1. Type set time and press RETURN.
The Date and Time screen displays.

DATE AND TIME
DATE
Day of the Week: Tuesday
Day of the Month: 5

Month: November
Year: 2002

TIME
Hour: 20

Minute: 30
Second: XX
Daylight Savings Rule: 1

Type: standard

2. Complete the Date fields.
a. Type Tuesday in the Day of the Week field.
b. Type November in the Month field.
c. Type 5 in the Day of the Month field.
d. Type 2002 in the Year field.
3. Complete the Time fields.
Use the 24-hour clock to set the hour, so if the current time is 2:00 p.m.,
you enter 14:00. You cannot update Second — it automatically resets to 0
when you save your changes.
a. Type 20 in the Hour field.
b. Type 30 in the Minute field (8:30 p.m.).
c. Type standard in the Type field.
d. Type 1 in the Daylight Savings Rule field.

44

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting time of day clock synchronization

4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
NOTE:

When you change the date or time, some display phones may not
automatically refresh the display. If this occurs, have each user press
the date/time button on their phone to update the display.
Displaying the system date and time

To display the system date and time:
1. Type display time and press RETURN.
The Date and Time screen displays. Verify the information you entered is
correct.
Related topics

See ‘‘Establishing daylight savings rules’’ for more information about setting
system time.
For additional information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software
Guide to ACD Call Centers.

Setting time of day clock
synchronization
Time of Day Clock Synchronization enables a switch to synchronize its internal
clock to UTC time provided by Internet time servers. Avaya uses the platform
(LINUX or Windows) system clock connected to an Internet time server to
provide time synchronization. The interface for these systems is web-based for
LINUX and Windows, or command line, for Windows only.
LINUX is used in:
■

S8700 IP-Connect

■

S8700 Multi-Connect

■

S8700 Media Server

Windows is used in:
■

S8100 Media Server with a CMC1

■

S8100 Media Server with G600

For additional information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software
Guide to ACD Call Centers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

45

System basics

The following systems use Avaya™ Site Administration (ASA) for time
synchronization.
■

DEFINITY R

■

DEFINITY CSI

■

DEFINITY SI

Before you start
■

A standard TCP/IP LAN connection is required to connect to the Internet
time servers. If a LAN connection is not available, time sync will be done
by setting the platform clock manually through the command line or web
interface.

■

You can set the following NTP/SNTP configuration information.

■

On the target switch, verify if Daylight Savings Time is on.

Instructions
NOTE:

These instructions are for the DEFINITY R, DEFINITY CSI, and
DEFINITY SI systems. For additional information, see Avaya
MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers.
1. Activate the Avaya Site Administration screen.
2. Click the Fault & Performance tab.

46

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting time of day clock synchronization

The Fault & Performance icons display.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

47

System basics

3. Click Time Synchronization.
The Time Synchronization - Properties screen displays.

4. Click in the “Offset” box.
The Plus and Minus radio buttons and the Hours and Minutes fields
display.

48

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting time of day clock synchronization

5. Click NEXT.
The Time Synchronization - Properties screen displays.

6. Click Plus to add hours to the remote station (located to the west of the
system time) or click Minus to subtract hours to the remote station (located
to the east of the system time).
7. In the hours field, enter the number of hours to be added or subtracted to
synchronize with the remote site.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

49

System basics

8. Click NEXT.
The Time Synchronization - Schedule displays.

50

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting time of day clock synchronization

9. Select either:
■

“Run Now” to run this program immediately and click NEXT.

■

“Schedule this task to run” and check the field below to determine if
the default setting is satisfactory. If this setting is not satisfactory,
click SCHEDULE.

The Scheduler screen displays.

10. In the Date field, highlight each object and use the pull-down menu to
select the desired setting.
11. In the Time field, highlight each item of time and use the pull-down menu
to select the desired time.
12. In the Recurrent Pattern area, select one radio button for the desired
frequency. Notice that each radio button is explained in the area to the
immediate right.
13. If there are times to be included, set to the desired frequency.
14. Click OK.
The Time Synchronization - Schedule displays.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

51

System basics

15. Click NEXT.
The Time Synchronization - Summary displays.

16. If the time synchronization description is satisfactory, click FINISH.
If the time synchronization is not satisfactory, click BACK and revise the
necessary information.
Related topics

See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers, for
more information about using time of day clock synchronization.

52

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using the bulletin board

Using the bulletin board
Avaya MultiVantage allows you to post information to the bulletin board. You can
also display and print messages from other switch administrators and Avaya
personnel using the bulletin board. Anyone with the appropriate permissions can
use the bulletin board for messages. Only one user can post or change a message
at a time.
Whenever you log in, the system alerts you if you have any messages on the
bulletin board and the date of the latest message. Also, if Avaya personnel post
high-priority messages while you are logged in, you receive notification the next
time you enter a command. This notification disappears after you enter another
command and reoccurs at login until deleted by Avaya personnel.
You maintain the bulletin board by deleting messages you have already read. You
cannot delete high-priority messages. If the bulletin board is at 80% or more
capacity, a message appears at login indicating how much of its capacity is
currently used (for example, 84%). If the bulletin board reaches maximum
capacity, new messages overwrite the oldest messages.
NOTE:

The bulletin board does not lose information during a system reset at level 1
or level 2. If you save translations, the information can be restored if a
system reset occurs at levels 3, 4, or 5.
Instructions
Displaying messages

To display the bulletin board:
1. Type display bulletin-board and press RETURN.
The Bulletin Board screen displays.

Message (* indicates high-priority)
*Avaya is in the process of
*investigating your trunk lockup problem.
*The Bulletin Board will be updated as
*we find information.
*
*
*
*
*
*
We recently added a new trunk group (14)
and have had many of the members getting
locked up.

555-233-506

Date
03/02/98
03/02/98
03/02/98
03/02/98

03/02/98
03/02/98
03/02/98

Issue 5 October 2002

53

System basics

Posting a message

In our example, we post a message to the bulletin board about a problem with a
new trunk group, and an Avaya representative replies to our message.
To post a message to the bulletin board:
1. Type change bulletin-board and press RETURN.
The Bulletin Board screen displays. There are three pages of message
space within the bulletin board. The first page has 19 lines, but you can
only enter text on lines 11-19. The first 10 lines on page 1 are for
high-priority messages from Avaya personnel and are noted with an
asterisk (*). The second and third pages each have 20 lines, and you can
enter text on any line. The system automatically enters the date the
message was posted or last changed to the right of each message line.
2. Type your message.
You can enter up to 40 characters of text per line. You also can enter one
blank line. If you enter more than one blank line, the system consolidates
them and displays only one. The system also deletes any blank line if it is
line one of any page. You cannot indent text on the bulletin board. The TAB
key moves the cursor to the next line.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Deleting messages

To delete a message from the bulletin board:
1. Type change bulletin-board and press RETURN.
The Bulletin Board screen displays.
2. Enter a space as the first character on each line of the message you want to
delete and press RETURN.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.

54

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Saving translations

Saving translations
NOTE:

An alternate method of saving (backing up) and restoring translations is
available for S8100 Media Server with a CMC1. See ‘‘Backup via the Web
interface (S8100 Media Server only)’’ on page 58.
Avaya MultiVantage retains all translation data in memory while the system is
operating. If the switch goes down, you lose all translation data. You must save
in-memory translation data to the memory card (flash ROM), disk, or tape. Saving
translation data to memory card or tape is the same as backing up your system.
NOTE:

Save translations on a daily basis. You may want to save translations after
business hours to prevent dial tone delays or during slow business hours if
your business is open 24 hours.
The save translation command writes two time-stamped identical copies of the
translation data to the selected memory card, disk, or tape. The save writes one
complete copy first, then writes the second copy in a different area of the device
— both with the same time-stamp. Failure during a save, including a system
crash, usually affects only one copy. The affected copy is marked “bad” and
should not be used for backup.
You can set save translation to be completed automatically as part of regularly
scheduled maintenance or manually, as needed. For more information about
saving translations automatically, see the maintenance book for your system.
Tip:

To determine if your system saves translations automatically, type display
system-parameters maintenance to see if you have scheduled
maintenance.
Translation copy protection assigns a number to a specific phone system and to
the flash card or set of flash cards that belong to that system. On an Avaya
MultiVantage on a DEFINITY CSI or Avaya MultiVantage on a DEFINITY SI,
this number is the same on both the translation storage device (flash card) and the
Flash PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) of the processor circuit pack.
In a duplicated system, the Flash PROM of each processor circuit pack has a
translation ID and both ID’s are stored on the memory card.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

55

System basics

An attempt to initialize (boot) the system with translations that do not contain the
same identification number as stored in the processor circuit pack raises a major
alarm and disables access to the save translations command for all non-Avaya
logins. You also receive a warning message on the copyright screen notifying you
of the mismatch. Contact your Avaya representative to correct this mismatch and
reset the save translations command. You must correct the mismatch before the
end of the specified grace period, otherwise you cannot access system
management commands (such as: add, change, remove, and duplicate) that
modify translation data. Avaya specifies the grace period during a system
installation or following an upgrade.
Before you start

If you are saving translations to a memory card or tape, you must verify the
memory card or tape is in place and clear any active alarms from the alarms panel.
If your switch is an Avaya MultiVantage on a DEFINITY CSI or Avaya
MultiVantage on a DEFINITY SI, verify the memory card translation ID matches
the translation ID of your switch’s Flash PROM.
Instructions

In our example, we save translations to the tapes on both processor A and B.
To save translations manually:
1. Type save translation both tape and press RETURN.
The save process can take up to 10 minutes. You cannot administer your
system while the save is in process. The Save Translation screen displays.
SAVE TRANSLATION

Processor
SPE_A
SPE_B

Command Completion Status
Success
Success

Error Code
0
0

2. If there is an error message in the Command Completion Status field and
an error code in the Error Code field, clear the error and repeat the save
process.

56

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Saving translations

More information

When mass storage system (‘‘MSS’’) devices on both processors in a duplex
system are specified, translation data is saved from the active processor to the
active and standby MSS devices at the same time. If the save to one device fails or
one device is out of service, the other save continues. You receive the status of
each save separately.
NOTE:

If you have a duplex system and you save translation data to both MSS
devices one at a time, translation data inconsistencies between the two
devices can occur.
Fixing problems
NOTE:

You cannot see whether the translation ID on the flash card corresponds to
the number on the Processor circuit packs. However, if the numbers do not
match, the system issues an error message when you attempt a save
translation operation.
When failures occur, the system responds with the following error codes.
Problem

Possible causes

Solution

1

Save translation cannot write
to the active drive.

Repeat the save translation
process for the active drive.

2

Save translation cannot write
to the standby drive.

Repeat the save translation
process for the standby drive.

For more information about error messages and how to correct them, see the
maintenance book for your system.
Related topics

See your maintenance book for information about backing up or restoring your
system.
See ‘‘Saving announcements’’ on page 445 for information about backing up
announcements for your system.
See ‘‘Restoring announcements’’ on page 447 for information about restoring
announcements to your system.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

57

System basics

Backup via the Web interface
(S8100 Media Server only)
The following are web interface procedures:
1. Open internet explorer.
2. Enter http:// in the address area of the web browser.
The DEFINITY ONE Home page displays:
3. Click Administer System.
The login screen displays:
Enter your login ID and password.
The login ID must have the correct backup permissions and be a member of
the S8100 Media Server Administrator’s login group.
The Notice screen displays:
4. Click Continue.
The System Administration screen displays:
5. Click Backup and Restore to open main backup menu.
Backup and restore main menu (S8100 Media
Server only)

58

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server
only)

From the backup and restore main menu, you can:
■

Perform immediate backups

■

Schedule multiple backups

■

Restore backups

■

Access last scheduled backup information

■

View contents of backup location
NOTE:

As you navigate the backup and restore screens, the main menu items
remain available. If you are using the Web, use the Back button to return to
previous screens.
Perform immediate backup

1. To perform an immediate backup, click Immediate Backup.
The following screen displays:

1. From the Destination menu, select a backup destination.This can be a LAN
address or a PCMCIA Flash Disk
2. Select items for immediate backup.
3. Click Backup.
NOTE:

When backing up to a LAN address, a shared drive must be installed on a
non- Avaya™ S8100 Media Server.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

59

System basics

After you click Backup, the following screen displays:

Viewing backup progress

1. To view backup progress, click View Backup Progress.
The following screen displays:

60

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server
only)

Backing up to a LAN address

You can back up your data to a LAN address using the Other locations feature. To
back up data to a LAN address:
1. Click Other locations.

Click Other locations.

The following screen displays:

2. Enter LAN location information.
3. Click Verify.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

61

System basics

The following screen displays:

4. Click Continue to return to the Immediate backup screen.
5. Select items to back up and select Backup.
Viewing scheduled backups

To view scheduled backups:
1. Click Scheduled Backups.
The following screen displays:

From this screen, you can add, edit, or delete scheduled backups.
NOTE:

The backup feature can be disabled and later enabled to allow you to
perform another function. If disabled, the current schedules remain intact.

62

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server
only)

Adding a new scheduled backup
(multiple backup schedules)

To add a new scheduled backup to the list:
1. On the Current list of scheduled backup jobs screen, click Add new
schedule.
The following screen displays:

2. Select backup destination either to a LAN address or a PCMCIA Flash
Disk.
3. Select items for scheduled backup.
4. Select a day and time for the backup.
5. Click Submit.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

63

System basics

Changing a scheduled backup

1. To change an existing scheduled backup, click Scheduled Backups.
The Current List of scheduled backup jobs displays:

2. Click the pencil symbol next to the scheduled backup you want to change.
The Changing this backup schedule displays:

3. Make any changes as appropriate, and click Submit.
The Current list of scheduled backups displays. The changes are activated.

64

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server
only)

Checking Scheduled Backup Status

1. To review previous backups, click Last scheduled backup results.
The following screen displays:

Checking the contents of a backup

1. To view contents click Contents of backup location.
The following screen displays:

2. Scroll to the location of backup contents and click Display or click Other
locations.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

65

System basics

The following screen displays:

Perform restore

1. Click Restore.
The following screen displays:

2. Select the restore source from the Source pull down menu. The source is
the media and/or location of the backup data. It could be a network or
shared drive location, or the pcmcia flash card.
3. Select items to restore.

66

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server
only)

4. Click Restore.
The following screen displays:

5. After the restore is completed, reboot the system.
NOTE:

A reboot is required. The restored stations will not be used if the
S8100 Media Server is not rebooted.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

67

System basics

68

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Introduction to the MultiVantage
system

This section provides you with general information about Avaya MultiVantage
and some of the system-wide functions. It explains how to understand your
configuration, read and use your dial plan, and shows you how to make simple
changes such as adding extension ranges. This section also explains how to assign
feature access codes (‘‘FAC’’).

Understanding your configuration
At a very basic level, the Avaya MultiVantage consists of hardware to perform call
processing, and the software to make it run. You use the administration interface
to let the system know what hardware you have, where it is located, and what you
want the software to do with it.
You can find out which circuit packs are in the system and which ports are
available by entering the command list configuration all. There are variations on
this command that display different types of configuration information. Use the
help function to experiment, and see which command works for you.
1. To view a list of port boards on your system, type list configuration
port-network and press RETURN.
The System Configuration screen appears.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 69

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Board
Number

Board Type Code

01A05
01A06
01B05

DIGITAL LINE
ANALOG LINE
ANALOG LINE

TN754B 000002
TN742 000010
TN746B 000008

01C04

ANALOG LINE

TN746B 000008

01C05

DIGITAL LINE

TN2224 000004

01C06
01C10

HYBRID LINE
DIGITAL LINE

TN762B 000004
TN754 000004

Vintage

Assigned Ports
u=unassigned t=tti p=psa
01
01
u
u
u
u
01
u
u
01
u

u
02
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
02
u

03
03
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u

u
04
u
u
u
u
04
u
u
u
u

05
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u

u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u

07
u
u
u
u
u
07
u
u
u
u

08
u
u
u
u
u
08
u
u
u
u

The System Configuration screen shows all the boards on your system that are
available for connecting phones, trunks, data modules and other equipment. You
can see the board number, board type, circuit-pack type, and status of each board’s
ports. The u entries on this screen indicate unused ports that are available for you
to administer. These may also appear as p or t, depending on settings in your
system.
You will find many places in the administration interface where you are asked to
enter a port or slot. The port or slot is actually an address that describes the
physical location of the equipment you are using.
A port address is made up of four parts:
■

cabinet — the main housing for all the switch equipment. Cabinets are
numbered starting with 01.

■

carrier — the rack within the cabinet that holds a row of circuit packs. Each
carrier within a cabinet has a letter, A–E.

■

slot — the space in the carrier that holds an individual circuit pack. Slots
are numbered 01-16.

■

port — the wire that is connected to an individual piece of equipment (such
as a phone or data module). The number of ports on a circuit pack varies
depending on the type.

So, if you have a single-carrier cabinet, the circuit pack in slot 06 would have the
address 01A06. If you want to attach a phone to the 3rd port on this board, the port
address is 01A0603 (01=cabinet, A=carrier, 06=slot, 03=port).

70

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the dial plan

Understanding the dial plan
Your dial plan tells your system how to interpret dialed digits. For example, if you
dial 9 on your system to access an outside line, it is actually the dial plan that tells
the system to find an external trunk when a dialed string begins with a 9.
The dial plan also tells the system how many digits to expect for certain calls. For
example, the dial plan may indicate that all internal extensions are 4-digit
numbers that start with 1 or 2.
Let us take a look at an example dial plan so you’ll know how to read your
system’s dial plan. The following figure shows an example of a simple dial plan.
change dialplan analysis

Page

1 of 1

DIAL PLAN ANALYSIS TABLE
Percent Full:

Dialed
String
0
1
3
4
5
*
#

Total
Length
1
3
5
6
7
3
3

Call
Type
attd
dac
ext
ext
ext
fac
fac

Dialed
String
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Total
Length
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

9

Call
Type
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

The Dial Plan Analysis Table defines the dialing plan for your system.
The Call Type column in the Dial Plan Analysis Table indicates what the system
does when a user dials the digit or digits indicated in the Dialed String column.
The Total Length column indicates how long the dialed string will be for each
type of call. For example, this dial plan shows that when users dial a 5-digit
number that starts with 3, they are dialing an extension.
The Dial Plan Analysis Table in our example contains the following call types:
■

Attendant (attd) — Defines how users call an attendant. Attendant access
numbers can be any number from 0 to 9 and contain 1 or 2 digits.
In our example figure, the system calls an attendant when users dial 0.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

71

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

■

Dial access code (dac) — Allows you to use trunk access codes (‘‘TAC’’)
and feature access codes (FAC) in the same range. For example, you could
define the group 100–199, which would allow both FAC and TAC in that
range. Dial access codes can start with any number from 1 to 9, * and #,
and contain up to 4 digits.
In our example figure, dial access codes begin with 1 and must be 3 digits
long.
NOTE:

The Dial Plan Analysis Table does not allow you to enter a range
specifically for trunk access codes. However, the Trunk Group screen
still allows you to assign a TAC to a trunk group. The TAC you enter
on the Trunk Group screen must match the format you have
administered for a DAC on the Dial Plan Analysis Table.
■

Extensions (ext) — Defines extension ranges that can be used on your
system. In our figure, extensions must be in the ranges 30000–39999,
40000–49999 and 50000–59999.

■

Feature access codes (fac) only — FAC can be any number from 1 to 9 and
contain up to 4 digits. You can use * or #, but only as a first digit. In our
example, feature access codes can begin with * or # and are 3-digits long.

The Dial Plan Analysis Table works with the Dial Plan Parameters Table for fully
defining your dial plan. The Dial Plan Parameters Table allows you to set
system-wide parameters for your dial plan.
Displaying your dial plan

You might want to take this opportunity to look at and interpret your own dial
plan. To display your system’s dial plan:
1. Type display dialplan analysis and press RETURN.
Modifying your dial plan

It is easy to make changes to your dial plan. For example, we will add a new range
of dial access codes to the dial plan. We want to be able to assign both FAC and
TAC in the 700–799 range.
1. Type change dialplan analysis and press RETURN.
The Dial Plan Analysis appears.
2. Move the cursor to an empty row.
3. Type 7 in the Dialed String column. Press TAB to move to the next field.
4. Type 3 in the Total Length Column. Press TAB to move to the next field.

72

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the dial plan

5. Type dac in the Call Type Column.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Adding extension ranges

You may find that as your needs grow you want a new set of extensions. Before
you can assign a station to an extension, the extension must belong to a range that
is defined in the dial plan. We will add a new set of extensions that start with 3 and
are 4 digits long (3000–3999).
To add this set of extensions to the dial plan:
1. Type change dialplan analysis and press RETURN.
The ‘‘Dial Plan Analysis Table’’ on page 748 appears.
2. Move the cursor to an empty row.
3. Type 3 in the Dialed String column. Press TAB to move to the next field.
4. Type 4 in the Total Length Column. Press TAB to move to the next field.
5. Type ext in the Call Type Column.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Uniform dial plan

You can also set up a Uniform Dialing Plan that can be shared among a group of
switches. For more information, see ‘‘Uniform Dial Plan’’ on page 1913.
Other options for the dial plan

You can establish a dial plan so that users only need to dial one digit to reach
another extension. You can also establish a dial plan that allows users to dial, for
example, three digits to reach one extension, and four digits to reach another. This
is particularly useful in the hospitality industry, where you want users to be able to
simply dial a room number to reach another guest. For more information, see
‘‘Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering’’ on page 1821.
Adding feature access codes

As your needs change, you may want to add a new set of FAC for your system.
Before you can assign a FAC on the Feature Access Code screen, it must conform
to your dial plan.
In our example, if you want to assign a feature access code of 33 to Last Number
Dialed, first you need to add a new FAC range to the dial plan.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

73

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

To add a FAC range from 30–39:
1. Type change dialplan analysis and press RETURN.
The ‘‘Dial Plan Analysis Table’’ on page 748 appears.
2. Move the cursor to an empty row.
3. Type 3 in the Dialed String column. Press TAB to move to the next field.
4. Type 2 in the Total Length Column. Press TAB to move to the next field.
5. Type fac in the Call Type Column.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Changing feature access codes

Feature access codes (FAC) allow users to activate and deactivate features from
their phones. A user who knows the FAC for a feature does not need a
programmed button to use the feature. For example, if you tell your users that the
FAC for the Last Number Dialed is *33, then users can redial a phone number by
entering the FAC, rather than requiring a Last Number Dialed button.
Many features already have factory-set feature access codes. You can use these
default codes or you can change them to codes that make more sense to you.
However, every FAC must conform to your dial plan and must be unique. For
more information about the dial plan, refer to ‘‘Understanding the dial plan’’ on
page 71.
Let us try an example. If you want to change the feature access code for Call Park
to *72:
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
2. Move the cursor to the Call Park Access Code field.
3. Type *72 in the access code field over the old code.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
If you try to enter a code that is assigned to a feature, the system warns you
of the duplicate code and does not allow you to proceed until you change
one of them.
Tip:

To remove any feature access code, merely delete the existing FAC and leave
the field blank.

74

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Controlling the calls your users can make and receive

Controlling the calls your users can
make and receive
The Avaya MultiVantage provides several ways for you to restrict the types of
calls your users can make, and the features that they can access.
You use Class of Restriction (‘‘COR’’) to define the types of calls your users can
place and receive. Your system may have only a single COR, a COR with no
restrictions, or as many CORs as necessary to effect the desired restrictions.
You will see the COR field in many different places throughout the MultiVantage
system - when administering phones, trunks, agent logins, and data modules, to
name a few. You must enter a COR on these screens, although you control the
level of restriction the COR provides.
Strategies for assigning CORs

The best strategy is to make it as simple as possible for you and your staff to know
which COR to assign when administering your system. You can create a unique
COR for each type of user or facility, for example, call center agents, account
executives, administrative assistants, Wide Area Telecommunications Service
(WATS) trunks, paging zones or data modules.
You can also create a unique COR for each type of restriction, for example, toll
restriction, or outward restriction. If you have a number of people who help you
administer your system, using this method would also require the additional step
of explaining where you wanted to use each type of restriction. See ‘‘CLAN and
processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support’’ on page 1637 for more information.
To find out what CORs are administered in your system already, type list cor. You
can also display information for a single COR by typing list cor #.
Allowing users to change CORs

You can allow specific users to change their class of restriction COR from their
telephones using a Change COR feature access code. You can also limit this
feature by insisting that the user enter a password as well as a feature access code
before they can change their COR.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

75

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

Before you start
■

Be sure that Change COR by FAC field is set to y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Note that you cannot have
both Change COR by FAC and Tenant Partitioning enabled.

■

Be sure that each user (who you want to allow to change a COR) has a
class of service with console permissions. For more information about
console permissions, refer to ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672.

Instructions

To allow users to change their own class of restriction, you must define a feature
access code and can, optionally, create a password. For example, we will create a
change COR feature access code of *55 and a password of 12344321.
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press ENTER.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
2. Move the cursor to the Change COR Access Code field.
3. Type *55 in the access code field.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now we have to define the password.
5. Type change system-parameters features and press ENTER.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Page 10 of 10

AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION PARAMETERS
Automatic Exclusion by COS? y
Automatic Exclusion Coverage/Hold? y
Automatic Exclusion with Whisper Page? y
Password to Change COR by FAC: 12344321

6. Move to the Password to Change COR by FAC field and enter 12344321.
This field determines whether or not the MultiVantage system requires the
user to enter a password when they try to change their COR. Avaya
recommends that you require a password.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.

76

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Controlling the features your users can access

Controlling the features your users
can access
The Avaya MultiVantage offers a wide range of features and functions. Some of
these you can administer differently from one user to the next. For example, you
can give one user a certain set of phone buttons, and the next user a completely
different set, depending on what each person needs to get his/her job done. You
decide on these things as you administer the phones for these individuals. Refer to
‘‘Managing phones’’ on page 91 for more information.
You can also establish classes of service (‘‘COS’’) to control the switch features
that users can access. For example, you can permit users to forward their calls, or
restrict them from placing priority calls. Once you have set permissions for a class
of service, you assign this COS to a user’s telephone or other device.
Classes of service are very similar to classes of restriction. COR and COS do not
overlap in the access or restrictions they control. Refer to ‘‘Class of Service’’ on
page 672 for more information.
Class of service and class of restriction give you great flexibility with what you
allow users to do. If you are in doubt about the potential security risks associated
with a particular permission, read further in this document, consult the Avaya
Products Security Handbook, or contact your Avaya representative.

System-wide settings
There are some settings that you enable or disable for the entire system, and these
settings effect every user. You may want to look over the various System
Parameters screens and decide which settings best meet the needs of your users.
To see a list of the different types of parameters that control your system, type
display system-parameters and press HELP. You can change some of these
parameters yourself. Type change system-parameters and press HELP to see
which types of parameters you can change. In some cases, an Avaya
representative is the only person who can make changes, such as to the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
This chapter offers a few examples of how you establish these system-wide
settings. The Screen reference contains explanations of each of the system
parameters screens, and how to use them.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

77

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

Changing feature parameters
You can modify the system parameters that are associated with some of the system
features. For example, you can use the system parameters to allow music to play if
callers are on hold or to allow trunk-to-trunk transfers on the system.
Generally, Avaya sets your system parameters when your system is installed.
However, you can change these parameters as your organization’s needs change.
For example, let us say that you are told that the number of rings between each
point for new coverage paths should change from 4 to 2 rings.
To change the number of rings:
1. Type change system-parameters coverage/forwarding and press
RETURN.
The System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding screen appears.
Page 1 of 2
SYSTEM PARAMETERS -- CALL COVERAGE / CALL FORWARDING
CALL COVERAGE/FORWARDING PARAMETERS
Local Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval (rings): 2
Off-Net Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval (rings): 2
Coverage - Caller Response Interval (seconds): 4

COVERAGE
Keep Held SBA At Coverage Point? y
External Coverage Treatment For Transferred Incoming Calls? n

FORWARDING
Call Forward Override? n
Coverage After Forwarding? y

2. In the Local Coverage Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Answer Interval
field, type 2.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Each phone in a Call Coverage path now rings twice before the call routes
to the next coverage point. The Local Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD
No Ans Interval field also controls the number of rings before the call is
forwarded when you use Call Forwarding for busy/don’t answer calls. This
applies only to calls covered or forwarded to local extensions. Use Off-Net
to set the number of rings for calls forwarded to public network extensions.

78

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administering treatment for denied or invalid calls

Administering treatment for denied or
invalid calls
You can administer your system to reroute denied or invalid calls to an
announcement, the attendant, or to another extension.
Instructions

In this example, we want:
■

all outward restricted call attempts to route to an announcement at
extension 2040

■

all incoming calls that are denied to route to the attendant

■

all invalid dialed numbers to route to an announcement at extension 2045
1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
2. In the Controlled Outward Restriction Intercept Treatment field,
type announcement.
3. Another blank field appears.
4. In this blank field, type 2040.
5. This is the extension of an announcement you recorded earlier.
6. In the DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment field, type attd.
7. This allows the attendant to handle incoming calls that have been
denied.
8. In the Invalid Number Dialed Intercept field, type announcement.
9. Another blank field appears.
10. In this blank field, type 2045.
11. This is the extension of an announcement you recorded earlier.
12. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

79

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

Setting up Music-on-Hold
Music-on-Hold automatically provides music to a caller placed on hold. Providing
music lets the caller know that the connection is still active. The system does not
provide music to callers in a multiple-party connection who are in queue, on hold,
or parked.
Before you start

You need to determine the music source you will use, and obtain the necessary
circuit pack. Refer to AVAYA MultiVantage™ Hardware Solutions Guide for
more information about required hardware.
NOTE:

If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials,
you may be required to obtain a copyright license from or pay fees to a third
party such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers
(ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI).
Instructions

In this example, we administer the system to allow local callers and incoming
trunk callers to hear music while on hold. Note that if you use Tenant Partitioning,
you cannot set up Music on Hold this way. See ‘‘Providing service for multiple
tenants’’ on page 82 for more information.
1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer?
Automatic Callback - No Answer Timeout Interval (rings):
Call Park Timeout Interval (minutes):
Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval (seconds):
AAR/ARS Dial Tone Required?
Music/Tone On Hold:
Music (or Silence) On Transferred Trunk Calls:
DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment:
Messaging Service Adjunct (MSA) Connected?
Internal Auto-Answer of Attd-Extended/Transferred Calls:
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Enabled?
ACA Referral Calls:
ACA Referral Destination:
ACA Short Holding Time Originating Extension:
ACA Long Holding Time Originating Extension:
Abbreviated Dial Programming by Assigned Lists:
Auto Abbreviated/Delayed Transition Interval(rings):

80

Issue 5 October 2002

Page 1 of 9

none
4_
10
20_
y
music Port: _______
all
attd
y
y
y
local
________
______
______

555-233-506

Setting up Music-on-Hold

2. In the Music/Tone On Hold field, type music.
The Port field appears.
3. In the Port field, type 6040.
This is the port address of the music source.
4. In the Music (or Silence) on Transferred Trunk Calls, type all.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
6. Now administer a class of restriction with Hear System Music on Hold set
to y, to allow your local users to hear music on hold.
More information

If a call with either Data Privacy or Data Restriction activated is placed on hold,
the Music/Tone on Hold is withheld. This is to prevent transmission of a musical
tone that a connected data service might falsely interpret as a data transmission.
If you administer the Music/Tone on Hold field to provide music, the system
provides the music after a hunt group or Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) split
delayed announcement.
Music on Hold may sound distorted when played to IP trunks or to IP phones
through certain codecs, particularly the G.723 codec. You can provide different
on-hold materials for these endpoints. Using the instructions for ‘‘Providing
service for multiple tenants’’, create one tenant partition for all endpoints that do
not use the G.723 codec and administer Music on Hold for this tenant. Create
another tenant partition for endpoints that use the G.723 codec and administer
silence, news, or other material that does not sound distorted for these endpoints.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

81

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

Providing service for multiple
tenants
If you manage the switching system for an entire office building, you may need to
provide individualized phone service for each of the firms who are tenants. You
can set up your system so that each tenant can have its own attendant, and can
chose to have music or play special announcements while callers are on hold.
Before you start

Before you can administer tenants in your system, Tenant Partitioning must be
enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. To allow tenants to
select their own Music on Hold, you must purchase and administer equipment.
Refer to AVAYA MultiVantage™ Hardware Solutions Guide for more information
about required hardware. Your Avaya representative can help you administer this
hardware.
Instructions

In this example, we are going to administer the system to allow one tenant to play
Country music for callers on hold, and another to play Classical music. We will
assign these music types to two new tenants.
1. Type change music-sources and press return.
The Music Sources screen appears.
Music Sources
Source
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Type
music
tone
music
none
none
none
music
none
none
none
music
none
none
none
none

Page 1 of X

Port

Description

01A1001
01A1003

Country
Tone-on-Hold
Classical

12B1301

Oldies

04C2003

Rock

2. For Source 1, enter music for the Type, 01A1001 for the Port, and Country
for the Description.

82

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Providing service for multiple tenants

3. Move to Source 3, and enter music for the Type, 01A1003 for the Port, and
Classical for the Description.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
5. Type change tenant 1 and press RETURN.
The Tenant screen appears.

Tenant 18

Tenant Description: ________________________________________
Attendant Group: 1
Ext Alert Port (TAAS): _______ Ext Alert (TAAS) Extension: ____
Night Destination: _____
Music Source: 1

6. In the Tenant Description field, type Dentist.
This identifies the client in this partition.
7. In the Attendant Group field, type 1.
The attendant group number must also appear in the Group field of the
attendant console screen for this tenant.
8. In the Music Source field, type 1.
Callers to this tenant will now hear country music while on hold.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
10. To administer the next partition, type change tenant 2 and press RETURN.
11. Administer this tenant, Insurance Agent, to use Attendant Group 2 and
Music Source 3. Be sure to change the Attendant Console screen so that
this attendant is in group 2.
12. This tenant’s callers will hear classical music on hold.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

83

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

Receiving notification in an
emergency
If one of your users calls an emergency service such as the police or ambulance,
someone, perhaps the receptionist, security or the front desk, needs to know who
made the call. Thus, when the emergency personnel arrive, they can be directed to
the right place.
You can set up the switch to alert the attendant and up to ten other extensions
whenever an end-user dials an emergency number. The display on the notified
user’s phone shows the name and number of the person who placed the
emergency call. The phones also ring with a siren-type alarm, which users must
acknowledge to cancel.
Before you start

Decide if you want one user to be able to acknowledge an alert, or if all users must
respond before an alert is cancelled.
Verify that the ARS field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Make sure that the extensions you notify belong to physical digital display
phones. Refer to ‘‘Phone reference’’ on page 1387 for a list of phone types. When
you assign crisis alert buttons to the phones, check the type field on the station
screen to be sure you are not using a virtual extension.
Instructions

In this example, we will set up the system to notify the attendant and the security
guards at all 3 entrances when someone dials the emergency number 5555. All
three guards must acknowledge the alert before it is silent.
1. Type change ars analysis 5 and press RETURN.
The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table appears.

84

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Receiving notification in an emergency

ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all

Percent Full:

6

Dialed
Total
Route
Call
Node ANI
String
Min Max Pattern
Type
Num
Reqd
5555_____________ 4_ 4_
1____
alrt
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n
_________________ __ __
_____
____
___
n

2. In the dialed string field, type 5555.
This is the number that end-users dial to reach emergency services.
3. In the Total Min and Max fields, type 4.
In this example, the user must dial all 4 digits for the call to be treated as an
emergency call.
4. In the Route Pattern field, type 1.
In this example, we use route pattern 1 for local calls.
5. In the Call Type field, type alrt.
This identifies the dialed string 5555 as one that activates emergency
notification.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now set up the attendant console to receive emergency notification.
7. Type change attendant 1 and press RETURN.
The Attendant Console screen appears.
8. In the feature button area, assign a crss-alert button.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
10. Assign a crss-alert button to each security guard’s phone.
You cannot assign this button to a soft key. See ‘‘Adding feature buttons’’
on page 129 for more information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

85

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

Finally, we make sure that all security personnel and the attendant will have to
acknowledge the alert.
11. Type change system-parameters crisis-alert and press RETURN.
The ‘‘Crisis Alert System Parameters’’ screen appears.
12. Go to the Every User Responds field and type y.
13. Press ENTER to save your changes.
More information

Attendants cancel an alert by pressing the crisis alert button three times. The first
button push turns off the siren, the second stops the lamp from flashing, and the
third clears the display.
Digital phone users cancel the siren by pushing the crisis alert button. If you have
set the system so that only one user needs to respond, this stops the alerting at all
phones. If all users must respond, each phone continues to alert until that user
presses the crisis alert button to acknowledge the alarm. The emergency caller’s
name and extension remain on the display at this point. To completely cancel an
alert and clear their displays, users press the Normal button.
Once you administer Crisis Alert, the switch still records each emergency call and
sends a record to the journal printer, if available. If not, you can view the
emergency log with the command list emergency.
Related topics

See ‘‘Crisis Alert’’ on page 1653 for more detailed information.
For information on other ways to reach the attendant in an emergency, see
‘‘Emergency Access to the Attendant’’ on page 1668.
To determine what types of digital phones have displays, see ‘‘Phone reference’’
on page 1387.
To ensure that you can still make necessary phone calls in an emergency, see
‘‘Emergency calls’’ on page 1671.
For information on setting up Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
(CAMA) trunks and providing Caller’s Emergency Service Identification
(CESID) information to your local community’s Enhanced 911 system, see
‘‘CAMA Numbering Format’’.

86

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Notifying a digital pager of an emergency

For information about updating station location information without having to
change the USA 911 system’s Automatic Location Identification database, see
Emergency Location extension field in ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127.
For information on how to administer IP phones to make emergency calls, see
‘‘Setting up emergency calls on IP phones’’ on page 114.

Notifying a digital pager of an
emergency
You also have the option of having your emergency calls go to a digital pager.
When someone dials an emergency number (for example, 911), the system sends
the extension and location (that originated the emergency call) to the administered
pager.
Before you start
■

You need to administer a CRSS-ALRT button on at least one of the following.
— Attendant Console (use the change attendant command)
— Digital telephone set (use the change station command)

■

The ARS Digit Analysis Table must have emergency numbers in the Call
Type column set to alrt (crisis alert).

■

You need a digital numeric pager.

■

You need one of the following circuit packs:
— Call Classifier
— Tone-Clock (with Call Classification and Tone Detection)

Instructions

To set up crisis alert to a digital pager:
1. Type change system-parameters crisis-alert and press Return.
The Crisis Alert System Parameters screen appears.
2. In the Alert Pager field, type y.
This allows you to use the Crisis Alert to a Digital Pager feature and causes
additional crisis alert administration fields to appear.
3. In the Originating Extension field, type a valid unused extension to send
the crisis alert message.
We’ll type 7768.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

87

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

4. In the Crisis Alert Code field, type 911.
This is the number used to call the crisis alert pager.
5. In the Retries field, type 5.
This is the number of additional times the system tries to send out the alert
message in case of an unsuccessful attempt.
6. In the Retry Interval (sec) field, type 30.
This is length of time between retries.
7. In the Main Number field, type the number that is to be displayed at the end
of the pager message.
We’ll type 303-555-0800.
8. In the Pager Number field, type the number for the pager.
We’ll type 303-555-9001.
9. In the Pin Number field, type pp77614567890.
This is the PIN number, if required, for the pager. Insert any pause digits
(pp) as needed to wait for announcements from the pager service to
complete before sending the PIN.
10. In the DTMF Duration - Tone (msec) field, type 100.
This is the length of time the DTMF tone is heard for each digit.
11. In the Pause (msec) field, type 100.
This is the length of time between DTMF tones for each digit.
12. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Related topics

Refer to ‘‘Crisis Alert’’ on page 1653 for more detailed information.

Other useful settings
There are many settings that control how your system operates and how your
users phones work. Most of these you administer through one of the System
Parameters screens. This section describes a few of the items you can enable in
your system to help your users work more efficiently. See ‘‘Feature-Related
System Parameters’’ on page 795 for a more detailed description of the available
system settings.

88

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Fiber link administration

Automatic callback if an extension is busy

You can allow users to request that the system call them back if they call a user
whose telephone is busy. See ‘‘Automatic callback’’ on page 1486.
Automatic hold

You can set a system-wide parameter that allows your users to initiate a call on a
second line without putting the first call on Hold. This is called Automatic Hold,
and you enable it on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. If you do not
turn this on, the active call drops when a the user presses the second line button.
Bridging onto a call that has gone to coverage

You can allow users to join (bridge) on to a call that rang at their extension and
then went to coverage before they could answer. See ‘‘Temporary Bridged
Appearance’’ on page 1868.
Distinctive ringing

You can establish different ringing patterns for different types of calls. For
example, you can administer your system so that internal calls ring differently
from external calls or priority calls. See ‘‘Distinctive ringing’’ on page 1658 for
more information.
Warning when phones are off-hook

You can administer the system so that if a phone remains off-hook for a given
length of time, the switch sends out a warning. This is particularly useful in
hospitals, where the phone being off-hook may be an indication of trouble with a
patient. See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for more information.
Warning users if their calls are redirected

You can warn analog phone users if they have features active that may redirect
calls. For example, if the user has activated send all calls or call forwarding, you
can administer the system to play a special dial tone when the user goes off-hook.
See ‘‘DISTINCTIVE AUDIBLE ALERTING’’ on page 826 for more
information.

Fiber link administration
For information concerning system fiber link configurations, see Upgrades and
Additions for Avaya DEFINITY® Server R.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

89

Introduction to the MultiVantage system

90

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing phones

This section explains how to add, swap, upgrade, and remove different kinds of
phones on your system. This section also gives you tips for customizing your own
phone (for system administration) so it has the feature buttons you need for many
administration and troubleshooting tasks. Most of the information applies to
traditional Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) phones, and headings
specifically state that certain procedures apply to IP (internet protocol) phones.
Note that this section does not tell you how to administer an attendant console. If
you need to add or modify an attendant console, see ‘‘Managing your attendant
consoles’’ on page 163.

Installing new phones
Simple administration allows you to plug a telephone into a jack and dial a
sequence to start up service to the phone. The dialing sequence sets up an
association between the phone and the corresponding station administration.

! SECURITY ALERT:
If you do not manage this feature carefully, its unauthorized use may cause
you security problems. Consult the Avaya Products Security Handbook for
suggestions on how to secure your system and find out about obtaining
additional security information.
For traditional instructions, see ‘‘Adding new phones’’.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 91

Managing phones

Before you start

On the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, be sure the Customer
Telephone Activation (CTA) Enabled field is y and the TTI Enabled field is y.
Complete the station screen for the new phone and type x in the port field. Note
that the phone type must match the board type. For example, match a two-wire
digital phone with a port on a two-wire digital circuit pack. Use this procedure
with all circuit-switched phones except BRI (ISDN) and model 7103A.
Tip:

See “Completing station screens” for more information. See Using
templates if you want to add a number of phones with similar settings.
Instructions

! CAUTION:
You can destroy your hardware if you attempt to connect an analog
telephone to a digital port.
To associate a phone with existing x-port station administration, complete the
following steps from the telephone you want to install:
1. Plug the phone into the wall jack.
2. Lift the receiver and continue if you hear dial tone.
3. Dial #*nnnn, where nnnn is the extension number of the phone you are
installing.
4. Hang up after you receive confirmation tone.
5. Dial a test call to confirm that the phone is in service.
If possible, call a phone with a display so the person answering can confirm
that you entered the correct extension number.
6. Repeat the process until all new phones have been installed.
7. For security reasons, you should disable this feature when you are done. At
the system administration terminal type change system-parameters
features to access the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
8. Type n in the Customer Telephone Activation (CTA) Enabled field.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
10. Type save translations and press ENTER to permanently save the
changes.
a. Fixing problems

92

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding new phones

If you misdial and the wrong extension is activated for the phone you are using,
use the terminal translation initialization (TTI) unmerge feature access code to
“uninstall” the phone before you try again. See “TTI separation from a telephone”
for more information.

Adding new phones
When you are asked to add a new phone to the phone system, what do you do
first? To connect a new phone you need to do three things:
■

find an available port

■

wire the port to the cross-connect field or termination closet

■

tell the telephone system what you’re doing

Before you can determine which port to use for the new phone, you need to
determine what type of phone you are installing, what ports are available, and
where you want to install the phone.
To add an IP phone, see ‘‘Adding an IP Telephone’’ on page 110.
Gathering necessary information

1. Determine whether the phone is an analog, digital, ISDN, or hybrid set.
You may also administer a virtual phone, one without hardware at the time
of administration.
You need this information to determine the type of port you need, because
the port type and phone type must match. If you do not know what type of
phone you have, see the Type field under ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for a list
of phones by model number.
2. Record the room location, jack number, and wire number.
You may find this information on the jack where you want to install the
phone, recorded in your system records, or from the technician responsible
for the physical installation.
3. Display the available boards (cards) and ports.
To view a list of boards on your system, type list configuration station
and press RETURN.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

93

Managing phones

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Board
Number

Board Type

Code

Assigned Ports
Vintage u=unassigned t=tti p=psa

01A05
01A06
01B05

DIGITAL LINE
ANALOG LINE
ANALOG LINE

TN754B 000002
TN742 000010
TN746B 000008

01C04

ANALOG LINE

TN746B 000008

01C05

DIGITAL LINE

TN2224 000004

01C06
01C10

HYBRID LINE
DIGITAL LINE

TN762B 000004
TN754 000004

01
01
u
u
u
u
01
u
u
01
u

u
02
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
02
u

03
03
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u

u
04
u
u
u
u
04
u
u
u
u

05
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u

u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u

07
u
u
u
u
u
07
u
u
u
u

08
u
u
u
u
u
08
u
u
u
u

The System Configuration screen shows all the boards on your system that
are available for connecting phones. You can see the board number, board
type, circuit-pack type, and status of each board’s ports.
4. Choose an available port and record its port address.
Each port that is available or unassigned is indicated by a ‘u.’ Choose an
available port from a board type that matches your phone type (such as a
port on an analog board for an analog phone).
Every phone must have a valid port assignment, also called a port address.
The combined board number and port number is the port address. So, if you
want to attach a phone to the 3rd port on the 01C05 board, the port address
is 01C0503 (01=cabinet, C=carrier, 05=slot, 03=port).
Tip:

If you add several phones at one time, you may want to print a paper
copy of the System Configuration screen. To print the screen to a
printer attached to the system terminal, type list configuration
station print and press RETURN. To print to the system printer that
you use for scheduled reports, type list configuration station
schedule immediate and press RETURN.
5. Choose an extension number for the new phone.
The extension you choose must not be assigned and must conform to your
dial plan. You should also determine whether this user needs an extension
that can be directly dialed (DID) or reached via a central phone number.
Be sure to note your port and extension selections on your system’s paper
records.

94

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding new phones

Physically connecting the phone

Once you have collected all the information, you are ready to physically wire the
port to the cross-connect field.
If you have an Avaya representative or on-site technician who completes the
physical connections, you need to notify them that you are ready to add the phone
to the system. To request that Avaya install the new connections, call your Avaya
representative to place an order.
If you are responsible for making the connections yourself and if you have any
questions about connecting the port to the cross-connect field, see your system
installation guide.
Now you are ready to configure the system so that it recognizes the new phone.
Before you start

To download foreign language display labels for phones, set the Display
Language field on the Station screen to english, spanish, italian, french, or
user-defined.
For a Eurofont character display for the 2420 phone, set the Display Character Set
field on the System-Parameters Country-Options screen to Eurofont.
For a Katakana character display for the 2420 phone, set the Display Character
Set field on the System-Parameters Country-Options screen to Katakana.
Completing the station screens

The information that you enter on the station screen advises the system that the
phone exists and indicates which features you want to enable on the phone.
To access the station screen for the new phone:
1. Type add station nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is the extension for
the new phone.
Make sure the extension conforms to your dial plan. You can also use the
add station next command to add a phone to the next available extension.
When the Station screen appears, you see the extension number and some
default field values. For example, the following screen is for a new phone
at extension 2345.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

95

Managing phones

STATION
Extension:
Type:
Port:
Name:

Lock Messages?
2345
6480D+
Security Code:
_______________
Coverage Path 1:
_____________________ Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to Station:

STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group:
Data Module?
Speakerphone:
Display Language:

none
n
2-way
english

n
_________
____
____
________

BCC:
TN:
COR:
COS:

_
1_
1
1

Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1
Message Lamp Ext: 2345
Mute Button Enabled? y
MM Complex Data Ext:
IP SoftPhone? n

2. Type the model number of the phone into the Type field.
For example, to install a 8411D phone, type 6480D+ in the Type field. Note
that the displayed fields may change depending on the model you add.
3. Type the port address in the Port field.
4. Type a name to associate with this phone in the Name field.
The name you enter displays on called phones that have display
capabilities. Also, some messaging applications, such as INTUITY,
recommend that you enter the user’s name (last name first) and their
extension to identify the phone.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
To make changes to this new phone, such as assigning coverage paths or feature
buttons, type change station nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is the
extension of the new phone. See ‘‘Managing phone features’’ on page 129 for
more information.

Using templates to add phones
A quick way to add phones is to copy the information from an existing phone and
modify it for each new phone. For example, you can configure one phone as a
template for an entire work group. Then, you merely duplicate the template station
screen to add all the other extensions in the group.
Note that only phones of the same model can be duplicated. The duplicate
command copies all the feature settings from the template phone to the new
phones.

96

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using templates to add phones

To duplicate an existing phone:
1. Type display station nnnn and press RETURN.
nnnn is the extension of the station screen you want to duplicate to use as a
template. Verify that this extension is the one you want to duplicate.
2. Press CANCEL to return to the command prompt.
3. Type duplicate station nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is the
extension you want to duplicate.
The system displays a blank Duplicate Station screen.

Ext.
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Port
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______

STATION
Security
Name
Code
____________________ ________
____________________ ________
____________________ ________
____________________ ________
____________________ ________
____________________ ________
____________________ ________
____________________ ________
____________________ ________

Room
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______

Jack
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______

Cable
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
_________

4. Type in the extension, port address, and phone name for each new phone
you want to add.
The rest of the fields are optional. You can complete them at any time.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes to system memory.
To make changes to these phones, such as assigning coverage paths or feature
buttons, type change station nnnn and press ENTER, where nnnn is the extension
of the phone that you want to modify.
Related topics

You can also add multiple call center agents, all with the same settings based on
an agent that is already administered. Enter command duplicate agent-loginID
and the extension of the agent you want to duplicate, then start and the extension
you want to use for the first new agent, then count and the number of agents you
want to add. Fill in the information on the Agent LoginID screen. For more
information, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD
Call Centers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

97

Managing phones

Using an alias
Not every phone model or device has a unique station screen in the system. You
might have to use an available model as an “alias” for another. If you need to enter
a phone type that the system does not recognize or support, use an alias. Defining
aliases is also a useful method to identify items that act as analog stations on the
switch, such as a fax machine, a modem, or other analog device.
If you purchase a phone model that is newer than your system, you can alias this
phone to an available model type that best matches the features of your new
phone. See your phone’s manual to determine which alias to use. If your manual
does not have this information, you can contact the DEFINITY helpline for an
appropriate alias.
For example, we will create two aliases: one to add a new 6220 phone and one to
add modems to our system.
1. See your new phone’s manual to find the correct alias.
In our example, we find that the 6220 should be administered on an older
system as a 2500 phone.
2. Type change alias station and press RETURN.
The Alias Station screen appears.
3. Enter 6220 in the Alias Set Type field.
This is the name or model of the unsupported phone.
4. Enter 2500 in the Supported Set Type field.
Enter the supported model in this field.
5. Enter modem in the second Alias Set Type field.
You can call the alias set anything you like. Once you define the alias, you
can use the alias set in the Type field on the Station screen.
6. Enter 2500 in the second Supported Set Type field.
Entering 2500 indicates to the system that these models are basic analog
devices.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.

98

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Customizing your phone

ALIAS STATION
Alias Set Type
Supported Set Type
6220
2500
modem
2500
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
’#’ indicates previously aliased set type is now native

Now you can follow the instructions for adding a new phone (or adding a fax or
modem). Your switch now recognizes the new type (6220 or modem) that you
enter in the Type field.
Be sure to see your phone’s manual for instructions on how to set feature buttons
and call appearance buttons. Note that if you need to use an alias for a phone, you
may not be able to take advantage of all the features of the new phone.

Customizing your phone
This section provides recommendations for setting up or enhancing your personal
phone. You need a phone that is powerful enough to allow you to use all the
features you may give to other employees. You may want to add feature buttons
that allow you to monitor or test the system, so that you can troubleshoot the
system from your phone.
It will be much easier to monitor and test your system if you have a phone with:
■

a large multi-button display (such as 8434D or 8410D)

■

a class of service (cos) that has console permissions

■

the following feature buttons
— ACA and Security Violations (assign to lamp buttons)
— Busy verify
— Cover message retrieval button
— Major/minor alarm buttons
— Trunk ID buttons
— Verify button

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

99

Managing phones

Once you select a phone, you’ll want to determine if you want to place this phone
at your desk or in the switch room. If the phone is in the switch room (near the
system administration terminal), you can quickly add or remove feature buttons to
test features and facilities. You may decide that you want a phone at both your
desk and in the switch room — it’s up to you.
You may also find it handy to set up multiple phones for testing applications and
features before you provide them to users. You may want to have a phone that
mimics each type of user phone in your organization. For example, if you have
four basic phone templates, one for executives, one for marketing, one for
technicians, and one for other employees, you may want to have examples of each
of these phones so you can test new features or options. Once you are satisfied
that a change works on the test phone, you can make the change for all the users in
that group.

Upgrading phones
If you want to change phone types for a user and do not need to change locations,
you can just access the station screen for that extension and enter the new model
number.
Tip:

This method can be used only if the new phone type matches the existing
port type (such as digital phone with a digital port).
For example, if a user at extension 4556 currently has a 7410+ phone and you
want to replace it with a new 8411D phone:
1. Type change station 4556 and press RETURN.
The Station screen for 4556 appears.
2. Overwrite 7410+ with 8411D in the Type field.
Now you can access the functions and feature buttons that correspond to an
8411D phone.

100

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Swapping phones

Swapping phones
You will often find that you need to move or swap phones. For example,
employees moving from one office to another may want to bring their phones. In
this case, you can use X ports to easily swap the phones.
In general, to swap one phone (phone A) with another phone (B), you change
phone A’s port assignment to x, change phone B’s port assignment to A’s old port,
and, finally, change the x for phone A to B’s old port. Note that these swapping
instructions work only if the two phones are the same type (both digital or both
analog, etc.).
For example, to swap phones for extension 4567 (port 01C0505) and extension
4575 (port 01C0516), complete the following steps:
1. Type change station 4567 and press RETURN.
2. Record the current port address (01C0505) and type x in the Port field.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change station 4575 and press RETURN.
5. Record the current port address (01C0516).
6. Type 01C0505 in the Port field.
7. Update the Room and Jack fields.
8. Press ENTER to save your changes.
9. Type change station 4567 again and press RETURN.
10. Type 01C0516 in the Port field.
This is the port that used to be assigned to extension 4575.
11. Update the Room and Jack fields.
12. Press ENTER to save your changes.
13. Physically unplug the phones and move them to their new locations.
When you swap phones, the system keeps the old button assignments. If you are
swapping to a phone with softkeys, the phone could have duplicate button
assignments, because softkeys have default assignments. You may want to check
your button assignments and modify them as necessary.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

101

Managing phones

Using ACTR to move phones
Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement (ACTR) allows a phone to be
unplugged from one location and moved to a new location without additional
switch administration. The switch automatically associates the extension to the
new port. ACTR works with 6400 Serialized phones and to the 2420 phones. The
6400 Serialized phone is stamped with the word “Serialized” on the faceplate for
easy identification. The 6400 Serialized phone memory electronically stores its
own part ID (comcode) and serial number as does the 2420 phone. ACTR uses the
stored information and associates the phone with new port when the phone is
moved.
ACTR is an enhancement to Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI), Personal
Station Access (PSA), Customer Telephone Activation (CTA). ACTR makes it
easy to identify and move phones.

! CAUTION:
When a phone is unplugged and moved to another physical location, the
Emergency Location Extension field must be changed for that extension or
the USA Automatic Location Identification data base must be manually
updated. If the Emergency Location Extension field is not changed or if the
USA Automatic Location Identification data base is not updated, the DID
number sent to the Public Safety Network could send emergency response
personnel to the wrong location.
Detailed description

On the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, set the Terminal Translation
Initialization (TTI) Enabled field to y and the TTI State field to voice.
NOTE:

When a phone is moved, if there is any local auxiliary power (a power
supply plugged into a local AC outlet), the phone must be plugged into an
AC outlet at the phone’s new location. A phone with remote auxiliary power
must be supplied remote auxiliary power at its new location. If you do not
supply auxiliary power in either case after a phone is moved, some optional
adjuncts (for example, an expansion module) do not operate.
When you enter always or once in the Automatic Moves field on the station
screen, the switch adds the extension to its ACTR Move List database. When the
phone is plugged in, the switch asks the phone for its serial number and records
the serial number on the ACTR Move List. If you change the entry in the
Automatic Moves field from always or once to no, the switch removes the
extension from the Move List.

102

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using ACTR to move phones

Call processing

When a phone is unplugged while on a call, and a 6400 Serialized phone or a 2420
phone that is administered for automatic moves is plugged into the port within 60
seconds:
■

both extensions are placed in idle state

■

active calls on either extension are dropped, unless the call is active on a
bridged appearance at some other phone

■

held calls remain in a hold state

■

any calls ringing on either extension instantly proceed to the next point in
coverage or station hunting path, unless the call is ringing on a bridged
appearance at some other phone

■

user actions that were pending when the new phone was plugged in are
aborted

Design considerations

You can use the list station movable command to keep track of extensions on the
move list. Once you reach the maximum number, the switch does not allow
additional extensions.
Administration
Before you start
■

Be sure the TTI field on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen is
set to y.

Tasks

Before you move a phone in your system, set the TTI State field to voice on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Moving phones

You can allow a phone to be unplugged from one location and moved to a new
location without additional switch administration.
For example, to allow moves anytime for a phone at extension 1234:
1. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN.
2. Move to the Automatic Moves field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

103

Managing phones

change station 1014

Page 2 of X
STATION

FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception?
LWC Activation?
LWC Log External Calls?
CDR Privacy?
Redirect Notification?
Per Button Ring Control?
Bridged Call Alerting?
Active Station Ringing:
H.320 Conversion?
Service Link Mode:
Multimedia Mode:
MWI Served User Type:
Automatic Moves:
AUDIX Name:
Messaging Server Name:
Recall Rotary Digit?

msa-spe
y
n
n
y
n
n
single
n
as-needed
basic
______
always

Auto Select Any Idle Appearance? n
Coverage Msg Retrieval?
Auto Answer:
Data Restriction?
Idle Appearance Preference?

y
none
n
n

Restrict Last Appearance? y

Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number? _
Special Character for Restricted Number? n

______
n

Display Client Redirection? n
Select Last Used Appearance?
Coverage After Forwarding?
Multimedia Early Answer?
Direct IP-IP Audio Connections?
IP Audio Hairpinning?

n
_
n
n
n

3. Type always in the Automatic Moves field.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.

Using TTI to move phones
Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) allows you to merge an x-ported station
to a valid port by dialing a TTI merge code, a system-wide security code, and the
x-port extension from a telephone connected to that port. TTI also allows you to
separate an extension from its port by dialing a similar separate digit sequence.
This action causes the station to revert to an x-port.
TTI can be used for implementing telephone and data module moves from office
to office. That is, you can separate a telephone from its port with TTI, unplug the
telephone from the jack, plug in the telephone in a jack in a different office, and
merge the telephone to its new port with TTI.
If you are moving phones and concerned about security, you may also want to see
‘‘Setting up Personal Station Access’’ on page 360 for more information about
setting the security code for each extension.

! SECURITY ALERT:
If you do not manage this feature carefully, its unauthorized use may cause
you security problems. For example, someone who knows the TTI security
code could disrupt normal business functions by separating telephones or
data terminals. You can help protect against this action by frequently
changing the TTI security code. You can further enhance system security by

104

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using TTI to move phones

removing the feature access code (FAC) from the system when it does not
need to be used (for example, there are no moves going on at present).
Consult the Avaya Products Security Handbook for additional steps to
secure your system and find out about obtaining information regularly about
security developments.
Before you start

Before you can merge a telephone, you must set the TTI State field to voice on the
Feature-Related System-Parameters screen. You also must set the extension to
match the port type of the TTI port making the merge request. For example, a
digital telephone type can merge only to a port on a digital board.

! CAUTION:
When a phone is unplugged and moved to another physical location, the
Emergency Location Extension field must be changed for that extension or
the USA Automatic Location Identification data base must be manually
updated. If the Emergency Location Extension field is not changed or if the
USA Automatic Location Identification data base is not updated, the DID
number sent to the Public Safety Network could send emergency response
personnel to the wrong location.
NOTE:

You cannot use TTI to change a virtual extension.
Instructions
TTI merge from a voice TTI port

! CAUTION:
You can destroy your hardware if you attempt to connect an analog
telephone to a digital port.
To merge an extension to a telephone with TTI, complete the following steps from
the telephone you want to merge:
1. Dial the TTI merge FAC.
— If the code is correct, you receive dial tone.
— If the code is not correct, you receive intercept tone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

105

Managing phones

2. Dial the TTI security code from the telephone you want to merge.
— If the code is correct, you receive dial tone.
— If the code is not correct, you receive intercept tone.
3. Dial the extension of the telephone you want to merge.
— If the extension is valid, you receive confirmation tone, which may
be followed by dial tone. (It is possible to receive intercept tone
immediately following the confirmation tone. If this happens, you
need to attempt the merge again.)
— If the extension is valid, but the extension is being administered, you
receive reorder tone. Try the merge again later.
— If the extension is invalid, you receive intercept tone.
— If the system is busy and cannot complete the merge, you receive
reorder tone. Try the merge again later.
— If the telephone has a download status of pending, you receive
reorder tone. You need to change the download status to complete to
successfully complete the TTI merge.
TTI separation from a telephone

To complete a TTI separation, complete the following steps from the telephone
that needs to be separated:
1. Dial the TTI separate FAC.
2. Dial the TTI security code.
— If the code is correct, you receive dial tone.
— If the code is not correct, you receive intercept tone.
3. Dial the extension of the telephone to be separated.
— If you have dialed the extension of the telephone currently merged
with this telephone, you receive confirmation tone.
— If you have dialed the extension of the telephone currently merged
with this telephone, but the extension is being administered, you
receive reorder tone. Try the separation again later.
— If you have not dialed the extension of the telephone currently
merged with this telephone, you receive intercept tone.
— If the system is busy and cannot complete the separation, you
receive reorder tone. Try the separation again later.

106

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using TTI to move phones

Fixing problems

If you are having difficulty using TTI, you may want to review the following
system restrictions:
■

The TTI Ports field on the System Capacity screen shows the number of
TTI ports used in a switch. This field shows only the number of TTI ports
being administered. If a TTI exceeds the maximum number of ports, the
port is not administered and cannot be added. In that case, a telephone
cannot be added.
BRI endpoints are only counted as one TTI port. For example, for every
two BRI endpoints, one TTI port is counted. As such, you can have two
telephones assigned to one port. If either endpoint is administered, the TTI
port count is reduced by 1.

■

The total number of translated telephones and Voice TTI ports in a system
is limited to the maximum number of administered telephones supported in
the system. The total number of translated data terminals and Data TTI
ports in a system is limited to the maximum number of administered data
modules allowed in the system.

■

Set the TTI State field to voice and then set the TTI State field to data.
When you use this order, voice and then data, you reduce the chance of a
user trying to use TTI on a data-only terminal that does not have TTI port
translation. This can happen when the number of telephones allowed by the
system is twice the number of data terminals. For example, if the system
limit for telephones is 15,000 and 7,500 for data, then when TTI was turned
on for data first, only the first 7,500 unadministered ports would get TTI
port translations.

■

When TTI is activated for the system, the following actions take place:
— If the TTI State field was previously activated but in a different state
(such as, a voice to data state), the old TTI translations are removed
and the new ones added on a board by board basis.
— If the TTI State field is set to voice, then default TTI translations are
generated for every unadministered port on all digital, hybrid, and
analog boards.
— If the TTI State field is set to data, then default TTI translations are
generated for every unadministered port on all digital and data line
boards in the system.
— Whenever a new digital board is inserted when the system is in TTI
Data mode, or when a digital, hybrid, or analog board is inserted
when the system is in TTI Voice mode, the unadministered ports on
the board become TTI ports.
— When TTI is deactivated, all translation for the TTI ports are
removed in the system; the ports return to an unadministered state.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

107

Managing phones

Removing phones
Before you physically remove a phone from your system, check the phone’s
status, remove it from any group or usage lists, and then delete it from the
system’s memory.
For example, to remove a phone at extension 1234:
1. Type status station 1234 and press RETURN.
The General Status screen appears.
2. Make sure that the phone:
■

is plugged into the jack

■

is idle (not making or receiving calls)

■

has no messages waiting

■

has no active buttons (such as Send All Calls or Call Forwarding)

3. Type list groups-of-extension 1234 and press RETURN.
The Extension Group Membership screen shows whether the extension is a
member of any groups on the system.
4. Press CANCEL.
5. If the extension belongs to a group, access the group screen and delete the
extension from that group.
For example, if extension 1234 belongs to pickup group 2, type change
pickup group 2 and delete the extension from the list.

6. Type list usage extension 1234 and press RETURN.
The Usage screen shows where the extension is used in the system.
7. Press CANCEL.
8. If the extension appears on the Usage screen, access the appropriate feature
screen and delete the extension.
For example, if extension 1234 is bridged onto extension 1235, type
change station 1235 and remove the appearances of 1234.
9. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN.
10. Delete any bridged appearances or personal abbreviated dialing entries and
press ENTER.

108

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding a fax or modem

11. Type remove station 1234 and press RETURN.
The system displays the station screen for this phone so you can verify that
you are removing the correct phone.
Tip:

Be sure to record the port assignment for this jack in case you want to
use it again later.
12. If this is the correct phone, press ENTER.
If the system responds with an error message, the phone is busy or still
belongs to a group. Press CANCEL to stop the request, correct the problem,
and enter remove station 1234 again.
13. Remove the extension from voice mail service if the extension has a voice
mailbox.
14. Type save translations and press RETURN to save your changes.
Note that you do not need to delete the extension from coverage paths. The system
automatically adjusts coverage paths to eliminate the extension.
Now you can unplug the set from the jack and store it for future use. You do not
need to disconnect the wiring at the cross-connect field. The extension and port
address remain available for assignment at a later date.
Once you successfully remove a set, that set is permanently erased from system
memory. If you want to reactivate the set, you have to add it again as though it
were a new phone.

Adding a fax or modem
Connecting a fax machine or modem to your system is similar to adding a phone,
with a few important exceptions. If you have not added a phone, you may want to
read ‘‘Adding new phones’’ on page 93.
Because the system does recognize the concept of “fax” or “modem,” you need to
administer these items as basic analog stations. You can merely use the supported
station type 2500 (analog, single line).
Alternatively, you can create aliases to the 2500 for fax machines and modems. If
you want to be able to create reports that indicate which stations are faxes or
modem, you should create aliases for these items. For more information about
aliasing, see ‘‘Using an alias’’ on page 98.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

109

Managing phones

For this example, let us assume that we have already defined an alias for ‘fax’ as a
2500 and that we now want to add a fax machine to extension 4444.
To add a fax machine as extension 444, complete the following steps:
1. Type add station 4444 and press RETURN.
2. In the Type field, type fax.
3. In the Port field, type the port address.
4. In the Name field, type a name to associate with this fax.
5. Move to the Data Restriction field and type y.
Entering y in this field prevents calls to and from this extension from being
interrupted by tone signals. This is important for fax machines and modems
as these signals can disrupt transmissions of data.
6. In the Distinctive Audible Alert field, type n.
This eliminates the distinct 2-burst ring for external calls, which often
interferes with the auto-answer function on fax machines or modems.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.

Adding an IP Telephone
The 4600-series IP Telephones are physical sets that connect to the MultiVantage
system via TCP/IP.

! CAUTION:
An Avaya IP endpoint can dial emergency calls (for example, 911 calls in the
U.S.). It only reaches the local emergency service in the Public Safety
Answering Point area where the telephone system has local trunks. Please
be advised that an Avaya IP endpoint cannot dial to and connect with local
emergency service when dialing from remote locations that do not have local
trunks. You should not use an Avaya IP endpoint to dial emergency numbers
for emergency services when dialing from remote locations. Avaya Inc. is not
responsible or liable for any damages resulting from misplaced emergency
calls made from an Avaya endpoint. Your use of this product indicates that
you have read this advisory and agree to use an alternative telephone to dial
all emergency calls from remote locations.

110

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding an IP Telephone

Before you start

Verify the system has a:
■

TN2302 IP Media Processor circuit pack for audio capability

■

TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack for signaling capability (for Servers R,
CSI, and SI only)

Be sure that your system has been enabled to use IP Telephones. Display the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen and verify the following field
settings:
■

Maximum Concurrently Registered IP Stations is greater than 0

■

IP Stations field is y

■

Information has been entered in the fields on the Maximum IP
Registrations by Product ID page

Instructions for adding an IP Telephone

Let us add an IP telephone at extension 4005.
To assign an extension, complete the following steps:
1. Type add station 4005 and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.
STATION
Extension:
Type:
Port:
Name:

Lock Messages?
2345
4620+
Security Code:
IP
Coverage Path 1:
_____________________ Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to Station:

STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: none
Speakerphone: 2-way
Display Language: english

n
_________
____
____
_____

BCC:
TN:
COR:
COS:

Personalized Ringing Pattern:
Message Lamp Ext:
Mute Button Enabled?
Expansion Module?

_
1_
1
1

1
2345
y
y

MM Complex Data Ext:
IP SoftPhone? n

In the Type field, type 4620.
2. The Port field is display-only, and IP appears.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

111

Managing phones

3. In the Security Code field, enter a password for the IP phone user.
NOTE:

Although the system accepts a null password, the IP phone will not
work unless you assign a password.
4. Press ENTER to save your work.
Changing from dual-connect to single-connect
IP phones

When you have a dual extension phone and you upgrade to a single extension
phone, you can remove the connection that is no longer used for that phone.
To remove the H.323 connection that is no longer needed, first record the media
complex extension number:
1. Type change station nnnn, where nnnn is the extension number of the
original dual-connect phone that you are replacing with a single-connect
phone.
The Station screen appears.
2. Move to the Media Complex Extension field.
3. Write down the number in the Media Complex field, then delete the
number from the field.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now remove the extension you recorded. Before you remove an H.323 extension
from your system, check the status, remove it from any group or usage lists, and
then delete it from the system’s memory.
For example, if you wrote down extension 1234 before you removed it from the
Media Complex field on the Station screen, then remove extension 1234 using
these steps:
1. Type status station 1234 and press RETURN.
The General Status screen appears.
2. Make sure that the extension:

112

■

is idle (not making or receiving calls)

■

has no messages waiting

■

has no active buttons (such as Send All Calls or Call Forwarding)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding an IP Telephone

3. Type list groups-of-extension 1234 and press RETURN.
The Extension Group Membership screen shows whether the extension is a
member of any groups on the system.
4. Press CANCEL.
5. If the extension belongs to a group, access the group screen and delete the
extension from that group.
For example, if extension 1234 belongs to pickup group 2, type change
pickup group 2 and delete the extension from the list.
6. Type list usage extension 1234 and press RETURN.
The Usage screen shows where the extension is used in the system.
7. Press CANCEL.
8. If the extension appears on the Usage screen, access the appropriate feature
screen and delete the extension.
For example, if extension 1234 belongs to hunt group 2, type change hunt
group 2 and delete the extension from the list.

9. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN.
10. Delete any bridged appearances or personal abbreviated dialing entries and
press ENTER.
11. Type remove station 1234 and press RETURN.
The system shows the station screen for this phone so you can verify that
you are removing the correct phone.
12. If this is the correct phone, press ENTER.
The system responds with command successfully completed.
If the system responds with an error message, the phone is busy or still
belongs to a group. Press CANCEL to stop the request, correct the problem,
and enter remove station 1234 again.
13. Remove the extension from voice mail service if the extension has a voice
mailbox.
14. Type save translations and press RETURN to save your changes.
Note that you do not need to delete the extension from coverage paths. The system
automatically adjusts coverage paths to eliminate the extension.
Once you successfully remove the extension, it is permanently erased from
system memory. If you want to reactivate the extension, you have to add it again
as though it were new.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

113

Managing phones

Tasks
Setting up emergency calls on IP phones

Set up which “calling number” to send to the public safety access point when an
emergency call is placed from an IP phone.
Instructions

You use the Station screen to set up emergency call handling options for IP
phones. As an example, we’ll administer the option that prevents emergency calls
from an IP phone.
To prevent an emergency call from an IP phone:
1. Type change station nnnn and press enter, where nnnn is the extension
of the phone you want to modify.
The station screen appears.

change station 1014

Page 1 of X
STATION

Extension: 1014
Type:
Port:
Name:

STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group:
Data Module?
Speakerphone:
Display Language?

Lock Messages? n
Security Code:
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:

2
n
2-way
English

BCC:
TN:1
COR: 1

Personalized Ringing Pattern:
Message Lamp Ext:
Mute button enabled?
Media Complex Ext:
IP Softphone?
Remote Office Station?
IP Emergency calls:

3
1014
y
y
n
block

2. Type block in the IP Emergency calls field and press RETURN to save
your changes.

114

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding an IP Softphone

Adding an IP Softphone
Avaya IP Softphones enable the end user to control telephone calls directly from a
personal computer (PC). An end user can log into your company’s MultiVantage
server remotely and make and receive telephone calls from the telephone
extension.
Avaya IP Softphone supports the following two configurations:
■

road-warrior application
You typically use this configuration for laptop users who are travelling. In
this configuration, the PC LAN connection carries both the call control
signaling and the voice path. Because voice calls are routed over the
connection to the PC, you’ll need a headset connected to the PC or a
handset that plugs into the PC’s sound card, to speak and hear sounds.

■

telecommuter application or Avaya IP Agent
For the telecommuter or Avaya IP Agent configuration, you make two
separate connections to the DEFINITY server. The signaling path is carried
over an IP network and the voice path is carried over the standard
circuit-switched telephone network (PSTN). Since you are using a phone
for audio, you do not need an H.323 PC audio application.
The telecommuter configuration uses the Avaya IP Softphone interface (on
the user’s PC) and a standard phone. The Avaya IP Agent configuration
uses the Avaya IP Agent interface (on the agent’s PC) and a call center
phone, such as a CallMaster.
Tip:

Use status station to show the part (product) ID, serial number and the
audio connection method used by existing stations.
Before you start

Be sure that your system has been enabled to use IP Softphones. Display the
System Parameters Customer-Options screen and verify the following field
settings:
■

Maximum Concurrently Registered IP Stations is greater than 0

■

IP Stations field is y

■

Information has been entered in the fields on the Maximum IP
Registrations by Product ID page

Be sure that your DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, and S8100 Media Server has a CLAN
board and an IP Media Processor board.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

115

Managing phones

Once you’re finished administering your MultiVantage system, you need to install
the IP Softphone software on each user’s PC.
Instructions for adding a road-warrior
application

You can use the road-warrior application when you have only a single telephone
line available to access the MultiVantage system over the IP network.
You also can “take over” an IP phone. Typically you would not have a different
extension for your softphone. When you log in, the softphone takes over the
existing phone extension (turn the DCP or IP phone off). During this time, that
DCP or IP phone is out of service. This is accomplished if, on the Station screen,
the IP Softphone field is y.
We will add a road-warrior application at extension 3001. Except for
single-connect IP phones, you have to actually administer two extensions for each
road-warrior application. We will first add an H.323 extension at 3000.
To assign an H.323 extension, complete the following steps:
1. Type add station 3000 and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.
add station 3000

Page

1 of 3

STATION
Extension: 3000
Type: H.323
Port: IP
Name:

Lock Messages? n
Security Code:
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to Station:

BCC:
TN:
COR:
COS:
Tests?

0
1
1
1
y

STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group: 2

2. In the Type field, enter H.323.
3. Press ENTER to save your work.

116

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding an IP Softphone

Now, you need to administer the phone (DCP) extension. To do so, complete the
following steps:
1. Type add station 3001 and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears. Note that you choose to change an existing
DCP extension by using change station nnnn in this step, where nnnn is
the existing DCP extension.
add station 3001

Page

1 of

4

STATION
Extension: 3001
Type: 6408D
Port: X
Name:

STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group:
Data Module?
Speakerphone:
Display Language:

Lock Messages? n
Security Code: *
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to Station:

2
n
2-way
english

BCC:
TN:
COR:
COS:

0
1
1
1

Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1
Message Lamp Ext: 3000
Mute Button Enabled? y

Media Complex Ext: 3000
IP Softphone? y

2. In the Type field, enter the model of phone you want to use, such as 6408D.
3. In the Port field, type x for virtual phone or enter the port number if there is
hardware.
4. In the Security Code field, enter the password for this remote user, such as
1234321.
This password can be up to 7 digits in length.
5. In the Media Complex Ext field, type 3000.
This is the H.323 extension we just administered.
6. In the IP Softphone field, type y.
7. On page 2, in the Service Link Mode field, type as-needed.
Set this field to permanent only for extremely busy remote phone users,
such as call center agents.
8. In the Multimedia Mode field, type enhanced.
9. Press ENTER to save your work.
Now you can install and configure the software on the user’s PC. In this example,
the user will login by entering their DCP extension (3001) and password
(1234321).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

117

Managing phones

Fixing problems
Problem

Possible causes

Solutions

Display characters on the
phone can not be
recognized.

Microsoft Windows is not
set to use Eurofont
characters.

Set the Microsoft Windows
operating system to use
Eurofont.

Instructions for adding a telecommuter
application

Assign this configuration to remote users who have two available phone lines. For
example, to administer a telecommuter application for a home user at extension
3010, complete the following steps:
1. Type add station 3010 and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.
NOTE:

Use the add station command if this is a new DCP extension. Use
the change station command for an existing DCP extension and
ignore steps 2 and 3.)
2. In the Port field, type x for virtual phone or enter the port number if there is
hardware.
3. In the Security Code field, enter the password for this remote user, such as
1234321.
This password can be up to 7 digits in length.
4. In the IP Softphone field, type y.
5. On page 2, in the Service Link Mode field, type as-needed.
Set this field to permanent only for extremely busy remote phone users,
such as call center agents.
6. In the Multimedia Mode field, type enhanced.
7. Press ENTER to save your work.
Now you can install and configure the software on the user’s PC. In this example,
the user will login by entering their DCP extension (3010) and password
(1234321).

118

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up remote office

Related topics

See the ‘‘Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones’’ on page 1444 for descriptions of the
IP Softphone configurations.
See the online help and to Avaya IP Softphone Overview and Troubleshooting for
customer information on Avaya IP Softphone applications. This document is a
Portable Document Format (PDF) document that is located in the Overview
Document folder on the Avaya IP Softphone CD.
Also see Getting Started, located on the Avaya IP Softphone CD for more
information on how to install and configure the IP Softphone software.

Setting up remote office
MultiVantage remote office provides IP processing capabilities to traditional call
handling for voice and data between MultiVantage and offices with remote office
hardware. You need to add the remote office information as a node on the
MultiVantage, add extensions, set up the trunk and signaling groups.
Before you start

Be sure the following fields on the Feature Related System Parameters Customer
Options screen are set to y or completed. If not, contact your Avaya
representative.
■

Maximum Administered Remote Office Trunks

■

Maximum Administered Remote Office Stations

■

Product ID registration limit

■

Remote Office

■

IP station

■

ISDN-PRI

■

IP trunks

■

Softphone

Also, be sure your remote office hardware is installed and administered at the
remote location. You need the following information from the remote
administration:

555-233-506

■

IP address

■

Password

Issue 5 October 2002

119

Managing phones

Adding remote office to Avaya MultiVantage
Solution

In our example, we’ll set up a remote office location using Avaya R300 Remote
Office Communicator hardware in our branch office in Santa Fe. We’ll add a new
node, and set up the signaling group and trunk group.
Adding a node
Instructions

To add the remote office node to MULTIVANTAGE:
1. Type change node-names IP and press RETURN.
The Node Name screen appears.
change node-names ip

Page 1 of 1
IP NODE NAMES

Name
default
remote office 1
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

IP Address
0 .0 .0 .0
134.23.107.22
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___

Name
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

IP Address
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___

Screen 1. IP Node Names

2. In the Name field, type in a word to identify the node.
In our example, type Remote 6.
3. In the IP address field, type in the IP address to match the one on the Avaya
R300 administration.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.

120

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up remote office

5. Type add remote office and the number for this remote office, and press
RETURN.
The remote office screen appears.
add remote-office 6

Page 1 of 1
REMOTE OFFICE 6

Node Name:
Network Region:
Location:
Site Data:

Remote Office 6
22
1
Contact: Joe Smith
Phone: xxx-yyy-zzz
_______________________________

Screen 2. Remote Office

6. Fill in the following fields:
■

Node Name - match the name on the IP Node Names screen.

■

Network Region - this must match the network region on the
IP-Interface screen for the circuit packs that connect this remote
office. Use display ip-interfaces to find this information.

■

Location - match the one set up on the Location screen for this
remote office.

■

Site Data - identify the street address or identifier you want to use

7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Tip:

Use status remote office to verify that your switch recognizes the remote
office information. It also displays the extensions and signaling group you
administer next.
Setting up a trunk group

You can modify an existing trunk group or add a new one. In our example, we’ll
add trunk group 6.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

121

Managing phones

Before you start

Perform ‘‘Setting up a signaling group’’ on page 122.
To set up the trunk group for your remote office:
1. Type add trunk group 6.
The Trunk Group screen appears.
add trunk-group next

Page 1 of x
TRUNK GROUP

Group Number: 6
Group Type: ISDN
CDR Reports: _
Group Name: Remote office 6
COR: __
TN: ___
TAC: 6
Direction: ________
Outgoing Display? _
Carrier Medium: IP
Dial Access? _
Busy Threshold: ___
Night Service: ________
Queue Length: ___
Incoming Destination: ________
Comm Type: _____
Auth Code? _
Trunk Flash? _
BCC: _
ITC? ____
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type (in/out): ____________
Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec): __
Outgoing Dial Type: _________
Incoming Dial Type: ________
Disconnect Timing(msec): ____
Digit Treatment: __________
Digits: ____
Sig Bit Inversion: none
Analog Loss Group: ___
Digital Loss Group: ___
Incoming Dial Tone? _
Bit Rate: _____
Synchronization: _____
Duplex: ____
Disconnect Supervision - In? _ Out? _
Answer Supervision Timeout: ___
Receive Answer Supervision? _

2. In the Group type field, type ISDN.
ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI must be y on the System Parameters Customer
Options screen.
3. In the TAC field, type in the trunk access code that conforms to your dial
plan.
4. In the Carrier Medium field, type IP (Medpro).
5. In the Dial Access field, type y.
6. In the Service type field, type tie.
7. In the Signaling Group field, type in the signaling group you created.
8. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Setting up a signaling group

Each Remote Office has own listen port and signaling group. Set up a new trunk
group, or use an existing trunk group administered for H.323 signaling.

122

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up remote office

Instructions

Set up the signaling group for remote office:
1. Type add signaling-group and the number of the group you want to add.
The signaling group screen appears.

add signaling-group 6

Page 1 of 5
SIGNALING GROUP

Group Number

6

Group Type:
Remote Office?

H.323
y
Max Number of NCA TSC: ___
Max number of CA TSC:
Trunk Group for NCA TSC:

___
___

Trunk Group for Channel Selection: 6
Supplementary Service Protocol: _

Near-end Node Name:
Near-end Listen Port:
LRQ Required? _
RRQ Required? y

clan
5001

Far-end Node Name: remote office 6
Far-end Listen Port:5055
Calls Share IP Signaling Connection?

_

Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded?

_

Interworking Message: ________

2. In the Group Type field, type H.323.
3. In the Remote Office field, type y.
4. In the Trunk Group for Channel Selection, type the number of the trunk
you set up for the remote office.
5. In the Near-end Node Name, identify the node name assigned to the CLAN
that supports the R300.
6. In the Far-end Node Name, identify the node name assigned to the CLAN
that supports the R300.
7. In the Near-end Listen port, type a port number in the 5000-9999 range.
8. In the Far-end Listen Port field, type 1720. See DEFINITY® Enterprise
Communications Server Release 1.1 Getting Started with the Avaya R300
Remote Office Communicator for more details.
9. In the RRQ field, type y.
10. Tab to the Direct IP-IP Audio Connection field on another page of this
screen and type y.
11. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

123

Managing phones

Setting up remote office on network regions

Now we will set up a network region and show the connections between regions.
Instructions

Set up network region 1:
1. Type add ip-network-region 1 and press ENTER.
The IP Network Region screen appears.
change ip-network-region 1

Page 1 of 2
IP Network Region

Region: 1
Name: Denver main
Audio Parameters
Codec Set: 4
Location: 1
UPD Port Range
Min: 2048_
Max: 3028

Direct IP-IP Audio Connections? y
IP Audio Hairpinning? y
RTCP Enabled? y
RTCP Monitor Server Parameters
Use Default Server Parameters? n
Server IP Address: 1 .2 .3 .4
Server Port: 5005
RTCP Report Period(secs): 5

DiffServ/TOS Parameters
Call Control PHB Value: 34_
VoIP Media PHB Value: 46
BBE PHB Value: 43
802.1p/Q Enabled?
Call Control 802.1p Priority:
VoIP Media 802.1p Priority:
802.1Q VLAN:

y
7
6
0

Resource Reservation Parameters
RSVP Enabled? y
RSVP Refresh Rate(secs): 15
Retry upon RSVP Failure Enabled? y
RSVP Profile: guaranteed-service

2. In the Name field, describe the region you are setting up.
3. In the Codec Set field, type the codec set you want to use in this region.
4. In the UDP Port Range, type the range of the UDP port number to be used
for audio transport.
5. In the Direct IP-IP Audio Connections field, type y.
6. Move to page 2 to set up connections between regions and assign codecs
for inter-region connections.

124

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up remote office

change ip-network-region 1
Page 2 of 2
Inter Network Region Connection Management
Region
001-032
033-064
065-096
097-128
129-160
161-192
193-224
225-250

1
1
_
_
_
_
_
6
_

2
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

3
_
_
_
5
_
_
_
_

4
2
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

5
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

6
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

7
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

8
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

9
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

0
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

1
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

2
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

3
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

4
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

(Group of
5 6 7 8 9
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _

32)
0 1
_ _
_ _
_ _
_ _
_ _
_ _
_ _
_ _

2
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

3
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

4
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

5
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

6
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

7
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

8
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

9
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

0
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

1
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

2
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

The following connections are administered in this example:
■

codec-set 2 is used between region 1 and region 4

■

codec-set 5 is used between region 1 and region 99

■

codec-set 6 is used between region 1 and region 193.

Now you need to assign the region number to the CLAN circuit pack. All the
endpoints registered with a specific CLAN circuit pack belong to the CLAN’s
region. See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™
Software for more information.
Adding phones to remote office

Be sure the extensions you add fit your dialing plan.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

125

Managing phones

Instructions

1. Type add station nnnn and press ENTER, where nnnn is the extension
you are adding.
The station screen appears.
add station 6001

Page 1 of X
STATION

Extension:
Type:
Port:
Name:

1014
8410D
x
Remote main

STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group:
Data Module?
Speakerphone:
Display Language?

Lock Messages? n
BCC: 0
Security Code: 1234567
TN: 1
Coverage Path 1: ___
COR: 1
Coverage Path 2: ___
COS: 1
Map-to Station:
Hunt-to-Station: _______

_
n
2-way
English

Personalized Ringing Pattern:
Message Lamp Ext: 6001
Mute button enabled? y
Media Complex Ext:
IP Station? n
Remote Office Phone? y

2. In the Type field, type in the model of the phone you are adding.
3. In the Port field, type x.
This indicates that there is no hardware associated with the port
assignment.
4. In the Name field, identify the phone for your records.
5. In the Security Code field, match the password set up on the Remote Office
administration.
6. In the Remote Office Phone field, type y.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Tip:

You can set up a telnet session on your remote office administration program
to verify that the phone is registered. See DEFINITY® Enterprise
Communications Server Release 1.1 Getting Started with the Avaya R300
Remote Office Communicator for details.

126

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

2420 DCP telephone

2420 DCP telephone
Downloading firmware to a 2420 DCP telephone

You can copy updated application code into ACP via TFTP over a TCP/IP
connection. This eliminates the need to physically remove the telephone and send
it to the factory for the firmware update. This feature is available on all Avaya
MultiVantage platforms.
Before you start

1. Type change node-name ip and press ENTER.
The IP Node Names screen appears.
2. Administer the TFTP server node name and the local node name (CLAN)
and IP address.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change ip-interfaces and press ENTER.
The IP Interfaces screen appears.
5. Administer the CLAN ethernet interface or processor CLAN.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
File download to the switch

1. File is placed on TFTP server using TFTP, FTP, HTTP or another file
transfer program.
2. Log into SAT and enter change tftp-server and press ENTER.
The TFTP Server Configuration screen appears.
change tftp-server

Page 1 of 1
TFTP Server Configuration

Local Node Name:
TFTP Server Node Name:
TFTP Server Port: 69
File to Retrieve:
File Status:
File Size:
Filename in Memory:

3. In the Local Node Name field, enter the valid local node name from the IP
Node Names screen.
The node must be assigned to a CLAN ip-interface or procr (processor
CLAN).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

127

Managing phones

4. In the TFTP Server Node Name field, enter the valid TFTP server node
name from the IP Nodes Names screen.
5. In the TFTP Server Port field, enter the TFTP server port number from
where the file download begins.
6. In the File to Retrieve field, enter the name of the file to be retrieved.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
The file transfer begins.
8. Enter display tftp-server and press ENTER to view the status of the file
transfer.
“File download successful” message appears when the file transfer

completes. It also displays the file size and the file name in memory.
File download to the 2420 DCP telephone
Before you start

You must have console permissions to download someone else’s phones.
NOTE:

Steps 1 through 3 need be done only once to set up the FAC for file
downloads. Thereafter, start at step 4 to download files.
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press ENTER.
2. In the Station Firmware Download Access Code field, enter *36.
This number can be any valid FAC as defined in the dial plan.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Take the 2420 DCP phone off-hook.
5. Dial the Station Firmware Download FAC (for instance, *36).
6. Press # if you are dialing from the target station (or dial the phone’s
extension to be downloaded).
7. Place the phone on-hook within 4 seconds after the confirmation tone.
The phone is placed in a busy-out state (not able to make or receive calls)
and displays “Firmware Download in Progress”, the amount of the file
downloaded, and a timer. The phone displays error messages and a success
message before rebooting.
8. When the download completes, the phone reboots and is released from the
busy-out state.

128

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing phone features

This section provides generic instructions for adding any feature button. Because
you may need more information to decide which feature buttons you want to
assign to a user or group of users, we included the Telephone feature buttons table
in this section. This table lists all of the feature buttons that are available on the
Avaya MultiVantage solution.
After the list of feature buttons, we included several procedures that explain how
to set up the specific feature buttons that require special treatment or
considerations.

Adding feature buttons
Once you add a phone to the system, you can use the station screen to change the
settings for the phone, such as adding or changing feature button assignments. The
system allows you to assign features or functionality to each programmable
button. It is up to you to decide which features you want for each phone and which
feature you want to assign to each button.
NOTE:

If you have 6400-series phones, your users can administer some of their own
feature buttons. See ‘‘Setting up Terminal Self Administration’’ on page 160
for more information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 129

Managing phone features

Instructions

To assign feature buttons:
1. Type change station nnnn and press ENTER, where nnnn is the extension
for the phone you want to modify.
The Station screen appears.
2. Press NEXT PAGE until you locate the Feature Button Assignment fields.
Some phones have several feature button groups. Make sure that you are
changing the correct button. If you do not know which button on the phone
maps to which button-assignment field, see your phone’s manual, or see
‘‘Phone reference’’ on page 1387.
3. Move the cursor to the field you want to change.
4. Type the button name that corresponds to the feature you want to add.
To determine feature button names, press HELP or refer to‘‘Telephone
feature buttons’’ on page 131.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Some phones have default assignments for buttons. For example, the following
figure shows that the 8411D includes defaults for 12 softkey buttons. It already
has assignments for features like Leave Word Calling and Call Forwarding.
If you do not use an alias, you can easily assign different features to these buttons
if you have different needs.
If you use an alias you must leave the default softkey button assignments. The
system allows you to change the button assignments on the screen and the features
work on the alias phone, however the labels on the display do not change.

STATION
SOFTKEY BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

130

lwc-store
lwc-cancel
auto-cback
timer
call-fwd
call-park
date-time
priority
abr-prog
abr-spchar
abr-spchar
abr-spchar

Issue 5 October 2002

Ext: ________

Char: ~p
Char: ~m
Char: ~w

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Telephone feature buttons
The following table provides descriptions of the feature buttons that you can
administer on multiappearance telephones. It also lists the administrable software
names and recommended button label names. Display buttons support telephones
equipped with alphanumeric displays. Note that some buttons may require 1-lamp
or 2-lamp buttons. Some buttons are not allowed on some systems and on some
phones.
Table 3. Telephone feature buttons

Button name

Button
label

Description

Maximum

abr-prog

AbrvDial
Program

Abbreviated Dialing Program: allows
users to program abbreviated dialing and
autodial buttons or to store or change
numbers in a personal list or group list
associated with the station.

1 per
station

abr-spchar

AbrvDial
(char)

Abbreviated Dialing Special Character:
allows users to enter an associated special
character [~, ~m (mark), ~p (pause), ~s
(suppress), ~w (wait for dial tone), or ~W
(wait forever)] when programming an
abbreviated dialing list entry.

1 each per
station

abrdg-appr
(Ext: ____)

(extension)

Bridged Appearance of an analog phone:
allows the user to have an appearance of a
single-line telephone extension. Assign to
a 2-lamp appearance button.

Depends on
station type

abrv-dial
(List: __
DC: __)

AD

Abbreviated Dialing: dials the stored
number on the specified abbreviated
dialing list.

1 per AD
list per dial
code

List: specify the list number 1 to 3 where
the destination number is stored
DC: specify the dial code for the
destination number
abrv-ring

AR

Abbreviated and Delayed Ringing: allows
the user to trigger an abbreviated or
delayed transition for calls alerting at an
extension.
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

131

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

ac-alarm

aca-halt

Description

Maximum

AC Alarm

Administered Connection alarm
notification: allows the user to monitor
when the number of failures for an
administered connection has met the
specified threshold.

1 per
station

Auto-Ckt
Assure

Automatic Circuit Assurance (display
button): allows users of display telephones
to identify trunk malfunctions. The system
automatically initiates a referral call to the
telephone when a possible failure occurs.

1 per
system

When the user presses ACA Halt, the
system turns off ACA monitoring for the
entire system. The user must press ACA
Halt again to restart monitoring.
account

Acct

Account: allows users to enter Call Detail
Recording (‘‘CDR’’) account codes. CDR
account codes allow the system to
associate and track calls according to a
particular project or account number.

admin

Admin

Administration: allows a user to program
the feature buttons on their 6400-series
telephone.

after-call
Grp:___

After Call
Work

After Call Work Mode: allows an agent to
temporarily be removed from call
distribution in order for the agent to finish
ACD-related activities such as completing
paperwork.

1 per split
group

Grp: specify the ACD split group number.
alrt-agchg

Alert Agent

Alert Agent: indicates to the agent that
their split/skill hunt group changed while
active on a call. This button blinks to
notify the agent of the change.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

132

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

alt-frl

Description

Maximum

Alt FRL

Alternate Facility Restriction Level
(‘‘FRL’’): activates or deactivates an
alternate facility restriction level for the
extension.

1 per
system

ani-requst

ANI
Request

Automatic Number Identification
Request: allows the user to display the
calling party’s number from incoming
trunks during the voice state of call. The
trunk must support this functionality.

1 per
station

assist
(Group: __)

Assist

Supervisory Assistance: used by an ACD
agent to place a call to a split supervisor.

1 per split
group

Group: specify the ACD split group
number.
asvn-halt

asvn-halt

Authorization Code Security Violation
Notification: activates or deactivates call
referral when an authorization code
security violation is detected.

1 per
system

atd-qcalls

AQC

Attendant Queue Calls (display button):
tracks the number of calls in the attendant
group’s queue and displays the queue
status. Assign this button to any user who
you want to backup the attendant.

1 per
station

atd-qtime

AQT

Attendant Queue Time (display button):
tracks the calls in the attendant group’s
queue according to the oldest time a call
has been queued, and obtains a display of
the queue status.

1 per
station

aut-msg-wt
(Ext: ___)

Message
(name or
ext #)

Automatic Message Waiting: associated
status lamp automatically lights when an
LWC message has been stored in the
system for the associated extension (can
be a ‘‘VDN’’). This lamp will not light
on the mapped-to physical station for
messages left for virtual extensions.

1 per
aut-mst-ext

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

133

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

Description

Maximum

auto-cback

Auto
CallBack

Automatic Call Back: when activated,
allows inside user who placed a call to a
busy or unanswered telephone to be called
back automatically when the called
telephone becomes available to receive a
call.

1 per
station

auto-icom
(Group: __)

Auto (name
or ext #)

Automatic Intercom: places a call to the
station associated with the button. The
called user receives a unique alerting
signal, and a status lamp associated with a
Intercom button flashes. Grp: Intercom —
Auto-Icom group number. This extension
and destination extension must be in the
same group.

1 per group
per dial
code

auto-in
(Group: __)

Auto In

Auto-In Mode: allows the user to become
automatically available for new ACD calls
upon completion of an ACD call. Grp:
The split group number for ACD.

1 per split
group

auto-wkup

Auto
Wakeup

Automatic Wakeup (display button):
allows attendants, front-desk users, and
guests to request a wakeup call to be
placed automatically to a certain extension
(may not be a VDN extension) at a later
time.

1 per
station

autodial

Autodial

Allows a user to dial a number that is not
part of a stored list.

aux-work
(Group: __)

Auxiliary
Work

Auxiliary Work Mode: removes agent
from ACD call distribution in order to
complete non-ACD-related activities.
Grp: The split group number for ACD.

1 per split
group

Continued on next page

134

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

brdg-appr
(Btn: __
Ext: ___)

Button
label

(extension)

Description

Maximum

Bridged Call Appearance: provides an
appearance of another user’s extension on
this telephone. For example, an assistant
might have a bridged appearance of their
supervisor’s extension. The bridged
appearance button functions exactly like
the original call appearance, for instance it
indicates when the appearance is active or
ringing.

Depends on
station type

You can assign brdg-appr buttons only to
2-lamp appearance buttons. You must
indicate which extension and which call
appearance button the user wants to
monitor at this phone.
btn-view

Button
View

Button View: allows users to view, on the
phone’s display, the contents of any
feature button. Button View does more
than the “View” or “stored-num” feature
button; these only display what is
contained in abbreviated dialing and
autodial buttons.
When the user presses the btn-view button
and then a specific feature button, they see
the feature name and any auxiliary data for
that button. This allows users to review
the programming of their feature buttons.
You can assign this soft-key button to any
6400-, 7400-, or 8400-series display
telephone.
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

135

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

busy-ind
(TAC/Ext: __)

Button
label

Busy

Description

Maximum

Busy Indication: indicates the busy or idle
status of an extension, trunk group,
terminating extension group (‘‘TEG’’),
hunt group, or loudspeaker paging zone.
Users can press the busy-ind button to dial
the specified extension.

1 per
TAC/Ext

You can assign this button to any lamp
button and must specify which Trunk or
extension the user wants to monitor.
call-appr

extension

Call Appearance: originates or receives
calls. Assign to a 2-lamp appearance
button.

Depends on
station type

call-disp

Return Call

Call Displayed Number (display button):
initiates a call to the currently displayed
number. The number may be from a leave
word calling message or a number the user
retrieved from the Directory.

1 per
station

call-fwd
(Ext: ___)

Call
Forwarding

Activates or deactivates Call Forwarding
All Calls.

1 per
station

call-park

Call Park

Allows the user to place the current call in
the call park state so it can be retrieved
from another phone.

1 per
station

call-pkup

Call Pickup

Allows the user to answer a call that is
ringing in the user’s pickup group.

1 per
station

call-timer

CTime

Used only on the 6400 sets. Allows users
to view the duration of the call associated
with the active call appearance button.

1 per
station

callr-info

Caller Info

(display button) Used with Call Prompting
to allow users to display information
collected from the originator.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

136

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

Description

Maximum

cas-backup

CAS
Backup

Centralized Attendant Service Backup:
used to redirect all ‘‘CAS’’ calls to a
backup extension in the local branch if all
RLTs are out-of-service or maintenance
busy. The associated status lamp indicates
if CAS is in the backup mode.

1 per
station

cdr1-alrm

CDR 1
Failure

CDR Alarm: associated status lamp is
used to indicate that a failure in the
interface to the primary CDR output
device has occurred.

1 per
station

cdr2-alrm

CDR 2
Failure

CDR Alarm: associated status lamp is
used to indicate that a failure in the
interface to the secondary CDR output
device has occurred.

1 per
station

cfwd-bsyda

Call
Forwarding
bsyda (Ext)

Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer:
activates and deactivates call forwarding
for calls when the extension is busy or the
user does not answer.

check-in

Check In

Check In (display button): changes the
state of the associated guest room to
occupied and turns off the outward calling
restriction for the guest room’s station.

1 per
station

check-out

Check Out

Check Out (display button): Changes the
state of the associated guest room to
vacant and turns on the outward calling
restriction for the guest room’s station.
Also clears (removes) any wake-up
request for the station.

1 per
station

clk-overid

Clocked
Override

Clocked Manual Override (display
button): used in association with Time of
Day Routing to override the routing plan
in effect for the activating user. The
routing plan is overridden for a specified
period of time.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

137

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

Description

Maximum

conf-dsp

Conference
Display

Allows a user to display information about
each party of a conference call. This
button can be assigned to stations and
attendant consoles.

1 per
station

consult

Consult

The Consult button allows a covering
user, after answering a coverage call, to
call the principal (called party) for private
consultation.

1 per
station

Activating Consult places the caller on
hold and establishes a private connection
between the principal and the covering
user. The covering user can then add the
caller to the conversation, transfer the call
to the principal, or return to the caller.
cov-cback

Coverage
Callback

Allows a covering party to store a leave
word calling message for the principal
(called party).

1 per
station

cov-msg-rt

Covr Msg
Retrieve

Coverage Message Retrieval (display
button): places a covering station into the
message retrieval mode for the purposes
of retrieving messages for the group.

1 per
station

cpn-blk

CPN Block

Blocks the sending of the calling party
number for a call.

1 per
station

cpn-unblk

CPN
Unblock

Deactivates calling party number
(‘‘CPN’’) blocking and allows the CPN to
be sent for a single call.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

138

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

crss-alert

Crisis

Description

Maximum

Crisis Alert (display button): provide this
button to the telephones or consoles that
you want to notify when any user makes
an emergency call. (You define which
calls are emergency calls on the
AAR/ARS Analysis screen by setting the
Call Type to alrt.)

1 per
station
10 per
system

After a user receives an alert, they can
press the crss-alert button to disable the
current alert.
If tenant partitioning is active, the
attendants within a partition can receive
emergency notification only from callers
in the same partition.
data-ext

Data (data
ext #)

Data Extension: sets up a data call. May
be used to pre-indicate a data call or to
disconnect a data call. May not be a VDN
or ISDN-BRI extension.

1 per dataextension
group

date-time

Date Time

Date and Time (display button): displays
the current date and time. Do not assign
this button to 6400-series display phones
as they normally show the date and time.

1 per
station

delete-msg

Delete
Message

Delete message (display button): deletes a
stored message that is currently on the
display.

1 per
station

dial-icom
(Grp: ___)

Dial Icom

Dial Intercom: accesses the intercom
group assigned to the button. Grp:
Intercom — Dial (Dial Icom) group
number.

1 per group

did-remove

DID
Remove

DID Remove (display button): allows
‘‘DID’’ assignments to be removed.

1 per
station

did-view

DID View

DID View (display button): allows DID
assignments to be displayed and changed.
Allows choice between XDID and
XDIDVIP numbers.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

139

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

directory

Directory

Description

Maximum

Directory (display button): allows users
with display telephones to access the
system directory, use the touch-tone
buttons to key in a name, and retrieve an
extension from the directory. The
directory contains the names and
extensions that you have assigned to the
telephones administered in your system.

1 per
station

If you assign a directory button, you
should also assign a Next and Call-Disp
button to the phone. These buttons allow
the user to navigate within the directory
and call an extension once they find the
correct one.
Note that Vector Directory Numbers do
not appear in the Directory.
dir-pkup

dir-pkup

Directed call pickup: allows the user to
answer a call ringing at another extension
without having to be a member of a pickup
group.

disp-chrg

Display
Charge

Provides your display phone with a visual
display of accumulated charges on your
current telephone call. Used exclusively
outside the U.S. and Canada.

1 per
station

disp-norm

Local/
Normal

Normal (display button): Toggles between
LOCAL display mode (displays time and
date) and NORMAL mode (displays
call-related data). LED off = LOCAL
mode and LED on = NORMAL.

1 per
station

dn-dst

Do Not
Disturb

Places the user in the do not disturb mode.

1 per
station

drop

Drop

Allows users to drop calls. Users can drop
calls from automatic hold or drop the last
party they added to a conference call.
Continued on next page

140

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

exclusion

Exclusion

Description

Maximum

Exclusion: allows multiappearance
telephone users to keep other users with
appearances of the same extension from
bridging onto an existing call.

1 per
station

If the user press the EXCLUSION button
while other users are already bridged onto
the call, the other users are dropped.
There are two means of activating
exclusion.
■

Manual Exclusion — when the user
presses the EXCLUSION button (either
before dialing or during the call).

■

Automatic Exclusion — as soon as the
user picks up the handset. To turn off
Automatic Exclusion during a call, the
user presses the EXCLUSION button. To
use Automatic Exclusion, set the
Automatic Exclusion by COS field to
y on the Feature-Related System
Parameters screen.

ext-dn-dst

Do Not
Disturb Ext

Extension — Do Not Disturb (display
button): used by the attendant console or
hotel front desk display phone to activate
do not disturb and assign a corresponding
deactivate time to an extension.

1 per
station

fe-mute

Far End
Mute for
Conf

Allows a user to mute a selected party on a
conference call. This button can be
assigned to stations and attendant
consoles.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

141

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

flash

goto-cover

Description

Maximum

Flash

1) Allows a station on a trunk call with
Trunk Flash to send a Trunk Flash signal
to the far end (e.g., Central Office); 2)
allows a station on a CAS main call to
send a Trunk Flash signal over the
connected RLT trunk back to the branch to
conference or transfer the call.

1 per
station

Go To
Cover

Go To Coverage: sends a call directly to
coverage instead of waiting for the called
inside-user to answer. Go to Cover forces
intercom and priority calls to follow a
coverage path.

1 per
station

NOTE:

Go to Cover cannot be activated for
calls placed to a Vector Directory
Number extension. Go to Cover can
be used to force a call to cover to a
VDN if the called principal has a
VDN as a coverage point.
grp-dn-dst

Do Not
Disturb Grp

Group Do Not Disturb (display button):
places a group of phones into the do not
disturb mode.

grp-page
(Number:___)

GrpPg

Allows users to make announcements to
groups of stations by automatically
turning on their speakerphones. Number:
The extension of the page group.

headset

Headset

Signals onhook/offhook state changes to
the switch. The green LED is on for
offhook state and off (dark) for onhook
state.

hunt-ns
(Grp: ___)

Hunt Group

Hunt-Group Night Service: places a
hunt-group into night service. Grp: Hunt
group number.

1 per
station

3 per hunt
group

Continued on next page

142

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

in-call-id
(Type: __
Grp: ___)

Button
label

Coverage
(group #,
type, name,
or ext #)

Description

Maximum

The Coverage Incoming Call
Identification (‘‘ICI’’) button allows a
member of a coverage answer group or
hunt group to identify an incoming call to
that group even though the member does
not have a display telephone.

1 per
group-type
per group

In the Type field, enter c for coverage
answer groups and type of h for a hunt
group. In the Grp field, enter the group
number.
inspect

Inspect
Mode

Inspect (display button): allows users on
an active call to display the identification
of an incoming call. Inspect also allows
users to determine the identification of
calls they placed on Hold.

1 per
station

int-aut-an

IntAutoAns

Internal Automatic Answer: causes any
hybrid or digital station to automatically
answer incoming internal calls.

1 per
station

last-numb

LastNumb
Dialed

Last Number Dialed (redial): originates a
call to the number last dialed by the
station.

1 per
station

lic-error

License
Error

License-Error: indicates a major License
File alarm. Pressing the button does not
make the light go out. The button goes out
only after the error is cleared and the
switch returns to License-Normal Mode.
You can administer this button on phones
and attendant consoles.

1 per phone
20 per
system
(Server
CSI/ Server
SI)
30 per
system
(Server R)

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

143

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

link-alarm
(link# ___)

Description

Maximum

Link Failure
(link #)

Link Alarm: associated status lamp
indicates that a failure has occurred on one
of the Processor Interface circuit pack data
links. Link: Link number — 1 to 8 for
multi-carrier cabinets or 1 to 4 for
single-carrier cabinets.

8 per
station

lsvn-halt

Login SVN

Login Security Violation Notification:
activates or deactivates referral call when
a login security violation is detected.

1 per
system

lwc-cancel

Cancel
LWC

Leave Word Calling Cancel: cancels the
last leave word calling message originated
by the user.

1 per
station

lwc-lock

Lock LWC

Leave Word Calling Lock: locks the
message retrieval capability of the display
module on the station.

1 per
station

lwc-store

LWC

Leave Word Calling Store: leaves a
message for the user associated with the
last number dialed to return the call to the
originator.

1 per
station

major-alrm

Major Hdwe
Failure

Major Alarm: assign to a status lamp to
notify the user when major alarms occur.
Major alarms usually require immediate
attention.

1 per
station

man-msg-wt
(Ext: ___)

Msg Wait
(name or
ext #)

Manual Message Waiting: allows a
multiappearance telephone user to press a
button on their telephone in order to light
the Manual Message Waiting button at
another telephone.

None

You can administer this feature only to
pairs of telephones, such as an assistant
and an executive. For example, an
assistant can press the man-msg-wt button
to signal the executive that they have a
call.
Continued on next page

144

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

man-overid
(TOD: _)

Immediate
Override

Description

Maximum

Immediate Manual Override (display
button): allows the user (on a system with
Time of Day Routing) to temporarily
override the routing plan and use the
specified ‘‘TOD’’ routing plan.

1 per
station

TOD: specify the routing plan the user
wants to follow in override situations.
manual-in
(Group: __)

Manual In

Manual-In Mode: prevents the user from
becoming available for new ACD calls
upon completion of an ACD call by
automatically placing the agent in the after
call work mode. Grp: The split group
number for ACD.

1 per split
group

mct-act

MCT
Activation

Malicious Call Trace Activation: sends a
message to the ‘‘MCT’’ control extensions
that the user wants to trace a malicious
call. MCT activation also starts recording
the call, if your system has a MCT voice
recorder.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

145

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

mct-contr

Button
label

MCT
Control

Description

Maximum

Malicious Call Trace Control: allows the
user to take control of a malicious call
trace request. Once the user becomes the
MCT controller, the system stops
notifying other MCT control extensions of
the MCT request.

1 per
station

NOTE:

To add an extension to the MCT
control group, you must also add the
extension on the ‘‘Extensions
Administered to have an
MCT-Control Button’’ screen.
When the user presses the MCT Control
button, the system first displays the called
party information. Pressing the button
again displays the rest of the trace
information.
The MCT controller must dial the MCT
Deactivate feature access code to release
control.
mf-da-intl

Directory
Assistance

Multifrequency Operator International:
allows users to call Directory Assistance.

1 per
station

mf-op-intl

CO
attendant

Multifrequency Operator International:
allows users to make international calls to
the CO attendant.

1 per
station

mj/mn-alrm

Maj/Minor
Hdwe
Failure

Minor Alarm: assign to a status lamp to
notify the user when minor or major
alarms occur. Minor alarms usually
indicate that only a few trunks or a few
stations are affected.

1 per
station

mm-basic

MM Basic

Multimedia Basic: used to place a
multimedia complex into the “Basic”
mode or to return it to the “Enhanced”
mode.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

146

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

mm-call

Description

Maximum

MM Call

Multimedia Call: used to indicate a call is
to be a multimedia call.

1 per
station

mm-cfwd

MM
CallFwd

Multimedia Call Forward: used to activate
forwarding of multimedia calls as
multimedia calls, not as voice calls.

1 per
station

mm-datacnf

MM
Datacnf

Multimedia Data Conference: used to
initiate a data collaboration session
between multimedia endpoints; requires a
button with a lamp.

1 per
station

mm-multnbr

MM
MultNbr

Indicate that the user wants to place calls
to 2 different addresses using the 2
B-channels.

1 per
station

mm-pcaudio

MM
PCAudio

Switches the audio path from the
telephone (handset or speakerphone) to
the ‘‘PC’’ (headset or
speakers/microphone).

1 per
station

msg-retr

Message
Retrieve

Message Retrieval (display button): places
the station’s display into the message
retrieval mode.

1 per
station

mwn-act

Message
Waiting
Act.

Message Waiting Activation: lights a
message waiting lamp on an associated
station.

1 per
station

mwn-deact

Message
Waiting
Deact

Message Waiting Deactivation: dims a
message waiting lamp on an associated
station.

1 per
station

next

Next

Next (display button): steps to the next
message when the phone’s display is in
Message Retrieval or Coverage Message
Retrieval mode. Shows the next name
when the phone’s display is in the
Directory mode.

1 per
station

night-serv

Night Serv

Night Service Activation: toggles the
system in or out of Night Service mode.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

147

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

noans-alrt

Description

Maximum

RONA

Redirection on No Answer Alert: indicates
a Redirection on No Answer timeout has
occurred for the split.

1 per hunt
group

no-hld-cnf

No Hold
Conference

No Hold Conference: can automatically
conference another party while continuing
the existing call.

1 per
station

normal

Normal
Mode

Normal (display button): places the
station’s display into normal call
identification mode.

1 per
station

off-bd-alm

Off board
alarm

Off board Alarm: associated status lamp
lights if an off-circuit pack major, minor,
or warning alarm is active on a circuit
pack. Off-board alarms (loss of signal,
slips, misframes) relate to problems on the
facility side of the DS1, ATM, or other
interface.

1 per
attendant

per-COline
(Grp: ___)

CO Line
(line #)

Personal CO Line: allows the user to
receive calls directly via a specific trunk.
Grp: CO line group number.

1 per group

pms-alarm

PMS Failure

Property Management System alarm:
associated status lamp indicates that a
failure in the ‘‘PMS’’ link occurred. A
major or minor alarm condition raises the
alarm.

1 per
station

pr-awu-alm

Auto
Wakeup
Alm

Automatic Wakeup Printer Alarm:
associated status lamp indicates that an
automatic wakeup printer interface failure
occurred.

1 per
station

pr-pms-alm

PMS Ptr
Alarm

PMS Printer Alarm: associated status
lamp indicates that a PMS printer interface
failure occurred.

1 per
station

pr-sys-alm

Sys Ptr
Alarm

System Printer Alarm: associated status
lamp indicates that a system printer failure
occurred.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

148

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

print-msgs

Description

Maximum

Print Msgs

Print Messages: allows users to print
messages for any extension by pressing
the button and entering the extension and a
security code.

1 per
station

priority

Priority Call

Priority Calling: allows a user to place
priority calls or change an existing call to
a priority call.

1 per
station

q-calls
(Grp: ___)

NQC

Queue Calls: associated status lamp
flashes if a call warning threshold has
been reached. Grp: Group number of hunt
group.

1 per hunt
group per
station

q-time
(Grp: ___)

OQT

Queue Time: associated status lamp
flashes if a time warning threshold has
been reached. Grp: Group number of hunt
group.

1 per hunt
group per
station

release

Release

Releases an agent from an ACD call.

1 per
station

ringer-off

Ringer
Cutoff

Ringer-Cutoff: silences the alerting ringer
on the station.

1 per
station

rs-alert

System
Reset Alert

The associated status lamp lights if a
problem escalates beyond a warm start.

1 per
station

rsvn-halt

rsvn-halt

Remote Access Barrier Code Security
Violation Notification Call: activates or
deactivates call referral when a remote
access barrier code security violation is
detected.

1 per
system

scroll

Scroll

Scroll (display button): allows the user to
select one of the two lines (alternates with
each press) of the 16-character LCD
display. Only one line displays at a time.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

149

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

send-calls
(Ext: ___)

Description

Maximum

Send All
Calls

Send All Calls allows users to temporarily
direct all incoming calls to coverage
regardless of the assigned call-coverage
redirection criteria. Assign to a lamp
button.

1 per
station

send-term

Send All
Calls-TEG

Send All Calls For Terminating Extension
Group: allows the user to forward all calls
directed to a terminating extension group.

1 per TEG

serv-obsrv

Service
Observing

Service Observing: activates Service
Observing. Used to toggle between a
listen-only and a listen-talk mode.

1 per
station

signal
(Ext: ___)

Signal
(name or
ext #)

Signal: allows the user to use one button
to manually signal the associated
extension. The extension cannot be a
VDN extension.

1 per signal
extension

ssvn-halt

ssvn-halt

Toggle whether or not station security
code violation referrals are made to the
referral destination.

1 per
station

sta-lock

Station
Lock

Station Lock: when enabled, no outgoing
calls can be made from the phone.

1 per
station

stored-num

Stored
Number

(display button) Places the station’s
display into the stored number mode.

1 per
station

stroke-cnt

ACD SD
Stroke
Count

Automatic Call Distribution Single Digit
Stroke Count: sends a message to CMS to
increment a stroke count number.

1 per
station

term-x-gr
(Grp: ___)

Term Grp
(name or
ext #)

Terminating Extension Group: provides
one or more extensions. Calls may be
received but not originated with this
button. Grp: TEG number.

1 per TEG

timer

Timer

(display button) Starts a clock on the
station to display elapsed time.

1 per
station

togle-swap

Conf/Trans
Toggle-Swa
p

Allows a user to toggle between two
parties before completing a conference or
a transfer.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

150

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone feature buttons

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

trk-ac-alm

Description

Maximum

FTC Alarm

Facility Test Call Alarm: associated status
lamp lights when a successful Facility
Test Call (‘‘FTC’’) occurs.

1 per
station

trk-id

Trunk ID

Trunk Identification (display button):
identifies the tac (trunk access code) and
trunk member number associated with a
call.

1 per
station

trunk-name

Trunk Name

(display button) Displays the name of the
trunk as administered on the CAS Main or
on a switch without CAS.

1 per
station

trunk-ns
(Grp: ___)

Trunk Grp

Trunk-Group Night Service: places a
trunk-group into night service. Grp: Trunk
group number.

3 per trunk
group

verify

Verify

Busy Verification: allows users to make
test calls and verify a station or a trunk.

1 per
station

vip-chkin

VIP
Check-in

VIP Check-in (display button): allows
user to assign the XDIDVIP number to the
room extension.

1 per
station

vip-retry

VIP Retry

VIP Retry: starts to flash when the user
places a VIP wakeup call and continues to
flash until the call is answered. If the VIP
wakeup call is not answered, the user can
press the VIP Retry button to drop the call
and reschedule the VIP wakeup call as a
classic wakeup call.

1 per
station

To assign this button, you must have both
Hospitality and VIP Wakeup enabled.
vip-wakeup

VIP
Wakeup

VIP Wakeup: flashes when a VIP wakeup
reminder call is generated. The user
presses the button to place a priority (VIP)
wakeup call to a guest.

1 per
station

To assign this button, you must have both
Hospitality and VIP Wakeup enabled.
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

151

Managing phone features

Table 3. Telephone feature buttons (Continued)

Button name

Button
label

voa-repeat
vu-display
(format: __
ID: __)

Description

Maximum

VOA repeat

VDN of Origin Announcement. VDN of
Origin Announcement must be enabled.

1 per
station

VuStats #

VuStats Display: allows the agent to
specify a display format for the statistics.
If you assign a different VuStats display
format to each button, the agent can use
the buttons to access different statistics.
You can assign this button only to display
phones.

limited to
the number
of feature
buttons on
the phone

format: specify the number of the format
you want the button to display
ID (optional): specify a split number,
trunk group number, agent extension, or
VDN extension
whisp-act

Whisper
Page
Activation

Whisper Page Activation: allows a user to
make and receive whisper pages. A
whisper page is an announcement sent to
another extension who is active on a call
where only the person on the extension
hears the announcement; any other parties
on the call cannot hear the announcement.

1 per
station

The user must have a class of restriction
(COR) that allows intraswitch calling to
use whisper paging.
whisp-anbk

Answerback

Whisper Page Answerback: allows a user
who received a whisper page to respond to
the user who sent the page.

1 per
station

whisp-off

Whisper
Page Off

Deactivate Whisper Paging: blocks other
users from sending whisper pages to this
phone.

1 per
station

work-code

Work Code

Call Work Code: allows an ACD agent
after pressing “work-code” to send up to
16 digits (using the dial pad) to CMS.

1 per
station

Continued on next page

152

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding abbreviated dialing lists

Adding abbreviated dialing lists
Abbreviated dialing is sometimes called speed dialing. It allows you to dial a short
code in place of an extension or phone number.
When you dial abbreviated-dialing codes or press abbreviated-dialing buttons,
you access stored numbers from special lists. These lists can be personal (a list of
numbers for an individual phone), group (a department-wide list), system (a
system-wide list), or enhanced numbers (allows for a longer list of numbers). The
version and type of your system determine which lists are available and how many
entries you can have on each list.
NOTE:

You can designate all group-number lists, system-number lists, and
enhanced-number lists as “privileged.” Calls automatically dialed from a
privileged list are completed without class of restriction (COR) or facility
restriction level (FRL) checking. This allows access to selected numbers
that some phone users might otherwise be restricted from manually dialing.
For example, a user may be restricted from making long-distance calls.
However, you can program the number of a branch office that is long
distance into an AD list as privileged. Then, the user can call this office
location using AD, while still being restricted from making other
long-distance calls.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Privileged group-number, system-number, and enhanced-number lists
provide access to numbers that typically would be restricted.
Instructions

As an example, we will program a new group list:
1. Type add abbreviated-dialing group next and press RETURN.
The Abbreviated Dialing List screen appears. In our example, the next
available group list is group 3.
ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST
Group List: 3
Size (multiple of 5): ___ Program Ext: ________ Privileged? _
DIAL CODE
01: ________________________
02: ________________________
03: ________________________
04: ________________________
05: ________________________

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

153

Managing phone features

2. Enter a number (in multiples of 5) in the Size field. This number defines
the number of entries on your dialing list.
For example, if you have 8 phone numbers you want to store in the list,
type 10 in the Size field.
3. If you want another user to be able to add numbers to this list, enter their
extension in the Program Ext field.
For example, if you want the user at 4567 to be able to change group list 3,
enter 4567 in this field.
4. Enter the phone numbers you want to store, one for each dial code.
Each phone number can be up to 24 digits long.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
You can display your new abbreviated-dialing list to verify that the information is
correct or print a copy of the list for your paper records.
Once you define a group list, you need to define which stations can use the list.
For example, we will set up station 4567 so it has access to the new group list.
To give station 4567 access to the group list:
1. Type change station 4567 and press RETURN.
The Station screen for extension 4567 appears.
2. Press NEXT PAGE to get to the Abbreviated Dialing List fields.

STATION
SITE DATA
Room:
Jack:
Cable:
Floor:
Building:

_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: group
3

Headset? n
Speaker? n
Mounting? d
Cord Length: 0
Set Color: ______

List2: _________

BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: call-appr
2: call-appr
3: call-appr

List3: _________

4: __________
5: __________

3. Type group in any of the List fields and press RETURN.
A blank list number field appears.
4. Type 3 in the list number field.
When you assign a group or personal list, you must also specify the
personal list number or group list number.

154

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding abbreviated dialing lists

5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
The user at extension 4567 can now use this list by dialing the feature access code
for the list and the dial code for the number they want to dial. Alternatively, you
can assign an abbreviated dialing button to this station that allows the user press
one button to dial a specific stored number on one of their three assigned
abbreviated lists.
Fixing problems
Problem

A user cannot
access a dial list.

Possible causes
■

The specific list may
not be assigned to the
user’s phone.

Solutions

1. Type display station nnnn and press
RETURN, where nnnn is the user’s
extension.
2. Review the current settings of the
List1, List2, and List 3 fields to
determine if the list the user wants to
access is assigned to their phone.

■

■

■

555-233-506

If the user attempted to
use a feature access
code to access the list,
they may have dialed
the incorrect feature
access code.
If the user attempted to
press a feature button,
they may have pressed
the incorrect feature
button.

If the user attempted to
press the correct
feature button, the
button may not be set
up correctly.

1. Type display feature-access-codes
and press RETURN.
2. Verify that the user is dialing the
appropriate feature access code.

1. Type display station nnnn and press
RETURN, where nnnn is the user’s
extension.
2. Review the current feature button
assignments to determine if the user
was pressing the assigned button.
1. Type display station nnnn and press
RETURN, where nnnn is the user’s
extension.
2. Review the current feature button
assignments to see if the list number
and dial code are correct.

Issue 5 October 2002

155

Managing phone features

Problem

Possible causes

A user
complains that
using an
abbreviated dial
list dials the
wrong number.

■

The user could be
using the wrong dial
code.

■

The dial code could be
defined incorrectly.

Solutions

1. Ask the user what number they dialed
or button they pressed to determine
which list and dial code they
attempted to call.
2. Access the dialing list and verify that
the number stored for the specific
dial code corresponds to the number
the user wanted to dial. (For example
to access a group list, type display
abbreviated-dialing group x and
press RETURN, where x is a group list
number.)
3. If the user dialed the wrong code,
give them the correct code.
4. If the dial code is wrong, press
CANCEL and use the appropriate
change command to re-access the
abbreviated dialing list. Correct the
number and press ENTER.

More information

There are limits to the total number of abbreviated dialing list entries, the number
of personal dial lists, and the number of group dial lists that your system can store.
Because of these limitations, you should avoid storing the same number in more
than one list. Instead, assign commonly dialed numbers to the system list or to a
group list. You can determine the abbreviated dialing storage capacity, by
referring to the System Capacity screen for the abbreviated dialing values
(display capacity).
Related topics

For more information, see ‘‘Abbreviated dialing’’ on page 1449.

156

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up bridged call appearances

Setting up bridged call appearances
Think of a bridged call appearance as a phone (the primary set) with an extension
(the bridged-to appearance). Both phones can be used to call in and out and both
show when a line is in use. A call to the primary phone is bridged to a specific
appearance, or button, on the secondary phone. The secondary phone retains all its
functions, and a specific button is dedicated as the bridged-to appearance from the
primary phone.
Bridged call appearances have to be assigned to phones with double-lamp buttons,
or lights. The phone types do not need to match, but as much consistency as
possible is recommended for all phones in a bridged group. When a call comes in
on bridged phones, the buttons assigned to the bridged appearances flash. You can
assign as many bridged appearances as there are line appearances on the primary
phone, and you can assign ringing (alerting) to one or more of the phones.
Instructions

To create a bridged call appearance:
1. Note the extension of the primary phone.
A call to this phone lights the button and, if activated, rings at the
bridged-to appearance on the secondary phone.
2. If you want to use a new phone for the bridged-to extension, duplicate a
station.
For information, see ‘‘Using templates to add phones’’ on page 96.
3. Type change station and the bridged-to extension and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.
STATION
FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception? _______
LWC Activation? _
CDR Privacy? _
Redirect Notification? _
Per Button Ring Control? _
Bridged Call Alerting? _
Active Station Ringing: ______

Auto Select Any Idle Appearance? _
Coverage Msg Retrieval? _
Auto Answer? __
Data Restriction? _
Idle Appearance Preference? _
Restrict Last Appearance? _
Data Module? _

XID? _
Fixed TEI? _
TEI: __
MIM Support? _
Endpt Init? _
SPID: ____
MIM Mtce/Mgt?
AUDIX Name: ______
Messaging Server Name: ______
Audible Message Waiting?
Disp Client Redir?
Select Last Used Appearance?

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

_
_
_
_

157

Managing phone features

4. Press NEXT PAGE until Per Button Ring Control appears (digital sets only).
■

If you want to assign ringing separately to each bridged appearance,
type y.

■

If you want all bridged appearances to either ring or not ring, leave
the default n.

5. Move to Bridge Call Alerting.
If you want the bridged appearance to ring when a call arrives at the
primary phone, type y. Otherwise, leave the default n.
6. Complete the appropriate field for your phone type.
If. . .

Then. . .

your primary phone is analog

move to the Line Appearance field and
enter abrdg-appr

your primary phone is digital

move to the Button Assignments field
and enter brdg-appr

7. Press RETURN.
Btn and Ext fields appear. If Per Button Ring Control is set to y on the
digital screen, Btn, Ext, and Ring fields appear.

STATION
SITE DATA
Room:
Jack:
Cable:
Floor:
Building:

_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ___________

Headset? n
Speaker? n
Mounting? d
Cord Length: 0
Set Color: ______

List2: _________

List3: _________

HOT LINE DESTINATION
Abbreviated Dialing List Number (From above 1, 2 or 3):
Dial Code:
Line Appearance: brdg-appr
Btn:
Ext:

Screen 3. Station screen (analog)

158

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up bridged call appearances

STATION
SITE DATA
Room: _______
Jack: _____
Cable: _____
Floor: _______
Building: _______

Headset? n
Speaker? n
Mounting: d
Cord Length: 0
Set Color: ______

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ________
BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: brdg-appr Btn:
1: brdg-appr Btn:

List2: ________

Ext:
Ext:

List3: ________

Ring:
Ring:

Screen 4. Station screen (digital set)

8. Enter the primary phone’s button number that you want to assign as the
bridged call appearance.
This button flashes when a call arrives at the primary phone.
9. Enter the primary phone extension.
10. If the Ring field appears:
■

If you want the bridged appearance to ring when a call arrives at the
primary phone, type y.

■

If you do not want the bridged appearance to ring, leave the default
n.

11. Press ENTER to save your changes.
To see if an extension has any bridged call appearances assigned, type list bridge
and the extension, and press RETURN.
More information

Following are a list of example situations where you might want to use bridged
appearances.
■

A secretary making or answering calls on an executive’s primary extension
These calls can be placed on hold for later retrieval by the executive, or the
executive can simply bridge onto the call. In all cases, the executive
handles the call as if he or she had placed or answered the call. It is never
necessary to transfer the call to the executive.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

159

Managing phone features

■

Visitor telephones
An executive may have another telephone in their office that is to be used
by visitors. It may be desirable that the visitor be able to bridge onto a call
that is active on the executive’s primary extension number. A bridged call
appearance makes this possible.

■

Service environments
It may be necessary that several people be able to handle calls to a
particular extension number. For example, several users may be required to
answer calls to a hot line number in addition to their normal functions.
Each user may also be required to bridge onto existing hot line calls. A
bridged call appearance provides this capability.

■

A user frequently using telephones in different locations
A user may not spend all of their time in the same place. For this type of
user, it is convenient to have their extension number bridged at several
different telephones.

Setting up Terminal Self
Administration
Terminal self-administration (‘‘TSA’’) allows users to administer some of their
own feature buttons from their telephones. TSA is available only for 6400-series
phones. Users are prompted, via the telephone’s display, to choose features to
assign to buttons on their telephones.
Before you start

To prevent users from changing another user's phone administration, you can
enable the system-wide option that requires users to enter a station security code
before they can administer their phone. To enable this option:
1. Set the Station Security Code for Terminal Self-Administration Required
on the Security-Related System Parameters screen to Y.
If you enable this option, the user is prompted for the station security code
when they press the Admin button. The user must enter the security code,
followed by the pound (#) button or the Done softkey.
Instructions

You need to assign a security code to the user’s Station screen for each user you
want to enable access to TSA. You also need to assign the user an Admin feature
button.

160

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up Terminal Self Administration

For example, to assign a security code of 12345678 to extension 4234, complete
the following steps:
1. Type change station 4234 and press RETURN.
The Station screen for extension 4234 appears.
2. In the Security Code field, type 12345678.
You should assign unique security codes for each user. Once you enter the
code and move off the field, the system changes the field to ‘*’ for extra
security.
3. In one of feature button fields, type admin.
You can assign this button to a feature button or a softkey.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
More information

Before a user can enter the TSA Admin mode, their telephone must be completely
idle. After a user presses the Admin button and enters a security code (if
necessary), they are prompted, via the telephone’s display, to choose features to
administer to buttons on their telephone.
The user can add, replace, or delete any of the following feature-button types from
their telephone.
■

CDR Account Code

■

Automatic Dial

■

Blank

■

Call Forwarding

■

Call Park

■

Call Pickup

■

Directed Call Pickup

■

Group Page

■

Send All Calls

■

Activate Whisper Page

■

Answerback for Whisper Page

■

Whisper Page Off

End-user button changes are recorded to the switch’s history log so that remote
services can know what translations are changed.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

161

Managing phone features

Fixing problems
■

When a telephone is in the Admin mode, the telephone cannot accept any
calls — the telephone is treated as if it were busy. Also, a user cannot make
calls while in the Admin mode.

■

Any button state a telephone is in when the telephone enters the Admin
mode stays active while the telephone is in the Admin mode.

■

ACD agents who wish access to the Admin mode of TSA must be logged
off before pressing the Admin button. If they are not logged off when they
attempt to enter the Admin mode, they receive a denial (single-beep) tone.

■

Call Forwarding can be active and works correctly in the Admin mode. An
active Call Forwarding button cannot be removed when the telephone is in
the Admin mode.

■

Since the telephone must be on-hook to go into the Admin mode, the
Headset On/Off button must be in the OFF position.

■

A telephone that is in the Admin mode of TSA cannot be remotely
unmerged by the PSA feature.
If a user has Abbreviated and Delayed Ringing active, a call can be silently
ringing at a telephone and the user may not realize it. This ringing prevents
the user from entering the Admin mode of TSA.

162

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing your attendant consoles

This section provides an overview to the Avaya attendant consoles. It also
explains how to add new consoles, remove consoles, and how to set your
system-wide console parameters.

Overview
The attendant console is the main answering position for your organization. The
console operator is responsible for answering incoming calls and for efficiently
directing or “extending” calls to the appropriate phone.
The attendant console also can allow your attendants to monitor:
■

system problems

■

toll fraud abuse

■

traffic patterns

The number of consoles you can have in your organization varies depending on
your MultiVantage system.
302 attendant consoles

MultiVantage supports the following 302 attendant consoles: the 302A/B, 302C,
and 302D consoles. You may have a basic or enhanced version of these consoles.
Figure 1 on page 164 shows the 302A/B console and Figure 2 on page 165 shows
the 302C console. The next two figures show the button layouts on the Feature
area and on the optional Selector console.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 163

Managing your attendant consoles

302bphn1 KLC 051496

Figure Notes

1. Call processing area

8. Volume control buttons

2. Handset

9. Select buttons

3. Handset cradle

10. Console display panel

4. Warning lamps and call waiting lamps

11. Display buttons

5. Call appearance buttons

12. Trunk group select buttons

6. Feature area

13. Lamp Test Switch

7. Trunk group select buttons

Figure 1. 302A and 302B1 attendant console

164

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Overview

8

7

9

6

Ringer
Select

Volume

Date
Time

5

1

Control

Control

Warning

Warning

Busy

Busy

10

Forced
Release

3

ABC

DEF

1

2

3

GHI

JKL

MNO

4

5

6

PRQS

TUV

WXYZ

7

8

9

Night

Pos
Busy

Calls Waiting

Calls Waiting
Warning
Individual
Calls Waiting

11

Alarm

Alarm Reported

0

Position
Available
Split

2
Cancel

Start

a

Release

4

Hold

b

c

d

e

f

12

phdg302c KLC 031199

Figure Notes

1. Handset

7. Display

2. Handset cradle

8. Select buttons

3. Call processing area

9. Volume control buttons

4. Warning lamps and call waiting lamps 10. Outside-line buttons
5. Outside-line buttons

11. Feature buttons

6. Display buttons

12. Call appearance buttons

Figure 2. 302C attendant console

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

165

Managing your attendant consoles

Figure 3. Console feature button layout

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

TWENTY ADMINISTRABLE
HUNDREDS GROUP
SELECT BUTTONS
(NUMBERS 1-20 ARE
FOR IDENTIFICATION
ONLY)

Figure 4. Enhanced Selector Console

166

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Overview

302D Console

The 302D console provides the following enhancements to the 302C console:
■

Modular handset/headset connection
The console accepts a standard RJ11, 4-pin modular handset or headset.
This connection replaces the quarter-inch, dual-prong handset/headset
connection.

■

Activate/deactivate push-button
You can use the push-button on the left side of the console to activate or
deactivate the console. A message appears on the console identifying that
the button must be pressed to activate the console.

■

Two-wire DCP compatibility
The console is compatible with two-wire ‘‘DCP’’ circuit packs only, not
four-wire DCP circuit packs.

■

Headset volume control
The console can now control the volume of an attached headset.

■

Noise expander option
The console has circuitry to help reduce background noise during pauses in
speech from the console end of a conversation. This option is normally
enabled.

■

Support for Eurofont or Katakana character set
The console can show the Eurofont or Katakana character set.
Administration of these character sets must be coordinated with the
characters sent from the switch.

Avaya PC consoles

The Avaya PC Console is a Microsoft Windows-based call handling application
for MultiVantage system attendants. It provides an ideal way to increase your
productivity and to better serve your customers.
PC Console offers all the call handling capabilities of the hardware-based Avaya
302 attendant console with a DXS module, plus several enhanced features and
capabilities. The enhanced features provide you with the ability to see up to six
calls at once, and to handle all calls more efficiently.
PC Console also provides a powerful directory feature. You are able to perform
searches, display user information, including a photo. You are able to place a call
immediately from the directory.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

167

Managing your attendant consoles

And, because PC Console resides on a Windows-based PC, you are able to use
other software applications at the same time. If a call comes in while you are in
another application, you are able to handle it immediately.
For more information about the Avaya PC Console, contact your Avaya account
team.
SoftConsole IP Attendant

The SoftConsole is a Windows-based application that can replace the 302B hard
console. The SoftConsole is similar to PC Console, but it performs call answering
and routing through a PC interface via IP. For more information, contact your
Avaya account team.

Adding an attendant console
Usually Avaya connects and administers your primary attendant console during
cutover. However, you might find a need for a second attendant console, such as a
backup console that is used only at night. Note that these instructions do not apply
to adding a PC Console or SoftConsole. For more information, see the appropriate
console documentation.
To add a night-only attendant console, complete the following steps:
1. Type add attendant 2 and press RETURN.
The Attendant Console screen appears.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE 2
Type: 302
Extension:
Console Type: night-only
Port:

Name: operator
Group: 1
Auto Answer:
TN: 1
Data Module?
COR: 1
Disp Client Redir?
COS: 1
Display Language:

none
n
n
english

DIRECT TRUNK GROUP SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS (Trunk Access Codes)
Local Remote
Local Remote
Local Remote
1:
5:
9:
2:
6:
10:
3:
7:
11:
4:
8:
12:
HUNDREDS SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1:
5:
9:
2:
6:
10:
3:
7:
11:
4:
8:
12:

13:
14:
15:
16:

17:
18:
19:
20:

2. In the Type field, enter 302.
This is the type of attendant console.

168

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding an attendant console

3. If you want this attendant to have its own extension, enter one in the
Extension field.
Tip:

If you assign an extension to the console, the class of restriction
(‘‘COR’’) and class of service (‘‘COS’’) that you assign on this
Console screen override the COR and COS you assigned on the
Console Parameters screen. To avoid unexpected behavior, you
should assign the same COR and same COS on both screens.
If you give your attendants an individual extension, users can call the
attendant directly by dialing the extension.
Individual attendant extensions also allow attendants to use features that an
attendant group cannot use — for example, you can assign them to hunt
groups.
4. In the Console Type field, enter night-only.
This indicates how this console is used in your organization—as a
principal, day only, night only, or day/night console. You can have only one
night-time console (night only or day/night) in the system.
5. In the Port field, enter the port address for this console.
6. Type a name to associate with this console in the Name field.
7. In the Direct Trunk Group Select Button Assignments fields, enter trunk
access codes for the trunks you want the attendant to be able to select with
just one button.
8. If you are using the Enhanced Selector console, assign the Hundreds Select
Buttons that you want this console to have.
If you want this console to be able to access extensions in the range 3500 to
3999, you need to assign them 5 Hundreds Select Buttons: 35 for
extensions 3500 to 3599, 36, 37, 38, and 39.
9. Assign the Feature Buttons that you want the 302 console to have.
To determine which buttons you can assign to a console, see ‘‘Attendant
console feature buttons’’
Tip:

Feature buttons are not numbered top-to-bottom on the attendant
console, as you might expect. Button numbers map to physical
positions on the console as shown in Figure 3 on page 166.
10. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

169

Managing your attendant consoles

Attendant console feature buttons
The following table lists the feature buttons that you can assign to an attendant
console.
Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons
Feature or
Function

Recommended
Button Label

Name Entered on
Station Screen

Maximum
Allowed

Abbreviated Dialing

AD

abrv-dial (List:___
DC:___)

1 per List/DC

Administered
Connection [status
lamp]

AC Alarm

ac-alarm

1

Automatic Call
Distribution
(‘‘ACD’’)

After Call Work

after-call (Grp. No.__)

N

2

Assist

assist (Grp. No:__)

1 per split
group

2

Auto In

auto-in (Grp. No.__)

1 per split
group

2

Auxiliary Work

aux-work (Grp. No.__)

1 per split
group

2

Manual-In

manual-in (Grp. No.__)

1 per split
group

2

Release

release

1

Work Code

work-code

1

Stroke (0-9)

stroke-cnt (Code:_)

1

Attendant Console
(Calls Waiting)

CW Aud Off

cw-ringoff

1

Attendant Control
of Trunk Group
Access (Activate)

Cont Act

act-tr-grp

1

Attendant Control
of Trunk Group
Access (Deactivate)

Cont Deact

deact-tr-g

1

Notes
1

3

Continued on next page

170

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant console feature buttons

Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons (Continued)
Feature or
Function

Recommended
Button Label

Name Entered on
Station Screen

Maximum
Allowed

Attendant Direct
Trunk Group Select

Local TG
Remote TG

local-tgs (TAC:__)
remote-tgs (LT:__)
(RT:__)

12

Attendant Crisis
Alert

Crisis Alert

crss-alert

1

Attendant Display
[display buttons]

Date/Time

date-time

1

Inspect Mode

inspect

1

Normal Mode

normal

1

Stored Number

stored-num

1

Attendant Hundreds
Group Select

Group Select _

hundrd-sel (Grp:__)

20 per
console

5

Attendant Room
Status

Occupied Rooms
Status

occ-rooms

1

6

Maid Status

maid-stat

1

6

Attendant Override

Override

override

1

Automatic Circuit
Assurance

ACA

aca-halt

1 per system

Automatic Wakeup
(Hospitality)

Auto Wakeup

auto-wkup

1

Busy Verification

Busy Verify

verify

1

Call Coverage

Cover Cback

cov-cback

1

Consult

consult

1

Go To Cover

goto-cover

1

Call Coverage
[display button]

Cover Msg Rt

cov-msg-rt

1

Call Offer
(Intrusion)

Intrusion

intrusion

1

Call Prompting
[display button]

Caller Info

callr-info

1

Call Type

Call Type

type-disp

1

Notes
4

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

171

Managing your attendant consoles

Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons (Continued)
Feature or
Function

Recommended
Button Label

Name Entered on
Station Screen

Maximum
Allowed

Centralized
Attendant Service

CAS-Backup

cas-backup

1

Check In/Out
(Hospitality)
[display buttons]

Check In

check-in

1

Check Out

check-out

1

Class of Restriction
[display button]

COR

class-rstr

1

Conference Display
[display button]

Conference
Display

conf-dsp

1

Demand Print

Print Msgs

print-msgs

1

DID View

DID View

did-view

1

Do Not Disturb
(Hospitality)

Do Not Disturb

dn-dst

1

Do Not Disturb
(Hospitality)
[display buttons]

Do Not Disturb
Ext

ext-dn-dst

1

Do Not Disturb
Grp

grp-dn-dst

1

Don’t Split

Don’t Split

dont-split

1

Emergency Access
To the Attendant

Emerg. Access
To Attd

em-acc-att

1

Facility Busy
Indication [status
lamp]

Busy (trunk or
extension#)

busy-ind (TAC/Ext: _)

1 per
TAC/Ext.

Facility Test Calls
[status lamp]

FTC Alarm

trk-ac-alm

1

Far End Mute
[display button]

Far End Mute for
Conf

fe-mute

1

Group Display

Group Display

group-disp

1

Group Select

Group Select

group-sel

1

Notes

7

Continued on next page

172

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant console feature buttons

Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons (Continued)
Feature or
Function

Recommended
Button Label

Name Entered on
Station Screen

Maximum
Allowed

Hardware Failure
[status lamps]

Major Hdwe
Failure

major-alrm

10 per system

Auto Wakeup

pr-awu-alm

1

DS1 (facility)

ds1-alarm

10 per system

PMS Failure

pms-alarm

1

PMS Ptr Alm

pr-pms-alm

1

CDR 1 Failure

cdr1-alrm

1

CDR 2 Failure

cdr2-alrm

1

Sys Ptr Alm

pr-sys-alm

1

Hold

Hold

hold

1

Integrated Directory
[display button]

Integrtd
Directory

directory

1

Incoming Call
Identification

Coverage
(Group number,
type, name, or
ext.#)

in-call-id

N

Intrusion (Call
Offer)

Intrusion

intrusion

1

Leave Word Calling

Cancel LWC

lwc-cancel

1

LWC

lwc-store

1

Delete Msg

delete-msg

1

Next

next

1

Call Display

call-disp

1

Leave Word Calling
(Remote Message
Waiting) [status
lamp]

Msg (name or
extension #)

aut-msg-wt (Ext:___)

N

Link Failure

Link Failure
(Link No.__)

link-alarm
(Link No.__)

1 per Link #

Leave Word Calling
[display buttons]

Notes

8

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

173

Managing your attendant consoles

Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons (Continued)
Feature or
Function

Recommended
Button Label

Name Entered on
Station Screen

Maximum
Allowed

Login Security
Violation

lsvn-halt

lsvn-halt

1 per system

Message Waiting

Message
Waiting Act.

mwn-act

1 per system

Message
Waiting Deact.

mwn-deact

1 per system

Night Service

Trunk Grp. NS

trunk-ns (Grp. No.__)

1 per trunk
group

No Answer Alert

noans-altr

noans-altr

1 per group

Off Board Alarm

off-bd-alm

off-bd-alm

1 per group

PMS Interface
[display buttons]

PMS display

Priority Calling

Prior Call

priority

N

Position Busy

Position Busy

pos-busy

1

Queue Status
Indications (ACD)
[display buttons]

AQC

atd-qcalls

1

AQT

atd-qtime

Queue Status
Indications (ACD)
[status lamps]

NQC

q-calls (Grp:_)

1

10

OQT

q-time Grp:_)

1 per hunt
group

10

Remote Access
Security Violation

rsvn-halt

rsvn-halt

1 per system

Ringing

In Aud Off

in-ringoff

1

Security Violation
Notification Halt

ssvn-halt

ssvn-halt

1 per system

Serial Call

Serial Call

serial-cal

1

Split/Swap

Split-swap

split-swap

1

System Reset Alert

System Reset
Alert [status
lamp]

rs-alert

1

Notes

9

11

Continued on next page

174

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant console feature buttons

Table 4. Attendant console feature buttons (Continued)
Feature or
Function

Recommended
Button Label

Name Entered on
Station Screen

Maximum
Allowed

Station Security
Code Notification
Halt

ssvn-halt

ssvn-halt

1 per system

Night Service
(ACD)

Hunt Group

hunt-ns (Grp. No.__)

3 per hunt
group

Time of Day
Routing [display
buttons]

Immediate
Override

man-ovrid

1

Clocked
Override

clk-overid

1

Timed Reminder

RC Aud Off

re-ringoff

1

Timer

Timer

timer

1

Trunk Identification
[display button]

Trunk-ID

trk-id

1

Trunk Group Name
[display button]

Trunk-Name

trunk-name

1

Visually Impaired
Service (VIAS)

VIS

vis

1

Console Status

con-stat

1

Display

display

1

DTGS Status

dtgs-stat

1

Last Message

last-mess

1

Last Operation

last-op

1

VDN of Origin
Announcement
Repeat

VOA Repeat

voa-repeat

1

VuStats

VuStats

vu-display

1

Notes

12

12

N = any number of buttons on the phone can be assigned to this feature. For phone feature
button descriptions, see ‘‘Telephone feature buttons’’ on page 131.
Continued on next page

1.

List: List number 1 to 3 where the destination number is stored.
DC: Dial codes of destination number.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

175

Managing your attendant consoles

2.
3.
4.

Grp: The split group number for ACD.
Code: Enter a stroke code (0 through 9).
TAC: local-tgs — TAC of local TG
remote-tgs — (L-TAC) TAC of TG to remote PBX
remote-tgs — (R-TAC) TAC of TG on remote PBX
The combination of local-tgs/remote-tgs per console must not exceed 12 (maximum).
Label associated button appropriately so as to easily identify the trunk group.
5. Grp: Enter a hundreds group number (1 through 20).
6. Enhanced Hospitality must be enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
7. Ext: May be a VDN extension.
8. Link: A link number — 1 to 8 for multi-carrier cabinets, 1 to 4 for single-carrier cabinets.
9. Grp: A trunk group number.
10. Grp: Group number of the hunt group.
11. Allows the attendant to alternate between active and split calls.
12. VDN of Origin must be enabled.

Removing an attendant console
Before you physically remove an attendant from your system, check the
attendant’s status, remove it from any group or usage lists, and then delete it from
the system’s memory.
For example, to remove attendant 3, which also is assigned extension 4345:
1. Type status attendant 3 and press RETURN.
The Attendant Status screen appears.
2. Make sure that the attendant:
■

is plugged into the jack

■

is idle (not making or receiving calls)

3. Type list usage extension 4345 and press RETURN.
The Usage screen shows where the extension is used in the system.
4. Press CANCEL.
5. If the attendant extension appears on the Usage screen, access the
appropriate feature screen and delete the extension.
For example, if extension 1234 belongs to hunt group 2, type change hunt
group 2 and delete the extension from the list.
6. Type remove attendant 3 and press RETURN.
The system displays the Attendant Console screen so you can verify that
you are removing the correct attendant.

176

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting console parameters

7. If this is the correct attendant, press ENTER.
If the system responds with an error message, the attendant is busy or still
belongs to a group. Press CANCEL to stop the request, correct the problem,
and enter remove attendant 3 again.
8. Remove the extension from voice mail service if the extension has a voice
mailbox.
9. Type save translations and press RETURN to save your changes.
Note that you do not need to delete the extension from coverage paths. The system
automatically adjusts coverage paths to eliminate the extension.
Now you can unplug the console from the jack and store it for future use. You do
not need to disconnect the wiring at the cross-connect field. The extension and
port address remain available for assignment at a later date.

Setting console parameters
You can define system-wide console settings on the Console Parameters screen.
For example, if you want to warn your attendants when there are more than 3 calls
in queue or if a call waits for more than 20 seconds, complete the following steps:
1. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.
The Console Parameters screen appears.

change console-parameters

Page
CONSOLE PARAMETERS
Attendant Group Name: OPERATORS
COS: 0
COR:
Calls in Queue Warning: 3
Attendant Lockout?
Ext Alert Port (TAAS):
CAS: none
SAC Notification? n
Night Service Act. Ext.:
IAS (Branch)? n
IAS Tie Trunk Group No.:
IAS Att. Access Code:
Alternate FRL Station:
Backup Alerting? n
DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext?

1 of

3

0
y

n

TIMING
Time Reminder
Time in Queue
INCOMING CALL
No Answer

on Hold (sec): 10
Return Call Timeout (sec): 10
Warning (sec): 20
REMINDERS
Timeout (sec): 20
Alerting (sec): 40
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: group
1
List2:
List3:
COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Starting Extension:
Count:

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

177

Managing your attendant consoles

2. In the Calls in Queue Warning field, enter 3.
The system lights the console’s second call waiting lamp if the number of
calls waiting in the attendant queue exceeds 3 calls.
3. In the Time in Queue Warning field, enter 20.
The system issues a reminder tone if a call waits in the attendant queue for
more than 20 seconds.
4. Press ENTER to save changes.
Note that some of the settings on the individual Attendant screens can override
your system-wide settings.

Providing backup for an attendant
MultiVantage allows you to configure your system so that you have backup
positions for your attendant. Attendant Backup Alerting notifies backup
telephones that the attendant need assistance in handling calls. The backup
telephones are alerted when the attendant queue reaches the queue warning level
or when the console is in night service.
Once a backup telephone receive an alert, the user can dial the Trunk Answer Any
Station (TAAS) feature access code (FAC) to answer the alerting attendant calls.
Tip:

You can find more information about attendant backup in the GuestWorks
Technician Handbook.
Before you start

178

■

You can assign the attendant backup alerting only to multiappearance
telephones that have a client room class of service (COS) set to No. For
more information, see ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672.

■

If you have not yet defined a Trunk Answer Any Station (TAAS) feature
access code, you need to define one and provide the feature access code to
each of the attendant backup users. For more information, see ‘‘Feature
Access Code’’ on page 781.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Providing backup for an attendant

Instructions

To enable your system to alert backup stations, you need to administer the
Console Parameters screen for backup alerting. You also need to give the backup
phones an attendant queue calls feature button and train your backup users how to
answer the attendant calls.
To configure the system to provide backup alerts and to setup extension 4345 to
receive these alerts, complete the following steps:
1. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.
The Console Parameters screen appears.
2. In the Backup Alerting field, enter y.
3. Press ENTER to save changes.
The system will now notify anyone with an attendant queue calls button
when the attendant queue reaches the warning level or when the console is
in night service.
4. Type change station 4345 and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.
5. In one of the Button Assignment fields, enter atd-qcalls.
The atd-qcalls button provides the visual alerting for this telephone. When
this button is dark (idle state), there are no calls in the attendant queue.
When the button shows a steady light (busy state), there are calls in the
attendant queue. When button shows a flashing light (warning state), the
number of calls in the attendant queue exceeds the queue warning. The
backup-telephone user also hears an alerting signal every 10 seconds.
6. Press ENTER to save changes.
Now you need to train the user how to interpret the backup alerting and give them
the ‘‘TAAS’’ feature access code so that they can answer the attendant calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

179

Managing your attendant consoles

180

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing displays

Displaying caller information
This chapter provides information on the messages that appear on the read-out
screen on display phones.
Your system uses automatic incoming call display to provide information about
incoming calls to a display phone that is in use, or active on a call. The
information is displayed for 30 seconds on all phones except for CALLMASTER
phones, where the display goes blank after 30 seconds. However, the information
for each new call overrides the existing message.
Call information appears on the display only if the call terminates at the phone.
For example, if the call is forwarded to another extension, no call information
appears.
See ‘‘Telephone displays’’ on page 1833 for more information on the buttons and
languages you can set up for the messages that appear on the display.

Displaying ANI calling party
information
Calling party information may consist of either a billing number that sometimes is
referred to as Automatic Number Identification (‘‘ANI’’), or a calling party
number. Your phone may display the calling party number and name, or the
incoming trunk group name.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 181

Managing displays

Instructions

We will set up tie trunk group 10 to receive calling party information and display
the calling party number on the phone of the person called.
1. Type change trunk group 10.
The Trunk Group screen for trunk group 10 appears.

TRUNK GROUP
Group Number:
Group Name:
Direction:
Dial Access?
Queue Length:
Comm Type:

10_
Group Type: tie_____
CDR Reports: r
Node1 to Node3
_______ COR: 10
TN: ___
TAC: *10__
two-way
Outgoing Display? n
Trunk Signaling Type: ____
n
Busy Threshold: 99_
Night Service: _____
___
Incoming Destination: 2000_
voice
Auth Code? n
Trunk Flash? n
BCC: _
ITC? ____
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type (in/out): auto/auto-incorrect Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec): 5
Outgoing Dial Type: _________
Incoming Dial Type: tone
Disconnect Timing(msec): 500
Digit Treatment: __________
Digits: ____
Sig Bit Inversion: none
Incoming Dial Tone? y
Disconnect Supervision - In? y Out? n
Answer Supervision Timeout: 0__

Receive Answer Supervision? y

2. Type tone in the Incoming Dial Type field.
3. Press NEXT PAGE and type *ANI*DNIS in the Incoming Tone (DTMF) ANI
field.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.

Displaying ICLID Information
Your switch collects the calling party name and number (Incoming Call Line
Identification, or ‘‘ICLID’’) received from the central office (‘‘CO’’) on analog
trunks.
Before you start

Be sure Analog Trunk Incoming Call ID field is set to y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.
See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for information on the
required circuit pack.

182

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Displaying ICLID Information

Instructions

We will set up the analog diod trunk group 1 to receive calling party information
and display the calling party number on the phone of the person called.
1. Type change trunk group 1.
The Trunk Group screen for trunk group 1 appears. The Group Type field is
already set to diod.
2. Press NEXT PAGE to display the Trunk Features page.
change trunk-group 1

Page 2 of x
TRUNK GROUP

TRUNK FEATURES
ACA Assignment? n

Measured: none
Maintenance Tests? y
Data Restriction? n

Suppress # Outpulsing? n
Receive Analog Incoming Call ID: Bellcore
Incoming Tone (DTMF) ANI: no

3. Type Bellcore in the Receive Analog Incoming Call ID field.
4. Press NEXT PAGE to display the Administrable Timers section.
change trunk-group 1

Page 3 of x
TRUNK GROUP

ADMINISTRABLE TIMERS
Incoming Disconnect(msec): 500
Incoming Dial Guard(msec): 70
Incoming Seizure(msec): 120
Flash Length(msec): 540 Incoming Incomplete Dial Alarm (sec): 255
END TO END SIGNALING
Tone (msec): 350
Pause (msec): 150

5. Type 120 in the Incoming Seizure (msec) field.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

183

Managing displays

Changing the display language
This section explains how to change the display language.
Before you start
■

Make sure the Display Character Set field on the System Parameters
Country-Options screen is set to the character type you want to display.
This field is set by Avaya.
NOTE:

Note: If you change the Display Character Set field to Roman after
you have administered non-Roman characters, you must change the
display field values back to Roman characters on each administrable
language display screen. See ‘‘Feature information displays’’ on page
1840 for more information.
■

Be sure the type of phone your company uses supports the characters you
want to display. Each character set requires specific phones. Call your
Avaya representative for details.

Instructions

We will change the display message language to German for the user at attendant
console 1, a 40-character display model. Also change the “transfer completed”
message from English to German.
1. Type change attendant 1 and press ENTER.
The Attendant Console screen appears.
change attendant 1

Page

1 of

3

ATTENDANT CONSOLE 1
Type:
Extension:
Console Type:
Port:

console
1000
principal
01C1106

Name:
Group:
TN:
COR:
COS:

Gunther
1
1
1
1

Auto Answer:
Data Module?
Disp Client Redir?
Display Language:

none
n
n
user-defined

DIRECT TRUNK GROUP SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS (Trunk Access Codes)
Local Remote
Local Remote
Local Remote
1: 9
5:
9:
2: 82
6:
10:
3:
7:
11:
4:
8:
12:
HUNDREDS SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1:
5:
9:
2:
6:
10:
3:
7:
11:
4:
8:
12:

184

Issue 5 October 2002

13:
14:
15:
16:

17:
18:
19:
20:

555-233-506

Changing the display language

2. Type user-defined in the Display Language field.
NOTE:

If “user-defined” is selected for the display language and no
translations are defined on the Language Translation screens, all
display messages appear as a string of asterisks.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change display-language transfer-conference and press ENTER.
The Language Translations screen for Transfer Completed appears.

change display-language transfer-conference

Page 1 of 3

Language Translations
1.

English: Transfer completed.
Translation: abtretung abgeschlossen

5. Type abtretung abgeschlossen in the Translation field and press ENTER
to save your changes.
Tip:

To include European, Katakana, or Ukrainian fonts in your display
message, use a tilde (~) before and after a Roman character that
maps to the character you wish to display. For example, type ~i~ to
create the character ä in your German display messages. See
‘‘Mapping enhanced display characters’’ on page 1861 for character
set maps.
Related topics

See ‘‘Telephone displays’’ on page 1833 more information about choosing the
language for messages on your display phones and for mapping US English to
Cyrillic (for Russian), Katakana (for Japanese), European, or Ukrainian
characters.
See ‘‘System Parameters Country-Options’’ on page 1176 for more information
about and field descriptions on the System Parameters Country-Option screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

185

Managing displays

Fixing problems

186

Symptom

Cause and Solution

Characters that display are
not what you thought you
entered.

This feature is case sensitive. Check the table to
make sure that you entered the right case.

You entered “~c”, and “*”
appears on the display
instead.

Lower-case “c” has a specific meaning in the
MultiVantage system, and therefore cannot be
mapped to any other character. An asterisk “*”
appears in its place.

You entered “~->” or “~<-”
and nothing appears on the
display.

These characters do not exist as single keys on
the standard US-English keyboard. Therefore
the system is not programmed to handle them.

Enhanced display characters
appear in fields that you did
not update.

If an existing display field contains a tilde (~)
followed by Roman characters, and you update
and submit that screen after this feature is
activated, that field will display the enhanced
character set.

Nothing displays on the
terminal at all.

Some unsupported terminals do not display
anything if a special character is presented.
Check the model of display terminal that you
are using.

You entered a character with
a descender and part of it
appears cut off in the
display.

Some of the unused characters in Group2a have
descenders that do not appear entirely within
the display area. These characters are not
included in the character map. For these
characters (g,j,p,q,y), use Group1 equivalents.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up directory buttons

Setting up directory buttons
Your switch directory contains the names and extensions that are assigned on each
station screen. Display-phone users can use a phone button to access the
directory, use the touch-tone buttons to key in a name, and retrieve an extension
from the directory.
Instructions

We will assign directory phone buttons for extension 2000. Our button assignment
plan is set up so that phone buttons 6, 7, and 8 are used for the directory.
Remember, the name you type in the Name field on the first page of the station
screen is the name that appears when the directory is accessed on a phone display.
1. Type change station 2000.
The Station screen for extension 2000 appears.
2. Move to the Button Assignments section.

Page 3 of X
STATION
SITE DATA
Room:
Jack:
Cable:
Floor:
Building:

_______
___
___
_______
_______

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ________
BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: call-appr
2: call-appr
3: call-appr
4: call-appr

Headset?
Speaker?
Mounting:
Cord Length:
Set Color:

List2: _________

n
n
d
0_
_____

List3: _________

5:
6: directory
7: next
8: call-display

3. In Button Assignment field 6, type directory.
4. In Button Assignment field 7, type next.
5. In Button Assignment field 8, type call-display.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

187

Managing displays

188

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Handling incoming calls

Setting up basic call coverage
This chapter shows you how to set up call coverage for incoming calls to be sure
that incoming calls are answered when the called party is not available.
Basic incoming call coverage:
■

provides for automatic redirection of calls to alternate destinations when
the called party is not available or not accepting calls

■

provides the order in which Avaya MultiVantage redirects calls to alternate
phones or terminals

■

establishes up to 6 alternate termination points for an incoming call

■

establishes redirection criteria that govern when a call redirects

■

redirects calls to a local telephone number (extension) or an off-switch
telephone number (public network)

Call coverage allows an incoming call to redirect from its original destination to
an extension, hunt group, attendant group, uniform call distribution (‘‘UCD’’)
group, direct department calling (‘‘DDC’’) group, automatic call distribution
(‘‘ACD’’) split, coverage answer group, AUDIX, or vector for a station not
accepting calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 189

Handling incoming calls

Administering system-wide call coverage
characteristics

This section shows you how to set up system-wide call coverage characteristics
that govern how coverage is handled.
Instructions

The System-Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding screen sets up the global
parameters which direct the switch on how to act in certain situations.
1. Leave all default settings as they are set for your system.
2. If you desire to customize your system, carefully read and understand each
field description before you make any changes.
See ‘‘System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding’’ on page 1167
for more information.
Related topics

See ‘‘Covering calls redirected to an off-site location’’ on page 193 for more
information on redirecting calls.
Creating coverage paths

This section explains how to administer various types of call coverage. In general,
call coverage refers to what happens to incoming calls. You can administer paths
to cover all incoming calls, or define paths for certain types of calls, such as calls
to busy phones. You can define where incoming calls go if they are not answered
and in what order they reroute to other locations. For example, you can define
coverage to ring the called phone, then move to a receptionist if the call is not
answered, and finally access a voice mailbox if the receptionist is not available.
With call coverage, the system redirects a call to alternate answering extensions
when no one answers at the first extension. An extension can have up to 6
alternate answering points. The system checks each extension in sequence until
the call connects. This sequence of alternate extensions is called a coverage path.
The system redirects calls based on certain criteria. For example, you can have a
call redirect to coverage without ever ringing on the principal set, or after a certain
number of rings, or when one or all call appearances (lines) are busy. You can set
coverage differently for internal (inside) and external (outside) calls, and you can
define coverage individually for different criteria. For example, you can decide
that external calls to busy phones can use the same coverage as internal calls to
phones with Do Not Disturb active.

190

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up basic call coverage

Instructions

To create a coverage path:
1. Type add coverage path next and press RETURN.
The Coverage Path screen appears. The system displays the next undefined
coverage path in the sequence of coverage paths. Our example shows
coverage path number 2.
COVERAGE PATH
Coverage Path Number: 2
Next Path Number: ___
COVERAGE CRITERIA
Station/Group Status
Active?
Busy?
Don’t Answer?
All?
DND/SAC/Goto Cover?

Inside Call
n
y
y
n
y

Hunt After Coverage: n
Linkage: ___ ___

Outside Call
n
y
y Number of Rings: 3
n
y

COVERAGE POINTS
Terminate to Coverage Pts. with Bridged Appearance? n
Point1: _________ Point2: _________ Point3: _________
Point4: _________ Point5: _________ Point6: _________

2. Type a coverage path number in the Next Path field.
The next path is optional. It is the coverage path to which calls are
redirected if the current path’s coverage criteria does not match the call
status. If the next path’s criteria matches the call status, it is used to redirect
the call; no other path is searched.
3. Fill in the Coverage Criteria fields.
You can see that the default sets identical criteria for inside and outside
calls. The system sets coverage to take place from a busy phone, if there is
no answer after a certain number of rings, or if the ‘‘DND’’ (do not
disturb), ‘‘SAC’’ (send all calls), or Go to Cover button are pressed or
feature-access codes are dialed.
4. Fill in the Point fields with the extensions, hunt group number, or coverage
answer group number you want for coverage points.
Each coverage point can be an extension, hunt group, coverage answer
group, remote number, or attendant.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

191

Handling incoming calls

Tip:

If you want to see which extensions or groups use a specific coverage path,
type display coverage sender group n, where n is the coverage path
number. For example, you should determine which extensions use a
coverage path before you make any changes to it.
Assigning a coverage path to users

Now assign the new coverage path to a user. For example, we will assign this new
coverage path to extension 2054.
NOTE:

A coverage path can be used for more than one extension.
Instructions

To assign a coverage path:
1. Type change station 2054 and press RETURN.
The Station screen for extension 2054 appears.

STATION
Extension:
Type:
Port:
Name:

2054
7406D
_____
__________________________

STATION OPTIONS
Data Module? n
Display Module? n

Lock Messages?
Security Code:
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to-Station:

n
BCC: 0
______
TN: 1
2__
COR: 1
___
COS: 1
_______

Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1
Message Lamp Ext: ________

MM Complex Data Ext: ________

2. Type 2 in the Coverage Path 1 field.
To give extension 2054 another coverage path, you can type a coverage
path number in the Coverage Path 2 field.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Related information

‘‘Assigning coverage options’’ on page 363

192

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up advanced call coverage

Setting up advanced call coverage
Advanced incoming call coverage:
■

redirects calls based on time-of-day

■

allows coverage of calls that are redirected to sites not on the local switch

■

allows users to change back and forth between two coverage choices
(either specific lead coverage paths or time-of-day tables).

Covering calls redirected to an off-site
location

You can provide coverage for calls that have been redirected to an off-site location
(for example, your home). This capability, called Coverage of Calls Redirected
Off-Net (‘‘CCRON’’) allows you to redirect calls onto the public network and
bring back unanswered calls for further coverage processing.
Before you start
■

On the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, verify the Coverage
of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field is y. If not, contact your Avaya
representative.

■

You need call classifier ports for all situations except ISDN end-to-end
signaling, in which case the ISDN protocol does the call classification. For
all other cases, use one of the following:
— Tone Clock with Call Classifier - Tone Detector circuit pack. See
Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for more
information on the circuit pack.
— Call Classifier - Detector circuit pack.

Instructions

To provide coverage of calls redirected to an off-site location:
1. Type change system-parameters coverage-forwarding and press
RETURN.
The System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding screen appears.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

193

Handling incoming calls

SYSTEM PARAMETERS -- CALL COVERAGE / CALL FORWARDING
COVERAGE OF CALLS REDIRECTED OFF-NET (CCRON)
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled?
Activate Answer Detection (Preserves SBA) On Final CCRON Cvg Point?
Ignore Network Answer Supervision?
Immediate Redirection On Receipt Of PROGRESS Inband Information?

y
y
n
n

2. In the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field, type y.
This instructs Avaya MultiVantage to monitor the progress of an off-net
coverage or off-net forwarded call and provide further coverage treatment
for unanswered calls.
3. In the Activate Answer Detection (Preserves SBA) On Final CCRON Cvg
Point field, leave the default as y.
4. In the Ignore Network Answer Supervision field, leave the default as n.
5. In the Immediate Redirection On Receipt Of PROGRESS Inband
Information field, leave the default as n.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Defining coverage for calls redirected to
external numbers

You can administer the system to allow calls in coverage to redirect to off-net
(external) or public-network numbers.
Standard remote coverage to an external number allows you to send a call to an
external phone, but does not monitor the call once it leaves your system.
Therefore, if the call is busy or not answered at the external number, the call
cannot be pulled back to the system. With standard remote call coverage, make the
external number the last coverage point in a path.
With newer systems, you may have the option to use the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net feature. If this feature is active and you use an external
number in a coverage path, the system can monitor the call to determine whether
the external number is busy or does not answer. If necessary, the system can
redirect a call to coverage points that follow the external number. With this
feature, you can have a call follow a coverage path that starts at the user’s
extension, redirects to the user’s home phone, and if not answered at home,
returns to redirect to their voice mail box.
The call will not return to the system if the external number is the last point in the
coverage path.

194

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up advanced call coverage

To use a remote phone number as a coverage point, you need to define the number
in the Remote Call Coverage Table and then use the remote code in the coverage
path.
Instructions

For example, to add an external number (303-538-1000) to coverage path 2:
1. Type change coverage remote and press RETURN.
The Remote Call Coverage Table appears.

01: 93035381000_____
02: ________________
03: ________________
04: ________________
05: ________________
06: ________________
07: ________________
08: ________________
09: ________________
10: ________________
11: ________________
12: ________________
13: ________________
14: ________________
15:________________

REMOTE
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:

CALL COVERAGE TABLE
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________

31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:

________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________

2. Type 93035381000 in one of the remote code fields.
If you use a digit to get outside of your network, you need to add the digit
before the external number. In this example, the system requires a ‘9’ to
place outside calls.
3. Be sure to record the remote code number you use for the external number.
In this example, the remote code is r01.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
5. Type change coverage path 2 and press RETURN.
The Coverage Path screen appears.
Tip:

Before making changes, you can use display coverage sender
group 2 to determine which extensions or groups use path 2.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

195

Handling incoming calls

COVERAGE PATH
Coverage Path Number: _
Next Path Number: ___
COVERAGE CRITERIA
Station/Group Status
Active?
Busy?
Don’t Answer?
All?
DND/SAC/Goto Cover?

Inside Call
n
y
y
n
y

Hunt After Coverage: y
Linkage: ___ ___

Outside Call
n
y
y Number of Rings: 2
n
y

COVERAGE POINTS
Terminate to Coverage Pts. with Bridged Appearance? n
Point1: 4101
Point2: r1
Point3: h77
Point4: _________ Point5: _________ Point6: _________

6. Type r1 in a coverage Point field.
In this example, the coverage rings at extension 4101, then redirects to the
external number. If you administer Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net
and the external number is not answered or is busy, the call redirects to the
next coverage point. In this example, the next point is Point 3 (h77 or hunt
group 77).
If you do not have the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net feature, the
system cannot monitor the call once it leaves the network. The call ends at
the remote coverage point.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Related topics

See ‘‘Call coverage’’ on page 1532 for more information on coverage.
Defining time-of-day coverage

The Time of Day Coverage Table on your system lets you redirect calls to
coverage paths according to the time of day and day of the week when the call
arrives. You need to define the coverage paths you want to use before you define
the time of day coverage plan.
For example, let us say you want to administer the system so that incoming calls
to extension 2054 redirect to a coworker in the office from 8:00 a.m. to 5:30 p.m.,
and to a home office from 5:30 p.m. to 8:00 p.m. on weekdays. You want to
redirect the calls to voice mail after 8:00 p.m. weekdays and on weekends.

196

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up advanced call coverage

Instructions

To set up a time-of-day coverage plan that redirects calls for our example above:
1. Type add coverage time-of-day next and press RETURN.
The Time of Day Coverage Table screen appears and the selects the next
undefined table number in the sequence of time-of-day table numbers. If
this is the first time-of-day coverage plan in your system, the table number
is 1.
TIME OF DAY COVERAGE TABLE 1__

Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00

3___
3___
3___
3___
3___
3___
3___

__:__
08:00
08:00
08:00
08:00
08:00
__:__

____
1
1
1
1
1
____

__:__
17:30
17:30
17:30
17:30
17:30
__:__

____
2
2
2
2
2
____

__:__
20:00
20:00
20:00
20:00
20:00
__:__

____
3
3
3
3
3
____

__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Record the table number so that you can assign it to extensions later.
2. To define your coverage plan, enter the time of day and path number for
each day of the week and period of time.
Enter time in a 24-hour format from the earliest to the latest. For this
example, assume that coverage path 1 goes to the coworker, path 2 to the
home, and path 3 to voice mail.
Define your path for the full 24 hours (from 00:01 to 23:59) in a day. If you
do not list a coverage path for a period of time, the system does not provide
coverage for that time.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

197

Handling incoming calls

Now assign the time-of-day coverage to a user. For example, we use extension
2054:
1. Type change station 2054 and press RETURN.
The Station screen for extension 2054 appears.

STATION
Extension:
Type:
Port:
Name:

2054
7406D
_____
__________________________

STATION OPTIONS
Data Module? n
Display Module? n

Lock Messages?
Security Code:
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to-Station:

n
BCC: 0
4196__
TN: 1
t1_
COR: 1
___
COS: 1
_______

Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1
Message Lamp Ext: ________

MM Complex Data Ext: ________

2. Move your cursors to Coverage Path 1 and type t plus the number of the
Time of Day Coverage Table.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now calls to extension 2054 redirect to coverage depending on the day and time
that each call arrives.
Creating coverage answer groups

You can create a coverage answer group so that up to 8 phones simultaneously
ring when calls cover to the group. Anyone in the answer group can answer the
incoming call.

198

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up call forwarding

Instructions

To add a coverage answer group:
1. Type add coverage answer-group next and press RETURN.
The Coverage Answer Group screen appears.
COVERAGE ANSWER GROUP
Group Number: ___
Group Name: COVERAGE_GROUP_
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
Name (first 26 characters)
1: ________ ___________________________
2: ________ ___________________________
3: ________ ___________________________
4: ________ ___________________________

5:
6:
7:
8:

Ext
________
________
________
________

Name (first 26 characters)
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________

2. In the Group Name field, enter a name to identify the coverage group.
3. In the Ext field, type the extension of each group member.
4. Press ENTER to save your new group list.
The system automatically completes the Name field when you press ENTER.
Related topics

See ‘‘Assigning a coverage path to users’’ on page 192 for instructions on
assigning a coverage path.

Setting up call forwarding
This section explains how to administer various types of automatic call
forwarding. To provide call forwarding to your users, assign each extension a
class of service (‘‘COS’’) that allows call forwarding. Then assign call-forwarding
buttons to the user phones (or give them the feature access code (‘‘FAC’’) for call
forwarding) so that they can easily forward calls. You use the station screen to
assign the COS and any call-forwarding buttons.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

199

Handling incoming calls

Within each class of service, you can determine whether the users in that COS
have the following call forwarding features:
■

Call Forwarding All Calls — allows users to redirect all incoming calls to
an extension, attendant, or external phone number.

■

Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer — allows users to redirect calls only
if their extensions are busy or they do not answer.

■

Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net — prevents users from forwarding calls to
numbers that are outside your system network.

As the administrator, you can administer system-wide call-forwarding parameters
to control when calls are forwarded. Use the System Parameters Call
Coverage/Call Forwarding screen to set the number of times an extension rings
before the system redirects the call because the user did not answer (CFWD No
Answer Interval). For example, if you want calls to ring 4 times at an extension
and, if the call is not answered, redirect to the forwarding number, set this
parameter to 4.
You also can use the System Parameters Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen to
determine whether the forwarded-to phone can override call forwarding to allow
calls to the forwarded-from phone (Call Forward Override). For example, if an
executive forwards incoming calls to an attendant and the attendant needs to call
the executive, the call can be made only if the Call Forwarding Override is set to
yes.
Instructions

To determine which extensions have call forwarding activated:
1. Type list call-forwarding and press RETURN.
This command lists all the extensions that are forwarded along with each
forwarding number.
NOTE:

If you have a V1, V2, or V3 system, you can see if a specific
extension is forwarded only by typing status station nnnn, where
nnnn is the specific extension.
Related topics

‘‘Call forwarding’’ on page 1612

200

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up call forwarding

Setting up call forwarding for users

This section shows you how to give your users access to call forwarding.
Instructions

We will change a call forwarding access code from a local phone with a Class of
Service of 1:
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.

FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Abbreviated Dialing List1 Access Code: ____
Abbreviated Dialing List2 Access Code: ____
Abbreviated Dialing List3 Access Code: ____
Abbreviated Dial - Prgm Group List Access Code: ____
Announcement Access Code: ____
Answer Back Access Code: ____
Auto Alternate Routing (AAR) Access Code: ____
Auto Route Selection (ARS) Access Code 1: ____
Access Code 2:
Automatic Callback Activation: ____
Deactivation:
Call Forwarding Activation Busy/DA: *70
All: *71
Deactivation:
Call Park Access Code: ____
Call Pickup Access Code: ____
CAS Remote Hold/Answer Hold-Unhold Access Code: ____
CDR Account Code Access Code: ____
Change Coverage Access Code: ____
Data Origination Access Code: ____
Data Privacy Access Code: ____
Directed Call Pickup Access Code: ____
Emergency Access to Attendant Access Code: ____
Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D/A: ____ All: ____
Deactivation:

____
____
#72

____

2. In the Call Forwarding Activation Busy/DA field, type *70.
The *70 feature access code activates the call forwarding option so
incoming calls forward when your phone is busy or does not answer.
3. In the Call Forwarding Activation All field, type *71.
The *71 feature access code forwards all calls.
4. In the Call Forwarding Deactivation field, type #72.
The #72 feature access code deactivates the call forwarding option.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
6. Type change cos and press RETURN.
The Class of Service screen appears.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

201

Handling incoming calls

CLASS OF SERVICE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Auto Callback
Call Fwd-All Calls
Data Privacy
Priority Calling
Console Permissions
Off-hook Alert
Client Room
Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net
Call Forward Busy/DA
Personal Station Access
Extended Forwarding All
Extended Forwarding B/DA
Trk-to-Trk Restriction Override
QSIG Call Offer Originations

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
y
y
n
n
n
y
y
n
n
n
n
n

y
n
n
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
y
n
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
n
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
n
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
n
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
y
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
n
n
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
n
n
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
y
n
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
n
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
n
y
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
n
y
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
y
y
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

7. On the Call Fwd-All Calls line, in the 1 column, type y.
This allows the user with this Class of Service to forward their calls. The
“1” column is for phones with a Class of Service of 1.
8. On the Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net line, in the 1 column, type y.
This restricts your users from forwarding calls off-site. If you want your
users to be able to call off-site, leave this field as n.
9. On the Call Forward Busy/DA line, in the 1 column, type y
This forwards your calls when your phone is busy or doesn’t answer after a
programmed number of rings.
10. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Allowing users to specify a forwarding
destination

Now that you have set up system-wide call forwarding, have your users use this
procedure if they want to change their call forwarding destination from their work
(local) station.
1. They dial either their Call Forwarding Activation Busy/DA or Call
Forwarding Activation All feature access code. If your users have buttons
assigned, they press those buttons, listen for dial tone, and dial the digits.
NOTE:

Both Call Forwarding Activation Busy/DA or the Call Forwarding
Activation All cannot be active for the same phone at the same time.
In this example, enter *71 for Call Forwarding Activation All.

202

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up call forwarding

2. They dial their “forwarding-to” off-site or on-site number.
In this example, enter 2081. This is a local number; for off-site forwarding,
include the AAR/ARS feature access code.
3. When they hear the 3-beep confirmation tone, they hang up.
Changing the forwarding destination remotely

Now that you have set up all of the required system administration for call
forwarding, have your users use this procedure if they want to change their call
forwarding destination from a telecommuting (off-site) phone.
1. They dial their telecommuting extension.
See ‘‘Telecommuting Access’’ on page 1213 for more information. In this
example, enter 555-9126.
2. When they get dial tone, they dial either their Extended Call Forward
Activate Busy/DA or the Extended Call Forward Activate All feature
access code.
In this example, enter *61 for the Extended Call Forward Activate All
number.
3. When they get dial tone, they dial their extension number and press the ‘#’
key.
In this example, enter 1014, then #.
4. Even though there is no dial tone, they dial their security code and press the
‘#’ key.
In this example, enter 4196, then #.
5. When they get dial tone, they dial their “forwarding-to” off-site or on-site
number.
In this example, enter 9-555-2081.
6. When they hear the 3-beep confirmation tone, they hang up.
Allowing users to change coverage remotely

This section shows you how to allow users to change their call coverage path from
a local or telecommuting (off-site) phone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

203

Handling incoming calls

Instructions

To change call coverage from off-site:
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
2. In the Change Coverage Access Code field, type *85.
Use the *85 feature access code to change a coverage path from a phone or
remote station.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change cor and press RETURN.
The Class of Restriction screen appears.
5. In the Can Change Coverage field, type y.
This permits users to select one of two previously administered coverage
paths.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
7. Type change station 1014 and press RETURN.
The Station screen for extension 1014 appears.
8. In the Security Code field, type 4196.
In this example, this is your security code. See ‘‘Security-Related System
Parameters’’ on page 1105 for more information on setting the length of
your security code.
9. In the Coverage Path 1 and Coverage Path 2 fields, verify that both are
defined enabling your user to move from one coverage path to another.
The t1 and t2 are the numbers of the Time of Day Coverage Tables.
10. Press ENTER to save your changes.

204

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up night service

Setting up night service
You can use night service to direct calls to an alternate location when the primary
answering group is not available. For example, you can administer night service
so that anyone in your marketing department can answer incoming calls when the
attendant is at lunch or has left for the day.
Once you administer night service to route calls, your end-users merely press a
button on the console or a feature button on their phones to toggle between normal
coverage and night service.
There are five types of night service:
■

Night Console Night Service — directs all attendant calls to a night or
day/night console

■

Night Station Night Service — directs all incoming trunk or attendant calls
to a night service destination

■

Trunk Answer from Any Station (‘‘TAAS’’) — directs incoming attendant
calls and signals a bell or buzzer to alert other employees that they can
answer the calls

■

Trunk Group Night Service — directs incoming calls to individual trunk
groups to a night service destination

■

Hunt Group Night Service — directs hunt group calls to a night service
destination

Setting up night station service to voice mail

The night station service (also known as Listed Directory Number (‘‘LDN’’)
Night Service) sends calls directed to an LDN to voice mail when the system is in
night service.
Instructions

What is described below is a common setup; however, you can use a regular
extension in this field, but it will not follow coverage.
NOTE:

You can use a dummy hunt group (one with no members) or an
exported station with a coverage path. The instructions below use a
hunt group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

205

Handling incoming calls

To set up a night station service to voice mail:
1. Type add hunt-group next and press RETURN.
The Hunt Group screen appears.
Page 1 of X
HUNT GROUP
Group Name:
Group Number:
MM Early Answer?
Queue?
Security Code:
ISDN Caller Disp:

ldn nights
5
_
_
____
________

Group Extension: 51002___ Group Type:
Skill? _
ACD?
Vector? _
AAS? _
COR:
TN: _

Measured: ________

Supervisor: Extension: ________

Controlling Adjunct: ____
Multiple Call Handling: __________
Objective: ____
Queue Length: ___
Calls Warning Threshold: ___
Time Warning Threshold: ___

Calls Warning Port: __
Time Warning Port: __

Redirect on No Answer (rings): _ Redirect to VDN: _
Forced Entry of Stroke Counts or Call Work Codes? _

The Group Number field fills automatically with the next hunt group
number.
2. In the Group Name field, type the name of the group.
In our example, type ldn nights. There should be no members in this hunt
group.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
NOTE:

If you are using tenant partitioning, the command for the next step
will be change tenant x. If you are using tenant partitioning, the
Night Destination field does not appear on the Listed Directory
Numbers screen. Instead, it is on the Tenant screen.
4. Type change listed-directory-numbers and press RETURN.
The Listed Directory Numbers screen appears.

206

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up night service

Page

1 of

2

LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS

Ext
1: 51001
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

Name
Attendant

TN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Night Destination: 51002

5. In the Night Destination field, add the night destination on the listed
directory phone.
In our example, type 51002.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
7. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.
The Console Parameters screen appears.

Attendant Group Name:
COS:
Calls in Queue Warning:
Ext Alert Port (TAAS):
CAS:
SAC Notification?
IAS (Branch)?
IAS Att. Access Code:
Backup Alerting?

CONSOLE PARAMETERS
27 character name
1
5
none
n
n
n

OPERATOR
COR: 1
Attendant Lockout? y

Night Service Act. Ext.: 1234
IAS Tie Trunk Group No.:
Alternate FRL Station:
DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext? n

TIMING
Time Reminder
Time in Queue
INCOMING CALL
No Answer

on Hold (sec): 10
Return Call Timeout (sec): 10
Warning (sec):
REMINDERS
Timeout (sec): 20
Alerting (sec): 40
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: group
1
List2:
List3:
COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Starting Extension:
Count:

8. In the DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Extension field, type n.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

207

Handling incoming calls

10. From a phone with console permissions, dial the call forwarding feature
access code, then the hunt group’s extension, followed by the main number
of AUDIX.
In our example, dial 51002.
NOTE:

You should receive the confirmation tone (3 beeps). This step is very
important as calls to the LDN night service extension do not follow
coverage.
11. In voice mail, build your auto attendant with the extension of the Listed
Directory Number, not the hunt group.
The originally dialed number was the LDN. That is what the switch passes
to the voice mail. In the case of the Intuity and newer embedded AUDIX
Voice Mail systems, you can use the Auto Attendant routing table to send
the calls to a common Auto Attendant mailbox.
Setting up night console service

This section shows you how to set up night console service.
Night Console Service directs all calls for primary and daytime attendant consoles
to a night console. When a user activates Night Console Service, the Night
Service button for each attendant lights and all attendant-seeking calls (and calls
waiting) in the queue are directed to the night console.
NOTE:

Activating night console service also puts trunk groups into night
service, except those for which a night service button has been
administered. See ‘‘Setting up trunk answer from any station’’ on
page 211 for more information.
To activate and deactivate Night Console Service, the attendant typically presses
the NIGHT button on the principal attendant console or designated console.
Only the principal console can activate night service. In the absence of any
console, a phone can activate night service.

208

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up night service

Instructions

We will put the attendant console (attendant 2) in a night service mode.
To set up Night Console Service:
1. Type change attendant 2 and press RETURN.
The Attendant Console screen appears.

ATTENDANT CONSOLE 2
Type:
Extension:
Console Type:
Port:

console
1000
principal
01C1106

Name:
Group:
TN:
COR:
COS:

27 character attd cons name
1
Auto Answer:
1
Data Module?
1
Disp Client Redir?
1
Display Language:

none
n
n
english

DIRECT TRUNK GROUP SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS (Trunk Access Codes)
Local Remote
Local Remote
Local Remote
1: 9
5:
9:
2: 82
6:
10:
3:
7:
11:
4:
8:
12:
HUNDREDS SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1:
5:
9:
2:
6:
10:
3:
7:
11:
4:
8:
12:

13:
14:
15:
16:

17:
18:
19:
20:

2. In the Console Type field, type principal.
There can be only one night-only or one day/night console in the system
unless you administer Tenant Partitioning. Night Service is activated from
the principal console or from the one station set per-system that has a
nite-serv button.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Setting up night station service

You can use night station service if you want to direct incoming trunks calls,
DID-LDN (direct inward dialing-listed directory number) calls, or internal calls to
the attendant (dialed ‘O’ calls) to a night service destination.
Let us say your attendant, who answers extension (LDN) 8100, usually goes home
at 6:00 p.m. When customers call extension 8100 after hours, you would like them
to hear an announcement that asks them to try their call again in the morning.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

209

Handling incoming calls

To set up night station service, you need to record the announcement (in our
example, it is recorded at announcement extension 1234). See ‘‘Managing
announcements’’ on page 439 for information on setting up the announcement.
Tip:

All trunk groups that are routed through the attendant direct to this night
service destination provided they already do not have a night service
destination and, on the Console Parameters screen, the DID-LDN Only to
DID-LDN Night Ext field is n. See ‘‘Setting up trunk answer from any
station’’ on page 211.
Instructions

To set up night station service:
1. Type change listed-directory-numbers and press RETURN.
The Listed Directory Numbers screen appears.
LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS

Ext
1: 8100
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

Name
attendant 8100

TN

Night Destination: 1234

2. Enter 1234 in the Night Destination field.
The destination can be an extension, a recorded announcement extension, a
vector directory number, or a hunt group extension.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.
The Console Parameters screen appears.

210

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up night service

Attendant Group Name:
COS:
Calls in Queue Warning:
Ext Alert Port (TAAS):
CAS:
SAC Notification?
IAS (Branch)?
IAS Att. Access Code:
Backup Alerting?

CONSOLE PARAMETERS
27 character name
1
5
none
n
n
n

OPERATOR
COR: 1
Attendant Lockout? y

Night Service Act. Ext.: 1234
IAS Tie Trunk Group No.:
Alternate FRL Station:
DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext? n

TIMING
Time Reminder
Time in Queue
INCOMING CALL
No Answer

on Hold (sec): 10
Return Call Timeout (sec): 10
Warning (sec):
REMINDERS
Timeout (sec): 20
Alerting (sec): 40
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: group
1
List2:
List3:
COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Starting Extension:
Count:

5. In the DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Extension field, type n.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
After you set up night station service, have the attendant use the night
console button to activate and deactivate night service.
Setting up trunk answer from any station

There may be situations where you want everyone to be able to answer calls when
the attendant is away. Use trunk answer any station (TAAS) to configure the
system so that it notifies everyone when calls are ringing. Then, you can give
users the trunk answer any station feature access code so they can answer these
calls.
When the system is in night service mode, attendant calls redirect to an alerting
device such as a bell or a buzzer. This lets other people in the office know when
they should answer the phone.
NOTE:

If no one answers the call, the call will not redirect to night service.
We will define a feature access code (we’ll use 71) and configure the alerting
device for trunk answer any station.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

211

Handling incoming calls

Before you start

You need a ringing device and 1 port on an analog line circuit pack. See Avaya
MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for more information on the circuit
pack.
Instructions

To set the feature access code for TAAS:
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
Page 3 of X
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Station Security Code Change Access Code: ____
Terminal Dial-up Test Access Code: ____
Terminal Translation Initialization Merge Code: ____ Separation Code: ____
Transfer to AUDIX Access Code: ____
Trunk Answer Any Station Access Code: 71__
User Control Restrict Activation: ____ Deactivation: ____
Voice Coverage Message Retrieval Access Code: ____
Voice Principal Message Retrieval Access Code: ____

2. In the Trunk Answer Any Station Access Code field, type 71.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Once you set the feature access code, determine where the external alerting device
is connected to the switch (we’ll use port 01A0702).
To set up external alerting:
1. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.
The Console Parameters screen appears.

Attendant Group Name:
COS:
Calls in Queue Warning:
Ext Alert Port (TAAS):
CAS:
SAC Notification?
IAS (Branch)?
IAS Att. Access Code:
Backup Alerting?

CONSOLE PARAMETERS
Operator
0
COR: 0
5
Attendant Lockout? y
01A0702
none
n
Night Service Act. Ext.:
n
IAS Tie Trunk Group No.:
Alternate FRL Station:
n
DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext? n

TIMING
Time Reminder
Time in Queue
INCOMING CALL
No Answer

on Hold (sec): 10
Return Call Timeout (sec): 10
Warning (sec):
REMINDERS
Timeout (sec): 20
Alerting (sec): 40
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: group
1
List2:
List3:
COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Starting Extension:
Count:

212

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up night service

2. In the EXT Alert Port (TAAS) field, type 01A0702.
Use the port address assigned to the external alerting device.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Setting up external alerting night service

Calls redirected to the attendant via Call Forwarding or Call Coverage will not go
to the LDN Night Station. If there is no night station specified, and the TAAS bell
is being used, these calls ring the TAAS bell. A call following the coverage path
rings the TAAS bell for the number of times indicated in the Coverage Don’t
Answer Interval for Subsequent Redirection (Rings) field. If not answered, the
call proceeds to the next point in the station’s coverage path. If the call was sent to
the Attendant by Call Forwarding, it continues to ring the TAAS bell.
When night service is enabled, and there is a night service destination on the LDN
screen, calls covering to the attendant attempt to ring the night destination instead
of the attendant position even if the handset is plugged in.
Instructions

To send LDN calls to the attendant during the day and to a guard’s desk at night:
1. Type change listed-directory-numbers and press RETURN.
The Listed Directory Numbers screen appears.

Page

1 of

2

LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS

Ext
1: 2000
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

Name
Attendant

TN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Night Destination: 3000

2. In the Night Destination field, verify this field is blank.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

213

Handling incoming calls

The Console Parameters screen appears.

Attendant Group Name:
COS:
Calls in Queue Warning:
Ext Alert Port (TAAS):
CAS:
SAC Notification?
IAS (Branch)?
IAS Att. Access Code:
Backup Alerting?

CONSOLE PARAMETERS
Operator
0
COR: 0
5
Attendant Lockout? y
01A0702
none
n
Night Service Act. Ext.:
n
IAS Tie Trunk Group No.:
Alternate FRL Station:
n
DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext? n

TIMING
Time Reminder
Time in Queue
INCOMING CALL
No Answer

on Hold (sec): 10
Return Call Timeout (sec): 10
Warning (sec):
REMINDERS
Timeout (sec): 20
Alerting (sec): 40
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: group
1
List2:
List3:
COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Starting Extension:
Count:

5. In the EXT Alert Port (TAAS) field, type 01A0702.
This is the port address assigned to the external alerting device.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
The system is in Night Service.
Any calls to extension 2000 now go to extension 3000 (the guard’s desk).
Any “0” seeking calls go to extension 3000 (the guard’s desk).

214

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up night service

To send LDN calls to the attendant during the day and to the TAAS bell at night:
1. Type change console-parameters and press RETURN.
The Console Parameters screen appears.

Attendant Group Name:
COS:
Calls in Queue Warning:
Ext Alert Port (TAAS):
CAS:
SAC Notification?
IAS (Branch)?
IAS Att. Access Code:
Backup Alerting?

CONSOLE PARAMETERS
Operator
0
COR: 0
5
Attendant Lockout? y
01A0702
none
n
Night Service Act. Ext.:
n
IAS Tie Trunk Group No.:
Alternate FRL Station:
n
DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext? y

TIMING
Time Reminder
Time in Queue
INCOMING CALL
No Answer

on Hold (sec): 10
Return Call Timeout (sec): 10
Warning (sec):
REMINDERS
Timeout (sec): 20
Alerting (sec): 40
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: group
1
List2:
List3:
COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Starting Extension:
Count:

2. In the DID-LDN Only to Night Ext. field, type y.
This allows only listed directory number calls (LDN) to go to the listed
directory night service number extension.
3. In the Ext Alert Port (TAAS) field, type 01A070.
This is the port address assigned to the external alerting device.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
The system is in night service.
Any DNIS extension 2000 calls now go to the TAAS bell.
Any “0” seeking calls now go to the TAAS bell.
Setting up trunk group night service

You can use trunk group night service if you want to direct individual trunk
groups to night service. The system redirects calls from the trunk group to the
group’s night service destination.
Trunk group night service overrides night station service. For example, we will
say you activate trunk group night service, and then your attendant activates night
station service. In this case, calls to the trunk group use the trunk night service
destination, rather than the station night service destination.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

215

Handling incoming calls

Instructions

We will direct night calls for trunk group 2 to extension 1245.
To set up trunk group night service:
1. Type change trunk-group 2 and press RETURN.
The Trunk Group screen appears.

TRUNK GROUP
Group Number: 2
Group Type: co
CDR Reports: y
Group Name: outside calls
COR: 1_
TN: 1__
TAC: ____
Direction: two-way_
Outgoing Display? n
Dial Access? n
Busy Threshold: 99
Night Service: 1245
Queue Length: 0
Country: 1_
Incoming Destination: ________
Comm Type: voice
Auth Code? n Digit Absorption List: _
Prefix-1? y
Trunk Flash? n
Toll Restricted? y
BCC: _
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type: loop-start
Outgoing Dial Type: tone
Cut-Through? n
Trunk Termination: rc
Disconnect Timing(msec): 500_
Auto Guard? n
Analog Loss Group: ___

Call Still Held? n

Sig Bit Inversion: none
Digital Loss Group: ___

Trunk Gain: high
Bit Rate: 1200
Synchronization: _____
Duplex: ____
Disconnect Supervision - In? y Out? n
Answer Supervision Timeout: 10
Receive Answer Supervision? n

2. Type 1245 in the Night Service field.
The destination can be a station extension, a recorded announcement
extension, a vector directory number, a hunt group extension, a terminating
extension group, or attd if you want to direct the call to the attendant.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Setting up night service for hunt groups

You can administer hunt group night service if you want to direct hunt group calls
to a night service destination.
Let us say your helpline on hunt group 3 does not answer calls after 6:00 p.m.
When customers call after hours, you would like them to hear an announcement
that asks them to try their call again in the morning.

216

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up night service

Instructions

To set up night service for your helpline, you need to record the announcement (in
our example, the announcement is on extension 1234) and then modify the hunt
group to send calls to this extension.
To administer the hunt group for night service:
1. Type change hunt-group 3 and press RETURN.
The Hunt Group screen appears for hunt group 3.

HUNT GROUP
Group Number:
Group Name:
Group Extension:
Group Type:
TN:
COR:
Security Code:
ISDN Caller Disp:

3
Accounting
2011
ucd-mia
1
1
____
________

Queue Length: 4
Calls Warning Threshold: ___
Time Warning Threshold: ___

Port: x
Port: x

ACD? n
Queue? y
Vector? n
Coverage Path: 1
Night Service Destination: 1234____
MM Early Answer? n

Extension: _______
Extension: _______

2. In the Night Service Destination field, type 1234.
The destination can be an extension, a recorded announcement extension, a
vector directory number, a hunt group extension, or attd if you want to
direct calls to the attendant.
Calls to hunt group 3 will follow the coverage path assigned to extension
1234.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Now you need to program a night service button.
See ‘‘Adding feature buttons’’ on page 129 for more information.
Related topics

‘‘Managing hunt groups’’ on page 224.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

217

Handling incoming calls

How do night service types interact?

Let us look at an example of how several types of night service might be used in
one company.
Assume that you already administered the following night service settings:
■

Night station night service redirects to extension 3000 and DID-LDN only
to LDN Night Ext is set to n

■

EXT Alert Port (TAAS) field is not defined

■

Trunk group 4 redirects to extension 2000

Let us look at how calls for this company are directed after hours:
call type

directs to

An LDN call on a DID trunk

extension 3000

A call on trunk group 4

extension 2000

An internal call to ‘0’

extension 3000

A call that redirects to the attendant
through a coverage path

the attendant queue

Adding call pickup
To give your users the ability to pickup other users’ calls, you may want to use
Call Pickup. To do this, you need to define a call pickup group.
Users may want to be able to pick up a call that is ringing at a nearby desk. Call
Pickup provides 3 ways to pick up calls ringing at another phone:

218

■

With Call Pickup, you create a call pickup group. All group members can
answer a call ringing at another phone in the group from their own phone.
If more than one phone is ringing, the one that has been ringing the longest
is picked up.

■

With Directed Call Pickup, users specify which ringing phone they want to
answer from their own phone. A call pickup group is not required.

■

With Group Call Pickup, users within an “extended” group can answer
calls outside of their immediate group by entering a feature access code
(FAC) followed by the 1- or 2-digit pickup (index) number.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding call pickup

Creating pickup groups

A pickup group is a list of phones where each member of the group can answer
another member’s calls. For example, if you want everyone in the payroll
department to be able to answer calls to any payroll extension (in case someone is
away from their desk), create a pickup group that contains all of the payroll
extensions. Members of a pickup group should be located in the same area so that
they can hear when the other extensions in the group ring.
Note that each extension may belong to only one pickup group. Also, the
maximum number of pickup groups may be limited by your system configuration.
To create a pickup group:
1. Type add pickup-group next and press RETURN.
The Pickup Group screen appears. The system selects the next Group
Number for the new pickup group.
2. Enter the extension of each group member.
Up to 50 extensions can belong to one group.
3. Press ENTER to save your new group list.
The system automatically completes the name field when you press ENTER
to save your changes.
PICKUP GROUP
Group Number:

Extended Group Number: ____

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext

Name (first 26 characters)

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:

Ext
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

Name (first 26 characters)

Once you define a pickup group, you can assign call-pickup buttons for each
phone in the group or you can give each member the call-pickup feature-access
code. Use the Station screen to assign call-pickup buttons.
To allow users to answer calls that are not in their pickup group, you may be able
to use Directed Call Pickup.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

219

Handling incoming calls

Setting up directed call pickup

To set up a phone so that the user can pick up calls with Directed Call Pickup, you
need to determine if directed call pickup is enabled on your system and make sure
that the user’s phone has a COR that allows directed call pickup.
To determine if Directed Call Pickup is enabled on your system:
1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
2. Move to the Directed Call Pickup? field and enter Y.
3. Press ENTER to save the changes.
Now we will modify extension 4444 to allow directed call pickup. For this
example, assume that the Can Use Directed Call Pickup field for COR 5 is set to
Y.
1. Type change station 4444 and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.
2. In the COR field, enter 5.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Setting up “simple” extended group pickup

Let us add a pickup group to an existing extended group where all members of the
extended group pick up each other’s calls. We will add pickup group 6 to the
existing extended group 56.
To create a simple extended pickup group:
1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
2. In the Extended Group Call Pickup field, type simple.
Permits feature access codes to be administered.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
5. In the Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code field, type the desired
FAC.
See the dial plan to enter the correct sequence and number of digits.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.

220

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding call pickup

7. Type add pickup-group next and press RETURN.
The Pickup Group screen appears.
PICKUP GROUP
Group Number: 1

Extended Group Number: ____

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
1:51001
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:

Name (first 26 characters)
station 51001

Ext
14:51001
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

Name (first 26 characters)
station 51002

8. Enter the primary extensions of the users desired in the pickup group.
Administer all the pickup groups that will be grouped together in the same
extended pickup group.
9. Type change extended-pickup-group n and press RETURN, where n is the
number of the extended pickup group to change.
The Extended Pickup Group screen appears.
change extended-pickup-group 1

Page

1 of

2

EXTENDED PICKUP GROUP
Extended Group Number: 56
Pickup
Number

Pickup Group
Number

Pickup
Number

Pickup Group
Number

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

345
25
2
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

221

Handling incoming calls

10. In the Pickup Group Number column, enter the pickup group number of the
pickup groups that belong to the extended group being administered.
The Pickup Number associated with the entered Pickup Group Number is
the number users will enter following the FAC when pickup group. In the
above listed example, a user in Pickup Group 2 will enter “0” following the
FAC to pick up a call from pickup group 345.
To minimize the number of digits entered by users, the Pickup Numbers
should be the lowest available Pickup Numbers.
11. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Setting up “flexible” extended group pickup

To create a flexible extended pickup group:
1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
2. In the Extended Group Call Pickup field, type flexible.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
5. In the Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code field, type the desired
FAC.
See the dial plan to enter the correct sequence and number of digits.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
7. Type add pickup-group next and press RETURN.
The Pickup Group screen appears.
8. In the Extended Group Number field, type the number of the extended
pickup group that can answer calls to this group.
For each administered pickup group, indicate an extended group by
entering the extended pickup group number. This extended pickup group
number identifies the other pickup groups that can have calls picked up by
the pickup group.
9. Add extended members as for other pickup features.

222

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding call pickup

10. Type change extended-pickup-group n and press RETURN, where n is the
number of the extended pickup group to change.
The Extended Pickup Group screen appears.

change extended-pickup-group 1

Page

1 of

2

EXTENDED PICKUP GROUP
Extended Group Number: 56
Pickup
Number

Pickup Group
Number

Pickup
Number

Pickup Group
Number

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:

345
25
2
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

11. In the Pickup Group Number column, type the pickup group numbers of
the pickup group that can answer each others calls.
This screen groups together the pickup groups that can have their calls
picked up by the pickup groups with identical extended pickup group
numbers. The pickup groups numbers are listed using the lowest available
Pickup Numbers. A unique “Extended Pickup Group number can be
assigned to each pickup group on this screen. The entries in the Extended
Group are the groups that can have calls picked up by the group with the
matching Extended Group number in the Pick Group screen. Thus, a
particular group’s calls may be picked up by members of many extended
pickup groups.
NOTE:

On the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, if the Extended
Group Call Pickup field is flexible, you can administer a pickup
group in multiple extended pickup groups.
12. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

223

Handling incoming calls

Managing hunt groups
This section shows you how to set up hunt groups. It explains how calls to a hunt
group are handled and shows you different call distribution methods.
What are hunt groups?

A hunt group is a group of extensions that receive calls according to the call
distribution method you choose. When a call is made to a certain phone number,
the system connects the call to an extension in the group.
Use hunt groups when you want more than one person to be able to answer calls to
the same number. For example, set up a hunt group for:
■

a benefits department within your company

■

a travel reservations service

Setting up hunt groups

Let us set up a hunt group for an internal helpline. Before making changes to the
switch, we’ll decide:
■

the phone number for the hunt group

■

the number of people answering calls

■

the way calls are answered

Our dial plan allows 4-digit internal numbers that begin with 1. The number 1200
is not in use. So, we’ll set up a helpline hunt group so anyone within the company
can call extension 1200 for help with a phone.
We will assign 3 people (agents) and their extensions to our helpline. We want
calls to go to the first available person.

224

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing hunt groups

Instructions

To set up our helpline hunt group:
1. Type add hunt-group next and press RETURN.
The Hunt Group screen appears. The Group Number field is automatically
filled in with the next hunt group number.
Page 1 of X
HUNT GROUP
Group Number: 4__
ACD?
Group Name: internal helpline____________
Queue?
Group Extension: 1200____
Vector?
Group Type: ucd-loa
Coverage Path: ____
TN:
Night Service Destination: _____
COR:
MM Early Answer?
Security Code: ____
ISDN Caller Disp: ________

2. In the Group Name field, type the name of the group.
In our example, type internal helpline.
3. In the Group Extension field, type the phone number.
We’ll type 1200.
4. In the Group Type field, type the code for the call distribution method you
choose.
We’ll type ucd-loa so a call goes to the agent with the lowest percentage of
work time since login.
NOTE:

The COS for all hunt groups defaults to 1. Therefore, any changes to
COS 1 on the Class of Service screen changes the COS for all your
hunt groups. A COS field does not appear on the Hunt Group screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

225

Handling incoming calls

5. Press NEXT PAGE to find the Group Member Assignments page.
HUNT GROUP
Group Number: 4 Group Extension: 3001
Group Type: ucd
Member Range Allowed: 1 - 999
Administered Members (min/max): 1 /9
Total Administered Members: 9
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
Name (24 characters)
Ext
Name (24 characters)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

:1011
:1012
:1013
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

More Members Exist

6. In the Ext field, type the extensions of the agents you want in the hunt
group.
We’ll type 1011, 1012, and 1013.
Tip:

For a ddc group type (also known as “hot seat” selection), the call is
sent to the extension listed in the first Ext field. The system uses this
screen to determine the hunting sequence.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
The Name fields are display-only and do not appear until the next time you
access this hunt group.
Related topics

See ‘‘Hunt Group’’ on page 875 for more information on an ‘‘ACD’’ and
non-ACD hunt group.
Changing a hunt group

To make changes to a hunt group:
1. Type change hunt-group n and press RETURN, where n is the number of
the hunt group.
2. Change the necessary fields.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.

226

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing hunt groups

Setting up a queue

You can tell your switch how to handle a hunt-group call when it cannot be
answered right away. The call waits in a “queue.”
We will tell the switch that up to 10 calls can wait in the queue, but that you want
to be notified if a call waits for more than 30 seconds.
You also want the switch to send a warning when 5 or more calls are waiting in
the queue. This warning flashes queue-status buttons on phones that have a status
button for this hunt group. When the buttons flash, everyone answering these calls
can see that the help-line calls need more attention.
Instructions

To set up our helpline queue:
1. Type change hunt-group n and press RETURN, where n is the number of
the hunt group to change.
In our example, type change hunt-group 5. The Hunt Group screen
appears.
Page 1 of X
HUNT GROUP
Group Number: 4__
ACD?
Group Name: internal helpline____________
Queue?
Group Extension: 1200____
Vector?
Group Type: ucd-loa
Coverage Path: ____
TN:
Night Service Destination: _____
COR:
MM Early Answer?
Security Code: ____
ISDN Caller Disp: ________

Measured: ________

Supervisor: Extension: ____

Controlling Adjunct: ____
Multiple Call Handling: __________
Objective: ____
Queue Length: 10
Calls Warning Threshold: 5

Calls Warning Port: __

2. In the Queue field, type y.
3. In the Queue Length field, type the maximum number of calls that you
want to wait in the queue.
In our example, type 10.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

227

Handling incoming calls

4. In the Calls Waiting Threshold field, type the maximum number of calls
that can be in the queue before the system flashes the queue status buttons.
In our example, type 5.
5. In the Time Warning Threshold field, type the maximum number of
seconds you want a call to wait in the queue before the system flashes the
queue status buttons.
In our example, type 30.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Adding hunt group announcements

You can add recorded announcements to a hunt group queue. Use announcements
to encourage callers to stay on the line or to provide callers with information. You
can define how long a call remains in the queue before the caller hears an
announcement.
See ‘‘Recording announcements’’ on page 442 for information on how to record
an announcement.
Let us add an announcement to our internal helpline. We want the caller to hear an
announcement after 20 seconds in the queue, or after approximately 4 or 5 rings.
Our announcement is already recorded and assigned to extension 1234.
Tip:

You can use display announcements to find the extensions of your
recorded announcements.
Instructions

To add an announcement to our helpline queue:
1. Type change hunt-group n and press RETURN, where n is the number of
the hunt group to change.
In our example, type change hunt-group 5.
The Hunt Group screen appears.

228

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing hunt groups

2. Press NEXT PAGE to find the First Announcement Extension field.
change hunt-group 1

Page

3 of

39

HUNT GROUP
Message Center:
Message
AUDIX Extension:
AUDIX
Message Center AUDIX Name:
Primary?
Primary?
Party Number
Number to
to INTUITY
INTUITY AUDIX?
Calling Party
LWC Reception:
LWC
AUDIX Name:
Name:
AUDIX
Messaging Server Name:

________
____
________
______
__
_
_______
_______
_______
_______

First Announcement
Announcement Extension: 1234
________
Delay
(sec):
__ 20
First
Delay
(sec):
Second Announcement
Announcement Extension:
Extension: ________
_____ Delay
(sec):
__ __
Recurring?
_ _
Second
Delay
(sec):
Recurring?

3. In the First Announcement Extension field, type the extension of the
announcement you want callers to hear.
In our example, type 1234.
4. In the First Announcement Delay (sec) field, type the number of seconds
you want the caller to wait before hearing the first announcement.
In our example, type 20.
Tip:

If you set the delay announcement interval to 0, callers automatically
hear the announcement before anything else. This is called a “forced
first announcement.”
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
You can use the same announcement for more than one hunt group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

229

Handling incoming calls

Managing vectors and VDNs
This section provides an introduction to vectors and Vector Directory Numbers
(‘‘VDN’’). It gives you basic instructions for writing simple vectors.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Vector fraud is one of the most common types of toll fraud because vectors
route calls based on the Class of Restriction (COR) assigned to the VDN.
See BCS Products Security Handbook for more information.
This section references announcements, hunt groups, queues, splits, and skills,
which are covered in detail in other sections of this book. You can also find
information about these topics in the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software
Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide.
NOTE:

The Client Room field on the Class of Service screen will affect VDN
displays. If a local station that has a COS with the Client Room field set to y
calls a local VDN, the agent’s display that receives the call will look as if it
is a direct station call rather than the expected VDN display of “station name
to vdn name.”
What are vectors?

A vector is a series of commands that you design to tell the system how to handle
incoming calls. A vector can contain up to 32 steps and allows customized and
personalized call routing and treatment. Use call vectoring to:
■

play multiple announcements

■

route calls to internal and external destinations

■

collect and respond to dialed information
Tip:

The vector follows the commands in each step in order. The vector “reads”
the step and follows the command if the conditions are correct. If the
command cannot be followed, the vector skips the step and reads the next
step.
Your system can handle calls based on a number of conditions, including the
number of calls in a queue, how long a call has been waiting, the time of day, day
of the week, and changes in call traffic or staffing conditions.

230

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing vectors and VDNs

Writing vectors

Writing vectors is easy, but Avaya recommends that you set up and test your
vectors before you use them across the system.
We’ll write a vector to handle calls to our main number. It is the first vector so
we’ll use number 1.
Tip:

Use list vector to see a list of existing vectors.
Before you start
■

On the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, verify the Basic Call
Vectoring field is y. If not, contact your Avaya representative.

■

To provide announcements, you need an Announcement circuit pack. See
Avaya MultiVantage™ Hardware Solutions Guide for more information on
the circuit pack.

■

Use one of the following:
■

Tone Clock with Call Classifier - Tone Detector circuit pack.

■

Call Classifier - Detector circuit pack.

Instructions

To write a vector:
1. Type change vector 1 and press RETURN.
The Call Vector screen appears.

Number:

Basic? y
Prompting? y
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

CALL VECTOR
Name: main number
calls ______ Multimedia? n

1

EAS? n
LAI? n

G3V4 Enhanced? n
G3V4 Adv Route? n

ANI/II-Digits? n
CINFO? n

Lock? n

ASAI Routing? n
BSR? n

____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

231

Handling incoming calls

The vector Number field on the left side of the screen is filled in
automatically.
2. In the Name field, type a description for the vector.
In our example, type main number calls.
Tip:

The information in the heading of the Call Vector screen is display
only. Use display system-parameters customer-options to see the
features that are turned on in your switch.
3. Type your vector steps in the numbered column on the left of the screen.
Tip:

When you type in your vector steps, the switch automatically
completes some of the vector step information for you. For example,
if you type “q” in a vector step field, the switch fills in “queue-to.”
Also, additional fields appear when you complete a field and press
TAB. This makes it very easy to type in your vector steps.
Now that vector 1 is set up, we will add a vector step to it to tell the switch how to
handle the calls to our main number.
Putting a call in a queue

Write a vector so that calls that come into the main business number redirect to a
queue.
We will use a vector-controlled hunt group for the main number queue. This hunt
group was set up as main split 47. When calls first arrive, all calls to our main
number should be queued as “pri 1” for low priority.
To queue calls, write the following vector (step 2). (Please note, we started our
example on step 2 because step 1 is used later in this chapter.)

232

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing vectors and VDNs

Number:

Basic? y
Prompting? y
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

CALL VECTOR
Name: main number
calls ______ Multimedia? n

1

EAS? n
LAI? n

G3V4 Enhanced? n
G3V4 Adv Route? n

ANI/II-Digits? n
CINFO? n

Lock? n

ASAI Routing? n
BSR? n

____________

queue-to main split 47 pri 1
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________

Tip:

Remember, the switch automatically fills in some of the information when
you type your vector step and press TAB.
Playing an announcement

Write a vector to play an announcement for callers in a queue. Use the
announcement to ask callers to wait. You need to record the announcement before
the vector can use it.
Let us play our announcement 4001, asking the caller to wait, then play music for
60 seconds, then repeat the announcement and music until the call is answered.
The goto command creates the loop to repeat the announcement and the music.
Unconditionally means under all conditions.
Tip:

Rather than loop your vectors directly back to the announcement step, go to
the previous queue-to step. This way, if for some reason the call does not
queue the first time, the switch can attempt to queue the call again. If the
call successfully queued the first time though, it merely skips the queue-to
step and plays the announcement. The system cannot queue a call more than
once in the exact same priority level.
To play and repeat an announcement, write this vector (steps 3-5):

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

233

Handling incoming calls

Number:

Basic? y
Prompting? y
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

CALL VECTOR
Name: main number
calls ______ Multimedia? n

1

EAS? n
LAI? n

G3V4 Enhanced? n
G3V4 Adv Route? n

ANI/II-Digits? n
CINFO? n

Lock? n

ASAI Routing? n
BSR? n

____________
queue-to main split 47 pri 1

announcement 4001 (All agents are busy, please wait...)
wait-time 60 secs hearing music
goto step 2 if unconditionally
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________

Routing based on time of day

Write a vector for calls that come in after your office closes.
Assume that your business is open 7 days a week, from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
When calls come in after business hours, you want to play your announcement
4002, which states that the office is closed and asks callers to call back during
normal hours. Write the vector so the call disconnects after the announcement is
played.
For after hours treatment, write this vector (steps 1, 6, and 7):

Number:

Basic? y
Prompting? y
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

234

CALL VECTOR
Name: main number
calls ______ Multimedia? n

1

EAS? n
LAI? n

G3V4 Enhanced? n
G3V4 Adv Route? n

ANI/II-Digits? n
CINFO? n

Lock? n

ASAI Routing? n
BSR? n

goto step 7 if time-of-day is all 17:00 to all 8:00
queue-to main split 47 pri 1
announcement 4001 (All agents are busy, please wait...)
wait-time 60 secs hearing music
goto step 2 if unconditionally

stop
disconnect after announcement 4002 (“We’re sorry, our office is closed...“)
____________
____________
____________
____________

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing vectors and VDNs

If the goto command in step 5 fails, the switch goes to the next step. The stop in
step 6 prevents callers from incorrectly hearing the “office is closed”
announcement in step 7. Stop keeps the call in the state it was in before the
command failed. In this case, if step 5 fails, the call remains in step 4 and the
caller continues to hear music.

! CAUTION:
Add a stop vector step only after calls are routed to a queue. If a stop
vector is executed for a call not in queue, the call drops.
Allowing callers to leave a message

Write a vector that allows callers to leave messages. This type of vector uses a
hunt group called a messaging split. For our example, we send after-hours calls to
the voice mailbox at extension 2000 and use messaging split 99.
Once the vector routes a call to the mailbox, the caller hears a greeting (that was
recorded with the voice mail for mailbox 2000) that tells them they can leave a
message.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

235

Handling incoming calls

To let callers leave messages, write this vector (step 7):

Number:

Basic? y
Prompting? y
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

CALL VECTOR
Name: main number
calls ______ Multimedia? n

1

EAS? n
LAI? n

G3V4 Enhanced? n
G3V4 Adv Route? n

ANI/II-Digits? n
CINFO? n

Lock? n

ASAI Routing? n
BSR? n

goto step 7 if time-of-day is all 17:00 to all 8:00
queue-to main split 47 pri 1
announcement 4001 (All agents are busy, please wait...)
wait-time 60 secs hearing music
goto step 2 if unconditionally
stop

messaging split 99 for extension 2000
____________
____________
____________
____________

Redirecting calls during an emergency or holiday

You can provide a quick way for a supervisor or agent to redirect calls during an
emergency or holiday. Use a special mailbox where you can easily change
announcements. This vector is also an alternative to making sure all agents log out
before leaving their phones.
In our example, no agents are normally logged in to split 10. We’ll use split 10 for
an emergency. We preset buttons on our agents’ phones so people with these
phones can log in at the touch of a button.
To quickly redirect calls:
1. Create a special mailbox with the appropriate announcement such as “We
are unable to answer your call at this time” or “Today is a holiday, please
call back tomorrow.”
In our example, we recorded the mailbox greeting for extension 2001.
2. Insert the following bold steps (steps 1, 10, and 11).
See ‘‘Inserting a step’’ on page 238 for more information.

236

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing vectors and VDNs

Number:

Basic? y
Prompting? y
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

1

CALL VECTOR
Name: main number
calls ______ Multimedia? n

EAS? n
LAI? n

G3V4 Enhanced? n
G3V4 Adv Route? n

ANI/II-Digits? n
CINFO? n

Lock? n

ASAI Routing? n
BSR? n

goto step 10 if staff agents split 10 > 0
goto step 8 if time-of-day is all 17:00 to all 8:00
queue-to main split 47 pri 1
announcement 4001 (All agents are busy, please wait...)
wait-time 60 secs hearing music
goto step 2 if unconditionally
stop
messaging split 99 for extension 2000
stop

messaging split 99 for extension 2001
stop

When there is an emergency, fire drill, or holiday, the supervisor or agent logs into
this split.
When an agent logs into split 10, the system looks at vector step 1, sees that more
than 0 people are logged into split 10, and sends calls to step 10 (which sends to
messaging split 99).
When your business returns to normal and the agent logs out of split 10, call
handling returns to normal.
Giving callers additional choices

You can give your callers a list of options when they call. Your vector tells the
switch to play an announcement that contains the choices. The switch collects the
digits the caller dials in response to the announcement and routes the call
accordingly.
We’ll create a vector that plays an announcement, then lets callers dial an
extension or wait in the queue for an attendant.
Please note, the following example of this “auto attendant” vector is a new vector
and is not built on the vector we used in the previous example.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

237

Handling incoming calls

To let callers connect to an extension, write this kind of vector:

Number:

CALL VECTOR
Name: main number
calls ______ Multimedia? n

1

Basic? y
Prompting? y

EAS? n
LAI? n

G3V4 Enhanced? n
G3V4 Adv Route? n

ANI/II-Digits? n
CINFO? n

Lock? n

ASAI Routing? n
BSR? n

wait-time 0 seconds hearing music
collect 4 digits after announcement 4004 (You have reached our company.
Please dial a 4-digit extension or wait for the attendant.)
03 route-to digits with coverage y
04 route-to number 0 with cov n if unconditionally
05 stop
01
02

06
07
08
09
10

____________
____________
____________
____________
____________

Inserting a step

It is easy to change a vector step and not have to retype the entire vector. We will
add announcement 4005 between step 3 and step 4 in vector 20.
To insert a new vector step in vector 20:
1. Type change vector 20 and press RETURN.
The Call Vector screen appears.
2. Press EDIT.
3. Type i followed by a space and the number of the step you want to add.
In our example, type i 4.
4. Type the new vector step.
We will type announcement 4005 (Please wait...).
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Tip:

When you insert a new vector step, the system automatically renumbers the
rest of the vector steps and all references to the vector steps. The switch
inserts a “*” when the numbering needs more attention.

238

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing vectors and VDNs

Deleting a step

To delete vector step 5 from vector 20:
1. Type change vector 20 and press RETURN.
The Call Vector screen appears.
2. Press EDIT.
3. Type d followed by a space and the number of the step you want to delete.
In our example, type d 5.
Tip:

You can delete a range of vector steps. For example, to delete steps 2
through 5, type d 2-5 and press ENTER.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Tip:

When you delete a vector step, the system automatically renumbers
the rest of the vector steps and all references to the vector steps. The
switch inserts a “*” when the numbering needs more attention.
More information

See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent
Selection (EAS) Guide for more information.
Automated Attendant competes with several features for ports on the Call
Classifier — Detector circuit pack or equivalent. See Avaya MultiVantage™
Solutions Hardware Guide for more information on the circuit pack.
Fixing problems

If there is a problem with a vector, the switch records the error as a vector event.
Vector events occur for a number of reasons including problems with a trunk, full
queue slots, or the vector reaching the maximum 1000 steps allowed.
Use display events to access the Event Report screen and see the event record.
Use the event record to see why the vector failed.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

239

Handling incoming calls

To view the Event Report:
1. Type display events and press RETURN.
The Event Report screen appears.

EVENT REPORT
The following option control which events will be displayed:
EVENT CATEGORY
Category: Vector
REPORT PERIOD
Interval: _a_ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__
SEARCH OPTIONS
Vector Number: __
Event Type: ___

2. To see all current vector events, press RETURN.
OR
Indicate the events that you want to see by completing the Report Period
and Search Option fields. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software
Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide for more
information.
3. Press ENTER to view the report.
The Event Report (detail) screen appears.

Event
Type
20
541

Event
Description
Call not queued
Not a messaging split

EVENT REPORT
Event
Event
Data 1
Data 2
12/5
B
Split
4C

First
Last
Event
Occur
Occur
Cnt
09/28/13:43 09/28/13:43 21
09/28/13:43 09/28/13:43 136

Look at the information in Event Data field to diagnose the vector event. In
this example, there was a problem with:
■

Vector 12, step 5

■

Split 89

Vector directory numbers

A VDN is an extension that directs an incoming call to a specific vector. This
number is a “soft” extension number not assigned to an equipment location.
VDNs must follow your dial plan.

240

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing vectors and VDNs

We will create VDN 5011 for our sales department. A call into 5011 routes to
vector 11. This vector plays an announcement and queues calls to the sales
department.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Vector fraud is one of the most common types of toll fraud because
vectors route calls based on the class of restriction (COR) assigned to
the VDN. See BCS Products Security Handbook for more
information.
Adding a vector directory number

To add a vector directory number:
1. Type add VDN 5011 and press RETURN.
You enter the VDN extension you want to add. The Vector Directory
Number screen appears.

VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER
Extension:
Name:
Allow VDN Override?
COR:
TN:
Vector Number:
AUDIX Name:
Messaging Server Name:
Measured:
Acceptable Service Level (sec):
VDN of Origin Annc. Extension:
1st Skill:
2nd Skill:
3rd Skill:

5011
Sales Department
n
1
1
11

both
301

Return Destination:
VDN Timed ACW Interval:
BSR Application:
BSR Available Agent Strategy: 1st-found

2. Type a description for this VDN in the Name field.
In our example, type Sales Department.
The information in the VDN Name field appears on a display phone. This
allows the agent to recognize the nature of the call and respond
accordingly.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

241

Handling incoming calls

Tip:

The VDN Override on the Vector Directory Number screen controls
the operation of the display.
3. Enter the vector number.
In our example, type 11.
4. In the Measured field, indicate how you want to measure calls to his VDN.
In our example, type both (for both CMS and BCMS).
Tip:

BCMS must be enabled to use “both.” Use display
system-parameters customer-options to see if BCMS is enabled.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Viewing vector directory numbers

To see the VDNs already associated with your vectors:
1. Type list VDN and press RETURN.
The Vector Directory Number screen appears.

VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER

Name
Tech Support
Customer Serv.
New Orders

Ext
5000
5001
5002

VDN
Vec
Orig
Ovrd COR TN Num Meas Annc
y
59 1 234 none 301
n
1
1
1 none 302
y
23 1
5 none 303

Event
Notif Skills
Adj 1st 2nd 3rd

Each VDN maps to one vector. Several VDNs can map to the same vector.

242

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding Automatic Call Distribution

Understanding Automatic Call
Distribution
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) is MultiVantage feature used in many call
centers. ACD gives you greater flexibility to control call flow and to measure the
performance of agents.
ACD systems operate differently from non-ACD systems, and they can be much
more complex. ACD systems can also be more powerful because they allow you
to use features and products that are not available in non-ACD systems. See Avaya
MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers for more
information on ACD call centers.
Enhancing an ACD system

First, all call center management systems (such as Avaya’s Basic Call
Management System (‘‘BCMS’’), BCMSVu, and the sophisticated Avaya IP
Agent Call Management System) require ACD. These management systems give
you the ability to measure more aspects of your center’s operation, and in more
detail, than is possible with standard Avaya MultiVantage reports.
Call vectoring greatly enhances the flexibility of a call center, and most vectoring
functions require ACD. Vectoring is a simple programming language that allows
you to custom design every aspect of call processing. See ‘‘What are vectors?’’ on
page 230 for more information.
Together, ACD and vectoring allow you to use Expert Agent Selection (‘‘EAS’’).
For a variety of reasons, you may want certain agents to handle specific types of
calls. For example, you may want only your most experienced agents to handle
your most important customers. You may have multilingual agents who can serve
callers in a variety of languages.
EAS allows you to classify agents according to their specific skills and then to
rank them by ability or experience within each skill. Avaya MultiVantage uses
these classifications to match each call with the best available agent. See Avaya
MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection
(EAS) Guide for more information on call vectoring and EAS.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

243

Handling incoming calls

Assigning a terminating extension
group
A Terminating Extension Group (‘‘TEG’’) allows an incoming call to ring as
many as 4 phones at one time. Any user in the group can answer the call.
Once a member of the TEG has answered a group call, the TEG is considered
busy. If a second call is directed to the group, it follows a coverage path if one has
been assigned.
Instructions

Now assign a terminating extension group to the advertising department. For
example, we will assign this TEG to extension 6725.
1. Type add term-ext-group next and press RETURN.
The Terminating Extension Group screen appears.

TERMINATING EXTENSION GROUP
Group Number: 1
Group Name: advertising
Security Code:

Group Extension:
Coverage Path:
COR:
TN:
LWC Reception:
Messaging Server Name:

ISDN Caller Disp: mbr-name
AUDIX Name:

6725
5
1
1
none

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
1: 5101
2:

Name (first 26 characters)
26 character name sta 5101

Ext
3:
4: 5102

Name (first 26 characters)
26 character name sta 5102

2. In the Group Extension field, type 6725.
This is the extension for the advertising group.
3. In the Group Name, type advertising.
This is the name of the group.
4. In the Coverage Path field, type 5.
This is the number of the call coverage path for this group.
5. In the COR field, leave the default as 1.
6. In the TN field, leave the default as 1.

244

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Assigning a terminating extension group

7. In the ISDN Call Display field, type mbr-name.
This specifies that the member name (member of the TEG where the call
terminated) is sent to the originating user.
8. In the Ext field, in the 1st place, type 5101.
9. In the 4th place, type 5102.
10. Press ENTER to save your changes.
11. Type change station 6725 and press RETURN.
The Station screen for extension 6725 appears.

Page 2 of X
STATION
FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception?
LWC Activation?
CDR Privacy?
Redirect Notification?
Per Button Ring Control?
PCOL/TEG Call Alerting?
Active Station Ringing:

msa-spe
y
n
y
n
n
single

H.320 Conversion? n
AUDIX Name: ______
Messaging Server Name: ______

Auto Select Any Idle Appearance?
Coverage Msg Retrieval?
Auto Answer:
Data Restriction?
Idle Appearance Preference?

n
y
none
n
n

Restrict Last Appearance? y
Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number? _

Audible Message Waiting? n
Display Client Redirection? n
Select Last Used Appearance? n

12. In the Bridged Call Alerting field, type y.
This provides audible ringing for TEG calls.
13. In the Button Assignments section, type term-x-gr 1.
This is the TEG button for the advertising group.
14. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

245

Handling incoming calls

246

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Routing outgoing calls

World class routing
Your system uses Automatic Alternate Routing (‘‘AAR’’) and Automatic Route
Selection (‘‘ARS’’) to direct outgoing calls.
■

AAR routes calls within your company over your own private network.

■

ARS routes calls that go outside your company over public networks. ARS
also routes calls to remote company locations if you do not have a private
network.

Automatic routing begins when a user dials a feature access code (‘‘FAC’’)
followed by the number the user wants to call. The switch analyzes the digits
dialed, selects the route for the call, deletes and inserts digits if necessary, and
routes the call over the trunks you specify in your routing tables. ARS and AAR
can access the same trunk groups and share the same route patterns and other
routing information. ARS calls can be converted to AAR calls and vice-versa.
The FAC for AAR is usually the digit 8. The FAC for ARS is usually the digit 9 in
the US and 0 outside of the US. Your Avaya technician sets up AAR on your
switch and usually assigns the AAR FAC at the same time. You can administer
your own ARS FAC.
This section describes only ARS call routing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 247

Routing outgoing calls

Managing calling privileges
Each time you set up a phone, you use the station screen to assign a class of
restriction (‘‘COR’’). You can create different CORs for different groups of users.
For example, you may want executives in your company to have different calling
privileges than receptionists.
When you set up a COR, you specify a facility restriction level (‘‘FRL’’) on the
Class of Restriction screen. The FRL determines the calling privileges of the user.
Facility Restriction Levels are ranked from 0–7, where 7 has the highest level of
privileges.
You also assign an FRL to each route pattern preference in the route pattern
screen. When a user makes a call, the system checks the user’s COR. The call is
allowed if the caller’s FRL is higher than or equal to the route pattern preference’s
FRL.
Instructions

Let us say we are setting up a new phone for an executive. The current translations
assign COR 1, with outward restrictions and an FRL 0, which is the lowest
permission level available. We want to assign a COR with the highest level of
permissions, FRL 7, to station 1234.
To change station 1234 from COR 1 to COR 7:
1. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.
2. In the COR field, type 7 and press ENTER to save your changes.
3. To change from FRL 0 to FRL 7, type change cor 7 and press RETURN.
The Class of Restriction screen appears.
4. In the FRL field, type 7 and press ENTER to save your changes.
Now all users with COR 7 will have the highest level of calling
permissions.

248

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Assigning ARS FAC

Assigning ARS FAC
Be sure the ARS feature access code (FAC) is set up on your system. In the U.S.,
9 is usually the ARS FAC. Users dial 9 to make an outgoing call.
When a user dials 9 to access ARS and make an outgoing call, the ARS access
code 9 is dropped before digit analysis takes place. will not be part of the digit
analysis.
Instructions

To assign the ARS FAC:
1. Type change dialplan and press ENTER.
The DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen screen appears.
2. Move to the 9 row and type fac in the first column. Press ENTER to save
your changes.
3. Type change features and press ENTER.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
4. Type 9 in the ARS - access code field and press ENTER to save your
changes.

Displaying ARS analysis information
Instructions

You will want to become familiar with how your system currently routes outgoing
calls. To display the ARS Digit Analysis Table that controls how the system routes
calls that begin with 1:
1. Type display ars analysis 1 and press RETURN.
The ARS Digit Analysis Table for dialed strings that begin with 1 appears.
Note that the switch displays only as many dialed strings as can fit on one
screen at a time.
To see all the dialed strings that are defined for your system, run an ARS Digit
Analysis report:
1. Type list ars analysis and press RETURN.
The ARS Digit Analysis Report appears. You may want to print this report
to keep in your paper records.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

249

Routing outgoing calls

Understanding ARS analysis
With ARS, the switch checks the digits in the number called against the ARS
Digit Analysis Table to determine how to handle the dialed digits. Your switch
also uses Class of Restriction (COR) and Facility Restriction Level (FRL) to
determine the calling privileges.
Let us look at a very simple AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table. Your system
likely has more defined dialed strings than our example.
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all
Dialed
Total
Route
Call Node
String
Min Max
Pattern Type Num
1____________________1
1
12
svcl ___
1____________________11_ 11 ____30
fnpa ___
1____________________12_ 23____ 17
intl ___
10xxx________________5 _ 5 ____ deny
op
___
1800_________________11_ 11____ 30
fnpa ___
2____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
3____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
4____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
5____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
6____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
7____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___

Percent Full:
ANI
Req
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

6

The far-left column of the ARS Digit Analysis Table lists the first digits in the
dialed string. When a user makes an outgoing call, the system analyzes the digits,
looks for a match in the table, and uses the information in the matching row to
determine how to route the call.
Let us say a caller places a call to 1-303-233-1000. The switch matches the dialed
digits with those in the first column of the table. In this example, the dialed string
matches the ‘1’. Then the systems matches the length of the entire dialed string
(11 digits) to the minimum and maximum length columns. In our example, the
11-digit call that started with 1 follows route pattern 30 as an fnpa call.
Tip:

The first dialed digit for an external call is often an access code. If ‘9’ is
defined as the ARS access code, the switch drops this digit and analyzes the
remaining digits with the ARS Analysis Table.
The Route Pattern points to the route that handles the calls that match this dial
string.
Call Type tells what kind of call is made with this dial string. Call type helps the
switch decide how to handle the dialed string.

250

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding ARS analysis

Examples of digit conversion

Your system uses the AAR or ARS Digit Conversion Table to change a dialed
number for more efficient routing. Digits may be inserted or deleted from the
dialed number. For instance, you can tell the switch to delete a 1 and an area code
on calls to one of your locations, and avoid long-distance charges by routing the
call over your private network.
The table below reflects these values:
■

ARS feature access code = 9
AAR feature access code = 8
Private Network Office Code (also known as Home RNX) = 222
Prefix 1 is required on all long-distance DDD calls
Dashes (-) are for readability only

The switch maps the dialed digits to the matching pattern that most closely
matches the dialed number. Example: If the dialed string is 957-1234 and
matching patterns 957-1 and 957-123 are in the table, the match is on pattern
957-123.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

251

Routing outgoing calls

Table 5.

ARS digit conversion examples

Operation

Actual Digits
Dialed

Matching
Pattern

Replacement
String

Modified
Address

Notes

DDD call to ETN

9-1-303-538-1345

1-303-538

362

362-1345

Call routes via AAR for
RNX 362

Long-distance call
to specified carrier

9-10222+DDD

10222

(blank)

(blank)

Call routes as dialed with
DDD # over private
network

Terminating a
local DDD call to
an internal station

9-1-201-957-5567
or 9-957-5567

1-201-957-5
or
957-5

222-5

222-5567.

Call goes to home RNX
222, ext. 5567

Unauthorized call
to intercept
treatment

9-1-212-976-1616

1-XXX-976

#

(blank)

"#" means end of dialing.
ARS ignores digits dialed
after 976. User gets
intercept treatment.

International calls
to an attendant

9-011-91-672530

011-91

222-0111#

222-0111

Call routes to local switch
(RNX 222), then to
attendant (222-0111).

International call
to announcement
(This method may
also be used to
block
unauthorized
IDDD calls)

9-011-91-672530

011-91

222-1234#

222.1234-

Call routes to local switch
(RNX 222), then to
announcement extension
(222-1234).

International call
from certain
European
countries needing
dial tone detection

0-00-XXXXXXXX

00

+00+

00+XXXX

The first 0 denotes ARS,
the second pair of 0s
denotes an international
call, the pluses denote
"wait" for dial tone
detection.

Defining operator assisted calls

Let us look at how the switch routes an ARS call that begins with 0 and requires
operator assistance. Remember, the user dials 9 to access ARS, then a 0, then the
rest of the number.

252

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding ARS analysis

To see how your switch handles a call to an operator:
1. Type display ars analysis 0 and press ENTER.
The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen starting with 0 appears.
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all
Dialed
Total
Route
Call Node
String
Min Max
Pattern Type Num
0____________________1
1
1
svcl ___
0____________________8__ 8 ____ 1
op
___
0____________________11_ 11____ 1
op
___
00___________________2 _ 2 ____ 1
op
___
01___________________10_ 23 ___ deny
op
___
011__________________10_ 23 ___ deny
iop
___
1____________________11_ 11 ___ 3
intl ___

Percent Full:
ANI
Req
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

6

The table in our example shows 6 translations for calls that begin with 0.
Instructions

We will use the ARS digit analysis table shown above and follow the routing for
an operator assisted a call to NJ.
— A user dials 9 0 908 956 1234.
— The switch drops the ARS FAC (9 in our example), looks at the ARS Digit
Analysis Table for 0, and analyzes the number. The switch:
■

determines that more than 1 digit was dialed

■

rules out the plan for 00, 01, and 011

■

determines that 11 digits were dialed

— The switch routes the call to route pattern 1 as an operator assisted call
Defining Inter-exchange carrier calls

Let us look at how the switch routes an ARS call to an inter-exchange
(long-distance) carrier (‘‘IXC’’). IXC numbers directly access your long-distance
carrier lines.
IXC numbers begin with 1010, followed by three digits, plus the number as it is
normally dialed including 0, 00, or 1+ 10 digits. These numbers are set up on your
default translations.
Remember, the user dials 9 to access ARS, then the rest of the number.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

253

Routing outgoing calls

Instructions

To see how your switch handles a call to an IXC:
1. Type display ars analysis 1 and press ENTER.
The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen starting with 1 appears.
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all
Dialed
Total
Route
Call Node
String
Min Max
Pattern Type Num
1____________________11_ 11 ___ 3
intl ___
1010xxx______________7 _ 7 ____ 5
op
___
1010xxx0_____________8 _ 8 ____ 5
op
___
1010xxx0_____________18_ 18 ___ 5
op
___
1010xxx00____________9 _ 9 ____ 5
op
___
1010xxx01____________17_ 25 ___ 3
iop
___
2____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
3____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
4____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___

Percent Full:
ANI
Req
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

6

This table shows 5 translations for IXC calls.
When you use x in the Dialed String field, the switch recognizes x as a wildcard.
The x represents any digit, 0 - 9. If I dial 1010, the next 3 digits will always match
the x wild cards in the dialed string.
Use the ARS digit analysis table shown above and follow the routing for an IXC
call to AT&T. 1010288 is the carrier access code for AT&T.
— A user dials 9 1010288 plus a public network number.
— The switch drops the ARS FAC (9 in our example), looks at the ARS Digit
Analysis Table for 1010, and analyzes the number.
— The switch matches 288 with xxx and sends the call over route pattern 5.
Restricted area codes and prefixes

Certain area code numbers are set aside in the North American Numbering Plan.
These numbers are 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 877, 888, 900. You need to
specifically deny calls made to area codes 200 through 900 (except 800 and 888).
You can also deny access to the 976 prefix, which is set aside in each area code for
pay-per call services, if you do not want to incur charges. You can block 976 or
any other prefix in all NPAs with a single entry in the digit analysis table. See
‘‘Using wild cards’’ on page 255 for more information.
Instructions

Set the 200 area code apart from other area codes 201 through 209. We use the
digit analysis table 120 because it defines long distance calls that begin with 1 and
all area codes from 200 through 209.

254

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding ARS analysis

To deny long distance calls to the 200 area code:
1. Type change ars analysis 120 and press ENTER.
The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen beginning with 120
appears.
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all
Dialed
Total
Route
Call Node
String
Min Max
Pattern Type Num
120__________________11 11
4
fnpa ___
1200_________________11_ 11____ deny
fnpa ___

Percent Full:
ANI
Req
n
n

6

The table in our example shows 2 translations for calls that begin with 120.
First, follow the routing for a long-distance call that begins with 120 and is
allowed. The 120 translation handles all dial strings 1-201 through 1-209, and
there are many matches.
— A user dials 9 120 plus 8 digits (the first of the 8 digits is not 0).
— The switch drops the ARS FAC (9 in our example), looks at the ARS Digit
Analysis Table for 120, and analyzes the number. The switch determines
that the call is a long-distance call and sends the call over route pattern 4.
Now we will follow a call that begins with the restricted area code 200. Only one
string matches this translation.
— A user dials 9 1200 plus 7 digits.
— The switch drops the ARS FAC (9), and looks at the ARS Digit Analysis
Table for 1200. The switch determines that the call type is deny and the call
does not go through.
Using wild cards

You can use wild cards to help separate out calls to certain numbers. Remember,
when you use the wild card x in the Dialed String field, the switch recognizes x as
any digit, 0 - 9. For example, you can restrict users from making calls to a 555
information operator where you might incur charges.
Instructions

To prevent callers from placing calls to long-distance 555 information numbers:
1. Type change ars analysis 1 and press RETURN.
The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen beginning with 1 appears.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

255

Routing outgoing calls

ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all
Dialed
Total
Route
Call Node
String
Min Max
Pattern Type Num
1____________________11_ 11 ___ 1
intl ___
1xxx555______________11_ 11 ___ 1
intl ___
1010xxx______________7 _ 7 ____ 1
op
___

Percent Full:
ANI
Req
n
n
n

6

2. Use the arrow keys to move to a blank Dialed String field.
3. Enter 1xxx555 in the Dialed String field.
4. Enter 11 in the Total Mn and 11 in Total Mx fields.
5. Enter deny (denied) in the Route Pattern field.
6. Enter fnhp in the Call Type field.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Defining local information calls

You can set up your switch to allow calls to local information, or 411.
Instructions

To allow 411 service calls:
1. Type change ars analysis 4 and press RETURN.
The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen beginning with 4 appears.
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all
Dialed
Total
Route
Call Node
String
Min Max
Pattern Type Num
411__________________3_ 3 ___ 1
svcl ___
5____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
6____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
7____________________7 _ 7 ____ 2
hnpa ___
911__________________3
3 ____ 1
svcl ___

Percent Full:
ANI
Req
n
n
n
n
n

6

2. Use the arrow keys to move to a blank Dialed String field.
3. Enter 411 in the Dialed String field.
4. Enter 3 in the Total Mn and 3 in Total Mx fields.
5. Enter 1 in the Route Pattern field.
6. Enter svcl (service call) in the Call Type field.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.

256

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up multiple locations

Setting up multiple locations
When you define a location number for:
■

cabinets in DEFINITY R

■

Remote offices on DEFINITY CSI, SI, and R

■

media gateways on S8300 Media Servers

■

IP phones and softphones according to IP network region

you can create numbering plans and time zone and daylight savings plans that are
specific for each cabinet. Choose the location you want to use as your main
location, and offset the system clock time on each cabinet according to their its
location. For more information about defining location numbers with the change
cabinet command, see your system’s Maintenance manual.
Before you start

Be sure the Multiple Locations field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen is set to y. If this field is set to n, contact your Avaya representative for
more information.
Be sure your daylight savings rules are administered. Daylight Savings Rule
numbers are located on the Daylight Savings Rule Screen
Each cabinet in a switch and each port network in the cabinet must be assigned a
location number. See the maintenance information for your switch for more
information.
Instructions

For example, we will set up multiple locations for a switch with cabinets in
Chicago and New York. Location 1 is assigned to the cabinet in Chicago, our main
office, so Central Standard Time is used for our main location. Location 2 is
assigned to the cabinet in New York. We’ll define the numbering plan area
(‘‘NPA’’) for the Chicago and New York locations, and set the time zone offset for
NY to show the difference in time between Eastern Standard Time and Central
Standard Time.
Tip:

Type list cabinets to see the cabinet screen and a list of cabinets and their
locations.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

257

Routing outgoing calls

To define locations for cabinets in Chicago and New York:
1. Type change multiple locations and press ENTER.
The Locations screen appears.
LOCATIONS
ARS Prefix 1 required for 10-digit NANP calls?
Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Name

TimeZone
Offset

Daylight-Savings
Rule

Number Plan
Area Code

Chicago________
New York_______
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________

+
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

1_
1_
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

312
212
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

00:00
01:00
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

2. Type y in the ARS Prefix 1 required for 10-digit NANP calls field.
Our dial plan requires users to dial a 1 before all 10-digit (long distance)
NANP calls.
3. Type Chicago in the Name field in the Number 1 row.
Use this field to identify the location.
4. Type +00:00 in the TimeZone Offset field in the Number 1 row.
In our example, the system time and the Chicago location time are the
same.
5. Type 1 in the Daylight Savings Rule field in the Number 1 row.
In our example, daylight savings rule 1 applies to U.S. daylight savings
time.
Tip:

Use display daylight-savings-rules to see what rules have been
administered on your switch.
6. Type 312 in the Number Plan Area Code field in the Number 1 row.
In our example, 312 is the local area code for Chicago, location 1.
7. Type New York in the Name field in the Number 2 row.

258

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Routing with multiple locations

8. Type -01:00 in the TimeZone Offset field in the Number 2 row.
In our example, subtract one hour from the system clock in Chicago to
provide the correct time for the location in New York.
9. Type 1 in the Daylight Savings Rule field in the Number 2 row.
In our example, daylight savings rule 1 applies to U.S. daylight savings
time, and both locations use the same rule.
10. Type 212 in the NANP field in the Number 2 row.
In our example, 212 is the local area code for New York, location 2.
11. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Related topics

See ‘‘Setting the system date and time’’ on page 43 for more information about
how to set your system clock and specify the daylight savings rule for the
location.
See ‘‘Establishing daylight savings rules’’ on page 41 for more information about
how to specify the dates and times of daylight savings rules.

Routing with multiple locations
When you set up multiple locations, you can define call routing that covers all
locations as well as call routing specific to each individual location. Use your
routing tables to define local routing for 911, service operators, local operator
access, and all local calls for each location. Leave long-distance and international
numbers that apply across all locations on the routing tables with location field set
to all.
Before you start

Be sure the Multiple Locations field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen is set to y. If this field is set to n, contact your Avaya representative for
more information.
AAR or ARS must be administered.
■

For AAR, verify that either the Private Networking field or the Uniform
Dialing Plan field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

■

For ARS, verify that the ARS field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.

Each cabinet in a switch must be assigned a location number. See the maintenance
information for your switch for more information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

259

Routing outgoing calls

Instructions

For example, we will use ARS to set up local call routing for two switch locations.
Our Chicago switch is assigned to location 1, and our New York switch is
assigned to location 2.
Our example shows a simple local dialing plan. Each location already contains
location-specific routing tables. We’ll use route pattern 1 for local service calls
and route pattern 2 for local HNPA calls in the Chicago location.
Tip:

Create location-specific routing by assigning different route patterns for
each location.
To define local calls for switches in Chicago and New York:
1. Type change ars analysis location 1 and press ENTER.
The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen for location 1 appears.
change ars analysis

Page 1 of X
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: 1___

Dialed
String
2________________
3________________
4________________
411______________
5________________
555______________
6________________
611______________
7________________
8________________
811______________
9________________

Total
Min Max
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
3
7
7
7
7
3
3
7
7

Route
Pattern
2____
2____
2____
1____
2____
deny_
2____
1____
2____
2____
1____
2____

Call
Type
hnpa
hnpa
hnpa
svcl
hnpa
hnpa
hnpa
svcl
hnpa
hnpa
svcl
hnpa

Node
Num
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Percent Full:

___

ANI
Reqd
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

2. Type the information for local dialed strings and service calls in each row
on the screen.
In our example, for location 1 (Chicago) local HNPA calls:

260

■

Type the appropriate digit in the Dialed String field

■

Type 7 in the Total Min field

■

Type 7 in the Total Max field

■

Type 2 in the Route Pattern field

■

Type hnpa in the Call Type field

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Modifying call routing

In our example, for location 1 (Chicago) local service calls:
■

Type the appropriate digits in the Dialed String field

■

Type 3 in the Total Min field

■

Type 3 in the Total Max field

■

Type 1 in the Route Pattern field

■

Type svcl in the Call Type field

3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change ars analysis 4 location 2 and press ENTER.
The ARS Digit Analysis Table for location 2 appears.
5. Type in the local HNPA and service call routing information for New York.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Related topics

See ‘‘Automatic routing — general’’ on page 1499 for more information on ARS.
See ‘‘AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table’’ on page 577, ‘‘AAR and ARS Digit
Conversion Table’’ on page 582, and ‘‘Toll Analysis’’ on page 1230 for general
information on ARS administration. You can define location specific entries in
addition to the global entries on these screens.

Modifying call routing
If your system uses ARS Digit Analysis to analyze dialed strings and select the
best route for a call, you must change the digit analysis table to modify call
routing. For example, you’ll need to update this table to add new area codes or to
restrict users from calling specific areas or countries.
Adding a new area code or prefix

A common task for system administrators is to configure their system to recognize
new area codes or prefixes.
When you want to add a new area code or prefix, you look up the settings for the
old area code or prefix and enter the same information for the new one.
Tip:

Use display toll xxx (where xxx is the prefix you want to add) to see if the
new area code or prefix number is set up as a toll call (y) or not. Some users
may not be allowed to dial toll call numbers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

261

Routing outgoing calls

Instructions

We will add a new area code. When the California area code, 415, splits and
portions change to 650, you’ll need to add this new area code to your system.
Tip:

If you do not need to use 1 for area code calls, omit the 1 in steps 1, 3, and 5
in our example. Also, enter 10 in the Total Min and Total Max fields (instead
of 11) in step 6.
To add this non-local area code:
1. Type list ars route-chosen 14152223333 and press RETURN.
You can use any 7-digit number after 1 and the old area code (415). We
used 222-3333.
The ARS Route Chosen Report screen appears.
ARS ROUTE CHOSEN REPORT
Location: 1
Dialed
String
141

Partitioned Group Number:
Total
Min Max
11
11

Route
Pattern
30

Call
Type
fnpa

Node
Number

1
Location
all

2. Write down the Total Min, Total Max, Route Pattern, and Call Type values
from this screen.
In this example, the Total Min is 11, Total Max is 11, Route Pattern is 30,
and the Call Type is fnpa.
3. Type change ars analysis 1650 and press RETURN.
The AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen appears.
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: all
Dialed
Total
Route
Call Node
String
Min Max
Pattern Type Num
1____________________11 11
30
fnpa ___
167__________________11 11
30
fnpa ___
1800_________________11 11
30
fnpa ___
2___________________ 7
7
2
hnpa ___
3___________________ 7
7
2
hnpa ___
4___________________ 7
7
2
hnpa ___
5___________________ 7
7
2
hnpa ___
7___________________ 7
7
2
hnpa ___
8___________________ 7
7
2
hnpa ___
911_________________ 3
3
1
emer ___
976________________ _11 11
deny
hnpa ___

262

Issue 5 October 2002

Percent Full:
ANI
Req
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

6

555-233-506

Modifying call routing

4. Move to a blank Dialed String field.
If the dialed string is already defined in your system, the cursor appears in
the appropriate Dialed String field, where you can make changes.
5. Enter 1650 in the Dialed String field.
6. Enter the minimum and maximum values from step 2 in the Total Mn and
Total Mx fields.
In our example, enter 11 in each field.
7. Enter the route pattern from step 2 in the Route Pattern field.
In our example, enter 30.
8. Enter fnpa in the Call Type field.
9. Enter the node number from step 2 in the Node Num field.
For our example, leave the node number blank.
10. Press ENTER to save your changes.
To add a new prefix, follow the same directions, except use a shorter dial string
(such as list ars route-chosen 2223333, where 222 is the old prefix) and a dial
type of hnpa.
Tip:

If you change an existing area code for a network with multiple locations, be
sure to change the Number Plan Area Code field on the Locations screen.
See ‘‘Setting up multiple locations’’ on page 257.
Using ARS to restrict outgoing calls

ARS allows you to block outgoing calls to specific dialed strings. For example,
you can restrict users from making international calls to countries where you do
not do business, or in the U.S. you can restrict access to 900 and 976 pay-per-call
numbers.

! SECURITY ALERT:
To prevent toll fraud, deny calls to countries where you do not do business.
The following countries are currently concerns for fraudulent calling.

555-233-506

country

code

country

code

Colombia

57

Pakistan

92

Ivory Coast

225

Peru

51

Mali

23

Senegal

221

Nigeria

234

Yemen

967

Issue 5 October 2002

263

Routing outgoing calls

Instructions

To prevent callers from placing calls to Colombia (57):
1. Type change ars analysis 01157 and press RETURN.
You enter 011 (international access) and the country code (57). The ARS
Digit Analysis Table screen appears.
2. Move to a blank Dialed String field.
If the dialed string is already defined in your system, the cursor appears in
the appropriate Dialed String field. Skip to step 5 to deny calls to this
dialed string.
3. Enter 01157 in the Dialed String field.
4. Enter 10 in the Total Mn and 23 in Total Mx fields.
5. Enter deny (denied) in the Route Pattern field.
6. Enter intl in the Call Type field.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.

Overriding call restrictions
You can use authorization codes to enable callers to override a station’s calling
privileges. For example, you can give a supervisor an authorization code so they
can make calls from a phone that is usually restricted for these calls. Since each
authorization code has its own COR, the system uses the COR assigned to the
authorization code (and FRL assigned to the COR) to override the privileges
associated with the employee’s phone.
Note that authorization codes do not override dialed strings that are denied. For
example, if your ARS tables restrict users from placing calls to Colombia, a caller
cannot override the restriction with an authorization code.
Before you start

Verify that the Authorization Codes field on the System Parameters Customer
Options screen is set to y.

! SECURITY ALERT:
You should make authorization codes as long as possible to increase the
level of security. You can set the length of authorization codes on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen.

264

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Defining ARS Partitions

Instructions

We will create an authorization code 4395721with a COR of 2.
1. Type change authorization-code 4395721 and press RETURN.
The Authorization Code — COR Mapping screen appears.
2. In the AC field, type 4395721.
3. In the COR field, enter 2.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Authorization Code - COR Mapping
NOTE: 2 codes administered. Use ’list’ to display all codes.
AC
COR
9260839 3
2754609 4
________ __
________ __
________ __

AC
COR AC
COR
________ __ ________ __
________ __ ________ __
________ __ ________ __
________ __ ________ __
________ __ ________ __

AC
COR
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __
________ __

AC
________
________
________
________
________

COR AC
COR
__ ________ __
__ ________ __
__ ________ __
__ ________ __
__ ________ __

Defining ARS Partitions
Most companies want all their users to be able to make the same calls and follow
the same route patterns. However, you may find it helpful to provide special
calling permissions or restrictions to a group of users or to particular phones.
ARS partitioning allows you to provide different call routing for a group of users
or for specific phones.
NOTE:

If you used partitioning on a prior release of Avaya MultiVantage and you
want to continue to use partitioning, please read this section carefully. In this
release of Avaya MultiVantage, partition groups are defined on the Partition
Route Table. If you want to define routing based on partition groups, use the
Partition Route Table. Partition groups are no longer defined on the Digit
Analysis Table.
Before you start

Verify that the Tenant Partitioning field on the System Parameters Customer
Options screen is y.
Verify that the Time of Day Routing field on the System Parameters Customer
Options screen is n.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

265

Routing outgoing calls

Setting up partition groups

Let us say you allow your employees to make local, long distance, and emergency
calls. However, you have a lobby phone for visitors and you want to allow users to
make only local, toll-free, and emergency calls from this phone.
To restrict the lobby phone, you modify the routing for a partition group to enable
only specific calls, such as U.S. based toll-free 1-800 calls, and then assign this
partition group to the lobby phone.
Instructions

To enable 1-800 calls for partition group 2:
1. Type list ars route-chosen 18002221000 and press RETURN.
You can use any 7-digit number following the 1800 to create an example of
the dialed string.
The ARS Route Chosen Report for partition group 1 appears.
ARS ROUTE CHOSEN REPORT
Location :

1

Dialed
String

Partitioned Group Number: 1
Total
Min Max

1800___________________

11 11

Route
Pattern
p1___

Call
Type
fnpa

Node
Number
_____

Location

all

2. Record the route pattern for the selected dialed string.
In our example, the route pattern for 1800 is p1. This indicates that the
system uses the Partition Routing Table to determine which route pattern to
use for each partition.
NOTE:

If there was a number (with no p) under Route Pattern on the Route
Chosen Report, then all partitions use the same route pattern. You
need to use the Partition Routing Table only if you want to use
different route patterns for different partition groups.
3. Press CANCEL to return to the command prompt.

266

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Defining ARS Partitions

4. Type change partition-route-table index 1 and press RETURN.
The Partition Route Table screen appears. In our example, partition group 1
can make 1800 calls and these calls use route pattern 30.
Partition Routing Table
Routing Patterns
Route
Index
----1
2
3
4
5
6
7

PGN 1
----__30
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 2
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 3
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 4
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 5
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 6
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 7
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 8
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____

5. In the PGN2 column that corresponds to Route Index 1, type 30 and press
ENTER.
This tells the system to use route pattern 30 for partition group 2 and allow
partition group 2 members to make calls to 1800 numbers.
Assigning a phone to a partition group

To assign an extension to a partition group, first assign the partition group to a
COR, and then assign that COR to the extension.
Instructions

To assign a Class of Restriction (COR) to partition group 2:
1. Type list cor and press RETURN.
The Class of Restriction Information screen appears.
CLASS OF RESTRICTION INFORMATION
COR
0
1
2
3

COR Description
supervisor
telecommuting

2. Choose a COR that has not been used and press CANCEL.
In our example, select 3.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

267

Routing outgoing calls

3. Type change cor 3 and press RETURN.
The Class of Restriction screen appears.
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
COR Number: 3
COR Description: lobby___________________
FRL: 0
APLT?
Can Be Service Observed? n
Calling Party Restriction:
Can Be A Service Observer? n
Called Party Restriction:
Partition Group Number: _
Forced Entry of Account Codes?
Priority Queuing? n
Direct Agent Calling?
Restriction Override: none
Facility Access Trunk Test?
Restricted Call List? n
Can Change Coverage?
Unrestricted Call List? __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Access to MCT? y
Fully Restricted Service?
Category For MFC ANI: 7
Hear VDN of Origin Annc.?
Send ANI for MFE? n_
Add/Remove Agent Skills?
MF ANI Prefix: ______
Automatic Charge Display?
Hear System Music on Hold? y
PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)?
Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup?
Can Use Directed Call Pickup?

y
none
none
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

4. Type a name for this COR in the COR Description field.
In our example, type lobby.
5. Enter 2 in the Partition Group Number field.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now assign COR 3 to the lobby phone at extension 1234:
1. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN.
The Station screen for 1234 appears.
2. In the COR field, enter 3.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.

Setting up time of day routing
Time of Day Routing lets you redirect calls to coverage paths according to the
time of day and day of the week. You need to define the coverage paths you want
to use before you define the time of day coverage plan.
You can route calls based on the least expensive route according to the time of day
and day of the week the call is made. You can also deny outgoing long-distance
calls after business hours to help prevent toll fraud. Time of Day Routing applies
to all AAR or ARS outgoing calls and trunks used for call forwarding to external
numbers.

268

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up time of day routing

Before you start

AAR or ARS must be administered on your switch before you use Time of Day
Routing.
■

For AAR, verify that either the Private Networking field or the Uniform
Dialing Plan field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

■

For ARS, verify that the ARS field is y and the Time of Day Routing field
is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

Instructions

As an example, we will allow our executives to make long distance calls during
business hours. Let us look at the Time of Day Routing Plan before we make any
changes.
To display your Time of Day Routing Plan:
1. Type display time-of-day 1 and press RETURN.
The Time of Day Routing Plan 1 appears.

Page 1 of 1
TIME OF DAY ROUTING PLAN 1

Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat

Act
PGN Act
Time
# Time
00:01 1 __:__
00:01 1 08:__00
00:01 1 08:__00
00:01 1 08:__00
00:01 1 08:__00
00:01 1 08:__00
00:01 1 __:__

PGN
#
_
2
2
2
2
2
_

Act
PGN
Time
#
__:__
_
12:__00 1
12:__00 1
12:__00 1
12:__00 1
12:__00 1
__:__
_

Act
Time
__:__
13:__00
13:__00
13:__00
13:__00
13:__00
__:__

PGN
#
_
2
2
2
2
2
_

Act
PGN Act
Time
# Time
__:__
_ __:__
17:__00 1 __:__
17:__00 1 __:__
17:__00 1 __:__
17:__00 1 __:__
17:__00 1 __:__
__:__
_ __:__

_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Make a note of the routing plan that is currently in effect. In our example,
this plan is for employees who can only make local calls.
You can see that in our example, two partition group numbers control time
of day routing. PGN 1 begins one minute after midnight (00:01) every day
of the week, and is used for after-business hours and all day Saturday and
Sunday. PGN 2 is assigned to office hours Monday through Friday, not
including noon (12:00) to 1:00 p.m. (13:00).
2. Press CANCEL to clear the screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

269

Routing outgoing calls

Now we will create a new time of day routing plan for long-distance calls for our
executives.
1. Type change time-of-day 2 and press RETURN.
The Time of Day Routing Plan 2 appears.
2. Type 1 in each field as shown on Time of Day Routing Plan 1.
In our example, this is the PGN used for after hours and the lunch hour.
3. Type 3 in all other fields.
In our example, PGN 3 uses the route pattern for long-distance calls during
business hours. We can save money by using the trunk lines provided by
our new long-distance carrier.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now assign your new Time of Day Routing Plan 2 to the COR assigned to your
executives. See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 to see where to assign this
field.
Example

For this example, assume the following:
■

Jim is the user at extension 1234.

■

Extension 1234 is assigned a COR of 2.

■

COR 2 is assigned a Time of Day Plan Number of 1.

■

The Time of Day Routing Plan 1 is administered as shown in the example
above.

When Jim comes into work on Monday morning at 8:30 and makes an ARS call
(dials the ARS access code followed by the number of the person he is calling),
the system checks the Time of Day Plan Number assigned to Jim’s COR.
Because Jim has a COR of 2 with Time of Day Plan Number 1, the system uses
Time of Day Routing Plan 1 to route the call.
According to Time of Day Routing Plan 1, calls made between 8:00 a.m. and
11:59 a.m. route according to the route pattern set up on PGN 1.
If Jim makes a call between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. on Monday, the Time of
Day Routing Plan 1 is used again. However, this time the call is routed according
to PGN 2.

270

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Location by region

Related topics

See ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 screens for more information.
See ‘‘Defining ARS Partitions’’ on page 265 to see how to set up partition
groups.

Location by region
Location by Region provides a way to administer location by IP network region.
This allows for the correct date and time information and trunk routing based on
the IP network region.
Setting up a remote user in a network region
that is correct for their time zone
Instructions

With your system located in New York and a remote user located in Germany, to
create the correct time zone settings:
1. Type change locations and press ENTER.
The Locations screen displays.
change locations

Page 1 of 3
LOCATIONS
ARS Prefix 1 Required for 10-Digit NANP Calls? _

Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Name

Timezone
Offset

Daylight-Savings
Rule

Number Plan
Area Code

New York____________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
Germany_____________
____________________
____________________
____________________

+
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
+
_
_
_

1_
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

00:00
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
08:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

2. On line 11, in the Name field, enter switch associated with the location (for
instance, Germany).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

271

Routing outgoing calls

3. In the first Timezone Offset field, enter + to indicate the time is ahead of
the system time.
4. In the second Timezone Offset field, enter 08 for the number of hours
difference between this location and system time.
5. In the Daylight Savings field, enter 1 if this country has daylight savings.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
7. Type change ip-network-map and press ENTER.
The IP Address Mapping screen displays.
change ip-network-map

1 of X
IP ADDRESS MAPPING

From IP Address
.
.
.

(To IP Address
.
.
.

Subnet
or Mask)

Region

8. In the From IP Address field, enter the IP address for the remote station in
Germany.
9. In the To IP Address field, enter the IP address of your system.
10. In the Subnet or Mask field, enter the subnet mask value of your network.
11. In the Region field, enter a number that is not being used. In this example,
enter 100.
12. Press ENTER to save your changes.
13. Type change ip-network-region 100 and press ENTER.
The IP Network Region screen displays.

272

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Location by region

change ip-network-region 100

Page

1 of

2

IP Network Region
Region: 100
Name: Germany
Audio Parameters
Codec Set: 1
Location: 11
UDP Port Range
Min: 2048
Max: 65535

Direct IP-IP Audio Connections? n
IP Audio Hairpinning? y

DiffServ/TOS Parameters
Call Control PHB Value:
VoIP Media PHB Value:
BBE PHB Value:
802.1p/Q Enabled? n
Call Control 802.1p Priority:
VoIP Media 802.1p Priority:
802.1Q VLAN:

RTCP Enabled?
RTCP Monitor Server Parameters
Use Default Server Parameters?
Server IP Address:
Server Port:
RTCP Report Period(secs):

y
n
___.___.___.___
_____
__

Resource Reservation Parameters
RSVP Enabled? y
RSVP Refresh Rate(secs):
Retry upon RSVP Failure Enabled? y
RSVP Profile: guaranteed-service

14. In the Name field, enter the location name for familiarity.
15. In the Location field, enter the number from the Locations screen. In this
example, it was 11.
16. Press Next Page.
Page 2 (Inter Network Region Connection Management) displays.
change ip-network-region 100

Page 2 of 2

Inter Network Region Connection Management
Region

(Group of 32)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
001-032 1
033-064
065-096
097-128
1
129-160
161-192
193-224

17. Notice in the Region column 001-032, that a “1” displays under column 1
indicating that Network Region 100 (Germany) is connected to Network
Region 1 (New York) using Codec Set 1.
18. In row 001-032, under column 1, enter 1 for New York.
19. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

273

Routing outgoing calls

274

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing multimedia calling

Multimedia Applications Server
Interface
The Multimedia Applications Server Interface (‘‘MASI’’) defines a protocol and a
set of operations that are used to extend Avaya MultiVantage feature functionality
to a Multimedia Communications Exchange (‘‘MMCX’’) system. MASI
architecture fits the client/server model, where the Avaya MultiVantage functions
as a server for MMCX clients. Examples of features supported by MASI include
call detail recording (‘‘CDR’’), AUDIX/INTUITY voice mail integration, and
Automatic Alternate Routing/Automatic Route Selection (AAR/ARS).
MMCX can make use of both MASI features and MMCX autonomous features.
Autonomous features are those that MMCX provides, even if MASI is not
enabled. This document does not discuss them unless there is a consideration for
MASI administration.
Some autonomous MMCX features:

555-233-506

■

Basic Call (Place/Drop)

■

Call Coverage

■

Conference

■

Transfer

Issue 5 October 2002 275

Managing multimedia calling

MultiVantage/MASI features:
■

Basic Call (Place/Drop) — Avaya MultiVantage tracks the status of all
calls placed to or from a MASI terminal.

■

Call Detail Recording — Avaya MultiVantage tracks calls to and from
MASI terminals and can produce call records that indicate if a call uses
MASI.

■

Call Coverage — Avaya MultiVantage tracks MMCX calls that are sent to
coverage. A MultiVantage coverage path can contain both MASI terminals
and MultiVantage stations.

■

Conference — Avaya MultiVantage tracks conference calls that involve
MASI terminals, if a MultiVantage station originates the conference.
Conferences that involve MASI terminals and MultiVantage stations are
voice-only. If the MultiVantage station originates the call, the caller can use
the consultative form of conference or transfer.

■

World Class Routing (‘‘AAR’’ or ‘‘ARS’’) — Calls from MASI terminals
can take advantage of Avaya MultiVantage World Class Routing
capabilities.

■

Voice messaging access to AUDIX/INTUITY — MMCX users can take
advantage of AUDIX voice messaging, and receive message waiting
indication.

■

MMCX trunking — By assigning MultiVantage trunk access codes to
interfaces from the MMCX to other MMCXs or the PSTN, Avaya
MultiVantage can monitor traffic over those interfaces.

Before you start

! CAUTION:
Avaya MultiVantage offers a wide range of features, and MMCX users may
want to take advantage of this. In some cases, these features will operate as
expected. However, some features are not supported for use over the MASI
link, and their behavior is unpredictable. You may cause harm to your
system by attempting to use these features. The Interactions section contains
a list of features, and lists those features that are absolutely not supported
for use with MASI. If you administer features on the DO NOT ADMINISTER
list, Avaya cannot be responsible for the result.
For purposes of administration, there are feature buttons and groups of users that
you must not administer with MASI terminal extensions. There are also features
that you simply cannot administer for a MASI terminal, because the software does
not allow it.

276

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

About this document

The following section describes the Multimedia Applications Server Interface,
and provides instructions on how to set it up, including administration and
monitoring. It also includes a section on troubleshooting.
You need to use both the DEFINITY Server system administration terminal
(‘‘SAT’’) and the MMCX administration terminal to administer MASI. This
document describes what you need to do at the DEFINITY Server SAT. It also
occasionally mentions administration that you must do at the MMCX
administration terminal. For more detailed MMCX information, see the MMCX
Technical Reference.
List of terms

This is a list of terms that are specific to MASI, or that have meanings in the
context of MASI that are not standard.
■

chgmasi — The command you use to administer MASI at the MMCX

administration terminal.
■

Interserver — Connections between MMCX terminals on different
MMCX servers/nodes.

■

MASI domain — A MASI domain consists of a MultiVantage system and
one or more MASI nodes that share the same dial plan. That is, the
extension numbers on the MMCX are known to MultiVantage, and fit in
the MultiVantage dial plan.

■

MASI interworking — MASI interworking refers to the completion of a

voice connection within a MultiVantage system, involving at least one
MASI terminal and a MASI path.
■

MASI link — The connection between the MMCX and the Avaya
MultiVantage.

■

MASI node — A single MMCX server. You may connect more than one
MASI node to a MultiVantage system. Each node has a separate number.
This node number needs to be consistent whenever referring to a specific
MMCX server.

■

MASI non-interworking — MASI non-interworking refers to the
completion of a call by MMCX, not involving a MASI path.

■

MASI path — The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) B-channels

between MMCX and Avaya MultiVantage in a MASI environment. Paths
are used for voice and data connections between Avaya MultiVantage and
MMCX.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

277

Managing multimedia calling

■

MASI signaling link — ISDN D-channel used to transport a new ISO

protocol called the MASI protocol between the Avaya MultiVantage and
the MMCX.
■

MASI terminal — The MultiVantage system representation of MMCX

terminals in a MASI environment.
■

MMCX interface — PRI interface for connecting an MMCX server to
other public, private or wide area network (WAN) switching systems or
equipment that is part of the public network. Similar to a MultiVantage
trunk group. These may include non-MASI trunks connecting the Avaya
MultiVantage and the MMCX.

■

MMCX trunk — The MultiVantage system representation of trunk or
network facilities terminating on MMCX. For purposes of MASI, they are
called “interfaces.”

Planning for MASI

Before you start to administer MASI, you should make a plan for how to do it.
Among the configurations on the following pages, there is probably one that
matches the configuration of your system fairly closely. You might want to either
write on these pages, or draw up your own configuration. It may help you if you
have already determined trunk group and signaling group numbers, unused
extensions, and so on. The following are things you need to consider:
■

Establish the dial plan on the MMCX to agree with that of the Avaya
MultiVantage. If you use Universal Dial Plan and MMCX, you may need to
make adjustments for the MMCX dial plan.

■

Find unused extensions and trunk group numbers. You need:
— one trunk group number for each ISDN-PRI connection to the
MMCX
— one signaling group number for each MASI node and an unused
MultiVantage extension for the signaling group
— one unused MultiVantage extension for the Near-End Path
Termination number for all MASI Paths to this ECS. You can use
the same number for all MASI nodes in the domain.
— two unused MMCX extensions for the nearpath and tscnum
arguments to the chgmasi command. This is the command you use
to administer MASI on the MMCX.

278

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

MASI configurations

There are several ways to set up combinations of MASI nodes and DEFINITY
servers.The following figures depict several possible configurations.

PSTN

PSTN

1

Trunk 1

DEFINITY
1

AUDIX

WAN

Trunk 2

2

MMCX
1

SG1
DEFINITY

S1

LAN

E1

E2

cydfdda1 LJK 071597

Figure 5. MASI domain of one Avaya MultiVantage running on a DEFINITY
Server and one MMCX

The parts of this drawing, for MASI, are as follows:

555-233-506

■

Trunk 1 — This is any type of trunk connection to the public network.

■

Trunk 2 — This is the link between the Avaya MultiVantage solution and
the MMCX, and requires a TN464C or later DS1 circuit pack. You
administer this link as an ISDN-PRI trunk group, a MASI path and an
NCA-TSC.

■

I1 and I2 — These are MMCX interfaces to destinations other than Avaya
MultiVantage solutions. Administer as MASI trunks.

■

E1 and E2 — Endpoints (terminals) belonging to the MMCX. Administer
as MASI terminals.

Issue 5 October 2002

279

Managing multimedia calling

■

MMCX — Determine a node number for each MMCX server. This can be
any number from 1–15. Once established, Avaya MULTIVANTAGE
informs the MMCX of its node number.

■

S1 — MultiVantage station.

E3

E4

LAN

PSTN
MMCX
2

Trunk 1
Trunk 3
SG2

DEFINITY
1

AUDIX

3

4

PSTN

DEFINITY

WAN

1

2

Trunk 2
S1

SG1

MMCX
1

LAN

E1

E2

cydfdda2 LJK 071597

Figure 6. MASI domain of one Avaya MultiVantage running on a DEFINITY
Server and two (or more) MMCXs

280

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

E3

E4

LAN

DEFINITY
2

AUDIX

DEFINITY

Trunk 3

MMCX
2

SG2
S2
3

Trunk 4
PSTN

PSTN

Trunk 1

WAN

1

DEFINITY
1

AUDIX

4

Trunk 2

2

MMCX
1

SG1
DEFINITY

S1
LAN

E1

E2

cydfdda3 LJK 071897

Figure 7. Two separate MASI domains

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

281

Managing multimedia calling

E3

E4

LAN

MMCX
2

3

PSTN

PSTN

Trunk 1

DEFINITY
1

INTUITY

4

WAN

1

2

Trunk 2

MMCX
1

SG1
DEFINITY

S1
LAN

E1

E2

cydfdda4 LJK 071897

Figure 8. One MASI domain, and one non-MASI MMCX

The MASI node must be directly connected to the Avaya DEFINITY Server for
MASI features to work. In this configuration, terminals that belong to MMCX 2
(E3 and E4), do not take advantage of MASI capabilities.

282

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

How to administer MASI

This section discusses the administration required to make MASI work. You
perform most of this administration from the DEFINITY Server administration
terminal. However, there are a few things you must do at the MMCX
administration terminal. This section sometimes refers to the chgmasi command.
This is the command you use to administer MASI parameters on the MMCX. For
more information about using the chgmasi command, see your MMCX Technical
Reference.
Step 1 — Establish customer options (Avaya)

An Avaya representative must activate MASI using the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen. The representative should also verify that ISDN-PRI
(Avaya MultiVantage™ on a DEFINITY R configuration) or ISDN-PRI over
PACCON (DEFINITY SI/DEFINITY CSI configurations), and AAR/ARS are
enabled.
On the MMCX, MASI must be enabled using the chgmasi command.
Step 2 — Establish maintenance parameters
and alarming options (Avaya)

Ensure that on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters screen, the Packet
Bus Activated field is y.
Using the set options command (Avaya init or inads logins only), set MASI
alarming options. For more information, see the Avaya MultiVantage Maintenance
and DEFNITY Server for the appropriate model.
Step 3 — Establish the physical connection

Establish the physical connection between the Avaya DEFINITY Server and the
MMCX. For more information about installing the cables, see Installation for
Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions.
Step 4 — Administer circuit pack

Using the DS1 Circuit Pack screen, verify that the DS1 circuit pack you use to
establish the MASI link is administered as follows:

555-233-506

■

Bit Rate = 1.544

■

Line Coding = b8zs

■

Line Compensation = 1

■

Signaling Mode = isdn-pri

Issue 5 October 2002

283

Managing multimedia calling

■

Interface = network

■

Country Protocol = 1

■

Protocol Version = a

Step 5 — Administer a signaling group

For each MASI node, you need to establish a unique signaling group. Use the
command add signaling-group xxx to access the Signaling Group screen.
Page 1 of 5
Group Number: _

SIGNALING GROUP
Associated Signaling? y
Primary D-Channel: ______

Max number of NCA TSC: __
Max number of CA TSC: __
Trunk Group for NCA TSC: __

Trunk Group for Channel Selection: ___

Screen 5. Signaling Group (Page 1 of 5)

For each link, establish a Non-Call Associated Temporary Signaling Connection
(NCA-TSC) with the following attributes:
■

Associated Signaling — MASI requires Facility Associated Signaling, so

this field must be set to y.
■

Primary D-channel — Enter a 6- to 7-character port number associated
with the DS1 Interface circuit pack port. The port address of the PRI that
carries D-channel signaling.

The port number is used to assign the primary D-channel in the Signaling
Group. For 24-channel facilities, the 24th port is assigned as the D-channel.
For 32-channel facilities, the 16th port is assigned as the D-channel.

284

■

Max Number of NCA TSC — For MASI, this must be 1.

■

Max number of CA TSC — Leave the default of 0.

■

Trunk Group For NCA TSC — This can be left blank.

■

Trunk Group for Channel Selection — This can be left blank.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

Page 2 of 5
ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT
Service/Feature: ___________
As-needed Inactivity Time-out (min):_
TSC
Local
Adj.
Mach.
Index
Ext.
Enabled Established
Dest. Digits
Appl.
Name
ID
1:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
2:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
3:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
4:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
5:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
6:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
7:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
8:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
9:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
10:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
11:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
12:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
13:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
14:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
15:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__

Screen 6. Administered NCA TSC Assignment page of the Signaling Group screen
■

Service/Feature — Leave blank.

■

As-needed Inactivity Time-out (min) — This field only applies to

as-needed NCA-TSCs. Since MASI requires a permanent connection,
leave blank.
■

■

■

TSC Index — This display-only field specifies the administered
NCA-TSCs assigned.
Local Ext — Enter a valid, unassigned Avaya MultiVantage extension.
This extension does not need a port assignment and does not need to
correspond to any other administration.
Enabled — Enter\ to enable the administered NCA-TSC. You may want

to wait to enable this link until all other administration is in place. If this is
y, Avaya MultiVantage attempts to establish the connection as soon as you

submit the form. This may cause your system to alarm, if other
administration is not finished.
■

■

Establish — Used to indicate the strategy for establishing this
administered NCA-TSC. Enter permanent for MASI.
Dest. Digits — A valid MMCX extension. This must correspond to the
value of the tscnum argument to the chgmasi command.
NOTE:

These digits are sent as entered to the destination MMCX; no routing
or other digit manipulation is performed.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

285

Managing multimedia calling

■

■

Appl. — Specifies the application this administered NCA-TSC is going to
be used for. Enter masi.
Machine ID — Used to indicate the MASI node to which this administered
NCA-TSC is connected. This number should be the same as the MASI
node number found on other screens.

How to list TSCs or determine status of the TSC

To determine which TSCs are designated for MASI, use the list masi tsc
command.

MASI TEMPORARY SIGNALING CONNECTIONS (TSC)
Sig.
Grp

Primary
D-Chan

TSC
Index

Local
Ext.

Enabled

xxx
xxx
xxx

xxxxxxx
xxxxxxx
xxxxxxx

xxx
xxx
xxx

xxxxx
xxxxx
xxxxx

x
x
x

Established

Dest. Digits

Mach.
ID

xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

xx
xx
xx

Screen 7. MASI Temporary Signaling Connections (TSC) Display

This command displays the following:
■

Sig Grp — The number of the signaling group to which this TSC belongs

■

Primary D-Channel — Port location of the Primary D-channel

■

TSC Index — The number of the MASI TSC within the signaling group

■

Local Ext. — MultiVantage extension associated with the TSC

■

Enabled — Indicates the state of the connection - enabled (y/n)

■

Established — Value of established flag (as-needed/permanent)

■

Dest. Digits — The MMCX extension that indicates the TSC destination

■

Mach. ID — MASI node number

Once you establish and enable the signaling group, you need to verify that it is
active. Use the command status signaling-group signaling-group# or status
tsc-administered signaling-group# [/tsc-index] [print] to determine if the link
is active.

286

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

Step 6 — Administer ISDN-PRI trunk group

Use the command add trunk-group xxx to access the Trunk Groups screen. For a
more detailed description of the ISDN-PRI trunk group, see ‘‘ISDN trunk group’’
on page 936.
Establish an ISDN-PRI trunk group with the following attributes:
Page 1
■

Group Type = isdn-pri

■

TAC = valid TAC that conforms to your existing dial plan

■

Direction = two-way

■

Service Type = tie

■

CDR Reports = n

You must also administer the PRI link from the MMCX to the ECS, using the
MMCX administration terminal. See the MMCX Technical Reference for
information on the addpri command.
Step 7 — Administer MASI Path Parameters

Use the change masi path-parameters command to access the MASI Path
Parameters screen.

MASI PATH PARAMETERS
Near-End Path Extension: _____
MASI Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Trunk Group
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Far-End Path Termination Number
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

Screen 8. MASI Path Parameters screen

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

287

Managing multimedia calling

Establish a MASI Path with the following attributes:
■

Near-End Path Extension — An unassigned MultiVantage extension.
When using the chgmasi command to administer the MMCX, this is the
farpath extension. See the MMCX Technical Reference for more
information.

■

MASI Node — The node number for the MMCX. For each MMCX/MASI
node, this number must be the same everywhere it occurs (signaling group,
masi trunk group, and masi terminal screens).

■

Trunk Group — This is the MultiVantage trunk group number for the

ISDN-PRI trunk that will be used to establish call paths.
■

Far-End Path Termination Number — This is an unassigned MMCX
extension. When using the chgmasi command to administer the MMCX,

this is the nearpath extension. See the MMCX Technical Reference for more
information.
Step 8 — Administer MASI trunk groups

You use the MASI trunk group screen to define MMCX interfaces that
interconnect MASI nodes, or that connect MMCX nodes to another private switch
or central office. Examples of MMCX interfaces include:
■

PRI trunks linking MMCX servers

■

PRI trunks linking MMCX to the PSTN

■

PRI trunks from MMCX to a MultiVantage system that are used for
purposes other than MASI

■

‘‘LAN’’ interfaces linking MMCX servers

Use the command add masi trunk-group xxx (or ‘next’) to access the MASI
Trunk Group screen. The trunk group number must not be assigned, and you
cannot exceed the maximum total trunks for your system. Valid values for xxx are
unused MultiVantage trunk group numbers between 1–96 for DEFINITY
SI/DEFINITY CSI configurations, and 1–120 for DEFINITY R configurations.

288

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

MASI TRUNK GROUP
Group Number: 15
Group Name: INCOMING CALL______________ COR: 1_
MASI Node Number: __

TN: 1

CDR Reports? y
TAC: 915_

Remote Group Number: _

Screen 9. MASI Trunk Group screen
■

Group Number — This field displays the MASI trunk group number. This
is the number assigned when executing the add masi trunk-group

command.
■

CDR Reports — Valid entries are y, n, and r. Default is y.

— If you enter y, CDR records will be generated by completed
outgoing calls terminated on this trunk group. If incoming calls are
being recorded (the Record Outgoing Calls Only field on the CDR
System Parameters screen is set to n), then a single CDR record will
be generated for answered calls with the call duration.
— If you enter n, no CDR records will be generated by calls originated
by or terminated on this trunk group.
■

Group Name — Enter a unique name that identifies the trunk group. Up to

27 characters can be used; default is “INCOMING CALL.”
■

COR — Enter a class of restriction (COR) number (0–95) that reflects the

desired restriction; default is “1.”
■

■

TN — This field displays the Tenant Partition number. All MASI trunks are
associated with Tenant 1.
TAC — Enter the trunk access code (‘‘TAC’’) that identifies the trunk

group on CDR reports. You must assign a different TAC to each MMCX
interface. Valid entries conform to the dial plan (1–4 digits, * and # are
valid first digits).
■

MASI Node Number — The node number assigned to this MMCX

machine.
■

555-233-506

Remote Group Number — This is the number of the remote trunk group.
For ISDN-PRI interfaces, valid values are any number 1–8; for local area
network (LAN) or WAN calling interfaces, the value must be 9. The

Issue 5 October 2002

289

Managing multimedia calling

combination of MASI Node Number and Remote Group Number must be
unique. Remote group number corresponds to the group number on the
MASI node.
How to view a list of all MASI trunk groups

To view a list of all the MASI trunks administered on the ECS, use the command
list masi trunk-group.

MASI TRUNK GROUP
Group
Number

TAC

Group Name

Node
Number

Remote
Grp No.

CDR

COR

TN

xxx

xxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

xx

x

x

xx

xxx

Screen 10.

List masi trunk-group output

How to determine the status of MASI trunk groups

To determine the status of a specific MASI trunk, use the command status masi
trunk-group xxx, where xxx is the trunk group number. This command provides
descriptive information about the trunk, and the number of currently active trunk
calls.

MASI TRUNK GROUP STATUS
Group Number: xxx
MASI Node Number: xx
Remote Group Number: xxx

Number of Active MMCX Trunk Calls: xxx

Screen 11. Status masi trunk-group output

290

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

Step 9 — Administer MASI terminals

Use the add masi terminal xxxxx or next command to administer each MASI
terminal as a MASI terminal. You use available extensions on the ECS, so they
need to conform to the Avaya MultiVantage dial plan. The extension must match
the MultiVantage dial plan, and for the add command, the extension must not
already be in use.The extension of the MASI terminal must match the number of
the MASI terminal.
Avaya MultiVantage users dial the MASI Terminal Extension to reach MMCX
users.
NOTE:

Anytime you add a terminal or other extension to the MMCX, you must
administer a corresponding MASI terminal on the Avaya MultiVantage
solution. If you do not, you will not be able to dial this extension from the
Avaya MultiVantage solution.

MASI TERMINAL
Extension: 1000

BCC: 0
MASI Node Number: __ TN: 1__
COR: 1_

Name: ___________________________

TERMINAL OPTIONS
Send Display Info? y

Screen 12.

MASI Terminal screen — page 1
■

Extension — This field displays the extension that you entered on the
command line.

■

BCC — This field displays the bearer capability class of the terminal, and
identifies the type of traffic the terminal supports. For MASI, this is always
0, for voice or voice-grade data.

■

MASI Node Number — The number of the node on which this terminal

resides.

555-233-506

■

TN — The tenant partition in which this terminal resides. At present, all
MASI terminals must reside within tenant 1. This field is display-only, and
always 1.

■

COR — The class of restriction associated with this terminal.

Issue 5 October 2002

291

Managing multimedia calling

■

Name — The name associated with the terminal. This can be any

alphanumeric string up to 27 characters.
■

Send Display Info — Indicates whether Avaya MultiVantage should
forward display information associated with a call. Set to y.
MASI TERMINAL

FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception: none___
CDR Privacy? n

AUDIX Name: ________

Screen 13.

MASI Terminal screen — page 2
■

LWC Reception — This field indicates whether the terminal can receive

Leave Word Calling (‘‘LWC’’) messages. Valid values are none, audix, and
spe (for DEFINITY R configurations) or mas-spe (for DEFINITY
SI/DEFINITY CSI configurations). SPE-based LWC is not supported for
MASI terminals. However, if embedded AUDIX is used without a Data
Control Link, you must administer MASI terminals to receive SPE-based
LWC messages. For such cases, the LWC feature is used by AUDIX to
activate and deactivate message waiting lamps on MASI terminals.
■

292

CDR Privacy — Indicates whether CDR Privacy is supported for this
terminal. See ‘‘Call detail recording’’ on page 1553 for more information.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

■

AUDIX Name — This field only appears on DEFINITY R configurations.
This field contains the name of the AUDIX adjunct for LWC messages. If
LWC reception field is set to audix, this field must contain a name. The
name must match a machine name on the Adjunct Names screen.
MASI TERMINAL

SITE DATA
Room:
Jack:
Cable:
Floor:
Building:

_______
_____
_____
_______
_______

BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: call-appr

Screen 14.

MASI Terminal screen — page 3
■

■

Room — Enter up to 10 characters to identify the MASI terminal location.
This field may be blank.
Jack — Enter up to 5 characters to identify the location where the MASI

terminal is connected. This field may be left blank.
■

■

■

■

Cable — Enter up to 5 characters to identify the cable that connects the
MASI terminal to the system. This field may be left blank.
Floor — Enter up to 7 characters to identify the floor where the MASI
terminal is located.
Building — Enter up to 7 characters to identify the building where the
MASI terminal is located. Valid entries are listed in the site table.
Button Assignments — This field contains a call appearance button and

is display only.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

293

Managing multimedia calling

Duplicate MASI terminal

Once you have one MASI terminal administered to your liking, you can use the
duplicate masi terminal command to administer other stations with the same
characteristics.

MASI TERMINAL

Ext
77777
77778
77779
77781
77782
77783
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Name
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________

Screen 15.

Room
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

Jack
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Cable
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Duplicate MASI Terminal screen

How to list and status MASI terminals

To view a list of all the MASI terminals administered on the ECS, use the
command list masi terminals.This command only lists terminals within the
domain of the Avaya DEFINITY Server from whose SAT you issue the command.
MASI TERMINALS

Ext

Name

xxxxx
xxxxx
xxxxx
xxxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Screen 16.

294

Node
Number CDR COR TN
xx
xx
xx
xx

x
x
x
x

xx
xx
xx
xx

xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx

List MASI Terminal output

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

To view the active or idle status of a specific MASI terminal, use the command
status masi terminal (extension).
GENERAL STATUS
TYPE: MASI
Extension: 54001
MASI Node Number: 14

Screen 17.

Service State: active

Status MASI terminal command

To determine which extension you assigned as the MASI Near-End Path
Termination extension, use the command list extension-type. This command
displays the extension number and type (attendant, masi-terminal, etc.), as well as
other information about the extension.
EXTENSION TYPE

Ext
--1234
4077

Type
---masi-terminal
term-masi-path-call

Screen 18.

Name
----

COR
--1

TN
-1

COS
--1

Cv1/
Cv2
----

List extension type

Step 10 — Administer features
AAR/ARS

1. AAR/ARS is an optional feature on Avaya MultiVantage, and you need to
purchase this option to use it with MMCX. To verify that this feature is
enabled, use the command display system-parameters
customer-options. If it is not enabled, contact your Avaya representative.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

295

Managing multimedia calling

2. The MMCX dial plan must use the same feature access codes as Avaya
MultiVantage. If this is not already the case, modify the MMCX dial plan
using the chgdp command. See the MMCX Technical Reference for more
information.
3. Include this feature access code in the chgmasi command.
CDR

1. To get call detail records for calls over MMCX interfaces, set
CDR Reports = y on the MASI Trunk Group screen.
2. To get call records for calls over the ISDN-PRI trunk group, set
CDR Reports = y on the ISDN-PRI Trunk Group screen.
3. To track calls between a MASI terminal and other MASI terminals or
MultiVantage stations, enter the MASI terminal extension on the
Intraswitch CDR screen.
4. Enter n in the Record Non-Call Assoc TSC field on the CDR System
Parameters screen.
NOTE:

If you use the same PRI trunks for MASI and non-MASI calls, Avaya
strongly recommends that you do not enable CDR for these calls. Establish a
separate trunk group for non-MASI calls and set CDR Reports = n.
Coverage

To establish coverage from a MASI terminal to AUDIX:
1. Use the MMCX user interface to enter the AUDIX hunt group extension as
the coverage point. You cannot use MultiVantage coverage administration
for MASI terminals.
2. If AUDIX ports are not administered on MultiVantage, do so.
3. Set up the MASI terminal as an AUDIX subscriber. Enter the MASI
terminal extension in the extension field on the Subscriber Administration
screen.
To establish coverage from a MASI terminal to another MMCX terminal or
MultiVantage station:
1. Use the MMCX user interface to enter the desired extension as the
coverage point for the MASI terminal. You cannot use MultiVantage
coverage administration for MASI terminals.

296

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

Step 11 — Verify administration

Make test calls from MultiVantage to MMCX, ensure that you can indeed place
and receive calls.
Call an unattended MASI terminal. Verify that the call goes to AUDX. Retrieve
the call from the MASI terminal. Verify that all works as expected.
MASI command permissions

If you are the super-user for your system, you can restrict other administrative
logins from changing MASI administration. To do this, use the change
permissions (login-ID) command. Enter y in the Additional Restrictions field,
then move to the Restricted Object List page of the screen.
You may restrict the following MASI-related objects:
■

masi-path-parameters

■

masi-terminal

■

masi-trunk-group

■

masi-tsc

Detailed description of features
AAR/ARS

MMCX can take advantage of advanced routing features for voice-only calls to
the public switched telephone network (PSTN) or a DEFINTY system private
network. Users must enter the AAR/ARS access code before the rest of the dialed
digits. MASI will route the call over the MultiVantage private network (AAR) or
the public network (ARS), based on the digits supplied by the MMCX user.
Routing patterns must contain only trunk groups that actually terminate on the
Avaya MultiVantage solution. Calls from one MMCX to another do not use
AAR/ARS. Authorization codes are not supported.
Call Detail Recording

Using the MASI link, MultiVantage is able to track call detail information for
calls made using MMCX terminals and interfaces. CDR records all calls
originating from or terminating at a MASI terminal. MASI CDR does not record
ineffective call attempts when all MASI paths are busy.
The Resource Flag value of 8 indicates a MASI call. This field appears in
unformatted, int-isdn, expanded and customized CDR formats. For formats other
than these, you can determine that a call involves a MASI terminal or trunk by the
TAC, dialed number or calling number fields.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

297

Managing multimedia calling

The following are the CDR capabilities of MASI. Administration information is
under the heading ‘‘How to administer MASI’’ on page 283.
■

Incoming/Outgoing Trunk Call Splitting
Call splitting does not produce separate records for MMCX calls that are
transferred or conferenced.

■

Intraswitch CDR
You can administer intraswitch CDR to monitor MASI terminals. To do
this, simply add the MASI terminal extension on the Intraswitch CDR
screen. MultiVantage then monitors calls from MASI terminals to other
MASI terminals, and calls between MASI terminals and MultiVantage
stations.

■

CDR Privacy
You can administer a MASI terminal for CDR Privacy.

■

Account Code Dialing and Forced Entry of Account Codes
This is not supported for MASI terminals. Therefore, make sure the COR
you assign does not force entry of account codes.

■

Trunk CDR
You can get call detail records for all incoming and outgoing calls made
over MMCX interfaces.

Call redirection / Voice-messaging access

MMCX users can enter a MultiVantage extension, including an AUDIX hunt
group, Callmaster agent, attendant console or telephone as their coverage point.
If AUDIX is established as the MASI terminal’s coverage point, the MASI
terminal receives message waiting indication, and dials the AUDIX hunt group
extension to retrieve messages. Once connected to AUDIX, operation for the
MMCX user is the same as for a MultiVantage station user, including use of # to
identify the extension, if desired.
NOTE:

It is not possible to determine the call coverage status of a MASI terminal.
MultiVantage tracks calls to MASI terminals that follow the autonomous coverage
path from the MASI terminal. MMCX calls redirected to MultiVantage stations
contain display information.
MASI terminals that dial AUDIX directly, or that place calls to MASI terminals
that cover to AUDIX, do not receive ringback if all AUDIX ports are busy.
Instead, these callers see a message that the called party is busy, and the call
drops.

298

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

Transfer

MASI terminals cannot transfer calls to MultiVantage stations, and cannot transfer
a call to another MASI terminal if the call involves a MultiVantage station.
Conferencing

Conferences can involve both MASI terminals and MultiVantage stations, and
either one may initiate the conference. MultiVantage stations participate in such
conferences in voice-only mode. If an MMCX user initiates a conference that
involves MultiVantage stations, the conference will drop when the initiator drops
from the call. If a MultiVantage station initiates the conference, that station may
drop without affecting the other conferees.
Status tracking - terminals and trunks

Avaya MultiVantage tracks the active/idle status of all MASI terminals, and
monitors traffic over MMCX interfaces.
Trunk groups

For MASI purposes, there are two kinds of trunk groups: the ISDN-PRI trunk
groups that serve as paths for establishing calls between MultiVantage stations or
trunks and MASI terminals or interfaces, and the remote trunks that are interfaces
from the MMCX to other entities. Each MASI remote trunk group appears to the
switch as a single unit, with no concept of members within the group.
NOTE:

You cannot test, busy out, or release MASI remote trunk groups, since you
cannot dial a MASI remote trunk TAC from the Avaya DEFINITY Server.
The TAC merely identifies the trunk to the switch for status and CDR.
You cannot administer MASI trunks as part of MultiVantage route patterns.
Interactions & Unsupported Features

We can generalize feature interactions to some extent. For example, since there
are no buttons available to a MASI terminal, any feature that requires a button is
also not available. MASI cannot support features that require the user to dial a
trunk access code for a MASI remote trunk, or a feature access code other than
AAR/ARS. The MMCX dial plan may contain only those feature access codes
that are supported.

! CAUTION:
DO NOT ADMINISTER the following features! The following features are not
supported for use over the MASI link, and Avaya cannot be responsible for the results if
you attempt to administer them.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

299

Managing multimedia calling

Unsupported Call Center features
■

ASAI — You must not administer a MASI terminal in an ASAI domain.
MASI terminals and MMCX trunks are not monitored by ASAI. It may be
possible for a MASI terminal to place a call to a MultiVantage station that
is part of an ASAI domain. ASAI will not be blocked from controlling this
call, but there may be unpredictable results. The same is true for calls
originating from an ASAI domain terminating at MASI terminals, and for
ASAI-monitored hunt groups that contain MASI terminals.

■

Automatic Call Distribution — You must not include a MASI terminal
extension as part of an ACD hunt group. You must not mix MASI
administration with anything related to ACD, including Outbound Call
Management and PASTE.

■

Call Vectoring — You must not include MASI terminal extensions in any
step of a vector.

Unsupported Basic features

300

■

Bridged Call Appearances — You must not administer a bridged
appearance that involves a MASI terminal.

■

Call Coverage — You must not administer a MASI terminal in a
MultiVantage station’s coverage path.

■

Call Forwarding — You must not forward a MultiVantage station to a
MASI terminal.

■

Call Pickup — You must not administer a MASI terminal as part of a
pickup group.

■

Intercom — You must not administer MASI terminals as members of any
type of intercom group.

■

Manual Message Waiting — You must not administer a manual message
waiting button (man-msg-wt) with a MASI terminal as the referenced
extension.

■

Manual Signaling — You must not administer a manual signaling button
(signal) with a MASI terminal as the referenced extension.

■

Night Service — You must not administer a MASI terminal as a night
service destination.

■

Pull transfer — MASI terminals cannot perform a pull transfer operation.
You must not administer this feature on an ECS where MASI is active. This
applies only in Italy.

■

Station Hunting — You must not administer a MASI terminal as part of a
station hunting path.

■

Terminating Extension Groups — You must not administer a MASI
terminal as part of a TEG.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

Other interactions

The following section describes feature behaviors that may not be as expected, but
that are not likely to be destructive.
Attendant features

555-233-506

■

Dial Access to the Attendant — MASI terminals will be able to dial the
attendant access code, if it is administered in the MMCX dial plan.

■

Attendant Direct Extension Selection — Attendants are able to access
MASI terminals via DXS buttons and busy lamp indicates status of the
MASI terminal.

■

Emergency Access to the Attendant — MASI terminals have emergency
access using the attendant access code, if it is administered in the MMCX
dial plan. However, off-hook alerting is not administrable.

■

Attendant Intrusion — Attendants are able to activate intrusion towards
MASI terminals.

■

Attendant Override — Attendants are not able to activate override towards
MASI terminals.

■

Attendant Recall — MASI terminals cannot activate attendant recall.

■

Attendant Remote Trunk Group Select — Attendants cannot use this
feature to select MASI remote trunks.

■

Attendant Return Call — Operates normally if a MASI terminal is the
called party.

■

Attendant Serial Call — Serial calls are denied if the calling party is an
MMCX interface.

■

Attendant Straightforward Outward Completion — The attendant is able to
complete calls to MultiVantage trunks for MASI terminals.

■

Attendant Through Dialing —The attendant can use Through Dialing to
pass dial tone to MASI terminals.

■

Attendant Timers — Attendant timers work the same no matter what kind
of terminal is involved.

■

Attendant Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators — You cannot administer
Busy/Warning indicators for MASI trunks because they are not standard
MultiVantage trunks. However, you can administer these indicators for the
trunk group administered for MASI paths.

■

Attendant Trunk Identification — The attendant is not able to identify the
trunk name via button pushes.

Issue 5 October 2002

301

Managing multimedia calling

Basic features

302

■

Abbreviated Dialing — A MultiVantage station can enter an MMCX
extension in an AD list. However, MASI terminals cannot use AD.

■

Administered Connections — MASI terminals must not be the originator
nor the destination of an administered connection.

■

Automatic Callback — Automatic callback does not work towards a MASI
terminal.

■

Automatic Circuit Assurance — You must not administer a MASI terminal
as an ACA referral destination. You cannot administer ACA for MASI
remote trunks.

■

Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks — You cannot use Busy
Verification for MASI terminals or remote trunks.

■

Call Detail Recording — CDR Account Code Dialing and Forced Entry of
Account Codes are not supported for MASI terminals. See Call Detail
Recording in Detailed Description for more information.

■

Call Park — The attendant can park calls at the extension of a MASI
terminal, but users can only retrieve these calls from a MultiVantage
station, since MASI terminals cannot dial the Answer Back FAC.

■

Data Call Setup — MultiVantage users cannot place data calls to MASI
terminals.

■

Facility Busy Indication — You can use FBI to track the status of MASI
terminals. The FBI button and indicator lamp must be on a MultiVantage
station. You cannot use FBI to track MMCX interfaces.

■

Facility Test Calls — MultiVantage users cannot make test calls to MMCX
interfaces.

■

Go to Cover — MASI terminals cannot activate this feature.

■

Leave Word Calling — The only valid LWC destination for a MASI
terminal is AUDIX. You cannot administer SPE-based LWC. MASI
terminals cannot send LWC messages to MultiVantage stations or MASI
terminals.

■

Loudspeaker paging — You can administer a MASI terminal as a code
calling extension.

■

Malicious Call Trace — MASI terminals cannot initiate malicious call
trace.

■

Message Retrieval — MMCX users can only retrieve messages through
AUDIX.

■

Music on Hold — Music on hold will only be available if a MultiVantage
station has placed the call on hold.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Applications Server Interface

■

Override — Executive override does not work towards MASI terminals.

■

Priority Calling — Priority calling is not supported for calls to or from
MASI terminals.

■

Ringback Queueing — Ringback Queueing is not supported for MASI
terminals.

■

Send All Calls — MMCX has an autonomous SAC function. See Call
Redirection for more information.

■

Tenant Partitioning — All MASI terminals exist in tenant 1, and you
cannot change the tenant number.

■

Time of Day coverage — As with all coverage, MultiVantage does not
control coverage of the MASI terminal.

■

Transfer out of AUDIX — A MASI terminal cannot use *T to transfer
from AUDIX to another MASI terminal.

Hospitality features
■

Do Not Disturb — MASI terminals cannot activate Do Not Disturb.

Multimedia features
■

Multimedia Call Handling — Avaya MMCH users are not able to make
H.320 calls to MASI terminals over the MASI link. Calls between MMCX
terminals and MMCH terminals are voice only.

Troubleshooting

Verify proper operation using the following commands and follow normal
escalation procedures to resolve any failures detected by the demand test.
1. Verify the DS1 trunk using the test board  long
command.
2. Verify the ISDN Signaling Group using the test signaling-group  command. Also verify proper administration.
3. Verify the temporary signaling connection using the test tsc-administered
 command. Also verify proper administration.
Common error conditions

If the cable from the ECS to the MMCX becomes disconnected, you should see
alarms raised against ISDN-SGRP and UDS1-BD. In particular, you should
observe ISDN-SGRP errors such as 769, 1793, and 257. To resolve, reconnect the
cable and follow normal test procedures.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

303

Managing multimedia calling

If the far-end path termination number is incorrect, you should observe
MASI-PTH error 513. To resolve, correct administration using the MASI Path
Parameters screen.
If the Layer 3 TSC is not administered properly or is out of service, you should
observe errors (but no alarms) raised against TSC-ADM. Verify the signaling
group administration and follow normal escalation procedures for TSC-ADM.
See the appropriate Avaya MultiVantage Maintenance manual for more
information.
If the TSC fails to come up even through Layer 2 Signaling Group and below pass
tests, you may run test tsc-administered  to force a switch
heartbeat test, or simply wait 5–10 minutes for the link to recover. This situation
may happen if the switch is rebooted or if the MASI interface is administered
before the MMCX is properly administered.
You may want to use busy port and release port commands to unlock things if
features are not working.

Multimedia Call Handling
Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) enables users to control voice, video, and
data transmissions using a telephone and PC. Users can conduct video
conferences and route calls like a standard voice call. They can also share PC
applications to collaborate with others working from remote sites.
Operations in Basic or Enhanced modes

There are two distinct levels of functionality: Basic and Enhanced. The Basic
mode of operation treats a standard-protocol H.320 multimedia call as a data call.
If the call is redirected, it is converted to a voice call. As a voice call, certain
features are enabled, such as coverage, voice mail, and multiparty video
conferencing.
The Enhanced mode of operation allows a multifunction telephone to control a
multimedia call as if it were a standard voice call. Spontaneous video
conferencing, call forwarding, call coverage, hold, transfer and park, along with
many routing features, are available to multimedia calls. Both modes of operation
allow data collaboration between multiple parties using the T.120 standard
protocol.

304

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

Definitions: MMCH features and components
Multimedia call

A multimedia call, for MMCH, is one that conforms to the H.320 and T.120 suite
of protocol standards. These standards allow video-conferencing packages from
different vendors to communicate with one another. The capabilities of the
individual multimedia-endpoint package can vary, however.
■

An H.320 call can contain voice, video and data.

■

The bandwidth for MMCH calls is limited to 2 B-channels.

Any vendor’s
H.320 DVC
product

DEFINITY

BRI
port
circuit
card

DEFINITY
DCP
multifunction
telephone

DCP
port
circuit
card
cydfdvc1 LJK 121997

Figure 9. MMCH multimedia complex

Basic multimedia complex

A Basic multimedia complex consists of a BRI-connected multimedia-equipped
PC and a non-BRI-connected multifunction telephone administered in Basic
mode. With a Basic multimedia complex, users place voice calls at the
multifunction telephone and multimedia calls from the multimedia equipped PC.
Voice calls will be answered at the multifunction telephone and multimedia calls
will alert first at the PC and, if unanswered, will next alert at the voice station. A
Basic multimedia complex provides a loose integration of the voice station and
H.320 DVC system.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

305

Managing multimedia calling

Enhanced multimedia complex

An Enhanced multimedia complex consists of a BRI-connected
multimedia-equipped PC and a non-BRI-connected multifunction telephone
administered in Enhanced mode. The Enhanced multimedia complex acts as
though the PC were directly connected to the multifunction telephone. Thus, voice
call control, multimedia call control and call status are enabled at the telephone.
An Enhanced multimedia complex provides a tight integration of the voice station
and H.320 DVC system.
Multimedia endpoint

The multimedia endpoint is a user’s PC that has been equipped with an H.320
multimedia package. The PC is physically connected to the Avaya MultiVantage
solution with a BRI line.

VC

DEFINITY
Audio
conditioning

BRI

MMI
H.320
protocols

Audio stream
Video stream
Data stream

cydfdvc2 LJK 011498

Figure 10.

306

Enhanced MMCH service link

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

Enhanced mode service link

The service link is the combined hardware and software multimedia connection
between the user’s multimedia endpoint and the Avaya DEFINITY Server which
terminates the H.320 protocol. The service link provides video, data, and,
optionally, voice streams to augment the capabilities of the telephone and PC. A
service link only applies to an Enhanced multimedia complex, never to a Basic
multimedia complex. The service link is administered on the station screen and
can be either “permanent” or “as-needed.”
Feature Description

MMCH’s two levels of functionality for a multimedia complex, Basic and
Enhanced mode, are enabled either by switch administration or by an mm-basic
feature button or FAC.
Basic Mode Operation
In Basic Mode:
■

All voice-only calls originate at the voice station.

■

All multimedia calls originate with the H.320 DVC system.

■

All incoming voice calls attempt to alert at the voice station and receive all
standard voice call treatment.

■

All incoming H.320 multimedia calls attempt to alert on the H.320 DVC
system initially. If answered, a 2-way video call will result. The Basic
multimedia complex voice station will not be involved in the call in any
way.
If the H.320 multimedia call is not answered at the H.320 DVC system and
the Basic multimedia complex voice station has the H.320 field
administered to “y”, the call will:
— timeout at the DVC system
— alert at the associated voice station set as a voice-only call
— receive all standard voice call treatment.

■

Call control depends on what type of call is being originated.
— Video is received and controlled at the PC.
— Voice is received and controlled at the telephone set.

■

555-233-506

The voice station of a Basic multimedia complex must manually add their
multimedia endpoint to a multimedia conference. There is limited support
for multimedia feature interactions. A specific set of voice features work
for multimedia calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

307

Managing multimedia calling

■

Service Links are not used by Basic mode complexes.

■

A single number may be used to reach the Basic multimedia complex for
voice or H.320 multimedia calls.

Enhanced Mode Operation

The Enhanced multimedia complex provides a much more tightly coupled
integration of the complex voice station and H.320 DVC system. In Enhanced
Mode:
■

Both multimedia and voice calls must originate at the telephone set.

■

Voice and multimedia calls can be controlled at the telephone set.

■

Conferencing is spontaneous and established just like a voice-only
conference call.

■

There is extensive support for multimedia feature interaction. Most voice
features work the same for multimedia calls.

■

Service Links can be either “permanent” or “as-needed.”

Physical Installation

The physical components necessary to utilize MMCH capabilities include:
■

H.320 DVC systems that are BRI connected to the Avaya DEFINITY
Server.

■

Non-BRI multifunction telephones.

■

Avaya TN787 MultiMedia Interface (MMI) and TN788 Voice Conditioner
(VC) boards.

■

A T.120 Enhanced Services Module (ESM) server (necessary only if you
plan to do T.210 data collaboration). Connectivity of the ESM requires an
additional TN787 along with a TN2207 DS1 circuit pack.

Dual Port Desktop

Both Basic and Enhanced multimedia complexes are dual-port desktops that
consist of:
■

a BRI-connected multimedia-equipped PC that supports the H.320 protocol

■

a non-BRI-connected multifunction telephone set.

The PC and the multifunction telephone are individually wired to the Avaya
DEFINITY Server. These two pieces of equipment can be administratively
associated to form a Basic or ENHANCED multimedia complex

308

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

MMCH works with any H.320 system that is fully H.320 compliant and operates
at the 2B or 128K rate.
NOTE:

If you intend to share applications among users or whiteboard capabilities,
the endpoint software you choose must also support the T.120 protocol.
The following endpoint-software packages have been tested:
■

PictureTel PCS 50 & PCS 100, Release 1.6T

■

Proshare 2.0a, 2.1

■

Zydacron Z250 Ver. 2.02, Z350 Ver. 1.2 (With Netmeeting 2.0)

MMI & VC hardware

The MMCH feature requires the use of two additional circuit packs:
■

Multi Media Interface (MMI) TN787J.

■

Voice Conditioner (VC) TN788B.

The TN787 and TN788 are service circuit packs. The TN787 supports
simultaneous operation of 16 2B H.320 calls. The TN788 supports the voice
processing for 4 H.320 endpoints.
■

These service circuit packs may be located in any Port Network.

■

These packs do not require any translations as part of their implementation.

■

The MMI and VC circuit packs are resource circuit packs akin to the Tone
Detector circuit packs.

■

These circuit packs require no switch administration and may be located in
multiple port networks.

T.120 Data Collaboration Server

The Expansion Services Module (ESM) provides T.120 data collaboration
capability on a MMCH multipoint H.320 video conference.

555-233-506

■

Each person in the conference who wants to participate in the data
collaboration session, must have a personal computer with an H.320 video
application that supports the T.120 protocol.

■

The Avaya DEFINITY Server must have an ESM installed.

Issue 5 October 2002

309

Managing multimedia calling

ESM Installation

Figure Notes

1. Port B Y-cable connector to a TN787
5. D8W cord connected to 356A
multimedia interface (MMI) circuit pack
adapter S/B port 8
2. Port A Y-cable connector to a TN2207
PRI circuit pack

6. Expansion service module
(ESM)

3. 25-pair Y-cable

7. Port B on compatible primary
rate interface (PRI) card

4. 356A adapter

Figure 11. Typical Multimedia Call handling ESM Connections

Use the following procedure and Figure 11 to connect to the ESM equipment:
1. Install the TN2207 primary rate interface (PRI) circuit pack and the TN787
multimedia interface (MMI) circuit pack in the MultiVantage System port
carrier.
NOTE:

These two circuit packs should be co-located in the cabinet since they
must be connected by a Y-cable on the back plane of the Avaya
DEFINITY Server.
2. Record the circuit pack locations.
3. Connect the ESM Y-cable as shown.
4. Administer the DS1 screen and the signaling-group screen for the ESM
(see ‘‘ESM T.120 Server Administration’’ on page 321).
5. Configure the ESM adjunct.

310

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

Planning for MMCH

The following are some of the tasks you perform in planning and administering
MMCH.
Planning the system

This is a list of questions to help you use Avaya MultiVantage for multimedia.
■

How many MMCH users are you going to have?

■

How many multimedia calls do you expect to have at any given time?

With the information above you can determine how many Voice Conditioner (VC)
and Multimedia Interface (MMI) circuit packs you need.
■

Will users need data collaboration capabilities? If so, you need to install the
Expansion Service Module (ESM).

■

Which stations, hunt groups or vectors need early answer?

■

Do you have ISDN-PRI trunks? It is possible to use separate DS1 trunks
for data, but ISDN-PRI trunks are recommended.

Installation checklist

1. Purchase MMCH right-to-use.
2. Avaya — enable MMCH on System Parameters Customer-Options screen.
3. Administer default multimedia outgoing trunk parameter selection on the
Feature-Related System-Parameters Features screen.
4. Administer MMCH related feature access codes on the Feature Access
Code screen.
5. Install and administer hardware:
■

Install MMIs, VCs and ESM.

■

Administer ESM to ECS connection — DS1 Circuit Pack and
Signaling Group screens.

■

Establish maintenance parameters — Maintenance-Related System
Parameters screen.

6. Administer multimedia complexes:

555-233-506

■

Administer data modules — Data Module screen, or Data Module
page of the Station screen.

■

Administer stations as part of a multimedia complex, assign
associated data module extension, multimedia mode, service link
mode and appropriate multimedia buttons — Station screen.

Issue 5 October 2002

311

Managing multimedia calling

7. Administer early answer and H.320 flag for stations, the early answer flag
for hunt groups, and the multimedia flag for vectors as appropriate.
8. Train end users.
9. Monitor traffic and performance.
Related screens
■

System-Parameters Customer-Options
— Multimedia Call Handling (Basic)
— Multimedia Call Handling (Enhanced)

■

Feature Related System-Parameters
— Default Multimedia Outgoing Trunk Parameter Selection (p.2)

■

Maintenance-Related System Parameters
— Packet Bus Activated = y
— Minimum Maintenance Thresholds - MMIs, VCs

■

Data Module (type = 7500 or WCBRI)
— Multimedia (p. 1) = y
— XID (p. 2) = n
— MIM Support (p. 2) = n

■

Station
— MM Complex Data Ext (p. 1)
— H.320 Conversion (p. 2)
— Multimedia Early Answer (p. 2)
— Multimedia Mode (p.2)
— Service Link Mode (p.2)
— Feature Buttons (p.3) (optional)

■

Hunt Group
— MM Early Answer (optional)

■

Call Vector
— Multimedia (optional)

312

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

■

Feature Access Codes
— Basic Mode Activation (p.5)
— Enhanced Mode Activation (p.5)
— Multimedia Call Access Code (p.5)
— Multimedia Data Conference Activation & Deactivation (p.5)
The Multimedia Data Conference Deactivation FAC must be entered after
you are active on a multimedia call. To enter the FAC:
1. Select TRANSFER
2. Receive a dialtone
3. Dial the FAC
4. Receive a confirmation tone
5. Re-select the call appearance for the held multimedia call.
— Multimedia Multi-Address Access Code (p.5)
— Multimedia Parameter Access Code (p.5)

■

DS1 Circuit Pack (ESM Only)
— Bit Rate=2.048
— Line Coding=hdb3
— Signaling Mode=isdn-pri
— Connect=pbx
— Interface=network
— Country Protocol=1
— CRC=y
— MMI Cabling Board

■

Signaling group (ESM Only)
— Primary D-Channel

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

313

Managing multimedia calling

Administration commands
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen:

To enable the MMCH release 6.3 feature, you need to purchase a new license file.
System-Parameters Features screen:

The default bandwidth for MMCH calls is defined on the System-Parameters
Features screen shown below.
NOTE:

Originating a multimedia call with the mm-call button will originate a call
according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the System
Parameters Features screen.
■

This default parameter will be either 2x56 or 2x64.

■

The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be 56K or
64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.

Data module screen

The H.320 DVC system should contain a BRI interface. You must connect this
BRI interface to a port on a TN556 BRI circuit pack and administer it as a BRI
data module.

314

■

You may administer the data endpoint type as 7500 (recommended) or
WCBRI.

■

The fields for multimedia are the same on either screen.

■

The administration for a Basic mode and an Enhanced mode data module
are exactly the same.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

Page 1 of 2
DATA MODULE
Data Extension: 65001
Name: ___________________________
Type: 7500_______ COS: 1_
Multimedia? y
Port: _____
COR: 1_
MM Complex Voice Ext: 67434
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ____________
SPECIAL DIALING OPTION: hot-line
HOT LINE DESTINATION
Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code (From above list): _
CIRCUIT SWITCHED DATA ATTRIBUTES (used for modem pooling)
Default Duplex: full
Default Mode: async
Default Speed: 1200_
DATA MODULE CAPABILITIES
Default ITC: restricted
Default Data Application? M2_A

Screen 19.

Data Module screen (Page 1 of 2)

Page 2 of 2
DATA MODULE
BRI LINK/MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
XID? n
Fixed TEI? n
MIM Support? n

Screen 20.

TEI: ___

Data Module screen (Page 2 of 2)
■

Type — Set the data module type to 7500 or WCBRI.

■

Multimedia — This field appears on the data module screen only if MM is
set to y on the System-Parameters Customer Options screen. Enter y to

enable this data module to be multimedia compliant.
■

■

MM Complex Voice Ext: (display only) — This field contains the number
of the associated telephone in the complex. This is a display-only field, and
is blank until you enter the data module extension in the Station screen MM
Complex Data Ext field. Once you have done that, these two extensions are
associated as two parts of a multimedia complex.
XID and MIM Support — Valid entries are y (default) and n. These fields

must be set to n.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

315

Managing multimedia calling

Station screen

After you have administered the BRI data module, use the Station screen to
associate it with a voice station to screen a multimedia complex. This is a
one-to-one relationship: you can administer only one station and one data
endpoint per multimedia complex. Neither the voice station, nor the data endpoint
can be a member of another multimedia complex.
NOTE:

A BRI station cannot be part of a multimedia complex.
■

H.320 Conversion — Valid entries are y and n (default). This field is

optional for non-multimedia complex voice stations and for Basic
multimedia complex voice stations. It is mandatory for Enhanced
multimedia complex voice stations. Because the system can only handle a
limited number of conversion calls, you may need to limit the number of
telephones with H.320 conversion. Enhanced multimedia complexes must
have this flag set to y.
For non-multimedia complex voice stations, setting this field to y allows
H.320 calls to convert to voice and alert at the stand-alone voice station. If
the call is unanswered at the voice station, the call will follow standard
voice treatment. Any subsequent station that is reached in the routing of
this call, that is, coverage points, forwarded destinations, call pickup
members, and so forth, do not need to have the H.320 field enabled. The
H.320 field is only needed at the first station that may receive the H.320
call.
For Basic multimedia complex voice stations, setting this field to y allows
H.320 calls to convert to voice and alert at the Basic multimedia complex
voice station after an attempt has been made to offer the call to the H.320
DVC system. If the call is unanswered at the H.320 DVC system, the call
will alert at the voice station after 5 seconds or after the administered
number of rings as specified in the voice station’s coverage path. If the call
is unanswered at the voice station, the call will follow standard voice
treatment. Any subsequent station that is reached in the routing of this call,
that is, coverage points, forwarded destinations, call pickup members, and
so forth, do not need to have the H.320 field enabled. The H.320 field is
only needed at the first station that may receive the H.320 call.

316

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

■

Service Link Mode — The service link is the combined hardware and
software multimedia connection between an Enhanced mode complex’s
H.320 DVC system and the Avaya DEFINITY Server which terminates the
H.320 protocol. A service link is never used by a Basic mode complex
H.320 DVC system. Connecting a service link will take several seconds.
When the service link is connected, it uses MMI, VC and system timeslot
resources. When the service link is disconnected it does not tie up any
resources. The Service Link Mode can be administered as either
‘as-needed’ or ‘permanent’ as described below:

— As-Needed - Most non-call center multimedia users will be
administered with this service link mode. The as-needed mode
provides the Enhanced multimedia complex with a connected
service link whenever a multimedia call is answered by the station
and for a period of 10 seconds after the last multimedia call on the
station has been disconnected. Having the service link stay
connected for 10 seconds allows a user to disconnect a multimedia
call and then make another multimedia call without having to wait
for the service link to disconnect and re-establish.
— Permanent - Multimedia call center agents and other users who are
constantly making or receiving multimedia calls may want to be
administered with this service link mode. The permanent mode
service link will be connected during the station’s first multimedia
call and will remain in a connected state until the user disconnects
from their PC’s multimedia application or the Avaya DEFINITY
Server switch restarts. This provides a multimedia user with a much
quicker video cut-through when answering a multimedia call from
another permanent mode station or a multimedia call that has been
early answered.
■

Multimedia Mode — There are two multimedia modes, Basic and
Enhanced, as described below:

— Basic — A Basic multimedia complex consists of a BRI-connected
multimedia-equipped PC and a non-BRI-connected multifunction
telephone set. When in Basic mode, users place voice calls at the
multifunction telephone and multimedia calls from the multimedia
equipped PC. Voice calls will be answered at the multifunction
telephone and multimedia calls will alert first at the PC and if
unanswered will next alert at the voice station if it is administered
with H.320 = y. A Basic mode complex has limited multimedia
feature capability as described in ‘‘Basic Mode Operation’’ on page
307).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

317

Managing multimedia calling

— Enhanced — An Enhanced multimedia complex consists of a
BRI-connected multimedia-equipped PC and a non-BRI-connected
multifunction telephone. The Enhanced mode station acts as though
the PC were directly connected to the multifunction telephone; the
service link provides the actual connection between the Avaya
DEFINITY Server and the PC. Thus, voice and multimedia calls are
originated and received at the telephone set. Voice and multimedia
call status are also displayed at the telephone set. An Enhanced
mode station allows multimedia calls to take full advantage of most
call control features as described in ‘‘Enhanced Mode Operation’’
on page 308.
■

Multimedia Early Answer — Valid entries are y and n (default). This field

lets you set this phone for early answer of multimedia calls. The system
will answer the incoming multimedia call on behalf of the station and
proceed to establish the H.320 protocol. After audio path has been
established to the caller, the call will then alert at the voice station. The
station may then answer by going off-hook and will have immediate audio
path. No hourglass tone will be heard by the answering party (see
‘‘Hourglass Tone’’ on page 328).
Example: An administrative assistant who does not have a multimedia PC,
but may get multimedia mode calls from forwarding or coverage, may
want to set the H.320 flag to y and the early answer flag to y on their voice
station. This allows any multimedia call to be presented to the station with
immediate voice path rather than hourglass tone. The answered call could
then be transferred as voice to voice mail or transferred as multimedia to a
user equipped with a multimedia endpoint.
Multimedia Buttons

There are six new multimedia specific buttons that may be added to a voice
station. Most of them may be placed on any voice station, whether it is part of a
Basic multimedia complex, an Enhanced multimedia complex or not part of any
multimedia complex. Two feature buttons, mm-basic and mm-pcaudio, may only
be placed on stations which are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex.
All of the multimedia specific feature buttons have a corresponding feature access
code except mm-pcaudio and mm-cfwd.

318

■

The mm-pcaudio feature can only be used via button.

■

The mm-cfwd button may be replaced by the standard “call forward” FAC
followed by the “multimedia call” FAC.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

■

mm-call — This button may exist on any voice station. Most multimedia
enabled users will want an mm-call button. This button (or it’s
corresponding FAC) must be used to indicate that the user is placing a
multimedia mode call. To place a multimedia mode call the user would go
off-hook, select an idle call appearance, and press the mm-call button
followed by the destination extension digits. If the user has a speakerphone
they can simply press the mm-call button, which preselects an idle call
appearance, followed by the destination extension digits.

The mm-call button lamp lights when you press this button during call
origination. The lamp also lights to indicate that the selected call
appearance is a multimedia mode call.
■

mm-basic — This button is only allowed on the voice station of a
multimedia complex. The mm-basic button toggles a station between Basic
and Enhanced modes. This button can NOT be used to change the station’s
multimedia mode when the station has an active multimedia call
appearance.

Toggling between Basic and Enhanced mode changes the station’s
administered Multimedia mode. When in Basic mode this field on the
station screen will show basic. When in Enhanced mode this field on the
station screen will show enhanced. The current station Multimedia mode
will be saved to translation when a save translation command is
executed.
■

mm-pcaudio — This button only works for an Enhanced multimedia
complex voice station. When originating or receiving a multimedia call, the
audio path is connected to the voice station’s handset or speakerphone
device. The mm-pcaudio button allows a user to switch the audio portion of
any call to their PC’s audio input/output device (if available). To switch the
audio path to the PC while active on a call, the user presses the
mm-pcaudio button (if off-hook you may now hang up the handset). The
mm-pcaudio button’s status lamp will light up when the button is pushed to
move the audio path to the PC and remain lit while the audio path is at the
PC device.
NOTE:

If you are on a voice only call, the voice path will switch to the PC
device but you will get muted or loopback video depending on the
multimedia endpoint software.
A user may simply go off-hook on their voice station or press the
speakerphone button to move the audio path of a multimedia call from the
PC back to the voice station. Pressing the mm-pcaudio button while the
status lamp is lit and the voice station’s handset is on-hook will disconnect
the user from the active call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

319

Managing multimedia calling

■

mm-datacnf — Pressing the mm-datacnf button from any voice station
that is participating in a multimedia call will light the status lamp and alert
the Avaya DEFINITY Server that you want to enable T.120 data
collaboration with the other parties on the call. The button status lamp will
also light for other participants in the multimedia call who have
mm-datacnf buttons.

Pressing this button from the voice station that enabled data collaboration
on a multimedia mode call will deactivate the data session and revert to a
voice and video call. If you are participating on a multimedia call with data
collaboration, but did not initiate the data collaboration, and you press this
button, the status lamp led will flash momentarily and the T.120 data
services will not be terminated, (only the station that activated the
collaboration session can deactivate it). This button only works for stations
connected to an Avaya DEFINITY Server equipped with an ESM adjunct.
■

mm-cfwd — The mm-cfwd button allows a user to indicate that
multimedia mode calls will be forwarded as multimedia mode calls to a
specific forwarded-to destination. If voice call forwarding is active and
multimedia call forwarding is not active then multimedia calls going off of
the Avaya DEFINITY Server will be forwarded as voice only calls.

The mm-cfwd button status lamp will be lit to indicate that multimedia call
forwarding is activated. Pressing the mm-cfwd button when the lamp is lit
will deactivate multimedia call forwarding.
Note - pressing the mm-cfwd button is the same as dialing the regular
call-fwd FAC followed by the mm-call button or FAC followed by the
desired forwarded-to extension digits.
■

mm-multinbr — The mm-multinbr call button is similar to the mm-call
button. It allows origination of a multimedia call from any voice station. It
is used when the destination being dialed requires a different address for
each of the 2 B-channels. An example of this is Central Office provided
ISDN-BRI. This type of BRI line is provisioned with separate listed
directory numbers for each B-channel. In order to make a 2B multimedia
call to such a device, two sets of address must be entered.

Originating a multimedia call with the mm-multinbr button will originate a
call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the
System Parameters Features screen. This default parameter will be either
2x56 or 2x64. The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be
56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.

320

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multimedia Call Handling

ESM T.120 Server Administration

change ds1 1c09

Page

1 of

1

DS1 CIRCUIT PACK
Location: 01C09
Bit Rate: 2.048

Name:
Line Coding: hdb3

Signaling Mode: isdn-pri
Connect: pbx

Interface: network
Country Protocol: 1
CRC? y

Idle Code: 11111111
MMI Cabling Board: 01C10

DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: 3.1kHz
MMI Interface: ESM

Slip Detection? n

Screen 21.

Near-end CSU Type: other

DS1 screen (Page 1 of 1)

From the system administration terminal:
1. Enter list configuration all, and a list of the installed carriers, circuit
packs, and ports appears.
2. Record the location (board number) of the MMI board cabled to the
TN2207 slot and verify that all other required circuit packs are present.
3. Enter add DS1 xxxxx, (where xxxxx is the location of the TN2207 PRI
circuit pack recorded in step 2), and the DS1 circuit pack administration
screen appears.
4. Set the Name field to ESM DS1
5. Set the Bit Rate field to 2.048
The TN2207 DS1 must have a bit rate of 2.048, even if all other DS1
boards in the system are operating at 1.544. Verify the 24/32 channel
switch on the circuit pack is in the 32 channel position.
6. Set the Line Coding field to hdb3
7. Set the Signaling Mode field to isdn-pri
8. Set the Connect field to pbx
9. Set the Interface field to network
10. Set the Country Protocol field to 1
11. Set the CRC field to y
12. The Idle Code default is 11111111.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

321

Managing multimedia calling

13. The DCP/Analog Bearer Capability default is 3.1 kHz.
14. Set the MMI Cabling Board field to xxxxx (where xxxxx is the location of
the TN787 MMI circuit pack recorded in step 2). This must be the slot for
port B of the Y-cable.
15. The MMI Interface field ESM appears.
change signaling-group 6

Page

1 of

5

SIGNALING GROUP
Group Number: 6
Associated Signaling? y
Primary D-Channel: 01C0916

Max number of NCA TSC: 0
Max number of CA TSC: 0
Trunk Group for NCA TSC:

Trunk Group for Channel Selection:
Supplementary Service Protocol: a

Screen 22.

Signaling-Group screen (Page 1 of 5)

1. Enter add signaling-group next and the signaling-group screen appears.
2. Change Associated Signaling field to y.
3. Change Primary D-Channel Port field to xxxx16 (where xxxx is the
address of the TN2207 PRI circuit pack, for example: 1B0516).
4. The Max Number of NCA TSC default is 0.
5. The Max Number of GA TSC default is 0.
6. Trunk Group for NCA TSC ____ (leave blank)
7. Trunk Group for Channel Selection____ (leave blank)
8. Logoff the terminal and then log back on the terminal to view your
changes.
Troubleshooting. To determine ESM link status enter the following commands

from the system administration terminal:
1. Status esm
2. Status signaling-group
3. List MMI
NOTE:

When you move ESM circuit packs, you MUST remove the DS1 and
signaling group translations. You cannot use the change circuit pack
command.

322

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the multimedia complex

When a vector is used to route video (56K/64K) calls to a hunt group comprised
of data extensions, the vector must have the multimedia field set to n. This field
causes multimedia calls routed through the vector to receive early answer
treatment prior to processing the vector steps. This provides a talk path to the
caller for announcements or immediate conversation with an agent and starts
network billing for the incoming call when vector processing begins.

Understanding the multimedia
complex
1-number access. 1-number access permits originating users to make voice or

multimedia calls to a Basic multimedia complex by dialing the same number for
either type of call. The number may be the voice station extension or the data
module extension. If the incoming call is a voice call, Avaya MultiVantage directs
it to the telephone. If the incoming call is 56K or 64K data call, Avaya
MultiVantage recognizes it as such and sends it to the multimedia endpoint.
Likewise, if a voice call is addressed to the data extension, the system recognizes
this and directs the call to the voice station.
Calls originating on the same switch as the Basic mode complex destination may
always use 1-number access for voice or video. In order to take advantage of
1-number access for calls originating from a remote location, the incoming calls
must arrive over ISDN-PRI trunks. If the system is setup with separate data
non-PRI digital facilities multimedia calls must be made to the data extension.
AVD (Alternate voice/data) trunk groups cannot be used to provide 1-number
access with MMCH. If the AVD trunk group has a BCC of 0, all calls arriving
over the AVD trunk to the Basic mode complex will be assumed to be voice calls.
If the AVD trunk group has a BCC of 1 or 4, all calls arriving over the AVD trunk
to the Basic mode complex will be assumed to be multimedia calls.
Originating voice calls. All voice calls are originated at the voice station.
Originating multimedia calls. For a Basic mode complex, multimedia calls are

normally originated at the user’s multimedia equipped PC. These multimedia calls
use the associated station’s COR/COS.
The voice station of a Basic multimedia complex may also use the “mm-call”
button or FAC, and the “mm-multinbr” button or FAC to originate multimedia
calls. When these methods are used, a multimedia call is originated from the voice
station. In order for the Basic multimedia complex to receive video, the user must
make a call from the H.320 DVC system to the voice station of the complex or
must make a multimedia call from the voice station to the H.320 DVC. This
allows the station to spontaneously add themselves or other parties to a
multimedia conference.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

323

Managing multimedia calling

1. H.320 DVC system GUI. The normal way for a Basic multimedia complex
endpoint to originate a multimedia call is through the vendor provided user
interface. Generally, digits to dial are entered, speed is selected and the call
originates from the DVC system. The voice station is not involved in such
as origination.
Any voice station may use the following mechanisms to originate a
multimedia call from the voice station. For stations that are not part of a
multimedia complex, video cannot be provided. For voice stations that are
part of a Basic multimedia complex, video is not provided until a
multimedia call is made from the complex’s H.320 DVC system to the
voice station or a multimedia call is made from the voice station to the
H.320 DVC system. Video is automatically included for Enhanced
multimedia complexes.
2. mm-call (Multimedia Call) button. If the station has an mm-call button
administered, the user goes off-hook and selects the mm-call button. The
user may select the mm-call button and then go off-hook. If the user has a
speakerphone on the station, the user may originate the call simply by
selecting the mm-call button. The speakerphone will automatically be
placed off-hook and dialtone will be heard. Upon selection of the mm-call
button, the mm-call status lamp (green LED) should become solid.
The user now dials the destination address digits. The destination address
may be provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last
number dialed, station busy indicators, etc. Originating a multimedia call
with the mm-call button will originate a call according to the Default
Multimedia Parameters selected on the System Parameters Features screen.
This default parameter will be either 2x56 or 2x64. The bearer capability of
the multimedia calls will either be 56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be
2B channels.
For calls with a bandwidth of 2B, use of the mm-call button to originate
will cause the same destination address to be used for both channels of the
2B call. See the section below on the mm-multinbr button/FAC for
information on originating a 2B call where the destination has a different
address for each B-channel.
NOTE:

The mm-call feature button is generally used by stations that are part
of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any station
to originate a multimedia call.
3. Multimedia Call feature Access Code. For stations that do not have an
administered mm-call button, the Multimedia call feature access code may
be used instead. The user goes off-hook on the station, waits for dialtone,
then dials the MM-call FAC, receives dialtone again and then dials the call
normally. The destination address may be provided by dialing digits, using
abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, station busy indicators, etc.

324

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the multimedia complex

Originating a multimedia call with the mm-call button will originate a call
according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the System
Parameters Features screen. This default parameter will be either 2x56 or
2x64. The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be 56K or
64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.
For calls with a bandwidth of 2B, use of the mm-call button to originate
will cause the same destination address to be used for both channels of the
2B call. See the section below on the mm-multinbr button/FAC for
information on originating a 2B call where the destination has a different
address for each B-channel.
NOTE:

The mm-call feature access code is generally used by stations that are
part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any
station to originate a multimedia call.
4. mm-multinbr (Multimedia Multi-number) button. The mm-multinbr
button is similar to the mm-call button. It allows origination of a
multimedia call from a voice station. It is used when the destination being
dialed requires a different address for each of the 2 B-channels. An
example of this is Central Office provided ISDN-BRI. This type of BRI
line is provisioned with separate listed directory numbers for each
B-channel. In order to make a 2B multimedia call to such a device, two sets
of addresses must be entered.
The user goes off-hook and selects the mm-multinbr button. The user may
select the mm-multinbr button and then go off-hook. If the user has a
speakerphone on the station, the user may originate the call simply by
selecting the mm-multinbr button. The speakerphone will automatically be
placed off-hook and dialtone will be heard. Upon selection of the
mm-multinbr button, the mm-multinbr and mm-call (if present) status lamp
(green led) should light steadily. The user now dials the first destination
address digits. The destination address may be provided by dialing digits,
using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc. The system will
provide dialtone after the first address has been completed. The user now
dials the second destination address digits. The destination address may be
provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number
dialed, etc. After the 2nd address has been collected the mm-multinbr
status lamp will go off.
Originating a multimedia call with the mm-multinbr button will originate a
call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the
System Parameters Features screen. This default parameter will be either
2x56 or 2x64. The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be
56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

325

Managing multimedia calling

NOTE:

The mm-multinbr feature button is generally used by stations that are
part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any
station to originate a dual address multimedia call.
5. Multimedia Multi-number Call feature Access Code. For stations that do
not have an administered mm-multinbr button, the Multimedia
Multi-number call feature access code may be used instead. It allows
origination of a multimedia call from a voice station. It is used when the
destination being dialed requires a different address for each of the 2
B-channels. An example of this is Central Office provided ISDN-BRI. This
type of BRI line is provisioned with separate listed directory numbers for
each B-channel. In order to make a 2B multimedia call to such a device,
two sets of addresses must be entered.
The user goes off-hook and dials the MM-multinbr feature access code.
Upon dialing of the MM-multinbr FAC, the mm-call (if present) status
lamp (green led) should become solid. The user now dials the first
destination address digits. The destination address may be provided by
dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc. The
system will provide dialtone after the first address has been completed. The
user now dials the second destination address digits. The destination
address may be provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries,
last number dialed, etc.
Originating a multimedia call with the MM-multinbr FAC will originate a
call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the
System Parameters Features screen. This default parameter will be either
2x56 or 2x64. The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be
56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.
NOTE:

The mm-multinbr FAC is generally used by stations that are part of
an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any station to
originate a dual address multimedia call.
6. Multimedia parameter selection feature access code. This FAC is used
to originate a multimedia call that wishes to use a different bearer and
bandwidth than the system default. For example, if the system has a default
multimedia parameter of 2x64 and the user wishes to make a call to a
destination that is known to only have 56K digital facilities, the MM
parameter selection FAC can be used to select a bearer and bandwidth of
2x56 for this specific call.

326

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the multimedia complex

The MM parameter selection FAC may be used in conjunction with the
mm-multinbr button or FAC to make a single or dual address multimedia
call at the desired bearer and bandwidth. The user goes off-hook and dials
the MM-parameter selection feature access code. Dialtone is returned. The
user enters a single digit, 1 or 2, where 1 = 2x64, 2 = 2x56. All other digits
will produce reorder. Dialtone is returned. Upon dialing of the
MM-parameter selection FAC, the mm-call (if present) status lamp (green
led) should become solid. The user may indicate a dual-address call at this
point with the mm-multinbr button or FAC. The user now dials one or two
sets of destination address digits. The destination address may be provided
by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc.
NOTE:

The mm-parameter selection FAC is generally used by stations that
are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any
station to originate a dual address multimedia call.
7. Dialing sequences that include TACs, AAR, ARS, Authorization codes,
CDR account codes, FRLs
1. Single address with TAC
■

Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC, Dial destination digits

2. Dual address with TAC
■

Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC, Dial 1st dest. digits, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC, Dial 2nd dest. digits

3. Single address with AAR/ARS
■

Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS, Dial destination digits

4. Dual address with AAR/ARS
■

Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 1st dest. digits, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 2nd dest. digits

5. Single address with AAR/ARS and authorization code
■

Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS FAC, Dial destination digits, Hear stutter

dialtone
■

555-233-506

Dial authorization code

Issue 5 October 2002

327

Managing multimedia calling

6. Dual address with AAR/ARS and authorization code
■

Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS FAC, Dial 1st dest. digits, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS FAC, Dial 2nd dest. digits, Hear stutter
dialtone

■

Dial authorization code

7. Single address with TAC or AAR/ARS and CDR account code
■

Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial CDR FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial CDR account code, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC or AAR/ARS, Dial destination digits

8. Dual address with TAC or AAR/ARS and CDR account code
■

Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial CDR FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial CDR account code, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC or AAR/ARS, Dial 1st dest. digits

■

Dial TAC or AAR/ARS, Dial 2nd dest. digits

Receiving voice calls. Any voice calls directed to the voice or data extension of

a Basic multimedia complex will ring at the voice station.
Receiving multimedia calls. Any data calls directed to the voice or data
extension of a Basic multimedia complex will ring at the multimedia equipped PC
if it is available. You may answer the multimedia call at the PC and voice and
video will connect to the PC. If the data endpoint is unavailable, the system
verifies that the telephone of the complex is administered with the H.320 field set
to y. If so, the system converts the call to voice and sends it to the telephone of the
multimedia complex, where the call then alerts.
Hourglass Tone. When a voice station answers a converted multimedia call, the

answering party may hear different things depending on the nature of the
originator. If the origination is directly from an H.320 DVC system or if the
originator is an Enhanced mode complex on a remote switch, an immediate audio
path will not exist between the two parties. This is because the H.320 protocol
must be established after the call is answered. It takes several seconds for the
H.320 protocol to establish an audio path. During this interval the answering party
will hear special ringback. When the audio path exists the special ringback will be
removed and replaced with a short incoming call tone indicating that audio now
exists. The combination of special ringback followed by incoming call tone is
referred to as “hourglass tone.” Hourglass tone is an indication to the answering
party that they should wait for the H.320 call to establish audio.

328

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the multimedia complex

Early Answer. The answering party may administer their station to avoid hearing
hourglass tone. With the station screen Early Answer field set to y, the system

answers the incoming multimedia call on behalf of the station and establishes the
H.320 protocol. After audio path has been established, the call will then alert at
the voice station of the Basic complex destination. The station may then answer
by going off-hook and will have immediate audio path. No hourglass tone will be
heard by the answering party.
If the H.320 field is not set to y for the telephone of a Basic multimedia complex,
H.320 calls alert at the multimedia endpoint until the caller drops. If an H.320 call
is directed to a telephone with H.320 set to n, the system denies the call.
You can assign H.320 conversion to any voice station.
Authorization. Multimedia complexes require the same types of authorization
(COR/COS) as standard telephones. If a call is addressed to the voice extension,
the system checks the COR/COS of the telephone, whether the call is voice-only
or multimedia. If a call is addressed to the data extension, the system checks the
COR/COS of the data endpoint. If the call is subsequently redirected to the voice
station, the system does a second COR/COS check for the authorization of the
voice station. Calls originated from the PC use the COR/COS of the voice station.
Adjunct Switch Applications Interface . ASAI is not expected to support

call-association for data calls. Therefore Avaya does not recommend that you use
ASAI for multimedia.
Administered Connections. Basic Multimedia endpoints may serve as the

origination point or destination of an administered connection.
Authorization and Barrier Codes. Basic Mode multimedia users or off-premises

PC users may not be able to respond to prompts for authorization or barrier codes.
Multimedia endpoints do not recognize the prompts.
An on-premises user might be able to use Remote Access and enter the entire digit
string at once before launching the call, but it would be better to eliminate the
need for such codes for multimedia users who need to call off premises.
Bridged Appearances. Voice users can bridge onto a call if the user has a

bridged appearance of a voice member of the call.
Call redirection. Calls directed to either member of the Basic multimedia

complex are subject to redirection (coverage, forwarding). Avaya MultiVantage
converts calls to voice before sending them to coverage. Calls redirected through
call forwarding maintain multimedia status if forwarded from the data endpoint.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

329

Managing multimedia calling

Conferencing . A multimedia conference can consist of multimedia and

voice-only conferees. All multimedia conferees are added to a multimedia
conference by a voice-terminal user on the switch, who acts as the controller of
the multimedia conference. When the controller is a Basic complex voice station,
the controller must remain on the conference until all parties have joined. Once all
endpoints are on the conference, the voice-terminal user may put the call on hold
or drop, if the user wishes.
Video conferees can see only their local video and one other party. If more than
two people are involved in a video conference, the person who is speaking is the
one whose video appears to other conferees. The speaker’s video shows the
previous speaker. This changes dynamically as the speaker changes.
Creating a multi-party video conference

All multimedia conferences must be controlled by a voice phone. Multimedia
conferees may be added by calling the voice phone or by having the voice phone
make a multimedia call to other DVC endpoints. The controller can then
conference together individual parties to create a multimedia conference.
To set up a multimedia conference:
1. Determine who is going to be the conference controller.
2. At the appointed time, the conference controller calls his or her telephone
from the multimedia endpoint by dialing the 1-number extension. Once this
call is established, the controller conferences in other calls as if this were a
voice conference. The controller continues to add conferees in this manner
until all conferees have joined, or until the number of conferees reaches the
administered limit.
3. The conference controller may also add voice or multimedia parties to the
conference spontaneously. The controller hits CONFERENCE, makes a
voice or multimedia call to a new party. To make a multimedia call, the
controller must originate a call using the mm-call button or FAC or the
mm-multinbr button or FAC. After the new party begins alerting, the
controller may hit CONFERENCE to add the party to the existing
conference on hold.
Coverage. Multimedia calls to a Basic mode complex are subject to the same

coverage criteria as voice calls and follow the coverage path administered for the
voice station of the Basic multimedia mode complex.
If a plain voice station or a Basic mode complex is the covering party, the
answering voice station will receive audio only. If all voice stations in the
coverage path have the station screen Early Answer field set to n and the
originator of the multimedia call was not a local Enhanced mode complex, the
answering station will hear hourglass tone.

330

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the multimedia complex

If an Enhanced mode complex is the covering party, the answering voice station
will receive voice and video. If all voice stations in the coverage path have the
station screen Early Answer field set to n and the originator of the multimedia call
was not a local Enhanced mode complex, the answering station will hear
hourglass tone.
Coverage: Multimedia calls and off-net call coverage. If the principal station’s
coverage path include a remote coverage point, the multimedia call will cover
off-switch as voice only. If the call is unanswered off-switch and proceeds to the
next coverage point on-switch, the multimedia nature of the call is preserved.
Coverage: Multimedia calls and coverage to voice mail. Voice mail systems

such as AUDIX are typically the last point in a coverage path and are usually
implemented as a hunt group. In order to guarantee that the originator of an H.320
multimedia call hears the voice mail greeting, the hunt group that defines the list
of voice mail ports should have the Early Answer field on the hunt group set to y.
This field will have no effect on voice calls to the voice mail system.
Call Detail Recording. Each channel of a 2-channel call generates a separate

CDR record.
Data Collaboration

Once you have established a multi-point video conference, multi-point T.120 data
collaboration may be enabled for that call. This will allow all video parties on the
current conference to collaborate.
T.120 Data conferencing is made possible through the Expansion Services
Module (ESM) which is an adjunct to the Avaya MultiVantage. Up to six parties
may participate in a single data conference, and up to 24 parties may use ESM
facilities for data collaboration at any given time.
Adding data sharing to a video conference
1. Set up a multimedia conference.
2. Once a multimedia call is active, any voice station in the conference, can
initiate data collaboration by pressing the mm-datacnf button. Or, to use the
feature access code to initiate a data conference, press the Transfer button.
A second line-appearance becomes active and you hear dial tone. Dial the
multimedia data conference feature access code. Confirmation tone is
heard and the system automatically reselects the held call appearance of the
multimedia conference. The Avaya MultiVantage solution will select a data
rate which is acceptable to all H.320 DVC systems in the current call.
If the system does not have sufficient ESM resources available for all
parties currently in the call, activation of T.120 data sharing will be denied.
The mm-datacnf status lamp will flash denial or the mm-datacnf FAC will
produce reorder.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

331

Managing multimedia calling

3. Each H.320 DVC system in the conference call is joined to the data
conference. On many DVC systems, the provided GUI may prompt the
user with a dialog box, requesting the user to select a specific conference to
join. With MMCH, there should only be one conference available to select.
4. The user must now use the PC’s GUI to begin application sharing. The
method for beginning application sharing or file transfer is different for
each H.320 multimedia application. One of the H.320 DVC systems
activates data sharing from the H.320 DVC vendor provided GUI. See your
H.320 DVC system documentation for details.
5. The same H.320 DVC system as in step 4, opens an application,
whiteboard, etc. to share and the image of the application is displayed on
all H.320 DVC systems in the conference.
For details on how multiple users may control the shared application, see
the vendor provided documentation for your specific H.320 DVC system.
6. To end the data collaboration session and retain the voice/video conference,
the station that selected the mm-datacnf button or FAC may press the
mm-datacnf button or hit transfer and dial the mm-datacnf deactivation
FAC.
NOTE:

As of this writing, many endpoints do not respond correctly to ending
the data collaboration session and retaining voice/video. Some H.320
DVC systems drop the entire call. Avaya recommends that once
T.120 data sharing has been enabled for a conference, that it remain
active for the duration of the conference call. When all endpoints
have dropped from the call, the T.120 resources will be released.
Joining a multimedia conference after T.120 data sharing has been enabled.

If a multimedia conference with T.120 data sharing is already active and it is
desired to conference in a new video endpoint, the new video endpoint can be
conferenced into the existing call. The new endpoint will be allowed into the data
conference if there exists sufficient ESM resources for the new endpoint. The new
endpoint will get voice/video and data sharing if the new endpoint supports the
MLP data rate chosen by the system when T.120 data collaboration was activated.
If the endpoint does not support the pre-existing MLP data rate, the new endpoint
will only receive voice and video.
Single switch data collaboration. When all parties involved in data
collaboration conference are located on the same physical Avaya DEFINITY
Server, there is no restriction on the type of user. The parties may be any
combination of Enhanced multimedia complexes, Basic multimedia complexes or
stand-alone H.320 DVC systems.

332

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the multimedia complex

Multi- switch data collaboration. When all parties involved in data
collaboration conference are not located on the same physical Avaya DEFINITY
Server, the parties located on the Avaya DEFINITY Server hosting the data
conference (i.e. the switch that activated mm-datacnf) may be any combination of
Enhanced multimedia complexes, Basic multimedia complexes or stand-alone
H.320 DVC systems. All parties on remote switches must not be Enhanced
multimedia complexes: they must be Basic multimedia complexes or
stand-alone H.320 DVC systems. Prior to originating or receiving a multimedia
mode call, the mm-basic feature button or feature access code can be used to
dynamically change an Enhanced mode complex into a Basic mode complex and
back again.
Forwarding of voice/multimedia calls. In Basic mode you can forward calls

from either the telephone or the multimedia endpoint. To forward a call from the
multimedia endpoint:
1. At the PC’s multimedia application, enter the call-forwarding feature
access code (FAC)
2. Enter the forward-to number in the dialed number field on the endpoint
software
3. Click the Dial button (or equivalent)
NOTE:

The PC multimedia software will probably respond with a message that the
call failed, since it does not recognize the FAC. In fact, Avaya MultiVantage
does receive the message, and forwards all multimedia calls addressed to the
1-number.
If a call is forwarded from the telephone, the call converts to voice first. If using
the multimedia endpoint to forward, the calls arrive at the forwarded-to extension
as a data call. Such calls continue to ring until answered or abandoned, rather than
follow a coverage path.
Users can forward calls from the multimedia endpoint using the call forward FAC.
You can also assign a call-forward button at the voice station to forward calls for
the data endpoint. If a Basic multimedia complex has console permissions, that
user can forward calls for others by dialing the FAC, the data extension, and then
the forwarded-to number.
Call Park. A voice-terminal user can park any active call, voice or multimedia,

and unpark the call from another telephone. Users cannot park or unpark calls
using multimedia endpoints.
Call Pickup. Members of a pickup group can answer an H.320 call using a
telephone after the call has been converted to voice. This is true for standard or
directed call pickup.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

333

Managing multimedia calling

Consult. After a call is converted to voice, consult may be used when transferring
or conferencing the call.
COR/COS. The Class of Restriction and Class of Service for H.320 calls

originated from a 1-number complex are the same as those of the telephone in the
complex.
Data Call Setup. Basic complex multimedia endpoints are BRI data endpoints,
and may use data call-setup procedures as provided by the software vendor.
Data Hotline. If endpoint software allows users to select the dial function without
entering a number, the endpoint can be used for hotline dialing.
Dial Access to Attendant. Access to Attendant is blocked for a data call from a

Basic mode multimedia endpoint.
Data Trunk Groups. Data trunk groups may be used to carry H.320 calls of a
fixed (administered) bearer capability.
Hold. The voice station and multimedia endpoint of a Basic complex are each
independent devices with respect to call control. When a Basic multimedia
complex voice station executes hold only the voice station is held. If the user has
conferenced their multimedia endpoint into a multimedia conference, activating
hold will not disconnect the multimedia endpoint from the conference, it will only
disconnect the Basic multimedia complex voice station. Executing hold with an
Enhanced mode complex will fully disconnect voice and video from the current
active call.
Hunt Groups using Basic Mode complexes. Since Basic mode complexes may
receive point to point multimedia calls at the DVC system and voice calls to the
station simultaneously, the voice station extension may be placed in any normal
voice hunt group or ACD skill and the data extension may be placed in a simple
hunt group made up of only data extensions.

Basic mode complex data extensions or stand-alone data extensions may be used
to create simple data hunt groups. Data extensions are not allowed in ACD hunt
groups. Avaya recommends that you do not mix voice and data stations in a hunt
group.
If you want multimedia calls to hunt to multimedia endpoints (i.e. 2B point to
point data hunting), put the data extension in the hunt group. If you place the voice
extension in a hunt group, only voice calls hunt to that extension. Multimedia calls
to a hunt group with a Basic mode voice station as the hunt group member will
not be offered to the DVC system of the Basic mode complex. If either the voice
or data extension of a Basic mode complex is busy, the entire complex is
considered busy for hunting purposes.

334

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Understanding the multimedia complex

In order to guarantee that all members of a voice hunt group or skill can receive
voice or multimedia calls, all members should have the H.320 field on the station
screen set to y. Simple voice stations and Basic complex mode voice stations will
receive voice only. Enhanced mode stations will receive voice and video.
The MM Early Answer field (on the Hunt Group screen) tells the system to
answer the incoming multimedia call and establish audio before it reaches the first
member of the hunt group. Thus, when the talk path is established, the caller is
able to speak with an agent immediately. This is not necessary for hunt groups
comprised of data extensions.
Hunting, Other considerations. Agents that are part of a Basic mode complex

may dial a feature access code to remove themselves from availability (and to
indicate that they are available again) from both the multimedia endpoint and the
telephone independently. This allows the voice member or the data member to be
individually made unavailable. To make the data extension unavailable, the agent
must dial the FAC from the DVC system.
CMS measurements may indicate unusually slow ASA, because of the time
required for the system to establish early-answer before offering the call to an
agent.
Hunting Call association (routing). Typically incoming voice calls consist of 2
B-channel calls to the same address, to provide greater bandwidth and better video
resolution. Avaya MultiVantage attempts to correctly pair up incoming calls and
offer them as a unit to a single agent. MMCH uses call association to route both
calls to the extension that answered the first call, regardless of how the call was
routed internally.

Two 56K/64K data calls with the same calling party number to the same
destination number are considered to be associated. The system makes every
attempt to route both calls of a 2-channel call to the same answering party. If the
first call terminates at a member of a hunt group, the second call does not have to
hunt, but goes directly to the same member. In order for 2B multimedia calls to be
correctly given to a single agent, incoming calls to the hunt group must have ANI
information. The ANI information may be in the form of ISDN calling party
number or DCS calling party number. Multimedia calls made on the same switch
as the hunt group are easily associated. If multimedia calls into a hunt group have
incorrect ANI information (i.e. all calls from switch X to switch Y include the
LDN for switch X), then as the volume of calls increases, the number of
mis-associated calls will increase. If multimedia calls into a hunt group have no
ANI information, the switch will never associate pairs of calls and all calls will be
treated independently and routed to separate agents. This is not a recommended
configuration.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

335

Managing multimedia calling

Hunting with Multimedia vectors. Very often, calls are routed to hunt groups or

skills via a vector. The existing VDNs and vectors which exist for routing voice
calls can be used to route multimedia calls.
In order to use a vector for multimedia calls that will terminate to voice stations,
you must set the Multimedia field on the vector screen to y. This field has no
effect on voice calls routing through the vector. This field will cause multimedia
calls routed through the vector to receive early answer treatment prior to
processing the vector steps. This provides a talk path to the caller for
announcements or immediate conversation with an agent.
NOTE:

Vectors which have the Multimedia field set to y must eventually route to
hunt groups, skills or numbers which are voice extensions. A vector with the
multimedia field set to y should never be set up to route to a hunt group or
number which is a data extension.
When a vector is used to route video (56K/64K) calls to a hunt group comprised
of data extensions, the vector must have the multimedia field set to n.
Intercept Treatment. H.320 calls that receive intercept treatment are treated like

other data calls. H.320 calls cannot be directed to an attendant for service because
the attendant cannot have H.320 conversion service.
ISDN Trunk Groups. Avaya highly recommends that you use ISDN trunks for

multimedia calls. ISDN PRI trunks allow complete 1-number access for an
Enhanced multimedia complex. ANI provided over PRI trunks allows correct
routing of multiple bearer channels to the correct destination device. ISDN also
provides the bearer capability on a call by call basis which can be used to
distinguish voice calls from multimedia calls.
Malicious Call Trace. If a malicious call terminates at a Basic multimedia

complex endpoint, the user can dial the feature access code from the telephone to
activate malicious call trace, followed by the extension of the multimedia
endpoint. If the user does not dial the multimedia extension, MCT traces any call
held on the telephone.
Message Waiting. Message Waiting indication is handled at the telephone.
Because H.320 calls are converted to voice before going to coverage, all messages
are voice only.
Night Service. Incoming Basic mode data calls follow established night-service

processing for data calls.
Remote Access. The switch does not prevent Basic multimedia complexes from
attempting to use remote access. However, these Basic mode endpoints will most
likely not be able to dial the necessary codes.

336

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

Station Hunting . Basic mode data calls to endpoints that have an extension

administered in the hunt-to-station field hunt based on established hunting
criteria. The call is converted to voice before station hunting.
Tenant Partitioning. Permission to make multimedia calls or add parties of any

type to a conference is subject to standard tenant-partitioning restrictions.
Terminating Extension Groups. Basic mode data calls to a TEG are converted
to voice and can terminate only at a voice endpoint. Effectively, Avaya
MultiVantage treats the multimedia-complex extension as a voice-only endpoint.
Telephone Display. Display information for calls to or from a Basic multimedia

complex contains the 1-number.

Enhanced Mode MM complex
The Enhanced multimedia complex provides a much greater unified and
integrated interface for control of voice and multimedia calls. The multifunction
voice station is used to control all calls, whether voice or multimedia. The H.320
desktop video system is used to present the video stream, data stream and
(optionally) audio stream to the user. The H.320 desktop video system is not used
for call control. The Enhanced multimedia complex allows the multifunction
voice station to handle voice or multimedia calls in an almost identical manner.
Each call appearance on the voice station may represent a voice or multimedia
call, allowing multiple voice or multimedia calls to be present simultaneously on
the station. The user may manage the separate call appearances without regard to
the voice or multimedia nature of the specific call. The standard
HOLD/TRANSFER/CONFERENCE/DROP actions may be applied to any call
without regard to the voice or multimedia nature of the call.
1-number access

1-number access permits originating users to make voice or multimedia calls to an
Enhanced multimedia complex by dialing the same number for either type of call.
The number may be the voice station extension or the data module extension. If
the incoming call is a voice call, Avaya MultiVantage alerts the station of an
incoming voice call. If the incoming call is 56K or 64K data call, Avaya
MultiVantage recognizes it as a multimedia call and inserts resources to terminate
the H.320 protocol and then alerts the voice station with a multimedia call.
Calls originating on the same switch as the Enhanced mode complex destination
may always use 1-number access for voice or video. In order to take advantage of
1-number access for calls originating from a remote location, the incoming calls
must arrive over ISDN-PRI trunks. If the system is setup with separate non-PRI
digital facilities for data, multimedia calls must be made to the data extension of
the Enhanced mode complex.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

337

Managing multimedia calling

AVD (Alternate voice/data) trunk groups cannot be used to provide 1-number
access with MMCH. If the AVD trunk group has a BCC of 0, all calls arriving
over the AVD trunk to the Basic mode complex will be assumed to be voice calls.
If the AVD trunk group has a BCC of 1 or 4, all calls arriving over the AVD trunk
to the Basic mode complex will be assumed to be multimedia calls.
ORIGINATION

The basic call sequence from an Enhanced mode complex is to originate a
multimedia call and alert the destination. When the destination answers the call,
the originating station’s H.320 desktop video system will be alerted (that is, called
by the switch to establish the service link). If the H.320 desktop video system is
not configured for auto-answer, the user must answer the H.320 calls via the DVC
GUI. If the H.320 DVC is configured for auto-answer, no action is needed via the
DVC GUI. Avaya recommends, but does not require, that Enhanced mode
complexes place their desktop video system into an auto-answer mode of
operation. If the far-end is providing a video signal, the 2-way video will be

observed. If the destination is not providing a video signal (call was answered by a
simple voice station), then loopback video will be provided at the Enhanced mode
complex originator. The audio signal will exist at the handset of the voice station.
The audio signal may be moved to the H.320 DVC system via activation of a
mm-pcaudio button on the voice station. See the section below on mm-pcaudio.
Hourglass tone. The originating party may hear different things when the
incoming multimedia call is answered depending on the nature of the answering
party. If the call is being answered directly by an H.320 DVC system or if the
answering party is an Enhanced mode complex on a remote switch, an immediate
audio path will not exist between the two parties. This is because the H.320
protocol must be established after the call is answered. It takes several seconds for
the H.320 protocol to establish an audio path. During this interval the originating
party will hear special ringback. When the audio path exists the special ringback
will be removed and replaced with a short incoming call tone indicating that audio
path now exists. The combination of special ringback followed by incoming call
tone is referred to as “hourglass tone.” Hourglass tone is an indication to the
originating party that they should wait for the H.320 call to establish audio.

- originating voice calls

Voice calls are originated from the voice station of an Enhanced mode complex in
the normal manner as for any voice station.
- originating multimedia calls

Multimedia calls from an Enhanced multimedia complex are originated from the
VOICE STATION, NOT the H.320 desktop video system. All multimedia
originations require the user to indicate the multimedia nature of the call prior to
providing any address digits. There are several different ways to originate a
multimedia call from the voice station.

338

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

1. mm-call (Multimedia Call) button. If the station has an mm-call button
administered, the user goes off-hook and selects the mm-call button. The
user may select the mm-call button and then go off-hook. If the user has a
speakerphone on the station, the user may originate the call simply by
selecting the mm-call button. The speakerphone will automatically be
placed off-hook and dialtone will be heard. Upon selection of the mm-call
button, the mm-call status lamp (green LED) will light steadily, indicating
a multimedia call.
The user now dials the destination address digits. The destination address
may be provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last
number dialed, station busy indicators, etc. Originating a multimedia call
with the mm-call button will originate a call according to the Default
Multimedia Parameters selected on the System Parameters Features screen.
This default parameter will be either 2x56 or 2x64. The bearer capability of
the multimedia calls will either be 56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be
2B channels.
For calls with a bandwidth of 2B, use of the mm-call button to originate
will cause the same destination address to be used for both channels of the
2B call. See the section below on the mm-multinbr button/FAC for
information on originating a 2B call where the destination has a different
address for each B-channel.
NOTE:

The mm-call feature button is generally used by stations that are part
of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any station
to originate a multimedia call.
2. Multimedia Call feature Access Code. For stations that do not have an
administered mm-call button, the Multimedia call feature access code may
be used instead. The user goes off-hook on the station, waits for dialtone,
then dials the MM-call FAC, receives dialtone again and then dials the call
normally. The destination address may be provided by dialing digits, using
abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, station busy indicators, etc.
Originating a multimedia call with the mm-call button will originate a call
according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the System
Parameters Features screen. This default parameter will be either 2x56 or
2x64. The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be 56K or
64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

339

Managing multimedia calling

For calls with a bandwidth of 2B, use of the mm-call button to originate
will cause the same destination address to be used for both channels of the
2B call. See the section below on the mm-multinbr button/FAC for
information on originating a 2B call where the destination has a different
address for each B-channel.
NOTE:

The mm-call feature access code is generally used by stations that are
part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any
station to originate a multimedia call.
3. mm-multinbr (Multimedia Multi-number) button. The mm-multinbr
button is similar to the mm-call button. It allows origination of a
multimedia call from a voice station. It is used when the destination being
dialed requires a different address for each of the 2 B-channels. An
example of this is Central Office provided ISDN-BRI. This type of BRI
line is provisioned with separate listed directory numbers for each
B-channel. In order to make a 2B multimedia call to such a device, two sets
of addresses must be entered.
The user goes off-hook and selects the mm-multinbr button. The user may
select the mm-multinbr button and then go off-hook. If the user has a
speakerphone on the station, the user may originate the call simply by
selecting the mm-multinbr button. The speakerphone will automatically be
placed off-hook and dialtone will be heard. Upon selection of the
mm-multinbr button, the mm-multinbr and mm-call (if present) status lamp
(green led) should become solid. The user now dials the first destination
address digits. The destination address may be provided by dialing digits,
using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc. The system will
provide dialtone after the first address has been completed. The user now
dials the second destination address digits. The destination address may be
provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number
dialed, etc. After the 2nd address has been collected the mm-multinbr
status lamp will go off.
Originating a multimedia call with the mm-multinbr button will originate a
call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the
System Parameters Features screen. This default parameter will be either
2x56 or 2x64. The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be
56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.
NOTE:

The mm-multinbr feature button is generally used by stations that are
part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any
station to originate a dual address multimedia call.

340

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

4. Multimedia Multi-number Call feature Access Code. For stations that do
not have an administered mm-multinbr button, the Multimedia
Multi-number call feature access code may be used instead. It allows
origination of a multimedia call from a voice station. It is used when the
destination being dialed requires a different address for each of the 2
B-channels. An example of this is Central Office provided ISDN-BRI. This
type of BRI line is provisioned with separate listed directory numbers for
each B-channel. In order to make a 2B multimedia call to such a device,
two sets of addresses must be entered.
The user goes off-hook and dials the MM-multinbr feature access code.
Upon dialing of the MM-multinbr FAC, the mm-call (if present) status
lamp (green led) should become solid. The user now dials the first
destination address digits. The destination address may be provided by
dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc. The
system will provide dialtone after the first address has been completed. The
user now dials the second destination address digits. The destination
address may be provided by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries,
last number dialed, etc.
Originating a multimedia call with the MM-multinbr FAC will originate a
call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the
System Parameters Features screen. This default parameter will be either
2x56 or 2x64. The bearer capability of the multimedia calls will either be
56K or 64K and the bandwidth will be 2B channels.
NOTE:

The mm-multinbr FAC is generally used by stations that are part of
an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any station to
originate a dual address multimedia call.
5. Multimedia parameter selection feature access code. This FAC is used
to originate a multimedia call that wishes to use a different bearer and
bandwidth than the system default. For example, if the system has a default
multimedia parameter of 2x64 and the user wishes to make a call to a
destination that is known to only have 56K digital facilities, the MM
parameter selection FAC can be used to select a bearer and bandwidth of
2x56 for this specific call.
The MM parameter selection FAC may be used in conjunction with the
mm-multinbr button or FAC to make a single or dual address multimedia
call at the desired bearer and bandwidth. The user goes off-hook and dials
the MM-parameter selection feature access code. Dialtone is returned. The
user enters a single digit, 1 or 2, where 1 = 2x64, 2 = 2x56. All other digits
will produce reorder. Dialtone is returned. Upon dialing of the
MM-parameter selection FAC, the mm-call (if present) status lamp (green
led) should become solid. The user may indicate a dual-address call at this

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

341

Managing multimedia calling

point with the mm-multinbr button or FAC. The user now dials one or two
sets of destination address digits. The destination address may be provided
by dialing digits, using abbreviated dial entries, last number dialed, etc.
NOTE:

The mm-parameter selection FAC is generally used by stations that
are part of an Enhanced multimedia complex, but may be used by any
station to originate a dual address multimedia call.
6. Dialing sequences that include TACs, AAR, ARS, Authorization codes,
CDR account codes, FRLS
1. Single address with TAC
■

Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC, Dial destination digits

2. Dual address with TAC
■

Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC, Dial 1st dest. digits, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC, Dial 2nd dest. digits

3. Single address with AAR/ARS
■

Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS, Dial destination digits

4. Dual address with AAR/ARS
■

Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 1st dest. digits, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 2nd dest. digits

5. Single address with AAR/ARS and authorization code
■

Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS FAC, Dial destination digits, Hear stutter

dialtone
■

Dial authorization code

6. Dual address with AAR/ARS and authorization code

342

■

Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 1st dest. digits, Hear dialtone

■

Dial AAR/ARS, Dial 2nd dest. digits, Hear stutter dialtone

■

Dial authorization code

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

7. Single address with TAC or AAR/ARS and CDR account code
■

Dial mm-call button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial CDR FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial CDR account code, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC or AAR/ARS, Dial destination digits

8. Dual address with TAC or AAR/ARS and CDR account code
■

Dial mm-multinbr button or FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial CDR FAC, Hear dialtone

■

Dial CDR account code, Hear dialtone

■

Dial TAC or AAR/ARS, Dial 1st dest. digits

■

Dial TAC or AAR/ARS, Dial 2nd dest. digits

Answering

The user actions required to answer voice or multimedia calls at an Enhanced
multimedia complex are identical if the H.320 DVC system is configured for
auto-answer. If the H.320 DVC system is not configured for auto-answer an
additional step is required. See answering multimedia calls below. Avaya
recommends, but does not require, that Enhanced mode complexes place
their desktop video system into an auto-answer mode of operation.

Answering voice calls

Incoming voice calls will alert at the voice station of the Enhanced multimedia
complex in the normal manner. Standard alerting and call appearance flashing will
occur. They are answered in the normal manner by selecting the alerting call
appearance and going off-hook on the voice station.
Answering multimedia calls

Incoming multimedia calls will alert at the voice station of the Enhanced
multimedia complex in the same manner as voice calls with one addition. If the
alerting station has an administered mm-call button and the alerting call
appearance is the selected call appearance (for instance, the red LED is lit, on the
alerting call appearance), then the mm-call button status lamp will go on
indicating that the call on the selected call appearance is a multimedia call.
The incoming multimedia call is answered in the normal manner by selecting the
alerting call appearance and going off-hook on the voice station. If the H.320
DVC system for the answering party is configured for auto-answer, no other
action is needed to complete the multimedia call. If the H.320 DVC system for the
answering party is not configured for auto-answer, the H.320 DVC system will
alert and must also be answered by the user. Avaya recommends, but does not
require, that Enhanced mode complexes place their desktop video system
into an auto-answer mode of operation.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

343

Managing multimedia calling

If the originating party is providing a video signal, then a complete 2-way
multimedia call will exist. If the originating party is not providing a video signal,
the answering party will receive loopback video. The audio signal will exist at the
handset of the voice station. The audio signal may be moved to the H.320 DVC
system via activation of a mm-pcaudio button on the voice station.
Hourglass Tone. The answering party may hear different things when the

incoming multimedia call is answered depending on the nature of the originator. If
the origination is directly from an H.320 DVC system or if the originator is an
Enhanced mode complex on a remote switch, an immediate audio path will not
exist between the two parties. This is because the H.320 protocol must be
established after the call is answered. It takes several seconds for the H.320
protocol to establish an audio path. During this interval the answering party will
hear special ringback. When the audio path exists the special ringback will be
removed and replaced with a short “incoming call tone” indicating that audio now
exists. The combination of special ringback followed by incoming call tone is
referred to as “hourglass tone.” Hourglass tone is an indication to the answering
party that they should wait for the H.320 call to establish audio.
Early Answer. The answering party may administer their station in such a way as
to avoid hearing hourglass tone. If the station screen has set the Early Answer
field to y, then the system will answer the incoming multimedia call on behalf of

the station and proceed to establish the H.320 protocol. After audio path has been
established, the call will then alert at the voice station of the Enhanced mode
complex destination. The station may then answer by going off-hook and will
have immediate audio path. No hourglass tone will be heard by the answering
party.
- multiple call appearance operation

With an Enhanced mode complex all calls to or from the complex are controlled
via the voice station. Each voice or multimedia call has its own call appearance
which may be selected without regard for the nature of the call using the specific
call appearance. This allows a multifunction station to control multiple voice or
multimedia calls in exactly the same way they would control multiple voice calls.
As an example, a user may originate a simple voice call on the first call
appearance. A multimedia call may then arrive on the second call appearance. The
user activates HOLD on the first call appearance and selects the second call
appearance to answer the multimedia call. The user may then activate HOLD on
the second call appearance and reselect the first call appearance or select a third
call appearance and originate another call.

344

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

- creating a multi-party video conference

An Enhanced multimedia complex can create a spontaneous video conference in
the same way that a spontaneous voice conference is created. Given an active call,
the user activates the CONFERENCE button. This puts the current call on HOLD
and activates a new call appearance. The user makes a multimedia call according
to the instructions for originating a multimedia call and then selects
CONFERENCE to combine or merge the two call appearances. This results in a
3-way conference.
If all three parties are video equipped, then a 3-way video conference results.
Conference members see the current speaker on video. The current speaker sees
the last speaker on video. If one of the parties is not video equipped, then a 3-way
audio conference exists and the two video equipped parties have 2-way video. The
CONFERENCE action may be repeated until 6 parties have been conferenced
together. The 6 parties may be any mix of voice or video, local or remote parties.
The following steps create a multi-party voice/video conference:
1. Enhanced mode complex station A originates a multimedia call to, or
receives a multimedia call from, party B. Station A and party B have 2-way
voice and video.
2. Station A, activates CONFERENCE.
3. Station A originates a multimedia call (i.e. uses the mm-call
button/FAC/etc.) and dials the party to be added, Enhanced multimedia
complex C.
4. Party C, answers the call from station A.
5. Station A selects CONFERENCE to complete the 3-way conference.
Parties A,B and C will be in a 3-way voice/video conference.
NOTE:

If party C is another Enhanced mode complex on the same switch as
station A, station A does not need to indicate a multimedia call prior to
dialing the new party in step 3. While A consults with C, the call will be
audio only. When A completes the conference in step 5, party C’s video will
be activated.
A multi-party video conference uses voice activated switching to determine which
parties are seen. The current speaker is seen by all other parties. The current
speaker sees the previous speaker.
Additional voice or video parties may be added by repeating these steps.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

345

Managing multimedia calling

Data Collaboration

Once you have established a multi-point video conference, multi-point T.120 data
collaboration may be enabled for that call. This will allow all video parties on the
current conference to collaborate.
T.120 Data conferencing is made possible through the Expansion Services
Module (ESM) which is an adjunct to the Avaya DEFINITY Server. Up to six
parties may participate in a single data conference, and up to 24 parties may use
ESM facilities for data collaboration at any given time.
The following steps add data sharing to a video conference:
1. Set up a multimedia conference.
2. Once a multimedia call is active, any member can initiate data
collaboration by pressing the mm-datacnf button. Or, to use the feature
access code to initiate a data conference, press the Transfer button. A
second line-appearance becomes active and you hear dial tone. Dial the
multimedia data conference feature access code. Confirmation tone is
heard and the system automatically reselects the held call appearance of the
multimedia conference. Avaya MultiVantage will select an MLP data rate
which is acceptable to all H.320 DVC systems in the current call.
If the system does not have sufficient ESM resources available for all
parties currently in the call, activation of T.120 data sharing will be denied.
The mm-datacnf status lamp will flash denial or the mm-datacnf FAC will
produce reorder.
3. Each H.320 DVC system in the conference call is joined to the data
conference. On many DVC systems, the provided GUI may prompt the
user with a dialog box, requesting the user to select a specific conference to
join. With MMCH, there should only be one conference available to select.
4. The user must now use the PC’s GUI to begin application sharing. The
method for beginning application sharing or file transfer is different for
each H.320 multimedia application. One of the H.320 DVC systems
activates data sharing from the H.320 DVC vendor provided GUI. See your
H.320 DVC system documentation for details.
5. The same H.320 DVC system as in step 4, opens an application,
whiteboard, etc. to share and the image of the application is displayed on
all H.320 DVC systems in the conference.
For details on how multiple users may control the shared application, see
the vendor provided documentation for your specific H.320 DVC system.

346

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

6. To end the data collaboration session and retain the voice/video conference,
the station that selected the mm-datacnf button or FAC may press the
mm-datacnf button or hit transfer and dial the mm-datacnf deactivation
FAC.
NOTE:

Currently, many endpoints do not respond correctly to ending the
data collaboration session and retaining voice/video. Some H.320
DVC systems drop the entire call. Avaya recommends that once
T.120 data sharing has been enabled for a conference, that it remain
active for the duration of the conference call. When all endpoints
have dropped from the call, the T.120 resources will be released.
Joining a multimedia conference after T.120 data sharing has been enabled.

If a multimedia conference with T.120 data sharing is already active and it is
desired to conference in a new video endpoint, the new video endpoint can be
conferenced into the existing call. The new endpoint will be allowed into the data
conference if there exists sufficient ESM resources for the new endpoint. The new
endpoint will get voice/video and data sharing if the new endpoint supports the
data rate chosen by the system when T.120 data collaboration was activated. If the
endpoint does not support the pre-existing data rate, the new endpoint will only
receive voice and video.
Activating HOLD while on a T.120 data collaboration conference.

If an Enhanced multimedia complex is active on a multimedia call and the call has
activated T.120 data collaboration, the user should be receiving voice/video and
data. If the station places this existing call on hold, audio and video will be
disconnected for the current call. The data collaboration portion of the call will
remain intact and unaffected. While this T.120 data conference is on hold, the user
will only be allowed to receive audio on all other call appearances. Thus a user is
limited to one call appearance that has T.120 data collaboration active.
Single switch data collaboration. When all parties involved in data

collaboration conference are located on the same physical Avaya DEFINITY
Server, there is no restriction on the type of user. The parties may be any
combination of Enhanced multimedia complexes, Basic multimedia complexes or
stand-alone H.320 DVC systems.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

347

Managing multimedia calling

Multi- switch data collaboration. When all parties involved in data
collaboration conference are not located on the same physical Avaya DEFINITY
Server, the parties located on the Avaya DEFINITY Server hosting the data
conference (i.e. the switch that activated mm-datacnf) may be any combination of
Enhanced multimedia complexes, Basic multimedia complexes or stand-alone
H.320 DVC systems.
NOTE:

All parties on remote switches must not be Enhanced multimedia
complexes. They must be Basic multimedia complexes or stand-alone H.320
DVC systems.
Prior to originating or receiving a multimedia mode call, the mm-basic feature
button or feature access code can be used to dynamically change an Enhanced
mode complex into a Basic mode complex and back again.
Voice station audio vs. H.320 DVC system audio

When an Enhanced mode complex originates or receives a voice or multimedia
call, the call is originated with the station handset or answered with the station
handset. The audio path will be through the handset. If the user’s H.320 DVC
system has speakers and a microphone, the user may wish to use the H.320 DVC
system for audio in much the same manner as a built-in or separate telephone
speakerphone. The user can move the station’s audio to the H.320 DVC system by
selecting an mm-pcaudio feature button on the voice station. There is no feature
access code for this function.
The mm-pcaudio feature button works very much like a speakerphone on/off
button. If the station is off-hook and selects mm-pcaudio, audio is directed to the
PC DVC system. The switch-hook may be placed on-hook. If the handset is taken
off-hook, the audio moves back to the handset. If the mm-pcaudio button is
selected while audio is already on the DVC system and the handset is on-hook,
this acts as a speakerphone off action and disconnects the current call.
The mm-pcaudio feature button may be used for voice as well as multimedia calls.
If the mm-pcaudio feature button is selected while on a voice only call, the DVC
system is alerted and brought into the call. No video will be transmitted or
displayed. Audio will be directed through the PC DVC system.

348

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

Switching between Basic and Enhanced modes

There may exist occasions when an Enhanced mode complex needs to switch to
Basic mode operation temporarily. One example is when a user wishes to make a
direct point to point multimedia call originated directly from the H.320 DVC.
Basic mode operation allows this functionality at the expense of losing
multimedia call handling capabilities (i.e. hold/xfer/conf). To switch from
Enhanced mode to Basic mode, the station may either select a mm-basic feature
button or dial the mm-basic feature access code. Both of these actions are valid
only if the Enhanced mode station has no multimedia calls active.
When in Basic mode, the status lamp for the mm-basic button, if present, will be
on solid. The mm-basic feature button acts as a toggle. If the status lamp is on,
when the button is selected, the lamp will go off and the station will return to
Enhanced mode. The mm-enhanced feature access code will set the state of the
station back to Enhanced. Switching to Enhanced mode is only valid if the
associated H.320 DVC system is idle.
NOTE:

Toggling between Basic and Enhanced mode changes the station’s
administered Multimedia mode. When in Basic mode this field on the
station screen will show basic. When in Enhanced mode this field on the
station screen will show enhanced. The current station Multimedia mode
will be saved to translation when a save translation command is
executed.
Forwarding of voice and multimedia calls

The Enhanced multimedia mode complex voice station may use the existing
standard call forwarding mechanisms to activate forwarding for voice calls. If the
forwarding destination is on the same switch then this will also forward
multimedia calls as multimedia calls to the destination. If the forwarding
destination is off switch, multimedia calls will forward off switch as voice only
calls. This is appropriate when the user will be at a location that is not able to
receive multimedia calls.
To forward multimedia calls off switch as multimedia calls, the user must activate
multimedia call forwarding. This may be done with an mm-cfwd button or feature
access code. The user may also activate standard voice call forwarding and select
the mm-call button prior to entering the forwarding address.
Coverage

Multimedia calls to an Enhanced mode complex are subject to the same coverage
criteria as voice calls and follow the coverage path administered for the voice
Station of the Enhanced multimedia mode complex.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

349

Managing multimedia calling

If a plain voice station or a Basic mode complex is the covering party, the
answering voice station will receive audio only. If all voice stations in the
coverage path have the Station screen Early Answer field set to n and the
originator of the multimedia call was not a local Enhanced mode complex, the
answering station will hear hourglass tone.
If an Enhanced mode complex is the covering party, the answering voice station
will receive voice and video. If all voice stations in the coverage path have the
Station screen Early Answer field set to n and the originator of the multimedia
call was not a local Enhanced mode complex, the answering station will hear
hourglass tone.
Multimedia calls and off-net call coverage. If the principal station’s coverage

path include a remote coverage point, the multimedia call will cover off-switch as
voice only. If the call is unanswered off-switch and proceeds to the next coverage
point on-switch, the multimedia nature of the call is preserved.
Multimedia calls and coverage to voice mail. Voice mail systems such as

AUDIX are typically the last point in a coverage path and are usually
implemented as a hunt group. In order to guarantee that the originator of an H.320
multimedia call hears the voice mail greeting, the hunt group that defines the list
of voice mail ports should have the Early Answer field on the hunt group set to y.
This field will have no effect on voice calls to the voice mail system.
Hunt Groups using Enhanced Mode Complexes

When creating hunt groups with Enhanced multimedia mode complexes, only the
station extension should ever be entered as a hunt group member. Any hunt group
or ACD skill can include the voice station of an Enhanced multimedia complex as
a member. The data extension of an Enhanced mode complex should never be
entered as any hunt group member. A hunt group or skill may have a mix of
members that are stand-alone stations and Enhanced mode complex stations. In
order to guarantee that all members of the hunt group or skill can receive voice or
multimedia calls, all members should have the H.320 field on the station screen
set to y. Simple voice stations will receive voice only. Enhanced mode stations
will receive voice and video.
The MM Early Answer field (on the Hunt Group screen) tells the system to
answer an incoming multimedia call and establish audio before it reaches the first
member of the hunt group. Thus, when the talk path is established, the caller is
able to speak with an agent immediately.
Other considerations. CMS measurements may indicate unusually slow ASA,
because of the time required for the system to establish early-answer before
offering the call to an agent.

350

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

Call association (routing). Typically incoming voice calls consist of 2 B-channel

calls to the same address, to provide greater bandwidth and better video
resolution. Avaya MultiVantage attempts to correctly pair up incoming calls and
offer them as a unit to a single agent. MMCH uses call association to route both
calls to the extension that answered the first call, regardless of how the call was
routed internally.
Two 56K/64K data calls with the same calling party number to the same
destination number are considered to be associated. The system makes every
attempt to route both calls of a 2-channel call to the same answering party. If the
first call terminates at a member of a hunt group, the second call does not have to
hunt, but goes directly to the same member.
In order for 2B multimedia calls to be correctly given to a single agent, incoming
calls to the hunt group must have ANI information. The ANI information may be
in the form of ISDN calling party number or ‘‘DCS’’ calling party number.
Multimedia calls made on the same switch as the hunt group are easily associated.
If multimedia calls into a hunt group have insufficient ANI information (i.e. all
calls from switch X to switch Y include the LDN for switch X), then as the
volume of calls increases the number of mis-associated calls will increase. If
multimedia calls into a hunt group have no ANI information, the switch will never
associate pairs of calls and all calls will be treated independently and routed to
separate agents. This is not a recommended configuration.
Multimedia vectors. Very often, calls are routed to hunt groups or skills via a

vector. The existing VDNs and vectors which exist for routing voice calls can be
used to route multimedia calls.
In order to use a vector for multimedia calls, you must set the Multimedia field on
the Vector screen to y. This field has no effect on voice calls routing through the
vector. This field will cause multimedia calls routed through the vector to receive
early answer treatment prior to processing the vector steps. This provides a talk
path to the caller for announcements or immediate conversation with an agent.
NOTE:

Vectors which have the Multimedia field set must eventually route to
hunt groups, skills or numbers which are voice extensions. A vector
with the multimedia field set to y should never be set up to route to a
hunt group or number which is a data extension.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

351

Managing multimedia calling

Interactions

Interactions are listed here only if the operation is different from standard.
■

Administered Connections
An Enhanced multimedia complex voice station may serve as the
origination point or destination of an administered connection. If the
Multimedia call feature access code is included in the administration of the
administered connection, this will result in a video AC.
An Enhanced multimedia complex H.320 DVC system may not serve as
the origination point of an administered connection.

■

X-porting
You cannot use X in the port field when administering a data module or the
data endpoint in a multimedia complex. However, you can use this to
administer the telephone.

■

Bridged Appearances
Enhanced multimedia complex voice station users can bridge onto a call if
the user has a bridged appearance. If the bridged appearance is for a
multimedia call, selecting the bridged appearance will result in a
multimedia call.

■

Call Detail Recording
Each channel of a 2-channel multimedia call generates a separate CDR
record that is tagged as data.

■

Call forwarding
Users cannot forward calls from a multimedia complex using multi-number
dialing, either by mm-multnmbr button or feature access code.

■

Call Park
Any station can park a multimedia call, and unpark the call from another
telephone. If a multimedia call is unparked by an Enhanced mode complex
station, a multimedia call will result. Users cannot park or unpark calls
using multimedia endpoints.

■

Call Pickup
Any member of a pickup group can answer a multimedia call after the call
has begun alerting at a station call appearance. If the station picking up the
call is an Enhanced mode complex station and the call is multimedia, a
multimedia call will result. This is true for standard or directed call pickup.

■

Consult
After a multimedia call has been answered, consult may be used when
transferring or conferencing the call.

352

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

■

COR/COS
The Class of Restriction and Class of Service for a multimedia call
originated from an Enhanced multimedia complex are those of the voice
station in the complex.

■

Data Call Setup
An Enhanced mode multimedia H.320 DVC system may not originate calls
from the DVC system. All calls, both voice or video are originated from the
voice station.

■

Data Hotline
An Enhanced multimedia complex H.320 DVC endpoint may not be used
to originate a call for hotline dialing. In order to setup a video hotline
function with an Enhanced mode complex, the hotline number
administered for the voice station should include the Multimedia call
feature access code.

■

Data Trunk Groups
Data trunk groups may be used to carry H.320 calls of a fixed
(administered) bearer capability.

■

ISDN Trunk Groups
Avaya highly recommends that you use ISDN trunks for multimedia calls.
ISDN PRI trunks allow complete 1-number access for an Enhanced
multimedia complex. ANI provided over PRI trunks allows correct routing
of multiple bearer channels to the correct destination device. ISDN also
provides the bearer capability on a call by call basis that can be used to
distinguish voice calls from multimedia calls.

■

Night Service
Incoming H.320 calls follow established night-service processing for data
calls.

■

Remote Access
The switch does not prevent Enhanced multimedia complexes from
attempting to use remote access. However, these endpoints will most likely
not be able to dial the necessary codes.

■

Station Hunting
Multimedia calls to Enhanced mode complex voice stations that have an
extension administered in the hunt-to-station field hunt based on
established hunting criteria. If the hunt-to-station is also an Enhanced mode
complex station, a multimedia call will result when the call is answered.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

353

Managing multimedia calling

■

Terminating Extension Groups
A multimedia call to a TEG may be answered by any member of the TEG.
If the member answering the call is an Enhanced mode complex station, a
multimedia call will result.

■

Telephone Display
Display information for calls to or from an Enhanced multimedia complex
contains the display information associated with the voice station.

Troubleshooting

If one channel of a 2 B-channel call goes down, your choices are to continue with
reduced transmission quality, or to hang up the call and start over. It is not possible
to re-establish the second channel while the call is still active.
If you cannot share data with others, it may be that both parties do not have the
same endpoint software. This is true for some data collaboration, but most
whiteboard and file transfer software implementations are compatible.
Monitoring MMCH

This section briefly discusses some of the commands you can use to monitor
multimedia complexes and conferences. The Maintenance manual for your system
discusses these commands and their output in detail.
Action

Objects

Qualifier

display

station
data module

xxxxx (extension)
xxxxx (extension)

list

mmi

status

measurements

multimedia-interface
voice-conditioner
esm

multimedia

endpoints [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
h.320-stations [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]

attendant
conference
conference
conference
data module
station
trunk

xxxx (console number)
all
xxx (conference ID)
xxx (conference ID) endpoint (endpoint ID)
xxxxx (extension)
xxxxx (extension)
(group number or group number/member
number)

esm

354

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhanced Mode MM complex

Status commands

The status commands for data module, station, trunk, and attendant provide the
conference ID and endpoint ID for any of these involved in an active multimedia
conference.

status station 1002
GENERAL STATUS
Type: 7405D
Extension: 1002
Port: 01C0702
Call Parked? no
Ring Cut Off Act? no
Active Coverage Option: 1

Service State:
Maintenance Busy?
SAC Activated?
User Cntrl Restr:
Group Cntrl Restr:
CF Destination Ext:
MM Conference ID:
MM Endpoint ID:

in-service/on-hook
no
no
none
none

Message Waiting:
Connected Ports:
ACD STATUS
Agent Logged In
Work Mode

HOSPITALITY STATUS
AWU Call At:
User DND: not activated
Group DND: not activated
Room Status: non-guest room

On ACD Call? no

Screen 23.

Status Station 1002 — General Status screen

The following fields specific to multimedia appear on the status station, attendant,
data module and trunk screens.

555-233-506

■

MM Conference ID — This field appears only if the station is active on a
multimedia conference. It displays the ID for the conference. Enter this
number with the status conference command to get more information about
this conference.

■

MM Endpoint ID — This field appears only if the station is active on a
multimedia conference. It displays the endpoint ID for the station. Enter
this number with the status conference endpoint command to learn more
about this endpoint’s involvement in the conference.

Issue 5 October 2002

355

Managing multimedia calling

List commands

The list multimedia endpoints command shows you all the multimedia data
modules that exist in your system, and their associated telephones, if any. The list
multimedia H.320-stations command shows you all the stations that are
administered for H.320 conversion.
MULTIMEDIA ENDPOINTS
Data Ext

MM Complex Voice Ext

100
1321
15683

Screen 24.

H.320 Conversion?

87654

y

738

n

List Multimedia Endpoints screen

MULTIMEDIA H.320-STATIONS
Station Ext

MM Data Ext

100
1321
15683

87654

Screen 25.

738

List Multimedia H.320-Stations screen

Considerations

Each channel of a 2-channel BRI call takes one port on an MMI circuit pack. This
alone limits the number of multimedia calls your system can handle. In addition,
each conference takes one port on a voice-conditioner circuit pack.
Also, there is a limit to the number of conversion calls that the system can handle
simultaneously. If you experience traffic problems after installing multimedia,
you may want to lower the number of stations that use H.320 conversion.

356

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up telecommuting

Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for
telecommuting
Telecommuting emphasizes the ability to perform telephony activities while
remote from the Avaya MultiVantage solution. It is a combination of four features
which permit you to remotely perform changes to your station’s Coverage and
Call Forwarding.
NOTE:

If you are operating in a Distributed Communications System (‘‘DCS’’)
environment, you need to assign a different telecommuting-access extension
to each switch and tell your users which extension they should use. A user
can set up call coverage from any of the DCS nodes, but needs to dial the
telecommuting-access extension of the node on which their station is
defined before using the feature access code.
You can also set up telecommuting with an IP (internet protocol) phone.
See ‘‘Adding an IP Softphone’’ for more information.
■

Coverage of Calls Redirected Off Net (‘‘CCRON’’) allows you to redirect
calls off-net onto the public network and bring back unanswered calls for
further coverage.
NOTE:

If a call covers or forwards off net and an answering machine answers
the call or it is directed to a cellular phone and a cellular
announcement is heard, the switch views this call as an answered call.
The switch does not bring the call back to the switch for further
routing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 357

Setting up telecommuting

■

The Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls feature allows you
to change the direction of calls to your station. This activates the capability
to have 2 coverage path options. These 2 path options can be specified on
the station screen; however, unless the Can Change Coverage field is set to
y on the Class of Restriction screen the second path option cannot be
populated.

■

The Personal Station Access feature gives you an extension number, a
Merge feature access code, and a personalized security code and tells you
which office phone you can use. This allows you to take your phone, as
long as the phones are the same type, anywhere on the same switch.

■

The Answer Supervision feature provides supervision of a call directed out
of the switch either by coverage or forwarding and determines whether the
switch should bring the call control back.

Before you start

Ensure you have the following equipment:
■

Call Classifier — Detector

■

1264-TMx software

■

MultiVantage extender — switch module or standalone rack mount (Digital
Communications Protocol (‘‘DCP’’) or Integrated Services Digital
Network (‘‘ISDN’’))
For more information about this equipment, see the Avaya MultiVantage™
Solutions Hardware Guide.

Verify the following fields on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen
are set to y.
■

Cvg Of Calls Redirected Off-Net

■

Extended Cvg/Fwd Admin

■

Personal Station Access

■

Terminal Translation Initialization (‘‘TTI’’)

If neither MultiVantage extender nor the System Parameters Customer Options
fields are configured, contact your Avaya representative.
Verify the telecommuting access extension is a direct inward dialing (‘‘DID’’) or a
central office (‘‘CO’’) trunk destination for off-premises features to work.
Configure TTI for personal station access (PSA). For information about
configuring TTI, see ‘‘Setting up Personal Station Access’’ on page 360.

358

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting

Configure Security Violation Notification for Station Security Codes. For
information about Security Violation Notification, see ‘‘Setting up security
violations notification’’ on page 401.
Instructions

In our example, we set up the telecommuting extension and enable coverage of
calls redirected off-net.
To configure Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting:
1. Type change telecommuting-access and press RETURN.
The Telecommuting Access screen appears.

TELECOMMUTING ACCESS
Telecommuting Access Extension: 1234

2. In the Telecommuting Access Extension field, type 1234 and press ENTER.
This is the extension you are configuring for telecommuting.
3. Type change system-parameters coverage and press RETURN.
The System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding screen appears.
4. In the Coverage Of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field, type y and
press ENTER.
Related topics

See ‘‘Telecommuting Access’’ on page 1213 for information about and field
descriptions on the Telecommuting Access screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

359

Setting up telecommuting

Setting up Personal Station Access
Personal Station Access (‘‘PSA’’) allows you to associate the preferences and
permissions assigned to your own extension with any other compatible phone.
When you request a PSA associate, the system automatically dissociates another
extension from the phone.
Preferences and permissions include the definition of terminal buttons,
abbreviated dial lists, and class of service ‘‘COS’’ and class of restriction
(‘‘COR’’) permissions assigned to your station. Extensions without a COS, such
as Expert Agent Selection (‘‘EAS’’) agents or hunt groups, cannot use PSA.
PSA requires you to enter a security code and can be used on-site or off-site.
Invalid attempts to associate a phone generate referral calls and are recorded by
Security Violation Notification, if that feature is enabled. If you interrupt the PSA
dialing sequence by pressing the release button or by hanging up, the system does
not log the action as an invalid attempt.
The disassociate function within PSA allows you to restrict the features available
to a phone. When a phone has been dissociated using PSA, it can be used only to
call an attendant, or to accept a TTI or PSA request. You can enable a dissociated
set to make other calls by assigning a special class of restriction.
When a call that goes to coverage from a PSA-disassociated extension, the switch
sends a message to the coverage point indicating that the call was not answered. If
the coverage point is a display phone, the display shows “da” for “don't answer.”
If the coverage point is a voice messaging system, the VM system receives an
indication from the switch that this call was not answered, and treats the call
accordingly.
NOTE:

Once a phone has been associated with an extension, anyone using the
terminal has the capabilities of the associated station. Be sure to execute a
dissociate request if the terminal can be accessed by unauthorized users.
This is particularly important if you use PSA and DCP extenders to permit
remote DCP access.
Before you start

Verify that the Personal Station Access field is set to y on the Class of Service
screen.
Verify that the extension has a COS that allows PSA.

360

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up Personal Station Access

Instructions

In our example, we specify the TTI State, the Record PSA/TTI Transactions, the
class of service, and the feature access codes set up PSA.
To set up Personal Station Access:
1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
2. Complete the following fields and press ENTER.
a. Type voice in the TTI State field.
b. (Optional) Type y on the Record PSA/TTI Transactions in History
Log field.
These fields display only when the Terminal Translation
Initialization (TTI) Enabled field on this screen is set to y.
3. Type change cos and press RETURN.
The Class of Service screen appears.
4. Type y in the Personal Station Access (PSA) 1 field and press ENTER.
5. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code (FAC) screen appears.
6. Complete the following fields and press ENTER.
a. Type #4 in the Personal Station Access (PSA) Associate Code field.
This is the feature access code you will use to activate Personal
Station Access at a phone.
b. Type #3 in the Dissociate Code field.
This is the feature access code you will use to deactivate Personal
Station Access at a phone.
More information

You can allow users to place emergency and other calls from phones that have
been dissociated. To enable this, you must first assign a class of restriction (COR)
for PSA-dissociated phones. You do this on the ‘‘Feature-Related System
Parameters’’ screen. In addition, you must set the restrictions for this COR on the
‘‘Class of Restriction’’ screen.
If you want users to be able to place emergency calls from dissociated phones, it is
also a good idea to have the system send calling party number (CPN) or automatic
number identification (‘‘ANI’’) information for these calls. To do this, you must
set the CPN, ANI for PSA Dissociated Sets field to y on the ‘‘Feature-Related
System Parameters’’ screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

361

Setting up telecommuting

Related topics

See ‘‘Training users’’ on page 373 for information on how to associate or
disassociate PSA.

Creating a station security code
Station Security Codes (‘‘SREPN’’) provide security to station users by
preventing other users from accessing functions associated with the user’s station.
Each station user can change their own SSC if they know the station’s current
settings.
You must create a system-wide SSC change feature access code (‘‘FAC’’) before
users can change their SSC. You must also provide users with their individual
SSC. A user cannot change a blank SSC.
Instructions

In our example, we set the station security code for a user.
To create a station security code:
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
2. Type #5 in the Station Security Code Change Access Code field and press
ENTER.
This sets the access codes for this features. The Command prompt appears.
3. Type change system-parameters security and press RETURN.
The Security-Related System Parameters screen appears.
4. Type 4 in the Minimum Station Security Code Length field and press
ENTER.
This determines the minimum required length of the Station Security
Codes you enter on the Station screen. Longer codes are more secure. If
station security codes are used for external access to telecommuting
features, the minimum length should be 7 or 8.

362

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Assigning coverage options

5. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN.
This is the station extension you configured for telecommuting. The Station
screen appears.

Page 1 of X
STATION
Extension:
Type:
Port:
Name:

1234 Lock Messages? n
406D
_____
__________________________

STATION OPTIONS
Data Module? n
Display Module? n

BCC: 0
Security Code:
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to-Station:

4321__
TN: 1
___
COR: 1
___
COS: 1
_______

Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1
Message Lamp Ext: 1014

MM Complex Data Ext: ________

6. Type 4321 in the Security Code field and press ENTER.
Related topics

See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about and field descriptions on the
Station screen.
See ‘‘Station security codes’’ on page 1832 for a description of the Station
Security Codes feature.

Assigning coverage options
Avaya MultiVantage allows you to assign two previously administered coverage
paths and/or time of day coverage tables on the Station screen. This allow
telecommuters to alternate between the two coverage paths and/or time of day
coverage tables administered to better control how their telephone calls are
handled.
For information about creating a coverage path, see ‘‘Creating coverage paths’’ on
page 190. For information about creating a time of day coverage table, see
‘‘Assigning a coverage path to users’’ on page 192.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

363

Setting up telecommuting

Instructions

In our example, we assign two coverage options so a user can choose from either
option to control how their calls are handled.
To assign 2 coverage options:
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
2. Type #9 in the Change Coverage Access Code field and press ENTER.
3. Type change cor 1 and press RETURN.
The Class of Restriction screen appears.
4. In the Can Change Coverage field, type y and press ENTER to save your
work.
The Command prompt appears.
5. Type change station 1234 and press RETURN.
This is the station extension you configured for telecommuting. The Station
screen appears.
6. Complete the following fields:
a. Type 2 in the Coverage Path 1 field.
b. Type t8 in the Coverage Path 2 field.
Related topics

See ‘‘Coverage Path’’ on page 696 for information about and field descriptions on
the Coverage Path screen.
See ‘‘Call coverage’’ on page 1532 for a description of the Call Coverage feature.
See ‘‘Training users’’ on page 373 for information on how to alternate your
coverage path option.
See ‘‘Extended user administration of redirected calls’’ on page 1673 for
information about the Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls feature.

Setting up call forwarding
Avaya MultiVantage allows you to change your call forwarding from any on-site
or off-site location.

364

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up call forwarding

Instructions

In our example, we assign the feature access codes and class of service to set up
call forwarding. This allows your users to forward their calls to another extension.
To set up call forwarding:
1. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Code screen appears.
2. Set a 2-digit access code for the following fields and press ENTER.
a. Type *8 in the Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D/A field.
b. Type *7 in the Extended Call Fwd Activate All field.
c. Type *6 in the Extended Call Fwd Activate Deactivation field.
This sets the access codes for these features. The Command prompt
appears.
3. Type change cos and press RETURN.
The Class of Service screen appears.
4. Set the following fields to y.
■

Extended Forwarding All

■

Extended Forwarding B/DA

This allows you to change the forwarding of all your calls from an off-site
location.
5. Set the Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net field to n and press ENTER.
This allows your users to forward calls off-site.
Interactions
■

Bridged Appearance
When the pound key (#) is pressed from a bridged appearance immediately
following any of this feature’s four FACs, the system assumes that the
currently active bridged extension will be administered. The station
security code of the currently active bridged extension must be entered
after the initial # to successfully complete the command sequence.
If the station has only bridged appearances, the station’s extension must be
dialed after the FAC to successfully complete the command sequence,
since the station’s extension is not associated with any appearances.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

365

Setting up telecommuting

■

Distributed Communications System
Assign a different telecommuting access extension for each switch. You
can use Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls from any of the
DCS nodes, but you must dial the extension of the node on which your
station is defined before dialing the FAC.

■

Tenant Partitioning
The telecommuting access extension is always automatically assigned to
Tenant Partition 1, so it can be accessed by all tenants.
The tenant number of the extension being administered must be accessible
by the tenant number from which the Extended User Administration of
Redirected Calls FAC is dialed or the request is denied. If the FAC is dialed
on site, the tenant number of the station or attendant must have access to
the tenant number of the extension administered. If the FAC is dialed off
site, the tenant number of the incoming trunk must have access to the
tenant number of the extension administered.

Related topics

See ‘‘Training users’’ on page 373 for information on how to change call
forwarding.
See ‘‘Call forwarding’’ on page 1612 for a description of the Call Forwarding
feature.

Assigning an extender password
Avaya MultiVantage allows you assign an extender password to a user. You can
assign one password for each port on your MultiVantage solution.
Before you start

Use the Remote Extender PC in the switch room to perform this procedure.
Instructions

In our example, we set a system generated random password for John Doe.
To assign an extender password:
1. Double-click the Security icon.
The Password Manager screen appears.
2. Double-click User Password for User 01.

366

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Assigning an extender password

3. Select Enable Password to enable the password.
4. Click random.
This means that the password is a system generated random number. The
system displays a 10-digit number in the Password field. Take note of this
number, your user will need it to access the switch from home.
5. Type Doe, John and click OK.
This is the last name and first name of the user. The system returns you to
the Password Manager screen.
6. Select CommLink:Select Cards.
A screen containing a list of cards (for example, Card A, Card B, and so
on) appears. Each card corresponds to a port on your switch.
7. Select Card A and click OK.
The system returns you to the Password Manager screen.
8. Select CommLink:Upload Password.
The error message screen appears with the message “Administrator
password not loaded”.
9. Click OK.
The Administrator screen appears.
10. Type 123456 and click OK.
This is the administrator’s password.
11. Select CommLink:Upload Password.
The password is uploaded.
12. When upload is complete, click OK.
The system returns you to the Password Manager screen.
13. Select File:Save As.
The Save As screen appears.
14. Type doe.fil in the File field and click OK.
The system saves the User01 information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

367

Setting up telecommuting

Installing home equipment
Avaya MultiVantage allows you to install equipment in your home so that you can
utilize system facilities from off-site.
Before you start

You need the following equipment:
■

MultiVantage extender remote module

■

DCP sets (office and home must match)

Configure a feature access code for associating your home number to your office
number. For information about configuring an associate feature access code, see
‘‘Setting up Personal Station Access’’ on page 360.
Instructions
Installing home equipment

To install your home equipment:
1. Plug the phone cord into the slot labeled line on the back of the module and
into the wall jack.
2. Plug the phone cord into the slot labeled port on the back of the module and
into the slot labeled line on the phone.
3. Plug the power cord into slot labeled power on the back of the module and
the wall socket.
The phone display Go Online appears.
4. Press 3 (Nxt).
The phone display Set Phone Number appears.
5. Press 2 (OK) to set the phone number.
6. Type 5551234 and press DROP.
This is the assigned analog phone number. In some areas, you may need to
include your area code (for example, 3035551234). The phone display Set
Phone Number appears.
7. Press 1(Prv).
This returns you to the Go Online phone display.

368

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Installing home equipment

8. Press 2 (OK).
The module dials the number. When the modules connect, the phone
display Enter Password appears.
9. Type 0123456789 and press DROP.
Associating your office phone number to the
home station

To associate your phone number:
1. On your home station, type #4.
This is the associate feature access code.
2. Type 4321 and press #.
This is your extension number.
3. Type 1996 and press #.
This is your password.
Disassociating your home station

To disassociate your home station:
1. Press HOLD four times.
Related topics

See ‘‘Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting’’ on page 357 for
step-by-step instructions on how to configure your office equipment.
See ‘‘Training users’’ on page 373 for step-by-step instructions on how to use
your home station.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

369

Setting up telecommuting

Setting up remote access
Remote Access permits a caller located outside the system to access the switch
through the public or private network and then use the features and services of the
system.
Remote Access users can dial into the system using central office (CO), Foreign
Exchange (‘‘FX’’), Wide Area Telecommunications trunks (‘‘WATS’’), and
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI) trunks.
In addition, a dedicated Remote Access Direct Inward Dialing number can be
provided.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Avaya has designed the Remote Access feature incorporated in this product
that, when properly administered by the customer, will enable the customer
to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the
network. It is the customer’s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to
properly implement the features, evaluate and administer the various
restriction levels, protect access codes and distribute them only to
individuals who have been advised of the sensitive nature of the access
information. Each authorized user should be instructed concerning the
proper use and handling of access codes.
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the
telecommunications network through use of remote access features. In such
an event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network
charges for traffic. Avaya cannot be responsible for such charges, and will
not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from
unauthorized access.
If you do not intend to use Remote Access now or in the future, you can
permanently disable the feature. If you do decide to permanently disable the
feature, it will require Avaya Services intervention to activate the feature again.
Before you start

Configure the Incoming Destination and Night Service fields on the CO trunk
screen. For information about configuring a CO trunk, see ‘‘Adding a CO, FX, or
WATS trunk group’’ on page 414.
Verify that the Authorization Codes field on the System Parameters Customer
Options screen is set to y.
Verify that the SVN Authorization Code Violation Notification Enabled field on
the Security-Related System Parameters screen is set to y.

370

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up remote access

Instructions
Setting up remote access

In our example, we set up a remote access extension with maximum security. This
assists you in blocking unauthorized people from gaining access to your network.
To set up remote access:
1. Type change remote-access and press RETURN.
The QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen screen appears.

REMOTE ACCESS
Remote Access Extension 1234___
Barrier Code Length 7__
Authorization Code Required? y
Remote Access Dial Tone: y
Barrier Code
COR TN COS
Expiration Date
No. of Calls
Calls Used
1:1234567
1__ 1_ 1__
01/01/99
______
______
2:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
3:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
4:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
5:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
6:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
7:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
8:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
9:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
10:_______
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
Permanently Disable? __ Disable Following A Security Violation? y
(NOTE: You must logoff to effect permanent disabling of Remote Access)

2. Type 1234 in the Remote Access Extension field.
This is the extension specified in the Incoming Destination field on the CO
trunk screen.
3. Type 7 in the Barrier Code Length field.
This is the number of digits your barrier code must be when entered.
4. Type y in the Authorization Code Required field.
This means you must also enter an authorization code when you access the
system’s Remote Access facilities. For information about setting up access
codes, see ‘‘Setting up authorization codes’’ on page 404.
5. Type y in the Remote Access Dial Tone field.
This means you hear dial tone as a prompt to enter your authorization code.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

371

Setting up telecommuting

6. Type 1234567 in the Barrier Code field.
This is the 7-digit barrier code you must enter to access the system’s
Remote Access facilities.
7. Type 1 in the COR field.
This is the class of restriction (COR) number associated with the barrier
code that defines the call restriction features.
8. Type 1 in the TN field.
This is the Tenant Partition (TN) number.
9. Type 1 in the COS field.
This is the class of service (COS) number associated with the barrier code
that defines access permissions for Call Processing features.
10. Type 01/01/99 in the Expiration Date field.
This is the date the barrier code expires. A warning message is displayed
on the system copyright screen seven days before the expiration date. The
system administrator can modify the expiration date to extend the time
interval, if necessary.
11. Type y in the Disable Following A Security Violation field.
This disables the remote access feature following detection of a remote
access security violation.
12. Press ENTER to save your work.
Disabling remote access permanently

To disable remote access permanently:
1. Type change remote-access and press RETURN.
The QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen screen appears.
2. Type y in the Permanently Disable field.
If you permanently disable this feature, it requires Avaya Services
intervention to reactivate the feature. There is a charge for reactivation of
this feature.
3. Press ENTER to save your work.

! CAUTION:
Your attempt to disable the Remote Access feature will be lost if the switch is
rebooted without saving translations. Therefore, execute a save translation
command after permanently disabling the Remote Access feature.

372

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Training users

More information

Remote Access provides you with access to the system and its features from the
public network. This allows you to make business calls from home or use
Recorded Telephone Dictation Access to dictate a letter. If authorized, you can
also access system features from any on-site extension.
With Remote Access you can dial into the system using Direct Inward Dialing
(DID), Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), or 800 Service trunks. When
a call comes in on a trunk group dedicated to Remote Access, the system routes
the call to the Remote Access extension you have assigned. If DID is provided
and the Remote Access extension is within the range of numbers that can be
accessed by DID, Remote Access is accessed through DID.
Barrier codes provide your system security and define calling privileges through
the administered COR. You can administer up to 10 barrier codes, each with a
different COR and COS. Barrier codes can be from 4 to 7 digits, but all codes
must be the same length. You can also require that users enter an authorization
code to use this feature. Both barrier codes and authorization codes are described
under ‘‘Setting up authorization codes’’ on page 404.
Related topics

See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on page 1085 for information about
and field descriptions on the Remote Access screen.
See ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 1800 for a description of the Remote Access
feature.

Training users
DEFINITIY ECS allows you to associate and disassociate PSA, change the
coverage path for your station, change the extension to which you forward your
calls, and change your personal station’s security code.
Before you start

Configure PSA. For information about configuring PSA, see ‘‘Setting up Personal
Station Access’’ on page 360
Assign two coverage options for your system. For information on how to assign
coverage options, see ‘‘Assigning coverage options’’ on page 363.
Configure call forwarding for your system. For information about configuring call
forwarding, see ‘‘Setting up call forwarding’’ on page 364.
Configure security codes for a station. For information about configuring personal
station security codes, see ‘‘Assigning an extender password’’ on page 366.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

373

Setting up telecommuting

Instructions
Associating PSA

In this example, we associate PSA (preferences and permissions) assigned to your
station with another compatible terminal.
To associate PSA:
1. Dial #4.
This is the associate PSA feature access code. You hear dial tone.
2. Type 1234 and press #.
This is your extension.
3. Type 4321 and press #.
This is your Station Security Code. You hear a confirmation tone.
Disassociating PSA

In our example, we disassociate PSA from the station you are using.
To disassociate PSA:
1. Dial #3.
This is the disassociate PSA feature access code. You are no longer PSA
associated to this station.
Changing a coverage option

In this example, we change the coverage option from path 1 to path 2 from a
remote location.
To change a coverage option:
1. Dial 1234.
This is the extension you configured for telecommuting. You hear dial
tone.
2. Dial #9 and press #.
This is the feature access code you set for changing a coverage path. You
hear dial tone.
3. Dial 4321 and press #.
This is the extension for which you want to change the coverage path.
4. Dial 87654321 and press #.
This is the extension security code.
5. Dial 2.
This is the new coverage path. You hear confirmation tone.

374

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Training users

Changing call forwarding

In this example, we change call forwarding to extension 1235.
To change call forwarding:
1. Dial 1234.
This is the extension you configured for telecommuting.
2. Dial #8 and press #.
This is the feature access code you set for activating extended call forward.
You hear dial tone.
3. Dial 4321and press #.
This is the extension from which you want to forward calls.
4. Dial 87654321 and press #.
This is the extension security code. You hear dial tone.
5. Dial 1235.
This is the extension to which you want to forward calls. You hear the
confirmation tone.
Changing your personal station security codes

In this example, we change the security code for extension 1235 from 98765432
to 12345678.
To change your security code:
1. Dial #5.
This is the feature access code you set for changing your security code. You
hear dial tone.
2. Dial 1235 and press #.
This is the extension for which you want to change the security code.
3. Dial 98765432 and press #.
This is the current security code for the extension. You hear dial tone.
4. Dial 12345678 and press #.
This is the new security code. Security codes can be 4- to 8-digits long.
5. Dial 12345678 and press #.
This is to confirm your new security code. You hear the confirmation tone.
NOTE:

If you cannot change your security code, Manager 1 can clear the
problem using the Clear Audit Summary command.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

375

Setting up telecommuting

Interrupting the command sequence for
personal station security codes

To interrupt the command sequence for personal station security codes:
1. To interrupt the command sequence before step 3, choose one of these
options:
■

Hang up or press the disconnect or recall button before hearing
intercept tone in step 3.
The system does not log an invalid attempt. You must restart the
process at step 1.

■

Type * before the second # in step 3.
You must begin the change sequence at the point of entering your
extension in step 2. (You should not enter the FAC again.)

■

Type * after the FAC has been entered and before the final #.
You must restart the process at step1.

2. To interrupt the command sequence after step 3, type * in steps 4 or 5, you
must begin the change sequence at the point of entering the new station
security code (SSC) in step 4.
If you hear intercept tone in any step, the command sequence has been
invalidated for some reason and you must restart the process at step 1.
If you hear intercept tone after step 3, the system logs an invalid attempt
via the Security Violation Notification (SVN) feature. This is true even if
you attempt to interrupt the change sequence with an asterisk.

376

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Enhancing system security

Toll fraud is the theft of long distance service and can come from both internal and
external sources. When toll fraud occurs, your company is responsible for usage
charges. In addition, unauthorized use may tie up your system, preventing your
customers from reaching you and your employees from doing business.
Avaya designed Avaya MultiVantage to help you to limit toll fraud. However,
there are steps that you, as the administrator, must also take to keep your system
secure from unauthorized use.
Need help quickly?

555-233-506

■

For assistance with toll fraud prevention (including systems and products),
call the Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 800-643-2353 or contact
your Avaya representative.

■

If you have identified fraudulent calling in progress, and require assistance
in stopping the fraud, call the Avaya Technical Service Center at
800-242-2121 and select the toll fraud help option or contact your Avaya
representative.

Issue 5 October 2002 377

Enhancing system security

Basic security
Keeping your system secure

The following is a partial list you can use to help secure your system. It is not
intended as a comprehensive security checklist. See the BCS Products Security
Handbook for more information about these and other security-related features.

378

■

Secure the system administration and maintenance ports and/or logins on
Avaya MultiVantage using the Access Security Gateway. This optional
password authentication interface program is provided to customers with
maintenance contracts.

■

Activate Security Violation Notification to report unsuccessful attempts to
access the system. Security Violation Notification lets you automatically
disable a valid login ID following a security violation involving that login
ID and disable remote access following a security violation involving a
barrier code or authorization code.

■

Use the list history command to determine if unauthorized changes have
been made to the system. To assist in identifying unauthorized use of the
system, the History report lists each time a user logs on or off the system.
See the Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information
about this report.

■

Secure trunks using Automatic Route Selection (ARS), class of restriction
(COR), Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs) and Alternate Facility
Restriction Levels (AFRLs), Authorization Codes, Automatic Circuit
Assurance (ACA), and Forced Entry of Account Codes (see ‘‘Call detail
recording’’ on page 1553 for more information).

■

Activate Enhanced Call Transfer for your voice messaging system, if
available. This limits transfers to valid extensions, but you also need to
restrict transfers to extensions that may offer dial tone to the caller, such as
screen extensions.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Preventing toll fraud

Preventing toll fraud
Top 15 tips to help prevent toll fraud

1. Protect system administration access
Make sure secure passwords exist for all logins that allow System
Administration or Maintenance access to the system. Change the
passwords frequently.
Set logoff notification and forced password aging when administering
logins. You must assign passwords for these logins at setup time.
Establish well-controlled procedures for resetting passwords.
2. Prevent voice mail system transfer to dial tone
Activate “secure transfer” features in voice mail systems.
Place appropriate restrictions on voice mail access/egress ports.
Limit the number of invalid attempts to access a voice mail to five or less.
3. Deny unauthorized users direct inward system access (screen)
If you are not using the Remote Access features, deactivate or disable
them.
If you are using Remote Access, require the use of barrier codes and/or
authorization codes set for maximum length. Change the codes frequently.
It is your responsibility to keep your own records regarding who is allowed
to use which authorization code.
4. Place protection on systems that prompt callers to input digits
Prevent callers from dialing unintended digit combinations at prompts.
Restrict auto attendants and call vectors from allowing access to dial tone.
5. Use system software to intelligently control call routing
Create Automatic Route Selection or World Class Routing patterns to
control how each call is to be handled.
Use “Time of Day” routing capabilities to limit facilities available on
nights and weekends.
Deny all end-points the ability to directly access outgoing trunks.
6. Block access to international calling capability
When international access is required, establish permission groups.
Limit access to only the specific destinations required for business.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

379

Enhancing system security

7. Protect access to information stored as voice
Password restrict access to voice mail mailboxes.
Use non-trivial passwords and change passwords regularly.
8. Provide physical security for telecommunications assets
Restrict unauthorized access to equipment rooms and wire connection
closets.
Protect system documentation and reports data from being compromised.
9. Monitor traffic and system activity for abnormal patterns
Activate features that “turn off” access in response to unauthorized access
attempts.
Use Traffic and Call Detail reports to monitor call activity levels.
10. Educate system users to recognize toll fraud activity and react
appropriately
From safely using calling cards to securing voice mailbox password, train
your users on how to protect themselves from inadvertent compromises to
the system’s security.
11. Monitor access to the dial-up maintenance port. Change the access
password regularly and issue it only to authorized personnel. Consider
activating Access Security Gateway.
12. Create a switch system management policy concerning employee turnover
and include these actions:
a. Delete any unused voice mailboxes in the voice mail system.
b. Immediately delete any voice mailboxes belonging to a terminated
employee.
c. Immediately remove the authorization code if a terminated
employee had screen calling privileges and a personal authorization
code.
d. Immediately change barrier codes and/or authorization codes shared
by a terminated employee. Notify the remaining users of the change.
e. Remove a terminated employee’s login ID if they had access to the
system administration interface. Change any associated passwords
immediately.
13. Back up system files regularly to ensure a timely recovery. Schedule
regular, off-site backups.

380

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Physical security

14. Callers misrepresenting themselves as the “phone company,” “AT&T,”
“RBOCS,” or even known employees within your company may claim to
be testing the lines and ask to be transferred to “900,” “90,” or ask the
attendant to do “start 9 release.” This transfer reaches an outside operator,
allowing the unauthorized caller to place a long distance or international
call. Instruct your users to never transfer these calls. Do not assume that if
“trunk to trunk transfer” is blocked this cannot happen.
15. Hackers run random generator PC programs to detect dial tone. Then they
revisit those lines to break barrier codes and/or authorization codes to make
fraudulent calls or resell their services. They do this using your telephone
lines to incur the cost of the call. Frequently these call/sell operations are
conducted at public payphones located in subways, shopping malls, or
airport locations. See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on page 1085
to prevent this happening to your company.

Physical security
Physical security is your responsibility. Implement the following safeguards as an
added layer of security:
1. Unplug and secure attendant console handsets when the attendant position
is not in use.
2. Lock wiring closets and switch rooms.
3. Keep a log book register of technicians and visitors.
4. Shred all switch information or directories you discard.
5. Always demand verification of a technician or visitor by asking for a valid
I.D. badge.
6. Keep any reports that may reveal trunk access codes, screen barrier codes,
authorization codes, or password information secure.
7. Keep the attendant console and supporting documentation in an office that
is secured with a changeable combination lock. Provide the combination
only to those individuals who need to enter the office.
8. Keep any documentation pertaining to switch operation secure.
9. Label all backup tapes or flash cards with correct dates to avoid using an
outdated one when restoring data. Be sure that all backup media have the
correct generic software load.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

381

Enhancing system security

System security checklist
Here’s some of the steps required for indemnification. Use these to analyze your
system security.
1. Remove all default factory logins of cust, rcust, browse, nms, and bcms
and assign unique logins with 7-character alphanumeric passwords and a
90-day password aging. Use the list logins command to find out what
logins are there.
2. If you do not use Remote Access, be sure to disable it permanently.
Tip:

You can use the display remote-access command to check the status
of your remote access.
To disable Remote Access, on the Remote Access screen, in the
Permanently Disable field, type y. See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway
screen’’ on page 1085 for more information on remote access.
NOTE:

Avaya recommends that you permanently disable Remote Access
using the change remote-access command. If you do permanently
disable Remote Access, the code is removed from the software.
Avaya charges a fee to restore the Remote Access feature.
3. If you use Remote Access, but only for internal calls, change
announcements or remote service observing.
a. Use a 7-digit barrier code.
b. Assign a unique COR to the 7-digit barrier code.
The unique COR must be administered where the FRL is 0, the
Calling Party Restriction field is outward, the Calling Permissions
field is n on all unique Trunk Group COR.
c. Assign Security Violation Notification Remote to 10 attempts in 2
minutes.
d. Set the aging cycle to 90 days with 100 call limit per barrier code.
See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on page 1085 for more
information.

382

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System security checklist

4. If you use Remote Access to process calls off-net or in any way access the
public network:
a. Use a 7-digit barrier code.
b. Assign a unique COR to the barrier code.
c. Restrict the COR assigned to each barrier code by FRL level to only
the required calling areas to conduct business.
d. Set the aging cycle to 90 days with 100 call limit per barrier code.
e. Suppress dial tone where applicable.
f. Administer Authorization Codes.
g. Use a minimum of 11 digits (combination of barrier codes and
authorization codes).
h. Assign Security Violation Notification Remote to 10 attempts in 2
minutes.
5. If you use vectors:
a. Assign all Vector Directory Numbers (‘‘VDN’’) a unique COR. See
Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call
Centers for more information.
NOTE:

The ‘‘COR’’ associated with the VDN dictates the calling privileges
of the VDN/vector. High susceptibility to toll fraud exists on vectors
that have “collect digits” steps. When a vector collects digits, it
processes those digits back to the switch and if the COR of the VDN
allows it to complete the call off-net, it will do so. For example, the
announcement “If you know your party’s 4-digit extension number,
enter it now” results in 4 digits being collected in step 6. If you input
“90##” or “900#”, the 4 digits are analyzed and if “9” points towards
‘‘ARS’’ and “0” or “00” is assigned in the ARS Analysis Tables and
the VDN COR allows it, the call routes out of the switch to an outside
local exchange or long distance operator. The operator then connects
the call to the requested number.
b. If vectors associated with the VDN do not require routing the call
off-net or via ‘‘AAR’’, assign a unique COR where the ‘‘FRL’’ is 0,
the Calling Party Restriction field is outward, the Calling
Permissions field is n on all unique Trunk Group COR.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

383

Enhancing system security

c. If the vector has a “route-to” step that routes the call to a remote
switch via AAR, assign a unique COR with a unique ARS/AAR
Partition Group, the lowest FRL to complete an AAR call, and n on
all unique COR assigned to your public network trunking facilities
on the Calling Permissions. Assign the appropriate AAR route
patterns on the AAR Partition Group using the change aar analysis
partition x 2 command.
Tip:

You can use the display aar analysis print command to print
a copy of your Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) setup
before making any changes. You can use the printout to correct
any mistakes.
d. If the vector has a “route-to” step that routes the call to off-net,
assign a unique COR with a unique ARS/AAR Partition Group, the
lowest FRL to complete an ARS call, and n on all unique COR
assigned to your public network trunking facilities on the Calling
Permissions. Assign the appropriate complete dial string in the
“route-to” step of the vector the unique ARS Partition Group using
the change ars analysis partition x 2 command.
6. On the Feature Access Code screen, Facility Test Calls Access Code, the
Data Origination Access Code, and the Data Privacy Access Code fields,
change from the default or remove them.
NOTE:

These codes, when dialed, return system dial tone or direct access to
outgoing trunking facilities. Transfers to these codes can take place
via an unsecured vector with “collect digits” steps or an unsecured
voice mail system.
7. Restrict Call Forwarding Off Net on every class of service.
See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for more information on Class of
Service.
NOTE:

You cannot administer loop-start trunks if Call Forwarding Off Net is
required.

384

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System security checklist

8. If loop start trunks are administered in the switch and cannot be changed by
the Local Exchange Company, block all class of service from forwarding
calls off-net. In the Class of Service screen, Restriction Call Fwd-Off Net
field, set to y for the 16 (0-15) COS numbers.
See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for more information.
NOTE:

If a station is call forwarded off-net and an incoming call to the
extension establishes using a loop-start trunk, incorrect disconnect
supervision can occur at the Local Exchange Central Office when the
call terminates. This gives the caller recall or transfer dial tone to
establish a fraudulent call.
9. Administer Call Detail Recording on all trunk groups to record both
incoming and outgoing calls.
See ‘‘Collecting information about calls’’ on page 537 for more
information.
10. On the ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096, be careful assigning route patterns
with an FRL of 0; these allow access to outgoing trunking facilities. Avaya
recommends assigning routes with an FRL of 1 or higher.
NOTE:

An exception might be assigning a route pattern with an FRL of 0 to
be used for 911 calls so even restricted users may dial this in
emergencies.
Tip:

You can use the list route-pattern print command to print a copy of
your FRLs and check their status.
11. On all trunk group screens, set the Dial Access field to n. If set to y, it
allows users to dial Trunk Access Codes, thus bypassing all the ARS call
screening functions.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for more information.
12. On the ‘‘AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table’’ on page 577, set all dial
strings not required to conduct business to den (deny).
13. If you require international calling, on the ‘‘AAR and ARS Digit
Conversion Table’’ on page 582, use only the 011+ country codes/city
codes or specific dial strings.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

385

Enhancing system security

14. Assign all trunk groups or same trunk group types a unique Class of
Restriction. If the trunk group does not require networking through your
switch, administer the Class of Restriction of the trunk group where the
FRL is 0, the Calling Party Restriction field is outward, and all unique
Class of Restriction assigned to your outgoing trunk groups are n. See
‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 for more information.
Tip:

You can use the list trunk-group print command to have a printout of
all your trunks groups. Then, you can use the display trunk-group x
command (where x is the trunk group) to check the COR of each trunk
group.
15. For your AUDIX, on the System Appearance screen, set:
■

the Enhanced Call Transfer field to y.

■

the Transfer Type field to enhanced. If set to basic, set the Transfer
Restriction field to subscribers. See ‘‘Feature-Related System
Parameters’’ on page 795 for more information.
NOTE:

The COR of the voice mail ports dictates the calling restrictions of
the voice mail. If the above settings are not administered correctly,
the possibility exists to complete a transfer to trunk access codes or
ARS/AAR feature codes for fraudulent purposes. Never assign
mailboxes that begin with the digits or trunk access codes of
ARS/AAR feature access codes. Require your users to use a mailbox
password length greater than the amount of digits in the extension
number.
16. Avaya recommends you administer the following on all voice mail ports:
■

Assign all voice mail ports a unique COR. See ‘‘Class of
Restriction’’ on page 658 for more information.

■

If you are not using outcalling, fax attendant, or networking,
administer the unique COR where the FRL is 0, the Calling Party
Restriction field is outward, and all unique trunk group COR on the
Calling Permissions are n. See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658
for more information.
NOTE:

Avaya recommends you administer as many layers of security as
possible. You can implement steps 9 and 16 as a double layer of
security. In the event that the voice mail becomes unsecured for any
reason, the layer of security on the switch takes over, and vice versa.

386

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding logins and passwords

17. Administer all fax machines, modems, and answering machines analog
voice ports as follows:
■

Set the Switchhook Flash field to n.

■

Set the Distinctive Audible Alert field to n. See ‘‘Station’’ on page
1127 for more information.

18. Install a Call Accounting System to maintain call records. In the CDR
System Parameters screen, Record Outgoing Calls Only field, set to y. See
‘‘CDR System Parameters’’ on page 646 for more information.
NOTE:

Call Accounting Systems produce reports of call records. It detects
phones that are being hacked by recording the extension number, date
and time of the call, and what digits were dialed.

Adding logins and passwords
This section shows you how to add a user and their password. To add a login, you
must be a superuser with authority to administer permissions.
When adding logins, remember the following:
■

Type the new login name as part of the add command. The name must be
3–6 alphanumeric characters in length, and can contain the characters 0-9,
a-z, A-Z.

■

The password must be from 7 to 11 alphanumeric characters in length and
contain at least 1 non-alphabetic character.

Instructions

We will add the login angi3 with the password b3stm0m. We also will require the
user to change their password every 30 days.
To add new logins and passwords:
1. Type add login angi3 and press RETURN.
The Login Administration screen appears.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

387

Enhancing system security

LOGIN ADMINISTRATION
Password of Login Making Change:
LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED
Login’s Name: angi3
Login Type:
Service Level:
Disable Following a Security Violation?
Access to INADS Port? _
LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password:
Reenter Login’s Password:
Password Aging Cycle Length (Days): 30
LOGOFF NOTIFICATION
Facility Test Call Notification? y
Remote Access Notification? y

Acknowledgment Required? y
Acknowledgment Required? y

ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
Access Security Gateway? n

The Login’s Name field shows the name you typed in the add command.
2. In the Password of Login Making Change field, type your superuser
password.
3. In the Disable Following a Security Violation field, type y to disable this
login following a login security violation.
This field appears only if on the Security-Related System Parameters
screen, SVN Login Violation Notification field is y.
4. In the Login’s Password field, type b3stm0m.
The password does not appear on the screen as you type.
5. In the Reenter Login’s Password field, retype b3stm0m.
6. In the Password Aging Cycle Length (Days) field, type 30.
This requires the user to change the password every 30 days.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now you need to set the permissions for this new login.

388

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding logins and passwords

8. Type change permissions angi3 and press RETURN.
The Command Permission Categories screen appears.

COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
Login Name: angi3
COMMON COMMANDS
Display Admin. and Maint. Data? n
System Measurements? n
ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Administer Stations? y
Administer Trunks? n
Additional Restrictions? y
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Maintain Stations? n
Maintain Trunks? n
Maintain Systems? n

Administer Features? n
Administer Permissions? n

Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Process Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Enhanced DS1? n

9. In the Administer Stations field, type y.
This allows your user to add, change, duplicate, or remove stations, data
modules and associated features.
10. In the Additional Restrictions field, type y.
A y in this field brings up the second and third pages of this screen.
COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST
vdn
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________

11. In the first field, type vdn.
This restricts your user from administering a VDN.
12. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

389

Enhancing system security

More information

When you add a login, the Security Measurement reports do not update until the
next hour.
Password aging is an option you can start while administering logins. The
password for each login can be aged starting with the date the password was
created or changed and continuing for a specified number of days (1 to 99).
The system notifies the user at the login prompt, 7 days before the password
expiration date, their password is about to expire. When the password expires, the
user needs to enter a new password into the system before logging in.

Changing a login
This section shows you how to change a user’s login. You may need to change a
user’s password because it has expired. To change a login’s attributes, you must
be a superuser with authority to administer permissions.
When changing logins, remember the following:
■

Type the new login name as part of the change command. The name must
be 3–6 alphanumeric characters in length, and can contain the characters
0-9, a-z, A-Z.

■

The password must be from 7 to 11 alphanumeric characters in length and
contain at least 1 non-alphabetic character.

Instructions

We will change the login angi3 with the password b3stm0m. We also will require
the user to change their password every 30 days.
To change logins:
We will change the login angi3.
1. Type change login angi3 and press RETURN.

390

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Changing a login

The Login Administration screen appears.
LOGIN ADMINISTRATION
Password of Login Making Change:
LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED
Login’s Name:angi3
Login Type:
Service Level:
Disable Following a Security Violation?
Access to INADS Port? _
LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password:
Reenter Login’s Password:
Password Aging Cycle Length (Days):
LOGOFF NOTIFICATION
Facility Test Call Notification? y
Remote Access Notification? y

Acknowledgment Required? y
Acknowledgment Required? y

ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
Access Security Gateway? n

2. In the Password of Login Making Change field, type your superuser
password.
3. In the Login’s Password field, type b3stm0m.
This is the login for the password you are changing.
4. In the Reenter Login’s Password field, retype b3stm0m.
The password does not appear on the screen as you type.
5. In the Password Aging Cycle Length (Days) field, type 30.
This requires the user to change the password every 30 days.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Related topics
‘‘Logging into the system’’.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

391

Enhancing system security

Displaying a login
This section shows you how to display a user’s login and review their
permissions.
Instructions

To display a login such as angi3:
1. Type display login angi3 and press RETURN.
The Login Administration appears and displays all information about the
requested login except the password.

Removing a login
This section shows you how to remove a user’s login. To remove a login, you
must be a superuser.
Instructions

To remove a login such as angi3:
1. Type remove login angi3 and press RETURN.
The Login Administration screen appears showing information for the
login you want to delete.
2. Press ENTER to remove the login, or press CANCEL to leave this screen
without removing the login.
More information

When you remove a login, the Security Measurement reports do not update until
the next hour.
Related topics
‘‘Logging into the system’’.

392

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using access security gateway

Using access security gateway
This section shows you how to use Access Security Gateway (‘‘ASG’’). ASG
prevents unauthorized access by requiring the use of the hand-held Access
Security Gateway Key for logging into the system.
You need superuser privileges to perform any of the ASG procedures.
Before you start

You need an Access Security Gateway Key.
On the ‘‘System-Parameters Customer-Options’’ screen, verify the Access
Security Gateway (ASG) field is y. If not, contact your Avaya representative.
Instructions

To set up access security gateway:
1. Type change login xxxx and press RETURN, where xxxx is the
alphanumeric login ID.
The Login Administration screen appears.

LOGIN ADMINISTRATION
Password of Login Making Change:
LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED
Login’s Name:xxxxxxx
Login Type:
Service Level:
Disable Following a Security Violation?
Access to INADS Port? _
LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password:
Reenter Login’s Password:
Password Aging Cycle Length (Days):
LOGOFF NOTIFICATION
Facility Test Call Notification? y
Remote Access Notification? y

Acknowledgment Required? y
Acknowledgment Required? y

ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
Access Security Gateway? n

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

393

Enhancing system security

2. In the Password of Login Making Change field, type your password.
3. In the Access Security Gateway field, type y.
When set to y, the Access Security Gateway Login Administration screen
(page 2) appears automatically.
4. Either:
■

■

Set the System Generated Secret Key field to:
■

y for a system-generated secret key, or

■

n for a secret key to be entered by the administrator, or

In the Secret Key field, enter your secret key.
Be sure to remember your secret key number.

5. All other fields on page 2 are optional.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
7. Type change system-parameters security and press RETURN.
The Security-Related System Parameters screen appears.

Page 2 of 2
SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS
SVN Station Security Code Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: ________
Referral Destination: ________
Station Security Code Threshold: 10
Time Interval: 0:03
Announcement Extension: ________
STATION SECURITY CODE VERIFICATION PARAMETERS
Minimum Station Security Code Length: 4
Security Code for Terminal Self Administration Required? y
ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
SYSAM-LCL? n
MAINT? n

SYSAM-RMT? y
SYS-PORT? n

8. In the Access Security Gateway Parameters section, you determine which
of the following necessary port type fields to set to y.
NOTE:

Avaya recommends that you protect the SYSAM-RMT port since it
is a dial-up port and therefore is more susceptible to compromise.
In our example, in the SYSAM-RMT field, we’ll type y.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.

394

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using access security gateway

Disabling Access Security Gateway

To temporarily disable ASG while users are on vacation or travel:
1. Type change login xxxx and press RETURN, where xxxx is the
alphanumeric login ID.
The Login Administration screen appears.
LOGIN ADMINISTRATION
Password of Login Making Change:
LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED
Login’s Name:xxxxxxx
Login Type:
Service Level:
Disable Following a Security Violation?
Access to INADS Port? _
LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password:
Reenter Login’s Password:
Password Aging Cycle Length (Days):
LOGOFF NOTIFICATION
Facility Test Call Notification? y
Remote Access Notification? y

Acknowledgment Required? y
Acknowledgment Required? y

ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
Access Security Gateway? n

2. On the Access Security Gateway Login Administration page (page 2), set
the Blocked field to y.
Setting the Blocked field to y does not remove the login from the system,
but temporarily disables the login.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
NOTE:

A superuser can disable and restart access for another superuser.
Restarting Access Security Gateway

To restart temporarily disabled access security gateway access for login:
1. Type change login xxxx and press RETURN, where xxxx is the
alphanumeric login ID.
The Login Administration screen appears.
2. On the Access Security Gateway Login Administration page (page 2), set
the Blocked field to n.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

395

Enhancing system security

Loss of an ASG key

If a user loses their Access Security Gateway Key:
1. Modify any logins associated with the lost Access Security Gateway Key.
See the Access Security Gateway (ASG) Key Release 1.0 User’s Guide to
change your PIN.
2. If the login is no longer valid, type remove login xxxx and press RETURN,
to remove the invalid login from the system, where xxxx is the
alphanumeric login ID.
3. To keep the same login, change the Secret Key associated with the login to
a new value.
4. Using the new secret key value, re-key devices that generate responses and
interact with the login.
Monitoring the Access Security Gateway
history log

The Access Security Gateway Session History Log records all ASG session
establishment and session rejection events except when, on the Login
Administration screen, the Access to INADS Port field is y. You must be a
superuser to use the list asg-history command.
1. Type list asg-history and press RETURN.
The Access Security Gateway screen appears.
ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY SESSION HISTORY
Date
01/06
01/05
01/05
01/03
01/02
01/02

Time
12:45
01:32
12:33
15:10
08:32
07:45

Port
SYSAM-RMT
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-RMT
SYSAM-RMT
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-RMT

Login
csand
jsmith
ajones
swrigh
jsmith
mehrda

Status
AUTHENTICATED
REJECT-BLOCK
REJECT-EXPIRE
REJECT-PASSWORD
REJECT-INVALID
REJECT-RESPONSE

This screen contains the following fields:

396

■

Date — Contains the date of the session establishment or rejection. For
example, the date displays in the mm/dd format where mm = month and
dd = day.

■

Time — Contains the time of the session establishment or rejection. For
example, the time displays in the hh/mm format where hh = hour and mm =
minute.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Changing login permissions

■

Port — Contains the port mnemonic associated with the port on which the
session was established or rejected. The port mnemonics for G3r systems
are SYSAM-LCL, SYSAM-RMT, MAINT, and SYS-PORT. For G3si
systems, they are MRG1, INADS, NET, and EPN.

■

Login — Contains the alphanumeric login string entered by the user and
associated with the session establishment or rejection.

■

Status — Contains a code that indicates whether the session was
established or rejected and, if rejected, the reason for the rejection. See
Access Security Gateway for a list of the possible status values.

Related topics

‘‘Logging in with Access Security Gateway’’ on page 37
‘‘Security violations notification’’ on page 1813

Changing login permissions
This section shows you how to change login permissions.
Once you have created a login, you can modify the permissions associated with
the login. The system maintains default permissions for each level of login, but
you may want to further restrict the login, or at least make sure the defaults are
appropriate for the user. The default values for these fields vary based on the login
type.
Instructions

We will change the login permissions of angi3.
To change login permissions:
1. Type change permissions angi3 and press RETURN.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

397

Enhancing system security

The Command Permission Categories screen appears.

COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
Login Name: angi3
COMMON COMMANDS
Display Admin. and Maint. Data? n
System Measurements? n
ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Administer Stations? y
Administer Trunks? n
Additional Restrictions? y
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Maintain Stations? n
Maintain Trunks? n
Maintain Systems? n

Administer Features? n
Administer Permissions? n

Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Process Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Enhanced DS1? n

2. In the Administer Stations field, type y.
This allows your user to add, change, duplicate, or remove stations, data
modules and associated features.
3. In the Additional Restrictions field, type y.
A y in this field brings up the second and third pages of this screen.
COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST
vdn
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________

4. In the first field, type vdn.
This restricts your user from administering a VDN.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.

398

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Changing passwords

Changing passwords
This section shows you how to change a user’s password.
Instructions

We will change the password for login angi3 to g3or5e.
To change passwords:
1. Type change password angi3 and press RETURN.
The Password Administration screen appears.
PASSWORD ADMINISTRATION
Password of Login Making Change: angi3
LOGIN BEING CHANGED
Login Name:
LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password:
Reenter Login’s Password:

2. In the Password of Login Making Change field, type your password to
change any field on this screen.
We’ll type angi3.
3. In the Login’s Password field, type the initial password for this login.
We’ll type g3or5e.
Notify the owner of the login to change their password immediately. The
password does not appear on the screen as you type.
A password must be from 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1
alphabetic and 1 numeric symbol.
4. In the Reenter Login’s Password field, retype the login’s password as
above, for verification.
We’ll type g3or5e.
The password does not appear on the screen as you type.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

399

Enhancing system security

Using busy verify
This section shows you how to use Busy Verify (also known as Busy Verification)
to help find fraud problems.
When you suspect toll fraud, you can interrupt the call on a specified trunk group
or extension number and monitor the call in progress. Callers will hear a long tone
to indicate the call is being monitored.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Listening to someone else’s calls may be subject to federal, state, or local
laws, rules, or regulations. It may require the consent of one or both of the
parties on the call. Familiarize yourself with all applicable laws, rules, and
regulations and comply with them when you use this feature.
Before you start

On the Trunk Group screen, verify the Dial Access field is y. If not, contact your
Avaya representative.
Instructions

To use busy verify:
1. Type change station xxxx and press RETURN, where xxxx is the station to
be assigned the busy verify button.
For our example, we’ll enter extension 1014.
The Station screen appears.

Page 3 of X
STATION
SITE DATA
Room:
Jack:
Cable:
Floor:
Building:

_______
___
___
_______
_______

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ________
BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: call-appr
2: call-appr
3: call-appr

400

Issue 5 October 2002

Headset?
Speaker?
Mounting:
Cord Length:
Set Color:

List2: _________

n
n
d
0_
_____

List3: _________

4: verify__
5: ________

555-233-506

Setting up security violations notification

2. In the Feature Button Assignments area, type verify.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. To activate the feature, press the VERIFY button on the phone and then enter
the Trunk Access Code and member number to be monitored.

Setting up security violations
notification
This section shows you how to use Security Violations Notification (‘‘SVN’’) to
set security-related parameters and to receive notification when established limits
are exceeded. You can run reports related to invalid access attempts. You also can
disable a login ID or remote access authorization that is associated with a security
violation.
When a security violation has occurred, there are steps that you can take to be sure
that this same attempt is not successful in the future. See the BCS Products
Security Handbook for more information.
Before you start

If you are using ASG, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, verify
the Access Security Gateway (ASG) field is y. If not, contact your Avaya
representative.
Instructions

To set up security violations notification:
1. Type change system-parameters security and press RETURN.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

401

Enhancing system security

The Security-Related System Parameters screen appears.

SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS
SVN Login Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: 3040_ Referral Destination: attd_
Login Threshold: 3_
Time Interval: 0:03
Announcement Extension: ________
SVN Remote Access
Originating
Barrier Code
Announcement

Violation Notification Enabled? y
Extension: 2719_ Referral Destination: 2720_
Threshold: 3
Time Interval: 0:03
Extension: ________

SVN Authorization
Originating
Authorization Code
Announcement

Code Violation Notification Enabled? y
Extension: 3030_ Referral Destination: 3031_
Threshold: 3
Time Interval: 0:03
Extension: ________

2. In the SVN Login Violation Notification Enabled field, type y.
This sets Security Violations Notification login violation notification.
3. In the Originating Extension field, type 3040.
This becomes the phone extension for the purpose of originating and
identifying SVN referral calls for login security violations.
4. In the Referral Destination field, type attd to send all calls to the attendant.
This is the phone extension that receives the referral call when a security
violation occurs.
5. In the Login Threshold field, type 3.
This is the minimum number of login attempts that are permitted before a
referral call is made. More than 3 attempts causes a security violation
notification.
6. In the Time Interval field, type 0:03.
This the time interval in which the threshold, or number of violations, must
occur.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
NOTE:

If you are not using Remote Access, go to step 11.

402

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up security violations notification

8. (Optional) Type change remote-access and press RETURN.
The QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen screen appears.
REMOTE ACCESS
Remote Access Extension________
Barrier Code Length____
Authorization Code Required? y
Remote Access Dial Tone: n
Barrier Code
COR TN COS
Expiration Date
No. of Calls
Calls Used
1:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
2:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
3:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
4:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
5:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
6:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
7:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
8:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
9:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
10:_______
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
Permanently Disable? __ Disable Following A Security Violation? y
(NOTE: You must logoff to effect permanent disabling of Remote Access)

9. (Optional) In the Disable Following A Security Violation field, type y.
This disables Remote Access following detection of a remote access
security violation.
10. (Optional) Press ENTER to save your changes.
11. Type change station xxxx and press RETURN, where xxxx is the station to
be assigned the notification halt button.
The Station screen appears.
Page 3 of X
STATION
SITE DATA
Room:
Jack:
Cable:
Floor:
Building:

_______
___
___
_______
_______

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ________
BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: asvn-halt
2: ________
3: ________

555-233-506

Headset?
Speaker?
Mounting:
Cord Length:
Set Color:

List2: _________

n
n
d
0_
_____

List3: _________

4: ________
5: ________

Issue 5 October 2002

403

Enhancing system security

12. In the Feature Button Assignments section, type one of the following:
■

asvn-halt — The Authorization Code Security Violation
Notification call is activated when an authorization code security
violation is detected. This applies only if you are using authorization
codes.

■

lsvn-halt — The Login Security Violation Notification call is
activated a referral call when a login security violation is detected.

■

rsvn-halt — The Remote Access Barrier Code Security Violation

Notification call is activated as a call referral. This applies only if
you are using Remote Access barrier codes.
■

ssvn-halt — The Station Code Security Violation Notification call

is activated when a station code security violation is detected. This
applies only if you are using station codes.
NOTE:

Any of the above 4 security violations will cause the system to place
a notification call to the designated phone. The call continues to ring
until answered. To stop notification of any further violations, press
the button associated with the type of violation.
13. Press ENTER to save your changes.

Setting up authorization codes
Authorization codes provide the means for extending control of system users’
calling privileges. They extend calling-privilege control and provide an extra level
of security for remote-access callers.
NOTE:

To maintain system security, Avaya recommends you use
authorization codes.
See BCS Products Security Handbook for more information.
Before you start

On the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, verify the Authorization
Codes field is y. If not, contact your Avaya representative. This field turns on the
feature and permits you to selectively specify levels of calling privileges that
override in-place restrictions.

404

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up authorization codes

Instructions

1. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
Page 3 of 8
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue: 5_
Time Before Off-Hook Alert: 10__
Emergency Access Redirection Extension: _____
Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in Attendant Queue: __
Call Pickup Alerting? n
Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup? y
Call Pickup on Intercom Calls? y
Directed Call Pickup? n
Deluxe Paging and Call Park Timeout to Originator? n
Controlled Outward Toll Restriction Intercept Treatment: tone _______
Controlled Termination Restriction (Do Not Disturb): tone _______
Controlled Station to Station Restriction: tone _______
AUTHORIZATION CODE PARAMETERS
Authorization Code Enabled? y
Authorization Code Length: 7
Authorization Code Cancellation Symbol? #
Attendant Time Out Flag? n
Display Authorization Code? _
Controlled Toll Restriction Replaces: station-station
Controlled Toll Restriction Intercept Treatment: extension
3000

2. In the Authorization Code Enabled field, type y.
This enables the Authorization Codes feature on a system-wide basis.
3. In the Authorization Code Length field, type 7.
This defines the length of the Authorization Codes your users need to enter.
To maximize the security of your system, Avaya recommends you make
each authorization code the maximum length allowed by the system.
4. In the Authorization Code Cancellation Symbol field, leave the default of
#.
This is the symbol a caller must dial to cancel the 10-second wait period
during which your user can enter an authorization code.
5. In the Attendant Time Out Flag field, leave the default of n.
This means a call is not to be routed to the attendant if a caller does not dial
an authorization code within 10 seconds or dials an invalid authorization
code.
6. In the Display Authorization Code field, type n.
This prevents the authorization code from displaying on phone sets thus
maximizing your security.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

405

Enhancing system security

8. Type change authorization-code nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is
the authorization code.
The Authorization Code — COR Mapping screen appears.

Page 1 of 1
Note:
AC
COR
4285193 1_
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __

Authorization Code - COR Mapping
XX codes administered. Use “list” to
AC
COR
AC
COR
AC
COR
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __

display all codes.
AC
COR
AC
COR
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __

9. In the AC field, enter the authorization code your users must dial.
In our example, type 4285193. The number of digits entered must agree
with the number assigned in the Feature-Related System Parameters
screen, Authorization Code Length field.
NOTE:

Remember, all authorization codes used in the system must be the
same length.
10. In the COR field, enter the desired Class of Restriction number from 0
through 95.
In our example, type 1.
11. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Related topics

See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 for more information on setting up
dialing out restrictions.
See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software
for more information on using trunk access codes.

406

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using Station Lock

See ‘‘Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks’’ on page 1684 and
‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 for more information on assigning Facility
Restriction Levels.
See ‘‘Call detail recording’’ on page 1553 and ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for more
information on using Call Detail Recording on station phones.
See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 and ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for more
information on using Class of Restriction on station phones.
See ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 1800 for more information on allowing authorized
callers to access the system from remote locations.
See ‘‘Barrier codes’’ on page 1504 or ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on
page 1085 for information on barrier codes.

Using Station Lock
Station Lock allows only authorized users to make external phone calls from a
particular station.
NOTE:

Avaya recommends digital phones use a Station Lock button rather than a
feature access code.
Setting Station Lock
We will set Station Lock to allow authorized users to access the system through a
particular station.
Before you start
■

Be sure the Station Lock COR field on the Class of Restriction screen has
the COR the user is using to define the calling restrictions.

Instructions
We will set Station Lock on a digital phone (extension 7262):
1. Type change station 7262 and press RETURN.
2. In the Security Code field, enter a security code of up to 8 digits.
In the COR field, leave the default at 1.
3. In the Button Assignments section, type sta-lock.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

407

Enhancing system security

5. Type change cor 1 and press RETURN.
6. In the Calling Party Restriction field, type none.
This means that no calling party restrictions exist on extension 7262.
7. In the Station Lock COR field, type 2.
8. Press ENTER to save your changes.
9. Type change cor 2 and press RETURN.
10. In the Calling Party Restriction field, verify it is outward.
11. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now when extension 7262 activates Station Lock, calling restrictions are
determined by the Station Lock COR, COR 2. Based on the administration
of COR 2, extension 7262 is not allowed to call outside the private
network. When Station Lock is not active on extension 7262, calling
restrictions are determined by the COR administered on the Station screen,
COR 1. In this example, when extension 7262 is unlocked, calls outside the
private network are allowed.
Let us set Station Lock on an analog, x-mobile, or digital phone without a Station
Lock button (extension 7262 and use a feature access code of 08):
1. Type change station 7262 and press RETURN.
2. In the Security Code field, enter a security code of up to 8 digits.
In the COR field, leave the default at 1. This means that anyone can call
outside on extension 7262.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System-Parameters screen appears.
5. In the Special Dial Tone field, type y for an audible tone indicating the
station is locked.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
7. Type change feature-access-codes and press RETURN.
The Feature Access Codes screen appears.
8. Move the cursor to the Station Lock Activation field.
9. In the Activation field, type *08.
10. In the Deactivation field, type #08.
11. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now when a user activates Station Lock, no one can call outside from
extension 7262.

408

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Dealing with security violations

Dealing with security violations
When a security violation occurs, there are steps that you can take to be sure that
this same attempt is not successful in the future.
Disabling a login ID

There may be occasions when you have to disable a login for one of your users
because of a security violation.
1. Log in to the switch using a login ID with the correct permissions.
2. Type disable login ge0rg3 and press RETURN.
Enabling a login ID

You may have to enable a login ID that has been disabled by a security violation,
or disabled manually with the disable login command.
1. Log in to the switch using a login ID with the correct permissions.
2. Type enable login ge0rg3 and press RETURN.
Enabling remote access

You may have to enable Remote Access that has been disabled following a
security violation, or disabled manually.
1. Log in to the switch using a login ID with the correct permissions.
2. Type enable remote-access and press RETURN.
Disabling remote access

There may be occasions when you have to disable remote access for one of your
users because of a security violation.
1. Log in to the switch using a login ID with the correct permissions.
2. Type disable remote-access and press RETURN.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

409

Enhancing system security

410

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing trunks

This chapter contains basic procedures for working with analog and digital trunks.
Specialized trunks such as Internet Protocol (‘‘IP’’), H.323, APLT, tandem,
release-link, and DMI-BOS trunks are not covered in this manual. For more
information, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software. This chapter also does not contain procedures for
working with ISDN trunk groups. Due to the complexity of ISDN technology and
the potential consequences of errors, ask your Avaya representative to assist you
in planning, installing, and administering ISDN trunks. For an introduction to
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) service on Avaya MultiVantage, see
‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1730. For descriptions of the fields on various screens
used to set up H.323 trunks, see Chapter 18, ‘‘Screen reference’’.

Tips for working with trunk groups
You’ll find detailed procedures for administering specific trunk groups elsewhere
in this chapter. However, there’s more to working with trunks than just
administering trunk groups.
Following a process

Trunking technology is complex. Following a process can prevent mistakes and
save you time. To set up new trunks and trunk groups, Avaya recommends
following the process below (some steps may not apply to your situation):
1. Install the necessary circuit packs and perform any administration the
circuit pack requires.
2. Connect the appropriate ports to your network service provider’s trunks.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 411

Managing trunks

3. Administer a trunk group to control the operation of the trunks.
4. Assign the ports you’re using to the trunk group.
5. For outgoing or 2-way trunks, administer Automatic Route Selection so
Avaya MultiVantage knows which outgoing calls to route over this trunk
group.
6. Test your new trunk group. Using the trunk access code, place a variety of
calls.
This chapter provides instructions for steps 3 and 4 in this process.
Working with your network service provider

Depending on the type of trunk you want to add, the vendor may be your local
phone company, a long distance provider, or some other service provider. Key
settings on Avaya MultiVantage must be identical to the same settings on the
provider’s equipment for your trunks to work. Clear, frequent communication
with your provider is essential — especially since some providers may use
different terms and acronyms than Avaya does!
Once you decide that you want to add a new trunk, contact your vendor. The
vendor should confirm the type of signal you want and provide you with a circuit
identification number for the new trunk. Be sure to record any vendor-specific ID
numbers or specifications in case you ever have any problems with this trunk.
Keeping records

In addition to recording vendor-specific information such as ID numbers, you
should record the following information about every trunk group you have.
The questions you need to answer

The kind of information you need to get

What type of trunk group is it?

You need to know what kind of trunks these are
(central office (‘‘CO’’), foreign exchange
(‘‘FX’’), etc.) and whether they use any special
services (such as T1 digital service). You also
need to know what kind of signaling the group
uses. For example, you might have a CO trunk
group with ground-start signaling running on a
robbed-bit T1 service.

412

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tips for working with trunk groups

The questions you need to answer

The kind of information you need to get

Which phone numbers are associated
with each trunk group?

For incoming or two-way trunk groups:
■

What number or numbers do outside callers
use to call into your switch over this group?

■

What’s the destination extension to which
this trunk group delivers calls? Does it
terminate at an attendant or a voice-mail
system?

For outgoing trunk groups:
■

Is the service from your network
service provider sending digits on
incoming calls?

What extensions can call out over this trunk
group?

Direct Inward Dial and Direct Inward/Outward
Dial trunks send digits to your switch. Tie trunks
may send digits, depending on how they’re
administered. You need to know:
■

How many digits is your service provider
sending?

■

Are you inserting any digits? What are they?

■

Are you absorbing any digits? How many?

■

What range of numbers has your service
provider assigned you?

Helpful tips for setting common fields

The procedures in this section cover the specific fields you must administer when
you create each type of trunk group. Here are some tips for working with common
fields that are available for most trunk groups.
■

Dial Access — Typing y in this field allows users to route calls through an
outgoing or two-way trunk group by dialing its trunk access code.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Calls dialed with a trunk access code over Wide Area
Telecommunications Service (‘‘WATS’’) trunks are not validated
against the ARS Digit Analysis Table, so users can dial anything they
wish. For security, you may want to leave the field set to n unless you
need dial access to test the trunk group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

413

Managing trunks

■

Outgoing Display — Typing y in this field allows display phones to show
the name and group number of the trunk group used for an outgoing call.
This information may be useful to you when you’re trying to diagnose
trunking problems.

■

Queue Length — Don’t create a queue for two-way loop-start trunks, or
you may have a problem with glare (the interference that happens when a
two-way trunk is seized simultaneously at both ends).

■

Trunk Type — Use ground-start signaling for two-way trunks whenever
possible: ground-start signaling avoids glare and provides answer
supervision from the far end. Try to use loop-start signaling only for
one-way trunks.

Related topics

See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for information on the
types of circuit packs available and their capacities.
See your switch’s installation manual for installation instructions for circuit packs.
See ‘‘Routing outgoing calls’’ on page 247 for detailed information on Automatic
Route Selection.

Adding a CO, FX, or WATS trunk
group
Basic administration for Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), and WATS
trunk groups is identical, so we’ve combined instructions for all 3 in the following
procedure. In most cases, Avaya recommends leaving the default settings in fields
that aren’t specifically mentioned in the following instructions. Your Avaya
representative or network service provider can give you more information. Your
settings in the following fields must match your provider’s settings:
■

Direction

■

Comm Type

■

Trunk Type

! CAUTION:
Use the list above as a starting point and talk to your service provider.
Depending on your particular application, you may need to coordinate
additional administration with your service provider.

414

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding a CO, FX, or WATS trunk group

Before you start

Before you can administer any trunk group, you must have one or more circuit
packs of the correct type with enough open ports to handle the number of trunks
you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, see the Avaya
MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.
Instructions

As an example, we will set up a two-way CO trunk group that carries voice and
voice-grade data only. Incoming calls terminate to an attendant during business
hours and to a night service destination the rest of the time
To add the new CO trunk-group:
1. Type add trunk-group next and press RETURN.
The Trunk Group screen appears. The system assigns the next available
trunk group number to this group. In our example, we’re adding trunk
group 5.

TRUNK GROUP
Group Number:
Group Name:
Direction:
Dial Access?
Queue Length:
Comm Type:
Prefix-1?

5
Group Type:
Outside calls
COR:
two-way
Outgoing Display?
n
Busy Threshold:
0
Country:
voice
Auth Code?
y
Trunk Flash?

TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type: ground start
Outgoing Dial Type: tone
Trunk Termination: rc
Auto Guard? n

co
CDR Reports: y
85
TN: 1__
TAC: 105
n
99
Night Service: 1234
Incoming Destination: attd
n Digit Absorption List: _
n
Toll Restricted? y

Cut-Through? n
Disconnect Timing(msec): 500_

Call Still Held? n

Sig Bit Inversion: none

Trunk Gain: high
Disconnect Supervision -In? y Out? n
Answer Supervision Timeout: 10

Receive Answer Supervision? n

2. In the Group Type field, type co.
This field specifies the kind of trunk group you’re creating.
3. In the Group Name field, type Outside calls.
This name will be displayed, along with the group number, for outgoing
calls if you set the Outgoing Display? field to y. You can type any name up
to 27 characters long in this field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

415

Managing trunks

4. Type 85 in the COR field.
This field controls which users can make and receive calls over this trunk
group. Assign a class of restriction that’s appropriate for the ‘‘COR’’
calling permissions administered on your system.
5. In the TAC field, type 105.
This field defines a unique code that you or your users can dial to access
this trunk group. The code also identifies this trunk group in call detail
reports.
6. In the Direction field, type two-way.
This field defines the direction of traffic flow on this trunk group.
7. Type 1234 in the Night Service field.
This field assigns an extension to which calls are routed outside of business
hours.
8. In the Incoming Destination field, type attd.
This field assigns an extension to which incoming calls are routed during
business hours. By entering attd in this field, incoming calls go to the
attendant and the system treats the calls as Listed Directory Number calls.
9. In the Comm Type field, type voice.
This field defines whether a trunk group can carry voice, data, or both.
Analog trunks only carry voice and voice-grade data.
10. In the Trunk Type field, type ground-start.
This field tells the system what kind of signaling to use on this trunk group.
To prevent glare, Avaya recommends ground start signaling for most
two-way CO, FX, and WATS trunk groups.
11. In the Outgoing Dial Type field, type tone.
This field tells the switch how digits are to be transmitted for outgoing
calls. Entering tone actually allows the trunk group to support both
dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) and rotary signals, so Avaya
recommends that you always put tone in this field.
12. In the Trunk Termination field, type rc.
Use rc in this field when the distance to the central office or the switch at
the other end of the trunk is more than 3,000 feet. Check with your service
provider if you’re not sure of the distance to your central office.
13. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now you are ready to add trunks to this trunk group. See ‘‘Adding trunks to a
trunk group’’ on page 430.

416

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding a DID trunk group

Adding a DID trunk group
In most cases, Avaya recommends leaving the default settings in fields that aren’t
specifically mentioned in the following instructions. Your Avaya representative or
network service provider can give you more information. For Direct Inward
Dialing (‘‘DID’’) trunk groups, settings in the following fields must match your
provider’s settings:
■

Direction

■

Comm Type

■

Trunk Type

■

Expected Digits (only if the digits your provider sends do not match your
dial plan)

! CAUTION:
Use the list above as a starting point and talk to your service provider.
Depending on your particular application, you may need to coordinate
additional administration with your service provider.
Before you start

Before you can administer any trunk group, you must have one or more circuit
packs of the correct type with enough open ports to handle the number of trunks
you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, see the Avaya
MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.
Tip:

In the DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment field on the Feature-Related
System parameters screen, enter attd. Incoming calls to invalid extensions
will be routed to the attendant.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

417

Managing trunks

Instructions

To add the new Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk-group:
1. Type add trunk-group next and press RETURN.
The Trunk Group screen appears. The system assigns the next available
trunk group number to this group. In our example, we’re adding trunk
group 5.

TRUNK GROUP
Group Number: 5
Group Name: Incoming calls

Group Type: did
COR: 85

CDR Reports: y
TN: 1
TAC: 105

Country: 1
Auth Code? n

TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type: wink-start
Trunk Termination:
Digit Treatment:
Expected Digits:
Analog Loss Group:
Extended Loop Range?

Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec):
Incoming Dial Type:
rc
Disconnect Timing(msec):
insertion
Digits:
4
Sig Bit Inversion:
___
Digital Loss Group:
n
Trunk Gain: high
Drop Treatment:

5
tone
500
6
none
___
silence

Disconnect Supervision - In? y

2. In the Group Type field, type did.
This field specifies the kind of trunk group you’re creating.
3. In the Group Name field, type Incoming calls.
You can type any name up to 27 characters long in this field.
4. Type 85 in the COR field.
This field controls which users can receive calls over this trunk group.
Assign a class of restriction that’s appropriate for the COR calling
permissions administered on your system.
5. In the TAC field, type 105.
This code identifies the trunk group on ‘‘CDR’’ reports.
6. In the Trunk Type field, type wink-start.
This field tells the system what kind of signaling to use on this trunk group.
In most situations, use wink start for DID trunks to minimize the chance of
losing any of the incoming digit string.

418

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding a DIOD trunk group

7. In the Incoming Dial Type field, type tone.
This field tells the switch how digits are transmitted for incoming calls.
Entering tone actually allows the trunk group to support both ‘‘DTMF’’
and rotary signals, so Avaya recommends that you always put tone in this
field.
8. In the Trunk Termination field, type rc.
Use rc in this field when the distance to the central office or the switch at
the other end of the trunk is more than 3,000 feet. Check with your service
provider if you’re not sure of the distance to your central office.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now you’re ready to add trunks to this trunk group. See ‘‘Adding trunks to a trunk
group’’ on page 430.
Related topics

See ‘‘Inserting and absorbing digits’’ on page 434 for instructions on matching
modifying incoming digit strings to match your dial plan.

Adding a DIOD trunk group
Administration for Direct Inward and Outward Dialing (‘‘DIOD’’) trunk groups
varies from country to country. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Application Notes for
Type Approval, and use the DS1 screen illustrations in the chapter for your
country as a model for your administration. Remember that the central office
serving your switch may be emulating another country’s network protocol. If so,
you’ll have to administer your circuit packs and trunk groups to match the
protocol used by your central office.

! SECURITY ALERT:
If you’re using Incoming Caller ID (‘‘ICLID’’) on analog trunks connected
to a DIOD Central Office trunk circuit pack, DO NOT put these trunks in an
outgoing AAR or ARS route pattern. Since the loop-start trunks supported on
the DIOD Central Office trunk circuit pack do not provide answer
supervision, the potential for toll fraud exists.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

419

Managing trunks

Adding a PCOL trunk group
In most cases, when administering Personal Central Office Line (‘‘PCOL’’) trunk
groups, Avaya recommends leaving the default settings in fields that aren’t
specifically mentioned in the following instructions. Your Avaya representative or
network service provider can give you more information. Your settings in the
following fields must match your provider’s settings:
■

Trunk Type

■

Trunk Direction

! CAUTION:
Use the list above as a starting point and talk to your service provider.
Depending on your particular application, you may need to coordinate
additional administration with your service provider.
Before you start

Before you can administer any trunk group, you must have one or more circuit
packs of the correct type with enough open ports to handle the number of trunks
you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, see the Avaya
MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.
Instructions

As an example, we will set up a new PCOL group and administer the group as a
CO trunk for two-way voice traffic.
To add the new PCOL group:
1. Type add personal-co-line next and press ENTER.

420

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding a PCOL trunk group

The Personal CO Line Group screen appears.
Page 1 of X
Group Number: 1
Group Name: OUTSIDE CALL
Security Code: ___

PERSONAL CO LINE GROUP
Group Type: co

CDR Reports: y
TAC: ____
Data Restriction? _

Coverage Path: ____
Outgoing Display? _

TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type:
Trunk Port:
Trunk Name:
Outgoing Dial Type:
Prefix-1?
Answer Supervision Timeout:
Trunk Gain:
Charge Conversion:
Decimal Point:
Currency Symbol:
Charge Type:

ground-start
Trunk Direction:
01D1901_
Disconnect Timing(msec):
__________
Trunk Termination:
tone_____
Analog Loss Group:
y
Digital Loss Group:
___
Receive Answer Supervision?
high
Country:
1____
none__
___
units__

two-way
500
rc____
7
_
_
1

2. In the Group Type field, type co.
This field specifies the kind of trunk group you’re creating. PCOL groups
can be administered as CO, FX, or WATS trunks.
3. In the Group Name field, type Outside calls.
This name will be displayed, along with the group number, for outgoing
calls if you set the Outgoing Display? field to y. You can type any name up
to 27 characters long in this field. (You may want to put the phone number
here that’s assigned to this trunk.)
4. In the TAC field, type 111.
This field defines a unique code that you or your users can dial to access
this trunk group. The code also identifies this trunk group in call detail
reports.
5. In the Trunk Type field, type ground start.
This field tells the system what kind of signaling to use on this trunk group.
To prevent glare, Avaya recommends ground start signaling for most
two-way CO, FX, and WATS trunk groups.
6. In the Trunk Port field, type 01D1901.
This is the port to which the trunk is connected.
7. In the Trunk Termination field, type rc.
Use rc in this field when the distance to the central office or the switch at
the other end of the trunk is more than 3,000 feet. Check with your service
provider if you’re not sure of the distance to your central office.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

421

Managing trunks

8. In the Outgoing Dial Type field, type tone.
This field tells the switch how digits are to be transmitted for outgoing
calls. Entering tone actually allows the trunk group to support both DTMF
and rotary signals, so Avaya recommends that you always put tone in this
field.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
You assign phones to a PCOL group by administering a CO Line button on each
phone. Once assigned, the Assigned Members page of the Personal CO Line
Group screen displays member phones:
Page 2 of X
PERSONAL CO LINE GROUP
ASSIGNED MEMBERS (Stations with a button for this PCOL Group)
Ext

Name

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:

Ext

Name

9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

More information
Call Detail Recording

Call detail recording (CDR) can be activated for calls on a personal CO line, but
the CDR record does not specifically identify the call as PCOL. Calls over
personal CO lines can, however, be identified by the trunk access code used on the
call. The call is recorded to the extension number assigned to the phone where the
call was originated or answered.
Restrictions

422

■

Abbreviated Dialing can be used with a personal CO line, but the accessed
lists are associated with the individual phones.

■

Auto Hold and Leave Word Calling do not work with calls on a personal
CO line.

■

Send All Calls cannot be activated for a personal CO line.

■

INTUITY AUDIX cannot be in the coverage path of a PCOL group.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding a Tie or Access trunk group

■

Only phones in the same PCOL group can bridge onto calls on the personal
CO line. If a user is active on his or her primary extension number on a
PCOL call, bridged call appearances of that extension number cannot be
used to bridge onto the call.

■

When a user puts a call on hold on a personal CO line, the status lamp
associated with the PCOL button does not track the busy/idle status of the
line.

Adding a Tie or Access trunk group
In most cases, Avaya recommends leaving the default settings in fields that aren’t
specifically mentioned in the following instructions. Your Avaya representative or
network service provider can give you more information. Your settings in the
following fields must match your provider’s settings (or the setting on the far-end
switch, if this is a private network trunk group):
■

Direction

■

Comm Type

■

Trunk Type

! CAUTION:
Use the list above as a starting point and talk to your service provider.
Depending on your particular application, you may need to coordinate
additional administration with your service provider.
Before you start

Before you can administer any trunk group, you must have one or more circuit
packs of the correct type with enough open ports to handle the number of trunks
you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, see the Avaya
MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.
Tip:

In the DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment field on the Feature-Related
System parameters screen, enter attd. Incoming calls to invalid extensions
will be routed to the attendant.
Instructions

As an example, we will add a two-way tie trunk group that supports voice and
voice-grade data.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

423

Managing trunks

To add the new tie trunk-group:
1. Type add trunk-group next and press RETURN.
The Trunk Group screen appears. The system assigns the next available
trunk group number to this group. In our example, we’re adding trunk
group 5.

Page 1 of X
TRUNK GROUP
Group Number:
Group Name:
Direction:
Dial Access?
Queue Length:
Comm Type:

5__
Outside calls
two-way_
n
0__
voice

Group Type:
COR:
Outgoing Display?
Busy Threshold:

tie
85_
n
99_

CDR Reports: y
TN: 1__
TAC: 105_
Trunk Signaling Type: ____
Night Service: 1234
Incoming Destination: _______

Auth Code? n
Trunk Flash? n

BCC: 0
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type (in/out): wink/wink___
Outgoing Dial Type: tone_____
Digit Treatment: __________
Expected Digits:__
Analog Loss Group: ___
Incoming Dial Tone? y

Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec):
Incoming Dial Type:
Disconnect Timing(msec):
Digits:
Sig Bit Inversion:
Digital Loss Group:

Disconnect Supervision - In? y Out? n
Answer Supervision Timeout: 0__

5_
tone____
500_
____
none
___

Receive Answer Supervision? y

2. In the Group Type field, type tie.
This field specifies the kind of trunk group you’re creating.
3. In the Group Name field, type Outside calls.
This name will be displayed, along with the group number, for outgoing
calls if you set the Outgoing Display? field to y. You can type any name up
to 27 characters long in this field.
4. Type 85 in the COR field.
This field controls which users can make or receive calls over this trunk
group. Assign a class of restriction that’s appropriate for the COR calling
permissions administered on your system.
5. In the TAC field, type 105.
This field defines a unique code users can dial to access this trunk group.
6. In the Direction field, type two-way.
This field defines the direction of traffic flow on this trunk group.

424

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding a Tie or Access trunk group

7. Type 1234 in the Night Service field.
This field assigns an extension to which calls are routed outside of business
hours.
8. In the Comm Type field, type voice.
This field defines whether a trunk group can carry voice, data, or both.
Analog trunks only carry voice and voice-grade data. If you’re
administering a T1 connection in North America, type rbavd in this field.
9. In the Trunk Type field, type wink/wink.
This field tells the system what kind of signaling to use on this trunk group.
Because we’re receiving and sending digits over this trunk group, we’re
using wink/wink signaling to minimize the chance of losing part of the
digit string in either direction.
10. Type tone in both the Outgoing Dial Type and Incoming Dial Type fields.
These fields tell the switch how digits are transmitted for incoming calls.
Entering tone actually allows the trunk group to support both DTMF and
rotary signals, so Avaya recommends that you always put tone in this field.
11. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Now you’re ready to add trunks to this trunk group. See ‘‘Adding trunks to a trunk
group’’ on page 430.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

425

Managing trunks

Setting up digital trunks
Any of the common trunks, except for PCOL trunks, can be analog or digital.
(PCOL trunks can only be analog.) Administering a digital trunk group is very
similar to administering its analog counterpart, but digital trunks must connect to
a DS1 circuit pack and this circuit pack must be administered separately. The
example in this section shows you how to do this.
In most cases, Avaya recommends leaving the default settings in fields that aren’t
specifically mentioned in the following instructions. Your Avaya representative or
network service provider can give you more information.
Your settings in the following fields must match your provider’s settings:
■

Bit Rate

■

Line Coding (unless you’re using a channel service unit to convert between
your line coding method and your provider’s)

■

Framing Mode

■

Signaling Mode

■

Interface Companding

! CAUTION:
Use the list above as a starting point and talk to your service provider.
Depending on your particular application, you may need to coordinate
additional administration with your service provider.
Before you start

Assign the DS1 circuit pack before you administer the members of the associated
trunk groups.

! CAUTION:
If enhanced DS1 administration is not enabled, you cannot make changes to
the DS1 Circuit Pack screen before you remove related member translations
of all trunks from the trunk group. See ‘‘Enhanced DS1 administration’’ on
page 428.
Before you can administer a digital trunk group, you must have one or more
circuit packs that support DS1 with enough open ports to handle the number of
trunks you need to add. To find out what circuit packs you need, see the Avaya
MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.

426

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up digital trunks

Instructions

The following example shows a DS1 circuit pack configured for T1 service. The
circuit pack is supporting a two-way CO trunk group that carries only voice and
voice-grade data.
To configure a new DS1 circuit pack:
1. Type add ds1 07A19 and press ENTER.
The DS1 Circuit Pack screen appears. You must enter a specific port
address for the circuit pack.
DS1 CIRCUIT PACK
Location:
Bit Rate:
Line Compensation:
Signaling Mode:

07A19
1.544
1
robbed-bit

Name: two-way CO
Line Coding: b8zs
Framing Mode: esf

Interface Companding: mulaw
Idle Code: 11111111

Slip Detection? y

2. Type two-way CO in the Name field.
Use this name to record useful information such as the type of trunk group
associated with this circuit pack or its destination.
3. In the Bit Rate field, type 1.544.
This is the standard for T1 lines.
4. In the Line Coding field, type b8zs.
Avaya recommends you use b8zs whenever your service provider supports
it. Since this trunk group only carries voice traffic, you could also use
ami-zcs without a problem.
5. In the Framing Mode field, type esf.
Avaya recommends you use esf whenever your service provider supports it.
6. In the Signaling Mode field, type robbed-bit.
7. In the Interface Companding field, type mulaw.
This is the standard for T1 lines in North America.
8. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

427

Managing trunks

More information
T1 recommended settings

The table below shows recommended settings for standard T1 connections to your
local exchange carrier.
Field

Value

Notes

Line Coding

b8zs

Use ami-zcs if b8zs is not
available.

Signaling Mode

robbed-bit

Robbed-bit signaling gives you
56K bandwidth per channel. If
you need a 64K clear channel
for applications like
asynchronous data transmission
or remote administration access,
use common channel signaling.

Framing

esf

Use d4 if esf is not available.

If you use b8zs line coding and esf framing, it will be easier to upgrade your T1
facility to ISDN should you want to. You can upgrade without reconfiguring
external channel service units, and your service provider won’t have to
reconfigure your network connection.
E1 recommended settings

DS1 administration for E1 service varies from country to country. See Avaya
MultiVantage™ Application Notes for Type Approval and use the DS1 screen
illustrations in the chapter for your country as a model for your administration.
NOTE:

Remember that the central office serving your switch may be emulating
another country’s network protocol. If so, you’ll have to administer your
circuit packs and trunk groups to match the protocol used by your central
office.
Enhanced DS1 administration

Normally, you can’t change the DS1 Circuit Pack screen unless you remove all
related trunks from their trunk group. However, if the DS1 MSP field on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y and you are assigned the
associated login permissions, you can change some of the fields on the DS1
Circuit Pack screen without removing the related trunks from their trunk group.

428

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up digital trunks

The following enhanced DS1 administration login permissions must be assigned
on the Command Permission Categories screen:
■

The Maintain Enhanced DS1 field must be y.

■

The Maintain Trunks field must be y.

■

The Maintain Switch Circuit Packs field must be y.

If you busy out the DS1 circuit pack, you can change the following fields: CRC,
Connect, Country Protocol, Framing Mode, Interface, Interconnect, Line Coding,
and Protocol Version. After changing these fields, you may also have to change
and resubmit associated screens.
Matching field settings on different screens

For enhanced DS1 administration, some field values on the DS1 Circuit Pack
screen must be consistent with those on other screens as shown in the table below.
If you change field values on the DS1 screen, you must change the related fields
on the other screens and resubmit them.
DS1 Circuit Pack field

Affected screens

Line Coding

Route Pattern
Access Endpoint
PRI Endpoint
Signaling Group
Trunk Group

Connect

Signaling Group

Protocol Version

Signaling Group

Interface

Signaling Group

Interconnect

Trunk Group

Country Protocol

Signaling Group
Trunk Group

Specific combinations of settings for some of these fields are shown below.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

429

Managing trunks

ITC, Bit Rate, and Line Coding. The ITC (Information Transfer Capability) field
appears on the Route Pattern screen, Trunk Group screen, and Access Endpoint
screen. The Line Coding and the Bit Rate fields appear on the DS1 Circuit Pack
screen. The settings for these fields on all the screens must be coordinated as
shown in the following tables.
ITC field

Bit Rate

Line Coding field

restricted

1.544 Mbps

ami-zcs

2.048 Mbps

ami-basic

1.544 Mbps

b8zs

2.048 Mbps

hdb3

unrestricted

Interconnect and corresponding Group Type entries. The Interconnect field
appears on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen. The Group Type field appears on the
Trunk Group screen. Set these fields as shown in the following table.
Interconnect field

Group Type field

co

co, did, diod, fx, or wats

pbx

access, aplt, isdn-pri, tandem, or tie

Related topics

See ‘‘DS1 Circuit Pack’’ on page 757 for information on administering DS1
service.
See ‘‘DS1 trunk service’’ on page 1659 for detailed information on DS1 service.

Adding trunks to a trunk group
Use this procedure to add new trunks or to change the assignment of existing
trunks. To change the assignment of existing trunks, remove them from their
current trunk group and add them to the new group.
Before you start

You must add a trunk group before you can assign and administer individual
trunks. To add a new trunk group, see the instructions in this chapter for the type
of group you want to add.

430

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding trunks to a trunk group

Instructions

As an example, we will assign 5 trunks to a new tie trunk group, trunk group 5.
We’ll use ports on several circuit packs for members of this group.
To assign trunks to trunk group 5:
1. Type change trunk-group 5 and press RETURN.
The Trunk Group screen appears.
2. Move to the Group Member Assignments page.
Some of the fields on this screen won’t appear for every trunk group.
TRUNK GROUP
Administered Members(min/max): xxx/yyy
Total Administered Members: xxx
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Port
Code Sfx
1: 1B1501_ TN464
F
2: 1B1502_ TN464
F
3: 1B1601_ TN464
F
4: 1B1602_ TN464
F
5: 1B1701_ TN464
F
6: _______
7: _______
8: _______
9: _______
10: _______
11: _______
12: _______
13: _______
14: _______
15: _______

Name
5211_______
5212_______
5213_______
5214_______
5215_______
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________

Night
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Mode
e&m_____
e&m_____
e&m_____
e&m_____
e&m_____
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________

Type
t1-comp
t1-comp
t1-comp
t1-comp
t1-comp
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Ans Delay
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

3. In the Port field in row 1, type 1B1501.
This field assigns the first member of the trunk group to a port on a circuit
pack.
4. In the Name field in row 1, type 5211.
This is the extension assigned to this trunk. In general, type the circuit ID
or telephone number for each trunk in this field. The information is helpful
for tracking your system or troubleshooting problems. Update these fields
whenever the information changes.
5. In the Mode field, type e&m.

! CAUTION:
An entry in this field is only required for some circuit packs. Dip
switch settings on the circuit pack control the signalling mode used on
the trunk group, so the entry in the Mode field must correspond to the
actual setting on the circuit pack.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

431

Managing trunks

6. In the Type field, type t1-comp.
An entry in this field is only required for some circuit packs.
7. Repeat steps 3–6, as appropriate, for the remaining trunks.
Notice that you can assign trunks in the same trunk group to ports on
different circuit packs.
8. Press ENTER to save your changes.

Removing trunks from a trunk group
Use this procedure to remove vacant trunk ports or to change the assignment of
existing trunks. To change the assignment of existing trunks, remove them from
their current trunk group and add them to the new group.
Instructions

We will remove trunks 5214 and 5215 from trunk group 5.
To remove trunks from trunk group 5:
1. Type change trunk-group 5 and press RETURN.
The Trunk Group screen appears.
TRUNK GROUP
Administered Members(min/max):
Total Administered Members:
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Port
Code Sfx Name
Night
1: 1B1501_ TN464
F
5211_______ _____
2: 1B1502_ TN464
F
5212_______ _____
3: 1B1601_ TN464
F
5213_______ _____
4: 1B1602_ TN464
F
5214_______ _____
5: 1B1701_ TN464
F
5215_______ _____
6: _______
___________ _____
7: _______
___________ _____
8: _______
___________ _____
9: _______
___________ _____
10: _______
___________ _____
11: _______
___________ _____
12: _______
___________ _____
13: _______
___________ _____
14: _______
___________ _____
15: _______
___________ _____

3/5
5

Mode
Type
Ans Delay
e&m_____ t1-comp ____
e&m_____ t1-comp ____
e&m_____ t1-comp ____
e&m_____ t1-comp ____
e&m_____ t1-comp ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____
________ _______ ____

2. Move to the Group Member Assignments page.
Some of the fields on this screen won’t appear for every trunk group.
3. Move the cursor to the Port 4 field and clear its entry.

432

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Removing trunk groups

4. Move the cursor to the Port 5 field and clear its entry.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
The switch will automatically clear the other fields associated with these 2
trunks.

Removing trunk groups
There’s more to removing a trunk group than just executing the remove
trunk-group command. If you’re using Automatic Route Selection (‘‘ARS’’), you
must remove an outgoing or two-way trunk group from any route patterns that use
it. If you’ve administered Trunk-Group Night Service buttons for the trunk group
on any phones, those buttons must be removed or assigned to another trunk group.
Instructions

As an example, we will remove trunk group 5. This two-way group is used in
ARS route pattern 2. In addition, a Trunk-Group Night Service button on
extension 8410 points to this group.
To remove trunk group 5:
1. In the Route Pattern screen for route pattern 2, clear the entries for trunk
group 5.
If you’re replacing trunk group 5 with another trunk group, just type the
information for the new trunk group over the old entries. Remember to
press ENTER to save your changes.
2. In the Station screen for extension 8410, clear the entry in the Button
Assignments field for the Trunk-Group Night Service button.
Remember to press ENTER to save your changes.
3. In the Trunk Group screen for trunk group 5, remove all member trunks
from the group.
See ‘‘Removing trunks from a trunk group’’ on page 432 for instructions.
4. Type remove trunk-group 5 and press ENTER.
The Trunk Group screen appears.
5. Press ENTER to remove the trunk group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

433

Managing trunks

Inserting and absorbing digits
Use this procedure to modify the incoming digit string on DID and tie trunks by
inserting (adding) or absorbing (deleting) digits. You’ll need to do this if the
number of digits you receive doesn’t match your dial plan.
Instructions

As an example, let us say you have a DID trunk group. It’s group number is 5.
Your service provider can only send 4 digits, but your dial plan defines 5-digit
extensions beginning with 6:
1. Type change trunk-group 5 and press ENTER.
The Trunk Group screen appears.

TRUNK GROUP
Group Number: 5
Group Name: Incoming calls

Group Type: did
COR: 85

TN: 1

CDR Reports: y
TAC: 105

Country: 1
Auth Code? n

TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type: wink-start
Trunk Termination:
Digit Treatment:
Expected Digits:
Extended Loop Range?

Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec):
Incoming Dial Type:
rc
Disconnect Timing(msec):
insertion
Digits:
4
Sig Bit Inversion:
n
Trunk Gain: high
Drop Treatment:

5
tone
500
6
none
silence

Disconnect Supervision - In? y

2. In the Digit Treatment field, type insertion.
This field tells the switch to add digits to the incoming digit string. These
digits are always added at the beginning of the string.
3. In the Digits field, type 6.
For insertion, this field defines the specific digits to insert. The switch will
add a “6” to the front of the digit strings delivered with incoming calls. For
example, if the central office delivers the string “4444,” Avaya
MultiVantage will change it to “64444,” an extension that fits your dial
plan.

434

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Inserting and absorbing digits

4. In the Expected Digits field, type 4.
This field tells the switch how many digits the central office sends.
NOTE:

The Expected digits field doesn’t appear on the screen for tie trunk
groups.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
If your service provider sends 7 digits but you only need 5, you need to absorb the
first 2 digits in the digit string. To absorb digits:
1. Type change trunk-group 5 and press ENTER.
The Trunk Group screen appears.
2. In the Digit Treatment field, type absorption.
This field tells the switch to remove digits from the incoming digit string.
These digits are always removed from the beginning of the string.
3. In the Digits field, type 2.
For absorption, this field defines how many digits will be absorbed. The
switch will remove the first 2 digits from the digit strings delivered with
incoming calls. For example, if the central office delivers the string
“556-4444,” Avaya MultiVantage will change it to “64444,” an extension
that fits your dial plan.
4. In the Expected Digits field, type 7.
This field tells the switch how many digits the central office sends.
NOTE:

The Expected digits field doesn’t appear on the screen for tie trunk
groups.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Related topics

See ‘‘Adding a DID trunk group’’ on page 417 for instructions on administering a
DID trunk group.
See ‘‘Adding a Tie or Access trunk group’’ on page 423 for instructions on
administering a tie trunk group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

435

Managing trunks

Administering answer detection
Use this procedure to administer an outgoing or two-way trunk group for network
answer supervision or answer supervision by timeout. If your network supplies
answer supervision to a trunk group, you can administer Avaya MultiVantage to
recognize and respond to that signal. If your network does not supply answer
supervision, you can set a timer for all calls on that group. When the timer expires,
the switch assumes the call has been answered and call detail recording starts (if
you are using CDR).
For information about answer detection by call classification, contact your Avaya
representative or see ‘‘Answer detection’’ on page 1468 for an introduction.
Before you start

Determine whether the trunk group receives answer supervision from your service
provider or private network. For example, most loop-start CO, FX, and WATS
trunks do not provide answer supervision.
Instructions

As an example, we will administer trunk group 5 for both types of answer
detection.
To administer trunk group 5 for answer supervision from the network:
1. In the Trunk Group screen for group 5, type y in the Receive Answer
Supervision field.
2. Press ENTER to save your change.
Now we will administer answer supervision by timeout. We’ll set the timer to 15
seconds. To administer trunk group 5 for answer supervision by timeout:
1. In the Trunk Group screen for group 5, type 15 in the Answer Supervision
Timeout field.
2. Press ENTER to save your change.
Related topics

See ‘‘Answer detection’’ on page 1468 for detailed information about this feature.

436

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administering trunks for listed directory numbers

Administering trunks for listed
directory numbers
Listed directory numbers (‘‘LDN’’) are the phone numbers given for an
organization in public telephone directories. You can administer Avaya
MultiVantage so that calls to different listed directory numbers go to the same
attendant group. How you administer your system for LDN calls depends on
whether the calls are coming in over DID and tie trunks or over CO and FX
trunks.
Instructions

As an example, let us say that one attendant group answers calls for 3 different
businesses, each with its own listed directory number:
■

Company A — 855-2020

■

Company B — 855-1000

■

Company C — 855-1111

DID trunks and some tie trunks transmit part or all of the dialed digit string to the
switch. If you want these calls to different numbers to go to one attendant group,
you must identify those numbers for the switch on the Listed Directory Numbers
screen.
We will take the 3 businesses listed above as an example. We will assume your
switch receives 4 digits from the central office on a DID trunk group and that
you’re not using Tenant Partitioning. To make these calls to different listed
directory numbers terminate to your attendant group:
1. Type change listed-directory-numbers and press ENTER.
The Listed Directory Numbers screen appears.
Page

1 of

2

LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS
Night Destination:
Ext
1: 2020
2: 1000
3: 1111
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

555-233-506

Name
Company A
Company B
Company C

TN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Issue 5 October 2002

437

Managing trunks

2. In the Ext 1 field type 2020.
This is the LDN for Company A.
3. Type Company A in the Name field.
This name will appear on the console display so the attendant knows which
business the call is for and how to answer it.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other two businesses.
You can enter up to 20 different listed directory numbers on this screen.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
To make LDN calls over a CO or FX trunk group terminate to an attendant group,
you must type attd in the Incoming Destination field on the Trunk Group screen
for that group.
When you use the Listed Directory Number screen to assign some extensions to
the attendant group, or when you enter attd in the Incoming Destination field on
the Trunk Group screen for CO or FX trunks, Avaya MultiVantage treats these
calls as LDN calls.
Related topics

See ‘‘Listed Directory Numbers’’ on page 1747 for detailed information about
this feature.

438

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing announcements

Understanding announcements
An announcement is a recorded message a caller may hear while the call is in a
queue, or if a call receives intercept treatment for some reason. An announcement
is often used in conjunction with music.
Announcements can be integrated or external. Integrated announcements reside
on a circuit pack in the switch carrier. External announcements are stored and
played back from adjunct equipment. For more information on external
announcements, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD
Call Centers.

Adding announcement data modules
NOTE:

This task is only required if you are using the TN750-series announcement
circuit pack.
Your system uses a data module to save and restore the announcements from the
integrated announcement circuit pack and your system’s memory. You need to set
up the data module that is built into the announcement circuit pack.
Before you start

You need to record your announcement on a special announcement circuit pack on
your system, or on an external device like an answering machine. See your Avaya
MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for circuit pack information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 439

Managing announcements

Instructions

To set up the announcement data module, determine the port location of the
Announcement circuit pack. You can find circuit pack information on the
Integrated Announcement Board screen.
To set up the data module on the Announcement circuit pack located at 01B18:
1. Type add data-module next and press RETURN.
The Data modules screen appears.
The system automatically fills in the number of the next available
extension. Make sure the extension conforms to your dial plan. If you want
to assign a specific extension, type that extension in the command instead
of “next.”

DATA MODULE
Data Extension:
Type:
Board:
ITC:

2002
announcement
01B18
restricted__

Name: announcement data module
COS: 1
COR: 1
TN: 1

ASSIGNED MEMBER (Station with a data extension button for this data module)
Ext
Name
1: ________ __________________________

2. In the Name field, type announcement data module.
3. In the Type field, type announcement and press RETURN.
The Port field automatically changes to Board.
4. In the Board field, type 01B18.
This is the address of the announcement circuit pack.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.

440

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Adding announcement extensions

Adding announcement extensions
You need to assign an extension for each announcement that you want to record.
After you define an announcement extension, you use it to record and access the
announcement.
Announcements can be stored on a TN2501AP circuit pack, TN750 circuit pack
or, for S8100 Media Server only, on the Integrated Scalable Speech Processor
Application (ISSPA) circuit pack or G700 Media Gateway embedded VAL
announcements (hereafter referred to as the Virtual VAL (VVAL)).
Instructions

We will use extension 1234 for an announcement about business hours. We will
use the integrated announcement circuit pack located on 01B18 (for S8100 Media
Server, we use 1A13, or for VVAL, we use 12V9 if referring to gateway 12).
To add an announcement extension 1234:
1. Type change announcements and press RETURN.
The Announcements/Audio Sources screen appears.

ANNOUNCEMENTS/AUDIO SOURCES

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

Ext.
1234____
________
________
________
________

Type
COR
integrated 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_

TN
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_

Name
business hours
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________

Q
n
n
n
n
n

QLen Pro Rate Port
N/A n
32
01B18

2. In the Ext field, type 1234.
3. In the Type field, type integrated.
4. In the Name field, type business hours.
NOTE:

If you are using either the TN2501AP, S8100 Media Server ISSPA
circuit packs or G700 VVAL, you must enter a name in the Name
field. This name becomes the filename for the announcement file. See
‘‘Announcements/Audio Sources’’ on page 606 for more information
on requirements for this field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

441

Managing announcements

5. In the Q field, type y.
This sets up an announcement queue so calls wait in a queue to hear an
announcement if all the ports on the announcement circuit pack are busy.
If you leave this field n, there is no announcement queue. When all the
announcement ports are busy the caller hears busy or other feedback
depending upon how the announcement was accessed.
6. N/A appears in the QLen (queue length) field. You cannot change this field
for integrated announcements because they have a pre-set queue length.
7. In the Pro (protected) field, type n.
If you enter n, users with console permissions can change the
announcement. If you enter y, the announcement cannot be changed.
This field appears only if the Type field is integrated.
8. In the Port field, type:
■

the location of the announcement circuit pack (TN2501AP or
TN750). In this example, we use 01B18.

■

1A13 if you are using the S8100 Media Server ISSPA circuit pack

■

ggv9 for G700 VVAL (where gg is the gateway number of the G700

Media Gateway)
9. Repeat steps 2 -8 with the correct information for each announcement you
want to record.
10. Press ENTER to save your work.
NOTE:

These steps have only created the administered name for the announcement
file. You fill the file space when you record an announcement or transfer an
announcement file to the circuit pack through a file transfer protocol
(‘‘FTP’’) session.
To check that the announcement administration is correct:
1. At the SAT, type list integrated-annc-boards and press RETURN.

Recording announcements
You can record an announcement for callers to hear when they dial a specific
extension. You can use the same steps to change an existing announcement.
For instructions on how to record an announcement at a computer or from a
phone, to a TN2501AP, see ‘‘Recording VAL announcements’’.

442

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Recording announcements

If you want to change an announcement that is recorded on a circuit pack without
memory, you have to delete the original message and record a new announcement.
See ‘‘Deleting and erasing announcements’’ on page 448.
Announcement sessions always use port 0, which also is used for playing
announcements, on the TN750 circuit packs. Announcement sessions always use
port 1, which is dedicated for telephone access, on the TN2501AP circuit packs.
With the TN2501AP circuit pack or VVAL, the port is only busy if another
telephone access session is active to the same circuit pack.
To begin an announcement session, the user must dial the administered feature
access code (‘‘FAC’’) followed by the announcement session. If an announcement
session is already in progress, or if a save or restore command is in progress, then
the user hears reorder tone (fast busy) and the system drops the call.
If the telephone session port to an integrated circuit pack is in use, then the user
hears reorder tone followed by silence. This indicates that the port will be
reserved for an announcement session. The user should redial the FAC and
extension every 45 seconds to gain access to the port.
NOTE:

For the MV1.1 and later release of MultiVantage™ software, multiple
telephone sessions are allowed, with one session associated with each active
integrated announcement circuit pack.
Once an end user accesses an announcement session, the user can dial 1 to record
an announcement, 2 to play an announcement, or 3 to delete the announcement. If
the circuit pack memory is more than 90% full, then the switch gives stutter dial
tone when the user gains access to an announcement session. Even if the user
hears stutter tone, the user should begin speaking to record the announcement.
Before you start
■

You need to have a phone or console with a class of service (‘‘COS’’) that
provides console permissions to record announcements.
See ‘‘Command Permission Categories’’ on page 676 for more information
on COS permissions.

Instructions

To record an announcement to extension 1234, or change the announcement
already recorded there, we’ll use a phone with console permissions. In our
example, the announcement feature access code is *56.
To record or change the announcement:

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

443

Managing announcements

1. Dial *56 from a phone or console.
■

If you hear dial tone, go to step 2.

■

If you hear a fast busy signal, hang up and redial the FAC and
extension every 45 seconds until you hear dial tone.

2. Dial the announcement extension 1234.
You hear dial tone.
3. Dial 1 to begin recording.
■

If you hear a beep or stutter tone, begin speaking. If the circuit pack
memory becomes full during recording, the system drops your
connection and does not retain the announcement.

■

If you hear intercept tone, hang up and record your announcement
on another extension that is assigned to a different circuit pack.

4. To end the recording:
■

If you are using a digital phone, press #. You hear dial tone allowing
you to continue your session (for example, dial 2 to hear the
announcement just recorded).

■

If you are using an analog phone, hang up. If your analog phone is
not connected through lineside DS1, the system records an electrical
click at the end of the recording. You have to redial the
announcement feature access code to continue your session.

5. To listen to the announcement you just recorded:
■

If you are using a digital phone, do not hang up. Dial 2. The
recording plays back through the handset.

6. If you are not satisfied with the announcement,
■

press 1 to re-record the announcement.

■

press 3 to delete the announcement and end the recording session.

7. If you want to listen to the announcement after you have hung up, dial the
extension from any phone or console. In this example, dial 1234. The
announcement plays through the handset.
NOTE:

You have to wait 15 seconds after you record the announcement
before you can dial the extension to hear your announcement. During
this 15-second window, you cannot record a new announcement and
no one can play this announcement. You can re-record the
announcement. Dial the feature access code, dial the extension, and
press 2 before the 15-second timer expires.

444

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Saving announcements

Saving announcements
NOTE:

This task is only applies if you are using a TN750-series announcement
circuit pack.
If you are using the TN2501AP (VAL) announcement circuit pack or VVAL
announcements, see ‘‘Moving announcements from the VAL circuit pack’’
on page 461.
If you are using the ISSPA announcements capability of the S8100 Media
Server, see ‘‘Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only)’’ on
page 58.
You can save and back-up announcements from an announcement circuit pack to
system memory. Your system memory is a tape, disk, or memory card, depending
on your system. Use this procedure primarily for announcement circuit packs
without built-in memory. VAL and VVAL announcements are backed up
internally to non-volatile flash memory.

! CAUTION:
Announcements that are recorded on announcement circuit packs without
built-in memory are lost if they are not saved to system memory before
power is shut down or the circuit pack is reset or removed.
For extra security, you may also want to save announcements from announcement
circuit packs that have their own built-in memory to another announcement circuit
pack with built-in memory or to tape.

! CAUTION:
Do not copy, save, or restore announcements from an announcement circuit
pack that has built-in memory to one without built-in memory because it may
corrupt the announcement data.
Instructions

To save or backup announcements when you have only one announcement circuit
pack:
1. Type save announcements and press RETURN to save the changes.
This process can take up to 40 minutes. You cannot administer your system
while it is saving announcements.
To save or backup announcements when you have more than one announcement
circuit pack, specify the circuit pack address in your command.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

445

Managing announcements

For example to save the announcements from the circuit pack at 01B18:
1. Type save announcements from 01B18 and press RETURN.
NOTE:

If you have announcement circuit packs with and without built-in
memory, save the circuit pack without built-in memory.
If you have a duplicated system with an active processor and a stand-by processor,
you can save announcements from the announcement circuit pack to both
processors. Simply add system memory for both processors to the save
announcements command.
If the save announcements procedure fails on one of the processors, it continues
on the other processor, which results in inconsistent announcement data between
the two processors.
To verify that the save announcements command was successful:
1. Type display integrated announcement boards and press RETURN.
The Integrated Announcement Boards screen appears.
This screen shows the date, time, and location of the announcement circuit pack
most recently saved. If the save announcement command failed or the save
translations were not run before rebooting, “N/A” appears in these fields.

Copying announcements
NOTE:

This task only applies if you are using a TN750-series announcement circuit
pack.
If you are using the TN2501AP (VAL) announcement circuit pack or VVAL
announcements, see ‘‘Moving announcements from the VAL circuit pack’’
on page 461.
If you are using the ISSPA announcements capability of the S8100 Media
Server, see ‘‘Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only)’’ on
page 58.
You can copy recorded announcements between back-up disks and tapes when
you want to store your recorded announcements in more than one place.

446

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Restoring announcements

Instructions

We will copy the announcements stored in our weekly disk back-up to the tape
back-up we take off company premises for a month. To copy announcements
between your back-up disk and tape:
1. Type copy announcements and press RETURN to save the changes.
This process can take up to 40 minutes. You cannot administer your system
while it is copying announcements.

Restoring announcements
NOTE:

This task only applies if you are using a TN750-series announcement circuit
pack.
If you are using the TN2501AP (VAL) announcement circuit pack or VVAL
announcements, see ‘‘Moving announcements to a VAL circuit pack or to
another LAN device’’ on page 463.
If you are using the ISSPA announcements capability of the S8100 Media
Server, see ‘‘Backup via the Web interface (S8100 Media Server only)’’ on
page 58.
You can restore announcements from system memory to an announcement circuit
pack. Your system memory is a tape, disk, or memory card, depending on your
system.
If you have a duplicated system, you system always restores the announcements
located on the active processor.
Instructions

We will restore announcements from our system memory (stored on a disk) to the
integrated announcement circuit pack on our system.
To restore announcements from system memory to the integrated announcement
circuit pack:
1. Type restore announcements disk and press RETURN.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

447

Managing announcements

We will restore announcements from system memory to an announcement circuit
pack that has built-in memory. We know that the announcement circuit pack is
located at 01B18:
1. Type restore announcements from cabinet 01. carrier B, slot 18 and
press RETURN.
2. Press ENTER to restore announcements.
Fixing problems
Problem

Possible causes and solutions

You receive
error code
E28

You do not have an integrated announcement circuit pack in the system.

You receive
error code
E31

A call is connected to the announcement on the circuit pack and the port is
busy. Wait for the call to disconnect and try restore announcements again.

If the system crashes or there is a processor interchange during restore
announcements, the restore fails and there is no valid announcement on the circuit
pack. Repeat the process when the system is operating properly.

Deleting and erasing announcements
You can use a system phone to delete recorded announcements from an
announcement circuit pack that does not have stored memory. When you delete
the announcement from the circuit pack, you do not delete the announcement
from your system backup tape or disk.
You can also erase the announcements stored on an integrated announcement
circuit pack that has stored memory.
NOTE:

The system denies any attempt to delete an announcement while it is
playing, being transferred, or being backed up to FLASH (amber LED is
flashing), regardless of whether the attempt is from a system phone, the
SAT, or through an FTP session.

448

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Deleting and erasing announcements

Before you start
■

Look up the announcement extension, which is mapped to a specific
TN2501AP circuit pack or VVAL gateway by location.
1. At the SAT, type list integrated-annc-boards and press RETURN.
2. Determine the extension(s) for the announcement(s) that you want
to delete.

■

Record the feature access code (FAC) for an announcement session.

Instructions

We will use a phone with console permissions to delete the recorded
announcement assigned to extension 1234. In our example, we know that the
announcement feature access code is *56.
1. Dial *56 from a phone or console.
You hear dial tone.
2. Dial 1234.
You hear dial tone.
3. Dial 3 to delete the announcement from the announcement circuit pack.
You hear a confirmation tone.
If the announcement is protected or is playing at the time of the command,
you hear a fast busy signal (reorder tone) and the system does not delete the
announcement.
4. Hang up the phone.
5. To ensure that an announcement was deleted, dial 1234.
You hear a busy signal if the announcement was deleted.
6. Repeat Steps 1-5 for each announcement that you want to delete.
You can delete only one announcement at a time.
You may also want to remove the announcement extension from the system. To
remove the extension, use your system administration terminal to complete the
following steps:
1. Type change announcements and press RETURN.
The Announcements/Audio Sources screen appears.
2. Delete the information in the Ext and Type fields.
3. Press ENTER to save your work.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

449

Managing announcements

Finally, to erase announcements on the announcement circuit pack located at
01B18:
1. Type erase announcements 01B18.
A warning message appears.
2. Press ENTER to erase the announcements on the circuit pack.

Setting up continuous-play
announcements
You can set up announcements to keep on repeating while callers are connected to
the announcement, so a caller listens until the system plays the entire
announcement.With a “barge-in” queue, you do not need a separate port for each
announcement.
For example, you can set up an Automatic Wakeup announcement to repeat and
use a barge-in queue. When guests pick up the phone to hear an announcement at
a particular time, they use only one port and the message repeats on that port until
the last guest goes off-hook and the message ends.
Before you start

You must use an integrated, multiple-integrated, or external announcement for
barge-in announcements.
Instructions

We will set up a continuous-play announcement for our integrated announcement
on extension 1234:
1. Type change announcements and press RETURN.
The Announcements/Audio Sources screen appears.

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6

Ext
.
1234____
________
________
________
________

ANNOUNCEMENTS/AUDIO SOURCES
Type
COR TN Name
Q
integ-rep 1_ 1_ business hours b
_________ 1_ 1_ _____________ n
_________ 1_ 1_ _____________ n
_________ 1_ 1_ _____________ n
_________ 1_ 1_ _____________ n

QLen Pro Rate Port
N/A n
32
01B18

2. Type b in the Q field on the same line as extension 1234.
3. Leave business hours in the name field, or enter a new description for the
announcement.
4. Press ENTER to save your work.

450

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Getting started with the TN2501AP or G700 Virtual
VAL

Getting started with the TN2501AP or
G700 Virtual VAL
Before you can use the capabilities of the TN2501AP or G700 VVAL
announcement circuit pack, it must be properly installed and configured. These
instructions are contained in other documents in the Avaya MultiVantage
documentation library. For more information about these and other tasks related to
using the TN2501AP, see the documents listed in the following table.

Task

Information source

Installing the TN2501AP
Administering IP Connections
Adding IP Routes
Testing the IP Connections

Made Easy Tool for DEFINITY®
Media Server Configurations

555-233-506

Installation, Upgrades and
Additions for Avaya™ CMC1
Media Gateways

Issue 5 October 2002

451

Managing announcements

Task

Information source

Installing VVAL for a G700 Media
Gateway using the Media-Gateway
screen and the enable announcement
command
Administering IP Connections
Adding IP Routes
Testing the IP Connections

Each G700 Media Gateway that will
be used to provide announcements
through the embedded VAL
circuitry on the Gateway processor
circuit pack must be assigned on
the ‘‘Media-Gateway’’ screen and
enabled using the enable
announcements command before
announcements can be recorded
using the phone or played from that
gateway.

NOTE:

G700 Media Gateway embedded
VAL announcements (VVAL)
must have the gateway(s) that will
provide announcements enabled
in order for announcement
extensions assigned to that
gateway to be played.

Announcements can be
administered to a gateway and files
can be FTPed to that gateway even
though it is not enabled. However,
the G700 Media Gateway first must
be assigned on the Media-Gateway
screen that it will be used for
gateway announcements.
Each G700 Media Gateway when
enabled is counted as a VAL circuit
pack towards the system limit of
either 1 VAL circuit pack (if the VAL
Maximum Capacity field is n or 10
circuit packs (for the S8700 or
S8300 Media Servers) if the VAL
Maximum Capacity field is y.
First the G700 Media Gateway
must have the V9 field assigned to
gateway-announcements on the
Media-Gateway screen before the
G700 embedded VAL (VVAL) can
be enabled.
Then the G700 Media Gateway
embedded VAL is enabled using
the enable announcement-board
ggV9 command (where gg is the
gateway number assigned on the
Media-Gateway screen).

452

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing VAL Announcements Using the SAT

Task

Information source
The G700 Media Gateway
embedded VAL also can be
disabled using the disable
announcement-board ggV9
command. This removes that
gateway from the VAL circuit pack
count but announcements already
assigned and recorded/FTPed on
that circuit pack remain but will not
play.

Administering Announcements
(recording, copying, deleting, etc.)

‘‘Managing VAL Announcements
Using the SAT’’ on page 453 and
‘‘Managing VAL Announcements
Using FTP’’ on page 459

Viewing announcement usage
measurements (list measurements
announcement command)

Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™
Software

Troubleshooting announcements

‘‘Troubleshooting VAL
Announcements’’ on page 467

Troubleshooting VAL hardware

Maintenance for Avaya™
MultiVantage and DEFINITY®
Server for your switch model

Managing VAL Announcements
Using the SAT
These are the tasks that you can perform from a System Access Terminal
(‘‘SAT’’):
■

Administering an announcement using the SAT

■

Recording announcements (with an option to use a system phone)

■

Deleting announcements (with an option to use a system phone)

To administer an announcement using the SAT, see ‘‘Adding announcement
extensions’’.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

453

Managing announcements

Recording VAL announcements

You can record an announcement for callers to hear when they dial a specific
extension or as part of call vectoring. You can use the same steps to change an
existing announcement.
You can record announcements in many ways:
■

Professional or computer recordings

■

Recording new announcements at a computer

■

Recording announcements at a system phone

Before you start

Ensure that the announcement administration is complete before proceeding. You
must have assigned a name before you can record an announcement (see ‘‘Adding
announcement extensions’’ on page 441).
If you are replacing a TN750C announcement circuit pack with the TN2501AP,
■

get a list and description of the announcements stored on the TN750C
circuit pack.

■

re-record the announcements on a computer or at a professional recording
studio as .wav files (CCITT µ-Law or A-Law, 8KHz, 8-bit mono), so that
they are ready to transfer to the new announcement circuit pack after it is
installed and administered.

Replacing old announcement circuit packs with the new TN2501AP circuit pack
requires that you

454

■

remove previous announcement administration

■

record new announcements for the TN2501AP

■

re-record any announcements currently resident on the TN750 circuit packs
that you are replacing. You cannot transfer or restore TN750
announcements from flash card, tape, or optical disk to the TN2501AP.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing VAL Announcements Using the SAT

Announcement file format requirements

In order to be compatible with the TN2501AP circuit pack and the MultiVantage
system, announcement recordings must have the following parameters:
■

CCITT A-Law or CCITT µ-Law companding format (do not use PCM)

■

8KHz sample rate

■

8-bit resolution (bits per sample)

■

Mono (channels = 1)

■

The µ-Law (Mu-Law) companding is used in the United States and A-Law
is used internationally. Use the companding format specified on the System
Parameters Country Options screen.

Announcements that are recorded in this format occupy 8K bytes per second of
file space for every second of recorded speech. For example, a 10-second
announcement creates an 80K bytes .wav file.
Professional or computer recordings

In order to be compatible with the TN2501AP circuit pack and the MultiVantage
system, announcement recordings must meet the ‘‘Announcement file format
requirements’’ described above.
Recording new VAL announcements at a
computer

To record an announcement at a computer:
1. At the computer, open the application that you use to record .wav files.
2. Set the recording parameters.
3. Record the announcement by speaking into a microphone connected to the
computer.
4. Play the announcement back at the computer before transferring the file to
the VAL circuit pack.
Recording VAL announcements at a system
phone

To record an announcement at a system phone, see ‘‘Recording announcements’’.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

455

Managing announcements

Converting announcement files to VAL format

If you are sharing recordings in a multi-site environment with Avaya
MultiVantage and S8100 Media Server or CONVERSANT systems, you must
convert announcement files for use on either system. If you need to convert an
announcement file to the required format, you can use a sound recording utility
application to do so.
To convert a previously-recorded or an S8100 Media Server- or CONVERSANTcompatible announcement file to Avaya MultiVantage-compatible formats:
1. Open the sound recording application on your computer (for example,
Microsoft Windows Sound Recorder).
2. Open the file you want to convert.
3. Check the file properties to see if you need to change the parameters.
4. If you need to change the recording parameters, look for a conversion tool
(some have a Convert Now option, others use Save As).
5. Change the file parameters to those listed in ‘‘Announcement file format
requirements’’.
NOTE:

In some applications, assigning the format (for example, CCITT
µ-Law) sets the remainder of the default parameters. Check each
parameter carefully, perhaps changing default settings to match the
parameters listed above. CCITT µ-Law or A-Law can be referred to
as ITU G.711 µ-Law or ITU G.711 A-Law, respectively.
Converting announcements for S8100 Media
Server/CONVERSANT

S8100 Media Server and CONVERSANT have a recording conversion utility that
supports file formats similar to those required by VAL. However, the conversion
utility can only read PCM-format announcement files.
If you are converting an announcement file for use on S8100 Media Server or
CONVERSANT systems:
1. If the file’s companding format is already PCM, go to Step 5.
If you are not sure what the file format is, proceed with Step 2.
2. At a computer, open the sound recording application (for example,
Microsoft Windows Sound Recorder).
3. Open the file that you want to convert.

456

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing VAL Announcements Using the SAT

4. Save (Convert Now or Save As) the announcement with these formats:
■

Format: PCM

■

Bits/Sample: 8

■

Sample Rate: 8KHz

■

Mono (channels = 1)
NOTE:

The recording conversion utility requires that announcement files are
in PCM format. VAL files are in CCIT A-Law or µ-Law format.
5. Open the file in recording conversion utility.
6. Convert the file to SSP format.
Deleting VAL announcements
Before you start

Look up the announcement information:
1. At the SAT, type list directory board and press RETURN.
2. Determine which announcement(s) that you want to delete, either by
extension or filename.
3. Decide whether you are
■

Deleting individual announcement files using the SAT.

■

Deleting all announcements on a circuit pack using the SAT.

■

‘‘Deleting and erasing announcements’’

NOTE:

The system denies any attempt to delete an announcement while it is
playing, being transferred, or backed up to FLASH (amber LED flashes),
regardless of whether the attempt is from a system phone, the SAT, or
through an FTP session.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

457

Managing announcements

Deleting individual VAL announcement files
using the SAT

To delete the announcement named Closed (announcement #3 on Screen 13):
1. At the SAT, type remove file board board-location
/annc/filename.wav and press RETURN.
For example, to delete announcement #3 in Screen 13, type:
remove file board 01A11 /annc/Closed.wav
NOTE:

Filenames are case-sensitive and require the .wav file extension.
The /annc portion of the command directs the system to the
announcement subdirectory on the VAL circuit pack, and
/Closed.wav indicates to delete the filename Closed.wav.
Deleting all VAL announcements on a circuit
pack using the SAT

To delete all of the announcement files on the VAL circuit pack:
1. At the SAT, type busyout board board-location and press RETURN.
Ensure that the command is successful.
NOTE:

When the VAL board is busied out,
■

both the RSCL and ethernet ports are busied out.

■

firmware takes down the ethernet link.

■

FTP is disabled because the ethernet link is down.

■

announcements on that circuit pack cannot play.

2. At the SAT, type erase announcements board board-location and press
RETURN.

! CAUTION:
This command deletes the specified announcement file in both RAM
and FLASH memory. The board firmware ignores the protect flag
(Pro field) when erasing the announcement files.
3. At the SAT, type list directory board and press RETURN.

458

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP

4. Verify that there are no files listed.
NOTE:

The announcement directory on the TN2501AP or G700 Media
Gateway is /annc.
5. Type list integrated-annc-boards and press RETURN.
Check the list to see that the announcement was deleted. The Length in
Seconds field should show 0.
Deleting VAL announcements at a system
phone

See ‘‘Deleting and erasing announcements’’.

Managing VAL Announcements
Using FTP
This section includes information on setting up and terminating a file transfer
protocol (FTP) session and outlines tasks that you can do in an FTP session.
There are 3 basic components to an FTP session:
■

Setting up an FTP session

■

Performing tasks in an FTP session

■

Ending an FTP session

! SECURITY ALERT:
Be sure to read and observe all of the Security Alerts regarding enabling and
disabling the VAL (TN2501AP or embedded G700 Gateway circuit packs)
filesystem and FTP sessions into it.
Setting up an FTP session

Setting up an FTP session into the VAL circuit pack involves:
1. Preparing the VAL circuit pack for the FTP session, which
■

allows an FTP session on an individual VAL circuit pack.

■

creates an ftp-login and ftp-password for that session.

2. Starting an FTP session from a computer or network management terminal.
Before you can start the FTP session, you need to know

555-233-506

■

the VAL circuit pack’s IP address from Step 1.

■

the VAL circuit pack’s ftp-login and ftp-password from Step 1.

Issue 5 October 2002

459

Managing announcements

Preparing the VAL circuit pack for the FTP
session

To prepare the VAL circuit pack for the FTP session, including setting the
username and password:
1. At the SAT, type enable filesystem board board-location login
ftp-username [3-6 characters] ftp-password [7-11 characters] and
press RETURN.
For example, the command:
enable filesystem board 01A11 login romeo shakespeare

enables an FTP session into the VAL circuit pack in Cabinet 1, carrier A,
slot 11. The ftp-username (3-6 characters) for this session is romeo, and
the ftp-password (7-11 characters) is shakespeare.
When the FTP session on the circuit pack is enabled, the announcement
and firmware files are available to anyone who knows the VAL circuit
pack’s IP address, the ftp-username, and the ftp-password.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Avaya recommends using a unique ftp-login and ftp-password for each FTP
session.
Starting an FTP session

If you are unfamiliar with FTP client application software, contact your network
administrator for information about access to an FTP session.
The following points apply to FTP sessions into the VAL circuit pack:
■

In FTP sessions, filenames are case-sensitive and require the .wav” file
extension.

■

Only one FTP session can be active at a time. If an FTP session is already
active for a particular VAL circuit pack, the system denies a second attempt
to establish an FTP session from some other remote host.

■

The VAL circuit pack has two user-accessible directories:
— /annc for playable announcements
— / (root) for temporary storage of embedded software updates. Use
this directory only for software updates.

■

460

FTP sessions time out after 10 minutes of inactivity.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP

Instructions

1. At the FTP client, type ftp val-ip-address and press ENTER. The IP address
must match the switch-administered IP address (see change node-names
ip).
2. At the username prompt, type romeo and press RETURN.
3. At the password prompt, type shakespeare and press RETURN.
The system responds with User logged in.
NOTE:

Once you are logged in you are in the announcements directory
(/annc).
4. If you are moving files to or from the VAL circuit pack, you must set the
system to binary mode. At the FTP client, type bin and press RETURN.
The system responds with Types set to I, binary mode.

! CAUTION:
If you do not transfer announcement files in binary mode, they can be
corrupted and the FTP session can fail.
Performing tasks in an FTP session

You are now ready to perform any of these tasks in the FTP session
■

Moving announcements from the VAL circuit pack

■

Deleting announcements

■

Moving announcements to a VAL circuit pack or to another LAN device

■

Combining tasks

Moving announcements from the VAL circuit
pack

When you move a file from the VAL circuit pack, you are either
■

backing up (archiving) an announcement file.

■

copying an announcement to another VAL circuit pack (restoring).

Moving a file in an FTP session means copying the file from the VAL circuit pack
to the FTP client’s default directory. If you want to move the file to another circuit
pack or LAN device, see ‘‘Moving announcements to a VAL circuit pack or to
another LAN device’’.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

461

Managing announcements

Before you start
■

Ensure that the steps in ‘‘Setting up an FTP session’’ are complete.

■

Ensure that you have adequate storage space for backup on the remote host
computer. Depending on the number of announcements and file type, 60
minutes of recording may require up to 32 megabytes of storage space for
backup on the remote host computer.

■

Know the IP address and location of the TN2501AP circuit pack as well as
the filename (list directory board) for the announcement that you want to
move.
NOTE:

The announcement directory on the TN2501AP circuit pack is /annc.
Instructions

To backup or save an announcement from the VAL board to the client computer
through an FTP session:
1. Ensure that the steps in ‘‘Setting up an FTP session’’ are complete.
2. At the FTP client, type get filename.wav and press RETURN.
Example: get Closed.wav
The announcement file is written to the directory from which you initiated
the FTP session.
NOTE:

FTP upload or download of announcement files does not preserve the
created timestamp. The file receives the current date and time when it
is written to the circuit pack or on the computer.
3. List the FTP client directory contents and ensure that the announcement
file is among those listed.
4. Terminate the FTP session (see ‘‘Ending an FTP session’’).
Deleting VAL announcements using FTP

You can delete an announcement from a TN2501AP circuit pack or from a LAN
device.
NOTE:

The system denies any attempt to delete an announcement while it is
playing, being transferred, or backed up to FLASH (amber LED flashes),
regardless of whether the attempt is from a system phone, the SAT, or
through an FTP session.

462

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP

Before you start
■

Know the IP address, the announcement filename that you are deleting, and
the VAL circuit pack location (list directory board).

Instructions

To delete an announcement on a TN2501AP circuit pack through an FTP session:
1. Ensure that the steps in ‘‘Setting up an FTP session’’ are complete.
2. At the computer client, type delete filename.wav and press RETURN.
Example: delete Closed.wav
NOTE:

The announcement file is only removed from volatile RAM memory.
Approximately 5 minutes later, the file is removed from nonvolatile
ROM flash memory.
3. List the contents of the announcement directory and ensure that the file is
not listed.
NOTE:

The .wav file extension on the announcement files are visible when
you view the announcement directory from the FTP client.
4. Terminate the FTP session (see ‘‘Ending an FTP session’’).
5. At the SAT, type change announcements and press RETURN.
The Announcements/Audio Sources screen appears.
6. Remove the announcement administration by deleting the entire line
associated with the announcement.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Moving announcements to a VAL circuit pack or
to another LAN device

You can copy an announcement file to the VAL circuit pack to another LAN
device.
Before you start

555-233-506

■

Know the announcement filename and its location on the client computer.

■

Know the destination IP address, the filename, and circuit pack location of
the announcement and VAL circuit pack to which you are moving the
announcement (list directory board).

Issue 5 October 2002

463

Managing announcements

■

Ensure that you have not just administered the announcement on the
Announcements/Audio Sources screen. If announcement administration
precedes the file transfer, then
— the announcement appears with a zero (0) length on the list
integrated-annc-boards screen.
— The Time Remaining fields on both the list
integrated-annc-boards and display integrated-annc-boards
screens do not refresh to reflect the presence of the new
announcement file on the circuit pack.
Use this procedure to ensure that the announcement length is accurate:
1. Administer the announcement at the switch (change
announcements), using the identical filename in the Name field
without spaces or the .wav file extension.
2. Attempt to play the announcement that was administered first and
transferred second.
The switch returns a busy signal at the first play attempt.
3. Attempt to play the announcement that was administered first and
transferred second in a telephone access session.
The switch returns a busy signal at the first play attempt.
4. Re-record this announcement with the same filename at a phone (see
‘‘Recording VAL announcements at a system phone’’).

Instructions

To copy an announcement to a VAL circuit pack or to another LAN device:
1. Ensure that the steps in ‘‘Setting up an FTP session’’ are complete.
2. At the FTP client, type put filename.wav and press RETURN.
Example: put Closed.wav
3. List the contents of the VAL announcement directory or LAN device and
look for the announcement file among those listed.
NOTE:

FTP upload or download of announcement files does not preserve its
timestamp. The file receives the current date and time when it is
written to the circuit pack or to a computer.
4. After you are sure that the announcement is on the VAL circuit pack,
administer the announcement at the switch (change announcements),
using the identical filename in the Name field without spaces or the .wav
file extension.
5. Terminate the FTP session (see ‘‘Ending an FTP session’’).

464

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP

Combining tasks

When you combine copying (the get command) and moving (the put command)
announcement files, you can rearrange VAL announcements.
Before you start
■

Know the IP address, the filename, and location of the destination VAL
circuit pack to which you are moving an announcement (list directory
board).

Instructions

To move an announcement to a VAL circuit pack from another VAL circuit pack
in an FTP session:
1. Ensure that the steps in ‘‘Setting up an FTP session’’ are complete.
NOTE:

You must first establish an FTP session into the circuit pack from
which you are restoring an announcement.
2. List the directory contents and ensure that the announcement file is among
those listed.
3. At the FTP client, type get filename.wav and press RETURN.
Example: get Closed.wav
A copy of the file is written to the directory from which you initiated the
FTP session.
4. List the FTP client directory contents to ensure that the announcement is
among those listed.
5. Terminate the FTP session (see ‘‘Ending an FTP session’’) to the circuit
pack from which you copied the announcement file.
6. Set up a new FTP session into the destination VAL circuit pack (see
‘‘Setting up an FTP session’’).
7. At the FTP client, type put filename.wav and press RETURN.
Example: put Closed.wav
8. List the VAL announcement directory contents to ensure that the
announcement is among those listed.
9. Terminate the FTP session to the circuit pack to which you copied the
announcement file.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

465

Managing announcements

Ending an FTP session

FTP sessions to a VAL circuit pack originate at the FTP client end. You terminate
an FTP session by
■

logging out from the FTP client (type bye or quit and press ENTER)
and

■

typing disable filesystem board board-location at the SAT and press
RETURN. (This clears the ftp-username and ftp-password.)
or

■

you can effectively terminate the session from the Avaya MultiVantage end
by letting the system time out (10 minutes of inactivity).

! SECURITY ALERT:
Both logging out of the FTP session and disabling the VAL circuit pack
filesystem provide a higher degree of security.
NOTE:

If you only disable the circuit pack filesystem, you can continue your FTP
session. However, new FTP session logins are not allowed.

VAL Manager
VAL Manager is a standalone application that allows you to copy announcement
files and MultiVantage announcement information to and from a MultiVantage
system over a LAN connection.
VAL Manager offers the following basic features:
■

Simplified administration to add, change, and remove MultiVantage
announcement information.

■

The ability to back up and restore announcement files and information to
and from a MultiVantage system.

■

The ability to view the status of announcement on the VAL circuit pack in
any MultiVantage system.

See your Avaya representative for more information about VAL Manager.

466

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Troubleshooting VAL Announcements

Troubleshooting VAL
Announcements
If a working announcement file is deleted via FTP, the next attempt to play the
announcement fails, and the system adds a software event to the Denial Events
Log. You can view this log to see if the announcement has been deleted, and to see
if other events have occurred related to announcements.
Viewing the Denial Events Log

To view the Denial Events Log:
1. At the SAT, type display events and press RETURN.
The Events Report screen appears. This input screen helps you focus the
report on events of a certain type or from a certain time period.

display events

Page

1 of

1

SPE B

EVENT REPORT
The following options control which events will be displayed.
EVENT CATEGORY
Category: denial
REPORT PERIOD
Interval: ___

From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__

SEARCH OPTIONS
Vector Number: ___
Event Type: _____

Screen 26.

Event Report screen (display events)

2. In the Category field, select or type denial.
3. You can further limit the report by setting the Interval field to one of the
following selections (select from the help list or type the first letter):

555-233-506

■

all

■

month

■

day

■

hour

■

minute

Issue 5 October 2002

467

Managing announcements

4. Press ENTER.
The Events Report screen appears.

display events

Page

1

of

1

EVENTS REPORT
Event Event
Type Description
2028
2027

Event
Data 1

Annc file has bad format
Annc not found on board

Screen 27.

8C0009
8C0007

Event
Data 2
0
0

First
Occur

Last
Occur

Evnt
Cnt

05/14/11:55 05/14/12:04
05/14/12:09 05/14/12:09

2
1

Events report screen (display events)

5. Look at the 2027 entry in the Event Type field.
■

The Event Description field explains that the announcement is not
on the circuit pack.

■

The Event Data 1 field contains the announcement number
(hexadecimal in the lower three digits).

NOTE:

This denial event only appears once in the Denial Events Log.
Troubleshooting poor sound quality

If you played an announcement files back in another environment and it sounded
great, but when you play it back in the MultiVantage environment the sound
quality is poor, ensure that the file formats are compatible. A good announcement
file format must be:
■

8Kbps sample rate

■

8-bit resolution (bits per sample)

■

A-law or Mu-law companding format

■

Mono (channels = 1)

You must also have the same companding mode administered on page 1 of the
System-Parameters Country-Options screen (change system-parameters
country-options).

468

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Troubleshooting VAL Announcements

The system records a software denial event in the Denial Events Log each time it
plays an announcement with a bad file format. Refer back to the Events report
screen (display events) and find the 2028 entry in the Event Type field:
■

The Event Description field explains that the announcement has a bad file
format.

■

The Event Data 1 field contains the announcement number (hexadecimal in
the lower three digits).

Viewing announcement measurements

You can view a report of announcement measurements, including how many
times an announcement was queued to play, how many callers dropped while in
queue, and how many times all announcement ports were busy during the report
period.
For more information about this report, see Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™
Software on your documentation CD.
Related topics

For more information, see ‘‘Announcements’’ on page 1464.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

469

Managing announcements

Non-volatile storage of
announcements on VAL
The VAL board has a RAM based file system on which the announcements are
stored. This is where a newly recorded or FTP’d announcement resides. The VAL
constantly checks to determine whether changes have been made to the file
system (file added or deleted or renamed). Once a change has been detected, the
VAL waits for 5 minutes of stability. After such a stable period, the VAL backs up
the RAM based file system to its FLASH. The FLASH version of the file system
is non-volatile and is what is restored upon reset/reseat.
If you record a new announcement and immediately reset the board, the
announcement will be lost. The yellow LED blinks while a backup from RAM to
FLASH occurs. All of the above is true regardless which (if any) of the .wav files
on the board are administered announcements. It is just the way the board
(firmware) operates. Note that only files with a .wav extension in the /annc
directly are backed up to FLASH.
MultiVantage announcement synchronicity

As mentioned above, there is a separation between the actual files on the VAL
board and the set of administered announcements. You can have 100 .wav files on
a VAL and only be using (administered) 5 of them. The best way to visualize this
is to look at the difference between a list integrated and the list directory board
/annc commands.
By going into the Change Announcement screen and changing the name of an
announcement, what is happening? You are changing only the administration of
the announcement. This means when the extension is called, the new file name is
requested. The board still has a file with the old file name but not one with the
new file name. You then could run change announcement again and switch the
name back to the old one and the announcement will play fine. The VAL board is
completely unaware that you change the change announcement command.

470

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Non-volatile storage of announcements on VAL

Changing the name of the announcement

To change the name of an announcement you must do two things.
1. Change the administered name (using the change announcement
command)
2. Change the name of the file on the VAL board
Changing the name of the file on the VAL board

There are two ways to accomplish this.
NOTE:

For the following steps, do not use the FTP rename command since
the FTP server on the VAL board does not support it.
1. Change the name of the existing file using the PC.
a. Access the file on the PC if already there or FTP the announcement
file from the VAL board (in binary mode) to the PC.
b. Rename it locally on the PC.
c. FTP the file with the new name back to the VAL board.
d. Assign the new name to the existing extension on the announcement
screen
e. Delete the old file on the board using the remove file command, if
you wish, or

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

471

Managing announcements

2. Re-record the announcement with the new file name.
a. FTP the new announcement to the VAL board.
b. Assign the new name to the existing extension on the announcement
screen (replacing the old file name).
c. Delete the old announcement file using the remove file command
(if desired).

472

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing group communication

Group communication features allow co-workers to communicate with each other
more efficiently. This chapter shows you how to administer your system so users
can place a variety of pages from their phones or use their phones as intercoms.
You can also give specific users permission to monitor other users’ calls or to
interrupt active calls with important messages.

Setting up voice paging over
loudspeakers
Use this procedure to allow users to make voice pages over an external
loudspeaker system connected to your Avaya MultiVantage system. If you’re
using an external paging system instead of an auxiliary trunk circuit pack, don’t
use this procedure. External systems typically connect to a trunk or station port
and are not administered through the Loudspeaker Paging screen.
Before you start

Your switch must have one or more auxiliary trunk circuit packs with enough
available ports to support the number of paging zones you define. Each paging
zone requires 1 port. See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide
for information on specific circuit packs.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 473

Managing group communication

Instructions

As an example, we will set up voice paging for an office with 5 zones. We’ll allow
users to page all 5 zones at once, and we’ll assign a class of restriction of 1 to all
zones.
1. Type change paging loudspeaker and press RETURN.
The Loudspeaker Paging screen appears.

LOUDSPEAKER PAGING
CDR? y
Voice Paging Timeout (sec): 30
Code Calling Playing Cycles:
PAGING PORT ASSIGNMENTS
Voice Paging
Zone Port
TAC COR TN
1: 01C0501
301
1
1
2: 01C0502
302
1
1
3: 01C0503
303
1
1
4: 01C0504
304
1
1
5: 01C0601
305
1
1
6:
1
7:
1
8:
1
9:
1
ALL:
310
1
1

Code Calling
TAC COR TN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Location:
Reception area
Shipping & receiving
Staff offices
Management suite
Breakroom

2. In the Voice Paging Timeout field, type 30.
This field sets the maximum number of seconds a page can last. In our
example, the paging party will be disconnected after 30 seconds.
3. In the Port field for Zone 1, type 01C0501.
Use this field to assign a port on an auxiliary trunk circuit pack to this zone.
4. In the Voice Paging — TAC field type 301.
Use this field to assign the trunk access code users dial to page this zone.
You cannot assign the same trunk access code to more than one zone.
5. In the Voice Paging — COR field type 1.
Use this field to assign a class of restriction to this zone. You can assign
different classes of restriction to different zones.
6. On the Zone 1 row, type Reception area in the Location field.
Give each zone a descriptive name so you can easily remember the
corresponding physical location.

474

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers

7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for zones 2 to 5.
8. In the ALL row, type 310 in the Voice Paging — TAC field and 1 in the
Voice Paging — COR field.
By completing this row, you allow users to page all zones at once. You do
not have to assign a port to this row.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
You can integrate loudspeaker voice paging and call parking. This is called
“deluxe paging.” You enable deluxe paging by entering y in the Deluxe Paging
and Call Park Timeout to Originator field on the Feature-Related System
Parameters screen. To allow paged users the full benefit of deluxe paging, you
should also enter a code in the Answer Back Access Code field on the Feature
Access Code screen if you haven’t already: paged users will dial this code + an
extension to retrieve calls parked by deluxe paging.
Fixing problems
Problem

Possible causes

Solutions

Users report that they can’t
page.

The attendant has taken
control of the trunk group.

Deactivate attendant
control.

Calls to an extension are
heard over the
loudspeakers.

The extension may have
been forwarded to a trunk
access code used for
paging.

Deactivate call forwarding
or change the extension
calls are forwarded to.

More information

Users page by dialing the trunk access code assigned to a zone and speaking into
their handset. For your users’ convenience, you may also want to consider the
following options:

555-233-506

■

Add the paging trunk access codes to an abbreviated dialing list and allow
users to page using the list.

■

Assign individual trunk access codes to Autodial buttons.

■

Assign individual trunk access codes to Busy buttons. The status lamp tells
the user whether or not the trunk is busy.

■

For attendants, you can provide one-button paging access by assigning
trunk access codes for paging zones to the Direct Trunk Group Select
buttons on the attendant console.

Issue 5 October 2002

475

Managing group communication

With an appropriate class of restriction, remote callers can also make loudspeaker
pages.
When deluxe paging is enabled, if a user with an active call dials the trunk access
code for a paging zone the active call is automatically parked.
■

Users dial the trunk access code + “#” to page and park an active call on
their own extensions.

■

Users with console permission can park a call on any extension by dialing
the trunk access code + the extension.

■

Attendants or users with console permissions may park calls to common
shared extensions.

■

Parked calls can be retrieved from any phone. Paged users simply dial the
answer back feature access code + the extension where the call is parked.

Related topics

See ‘‘Paging over speakerphones’’ on page 479 for another way to let users page.
See ‘‘Loudspeaker paging’’ on page 1753 for detailed information on voice
paging over loudspeakers.

Setting up chime paging over
loudspeakers
Use this procedure to allow users to make chime pages over an external
loudspeaker system connected to your switch. Users page by dialing a trunk
access code and the extension of the person they want to page. The system plays a
unique series of chimes assigned to that extension. This feature is also known as
Code Calling Access.
Before you start

Your switch must have one or more auxiliary trunk circuit packs with enough
available ports to support the number of paging zones you define. Each paging
zone requires 1 port. See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide
for information on specific circuit packs.

476

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers

Instructions

To set up chime paging, you fill out the necessary fields on the Loudspeaker
Paging screen and then assign chime codes to individual extensions on the Code
Calling IDs screen.
As an example, we will set up chime paging for a clothing store with 3 zones.
We’ll allow users to page all zones at once, and we will assign a class of
restriction of 1 to all zones.
1. Type change paging loudspeaker and press RETURN.
The Loudspeaker Paging screen appears.

LOUDSPEAKER PAGING
CDR? y
Voice Paging Timeout (sec):
Code Calling Playing Cycles: 2
PAGING PORT ASSIGNMENTS
Voice Paging
Zone Port
TAC COR TN
1: 01A0301
1
2: 01A0302
1
3: 01A0303
1
4:
1
5:
1
6:
1
7:
1
8:
1
9:
1
ALL:
1

Code Calling
TAC COR TN
80
1
1
81
1
1
82
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
89
1
1

Location:
Men’s Department
Women’s Department
Children’s

2. In the Code Calling Playing Cycles field, type 2.
This field sets the number of times a chime code plays when someone
places a page.
3. In the Port field for Zone 1, type 01A0301.
Use this field to assign a port on an auxiliary trunk circuit pack to this zone.
4. In the Code Calling — TAC field type 80.
Use this field to assign the trunk access code users dial to page this zone.
You cannot assign the same trunk access code to more than one zone.
5. In the Code Calling — COR field type 1.
Use this field to assign a class of restriction to this zone. You can assign
different classes of restriction to different zones.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

477

Managing group communication

6. On the Zone 1 row, type Men’s Department in the Location field.
Give each zone a descriptive name so you can easily remember the
corresponding physical location.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for zones 2 and 3.
8. In the ALL row, type 89 in the Code Calling — TAC field and 1 in the
Code Calling — COR field.
By completing this row, you allow users to page all zones at once. You do
not have to assign a port to this row.
9. Press ENTER to save your changes.
To assign chime codes to individual extensions:
1. Type change paging code-calling-ids and press RETURN.
The Code Calling IDs screen appears.

CODE CALLING IDs
ID ASSIGNMENTS
Id
Ext
111: 2130
112: 2131
113: 2149
114: 2150
115: 2152
121: 2153
122: 2160
123: 2167
124: ________
125: ________
131: ________
132: ________
133: ________
134: ________
135: ________

Id
141:
142:
143:
144:
145:
151:
152:
153:
154:
155:
211:
212:
213:
214:
215:

Ext
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Id
221:
222:
223:
224:
225:
231:
232:
233:
234:
235:
241:
242:
243:
244:
245:

Ext
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Id
251:
252:
253:
254:
255:
311:
312:
313:
314:
315:
321:
322:
323:
324:
325:

Ext
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Id
331:
332:
333:
334:
335:
341:
342:
343:
344:
345:
351:
352:
353:
354:
355:

Ext
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

2. Type the first extension, 2130, in the Ext field for Id 111.
Each code Id defines a unique series of chimes.
3. Assign chime codes to the remaining extensions by typing an extension
number on the line following each code Id.
You can assign chime codes to as many as 125 extensions.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.

478

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Paging over speakerphones

Fixing problems
Problem

Possible causes

Solutions

Users report that they can’t
page.

The attendant has taken
control of the trunk group.

Deactivate attendant
control.

More information

Users page by dialing the trunk access code assigned to a zone. For your users’
convenience, you may also want to consider the following options:
■

Add the paging trunk access codes to an abbreviated dialing list and allow
users to page using the list.
NOTE:

Don’t use special characters in abbreviated dialing lists used with
chime paging.
■

Assign individual trunk access codes to Autodial buttons.

■

Assign individual trunk access codes to Busy buttons. The status lamp tells
the user whether or not the trunk is busy.

■

For attendants, you can provide one-button paging access by assigning
trunk access codes for paging zones to the Direct Trunk Group Select
buttons on the attendant console.

With an appropriate class of restriction, remote callers can also make loudspeaker
pages.
Related Topics

See ‘‘Paging over speakerphones’’ below for another way to let users page.
See ‘‘Loudspeaker paging’’ on page 1753 for detailed information on chime
paging over loudspeakers,

Paging over speakerphones
Use this procedure to allow users to make an announcement over a group of
digital speakerphones. By dialing a single extension that identifies a group, users
can page over all the speakerphones in that group. Speakerphone paging is
one-way communication: group members hear the person placing the page but
cannot respond directly.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

479

Managing group communication

Before you start

You must have ‘‘DCP’’ set speakerphones or IP set speakerphones.
Instructions

To set up speakerphone paging, you create a paging group and assign phones to it.
In the following example, we’ll create paging group 1 and add 4 members.
1. Type add group-page 1 and press RETURN.
The Group Paging Using Speakerphone screen appears.

GROUP PAGING USING SPEAKERPHONE
Group Number: 1
Group Extension: 3210
Group Name: Sales staff
COR: 5
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
Name
Ext
Name
1: 2009
B. Smith
17:
2: 2010
R. Munoz
18:
3: 2011
Y. Lu
19:
4: 2012
A. Sullivan
20:
5:
21:
6:
22:
7:
23:
8:
24:
9:
25:
10:
26:
11:
27:
12:
28:
13:
29:
14:
30:
15:
31:
16:
32:

2. In the Group Extension field, type 3210.
This field assigns the extension users dial to page the members of this
group.
3. In the Group Name field, type Sales staff.
This name appears on callers’ phone displays when they page the group.
4. In the COR field, type 5.
Any user who wants to page this group must have permission to call
COR 5.
5. In the Ext field in row 1, type 2009.

480

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Paging users who are on active calls

6. Enter the remaining extensions that are members of this group.
The switch fills in the Name fields with the names from the Station screen
when you save your changes.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Fixing problems
Problem

Possible causes

Solutions

Users get a busy signal
when they try to page.

All phones in the group are
busy or off-hook.

Wait a few minutes and try
again.

All phones in the group
have Send All Calls or Do
Not Disturb activated.

Group members must
deactivate these features in
order to hear a page.

Some phones in the group
are busy or off-hook.

Wait a few minutes and try
again.

Some phones in the group
have Send All Calls or Do
Not Disturb activated.

Group members must
deactivate these features in
order to hear a page.

Some group members
report that they don’t hear a
page.

More information
■

You can create up to 32 paging groups on one Avaya MultiVantage system.

■

Each group can have up to 32 extensions in it.

■

One phone can be a member of several paging groups.

Related topics

See ‘‘Group paging’’ on page 1690 for detailed information on paging over
speakerphones.

Paging users who are on active calls
Use this procedure to allow one user to interrupt another user’s call and make a
private announcement. This is called whisper paging. The paging user dials a
feature access code or presses a feature button, then dials the extension they want
to call. All 3 users can hear the tone that signals the page, but only the person on
the paged extension can hear the pager’s voice: other parties on the call cannot
hear it, and the person making the page cannot hear anyone on the call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

481

Managing group communication

Before you start

Before you administer whisper paging:
■

Your switch must have a circuit pack that supports whisper paging. See the
Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for information on
specific models.

■

Users must have 6400-, 7400-, 8400-, or 9400-series DCP (digital) phones.

Instructions

You give users the ability to use whisper paging by administering feature buttons
or feature access codes.
You can give users feature buttons that make, answer, or block whisper pages.
Using the Station screen, you can administer these buttons in any combination as
appropriate:
■

Whisper Page Activation — allows this user to place a whisper page

■

Answerback — allows this user to answer a whisper page
Pressing the answerback button automatically puts any active call on hold
and connects the paged user to the paging user.

■

Whisper Page Off— allows this user to block whisper pages
If possible, assign this function to a button with a lamp so the user can tell
when blocking is active. You cannot administer this button to a soft key.

To allow users to make a whisper page by dialing a feature access code, you
simply need to enter a code in the Whisper Page Activation Access Code field on
the Feature Access Code screen.
Related topics

See ‘‘Using phones as intercoms’’ on page 483 for another way to give individual
users quick, two-way communication.
See ‘‘Whisper paging’’ on page 1927 for detailed information on whisper paging.

482

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using phones as intercoms

Using phones as intercoms
Use this procedure to make communications quicker and easier for users who
frequently call each other. With the intercom feature, you can allow one user to
call another user in a predefined group just by pressing a couple of buttons. You
can even administer a button that always calls a predefined extension when
pressed.
Instructions

Administering the intercom feature is a 2-step process. First, you create an
intercom group and assign extensions to it. Then, to allow group members to
make intercom calls to each other, you administer feature buttons on their phones
for automatic intercom, dial intercom, or both. This section also provides
instructions for allowing one user to pick up another user’s intercom calls.
In this example, we’ll create intercom group 1 and add extensions 2010 to 2014.
1. Type add intercom-group 1 and press RETURN.
The Intercom Group screen appears.

INTERCOM GROUP
Group Number: 1
Length of Dial Code: 1
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
DC
1: 2010
1
2: 2011
2
3: 2012
3
4: 2013
4
5: 2014
9
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

Name
B. Smith
L. Yu
R. Munoz
K. Mancetti
N. Mitchell

2. Type 1 in the Length of Dial Code field.
Dial codes can be 1 or 2 digits long.
3. On row 1, type 2010 in the Ext field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

483

Managing group communication

4. On row 1, type 1 in the DC field.
This is the code a user will dial to make an intercom call to extension 2010.
The length of this code must exactly match the entry in the Length of Dial
Code field.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining extensions.
Dial codes don’t have to be in any order. The switch fills in the Name field
with the name from the Station screen when you save your changes.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
To allow users to make intercom calls, you must administer feature buttons on the
phones in the intercom group. You can administer buttons for dial intercom,
automatic intercom, or both on multi-appearance phones. You can’t administer
either intercom feature on single-line phones, but you can assign single-line
phones to intercom groups so those users can receive intercom calls.
As an example, we will set up automatic intercom between extensions 2010 (dial
code = 1) and 2011 (dial code = 2) in intercom group 1.
To set up automatic intercom between extensions 2010 and 2011:
1. Type change station 2010 and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.

STATION
SITE DATA
Room:
Jack:
Cable:
Floor:
Building:

_______
_____
_____
_______
_______

Headset?
Speaker?
Mounting:
Cord Length:
Set Color:

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ________
BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: call-appr_
2: call-appr_
3: call-appr_
4: auto-icom_ Grp: 1
5: dial-icom_ Grp: 1

List2: ________

DC: 2

6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

n
n
d
0
______

List3: ________

__________
__________
__________
__________
__________

2. Move to the page with the Button Assignments fields.
3. In Button Assignments field 4, type auto-icom and press TAB.
The Grp and DC fields appear.

484

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Using phones as intercoms

4. In the Grp field, type 1.
This is the number of the intercom group. Since an extension can belong to
more than one intercom group, you must assign a group number to
intercom buttons.
5. In the DC field, type 2.
This is the dial code for extension 2011, the destination extension.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
7. Repeat steps 1–6 for extension 2011.
Assign a dial code of 1 to 2011’s automatic intercom button.
To give a member of a group the ability to make intercom calls to all the other
members, administer a Dial Intercom button on the member’s phone. Type the
number of the intercom group in the Grp field beside the Dial Intercom button.
You can also give one user instant, one-way access to another. For example, to
give user A instant, one-way access to user B, administer an Automatic Intercom
button on A’s phone only. You don’t have to administer any intercom button on
B’s phone. If B has a Dial Intercom button, he can make an intercom call to A the
same way as he would to any other group member.
When users are in the same call pickup group, or if Directed Call Pickup is
enabled on your switch, one user can answer an intercom call to another user. To
allow users to pick up intercom calls to other users, you must enter y in the Call
Pickup on Intercom Calls field on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Related topics

See ‘‘Abbreviated dialing’’ on page 1449 for information on another way for
users to call each other without dialing complete extension numbers.
See ‘‘Intercom’’ on page 1724 for detailed information on intercom functions.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

485

Managing group communication

Setting up automatic answer
intercom calls
Automatic Answer Intercom Calls (Auto Answer ICOM) allows a user to answer
an intercom call within the intercom group without pressing the intercom button.
Auto Answer ICOM works with digital, BRI, and hybrid phones with built-in
speaker, headphones, or adjunct speakerphone.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Press the Do Not Disturb button or the Send All Calls button on your phone
when you don’t want someone in your intercom group to listen in on a call.
Auto Answer ICOM does not work when the Do Not Disturb button or the
Send All Calls button is pressed on the phone.
Administration

This section contains an example, with step-by-step instructions, on how to set up
Auto Answer ICOM.
In this example, you set up Auto Answer ICOM on station 12345. To do so,
complete the following steps:
1. Type change station 12345.
The Station screen for extension 12345 appears.

change station 12345

Page 2 of X
STATION

FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception? msa-spe
LWC Activation? y
LWC Log External Calls? n
CDR Privacy? n
Redirect Notification? y
Per Button Ring Control? n
Bridged Call Alerting? n
Active Station Ringing: single
H.320 Conversion?
Service Link Mode:
Multimedia Mode:
MWI Served User Type:
AUDIX Name:
Messaging Server Name:
Recall Rotary Digit?

n
as-needed
basic
______

Auto Select Any Idle Appearance? n
Coverage Msg Retrieval? y
Auto Answer: icom
Data Restriction? n
Idle Appearance Preference? n
Restrict Last Appearance? y

Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number? _
Special Character for Restricted Number? n

______
n

Display Client Redirection?
Select Last Used Appearance?
Coverage After Forwarding?
Multimedia Early Answer?
Direct IP-IP Audio Connections?
IP Audio Hairpinning?

n
n
_
n
n
n

2. Move to the Auto Answer field and enter icom.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.

486

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Observing calls

Observing calls
Use this procedure to allow designated users, normally supervisors, to listen to
other users’ calls. This capability is often used to monitor service quality in call
centers and other environments where employees serve customers over the phone.
On Avaya MultiVantage, this is called “service observing” and the user observing
calls is the “observer.”
This section describes service observing in environments without Automatic Call
Distribution (‘‘ACD’’) or call vectoring. To use service observing in those
environments, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD
Call Centers.
Before you start

On the System Parameter Customer-Options screen, verify the:
■

Service Observing (Basic) field is y.

If you want to enable remote service observing by allowing remote users to dial a
feature access code, verify the:
■

Service Observing (Remote/By FAC) field is y

If the appropriate field is not enabled, contact your Avaya representative.
Instructions

! SECURITY ALERT:
Listening to someone else’s calls may be subject to federal, state, or local
laws, rules, or regulations. It may require the consent of one or both of the
parties on the call. Familiarize yourself with all applicable laws, rules, and
regulations and comply with them when you use this feature.
In this example, we’ll set up service observing for a manager. The manager’s class
of restriction is 5. We’ll assign a feature button to the manager’s phone and allow
her to monitor calls on local extensions that have a class of restriction of 10.
Everyone on an observed call will hear a repetitive warning tone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

487

Managing group communication

To set up service observing:
1. Set the observer’s class of restriction to permit service observing:
a. In the Class of Restriction screen for COR 5, type y in the Can Be A
Service Observer? field.
b. Move to the page of the Class of Restriction screen that shows
service observing permissions.
c. Type y in the field for class of restriction 10.
2. In the Class of Restriction screen for COR 10, type y in the Can Be Service
Observed? field.
Anyone with class of restriction 5 now has permission to observe
extensions with class of restriction 10. To further restrict who can observe
calls or be observed, you may want to create special classes of restriction
for both groups and use these classes only for the appropriate extensions.
3. In the Station screen, assign a Service Observing button to the observer’s
phone.
A service observing button permits users to switch between listen-only and
listen-and-talk modes simply by pressing the button.
4. To activate the warning tone, type y in the Service Observing — Warning
Tone field on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
A unique 2-second, 440-Hz warning tone plays before an observer
connects to the call. While the call is observed, a shorter version of this
tone repeats every 12 seconds.
In order for users to activate service observing by feature access codes, use the
Feature Access Code screen to administer codes in one or both of the following
fields:
■

Service Observing Listen Only Access Code

■

Service Observing Listen/Talk Access Code

When using feature access codes, observers must choose a mode at the start of the
session. They cannot switch to the other mode without ending the session and
beginning another.
NOTE:

Feature access codes are required for remote observing.
Related topics

See ‘‘Service observing’’ on page 1817 for detailed information on service
observing.

488

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Managing data calls

Types of data connections
You can use MultiVantage to allow the following types of data elements/devices
to communicate to the world:
■

Data Terminals

■

Personal computers

■

Host Computers (for example, CentreVu CMS or Intuity AUDIX)

■

Digital Phones (Digital Communications Protocol (‘‘DCP’’) and Integrated
Services Digital Network-Basic Rate Interface (‘‘ISDN-BRI’’))

■

Audio/Video Equipment

■

Printers

■

Local area networks (‘‘LAN’’)

You enable these connections using a large variety of data communications
equipment, such as:

555-233-506

■

Modems

■

Data Modules

■

Asynchronous Data Units (‘‘ADU’’)

■

Modem Pools

■

Data/modem pooling circuit packs

Issue 5 October 2002 489

Managing data calls

Once you have connected these data devices to the switch, you can use
networking and routing capabilities to allow them to communicate with other
devices over your private network or the public network.
This section describes the system features available to enable data
communications.

Data Call Setup
Data Call Setup provides multiple methods to set up a data call:
■

Data-terminal (keyboard) dialing

■

Telephone dialing

■

Hayes AT command dialing

■

Administered connections

■

Hotline dialing

Administering Data Call Setup

For data-terminal dialing:
1. Choose one of the following data modules and administer all fields:
■

Processor/Trunk Data Module

■

Data Line Data Module

■

7500 Data Module

2. On the Modem Pool Group screen, administer the Circuit Pack
Assignments field.
See ‘‘Modem Pool Group’’ on page 1038 for more information.
For telephone dialing:
1. Choose one of the following:
■

On the Feature Access Code screen, administer the Data Origination
Access Code field. See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for
more information.

■

On the Station screen, assign one button as data-ext (Ext:). See
‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for more information.

2. Choose one of the following data modules and administer all fields:

490

■

Processor/Trunk Data Module

■

Data Line Data Module

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data Call Setup

3. On the Modem Pool Group screen, administer the Circuit Pack
Assignments field. See ‘‘Modem Pool Group’’ on page 1038 for more
information.
Depending on the hardware used, assign ports to the following:
■

Data modules

■

7400D-series or CALLMASTER digital telephones

■

7500D-series telephones with asynchronous data module (ADM)

■

Analog modems (port is assigned using 2500 telephone screen)

Characters used in Data Call Setup

Basic-digit dialing is provided through an ADM or 7500B data module. The user
can enter digits from 0 to 9, *, and # from a 7500 or 8500 series telephone keypad
or an EIA-terminal interface. In addition, the user can dial the following special
characters.
Table 6. Special characters
Character

Use

SPACE,

improves legibility. The switch ignores these
characters during dialing.

-, (, and)

+ character (wait)

interrupts or suspends dialing until the user
receives dial tone

, (pause)

inserts a 1.5-second pause

% (mark)

indicates digits for end-to-end signaling
(touch-tone). This is required when the trunk is
rotary. It is not required when the trunk is
touch-tone.

UNDERLINE

@

or BACKSPACE

corrects previously typed characters on the same
line
deletes the entire line and starts over with a new
DIAL: prompt

Each line of dialing information can contain up to 42 characters (the + and %
characters count as two each).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

491

Managing data calls

Examples of dialing are:
■

DIAL: 3478

■

DIAL: 9+(201) 555-1212

■

DIAL: 8, 555-2368

■

DIAL: 9+555-2368+%9999+123 (remote access)

The following call-progress messages and their meanings are provided for DCP
and ISDN-BRI modules.
Table 7. Call-progress messages
Message

Application

Meaning

DIAL:

DCP

Equivalent to dial tone. Enter the desired
number or FAC followed by Enter.

CMD

BRI

Equivalent to dial tone. Enter the desired
number or FAC followed by Enter.

RINGING

DCP, BRI

Equivalent to ringing tone. Called
terminal is ringing.

BUSY

DCP, BRI

Equivalent to busy tone. Called number
is busy or out of service.

ANSWERED

DCP, BRI

Call is answered.

ANSWERED NOT DATA

DCP

Call is answered and a modem answer
tone is not detected.

TRY AGAIN

DCP, BRI

Equivalent to reorder tone. System
facilities are currently not available.

DENIED

DCP, BRI

Equivalent to intercept tone. Call cannot
be placed as dialed.

ABANDONED

DCP, BRI

Calling user has abandoned the call.

NO TONE

DCP, BRI

Tone is not detected.

CHECK
OPTIONS

DCP, BRI

Data-module options are incompatible.

XX IN QUEUE

DCP, BRI

Current position in queue.

PROCESSING

DCP, BRI

Out of queue. Facility is available.

TIMEOUT

DCP, BRI

Time is exceeded. Call terminates.
Continued on next page

492

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data Call Setup

Table 7. Call-progress messages (Continued)
Message

Application

Meaning

FORWARDED

DCP, BRI

Equivalent to redirection-notification
signal. Called terminal activates Call
Forwarding and receives a call, and call
is forwarded.

INCOMING
CALL

DCP, BRI

Equivalent to ringing.

INVALID
ADDRESS

DCP

Entered name is not in
alphanumeric-dialing table.

WRONG
ADDRESS

BRI

Entered name is not in
alphanumeric-dialing table.

PLEASE ANS-

DCP, BRI

Originating telephone user transferred
call to data module using One-Button
Transfer to Data.

TRANSFER

DCP

Data Call Return-to-Voice is occurring.

CONFIRMED

DCP, BRI

Equivalent to confirmation tone. Feature
request is accepted, or call has gone to a
local coverage point.

OTHER END

DCP, BRI

Endpoint has terminated call.

DISCONNECTED

DCP, BRI

Call is disconnected.

WAIT

DCP, BRI

Normal processing continues.

WAIT, XX IN
QUEUE

DCP

Call is in a local hunt-group queue.

Continued on next page

DCP data modules
Data-terminal dialing

DCP data-terminal dialing allows a user to set up and disconnect data calls
directly from a data terminal as follows.
1. At the DIAL: prompt, the user types the data number. The message
RINGING displays.
2. If the call is queued, the message WAIT, XX IN QUEUE displays. The
queue position XX updates as the call moves up in queue.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

493

Managing data calls

3. To originate and disconnect a call, the user presses BREAK. If the terminal
does not generate a 2-second continuous break signal, the user can press
originate/disconnect on the data module.
4. The user can enter digits at the DIAL: prompt.
Telephone dialing

DCP telephone dialing allows telephone users to originate and control data calls
from a telephone.
Users can set up a call using any unrestricted telephone and then transfer the call
to a data endpoint.
The primary way to make data calls is with multiappearance telephone
data-extension buttons. Assign any administrable feature button as a
data-extension button. The data-extension button provides one-touch access to a
data module. The number of assigned data-extension buttons per telephone is not
limited.
The following options, either alone or combined, permit flexibility in making data
calls from a telephone.
■

One-Button Transfer to Data
A user can transfer a call to the associated data module by pressing the
data-extension button after the endpoint answers.

■

Return-to-Voice
A user can change the connection from data to voice. The user presses the
data-extension button associated with the busy data module. If the user
hangs up, the call disconnects. Return of a data call to the telephone implies
that the same data call is continued in the voice mode, or transferred to
point.
The Return-to-Voice feature is denied for analog adjuncts.

■

Data Call Preindication
A user, before dialing a data endpoint, can reserve the associated data
module by pressing the data-extension button. This ensures that a
conversion resource, if needed, and the data module are reserved for the
call. Avaya recommends the use of Data Call Preindication before 1-button
transfer to data for data calls that use toll-network facilities. Data Call
Preindication is in effect until the associated data-extension button is
pressed again for a 1-button transfer; there is no time-out.

494

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data Call Setup

ISDN-BRI data modules
Data-terminal dialing

A user can set up and disconnect data calls directly from a data terminal without
using a telephone as follows:
1. The user presses ENTER a few times. If the CMD: prompt does not appear,
the user presses BREAK A + T at the same time, and then presses ENTER.
2. At the CMD: prompt, the user types and presses ENTER.
3. To disconnect, the user enters +++. At the CMD: prompt, the user types
end and presses ENTER.
Telephone dialing

To make a data call, an ISDN-BRI phone user presses the data button on the
terminal, enters the number on the dial pad, and then presses the data button again.
The following data functions are not available on ISDN-BRI phones:
■

One-Button Transfer to Data

■

Return-to-Voice

■

Data Call Preindication

■

Voice-Call Transfer to Data and Data-Call Transfer to Voice

The system handles all presently defined BRI bearer data-call requests. Some
capabilities that are not supported by Avaya terminals are provided by non-Avaya
terminals. If the switch does not support a capability, a proper cause value returns
to the terminal.
BRI terminals receive a cause or reason code that identifies why a call is being
cleared. The BRI data module converts certain cause values to text messages for
display.
In a passive-bus multipoint configuration, the system supports two BRI endpoints
per port, thus doubling the capacity of the BRI circuit pack. When you change the
configuration of a BRI from point-to-point to multipoint, the original endpoint
does not need to reinitialize. Only endpoints that support service profile identifier
(‘‘SPID’’) initialization can be administered in a multipoint configuration.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

495

Managing data calls

Analog modems

When a telephone user places a data call with a modem, the user dials the
data-origination access code assigned in the system before dialing the endpoint.
Considerations
■

A BRI phone cannot call a data terminal, and a data terminal cannot call a
BRI phone.

■

Abbreviated Dialing

Interactions

Only 22 of the 24 (maximum) digits in an abbreviated-dialing number are
available for keyboard dialing. The remaining two digits must contain the
wait indicator for tone detection.
■

Call Coverage
A hunt group made up of data endpoints cannot be assigned a coverage
path.

■

Call Detail Recording
CDR records the use of modem pools on trunk calls.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
Calls received by a data module can be forwarded. Activate Call
Forwarding All Calls with data-terminal (keyboard) dialing. If the
forwarded-to endpoint is an analog endpoint and the caller is a digital
endpoint, modem pooling is activated automatically.

■

Pooled Modems with Hunt Groups
UCD can provide a group of data modules or analog modems for
answering calls to connected facilities (for example, computer ports).

■

World-Class Tone Detection
Multiple-line data-terminal dialing is supported if the administered level of
tone detection is precise. You can administer tone-detection options. The
message that Data Call Setup sends to users varies according to the option.
If the option is not set to precise, and a data call is set up over an analog
trunk, messages describing the status of the called endpoint (for example,
RINGING, BUSY, TRY AGAIN) change according to which
tone-detection option is selected.

496

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Default Dialing

Default Dialing
Default Dialing provides data-terminal users who dial a specific number the
majority of the time a very simple method of dialing that number. Normal data
terminal dialing and alphanumeric dialing are unaffected.
Default Dialing enhances data terminal (keyboard) dialing by allowing a
data-terminal user to place a data call to a preadministered destination by either
pressing a Return at the DIAL: prompt (for data terminals using DCP data modules)
or typing d and pressing RETURN at the CMD: prompt (for data terminals using
ISDN-BRI data modules). The data-terminal user with a DCP data module can
place calls to other destinations by entering the complete address after the DIAL:
prompt (normal data terminal dialing or alphanumeric dialing). The data-terminal
user with an ISDN-BRI data module can place calls to other destinations by
typing d, a space, the complete address, and press RETURN after the CMD: prompt.
NOTE:

DU-type hunt groups connecting the system to a terminal server on a host
computer have hunt-group extensions set to no keyboard dialing.
For the AT command interface supported by the 7400A/7400B/8400B data
module, to dial the default destination, enter the ATD command (rather than press
return).
Administering Default Dialing

1. You can use an abbreviated dialing list for your default ID. See
‘‘Abbreviated dialing’’ on page 1449 for more information.
2. On the Data Module screen, administer the following fields:

555-233-506

■

Special Dialing Option as default.

■

Abbreviated Dialing List, enter the list to use.

■

AD Dial Code.

Issue 5 October 2002

497

Managing data calls

Alphanumeric Dialing
Alphanumeric Dialing enhances data-terminal dialing by allowing users to place
data calls by entering an alphanumeric name rather than a long string of numbers.
For example, a user could type 9+1-800-telefon instead of 9+1-800-835-3366 to
make a call. Users need to remember only the alpha-name of the far-end
terminating point.
Alphanumeric Dialing allows you to change a mapped string (digit-dialing
address) without having to inform all users of a changed dial address. Users dial
the alpha name.
When a user enters an alphanumeric name, the system converts the name to a
sequence of digits according to an alphanumeric-dialing table. If the entered name
is not found in the table, the system denies the call attempt and the user receives
either an Invalid Address message (DCP) or a Wrong Address message
(ISDN-BRI).
Because data terminals access the switch via DCP or ISDN-BRI data modules,
dialing procedures vary:
■

For DCP, at the DIAL: prompt users type the alphanumeric name and press
RETURN.

■

For ISDN-BRI, at the CMD: prompt users type d, a space, and the
alphanumeric name, and press RETURN.

More than one alphanumeric name can see the same digit string.
Administering Alphanumeric Dialing

1. On the Alphanumeric Dialing Table screen, administer the Alpha-name and
Mapped String fields. See ‘‘Alphanumeric Dialing Table’’ on page 604 for
more information.
Considerations
NOTE:

Alphanumeric dialing does not apply to endpoints with Hayes modems.

498

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data Hotline

Data Hotline
Data Hotline provides for automatic-nondial placement of a data call preassigned
to an endpoint when the originating switch goes off-hook. Use for security
purposes.
Administering Data Hotline

1. You can use an abbreviated dialing list for your default ID. See
‘‘Abbreviated dialing’’ on page 1449 for more information.
2. On the Station screen, administer the following fields. See ‘‘Station’’ on
page 1127 for more information.
■

Abbreviated Dialing List

■

Special Dialing Option

■

Hot Line Destination

3. On the Data Module screen, administer the Abbreviated Dialing List1 field.
The system automatically places Data Hotline calls to preassigned extensions or
off-premises numbers. Calling terminals are connected to the system by a data
module. Users should store the destination number in the abbreviated dialing list
for future reference.
Interactions
■

Call Forwarding — All Calls
A Data Hotline caller cannot activate both Call Forwarding and Data
Hotline. Dialing the Call Forwarding feature access code (FAC) causes
activation of the Data Hotline instead.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

499

Managing data calls

Data Privacy
Data Privacy protects analog data calls from being disturbed by any of the
system’s overriding or ringing features.
Administering Data Privacy

1. Choose either of the following:
■

On the Feature Access Code screen, administer the Data Privacy
Access Code field. See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for
more information.

■

On the Class of Service screen, administer the Data Privacy field.
See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for more information.

2. On the Station screen, administer the Class of Service field. See ‘‘Station’’
on page 1127 for more information.
To activate this feature, the user dials the activation code at the beginning of the
call.
Considerations
■

Data Privacy applies to both voice and data calls. You can activate Data
Privacy on Remote Access calls, but not on other incoming trunk calls.
Data Privacy is canceled if a user transfers a call, is added to a conference
call, is bridged onto a call, or disconnects from a call. You can activate
Data Privacy on calls originated from attendant consoles.

■

For virtual extensions, assign the Data Privacy Class of Service to the
mapped-to physical extension.

■

Attendant Call Waiting and Call Waiting Termination

Interactions

If Data Privacy is active, Call Waiting is denied.
■

Bridged Call Appearance — Single-Line Telephone
If you activate Data Privacy or assign Data Restriction to a station involved
in a bridged call and the primary terminal or bridging user attempts to
bridge onto the call, this action overrides Data Privacy and Data
Restriction.

■

Busy Verification
Busy Verification cannot be active when Data Privacy is active.

500

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data Restriction

■

Intercom — Automatic and Dial
An extension with Data Privacy or Data Restriction active cannot originate
an intercom call. The user receives an intercept tone.

■

Music-on-Hold Access
If a user places a call with Data Privacy on hold, the user must withhold
Music-on-Hold to prevent the transmission of tones that a connected data
service might falsely interpret as a data transmission.

■

Priority Calls
If a user activates Data Privacy, Priority Calls are denied on analog
telephones. However, Priority Calls appear on the next available line
appearance on multiappearance telephones.

Data Restriction
Data Restriction protects analog-data calls from being disturbed by any of the
system’s overriding or ringing features or system-generated tones.
Data Restriction applies to both voice and data calls.
Once you administer Data Restriction for an analog or multiappearance telephone
or trunk group, the feature is active on all calls to or from the terminal or trunk
group.
NOTE:

Do not assign Data Restriction to attendant consoles.
Administering Data Restriction

1. On the Station screen, set the Data Restriction field to y. See ‘‘Station’’ on
page 1127 for more information.
2. Choose one of the following trunk groups and set the Data Restriction field
to y. See ‘‘ISDN trunk group’’ on page 936 and ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page
1233 for more information.

555-233-506

■

Access

■

Advanced Private-Line Termination (‘‘APLT’’)

■

Circuit Pack (‘‘CP’’)

■

Customer-Premises Equipment (‘‘CPE’’)

■

Direct Inward Dialing (‘‘DID’’)

■

Foreign Exchange (‘‘FX’’)

Issue 5 October 2002

501

Managing data calls

■

Integrated Services Digital Network-Primary Rate Interface
(‘‘ISDN-PRI’’)

■

Release-Link Trunk (‘‘RLT’’)

■

Tandem

■

Tie

■

Wide Area Telecommunications Service (‘‘WATS’’)

Interactions - Data Restriction
■

Attendant Call Waiting and Call Waiting Termination
If Data Restriction is active, Call Waiting is denied.

■

Busy Verification
Busy Verification cannot be active when Data Restriction is active.

■

Intercom — Automatic and Dial
An extension with Data Privacy or Data Restriction activated cannot
originate an intercom call. The user receives an Intercept tone.

■

Music-on-Hold Access
If a user places a call with Data Restriction on hold, The user must
withhold Music-on-Hold to prevent the transmission of tones that a
connected data service might falsely interpret as a data transmission.

■

Priority Calls
Priority Calls are allowed if the analog station is idle. Call Waiting
(including Priority Call Waiting) is denied if the station is busy. However,
Priority Calls appear on the next available line appearance on
multiappearance telephones.

■

Service Observing
A data-restricted call cannot be service observed.

Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions
Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions allows users to make data calls involving
data communications equipment (‘‘DCE’’) or digital terminal equipment
(‘‘DTE’’) located remotely from the system site.
A Data-Only Off-Premises Extension uses an on-premises modular trunk data
module (‘‘MTDM’’). The system communicates with remote data equipment
through the private-line facility linking the on-premises MTDM and the remote
data equipment.

502

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions

Users can place data calls to this type of data endpoint using Telephone Dialing or
Data Terminal (Keyboard) Dialing. Since there is no telephone at the remote site,
originate data calls from the remote data terminal using Keyboard Dialing only.
Administering Data-Only Off-Premises
Extensions

1. On the Processor/Trunk Data Module screen, administer all fields.
See ‘‘Data modules’’ on page 707 for more information.
Considerations
■

The system does not support communications between two TDMs. Modem
Pooling is similar to a ‘‘TDM’’, it cannot be used on calls to or from a
Data-Only Off-Premises Extension.

■

Telephone Dialing

Interactions

An on-premises multiappearance telephone may have a Data Extension
button associated with the TDM used for a Data-Only Off-Premises
Extension. The telephone user and the remote user share control of the data
module. Actions of the user at the telephone may affect the remote user.
— 1-Button Transfer to Data
The telephone user can transfer a call to the Data-Only Off-Premises
Extension. The Data Extension button lamp on the telephone lights
and the Call in Progress lamp on the data module lights during a
data call.
— Data Call Preindication
The multiappearance telephone user presses the idle associated Data
Extension button to reserve a data module. The data module is busy
to all other users. When the user reserves a data module, the lamp
associated with the Data Extension button winks and lights at any
other associated telephones. A remote user receives the BUSY
message when attempting to originate a call.
— Return-to-Voice
To establish a data call, the telephone user presses the associated
busy Data Extension button to transfer the call to the telephone. The
data module associated with the Data Extension button is
disconnected from the call. The Call in Progress lamp on the data
module goes dark.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

503

Managing data calls

Data Modules — general
A Data Module is a connection device between a basic-rate interface (BRI) or
‘‘DCP’’ interface of the switch and DTE or DCE.
The following types of data modules can be used with the system:
■

Announcement data module

■

Data line data module

■

Processor/trunk data module (P/TDM)

■

Netcon data module (DEFINITY SI configurations only) See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™
Software for more information.

■

Processor interface data module (DEFINITY SI configurations only). See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™
Software for more information.

■

System port data module (DEFINITY R configurations only)

■

X.25 data module (DEFINITY R configurations only). See Administration
for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more
information.

■

7500 data module

■

World Class BRI data module

■

Ethernet data module. See Administration for Network Connectivity for
Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.

■

Point-to-Point Protocol (‘‘PPP’’) data module. See Administration for
Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more
information.
NOTE:

The 51X series Business Communications Terminals (‘‘BCT’’) are not
administered on the Data Module screen. The 510 BCT (equivalent to a
7405D with a display and built-in DTDM), 515 BCT (equivalent to a 7403D
integrated with 7405D display module function, data terminal and built-in
DTDM), and the 7505D, 7506D, and 7507D have a DCP interface but have
built-in data module functionality. Both are administered through the Station
screen.

504

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data Modules — general

Detailed description of data modules

TTI allows data modules without hardware translation to merge with an
appropriate data module connected to an unadministered port. The
unadministered port is given TTI default translation sufficient to allow a terminal
connected to the data module (connected to the port) to request a TTI merge with
the extension of a data module administered without hardware translation.
NOTE:

TTI is not useful for Announcement and X.25 hardware.
Administration Without Hardware supports PDM, TDM, Data-Line,
Announcement, and X.25 data modules.
NOTE:

The 513 BCT has an EIA interface rather than a DCP interface (no built in
data module, attachable telephone, or telephone features). The 513 BCT is
not administered; only the data module to which the 513 BCT is connected
is administered.
7400A/7400B+/8400B+ Data Module

Use the 7400A data module instead of an MTDM when you support combined
Modem Pooling. The 7400A data module supports asynchronous operation at
speeds up to 19200-bps, and provides a DCP interface to the switch and an EIA
232C interface to the associated modem. The 7400A operates in stand-alone mode
as a data module.
7400B+ and 8400B+ data modules support asynchronous-data communications
and operate in stand-alone mode for data-only service or in linked mode, which
provides simultaneous voice and data service. The 7400B+ and 8400B+ provide
voice and data communications to 7400D series phones and 602A1
CALLMASTER phones that have a connection to a data terminal or personal
computer. The data modules integrate data and voice into the DCP protocol
required to interface with the switch via a port on a digital-line circuit pack. Use
the 7400B+ or 8400B+ instead of an MPDM when you need asynchronous
operation at speeds up to 19.2-kbps to provide a DCP interface to the switch for
data terminals and printers. The 7400B+ and 8400B+ do not support synchronous
operation and keyboard dialing. Dialing is provided using the standard Hayes
command set.
7400D

This data module supports synchronous operation with AUDIX, CMS, and DCS.
It provides synchronous data transmissions at speeds of 19.2-Kbps full duplex.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

505

Managing data calls

7400C High Speed Link

The 7400C high-speed link (HSL) is a data-service unit that allows access to DCP
data services. It provides synchronous data transmission at speeds of 56- and
64-Kbps and provides a link to high-speed data networks. Used for Group 4 fax
applications that include electronic mail and messaging, and electronic storage of
printed documents and graphics. Use the 7400C for video teleconferencing and
LAN interconnect applications.
7500 Data Modules

The 7500 Data Module connects DTE or DCE to the ISDN network. The 7500
Data Module supports EIA 232C and V.35 interfaces and RS-366
automatic-calling unit interface (for the EIA 232C interface only).
The 7500 has no voice functions. Configure in the following ways:
Asynchronous DCE

■

300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200-bps
Synchronous DCE

■

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 56000, 64000-bps
Asynchronous DTE (used for modem pooling)

■

up to 19200-bps
The 7500 Data Module is stand-alone or in a multiple-mount housing.
Asynchronous Data Module
NOTE:

The alias station command cannot be used to alias data modules.
Use the Asynchronous Data Module (ADM) with asynchronous DTEs as a data
stand for the 7500 and 8500 Series of ISDN-BRI phones, thus providing
connection to the ISDN network. The ADM provides integrated voice and data on
the same phone and supports data rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and
19200-bps. This module also supports the Hayes command set, providing
compatibility with PC communications packages.
Related topics

See ‘‘Data modules’’ on page 707 for more information.

506

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administered Connection

Administered Connection
An Administered Connection (‘‘AC’’) is a connection between two access or data
endpoints. Avaya MultiVantage automatically establishes and maintains the
connection based on the attributes you administer. ACs provides the following
capabilities.
■

Support of both permanent and scheduled connections

■

Auto Restoration (preserving the active session) for connections routed
over Software Defined Data Network (‘‘SDDN’’) trunks

■

Administrable retry interval (from 1 to 60 minutes) per AC

■

Administrable alarm strategy per AC

■

Establishment/retry/auto restoration order based on administered priority

Detailed description

Establish an AC between the following:
■

Two endpoints on the same switch

■

Two endpoints in the same private network, but on different switches

■

One endpoint on the controlling switch and another endpoint off the private
network

In all configurations, administer the AC on the switch having the originating
endpoint. For an AC in a private network, if the two endpoints are on two different
switches, normally the connection routes via Automatic Alternate Routing
(‘‘AAR’’) through tie trunks (ISDN, DS1, or analog tie trunks) and intermediate
switches. If required, route the connection via Automatic Route Selection
(‘‘ARS’’) and Generalized Route Selection (‘‘GRS’’) through the public network.
The call routes over associated ISDN trunks. When the far-end answers, a
connection occurs between the far-end and the near-end extension in the
Originator field on the AC screen.
Because the system makes an administered connection automatically, you do not
use the following:
■

Data Call Setup
Do not assign a default dialing destination to a data module when it is used
in an AC.

■

Data Hotline
Do not assign a hotline destination to a data module that is used in an AC.

■

Terminal Dialing
Turn off terminal dialing for data modules involved in an AC. This
prevents display of call-processing messages (INCOMING CALL,...) on
the terminal.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

507

Managing data calls

Access endpoints

Access endpoints are non-signaling trunk ports. They neither generate signaling to
the far-end of the trunk nor respond to signaling from the far-end. Designate an
access endpoint as the originating endpoint or destination endpoint in an AC.
Typical AC applications

The following are typical AC applications:
■

A local data endpoint connection to a local or remote-access endpoint.
Examples: an MPDM ACCUNET digital service connecting to SDDN via
an ISDN trunk-group DS1 port; an MPDM ACCUNET digital service
connecting to an ACCUNET Switched 56 Service via a DS1 port.

■

A local-access endpoint connecting to a local or remote-access endpoint.
Examples: a DSO cross-connect and a 4-wire leased-line modem to a
4-wire modem connection via an analog tie trunk.

■

A local data endpoint connecting to a local or remote data endpoint such as
a connection between two 3270 data modules.
NOTE:

The following guidelines do not include AAR and ARS, or GRS
administration information for routing AC calls over trunk groups.
See the respective feature elsewhere in this book for that information.
Establishing Administered Connections

The originating switch attempts to establish an AC only if one of the following
conditions exist:
■

AC is active.

■

AC is due to be active (either a permanent AC or time-of-day requirements
are satisfied if it is a scheduled AC).

■

Originating endpoint is in in-service or idle state.

If the originating endpoint is not in service or is idle, no activity takes place for the
AC until the endpoint transitions to the desired state. The originating switch uses
the destination address to route the call to the desired endpoint. When the switch
establishes two or more ACs at the same time, the switch arranges the connections
in order of priority.

508

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administered Connection

AC attempts can fail for the following reasons:
■

Resources are unavailable to route to the destination.

■

A required conversion resource is not available.

■

Access is denied by class of restriction (‘‘COR’’), facilities restriction level
(‘‘FRL’’), or bearer capability class (‘‘BCC’’). Or, an attempt is made to
route voice-band-data over SDDN trunks in the public switch network.

■

Destination address is incorrect.

■

Destination endpoint is busy.

■

Other network or signaling failures occur.

In the event of a failure, an error is entered into the error log, which generates an
alarm, if it is warranted by your alarming strategy. You can display AC failures via
the status-administered connection command.
As long as an AC is due to be active, the originating switch continues to establish
an AC unless the attempt fails because of an administrative error (for example, a
wrong number) or service-blocking condition (for example, outgoing calls
barred).
■

The frequency with which failed attempts are retried is determined by the
administered retry interval (1 to 60 minutes) for each AC.

■

Retries are made after the retry interval has elapsed regardless of the
restorable attribute of the AC.

■

ACs are retried in priority order.

■

When you change the time of day on the switch, an attempt is made to
establish all ACs in the waiting-for-retry state.

Dropping Administered Connections

An AC remains active until one of the following occurs:
■

The AC is changed, disabled, or removed.

■

The time-of-day requirements of a scheduled AC are no longer satisfied.

■

One of the endpoints drops the connection. This could be because of user
action (in the case of a data endpoint), maintenance activity resulting from
an endpoint failure, busying out of the endpoint, or handshake failure. If
the endpoints are incompatible, the connection is successful until
handshake failure occurs.
NOTE:

An AC between access endpoints remains connected even if the
attached access equipment fails to handshake.
■

555-233-506

An interruption (for example, facility failure) occurs between the
endpoints.

Issue 5 October 2002

509

Managing data calls

If an AC drops because it was disabled/removed or is no longer due to be active,
no action is taken. If an AC drops because of changed AC attributes, an immediate
attempt is made to establish the connection with the changed attributes if it is still
due to be active. Existing entries in the error/alarm log are resolved if they no
longer apply. If handshake failure resulted in the dropping of the connection, in
the case of an AC involving at least one data endpoint, no action is taken for that
AC until the change administered-connection command is executed.
Administered Connections failure: Auto
Restoration and Fast Retry

When an active AC drops prematurely, you must invoke either auto restoration or
fast retry to determine whether auto restoration is attempted for an active AC.
If you option AC for auto restoration and the connection was routed over SDDN
trunks, auto restoration is attempted. During restoration, connections are
maintained between the switch and both endpoints. In addition to allowing the
active session to be maintained, AC also provides a high level of security by
prohibiting other connections from intervening in active sessions. Auto
restoration generally completes before the 60-second endpoint holdover interval.
If auto restoration is successful, the call might be maintained (no guarantee). The
restoration is transparent to the user with the exception of a temporary disruption
of service while restoration is in progress. A successful restoration is reflected by
the restored state on the status AC screen. Although the restoration was
successful, the data session may not have been preserved.
If auto restoration is not active or if the AC is not routed over SDDN trunks, the
switch immediately attempts to reestablish the connection (fast retry). The switch
also attempts a retry if the originating endpoint initiated the drop. With fast retry,
connections are not maintained on both ends. Fast Retry is not attempted for an
AC that was last established via fast retry, unless the AC is active for at least two
minutes.
If auto restoration or fast retry fails to restore or reestablish the connection, the
call drops and the AC goes into retry mode. Retry attempts continue, at the
administered retry interval, as long as the AC is due to be active.

510

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administered Connection

Administering Administered Connections

1. Choose one of the following data modules and administer all fields:
■

Data Line Data Module (use with Data Line circuit pack)

■

Processor/Trunk Data Module (use with one of the following:)
— MPDMs, 700D, 7400B, 7400D, or 8400B
MTDMs, 700B, 700C, 700E, or 7400A

■

Processor Interface Data Module (see Administration for Network
Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more
information)

■

X.25 Data Module (see Administration for Network Connectivity for
Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information)

■

7500 Data Module (use with ISDN Line 12-BRI-S-NT or ISDN
Line 12-BRI-U-NT circuit pack)

■

World Class Core BRI Data Module (use with wcbri)

2. On the DS1 Circuit Pack screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘DS1 Circuit
Pack’’ on page 757 for more information. (Use with switch node carriers.)
3. On the Access Endpoint screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Access
Endpoint’’ on page 593 for more information.
4. Choose one of the following trunk groups and administer all fields. See
‘‘ISDN trunk group’’ on page 936 and ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for
more information.
■
■
■

ISDN-BRI
ISDN-PRI
Tie

5. On the Class of Restriction screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Class of
Restriction’’ on page 658 for more information.
6. On the Class of Service screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Class of
Service’’ on page 672 for more information.
7. On the Dial Plan Record screen, administer the Local Node Number field
with a number from 1-63 that matches the DCS switch node number and
the CDR node number. See ‘‘DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen’’ on page
747 for more information.
8. On the Administered Connection screen, administer all fields. See
‘‘Administered Connection’’ on page 598 for more information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

511

Managing data calls

9. On the Station screen, assign one button as ac-alarm. See ‘‘Station’’ on
page 1127 for more information.
10. On the Attendant Console screen, assign one button as ac-alarm. See
‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for more information.
Interactions
■

Abbreviated Dialing
Use Abbreviated Dialing entries in the Destination field. Entries must
comply with restrictions.

■

Busy Verification of Stations and Trunks
This feature does not apply to access endpoints because they are used only
for data.

■

Call Detail Recording
For an AC that uses a trunk when CDR is active, the origination extension
is the originator of the call.

■

Class of Restriction
Reserve a COR for AC endpoints and SDDN trunks. This restricts
endpoints that are not involved in AC from connecting to SDDN trunks or
endpoints involved in AC.

■

Class of Service/Call Forwarding
Assign to an AC endpoint a COS that blocks Call Forwarding activation at
the endpoint.

■

Digital Multiplexed Interface (‘‘DMI’’)
Use DMI endpoints as the destination in an AC. DMI endpoints do not
have associated extensions, so do not use them as the originator in an AC.

■

Facility Test Calls
The feature does not apply to access endpoints because an access endpoint
acts as an endpoint rather than as a trunk.

■

Modem Pooling
If you require a modem in an AC, one is inserted automatically. If no
modem is available, the connection is dropped.

■

Non-Facility Associated Signaling (‘‘NFAS’’) and D-Channel Backup
Auto restoration for an AC that is initially routed over an NFAS facility
may fail if the only backup route is over the facility on which the backup
D-channel is administered. The backup D-channel may not come into
service in time to handle the restoration attempt.

512

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Modem Pooling

■

Set Time Command
When you change the system time via the set time command, all scheduled
ACs are examined. If the time change causes an active AC to be outside its
scheduled period, the AC is dropped. If the time change causes an inactive
AC to be within its scheduled period, the switch attempts to establish the
AC.
If any AC (scheduled or continuous) is in retry mode and the system time
changes, the switch attempts to establish the AC.

■

System Measurements
Access endpoints are not measured. All other trunks in an AC are measured
as usual.

Modem Pooling
Modem Pooling allows switched connections between digital-data endpoints (data
modules) and analog-data endpoints via pods of acoustic-coupled modems. The
analog-data endpoint is either a trunk or a line circuit.
Data transmission between a digital data endpoint and an analog endpoint requires
conversion via a modem, because the DCP format used by the data module is not
compatible with the modulated signals of an analog modem. A modem translates
DCP format into modulated signals and vice versa.
Modem Pooling feature provides pools of integrated-conversion modems and
combined-conversion modems.
Integrated-conversion modem pools have functionality integrated on the Pooled
Modem circuit pack, providing two modems. Each one emulates a TDM cabled to
a 212 modem. Integrated are modem pools not available in countries that use
A-law companding.
Combined-conversion modem pools are TDMs cabled to any TDM-compatible
modem. Combined-conversion modem pools can be used with all systems.
The system can detect the needs for a modem. Data calls from an analog-data
endpoint require that the user indicate the need for a modem, because the system
considers such calls to be voice calls. Users indicate this need by dialing the
data-origination access code field on the Feature Access Code screen before
dialing the digital-data endpoint.
The system provides a Hold Time parameter to specify the maximum time any
modem can be held but not used (while a data call is in queue).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

513

Managing data calls

Administering Modem Pooling

For Integrated modem poolings:
1. On the Modem Pool Group screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Modem Pool
Group’’ on page 1038 for more information.
2. On the Feature Access Code screen, administer the Data Origination
Access Code field. See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for more
information.
3. On the Data Module screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Data modules’’ on
page 707 for more information.
For Combined modem poolings:
1. On the Modem Pool Group screen, administer all fields. See ‘‘Modem Pool
Group’’ on page 1038 for more information.
2. On the Feature Access Code screen, administer the Data Origination
Access Code field. See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for more
information.
Considerations

514

■

On data calls between a data module and an analog-data endpoint,
Return-to-Voice releases the modem and returns it to the pool. The
telephone user connects to the analog-data endpoint.

■

For traffic purposes, the system accumulates data on modem-pooling calls
separate from voice calls. Measurements on the pools also accumulate.

■

Modem Pooling is not restricted. Queuing for modems is not provided,
although calls queued on a hunt group retain reserved modems.

■

Avoid mixing modems from different vendors within a combined pool
because such modems may differ in transmission characteristics.

■

Each data call that uses Modem Pooling uses four time slots (not just two).
As a result, heavy usage of Modem Pooling could affect TDM
bus-blocking characteristics.

■

Tandem switches do not insert a pooled modem. The originating and
terminating switches insert a pooled modem.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

PC Interface

Interactions
■

Call Detail Recording
Data call CDR records the use of modem pools on trunk calls.

■

Data Call Setup
Data calls to or from a TDM cannot use Modem Pooling.

■

Data Privacy and Data Restriction
The insertion of a modem pool does not turn off Data Privacy or Data
Restriction.

■

Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions
Calls to or from a Data-Only Off-Premises Extension cannot use Modem
Pooling, when this type of digital-data endpoint uses a TDM.

■

DMI Trunks
If you place a data call from a local analog-data endpoint to a DMI trunk,
you must dial the data-origination access code to obtain a modem. Data
calls on DMI trunks to local analog-data endpoints automatically obtain
modems.

■

DS1 Tie Trunk Service
Connect modems used for Modem Pooling to AVD DS1 tie trunks via Data
Terminal Dialing or by dialing the feature-access code for data origination.

PC Interface
The personal computer (PC) Interface consists of the PC/PBX platforms and
PC/ISDN Platform product family. These products are used with Avaya
MultiVantage to provide users of IBM-compatible PCs fully-integrated voice and
data workstation capabilities.
Two groups of different configurations are available for PC Interface: group 1
uses DCP and group 2 uses the ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) protocol.
The group 1 configurations consist of DCP configurations that use a DCP
expansion card) in the PC to link to the switch. Group 1 (shown in Figure 12 on
page 516) uses the following connections:

555-233-506

■

The PC Interface card plugs into an expansion slot on the PC. The card has
2 standard 8-pin modular jacks (line and phone).

■

The digital phone plugs into the phone jack on the PC Interface card.

Issue 5 October 2002

515

Managing data calls

■

The line jack on the card provides a digital port connection to Avaya
DEFINITY servers.

■

The distance between the PC Interface card and the PBX should be no
more than 1524m for 24-gauge wire or 1219m for 26-gauge wire.

Figure Notes

1. IBM-compatible PC with DCP
Interface card

Figure 12.

4. DCP telephone

2. IBM-compatible PC with DCP
Interface card

5. Avaya (Digital Line, Digital Line
(16-DCP-2-Wire), or Digital Line
(24-DCP-2-wire) circuit pack)

3. DCP

6. Host

DCP PC interface configuration (Group 1)

The group 2 configurations link to the switch using a PC/ISDN Interface card
installed in the PC. This group can include a stand-alone PC terminal, or up to 4
telephones, handsets, or headsets. Group 2 (shown in Figure 13 on page 517) uses
PC/ISDN Interface cards (up to four cards) which plug into expansion slots on the
PC. These cards each provide 2 standard 8-pin modular-jack connections for both
line connections (to the switch) and phone connections. A standard 4-pin modular
jack is also available for use with a handset or headset.

516

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

PC Interface

Figure Notes

1. ISDN telephone

7. Avaya Media Server

2. PC with application

8. PRI trunks

3. Handset or Headset

9. BRI stations

4. BRI Interface card

10. Interworking

5. 2B + D

11. DMI

6. ISDN Line (12-BRI-S-NT) circuit pack)

12. Switch features

Figure 13.

ISDN—BRI PC interface configuration (Group 2)

PC Interface users have multiple appearances (depending on the software
application used) for their assigned extension. Designate one or more of these
appearances for use with data calls. With the ISDN-BRI version, you can use up
to 4 separate PC/ISDN Interface cards on the same PC. Assign each card a
separate extension, and assign each extension one or more appearances. The
availability of specific features depends on the COS of the extension and the COS
for the switch. Modem Pooling is provided to ensure general availability of off-net
data-calling services.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

517

Managing data calls

Security

There are two areas where unauthorized use may occur with this feature:
unauthorized local use and remote access.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Unauthorized local use involves unauthorized users who attempt to make
calls from a PC. The PC software has a security setting so users can place
the PC in Security Mode when it is unattended. You also can assign
Automatic Security so that the administration program on the PC is always
active and runs in Security Mode. This mode is password-protected.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Remote access involves remote access to the PC over a data extension.
Remote users can delete or copy PC files with this feature. You can
password-protect this feature. See the BCS Products Security Handbook for
additional steps to secure your system and to find out about obtaining
information regularly about security developments.
Administering a PC interface

1. On the Station screen, set the Type field to pc.
Considerations
■

Use the Function Key Module of the 7405D with PC Interface.

■

BRI terminals normally are initializing terminals and require you to assign
an SPID. The PC/ISDN Platform (Group 2), in a stand-alone configuration,
is a non-initializing BRI terminal and does not require you to assign a
SPID.
— Set a locally-defined terminal type with General Terminal
Administration
— Define the terminal type as a non-initializing terminal that does not
support Management Information Messages (MIM).
— Assign the PC/ISDN Platform with an associated (initializing)
ISDN-BRI telephone (such as an ISDN 7505) using a SPID.
— Assign the station (using a locally-defined terminal type) to take full
advantage of the capabilities of the PC Interface. This terminal type
is also non-initializing with no support of MIMs.

518

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

■

Do not use telephones with data modules with the PC Interface. (You can
still use 3270 Data Modules if you also use 3270 emulation). If you attach a
DCP data module or ISDN data module to a telephone that is connected to
a PC Interface card, the data module is bypassed (not used). All the
interface functions are performed by the interface card even if a data
module is present.

■

The 7404D telephone with messaging cartridge cannot be used with PC
Interface. However, the 7404D with PC cartridge can be used, but only
with Group 1 configurations.

Wideband Switching
Wideband Switching provides the ability to dedicate 2 or more ISDN-PRI
B-channels or DS0 endpoints for applications that require large bandwidth. It
provides high-speed end-to-end communication between endpoints where
dedicated facilities are not economic or appropriate. ISDN-BRI trunks do not
support wideband switching.
Wideband Switching supports:
■

High-speed video conferencing

■

WAN disaster recovery

■

Scheduled batch processing (for example, nightly file transfers)

■

LAN interconnections and imaging

■

Other applications involving high-speed data transmission, video
transmission, or high bandwidth

Detailed description

ISDN-PRI divides a T1 or E1 trunk into 24 (32 for E1) channels, where one
channel is used for signaling, and all others for standard narrowband
communication. Certain applications, like video conferencing, require greater
bandwidth. You can combine several narrowband channels into one wideband
channel to accommodate the extra bandwidth requirement. Avaya MultiVantage
serves as a gateway to many types of high-bandwidth traffic. In addition, DS1
Converter circuit packs are used for wideband switching at DS1 remote EPN
locations. They are compatible with both a 24-channel T1 and 32-channel E1
facility (transmission equipment). They support circuit-switched wideband
connections (NxDS0) and a 192 Kbps packet channel.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

519

Managing data calls

The following table provides information on Wideband Switching channel types.
Channel Type

Number of Channels (DSOs)

Data Rate

H0 (T1 or E1)

6 (grouped 4 (T1) or 5 (E1) quadrants
of 6 B-channels each)

384 Kbps

H11 (T1 or E1)

24 (on T1 - all 24 B-channels, with
the D-channel not used; on E1 B-channels 1 to 15, and 17 to 25, and
B-channels 26 to 31 unused)

1536 Kbps

H12 (E1 only)

30 (B-channels 1 to 15 and 17 to 31)

1920 Kbps

NxDS0 (T1)

2-24

128–1536 Kbps

NxDS0 (E1)

2-31

128–1984 Kbps

Channel allocation

For standard narrowband communication, ISDN-PRI divides a T1 or E1 trunk as
follows:
■

T1 trunks are divided into 23 information channels are 1 signaling channel

■

E1 trunks are divided into 30 information channels, 1 signaling channel,
and 1 framing channel

Certain applications, like video conferencing, require greater bandwidth. You can
combine several narrowband channels into one wideband channel to
accommodate the extra bandwidth requirement. Avaya MultiVantage serves as a
gateway to many types of high-bandwidth traffic. In addition, DS1 converters are
used for wideband switching at remote locations.
Performed using one of the three allocation algorithms: fixed, flexible, or floating.

520

■

Fixed allocation — Provides contiguous-channel aggregation. The starting
channel is constrained to a predetermined starting point. (Used only for H0,
H11, and H12 calls.)

■

Flexible allocation — Allows a wideband call to occupy non-contiguous
positions within a single T1 or E1 facility (NxDS0).

■

Floating allocation — Enforces contiguous-channel aggregation. The
starting channel is not constrained to a predetermined starting point
(NxDS0).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Typical uses

A typical video application uses an ISDN-PRI interface to DS0 1 through 6 of the
line-side facility. See Figure 14.

wdbndex CJL 061996

Figure Notes

1. Video application

8. Network

2. Port 1

9. DS0 24 D-channel

3. Port 2

10. DS0 23 unused

4. ISDN terminal adaptor

11. DS0 1–6 wideband

5. Line-side ISDN-PRI

12. DS0 24 D-channel

6. Avaya Media Server

13. DS0 7–23 narrow bands

7. ISDN trunk

14. DS0 1–6 wideband

Figure 14.

555-233-506

Wideband Switching Video Application

Issue 5 October 2002

521

Managing data calls

Endpoint applications

An endpoint application is the origination or destination of a wideband call.
Endpoint application can be any number of data applications based on the
customer’s particular needs.
ISDN-PRI terminal adapters

For wideband switching with non-ISDN-PRI equipment, you can use an
ISDN-PRI terminal adapter. ISDN-PRI terminal adapters translate standard ISDN
signaling into a form that can be used by the endpoint application and vice versa.
The terminal adapter also must adhere to the PRI-endpoint boundaries as
administered on the Avaya MultiVantage switch when handling both incoming (to
the endpoint) applications and outgoing calls.
Line-side (T1 or E1) ISDN-PRI facility

A line-side ISDN-PRI (T1 or E1) facility is comprised of a group of DS0s (24 for
a T1 facility and 32 for an E1 facility). In this context, these DS0s are also called
channels. T1 facilities have 23 B-channels and a single D-channel. E1 facilities
have 30 B-channels, 1 D-channel, and a framing channel. Data flows
bi-directionally across the facility between the switch and the ISDN-PRI terminal
adapter.
PRI-endpoints

A PRI-endpoint (PE) is a combination of DS0 B-channels on a line-side
ISDN-PRI facility that has been assigned an extension.
A PRI-endpoint can support calls of lower bandwidth. In other words, a PE having
a width 6 (six DS0s) can handle a call of one channel (64 Kbps) up to an including
6 channels. For example, an endpoint application connected to a PE defined as
using B-channels 1 through 6 of an ISDN-PRI facility could originate a call using
B-channels 1, 3, and 5 successfully. If the PE has been administered to use
flexible channel allocation, the algorithm for offering a call to the PE starts from
the first DS0 administered to the PE. Since only one active call is permitted on a
PE, contiguous B-channels always are selected unless one or more B-channels are
not in service.
One facility can support multiple separate and distinct PRI-endpoints (several
extensions) within a single facility. Non-overlapping contiguous sets of DS0s
(B-channels) are associated with each PE.
Universal digital signaling level 1 circuit pack

The UDS1 circuit pack is the interface for line-side and network facilities carrying
wideband calls.

522

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Non-signaling configuration

Wideband also can support configurations using non-signaling (non-ISDN-PRI)
line-side T1 or E1 connections. The endpoints are the same as those defined for
configurations with signaling.
Data service unit/channel service unit

This unit simply passes the call to the endpoint application. Unlike terminal
adapters, the DSU/CSU does not have signaling capability.
NOTE:

No DSU/CSU is needed if the endpoint application has a fractional T1
interface.
Line-side (T1 or E1) facility

This facility, like the ISDN-PRI facility, is composed of a group of DS0s (24 for a
T1 facility and 32 for an E1 facility; both T1 and E1 use 2 channels for signaling
purposes). Line-side facilities are controlled solely from the switch. Through the
access-endpoint command, a specific DS0 or group of DS0s is assigned an
extension. This individual DS0 or group, along with the extension, is known as a
Wideband Access Endpoint (‘‘WAE’’).
Wideband access endpoint

WAEs have no signaling interface to the switch. These endpoints simply transmit
and receive wideband data when the connection is active.
NOTE:

The switch can determine if the connection is active, but this does not
necessarily mean that data is actually coming across the connection.
A WAE is treated as a single endpoint and can support only one call. If all DS0s
comprising a wideband access endpoint are in service, then the wideband access
endpoint is considered in service. Otherwise, the wideband access endpoint is
considered out of service. If an in-service wideband access endpoint has no active
calls on its DS0s, it is considered idle. Otherwise, the wideband access endpoint is
considered busy.
Multiple WAEs are separate and distinct within the facility and endpoint
applications must be administered to send and receive the correct data rate over
the correct DS0s. An incoming call at the incorrect data rate is blocked.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

523

Managing data calls

Guidelines and examples

This section examines wideband and its components in relation to the following
specific customer usage scenarios:
■

Data backup connection

■

Scheduled batch processing

■

Primary data connectivity

■

Networking

Data backup connection

Using wideband for data transmission backup provides customers with alternate
transmission paths for critical data in the event of primary transmission path
failure.
Scheduled batch processing

Scheduled batch processing applications are used for periodic database updates
(for example, retail inventory) or distributions (for example, airline fare
schedules). These updates are primarily done after business hours and are often
referred to as nightly file transfers. Wideband meets the high bandwidth
requirements at low cost for scheduled batch processing. In addition, wideband
allows the dedicated-access bandwidth for busy-hour switch traffic to be used for
these applications after business hours; no additional bandwidth costs are
incurred.
The non-ISDN backup data connection is also appropriate for scheduled batch
processing applications. Administered Connections are used to schedule daily or
weekly sessions originating from this application.
Primary data connectivity

Permanent data connections (those always active during business hours), such as
interconnections between LANs, are well suited for Avaya MultiVantage when
ISDN-PRI endpoints are used. The ISDN end-to-end monitoring and the
endpoint’s ability to react to failures provide for critical data availability needs.
With ISDN, endpoints can detect network failures and initiate backup connections
through the switch; ISDN endpoints can also establish additional calls when extra
bandwidth is needed.
Any failures not automatically restored by Avaya MultiVantage are signaled to the
endpoint application, which can initiate backup data connections over the same
PRI endpoint. Avaya MultiVantage routes the backup data connections over
alternate facilities if necessary.

524

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Networking

All of the wideband networking is over ISDN-PRI facilities (and the emulation of
them by ATM-CES) but may connect to a variety of networks, other domestic
interexchange carriers’ services, private line, RBOC services, and services in
other countries.
ISDN-PRI trunk groups and channel
allocation

Only ISDN-PRI trunks (and the emulation of them by ATM-CES) support
wideband calls to the network. Wideband’s bandwidth requirements have
necessitated modification of the algorithms by which trunks look for idle
channels. The following section describes the search methods and their
relationship to the available wideband data services.
Facility lists

The system always sends a wideband call over a single trunk group and a single
DS1 facility (or other ISDN-PRI-capable facility). Since a trunk group may
contain channels (trunk members) from several different DS1 facilities, the
system maintains a facility list for each trunk group.
A facility list orders the trunk members based on signaling group. If the system is
using non-facility associated signaling groups with multiple DS1 facilities, the
system sorts trunk members in that signaling group according to the interface
identifier assigned to the corresponding DS1 facility.
When searching for available channels for a wideband call placed over a given
trunk group, the system starts with the channels in the lowest-numbered signaling
group with the lowest interface identifier. If the system cannot find enough
channels in a given signaling group with that interface identifier, it checks the next
higher interface identifier. If no more interface identifiers are available in the
current signaling group, the system moves its search to the channels in the next
higher signaling group.
For example, if three facilities having signaling group/interface identifier
combinations of 1/1, 1/2, and 2/1 were associated with a trunk group, then a call
offered to that trunk group would search those facilities in the order as they were
just listed. Also note that since trunks within a given facility can span several
trunk groups, a single facility can be associated with several different trunk
groups.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

525

Managing data calls

Given this facility list concept, the algorithms have the ability to search for trunks,
by facility, in an attempt to satisfy the bandwidth requirements of a given
wideband call. If one facility does not have enough available bandwidth to
support a given call, or it is not used for a given call due to the constraints
presented in the following section, then the algorithm searches the next facility in
the trunk group for the required bandwidth (if there is more than one facility in the
trunk group).
In addition to searching for channels based on facilities and required bandwidth,
Port Network (PN) preferential trunk routing is also employed. This PN routing
applies within each algorithm at a higher priority than the constraints put on the
algorithm by the parameters listed later in this section. In short, all facilities that
reside on the same PN as the originating endpoint are searched in an attempt to
satisfy the bandwidth of a given call, prior to searching any facilities on another
PN.
Direction of trunk/hunting within facilities

You can tell the system to search for available channels in either ascending or
descending order. These options help you reduce glare on the channels because
the system can search for channels in the opposite direction to that used by the
network. If an ISDN trunk group is not optioned for wideband, then a cyclical
trunk hunt based on the administration of trunks within the trunk group is still
available.
H11

When a trunk group is administered to support H11, the algorithm to satisfy a call
requiring 1,536 Kbps of bandwidth uses a fixed allocation scheme. That is, the
algorithm searches for an available facility using the following facility-specific
channel definitions:
■

T1: H11 can only be carried on a facility without a D-channel being
signaled in an NFAS arrangement (B-channels 1-24 are used).

■

E1: Although the 1,536 Kbps bandwidth could be satisfied using a number
of fixed starting points (for example, 1, 2, 3, and so forth), the only fixed
starting point being supported is 1. Hence, B-channels 1-15 and 177-25
always are used to carry an H11 call on an E1 facility.

If the algorithm cannot find an available facility within the trunk that meets these
constraints, then the call is blocked from using this trunk group. In this case, the
call may be routed to a different trunk group preference via Generalized Route
Selection (GRS), at which time, based on the wideband options administered on
that trunk group, the call would be subject to another hunt algorithm (that is, either
the same H11 algorithm or perhaps an N x DS0 algorithm described in a later
paragraph).

526

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Note that on a T1 facility, a D-channel is not considered a busy trunk and results
in a facility with a D-channel always being partially contaminated. On an E1
facility, however, a D-channel is not considered a busy trunk because H11 and
H12 calls may still be placed on that facility; an E1 facility with a D-channel and
idle B-channels is considered an idle facility.
H12

Since H12 is 1,920 Kbps which is comprised of 30 B-channels, a 1,920-kbps call
can only be carried on an E1 facility. As with H11, the hunt algorithm uses a fixed
allocation scheme with channel 1 being the fixed starting point. Hence, an H12
call always is carried on B-channels 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 on an E1 facility (as
shown in the following table). When offered any other call (other than a
1,536-kbps call), the algorithm behaves as it does when H11 is optioned.

DS0s Comprising Each Channel
Facility

ISDN
Interface

H11

H12

T1

23B + D

-

-

T1

24B (NFAS)

1-24

-

E1

30B + D

1-15, 17-25

1-15, 17-31

E1

31B (NFAS)

1-15, 17-25

1-15, 17-31

H0

When a trunk group is administered to support H0, the algorithm to satisfy a call
requiring 384 Kbps of bandwidth also uses a fixed allocation scheme. Unlike the
H11 fixed scheme which only supports a single fixed starting point, the H0 fixed
scheme supports 4 (T1) or 5 (E1) starting points. The H0 algorithm searches for
an available quadrant within a facility based on the direction of trunk or hunt
administered. If the algorithm cannot find an available quadrant within any
facility allocated to this trunk group, then the call is blocked from using this trunk
group. Again, based on GRS administration, the call may route to a different trunk
group preference and be subject to another algorithm based on the wideband
options administered.
Note that a D-channel is considered a busy trunk and results in the top most
quadrant of a T1, B-channels 19 to 24, always being partially contaminated. This
is not true for NFAS.
If this H0 optioned trunk group is also administered to support H11, H12, or N x
DS0, then the system also attempts to preserve idle facilities. In other words,
when offered a narrowband, H0, or N x DS0 call, the system searches
partially-contaminated facilities before it searches to idle facilities.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

527

Managing data calls

N x DS0

For the N x DS0 multi-rate service, a trunk group parameter determines whether a
floating or a flexible trunk allocation scheme is to be used. The algorithm to
satisfy an N x DS0 call is either floating or flexible.
■

Floating (Contiguous) — In the floating scheme, an N x DS0 call is placed
on a contiguous group of B-channels large enough to satisfy the requested
bandwidth without any constraint being put on the starting channel (that is,
no fixed starting point trunk).

■

Flexible — In the flexible scheme, an N x DS0 call is placed on any set of
B-channels as long as the requested bandwidth is satisfied. There is
absolutely no constraint such as contiguity of B-channels or fixed starting
points. Of course, as with all wideband calls, all the B-channels comprising
the wideband call must reside on the same ISDN facility.
Regardless of the allocation scheme employed, the N x DS0 algorithm, like
the H11 and H12 algorithms, attempts to preserve idle facilities when
offered B, H0, and N x DS0 calls. This is important so that N x DS0 calls,
for large values of N, have a better chance of being satisfied by a given
trunk group. However, if one of these calls cannot be satisfied by a
partially-contaminated facility and an idle facility exists, a trunk on that
idle facility is selected, thus contaminating that facility.
There are additional factors to note regarding specific values of N and the
N x DS0 service:
— N = 1 — this is considered a narrowband call and is treated as any
other voice or narrowband-data (B-channel) call.
— N = 6 — if a trunk group is optioned for both H0 and N x DS0
service, a 384-kbps call offered to that trunk group is treated as an
H0 call and the H0 constraints apply. If the H0 constraints cannot be
met, then the call is blocked.
— N = 24 — if a trunk group is optioned for both H11 and N x DS0
service, a 1,536-kbps call offered to that trunk group is treated as an
H11 call and the H11 trunk allocation constraints apply.
— N = 30 — if a trunk group is optioned for both H12 and N x DS0
service, a 1,920-kbps call offered to that trunk group is treated as an
H12 call and the H12 trunk allocation constraints apply.

528

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Glare and blocking
Glare prevention

Glare occurs when both sides of an ISDN interface select the same B-channel for
call initiation. For example, a user side of an interface selects the B-channel for an
outgoing call and, before the switch receives and processes the SETUP message,
the switch selects the same B-channel for call origination. Since any single
wideband call uses more channels, the chances of glare are greater. With proper
and careful administration, glare conditions can be reduced.
To reduce glare probability, the network needs to be administered so both sides of
the interface select channels from opposite ends of facilities. This is called linear
hunting, ascending or descending. For example, on a 23B+D trunk group, the user
side could be administered to select B-channels starting at channel 23 while the
network side would be administered to start selecting at channel 1. Using the same
example, if channel 22 is active but channel 23 is idle, the user side should select
channel 23 for re-use.
Blocking prevention

Blocking occurs when insufficient B-channels required to make a call are
available. Narrowband calls require only one channel so blocking is less likely
than with wideband calls which require multiple B-channels. Blocking also occurs
for wideband calls when bandwidth is not available in the appropriate format (that
is, fixed, floating, or flexible).
To reduce blocking, the switch selects trunks for both wideband and narrowband
calls to maximize availability of idle fixed channels for H0, H11, and H12 calls
and idle floating channels for N x DS0 calls that require a contiguous bandwidth.
The strategy for preserving idle channels to minimize blocking depends on the
channel type. The chances for blocking are reduced if you use a flexible
algorithm, assuming it is supported on the other end.

Channel Type

Blocking Minimization Strategy

H0

Preserve idle quadrants

H11

Preserve idle facilities

H12

Preserve idle facilities

Flexible NxDS0

Preserve idle facilities

Floating NxDS0

Preserve idle facilities as first priority

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

529

Managing data calls

Administering Wideband Switching
Before you start

You need a DS1 Converter circuit pack. See the Avaya MultiVantage™ System
Release 4.0 System Description Pocket Reference for more information on the
circuit pack.
Instructions

To administer wideband switching:
1. On the Access Endpoint screen, administer all fields.
See ‘‘Access Endpoint’’ on page 593 for more information.
2. On the PRI Endpoint screen, administer all fields.
See ‘‘PRI Endpoint’’ on page 1080 for more information.
3. On the ISDN Trunk Group screen, administer all fields.
See ‘‘ISDN trunk group’’ on page 936 for more information.
4. On the Route Pattern screen, administer all fields.
See ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 for more information.
5. (Optional) On the Fiber Link Administration, administer all fields.
See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™
Software for more information.
Considerations
■

For wideband switching with non-ISDN-PRI equipment, you can use an
ISDN-PRI terminal adapter.

■

Administered Connections

Interactions

Provides call initiation for WAEs. All Administered Connections that
originate from WAEs use the entire bandwidth administered for WAE. The
destination of an Administered Connection can be a PRI endpoint.

530

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

■

Automatic Circuit Assurance
Treats wideband calls as logical single-trunk calls so that a single
ACA-referral call is made if an ACA-referral call is required. The call is
referred to the lowest B-channel associated with the wideband call.

■

Call Coverage
A wideband endpoint extension cannot be administered as a coverage point
in a call-coverage path.

■

Call Detail Recording
When CDR is active for the trunk group, all wideband calls generate CDR
records. The feature flag indicates a data call and CDR records contain
bandwidth and BCC.

■

Call Forwarding
You must block Call Forwarding through Class of Service.

■

Call Management System and Basic Call Management System
Wideband calls can be carried over trunks that are measured by CMS and
BCMS. Wideband endpoints are not measured by CMS and ‘‘BCMS’’.

■

Call Vectoring
PRI endpoints can use a vector-directory number (‘‘VDN’’) when dialing.
For example, PRI endpoint 1001 dials VDN 500. VDN 500 points to
Vector 1. Vector 1 can point to other PRI endpoints such as route-to 1002,
or route-to 1003, or busy.
Call Vectoring is used by certain applications. When an incoming
wideband call hunts for an available wideband endpoint, the call can route
to a VDN, that sends the call to the first available PRI endpoint.

■

Class of Restriction
COR identifies caller and called-party privileges for PRI endpoints.
Administer the COR so that account codes are not required. Forced entry of
account codes is turned off for wideband endpoints.

■

Facility Busy Indication
You can administer a busy-indicator button for a wideband-endpoint
extension, but the button does not accurately track endpoint status.

■

Facility Test Calls
You can use Facility Test Calls to perform loop-back testing of the
wideband call facility.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

531

Managing data calls

■

Generalized Route Selection
GRS supports wideband BCC to identify wideband calls. GRS searches a
route pattern for a preference that has wideband BCC. Route preferences
that support wideband BCC also can support other BCCs to allow different
call types to share the same trunk group.

■

CO Trunk (TTC - Japan) Circuit Pack
This circuit pack cannot perform wideband switching. No member of the
circuit pack should be a member of a wideband group.

CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application
Interface
CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Applications Interface (‘‘ASAI’’) links Avaya
MultiVantage and adjunct applications. The interface allows adjunct applications
to access switch features and supply routing information to the switch. CallVisor
ASAI improves Automatic Call Distribution (‘‘ACD’’) agents’ call handling
efficiency by allowing an adjunct to monitor, initiate, control, and terminate calls
on the switch. The CallVisor ASAI interface may be used for Inbound Call
Management (‘‘ICM’’), Outbound Call Management (‘‘OCM’’), and office
automation/messaging applications.
CallVisor ASAI is supported by two transport types. These are:
1. Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
transport (CallVisor ASAI-BRI)
2. LAN Gateway Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol transport
(Avaya LAN Gateway).
CallVisor ASAI messages and procedures are based on the ITU-T Q.932
international standard for supplementary services. The Q.932 Facility Information
Element (‘‘FIE’’) carries the CallVisor ASAI requests and responses across the
interface. An application program can access CallVisor ASAI services by
supporting the ASAI protocol or by using a third-party vendor application
programming interface (‘‘API’’).
For a simple ASAI configuration example, see Figure 15.

532

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface

Figure Notes

1. ASAI adjunct

5. ISDN-BRI

2. ISDN Line circuit pack

6. Packet bus

3. Packet Controller circuit pack

7. Memory bus

4. Switch processing element (SPE)

Figure 15.

ASAI Switch Interface Link — BRI Transport

ASAI Capabilities

For information concerning the types of associations over which various event
reports can be sent, see Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical
Reference.
Considerations
■

If your system has an expansion cabinet (with or without duplication),
ASAI resources should reside on the system’s Processor Cabinet.

Interactions

See Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical Reference.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

533

Managing data calls

Setting up CallVisor ASAI
CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Applications Interface (ASAI) can be used in the
telemarketing and help-desk environments. It is used to allow adjunct applications
to monitor and control resources in Avaya MultiVantage.
Before you start
■

On the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, verify the:
— ASAI Interface field is y. If not, contact your Avaya representative.
— ASAI Proprietary Adjunct Links field is y if the adjunct is running
the CentreVu Computer Telephony.

Instructions

To set up CallVisor ASAI:
1. Type add station nnnn and press RETURN, where nnnn is the extension you
want to assign to the ASAI adjunct.
The Station screen appears.
Page 1 of X
STATION
Extension: 1014
Type: asai
Port:
Name: __________________________

STATION OPTIONS
Data Module? n
Display Module? n

Lock Messages?
Security Code:
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to-Station:

n
______
___
___
____

BCC:
TN:
COR:
COS:

0
1
1
1

Personalized Ringing Pattern: 1
Message Lamp Ext: 1014

MM Complex Data Ext: ________

2. In the Type field, type
■

asai if this adjunct platform is other than CentreVu Computer

Telephony, for example, IBM CallPath.
■

adjlk (Computer Telephony adjunct link) if this is for the CentreVu
Computer Telephony using the Telephony Services Application
Programming Interface (‘‘TSAPI’’).

3. In the Port field, use the port address assigned to the LAN Gateway
Interface circuit pack.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.

534

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Setting up DEFINITY LAN Gateway

Setting up DEFINITY LAN Gateway
Before you start
This section describes pre-administrative tasks associated with the Co-Resident
DLG.
For S8100 Media Server Configurations
If you want to use a TN799 C-LAN circuit pack as the Ethernet Interface for the
Co-Resident DLG, proceed as follows:
1. Type display system-parameters customer-options and press ENTER.
2. Go to page 2 and make sure the ASAI Link Core Capabilities and/or
Computer Telephony Adjunct Links fields are y, and the Co-Res
DEFINITY LAN Gateway field is y.
3. Type display node-names ip and press ENTER.
Make sure that there is a node name associated with the C-LAN. If there is
not a node name, add one.
4. Type display ip-interfaces and press ENTER.
Make sure the C-LAN is administered and its Ethernet port is enabled. If
the C-LAN is not listed (the Type field should display C-LAN, and the
previously administered node name should appear in the Node Name /
Local Node field), add a C-LAN.
5. Type list data-module and press ENTER.
Make sure that the Ethernet port on the C-LAN is administered. If the
Ethernet port is not listed, add it with the add data-module command (the
Service Type field should be Ethernet and the Port field should be port 17
on the TN799).
If you want to use a TN2314 circuit pack as the Ethernet Interface for the
Co-Resident DLG, proceed as follows:
1. Type display system-parameters customer-options and press ENTER.
2. Go to page 2 and make sure the ASAI Link Core Capabilities and/or
Computer Telephony Adjunct Links fields are y, and the Co-Res
DEFINITY LAN Gateway field is y.
3. Go to page 4 and make sure that the Processor Ethernet field is y.
4. Type display ip-interfaces and press ENTER.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

535

Managing data calls

Make sure the PROCR is administered and its Ethernet port is enabled. If
the PROCR is not listed (PROCR should appear in the Type field and the
previously administered node name should appear in the Node Name
field), add a PROCR.
For S8300 Media Server
Although the S8300 Media Server does not use a standard DEFINITY server port
board, the pre-administration is the same.
1. Type display system-parameters customer-options and press ENTER.
2. Go to page 2 and make sure the ASAI Link Core Capabilities and/or
Computer Telephony Adjunct Links fields are y, and the Co-Res
DEFINITY LAN Gateway field is y.
3. Go to page 4 and make sure that the Processor Ethernet field is y.
4. Type display ip-interfaces and press ENTER.
Make sure the PROCR is administered and its Ethernet port is enabled. If
the PROCR is not listed (PROCR should appear in the Service Type field
and the previously administered node name should appear in the Node
Name field), add a PROCR.
Administering CTI Links - Summary
Use this information to familiarize yourself with the basic administrative tasks for
administering CTI links using the Co-Resident DLG.
■

Use the display system-parameters customer-options command make
sure the following fields are set to y.
— ASAI Link Core Capabilities and/or Computer Telephony Adjunct
Links
— Co-Res DEFINITY LAN Gateway

■

Use the add cti-link command to administer a CTI link.

■

Use the change ip-services command and in the Service Type field, enter
DLG.
When the Service Type field is DLG, the system adds a DLG
Administration page as the last page of the screen.
— Complete the DLG Administration page to add your client
information.
NOTE:

For additional information on DLG administration for the S8300 Media
Server, see “Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical Reference.”

536

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Collecting billing information

Collecting information about calls
Call detail recording (CDR) collects detailed information about all incoming and
outgoing calls on specified trunk groups. If you use intraswitch CDR, you can also
collect information about calls between designated extensions on the switch.
Avaya MultiVantage sends this information to a printer or to some other CDR
output device that collects call records and that may also provide reports.
You can have a call accounting system directly connected to your switch. If you
are recording call details from several switches, the switch may send the records
to a collection device for storage. A system called a poller may then take these
records and send them to the call accounting system. The call accounting system
sorts them, and produces reports that you can use to compute call costs, allocate
charges, analyze calling patterns, detect unauthorized calls, and keep track of
unnecessary calls.
Before you start

The call accounting system that you use may be sold by Avaya, or it may come
from a different vendor. You need to know how your call accounting system is set
up, what type of call accounting system or call detail recording unit you are using,
and how it is connected to the switch. You also need to know the record format
that your call accounting system requires.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 537

Collecting billing information

Instructions

In this example, we are going to establish call detail recording for all calls that
come in on trunk group 1 (our CO trunk). We are going to set up CDR so that any
call that is handled by an attendant produces a separate record for the attendant
part of the call.
1. Type change trunk-group 1 and press RETURN.
The Trunk Group screen appears.

TRUNK GROUP
Group Number:
Group Name:
Direction:
Dial Access?
Queue Length:
Comm Type:
Prefix-1?

1
Group Type:
Outside calls
COR:
two-way
Outgoing Display?
n
Busy Threshold:
0
Country: 1
voice
Auth Code?
y
Trunk Flash?

TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type: ground start
Outgoing Dial Type: tone
Trunk Termination: rc
Auto Guard? n

co
CDR Reports: y
85
TN: 1__
TAC: 105
n
99
Night Service: 1234
Incoming Destination: attd
n Digit Absorption List: _
n
Toll Restricted? y

Cut-Through? n
Disconnect Timing(msec): 500_

Call Still Held? n

Sig Bit Inversion: none

Trunk Gain: high
Disconnect Supervision - In? y
Answer Supervision Timeout: 10

Out? n
Receive Answer Supervision? n

2. In the CDR Reports field, type y.
This tells the switch to create call records for calls made over this trunk
group.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change system-parameters cdr and press RETURN.
The CDR System Parameters screen appears.

538

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Collecting information about calls

CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Page 1 of X
Node Number (Local PBX ID): 1
CDR Date Format: month/day
Primary Output Format: ___________
Primary Output Ext: ________
Secondary Output Format: ___________
Secondary Output Ext: ________
Use ISDN Layouts? _
EIA Device Bit Rate: ____
Use Enhanced Formats? _
Modify Circuit ID Display? _
Remove # from Called Number? _
Record Outgoing Calls Only? _
Intra-switch CDR? _
Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? _
Outg Trk Call Splitting? _
Disconnect Information in Place of FRL? _
Outg Attd Call Record? _
Interworking Feat-flag? _
Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Screen? _
Calls to Hunt Group - Record: __________
Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead of Group or Member? _
Record Called Agent Login ID Instead of Group or Member? _
Inc Trk Call Splitting? _
Inc Attd Call Record? _
Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC? _
Call Record Handling Option: _________
Record Call-Assoc TSC? _
Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls: _________
Privacy - Digits to Hide: _
CDR Account Code Length: __

5. In the CDR Format field, type month/day.
This determines how the date will appear on the header record.
6. In the Primary Output Format field, type Unformatted.
This is the record format that our call accounting system requires. Check
with your call accounting vendor to determine the correct record format for
your system.
7. In the Primary Output Ext. field, type 2055.
This is the extension of the data module that we use to connect to our call
accounting system.
8. In the Record Outgoing Calls Only field, type n.
This tells the switch to create records for both incoming and outgoing calls
over all trunk groups that use CDR.
9. In the Outg Trk Call Splitting and Inc Trk Call Splitting fields, type y.
This tells the system to create a separate record for any portion of an
incoming or outgoing call that is transferred or conferenced.
10. In the Outg Att Call Record and Inc Att Call Record fields, type y.
This tells the system to create a separate record for the attendant portion of
any incoming or outgoing call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

539

Collecting billing information

More information

You can also administer the switch to produce separate records for calls that are
conferenced or transferred. This is called Call Splitting. There are many other
variations that you can administer for CDR, and these are described in the screens
section of this book.
Related topics

For additional information on CDR, see ‘‘Call detail recording’’ on page 1553.
For more information about how to connect a CDR output device, see the
Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions.
The Call Detail Acquisition and Processing Reference Manual also contains CDR
information, but has not been updated in several years and is no longer entirely
accurate.

Recording calls between users on the
same switch
Call detail recording generally records only those calls either originating or
terminating outside the switch. There may be times when you need to record calls
between local users. Intra-switch CDR lets you track calls made to and from local
extensions.
Instructions

In this example, we administer the switch to record all calls to and from
extensions 5100, 5101, and 5102.
1. Type change system-parameters cdr and press RETURN.
The CDR System Parameters screen appears.
2. In the Intraswitch CDR field, type y.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Type change intra-switch-cdr and press RETURN.

540

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tracking calls by account code

The Intra-Switch CDR screen appears.
Page 1 of 1
INTRA-SWITCH CDR
Assigned Members: 2 of 100 administered
1: 72447 _ 19:
37:
55:
2: 72448
20:
38:
56:
3:
_ 21:
39:
57:
4:
_ 22:
40:
58:
5:
23:
41:
59:
6:
24:
42:
60:
7:
25:
43:
61:
8:
26:
44:
62:
9:
27:
45:
63:
10:
28:
46:
64:
11:
29:
47:
65:
12:
30:
48:
66:
13:
31:
49:
67:
14:
32:
50:
68:
15:
33:
51:
69:
16:
34:
52:
70:
17:
35:
53:
71:
18:
36:
54:
72:

73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:
90:

91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100.
101:
102:
103:
104:
105:
106:
107:
108:

5. In the first three available slots, type 5100, 5101, and 5102.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.
7. The switch will now produce call records for all calls to and from these
extensions, including those that originated on the local switch.
Related topics

See ‘‘Intraswitch CDR’’ on page 1559 for more detailed information.

Tracking calls by account code
You can have your users to enter account codes before they make calls. By doing
this, you can have a record of how much time was spent on the phone doing
business with or for a particular client.
Instructions

In this example, we are going to set up the system to allow the user at extension
5004 to enter a 5-digit account code before making a call.
1. Type change system-parameters cdr and press RETURN.
The CDR System Parameters screen appears.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

541

Collecting billing information

CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Page 1 of X
Node Number (Local PBX ID): 1
CDR Date Format: _________
Primary Output Format: ___________
Primary Output Ext: ________
Secondary Output Format: ___________
Secondary Output Ext: ________
Use ISDN Layouts? _
EIA Device Bit Rate: ____
Use Enhanced Formats? _
Modify Circuit ID Display? _
Remove # from Called Number? _
Record Outgoing Calls Only? _
Intra-switch CDR? _
Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? _
Outg Trk Call Splitting? _
Disconnect Information in Place of FRL? _
Outg Attd Call Record? _
Interworking Feat-flag? _
Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Screen? _
Calls to Hunt Group - Record: __________
Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead of Group or Member? _
Record Called Agent Login ID Instead of Group or Member? _
Inc Trk Call Splitting? _
Inc Attd Call Record? _
Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC? _
Call Record Handling Option: _________
Record Call-Assoc TSC? _
Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls: _________
Privacy - Digits to Hide: _
CDR Account Code Length: __

2. In the CDR Account Code Length field, type 5.
3. Press ENTER to save your changes.
4. Assign an account button on the Station screen for extension 5004. See
‘‘Adding feature buttons’’ on page 129 for more information.
5. Provide your users with a list of account codes to use.
6. You can also assign a Feature Access Code and give this to your users.

Forcing users to enter account
codes
Forced Entry of Account Codes is another form of account code dialing. You can
use it to allow certain types of calls only with an account code, to track fax
machine usage by account, or just to make sure that you get account information
on all relevant calls.
Before you start

Before you can administer Forced Entry of Account Codes, it must be enabled on
the System Parameters Customer-Options screens. If it is not, please contact your
Avaya representative.

542

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Forcing users to enter account codes

Instructions

In this example, we administer the system to force users in our North American
office to enter an account code before making international calls.
1. Type change system-parameters cdr and press RETURN.
The CDR System Parameters screen appears.
2. In the Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form
field, type y.
3. In the CDR Account Code Length field, type 5.
4. Press ENTER to save your changes.
5. Type change toll 0 and press RETURN.
6. The Toll Analysis screen appears.
change toll analysis

Dialed String
0____________________
01___________________
011__________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________

Page 1 of 1
TOLL ANALYSIS
Percent Full:_
Location:
Total
Toll CDR <--Unrestricted Call List-->
Min Max RCL List FEAC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1__ 1__
_
x
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
9__ 17_
_
x
x
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
10_ 18_
_
x
x
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

7. In the first available Dialed String field, type 011.
This is the international access code for this office.
8. In the Total Min and Max columns, type 10 and 18, respectively.
This is the minimum and maximum number of digits the system will
analyze when determining how to handle the call.
9. In the Toll List and CDR FEAC columns, type x.
10. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

543

Collecting billing information

More information

You can also establish a class of restriction with Forced Entry of Account Codes
set to y, and assign this class of restriction (COR) to trunks or other facilities that
you want to restrict. With this method, all users with this COR must enter account
codes before making any outgoing trunk calls. See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page
658 for more information.

Receiving call-charge information
Avaya MultiVantage provides two ways to receive information from the public
network about the cost of calls. Note that this service is not offered by the public
network in some countries, including the US.
■

Advice of Charge (AOC, for ISDN trunks) collects charge information
from the public network for each outgoing call. Charge advice is a number
representing the cost of a call; it may be recorded as either a charging or
currency unit.

■

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM, for non-ISDN trunks) accumulates pulses
transmitted from the public network at periodic intervals during an
outgoing trunk call. At the end of the call, the number of pulses collected is
the basis for determining charges.

Before you start

You need to request either AOC or PPM service from your network provider. In
some areas, your choice may be limited. Your Avaya representative can help you
determine the type of service you need.
NOTE:

This service is not offered by the public network in some countries,
including the U.S.

544

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Receiving call-charge information

Collecting call charge information over ISDN

In this example, we administer the system to provide Advice of Charge over an
existing ISDN trunk group, at the end of a call. This information will appear on
CDR reports.
1. Type change trunk-group 2.
The ISDN trunk group screen appears with existing administration for this
ISDN trunk group.
Page 1 of x
TRUNK GROUP
Group Number:
Group Name:
Direction:
Dial Access?
Queue Length:
Service Type:

2
Group Type: isdn
CDR Reports: y
OUTSIDE_CALL_______________ COR: 1_
TN: 1__
TAC: ____
two-way_
Outgoing Display? n
n
Busy Threshold: 99_
Night Service: ________
0__
public-ntwrk
Auth Code? n
TestCall ITC: rest
Far End Test Line No: _______________
TestCall BCC: 4
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Codeset to Send Display: 6
Codeset to Send TCM,Lookahead: 6
Max Message Size to Send: 260
Charge Advice: none_____________
Supplementary Service Protocol: a
Digit Handling(in/out):enbloc/enbloc
Trunk Hunt: cyclical
QSIG Value-Added Avaya? n
Connected to Toll? n
STT Loss: normal
DTT to DCO Loss: normal
Calling Number - Delete: ___ Insert: _______________ Numbering Format: _______
Bit Rate: 1200_
Synchronization: async
Duplex: full
Disconnect Supervision - In? y Out? n
Answer Supervision Timeout: 0__

2. In the CDR Reports field, type y.
This ensures that the AOC information appears on the CDR report.
3. Verify that Service Type is public-ntwrk.
4. In the Supplementary Service Protocol field, type a.
5. The Charge Advice field, type end-on-request.
This ensures that the switch will place one request for charge information.
This reduces the amount of information passed to the switch and consumes
less processor time than other options.
6. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

545

Collecting billing information

Receiving call-charge information over
non-ISDN trunks

In this example, we will administer an existing Direct Inward and Outward
Dialing (DIOD) trunk to receive PPM from the public network.
1. Type change trunk-group 3.
The Trunk Group screen appears with existing administration for this trunk
group.
Page 1 of x
TRUNK GROUP
Group Number: 3
Group Type: diod
CDR Reports: y
Group Name: DIOD_PPM___________________ COR: 1_
TN: 1__
TAC: 112_
Direction: two-way_
Outgoing Display? n
Dial Access? n
Busy Threshold: 99_
Night Service: ________
Queue Length: 0__
Comm Type: voice
Auth Code? n
Digit Absorption List:
Prefix-1? y
Trunk Flash? n
Toll Restricted? y
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type: auto/immed
Outgoing Dial Type: tone
Incoming Dial Type: tone
Trunk Termination: rc
Digit Treatment:
Digits:
Expected Digits:
Sig Bit Inversion: none
Trunk Gain: high
Drop Treatment: silence
Disconnect Supervision - In? y Out? n
Answer Supervision Timeout: 0__
Recieve Answer Supervision: y

2. In the CDR Reports field, type y.
This ensures that the PPM information appears on the CDR report.
3. In the Direction field, type two-way.
4. In the PPM field, type y.
5. In the Frequency field, type 50/12.
This is the signal frequency (in kHz). The frequency you will use depends
on what the circuit pack you use is able to accept. See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on
page 1233 for more information.
6. In the Administrable Timers section, set the Outgoing Glare Guard timer to
5 seconds.
7. Press ENTER to save your changes.
8. You also need to ensure that the values of the Digital Metering Pulse
Minimum, Maximum and Value on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen are
appropriate to the values offered by your service provider. See ‘‘DS1
Circuit Pack’’ on page 757 for more information.

546

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Viewing call charge information

Related topics

See ‘‘Call charge information’’ on page 1527 for more information about AOC
and PPM.

Viewing call charge information
Avaya MultiVantage provides two ways for you to view call-charge information:
on a telephone display or as part of the Call Detail Recording (CDR) report. From
a display, users can see the cost of an outgoing call, both while the call is in
progress and at the end of the call.
Instructions

In this example, we administer extension 5040 to be able to view the charge of a
call in progress. The charges will appear in currency units (in this case, Lira) on
the user’s telephone display.
1. Type change trunk-group 2 and press RETURN.
The Trunk Group screen appears.

add trunk-group next
TRUNK FEATURES
ACA Assignment? _

Page 2 of x
Measured: ____
Maintenance Tests? _

Data Restriction? _
Abandoned Call Search? _
Suppress # Outpulsing? _
Charge Conversion:
Decimal Point:
Currency Symbol:
Charge Type:

_____
______
___
_______

Receive Analog Incoming Call ID:
Per Call CPN Blocking Code:
Per Call CPN Unblocking Code:
MF Tariff Free?
Outgoing ANI: _______________

________
___
___
_

2. In the Charge Conversion field, type 200.
This indicates that one charge unit sent from the service provider is equal to
200 units, in this case, Lira.
3. In the Decimal Point field, type none.
4. In the Charge Type field, type Lira.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

547

Collecting billing information

6. Type change system-parameters features and press RETURN.
The Feature-Related System Parameters screen appears.
7. In the Charge Display Update Frequency (seconds) field, type 30.
Frequent display updates may have considerable performance impact.
8. Press ENTER to save your changes.
9. Now assign extension 5040 a disp-chrg button to give this user the ability
to control the charge display. See ‘‘Adding feature buttons’’ on page 129
for more information.
More information

If you want end users to control when they view this information, you can assign a
display button that they can press to see the current call charges. If you want call
charges to display automatically whenever a user places an outgoing call, you can
set Automatic Charge Display to y on the user’s COR screen.

548

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administering Media Servers

This chapter describes how to administer an S8700 Media Server and a G700
Media Gateway and the S8300 Media Server. It is targeted for system
administrators after the product is installed and tested. In a converged network
where voice and data are both sent over a corporate local area network (LAN),
this configuration can provide primary or standby telephony and
communications-processing capabilities.
Users should have broad data networking experience with data products and
technology to best understand this product. An in-depth knowledge of Avaya
MultiVantage call-processing software and Avaya P330 systems is also
recommended.

Overview
To set up and maintain your S8300 Media Server with a G700 you need to
administer:
■

the G700 Media Gateway and its internal processors, typically using the
P330 Device Manager web-based tool or a command-line interface (CLI)

■

the S8300 Media Server using the S8300 Media Server Web Interface

■

call-processing features using Avaya MultiVantage software

For details on administration access methods, tools, and alternatives, see Welcome
to the Avaya™ S8300 Media Server and Avaya™ G700 Media Gateway.
Documents mentioned in this chapter are available on the Avaya website:
http://www.avaya.com/support

G700 Media Gateway administration
The hardware elements of the G700 Media Gateway are summarized in this
section. For details on any of these hardware components, or for different
configuration setups, see the Avaya MultiVantage Solutions Hardware Guide.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 549

Administering Media Servers

G700 Media Gateway physical design

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The G700 Media Gateway is a19-inch,
rack-mount design similar to other Avaya P330 hardware. The media gateway can
be a member of a P330 stack of Layer 2 or 3 devices, reside in a stack of other
media gateways, or operate as a standalone unit. Figure 16 shows the front of the
media gateway.

Figure 16.

The G700 Media Gateway (front view)

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Key components of the G700 Media
Gateway include:
1. LED Status Panel (top left) for the media gateway
2. S8300 Media Server slot (V1). The G700 Media Gateway does not have an
S8300 Media Server in its basic configuration.
3. P330 Expansion slot (bottom left) for adding modules such as a 16-port
Ethernet expansion module, fiber interfaces, ATM access or WAN access
4. Dual 10/100Base-T Ethernet Ports for connection to the corporate LAN
(bottom center of chassis)
5. Up to three additional media modules in slots V2 to V4 on the right side of
the chassis (slots are numbered from top to bottom)
6. 8-Pin RS-232 Serial Port (Console) for direct-connect P330 stack processor
administration (typically done by Services personnel)

550

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

G700 Media Gateway administration

S8300 Media Server faceplate

(For S8300 Media Servers) Figure 17 shows the faceplate of the S8300 Media
Server.

Figure 17.

S8300 Media Server faceplate

The faceplate of the S8300 Media Server has the following components:
■

The LED array on the left indicates when the S8300 is active and when it is
safe to power it down.

■

A Shut Down button can be used to shut down the server (the S8300 can
also be shut down and restarted using software commands).

■

A Services Ethernet interface provides a direct connection to a laptop
computer connected with a crossover cable. Normally only Services
technicians use this interface; most ongoing S8300 administration is done
using the Ethernet connection to the corporate LAN on the media gateway.

■

One of the two USB connections may be used to attach an external modem,
primarily used to report alarms to a Services support agency.

■

The label on the right provides identification information for the S8300
Media Server.

G700 Media module description

(For S8300 Media Servers) The four slots on the G700 Media Gateway are
populated with media modules according to the needs at your site. Up to four slots
may be filled as follows:
■

555-233-506

The S8300 Media Server is a special type of media module that hosts the
call-processing (telephony) software. If present, the S8300 is installed in
slot one (V1); only one can be installed per media gateway. The S8300 can
act as a primary call controller for the system, or one or more S8300s can
be configured to provide standby service for a primary call controller if
needed. See ‘‘Local Survivable Processor configuration’’ for details.

Issue 5 October 2002

551

Administering Media Servers

■

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The other media module slots are
filled as needed to meet the call-processing needs at your site. Media
modules can be mixed and matched. Table 8 lists the administrative name
and port capacities for the media modules that may be installed in a G700
Media Gateway.

Table 8. Media Module names and port capacities
Media module type

Administration name

Number of ports

Analog Line/Trunk

analog

8

DCP Telephone

dcp

8

T1/E1

ds1

24/32 (T1=24 in robbed-bit
signalling mode and E1=32 for 1
control, 1 signal and 30 voice)

VoIP

voip

N/A

S8300 Media Server

icc

N/A

MM270

bri

8

Local Survivable Processor configuration

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) An S8300 Media Server can be configured
either as the primary call-processing controller, or as a Local Survivable Processor
(LSP). An LSP can take over call processing if the primary call-processing system
(such as another S8300 Media Server or an S8700 Media Server) is unavailable
for any reason (such as a network failure or server problem). The S8300 Media
Servers can be either the primary or LSP media servers; they are set up to operate
as a primary or standby LSP server during the configuration process using the
S8300 Media Server Web Interface.
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) If the S8300 Media Server loses contact
with its G700 Media Gateway, it will take the media gateway out of service after a
time-out period. However, if the G700 loses contact with the S8300 Media Server,
the media gateway first tries to reestablish contact. If it fails after a time-out
period, then the G700 tries to connect with another media server in its controller
list. When a functional media server is located, the G700 reboots.

552

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

G700 Media Gateway administration

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) If the primary call-processing server goes
offline and an LSP is available as a standby unit, it will assume call processing as
follows:
■

IP phones and media gateways that were previously using the primary
media server will try to register with the standby media server for call
processing, provided that they have been administered to do so in the
controller list (use the set mgc list command).

■

The standby media server (LSP) will go into license error mode, then start
to provide call processing. It cannot preserve any calls set up by the
primary media server. IP phone connections can stay up until the call is
completed if they are shuffled, but no features are supported on the call.
NOTE:

The license error mode will run for up to 10 days and if the problem
is not resolved, then it goes into no license mode and call processing
halts.
■

When the primary media server is available again, it will begin handling
call processing. However, those endpoints that are now using the standby
media server will continue to do so until the standby unit is rebooted.

■

If the standby S8300 Media Server is rebooted, all devices will return to
using the primary media server for call-processing service. Any calls in
progress on the LSP will be dropped when the reboot occurs (the change
back to the primary media server is not call preserving).

■

With LSP functionality, there is full functionality and feature support.

Using Device Manager to administer G700
Media Gateway components

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Device Manager, also known as the P330
Embedded Web Manager, provides a browser-based graphical user interface
(GUI) to assist you with ongoing media gateway administration. For complete
information on using Device Manager, see the Avaya User’s Guide P330
Manager.
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Device Manager allows you to:

555-233-506

■

View the status of different devices on the network.

■

Configure or modify devices including Virtual LAN (VLAN) groupings,
port mirroring, and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps.

Issue 5 October 2002

553

Administering Media Servers

Accessing Device Manager from a web browser

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) To access the P330 Device Manager from a
web browser:
1. Open a compatible web browser on your computer. Microsoft Internet
Explorer 5.0 (or higher) and Netscape Navigator 4.7 and 6.2 are supported.
The Java Plug-in 1.3.1_02 is required.
2. In the Address (or Location) field of your browser, type the IP address of
the P330 stack.
3. Log in as prompted.
■

The default user name is: root

■

The default password for read-write access is: root
NOTE:

You should change the default passwords after you log in, if they
have not already been changed. The passwords apply to all logins for
these devices, whether accessed through Device Manager or a CLI.
4. The Welcome Page is displayed. Proceed with P330 and media gateway
device administration.
Accessing Device Manager through
MultiService Network Manager

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) You can alternatively launch the P330
Device Manager from the Avaya MultiService (formerly P330View) Network
Manager. This optional product is a complete Network Management System
(NMS). Services include:
■

viewing all network devices by type, subnet, or customized groupings

■

logging and viewing SNMP traps and events

■

launching and managing other applications including Avaya™ Site
Administration

Contact your Avaya representative to obtain a copy of this program if desired.
Command line interface administration

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Instead of using Device Manager, you
could telnet into the Media Gateway Processor (MGP), or use the serial interface
on the front of the chassis to establish a direct connection to the P330 stack
processor.

554

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Media Server administration

■

Command line interface (CLI) access procedures are covered in Welcome
to the Avaya S8300 Media Server and Avaya G700 Media Gateway.

■

For a list of CLI commands, see the Maintenance for Avaya™ G700 Media
Gateway controlled by an Avaya™ S8300 Media Server or an Avaya™
S8700 Media Server, 555-234-101, October 2002.

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) SNMP alarms are different from server
hardware- or software-generated Operations Support System (OSS) alarms that
are recorded in the server logs, and may be reported to Avaya’s Initialization and
Administration System (INADS) or another services support agency over the
server’s optional modem interface or through SNMP notifications. Either method,
both, or no alarm-reporting method may be used at a given site.

Media Server administration
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The S8300 and S8700 Media Server
contains the Avaya MultiVantage call-processing software, and controls its
operation over the corporate network. Some of the primary functions controlled
by the S8300 and S8700 Media Server are:
■

Backing up and restoring call processing, server, and security data.

■

Checking server and process status.

■

Administering network features for the S8300 and S8700 Media Server
such as SNMP service, enabling or disabling the modem (if used), enabling
FTP services, and installing license and authentication files.

■

Installing new software and reconfiguring the server as needed.

■

Performing routine diagnostics and troubleshooting such as viewing alarms
and system logs, and running tests if needed.

Media Server Web Interface and online help

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) S8300 and S8700 Media Server tasks are
performed using the Media Server Web Interface. This browser-based server
administration tool is an easy-to-use graphical user interface for performing the
server administration tasks listed above. It contains an extensive help system that
describes all web screens and media server procedures. This section covers
highlights of media server administration.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

555

Administering Media Servers

Accessing the Media Server Web Interface

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The Web Interface can be accessed through
the corporate LAN connection to the G700 Media Gateway, or through the
Services Ethernet interface on the front of the S8300 and S8700 Media Server
connected to a laptop PC using a crossover cable. Details on how to configure a
laptop for a direct connection are in the online help and in Welcome to the Avaya
S8300 Media Server and Avaya G700 Media Gateway.
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) To access the media server, you must log in
as follows:
1. Open a compatible Internet browser on your computer. Currently only
Internet Explorer 5.x (Avaya recommends 5.5 with Service Pack 2) and
Netscape 4.7x are supported.
2. In the Address (or Location) field of your browser, type the IP address or
name of the Avaya media server and press Enter.
■

LAN access by IP address. If you are logging into the administrative
interface over the corporate local area network, you can type the
media server’s unique IP address in standard dotted-decimal
notation, such as http://192.152.254.201.

■

LAN access by server name. If the server has already been
configured and if the corporate LAN includes a domain name
service (DNS) server that has been administered with the servers’
names, you can type the server’s name into the address field instead
of the IP address. Server names vary depending on local
administration (such as http://media-server1.mycompany.com).

■

Laptop access by IP address. If you are logging in to the services
Ethernet interface from a directly connected laptop, the IP address
on the server is always 192.11.13.6. The subnet mask is always
255.255.255.252. New servers that have not yet been configured
can only be accessed in this way. Server-name login is not available
through the services interface because this connection is a closed
(private) network with no DNS.
NOTE:

The S8300 Media Server’s name and IP address are specified during
initial media server configuration.

556

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Media Server administration

3. If your browser does not have a valid security certificate, you will see a
warning screen and instructions to load the security certificate.
■

If you are certain your connection is secure, accept the server
security certificate to access the Login screen.

■

If you plan to use this computer and browser to access this or other
Avaya media servers again, click the main menu link to Install
Avaya Root Certificate after you log in.

4. The Login screen appears.
■

In the Username field, type your user name (login ID), such as cust.

■

Click the Login button or press Enter.
NOTE:

User names and passwords are case sensitive. Enter the login ID and
confirmation information in upper- or lowercase as required.
5. Enter your login confirmation information as prompted:
■

Password prompt. Type your password in the Password field, and
click Login or press Enter again.

■

ASG challenge. If your login is Access Security Gateway (ASG)
protected, you will see a challenge screen. Enter the correct response
and click Login or press Enter.

6. The server will match your login information against its authentication
tables. If the information you entered is recognized as a valid login, the
screen displays a two-frame window, with the main menu in the left panel
and a usage-agreement notice in the right window.
■

If the main menu in the left panel has only about 10 links, you have
accessed the server from a login ID that has restricted permissions.
You can adjust the login service levels using the Login
Administration screen in Avaya™ Site Administration or SAT.

■

If the server cannot recognize your user name or password, you
receive an authentication failure message. Return to step 5. If you
fail to enter the user name and login confirmation correctly 4 times
within a few minutes, the Login screen will block further attempts to
log in for a while.

7. When you successfully log in to the server, check the top of the left panel.
The Avaya media server you are logged into is identified by name and
server number. The S8300 Media Server number is always 1. The S8700
Media Server shows two servers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

557

Administering Media Servers

Web interface main menu

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The tasks you can perform are shown by a
list of links in the left panel of the main web interface window.
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) For help with any of these tasks, click the
Help button on the main menu. Alternatively, if you have already clicked on a
link, click the About This Screen button on the web interface page to go directly
to the help for that specific screen.

Media server web interface tasks

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Key tasks that administrators typically
perform on the S8300 and S8700 Media Server are summarized in this section.
See the online help for complete information.
Backup and restore data

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) One of the most important tasks is to set up
a schedule to routinely back up system data to a safe location. Because the S8300
Media Server does not include a media storage device for backup purposes, the
data must be emailed or transferred using file transfer protocol (FTP) to another
server or computer for backup. The S8700 Media Server has a local removable
storage device.
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The web interface allows you to back up
call-processing data (MultiVantage translations), server system data, and security
files. Avaya recommends that you encrypt the backup files to keep this sensitive
information secure.
Upgrade software and configuration

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Occasionally you may need to install new
software on the media server. The new software (and a new license file if
required) must be copied to the media server using one of the methods listed in
‘‘Copy files to the server’’. The software installation process uses wizard-like
screens on the web to guide you through the process.
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) You may also need to update your server
configuration from time to time, and reverify it after a software upgrade. IP
addresses for the server and its gateway to the corporate LAN, or for the optional
UPS unit, DNS servers, and modem, are specified using configuration wizard-like
screens. The wizard-like screens also allow you to specify static network routes
for sending information over the network, and to update or change the method by
which the S8300 Media Server keeps time.

558

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Media Server administration

Copy files to the server

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Files must be copied to the media server
from another computer or server in the network, or uploaded from a directly
connected laptop computer. Files that may be copied to the server include license
and authentication files, system announcements, and files for software upgrades.
Files may be copied to the server using one of the following methods:
■

Upload Files to Server (via browser) link to upload one or more files from
your computer to the server’s FTP directory using HTTP protocol.

■

Download Files to Server (from web) link to copy files to the server from
another server on the network; it works like the Upload Files screen.

■

Transfer files from another computer or server accessible from the
corporate network using FTP or Trivial FTP (TFTP). Files must be
transferred in binary mode. Either a GUI or CLI FTP program can be used,
depending on what is available on your computer.

SNMP administration

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) You can set up Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) services on the server to provide a means for a
corporate NMS to monitor the server, and send alarm notifications to a services
agency, to a corporate NMS, or both.
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) To activate SNMP alarm notification for
the S8300 and S8700 devices, use the Configure Trap Destinations screen to set
up SNMP destinations in the corporate NMS. SNMP traps for other devices on the
network can be administered using Device Manager; see ‘‘Using Device Manager
to administer G700 Media Gateway components’’.
Downloadable programs

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) In addition to housing the call-processing
software, the S8300 and S8700 Media Server may be used to download the
following application software. A downloadable version of these packages may
be accessed through the S8300 and S8700 Media Server Web Interface. This
software must be installed on a computer that is running a compatible Microsoft
Windows system as noted.

555-233-506

■

Avaya Site Administration is the typical way to do telephony
administration. It runs on most Windows systems and is available in
several languages. See ‘‘Call-processing administration’’ for details.

■

Avaya VoIP Monitoring Manager is used to monitor network Quality of
Service (QoS) for Avaya IP endpoints using a graphical user interface.
Currently it runs only on Windows 2000 systems.

Issue 5 October 2002

559

Administering Media Servers

NOTE:

The VoIP Monitoring Manager may not be available on all S8300
Media Servers. (It is available on all S8700 Media Servers.) It is
normally offered as part of the Avaya VisAbility Management Suite.
Contact your Avaya representative if you are interested in obtaining
this program.

Call-processing administration
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The telephony features of the S8300 Media
Server are administered using the same commands and procedures as an S8700
Media Server or a legacy DEFINITY Enterprise Communications System.
Overview

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Avaya MultiVantage software resides on
the S8300 and S8700 Media Server. It can be accessed through either:
■

Avaya™ Site Administration features a graphical user interface (GUI) that
provides access to SAT commands as well as wizard-like screens that
provide simplified administration for frequently used features. You can
perform most of your day-to-day administration tasks from this interface
such as adding or removing users and telephony devices. You can also
schedule tasks to run at a non-peak usage time.
Avaya™ Site Administration must be installed on a computer running a
compatible Microsoft Windows operating system such as Windows 95, 98,
NT 4.0, Millennium Edition, and Windows 2000. Once installed, it can be
launched from a desktop icon, from the P330 Device Manager, or through a
link in the S8300 Media Server Web Interface.

■

The System Access Terminal (SAT) program uses a Command Line
Interface (CLI) interface for telephony administration. SAT is available
through the Avaya™ Site Administration package.

Security Considerations

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Security for administration of the G700
Media Gateway is the same as for traditional MultiVantage levels. This means that
administration login passwords are passed in plain text with no encryption.
Exceptions to this no-encryption policy include:

560

■

The ASG program that is installed on all Avaya media servers.

■

An encrypted web interface to the S8300 Media Server (see the security
certificate information in the media server online help)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call-processing administration

■

Optional encryption for data backups (see ‘‘Backup and restore data’’).

■

Support for RADIUS authentication for media gateways and P330 stack
elements using the P330 Device Manager. See ‘‘Using Device Manager to
administer G700 Media Gateway components’’.

Command syntax changes for media modules

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The syntax for using the SAT commands
for a G700 Media Gateway or S8300 Media Server has changed. In a traditional
DEFINITY system, ports are identified by the cabinet number, carrier, slot, and
port. For example: 02A0704
(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Because this numbering convention does
not make sense for media modules, a new convention was developed. The
numbering convention for the media modules uses the same seven-character field
as does a traditional system, but the fields represent the media gateway number,
media module slot (V1 to V4), and port number (00 to 99 are supported; the actual
number of ports that can be specified depends on the type of media module).
Example: 001V205
In this example, the 001 represents the media gateway number, the V2 represents
the slot number (possibly V1 through V4), and 05 is the port number.
Screen and command change summary

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) The following screens have been added or
changed to accommodate G700 Media Gateways, S8300 Media Servers, and other
media modules. Changes relevant to an S8300 or G700 configuration are
summarized in this section.
Media Gateway changes

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) New commands and screens for media
gateways include:
■

555-233-506

The media-gateway administration screen is used to administer G700
Media Gateways and their media modules. Information is similar to the list
media-gateway screen (next item), but also includes MAC address,
network region, location and site data. See Chapter 18, ‘‘Screen reference’’
for details.

Issue 5 October 2002

561

Administering Media Servers

■

The list media-gateway [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] command shows the list of
currently administered gateways. Information includes the media gateway
number, name, serial number, IP address, and whether or not this media
gateway is currently registered with the call controller. The IP address field
is blank until the media gateway registers once, then remains populated.

■

The list configuration media-gateway x command allows you to list all
the assigned ports on the media modules for the G700 Media Gateway
specified by its number (x).

System-Parameters Customer-Options screen

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) This screen has been updated to indicate
the presence of an S8300 Media Server as a primary or standby call processor as
listed below. See Chapter 18, ‘‘Screen reference’’for a complete description of
this screen.
■

The Optional Features section contains a new Local Spare Processor (LSP)
field. If it displays a y (yes), this S8300 Media Server is configured to
provide standby call processing in case the primary media server is
unavailable. See ‘‘Local Survivable Processor configuration’’ for details.
This display-only field can be set only by the license file.

■

Two additional fields in the Optional Features section indicate if the
primary call-processing controller is an S8300 Media Server. If traditional
port networking is disabled and Processor Ethernet is enabled, an S8300
Media Server is controlling telecommunications.
■

Port Network Support: set to n indicates that traditional port
networking is disabled. An S8300 Media Server is the primary call
controller.

■

Processor Ethernet: set to y indicates the presence of an S8300
Media Server.

Quality of Service Monitoring

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Several screen changes allow you to
monitor Quality of Service (QoS) on an S8300 Media Server with a G700
configuration. The media gateway can send data to a real-time control protocol
(RTCP) server, which in turn monitors the network region’s performance. Screens
include:
■

562

A new RTCP Monitor Server section on the IP-Options System
Parameters screen allows you to enter a single default IP address, server
port, and RTCP report period that can be utilized by all administered
network regions. This means you do not have to re-enter the IP address
each time you access the ip-network-region screen.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call-processing administration

■

■

The IP Network Region screen also must be administered for QoS
monitoring (see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software for details). If the RTCP Enabled field is left at
default (“y”), then be sure to set a valid IP address in the IP-Options
System Parameters screen. For situations that require customization, this
screen is administered on a per IP network regional basis. Items to
customize include:
■

Enabling or disabling of RTCP monitoring

■

Modifications to the report flow rate

■

Changes to the server IP address and server port

The list ip-network-region qos and list ip-network-region monitor
commands list quality of service and monitor server parameters from the IP
Network Region screen as follows:
■

qos displays VoIP media and call control (and their 802.1p priority
values), BBE DiffServ PHB values, RSVP profile and refresh rate.

■

monitor displays RTCP monitor server IP address, port number,
report flowrate, codec set, and UDP port range parameters.

Media Gateway serviceability commands

(For S8300 and S8700 Media Servers) Additional commands related to media
gateways appear in Maintenance for S8700 Media Server for Multiconnect
Configurations and Maintenance for S8700 Media Server for IP-connect
Configurations.These include:

555-233-506

■

The status media-gateways command provides an alarm summary,
busyout summary, and link summary of all configured media gateways.

■

Several commands have been modified to support the media gateway port
identification format described in ‘‘Command syntax changes for media
modules’’. These include:
■

Message Sequence Trace (mst)

■

display errors

■

display alarms

Issue 5 October 2002

563

Administering Media Servers

SNMP Agents
The S8300 and S8700 Media Servers contain SNMP modules. A simplified
SNMP manager exists to collect traps from network elements such as the
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), Ethernet switches, and media gateways. An
SNMP alarm sub-agent exists to send SNMP traps to customer provided network
managers. An SNMP alarm sub-agent exists to send alarms as traps to the
Initialization and Administration System (INADS). An SNMP master agent,
MIB-II sub-agent, and MultiVantage sub-agent is provided.
The co-resident MultiVantage sub-agent is used to manage the co-resident ACP
software.
NOTE:

The following procedures are for the S8300 and S8700 Media Servers only.
Adding trap destinations

A trap destination is an IP addresses that needs to receive SNMP alarm traps from
the media server.
Instructions

To add a trap destination:
1. On the main page, under SNMP, click on Configure Trap Destinations.
The Configure Trap Destinations page displays.

Screen 28.

Configure Trap Destination screen

2. Click Add.

564

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

SNMP Agents

The Add Trap Destination page displays.

Screen 29.

Add Trap Destination screen, upper portion

3. In the Fill-in IP address and provide data for one of the three SNMP
versions section, check the Check to enable this destination box.
4. In the IP address field, enter the IP address for destination.
NOTE:

To use MultiVantage Fault Performance Management (MFPM), use
SNMP Version 1.
5. In the SNMP version 1 section, in the Community name field, type public
if you are using MFPM. If you do not use MFPM, you can enter anything
but it has to be coordinated with the receiving network management
station.
6. Press ADD to save your changes.
7. If you go back to check what the information looks like, under SNMP, click
on Configure Trap Destinations.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

565

Administering Media Servers

The updated Configure Trap Destinations page displays.

Screen 30.

Updated Configure Trap Destinations screen

Administering SNMP agents

This link provides support for administration of the co-resident SNMP master
agent and MultiVantage sub-agent.
■

Enable and disable access to the MultiVantage sub-agent

■

Enable and disable each protocol (V1, V2, V3) individually. Any
combination may be enabled.

■

Administration of the password for the ACPSNMP login

■

Enable SNMP busyout/release of ACP objects

You can use this page to allow or restrict SNMP services at the application level.
(You can use the Set LAN Security page to inhibit the reception of SNMP
messages at the network level. Both must be enabled for SNMP to function.)
This screen is divided into three sections:
1. MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent
■

Shows if the MultiVantage Management sub-agent is enabled (the
checkbox is checked).

■

Shows if the sub-agent can be used to busyout and release boards,
ports, trunk groups, and trunk members (checkbox is checked).

2. SNMP Users / Communities

566

■

Shows the status of SNMP version 1 read-only and read-write
communities. If a community has been administered, it displays.

■

Shows the status of SNMP version 2c read-only and read-write
communities. If a community has been administered, it displays.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

SNMP Agents

■

Shows the status of SNMP version 3 read-only and read-write users.
If a user has been administered, its information displays. Passwords
do not display; stars display to show a password has been
administered. If a privacy password is used, an authentication
password also must be given.

3. IP Addresses for SNMP Access
■

A list of IP addresses from which SNMP access is allowed, or

■

All IP addresses.

Each SNMP version can be enabled and disabled independently of the other
versions.
Administering SNMP versions 1 and 2c
Before you start
■

If you are using MFPM, obtain the community strings entered on the
completed VMS001 form. For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage
Fault and Performance Manager, Installation and Configuration,
555-233-138.

Instructions

To set up SNMP, we will use Versions 1 and 2c for the IP addresses.
The SNMP agents will be using the MultiVantage Fault and Performance
Manager (MFPM).
To set up versions 1 and 2c:
1. On the main page, under SNMP, click on Administer SNMP Agents.
The Administer SNMP Agents page displays.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

567

Administering Media Servers

Screen 31.

568

Administer SNMP Agents, upper portion

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

SNMP Agents

Screen 32.

Administer SNMP Agents, lower portion

2. In the MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent section, check the Check to
enable MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent box.
If checked, an SNMP manager can interact with the ACP application using
the MultiVantage sub-agent within the restrictions administered on this
screen.
If not checked, SNMP access to the ACP application is denied. Disabling
the MultiVantage sub-agent does not inhibit access to other SNMP agents
running on the server.
If you check the Check to enable busy-out / release box, the
MultiVantage sub-agent can be used to busyout and release boards, ports,
trunk groups, and trunk members.
3. In the Change Agent ACP Login Password field, enter a new
password to change the password the MultiVantage sub-agent uses to log in
to the call processing software.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

569

Administering Media Servers

4. In the Verify New Agent ACP Login Password field, repeat the new
password.
NOTE:

To use MFPM you must use both SNMP Version 1 and Version 2c.
Community strings must be set up in the special format.
5. In the SNMP Version 1 section, check the Check to enable SNMP
Version 1 box.
This is the SNMP version of the protocol to be used in communicating with
the SNMP agents on the server.
NOTE:
The Community Name fields are the authentication mechanism for

SNMP v1 and v2c. The name can contain up to 50 characters. Any
character can be used except “. There must be no spaces and the text
is case sensitive.
6. In the Community Name (read-only) field, type the name.
The user can query only for information.
Your entry must be in the format: anything!g3mgt!aliased active server
name of the switch.
NOTE:

Be sure to insert the “!” character between the name sections.
For example, spaceport!g3mgt!blanket
NOTE:

If you do not use MFPM, you can enter anything but it has to be
coordinated with the receiving network management station.
7. In the Community Name (read-write) field, type the name.
The user can query agents for information (SNMP GETSs) and send
commands to an agent (SNMP SETs).
Your entry must be in the format: anything!g3mgt!aliased active server
name of the switch.
NOTE:

You must insert the “!” character between the name sections.

570

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

SNMP Agents

For example, trumpet!g3mgt!soundblast. Notice the term ‘g3mgt’ appears
in all names.
NOTE:

If you do not use MFPM, you can enter anything but it has to be
coordinated with the receiving network management station.
NOTE:

If you are using MFPM, whatever is entered in the community string
for ‘anything’ must also be administered in MFPM. For more
information, see Avaya MultiVantage Fault and Performance
Manager, Installation and Configuration, 555-233-138.
8. In the SNMP version 2c section, check the Check to enable SNMP
Version 2c box.
9. In the Community Name (read-only) field, type the same name
assigned in step 6.
10. In the Community Name (read-write) field, type the same name
assigned in step 7.
11. In the IP Address for SNMP Access section, check the Following IP
address box.
12. In the IP address 1 field, type the IP address.
The SNMP agents on this server can be programmed to accept incoming
SNMP messages from a restricted list of SNMP managers. If an SNMP
message is received from an IP address not listed, it is dropped.
13. Repeat step 12 until all IP addresses are listed.
14. Press ENTER to save your changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

571

Administering Media Servers

Administering SNMP version 3

If you decide to use SNMP Version 3, there are three levels of security provided.
1. The user name with no password provides the same level of security as
SNMP Version 1 and Version 2c.
2. The Authentication Password field provides an enhanced level of security.
3. The Privacy Password provides an additional level of security.
Instructions

To set up SNMP, we will use Version 3 for the IP addresses.
To set up Version 3:
1. On the main page, under SNMP, click on Administer SNMP Agents.
The Administer SNMP Agents page displays.

Screen 33.

572

Administer SNMP Agents, upper portion

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

SNMP Agents

Screen 34.

Administer SNMP Agents, lower portion

2. In the MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent section, check the Check to
enable MultiVantage Management Sub-Agent box.
3. If checked, an SNMP manager can interact with the ACP application using
the MultiVantage sub-agent within the restrictions administered on this
screen.
4. If not checked, SNMP access to the ACP application is denied. Disabling
the MultiVantage sub-agent does not inhibit access to other SNMP agents
running on the server.
5. If you check the Check to enable busy-out / release box, the
MultiVantage sub-agent can be used to busyout and release boards, ports,
trunk groups, and trunk members.
6. In the Change Agent ACP Login Password field, enter a new
password to change the password the MultiVantage sub-agent uses to log in
to the call processing software.
7. In the Verify New Agent ACP Login Password field, repeat the new
password.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

573

Administering Media Servers

8. Scroll down to the SNMP Version 3 section and check the Check to
enable SNMP Version 3 box.
This is the SNMP version of the protocol to be used in communicating with
the SNMP agents on the server.
9. In the User Name field, type the user name.
The user can query only for information.
Your entry must be in any alphanumeric format and up to 50 characters in
length.
10. (Optional) In the Authentication Password field, type the security
password.
Your entry must be in any alphanumeric format and up to 50 characters in
length.
NOTE:

If you did not do step 10, you cannot step 11.
11. (Optional) In the Privacy Password field, type the security password.
12. (Optional) In the IP address 1 field, type the IP address that is allowed
to access the SNMP.
The SNMP agents on this server can be programmed to accept incoming
SNMP messages from a restricted list of SNMP managers. If an SNMP
message is received from an IP address not listed, it is dropped.
13. Repeat step 12 until all IP addresses are listed.
14. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Starting/Stopping Master Agent

The Master Agent receives SNMP requests and forwards them to the appropriate
subagent.
Instructions

Use the Start selection if you are going to use SNMP. If the Master Agent is off,
the button says Start Agent.
Use the Stop selection if you are not going to use SNMP. (This applies to MIB
access only. You can have SNMP traps enabled without MIB access activated.) If
the Master Agent is on, the button says Stop Agent.

574

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

SNMP Agents

To stop Master Agent:
1. On the main page, under SNMP, click Start/Stop Master Agent.
The Start/Stop SNMP Master Agent page displays.

Screen 35.

Start/Stop SNMP Master Agent screen

2. To stop Master Agent, click Stop Agent.
Administering ACP log-in permissions

Now that you have set up SNMP, you need the ability to display administration
commands and get system measurements.
Instructions

1. On the SAT, type change permissions acpsmp and press ENTER.
The Command Permissions Categories screen displays.
change permissions acpsnmp

Page 1

COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
Login Name: acpsnmp
COMMON COMMANDS
Display Admin. and Maint. Data? y
System Measurements? y
System Mgmt Data Transfer Only? n
ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Administer Stations? n
Administer Trunks? n

Administer Features? n
Administer Permissions? n

Additional Restrictions? n
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Maintain Stations? n
Maintain Trunks? n
Maintain System? n

555-233-506

Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Process Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Enhanced DS1: n

Issue 5 October 2002

575

Administering Media Servers

2. In the Display Admin. and Maint. Data field, type y.
3. In the System Measurements field, type y.
NOTE:

To be able to do busy out and release commands, do the following step.
4. In the Maintain Stations field, type y.
5. In the Maintain Trunks field, type y.
6. In the Maintain System field, type y.
7. In the Maintain Switch Circuit Packs field, type y.
8. In the Maintain Process Circuit Packs field, type y.
9. In the Maintain Enhanced DS1 field, type y.
10. Press ENTER to save your changes.

576

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Screen reference

AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table
Your switch compares dialed S8100 Media Server with CMC1 numbers with the
dialed strings on this table and determines the route pattern for the number.
change aar analysis

Page 1 of X
AAR DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Percent Full:

Dialed
String
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________

Screen 36.

555-233-506

Total
Min Max
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __

Route
Pattern
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Call
Type
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Node
Num
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

___

ANI
Reqd
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

AAR Digit Analysis Table

Issue 5 October 2002 577

Screen reference

change ars analysis

Page 1 of X
ARS DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE
Location: ___

Dialed
String
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________

Screen 37.

Total
Min Max
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __
__ __

Route
Pattern
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Call
Type
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Node
Num
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Percent Full:

___

ANI
Reqd
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

ARS Digit Analysis Table

ANI Reqd
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if ANI is required on incoming R2-MFC or Russian
MF ANI calls. This field applies only if the Request Incoming
ANI (non-AAR/ARS) field on the
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters screen
is n.

r

Allowed only if the Allow ANI Restriction on AAR/ARS field
on the Feature Related System Parameters screen is y. Use to
drop a call on a Russian Shuttle trunk or Russian Rotary trunk
if the ANI request fails. Other types of trunks treat r as y.

Call Type (for AAR only)

Enter the call type associated with each dialed string. Call types indicate
numbering requirements on different trunk networks. ISDN Protocols are listed in
the table below.

578

Valid entries

Usage

aar

Regular AAR calls

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table

Valid entries

Usage

intl

The Route Index contains public network ISDN trunks that
require international type of number encodings.

pubu

The Route Index contains public network ISDN trunks that
require unknown type of number encodings.

lev0 to lev2

Specify ISDN Private Numbering Plan (PNP) number
formats. (See ‘‘ISDN Numbering — Private’’ on page 970
for more information.)

ISDN Protocol
Call Type

Numbering Plan Identifier

Type of Numbering

aar

E.164(1)

national(2)

intl

E.164(1)

international(1)

pubu

E.164(1)

unknown(0)

lev0

PNP(9)

local(4)

lev1

PNP(9)

Regional Level 1(2)

lev2

PNP(9)

Regional Level 2(1)

Call Type (for ARS only)
Valid
entries

China # 1
Call Type

Usage

alrt

alerts attendant consoles or other digital
phones when an emergency call is placed

normal

emer

emergency call

normal

fnpa

10-digit North American Numbering Plan
(NANP) call (11 digits with Prefix Digit “1”)

attendant

hnpa

7-digit NANP call

normal

intl

public-network international number

toll-auto

iop

international operator

attendant

locl

public-network local number

normal

lpvt

local private

normal

natl

non-NANP

normal

npvt

national private

normal

nsvc

national service

normal

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

579

Screen reference

Valid
entries

Usage

China # 1
Call Type

op

operator

attendant

pubu

public-network number (E.164)-unknown

normal

svcl

national(2)

toll-auto

svct

national(2)

normal

svft

service call, first party control

local

svfl

service call, first party control

toll

Dialed String

User-dialed numbers are matched to the dialed string entry that most closely
matches the dialed number. For example, if a user dials 297-1234 and the AAR or
ARS Digit Analysis Table has dialed string entries of 297-1 and 297-123, the
match is on the 297-123 entry.
An exact match is made on a user-dialed number and dialed string entries with
wildcard characters and an equal number of digits. For example, if a user dials
424, and there is a 424 entry and an X24 entry, the match is on the 424 entry.
Valid
entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter up to 18 digits that the switch analyzes.

*, x, X

wildcard characters

Location (for the ARS Digit Analysis Table)

This is a display-only field on the ARS Digit Analysis Table.
Valid
display

580

Usage

1 to 44

Defines the switch location that uses this ARS Digit Analysis
Table.

all

Indicates that this ARS Digit Analysis Table is the default for all
port network (cabinet) locations. Appears only if the Multiple
Locations field is n on System Parameters Customer Options.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table

Max
Valid entries

Usage

Between Min and
28

Enter the maximum number of user-dialed digits the
system collects to match to the dialed string.

Valid entries

Usage

Between 1 and
Max

Enter the minimum number of user-dialed digits the
system collects to match to the dialed string.

Min

Node Number
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 999 or blank

Enter the number of the destination node in a private
network if you are using node number routing or DCS.
If you complete this field, leave the Route Index field
blank.

Percent Full

Displays the percentage (0 to 100) of the system’s memory resources that have
been used by AAR/ARS. If the figure is close to 100%, you can free up memory
resources.
Route Pattern

Enter the route number you want the switch to use for this dialed string.
Valid entries

Usage

p1 to p2000

Specifies the route index number established on the Partition
Routing Table

1 to 640

Specifies the route pattern used to route the call.

1 to 999

Specifies the route pattern used to route the call. For S8300
Media Server only.

r1 to r32

Specifies the remote home numbering plan area table.
Complete this field if RHNPA translations are required for
the corresponding dialed string.

node

Designates node number routing

deny

Blocks the call

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

581

Screen reference

AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table
Your system uses the AAR or ARS Digit Conversion Table to change a dialed
number for more efficient routing. Digits may be inserted or deleted from the
dialed number. For instance, you can tell the switch to delete a 1 and an area code
on calls to one of your locations, and avoid long-distance charges by routing the
call over your private network.

change aar digit-conversion

Page 1 of 2

AAR DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE
Percent Full: ___

Matching Pattern
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

Screen 38.

Min
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Max
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Del
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Replacement String
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

Net
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

AAR Digit Conversion Table

change ars digit-conversion

Page 1 of 2

ARS DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE
Location: 1
Matching Pattern
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

Screen 39.

Conv ANI Req
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Min
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Max
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Del
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Replacement String
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

Percent Full: ___
Net
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Conv ANI Req
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

ARS Digit Conversion Table
NOTE:

When you access the screen with display or change, the entries are sorted
in the order of the matching pattern. Digits appear before characters.

582

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table

ANI Req

This field applies only if the Request Incoming ANI (non-AAR/ARS) field on the
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters screen is n.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to require ANI on incoming R2-MFC or Russian MF
ANI calls.

r

Allowed only if the Allow ANI Restriction on AAR/ARS
field is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Use to drop a call on a Russian Shuttle trunk or Russian
Rotary trunk if the ANI request fails. Other types of trunks
treat r as y.

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow additional digit conversion.

Conv

Del
Valid entries

Usage

0 to Min

Enter the number of digits you want the system to
delete from the beginning of the dialed string.

Location (for ARS only)

This is a display-only field. Values other than all appear only if the Multiple
Locations field on the System Parameters Customer Options is y.
Valid
display

Usage

1 to 44

Defines the switch location for this ARS Digit Conversion
Table.

all

Indicates that this ARS Digit Conversion Table is the default for
all port network (cabinet) locations.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

583

Screen reference

Matching Pattern

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the number you want the switch to match to dialed
numbers. If a Prefix Digit 1 is required for 10-digit direct
distance dialing (DDD) numbers, be sure the matching
pattern begins with a 1.

(1 to 18
digits)
*, x, X

wildcard characters

Max
Valid entries

Usage

Min to 28

Enter the maximum number of user-dialed digits the
system collects to match to this Matching Pattern.

Valid entries

Usage

1 to Max

Enter the minimum number of user-dialed digits the
system collects to match to this Matching Pattern.

Min

Net

Enter the switch network used to analyze the converted number.
Valid entries

Usage

ext, aar, ars

Analyze the converted digit-string as an extension number,
an AAR address, or an ARS address.

Percent Full

Displays the percentage (0 to 100) of the system’s memory resources that have
been used by AAR/ARS. If the figure is close to 100%, you can free-up memory
resources.

584

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Abbreviated Dialing List

Replacement String
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the digits that replace the deleted portion of the
dialed number. Leave this field blank to simply delete the
digits.

(1 to 18
digits)
*
#

Use # to indicate end-of-dialing. It must be at the end of the
digit-string.

blank

Abbreviated Dialing List
This screen establishes system-wide or personal lists for speed dialing.
Enhanced List

The Enhanced Abbreviated Dialing List can be accessed by users to place local,
long-distance, and international calls; to activate/deactivate features; or to access
remote computer equipment.
NOTE:

The Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List field must be enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen before you can program an
Enhanced List.
You can define only one Enhanced Abbreviated Dialing List in the system. Before
you assign numbers to the list, you must define whether you want a 3-digit or
4-digit enhanced list on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. If you
select 3-digit enhanced list, the list can be up to 10 separate screens numbered
from 0-9 that allow you to define up to 1000 numbers. If you select a 4-digit
enhanced list, the list can include up to 100 separate screens numbered 0-99 that
allow you to assign up to 10,000 numbers.
If you want your attendants to use abbreviated dialing, you must also administer
the Console Parameters screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

585

Screen reference

Page 1

display abbreviated-dialing enhanced
ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST
Enhanced List
Size (multiple of 5): 5
DIAL CODE
100: ________________________
101: ________________________
102: ________________________
103: ________________________
104: ________________________
105: ________________________

Screen 40.

Page 1 of 4

Privileged? n

Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List

See Abbreviated Dialing for a detailed description of the special characters.
DIAL CODE

Enter the number you want the system to dial when users enter this dial code.
While the system is waiting, a call progress tone receiver is tied up, and, since
there are a limited number of receivers in the system, outgoing calling capability
may be impaired.
Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned.

586

Valid entries

Usage

Digits 0 to 9

Up to 24 characters

* (star)

Part of FAC

# (pound)

Part of FAC

~p

Pause 1.5 seconds

~w

Wait for dial tone

~m

Change to outpulse DTMF digits at the end-to-end rate

~s

Start suppressing display of the digits being outpulsed

~W

Wait indefinitely for dial tone. Use this only if network
response time is more than 30 seconds. Not available for
S8300 Media Server.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Abbreviated Dialing List

Privileged

Indicates whether users of this list can dial any number in the list, regardless of the
COR of the station from which they dial.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Set this field to n if you want the system to verify that this
station is allowed to dial this number.

Size (multiple of 5)

The number of dial code list entries you want in this list.
Valid entries

Usage

5 to 100, in multiples of 5

Up to 100 entries per screen

Group List

This screen implements the Abbreviated Dialing Group List. The Group Lists are
controlled by the System Administrator. Up to 100 numbers can be entered per
group list that can be accessed by users to place local, long-distance, and
international calls; to activate/deactivate features; or to access remote computer
equipment.
Field descriptions for page 1
change abbreviated-dialing group
ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST
Group List: ____
Size (multiple of 5):
5 Program Ext: ________
DIAL CODE
01: ________________
02: ________________
03: ________________
04: ________________
05: ________________

Screen 41.

Page 1 of X

Privileged? n

Abbreviated Dialing Group List

DIAL CODE

Enter the number you want the system to dial when users enter this dial code.
While the system is waiting, a call progress tone receiver is tied up, and, since
there are a limited number of receivers in the system, outgoing calling capability
may be impaired.
Only 1 through 5 display initially. If you enter a number greater than 5 in the Size
field, the system increases the number of dial codes to the number you specified.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

587

Screen reference

Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned.
Valid entries

Usage

Digits 0 to 9

Up to 24 characters

* (star)

Part of FAC

# (pound)

Part of FAC

~p

Pause 1.5 seconds

~w

Wait for dial tone

~m

Change to outpulse DTMF digits at the end-to-end rate

~s

Start suppressing display of the digits being outpulsed

~W

Wait indefinitely for dial tone. Use this only if network
response time is more than 30 seconds. Not available for
S8300 Media Server.

Group List

This is a display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command such as add or change.
Valid entries

Usage

Display-only field

Enter a group number when completing a paper screen.

Privileged
Valid entries

Usage

y

If y is entered, the calling phone’s class of restriction (COR)
is never checked and any number in the group list will be
dialed.

n

If n is entered, the calling phone’s COR is checked to
determine if the number can be dialed.

Program Ext

Enter the extension that you want to give permission to program the Group List.
Size (multiple of 5)

Enter the number of abbreviated dialing numbers you want to assign in multiples
of 5, up to 100.

588

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Abbreviated Dialing List

Personal List

This screen establishes a personal dialing list for phone/data module users. The
personal list must first be assigned to the phone by the System Administrator
before the phone user can add entries in the list. The lists can be accessed by users
to place local, long-distance, and international calls; to activate/deactivate
features; or to access remote computer equipment.
change abbreviated-dialing personal
ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST

Page 1 of 4

Personal List: ________ List Number: ___
Size (multiple of 5): 5
DIAL CODE
01: ________________
02: ________________
03: ________________
04: ________________
05: ________________
06: ________________
07: ________________
08: ________________
09: ________________
00: ________________

Screen 42.

Abbreviated Dialing Personal List screen

DIAL CODE

Enter the number you want the system to dial when users enter this dial code.
While the system is waiting, a call progress tone receiver is tied up, and, since
there are a limited number of receivers in the system, outgoing calling capability
may be impaired.
Only 1 through 5 display initially. If you enter a number greater than 5 in the Size
field, the system increases the number of dial codes to the number you specified.
Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned.
Valid entries

Usage

Digits 0 to 9

Up to 24 characters

* (star)

Part of FAC

# (pound)

Part of FAC

~p

Pause 1.5 seconds

~w

Wait for dial tone

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

589

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

~m

Change to outpulse DTMF digits at the end-to-end rate

~s

Start suppressing display of the digits being outpulsed

~W

Wait indefinitely for dial tone. Only use this if network
response time is more than 30 seconds.

List Number

A display-only field indicating which of the three personal lists is defined for the
phone.
Personal List

A display-only field indicating the extension of the phone that will use this list.
Size (multiple of 5)

Enter the number of abbreviated dialing numbers you want to assign in multiples
of 5, up to 100.
System List

This screen implements a system abbreviated-dialing list. Only one system list
can be assigned and is administered by the System Administrator. The list can be
accessed by users to place local, long-distance, and international calls; to
activate/deactivate features; or to access remote computer equipment.

590

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Abbreviated Dialing List

Page 1 of 4 of the screen
display abbreviated-dialing system
ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST
System List
Size (multiple of 5): 5
Privileged? n
DIAL CODE
01: ________________
02: ________________
03: ________________
04: ________________
05: ________________
06: ________________
07: ________________
08: ________________
09: ________________
10: ________________
11: ________________
12: ________________
13: ________________
14: ________________
15: ________________

Screen 43.

Page 1 of X

Abbreviated Dialing System List screen

DIAL CODE

Enter the number you want the system to dial when users enter this dial code.
While the system is waiting, a call progress tone receiver is tied up, and, since
there are a limited number of receivers in the system, outgoing calling capability
may be impaired.
Only 1 through 5 display initially. If you enter a number greater than 5 in the Size
field, the system increases the number of dial codes to the number you specified.
Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned.
Valid entries

Usage

Digits 0 to 9

Up to 24 characters

* (star)

Part of FAC

# (pound)

Part of FAC

~p

Pause 1.5 seconds

~w

Wait for dial tone

~m

Change to outpulse DTMF digits at the end-to-end rate

~s

Start suppressing display of the digits being outpulsed

~W

Wait indefinitely for dial tone. Use this only if network
response time is more than 30 seconds.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

591

Screen reference

Privileged

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if the originating party’s class of restriction (COR) is
never checked and any number in the list can be dialed.

n

Enter n if the COR is to be checked to determine if the
number can be dialed.

Size (multiple of 5)

Enter the number of abbreviated dialing numbers you want to assign in multiples
of 5, up to 100.
7103A Button List

This screen assigns abbreviated dialing numbers to the 7103A phone buttons. The
entries can then be accessed by 7103A phone users to place local, long-distance,
and international calls; activate/deactivate features; or to access remote computer
equipment. This screen applies only to 7103A fixed feature phones. Only one
7103A abbreviated dialing list can be implemented in the system and it applies to
all 7103A fixed feature phones in the system. This list is controlled by the System
Administrator.
Pages 1 through 4 of the screen

display abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons
ABBREVIATED DIALING LIST
7103A Button List

Page 1 of 1

DIAL CODE (FOR THE 7103A STATION BUTTONS)
1: ________________________
5. ________________________
2: ________________________
6. ________________________
3: ________________________
7. ________________________
4: ________________________
8. ________________________

Screen 44.

592

Abbreviated Dialing List — 7103A Button List

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Access Endpoint

DIAL CODE

Enter the number you want to assign to each dial code (button). Any additions or
changes apply to all 7103A fixed feature phones. While the system is waiting, a
call progress tone receiver is tied up, and, since there are a limited number of
receivers in the system, outgoing calling capability may be impaired.
Vector Directory Number extension may also be assigned.
Valid entries

Usage

Digits 0 to 9

Up to 24 characters

* (star)

Part of FAC

# (pound)

Part of FAC

~p

Pause 1.5 seconds

~w

Wait for dial tone

~m

Mark

~s

Start suppressing display of the digits being outpulsed

~W

Wait indefinitely for dial tone. Use this only if network
response time is more than 30 seconds. Not available for
S8300 Media Server.

Access Endpoint
This screen administers Access Endpoints and Wideband Access endpoints.
NOTE:

You can administer Wideband Access Endpoints only if, on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Wideband Switching field
is y.
An Access Endpoint is a nonsignaling trunk that neither responds to signaling nor
generates signaling. Access Endpoints eliminate the need to dedicate an entire
trunk group for the access of a single trunk by providing the capability to assign
an extension number to a single trunk.
An Access Endpoint can be specified as the Originator or Destination endpoint of
an administered connection.
A Wideband Access Endpoint (WAE) is an endpoint application connected to
line-side non-ISDN T1 or E1 facilities and, like Access Endpoints, have no
signaling interface with the system. For information on endpoint applications
connected to line-side ISDN-PRI facilities, see ‘‘PRI Endpoint’’ on page 1080.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

593

Screen reference

The WAE is defined by a starting port (DS0) and a width specifying the number of
adjacent nonsignaling DS0s (positioned within a DS1 facility) that make up the
endpoint. This width may be between 2 and 31 adjacent DS0s.
NOTE:

Access Endpoints and Wideband Access Endpoints consume the same
resources that trunks use. Thus, the sum of Access Endpoints and trunks
cannot exceed the maximum number of trunks available in your system
configuration.
Field descriptions for page 1

add access-endpoint next

Page

1 of

1

ACCESS ENDPOINT
Extension: 30001
(Starting) Port:_______
Communication Type: voice-grade-data
Name:_____________
COR: 1
TN: 1

Screen 45.

COS: 1
ITC: restricted

Access Endpoint screen

Communication Type
Valid entries

Usage

voice-grade-data

For an analog tie trunk access endpoint.

56k-data
64k-data

For a DS1 access endpoint enter as appropriate
(64k-data is not allowed for robbed-bit trunks).

wideband

For a Wideband access endpoint

COR

The COR is administered so that only an administered connection (AC) endpoint
can be connected to another AC endpoint.

594

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 95

Enter the appropriate class of restriction (COR) number.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Access Endpoint

COS

The COS is administered (see ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672) so that the use of
the Call Forwarding All Calls feature for access endpoints is prohibited.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 15

Enter the appropriate COS number.

Extension

A display-only field showing the extension number as specified in the command
line, or shows the next available extension number if next was entered on the
command line. This is the extension number assigned to the nonsignaling trunk
and used to access the trunk endpoint.
ITC (Information Transfer Capability)

This field is used to determine the type of transmission facilities to be used for
ISDN calls originating from this endpoint. Displays when the Communication
Type field is 56k-data, 64k-data, or Wideband.
When adding an access endpoint with the ITC administered as unrestricted, its
associated port has to be a channel of a DS1 circuit pack with the Zero Code
Suppression field administered as B8ZS. If the port is not a channel of a DS1
circuit pack with its Zero Code Suppression field administered as B8ZS, the end
validation fails and the screen submission is rejected. The cursor is moved to ITC
with the following error message:
An unrestricted access endpoint can only be from B8ZS DS1
circuit pack.

When adding an access endpoint with the ITC administered as restricted, its
associated port can be a channel from a DS1 circuit pack with the Zero Code
Suppression field administered as ZCS or B8ZS.
For an existing access endpoint, ITC can only be changed from restricted to
unrestricted if its associated port is a channel of a DS1 circuit pack with its Zero
Code Suppression field administered as B8ZS. If the port is not a channel of a
DS1 circuit pack with its Zero Code Suppression field administered as B8ZS, the
end validation fails and the screen submission is rejected. The cursor is moved to
ITC with the following error message:
An unrestricted access endpoint can use only B8ZS DS1
circuit pack

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

595

Screen reference

Without this end validation, a user could administer an access endpoint as
unrestricted when in fact it is restricted, that is, its associated port is a member of a
DS1 circuit pack that uses ZCS data transmission.
Valid entries

Usage

unrestricted

When unrestricted, only unrestricted transmission facilities (b8zs)
will be used to complete the call. An unrestricted facility is a
transmission facility that does not enforce 1’s density digital
transmission (that is, digital information is sent exactly as is).
For Wideband Access Endpoints, enter unrestricted.

restricted

When restricted, either restricted (zcs-ami) or unrestricted
transmission facilities is used to complete the call. A restricted facility
is a transmission facility that enforces 1’s density digital transmission
(that is, a sequence of eight digital zeros is converted to a sequence of
seven zeros and a digital one) via zcs coding on DS1 circuit pack.

Name

Enter an name for the endpoint.
(Starting) Port

Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number.

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier.

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number.

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number.

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31

596

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Access Endpoint

Valid entries

Usage

1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit number
(port) 12.
NOTE:

For Wideband Access Endpoints, analog tie trunks cannot be used and the
DS1 Interface circuit pack, Version C or later, must be used.
The DS1 circuit number corresponds to the channel that will carry the data traffic.
Channels 1 through 31 (DS1 Interface only) or channels 1 through 24 (DS1 Tie
Trunk, DS1 Interface, or DS1 Interface (32) circuit packs) can be used when the
DS1 Signaling Type field is robbed-bit or isdn-ext. For Common Channel or
ISDN-PRI signaling, channel use is limited to channels 1 through 30 (DS1
Interface circuit pack only) or channels 1 through 23 (DS1 Interface (32) or DS1
Interface ). A channel can be administered as an access endpoint regardless of the
DS1 signaling type.
TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 100

Enter the Tenant Partition number.

Width

Appears if the Communication Type field is wideband. This field cannot be
blank.
Valid entries

Usage

2 to 31

Enter the number of adjacent DS0 ports beginning with the
specified Starting Port, that make up the WAE.

6

A width of 6 defines a 384 Kbps WAE.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

597

Screen reference

Administered Connection
This screen assigns an end-to-end Administered Connection (AC) between two
access endpoints or data endpoints. The AC is established automatically by the
system whenever the system restarts or the AC is due to be active. See
‘‘Administered connections’’ on page 1454 and ‘‘Access Endpoint’’ on page 593
for additional information.
Field descriptions for page 1

change administered-connection
ADMINISTERED CONNECTION
Connection Number: 1
Enable? y
Originator: ________
Destination: __________________________________
Name: __________________

Page 1 of 1

AUTHORIZED TIME OF DAY
Continuous? n
Sun? n Mon? n Tue? n Wed? n Thu? n
Start Time: 00:00
Duration: 000:00

Fri? n

Sat? n

MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS
Alarm Type:
Priority:

Screen 46.

warning
5

Alarm Threshold: 5
Retry Interval: 2
Auto Restoration? y

Administered Connection screen

Connection Number

This is a display-only field showing an unassigned AC number when the screen is
accessed using an administration command such as change or display.
Destination

Used to route the AC to a desired endpoint. Enter the address of the destination
access or data endpoint. This endpoint is the terminating party of the AC and need
not be local to the switch on which the AC is assigned. The entry must be
consistent with the local switch’s dial plan (that is, the first digits are assigned as

598

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administered Connection

an extension, feature access code, or trunk access code, or DDD Number). If a
local extension is entered, it must be assigned to either an access or data endpoint.
Abbreviated Dialing entries may be used in this field.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter the assigned access endpoint/data module extension or
valid dialed string.
Enable

Provides the administered connection.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Indicates an attempt will be made to establish the AC when
the AC is due to be active.

n

The AC will not be made or if it is up, it will drop.

Name
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27 alphanumeric
characters.
Up to 15 alphanumeric characters
(S8300 Media Server, S8700
IP-Connect only)

Enter a short identification of the AC.

Originator

Enter the assigned access endpoint/data module extension.
Data Line circuit pack
■

Asynchronous EIA 232C compatible equipment

Digital Line circuit pack connections, including:

555-233-506

■

MPDM (700D), MTDM (700B, 700C, 700E), 7400D data module

■

7400A, 7400B, 7400C HSL, 8400B data module

■

7401D phone with 7400B or 8400B data module

■

7403D/7405D/7407D/7410D/7434D phone with DTDM or 7400B or
8400B data module

■

7404D or 7406D phone

■

510D personal terminal

Issue 5 October 2002

599

Screen reference

■

515 BCT, 615 BCT, or 715 BCT terminal

■

PC/switch connection

ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack connections, including:
■

7500 data module

■

7505D/7506D/7507D phone with ADM

Valid entries

Usage

Assigned access endpoint/data
module extension

The endpoint must be local to the switch on
which the AC is administered. Nonsignaling
DS1 trunk or analog tie trunk.

Authorized Time of Day
Continuous

The connection will be up all the time or re-established if the connection goes
down.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Indicates that the AC is continuous (that is, not scheduled to
be active at a certain time). If y is entered, the seven Start
Days and associated Duration fields do not appear.

n

Displays the Start Days fields.

Duration

Enter the period of time that the scheduled AC should remain active. This period
is specified in two fields separated by a colon. The maximum duration is 167
hours and 59 minutes (that is, 1 minute less than 1 week). Only appears if the
Continuous field is n.

600

Valid entries

Usage

000 through
167

For the hour field.

00 through 59

For the minute field.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administered Connection

Start Days (Sun through Sat)

These fields indicate only the days on which an attempt will be made to establish
the AC and not necessarily the days it is active. A scheduled AC may be active
over a number of days, and, in this situation, these fields should be used only to
specify the days on which the AC starts and not other days on which the AC may
be active. Only appears if the Continuous field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y in each of the required days of the week fields to
indicate that an attempt will be made to establish the AC.

n

Displays the day fields.

Start Time

Only appears if the Continuous field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

00:00 through 23:59

Enter the time of the day when an attempt
should begin to establish a scheduled AC. The
time is specified in two fields separated by a
colon.

Miscellaneous Parameters
Alarm Threshold

Only appears if an entry in the Alarm Type field is other than none. Enter the
number of times an attempt to establish or reestablish an AC must fail
consecutively before an AC alarm generates. (An alarm will be generated after the
fourth retry has failed; thus, with the retry interval of 2 minutes, an alarm will be
generated approximately 8 minutes after the first failure occurs.)
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 10

An alarm generates on the first failure if this field is 1.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

601

Screen reference

Alarm Type

Enter the type of alarm to be generated if the AC cannot be initially established, or
fails and cannot be reestablished, and the number of consecutive failures equals
the alarm threshold. All AC alarms and the errors that caused the alarms are
recorded in the system’s alarm and error log. In addition, a status lamp associated
with an attendant console or phone feature button (ac-alarm) may be used to
indicate the AC alarm.
Valid entries

Usage

major

Failures that cause critical degradation of service and require
immediate attention.

minor

Failures that cause some degradation of service, but do not
render a crucial portion of the system inoperable. This
condition requires action, but its consequences are not
immediate. Problems might be impairing service to a few
trunks or stations or interfering with one feature across the
entire system.

warning

Failures that cause no significant degradation of service or
failures in equipment external to the system. Warning alarms
are not reported to the attendant console or INADS.

none

The alarm notification may be disabled for this AC.

Auto Restoration
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to indicate an attempt is to be made to reestablish an
AC that failed. Auto restoration is available only for an AC
that is established over an ISDN Software Defined Data
Network (SDDN) trunk group. A y in this field is ignored in
all other situations.

Priority

Enter a number that is to be used to determine the order in which ACs are to be
established.

602

Valid entries

Usage

1 through 8

1 is the highest and 8 the lowest priority.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Alias Station

Retry Interval
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 60

Enter the number of minutes between attempts to establish or
reestablish the AC.

Alias Station
This screen allows you to configure the system so that you can administer new
phone types that are not supported by your system software. This screen maps
new telephone models to a supported telephone model. This mapping does not
guarantee compatibility, but allows nonsupported models to be administered and
tracked by their own names.
Some administrators also use this screen to “name” non-telephone devices. For
example, you know that you can add a modem to your system by simply
administering the extension as the standard analog type 2500. But, if you listed
your stations, how would you know which extensions are modems? Instead, you
could use the Alias screen to create a ‘modem’ alias to type 2500 and enter
modem in the Type field for every modem you add to your system. For more
information, see ‘‘Adding a fax or modem’’ on page 109.
Tip:

When you upgrade a system that uses an alias set type to a new release, the
system determines if the aliased type is supported in the new release (is now
a native set type). When you review the Alias Station screen, you may see
alias types that have become native. If the type is now native, the last
character of the aliased set type becomes a “#.”

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

603

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 1
change alias station

Page 1 of 1
ALIAS STATION
Alias Set Type
Supported Set Type
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
’#’ indicates previously aliased set type is now native

Screen 47.

Alias Station screen

Alias Set Type

Enter up to a 5-character name for the non-supported phone type that you want to
alias to a similar supported telephone type. Do not use blank characters.
Supported Set Type

Enter a supported phone type that you want to map (or alias) to the alias set type.
Valid supported phone types are listed in Table 17 on page 1162.
NOTE:

Data Communication Protocol (DCP) telephone types must be aliased to
DCP telephone types, hybrid types to hybrid types, and analog to analog
types.

Alphanumeric Dialing Table
This screen associates alpha-names to dialed digit strings. This allows telephone
users to place a data call by simply typing the alpha-name. Users need only
remember far-end alpha-names instead of the actual digit strings.
The screen consists of paired Alpha-name/Mapped String fields. Entries may be
made in any order on the screen. However, before the screen is displayed for
changing or reviewing, the entries in the table are sorted alphanumerically by the
alpha-name. All entries will be moved to the beginning of the table, leaving all
blank entries at the end.

604

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Alphanumeric Dialing Table

Field descriptions for page 1
change alphanumeric-dial-table
ALPHANUMERIC DIALING TABLE
XXX of XXX administered
Alpha-name
Mapped String
| Alpha-name
|
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________
____________ ______________________ | _____________

Screen 48.

Page 1 of 2

Mapped String
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________
______________________

Alphanumeric Dial Table screen

Alpha-name

All alpha-names in the table must be unique and cannot be referenced in their own
“Mapped String”. The alpha-names can be used in any other “Mapped String” and
multiple times in a “Mapped String”.
Valid entries

Usage

From 1 to 8 alphanumeric
characters

The entry must start with an alphabetic
character and may not have blank spaces
between characters.

Mapped String

Enter from 1 to 24 characters that may contain alphanumeric, readability,
delimiters, and/or special characters. The entry is used to generate the final dialing
string and can include Facility Access Codes.
NOTE:

A Mapped String may not contain an Alpha-Name whose Mapped String
also contains an Alpha-Name.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

605

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

Digits 0
through 9

Numeric

A through Z,
a through z

Alpha (note uppercase entries are mapped to lowercase)

(

Character delimiters used for easy reading of the dial string

)

Delimiters consisting of both readability and special
characters are used to separate tokens of “alpha-names” or
numeric sub-strings. For example, “(205) mt-1234+0000”

/
+
%

“,”
space
Each treated as a numeric

#
*

Treated as a readability character

^

Announcements/Audio Sources
Use this screen to assign announcements to circuit packs and port locations.

change announcements

Page 1 of X
ANNOUNCEMENTS/AUDIO SOURCES

Ann.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Ext.
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________

Screen 49.

606

Type
COR
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_
_________ 1_

TN
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_
1_

Name
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________
________________________

Q
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

QLen
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Pr
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Rt
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Port
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Announcements/Audio Sources

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Announcements/Audio Sources

COR
Valid entries

Usage

0 – 95

Enter the class of restriction (COR) you want associated with
this announcement

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 8 digits

Enter the extension you assign to this announcement. The
following screens can reference this extension: Hunt Group,
Coverage Path, Trunk Group (Incoming Destination and
Night Destination), Vector, Feature-Related System
Parameters (DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment, Controlled
Restriction)

Ext

Name
Valid entries

Usage

up to 27-character
alpha-numeric filename

Describe the announcement message.

(no ., /, :, *, ?, <, >, \, .wav,
or blanks in this field for
VAL circuit packs only)

For TN2501AP and Avaya MultiVantage™
S8100 Media Server with CMC1 Media
Gateway ISSPA announcements, this field is
required. The value in this field becomes the
filename of the announcement.
The .wav file extension, which is part of the
filename stored on the circuit pack, does not
appear. Do not enter .wav as part of the
filename.
Names on a single VAL circuit pack must be
unique. The system checks for duplicate
filenames on the same VAL circuit pack.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

607

Screen reference

Port

For External Announcements (analog, Lineside T1/E1, or Aux. Trunk). Enter the
necessary characters in the aaxssyy format (where aa = the cabinet number, x =
the carrier, ss = the slot number, and yy = the circuit number).
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number.

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect)
A through E

Third character is the carrier.

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number.

00 through 32

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number.

For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit number
(port) 12.
For Integrated Announcements (TN750 or TN2501AP (VAL) circuit pack). Enter
the necessary characters in the aaxss format (where aa = the cabinet number, x =
the carrier, and ss = the slot number).
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number.

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect)
A through E

Third character is the carrier.

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number.

For example, 01A06 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, and slot 06.

608

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Announcements/Audio Sources

For ISSPA.
Valid entries

Usage

1A13

Denotes the embedded announcement in S8100
Media Server with CMC1 Media Gateway, or
S8100 Media Server with G600 Media Gateway

For G700 Media Gateway (VVAL) circuit pack). Enter the necessary characters in
the ggV9 format (where gg = the gateway number and V9 = embedded
announcements).
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 30

Media gateway number.

For example, 10V9 is gateway 10.
Pr

When the Type is field analog, ds1, or aux-trunk, N/A appears in this field.
Valid
entries

Usage

y

Enter y to protect the integrated announcement from being
deleted or changed by any user. For VAL, after an
announcement file resides on the circuit pack (recorded or FTP
transfer), you can set this field to y to protect the file
(read-only).

n

Enter n to allow only users with a console permission COS to
change or delete an announcement. For VAL the default is n,
meaning that the announcement file is read-write. Use this
value when you initially administer the announcement.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

609

Screen reference

Q (Queue)
Valid
entries
y

Usage

Enter y to queue calls for the announcement if the Type field is
integrated, integ-rep or aux-trunk. The caller is always
connected to the beginning of the announcement. Enter y for
ACD and vectoring delay announcements. Call centers should
always use this option.

n

No queue and no barge-in. The caller is always connected to
the beginning of the announcement. The announcement does
not play if a port is not available.

b

Enter b to set up barge-in if the Type field is integrated,
integ-rep or aux-trunk. Callers are connected to the
announcement at any time while it is playing.
NOTE:

The same non-barge-in announcement can be played
through more than one port (or all ports) of an integrated
circuit pack. The initial request to play an announcement
selects an available port on the board on which the
announcement resides. If there are additional requests to
play the announcement while it is playing on another
port(s), another port is selected. If all ports are busy, new
requests to play announcements go to the integrated
announcement system queue (Q field must be y).
Otherwise, the request to play is denied, and processing
continues without the caller hearing the announcement.
When a port becomes available, all queued calls (up to
the platform “calls connected” limit) are connected at the
same time to hear the announcement play from the
beginning.
A barge-in announcement starts playing when first
requested and continues playing through a port, repeating
until there are no more requests. Call processing
simultaneously connects calls to the playing barge-in
announcement. Each call remains connected until the
requesting feature operation removes the call (for
example, wait step times out). Barge-in type
announcements never select another port to play the
same announcement once it is playing on a specific port.

610

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Announcements/Audio Sources

QLen (Queue Length)

The queue length is the number of calls that can queue for this announcement. The
maximum number of queues allowed depends on your system configuration.
The QLen field applies if the Q field is y and the Type field is analog, ds1 or
aux-trunk. When the Type field is integrated or integ-rep, N/A appears in this
field. Integrated announcements have a pre-set queue length.
Valid entries

Usage

The maximum number your
system allows

Number of calls that can be queued for
this announcement

Rt

Enter the recording rate speed (in 1000 bits/second) for integrated
announcements. A different recording speed may be used for each integrated
announcement. When the Type field is analog, ds1 or aux-trunk, N/A appears in
this field.
TN750 or ISSPA.
Valid
entries

Usage

16

16 kbps (8 minutes and 32 seconds of announcement time per
circuit pack or 1 hour and 24 minutes for 10 circuit packs for
the TN750; for the ISSPA, there are 240 minutes of storage
time). This rate does not provide a high-quality recording.
Avaya does not recommend this for customer announcements,
but it is adequate for VDN of Origin announcements.

32

32 kbps (4 minutes and 16 seconds of total announcement time
for the TN750; for the ISSPA, there are 120 minutes of storage
time).

64

64 kbps (for 2 minutes and 8 seconds of announcement time
per circuit pack or 42 minutes for 10 circuit packs for the
TN750; for the ISSPA, there are 60 minutes of storage time).
This is the default for VAL.

VAL or VVAL.
Valid
entries
64

Usage

VAL provides 10 minutes storage as the default and 60
minutes with the VAL Maximum Capacity field.
VVAL provides 20 minutes regardless of the setting of the
VAL Maximum Capacity field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

611

Screen reference

TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 100

Enter the Tenant Partition number, if any.

Type

Enter the type of announcement you want to assign to this extension number.
If you enter integrated or integ-rep, complete the Q, Protect, Rate, and Port
fields. If you enter analog, ds1-fd, ds1-sa, ds1-ops, or aux-trunk, complete
QLen (if Q is y) and Port.

612

Valid entries

Usage

analog

Use to play announcements from an external device for a
specific period and hang up when finished. When the device
hangs up, the caller hears a click. Connects to switch through
analog port. Ringing starts playback.

analog-m

Use for continuous playing music or audio source from an
external announcement device.

analog-fd

Use to play announcements from an external device for a
specific period and hang up when finished. When the device
hangs up, the caller hears a click. Connects to switch through
analog port. Ringing starts playback. Sends forward
disconnect signal to stop playback.

aux-trunk

Auxiliary trunk. Use with an external announcement device
with a 4-wire “aux” interface.

aux-trk-m

Auxiliary trunk. Use with continuously playing music or
audio sources that do not indicate playback is active.

ds1-fd

Assigned to DS1 ports on circuit packs. Avaya recommends
this for interfacing for CONVERSANT Line Side T1 ports
when CONVERSANT is used. Callers do not hear a click
when the device hangs up. Provides a disconnect to stop
playback when the announcement is done.

ds1-ops

Callers do not hear a click when the device hangs up.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ARS Toll Table

Valid entries

Usage

ds1-sa

Provides a disconnect to stop playback when the
announcement is done. Callers do not hear a click when the
device hangs up.

integrated

Stored internally on the switch on a special integrated
announcement circuit pack. Use for general announcements
and VDN of Origin Announcements.

integ-rep

integrated repeating

See Appendix A, “Recorded Announcements,” in Avaya MultiVantage™ Call
Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers, for more information about the Type
field.

ARS Toll Table
This screen assigns ARS Toll Tables used by Subnet Trunking. Use it to specify
whether calls to CO codes listed on the table are toll or non-toll calls. You specify
non-toll calls based on the last 2 digits of the distant-end of the trunk group.
change ars toll
ARS TOLL TABLE: __

00:
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:

Screen 50.

y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y

10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:

y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y

20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:

y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y

OFFICE CODES: x00-x99
30: y 40: y 50: y 60:
31: y 41: y 51: y 61:
32: y 42: y 52: y 62:
33: y 43: y 53: y 63:
34: y 44: y 54: y 64:
35: y 45: y 55: y 65:
36: y 46: y 56: y 66:
37: y 47: y 57: y 67:
38: y 48: y 58: y 68:
39: y 49: y 59: y 69:

Page 1 of 1

y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y

70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:

y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y

80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:

y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y

90:
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:

y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y

ARS Toll Table

00: through 99:

These fields represent the last 2 digits of the codes within the 100-block of
numbers. Designate each as a number toll or non-toll call.
Valid entries

Usage

y /n

Enter n to designate a non-toll CO code.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

613

Screen reference

ARS TOLL TABLE
Valid entries

Usage

2 through 9

Identify the number of the ARS Toll Table

OFFICE CODES
Valid entries

Usage

200–299 through 900–999

Identify the block of numbers on this screen.

Attendant Console
This screen assigns an Attendant Console to the system.
Field descriptions for page 1

change attendant 1

Page

1 of

3

ATTENDANT CONSOLE 1
Type:
Extension:
Console Type:
Port:
Security Code:

console
1000
principal
01C1106

Name:
Group:
TN:
COR:
COS:

27 character attd cons name
1
Auto Answer: none
1
Data Module? y
1
Disp Client Redir? n
1
Display Language: english
H.320 Conversion? n

DIRECT TRUNK GROUP SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS (Trunk Access Codes)
Local Remote
Local Remote
Local Remote
1: 9
5:
9:
2: 82
6:
10:
3:
7:
11:
4:
8:
12:
HUNDREDS SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1:
5:
9:
2:
6:
10:
3:
7:
11:
4:
8:
12:

Screen 51.

13:
14:
15:
16:

17:
18:
19:
20:

Attendant Console

Attendant Console x

This is a display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command such as add or change.

614

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Console

Auto Answer
Valid entries

Usage

all

Entering all in this field indicates an incoming call to an idle
attendant will be answered automatically without any action
(no button presses required) by the attendant.

acd

Entering acd indicates only ACD split/skill calls and direct
agent calls can auto answer. Non-ACD calls terminated to an
attendant console with Auto Answer set to acd ring audibly.

none

Entering none causes all calls terminated to this attendant
console to receive some sort of audible ringing treatment.

Console Type

Enter this console’s intended use. There can only be one night-only or one
day/night console in the system unless Tenant Partitioning is administered. Night
Service is activated from the principal console or from the one station set
per-system that has a nite-serv button.
Valid entries

Usage

principal

Puts the attendant console into night service.

day-only

Will not get night service calls.

night-only

Handles only night service calls.

day/night

Handles day or night service calls.

Valid entries

Usage

0 through 95

Enter the class of restriction that reflects the desired
restriction.

Valid entries

Usage

0 through 15

Enter the class of service (COS) for this attendant console.

COR

COS

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

615

Screen reference

Data Module
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if the console is to be connected to a data terminal via
7400B or 8400 Data Module. If y is entered, complete the
Data Module screen (page 4).

Disp Client Redir

This field is administrable only if the Hospitality feature has been enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. This field affects the station’s
display on calls originated from a station with Client Room Class of Service.
Valid entries

Usage

y

When the field is y, the redirection information for a call
originating from a Client Room and terminating to this
station displays.
Note: For stations with an audix station type, AUDIX Voice
Power ports, or ports for any other type of messaging that
needs display information, this field must be y.

n

When the field is n, then for all calls originating from a
Client Room (even redirected calls) that terminate to this
station, this station’s display will not show the redirection
information. Only the client name and extension (or room,
depending on what is administered on the Hospitality screen)
displays.

Display Language

Enter the language in which you want console messages displayed.
Valid entries

Usage

English
French
Italian
Spanish
user-defined

616

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Console

Extension (Optional)

Enter the extension for the individual attendant console. Individual attendant
extensions allow attendants to use features that an attendant group cannot use. For
example, extensions can be members of a DDC or UCD group. An individual
attendant extension can have its own Class of Restriction and Class of Service.
If you give your attendants an individual extension, users can call the attendant by
dialing the extension or you can assign them an abbreviated-dialing button for fast
access to the attendant.
Valid entries

Usage

An
unassigned
extension or
blank

If an extension is not assigned, the attendant can only be
addressed as a member of the attendant group. If the
attendant has a data module, the extension field cannot be
blank.

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 28

Enter the Attendant Group number

Group

H.320 Conversion

Allows H.320 compliant calls made to this phone to be converted to voice-only.
Because the system can handle only a limited number of conversion calls, you
may need to limit the number of phones with H.320 conversion.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y for H.320 compliant calls.

Name

Enter the name of this console.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27 alphanumeric characters

Any entry is accepted.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

617

Screen reference

Port

Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number.

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03

(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier.

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number.

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number.

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

ip

SoftConsole IP attendant. You also must have
the Type field as 302B and enter a security code.
ip is allowed only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the IP Attendant
Consoles field is y.

x

Indicates that there is no hardware associated
with the port assignment. An individual
attendant extension must be assigned in the
Extension field.

For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit number
(port) 12.

618

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Console

Each attendant console requires a port on a digital line circuit pack. For reliability,
the attendant consoles should not be assigned to ports on the same digital line
circuit pack. For example, if three attendant consoles are to be provided, assign
each console to a port on three different digital line circuit pack, if possible.
However, if required, all attendant consoles can be assigned to ports on the same
digital line circuit pack.
Security Code

Does not apply to S8700 IP-Connect. Enter the security code required by the
SoftConsole IP attendant. The required security code length is determined by
Minimum Security Code Length on the Feature-Related System Parameters
screen.
TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 100

Enter the Tenant Partition number.

Valid entries

Usage

console

Indicates the type of attendant console being administered.

302

Use for 302B/C/D or SoftConsole IP attendant.

Type

DIRECT TRUNK GROUP SELECT BUTTON
ASSIGNMENTS (Trunk Access Codes)

Enter the trunk access codes (TACs) for local and remote switches. (There are
fields for one local TAC and one remote TAC per button labeled Local and
Remote.) The local TAC (1 to 4 digits) refers to a trunk group or Loudspeaker
Paging zone on this switch. Remote TACs are only useful in a private network
(including DCS) network. The remote TAC (1 to 3 digits) refers to a trunk group
on the remote switch. If a remote TAC is given, then the local TAC must see a
trunk group that connects directly to the remote switch and is also limited to 1 to 3
digits.
Avaya recommends a DCS trunk be specified as the local TAC between the local
and remote switches. If the TAC specified as local between the local and remote
switches is not a DCS trunk, the remote trunk cannot be monitored by the local
switch.
Valid entries

Usage

1-4 digit number
* or #

555-233-506

May be used as first digit

Issue 5 October 2002

619

Screen reference

HUNDREDS SELECT BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS

Enter in the appropriate field (1 through 20), the hundreds group to be associated
with a Hundreds Group Select button located on an optional selector console.
Valid entries

Usage

1-5 digit hundreds
group (plus prefix, if
needed)

Fields 1 through 8 are used when the selector console
is a 24A-type console and fields 1 through 20 are
used for a 26A-type console. Enter a hundreds group
number that represents all but the last two digits of an
extension number (for example, the Hundreds Select
Button — on the selector console — for extension
3822 would be “38”).

Field descriptions for page 2 (SoftConsole IP
Attendant)

change attendant 1

Page 2 of 4
ATTENDANT

IP FEATURE OPTIONS

IP Emergency Calls: extension
Emergency Location Ext:

Screen 52.

Direct IP-IP Audio Connections? y
IP Audio Hairpinning? y

Attendant Console Data Module (page 2)

IP FEATURE OPTIONS
Direct IP-IP Audio Connections

Allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints.
Valid
entries
y/n

620

Usage

Enter y to save on bandwidth resources and improve sound
quality of voice over IP transmissions.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Console

Emergency Location Ext

The Emergency Location Ext field defaults to the phone’s extension. This
extension is the starting point for identifying the street address or nearby location
when an emergency call is made. The entry in this field is manipulated by
‘‘CAMA Numbering Format’’ before being sent over CAMA trunks; or similarly
by ‘‘ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown’’ before being sent over ISDN trunks.
Valid entries

Usage

1-8 digits

Enter the Emergency Location Extension for the SoftConsole
IP Attendant.

IP Audio Hairpinning

Allows IP endpoints to be connected through the IP circuit pack on the switch.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow IP endpoints to be connected through the IP
circuit pack on the switch in IP format, without going
through the MultiVantage TDM bus.

IP Emergency calls

This field tells the switch how to handle emergency calls from the SoftConsole IP
Attendant. This field appears when the Port field is set to ip on the Attendant
Console screen.

! CAUTION:
An Avaya IP endpoint can dial emergency calls (for example, 911 calls in the
U.S.). It only reaches the local emergency service in the Public Safety
Answering Point area where the telephone system has local trunks. Please
be advised that an Avaya IP endpoint cannot dial to and connect with local
emergency service when dialing from remote locations that do not have local
trunks. You should not use an Avaya IP endpoint to dial emergency numbers
for emergency services when dialing from remote locations. Avaya Inc. is not
responsible or liable for any damages resulting from misplaced emergency
calls made from an Avaya endpoint. Your use of this product indicates that
you have read this advisory and agree to use an alternative telephone to dial
all emergency calls from remote locations.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

621

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

extension

Enter extension to send the attendant extension entered in
the Emergency Location Extension field to the Public Safety
Answering Point (PSAP).

block

Enter block to prevent the completion of emergency calls.
Use this entry for attendants who move around but always
have a circuit-switched phone nearby, and for users who are
farther away from the switch than an adjacent area code
served by the same 911 Tandem office.
When users attempt to dial an emergency call from a
SoftConsole IP Attendant and the call is blocked, they can
dial 911 from a nearby circuit-switched phone instead.

cesid

Enter cesid to allow the switch to send the CESID
information supplied by the SoftConsole IP Attendant to the
PSAP. The end user enters the emergency information into
the SoftConsole IP Attendant.
Use this entry for SoftConsole IP Attendant that are near
enough to the switch that an emergency call routed over the
switch’s trunk reaches the PSAP that covers the switch.
If the switch uses ISDN trunks for emergency calls, the digit
string is the telephone number (provided that the number is a
local direct-dial number with the local area code) at the
physical location of the SoftConsole IP Attendant. If the
switch uses CAMA trunks for emergency calls, the end user
enters a specific digit string for each SoftConsole IP
Attendant location, based on advice from the local
emergency response personnel.

option

Enter option to allow the attendant to select the option
(extension, block, or cesid) that the attendant selected
during registration and the SoftConsole IP Attendant
reported. Use this entry for extensions that are swapped back
and forth between SoftConsole IP Attendants and a phone
with a fixed location.
The user chooses between block and cesid on the
softphone. A DCP or IP phone in the office automatically
selects extension.

622

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Console

Field descriptions for page 2

change attendant 1

Page 2 of 4
ATTENDANT

DATA MODULE
Data Extension: ____

ITC: restricted

Name:
COS:
COR:
TN:

_______________
1_
1_
1_

BCC: 2

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ________
SPECIAL DIALING OPTION: default

ASSIGNED MEMBER (Station with a data extension button for this data module)
Ext
Name
1:

Screen 53.

Attendant Console Data Module (page 2)

This page displays if the Data Module field on Page 1 is y. If this is a non-IP
attendant console this is page 2 of the Attendant screen.
DATA MODULE
BCC

A display-only field that appears when the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field
is enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
NOTE:

The BCC value is used to determine compatibility when non-ISDN facilities
are connected to ISDN facilities (ISDN Interworking feature).
COR

Enter the desired class of restriction (COR) number.
Valid entries

Usage

0–95

COS

Enter the desired (COS) number to designate allowed features. See ‘‘Class of
Service’’ on page 672 for additional information on the allowed features.
Valid entries

Usage

0–15

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

623

Screen reference

Data Extension

Enter the extension number assigned to the data module.
Valid entries

Usage

1- to 5-digit number

Must agree with the system’s dial plan

ITC
Valid entries

Usage

restricted
unrestricted

Name

Enter the name of the user associated with the data module. The name is optional;
it can be left blank.
TN

Enter the Tenant Partitioning number.
Valid entries

Usage

1–100

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1

624

Valid entries

Usage

s

System

g

Group. If g is entered, a group number is also required.

p

Personal. If p is entered, a personal list number also is
required.

e

Enhanced

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Console

SPECIAL DIALING OPTION

Enter one of three dialing options that are available. This identifies the destination
of all calls when this data module originates calls.
Valid entries

Usage

hot-line
default

HOT LINE DESTINATION — Abbreviated Dialing
Dial Code

Only displays when the Special Dialing Option field is hot-line or default (S8700
IP-Connect only). The associated AD number is dialed when the user goes
off-hook on a Data Hot Line call.
Hot Line Service allows single-line telephone users, by simply lifting the handset,
to automatically place a call to a preassigned destination (extension, telephone
number, or feature access code).
The Hot Line Service destination number is stored in an Abbreviated Dialing List.
A Direct Department Calling (DDC), a Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), a
Terminating Extension Group (TEG) extension, or any individual extension
within a group can be a Hot Line Service destination. Also, any extension within a
DDC group, UDC group, or TEG can have Hot Line Service assigned.
Use Hot Line Service when very fast service is required and when you use a
telephone only for accessing a certain facility. Loudspeaker Paging Access can be
used with Hot Line Service to provide automatic access to paging equipment.
Valid entries

Usage

A dial code

Within the range of the abbreviated dialing list type

DEFAULT DIALING Abbreviated Dialing Dial
Code

The associated AD number is dialed when the user goes off-hook and enters a
carriage return following the “DIAL” prompt. The data call originator also can
perform data terminal dialing by specifying a dial string that may or may not
contain alphanumeric names. Only displays when the Special Dialing Option field
is default.
Valid entries

Usage

A dial code

Within the range of the abbreviated dialing list type

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

625

Screen reference

Ext

This is the extension number of a previously administered user who has an
associated Data Extension button and who will share the use of the module.
Name

Contains the name assigned to the above extension number.
Field descriptions for page 4
change attendant 1

Page Y of X
ATTENDANT CONSOLE

FEATURE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: split_____
2: __________
3: __________
4: __________
5: __________
6: hold _____ *
7: __________
8: aux-work
RC:
Grp:
9: __________
10: __________
11: __________
12: __________

Screen 54.

13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:

__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
forced-rel
__________
__________
__________
night-serv *
pos-busy__ *

Attendant Console

If this is a non-IP attendant console this is page 3 of the Attendant screen.
FEATURE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS

Enter the feature buttons from ‘‘Attendant console feature buttons’’ on page 170
that you want to assign to the attendant console. The fixed buttons that cannot be
changed (that is, split and forced release) are shown on the screen. The hold,
night-serv, and pos-busy buttons are shown in the system default locations. These
buttons can be administered elsewhere on the screen. The following provides
descriptions of feature buttons that are unique to the attendant console. See the
‘‘Attendant console feature buttons’’ and to the ‘‘Telephone feature buttons’’
sections for more information about the buttons.
Valid entries

Usage

Audible Tones On/Off

626

cw-ringoff

Call waiting ringer off; turns on/off the audible tone for call
waiting on attendant console (1 per console).

in-ringoff

Incoming call ringer off; turns on/off the audible tone for
incoming call ringer (1 per console).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Console

Valid entries

Usage

re-ringoff

Timed reminder ringer off; turns on/off the audible tone for
timer reminder ringer (1 per console).

alt-frl

Alternate FRL. Alternate facility restriction level; allows the
attendant to activate or deactivate the AFRL feature. When
activated, this allows the originating device (lines or trunks)
to use an alternate set of the facility restriction levels to
originate a call (1 per console).

Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access
act-tr-grp

Activate trunk group access; allows the attendant to control a
trunk group. All calls going to the trunks are routed to the
attendant (1 per console).

deact-tr-g

Deactivate trunk group access; allows the attendant to release
control of a trunk group (1 per console).

class-rstr

Display Class of Restriction. Used to display the COR
associated with a call (1 per console).

em-acc-att

Emergency Access to the Attendant. The associated status
lamp is flashed when there are one or more calls on the
emergency attendant queue (1 per console).

hold

Hold. When the HOLD button is pressed while the attendant is
active on a loop, the party on the loop is put on hold and the
“call type” button associated with the loop is lit (1 per
console).

pos-busy

Position Busy. When this button is pushed, the attendant is
put into position busy mode, the “Pos Avail” light is turned
off, and the light associated with the pos-busy button is lit.
Pushing the POS-BUSY button a second time takes the console
out of “position busy” mode, turns on the “Pos Avail” light
and turns off the light associated with the pos-busy button.
If the pos-busy button is administered on a 2-LED button, the
top LED flashes when the last attendant goes into “Position
Busy” mode. Otherwise, if the button has only one LED, the
single LED associated with the pos-busy button flashes (1 per
console).

serial-cal

555-233-506

Serial Call. This button allows the attendant-extended calls to
return to the same attendant if the trunk remains off-hook (1
per console).

Issue 5 October 2002

627

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

override

Attendant Override. This button enables the attendant to
override diversion features such as, Call Forwarding, Call
Coverage, and so on (1 per console).

intrusion

Call Offer. Depression of this button allows the attendant to
extend a call when the called party is active on another call (1
per console).

dont-split

Don’t Split. This button allows the attendant to not split away
a call when dialing (1 per console).

vis

Visually Impaired Attendant Service (vis) — This button
activates visually impaired service for the attendant. When
this service is activated, the attendant can listen to console
status or messages by pressing buttons that have been
translated as follows:
■

“con-stat” repeats the console status.

■

“display” calls out display contents.

■

“dtgs-stat” calls out the DTGS status.

■

“last-mess” repeats the last message.

■

“last-op” calls out the last operation.

Trunk Group Select — In addition to the 12 Direct Trunk Group Selection
(DTGS) Button Assignments on Field descriptions for page 1, up to 12 single
lamp DTGS buttons can be administered on this page. The status lamp
associated with the feature button is used to monitor the busy/idle status of the
trunk. Trunk groups administered on these buttons cannot be controlled using
Attendant Control of Trunk Group Select buttons. The single lamp DTGS
buttons can be administered as follows:

628

local-tgs

Local trunk group select; allows the attendant to access trunk
groups on the local switch (combination of 12
local-tgs/remote-tgs per console).

remote-tgs

Remote trunk group select; allows the attendant to access
trunk groups on a remote switch (combination of 12
local-tgs/remote-tgs per console).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Console

Valid entries

Usage

hundrd-sel

Hundreds group select; in addition to the fixed HGS buttons
on Field descriptions for page 1, a user can administer
hundreds group select feature buttons on this page. When a
feature button is administered as “hundrd-sel,” a subfield
appears that must then be administered in the same manner as
the fixed HGS button fields (a 1 to 3 digit hundreds group
plus prefix, if needed). Administered “hundrd-sel” feature
buttons operate in the same manner as fixed HGS buttons.
The total number of hundreds group select buttons (fixed and
administered) allowed on a console is 20. Thus, if all 20 fixed
HGS buttons have been administered, no “hundrd-sel”
feature buttons can be administered.
Note: If no fixed HGS buttons are administered, 19
“hundrd-sel” feature buttons are available. This is because 5
of the 24 feature buttons must be used for required feature
buttons (hold, pos-busy, night-serv, forced-rel, and split)

group-disp

Group Display. Allows the attendant to see a display of
extensions currently being tracked on the DXS module.

group-sel

Group Select. Allows the attendant to select a specific group
of hundreds by dialing the first 2 or 3 digits of the hundreds
group.

Attendant Room Status
occ-rooms

Occupied rooms; allows the attendant to see which rooms are
occupied.

maid-stat

Maid status; allows the attendant to see which rooms are in
one of six specified states.

vu-display

VuStats (vu-display) — This button allows users with
display telephones and attendants to turn on the VuStats
display. The limit to the number of VuStats feature buttons
you can administer depends on how many feature buttons are
available on the attendant console you are administering. The
system is designed to allow you to set up a separate VuStats
display format for each feature button. Therefore, agents can
change the type of measurements on their display by
selecting a different VuStats feature button.

■

555-233-506

If 12 HGS buttons are assigned on Field descriptions for page 2, Avaya
recommends that the “night,” “pos-busy,” and “hold” buttons be reassigned
to locations 20, 21, and 3, respectively. The HGS buttons should then be
assigned to the right-most three columns, as required.

Issue 5 October 2002

629

Screen reference

change attendant 1

Page Y of X
ATTENDANT CONSOLE

DISPLAY MODULE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: normal____
2: inspect___
3: cov-msg-rt
4: next______

Screen 55.

5:
6:
7:
8:

delete-msg
call-disp_
date-time_
timer_____

Attendant Console
■

DISPLAY MODULE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS — Display-type buttons

obtain display functions on the associated alphanumeric display. These
buttons are noted as [display button] in the Feature or Function column on
the table. Also, several feature buttons can be administered so that their
associated status lamps can be used to provide visual indications of the
associated feature or function. In some cases, the button itself is not
operational. These buttons are noted as [status lamp]. If a Call Cover Msg
Rt (cov-msg-rt) button is assigned, a Leave Word Calling Delete Msg
(delete-msg) button and a Next (next) button must also be assigned.

Audix-MSA Node Names
change node-names audix-msa

Page 1 of x

AUDIX-MSA NODE NAMES
Audix Name
audixA_
audixB_
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Screen 56.

IP Address
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__

MSA Names
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

IP Address
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__
__.__.__.__

Audix-MSA Node Names screen

Audix Names

Identifies the name of the AUDIX node.

630

Valid entries

Usage

1-7 character string

Used as a label for the associated IP address. The node
names must be unique on each switch.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Authorization Code — COR Mapping

IP Address

The IP address associated with the node name. This field can be blank for X.25
connections.
MSA Names

Identifies the name of the MSA node.
Valid entries

Usage

1-7 character string

Used as a label for the associated IP address. The MSA
names must be unique on each switch.

Authorization Code — COR Mapping
You use this screen to assign authorization codes and the class of restriction
(COR) that is associated with a given authorization code. See ‘‘Authorization
codes’’ on page 1479 and ‘‘CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support’’
on page 1637 for more information on how Authorization Codes work with COR.
To maximize the security of your system:

555-233-506

■

Administer authorization codes to the maximum length allowed by the
system

■

Create random (nonconsecutive) authorization codes

■

Change authorization codes at least quarterly

■

Deactivate authorization codes immediately if a user leaves the company or
changes assignments

■

Assign each authorization code the minimum level of calling permissions
required

Issue 5 October 2002

631

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 1

change authorization-code
Page 1 of 1
Authorization Code - COR Mapping
Note:
XX codes administered. Use “list” to display all codes.
AC
COR
AC
COR
AC
COR
AC
COR
AC
COR
AC
COR
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __
_______ __ _______ __ _______ __ _______ __
_______ __
_______ __

Screen 57.

Authorization Code - COR Mapping screen

AC
Valid entries

Usage

Any combination of
between 4 and 13
digits

The number of digits must agree with the number
assigned to the Authorization Code Length field on
the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. To
enhance system security, choose Authorization
Codes of 13 random digits.

COR
Valid entries

Usage

0–95

When a user dials the associated authorization
code, this is the COR that the telephone or other
facility will assume for that call.

Number of Codes Administered

Displays the number of Authorization Codes already administered using the
Authorization Codes screen. There is a maximum number of authorization codes
that you can use. To find out what this number is for your system, type display
capacity, and page down to find the authorization code information.

632

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Best Service Routing

Best Service Routing
This screen administers the routing numbers for each location associated with a
particular application. This allows the DEFINITY ECS to compare specified
skills, identify the skill that will provide the best service to a call, and deliver the
call to that resource.
For information on setting up Best Service Routing (BSR), see Avaya
MultiVantage Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers.
Field descriptions for page 1
change best-service-routing 1

Page 1 of 15

BEST SERVICE ROUTING
Number: 1
Num
1
4

Name: ARS

Location Name
st10
auto
st10
auto

Screen 58.

555-233-506

Switch Node

Maximum Suppression Time: 30
Status Poll VDN
95022011
95022014

Interflow VDN
3035552121
3035551110

Lock? n
Net Redir?
y
n

Best Service Routing

Issue 5 October 2002

633

Screen reference

Interflow VDN

When a given remote switch is the best available, the origin switch interflows the
call to this vector on the remote switch. Each remote switch in a given application
has to have a dedicated interflow switch.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9, *,
#,
~p (pause)
~w/~W (wait)
~m (mark)
~s (suppress)

or blank
(DEFINITY R,
SI, CSI)
Location Name

Indicates the location.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
(DEFINITY R, SI, CSI)
Lock

Indicates whether this application is locked.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Set to y to prevent this application from being sent to Call
Management System (CMS).

(DEFINITY R,
SI, CSI)

Maximum Suppression Time

Prevents callers from connecting to a VDN within a certain time period after
receiving a busy signal.
Valid entries

Usage

0-60

Enter time in seconds.

(DEFINITY R,
SI, CSI)

634

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Best Service Routing

Name

Contains the name assigned to the BSR number.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
(DEFINITY R, SI, CSI)

Assign a descriptive name for the
physical location.

Net Redir
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Set to y for each to location to which calls are to be
redirected using Network Call Redirection. For more
information, see “Network Call Redirection.”

(DEFINITY R,
SI, CSI)
Num

This field corresponds to the “consider location x” step from the Call Vector
screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1-255

Enter the number.

(DEFINITY R,
SI, CSI)
Number

This display-only field corresponds to the BSR Application field on the Vector
Directory Number screen.
Status Poll VDN

This field specifies the AAR or ARS pattern that routes over an IP trunk. The
status poll vector on the remote switch compares resources on that switch and
replies to the origin switch with information on the best of these. Each remote
switch in a given application has to have a dedicated status poll vector.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9, *, #,
~p (pause)
~w/~W (wait)
~m (mark)
~s (suppress)

or blank
(DEFINITY R, SI, CSI)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

635

Screen reference

Switch Node

Enter a number unique to the switch in a network of switches.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 32767 or

This number is an important part of the UCID tag and must
be unique to the switch.

blank
(DEFINITY
R, SI, CSI)

Bulletin Board
Use the bulletin board to post and receive information. There are three pages of
message space within the bulletin board. The first page has 19 lines, but you can
only enter text on lines 11-19. The first 10 lines on page 1 are for high-priority
messages from Avaya personnel and are noted with an asterisk (*). The second
and third pages each have 20 lines, and you can enter text on any line. The system
automatically enters the date the message was posted or last changed to the right
of each message line.
You can enter up to 40 characters of text per line. You can also enter one blank
line. If you enter more than one blank line, the system consolidates them and
displays only one. The system also deletes any blank line if it is line one of any
page. You cannot indent text on the bulletin board. The TAB key moves the cursor
to the next line.
Field descriptions for page 1

change bulletin-board

Screen 59.

636

Page 1 of 3

Message (* indicates high-priority)
*Avaya is in the process of
*investigating your trunk lockup problem.
*The Bulletin Board will be updated as
*we find information.
* We have identified the problem.
*The trunk you added does not provide
*disconnect supervision. However, the
*trunk group was administered as such.
*Please call Pat J. for details.

Date
03/02/93
03/02/93
03/02/93
03/02/93
03/04/93
03/04/93
03/04/93
03/04/93
03/04/93

We recently added a new trunk group (14)
and have had many of the members getting
locked up.
We see the error - thanks for checking.

03/02/93
03/02/93
03/02/93
03/05/93

Sample Bulletin Board

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bulletin Board

Date

This display-only field contains the date the information was entered or last
changed.
Lines 1 through 10

These lines are reserved for high priority messages and are noted with an asterisk
(*) in the first column on the left. If you have an init or inads login you can enter
high-priority information to trigger the high-priority message at login time.
Valid entries

Usage

A through Z

Enter any information.

a through z

Blank
0 through 9

!@#$%^&*()_
+-=[]{}|\’˜;:’,”<.>/?
Lines 11 through 19

These lines can be used by anyone with access.
Valid entries

Usage

A through Z

Enter any information.

a through z

Blank
0 through 9

!@#$%^&*()_
+-=[]{}|\’˜;:’,”<.>/?
Field descriptions for pages 2 and 3
Date

This display only field contains the date the information was entered or last
changed.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

637

Screen reference

Lines 1 through 20

These lines can be used by anyone with access.
Valid entries

Usage

A through Z

Enter any information.

a through z

Blank
0 through 9

!@#$%^&*()_
+-=[]{}|\’˜;:’,”<.>/?

Call Vector
This screen programs a series of commands that specify how to handle calls
directed to a Vector Directory Number (VDN). See the Avaya MultiVantage™
Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide for
additional information.
Field descriptions for page 1

change vector 129
CALL VECTOR
Number: 129
Name: _______________
Multimedia? n
Attendant Vectoring? n
Meet-me Conf? y
Basic? y EAS? n
G3V4 Enhanced? y
ANI/II-Digits? y
Prompting? y LAI? n G3V4 Adv Route? y
CINFO? y
BSR? n
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

Lock? n
ASAI Routing? n
Holidays? n

____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________

Screen 60.

638

Page 1 of 3

Call Vector

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call Vector

Field descriptions for page 2
change vector 129

Page 2 of 3
CALL VECTOR

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________

Screen 61.

Call Vector

Field descriptions for page 3

change vector 129

Page 3 of 3
CALL VECTOR

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________

Screen 62.

Call Vector

01 through XX

Enter vector commands as required (up to the maximum allowed in your
configuration). For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center
Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

adjunct

Causes a message to be sent to an adjunct requesting
routing instructions based on the CTI link number.

announcement

Provides the caller with a recorded announcement.

busy

Gives the caller a busy signal and causes termination of
vector processing.

check

Checks the status of a split (skill) for possible termination
of the call to that split (skill).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

639

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

collect

Allows the user to enter up to 16 digits from a touch-tone
phone, or allows the vector to retrieve Caller Information
Forwarding (CINFO) digits from the network.

consider

Defines the resource (split, skill, or location) that is
checked as part of a Best Service Routing (BSR) consider
series and obtains the data BSR uses to compare resources.

converse-on

Delivers a call to a converse split (skill) and activates a
voice response script that is housed within a Voice
Response Unit (VRU).

disconnect

Ends treatment of a call and removes the call from the
switch. Also allows the optional assignment of an
announcement that will play immediately before the
disconnect.

goto

Allows conditional or unconditional movement
(branching) to a preceding or subsequent step in the
vector.

messaging

Allows the caller to leave a message for the specified
extension or the active or latest VDN extension.

queue-to

Unconditionally queues a call to a split or skill and assigns
a queueing priority level to the call in case all agents are
busy.

reply-best

Used only in status poll vectors in multi-site Best Service
Routing applications, where it “returns” best data for its
location to the primary vector on the origin switch.

route-to

Routes calls either to a destination that is specified by
digits collected from the caller or an adjunct (route-to
digits), or routes calls to the destination specified by the
administered digit string (route-to number).

stop

Halts the processing of any subsequent vector steps.

wait-time

Delays the processing of the next vector step if a specified
delay time is included in the command’s syntax. Also
provides feedback (in the form of silence, ringback, or
music) to the caller while the call advances in queue.

ANI/II-Digits

A display-only field indicating whether you can use ANI and II-Digits Vector
Routing Commands. ANI/II-Digits Routing requires that the G3V4 Enhanced
field be y.

640

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call Vector

ASAI Routing

A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the CallVisor Adjunct/Switch Applications Interface
(ASAI Link Core Capabilities) field is y.
Attendant Vectoring

This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen,
the Attendant Vectoring field is y. Attendant Vectoring and Meet-me Conference
cannot be enabled at the same time. This field does not appear for S8700
IP-Connect.
Valid
entries

Usage

y

Enter y so the vector is an attendant vector. Default when, on
the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
Vectoring (Basic) and Vectoring (Prompting) fields are y.

n

Default when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen, the Vectoring (Basic) and Vectoring (Prompting)
fields are n. No changes allowed to this field.

Basic

A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Vectoring (Basic) field is y.
BSR

A display-only field indicating that on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen, the Vectoring (Best Service Routing) field is y. Thus, you can use BSR
commands and command elements in your vectors. An n indicates that the BSR
option is not enabled.
CINFO

A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Vectoring (CINFO) field is y.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

641

Screen reference

EAS

A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Expert Agent Selection (EAS) field is y.
NOTE:

When Expert Agent Selection (EAS) field is y, the help messages and error
messages associated with this screen will reflect a terminology change from
“Split” to “Skill”. In addition, the vector commands entered also will be
affected by this terminology change (for example, check backup split
becomes check backup skill when EAS is enabled).
G3V4 Adv Route

A display-only field indicating whether you can use the G3V4 Advanced Vector
Routing commands.
G3V4 Enhanced

A display-only field indicating whether you can use G3V4 Enhanced Vector
Routing commands and features.
Holidays

A display-only field that appears when, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Vectoring (Holidays) field is y.
LAI

A display-only field indicating whether Look-Ahead Interflow is enabled.
Lock

This field controls access to the vector from Avaya CentreVu® products.
NOTE:

Always lock vectors that contain secure information (for example,
access codes).
Valid entries

Usage

y

You do not want this vector to be accessible to these client
programs. Locked vectors can only appear and be
administered through the SAT or a terminal emulator.
If Meet-me Conference is y, the Lock field also must be y.

n

642

Issue 5 October 2002

Gives CentreVu® CMS and CentreVu® Control Center users
the ability to administer this vector from these client
programs.

555-233-506

Call Vector

Meet-me Conf

This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen,
the Enhanced Conferencing field is y. This field designates the VDN as a
Meet-me Conference VDN.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable Meet-me Conference for this vector. If
Meet-me Conference is y, the Lock field also must be y.
When the Lock field is y, the vector cannot be changed by
adjunct vectoring programs such as Visual Vectors.
Attendant Vectoring and Meet-me Conference cannot be
enabled at the same time.

Multimedia

Indicates whether the vector should receive early answer treatment for multimedia
calls. This only applies if the Multimedia Call Handling field is y. This field does
not appear for S8700 IP-Connect.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

If you expect this vector to receive multimedia calls, set this
field to y. If this value is y, the call is considered to be
answered at the start of vector processing, and billing for the
call starts at that time. See ‘‘Managing multimedia calling’’
on page 275 for more information.

Name

Represents the vector name.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27 alphanumeric characters.
Up to 15 alphanumeric characters
(for S8300 Media Server, S8700
IP-Connect only)

This is an optional field.
If ~r can be used to activate Network
Call Redirection if, on the
System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the ISDN
Network Call Redirection field is y.

Number

A display-only field when the screen is accessed using a change or display
administration command.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

643

Screen reference

Prompting

A display-only field indicating whether, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Vectoring (Prompting) field is y.

CAMA Numbering Format
This screen administers the Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA)
trunks and provides Caller’s Emergency Service Identification (CESID)
information to the local community’s Enhanced 911 system through the local
tandem office.
This screen provides the CESID format by extension number or number blocks.
This allows for multiple CESID formats to be sent over multiple CAMA trunk
groups allowing for mixed station numbering plans and some limited conversion
from non-DID to DID numbers typically required by the Private
Switch/Automatic Location Interface (PS/ALI) database.
The default CESID defines the CESID for all extensions that are not defined in the
Ext Code field.
There are 446 CESID entries over 15 pages. The first page contains the Default
CESID and 26 extensions to CESID entries. The second through fifteenth pages
each contain 30 extensions to CESID entries.
Field descriptions for page 1
change cama-numbering

Page 1 of 15
CAMA NUMBERING - E911 FORMAT

System CESID Default: _____________
Ext
Len
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Ext
Code
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Screen 63.

644

Total
CESID
Length
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__
_____________
__

Ext
Len
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Ext
Code
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Total
CESID
Length
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _
________________ _

CAMA Numbering Format

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CAMA Numbering Format

CESID
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 11 digits or
blank

Enter the number that will be used to identify the calling
terminal within an emergency service system. This field
may represent a prefix to an extension or the entire CESID.

1 to 16 digits or
blank (S8300
Media Server,
S8700
IP-Connect)
Ext Code
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 5 digits
or blank
Up to 7 digits
or blank
(S8300 Media
Server, S8700
IP-Connect)

Enter the leading digits or all of the digits in the extension
for the specified CESID. If the extension length is greater
than the number of digits in the extension code, the
extension code will be interpreted as a block of digits. For
example, if the extension length is 4 and the extension
code is 11, the CESID will serve extensions 1100 through
1199. The Ext Code 11 is for a DID block. An Ext Code of
126 might point a non-DID block to a nearby DID
extension 5241666.

Ext Len
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 7 or
blank

Enter the number of digits in the extension.

System CESID Default
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 16 digits

Enter a default CESID. This number will be sent over the
CAMA trunk if the Ext Code field does not have an entry.

Total Length
Valid entries

Usage

1–16 or blank

Enter the total number of digits to send.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

645

Screen reference

CDR System Parameters
Use the Call Detail Recording (CDR) System Parameters screen to set parameters
for the types of calls you want to record and how to format the information. You
can use CDR records to determine call costs, diagnose problems, detect abuse,
and optimize your network.
Field descriptions for page 1

change system-parameters cdr

Page

1 of

1

CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Node Number (Local PBX ID):
CDR Date Format: month/day
Primary Output Format: printer
Primary Output Endpoint: CDR1
Secondary Output Format:
Use ISDN Layouts? n
EIA Device Bit Rate: 9600
Use Enhanced Formats? n
Condition Code ‘T’ for Redirected Calls? n
Modified Circuit ID Display? n
Remove # From Called Number? n
Record Outgoing Calls Only? y
Intra-switch CDR? n
Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? y
CDR Call Splitting? y
Disconnect Information in Place of FRL? n
Attendant Call Recording? y
Interworking Feat-flag? n
Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form? n
Calls to Hunt Group - Record: member-ext
Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead of Group or Member? n
Record Agent ID on Incoming? n
Record Agent ID on Outgoing? n
Inc Trk Call Splitting? n
Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC? n
Record Call-Assoc TSC? n
Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls: dialed
Privacy - Digits to Hide: 0
CDR Account Code Length: 4

Screen 64.

646

CDR System Parameters screen

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CDR System Parameters

Call Record Handling Option

Displays on DEFINITY R only. Used to control call routing when new calls come
in, the CDR link is down, and the buffer is filled.
NOTE:

Changing this field from the default warning may cause ACD & vector calls
that are measured by CDR to be redirected.
Valid entries

Usage

reorder

Enter reorder to block calls with reorder tone when the
buffer is full. This applies to all calls. If you choose this
option, no one will be able to make or receive calls if CDR is
unable to record them.

warning

Enter warning to stop call recording when the buffer is full.
This generates a minor alarm.

attendant

Enter attendant to route all calls to the attendant as
non-CDR calls.

Calls to Hunt Group — Record
Valid entries

Usage

member-ext

Enter member-ext to record the extension of the phone or
data terminal where the call terminated.

group-ext

Enter group-ext to record the extension that was dialed.

CDR Account Code Length
Valid entries

Usage

1–15

Enter the number of digits to record when a user enters an
account code. For some record formats, a long account code
overwrites spaces on the record that are usually assigned to
other fields.

CDR Date Format

Use this field to select the format for the date stamp that begins each new day of
call records.
Valid entries

Usage

month/day

Choose the format that is most appropriate for your situation.
If your company has many different sites, you may need to
use the same format as the other locations.

day/month

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

647

Screen reference

Condition Code ‘T’ for Redirected Calls

You can elect to identify CDR records of calls that have been redirected
automatically off the switch.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The Condition Code of both CDR records for the call will be
‘T.’

n

The Condition Codes normally associated with the Record
Outgoing Calls Only field are generated.

Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls
Valid entries

Usage

dialed

Use dialed to record the digits a user actually dials.

outpulsed

Use outpulsed to record the digits that the switch actually
sends out over the trunk, including any additions or deletions
that take place during routing.

Disconnect Information in Place of FRL

See ‘‘Call detail record field descriptions’’ on page 1587 for more information.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to replace the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) field
with information about why a call disconnects. You can use
this information to isolate problems between the
DEFINITY R and the telephone network.

n

Enter n to record the call’s FRL.

EIA Device Bit Rate

Applies to DEFINITY SI only. Displays if either Primary or Secondary Output
Format field is eia.
Valid entries
300
1200

Enter the baud rate of the CDR device connected to the EIA
port.

2400
4800
9600

648

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CDR System Parameters

Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on
Toll Analysis Form

Specifies whether an account code will be required when making a toll call. This
will not necessarily be all chargeable calls and it may even include some
non-chargeable calls. See‘‘Forcing users to enter account codes’’ on page 542 for
more information.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to deny all toll calls unless the user dials an account
code. Forced Entry of Account Codes must be y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

n

Enter y to allow calls without an account code. This does not
override other calling restrictions.

Inc Attd Call Record

Appears when Inc Trk Call Splitting is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable separate recording of attendant portions of
outgoing calls that are transferred or conferenced.

Inc Trk Call Splitting

Appears when the Record Outgoing Calls Only field on the System Parameters
CDR screen is n.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to create separate records for each portion of
incoming calls that are transferred or conferenced.

Interworking Feat-flag

See ‘‘Call detail record field descriptions’’ on page 1587 for more information.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if you want the feature flag to indicate interworked
outgoing ISDN calls. An interworked call is one that passed
through more than one ISDN node.

n

Enter n if you want the feature flag to indicate no answer
supervision for interworked calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

649

Screen reference

Intra-Switch CDR
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to record calls within the switch. If you choose this
option, you must complete the Intraswitch CDR screen to
indicate which extensions to monitor.

Modified Circuit ID Display

This affects the “printer,” “teleseer,” and “59-character” output formats.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to display the circuit ID in its actual format (100’s,
10’s, units). For example, circuit ID 123 displays as 123.
You might need to verify that your output device can accept
this format.

n

Enter n to display the circuit ID in its default format (10’s,
units, 100’s). For example, circuit ID 123 appears as 231.

Node Number (Local PBX ID)

A display-only field indicating the DCS switch node number in a network of
switches.
Outg Attd Call Record

Only appears if Outg Trk Call Splitting is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable separate recording of attendant portions of
outgoing calls that are transferred or conferenced.

Outg Trk Call Splitting

See ‘‘Call Splitting’’ on page 1555 for more information.

650

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to create separate records for each portion of
outgoing calls that are transferred or conferenced.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CDR System Parameters

Primary Output Endpoint

This field determines where the switch sends the CDR records, and is required if
you specify a Primary Output Format.
Valid entries

Usage

eia

If you use the EIA port to connect the CDR device, enter
eia. This is not a valid option on DEFINITY R systems.

Extension number

This is the extension of the data module (if used) that links
the primary output device to the switch.

CDR1, CDR2

Use this value if the CDR device is connected over a
TCP/IP link, and this link is defined as either CDR1 or
CDR2 on the IP Services screen.

Primary Output Format

Controls the format of the call records sent to the primary output device.
Valid entries

Usage

customized

Use this option if you have special call accounting needs that
standard record formats do not accommodate. If you use a
customized record format, you need to have call accounting
software that is also customized to receive these records.
Consult with your call accounting vendor before using this
option.

printer

Use printer if you are sending the call detail records to a
printer rather than to a record collection or call accounting
system.

59-char

The remaining formats are standard record formats. The one
you use must be compatible with your call accounting
software. Verify this through your vendor or the accounting
system documentation.

expanded
lsu
lsu-expand
int-direct
int-isdn
int-process
teleseer
unformatted

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

651

Screen reference

Privacy — Digits to Hide

If you enable CDR Privacy on the Station screen for a given phone, use this field
to indicate how much of the dialed number to hide on the CDR record.
Valid entries

Usage

0–7

Enter the number of digits to hide, counting from the end
(right to left). For example, if you enter 4 in this field and the
user dials 555-1234, only “555” would appear in the Dialed
Number field of the CDR record.

Record Agent ID Instead on Incoming

Only displays if the Expert Agent Selection (EAS) field is y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. You cannot use both the Called
VDN and the Agent Login ID Instead of Group or Member. Only one of these
fields can be y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to include the EAS agent’s LoginID instead of the
physical extension in the Dialed Number Field of a CDR
record.

Record Agent ID Instead on Outgoing

Only displays if the Expert Agent Selection (EAS) field is y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to include the EAS agent’s LoginID instead of the
physical extension in the Dialed Number Field of a CDR
record.

Record Call-Assoc TSC

652

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to create records for call-associated temporary
signaling connections. If you have a lot of data connections
this could increase the number of records. You may want to
consider the capacity of your call collection device.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CDR System Parameters

Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead
of Group or Member

If this option is enabled, the called VDN overrides the group or member
information that normally appears in the Dialed Number Field of the CDR record.
If a call is directed through more than one VDN, the first VDN used for the call is
stored. This applies only to calls routed to a hunt group by a vector, not to calls
routed directly to an extension by a vector.
You cannot use both the Called VDN and the Agent Login ID Instead of Group or
Member. Only one of these fields can be y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to include the Vector Directory Number (VDN) in
the Dialed Number Field of a CDR record.

Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC

A temporary signaling channel (TSC) is a virtual connection established within an
ISDN D-channel. For more information, see the DEFINITY® Communications
System Generic 2.2 and Generic 3 V2 DS1/CEPT1/ISDN PRI Reference.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to create records for non-call-associated temporary
signaling connections. If you have a lot of data connections
this could increase the number of records. You may want to
consider the capacity of your record collection device.

Record Outgoing Calls Only
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to record only outgoing calls. This can save space
if you are only concerned with charges for outbound calls.

n

Enter n to record both outgoing and incoming calls.

Remove # From Called Number
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to have the “#” (or “E”) symbol removed from the
Dialed Number field of the call detail record. You might
need to verify that your output device can accept this format.

n

Enter n to have the trailing “#” (or “E”) symbol appear in
the Dialed Number field whenever inter-digit time out
occurs or users dial # to indicate the end of dialing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

653

Screen reference

Secondary Output Endpoint

Appears when the Secondary Output Format field is administered.
Valid entries

Usage

eia

Use this if the secondary output device is connected to the
eia port. This is not a valid option on DEFINITY R
systems.

Extension number

This is the extension of the data module (if used) that links
the secondary output device to the switch.

CDR1, CDR2

Use this value if the CDR device is connected over a
TCP/IP link, and this link is defined as either CDR1 or
CDR2 on the IP Services screen.

Secondary Output Format

Controls the format of the call records sent to the secondary output device.

! CAUTION:
Only qualified (Avaya) service personnel should administer a secondary
output device. This option may cause loss of data when the buffer contains
large amounts of data.
Valid entries

Usage

customized

These are the only formats you can use for a secondary
output device. The format must be compatible with your call
accounting software. Verify this through your vendor or the
accounting system documentation.

int-direct
int-process
lsu
unformatted

654

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CDR System Parameters

Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts

Ineffective call attempts are calls that are blocked because the user did not have
sufficient calling privileges or because all outgoing trunks were busy. This
includes the unavailable incoming or outgoing trunks due to trunk usage
allocation for ISDN Call-by-Call Service Selection trunks, incoming calls rejected
by the switch due to NSF mismatch, and ISDN calls that did not complete at the
far end, if a cause value was provided. These calls appear on the CDR record with
a condition code “E.”
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to ignore ineffective call attempts. Use this if you
have limited storage space for CDR records and records often
overrun the buffer.

n

Enter n to report ineffective call attempts. This can tell you if
your users are often unable to place outgoing calls, or if a
large number of incoming calls are not completed. You can
also use this if you need to have records of attempts to
contact a client, and are using ISDN trunks. Using this option
requires more space for records.

Use Enhanced Formats

Enhanced formats provide additional information about time in queue and ISDN
call charges, where available. This affects the “expanded”, “teleseer”, “lsu”,
“printer”, and “unformatted” output formats.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable the use of the Enhanced version of the
specified primary output format. You cannot use Enhanced
formats and ISDN formats at the same time.

Use ISDN Layouts

ISDN Layouts provide more accurate information about the inter-exchange carrier
and ISDN network services used for a call. This affects “lsu” and “printer” output
formats, as well as any format with ISDN layouts, such as “teleseer.”
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable the use of the ISDN version of the
specified primary output format. You cannot use ISDN
formats and Enhanced formats at the same time.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

655

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 2

change system-parameters cdr

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

Data Item - Length
time____________ - 4_
space___________ - 1_
duration________ - 4_
return__________ - 1_
line-feed_______ - 1_
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __

Screen 65.

Page 2 of 2
CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Data Item - Length
17: ________________ - __
18: ________________ - __
19: ________________ - __
20: ________________ - __
21: ________________ - __
22: ________________ - __
23: ________________ - __
24: ________________ - __
25: ________________ - __
26: ________________ - __
27: ________________ - __
28: ________________ - __
29: ________________ - __
30: ________________ - __
31: ________________ - __
32: ________________ - __
Record length = 11

33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:

Data Item - Length
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __
________________ - __

CDR System Parameters

This page appears only if the Primary Record Format field is customized.
Data Item

Enter the data items in the order they should appear on the customized record.
Only use this screen if you have arranged with your vendor to customize your call
accounting system to receive these records.
You must include at least one field in order to have a record. See the table below
for valid entries. The last two data items in a the record must be line-feed and
return, in that order.
For more information, see ‘‘Call detail record field descriptions’’ on page 1587.
Table 9. Valid Data Item entries
Data Item

Length

Data Item

Length

acct-code

15

ins

3

attd-console

2

isdn-cc

11

auth-code

7

ixc-code

4

Continued on next page

656

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CDR System Parameters

Table 9. Valid Data Item entries (Continued)
Data Item

Length

Data Item

Length

bandwidth

2

ma-uui

1

bcc

1

node-num

2

calling-num

15

null

1

clg-pty-cat

2

out-crt-id

3

clg-num/in-tac

10

ppm

5

code-dial

4

res-flag

1

code-used

4

return

1

cond-code

1

sec-dur

5

date

6

space

1

dialed-num

23

time

4

duration

4

tsc_ct

4

feat-flag

1

tsc_flag

1

frl

1

vdn

5

in-crt-id

3

in-trk-code

4

line-feed

1
Continued on next page

Length

Enter the length of each data item, if different from the default.
Valid entries

Usage

The maximum record length
depends on the call accounting
system you use. Check with
your vendor.

The date field should be six-digits to
ensure proper output. Certain fields default
to the required length.

Record Length

Display-only field indicating the accumulated total length of the customized
record, updated each time the length of a data item changes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

657

Screen reference

Class of Restriction
Use this screen to establish classes of restriction (COR). Classes of restriction
control call origination and termination. Your system may use only one COR or as
many as necessary to control calling privileges. You can assign up to 96 different
CORs (0 – 95).
Consider the following to enhance your system security:
1. Assign a separate COR to incoming and outgoing trunk groups, then
restrict calling between the two groups.
2. Limit the calling permissions as much as possible by setting appropriate
Calling Party Restrictions and Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs).
Field descriptions for page 1

change cor 10

Page 1 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION

COR Number: 10
COR Description: supervisor
FRL:
Can Be Service Observed?
Can Be A Service Observer?
Time of Day Chart:
Priority Queuing?
Restriction Override:
Restricted Call List?
Unrestricted Call List?
Access to MCT?
Group II Category For MFC:
Send ANI for MFE?
MF ANI Prefix:
Hear System Music on Hold?

Screen 66.

658

0
APLT?
n
Calling Party Restriction:
y
Called Party Restriction:
1
Forced Entry of Account Codes?
n
Direct Agent Calling?
none
Facility Access Trunk Test?
n
Can Change Coverage?
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
y
Fully Restricted Service?
7
Hear VDN of Origin Annc.?
n_
Add/Remove Agent Skills?
______
Automatic Charge Display?
y
PASTE(Display PBX Data on telephone)?
Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup?
Can Use Directed Call Pickup?
Group Controlled Restriction:

y
none
none
n
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
inactive

Class of Restriction

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of Restriction

Access to MCT?

This field refers to Malicious Call Trace.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow permissions to activate a request to trace a
malicious call.

n

Entering n prohibits this user from requesting a malicious
call trace, but does not prevent this extension from
appearing in the MCT History report, should this extension
be the subject of a malicious call trace.

Add/Remove Agent Skills
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow users with this COR to add and remove
skills.

APLT
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter n to allow access to APLT trunk group Enhanced Private
Switched Communications System (EPSCS) or Common
Control Switched Arrangement (CCSA) off-net facilities.
If fully restricted service is enabled, set this field to n.

Automatic Charge Display

Shows the cost of an active outgoing call using Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) or
ISDN Advice of Charge (AOC) on Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) or
Avaya BRI stations. Not available in the U.S.
Valid
entries

Usage

y

Displays call charges during and at the end of the call.

n

Call charges can be seen if users press the DISP-CHRG button
before the call drops.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

659

Screen reference

Called Party Restriction
Valid entries

Usage

Inward

Blocks the calling party from receiving incoming exchange
network calls, attendant originated calls, and attendant
completed calls.

Manual

Blocks the called party from receiving all calls except for
those originated or extended by the attendant.

Public

Blocks the called party from receiving public network calls.
Attendant calls are allowed to go through to the called party
as well as attendant-assisted calls if the Restriction Override
field in the public restricted station’s COR is attd or all.

Termination

Blocks the called party from receiving any calls at any time.

None

No called party restrictions.

Calling Party Restriction

This field determines the level of calling restriction associated with this COR.
NOTE:

To enhance system security, limit calling permissions as much as possible.
Valid
entries

660

Usage

Origination

Blocks the calling party from originating a call from the
facility at any time. The party can only receive calls. A phone
with this COR may initiate Remote Access calls, if the COR of
the barrier code allows it.

Outward

Blocks the calling party from calling outside the private
network. Users can dial other users on the same switch or
within a private network. To enhance security, Avaya
recommends that you use outward restrictions when practical.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of Restriction

Valid
entries

Usage

All-toll

Blocks the calling party from making ARS and trunk access
calls from a facility assigned the COR to certain toll areas as
defined in the Dialed String field on the Toll Analysis screen.
The Dialed String field must be marked as being associated
with the system’s Toll List. The call completes if the facility’s
COR also is associated with an Unrestricted Call List and
whose Dialed String field also matches the dialed number.

Tac-toll

Blocks the calling party from making trunk access calls from
the facility assigned the COR to certain toll areas as defined in
the Dialed String field on the Toll Analysis screen. The Dialed
String field must be marked as being associated with the
system’s Toll List. The call completes if the facility’s COR
also is associated with an Unrestricted Call List and whose
Dialed String field also matches the dialed number. See ‘‘Toll
Analysis’’ on page 1230 for additional information.

None

No calling party restrictions.

Can Be a Service Observer

If you want an observer to observe users, set the users’ CORs to y on the
observer’s COR Service Observing Permission table.

! SECURITY ALERT:
The use of Service Observing features may be subject to federal, state, or
local laws, rules, or regulations; or require the consent of one or both of the
parties to the conversation. Customers should familiarize themselves with
and comply with all applicable laws, rules, and regulations before using
these features.
NOTE:

You cannot enter y in the previous two fields unless Service Observing
(Basic) is enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if users with this COR can service observe other
users.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

661

Screen reference

Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow this Station’s or EAS agent’s calls to be
picked up by using the Directed Call Pickup Up feature.
Before you can set this field to y, you must set Directed Call
Pickup on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen to
y.

Can Be Service Observed

Note that this field allows or denies service observing for not only physical
extensions, but also for logical agent IDs and VDNs. If you want an observer to
observe users, set the users’ CORs to y on the observer’s COR Service Observing
Permission table.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if users with this COR can be service observed.

Can Change Coverage
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow station users with this COR to select one of
two previously administered coverage paths or to activate,
change, or deactivate call forward all calls or call forward
busy/don’t answer from any on-site or off-site location.

Can Use Directed Call Pickup

662

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the station, attendant, or EAS agent to pick
up calls using the Directed Call Pickup feature. Set Directed
Call Pickup on the Feature-Related System Parameters
screen to y to set this field to y.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of Restriction

Category For MFC ANI

The Category for MFC ANI field always controls categories for Russian signaling
trunks. It also may control categories for R2-MFC signaling trunks, depending on
what value is in the Use COR for Calling Party Category field on the
system-parameters multi-frequency screen.
The Calling Party Category digit administered in this field is included as part of
the ANI information sent to the Central Office on request using R2-MFC
signaling.
Valid entries

Usage

1 –10

Used in other than U.S.

COR Description
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 35
characters

Enter a description of the COR that indicates how you use it.
If you make this as clear as possible (for example, Customer
Service, Legal Department), it will be easier to remember
which COR to assign when you add users.

COR Number

This is a display-only field when the screen is accessed via an administration
command such as change or display.
Direct Agent Calling
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If this is y, users may dial an ACD agent’s extension directly,
rather than anyone in the agent pool. If the system is in Night
Service, the call routes to the Night Service extension. If the
extension with this COR belongs to an agent, the agent may
receive calls directly.

Facility Access Trunk Test

An associated feature button (“trk-ac-alm”) status lamp lights when a successful
test attempt occurs. Pressing one of the alarm buttons (ten maximum) when its
associated status lamp is lit turns off all lamps on all buttons whether the access is
still in progress or has completed.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow users with this COR to perform Facility
Access Trunk Tests.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

663

Screen reference

Forced Entry of Account Codes

FEAC must be enabled on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen and
on the CDR System Parameters screen.
See ‘‘Forced Entry of Account Codes’’ on page 1554 and ‘‘Forcing users to enter
account codes’’ on page 542 for more information.
NOTE:

If a COR requiring entry of account codes is assigned a VDN, the route to
commands executed by the associated vector will not be successful.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate that an account code must be dialed when
making outgoing trunk calls.
If this is y, any telephone assigned the associated COR must
dial an account code before making an outgoing call. If you
set this to y for a COR assigned to a trunk group, users must
dial account codes before calling out over that trunk group.
This may be useful for trunks used in international calls, and
those that are more expensive. If a call is being routed by
ARS, account code checking is not done on the COR.

FRL
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 7

Enter an originating FRL number. AAR and/or ARS features
use this entry to determine call access to an outgoing trunk
group. Outgoing call routing is determined by a comparison
of the FRLs in the AAR/ARS Routing Pattern and the FRL
associated with the COR of the call originator (typically, a
telephone user). An originating FRL of 0 has the least calling
privileges.
To enhance system security, assign the lowest possible FRL.

664

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of Restriction

Fully Restricted Service
NOTE:

If this field is enabled, the APLT field must be n.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

When y entered for a given COR, stations assigned that COR
will not have access to the public network for either
incoming or outgoing calls.

Group II Category For MFC

This field always controls categories for Russian signaling trunks. It can control
categories for R2-MFC signaling trunks, depending on the value of the Use COR
for Calling Party Category field on the Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System
Parameters screen.
The Calling Party Category digit administered in this field is included as part of
the ANI information sent to the Central Office on request using R2-MFC
signaling.
Valid entries

Usage

1 –10

Enter the value you want the switch to send as the Calling
and/or Called Party Category for phones or trunks that use this
COR.

Group Controlled Restriction

A display-only field that determines if the current COR is under controlled
restriction. This field can help troubleshoot problems by first checking its value.
Valid entries

Usage

active

indicates the COR is controlled restricted

inactive

indicates the COR is not controlled restricted

Hear System Music on Hold
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the Music on Hold feature to be activated
by a telephone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

665

Screen reference

Hear VDN of Origin Announcement
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if users with this COR can receive VDN of Origin
messages.

MF ANI Prefix

Defines the prefix to apply to an extension number when ANI is sent to the CO.
This overrides any ANI prefix administered on the Multifrequency Signaling
screen. This does not apply when ANI is tandemed through the switch on tandem
calls. This field also applies to the ANI for the switch when the originating side is
a trunk and there was no ANI.
Valid entries

Usage

1–7 digits or
blank

If you want the entire number to display on the receiving end,
enter all digits except the extension number.

Partitioned Group Number

This field appears only if AAR/ARS Partitioning is y and Time of Day Routing is
n on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1–8

Enter the AAR/ARS partitioned group number associated
with this COR.

PASTE (Display PBX Data on telephone)
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to download all lists. Enter n to disallow the PASTE
feature.

Priority Queuing

666

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow the telephone user’s calls to be placed ahead
of non-priority calls in a hunt group queue

n

If you do not use Automatic Call Distribution (ACD is not
enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen), this field must be n.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of Restriction

Restricted Call List

This list can be used whether the COR is toll restricted. The Restricted Call List
(RCL) has priority over the Toll Analysis Unrestricted Call List (UCL). A call
attempt from a facility assigned a COR (with RCL field set to y), whose dialed
digit string is on the Toll Analysis screen and is marked as being associated with
the RCL, will be denied.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to specify that this COR will have access to the
system’s Restricted Call List (see ‘‘Toll Analysis’’ on page
1230).

Restriction Override

Allows the specified users to bypass restriction on conference, transfer or call
forwarding operations.
Valid entries

Usage

attendant

A telephone with a COR that is inward restricted cannot
receive public network, attendant-originated, or
attendant-extended calls. Enter attendant to give your
attendants the ability to override this restriction.

all

Enter all if you want all of the users with this COR to
override inward restrictions.

none

Enter none if you do not want any users of this COR to
bypass the restrictions.

Send ANI for MFE

Only applicable for Spain. Valid for 2/6 signaling, but not 2/5 signaling. The
following field appears only if Expert Agent Selection (EAS) is enabled on the
Feature-Related System-Parameters screen.
Valid
entries

Usage

y

Enter y to enable Automatic Number Identification (ANI).
When the value is y, the switch sends the calling party’s
number to the public or IBERCOM network so that charges
will be broken down by line.

n

If this value is n, charges are not itemized by line, and your
company will receive a single bill for the total number of calls
made (block charging).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

667

Screen reference

Time of Day Chart

Appears only if Time of Day field is enabled on the System Parameters
Customer-Options screen. See ‘‘Setting up time of day routing’’ on page 268 for
more information.
Valid entries

Usage

1–8

Enter the AAR/ARS time-of-day-chart number associated
with this COR.

Unrestricted Call List

Any entry on the Toll Analysis screen with an “X” in the Toll List column is
restricted, meaning that the system blocks any attempt to complete a call
containing the Dialed String. However, this field overrides that restriction.
For example, if the Toll Analysis screen shows a Dialed String entry of 538 and
there is an “X” in the Toll List column, the 538 number is restricted. To override
this restriction, in the Toll Analysis screen, enter X in the “5” column under the
Unrestricted Call List heading. In the Class of Restriction screen, in this field,
enter 5 to complete the restriction override.
Valid entries

Usage

1–10 or blank

Appears when Calling Party Restriction is all-toll or tac-toll.
This field allows a user to complete a toll call with
“restricted” dialed digits. This field is associated with the
Dialed String field on the Toll Analysis screen. An
Unrestricted Call List number is denoted on that screen.

Use COR for all Group II Responses

This field appears only if, on the Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System
Parameters screen, the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Y allows the COR administered category to be used for both

the calling party and called party categories.

668

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of Restriction

Field descriptions for page 2

change cor 10

Page 2 of 4
CLASS OF RESTRICTION

MF Incoming Call Trace?
Brazil Collect Call Blocking?
Block Transfer Display?
Block Enhanced Conference/Transfer Displays?
Remote Logout of Agent?

n
n
n
y
n

Station Lock COR: 10

Screen 67.

Class of Restriction screen

Block Enhanced Conference/Transfer Display

Use this field to add display messages regarding conference and transfer features
on digital phones.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to block all the enhanced conference/transfer display
messages except “Transfer Completed”

Block Transfer Display
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to prevent users of DCP, Hybrid, ISDN-BRI, or
wireless display telephones from receiving a confirmation
message when they transfer a call.

Brazil Collect Call Blocking

For Brazil only
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to permit all Brazilian trunks calls that terminate to a
station to send back a double answer to the CO. This double
answer tells the CO that this particular station cannot accept
collect calls. The CO then tears down the call if it is a collect
call. Set Country on the trunk group screen to 23 and set this
field to y.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

669

Screen reference

MF Incoming Call Trace
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow assignment of a Call Trace COR to a station.
Avaya MultiVantage then generates an MFC backward signal
(administered on the System-Parameters
Multifrequency-Signaling screen) during call setup instead of
the “free” signal. This triggers the central office to collect
trace information before releasing the calling party, if the
terminating station’s COR has this feature set to y.

Remote Logout of Agent

Use a feature access code to logout an idle ACD or EAS agent without being at
the agent’s phone.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow remote logout of an idle ACD or EAS agent.

Station Lock COR

This field defaults to the current screen COR. Extensions that are assigned this
COR can use Station Lock with the access code administered on the FAC screen.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 95

This field defaults to current COR.

Field descriptions for page 3
change cor 10

Page 3 of
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
CALLING PERMISSION (Enter y to grant permission to call specified COR)
0? n
12? n
24? n
36? n
48? n
60? n
72? n
84?
1? n
13? n
25? n
37? n
49? n
61? n
73? n
85?
2? n
14? n
26? n
38? n
50? n
62? n
74? n
86?
3? n
15? n
27? n
39? n
51? n
63? n
75? n
87?
4? n
16? n
28? n
40? n
52? n
64? n
76? n
88?
5? n
17? n
29? n
41? n
53? n
65? n
77? n
89?
6? n
18? n
30? n
42? n
54? n
66? n
78? n
90?
7? n
19? n
31? n
43? n
55? n
67? n
79? n
91?
8? n
20? n
32? n
44? n
56? n
68? n
80? n
92?
9? n
21? n
33? n
45? n
57? n
69? n
81? n
93?
10? n
22? n
34? n
46? n
58? n
70? n
82? n
94?
11? n
23? n
35? n
47? n
59? n
71? n
83? n
95?

Screen 68.

670

4

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

Class of Restriction screen

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of Restriction

CALLING PERMISSION
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

A y means an originating facility assigned this COR can be
used to call facilities assigned this COR. Enter n for each
COR number (0 through 95) that cannot be called by the
COR being implemented.

Field descriptions for page 4

change cor 10

Page 4 of
CLASS OF RESTRICTION
SERVICE OBSERVING PERMISSIONS
(Enter y to grant permission to service observe specified COR)
0? n
12? n
24? n
36? n
48? n
60? n
72? n
84?
1? n
13? n
25? n
37? n
49? n
61? n
73? n
85?
2? n
14? n
26? n
38? n
50? n
62? n
74? n
86?
3? n
15? n
27? n
39? n
51? n
63? n
75? n
87?
4? n
16? n
28? n
40? n
52? n
64? n
76? n
88?
5? n
17? n
29? n
41? n
53? n
65? n
77? n
89?
6? n
18? n
30? n
42? n
54? n
66? n
78? n
90?
7? n
19? n
31? n
43? n
55? n
67? n
79? n
91?
8? n
20? n
32? n
44? n
56? n
68? n
80? n
92?
9? n
21? n
33? n
45? n
57? n
69? n
81? n
93?
10? n
22? n
34? n
46? n
58? n
70? n
82? n
94?
11? n
23? n
35? n
47? n
59? n
71? n
83? n
95?

Screen 69.

4

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

Class of Restriction

SERVICE OBSERVING PERMISSION
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

A y grants permission to observe specific CORs. Enter n for
each COR number (0 through 95) that cannot be observed by
the COR being implemented.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

671

Screen reference

Class of Service
This screen administers access permissions for call processing features that
require dial code or feature button access.
NOTE:

Class of Service (COS) does not apply to trunk groups except for the
Remote Access feature.
A COS assignment defines whether or not a telephone user may access or use the
following features and functions. Up to 16 different COS numbers may be
administered (0–15).
change cos

Page 1 of 1
CLASS OF SERVICE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Auto Callback
Call Fwd-All Calls
Data Privacy
Priority Calling
Console Permissions
Off-hook Alert
Client Room
Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net
Call Forward Busy/DA
Personal Station Access (PSA)
Extended Forwarding All
Extended Forwarding B/DA
Trk-to-Trk Restriction Override
QSIG Call Offer Originations
Automatic Exclusion

Screen 70.

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
y
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
n
n
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
y
n
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
n
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
n
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
n
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
y
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
y
n
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
n
n
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
n
n
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
y
n
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
n
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
n
y
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

y
n
y
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

n
y
y
y
n
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

Class of Service screen

The screen lists the default values for each COS/feature combination. For a
particular combination, y allows access to the feature and n denies access. Assign
entries on the screen for each COS to be implemented. Default values are shown
on the screen.

! CAUTION:
Because many hunt groups are set up with COS 1, be careful when you
assign restrictions to COS 1.
Automatic Callback

Allows this user to request Automatic Callback. See ‘‘Automatic callback’’ on
page 1486 for more information.

672

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of Service

Automatic Exclusion

Allows a user to activate automatically Exclusion when they go off hook on a
station that has an assigned EXCLUSION button. If set to n, allows a user manual
exclusion when they press the EXCLUSION button before dialing or during a call.
Appears when, on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, the Automatic
Exclusion by COS field is y.
Call Forwarding All Calls

Allows this user to forward all calls to any extension. See ‘‘Call forwarding’’ on
page 1612 for more information.
Call Forwarding Busy/DA

Allows this user to forward calls to any extension when the dialed extension is
busy or does not answer. See ‘‘Call forwarding’’ on page 1612 for more
information.
Client Room

Allows users to access Check-In, Check-Out, Room Change/Swap, and Maid
status functions. In addition, Client Room is required at consoles or telephones
that are to receive message-waiting notification. You can administer class of
service for Client Room only when you have Hospitality Services and a Property
Management System interface. See GuestWorks® and DEFINITY® Systems
Technician Handbook for Hospitality Installations for more information.
Console Permissions

Console Permissions allow multiappearance telephone users to control the same
features that the attendant controls. You might assign this permission to front-desk
personnel in a hotel or motel, or to a call center supervisor. With console
permission, a user can:

555-233-506

■

Activate Automatic Wakeup for another extension

■

Activate and deactivate controlled restrictions for another extension or
group of extensions

■

Activate and deactivate Do Not Disturb for another extension or group of
extensions

■

Activate Call Forwarding for another extension

■

Add and remove agent skills

■

Record integrated announcements

Issue 5 October 2002

673

Screen reference

Data Privacy

Allows this user to enter a feature access code to protect a data call from
interruption by any of the system’s override or ringing features. See ‘‘Data
Privacy’’ on page 500 for more information.
Extended Forwarding All

Allows a user to administer call forwarding (for all calls) from a remote location.
You cannot change a COS to y if Extended Cvg/Fwd Admin on the System
Parameters Customer-Options screen is n. See ‘‘Extended User Administration of
Redirected Calls’’ on page 1545 for more information.
Extended Forwarding B/DA

Allows this user to administer call forwarding (when the dialed extension is busy
or does not answer) from a remote location. You cannot change this COS to y if
Extended Cvg/Fwd Admin on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen is
n. See ‘‘Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls’’ on page 1545 for
more information.
Off-Hook Alert

See ‘‘Emergency Access to the Attendant’’ on page 1668 for more information.
To enable this option, either the Hospitality (Basic) or Emergency Access to
Attendant field must be enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen.
Personal Station Access (PSA)

Allows users to associate a telephone to their extension with their programmed
services, using a feature access code. This field must be set to n for virtual phones.
You cannot change this field to y if Personal Station Access (PSA) on the System
Parameters Customer-Options screen is n. See ‘‘Personal Station Access’’ on
page 1794 for more information.
Priority Calling

Allows user to dial a feature access code to originate a priority call. Such calls
ring differently and override send all calls, if active. See ‘‘Priority Calling’’ on
page 1798 for more information.
QSIG Call Offer Originations

Allows this user to invoke QSIG Call Offer services. See Administration for
Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.

674

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Code Calling IDs

Restrict Call Fwd-Off Net

This restricts users from forwarding calls to the public network. For security
reasons, this should be enabled for all classes of service except the ones you use
for very special circumstances. See ‘‘Call Forwarding Off Net’’ on page 1613 for
more information.
Trk-to-Trk Restriction Override

Users with this COS override any system and/or COR-to-COR calling party
restrictions that would otherwise prohibit the trunk-to-trunk transfer operation for
users with this COS. See ‘‘Transfer — Trunk-to-Trunk’’ on page 1899 for more
information.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Use this COS capability with caution. The ability to perform trunk-to-trunk
transfers greatly increases the risk of toll fraud.

Code Calling IDs
On systems with chime paging, use this screen to assign a unique series of chimes
(a chime code) to extensions. The chime code assigned to an extension plays over
the speakers whenever that extension is paged. You may assign chime codes to up
to 125 extensions.

change paging code-calling-ids

Page 1 of 2
CODE CALLING IDs

ID ASSIGNMENTS
Id
Ext
111: ____
112: ____
113: ____
114: ____
115: ____
121: ____
122: ____
123: ____
124: ____
125: ____
131: ____
132: ____
133: ____
134: ____
135: ____

Screen 71.

555-233-506

Id
141:
142:
143:
144:
145:
151:
152:
153:
154:
155:
211:
212:
213:
214:
215:

Ext
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Id
221:
222:
223:
224:
225:
231:
232:
233:
234:
235:
241:
242:
243:
244:
245:

Ext
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Id
251:
252:
253:
254:
255:
311:
312:
313:
314:
315:
321:
322:
323:
324:
325:

Ext
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Id
331:
332:
333:
334:
335:
341:
342:
343:
344:
345:
351:
352:
353:
354:
355:

Ext
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Code Calling IDs

Issue 5 October 2002

675

Screen reference

Ext

This field assigns extensions to chime codes. Only one extension can be assigned
to each chime code.
Valid entries

Usage

An extension
number

Enter a physical extension, not a VDN, to assign that
extension to a code. Otherwise, leave this field blank.

Related topics

See ‘‘Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers’’ on page 476 for instructions.
See ‘‘Loudspeaker paging’’ on page 1753 for a description of the feature.

Command Permission Categories
Use this screen to administer a user’s permissions associated with their login.
When set to y, the permissions on this screen apply for the object that is not
restricted. Use the second and third pages of the Command Permission Categories
screen to restrict a user from any access to specified objects. To see pages 2 and 3,
type y in the Additional Restrictions field.
Field descriptions for page 1

change permissions angi3

Page 1 of 3
COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
Login Name: angi3

COMMON COMMANDS
Display Admin. and Maint. Data? n
System Measurements? n
System Mgmt Data Transfer Only? n
ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Administer Stations? n
Administer Features? n
Administer Trunks? n
Administer Permissions? n
Additional Restrictions? n
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Maintain Stations? n
Maintain Trunks? n
Maintain Systems? n

Screen 72.

676

Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Process Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Enhanced DS1? n

Command Permission Categories

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Command Permission Categories

Additional Restrictions

Use page 2 and 3 to add objects (up to 40) that this user cannot manipulate. If an
object appears on the Additional Restrictions page, users cannot display, add,
change, or do anything else with that object.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to create additional restrictions, and to have the
second and third pages of this screen appear.

Administer Features

Use caution when assigning this permission to a user.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to administer feature-related
parameters, such as coverage paths, class of service, class of
restriction, system parameters, authorization codes, and
security.

Administer Permissions

This permission only applies to super-user logins.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to administer logins and command
permissions.

Administer Stations
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to add, change, duplicate, or remove
stations, data modules and associated features, such as
abbreviated dialing, vectors, and routing tables.

Administer Trunks

Give this permission only to users who are very familiar with these features.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to administer AAR/ARS, trunk
groups, remote access, and route patterns.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

677

Screen reference

Display Admin. and Maint. Data
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to use the display, list, monitor,
status, and schedule commands and also change their own
passwords and schedule reports.

Login Name

This display-only field shows the login to which these permissions apply.
Maintain Enhanced DS1

You can only enter a value in this field if the DS1 MSP field is set to y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to perform enhanced DS1
maintenance.

Maintain Process Circuit Packs

You can only enter a value in this field if the Processor and System MSP field is
set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to perform processor maintenance.

Maintain Stations

You can only enter a value in this field if the Station and Trunk MSP field is set to
y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to perform station maintenance.

Maintain Switch Circuit Packs

You can only enter a value in this field if the Station and Trunk MSP field is set to
y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

678

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to perform circuit pack maintenance.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Command Permission Categories

Maintain Systems

You can only enter a value in this field if the Processor and System MSP field is
set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to perform system maintenance.

Maintain Trunks

You can only enter a value in this field if the Station and Trunk MSP field is set to
y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to perform trunk maintenance.

System Measurements

This field only appears for DEFINITY SI systems.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to use the list measurements
commands.

System Mgmt Data Transfer Only
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate the switch is accessible by Network
Administration.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

679

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 2
change permissions angi3

Page 2 of 3

COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________

Screen 73.

Command Permission Categories—Restricted Object List screen

Pages 2 and 3 of this screen are identical, and allow you to specify up to 40
objects that this user cannot access. These pages do not appear unless you set both
the Administer Station and Additional Restrictions fields to y on page 1 of this
screen. If you want to limit a user’s permissions beyond those on page 1, enter the
objects in this list. For example, if you want a user to be able to add and change
stations, but not Vector Directory Numbers (VDN), in the Administer Stations and
Additional Restrictions fields, type y. Then on page 2, type vdn as a restricted
object.

Configuration Set
This screen defines a number of call treatment options for EC500 cell phone calls.
The EC500 allows the use of up to 10 Configuration Sets, which are already
defined in the system using default values.
Field descriptions for page 1
change xmobile configuration-set 1

Page

1 of 1

CONFIGURATION SET: 1
Configuration Set Description:
Calling Number Style:
CDR for Calls to EC500 Destination?
Fast Connect on Origination?
Post Connect Dialing Options?

Screen 74.

680

Configuration Set

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Configuration Set

Calling Number Style

Determines the format of the caller ID for calls from a local switch extension to an
EC500 cell phone.
Valid entries

Usage

network

Provides a display of only 10-digit numbers. For internal
calls, the ISDN numbering tables are used to create the
calling number and DCS calls use the ISDN calling number
if provided. The externally provided calling number is used
when available for externally originated calls.

pbx

Provides a display of less than 10-digits. Extensions sent as
the calling number for all internally- and DCS
network-originated calls.

CDR for Calls to EC500 Destination

Determines whether a call detail record is generated for any call to the cell phone.
NOTE:

CDR reporting for EC500 calls relies on the CDR Reports field on the Trunk
Group screen. If, on the Trunk Group screen, the CDR Reports field is n, no
CDR is generated even if this field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Treats calls to the XMOBILE station as trunk calls and
generates a CDR.

n

Treats calls to the XMOBILE station as internal calls and
does not generate a CDR.

Configuration Set Description

Describes the purpose of the configuration set.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 20 alphanumeric
characters or blank

For example, EC500 handsets.

Fast Connect on Origination

Determines whether some additional processing occurs on the switch prior to
connecting a call.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to send CONNECT messages.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

681

Screen reference

Post Connect Dialing Options

Determines whether additional capabilities, beyond standard ISDN dialing, are
available for those incoming ISDN trunk calls that are mapped into XMOBILE
stations. These options come into effect after the call has entered the active state
(the switch has sent a CONNECT message back to the network).

682

Valid entries

Usage

dtmf

Expect digits from either in-band or out-of-band, but not
simultaneously. The switch allocates a DTMF receiver
whenever it needs to collect digits. This option normally
would be used for EC500 XMOBILE station calls.

out-of-band

Expect all digits to be delivered by out-of-band signaling
only. The switch collects digits that it needs from the
out-of-band channel (no touch-tone receiver). In addition,
any digits received when the switch is not collecting digits
are converted to DTMF and broadcast to all parties on the
call. This option is in force for DECT XMOBILE station
calls.

both

Expect all subsequent digits to be delivered by simultaneous
in-band and out-of-band signaling. Out-of-band signaling
consists of digits embedded in ISDN INFO messages while
the in-band signaling consists of DTMF in the voice path.
The switch collects all digits that it needs from the
out-of-band channel. No touch tone receive is allocated in
order to prevent collecting double digits. End-to-end
signaling occurs transparently to the switch via in-band
transmission of DTMF. This option is in force for PHS
XMOBILE station calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Console Parameters

Console Parameters
This screen administers attendant console group parameters. This includes basic
parameters for Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) and Inter-PBX Attendant
Service (IAS). A list of the administered attendant consoles also displays on this
screen.
Field descriptions for page 1
change console-parameters

Page
CONSOLE PARAMETERS
Attendant Group Name: OPERATOR
COS: 0
COR:
Calls in Queue Warning: 5
Attendant Lockout?
Ext Alert Port (TAAS):
CAS: none
Night Service Act. Ext.:
IAS (Branch)? n
IAS Tie Trunk Group No.:
IAS Att. Access Code:
Alternate FRL Station:
Backup Alerting? n
DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext?
Attendant Vectoring VDN:

Screen 75.

1 of

4

0
y

n

Console Parameters — Default Attendant Group

AAR/ARS Access Code

Appears if the CAS field is QSIG-branch. An optional field that contains an
AAR/ARS access code to route to the main PBX, if needed.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9,
*, #

Enter up to 4 digits.

blank
Alternate FRL Station

This is a display-only field indicating the extension of the alternate facility
restriction level (FRL) activation station.
Attendant Group Name

Enter a name for the attendant group.
Valid entries

Usage

1-27
alphanumeric
characters

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

683

Screen reference

Attendant Lockout

Attendant Lockout prevents an attendant from re-entering a multiple-party
connection held on the console unless recalled by a telephone user.
Attendant Lockout provides privacy for parties on a multiple-party call held on
the console. The held parties can hold a private conversation without interruption
by the attendant.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to activate Privacy — Attendant Lockout. If y is
entered, the attendant is prohibited from reentering a
conference call that has been placed on hold unless recalled
by a phone user on the call.

Attendant Vectoring VDN

This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen,
the Attendant Vectoring field is y and the Tenant Partitioning field is n.
Valid
entries

Assigned
VDN
extension or
blank

Usage

Enter an assigned Attendant VDN extension or blank.

Backup Alerting

Indicates whether or not system users can pick up alerting calls if the attendant
queue has reached its warning state.
Calls In Queue Warning

Enter the number of incoming calls that can be in the attendant queue before the
console’s second Call Waiting lamp lights. The console’s first Call Waiting lamp
lights when any incoming calls are waiting to be answered. The second lamp
lights when the number of calls waiting equals the value you entered in the Calls
in Queue Warning field.
Valid entries

Usage

1-300

684

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Console Parameters

CAS

The CAS Main or Branch features must be enabled on the System- Parameters
Customer-Options screen for either of these features to be functional here.
Valid entries

Usage

main
branch
none
QSIG-main

Can be used if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen, the Centralized Attendant field is y. Indicates all
attendants are located on the main PBX.

QSIG-branch

Can be used if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen, the Centralized Attendant field is y. Indicates there
are no local attendants and routes to the main PBX.

CAS Back-Up Ext.

This field handles attendant-seeking calls if the RLT trunk group to the CAS Main
switch is out of service or if CAS Back-Up is activated. This field must be
explicitly defined as an extension in the dial plan. Neither a prefixed extension nor
a VDN extension is allowed. Appears only when branch is entered in the CAS
field.
Valid entries

Usage

An extension number for a station
individual attendant console
hunt group
TEG
COR

Enter the class of restriction (COR) number that reflects the desired features for
the attendant. You can override this COR, by assigning a different COR on the
individual Attendant screen.
Valid entries

Usage

0-95

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

685

Screen reference

COS

Enter a class of service (COS) number that reflects the desired features for all your
attendant consoles. You can override this COS, by assigning a different COS on
the individual Attendant screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1-15

DID-LDN Only to LDN Night Ext.
Valid
entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow only listed directory number (LDN) calls to
go to the listed directory night service extension.

n

Enter n if you want all attendant seeking calls to route to the
LDN night service extension.

Ext Alert Port (TAAS)

Enter the seven-digit port number assigned to the external alerting device. This
supports the Night Service — Trunk Answer From Any Station feature.
NOTE:

Type an “X” in this field to indicate that there is no hardware associated with
this port assignment. If an X is used here, you must also fill in the Ext Alert
(TAAS) Extension field.
Ext Alert (TAAS) Extension

Appears only when an X is entered in the Ext Alert Port (TAAS) field. This
extension is used by the Terminal Translation Feature (TTI) to assign a port to the
Ext Alert Port from a station on the Ext Alert port during system installation or
provisioning. Once a port is assigned (either via TTI or by changing the Ext Alert
Port field from the G3-MA or other manager terminal) the extension is
automatically removed and treated as unassigned.
IAS Att. Access Code

Enter the extension number of the attendant group at the main switch. This entry
is required when IAS Branch is y. Does not appear if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Centralized Attendant field is y.

686

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Console Parameters

IAS (Branch)

Enables or disables Inter-PBX Attendant Service (IAS) Branch feature. Does not
appear if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Centralized
Attendant field is y.
NOTE:

CAS and IAS cannot both be active at the same time.
IAS Tie Trunk Group No.
NOTE:

Enter the number of the tie trunk group to the main for the IAS (Branch).
This entry is required when IAS Branch is y. Does not appear if, on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Centralized Attendant
field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

1-666
1-2000

For DEFINITY R, CSI, SI.
For S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect.

Night Service Act. Ext.

This is a display-only field containing the extension of the current night service
activation station, if any. Such a station is administered by assigning it a
“night-serv” button.
QSIG CAS Number

Appears if the CAS field is QSIG-branch. Contains the complete number of the
attendant group at the main switch, or a vector directory number (VDN) local to
the branch switch. This field cannot be left blank.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9

Enter up to 20 digits.

RLT Trunk Group No.

Appears only when branch is entered in the CAS field. Enter the trunk group
number corresponding to the Release Link Trunk (RLT) trunk group to the main
location when supporting CAS Branch service.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

687

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 2

change console-parameters

Page

2 of

4

CONSOLE PARAMETERS
TIMING
Time Reminder on Hold (sec): 10
Time in Queue Warning (sec):

Return Call Timeout (sec): 10

INCOMING CALL REMINDERS
No Answer Timeout (sec): 20
Alerting (sec): 40
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls? y
ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: group
1
List2:
List3:
SAC Notification? n
COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Starting Extension:
Count:

Screen 76.

Console Parameters — Default Attendant Group

TIMING
Return Call Timeout (sec)

Enter the time in seconds before a split away call (call extended and ringing a
station or otherwise split away from the console) returns to the console. Be sure to
allow five seconds for each ring at all points in a coverage path to ensure the entire
path is completed before the call returns to the console.
Valid entries

Usage

10-1024 or

blank
Time In Queue Warning (sec)

Enter the number of seconds a call can remain in the attendant queue before
activating an alert.
Valid entries

Usage

9-999 or

blank

688

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Console Parameters

Time Reminder on Hold (sec)

Enter the time in seconds that a call remains on hold at the console before the
attendant is alerted. In a CAS arrangement, the main and the branch consoles
(when administered) should be administered the same.
Valid entries

Usage

10-1024

INCOMING CALL REMINDERS
Alerting (sec)

Enter the number of seconds after which a held or unanswered call is disconnected
from an attendant loop and routed to another attendant or night service
No Answer Timeout (sec)

Enter the number of seconds a call to the attendant can remain unanswered
without invoking a more insistent sounding tone. Be sure to allow five seconds for
each ring at all points in a coverage path to ensure the entire path is completed
before the call returns to the console.
Valid entries

Usage

10-1024 or

blank
Secondary Alert on Held Reminder Calls?
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to begin attendant alerting for Held Reminder Calls
with secondary alerting.

n

Enter n to have held reminder calls alert the attendant the
same as normal calls. Normal calls start with primary
alerting and switch to secondary alerting when the No
Answer Timeout expires.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

689

Screen reference

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1, List2, List3

You can assign up to 3 abbreviated dialing lists to each attendant. However, you
cannot assign a personal list to an attendant.
Valid entries

Usage

enhanced

Allows the attendant to access the enhanced system abbreviated
dialing list.

group

Allows the attendant to access the specified group abbreviated
dialing list. You also must enter a group number.

system

Allows the attendant to access the system abbreviated dialing
list.

SAC Notification

Enables or disables Enhanced Attendant Notification for Send All Calls.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

COMMON SHARED EXTENSIONS
Count

Enter a number to indicate the number of consecutive extensions, beginning with
the Start Extension to be used as common, shared extensions. For example, if you
enter a starting extension of 4300 and a count of 3, the system provides three
consecutive extension numbers (4300, 4301, and 4302) for parking calls.
The extensions should be assigned to the optional Attendant Selector Console in
the 00 through 09 block (bottom row) in any hundreds group for easy
identification by the attendant. The lamp associated with the number will identify
“call parked” or “no call parked”, instead of busy or idle status.
Valid entries

Usage

1-80 or blank

Starting Extension

These extension numbers can be used by the attendant to park calls.

690

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Console Parameters

Field descriptions for page 3
change console-parameters

Page 3 of 4
CONSOLE PARAMETERS

QUEUE PRIORITIES
Emergency Access:1_
Assistance Call:2_
CO Call:2_
DID to Attendant:2_
Tie Call:2_
Redirected DID Call:2_
Redirected Call:2_
Return Call:2_
Serial Call:2_
Individual Attendant Access:2_
Interpositional:2_
VIP Wakeup Reminder Call:2_
Miscellaneous Call:2_
Call-Type Ordering Within Priority Levels? n

Screen 77.

Console Parameters — Default Attendant Group

QUEUE PRIORITIES

Attendant Priority Queue allows attendants to answer calls by call category (for
example, by trunk type). The Attendant Priority Queue handles incoming calls to
an attendant when the call cannot be immediately terminated to an attendant. The
calling party hears ringback until an attendant answers the call.
You may assign the same priority level to more than one call. Priority 1 is the
highest priority and is the default for Emergency Access. Assign a priority level
from 1 through 13 to each of the call types.
The attendant call categories are:

555-233-506

■

Emergency Access — A call from a telephone user who dials the
emergency access code (default is highest-priority level)

■

Assistance Call— A call from a telephone user who dials the
attendant-group access code, or from a telephone that has the Manual
Originating Line Service feature activated

■

CO Call — An incoming trunk call (CO/FX/WATS trunk) to an attendant
group. This does not include trunk calls that return to the attendant group
after a timeout or deferred attendant recall.

■

DID to Attendant — An incoming DID trunk call to an attendant group.
This does not include trunk calls that return to the attendant group after a
timeout or deferred attendant recall.

Issue 5 October 2002

691

Screen reference

■

Tie Call — An incoming TIE trunk call (dial-repeating or direct types) to
an attendant group. This does not include trunk calls that return to the
attendant group after a timeout or deferred attendant recall.

■

Redirected DID Call — A DID or ACD call that times out due to
ring/no-answer, busy condition (if applicable), or Number Unobtainable
and reroutes to the attendant group.

■

Redirected Call — A call assigned to one attendant, but redirected to the
attendant group because the attendant is now busy

■

Return Call — A call returned to the attendant after it times out. If the
attendant is now busy, the call redirects to the attendant group.

■

Serial Call — A call from the Attendant Serial Call feature when an outside
trunk call (designated as a serial call by an attendant) is extended to and
completed at a telephone, and then the telephone user goes on-hook. If the
attendant who extended the call is busy, the call redirects to the attendant
group.

■

Individual Attendant Access — A call from a telephone user, incoming
trunk call, or a system feature to the Individual Attendant Access (IAA)
extension of a specific attendant. If the attendant is busy, the call queues
until the attendant is available.

■

Interposition — A call from one attendant to the Individual Attendant
Access (IAA) extension of another attendant

■

VIP Wakeup Reminder Call — A VIP Wakeup reminder call.

■

Miscellaneous Call — All other calls.

Call-Type Ordering Within Priority Levels?

If you use call-type ordering, calls to the attendant are first grouped by the queue
priority level, then by call type, and, finally, in the order received.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if you want to present calls by call type. You can
assign a type-disp button on the Attendant Console screen
so that the attendant can review the call type for the active
call.

n

Enter n if you wish the calls to be queued in chronological
order by queue priority level.

The call types, in descending order of priority, are:
■

692

Type 1 call: outgoing public-network calls receive answer supervision
when the Answer Supervision Timer of the trunk group expires, even if the
trunk is actually still ringing. Also, incoming calls when answered by the
attendant.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Console Parameters

■

Type 2 call: incoming external public-network calls before they receive
answer supervision or before the Answer Supervision Timer of the trunk
group expires

■

Type 3 call: all other calls (internal calls, conference calls, and tie-trunk
calls of any type)

Note that external public-network calls have priority over all other calls including
conference calls. And, answered public-network calls have priority over those
calls not yet answered.
Field descriptions for page 4

change console-parameters

Page 4 of 4
CONSOLE PARAMETERS

ASSIGNED MEMBERS ( Installed attendant consoles )
Type
Grp TN
Type
Grp TN
Type
1:
1
1
11:
1
1
21:
2:
1
1
12:
1
1
22:
3:
1
1
13:
1
1
23:
4:
1
1
14:
1
1
24:
5:
1
1
15:
1
1
25:
6:
1
1
16:
1
1
26:
7:
1
1
17:
1
1
27:
8:
1
1
18:
1
1
28:
9:
1
1
19:
1
1
10:
1
1
20:
1
1

Screen 78.

Grp
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

TN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Console Parameters — Default Attendant Group

ASSIGNED MEMBERS (Installed attendant
consoles)
Grp

Display-only field that lists the Attendant Group number.
TN

Display-only field that lists the Tenant Partition number.
Type

Display-only field that shows all attendants in the group. You administer the
individual attendant consoles on the Attendant Console screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

693

Screen reference

Coverage Answer Group
This screen establishes Call Coverage Answer Groups.
An answer group contains up to eight members who act as a coverage point for
another user. For example, if several secretaries are responsible for answering a
department’s redirected calls, all the secretaries could be assigned to an answer
group. The answer group is assigned a group number, and that group number
appears in the department’s coverage path. All phones in an answer group ring
(alert) simultaneously. Any member of the group can answer the call.
Each coverage answer group is identified by a number from 1 through the
maximum number allowed by your system configuration (see Avaya
MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide). The members of the group are
identified by their extension number. Any phone, including those administered
without hardware (X-ported (but not attendants) can be assigned to a coverage
answer group. Note that members whose extensions are X-ported will not be
alerted.
Field descriptions for page 1

change coverage answer-group 3
COVERAGE ANSWER GROUP

Page 1 of 1

Group Number: 3___
Group Name: COVERAGE_GROUP_
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
Name (first 26 characters)
1: ________ ___________________________
2: ________ ___________________________
3: ________ ___________________________
4: ________ ___________________________

Screen 79.

5:
6:
7:
8:

Ext
________
________
________
________

Name (first 26 characters)
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________
__________________________

Coverage Answer Group

Ext

Enter the extension number (may not be a Vector Directory Number extension) for
each member of this coverage answer group.
Valid entries

Usage

An assigned extension for a station.

694

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Coverage Answer Group

Group Name

Enter the group name you want to use to identify this group.
Tip:

Enter the extension numbers that are group members. This allows a list
coverage answer group command to be used to list the phones that will be
alerted. The list command can be used in conjunction with the list station,
list coverage path, and list hunt group commands to determine stations
involved in call coverage. This makes it possible to follow call coverage for
any extension, allowing the administrator to easily track call coverage
paths.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27 characters

For example, typing pool, room 12, secy, and so
on.

Group Number

A display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command such as add or change.
Name

This display-only field indicates the name assigned when the member’s phone is
administered.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

695

Screen reference

Coverage Path
This screen implements Call Coverage Paths. The screen provides the means to
specify the call coverage criteria, the points in the coverage path used to redirect
calls, and the number of times a principal’s phone rings before the call redirects to
coverage.
Field descriptions for page 1

change coverage path 2

Page

1 of

1

COVERAGE PATH
Coverage Path Number: 2
Next Path Number: ___

Hunt After Coverage: n
Linkage: ___ ___

COVERAGE CRITERIA
Station/Group Status
Active?
Busy?
Don’t Answer?
All?
DND/SAC/Goto Cover?

Inside Call
n
y
y
n
y

Outside Call
n
y
y Number of Rings:2
n
y

COVERAGE POINTS
Terminate to Coverage Pts. with Bridged Appearance? n
Point1: _________ Point2: _________ Point3: _________
Point4: _________ Point5: _________ Point6: _________

Screen 80.

Coverage Path screen

Coverage Path Number

A display-only field indicating the coverage path being administered.
Hunt After Coverage

696

Valid entries

Usage

y

Coverage treatment continues by searching for an available
station in a hunt chain that begins with the hunt-to-station
assigned on the station screen of the last coverage point.

n

Coverage treatment is terminated; the call is left at the last
available location (principal or coverage point).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Coverage Path

Linkage

Display-only fields that show the (up to) two additional coverage paths in the
coverage path chain. (See above.)
Next Path Number

Enter the next coverage path in a coverage path chain. See ‘‘Call coverage’’ on
page 1532 for more information. If the coverage criteria of the current coverage
path is not satisfied, the system steps down this chain until it finds a coverage path
with redirection criteria that matches the call status. If the chain is exhausted
before the system finds a match, the call does not redirect to coverage. No path
number here indicates that this path is the only path for the principal.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 9999 or

blank
COVERAGE CRITERIA

COVERAGE CRITERIA are the conditions that, when met, cause the call to
redirect to coverage. Assign one of the following:
Valid entries

Usage

Active

Calls redirect if at least one call appearance is busy.

Busy

Calls redirect if all call appearances that accept incoming
calls are busy.

Don’t Answer

Calls redirect when the specified number of rings has been
exceeded.

All

Calls redirect immediately to coverage and overrides any
other criteria with a y in this column.

DND/SAC/
Goto Cover

Must be assigned before a user can activate Do Not Disturb
(Hospitality Services), Send All Calls (SAC), or Go to
Cover features. Allows a calling user, when calling to
another internal extension, to redirect a call immediately to
coverage by pressing a GO TO COVER button. Allows a
principal temporarily to direct all incoming calls to
coverage, regardless of the other assigned coverage criteria
by pressing the SEND ALL CALLS (or DO NOT DISTURB) button.
Send All Calls also allows covering users to temporarily
remove their phones from the coverage path.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

697

Screen reference

Number of Rings

Enter the number of rings.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 99

This is the number of rings a user’s phone rings before the
system redirects the call to the first point in the coverage
path.

COVERAGE POINTS
Point1, Point2, Point3, Point4, Point5, Point6

The alternate destinations that comprise a coverage path. Coverage points must be
assigned sequentially beginning with Point 1 (do not leave gaps). Each path can
have up to six coverage points.
Valid entries

Usage

extension

Redirects the call to an internal extension or
announcement

attd

Redirects the call to the attendant or attendant group. If
the system has Centralized Attendant Service (CAS), the
call goes to the CAS attendant.

h1 to h999

Redirects the call to the corresponding hunt-group. For
example, enter “h32” if you want a coverage point routed
to hunt group 32. (See ‘‘Hunt Group’’ on page 875 for
more information.)

c1 to c750
c1 to c1000 (For

Redirects the call to the corresponding coverage answer
group. For example, enter “c20” if you want a coverage
point routed to call coverage answer group 20. (See
‘‘Coverage Answer Group’’ on page 694 for more
information.)

S8300 Media
Server, S8700
IP-Connect,
S8700
Multi-Connect)

698

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Coverage Path

Valid entries

Usage

r1 to r999
r1 to r1000 (For

Redirects the call to the corresponding remote coverage
point number. For example, enter “r27” if you want a
coverage point routed to remote coverage point 27. (See
‘‘Remote Call Coverage Table’’ on page 1092 for more
information.)

S8300 Media
Server, S8700
IP-Connect,
S8700
Multi-Connect)
v + extension

Redirects the call to the corresponding VDN extension.
For example, enter “v12345” if you want the last
administered coverage point to be the VDN associated
with extension 12345. Note that a Vector Directory
Number may be used only as the last administered point
in a coverage path.

If calls redirect to an AUDIX in a DCS network, administer a unique Hunt Group
screen. Assign the AUDIX extension in the Group Extension field. If the AUDIX
is connected to the local node, set the Message Center field to audix; if the
AUDIX is connected to another node, set the Message Center field to rem-audix.
If calls redirect to Message Center (a special Uniform Call Distribution hunt
group), AUDIX, or to the attendant, do not list any subsequent coverage points.
These calls will normally queue and never redirect to another coverage point.
Calls to any hunt group will queue if possible. Calls redirect from a hunt group
only if all hunt group members are busy and either the queue is full or there is no
queue.
If the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net feature is not enabled, a remote
coverage point will function as the last point in the coverage path, because the
system will no longer have control of the call once it has redirected off-net.
However, if the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net feature is enabled, a call
redirected off-net can be monitored by the system and brought back for further
call coverage processing.
Terminate to Coverage Pts. with Bridged
Appearances

Valid entries

Usage

y

Allows a call to alert as both a bridged call and a redirected
call.

n

The call skips the coverage point if it has already alerted as
a bridged call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

699

Screen reference

Crisis Alert System Parameters
This screen allows you to define the system parameters associated with sending
crisis alert messages.
Field descriptions

change system-parameters crisis-alert
CRISIS ALERT SYSTEM PARAMETERS
ALERT STATION
Every User Responds? n
ALERT PAGER
Alert Pager?
Originating Extension:
Crisis Alert Code:
Retries:
Retry Interval (sec):
Main Number:

y
7768
911
5
30
303-555-0800

Pager Number
1: 3035559001
2: 123456789012345
3: 123456789012345

Pin Number
1: 7614567890
2: ppp1234567890pp
3: ppp1234567890pp

DTMF Duration - Tone (msec): 100

Screen 81.

Pause (msec): 100

Crisis Alert System Parameters screen

ALERT STATION
Every User Responds

Controls who needs to respond to a crisis alert.

700

Valid entries

Usage

y

If set to y, all users who have a crisis alert button are notified
and must clear the alert for every emergency alert. Assign
crisis alert buttons only to attendant consoles and stations
that must be notified of an emergency call.

n

If set to n, all users are notified, but only one user needs to
acknowledge an alert. This user may be the attendant or any
other digital telephone with a crisis alert button. When the
alert is acknowledged by one user, the alert is cleared at all
stations except the one that acknowledged the alert.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Crisis Alert System Parameters

ALERT PAGER
Alert Pager
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use Crisis Alert to a Digital Pager.

Crisis Alert Code

Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. This field requires an entry before
submitting the screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 3
digits

The numbers in this field are the first 3 digits in the crisis
alert pager message. Avaya recommends you enter the
numbers used to call the local emergency service or any
digits used for an emergency situation (for example, 911).

DTMF Duration - Tone (msec)

The length of time the Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tone is heard for each
digit. Displays when the Alert Pager field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

20 through
2550

Enter a number in increments of 10.

Main Number

The main phone number to the location or a location code. This field is optional
and does not require an entry. Displays when the Alert Pager field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

digits 0-9

Enter a number up to 15 digits to identify the location where
the crisis alert call originated. It can be the main number to
the location or a numerical identification. Any dashes are for
display purposes only and not included in the message sent to
the pager. This entry is the last group of digits displayed in
the pager message.

- (dash)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

701

Screen reference

Originating Extension

Used as the extension originating the call to send a crisis alert message to a pager.
Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. This field requires an entry before
submitting the screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 7
digits

Requires a valid unassigned extension according to the dial
plan.

Pager Number

Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. One of these fields must have a number
or the screen cannot be submitted.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 15 digits

Any dashes are for display purposes only and not included in
the message sent to the pager One of the pager number fields
must have a number or the screen cannot be submitted.

- (dash)

Pause (msec)

The length of time between DTMF tones for each digit. Displays when the Alert
Pager field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

20 through
2550

Enter a number in increments of 10.

Pin Number

This field can be used for any combination of the pager pin number and pauses or
left blank. Displays when the Alert Pager field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

digits 0-9

Enter a number up to 15 digits. A pause (about 2 seconds) is
for timing of the message. For instance, after the pin number
you may want to have a pause to allow time for the pager
service to set up the correct pager message box. If the pager
service requires you to submit a PIN number, enter it here.

p(ause)
# (pound)
* (star)

702

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CTI Link

Retries

Displays when the Alert Pager field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 10

The number of times the system tries to send out the alert
message in case of an unsuccessful attempt. This increases
the chances that the pager receives a crisis alert message.

Retry Interval (sec)

Displays when the Alert Pager field is y. This field is not used unless the Retries
field is 1-10.
Valid entries

Usage

30 through 60

The administrable time period (in seconds) between retries. If
an attempt to call the pager fails, the retry call attempts after
the retry interval period.

CTI Link
The cti-link commands are available only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, either the ASAI Link Core Capabilities and/or
Computer Telephony Adjunct Links field is y.
Field descriptions for page 1

add cti-link next

Page 1 of 2
CTI LINK

CTI Link:
Extension:
Type:
Port:
Name:

1
40001
ASAI
1C0501
ASAI CTI Link 1

COR: 1

BRI OPTIONS
XID? y
MIM Support? n

Fixed TEI? n
CRV Length: 2

Screen 82.

555-233-506

CTL Link screen when Type field is ASAI or ADJLK

Issue 5 October 2002

703

Screen reference

add cti-link next

Page 1 of 2
CTI LINK

CTI Link: 1
Extension: 40001
Type: ASAI-IP
COR: 1
Name: ASAI CTI Link 1

Screen 83.

CTI Link screen when Type field is ASAI-IP or ADJ-IP

CTI Link
A display-only field indicating the CTI link number.
Valid entries

Usage

1-8

S8100 Media Server with a CMC1
Avaya MultiVantage on a DEFINITY CSI
DEFINITY G3i

1-16

S8300 Media Server
Avaya MultiVantage on a DEFINITY R
S8700 Multi-Connect

Extension
This field displays the extension for this link.
Type
For each link that you want to add to your system, you must specify the CTI link
type.

704

Valid entries

Usage

ADJLK

For ASAI links not used by co-resident DLG.

ADJ-IP

For ASAI adjunct links used by co-Resident DLG.

ASAI

For ASAI adjunct links not used by co-resident DLG.

ASAI-IP

For ASAI links used by co-Resident DLG.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CTI Link

Port
Appears when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK. Enter 7 characters to specify a
port, or an x.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44
(DEFINITY R)

First and second numbers are the cabinet number

01 through 03
(DEFINITY SI)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

01 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number

01 through 32

Sixth and seventh characters are the circuit number

x

Indicates that there is no hardware associated with the
port assignment. Use for AWOH.

Name

Enter a name associated with this CTI link.
COR

Enter a Class of Restriction (COR) number to select the desired restriction.
BRI Options
XID
Appears when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK. Used to identify Layer 2 XID
testing capability.
MIM Support
Management Information Message Support. A display-only field that appears
when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK.
Fixed TEI
Appears when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK. It indicates that the endpoint has
a fixed Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

705

Screen reference

The TEI identifies a unique access point within a service. You must administer
TEIs for fixed TEI terminals. However, for terminals with the automatic TEI
capability, the system dynamically assigns the TEI.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Entering y displays the TEI field.
For ASAI, enter y.

CRV Length
Appears when the Type field is ASAI or ADJLK. Enter 1 or 2 to indicate the
length of CRV for each interface.
Field descriptions for page 2

add cti-link next

Page 2 of 2
CTI LINK

FEATURE OPTIONS
Event Minimization? n

Screen 84.

Special Character for Restricted Number? n

Link screen when Type field is ASAI-IP or ADJ-IP

Event Minimization
May be used when event reports normally would be sent on multiple associations,
but the adjunct does not need to see more than one. Typically, these event reports
are identical except for the association they are sent over (for example, call
control, domain control, or active notification). Some applications discard
duplicate events, so in this case, there is no point in sending them across the ASAI
CTI link. When enabled, this option allows only a single such event to be sent.
The selection of the association on which the event will be sent is based on
association precedence as follows: active notification (if enabled), call control (if
enabled), or domain control (if enabled). Use the Station screen to change this
option. The new option settings take effect the next time the ASAI link is
activated.

706

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to control the behavior for that particular link.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

Special Character for Restricted Number
Enables an ASAI CTI link to indicate the calling number restricted presentation
within an event report. For further information, see DEFINITY® Enterprise
Communications Server CallVisor® ASAI Technical Reference.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

When set to y and a calling number received in a SETUP
message has the presentation indicator set (octet 3a in the
calling number), then an “*” is appended to the calling party
number in the ASAI message.

Data modules
The following section provides descriptions of standard fields on Data Module
screens. Some of the fields are used for specific data module types; others are
used for all data modules. Unique fields and fields requiring special consideration
are listed with the appropriate data module descriptions in this book.
Field descriptions for page 1

change data-module 30

Page

1 of 2

DATA MODULE
Data Extension:
Type:
Port:
ITC:

30
data-line___
_______
restricted__

Name:
COS:
COR:
TN:

27
1
1
1

BCC:

Connected to: dte

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1:
SPECIAL DIALING OPTION:

ASSIGNED MEMBER (Station with a data extension button for this data module)
Ext
1: 1002

Screen 85.

555-233-506

Name
27 character

station name

Data Module

Issue 5 October 2002

707

Screen reference

Baud Rate

Used with X.25 Data Modules. The maximum raw data transmission speed.
Valid entries

Usage

300
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
switched

You can enter this if the Cable Type field is none on the
PGATE screen.

BCC

(Bearer Capability Class) A display-only field used with Data Line, Netcon,
Processor Interface, Point-to-Point Protocol, Processor/Trunk (pdm selection),
and System Port Data Modules. Appears when the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI
Trunks field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. The value
in this field corresponds to the speed setting of the data module. This field may be
compared with the BCC value in an associated routing pattern when attempted
calls utilizing the data module fail to complete. The BCC values must be the same.
See ‘‘Generalized route selection’’ on page 1687 for a detailed description of
Bearer Capability Classes (BCC) and their ability to provide specialized routing
for various types of voice and data calls. The BCC value is used to determine
compatibility when non-ISDN-PRI facilities are connected to ISDN facilities
(ISDN-PRI Interworking).
Valid entries

Usage

1

Relates to 56-bkps

2, 3, 4

Relates to 64 kbps

Board

Used with Announcement Data Modules. Enter the five character announcement
circuit pack number that identifies the physical circuit pack to which the
announcement module is connected. You can enter X in this field to indicate that
there is no hardware associated with this port assignment.

708

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

The five character announcement board number is comprised of:
Characters

Meaning

Value

1-2

Cabinet Number

01 through 44
(DEFINITY R
configurations)
1-64 (S8700
IP-Connect)
01 through 03
(DEFINITY SI
configurations)

3

Carrier

A through E

4-5

Slot Number or X

0 through 20

Broadcast Address

Used with Ethernet data modules. See Administration for Network Connectivity
for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information. Does not appear for
S8700 IP-Connect.
Connected Data Module

Used with X.25 and Processor Interface (used with DEFINITY CSI and SI only)
data modules. See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software for more information.
Connected to

Used with Data Line and Processor/Trunk (pdm selection) Data Module. This
field shows to what the Asynchronous Data Unit (ADU) is connected.
Valid
entries

Usage

dte

Data Terminal Equipment. Used with Data Line and
Processor/Trunk Data Modules.

isn

Information Systems Network. Used with Data Line and
Processor/Trunk Data Modules.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

709

Screen reference

COS

Does not appear for ethernet or x.25. Enter the desired class of service.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 15

Select the allowed features.

COR

Does not appear for ethernet. Enter the desired class of restriction.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 95

Select the allowed restriction.

Data Extension

A display-only field indicating the extension assigned to the data module.
Destination Number

Used with X.25 and Processor Interface data modules. See Administration for
Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.
DTE/DCE

Used with X.25 Data Modules. Specifies how the above endpoint type acts.
Valid entries

Usage

dte

Data Terminal Equipment

dce

Data Communications Equipment

Enable Link

Used with X.25, Point-to-Point, and Processor Interface data modules. See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for
more information. This field is in different locations on the screen for different
data module types.

710

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

Endpoint Type

Used with X.25 Data Modules. An endpoint type is a type of packet switched data
endpoint that uses X.25 call control procedures. The X.25 Endpoint connects to
external ports on the PGATE board and to the TDM bus via a DS1 trunk. Ports
connected to the adjunct endpoint can be either DTEs or DCEs. The type of
endpoint (DTE or DCE) is administrable on the “data-mod” screen.
Valid entries

Usage

adjunct

Mandatory entry

Error Logging

Used with X.25 Data Modules.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to record X.25 protocol errors in the hardware error
log. See the Maintenance for Avaya™ MultiVantage and
DEFINITY® Server for more information about error logs.

Establish Connection

Used with X.25, Point-to-Point, and Processor Interface (used with DEFINITY
CSI and SI only) data modules. See Administration for Network Connectivity for
Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.
Highest PVC Logical Channel

A display-only field used with X.25 Data Modules. Appears when the Permanent
Virtual Circuit field is y. Specifies how the above endpoint type acts.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 64

Indicates that 1 to 64 Logical Channels are allowed on this
port.

IP Address Negotiation

Used with Point-to-Point data modules. Does not appear for S8700 IP-Connect.
See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software
for more information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

711

Screen reference

ITC

(Information Transfer Capability) Used with 7500, Announcement, data-line,
Netcon, Processor/Trunk (pdm selection), Processor Interface, and System Port
Data Modules. Appears only when, on the Trunk Group screen, the Comm Type
field is 56k-data or 64k-data. Indicates type of transmission facilities to be used
for ISDN calls originated from this endpoint. Does not display for voice-only or
BRI stations.
Valid entries

Usage

restricted

Either restricted or unrestricted transmission facilities are
used to complete the call. A restricted facility is a
transmission facility that enforces 1’s density digital
transmission (that is, a sequence of 8 digital zeros are
converted to a sequence of 7 zeros and a digital 1).

unrestricted

Only unrestricted transmission facilities are used to complete
the call. An unrestricted facility is a transmission facility that
does not enforce 1’s density digital transmission (that is,
digital information is sent exactly as is).

Link

Used with X.25, Ethernet, Point-to-Point, and Processor Interface (used with
DEFINITYCSI and SI only) data modules. See Administration for Network
Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information. This field
is in different locations on the screen for different data module types.
Valid entries

Usage

1-99

Enter a communication interface link number.

Maintenance Extension

Used with Netcon and Processor Interface Data Modules.

712

Valid entries

Usage

Enter the extension number required to
perform maintenance functions on the
standby netcon physical channel in a
duplicated system.

The standby remote loop around
tests fails if this field is not
administered.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

MM Complex Voice Ext

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Does not appear on S8700
IP-Connect. This field contains the number of the associated phone in the
multimedia complex. This field appears only after you set the Multimedia field to
y. This field is left blank until you enter the data module extension in MM
Complex Data Ext on the Station screen.
Valid entries

Usage

Valid values
conform to
your dial plan

Once you complete the field on the station screen, these two
extensions are associated as two parts of a one-number
complex, which is the extension of the telephone.

Multimedia

Used with the 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only if, on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the MM field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to make this data module part of a multimedia
complex.

Name

Enter the name of the user associated with the data module. The name is optional
and can be blank.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27 alphanumeric
characters
Network uses 1’s for Broadcast Addresses

Used with Ethernet data modules. See Administration for Network Connectivity
for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.
Node Name

Used with Ethernet (not on S8700 IP-Connect) and Point-to-Point data modules.
See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software
for more information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

713

Screen reference

PDATA Port

Used with System Port Data Modules. Enter a seven-digit alphanumeric port
location to which the data module is connected. Used to relate the physical
PDATA port to which the mode 3 portion of the system port is connected. This
entry must be assigned to a port on a PDATA Line Board.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 22

First and second characters are the cabinet number

01 through 64

First and second characters are the cabinet number (S8700
IP-Connect)

A through E

Third character is the carrier

01 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number in the carrier

01 through 12

Sixth and seventh characters are the circuit number

Permanent Virtual Circuit

A display-only field used with X.25 Data Modules.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

A y indicates that the logical channels for PVC are allowed
for this port.

Physical Channel

Used with Netcon and Processor Interface Data Modules. The Physical Channel
number is referred to on associated system forms as the Interface Link number.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 08

For Processor Interface Data Modules, enter the 2-digit circuit
number of the Processor Interface port. A multi-carrier cabinet
system supports the use of two Processor Interface circuit packs,
the first circuit pack (mounted in Control Carrier A) supports
physical channels or links 01 through 04; the second (mounted in
Control Carrier A) supports physical channels or links 05 through
08. A single-carrier cabinet system supports one Processor
Interface circuit pack and physical channels or links 01 through 04
only.

714

01 through 04

For DEFINITY CSI configurations. For Netcon Data
Modules, enter a netcon data channel.

01 through 08

For DEFINITY SI configurations. For Netcon Data
Modules, enter a netcon data channel.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

Port

Used with 7500, Data Line, Ethernet, Processor/Trunk, PPP, System Port, X.25,
and World Class BRI Data Modules. Specifies a port location to which the data
module is connected.
Characters

Meaning

Value

1-2

Cabinet Number

01 through 44 (DEFINITY R
configurations)
01 through 03 (DEFINITY SI
configurations)
01 through 64 (S8700 IP-Connect)

3

Carrier

A through E

4-5

Slot Number

0 through 20

6-7

Circuit Number

01 through 04 (x.25 circuit pack)
01 through 31 (DEFINITY SI, S8700
IP-Connect (tdm, pdm)
configurations)
01 through 16 (ppp for S8700
IP-Connect)
01 through 08 (system-port for S8700
IP-Connect)
17/33 (ethernet on S8700 IP-Connect)

NOTE:

You can enter X in the Port field to indicate that there is no hardware
associated with the port assignment (also known as administration
without hardware). These stations are referred to as “phantom
stations.” If this data module is designated as a secondary data
module (Secondary data module set to y) X cannot be entered into
this field. The port of a primary data module cannot be changed to X
if a secondary data module is administered.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

715

Screen reference

Remote Loop-Around Test

Used with Processor/Trunk and X.25 Data Modules. Appears when the Type field
is pdm, tdm, or x.25.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

For Processor/Trunk Data Modules, enter y if the data
module supports a loop-back test at the EIA interface. In
general, Avaya equipment supports this test but it is not
required by Level 2 Digital Communications Protocol. Enter
n to abort a request for this test.

y/n

For X.25 Data Modules, enter y to allow remote loop-around
tests on this port. See the Maintenance for Avaya™
MultiVantage and DEFINITY® Server manual for more
information about remote loop-around tests. Enter n to abort
a request for this test.

Secondary data module

Used with Processor/Trunk Data Modules. Appears only when the Type field is
pdm. The primary data module must be administered before the secondary data
module may be added. If the Port field is X, the Secondary data module field
cannot be y.
Valid entries

Usage

y

This PDM is the secondary data module used for Dual
I-channel AUDIX networking.

n

This is the primary PDM, or if this data module is not used
for AUDIX networking.

Subnet Mask

Used with Point-to-Point data modules (for S8700 IP-Connect). See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for
more information.
Switched Virtual Circuit

A display-only field used with X.25 Data Modules.

716

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

A y indicates that the Switched Virtual Circuit is not allowed
for this port.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 100

Enter the Tenant Partition number.

Type

Enter the type of data module.
Valid entries

Usage

7500

Assigns a 7500 Data Module. The 7500 data module
supports automatic TEI, B-channel, maintenance and
management messaging, and SPID initialization
capabilities. BRI endpoints, both voice and/or data, are
assigned to either the ISDN-BRI - 4-wire S/T-NT Interface
circuit pack or the ISDN-BRI - 2-wire U circuit pack.
Each can support up to 12 ports. Since BRI provides
multipoint capability, more than one ISDN endpoint
(voice or data) can be administered on one port. For BRI,
multipoint administration allows for telephones having
SPID initialization capabilities, and can only be allowed if
no endpoint administered on the same port is a fixed tie
endpoint and no station on the same port has B-channel
data capability. Currently, multipoint is restricted to 2
endpoints per port.

announcement

Assigns an announcement data module. The
announcement data module is built-in to the integrated
announcement circuit pack and is administered using the
Announcement Data Module screen. This data module (in
conjunction with an administered Netcon Data Module in
DEFINITY SI configurations) allows the system to save
and restore the recorded announcements file between the
announcement circuit pack and the system memory.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

717

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

data-line

Assigns a Data Line Data Module. The Data Line Data
Module (DLDM) screen assigns ports on the Data Line
circuit pack (DLC) that allows EIA 232C devices to
connect to the system. The DLC, with a companion
Asynchronous Data Unit (ADU), provides a less
expensive data interface to the system than other
asynchronous DCP data modules.
The DLC supports asynchronous transmissions at speeds
of Low and 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 bps
over 2-pair (full-duplex) lines. These lines can have
different lengths, depending on the transmission speed and
wire gauge.
The DLC has 8 ports. The connection from the port to the
EIA device is direct, meaning that no multiplexing is
involved. A single port of the DLC is equivalent in
functionality to a data module and a digital line port. The
DLC appears as a data module to the Digital Terminal
Equipment (DTE) and as a digital line port to the switch.
The DLC connects the following EIA 232C equipment to
the system:

ethernet

718

Issue 5 October 2002

■

Printers

■

Non-Intelligent Data Terminals

■

Intelligent Terminals, Personal Computers (PCs)

■

Host Computers

■

Information Systems Network (ISN), RS-232C
Local Area Networks (LANs), or other data
switches.

Assigns an Ethernet data module. The Ethernet Data
Module screen assigns the 10BaseT port on the
Control-LAN (C-Lan) circuit pack. This port provides a
TCP/IP connection to network hub or LAN. See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software for more information on
Ethernet data modules.

555-233-506

Data modules

Valid entries

Usage

netcon

Assigns a Netcon Data Module. Netcon data modules are
the Processor Data Modules (PDMs) that are integrated
into the system’s network control ports that provide
asynchronous circuit switched interfaces to the
maintenance and administration terminals, Hospitality
journal printers, and CDR digital output. They are
characterized by their special locations, that is, special
port identifications.
NOTE:

The Netcon data module is only
applicable to DEFINITY SI
configurations. For DEFINITY R and
later configurations, use the system-port
command.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

719

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

pdm

Assigns a DCE interface for Processor/Trunk Data
Modules. These screens assign Modular Processor Data
Modules (MPDMs) and Modular Trunk Data Modules
(MTDMs). One screen is required for assigning MPDMs
(700D), 7400B, 7400D or 8400B Data Module, and
another screen for MTDMs (700B, 700C, 700E, 7400A).
One screen must be completed for each MPDM, 7400B,
7400D, 8400B or MTDM.
The MPDM, 7400B, or 8400B Data Module provides a
Data Communications Equipment (DCE) interface for
connection to equipment such as data terminals, CDR
output devices, on-premises administration terminal,
Message Server, Property Management System (PMS),
AUDIX, and host computers. It also provides a Digital
Communications Protocol (DCP) interface to the digital
switch. (DCE is the equipment on the network side of a
communications link that provides all the functions
required to make the binary serial data from the source or
transmitter compatible with the communications channel.)
The MTDM provides an Electronic Industries Association
(EIA) Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) interface for
connection to off-premises private line trunk facilities or a
switched telecommunications network and a DCP
interface for connection to the digital switch. (DTE is the
equipment comprising the endpoints in a connection over
a data circuit. For example, in a connection between a data
terminal and a host computer, the terminal, the host, and
their associated modems or data modules make up the
DTE.) The MTDM or 7400A Data Module also can serve
as part of a conversion resource for Combined Modem
Pooling.

ppp

720

Issue 5 October 2002

Assigns a Point-to-Point Protocol data module. The PPP
Data Module screen assigns a synchronous TCP/IP port on
the C-Lan. These ports are tailored to provide TCP/IP
connections for use over telephone lines. See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software for more information on
Point-to-Point data modules.

555-233-506

Data modules

Valid entries

Usage

procr-intf

Assigns a Processor Interface Data Module. The Processor
Interface data modules are the Processor Data Modules
(PDMs) that are integrated into the system’s
synchronous/asynchronous Processor Interface circuit
pack ports.
NOTE:

The Processor Interface data module is
applicable only to DEFINITY SI
configurations.
They are used to provide the following interfaces:
■

3B/Call Management System (maximum of 1)

■

3B/Message Server (maximum of 1)

■

Distributed Communications System (maximum
of 8)

■

AUDIX (maximum of 1)
NOTE:

Not all maximums can be achieved at the
same time
Connections for these interfaces are achieved via a digital
line port and MPDM combination, and/or in the case of
DCS or ISDN-PRI, via a DS1 interface. One direct EIA
connection is available (labeled as Processor Interface on
the back of the Control Cabinet) for simplex operation.
When used, the physical channel assignment (see below)
must be “01”. Use of the EIA connection eliminates the
need for one digital line port/MPDM combination. See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software for more information on
Processor Interface data modules.
system-port

Assigns a System Port Data Module.

tdm

Assigns a DTE interface for Processor/Trunk Data
Modules. See the pdm entry above.

wcbri

Assigns a World Class BRI Data Module.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

721

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

x.25

Assigns an X.25 Data Module in DEFINITY R
configurations for communications to Adjuncts and other
nodes in a DCS network. See Administration for Network
Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more
information on X.25 data modules.

DESTINATION
CHAP

Appears when the Type field is ppp. Used with Point-to-Point data modules. See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for
more information.
CHAP Secret

Appears when the CHAP field is y. Used with Point-to-Point data modules. See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for
more information.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter 1-30
characters;
first character
cannot be @
Digits

Appears when the Type field is ppp. Used with Point-to-Point data modules. See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for
more information.
Valid entries

Usage

Extension of
the destination
or blank
Node Name

Appears when the Type field is ppp. Used with Point-to-Point data modules. See
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for
more information.

722

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1

Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and
World Class BRI Data Modules. Supports Data Hot Line. This field can be left
blank.
Valid entries

Usage

e

Enhanced

g

Group. You also must enter a group list number.

p

Personal. You also must enter a personal list number.

s

System.

SPECIAL DIALING OPTION

Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and
World Class BRI Data Modules. Identifies the type of dialing for calls when this
data module originates calls.
Valid entries

Usage

hot-line
default

blank

For regular (normal) keyboard dialing.

HOT LINE DESTINATION
Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code

Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and
World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only when the Special Dialing Option
field is hot-line. Entry in this field supports Data Hot Line.
Valid entries

Usage

0-999

This number is associated with the AD List. When the user
goes off-hook on a Data Hot Line call, the system dials the
AD number.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

723

Screen reference

DEFAULT DIALING
Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code

Used with 7500, Data Line, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor Interface, and
World Class BRI Data Modules. Only appears when the Special Dialing Option
field is default. When the user goes off-hook and enters a carriage return
following the DIAL prompt, the system dials the AD number. The data call
originator can also perform data-terminal dialing by specifying a dial string that
may or may not contain alphanumeric names.
Valid entries

Usage

0-999

Enter a list number associated with the abbreviated dialing
list.

CIRCUIT SWITCHED DATA ATTRIBUTES

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules.
NOTE:

These fields represent defaults needed for modem pooling conversion
resource insertion when the endpoint does not support data query
capability and administered connections. These fields have no
significance for data modules providing data query [all Avaya
-supported ISDN-BRI data modules (7500 and ADM)]. For Avaya
ISDN-BRI or World Class ISDN-BRI data modules, use the default
settings.
Default Duplex

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to identify the duplex
mode.
Valid entries

Usage

full

Allows simultaneous two-way transmission.

half

Allows only one transmission direction at a time.

Default Mode

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to identify the data
mode.

724

Valid entries

Usage

sync

Synchronous

async

Asynchronous

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

Default Speed

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to identify the data
rate.
Valid entries

Usage

1200
2400
4800
19200
56000
64000

Can be entered when the Default Mode field is sync.

ASSIGNED MEMBER
Ext and Name

Used with Data Line, Announcement, Netcon, Processor/Trunk, Processor
Interface, and System Port Data Modules. Displays the extension number and
name of the user (previously administered) with associated Data Extension
buttons who shares the module.
DATA MODULE CAPABILITIES
Default Data Applications

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to identify mode to be
Used with originating data calls when the mode is not specified with the calling
parameters. This mode is also used for terminating trunk calls that do not have
bearer capability specified or administered connections. See ‘‘Generalized route
selection’’ on page 1687 for additional information.
Valid entries

Usage

M0

Mode 0. Use this setting for a WCBRI endpoint used as an
administered connection.

M1

Mode 1

M2_A

Mode 2 asynchronous

M2_S

Mode 2 synchronous

M3/2

Mode 3/2 adaptable

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

725

Screen reference

Default ITC

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules.
Valid entries

Usage

restricted

For a WCBRI endpoint used as an administered connection.

unrestricted

MM Complex Voice Ext:

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. This display-only field
contains the number of the associated phone in the multimedia complex. It only
appears when the Multimedia field is y. This field is left blank until you enter the
data module extension in MM Complex Data Ext field on the Station screen. Once
you complete the field on the Station screen, these two extensions are associated
as two parts of a one-number complex, which is the extension of the phone. Valid
values conform to your dial plan.
Field descriptions for page 2

This version of page 2 appears when the Type field is data-line.
change data-module 30
CAPABILITIES

DATA MODULE

Page 2 of 2

KYBD Dialing? y
Busy Out? n

Configuration? n

SPEEDS
Low? y
300? y
OPTIONS

1200? y
2400? y

Permit Mismatch? n
Disconnect Sequence: two-breaks
Parity: even

Screen 86.

726

4800? y
9600? y

19200? y
Autoadjust? n

Dial Echoing? y
Answer Text? y
Connected Indication? y

Data Line Data Module — if KYBD Dialing is y

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

change data-module 30
CAPABILITIES

DATA MODULE

Page 2 of 2

KYBD Dialing? n
Busy Out? n
SPEEDS
Low? y
300? y
OPTIONS

1200? y
2400? y

4800? y
9600? y

19200? y

Permit Mismatch? n

Screen 87.

Data Line Data Module — if KYBD Dialing is n

See ‘‘DLC Option Settings’’ on page 732 for additional information when
assigning entries for the remaining fields on the screen.
CAPABILITIES
Busy Out

This option should be enabled for DTEs that are members of a hunt group and to
allow “busy out” when DTE turns power off so that calls do not terminate on that
DTE.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to place the DLC port in a busied-out state once the
DTE control lead to the DLC is dropped.

Configuration

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. This option normally is enabled for
“originate/receive” DTE such as non-intelligent terminals and disabled for
intelligent devices such as computers. The KYBD Dialing field must be y with
this option.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to allow the viewing and changing of options from
the DTE.

KYBD Dialing

This option must be enabled to allow data endpoints to originate calls via the EIA
232C interface and obtain ASCII feedback text. When enabled, the user gets the
dial prompt. This option normally is enabled for “originate/receive” DTE that has

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

727

Screen reference

a need to set up data calls. If this option is disabled, originations cannot be done at
the DTE and text feedback does not occur at the DTE during call setup/take down.
Data call answering is still allowed but without text feedback.
NOTE:

ADU-type hunt groups connecting the system to terminal servers on a host
computer should have these hunt group extensions assigned as “no”
keyboard dialing.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to allow keyboard dialing. This enables the data
endpoint to receive and transmit text during call origination or
termination. Low must be n.

SPEEDS

Enter y to select operating speeds as follows:
Valid
entries

Usage

Low

Enter y to instruct the DLC to operate at a low speed from 0 to
1800 bits per second (bps). Enter n if the KYBD Dialing field
is y.

300, 1200,
2400, 4800,
9600, or
19200

Enter y beside the desired operating speed. Enter n if the
speed is not desired. The DLC can be any one of these speeds.
The speed is matched for the duration of the call, from call
setup to call takedown.
When multiple speeds are selected (select three or more, do
not select just two speeds) and autoadjust is disabled, the
DTE’s speed must be the highest selected speed. This is
required because all feedback text is delivered to the DTE at
the highest selected speed.

Autoadjust

728

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. Enter y which
tells the DLC port to automatically adjust to the operating
speed and parity of the DTE it is connected to. Enter n if this
option is not desired. Autoadjust can be selected with any of
the speeds selected in the previous step. Autoadjust allows the
DLC port to determine the speed and parity of the DTE and
then match itself to this speed. Autoadjust only applies to calls
originated by the user through Keyboard Dialing.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

Answer Text

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. This option enables text feedback that
is normally delivered to the DTE when a call is answered or disconnected. The
Answer Text option applies to DLC-generated text as well as text received from
the system. If this option is disabled, the system still generates the text, but the
DLC prevents it from being sent to the device.
This applies to the following messages:
— INCOMING CALL
— ANSWERED
— DISCONNECTED
— DISCONNECTED OTHER END
This option usually is disabled when the answering DTE is a computer or an
intelligent device.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow text messages to be delivered to the DTE
when a call is being answered.

Answer Text

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. This option enables text feedback that
is normally delivered to the DTE when a call is answered or disconnected. The
Answer Text option applies to DLC-generated text as well as text received from
the system. If this option is disabled, the system still generates the text, but the
DLC prevents it from being sent to the device.
This applies to the following messages:
— INCOMING CALL
— ANSWERED
— DISCONNECTED
— DISCONNECTED OTHER END
This option usually is disabled when the answering DTE is a computer or an
intelligent device.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow text messages to be delivered to the DTE
when a call is being answered.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

729

Screen reference

OPTIONS
Answer Text

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. This option enables text feedback that
is normally delivered to the DTE when a call is answered or disconnected. The
Answer Text option applies to DLC-generated text as well as text received from
the system. If this option is disabled, the system still generates the text, but the
DLC prevents it from being sent to the device.
This applies to the following messages:
— INCOMING CALL
— ANSWERED
— DISCONNECTED
— DISCONNECTED OTHER END
This option usually is disabled when the answering DTE is a computer or an
intelligent device.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow text messages to be delivered to the DTE
when a call is being answered.

Connected Indication

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. This option generates a
“CONNECTED” message to the DTE when the connection has been established.
If the KYBD Dialing field is n, the connected indication is provided by the DLC
activating its EIA 232C control lead.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to select this option.

Dial Echoing

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y.
Valid
entries
y/n

730

Usage

Enter y to echo characters back to the DTE. Dial echoing
should be disabled when keyboard dialing is done by an
intelligent device.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

Disconnect Sequence

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. Selects the sequence for a disconnect.
Valid
entries

Usage

long-break

A long-break is greater than 2 seconds.

two-breaks

Two-breaks is within 1 second.

Parity

Appears when the KYBD Dialing field is y. Select the desired type of parity. The
DLC generates the parities when call setup text is sent to the DTE. The DLC does
not check the parity when receiving dialing characters. Parity has nothing to do
with the far end; it is used by the DLC to terminal communications during call
setup. Set to match the connected DTE.
Valid entries

Usage

even
odd
mark
space

Permit Mismatch

This option allows the EIA interface to operate at a rate different than that agreed
to in the data module handshake. (The data module handshake is always the
highest compatible rate as determined by the reported speed option of each data
module.) Permit Mismatch eliminates the need to change the DTE/DLC speed
every time a call is placed to/from an endpoint operating at a different speed.
When this option is enabled, the DLC reports the highest optioned speed and all
the lower speeds (or the previously selected autoadjust speed) during the
handshake process.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to instruct the DLC to operate at the highest selected
speed, which is a higher rate than the far-end data module.

! CAUTION:
Caution must be used when using this option to send information from a
DTE/DCE that is transmitting data at higher rates than that of the far end.
Sustained usage of this type transmission results in loss of data. Whenever
this option is enabled, the DTE must match the highest speed selected for the
associated DLC port.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

731

Screen reference

This option is intended to be used by a DTE device operating locally at a higher
baud rate than that of its far-end connection but transmitting relatively low
amounts of data (for example, a user typing at a terminal). Also, this option may
be selected whether Keyboard Dialing is selected.
NOTE:

The Low speed setting is not reported as an available speed when the Permit
Mismatch field is y.
DLC Option Settings

The following provides additional information on the option settings for DLCs
when used with the following types of devices:
■

Printers

■

Non-intelligent terminals

■

Data terminals and personal computers

■

Host computers

■

Information Systems Network (ISN)

Printers

A DLC port with a companion ADU, when attached to a printer, usually
terminates a data call. Therefore, in this connection, the printer is the endpoint
device. The originating device may be attached to a DCP mode 2 data module
(such as the MPDM) or the DLC. A Z3A ADU extends the range of the EIA 232C
connection.
When a receive-only printer (or any printer that does not generate the Transmit
Data and DTR leads) is used, the ADU must be powered from a small
plug-mounted transformer (2012D, or equivalent) connected to pins 7 and 8 of the
modular jack. (See ADU User Manual for details.)
An ADU cannot be used if the printer has hardware flow control using the Clear
To Send (CTS) lead. An ADU can be used, however, if the printer is using
software flow control.
A printer connected to a DLC is usually assigned as a line. Table 10 lists the
option settings for printer connections.

732

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

Table 10. DLDM screen settings for printer connection
Field on screen

Option

Comments

Speed

Highest speed at
which the Printer
operates

Subject to distance
limitations; Autoadjust not
used

KYBD Dialing

no

Busy Out

yes

If printer is member of Hunt
Group

Permit Mismatch

yes

No, if printer is low speed

Parity

-

Don’t care

Dial Echoing

-

Don’t care

Disconnect
Sequence

-

Don’t care

Answer Text

-

Don’t care

Connected
Indication

-

Don’t care

Configuration

no

Non-intelligent terminals

A non-intelligent terminal connected to the DLC usually is assigned as a line.
Table 11 lists the option settings for non-intelligent terminals.
Table 11.

DLDM screen settings for connection to non-intelligent
terminals

Field On screen

Option

Comments

Speed

All speeds at which
the terminal can
operate; autoadjust

Subject to distance limitations;
Autoadjust when the KYBD
Dialing field is y and the
Terminal can generate an ASCII
“return”

KYBD Dialing

yes

Busy Out

no

Yes, if terminal is member of a
hunt group

Permit Mismatch

yes

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

733

Screen reference

Table 11.

DLDM screen settings for connection to non-intelligent
terminals (Continued)

Field On screen

Option

Comments

Parity

Same as DTE

Dial Echoing

yes

Only if the KYBD Dialing field
is y

Disconnect
Sequence

2

Depends on terminal

Answer Text

yes

Connected
Indication

-

Configuration

yes

Don’t care

Continued on next page

Data terminals and personal computers

An intelligent data terminal or a personal computer (PC) attached to a DLC can
either originate or terminate a data call. A single ADU at the site of the originating
device extends the distance signals can travel to the switch (the model ADU
depends on the terminal connector). An analog telephone can be attached to this
arrangement whenever an ADU uses the standard building wiring. Table 12 lists
the option settings used for data terminal and personal computer connections.
Table 12. DLDM screen settings for connection to data terminal or
personal computer
Field on screen

Option

Comments

Speed

All speeds at which
the Data Terminal
or PC can operate

Subject to distance limitations;
Autoadjust not used

KYBD Dialing

yes

Busy Out

no

Yes, if device is accessed through
a hunt group

Permit Mismatch

yes

No, if device does not support
XON/XOFF flow control
Continued on next page

734

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

Table 12. DLDM screen settings for connection to data terminal or
personal computer (Continued)
Field on screen

Option

Comments

Parity

Same as DTE

Dial Echoing

no

These devices can dial in the
ASCII stream without human
intervention

Disconnect
Sequence

Long 

-

Answer Text

no

These devices may not want to
see any text

Connected
Indication

-

Don’t care

Configuration

yes
Continued on next page

Host computers

A host computer may originate and terminate a data call. For this application, the
number of DLCs required depends on the number of ports needed. An MADU can
be used (instead of 8 ADUs) to complete the connection. Table 13 on page 736
lists option settings for a port that has a terminating connection to a host computer
or an originating connection from a host computer.
NOTE:

If the KYBD Dialing field is n, the rest of the option settings are irrelevant.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

735

Screen reference

Table 13. DLDM screen settings for terminating connection to host
computer
Field on screen

Option

Comments

Speed

All speeds at which
the computer can
operate

Subject to distance limitations;
Autoadjust not used

KYBD Dialing

no

Busy Out

-

Don’t care

Permit Mismatch

-

Don’t care

Parity

-

Don’t care

Dial Echoing

-

Don’t care

Disconnect
Sequence

-

Don’t care

Answer Text

-

Don’t care

Connected
Indication

-

Don’t care

Configuration

-

Don’t care

This version of page 2 does not appears for S8700 IP-Connect.
change data-module 30
DATA MODULE
LAYER 2 PARAMETERS
Number of Outstanding Frames (w): 4
Retry Attempt Counter (N2): 2
Frame Size (N1): 135
Retransmission (T1) Timer (1/10 seconds): 10
Idle (T4) Timer (1/10 seconds): 30
LAYER 3 PARAMETERS
Number of Outstanding Packets: 2
Restart (T20) Timer (seconds): 8
Reset (T22) Timer (seconds): 10

Screen 88.

736

Page 2 of 2

X.25 Adjunct Data Module

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

LAYER 2 PARAMETERS
Frame Size (N1)

Specifies the number of bytes in a frame.
Valid entries

Usage

135

If the value is 135, there can be up to 1080 bits within a
frame. This value is suitable for all adjuncts and for DCS.

263

Idle (T4) Timer (1/10 seconds)

The T4 timer is a system parameter that represents the time a DTE allows without
frames being exchanged on the data link.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 250

Number of Outstanding Frames (w)

Specifies layer 2 window size.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 7

If you enter 2, up to 2 frames can be sent without
confirmation.

Retransmission (T1) Timer (1/10 seconds)

The T1 timer is started at the beginning or the end of the transmission of a frame.
At the end of this timer, retransmission of a frame is initiated according to the
procedures for link set-up and disconnection or information transfer.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 250

Retry Attempt Counter (N2)

Specifies the number of times to send one frame when this frame is not confirmed
for a period of time.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 7

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

737

Screen reference

LAYER 3 PARAMETERS
Number of Outstanding Packets

Specifies the number of packets that can be sent without confirmation.
Valid entries

Usage

2 through 7

Reset (T22) Timer (seconds)

The T22 timer is a DTE time-limit started when DTE issues a reset indication and
terminated when the reset request is received or confirmed.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 500

Restart (T20) Timer (seconds)

The T20 timer is a DTE time-limit started when DTE issues a restart indication
and terminated when the restart request is received or confirmed.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 500

change data-module 30

Page 2 of 2
DATA MODULE

BRI LINK/MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
XID? y
Fixed TEI? n
MIM Support? y
Endpt Init? y

Screen 89.

738

TEI: ___
SPID: 300_____

MIM Mtce/Mgt? y

7500 and World Class BRI Data Module

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Data modules

BRI LINK/MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
Country Protocol

Used with World Class BRI Data Modules. Enter the protocol that corresponds to
your supported initialization and codesets. The Country Protocol must match any
previously-administered endpoint on the same port. The following table lists the
valid protocol entries.
Country/Area

Protocol

Australia

2

ETSI (Europe)

etsi

Japan

3

Singapore

6

United States (Bellcore National ISDN)

1

Endpt ID

Used with World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only if the Endpt Init field is
y. This field provides for multipoint configuration conformance to the Bellcore
Terminal Initialization procedures. In these procedures, a multipoint configuration
requires that the last 2 digits of the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) be between
00 and 63 and be binary unique for each endpoint. This field, combined with the
SPID, gives the effective SPID administered into the terminal. Bellcore ISDN-1
requires that the SPID programmed into the endpoint contain at least 9 digits. (For
example, if the SPID field is 1234, and the Endpt ID field is set to 01, then the
SPID administered on the terminal is 000123401. The three leading zeros are
necessary to create a 9-digit SPID.)
Valid entries

Usage

00 through 62

Enter a 2-digit number. Each Endpt ID field must have a
unique value for each endpoint on the same port.

Endpt Init

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Endpoint initialization is a
procedure, required for multipoint operation, by which User Service Order Profile
(USOP) is associated with an endpoint on the ISDN-BRI. This association is
made via the Service Profile Identifier (SPID), administered into the system and
entered into the ISDN-BRI terminal. For a ISDN-BRI terminal to become
operational in a multipoint configuration, both the administered SPID and the

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

739

Screen reference

SPID programmed into the ISDN-BRI terminal must be the same. This means that
the SPID of the new or re-used terminals must be programmed to match the
administered SPID value.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Indicates the terminal’s endpoint initialization capability.

Fixed TEI

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Used to indicate whether the
endpoint has Fixed Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) capability. TEI identifies
a unique access point within a service. For Fixed TEI stations, the TEI must be
administered. Terminals with automatic TEI capability, the associated TEI is
assigned by the system.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate the endpoint has Fixed Terminal
Equipment Identifier (TEI) capability.

MIM Mtce/Mgt

Used with 7500 Data Modules.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Entering y indicates the terminal supports MIM
Maintenance and Management capabilities, other than
endpoint initialization.

MIM Support

Used with 7500 Data Modules. Management Information Message Support. Used
to support two types of capabilities: MIM endpoint initialization capability (SPID
support), and other Maintenance/Management capability.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

740

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Date and Time

SPID

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only if the Endpt
Init field is y. The Service Profile Identifier (SPID) is a variable parameter of up to
10 digits. The SPID must be different for all terminals on the ISDN-BRI and from
the Service SPID. The SPID should always be assigned. If the SPID is not
assigned for the first ISDN-BRI on a port, any other ISDN-BRI assignment to that
port is blocked.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through
9999999999

TEI

Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules. Appears only if the Fixed
TEI field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 63

Enter a 1- to 2-digit number.

XID

(Exchange identification) Used with 7500 and World Class BRI Data Modules.
Used to identify layer 2 XID testing capability.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Avaya recommends setting to n.

Date and Time
Use this screen to set the system date and time, to select the daylight savings plan
number, if any, and to show whether the current time is standard time or daylight
savings. Settings on this screen affect your switch’s internal clock and timestamp.
You should update the date and time for a leap year or a system restart after a
power failure. The correct date and time assure that CDR records are correct.
CDR does not work until the date and time have been entered.
For additional information, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software
Guide to ACD Call Centers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

741

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 1
set time
DATE AND TIME
DATE
Day of the Week: _______
Day of the Month: __

Month: ________
Year: ____

TIME
Hour: __

Minute: __

Second: __

Type: ________________

Daylight Savings Rule: _
WARNING: Changing the date or time may impact BCMS, CDR, SCHEDULED EVENTS,
and MEASUREMENTS

Screen 90.

Date and Time

Day of the Month
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 31

Enter the current day of the month. The system
clock uses this as the current date.

Day of the Week
Valid entries

Usage

Sunday through Saturday

Enter the current day of the week. The system
clock uses this as the current day.

Daylight Savings Rule

This field displays which daylight savings rule is in use for your system.
Valid
entries
0 to 15

Usage

Enter the appropriate rule number. The system clock uses this
as the current daylight savings rule. These rules are defined on
the Daylight Savings Rules screen.

Hour

The system uses a 24-hour clock. For example, 14:00 is the same as 2:00 p.m.

742

Valid
entries

Usage

0 to 23

Enter the current hour to be used by the system clock.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Date and Time

Minute
Valid
entries
0 to 59

Usage

Enter the current minute. The system clock uses this as the
current minute.

Month
Valid entries

Usage

January through
December

Enter the current month. The system clock uses
this as the current month.

Second

This display-only field shows the seconds and cannot be modified. It resets to zero
when you save the information on this screen.
Type
Valid entries

Usage

daylight-savings

Enter daylight-savings to indicate daylight savings
time is in effect.

standard

Enter standard to indicate standard time is in effect.

Year
Valid
entries
1990 to 2099

Usage

Enter the current year. The system clock uses this as the
current year.

Related topics

To update the date and time for the change to or from daylight savings time, use
the Daylight Saving Rule screen. See ‘‘Establishing daylight savings rules’’ on
page 41 for instructions on how to set up daylight savings rules.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

743

Screen reference

Daylight Savings Rules
Use this screen to enter up to 15 customized daylight savings rules. You can
specify the day, month, date, time, and increment each daylight savings rule goes
into effect and the day, month, date, and time it stops. Rule 0 makes no adjustment
to the system clock for daylight savings and cannot be modified. Telephone
displays are affected by these settings.
Field descriptions for page 1
change daylight-savings-rules
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS RULES
Rule
Change Day
0:

No Daylight Savings

1:

Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:
Start:
Stop:

2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:

Screen 91.

first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first
first

_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on

Page 1 of 2

or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or

after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after
after

Month___Date

Time____Increment

________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________

__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at

______

Daylight Savings Rules

Change day (Start)
Valid entries

Usage

Sunday

Enter the day of the week you want the clock to move ahead
to begin daylight savings. If you enter Day in this field, the
clock will change on the exact date entered in the next two
fields.

through
Saturday or
Day

Change day (Stop)
Valid entries

Usage

Sunday

Enter the day of the week you want the clock to move back
to return to standard time. If you enter Day in this field, the
clock will change on the exact date entered in the next two
fields.

through
Saturday or
Day

744

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Daylight Savings Rules

Date (Start)
Valid
entries
0 to 31

Usage

Enter the day of the month you want the clock to move ahead
to begin daylight savings.

Date (Stop)
Valid
entries
0 to 31

Usage

Enter the date you want the clock to move back to return to
standard time.

Increment (Start)
Valid
entries

Usage

0 to 23

Enter the number of hours you want the clock to move ahead
for daylight savings and to move back to return to standard
time.

0 to 59

Enter the number of minutes you want the clock to move
ahead for daylight savings and to move back to return to
standard time.

Month (Start)
Valid entries

Usage

January through
December

Enter the month you want the clock to move ahead to
begin daylight savings.

Month (Stop)
Valid entries

Usage

January

Enter the month you want the clock to move back to return
to standard time.

through
December

Rule

This display-only field indicates the daylight savings rule number.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

745

Screen reference

Time (Start)

The system uses a 24-hour clock. For example, 14:00 is the same as 2:00 p.m.
Valid
entries

Usage

0 to 23

Enter the hour you want the clock to move ahead to begin
daylight savings.

0 to 59

Enter the minute you want the clock to move ahead to begin
daylight savings.

Time (Stop)

The system uses a 24-hour clock. For example, 14:00 is the same as 2:00 p.m.
Valid
entries

Usage

0 to 23

Enter the hour you want the clock to move back to return to
standard time.

0 to 59

Enter the minute you want the clock to move back to return to
standard time.

DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen
Use the DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen to determine when and how to
convert messages from an administered AUDIX NCA-TSC to a QSIG NCA-TSC.
This screen maps the AUDIX NCA-TSC to the appropriate machine ID index to
find the QSIG subscriber entry in the QSIG MWI-Prefix screen. It also assigns the
voice mail number to be used when a DCS served-user node interrogates a QSIG
message center.
This screen only appears if the Interworking with DCS field is enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

746

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen

change isdn dcs-qsig-tsc-gateway

Page 1 of 1
DCS TO QSIG TSC GATEWAY

Mach
ID
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Sig
Grp
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

TSC
Index
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Screen 92.

Voice Mail
Number
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________
____________

AAR/
ARS
Access
Code
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Mach
ID
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Sig
Grp
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

TSC
Index
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

VoiceMail
Number
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

AAR/
ARS
Access
Code
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway screen

AAR/ARS Access Code

This field can be left blank.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9, *, #

Enter up to 4-digit access code.

Mach ID

You can enter up to 20 machine IDs.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 20

Enter a unique machine ID. The system does not
allow you to specify an ID that you already entered
on the Processor Channel screen.

Sig Grp

You must complete the Signaling Group field for each machine ID.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 110

Enter the assigned signaling group number between
1 and 110 for DEFINITY SI and CSI.

1 through 416

Enter the assigned signaling group number between
1 and 416 for DEFINITY R

1 through 650

Enter the assigned signaling group number between
1 and 650 for S8300 Media Server, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

747

Screen reference

TSC Index

You must complete the TSC Index field for each machine ID.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 64

Enter the assigned signaling group number for
qsig-mwi application type on the Signaling Group
screen.

Voice Mail Number

This field can be left blank.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9

Enter the complete Voice Mail Dial Up number up to
15 digits.

Dial Plan Analysis Table
The Dial Plan Analysis Table is the system’s guide to translating the digits dialed
by users. This screen enables you to determine the beginning digits and total
length for each type of call that your switch needs to interpret. The Dial Plan
Analysis Table and the Dial Plan Parameters screen work together to define your
system’s dial plan.
change dialplan analysis

Page

1 of

3

DIAL PLAN ANALYSIS TABLE
Percent Full:

Dialed
String
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*0
*1
*8
*9
#

Screen 93.

748

Total
Length
1
3
5
2
6
4
7
7
1
5
3
3
4
4
3

Call
Type
attd
dac
ext
fac
ext
ext
ext
ext
fac
ext
fac
fac
fac
dac
fac

Dialed
String

Total Call
Length Type

Dialed
String

9

Total Call
Length Type

Dial Plan Analysis Table

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Dial Plan Analysis Table

Call Type

Valid entries

Usage

attd

Attendant — Defines how users call an attendant. Attendant
access numbers can start with any number from 0 – 9 and contain
1 or 2 digits. If a telephone’s COR restricts the user from
originating calls, this user cannot access the attendant using this
code.

dac

Dial access code — Allows you to use trunk access codes (TAC)
and feature access codes (FAC) in the same range. Dial access
codes can start with any number from 0–9, * or # and can contain
up to 4 digits.
If an extension entry and a DAC entry have the same Dialed
String, the extension entry can be as long as or longer than the
DAC entry only if all of the trunk groups covered by that DAC
entry have Dial Access on the Trunk Group screen set to “no.”

You can use the DAC to activate or deactivate a switch feature or
to seize a trunk from a trunk group, or both. In the first case, the
DAC functions as a FAC, in the second as a TAC. For example,
you can define the group 300–399 for dial access codes, and
allow both FAC and TAC in that range.
You can use 4-digit DACs for ordinary trunk access, but they do
not work for attendant control of trunk groups, trunk-ID buttons,
or DCS, and only the last 3 digits of the codes can be recorded in
CDR records.
ext

555-233-506

Primary extension — Defines extension ranges that can be used
on your system. Extension can have a first digit of 0 through 9
and can be 1 – 7 digits in length. Extension cannot have the same
first digit as the ARS or AAR feature access code (FAC).

Issue 5 October 2002

749

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

fac

Feature access code only — A FAC can be any number from 1–9
and contain up to 4 digits. You can use * or #, but only as a first
digit.
Avaya recommends that a FAC have the longest total length for a
given dialed string when using mixed numbering. Otherwise,
problems may occur when, for example, 3-digit FACs and 4-digit
extensions begin with the same first digit and the FAC is an
abbreviated dialing list access code.
However, if the entry in the dial plan that defines the FAC is used
to define the AAR or ARS access code, then it must have the
longest total length in the dial plan.

pext

Prefixed extension — Is made up of a prefix (first digit) that can
be a 0–9 (* and # not allowed) and an extension number of up to
5 digits in length. The maximum length of a prefix and extension
combination is 6 digits. You cannot administer a dial access code
with the same first digit as a prefixed extension.
The purpose of the prefix is to identify the call type as an
extension. After digit collection, the prefix digit is removed from
the string of dialed digits. The remaining digits (extension
number) are then processed. A prefixed extension allows the use
of extensions numbers with any dialed string (the extension
length must be specified on the table). The “prefixed extension”
cannot have the same dialed string as the ARS or AAR facility
access code (FAC).
When a dial plan has mixed station numbering, extensions of
various lengths (all with the same first digit) are mapped on the
Dial Plan Analysis table. The system then employs an inter-digit
time-out to ensure that all dialed digits are collected. The
inter-digit time-out may add several seconds to the dial time. An
alternative to the delay required in the time-out mechanism at the
expense of dialing an extra digit is to use prefixed extensions in
the dial plan.

750

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Dial Plan Parameters

Dialed String

The dialed string contains the digits that the switch will analyze to determine how
to process the call.
Valid
entries
0–9, * and #

Usage

Enter up to 2 characters for each call type. * and # can only be
the first digit in a string.
NOTE:

For call type attd, if the total length is 2, the Dialed
String must be 2 digits long.
Percent Full

Displays the percentage (0 to 100) of the system’s memory resources that have
been allocated for the dial plan that are currently being used.
Total Length

Valid entries

Usage

1–2 for attd
1–4 for dac
1–4 for fac
1–7 for ext
2–6 for pext

Enter the number of digits for this call type. The allowed length
varies by call type. This must be greater than or equal to the
number of digits in the Dialed String.

Dial Plan Parameters
The Dial Plan Parameters screen works with the Dial Plan Analysis Table to
define your system’s dial plan.
It also controls the appearance of 6- and 7-digit extensions on station displays and
administration forms. 6- and 7-digit extensions may be hard to read as a block.
MultiVantage allows you to select a single system-wide format for all 6-digit
extensions and a format for all 7-digit extensions.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

751

Screen reference

You are allowed, but not required, to use punctuation marks when entering an
extension number on any form in the system. The punctuation marks need not
match the format given in the system parameter. When the form redisplays, the
format prescribed in the system parameter is used.
You can enter the period (.) or hyphen (-) punctuation in an extension on a
command line, but you cannot use a space within an extension number in a
command line, even if that is part of your specified display format.
change dialplan parameters

Page 1 of 1
DIAL PLAN PARAMETERS

Local Node Number: 2
ETA Node Number:
ETA Routing Pattern:
UDP Extension Search Order: local-extensions-first
6-Digit Extension Display Format: xx.xx.xx
7-Digit Extension Display Format: xxx-xxxx
AAR/ARS Internal Call Prefix:
AAR/ARS Internal Call Total Length:

Screen 94.

Dial Plan Parameters screen

6-Digit Extension Display Format (Phase 3)
Determines how the system punctuates 6-digit extensions.
Valid entries

Usage

xx.xx.xx

This field can contain all ‘x’ characters (no punctuation)
or you can use a combination of 6 ‘x’ characters and 0-2
hyphens (-), spaces, or periods (.) to depict how 6-digit
extensions will display. There must be 6 ‘x’ characters
and no more than 2 punctuation marks. You must specify
a format or accept the default. You cannot leave this field
blank.

7-Digit Extension Display Format (Phase 3)
Determines how the system punctuates 7-digit extensions.

752

Valid entries

Usage

xxx-xxxx

This field can contain all ‘x’ characters (no punctuation)
or you can use a combination of 7 ‘x’ characters and 0-1
hyphen (-), space, or period (.) to depict how 7-digit
extensions will display. There must be 7 ‘x’ characters
and no more than 2 punctuation marks. You must specify
a format or accept the default. You cannot leave this field
blank.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Dial Plan Parameters

AAR/ARS Internal Call Prefix
Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ARS/AAR
Dialing Without FAC field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

1–63

Enter the number of a specific node in a network.

blank

The field may be left blank if automatic restoration, DCS,
and CDR are not used.

AAR/ARS Internal Call Total Length
Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ARS/AAR
Dialing Without FAC field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

1–63

Enter the number of a specific node in a network.

blank

The field may be left blank if automatic restoration, DCS,
and CDR are not used.

ETA Node Number

Enter the number of the destination switch for Extended Trunk Access (ETA)
calls. ETA calls are unrecognized numbers you can send to another switch for
analysis and routing. Such numbers can be Facility Access Codes, Trunk Access
Codes, or extensions that are not in the UDP table.
Valid entries

Usage

1 – 999 or
blank

Enter the number of a destination switch.

ETA Routing Pattern

Enter the number of the routing pattern to reach the destination switch.
Valid entries

Usage

1 – 640 or
blank

DEFINITY R, CSI, SI.

1–999 or
blank

S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

753

Screen reference

Local Node Number

Enter a number to identify a specific node in a switch network. This entry must
match the DCS switch node number and the CDR node number if they are
specified.
Valid entries

Usage

1–63

Enter the number of a specific node in a network.

blank

The field may be left blank if automatic restoration, DCS,
and CDR are not used.

UDP Extension Search Order
Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Uniform
Dialing Plan field is y. Specifies the first table to search to match a dialed
extension. If the dialed extension is not found in the specified place, it then is
searched for in the “other” place.
Valid entries

Usage

local-extensions-first

Searches the local Dial Plan first to match a dialed
extension; if not found, then uses the UDP tables
to route the call.

udp-table-first

Searches the UDP tables for an off-switch
conversion; if not found, then searches the local
server for the dialed extension.

Digit Absorption
This screen implements up to 5 digit absorption lists. The screen may be required
for each CO and FX trunk group connected to a step-by-step CO. Each outgoing
digit string from the switch to the step-by-step CO is treated according to entries
in the “Absorption Treatment Assignment” section of the screen.
NOTE:

If the Digits field on the Trunk Group screen is blank, you cannot administer
Digit Absorption.

754

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Digit Absorption

Field descriptions for page 1

change digit absorption

Page 1 of 1
DIGIT ABSORPTION

List Number: __
ABSORPTION TREATMENT INFORMATION (All selections must be from same group)
Choice
Meaning
Group I.
A
Digit not absorbed.
B
Digit absorbed repeatedly.
C
Digit absorbed once with no further absorption.
Group II.
A
Digit not absorbed.
D
Digit absorbed only if it is the first digit.
E
Digit absorbed only if it is the second digit and
the first digit was already absorbed.
F
Digit asorbed only if it is the first or second digit.
ABSORPTION TREATMENT ASSIGNMENT (select treatment (A-F) for each digit below)
0: A
2: A
4: A
6: A
8: A
1: A
3: A
5: A
7: A
9: A

Screen 95.

Digit Absorption

Absorption Treatment Assignment

Enter a desired treatment letter. All choices for the digits 0 through 9 must be
taken from the same group (Group I or Group II).
Valid entries

Usage

A through F

Absorption Treatment Information

This is a display-only section. It shows how Digit Absorption treats each digit, 0
through 9, depending on the assignment of A through C for Group I, and A, D, E,
and F for Group II. Enter the assignment on the next section on the screen.
List Number

A display-only field indicating the Digit Absorption List number (0 through 4).
The list number is referenced from a field entry on the associated trunk group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

755

Screen reference

DLG Administration
This screen appears if, on the Station screen, the Service Type field is DLG. This
screen includes all clients that are allowed to connect to the virtual DEFINITY
LAN Gateway (DLG).
Field descriptions for page 1
The following screen appears if the Service Type field is DLG and is administered.
This screen includes all clients that are allowed to connect to the co-resident
DEFINITY LAN Gateway (DLG). This page is always the last page on the IP
Services screen.

DLG Administration
CTI_-Link
1
3
4

Screen 96.

Enabled
y
y
y

Client Name

Page X of Y
Client Link

client1
client2
client1

1
1
2

Client Status
in use
idle
idle

DLG Administration

Client Link

The client name on the CTI switch side identifies the logical connection on the
client side (IP address and host name) for multiple links and for the corresponding
client (CTI link number/client name) that are connected to you.
Valid entries

Usage

1-X or blank

Enter the number between 1 and the number of CTI
links allowed on the system (for instance, 8 or 16).

Client Name

Enter the node name of the client adjunct requesting service for the specified CTI
link.
Client Status

A display-only field indicating idle (currently there is no active connection) or in
use (currently there is an active connection for this client link).
CTI Link

A display-only field indicating the link number.

756

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

Enabled

Controls whether the co-resident DLG will allow connections for the
corresponding client.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to access DLG.

n

Will refuse connections for that Client Name/Client
Link pair.

DS1 Circuit Pack
Use this screen to administer all DS1 circuit packs.
Field descriptions for page 1

add ds1 xxxxxx

Page 1 of 2
DS1 CIRCUIT PACK

Location:
Bit Rate:
Line Compensation:
Signaling Mode:
Connect:
Interconnect:
TN-C7 Long Timers?

_____
_____
_
___________
_________
___
_

Interface Companding: _____
Idle Code: ________
MMI Cabling Board: _____

Name:
Line Coding:
Framing Mode:
D-Channel:
Interface:
Peer Protocol:
Country Protocol:
Protocol Version:
CRC?

_______________
____
___
__
___________
________
____
_
_

DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: ________
MMI Interface: ESM

MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
Slip Detection? _

Screen 97.

555-233-506

Near-end CSU Type: ________

DS1 Circuit Pack

Issue 5 October 2002

757

Screen reference

add ds1 xxxxxx

Page 1 of 2
DS1 CIRCUIT PACK

Location:
Bit Rate:
Line Compensation:
Signaling Mode:
Connect:
Interconnect:

_____
_____
_
___________
_________
___

Interface Companding: _____
Idle Code: ________
MMI Cabling Board: _____

Name:
Line Coding:
Framing Mode:
D-Channel:
Interface:
Peer Protocol:
Country Protocol:
Protocol Version:
CRC?

_______________
____
___
__
___________
________
____
_
_

DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: ________
MMI Interface: ESM

MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
Slip Detection? _

Screen 98.

Near-end CSU Type: ________

DS1 Circuit Pack

add ds1 xxxxxx

Page 1 of 2
DS1 CIRCUIT PACK

Location: ______
Bit Rate: ______

Name: ____________
Line Coding: ____

Signaling Mode: __________
Interconnect: ____

Country Protocol: ______

Interface Companding: ____
Idle Code: ____
Received Digital Metering Pulse Minimum (ms):
Received Digital Metering Pulse Maximum (ms):
Received Digital Metering Pulse Value:
Slip Detection: __
Near-end CSU Type: ______

Screen 99.

758

DS1 Circuit Pack screen for Croatia and South Africa

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

The following screen is valid only for the TN2242.
add ds1 xxxxxx

Page 1 of 2
DS1 CIRCUIT PACK

Location: 01A13
Bit Rate: 2.048

Name: _______________
Line Coding: cmi

Signaling Mode: CAS
Interconnect: pbx
Country Protocol: 3
Interface Companding: mulaw
Idle Code: 11111111

MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
Slip Detection? n

Screen 100. DS1 Circuit Pack screen for Channel Associated Signaling

Bit Rate

Use this field to select the maximum transmission rate for DS1 circuit packs that
support either T-1 or E-1 service. For circuit packs that only support one of these
services, the field is a display-only field.
NOTE:

Once an add ds1 operation is complete (that is, the DS1 screen has been
submitted) you can’t change the Bit Rate field with a change ds1
command. Instead, execute a remove ds1 command. Then use the add ds1
command to administer the circuit pack again. You’ll have to re-enter all the
information for the circuit pack.
TN464C (and later release) circuit packs have an option switch that must be
set to match the entry in the Bit Rate field.
Valid entries

Usage

1.544

Use for T-1 service.

2.048

Use for E-1 service.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

759

Screen reference

Channel Numbering

The ETSI and ISO QSIG specifications require that B-channels on an E1 be
encoded as 1-30 in the Channel ID IE. Prior to this field, Avaya MultiVantage
only used this scheme for Country Protocols 2a (Australia) and 13a (Germany
1TR6). This field appears when the Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri, the Bit Rate
field is 2.048, the Connect field is pbx, and the Interface field is peer-master or
peer-slave.
Valid entries

Usage

timeslot
sequential

If the Avaya MultiVantage is connected via QSIG trunks to a
switch supporting the ETSI QSIG or ISO QSIG
specifications, this field must be sequential.
When the Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri and the Bit Rate
field is 2.048, but the Channel Numbering field does not
display because of the setting of other fields, it is set
internally to sequential for 2a (Australia) and 13a
(Germany).

Connect

In order to control communications at layers 2 and 3 of the ISDN-PRI protocol,
use this field to specify what is on the far end of this DS1 link. This field only
appears when the Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri.
Valid entries

Usage

pbx

Enter pbx if this DS1 link is connected to another switch in a
private network. If pbx is entered, the Interface field appears.

line-side

Enter line-side when the switch is acting as the network side
of an ISDN-PRI interface. Use line-side to connect to Roll
About Video equipment.

network

Enter network when the DS1 link connects this switch to a
central office or any other public network switch.

host

Enter host when the DS1 link connects this switch to a
computer.

Country Protocol

The entry in this field must match the country protocol used by the far-end switch.
For connections to a public network, your network service provider can tell you
which country protocol they are using.

760

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

This field appears if the Signaling Mode field is CAS or isdn-pri. For the
Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack, this is a display-only field if the Signaling
Mode field is CAS.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 25

Enter the country protocol used by the central office at which
this link terminates.

etsi

Enter etsi if your network service provider uses the protocol
of the European Telecommunications Standards Institute
(ETSI). Enter etsi only if the Signaling Mode field is
isdn-pri.

CRC

This field indicates whether a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) will be performed
on transmissions that the DS1 circuit pack receives. This field does not display for
all circuit packs.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y when the Signaling Mode field is CAS and the DS1
link is providing E-1 service.

n

Enter n for all other applications.

D-Channel

The Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack, when administered to support ISDN-PRI
signaling, allows you to assign the D-channel to any channel from 1 to 31 in an
E-1 facility. You cannot submit the screen if this field is blank. Using the change
ds1 command, you can change this field if the D-channel is not used in a
signaling group. This field appears only when the Location field indicates the
circuit pack is a Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack and the Signaling Mode field is
isdn-pri.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 31

Enter the number of the channel that will be used as the
D-channel.

DCP/ANALOG Bearer Capability

This field appears when the Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri. It is used to
determine bearer capability encoding.
Valid entries

Usage

3.1kHz
speech

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

761

Screen reference

DMI-BOS

The DMI/BOS protocol is used for high-speed digital communications between a
host computer and an Avaya MultiVantage. With this 24-channel protocol,
channels 1–23 of the DS1 link carry data and channel 24 carries control signaling.
DMI/BOS has greater capacity than a robbed-bit 24-channel facility. This field
appears only when the Signaling Mode field is common-chan.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to activate the Digital Multiplexed Interface-Bit
Oriented Signaling (DMI-BOS) format.

n

Enter n to use an Avaya proprietary format.

Framing Mode

Use this field to select either superframe (sf or d4) or extended superframe (esf)
for T1 service on the DS1 link. The framing mode you use must match the mode
used on the other end of the link, so work with your network services provider to
determine the appropriate entry for this field.
This field only appears if the Bit Rate field is 1.544 (that is, if you’re using T-1
service). If you’re using E-1 service, Avaya MultiVantage automatically selects
CEPT1 framing.
Tip:

Avaya recommends using ESF when your service provider supports it,
especially if you may someday upgrade the facility to ISDN. The ESF format
provides enhanced performance measurements and uses a sophisticated
error-checking method to ensure data integrity.

762

Valid entries

Usage

d4

Enter d4 to use the basic DS1 superframe (sf). Avaya
recommends this mode only for voice traffic.

esf

Enter esf to use the Extended Superframe format. Avaya
recommends this mode for digital data traffic. If you enter
esf for a TN464F, TN767E, or a later suffix DS1 circuit
pack, a second page of the DS1 Circuit Pack screen becomes
available to administer ESF Data Link options.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

Idle Code

! CAUTION:
Customers: The entry in the Country Protocol field sets the default idle code.
Do not change the default without assistance from Avaya or your network
services provider.
For some circuit packs, this is a display-only field.
Valid entries

Usage

any 8-digit
string of 0’s
and 1’s

This entry sets the signal sent out over idle DS0 channels.
The string must be compatible with the protocol used by the
far-end switch.

Interconnect

For E-1 service using channel-associated signaling, the entry in this field tells
Avaya MultiVantage whether the DS1 circuit pack is using a public or private
network protocol. The entry in this field must agree with the entry in the Group
Type field on the Trunk Group screen. This field appears only when the Signaling
Mode field is CAS.
Valid entries

Usage

pbx

If pbx is selected, the board operates as a tie trunk circuit
pack.

CO

If CO is selected, the board operates as a CO or DID circuit
pack.

Interface

This field only appears when the Connect field is pbx; that is, when this DS1 link
is providing an ISDN-PRI connection in a private network. The Interface field
controls how your switch negotiates glare with the far-end switch. The switches at
either end of the DS1 link must have complementary settings in this field: if not,
the D-channel won’t even come up. For example, if the switch at one end of the
link is administered as network, the other must be administered as user.
Valid entries

Usage

Use the following 2 values for private network applications in the U.S.
network

Enter network if your switch overrides the other end when
glare occurs. If you are connecting your switch to a host
computer, set this field to network.

user

Enter user if your switch releases the contested circuit and
looks for another when glare occurs. If you are connecting
your switch to a public network, set this field to user.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

763

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

Use the following values for private networks (including QSIG networks)
outside the U.S. Entering either of these values causes the Peer Protocol and
Side fields to appear.
peer-master

Enter peer-master if your switch overrides the other end
when glare occurs.

peer-slave

Enter peer-slave if your switch releases the contested circuit
and looks for another when glare occurs.

Interface Companding

The entry in this field must match the companding method used by the far-end
switch. This field does not appear for all DS1 circuit packs.
Valid entries

Usage

alaw

Enter alaw for E-1 service.

mulaw

Enter mulaw for T-1 service.

Interworking Message

This field determines what message the switch sends when an incoming ISDN
trunk call interworks (is routed over a non-ISDN trunk group).
Valid entries

Usage

PROGress

Normally select this value. PROGress asks the public
network to cut through the B-channel and let the caller hear
tones such as ringback or busy tone provided over the
non-ISDN trunk.

ALERTing

ALERTing causes the public network in many countries to
play ringback tone to the caller. Select this value only if the
DS1 is connected to the public network, and it is determined
that callers hear silence (rather than ringback or busy tone)
when a call incoming over the DS1 interworks to a
non-ISDN trunk.

ITN-C7 Long Timers

This field controls the T302 and T303 timers. It only appears if the Signaling
Mode field is isdn-pri.

764

Valid entries

Usage

y

Use if you want to increase the length of the long timers.

n

Leave n if you want to use the default long timers.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

Line Coding

This field selects the type of line coding used on this facility. The setting in this
field must match the setting on the far-end of the link, or you must have an
intervening CSU to convert the line coding protocols. Voice calls will work even
if line coding does not match, but a single data call will bring down the DS1
facility. For the TTC 2Mb CMI Trunk circuit pack, this is a display-only field
showing cmi (coded mark inversion).
The following information is for reference. Talk with your network service
provider or your Avaya representative to find the appropriate protocol for your
application.

! CAUTION:
If you change this field, you must busy out the DS1 circuit pack. You must
also change the following screens: Route-Pattern, Access Endpoint, PRI
Endpoint, Signaling-Group, and Trunk-Group.
NOTE:

When the DS1 circuit pack is used for ISDN service, the ISDN D-channel
data is inverted when ami-basic or ami-zcs is entered and not inverted
when b8zs or hdb3 is entered.
Valid entries

Usage

b8zs (bipolar
eight zero
substitution)

Enter b8zs for T-1 facilities that support voice and/or
data traffic. Enter b8zs if you need a 64K clear channel.

ami-zcs (alternate
mark inversion zero code
suppression)

Enter ami-zcs only for T-1 facilities that carry voice
traffic: Avaya does not recommend this for digital-data
applications. If you anticipate upgrading this facility to
ISDN, use b8zs line coding if possible.

ami-basic

Enter ami-basic for unrestricted E-1 facilities.

(alternate mark
inversion-basic)
hdb3 (high
density bipolar 3)

Enter hdb3 for restricted E-1 facilities.

cmi (coded mark

Used in Japan, cmi is the only type of line coding you
can use with the Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack. This
field becomes a display-only field when you are
administering the Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack.

inversion)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

765

Screen reference

Line Compensation

The appropriate entry in this field varies with the type of cable used, so work with
your network service provider to determine the correct setting in your situation.
The following table shows the appropriate entries for different lengths of
22-gauge ABAM cable terminated on a DSX-1 cross-connect.
Valid
entries

Usage

1

Length: 000–133 (ft), 000-40.5 (m)

2

Length: 133–266 (ft), 40.5–81.0 (m)

3

Length: 266–399 (ft), 81.0–122 (m)

4

Length: 399–533 (ft), 122–163 (m)

5

Length: 533–655 (ft), 163–200 (m)

The following table shows the appropriate entries for different lengths of
22-gauge ABAM cable directly connecting to DS1 interfaces.
Valid
entries

Usage

1

Length: 0000–0266(ft), 000–081(m)

2

Length: 0266–0532(ft), 081–162(m)

3

Length: 0532–0798(ft), 162–243(m)

4

Length: 0798–1066(ft), 243–325(m)

5

Length: 1066–1310(ft), 325–400(m)

Location

This display-only field shows the port address specified in the add command
when the circuit pack was first administered.
MMI Cabling Board

This field appears only if the MMCH field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.

766

Valid entries

Usage

slot address
(cabinet,
carrier, slot)

Enter the slot location (cabinet, carrier, slot) of the
multimedia interface circuit pack that is connected to the
Expansion Services Module (ESM).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

MMI Interface

This display-only field appears if the MMCH field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen and there is a value in the MMI Cabling Board field.
Name

Use this field to assign a significant, descriptive name to the DS1 link. Avaya
recommends putting the vendor’s circuit ID for the link in this field, because that
information helps you troubleshoot problems with the link, but you could also use
this field to indicate the function or the destination of this DS1 facility. In that
case, put the DS1 link circuit ID in the Name field of the trunk group associated
with this link.
Valid entries

Usage

1–15 characters

Enter a name for the DS1 link.

Peer Protocol

This allows you to administer the peer level protocol that will operate in a private
network. This field appears if the Interface field is peer-master or peer-slave. To
enter Q-SIG, the Basic Call Setup field on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen must be y.
Valid entries

Usage

Q-SIG

This implements QSIG Network Basic Call.

TTC

For private networking. Requires a Digital Trunk (Japan 2
MB TTC) (TN2242) circuit pack.

Protocol Version

In countries whose public networks allow multiple layer-3 signaling protocols for
ISDN-PRI service, this field selects the protocol that matches your network
service provider’s protocol. See ‘‘Public network signaling administration for
ISDN-PRI Layer 3’’ on page 768 to see which countries support which protocols.
This field appears only when:
■

The Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri and the Connect field is network.

■

The Signaling Mode field is isdn-pri, the Connect field is pbx, and the
Interface field is user or network.

Valid entries

Usage

a, b, c, d

The entry in this field must match the protocol used by your
network service provider, so work with your vendor to
determine the appropriate entry.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

767

Screen reference

! WARNING:
The AT&T Switched Network Protocol does not support restricted displays
of connected numbers. Therefore, if you administer the 1a
country-protocol/protocol-version combination on the DS1 screen, you
cannot set the Send Connected Number field to r (restricted) on the
ISDN-PRI Trunk Group screen, as this causes display problems.
Public network signaling administration for ISDN-PRI Layer 3

The table below shows Avaya MultiVantage public network access connections
for ISDN-PRI Layer 3.
Admin
value

B-channel
mtce msg

Country

Protocol supported

1-a

United States,
Canada

AT&T TR 41449/ 41459 (tested with
AT&T network, Canadian network, and
MCI network)

Service

1-b

United States

Bellcore TR 1268;
NIUF.302; ANSI T1.607

Restart

1-c

United States

NORTEL DMS-250 BCS36/IEC01

Service

1-d

United States

Telecordia SR-4287

Service

2-a

Australia

AUSTEL TS014.1;
Telecom Australia TPH 1856 National
ISDN protocol

Restart

2-b

Australia

ETSI ISDN protocol

Restart

3

Japan

NTT INS-NET

Restart

4

Italy

ETS 300 102

Restart

5

Netherlands

ETS 300 102

Restart

6

Singapore

ETS 300 102

Restart

7

Mexico

ETS 300 102

Restart

8

Belgium

ETS 300 102

Restart

9

Saudi Arabia

ETS 300 102

Restart

10-a

United
Kingdom

ETS 300 102 (for connection to DASS
II/DPNSS through external converter)

Restart

Continued on next page

768

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

Admin
value

B-channel
mtce msg

Country

Protocol supported

10-b

United
Kingdom,
Ireland

ETS 300 102 (Mercury); British Telecom
ISDN 30; Telecom Eireann SWD 109

none

11

Spain

Telefonica ISDN Specification

Restart

12-a

France

VN4 (French National PRI)

None

12-b

France

ETS 300 102 modified according to P10-20,
called Euronumeris

None

13-a

Germany

FTZ 1 TR 6 (German National PRI)

None

13-b

Germany

ETS 300 102

Restart

14

Czech
Republic,
Slovakia

ETS 300 102

Restart

15

Russia (CIS)

ETS 300 102

Restart

16

Argentina

ETS 300 102

Restart

17

Greece

ETS 300 102

Restart

18

China

ETS 300 102

Restart

19

Hong Kong

ETS 300 102

Restart

20

Thailand

ETS 300 102

Restart

21

Macedonia

ETS 300 102

Restart

22

Poland

ETS 300 102

Restart

23

Brazil

ETS 300 102

Restart

24

Nordic

ETS 300 102

Restart

25

South Africa

ETS 300 102

Restart

ETSI-a

Europe, New
Zealand, etc.

ETS 300 102

Restart

ETS 300 102

None

ETSI-b

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

769

Screen reference

Received Digital Metering Pulse Maximum (ms)

This field appears only when the Signal Mode field is cas (Channel Associated
Signaling), the Interconnect field is co or pbx, and the Country Protocol field is
administered for a protocol that uses periodic pulse metering (PPM) as defined in
Table 14. The default value depends on the Country Protocol field’s entry.
Valid entries

Usage

20 to 1000
ms in
increments of
10ms.

Work with your network services provider to determine the
appropriate entry. The entry must be greater than the
Received Digital Metering Pulse Minimum field.

Received Digital Metering Pulse Minimum (ms)

This field appears only when the Signal Mode field is cas (Channel Associated
Signaling), the Interconnect field is co or pbx, and the Country Protocol field is
administered for a protocol that uses periodic pulse metering (PPM) as defined in
Table 14 on page 771. The default value depends on the Country Protocol field’s
entry.
Valid entries

Usage

20 to 1000
ms in
increments of
10ms.

Work with your network services provider to determine the
appropriate entry. The entry must be less than the Received
Digital Metering Pulse Maximum field.

Received Digital Metering Pulse Value

This field appears when the Signal Mode field is cas (Channel Associated
Signaling), the Country Protocol field is 21, and the Interconnect field is co or
pbx.

770

Valid entries

Usage

0, 1

Work with your network services provider to determine the
appropriate entry.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

Table 14. Incoming digital PPM signaling default (per Country Protocol
code)
Code

Country

PPM Min (ms)

PPM Max (ms)

PPM Value

0

null

NA

NA

NA

1

U.S.

NA

NA

NA

2

Australia

80

180

0

3

Japan

NA

NA

NA

4

Italy

120

150

1

5

Netherlands

90

160

0

6

Singapore

NA

NA

NA

7

Mexico

20

180

1

8

Belgium

20

180

1

9

Saudi Arabia

NA

NA

NA

10

UK

NA

NA

NA

11

Spain

20

220

0

12

France

NA

NA

NA

13

Germany

NA

NA

NA

14

Czech Republic

20

420

1

15

Russia CIS

NA

NA

NA

16

Argentina

10

180

1

17

Greece

100

180

1

18

China

NA

NA

NA

19

Hong Kong

NA

NA

NA

20

Thailand

20

180

1

21

Macedonia

120

180

1

Croatia

20

80

1

Poland

100

150

0

22

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

771

Screen reference

Table 14. Incoming digital PPM signaling default (per Country Protocol
code) (Continued)
Code

Country

PPM Min (ms)

PPM Max (ms)

PPM Value

23

Brazil

NA

NA

NA

24

Nordic

NA

NA

NA

25

South Africa

160

240

0, 1
Continued on next page

Side

This field controls how your switch resolves glare at layer 3 over an ISDN-PRI
link in QSIG private networks. It appears if the Interface field is peer-master or
peer-slave.
The default value of the field changes depending upon which value the Interface
field contains.

! CAUTION:
It is critical that administration on this switch correctly pairs with the
administration of the far-end switch. If the far-end is administered as the b
side, this field should be set to a regardless of whether the layer 2
designation is peer-master or peer-slave, and vice versa.

772

Valid entries

Usage

a

Enter a if the Interface field is peer-master (this
switch overrides the far-end when glare occurs).

b

Enter b if the Interface field is peer-slave (this
switch releases the contested circuit and looks for
another when glare occurs).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

Signaling Mode

This field selects the signaling method used for the DS1 link. This mode must
match the method used on the other end of the link, so work with your network
services provider to determine the appropriate entry for this field.
Valid entries

Usage

CAS

Enter CAS for out-of band signaling with E-1 service. This
setting yields 30 64-kbps B-channels for voice or data
transmission. Channel 0 is used for framing while channel 16
carries signaling.

(Channel
Associated
Signaling)
robbed-bit

Enter robbed-bit for in-band signaling with T-1 service. This
setting yields 24 56-kbps B-channels for voice transmission.

isdn-pri

Enter isdn-pri for either T-1 or E-1 ISDN service. This
setting supports both Facility Associated Signaling and
Non-Facility Associated Signaling.

isdn-ext

Enter isdn-ext for either T-1 or E-1 ISDN service. This
setting supports only Non-Facility Associated Signaling.

common-ch
an

Enter common-chan, for out-of-band signaling with T-1
service. This setting yields 23 64-kbps B-channels for voice
or data transmission. Channel 24 is used for signaling.

MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
Alarm When PRI Endpoint Detached

Use this field for DS1 circuit packs connected to Roll-About Video equipment.
This field appears only when the Connect field is line-side.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if you want the switch to generate an alarm when the
DS1 board detects a loss of signal (for example, if the video
equipment is disconnected).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

773

Screen reference

EC Configuration

Appears when Echo Cancellation is y on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1-15

Four default echo cancellation configurations are available:
Enter 1, 5-15: provides the most rapid adaptation in detecting
and correcting echo at the beginning of a call.
Enter 2: slightly slower adaptation to echo, use if speech is
clipped when both parties talk at the same time.
Enter 3: slightly slower adaptation to echo, may result in a 2
or 3 second fade on strong echo
Enter 4: in cases of extreme echo, excessive clipping or
breakup of speech. May result in slight echo or background
noise.

EC Direction

Direction of echo cancellation. Appears when Echo Cancellation is y on the DS1
Circuit Pack screen.
Valid entries

Usage

inward/outwa
rd

Indicate the direction of the echo that is being cancelled.

Echo Cancellation

Appears when DS1 Echo Cancellation is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen and circuit packs support echo cancellation.

774

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow echo cancellation.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

Near-end CSU Type

This field appears only when the DS1 circuit pack is a TN767D or TN464E or
later suffix model, the Bit Rate field is 1.544 and the Country Protocol field is 1
(U.S.). This field does not display for all circuit packs.
Valid entries

Usage

other

Enter other if no channel service unit is attached to the DS1
facility or if the CSU is an external unit. No options are
available on page 2 for administering an external CSU.

integrated

Enter integrated if a 120A CSU module is attached to the
DS1 board. This integrated channel service unit (ICSU) can
accept software-administrable option downlinks (that is, it
can respond to test codes from technician’s equipment and
report its status). When you enter integrated, fields for
administering options on the ICSU appear on page 2 of the
DS1 Circuit Pack screen.

Slip Detection

Slips — synchronization errors — slow digital transmissions and can result in
data loss. The switch maintains a slip-count record for each DS1 interface to
detect errors and evaluate their severity (the type of alarm). If as many as 50
percent of those spans administered for slip detection are experiencing slips (with
respect to the primary), then a decision is made to switch to the secondary.

! CAUTION:
Always enter y for DS1 circuit packs that serve as primary or secondary
synchronization references.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow maintenance software to measure the slip-rate
of this circuit pack and determine whether it’s excessive.
Typically, enter y for DS1 spans used for data applications and
for spans used as synchronization references. This excludes all
T1-spans connecting channel banks, unless the channel bank is
externally timed. This entry enables switching between the
primary and secondary synchronization references and an
internal high-accuracy clock.

n

Enter n for DMI-BOS links or when testing is not required.
Normally, enter n for DS1 spans that are used exclusively for
voice and that do not serve as the primary or secondary
synchronization source.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

775

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 2

add ds1 xxxxxx
DS1 CIRCUIT PACK
ESF DATA LINK OPTIONS
Network Management Protocol:
Send ANSI-T1.403 One-Second Performance Reports?
Far-end CSU Address:

INTEGRATED CSU OPTIONS
Transmit LBO:
Receive ALBO:
Upon DTE LOS:
CPE LOOPBACK JACK OPTIONS
Supply CPE Loopback Jack Power?

Screen 101. DS1 Circuit Pack

! CAUTION:
Customers: Do not change fields on this page without assistance from Avaya
or your network service provider.
Page 2 does not appear for all DS1 circuit packs. For those circuit packs that
support it, this page appears only when the Framing Mode field is esf or the
Near-end CSU Type field is integrated.
ESF DATA LINK OPTIONS
Far-end CSU Address

This field, which, appears only if the Framing Mode field is esf.
Valid entries

Usage

a

Enter b. This field administers the transmit direction address
used for the ESF data link command with both integrated
and external channel service units (CSU).

b

Network Management Protocol

This field appears only if the Framing Mode field is esf.

776

Valid entries

Usage

tabs

The entry in this field, used only with circuit packs that have
an integrated channel service unit (CSU), allows the data
link to be remotely monitored.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 Circuit Pack

Send ANSI-T1.403 One-Second Performance
Reports

This field selects whether your DS1 circuit pack will send error reports to the
far-end switch. These reports are useful for network management, and are sent at
1-second intervals when enabled. This field appears only if the Framing Mode
field is esf. It is used only with circuit packs that have an integrated channel
service unit (CSU).
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter n. Consult your Avaya representative if you think you
may want to use these reports.

INTEGRATED CSU OPTIONS
Receive ALBO (Receive Automatic Line
Build-Out)

This field increases the strength of incoming signals by a fixed amount to
compensate for line losses.
Valid entries

Usage

26db

To set this field correctly, you should measure the signal loss
on this specific facility. However, you may enter 26db for
most applications. 36db is occasionally appropriate, mainly
on campus networks that don’t conform to public telephone
network standards.

36db

Transmit LBO (Transmit Line Build-Out)

This field reduces the outgoing signal strength by a fixed amount. The appropriate
level of loss depends on the distance between your switch (measured by cable
length from the smart jack) and the nearest repeater. Where another switch is at
the end of the circuit, as in campus environments, use the cable length between the
2 switches to select the appropriate setting from the table below. This field
appears if the Near-end CSU Type field is integrated.
Valid entries

Usage

0db

For distances of 2,001–3,000 feet

-7.5db

For distances of 1,001–2,000

-15db

For distances of 0–1,000 feet

-22.5db

For mid-span repeaters

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

777

Screen reference

Upon DTE LOS

DTE stands for “Data Terminal Equipment.” This field tells the switch what to do
if the outgoing signal from the DS1 circuit pack (the data terminal equipment) to
the network is lost.
Valid entries

Usage

loopback

Enter loopback to return the network signal to the network.
This prevents any alarms at the far-end switch.

ais

Enter ais (Alarm Indicator Signal) to send an unframed
all-ones signal (the AIS or Blue Alarm) to the far-end switch.
This option alerts your network service provider to the
problem immediately and aids troubleshooting.

CPE LOOPBACK JACK OPTIONS
Supply CPE Loopback Jack Power

If a CPE (Customer Premise Equipment) Loopback Jack is installed, the DS1
board should supply power to the equipment during loopback testing.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if a CPE Loopback Jack is installed. If not, you must
enter n.

Related topics

See ‘‘Setting up digital trunks’’ on page 426 for instructions.
See ‘‘DS1 trunk service’’ on page 1659 for detailed information.

Extended Pickup Group
This screen allows grouping of pickup groups into extended pickup groups. This
allows users to answer calls outside their immediate group. The maximum
number of groups that can be added to an extended pickup group is 25.

778

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Extended Pickup Group

Field descriptions

change extended-pickup-group 1

Page

1 of

2

EXTENDED PICKUP GROUP
Extended Group Number: 56
Pickup
Number

Pickup Group
Number

Pickup
Number

Pickup Group
Number

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:

_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Screen 102. Extended Pickup Group screen

Extended Group Number

This display-only field shows the number associated with a collection of pickup
groups. The extended group is a collection of pickup groups that can answer calls
from other pickup groups in the same extended group.
Pickup Group Number

This field determines which call pickup groups can answer calls in the extended
pickup group.
Valid entries

Usage

1-800 or blank
(DEFINITY CSI,
SI)
1-5000 or blank
(DEFINITY R,
S8300 Media
Server, S8700
IP-Connect,
S8700
Multi-Connect)

Enter the pickup group numbers for each of the pickup
groups that you want to belong to this extended group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

779

Screen reference

Pickup Number

This display-only field shows the pickup number assigned to the pickup group
number. This is the number users dial after the feature access code (FAC) to pick
up calls in their extended pickup group.

Extensions Administered
to have an MCT-Control Button
This screen lists the extensions that can take control of a Malicious Call Trace
(MCT) request. In order to give a user the ability to take control of such requests,
you need to add their extension to this list and assign them a mct-control feature
button.
Field descriptions for page 1

change mct-group-extensions
Page 1 of 1
Extensions Administered to
1: ________ 19: ________
2: ________ 20: ________
3: ________ 21: ________
4: ________ 22: ________
5: ________ 23: ________
6: ________ 24: ________
7: ________ 25: ________
8: ________ 26: ________
9: ________ 27: ________
10: ________ 28: ________
11: ________ 29: ________
12: ________ 30: ________
13: ________ 31: ________
14: ________ 32: ________
15: ________ 33: ________
16: ________ 34: ________
17: ________ 35: ________
18: ________ 36: ________

have an MCT-Control Button:
37: ________ 55: ________ 73:
38: ________ 56: ________ 74:
39: ________ 57: ________ 75:
40: ________ 58: ________ 76:
41: ________ 59: ________ 77:
42: ________ 60: ________ 78:
43: ________ 61: ________ 79:
44: ________ 62: ________ 80:
45: ________ 63: ________ 81:
46: ________ 64: ________ 82:
47: ________ 65: ________ 83:
48: ________ 66: ________ 84:
49: ________ 67: ________ 85:
50: ________ 68: ________ 86:
51: ________ 69: ________ 87:
52: ________ 70: ________ 88:
53: ________ 71: ________ 89:
54: ________ 72: ________ 90:

________ 91:
________ 92:
________ 93:
________ 94:
________ 95:
________ 96:
________ 97:
________ 98:
________ 99:
________ 100:
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________

________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________

Screen 103. Malicious Call Trace control extensions

1–100

Enter the extension for a telephone or attendant console that you want to have an
MCT-Control button. Note that you must also assign the mct-control button
on the extension’s Station or Attendant Console screen.

780

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature Access Code

Feature Access Code
This screen assigns feature access codes (FACs) that, when dialed, activate or
cancel the system features. Each field on this screen has the same valid values,
which must conform to feature access codes or dial access codes as defined by
your dial plan.
Valid entries

Usage

1–4 digit number,

* and # may be used as first digit. However, analog

*#

rotary dial phones cannot use the “*” and “#” symbols.

Field descriptions for page 1

change feature-access-codes

Page
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Abbreviated Dialing List1 Access Code: ____
Abbreviated Dialing List2 Access Code: ____
Abbreviated Dialing List3 Access Code: ____
Abbreviated Dial - Prgm Group List Access Code: ____
Announcement Access Code: ____
Answer Back Access Code: ____
Auto Alternate Routing (AAR) Access Code: ____
Auto Route Selection (ARS) Access Code1: ____ Access Code 2:
Automatic Callback Activation: ____
Deactivation:
Call Forwarding Activation Busy/DA: ____
All: ____
Deactivation:
Call Park Access Code: ____
Call Pickup Access Code: ____
CAS Remote Hold/Answer Hold-Unhold Access Code: ____
CDR Account Code Access Code: ____
Change COR Access Code: ____
Change Coverage Access Code: ____

1 of 7

____
____
____

Data Origination Access Code: ____
Data Privacy Access Code: ____
Directed Call Pickup Access Code: ____

Screen 104. Feature Access Code (FAC) screen

Abbreviated Dialing List1 Access Code

Used to access AD list 1.
Abbreviated Dialing List2 Access Code

Used to access AD list 2.
Abbreviated Dialing List3 Access Code

Used to access AD list 3.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

781

Screen reference

Abbreviated Dial - Prgm Group List Access
Code

Used to enter a group list from a telephone. The user’s extension must be entered
on the Abbreviated Dial Group List screen in order to program the group list.
Announcement Access Code

Used to record announcements.
Answer Back Access Code

Used to retrieve parked calls.
Auto Alternate Routing (AAR) Access Code

Used to access AAR.
Auto Route Selection (ARS) Access Code1

Used to access ARS. You can have one ARS access code for local and one for
long distance, and route accordingly.
(ARS) Access Code 2

Also used to access ARS.
Automatic Callback Activation/Deactivation

Used to activate/cancel Automatic Callback.
Call Forwarding Activation Busy/DA

Used to forward calls to an administered number if the user is busy or does not
answer.
(Call Forwarding Activation) All

Used to forward calls to an administered number for all calls.
(Call Forwarding) Deactivation

Used to deactivate call forwarding.

782

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature Access Code

Call Park Access Code

Used to park an active call, which can then be retrieved from a different station
using the answer back access code. Do not administer to have the same first digit
as another feature access code that is longer in length.
Call Pickup Access Code

Used to answer a call directed to a pickup group.
CAS Remote Hold/Answer Hold-Unhold Access
Code

Used by a Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) attendant to place calls on hold
and answer calls held at a remote switch.
CDR Account Code Access Code

Used prior to entering an account code for CDR purposes.
Change COR Access Code

Used to allow users to change their class of restriction (COR) from a phone. This
field can only be used if the Change COR by FAC field is enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Change Coverage Access Code

Used to change a coverage path from a telephone or remote station.
Data Origination Access Code

Used to originate a data call from a voice station.
Data Privacy Access Code

Used to isolate a data call from call waiting or other interruptions.
Directed Call Pickup Access Code

Used to establish directed call pickup.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

783

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 2

change feature-access-codes
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Emergency Access to Attendant Access Code:
Enhanced EC500 Activation:
Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D/A_ All:
Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code:
Facility Test Calls Access Code:
Flash Access Code:
Group Control Restrict Activation:
Hunt Group Busy Activation:
ISDN Access Code:
Last Number Dialed Access Code:
Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Lock:
Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Unlock:
Leave Word Calling Send A Message: #66
Leave Word Calling Cancel A Message: *66
Malicious Call Trace Activation:
Meet-me Conference Access Code Change:
PASTE (Display PBX data on Phone) Access Code:
Personal Station Access (PSA) Associate Code:
Per Call CPN Blocking Code Access Code:
Per Call CPN Unblocking Code Access Code:

Page

2

of 7

Deactivation:
Deactivation:

Deactivation:
Deactivation:

Deactivation:

Dissociate Code:

Screen 105. Feature Access Code (FAC) screen

Emergency Access To Attendant Access Code

Used to gain access to the attendant in an emergency situation. Such calls alert as
emergency calls. This field cannot be used if the Emergency Access to Attendant
field is not enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Enhanced EC500 Activation

Used to activate extension to cellular where calls to an office number are extended
to a cell phone.
Extended Call Fwd Activate Busy D/A

Used to activate call forwarding from a telephone or remote location.
Extended Call Fwd Activate All

Used to activate call forwarding from a telephone or remote location.

784

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature Access Code

Extended Call Fwd Deactivation

Used to deactivate call forwarding from a telephone or remote location.
NOTE:

An extension must have Station Security Codes administered to use the
following FACs:
■

Extended Call Forward All Activate

■

Extended Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer Activate

■

Extended Call Forward Deactivate

■

Change Coverage

Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code

The feature access code (FAC) users enter when a call directed to another pickup
group is to be answered. Users must enter a valid “Pickup Number” following the
Extended Group Call Pickup Access Code to complete the operation.
Facility Test Calls Access Code

Used to place activate a facility test call.

! SECURITY ALERT:
To ensure the security of your system, leave Facility Test Calls Access Code
blank except when actually testing trunks.
Flash Access Code

Used to generate trunk flash. This code ensures that the flash signal is interpreted
by the central office switch, rather than the Avaya MultiVantage.
Group Control Restrict Activation / Deactivation

Used to change the restriction level for all users with a given class of restriction.
Requires console permissions.
Hunt Group Busy Activation/Deactivation

Hunt Group members can dial these codes to place themselves in a busy state, and
to become available again.
ISDN Access Code

Used to place an ISDN call without using ARS, AAR, or UDP.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

785

Screen reference

Last Number Dialed Access Code

Used to redial the last number dialed from this station.
Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Lock

Used to lock the display module on telephones. The lock function activates at a
telephone by dialing this system-wide lock access code. This prevents
unauthorized users from displaying, canceling, or deleting messages associated
with the telephone. The Lock Messages field on the Station screen also must be
enabled.
Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval Unlock

Used to unlock a telephone’s display module. The lock function is canceled at the
telephone by dialing this unlock FAC followed by the SCC.
Leave Word Calling Send A Message

Used to send a leave word calling message.
Leave Word Calling Cancel A Message

Used to cancel a leave word calling message.
Malicious Call Trace Activation

Used to activate a trace request on a malicious call.
Meet-me Conference Access Code Change

Allows the controlling user of a Meet-me Conference VDN to change the access
code.
PASTE (Display PBX data on Phone) Access
Code

Allows users to view call center data on display phones. PASTE is used in
conjunction with Avaya IP Agent.
Personal Station Access (PSA) Associate Code

Used to associate a telephone with the phone features assigned to a user’s
extension.

786

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature Access Code

Personal Station Access (PSA) Dissociate Code

Used to remove the association between a physical phone and an extension
number. You cannot provide the code until Personal Station Access (PSA) on the
System Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
Per Call CPN Blocking Code Access Code

If CPN blocking is off for a trunk group, users can turn it on for a call by using
this code. When they dial this code, the calling party number is not sent to the
public network.
Per Call CPN Unblocking Code Access Code

If CPN blocking is on for a trunk group, users can turn it off for a call by using
this code. When they dial this code, the calling party number is sent to the public
network.
Field descriptions for page 3

change feature-access-codes

Page 3 of 7
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)

Priority Calling Access Code:
Program Access Code:
Refresh Terminal Parameters Access Code:
Remote Send All Calls Activation:
Self Station Display Access Code:
Send All Calls Activation:
Station Firmware Download Access Code:
Station Lock Activation:
Station Security Code Change Access Code:
Station User Admin of FBI Assign:
Station User Button Ring Control Access Code:
Telephone Activation: #*
Terminal Dial-up Test Access Code:
Terminal Translation Initialization Merge Code:
Transfer to Voice Mail Access Code:
Trunk Answer Any Station Access Code:
User Control Restrict Activation:
Voice Coverage Message Retrieval Access Code:
Voice Principal Message Retrieval Access Code: *80

Deactivation:
Deactivation:
Deactivation:
Remove:

Separation Code:

Deactivation:

Screen 106. Feature Access Code (FAC) screen

Program Access Code

Used to program abbreviated dial buttons on an individual phone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

787

Screen reference

Refresh Terminal Parameters Access Code

Used to update terminal parameters on an individual phone when system settings
have changed.
Remote Send All Calls Activation/Deactivation

Used to activate or deactivate the Send All Calls feature. Requires console
permissions.
Self Station Display Activation

The self station field is not active. If set to a valid FAC, a digital station displays
its primary extension number when the FAC is entered.
Send All Calls Activation/Deactivation

Used to activate or deactivate sending all calls to coverage with minimal or no
alerting at the station.
Station Firmware Download Access Code

This field specifies the feature access code used for 2420 DCP station firmware
downloads.
Station Lock Activation/Deactivation

Used to activate or deactivate Station Lock.
Station Security Code Change Access Code

Enter the code the user must dial to change their Station Security Code. The SCC
must be administered before the user can change it using this FAC. That is, a user
cannot change a blank SCC.
Station User Admin of FBI Assign

Use to activate or deactivate Facility Busy Indicators.
Station User Button Ring Control Access Code

Used to control the ring behavior for each line appearance and bridged appearance
from the station. Allows users to have their phones ring either silently or audibly.

788

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature Access Code

Terminal Dial-Up Test Access Code

Used to perform tests on digital telephones to make sure that the telephone and the
buttons are communicating properly with the switch. See your Maintenance
documentation for information about Digital Terminal Remote Looparound Test.
Terminal Translation Initialization Merge Code

Enter the digits that must be dialed to install (merge) a station without losing any
of its previous feature settings. The Terminal Translation Initialization Separation
Code must have been used, or an X administered in the Port field of the Station
screen, when the telephone was removed from its former location in order for the
Terminal Translation Initialization Merge Code to be effective. (If you try to use
this and it doesn’t work, check the station screen for this extension. If there is still
a port assigned, type X in the port field, then try the TTI merge again.)
Terminal Translation Initialization Separation
Code

Enter the digits that must be dialed to remove (separate) a station from a location
without losing any of its feature settings.
Transfer to Voice Mail Access Code

Enter the digits that must be dialed to allow coverage to transfer the caller to the
original call recipient’s AUDIX mail where the caller can leave a message. Do not
administer this code to have the same first digit as another feature access code that
is longer in length.
Trunk Answer Any Station Access Code

Enter the access code that station users must dial to answer calls alerting on night
bells.
User Control Restrict Activation/Deactivation

Used to change the restriction level for a specific extension. Requires console
permissions.
Voice Coverage Message Retrieval Access
Code

Allows users to retrieve voice messages for another user (for whom they are a
coverage point) via a digital display module.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

789

Screen reference

Voice Principal Message Retrieval Access Code

Allows users to retrieve their own voice messages for another user via a digital
display module.
Field descriptions for page 4

change feature-access-codes

Page 4 of 7

FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Whisper Page Activation Access Code:

Screen 107. Feature Access Code (FAC) screen

Whisper Page Activation Access Code

Allows users to place a page to another user’s phone, when active on a call. The
paged user, and not the other parties on the call, hears the page.
Field descriptions for page 5

The feature access codes on this page pertain only to ACD call centers.
change feature-access-codes
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)

Page 5 of 7

Automatic Call Distribution Features
After Call Work
Assist
Auto-In
Aux Work
Login
Logout
Manual-In
Service Observing Listen Only
Service Observing Listen/Talk
Add Agent Skill
Remove Agent Skill
Remote Logout of Agent

Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access

Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:

___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Call Vectoring/Call Prompting Features
Converse Data Return Code: ___

Screen 108. Feature Access Code (FAC) screen

790

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature Access Code

Add Agent Skill Access Code

Enter the digits an agent must dial to be able to add a skill to their current skill set.
After Call Work Access Code

Enter the code the agent must dial when the agent will be performing work-related
ACD activities.
Assist Access Code

Enter the digit the agent must dial to request assistance from the split supervisor.
Auto-In Access Code

Enter the code the agent must dial to become automatically available to receive
another ACD call each time a call is released.
Aux Work Access Code

Enter the code the agent must dial when the agent will be performing non-ACD
activities.
Converse Data Return Code

Enter the access code the CONVERSANT must outpulse prior to outpulsing the
digits being returned to the system. This FAC must match the code administered
on CONVERSANT.
Login Access Code

Enter the code the agent must dial to gain access to the ACD functions. This is a
system-wide code for all ACD agents.
Logout Access Code

Enter the logout code the agent must enter to exit ACD. This is a system-wide
logout code for all ACD agents.
Manual-In Access Code

Enter the code the agent must dial to receive a single, new ACD call upon the
completion of an ACD call.
NOTE:

The following two fields appear only if Service Observing (Remote/By
FAC) on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

791

Screen reference

Remove Agent Skill Access Code

Enter the digits an agent must dial to be able to remove a skill from their current
skill set.
NOTE:

The next field is available only if Vectoring (Basic) and Vectoring
(Prompting) have been enabled on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.
Remote Logout of Agent Access Code

Enter the digits you need to dial to remotely logout an idle ACD or EAS agent.
Service Observing Listen Only Access Code

Enter the code that must be dialed to allow a station with Service Observing
permission (COR) to listen to other agent ACD calls without being heard on the
ACD call.
Service Observing Listen/Talk Access Code

Enter the code that must be dialed to allow a station with Service Observing
permission (COR) to both listen and be heard on an ACD call.
NOTE:

The following two fields appear only if Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
Enabled is optioned on the Feature-Related System-Parameters screen.

792

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature Access Code

Field descriptions for page 6

The feature access codes on this page pertain only to Hospitality features.

change feature-access-codes

Page 6 of 7
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Hospitality Features

Automatic Wakeup Call
Housekeeping Status (Client Room)
Housekeeping Status (Client Room)
Housekeeping Status (Client Room)
Housekeeping Status (Client Room)
Housekeeping Status (Client Room)
Housekeeping Status (Client Room)
Housekeeping Status (Station)
Housekeeping Status (Station)
Housekeeping Status (Station)
Housekeeping Status (Station)
Verify Wakeup Announcement
Voice Do Not Disturb

Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access
Access

Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:
Code:

*11
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______

Screen 109. Feature Access Code (FAC) screen

Automatic Wakeup Call Access Code

Enter the access code the user must dial to schedule or cancel a wakeup call.
Housekeeping Status (Client Room) Access
Code

Enter the access code the housekeeper dials from the client’s room to provide
room status. These codes are transmitted to the Property Management System
(PMS) for processing. You can assign a definition to the six codes on the
Hospitality screen.
Housekeeping Status (Station) Access Code

Enter the access code the housekeeper must dial to provide room status. This
access code must be dialed from designated telephones. There are four codes.
Verify Wakeup Announcement Access Code

Enter the access code the user can dial to verify a wakeup announcement.
Voice Do Not Disturb Access Code

Enter the access code the user must dial to enter or cancel a do not disturb request
without using a display — through the use of voice prompting.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

793

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 7

The feature access codes on this page pertain only to Multimedia Call Handling
(MMCH).
change feature-access-codes

Page 7 of 7
FEATURE ACCESS CODE (FAC)
Multimedia Features

Basic Mode Activation:
Enhanced Mode Activation:
Multimedia Call Access Code:
Multimedia Data Conference Activation:
Multimedia Multi-Address Access Code:
Multimedia Parameter Access Code:

Deactivation:

Screen 110. Feature Access Code (FAC) screen

Basic Mode Activation

If you enter this FAC when your system is an Enhanced multimedia complex, it
will revert to a Basic multimedia complex. If you enter this FAC when your
system is a Basic mode station it will do nothing.
Enhanced Mode Activation

If you enter this FAC when your system is a Basic multimedia complex, it will
become an Enhanced multimedia complex. If you enter this FAC when your
system is an Enhanced mode station it will do nothing.
Multimedia Call Access Code

If you enter this FAC from any voice station, it indicates to the Avaya
MultiVantage that you are making an Enhanced mode multimedia call. If you
originate a multimedia call with the multimedia call access code, it will originate a
call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the Feature
Related System Parameters screen.
Multimedia Data Conference Activation

If you enter this FAC from any voice station that is participating in a multimedia
call, it will alert the Avaya MultiVantage that you want to enable data
collaboration with the other parties on the call. If you enter this FAC a second

794

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

time, it will give denial treatment (since a collaboration session is already active).
This FAC only applies to voice stations on an Avaya MultiVantage switch
equipped with an ESM adjunct.
Multimedia Data Conference Deactivation

If you enter this FAC from the phone that enabled data collaboration on a
multimedia mode call, it will deactivate the data session and revert to a voice and
video call. If a user enters this FAC while participating in a data-collaboration
multimedia call that the user did not initiate, the system responds with denial
treatment.
Multimedia Multi-Address Access Code

The multimedia multi-address access code is similar to the multimedia call access
code. It allows origination of a multimedia call from a voice station. It is used
when the destination being dialed requires a different address for each of the 2
B-channels. For example, ISDN-BRI provided by a Central Office is provisioned
with separate listed directory numbers for each B-channel. In order to make a 2B
multimedia call to such a device, two sets of addresses must be entered.
Originating a multimedia call with the multimedia multi-address access code will
originate a call according to the Default Multimedia Parameters selected on the
System Parameters Features screen.
Multimedia Parameter Access Code

This FAC can be entered by any voice station to indicate to the Avaya
MultiVantage that you want to initiate a multimedia mode call with a specific
bearer capability. This FAC would be followed by a 1 or 2 to indicate the
following parameter selections respectively: 2x64 (unrestricted initial system
default), 2x56 (restricted).

Feature-Related System Parameters
This screen implements system parameters associated with various System
features.
NOTE:

This screen used to contain Call Coverage and Call Forwarding parameters.
These fields have been moved to a new screen, which you can access with
the command change system-parameters coverage-forwarding.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

795

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 1

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Self Station Display Enabled? n
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer? none
Automatic Callback - No Answer Timeout Interval (rings): 4_
Call Park Timeout Interval (minutes): 10
Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval (seconds): 20_
AAR/ARS Dial Tone Required? y
Music/Tone On Hold: music
Music (or Silence) On Transferred Trunk Calls: all
DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment: attd
Internal Auto-Answer of Attd-Extended/Transferred Calls?
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Enabled?
ACA Referral Calls:
ACA Referral Destination:
ACA Short Holding Time Originating Extension:
ACA Long Holding Time Originating Extension:
Abbreviated Dial Programming by Assigned Lists:
Auto Abbreviated/Delayed Transition Interval(rings):
Protocol for Caller ID Analog Terminals:
Display Calling Number for Room to Room Caller ID Calls?

Screen 111.

page 1

Port: _______

y
y
local
________
______
______

Bellcore

Feature-Related System Parameters screen

AAR/ARS Dial Tone Required

A second dial tone provides feedback to the user that additional dialing can occur.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate a second dial tone is to be given to the
calling party on a incoming tie or DID trunk call that is to be
routed via AAR/ARS.

Abbreviated Dial Programming by Assigned
Lists

796

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow programming by station’s assigned list.

n

Enter n if using Program Access code to indicate which
personal list is to be programmed.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

ACA Referral Calls

Indicates where ACA referral calls generate. This field only appears when the
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Enabled field is y.)
Valid entries

Usage

local

Local referral calls generate on and for the local switch.

primary

Primary referral calls generate on the local switch for remote
switches as well as the local switch.

remote

Remote referral calls generate at another switch in a DCS
network. In this case, the remote node number must also be
entered. The remote node number is the same node number
as defined on the Dial Plan screen. Also, ACA button status
transmits to other switches when in a DCS network.

ACA Referral Destination

The specified extension should be equipped with a display module. This field only
appears if ACA Referral Calls is local or primary.
Valid entries

Usage

An extension

Enter the extension on the local switch that is to receive the
ACA referral call.

attd

Enter attd for attendant.

ACA Remote PBX Identification

This field only appears if ACA Referral Calls is remote.
Valid entries

Usage

1–63

Enter a number to identify the switch in a DCS network that
makes the referral call. Do not define the remote switch
identified in this field as local on the system’s Dial Plan
screen.

ACA Short Holding Time Originating Extension
and ACA Long Holding Time Originating
Extension
Valid entries

Usage

An unassigned
extension

Do not use the same extension number for both fields. The
specified extensions are assigned automatically by the
system when the screen is submitted. These fields only
display if ACA Referral Calls is local or primary.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

797

Screen reference

Auto Abbreviated/Delayed Transition Interval
(rings)
Valid entries

Usage

1–16

Enter the number of rings before an automatic abbreviated/
delayed transition is triggered for a call

Automatic Callback — No Answer Timeout
Interval (rings)

Valid entries

Usage

2–9

Enter the number of times the callback call rings at the
calling station before the callback call is canceled.

Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Enabled

If Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) Enabled is n, associated ACA fields will
not display.
Must have an “aca-halt” button administered on the user’s station. If you enable
this feature, complete the following ACA-related fields.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if ACA measurements will be taken.

n

Otherwise, enter n.

Call Park Timeout Interval (minutes)

798

Valid entries

Usage

1–90

Enter the number of minutes a call remains parked before it
cancels.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

DID/Tie/ISDN Intercept Treatment
Valid entries

Usage

A recorded
announcement
extension

Toll charges do not apply to DID and private network calls
routed to an announcement.

attd

For system security, Avaya recommends entering attd in
this field. This routes intercept calls to the attendant and, if
the attendant receives several of these, they will know a
problem exists.

Display Calling Number for Room to Room
Caller ID Calls

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to display the calling number for room to room
hospitality calls.

Internal Auto-Answer of
Attd-Extended/Transferred Calls

This only applies to digital telephones (except BRI) with a headset or
speakerphone capability.
Valid entries

Usage

attd-extended

Enter attd-extended to enable IAA for only attendant
extended calls.

both

Enter both to enable IAA for station transferred and attendant
extended calls.

none

Enter none to disable IAA for all calls.

transferred

Enter transferred to enable IAA for only station transferred
calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

799

Screen reference

Music (or Silence) On Transferred Trunk Calls
Valid entries

Usage

all

Enter all to allow all transferred trunk calls to receive music
until the call is answered if the Music-on-Hold feature is
available.

no

Enter no if trunk callers are to hear music (or silence if
Music-on-Hold is not administered) while waiting to be
transferred, and then ringback as soon as the transfer is
completed till the call is answered.

call-wait

Enter call-wait if trunk calls transferred to stations that
require the call to wait hear music (if administered); all other
transferred trunk calls receive ringback tone.

Music/Tone on Hold

If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you
may be required to obtain a copyright license from, or pay fees to, a third party
such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or
Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). You can purchase a Magic OnHold®
system, which does not require such a license, from Avaya. This field does not
appear if Tenant Partitioning is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen. In that case, use the Tenant screen to establish Music on Hold.
Valid entries

Usage

music
tone
none

Indicates what a caller hears while on hold.

Off-Premises Tone Detect Timeout Interval
(seconds)

800

Valid entries

Usage

5–25

The number of seconds a call progress tone receiver (CPTR)
tries to detect dial tone from a trunk during dialing. Once the
time-out interval occurs, the call either outpulses on the trunk
or gets intercept treatment depending on the setting of the
Outpulse Without Tone field on page 6 of this screen.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Port

Indicates the port number that provides Music-on-Hold access. This requires a
port on a TN763 Auxiliary Trunk circuit pack or any supported Analog Line
circuit pack. Appears when Music/Tone on Hold is music. Enter the necessary
characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

801

Screen reference

Protocol for Caller ID Analog Terminals

Determines the protocol/tones sent to a Caller ID phone.
Valid
entries

Usage

Bellcore

Enter Bellcore for Bellcore protocol with 212 modem
protocol tones. Used in the U.S. and similar countries.

V23-Bell

Enter V23-Bell for Bellcore protocol with V.23 modem tones.
Used in Bahrain and similar countries.

Self Station Display Enabled

Use this field to control the use of the INSPECT button for digital display phones.
Self Station Display allows a user to display the primary extension associated with
a digital display phone. There are two methods: (1) enter a feature access code
(FAC), and (2) use the INSPECT button. In either case, the display shows the
primary extension associated with the phone where the FAC or NORMAL or EXIT
button is entered. In the case of the FAC, the display continues until a
display-altering event occurs (for instance, going on-hook or receiving an
incoming call). In the case of the INSPECT button, the display continues until the
user presses the NORMAL or EXIT button or until a display-altering event occurs.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The primary extension does display when the INSPECT button
is pressed.

n

The extension does not display when the INSPECT button is
pressed.

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer

Regulations in some countries control the settings for this field. See your Avaya
representative for assistance.
Valid
entries

802

Usage

all

Enter all to enable all trunk-to-trunk transfers. This allows
telephone users to set up trunk-to-trunk transfer, go on-hook
without disconnecting the call, and forward the call to a
remote location.

restricted

Enter restricted (restricted public) to restrict all public trunks
(CO, WATS, FX, CPE, DID, and DIOD).

none

Enter none to restrict all trunks (except CAS and DCS) from
being transferred.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Field descriptions for page 2
change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
LEAVE WORD CALLING PARAMETERS
Maximum Number of External Calls Logged Per Station: 0
Message Waiting Indication for External Calls? n
Stations with System-wide Retrieval Permission (enter extension)
1: 34430
3: attd
5:
7:
9:
2: 34412
4:
6:
8:
10:
WARNING!
SEE USER DOCUMENTATION BEFORE CHANGING TTI STATE
Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) Enabled? _
TTI State: _______
TTI Security Code: _______
Customer Telephone Activation (CTA) Enabled?
Record CTA/PSA/TTI Transactions in History Log? _
COR for PSA Dissociated Sets: _
CPN, ANI for PSA Dissociated Sets: _
Prohibit Bridging Onto Calls with Data Privacy? _
Enhanced Abbreviated Dial Length (3 or 4)? _
Record All Submission Failures in History Log? _
Record PMS/AD Transactions in History Log?_
Record IP Registrations in History Log?
Default Multimedia Outgoing Trunk Parameter Selection: 2x64

Screen 112.

page 2

Feature-Related System Parameters screen

LEAVE WORD CALLING PARAMETERS
Maximum Number of Messages Per Station
(when MSA not in service)

Appears for DEFINITY CSI and S8100 Media Server with CMC1 only.
Valid entries

Usage

0-125

The maximum number of LWC Messages that can be stored
by the system for a telephone at a given time.

Maximum Number of External Calls Logged Per
Station

When an external call is not answered, the switch keeps a record of up to 15 calls
(provided information on the caller identification is available) and the phone’s
message lamp lights. The phone set displays the names and numbers of
unsuccessful callers.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 15

The maximum number of calls that can be logged for each
user. The assigned number cannot be larger than the entry in
the Maximum Number of Messages Per Station (when MSA
not in service) field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

803

Screen reference

Message Waiting Indication for External Calls

Provides a message waiting indication when external calls are logged.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The message waiting indication for a particular station is on
whenever an external call is logged.

n

The log of external calls has no impact on the message
waiting indication.

COR for PSA Dissociated Sets
Valid entries

Usage

1-95 or blank

Enter the class of restriction to apply to calls made from
dissociated telephones. See ‘‘Personal Station Access’’ on
page 1794 for more information.

CPN, ANI for PSA Dissociated Sets

Appears when the COR for PSA Dissociated Sets field is non-blank. Specifies the
ISDN calling party number (CPN), R2-MFC ANI, and CAMA CESID applied to
calls made from PSA dissociated sets, if no system-wide calling party information
has been administered for those protocols on their respective administration
screens.
Valid entries

Usage

1-20 digits

Enter the calling party number or automatic number
identification for calls made from dissociated telephones.

Customer Telephone Activation (CTA) Enabled

804

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If y, you can use #* to automatically activate telephones after
administration. See Installing new phones for more
information.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Default Multimedia Outgoing Trunk Parameter
Selection

Does not appear on S8700 IP-Connect.
Valid entries

Usage

2x56

Sets default parameter for bandwidth and bearer for all video
calls.

2x64

Enhanced Abbreviated Dial Length (3 or 4)

The administrator may not be able to use all entry slots because of system capacity
constraints.
Valid entries

Usage

3

A value of 3 makes 1000 Enhanced List entries available to
the administrator

4

A value of 4 makes 10,000 entries available.

Prohibit Bridging Onto Calls with Data Privacy
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to protect calls from bridge-on by any party,
including Service Observing, Intrusion, Verify, and Bridging.

Record All Submission Failures in History Log

Allows submission failures to be recorded on the history log.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to record submission failures on the history log.

Record CTA/PSA/TTI Transactions in History
Log

Use this field to record when extensions and physical phones move between ports
without additional administration from the switch administrator.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to start records for ACTR, TTI, and PSA transactions
(extension and phone moves between ports) in the history log.
You access these transactions via the List History command.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

805

Screen reference

Record IP Registrations in History Log

Allows the logging of IP registrations in the history log.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to record IP registrations on the history log.

Record PMS/AD Transactions in History Log

Allows PMS and abbreviated dialing button transactions to be recorded on the
history log.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to record PMS or abbreviated dialing button
transactions on the history log.

Stations With System-wide Retrieval
Permission (enter extension)

An extension must be removed from this list before the station is removed from
the system. The switch refers to the extensions on this list as “super-retrievers.”
Valid entries

Usage

An assigned
extension.

Enter up to 10 telephone extension numbers that can retrieve
LWC Messages or External Call Log records for all other
telephones. A VDN extension is not allowed.

attd

An entry of attd gives retrieval permission to all attendants.

Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) Enabled

Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) must be enabled on the System
Parameters Customer Options screen before the TTI and Automatic Customer
Telephone Rearrangement (ACTR) fields can be administered.

806

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to start ACTR, TTI, and PSA transactions (extension
and phone moves between ports).

n

Enter n to remove existing TTI port translations and make sure
no new TTI port translations are generated.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

TTI Security Code

(This is also known as the TTI authorization code but is not the same as system
authorization codes.) This field appears when Terminal Translation Initialization
(TTI) Enabled is y.
Valid entries

Usage

1- to 7-digit code

This is the code that TTI users must enter when
accessing TTI from their telephones

TTI State

The value of this field determines what type of TTI default port translation is
generated for unadministered digital ports. This field appears when Terminal
Translation Initialization (TTI) Enabled is y.
Valid entries

Usage

data

Used for moving processor data modules, should be turned off
after move.

resume

Allows the TTI state to return to what it was before TTI was
manually suspended.

suspend

Allows any current generation or removal of TTI port
translations to be halted and access to TTI is denied.

voice

Enter voice to allow Personal Station Access and Automatic
Customer Telephone Rearrangement.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

807

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 3

change system-parameters features
page 3
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue: 5_
Time Before Off-Hook Alert: 10__
Emergency Access Redirection Extension: ________
Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in Attendant Queue: __
Call Pickup Alerting? n
Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup? y
Call Pickup on Intercom Calls? y
Directed Call Pickup? n
Extended Group Call Pickup: flexible
Deluxe Paging and Call Park Timeout to Originator? n
Controlled Outward Restriction Intercept Treatment: tone
Controlled Termination Restriction (Do Not Disturb): tone
Controlled Station to Station Restriction: tone
AUTHORIZATION CODE PARAMETERS
Authorization Code Enabled? y
Authorization Code Length: 7
Authorization Code Cancellation Symbol? #
Attendant Time Out Flag? n
Display Authorization Code? _
Controlled Toll Restriction Replaces: station-station
Controlled Toll Restriction Intercept Treatment: extension
3000

Screen 113. Feature-Related System Parameters screen

Call Pickup Alerting

This provides pickup group members with a visual indication on the Call Pickup
status lamp of calls eligible to be answered via Call Pickup.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable Call Pickup Alerting on a system-wide basis.

Call Pickup on Intercom Calls
Valid
entries

808

Usage

y

Enter y to allow a user’s or Agent LoginID’s call, ringing as an
intercom call, to be picked up using the Call Pickup or Directed
Call Pickup features. This field controls the use of this feature
throughout the system.

n

Enter n to prevent the use of these features to pickup an
intercom call.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Controlled Outward Restriction Intercept
Treatment

Enter the type of intercept treatment the caller receives when the call is outward
restricted.
Valid entries

Usage

announcement

Provides a recorded announcement to calls that cannot be
completed as dialed. You select and record the message.
The calling party receives indication that the call is
receiving Intercept Treatment.
Enter the extension number for the announcement in the
associated field.

attendant

Allows attendants to provide information and assistance to
outgoing calls that cannot be completed as dialed or that
are transferred to incomplete or restricted stations.

extension

Enter the extension number for the extension in an
associated field. May not be a VDN extension.

tone

Provides a siren-type tone to internal calls that cannot be
completed as dialed

Controlled Station-to-Station Restriction

Enter the type of intercept treatment the caller receives when the call is placed to a
restricted telephone.
Valid entries

Usage

announcement

If announcement is entered, an associated extension
number field displays. Enter the extension of the restricted
telephone in the field.

attendant

Intercepted calls are redirected to the attendant.

extension (may

not be a VDN
extension)

If extension is entered, an associated extension number
field displays. Enter the extension of the restricted
telephone in the field.

tone

Intercepted calls receive intercept (siren) tone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

809

Screen reference

Controlled Termination Restriction (Do Not
Disturb)

Enter the type of intercept treatment the caller receives when the call is placed to a
termination restricted telephone.
Valid entries

Usage

announcement

If announcement is entered, complete an associated
extension number field.

attendant

Redirects intercepted calls to the attendant.

coverage

Redirects intercepted calls to coverage.

extension

If extension is entered, complete an associated extension
number field. May not be a VDN extension,

tone

Provides a siren-type tone to calls that cannot be completed
as dialed.

Deluxe Paging and Call Park Timeout to
Originator

Paged calls that are to be parked require separate activation of the Call Park
feature. All parked calls that time out return to the attendant.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to enable the Loudspeaker Paging - Deluxe feature
that essentially integrates the Loudspeaker Paging and Call
Park features. All parked calls that time out (not answered by
paged party) return to the parking party.

n

Enter n to enable the Loudspeaker Paging feature.

Directed Call Pickup

Feature use by individual stations, attendants, or EAS agents can be controlled by
COR.

810

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow use of the Directed Call Pickup feature
across the system.

n

Enter n to prevent feature use.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Emergency Access Redirection Extension
Valid entries

Usage

An assigned extension

Enter the assigned extension number (can be a
VDN) where emergency queue overflow will
redirect.

Extended Group Call Pickup

Enables call pickup groups to answer calls directed to another call pickup group.
Valid entries

Usage

flexible

Flexible feature version supporting a one-to-n (pickup
group-to-extended pickup group) mapping.

simple

Simple feature version with a one-to-one pickup
group-to-extended pickup group mapping supported.

none

Extended group call pickup not supported.

Number of Emergency Calls Allowed in
Attendant Queue
Valid
entries
0–75

555-233-506

Usage

Enter the number of calls allowed in the attendant queue
before additional calls are routed to the backup extension.

Issue 5 October 2002

811

Screen reference

Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue
Valid
entries
2–75

Usage

Enter the number of calls that can go in to the emergency
queue

Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup
Valid
entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow a temporary bridged appearance for calls
answered with the Call Pickup or Directed Call Pickup
features. This field controls this capability on a system-wide
basis.

n

Enter n to prevent the temporary bridged appearance of calls
answered with these features.

Time Before Off-Hook Alert

812

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 3000 seconds

Enter the time in seconds that a telephone with an
Off-Hook Alert Class of Service can remain
off-hook (after intercept tone has started) before an
emergency call is sent to the attendant.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

AUTHORIZATION CODE PARAMETERS
Attendant Time Out Flag

If this field is not enabled, the caller receives Intercept tone. This flag affects only
remote users or incoming calls over trunks requiring an authorization code. This
field only appears if Authorization Codes Enabled is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if a call is to be routed to the attendant if the caller
does not dial an authorization code within 10 seconds or dials
an invalid authorization code.

Authorization Code Cancellation Symbol

Enter the symbol a caller must dial to cancel the 10-second wait period during
which the user can enter an authorization code. This field only appears when
Authorization Code is y.
Valid entries

Usage

#

Enter the cancellation code # if the main and tandem
switches are both the same type of switch.

1

Enter the cancellation code 1 if an Avaya System 85 or
DIMENSION PBX switch is part of the complex/network.

Authorization Code Length

This field only appears and must be completed if Authorization Codes Enabled is
y. This is the number of digits that must be assigned to the Authorization Code
(AC) field on the Authorization Code screen.

! SECURITY ALERT:
You enhance your system’s security by using the maximum length for your
authorization code.
Valid entries

Usage

4–13 digits

Enter a number that defines the number of digits (length) in
the Authorization Code field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

813

Screen reference

Authorization Codes Enabled

This field cannot be administered if Authorization Codes is not enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

! SECURITY ALERT:
To maintain system security, Avaya recommends that Authorization Codes be
used.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable Authorization Codes on a systemwide
basis.

Controlled Toll Restriction Intercept Treatment

Appears when the Controlled Toll Restriction Replaces field is outward or
station-to-station. This field applies an intercept treatment to a toll call during
the call processing.
Valid entries

Usage

announcement

A sub-field appears to the right if announcement is used.
If the entry is announcement, enter the assigned
announcement extension.

attendant

Intercepted calls are redirected to the attendant.

extension

A sub-field appears to the right if extension is used. If the
entry is extension, enter the extension assigned to station
or individual attendant.

tone

Intercepted calls receive intercept (siren) tone.

Controlled Toll Restriction Replaces

This field activates the Controlled Toll Restriction feature.

814

Valid entries

Usage

outward
station-station
none

The value that you choose for this field will be replaced by
controlled toll restriction. In other words, if you choose
station-station, you will not be able to use station-station
restrictions unless you reset this field.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Display Authorization Code

This field applies only to DCP, not to BRI or hybrid sets.

! SECURITY ALERT:
To enhance your system’s security, set Display Authorization Code to n.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow authorization code digits to display on the
set during the dialing.

n

Enter n if these digits should not display.

Field descriptions for page 4

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SYSTEM PRINTER PARAMETERS
System Printer Endpoint: ____
EIA Device Bit Rate: 9600

page 4

Lines Per Page: 60

SYSTEM-WIDE PARAMETERS
Switch Name: ________________
Emergency Numbers - Internal:
External: 911
No-License Incoming Call Number:
MALICIOUS CALL TRACE PARAMETERS
Apply MCT Warning Tone? n
MCT Voice Recorder Trunk Group: ___
Delay Sending RELease (seconds)?
SEND ALL CALLS OPTIONS
Send All Calls Applies to: station
Auto Inspect on Send All Calls? n
UNIVERSAL CALL ID
Create Universal Call ID (UCID)? n
UCID Network Node ID: ___

Screen 114.

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters screen

Issue 5 October 2002

815

Screen reference

SYSTEM PRINTER PARAMETERS

The system printer is the printer dedicated to support scheduled reports.
EIA Device Bit Rate

This field does not appear for DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect.
Valid entries

Usage

1200
2400
4800
9600

Enter the required printer speed setting.

Lines Per Page
Valid entries

Usage

24 – 132

Enter the number of lines per page required for the report.

System Printer Endpoint
NOTE:

The eia option is not available for DEFINITY R.
Valid entries

Usage

Data module extension

Does not appear for S8700 IP-Connect. Associated
with the System printer.

eia

Does not appear for S8700 IP-Connect. If the DCE
jack is used to interface the printer.

SYS_PRNT

Use this value if the system printer is connected
over a TCP/IP link, and the link is defined as SYS_
PRNT on the IP Services screen.

blank

816

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

SYSTEM-WIDE PARAMETERS
Emergency Numbers - Internal

Enter the phone number you want to use for emergency calls. If your system is in
a No-License mode, these will be the only numbers that users can dial. The
number may contain the feature access code for Emergency Access to the
Attendant, trunk access codes, or any number or blank.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter extension assigned to station
or individual attendant or blank

.

Emergency Numbers - External

Enter the external phone number you want to use for emergency calls.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9,
*, #,

Enter up to 21 digits.

~p (pause)

No-License Incoming Call Number

Enter the administered extension that can receive incoming calls when the switch
is in No-License mode.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter extension assigned to station
or individual attendant or blank

.

Switch Name
Valid entries

Usage

Any
keyboard
character

Enter alpha-numeric characters for identification.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

817

Screen reference

MALICIOUS CALL TRACE PARAMETERS
Apply MCT Warning Tone
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to provide an audible tone to the controlling station
when an MCT recorder is actively recording a malicious call.

Delay Sending RELease (seconds)

This field specifies the amount of time DEFINITY waits before sending an ISDN
release message in response to receiving an ISDN disconnect message. This field
appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
Malicious Call Trace field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0-30

Enter the number in increments of 10.

MCT Voice Recorder Trunk Group

Assign the trunk group for MCT voice recorders.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 666 or

group number for DEFINITY R, CSI, SI

blank
1 to 2000 or

group number for S8700 IP-Connect

blank
SEND ALL CALLS OPTIONS
Auto Inspect on Send All Calls

818

Valid entries

Usage

y

If set to y, allows you to be presented automatically with
Calling Party information for calls which are silently alerting
their station because of the Send-All-Calls feature.

n

If set to n, you are not guaranteed a Calling Party display for
calls sent directly to Coverage by the Send-All-Calls feature.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Send All Calls Applies to
Valid entries

Usage

station

If set to station, any call to that station, regardless of the
number dialed, causes calls to that station’s own extension to
be sent immediately to Coverage, or causes calls to different
extensions assigned to the station as bridged appearances to
become Ring-Ping notification if Redirect Notification field
is y.

extension

When set to extension, only the calls sent to that extension
are placed to coverage.

UNIVERSAL CALL ID
Create Universal Call ID (UCID)
Valid
entries

Usage

y

If set to y, DEFINITY will generate UCID for each call when
necessary.

n

If set to n, the DEFINITY will not generate a UCID for any
call.

UCID Network Node ID

Enter a number unique to the switch in a network of switches.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 32767 or
blank

This number is an important part of the UCID tag and must
be unique to the switch.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

819

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 5

change system-parameters features
page
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Public Network Trunks on Conference Call: 5
Auto Start?
Conference Parties with Public Network Trunks: 6
Auto Hold?
Conference Parties without Public Network Trunks: 6
Attendant Tone?
Night Service Disconnect Timer (seconds): 180
Bridging Tone?
Short Interdigit Timer (seconds): 3
Conference Tone?
Unanswered DID Call Timer (seconds): ____
Intrusion Tone?
Line Intercept Tone Timer (seconds): 30
Special Dial Tone?
Long Hold Recall Timer (seconds):
Mode Code Interface?
Reset Shift Timer (seconds): 0
Station Call Transfer Recall Timer (seconds): 0
DID Busy Treatment: tone
Invalid Number Dialed Intercept Treatment: Announcement _____
Allow AAR/ARS Access from DID/DIOD? _
Allow ANI Restriction on AAR/ARS? _
7405ND Numeric Terminal Display? n
DISTINCTIVE AUDIBLE ALERTING
Internal: 1
External: 2
Priority: 3
Attendant Originated Calls:
DTMF Tone Feedback Signal to VRU - Connection: _

5
n
n
y
n
n
n
n
n

7434ND? n

Disconnection: _

Screen 115. Feature-Related System Parameters screen

7405ND Numeric Terminal Display
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If enabled, this allows you to use 7405ND in the Type field
of the station screen. This is not an actual phone type, but you
can use this to define ports for certain types of Octel
Messaging Division voice messaging systems. This numeric
display setting sends only numbers, and not names, to the
Octel system.

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If enabled, this allows you to use 7434ND in the Type field
of the station screen. This is not an actual phone type, but you
can use this to define ports for certain types of Octel
Messaging Division systems. Use this value if your voice
messaging system operates in Bridged Mode.

7434ND

820

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Allow AAR/ARS Access from DID/DIOD
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow calls for DID and DIOD type trunk groups
to complete calls using ARS or AAR.

Allow ANI Restriction on AAR/ARS

(For Russia only) If a call is placed over a Russian shuttle trunk or a Russian
rotary trunk via an AAR or ARS entry with the ANI Req field set to r, then ANI is
requested just like a y entry. However, if the ANI request fails, the call
immediately drops. All other trunk types treat the r entry as a y.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The ANI Req field on the ‘‘AAR and ARS Digit Analysis
Table’’ on page 577 and the ‘‘AAR and ARS Digit
Conversion Table’’ on page 582 permits the additional value
of r(estricted).

n

The ANI Req field on the two screens takes only the current
values of n and y.

Attendant Tone
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to provide call progress tones to the attendants.

Auto Hold
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable the Automatic Hold feature on a
system-wide basis.

Auto Start

If this field is enabled, the START buttons on all attendant consoles are disabled.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable the Automatic Start feature.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

821

Screen reference

Bridging Tone
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to apply a bridging tone when calls are bridged on
primary extensions.

Conference Parties with Public Network Trunks

Specifies the maximum number of parties allowed in a conference call involving a
public network subscriber. If the value of the Public Network Trunks on
Conference Call field is 0, this field will not appear on the screen.
Valid entries

Usage

3 to 6

Conference Parties without Public Network
Trunks

Enter a number to specify the maximum number of parties allowed in a
conference call involving no public network trunks.
Valid entries

Usage

3 to 6

Conference Tone
NOTE:

Bridging and Conference Tones are not supported by all countries. If these
tones are enabled for countries other than Italy, Belgium, United Kingdom,
or Australia, the tones will be equivalent to no tone (silence) unless the tone
is independently administered or customized on the System-Parameters
Country Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to provide conference tone as long as three or more
calls are in a conference call.

DID Busy Treatment
Valid entries

Usage

attendant

Specifies how to handle a direct inward dialing (DID) call
to a busy station.

tone

822

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Intrusion Tone
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to apply an intrusion tone (executive override) when
an attendant intrudes on the call.

Invalid Number Dialed Intercept Treatment

Enter the type of intercept treatment the end-user hears after dialing an invalid
number.
Valid entries

Usage

announcement

Provides a recorded announcement when the end-user dials
an invalid number. You select and record the message.
Enter the extension number for the announcement in the
associated field.

tone

Provides intercept tone when the end-user dials an invalid
number.

Line Intercept Tone Timer (seconds)

Enter a number to specify how long an analog station user can wait after hearing
warning tone without going on hook, before the station is placed in the lockout
state.
Valid entries

Usage

0–60

Long Hold Recall Timer (seconds)

You can administer the system to remind a user that a call has been on hold for too
long.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 999

Enter a number between 0 and 999; 0 deactivates the timer.
This value is the number of seconds a call can be on hold
before the system re-alerts the user to remind them of the
call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

823

Screen reference

Mode Code Interface
NOTE:

If you make a change to this field, you must log off and log back on to effect
the permission changes to get to the ‘‘Mode Code Related System
Parameters’’ on page 1034.
Allows you to use the Mode Code Voice Mail System Interface to connect the
switch over a DTMF interface to INTUITY AUDIX or other vendors’ voice mail
systems.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Night Service Disconnect Timer (seconds)

Enter a number or blank to indicate how long a trunk call can be unanswered
during night service before being disconnected. The trunk must not have
Disconnect Supervision for this timer to apply.
Valid entries

Usage

10 to 1024 or
blank

Public Network Trunks on Conference Call

Indicates the number of public network trunks allowed on a conference call.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 5

If this field is 0, the Conference Parties with Public Network
Trunks field will not appear on the screen.

Reset Shift Timer (seconds)

Used only for station-to-station calls or private network calls using ISDN trunks.
Valid
entries
0 through
255

824

Usage

Specifies the number of seconds that reset shift dial tone is
audible before busy tone is heard. Reset shift dial tone allows
the user to dial a new extension by dialing one new digit that
replaces the last digit of the extension previously dialed. The
new digit replaces the last digit of the extension previously
dialed.
Enter 0 to disable this feature.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Short Interdigit Timer (seconds)

Enter a number to limit the time that digit analysis will wait for the next digit
when it has predicted that all the digits have already been collected.
Valid entries

Usage

3 through 9

Special Dial Tone

Special dial tone notifies an analog-phone user if certain features are still active
when the user goes off-hook. These features include:
■

Call Forwarding

■

Send All Calls

■

Do Not Disturb

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use the Special Dial Tone. You must have a
TN2182 circuit pack.

Station Call Transfer Recall Timer (seconds)

Allows a user-transferred call (station-to-station, a trunk call, or a DCS call) to
re-terminate with priority ringing back to the station user who initiates the transfer
operation if the transfer-to party does not answer the call within the administered
Station Call Transfer Recall timer.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 999

Enter the time in seconds before a call redirects back to the
station user who initiated the transfer operation. Enter 0 to
disable this feature.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

825

Screen reference

Unanswered DID Call Timer (seconds)

Enter number or blank to limit how long a DID call can remain unanswered before
routing to the DID/TIE/ISDN Intercept Treatment feature. This timer interacts
with the nonadministrable 50 second Wait for Answer Supervision Timer
(WAST). The WAST timer overrides this field. Thus if this field is set to a value
equal to or greater than 50 seconds, the caller receives intercept tone instead of the
normal attendant or announcement treatment that is given when the Unanswered
DID Call Timer expires before the WAST. If the Unanswered DID Call Timer
expires while the DID call is being processed by call vectoring, the timer is
ignored. See Wait Answer Supervision Timer in this section.
Valid entries

Usage

A number between 10 and
1024

blank
DISTINCTIVE AUDIBLE ALERTING
Attendant Originated Calls
Valid entries

Usage

internal
external
priority

Indicates which type of ringing (defined above) applies to
attendant-originated calls.

Distinctive Audible Alerting (Internal, External,
Priority)

This is also known as Distinctive Ringing.

826

Valid entries

Usage

1 through 3.

Enter the number of rings for internal, external and priority
calls. For virtual stations, this applies to the mapped-to
physical phone.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

DTMF Tone Feedback Signal to VRU Connection, Disconnection

This field appears only if DTMF Feedback Signals for VRU on the
Customer-Options System Parameters screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9,
*, #, A, B, C,
D

Enter the code to connect or disconnect the VRU. This can
be a single digit, or a combination such as *99 to connect,
#99 to disconnect. The tones must be programmed at the
VRU as well.

blank

Blank means that no tone is to be sent to the VRU.

Field descriptions for page 6

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

page 6

CONFERENCE/TRANSFER
Abort Transfer?
Transfer Upon Hang-Up?
Abort Conference Upon Hang-Up?
No Hold Conference Timeout:

n
n
n
60

ANALOG BUSY AUTO CALLBACK
Without Flash?

Screen 116.

No Dial Tone Conferencing? n
Select Line Appearance Conferencing? n
Unhold? n

Announcement:
Voice Mail Hunt Group Ext:

Feature-Related System Parameters screen

CONFERENCE/TRANSFER
Abort Conference Upon Hang-Up

Allows DCP, hybrid, IP, wireless, or ISDN-BRI phone users to abort the
conference operation when they hang up.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to change a call placed on soft-hold in the
conference-pending status to hard-held status if the user
hangs up.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

827

Screen reference

Abort Transfer

Stops the transfer operation whenever a user presses a non-idle call appearance
button in the middle of the transfer operation, or when they hang up. If both the
Abort Transfer and Transfer Upon Hang-Up fields are y and you press the
TRANSFER button and then dial the complete transfer-to number, hanging up the
phone transfers the call. You must select another non-idle call appearance to abort
the transfer. If the Transfer Upon Hang-Up field is y, hanging up completes the
transfer. Requires DCP, Hybrid, IP, ISDN-BRI or wireless phones.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to abort the transfer a call by pressing the TRANSFER
button, dialing the desired extension, and then hanging up or
selecting another non-idle call appearance. The user must
press the TRANSFER button again to complete the process
unless Transfer Upon Hang-up is also set to y.

No Dial Tone Conferencing

When another line is on hold or alerting, No Dial Tone Conferencing, eliminates
dial tone while setting up a conference. See GuideBuilder for more information.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to activate No Dial Tone Conferencing

No Hold Conference Timeout

Controls the timeout of No Hold Conference call setup. The system Answer
Supervision timer should be set to a value less than this.
Valid entries

Usage

20-120

Enter the number of seconds.

Select Line Appearance Conferencing

Select Line Appearance Conference changes the capabilities of the conference
buttons and line appearance buttons on digital phones. See GuideBuilder for more
information.

828

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to activate Select Line Appearance Conferencing

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Transfer Upon Hang-Up

Allows DCP, hybrid, IP, wireless, or ISDN-BRI phone users to complete a
transfer operation by hanging up.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y so users may transfer a call by pressing the TRANSFER
button, dialing the desired extension, and then hanging up.
The user may also wait to hang up, speak with the other
party, then press TRANSFER again to complete the process.

Unhold

Allows the user to press the hold button on a phone to release a hold (if no other
line appearance is on hold or alerting). This does not apply to BRI phones or
attendant consoles.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to activate the unhold capability

ANALOG BUSY AUTO CALLBACK
Announcement

Appears only if the Without Flash field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter a valid announcement extension. This field cannot be left
blank.
Voice Mail Hunt Group Ext

Appears only if the Without Flash field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter a voice mail hunt group extension.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

829

Screen reference

Without Flash

Provides automatic callback for analog stations without flashing the hook. It is
applied only when the called station is busy and has no other coverage path or call
forwarding. The caller can enable the automatic callback without flashing the
hook or entering the feature access code.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to provide automatic callback for a calling analog station
without flashing the hook.

Field descriptions for page 7

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

page 7

ISDN PARAMETERS
Send Non-ISDN Trunk Group Names as Connected Name?
Display Connected Name/Number for ISDN DCS Calls?
Send ISDN Trunk Group Name on Tandem calls?
QSIG TSC Extension:
MWI - Number of Digits Per Voice Mail Subscriber:
National CPN Prefix:
International CPN Prefix:
Pass Prefixed CPN to ASAI:
Unknown Numbers Considered Internal for AUDIX?
UNSI Calling Name for Outgoing Calls?
Path Replacement with Measurements?
QSIG Path Replacement Extension:
Path Replace While in Queue/Vectoring?

Screen 117. Feature-Related System Parameters screen

ISDN PARAMETERS
Display Connected Name/Number for ISDN DCS
Calls

830

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to display the connected name/number (if received)
for ISDN DCS calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Feature Plus Ext
Valid entries

Usage

A valid extension

Administration of this field is required for proper
termination of some Feature Plus signaling. For
example, Message Waiting Indication (MWI)
requires this extension in order to send the indication
to the appropriate switch. Appears only if the ISDN
Feature Plus field is y on the System Parameters
Customer Options screen.

International CPN Prefix

Allows you to apply prefixes to international calling numbers for display at
receiving phones. This is useful for those phones that use or implement call back
features based on incoming call numbers. When an ISDN-PRI call arrives, the
incoming call setup is analyzed for: (1) whether the Type of Address (TOA) is
national or international, and (2) whether the Numbering Plan Identifier (NPI) is
Unknown or ISDN/Telephony. This administered prefix is applied to international
calls. Prefixing applies to any subsequent display on the same switch when the
call is transferred, covered, or forwarded. The same prefixing applies to outgoing
ISDN-PRI calls when the connected number information is returned and meets the
same TOA and NPI criteria. The prefix plus the calling/connected number digit
string is limited to 15 digits, with truncation occurring at the least significant
digits.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 5 digits,
0 through 9, *
and # or
blank

Enter a number that allows you to apply prefixes to
international calling numbers for display.

Maximum Length

Appears only if the Unknown Numbers Considered Internal for AUDIX field is y.
Indicates the maximum length of an unknown private number. Any unknown
number longer than the administered value is considered external. This field
cannot be blank when it appears.
Valid
entries
1 through 20

555-233-506

Usage

Enter a number for the maximum length of an unknown
private number.

Issue 5 October 2002

831

Screen reference

MWI - Number of Digits Per Voice Mail
Subscriber

Appears only if the Basic Supplementary Services field or the ISDN Feature Plus
field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. This field provides
an indication of the number of digits per AUDIX subscriber.
NOTE:

For QSIG-MWI only. These routing digits and inserted digits must screen a
digit string that, when analyzed and processed, routes to a Signaling Group
supporting QSIG-TSCs. Once a QSIG TSC is established (from a message
center switch to a served user switch) then every lamp update message
places the Inserted Digits field (from the Message Waiting Indication
Subscriber Number Prefixes screen) in front of the AUDIX subscriber
number to screen a complete QSIG network number for the served user.
NOTE:

For Feature Plus MWI only. The routing digits and inserted digits must
screen a digit string that routes over an SSF trunk to the Feature Plus
extension on the remote (Served User) switch. The Inserted Digits field
must include the Feature Plus extension.

832

Valid entries

Usage

3 to 7

Enter a value that corresponds to the digit string length of
subscribers translated in the Message Center entity. For
instance, if the Message Center entity is AUDIX, the value
in this field must match the value of the Extension Length
field on the Switch Interface Administration screen of
AUDIX.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

National CPN Prefix

Allows you to apply prefixes to national calling numbers for display at receiving
phones. This is useful for those phones that use or implement call back features
based on incoming call numbers. When an ISDN-PRI call arrives, the incoming
call setup is analyzed for: (1) whether the Type of Address (TOA) is national or
international, and (2) whether the Numbering Plan Identifier (NPI) is Unknown or
ISDN/Telephony. This administered prefix is applied to national calls. Prefixing
applies to any subsequent display on the same switch when the call is transferred,
covered, or forwarded. The same prefixing applies to outgoing ISDN-PRI calls
when the connected number information is returned and meets the same TOA and
NPI criteria. The prefix plus the calling/connected number digit string is limited to
15 digits, with truncation occurring at the least significant digits.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 5 digits,
0 through 9, *
and # or
blank

Enter a number that allows you to apply prefixes to national
calling numbers for display.

Pass Prefixed CPN to ASAI

Passes Calling Party Number information (CPN) to ASAI. The prefixed number is
not passed on to other adjuncts, Call Detail Recording, or switches.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to pass CPN information to ASAI.

Path Replacement While in Queue/Vectoring
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow Path Replacement after queue/vector
processing has started. Depending on the version of CMS you
are using, some calls can go unrecorded if you enable this
capability. Please see your Avaya representative for more
information.

Path Replacement with Measurements
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Allows QSIG path replacement or DCS with Reroute to be
attempted on measured calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

833

Screen reference

QSIG Path Replacement Extension

Enter the extension for the system to use as part of the complete number sent in
the Path Replacement Propose message.
Valid entries

Usage

Extension

Enter an unused extension that conforms to your dial plan.

QSIG TSC Extension
Valid entries

Usage

Enter any
valid,
unassigned
extension.

This is the phantom endpoint extension for QSIG Call
Independent Signaling Connections (CISCs), which are
similar to NCA Temporary Signaling Connections (TSCs)
(both incoming and outgoing).

Send ISDN Trunk Group Name on Tandem Calls
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to provide consistent display information regardless
of trunk type. If set to y, provides only trunk group name.

Send Non-ISDN Trunk Group Name as
Connected Name

834

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to send a name of the non-ISDN trunk group as the
connected name when a call routes from ISDN to non-ISDN
and the call is answered.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Unknown Numbers Considered Internal for
AUDIX

Appears when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, either the
ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y. This field controls the treatment of an
ISDN number whose numbering plan identification is “unknown” in a QSIG
centralized AUDIX arrangement. This field works in conjunction with the Calling
Party Number to Intuity AUDIX field on the Hunt Group screen. The Calling
Party Number to Intuity AUDIX field on the Hunt Group screen must be y for this
field to have an effect.
Valid
entries
y

n

Usage

The unknown number is considered “internal” and AUDIX tries to
find a calling party name match for the digit string. If a name match
is found, AUDIX provides the calling party’s name. If no name is
found, AUDIX provides the calling party’s phone number.
The unknown number is considered “external” and AUDIX
provides the calling party’s phone number.

USNI Calling Name for Outgoing Calls?
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to send a name on outgoing calls over NI PRI trunks.
Important: Be sure you have validated that your service
provider’s central office is capable of accepting calling name
information from DEFINITY in this way. For example, if the
central office switch is a 5ESS, it must be a generic 5EXX or
later. Failure to validate the central office capability may
cause the central office to drop outgoing calls from your
switch. In this case, change the value in this field to n.

Enter n to prevent sending calling name information with
outgoing calls over NI PRI trunks. n is this field overrides a y
in the Send Name field of the outgoing trunk group screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

835

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 8

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

page 8

CPN/ANI/ICLID PARAMETERS
CPN/ANI/ICLID Replacement for Restricted Calls:
CPN/ANI/ICLID Replacement for Unavailable Calls:

Screen 118. Feature-Related System Parameters screen

CPN/ANI/ICLID PARAMETERS
CPN/ANI/ICLID Replacement for Restricted
Calls
Valid
entries

Usage

up to 15
characters

Enter a text string to replace the restricted numbers on the
display.

CPN/ANI/ICLID Replacement for Unavailable
Calls

836

Valid
entries

Usage

up to 15
characters

Enter a text string to replace the unavailable numbers on the
display.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Field descriptions for page 9

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

page 9

Pull Transfer: n
Update Transferred Ring Pattern?
Outpulse Without Tone? y
Wait Answer Supervision Timer?
Misoperation Alerting? n
Repetitive Call Waiting Tone?
Allow Conference via Flash? y
Repetitive Call Waiting Interval (sec):
Vector Disconnect Timer (min): __
Network Feedback During Tone Detection?
Hear Zip Tone Following VOA? y
System Updates Time On Station Displays?
Intercept Treatment On Failed Trunk Transfers? n
Station Tone Forward Disconnect: silence
Level Of Tone Detection: precise
Charge Display Update Frequency (seconds): 30
Date Format on 607/2420/4600/6400 Terminals: mm/dd/yy
On-hook Dialing on 607/2420/4600/6400/8400 Terminals? n
RECALL TIMING
Flashhook Interval? y
Upper Bound (msec): 1000
Lower Bound (msec): 200
Forward Disconnect Timer (msec): 600
ITALIAN DCS PROTOCOL
Italian Protocol Enabled? y
Apply Intercept Locally? _
Enforce PNT-to-PNT Restrictions? _

Screen 119.

n
n
y
_
y
n

Feature-Related System Parameters screen

Allow Conference via Flash
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow an analog station to use flash to conference
calls together.

n

Enter n to prevent this.

Charge Display Update Frequency (seconds)

This applies only if you use Advice of Charge or Periodic Pulse Metering with
display functions.
Valid entries

Usage

10–60 or

The amount of time (in seconds) between charge-display
updates. Frequent display updates may have considerable
performance impact. If the duration of a call is less than the
Charge Display Update Frequency, the display will not
automatically show charge information. To see charge
information for a call, the user must have a disp-chrg button
and must press the button before the call drops.

blank

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

837

Screen reference

Date Format on 607/2420/4600/6400 Terminals

The format of the date as displayed on the telephones.
Valid entries

Usage

mm/dd/yy

month/day/year

dd/mm/yy

day/month/year

yy/mm/dd

year/month/day

Hear Zip Tone Following VOA?

This tone alerts a telephone user that the announcement has completed and a caller
is now connected. CallMaster set and attendant console users hear double zip tone
following the announcement. All other telephone users hear single zip tone.
NOTE:

This field does not effect auto-answer zip tone heard prior to the VOA.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to play zip tone following a VDN of Origin
Announcement (VOA).

n

Enter n if you do not want zip tone following a VOA.

Intercept Treatment on Failed Trunk Transfers

838

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to provide intercept treatment to calls failing trunk
transfers.

n

Enter n to drop these calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Level of Tone Detection

For the most part, this option is no longer required in today’s switching
environment. It may be useful if your users are having difficulty placing outgoing
calls due to inaccurate detection of network dial tone.
Valid entries

Usage

broadband

This is the least exact of the levels of tone detection. If the
switch detects any tone at all, it interprets this as dial tone.

medium

The switch interprets any tone which has a continuous “on”
period of longer than 1 second as dial tone. Otherwise, the
switch accepts whatever the tone detector circuit pack
reports.

precise

The switch accepts whatever the tone detector circuit pack
reports.

Misoperation Alerting

Misoperation Alerting should not be enabled if Call Prompting is optioned.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y for misoperation recall alerting on multi-appearance
stations, analog stations, and attendant consoles.

n

Enter n for standard misoperation handling without recall
alerting.

Network Feedback During Tone Detection
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to provide audible feedback to the user while the
system attempts to detect dial tone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

839

Screen reference

On-hook Dialing on 607/2420/4600/6400/8400
Terminals

For 6400/8400, 607, 2420, and 4600 telephone users with speakerphones.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y allows users to dial without lifting the handset. If you
enable this, users hear dial tone when they press the Speaker
button, even if the handset is on-hook.

The next four fields control station-to-switch recall signal timing. If a flashhook
interval (recall window) is required, the upper and lower bounds of the interval
can be administered. An on-hook that lasts for a period of time greater than or
equal to the lower bound and less than or equal to the upper bound will be treated
as a recall flash. If an interval is not required, the Disconnect Timing value must
be administered. An on-hook that lasts for a period of time less than this value will
be ignored; greater than or equal to this value will be regarded as a disconnect.
Regardless, an on-hook lasting 50 to 150 ms coming from a 2500-type set will
always be treated as a digit pulse unless Ignore Rotary Digits is y for that station.
Outpulse Without Tone
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to indicate the switch will outpulse digits even when
a dial tone has not been received.

n

Enter “n” if the calling party should receive intercept tone if
no dial tone is detected.

Pull Transfer
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable the Pull Transfer feature on a system-wide
basis. This allows either the transferring or transferred-to
party to press the Transfer button to complete the transfer
operation

Repetitive Call Waiting Interval (sec)

This field appears when the Repetitive Call Waiting Tone field is y.

840

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 99

Enter a number to specify the number of seconds between
call waiting tones.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Repetitive Call Waiting Tone
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate that a repetitive call waiting tone be
provided to the called party for all types of call waiting
access.

Station Tone Forward Disconnect

Tone Forward Disconnect applies to any station other than one administered as a
data endpoint, an attendant console, a BRI phone, an auto answer, or as an
Outgoing Call Management (OCM) agent.
Valid entries

Usage

busy
intercept
silence

When a station is the last party remaining off-hook on a call,
that station receives the indicated tone or silence until that
station is placed on-hook, or until the tone has played for 45
seconds and is followed by silence.

System Updates Time On Station Displays

This does not apply to phones (such as BRI phones) where the user sets the time.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to have the system automatically update the time on
display phones when background maintenance is run (for
example, when the set is plugged in).

Update Transferred Ring Pattern
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to change the ringing pattern from internal to external
when an internal station transfers an external call. If most of
your calls go through an attendant, you might want to set this
to y, so your users will be able to distinguish an external call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

841

Screen reference

Vector Disconnect Timer (min)

Enter the number of minutes, or blank that a trunk should remain connected to a
vector.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 240

The number of minutes that you enter determines when the
trunk will be disconnected if the Disconnect Supervision-In
or Disconnect Supervision-Out fields on the Trunk screen are
n.

blank

Enter blank if you do not want Avaya MultiVantage to
initiate a disconnect.

Wait Answer Supervision Timer

See Unanswered DID Call Timer (seconds) for more information.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to enable this feature on a systemwide basis. When y
is entered in this field, calls to stations unanswered after 50
seconds are dropped.

n

When n is entered in this field, unanswered calls drop only
when the calling party goes on-hook.

RECALL TIMING
Disconnect Timing (msec)

Appears when the Flashhook Interval field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

80 to 1250 (in

increments of 10).
Flashhook Interval
Valid
entries

842

Usage

y

Enter y to indicate that a flashhook interval (recall window) is
required. If a y is entered, Upper Bound and Lower Bound
appear

n

If n is entered, Disconnect Timing appears.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Forward Disconnect Timer (msec)

Specify the duration of a momentary disconnect sent by the switch to an analog
station user when that user is the last party still off-hook on a call.
Valid entries

Usage

25 to 1500 (in increments of 25).

Lower Bound (msec)

The lower bound of the station-to-switch recall signal timing interval in
milliseconds. Specifies the lower bound of the flashhook interval. Appears when
the Flashhook Interval field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

80 to 1250 (in

increments of 10).
Upper Bound (msec)

Specifies the upper bound of the flashhook interval. Specifies the upper bound of
the station-to-switch recall signal timing interval in milliseconds. Appears when
the Flashhook Interval field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

80 to 1250 (in

A flash of 50 msec to 130 msec is always acceptable
from a 2500-type set regardless of the setting of the
Upper and Lower bounds and will be treated as the digit
one.

increments of 10).

ITALIAN DCS PROTOCOL

The next three fields control the Italian DCS Protocol feature.
Apply Intercept Locally

This field appears if the Italian Protocol Enabled field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate that DID/CO intercept treatment will be
applied locally instead of on the originating switch.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

843

Screen reference

Enforce PNT-to-PNT Restrictions

This field appears if the Italian Protocol Enabled field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate that restrictions and denial of PNT-to-PNT
connections will be enforced when the EDCS message is
unavailable. A y in this field means restrictions will be
enforced.

Italian Protocol Enabled
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable the Italian DCS feature on a systemwide
basis.

Field descriptions for page 10

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
CALL CENTER SYSTEM PARAMETERS
EAS
Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Enabled? n
Minimum Agent-LoginID Password Length:
Direct Agent Announcement Extension: ________
Message Waiting Lamp Indicates Status For: station

page 10

Delay: ___

VECTORING
Converse First Data Delay:
Converse Signaling Tone (msec):
Prompting Timeout (secs):
Interflow-qpos EWT Threshold:
Reverse Star/Pound Digit For Collect Step?
Available Agent Adjustments for BSR?
SERVICE OBSERVING
Service Observing: Warning Tone?
ASAI
Call Classification After Answer Supervision?

0
100
10
2
n
_

Second Data Delay: 2
Pause (msec): 70_

n

or Conference Tone?

n

Send UCID to ASAI? n

Screen 120. Feature-Related System Parameters screen

844

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

CALL CENTER SYSTEM PARAMETERS
EAS
Direct Agent Announcement Delay

Only appears if Expert Agent Selection (EAS) or ASAI Link Core Capabilities on
the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0–99 or blank

Enter the number of seconds the caller will hear ringback
before the Direct Agent Announcement is heard by the
calling party.

Direct Agent Announcement Extension
Valid entries

Usage

Valid
extension

Enter the extension of the direct agent announcement.

Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Enabled

To enable this field, either no ACD or vectoring hunt groups may exist or, existing
ACD or vectoring hunt groups must be “skilled.” Only appears if Expert Agent
Selection (EAS) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable Expert Agent Selection.

Message Waiting Lamp Indicates Status For

Only appears if Expert Agent Selection (EAS) on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

station

Since you only have one message waiting lamp on a phone,
you need to indicate if the message is for at the phone
extension or the loginID.

loginID

Expert Agent Selection (EAS) must be enabled to use this
option.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

845

Screen reference

Minimum Agent-LoginID Password Length

Enter the minimum number of digits that must be administered as an EAS Agent’s
LoginID password. Only appears if Expert Agent Selection (EAS) on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0–9

Entering a 0 or blank indicates no password is required.

VECTORING
Available Agent Adjustments for BSR

Controls the use of BSR available agent adjustments. The Vectoring (Best Service
Routing) field must be y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow adjustments to available agents.

Converse First Data Delay/Second Data Delay

The First Data Delay prevents data from being outpulsed (as a result of a converse
vector step) from the system to CONVERSANT before CONVERSANT is ready.
The delay commences when the CONVERSANT port answers the call. The
Second Data Delay is used when two groups of digits are being outpulsed (as a
result of a converse vector step) from the system to CONVERSANT. The Second
Data Delay prevents the second set from being outpulsed before CONVERSANT
is ready. The delay commences when the first group of digits has been outpulsed.
Only appears if Vectoring (Basic) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen is y.

846

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Number of seconds for the delay.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

Converse Signaling Tone/Pause

Only appears if Vectoring (Basic) and DTMF on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen are y. In the Signaling Tone field, enter the length in
milliseconds of the digit tone for digits being passed to the CONVERSANT. In
the Pause field, enter the length in milliseconds of the delay between digits being
passed. The optimum timers for the CONVERSANT are a 100 msec tone and 70
msec pause.
Valid entries

Usage

40 to 2550 (in

Values entered in the Tone/Pause fields are rounded up or
down depending upon the type of circuit pack used to
outpulse the digits.

increments of
10).
100

■

TN742B or later suffix analog board — Tone and

pause round up or down to the nearest 25 msecs. For
example a 130 msec tone rounds down to 125 msecs, a
70 msec pause rounds up to 75 msec for a total of 200
msecs per tone.
■

TN464F, TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards — Tone
and pause round up to the nearest 20 msecs. For
example a 130 msec tone rounds up to 140 msecs, a 70
msec pause rounds up to 80 msecs for a total of 220
msecs per tone.

If a circuit pack has been used for end-to-end signalling to
the CONVERSANT, and has then been used to send digits
to a different destination, the CONVERSANT timers may
stay in effect. To reset your timers to the system default, pull
and reseat the circuit pack.
Interflow-qpos EWT Threshold

Displays only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
Lookahead Interflow (LAI) field is y. Part of enhanced Look-Ahead Interflow.
Any calls predicted to be answered before this threshold will not be interflowed
(therefore saving CPU resources).
Valid entries

Usage

0–9 or blank

Number of seconds for this threshold

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

847

Screen reference

Prompting Timeout (secs)

Enter the number of seconds before the Collect Digits command times out for
callers using rotary dialing. Only appears if Vectoring (Prompting) on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

4 to 10

Reverse Star/Pound Digit for Collect Step

The “*” is interpreted as a “caller end-of-dialing indicator and the “#” is an
indicator to clear all digits previously entered by the caller for the current
“collect” vector step.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to reverse the star and pound digits by the “collect”
vector step. If set to y, it does not affect any other DEFINITY
vector step or other non-ACD DEFINITY feature (such as
ARS) in that the “*” and “#” digit-processing is unchanged.

SERVICE OBSERVING
or Conference Tone

Service Observing (Basic) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen
must be y before this field may be administered.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to assign a conference tone to be given to telephone
users and calling parties whenever their calls are being
monitored using the Service Observing feature.

Service Observing: Warning Tone

Service Observing (Basic) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen
must be y before this field may be administered.

! CAUTION:
The use of Service Observing features may be subject to federal, state, or
local laws, rules or regulations or require the consent of one or both of the
parties to the conversation. Customers should familiarize themselves and
comply with all applicable laws, rules, and regulations before using these
features.

848

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to assign a warning tone to be given to telephone
users and calling parties whenever their calls are being
monitored using the Service Observing feature.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

ASAI
Call Classification After Answer Supervision?

For use with ASAI Outbound Call Management (OCM).
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to force the switch to rely on the network to provide
answer/busy/drop classification to the switch. After the call
has been answered, a call classifier can be added to perform
answering machine, modem and voice answering detection.

Send UCID to ASAI
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable transmission of Universal Call ID (UCID)
information to ASAI.

Field descriptions for page 11

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
AGENT AND CALL SELECTION
MIA Across Splits or Skills?
ACW Agents Considered Idle?
Call Selection Measurement:
Service Level Supervisor Call Selection Override?
Auto Reserve Agents:
Copy ASAI UUI During Conference/Transfer?
REASON CODES
Aux Work Reason Code Type:
Logout Reason Code Type:
CALL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Adjunct CMS Release:
ACD Login Identification Length:
BCMS/VuStats LoginIDs?
BCMS/VuStats Measurement Interval:
BCMS/VuStats Abandon Call Timer (seconds):
Validate BCMS/VuStats Login IDs?
Clear VuStats Shift Data:
Remove Inactive BCMS/VuStats Agents?

page 11

n
y
current-wait-time
y

none
none

0
hour
n
on-login
n

Screen 121. Feature-Related System Parameters screen

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

849

Screen reference

AGENT AND CALL SELECTION
ACW Agents Considered Idle
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to have agents who are in After Call Work included
in the Most-Idle Agent queue. This means that ACW is
counted as idle time. Enter n to exclude ACW agents from
the queue.

Auto Reserve Agents
Valid entries

Usage

all
none
secondary-only

Call Selection Measurement

This field determines how Avaya MultiVantage selects a call for an agent when
the agent becomes available and there are calls in queue.
For information on CentreVu® Advocate, please contact your Avaya Account
Executive or see the Avaya Business Advocate Release 3 Version 11 User Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

current-waittime

Current Wait Time selects the oldest call waiting for any
of the agent’s skills.

predicted-waittime.

Predicted Wait Time is a feature of CentreVu® Advocate.

Copy ASAI UUI During Conference/Transfer

Displays when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, either the
ASAI Interface or ASAI Proprietary Adjunct Links field is y.

850

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to copy ASAI UUI during conference or transfer
calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

MIA Across Splits or Skills
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to remove an agent from the MIA queue for all the
splits/skills/hunt groups that he or she is available in when
the agent answers a call from any of his or her
splits/skills/hunt groups.

Service Level Supervisor Call Selection
Override

This field determines whether Avaya MultiVantage changes agents’ call handling
preferences when a skill using Service Level Supervisor exceeds its Level 1
threshold.
For information on CentreVu® Advocate, please contact your Avaya Account
Executive or see the Avaya Business Advocate Release 3 Version 11 User Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if you want to override the normal call handling
preferences of a skill’s assigned agents in this situation.

n

Enter n if you do not want to override agents’ normal call
handling preferences when the skill exceeds its Level 1
threshold. Service Level Supervisor requires Expert Agent
Selection and CentreVu® Advocate.

REASON CODES
Aux Work Reason Code Type
Valid entries

Usage

none

Enter none if you do not want an agent to enter a Reason
Code when entering AUX work.

requested

Enter requested if you want an agent to enter a Reason Code
when entering AUX mode but do not want to force the agent
to do so. To enter requested the Reason Codes and EAS on
the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen must be y.

forced

Enter forced to force an agent to enter a Reason Code when
entering AUX mode. To enter forced, the Reason Codes and
EAS on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen must
be y.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

851

Screen reference

Logout Reason Code Type
Valid entries

Usage

none

Enter none if you do not want an agent to enter a Reason
Code when logging out.

requested

Enter requested if you want an agent to enter a Reason
Code when logging out but do not want to force the agent to
do so. To enter requested the Reason Codes and EAS on
the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen must be y.

forced

Enter forced to force an agent to enter a Reason Code when
logging out. Enter forced to force an agent to enter a Reason
Code when entering AUX mode. To enter forced, the
Reason Codes and EAS on the System-Parameters
Customer-Option screen must be y.

CALL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ACD Login Identification Length

Enter the number of digits for an ACD Agent Login ID if Expert Agent Selection
(EAS) on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is n. If BCMS/VuStats
Login IDs is y, the ACD Login ID length must be greater than 0. This field
identifies an ACD agent to CMS. The number you enter in this field must equal
the number of characters in the agent’s login ID.
Valid entries

Usage

0–9

For CMS, this field cannot be 0.

Adjunct CMS Release

Specifies the release of the CMS adjunct used with the system.

852

Valid entries

Usage

R3V5
R3V6
R3V8
R3V9
R3V11

For CMS, this field cannot be blank.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

BCMS/VuStats Measurement Interval

You can enter half-hour or hour for polling and reporting measurement data if the
BCMS (Basic) and/or the VuStats on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

half-hour

There are a maximum of 25 time slots available for
measurement intervals. If hour is specified, an entire day of
traffic information will be available for history reports;
otherwise, only half a day will be available. This does not
affect daily summaries as they always reflect traffic
information for the entire day. The interval may be changed
at any time, but will not go into effect until the current
interval completes.

hour

BCMS/VuStats LoginIDs

This feature can be used when EAS is not optioned, or in addition to EAS login
IDs. When this field is y, both BCMS and CMS use the same login ID for an
agent.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to administer valid agent login IDs to monitor call
activity by agent.

BCMS/VuStats Abandon Call Timer (seconds)

Specifies the number of seconds before calls are considered abandoned. Calls
with talk time that is less than this number (and that are not held) are tracked by
BCMS and displayed by VuStats as ABAND calls.
Valid entries

Usage

1–10 or blank

Clear VuStats Shift Data
Valid entries

Usage

on-login

Enter on-login to clear shift data for an agent when the agent
logs in.

at-midnight

Enter at-midnight to clear shift data for all agents at
midnight.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

853

Screen reference

Remove Inactive BCMS/VuStats Agents
Valid entries

Usage

y

Agents are removed from reports when they have no staff
time during the previous 7 days.

n

Agents remain on the report even if they have no staff time
for any period of time.

Validate BCMS/VuStats Login IDs
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow entry only of login-IDs that have been
entered on the BCMS Login-ID screen.

n

Enter n to allow entry of any ACD login of the proper
length.

Field descriptions for page 12

change system-parameters features
FEATURE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

page 12

AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION PARAMETERS
Automatic Exclusion by COS? y
Automatic Exclusion Coverage/Hold? y
Automatic Exclusion with Whisper Page? y
Recall Rotary Digit: 2
Password to Change COR by FAC: *
Duration of Call Timer Display (seconds): 3
WIRELESS PARAMETERS
Radio Controllers with Download Server Permission (enter board location)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
IP PARAMETERS
Direct IP-IP Audio Connections? n
IP Audio Hairpinning? n
RUSSIAN MULTI-FREQUENCY PACKET SIGNALING
Re-try?
T2 (Backward Signal) Activation Timer (secs):

Screen 122. Feature-Related System Parameters screen

854

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION PARAMETERS
Automatic Exclusion by COS

Activates automatic exclusion automatically by class of service when a user goes
off-hook on a station with an assigned EXCLUSION button. This works only for
stations on the local switch.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enables automatic exclusion by a class of service.

n

Exclusion operates normally. See Exclusion on ‘‘Telephone
feature buttons’’ on page 131 for more information.

Automatic Exclusion Coverage/Hold

Appears when Automatic Exclusion by COS field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The principal can bridge onto the call by pressing the
appropriate bridged appearance button. And, if the coverage
point places the exclusion call on hold, the principal can
retrieve the call.

n

If a coverage point has answered a call and there is active
exclusion on the call, the principal cannot bridge onto the call.
And, if the coverage point places the exclusion call on hold, the
principal cannot retrieve the call.

Automatic Exclusion with Whisper Page

Appears when Automatic Exclusion by COS field is y.
Valid
entries

Usage

y

The whisper page goes through to an excluded call.

n

The whisper page is denied when a station attempts to whisper
page to a station that is on an excluded call.

Duration of Call Timer Display

Administer a call timer button on the Station screen.
Valid
entries
3–30

555-233-506

Usage

Enter the length of time (in 3 second increments) that the call
information remains on display after the call is terminated.

Issue 5 October 2002

855

Screen reference

Password to Change COR by FAC

Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Change COR
by FAC field is y. Avaya recommends using this password option.
Valid
entries

Usage

4 to 8 digits

Requires the password option.

blank

Disables the password option.

Recall Rotary Digit

This establishes the digit to use for rotary phones to receive recall dial tone.
Dialing this digit simulates switch hook flash so that users of rotary phones can
use features such as conference and transfer. The phone must also be administered
to use the recall rotary digit.
Valid
entries
0 through 9

Usage

Enter the digit users can dial to generate recall dial tone. Use a
number that is not the first digit in normal dialing patterns.

WIRELESS PARAMETERS
Radio Controllers with Download Server
Permission

Enter the necessary characters for the port location of the circuit pack containing
the radio controllers with download server permission.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03

(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)

856

A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Feature-Related System Parameters

IP PARAMETERS
Direct IP-IP Audio Connections

Allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter to y to save on bandwidth resources and improve sound
quality of voice over IP transmissions.

IP Audio Hairpinning

Allows IP endpoints to be connected through the IP circuit pack on the switch.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow IP endpoints to be connected through the IP
circuit pack on the switch in IP format, without going
through the DEFINITY TDM bus.

RUSSIAN MULTI-FREQUENCY PACKET
SIGNALING
Re-try

The Re-try field applies to outgoing Russian MFP trunks. It allows the switch to
resend Russian MFP calling party number and dialed number information to the
CO. The switch resends the information only once over another outgoing trunk
port of the same trunk group if the switch receives a message that the information
was received incorrectly by the CO. The switch also sends Russian MFP
information over another trunk port if the switch does not receive a timely
response for the information.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to resend address information on outgoing Russian MFP
trunks.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

857

Screen reference

T2 (Backward Signal) Activation Timer (secs)

The T2 (Backward Signal) Activation Timer (secs) field applies to outgoing
Russian MFP trunks. This field sets the number of seconds the switch waits for
confirmation after sending calling party number and dialed number information
on outgoing Russian MFP trunks
Valid entries

Usage

5 through 20

Enter the number of seconds the system waits to receive
confirmation after sending the address information on outgoing
Russian MFP trunks.

Group Paging Using Speakerphone
Use this screen to assign digital speakerphones to a paging group. Users can page
all the phones in the group simultaneously by dialing the group’s extension.
add group-page next

Page 1 of 1
GROUP PAGING USING SPEAKERPHONE
Group Number: 1
Group Extension: 3210
Group Name: Sales staff
COR: 5
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
Name
Ext
Name
1: 2009
B. Smith
17:
2: 2010
R. Munoz
18:
3: 2011
Y. Lu
19:
4: 2012
A. Sullivan
20:
5:
21:
6:
22:
7:
23:
8:
24:
9:
25:
10:
26:
11:
27:
12:
28:
13:
29:
14:
30:
15:
31:
16:
32:

Screen 123. Group Paging Using Speakerphone screen

COR

858

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 95

Enter a class of restriction. In order to page the group, users’
class of restriction must give them calling permission for the
group’s class of restriction.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Group Paging Using Speakerphone

Ext
Valid entries

Usage

An extension
number

Assign a phone to the group by entering its extension number
in this field.

Group Extension
Valid entries

Usage

An extension
number

Assign the extension users will dial to page the members of
this group.

Group Name
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 27
characters

Enter a name that’s informative to users, because it appears
on callers’ phone displays when they page the group.

Group Number

This field displays the identifying number the switch assigns to the group when it
is created.
Name

When you save your changes, the switch fills in this display field with the name
assigned to each extension on the Station screen.
Related topics

See ‘‘Paging over speakerphones’’ on page 479 for complete instructions.
See ‘‘Group paging’’ on page 1690 for a description of the feature.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

859

Screen reference

Holiday Table
Use this screen to define individual holidays or holiday ranges for use with
Holiday Vectoring. To use and administer Holiday Vectoring, Vectoring (Holiday)
must be y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Contact your
Avaya representative for assistance.
change holiday table 1

Page

1 of 1

HOLIDAY TABLE
Number:

1

______START______
Month Day Hour Min
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__

Name:
______END________
Month Day Hour Min
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__
__
__ __
__

Description
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________

Screen 124. Holiday table screen

Description
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27 characters.

Enter a phrase to describe the holiday.

End Day
Valid entries

Usage

1-31

Enter the ending day of the holiday.

End Hour
Valid entries

Usage

0-23

Enter the ending hour of the holiday using a 24-hour clock.

Valid entries

Usage

0-59

Enter the ending minute of the holiday.

End Min

860

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Holiday Table

End Month
Valid entries

Usage

1-12

Enter the ending month of the holiday.

Name

Display-only field identifying the name of the table.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27 characters

Enter a description of the holiday table.

Number

Display-only field identifying the holiday table number.
Valid display

Usage

1-10

Holiday table number.

Start Day
Valid entries

Usage

1-31

Enter the starting day of the holiday.

Start Hour
Valid entries

Usage

0-23

Enter the starting hour of the holiday using a 24-hour clock.

Valid entries

Usage

0-59

Enter the starting minute of the holiday.

Start Min

Start Month
Valid entries

Usage

1-12

Enter the starting month of the holiday.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

861

Screen reference

Hospitality
This screen is used to implement the system parameters associated with the
hospitality features. To use and administer the Hospitality-related features,
Hospitality must be y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Contact your Avaya representative for assistance.
Field descriptions for page 1
change system-parameters hospitality
HOSPITALITY
Message Waiting Configuration:
Controlled Restrictions Configuration:
Housekeeper Information Configuration:
Number of Housekeeper ID Digits:
PMS Log Endpoint:
Journal/Schedule Endpoint:
Client Room Coverage Path Configuration:
Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms:
Forward PMS Messages to Intuity Lodging?
PMS LINK PARAMETERS
PMS Endpoint:
PMS Protocol Mode:
Seconds before PMS Link Idle Timeout:
Milliseconds before PMS Link Acknowledgment Timeout:
PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions:
PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests:
Take Down Link for Lost Messages?

Page

1 of

3

act-nopms
act-nopms
act-nopms
0

act-nopms
n

transparent ASCII mode? n
20
500
3
3
y

Screen 125. Hospitality screen

Client Room Coverage Path Configuration

This indicates whether the server and the PMS exchange coverage path
information for guest stations.

862

Valid entries

Usage

act-nopms

The message is acknowledged (MESSAGE ACK), but no
action is taken.

act-pms

If active (act-pms), the server and PMS exchange and accept
coverage path information. This field does not apply to
normal mode. When upgrading from a release that does not
support this feature, the field is set to act-pms if the PMS
protocol mode is administered for transparent or ASCII
mode.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality

Controlled Restrictions Configuration

This indicates whether controlled restriction information is being exchanged
between the server and the PMS.
Valid entries

Usage

act-nopms

The message is acknowledged (MESSAGE ACK), but no
action is taken.

act-pms

The server and the PMS exchange and accept controlled
restriction information.

Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms

This applies only to stations with a “client room” class of service in the
“occupied” mode. This field is used for transparent or ASCII mode. The value in
this field is also used during a translation save as the coverage path for each
station with “client room” class of service.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 9999 or
blank

Enter the coverage path assigned when the server receives a
check-out message for a valid extension or a new check-in.

Forward PMS Message to INTUITY Lodging

This field is used only in ASCII mode.
Valid entries

Usage

y

PMS-to-INTUITY messages are sent through the server.

n

PMS-to-INTUITY messages are sent directly to the Avaya
INTUITY Lodging system.

Housekeeper Information Configuration

This indicates whether housekeeper information is being exchanged between the
server and the PMS.
Valid entries

Usage

act-nopms

The message is acknowledged (MESSAGE ACK), but no
action is taken.

act-pms

If active (act-pms), the server and PMS exchange and accept
housekeeper information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

863

Screen reference

Journal/Schedule Endpoint

This is a valid data extension number that is assigned to the data module
connected to the Journal/Schedule printer.
Valid entries

Usage

Valid data
extension number

Cannot be a VDN extension. This extension can be the
same as the PMS/Log printer and both sets of reports can be
printed on the same printer. This extension is dialed by the
server to send journal information or schedule reports to the
printer.

PMS_LOG

Use this value if the printer is connected over a TCP/IP
link, and this link is defined as PMS_LOG on the IP
Services screen.

PMS_JOURNAL

Use this value if the printer is connected over a TCP/IP
link, and this link is defined as PMS_JOURNAL on the IP
Services screen.

blank
Message Waiting Configuration

This indicates whether message waiting notification requests and changes are
being exchanged between the server and the PMS.
Valid entries

Usage

act-nopms

The message is acknowledged (MESSAGE ACK), but no
action is taken.

act-pms

Message waiting is active on the server and information
between the PMS and server is being transmitted.

Number of Housekeeper ID Digits

864

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 6

Enter the number of digits that the housekeeper must dial for
identification.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality

PMS Log Endpoint

This is a valid data extension number that is assigned to the data module
connected to the PMS/Log printer.
Valid entries

Usage

Valid data
extension

Cannot be a VDN extension. This extension is dialed by the
server to send housekeeping and PMS events to the printer.

PMS_LOG

Use this value if the printer is connected over a TCP/IP link,
and this link is defined as PMS_LOG on the IP Services
screen.

PMS_JOURNAL

Use this value if the printer is connected over a TCP/IP link,
and this link is defined as PMS_JOURNAL on the IP
Services screen.

blank
PMS LINK PARAMETERS
ASCII mode

The PMS Protocol Mode field must be transparent.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y when the ASCII-only mode is being used for the
PMS message set.

Milliseconds Before PMS Link Acknowledgment
Timeout

This regulates how quickly the system responds to a message from the PMS (also
known as “pace timing.”) This value is also used as the “inquiry message” (ENQ)
time-out value. In most cases, keep this as short as possible.
Valid entries

Usage

100 to 1500

Enter the time in milliseconds the system waits for an
acknowledgment from the PMS indicating it correctly
received a message.

PMS Link Maximum Retransmission Requests
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 5

Enter the number of times that the server will allow the PMS
to request acknowledgment for a message that it sent.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

865

Screen reference

PMS Link Maximum Retransmissions
Valid
entries
1 to 5

Usage

Enter the number of times that the server retransmits a message
to the PMS in response to a negative acknowledgment, or sends
an inquiry for acknowledgment from the PMS before giving up
on the message.

PMS Log Endpoint
Valid entries

Usage

Valid
extension

Enter the data extension number the server dials to access PMS.
Cannot be a VDN extension.

PMS

Use this value if the PMS is connected over a TCP/IP link, and
this link is defined as PMS on the IP Services screen.

blank
PMS Protocol Mode

This indicates the message protocol mode used between the server and PMS.
Coordinate this option with your PMS vendor.
Valid
entries

Usage

normal
transparent

Seconds Before PMS Link Idle Timeout
Valid entries

Usage

5 to 20

Enter the idle time in seconds that the server waits for an
acknowledgment from the PMS before the server enters link
failure mode from the PMS transmission link.

Take Down Link for Lost Messages

866

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to cause the PMS link to come down if messages are
being lost. Monitor your PMS error log if you use n.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality

Field descriptions for page 2

change system-parameters hospitality

Page

HOSPITALITY
Daily Wakeup? y VIP Wakeup?
VIP Wakeup Per 5 Minutes:
Room Activated Wakeup With Tones?
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report:
Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report:
Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report:
Announcement Type:
Integrated Announcement Extension:
Length of Time To Remain Connected To Announcement:
Extension To Receive Failed Wakeup LWC Messages:
Routing Extension On Unavailable Voice Synthesis:
Display Room Information in Call Display?
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers?
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers?
Number of Digits from PMS:
PMS Sends Prefix?
Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path:
Digit to Insert/Delete:
Dual Wakeup? y

2 of

3

y
_____
______
______
______

____
______
______

Screen 126. Hospitality screen

Announcement Ports

This field appears only when the Announcement Type field is voice-synthesis.
For the voice-synthesis announcement type, this indicates the equipment
location of two ports on the voice synthesizer circuit pack. Enter the necessary
characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03

(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

867

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

Announcement Type

This indicates the type of automatic wakeup announcement the hotel guest will
receive. Allowable entries are as follows:
Valid entries

Usage

external

Applicable when using an announcement adjunct.
If external is used, complete the Auxiliary Board for
Announcement field.

integrated

Applicable when using the TN750B or TN750C
announcement circuit pack.
If integrated is used, complete the Integrated
Announcement Extension field. The extension you enter
must be a valid integrated announcement extension
(administered on the Recorded Announcements screen) or
a VDN. If you enter an invalid extension, the server
displays an error message.

mult-integ

Multi-integrated; applicable when using the TN750B or
TN750C announcement circuit pack.
If mult-integ is used, complete the Default
Announcement Extension field. The extension you enter
must be a valid integrated announcement extension
(administered on the Recorded Announcements screen) or
a VDN. If you enter an invalid extension, the server
displays an error message.

868

voicesynthesis

If voice-synthesis is used, complete the Announcement
Ports field.

music-on-hold

If music-on-hold is used, no other field appears.

silence

If silence is used, no other field appears.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality

Automatic Selection of DID Numbers

This field assigns a 2- to 5-digit number to a guest’s phone number that is not
associated with the room number.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for
Guest Rooms feature.

Auxiliary Board for Announcement

This field appears only when the Announcement Type field is external. This
indicates the equipment location of an auxiliary trunk circuit that connects to the
external announcement equipment. Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

869

Screen reference

Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers

This field allows you to select the DID number assigned to a room when a guest
checks in. This field can be accessed only if the Automatic Selection of DID
Numbers field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow you to select the DID number assigned to a
room when a guest checks in.

Daily Wakeup
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if each extension can request daily wakeup calls.

Default Announcement Extension

This field appears only when the Announcement Type field is mult-integ. This
indicates the default wakeup announcement extension when using the integrated
announcement circuit pack.
Valid entries

Usage

valid extension or VDN

Enter the extension of the announcement you want
to use for default wakeup calls.

Digit to Insert/Delete

Enter the leading digit that may be deleted and inserted back as described in the
following text. The current PMS message set uses the extension number as the
room identifier. In many customer configurations, the leading digit of the
extension number is dropped to screen the room number. In order to accommodate
PMS devices that are based on room number and not extension, this leading digit
may be deleted on messages from the switch to the PMS, and then inserted back
on messages from the PMS.
NOTE:

The PMS interface supports 3-, 4-, or 5-digit extensions, but prefixed
extensions do not send the entire number across the interface. Only the
assigned extension number is sent. Therefore, you should not use prefixed
extensions for numbers that are also going to use the Digit to Insert/Delete
function.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

870

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality

Display Room Information in Call Display

This indicates the type of guest room information displayed on phone displays.
Valid entries

Usage

y

If this field is set to y, the phones will display the name and
room number. The extension number and room number are
not always the same number.

n

If this field is set to n, the phones will display the name and
extension number.

Dual Wakeup
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if each extension can request two wakeup calls
within one 24-hour time period.

Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC
Messages

This indicates where unsuccessful wakeup LWC messages will be stored. This is
usually administered to an unassigned extension (cannot be a VDN extension) or
to the attendant (attd). In addition, a LWC lamp for that extension is usually
assigned to the attendant console as an indication of failed wakeup calls.
Valid entries

Usage

Unassigned extension
Integrated Announcement Extension

This field appears only when the Announcement Type field is integrated. This
indicates the wakeup announcement extension when using the integrated
announcement circuit pack.
Valid entries

Usage

valid extension or VDN

Enter the extension of the announcement you
want to use for wakeup calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

871

Screen reference

Length of Time to Remain Connected to
Announcement

Enter the length of time in seconds that a hotel guest will be connected to an
announcement. This applies only after the guest has heard the announcement
completely one time, but continues to listen.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 300

Number of Digits from PMS

This indicates the number of digits being sent from the PMS to the server to
identify room numbers.
NOTE:

If the Number of Digits from PMS field is blank and the PMS Sends Prefix
field is set to n, the server will not support an extension that starts with 0.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 4

When using normal mode, digits 1 through 4 are valid.
When using transparent or ASCII mode, digits 1 through 5
are valid.
If using mixed numbering in the server, leave this field
blank.

1 to 5

blank

Number of Digits in PMS Coverage Path

This indicates whether the coverage paths are 3 or 4 digits long. There can be up
to 9999 coverage paths.
Valid entries

Usage

3 to 4

PMS Sends Prefix

This indicates if the PMS sends a prefix digit to the server as part of the room
numbering plan.
NOTE:
If the PMS Sends Prefix field is set to n and the Number of Digits from
PMS field is blank, the server will not support an extension that starts with

0.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

872

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality

Room Activated Wakeup with Tones
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if wakeup calls can be activated via tones that
prompt users for the time they wish to waken. This allows
room activated wakeup calls without the use of a speech
synthesizer or a display telephone.

Routing Extension on Unavailable Voice
Synthesis

This indicates where a wakeup call will go to if both wakeup announcements on
the Speech Synthesizer circuit pack are not available. This is usually administered
to an unassigned extension (cannot be a VDN extension) or to the attendant (attd).
Valid entries

Usage

Assigned extension or
attd

! CAUTION:
Set the following reports for a time other than when the system does its scheduled
maintenance tests. To make sure the times do not overlap, enter the command display
system-parameters maintenance and check when the system is set to run tests.
Time of Scheduled Emergency Access
Summary Report

This indicates the time of day that the Emergency Access Summary Report will be
printed on the Journal/ Schedule printer.
Valid entries

Usage

hh:mm:am/pm

Enter the time where hh=hour, mm=minute, am/pm=A.M.
or P.M.

Time of Scheduled Wakeup Activity Report

This indicates the time of day that the Wakeup Activity Report will be printed on
the Journal/Schedule Printer. This report summarizes the wakeup activity for each
extension that had wakeup activity for the past 24 hours.
Valid entries

Usage

hh:mm:am/pm

Enter the time where hh=hour, mm=minute, am/pm=A.M.
or P.M.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

873

Screen reference

Time of Scheduled Wakeup Summary Report

This indicates the time of day that the Wakeup Summary Report will be printed on
the Journal/Schedule printer. This report gives an hour-by-hour summary of the
number of scheduled wakeup calls and a list of extensions to which wakeup calls
were attempted but did not complete during the hour.
Valid entries

Usage

hh:mm:am/pm

Enter the time where hh=hour, mm=minute, am/pm=A.M.
or P.M.

VIP Wakeup
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if each extension can request VIP wakeup calls.

VIP Wakeups Per 5 Minutes

This field appears if the VIP Wakeup field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 50

Enter the number of VIP Wakeup calls allowed in a 5-minute
interval.

Field descriptions for page 3

change system-parameters hospitality

Page 3 of 3

HOSPITALITY
ROOM STATES:
Definition
Definition
Definition
Definition
Definition
Definition

for
for
for
for
for
for

Rooms
Rooms
Rooms
Rooms
Rooms
Rooms

in
in
in
in
in
in

State
State
State
State
State
State

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Rooms
Rooms
Rooms
Rooms
Rooms
Rooms

in
in
in
in
in
in

State
State
State
State
State
State

1
2
3
4
5
6

HOSPITALITY FEATURES
Suite Check-in? n

Screen 127. Hospitality screen

874

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

ROOM STATES
Definition for Rooms in State 1 - 6

Enter up to a 30-character definition for each room status. For example, you could
define state 1 as ‘clean, ready to use’ and state 2 as ‘occupied, needs cleaning.’
The definitions for room states (Field descriptions for page 3), are for Attendant
Room Status only. If you are not using Attendant Room Status, you do not need to
complete these fields.
HOSPITALITY FEATURES
Suite Check-in

This field allows attendants to have the system automatically check-in several
related extensions with one check-in command.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use the Suite Check-in feature. See ‘‘Suite
Check-in’’ for more information.

Hunt Group
Allows calls to be answered by users (agents) at a predefined group of telephones
or devices.
This screen creates a hunt group that is identified by a hunt group number. Users
assigned to a hunt group are identified by their extension number.
This screen can be used to implement a hunt group and its associated features such
as Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Hunt Group Queuing. Look at the
various hunt group screens and choose the screens that can be used to implement
your hunt group requirements.
The total number of pages vary depending on your System configuration. See the
Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for the maximum number of
hunt groups supported by each configuration.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

875

Screen reference

The System checks for the busy or idle status of extension numbers in the hunt
group when answering calls. A Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) type hunt group
selects the “most idle” extension in the group when answering a new call. A
Direct Department Calling (DDC) type hunt group selects the first available
extension (in the administered sequence) when answering a new call. Expert
Agent Distribution (EAD), used only with Expert Agent Selection (EAS), selects
the “most idle” agent or the “least occupied” agent with the highest skill level for
the call’s skill.
NOTE:

Vector controlled splits/skills can be called directly via the split/skill
extension (instead of calling a VDN mapped to a vector that will terminate
the call to a vector controlled split/skill); however, the calls will not receive
any announcements, be forwarded, redirect to coverage, or
intraflow/interflow to another hunt group.
Field descriptions for page 1
change hunt-group 4

Page 1 of X
HUNT GROUP

Group Number:
Group Name:
Group Extension:
Group Type:
TN:
COR:
Security Code:
ISDN Caller Disp:

4__
____________________________
________

ACD?
Queue? y
Vector?
Coverage Path: ____
Night Service Destination: ____
MM Early Answer?

____
________

Queue Length: ___
Calls Warning Threshold: ___
Time Warning Threshold: ___

Port: x
Port: x

Extension: ____
Extension: ____

Screen 128. Hunt Group screen when Queue is y

change hunt-group x

Page 1 of X
HUNT GROUP

Group Number:
Group Name:
Group Extension:
Group Type:
TN:
COR:
Security Code:
ISDN Caller Display:

___
____________________________
____

ACD?
Queue?
Vector?
Coverage Path:
Night Service Destination:
MM Early Answer?

n
n
n
____
_____

____
________

Screen 129. Hunt Group screen when Queue and Vector are n

876

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

The two Extension fields display only when the Calls Warning Port and the Time
Warning Port fields are x.
change hunt-group x

Page 1 of X
HUNT GROUP

Group Number:
Group Name:
Group Extension:
Group Type:
TN:
COR:
Security Code:
ISDN Caller Display:

___
____________________________
____

ACD? n
Queue? y
Vector? y

MM Early Answer?
____
________

Queue Length: ___
Calls Warning Threshold: ___
Time Warning Threshold: ___

Port: x
Port: x

Extension: ____
Extension: ____

Screen 130. Hunt Group screen when Queue and Vector are y

The two Extension fields display only when the Calls Warning Port and the Time
Warning Port fields are x.
change hunt-group x

Page 1 of X
HUNT GROUP

Group Number:
Group Name:
Group Extension:
Group Type:
TN:
COR:
Security Code:
ISDN Caller Disp:

___
____________________________
____

ACD?
Queue?
Vector?
Coverage Path:
Night Service Destination:
MM Early Answer?

n
y
n
____
_____

____
________

Queue Length: ___
Calls Warning Threshold: ___
Time Warning Threshold: ___

Port: x
Port: x

Extension: ____
Extension: ____

Screen 131. Hunt Group screen when Queue is y and Vector is n

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

877

Screen reference

ACD

Indicates whether Automatic Call distribution is used. This field cannot be set to y
if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the ACD field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The hunt group will function as an ACD split/skill. AUDIX
hunt groups can function as ACD splits/skills.

n

This feature is not desired, even if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the ACD field is y. When the hunt
group is assigned as an ACD split/skill, the hunt group
members serve as ACD agents. The agents in this split/skill
must log in to receive ACD split/skill calls. If this hunt group
is on a remote switch using the AUDIX in a DCS feature,
enter n.

Calls Warning Threshold

Appears if the Queue field is y. Enter the number of calls that can be queued
before the System flashes the queue status (feature buttons assigned on agents
phones) and the optional Auxiliary Queue Call Warning Threshold lamp assigned
to the split/skill. These lamps are lighted steadily when at least one call is in queue
and the threshold has not yet been reached.
Valid entries

Usage

1-999 and must be less than
or equal to the queue length
or blank

This field must not be left blank if Calls
Warning Port is assigned a port number.

(Calls Warning) Extension

Appears if the Queue field is y and when the Calling Warning Port and the Time
Warning Port fields are X. An extension is needed when an X is placed in Calls
Warning Port. This extension can be used by the Terminal Translation
Initialization (TTI) feature to assign a port to this extension from the port itself.
Once Calls Warning Port is assigned a valid port (either via TTI or the change
hunt-group command), then the extension is removed and considered
unassigned.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter an unassigned extension. This field may not be blank.

878

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

(Calls Warning) Port

Appears if the Queue field is y. Enter the seven-character port number assigned to
connect the optional external Auxiliary Queue Call Warning Threshold lamp that
will flash when the number of calls in queue has exceeded the queue warning
threshold (assigned in Calls Warning Threshold).
This port is assigned to an Analog Line circuit pack or given an “X” designation if
an extension is used.Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
NOTE:

For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit
number (port) 12.
COR

Enter the class of restriction (COR) number that reflects the desired restriction for
the hunt group. If this is a hunt group supporting the AUDIX in a DCS feature, the
CORs on the Hunt Group screen on each switch must be the same.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 95

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

879

Screen reference

Coverage Path

Enter a coverage path number. This assigns a coverage path for the hunt group.
The coverage path is assigned using the Coverage Path screen. Does not appear if
the Vector field is y
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 999
t1 to t999

Time of day table

blank
Group Extension

Enter an unused extension number to be assigned to the hunt group. The field may
not be blank.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 7 digits

Unassigned extension

Group Name

Enter a character string that uniquely identifies the group (for example, “parts
dept,” “purchasing,” or “sales dept”).
Valid entries

Usage

27-character string
Group Number

This is a display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command such as add or change.
Group Type

The group types available depend on what is administered on your System
Parameters Customer Options screen for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD),
Expert Agent Selection (EAS) and CentreVu Advocate. The table below shows
what group types are available depending on your configuration.
Each option uses a different method to select an extension or agent for a call when
two or more extensions or agents are available. The second table shows how calls
are handled for each group type.

880

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

Table 15. Group Types

ACD=n
ACD, Split, Vector = n/y

circ

ddc

x

x
x

ucdmia

eadmia

ucdloa

eadloa

pad

x

ACD, Skill, Vector = n/y

x

x

ACD, Skill, Vector = y

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Advocate or Elite
ACD, Skill, Vector = y

x

Dynamic Advocate
Continued on next page

Valid entries

Usage

ddc

Enter ddc when the call should be routed to the first
extension or ACD agent assigned in the ACD split. Group
type ddc is also known as “hot seat” distribution. “ddc”
distribution is not available when the group is administered
as a skill.

ucd-mia

When ucd-mia or ucd-loa is entered, a call routes to the
most-idle agent based on when the agent finished the most
recent call (“ucd-mia”), or the least occupied agent based on
agent occupancy (“ucd-loa”). Enter ucd-mia or ucd-loa if the
hunt group has an AUDIX message. One of these entries is
required when supporting the Outbound Call Management
feature and when the Controlling Adjunct field is asai.

ucd-loa

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

881

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

ead-mia

When ead-mia or ead-loa is entered, a call routes to the
available agent with the highest skill level for the call. If two
or more agents with equal skill levels are available, Avaya
MultiVantage routes the call to the most-idle agent based on
when the agent finished the most recent call (“ead-mia”), or
the least occupied agent based on agent occupancy
(“ead-loa”). This allows a call to be distributed to the agent
best able to handle the call if multiple agents are available.

ead-loa

circ

Enter circ (circular) when the call should be routed in a
“round-robin” order. The order in which you administer the
extensions determines the order that calls are directed. The
switch keeps track of the last extension in the hunt group to
which a call was connected. The next call to the hunt group is
offered to the next extension in the circular list independent
of how long that extension has been idle. You cannot use
circular hunting with automatic call distribution, queues, or
vectors.

pad

Enter pad (percent allocation distribution) to select an agent
from a group of available agents based on a comparison of
the agent’s work time in the skill and the agent’s target
allocation for the skill.

ISDN Caller Disp

This field is required if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

grp-name

Enter grp-name or mbr-name to specify whether the hunt
group name or member name, respectively, will be sent to
the originating user.

mbr-name

blank

If the ISDN-PRI or the ISDN-BRI Trunks field is n, this field
must be blank.

MM Early Answer

This field applies for systems using Multimedia Call Handling only.

882

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

The system begins to answer an H.320 call and establish an
audio channel before offering the conversion call to the hunt
group. This starts billing for the call when the call is first put
into queue.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

Night Service Destination

Enter the destination where calls to this split will redirect when the split is in the
night service mode. Not all features will work correctly if this is not a local
extension. Does not appear if the Vector field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

An assigned extension
number (can be a VDN
extension)
attd

An attendant group code.

blank
Queue

Specifies a queue for the hunt group.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y so the hunt group will be served by a queue.

Queue Length

Appears if the Queue field is y. Enter the maximum number of calls that can be in
the queue at the same time. This field must have an entry when the Queue field is
y.
Valid entries

Usage

1-200

For DEFINITY R, CSI, SI configurations

1-999

For S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect

Security Code

Enter a 4-digit security code (password) used for the Demand Print feature.
Valid entries

Usage

4-digit security code

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

883

Screen reference

Time Warning Threshold

Appears if the Queue field is y and when the Calling Warning Port and the Time
Warning Port fields are X. Enter the time in seconds that a call can remain in the
queue before the System flashes the Queue status lamps (feature buttons assigned
members phones) and the Auxiliary Queue Time Warning lamp assigned to this
split/skill.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 999 or

An entry of 0 provides a warning whenever a call is queued.

blank
(Time Warning) Extension

Appears if the Queue field is y. An extension is needed when an X is placed in
Time Warning Port. This extension can be used by the Terminal Translation
Initialization (TTI) feature to assign a port to this extension from the port itself.
Once Time Warning Port is assigned a valid port (either via TTI or the change
hunt-group command), then the extension is removed and considered
unassigned.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter an unassigned extension. This field may not be blank.
(Time Warning) Port

Appears if the Queue field is y. Enter the seven-character port number assigned to
the Auxiliary Queue Time Warning lamp that flashes when the time entered in
Time Warning Threshold has been reached by a call in queue.
NOTE:

This port is assigned to an Analog Line circuit pack or given an “X”
designation if an extension is used.Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

884

Issue 5 October 2002

Third character is the carrier

555-233-506

Hunt Group

Valid entries

Usage

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31

For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit number
(port) 12.
TN

Enter the Tenant Partition number.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 100

Vector

See example screens for fields that display when this field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate that this hunt group will be vector
controlled. On the System-Parameters Customer-Option
screen, the Vectoring-Basic field must be y before y can be
entered here.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

885

Screen reference

Field description for page 2

Page 2 of the Hunt group screen appears only when the ACD field on page 1 is y.
If the ACD field is n, page 3 becomes page 2 and all subsequent page numbers are
decreased by one.
The Timed ACW Interval field appears only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Option screen, the Timed ACW field on page 3 is y.

change hunt-group 4
Skill?
AAS?
Measured:
Supervisor Extension:
Priority on Intraflow?

_
_
____
____
_

Page 2 of X
HUNT GROUP
Expected Call Handling Time (sec): ___

Controlling Adjunct: ____

Timed ACW Interval (sec): ___
Multiple Call Handling: _____________
Redirect on No Answer (rings): ___
Redirect to VDN: _____
Forced Entry of Stroke Counts or Call Work Codes? _

Screen 132. Hunt Group screen when ACD is y and Queue and Vector are n

change hunt-group x
Skill?
AAS? _
Measured: internal
Supervisor Extension: ____

Page 2 of X
HUNT GROUP
Expected Call Handling Time (sec): ___
Acceptable Service Level (sec):

Controlling Adjunct: ____

VuStats Objective: ____
Timed ACW Interval (sec): ___
Multiple Call Handling: _____________
Redirect on No Answer (rings): ___
Redirect to VDN: _____
Forced Entry of Stroke Counts or Call Work Codes? _

Screen 133. Hunt Group screen when Queue and Vector are y

886

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

AAS

Appears when the ACD field is y.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if this hunt group is to serve as an Auto-Available Split.

Acceptable Service Level (sec)

Appears if the ACD field is y and the Measured field is internal or both. Enter the
number of seconds within which calls to this hunt group should be answered. This
allows BCMS and/or VuStats to report a percentage of calls that were answered
within the specified time. This entry is also used by the CentreVu® Advocate
Service Objective feature.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9999 seconds
Adjunct CTI Link

Appears when the ACD field is y and the Controlling Adjunct field is asai or
adjlk. Enter the appropriate ASAI CTI Link. This field cannot be blank.
Controlling Adjunct

Appears only if the ACD field is y. If the controlling adjunct is a CONVERSANT
voice system (requires an ASAI link), then enter asai in this field. (On the
System-Parameters Customer-Option screen, the ASAI Link Core Capabilities
and Computer Telephony Adjunct Links fields must be y for CallVisor ASAI
capability and for an entry other than none.)
Valid entries

Usage

none

Indicates that members of the split/skill or hunt group are
not controlled by an adjunct processor.
All agent logins are controlled by an associated adjunct
and logged-in agents can only use their data terminal
keyboards to perform phone functions (for example,
change work state).

asai

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

887

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

adjlk

Computer Telephony Adjunct Links
Indicates ASAI links administered without hardware and
used by the Co-Resident DLG application. You cannot
use this selection unless, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Co-Res DEFINITY LAN
Gateway field is y.
Indicates ASAI adjunct links administered without
hardware and used by the Co-Resident DLG application.
You cannot use this selection unless, on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Co-Res
DEFINITY LAN Gateway field is y.

asai-ip

adj-ip

Dynamic Percentage Adjustment

Appears when ACD and Group Type fields on the Hunt Group screen are pad and
the Business Advocate field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Dynamic Queue Position

Appears when the ACD and Skill fields are y on the Hunt Group screen and the
Business Advocate field is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to apply the dynamic queue operation to the calls
queued to the skill.

Dynamic Threshold Adjustment

Appears when the ACD and Service Level Supervisor fields on the Hunt Group
screen are y and the Business Advocate field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

888

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

Expected Call Handling Time (sec)

Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, either the
Vectoring (Advanced Routing) or Business Advocate field is y. and, on the Hunt
Group screen, the ACD field is y. .
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 9999 in
increments of
1

Establishes the number of seconds for expected call
handling. This value is used to initialize Expected Wait
Time and is also used by the CentreVu® Advocate Percent
Allocation feature.

Forced Entry of Stroke Counts or Call Work
Codes

Appears when the ACD field is y and Controlling Adjunct field is none.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y so either a Stroke Count or Call Work Code must be
entered for each call answered by an agent when in the
Manual-In mode.

Inflow Threshold (sec)

Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields are y and Vector field is n. Enter
the number of seconds that a call can remain in the queue before no more calls
will be accepted by the queue. If 0 is entered, a call is redirected to this split/skill
only if there is an available agent.
Valid entries

Usage

0-999

Level 1 Threshold (sec)

Enter the number of seconds corresponding to the Expected Wait Time (EWT)
you want to set for this threshold. For example, if you enter 45 calls whose EWT
exceeds 45 seconds will be classified as over threshold 1. This field is used with
Service Level Supervisor and only appears if the Service Level Supervisor field is
y.
Level 2 Threshold (sec)

Appears if the ACD field is y. Enter the number of seconds corresponding to the
Expected Wait Time (EWT) you want to set for this threshold. For example, if you
enter 60 calls whose EWT exceeds 60 seconds will be classified as over threshold
2. This field is used with Service Level Supervisor and only appears if the Service
Level Supervisor field is y.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

889

Screen reference

Measured

Provides measurement data for the ACD split/skill collected (internal to the
switch) for VuStats or BCMS. This measurement data is collected for VuStats and
BCMS only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, they are y
and, on the Hunt Group screen, the ACD field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

internal

If you enter internal in this field and on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen neither the
VuStats or BCMS field is y, the system displays the
following message:
 cannot be used; assign
either BCMS or VuStats first

Contact your Avaya representative to assist with any
changes you want to make on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.
external

Provides measurements made by the Call Management
System (external to switch).

both

Provides measurements collected both internally and
externally.

none

Measurement reports for this hunt group are not required.

Multiple Call Handling

Appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
Multiple Call Handling field is y and the ACD field on this screen is y. This field
defines whether the hunt group can have multiple call handling capabilities, and if
so, what type.

890

Valid entries

Usage

none

Agents who are members of that split/skill can only receive
an ACD call from that split/skill when the phone is idle.

on-request

Agents in the Multiple Call Handling split/skill can place a
non-ACD or an ACD call on hold and select an available
work mode. A queued ACD split/skill or direct agent call
then is routed to the agent.

many-forced

An ACD call is delivered automatically to an idle line
appearance if the agent is in the Auto-In/Manual-In (MI/AI)
work mode and an unrestricted line appearance is available.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

Valid entries

Usage

one-forced

An ACD call is delivered automatically to an idle line
appearance if the agent has no other ACD call on the station,
is in the Auto-In/Manual-In (MI/AI) work mode, and an
unrestricted line appearance is available.

one-per-skill

An ACD call is delivered automatically to an idle line
appearance if the agent has no other ACD call for that skill
on the station, is in the Auto-In/Manual-In (MI/AI) work
mode, and un unrestricted line appearance is available. Valid
in an EAS environment and only when the Skill field is y.

Priority On Intraflow

Appears if the ACD field is y and the Vector field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y for calls intraflowing from this split to a covering
split to be given priority over other calls waiting in the
covering split queue.

Redirect on No Answer (rings)

Appears if the ACD field is y. Enter the maximum number of rings before a call
will redirect back to the split/skill, or to the administered VDN.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 20

blank

Deactivates Redirect on No Answer.

Redirect to VDN

Appears if the ACD field is y. To redirect a RONA call to a VDN instead of to the
split/skill, enter the extension number of the VDN. The administered VDN must
be on-premises and must be administered on the system. The VDN can specify a
vector that will in turn route to an off-premises VDN. You cannot enter an
extension in this field if the Redirection on No Answer (rings) field is blank.
Direct Agent calls go to the agent’s coverage path if it is administered. If not, the
calls go to a VDN.
Valid entries

Usage

Assigned
VDN or blank

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

891

Screen reference

Service Level Supervisor

Appears if, on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Business
Advocate field is y and, on the Hunt Group screen, the ACD and Skill fields are y.
For information on CentreVu® Advocate, please contact your Avaya Account
Executive or see the CentreVu® Advocate User Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use Service Level Supervisor for this skill.

Service Level Target

Appears when the ACD field and the Dynamic Percentage Adjustment or
Dynamic Threshold Adjustment field on the Hunt Group screen is y and the
Business Advocate field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1-99 (percentage)

Enter the percentage and time
components of the service level target.

1-9999 (time in seconds)

Service Objective

Appears when the Skill and Business Advocate fields on the Feature Related
System Parameters screen are y and, on the Hunt Group screen, the ACD field is
y.
Valid entries

Usage

1-9999

Enter the per-skill service objective.

Skill

Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Expert Agent
Selection field is y and, on the Hunt Group screen, the ACD field is y.
If this field is y, then the Group Type field must be ucd or ead.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if this hunt group is to be an EAS skill.

Supervisor Extension

Appears if the ACD field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter the extension number (cannot be a VDN number) of
the ACD split/skill supervisor that agents will reach when
using the Assist feature

892

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

Timed ACW Interval (sec)

When a value is entered in this field, an agent in auto-in work mode who receives
an ACD call from this hunt group is placed automatically into After Call Work
(ACW) when the call drops. Enter the number of seconds the agent should remain
in ACW following the call. When the administered time is over, the agent
automatically becomes available. Timed ACW cannot be administered if the hunt
group is adjunct controlled, is an AUDIX Message Center, or is an auto-available
split. The Timed ACW Interval field appears if, on the System Parameters
Customer-Option screen, the Timed ACW field is y and, on the Hunt Group
screen, the ACD field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

1-9999 or

The number of seconds the agent should remain in ACW
following the call.

blank
VuStats Objective

Enter a numerical user-defined objective. An objective is a split or skill goal for
the call. This could be an agent objective such as a specific number of calls
handled or an average talk time. The objective could also be a percent within the
service level. The objective appears on the VuStats display and allows agents and
supervisors to compare the current performance against the value of the objective
for the split or skill.
You can use this value in a customized VuStats display format if, on the VuStats
display format screen, the Object Type field is either agent, agent-extension, or
split.
Appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the VuStats field
is y and the Measured field is either internal or both and, on the Hunt Group
screen, the ACD field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0-99999

Enter a split or skill objective.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

893

Screen reference

Field description for page 3
change hunt-group 4

Page 3 of x
HUNT GROUP

Message Center:
Voice Mail Extension:
Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX?
LWC Reception:

rem-vm
____
n
none

Screen 134. Hunt Group screen

AUDIX Name

Enter the name of the AUDIX machine as it appears on the Node Names screen.
Only appears on DEFINITY R. Add the AUDIX name to the Node Names screen
before entering it in this field. For more information on the Node Names screen,
see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software.
Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX

Appears when the Message Center field is audix or rem-vm.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to send the calling party number to INTUITY
AUDIX.

First Announcement Delay (sec)

Enter the number of seconds that a call remains in queue before the associated
first announcement is given the calling party. The call retains its place in the
queue while the caller is listening to the recorded announcement. If the call hasn’t
been answered after the announcement, the caller hears music (for first
announcement only) if Music-on-Hold is provided or ringing for as long as the
call remains in queue. Appears only if the Queue field is y and the Vector field is
n.

894

Valid entries

Usage

0 through 99

When 0 is entered, the first announcement is provided
immediately to the caller. This value is set automatically to
0 if there is no queue.

blank

This field must be blank if there is no first announcement.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

First Announcement Extension

Appears when the ACD and Queue fields are y and the Vector field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter a recorded
announcement
extension
number.

This is the announcement the caller receives after being in the
queue for the time interval specified in First Announcement
Delay. If the call hasn’t been answered after the
announcement, the caller hears music (only after the first
announcement) if Music-on-Hold is provided, or ringing for as
long as it remains in the queue. If this is the forced first
announcement, the caller always hears ringback after the
announcement; otherwise, the caller hears music (if provided).

blank

Leaving this field blank indicates there will be no
announcement.

LWC Reception

Defines the destination for Leave Word Calling (LWC) messages left for the hunt
group.
Valid entries

Usage

audix

If LWC is attempted, the messages are stored in AUDIX.
The Audix Name field must be filled in too.

msa

If LWC is attempted, the messages are stored in the system
processing element (spe). The Messaging Server Name field
must be filled in too.

spe
none

Message Center

Enter the type of messaging adjunct for the hunt group. Only one hunt group in
the System can be administered as audix, one as qsig-mwi, one as fp-mwi, and
one as rem-vm.
Valid entries

Usage

msa

Messaging Server Adjunct

rem-vm

DCS feature allowing voice mail to be located on another switch

audix

For AUDIX located on this switch

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

895

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

qsig-mwi

QSIG network allowing voice mail to be located on another
switch

fp-mwi

Public network allowing AUDIX to be located on another
switch; administrable only when the ISDN Feature Plus field on
the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.

none

Indicates the hunt group does not serve as a message hunt group.

Message Center AUDIX Name

Enter the name of the Message Center AUDIX. Appears on DEFINITY R, S8300
Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect if the Message Center
field is audix or rem-vm.
Message Center MSA Name
NOTE:

Administer the IP Node Names screen first.
Enter the name of the Message Center MSA. When it appears, it replaces the
Message Center AUDIX Name field. Appears on DEFINITY R, S8300 Media
Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect if the Message Center field is
msa.
Messaging Server Name

Enter the name of the messaging server machine as it appears on the Node Names
screen. Appears on DEFINITY R, S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect. Use the change node-names command to add the AUDIX name
to the Node Names screen before entering it in this field. For more information on
the Node Names screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software.
Primary

Appears on DEFINITY R, S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect if the Message Center field is audix, rem-audix, or msa.

896

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate that the specified AUDIX or Messaging
Server is the primary adjunct.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

Second Announcement Extension

Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter the extension number
assigned to a recorded
announcement.
blank

Leaving the field blank indicates there
is no second announcement.

Second Announcement Delay (sec)

Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n.
Enter the time in seconds before the call in the queue receives a second recorded
announcement or that the second announcement is repeated.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 99

Avaya recommends that, if this split/skill or hunt group is a
coverage point for another split/skill, this delay should not
be more than 15 seconds.

blank

Leave blank if there is no second announcement.

Second Announcement Recurring

Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The second announcement can be repeated.

blank

Leave blank if there is no second announcement.

Voice Mail Extension

Appears if the Message Center field is rem-vm.
Valid entries

Usage

extension

Enter the UDP extension of the voice mail hunt group on the
host switch.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

897

Screen reference

Field descriptions for Hunt group for MWI page

change hunt-group 4

Page 3 of X
HUNT GROUP

Message Center: _________
Voicemail Number: _________________
Routing Digits (e.g. AAR/ARS Access Code): ____

LWC Reception: none
AUDIX Name: _______
Messaging Server Name: _______
First Announcement Extension: ________ Delay (sec): __
Second Announcement Extension: ________ Delay (sec): __ Recurring? _

Screen 135. Hunt Group for MWI screen

Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX

Only appears when the Message Center field is audix or rem-audix.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to send the calling party number to INTUITY
AUDIX.

First Announcement Extension

Appears when the ACD and Queue fields are y and the Vector field is n.

898

Valid entries

Usage

Enter a recorded
announcement
extension
number.

This is the announcement the caller receives after being in the
queue for the time interval specified in First Announcement
Delay. If the call hasn’t been answered after the
announcement, the caller hears music (only after the first
announcement) if Music-on-Hold is provided, or ringing for as
long as it remains in the queue. If this is the forced first
announcement, the caller always hears ringback after the
announcement; otherwise, the caller hears music (if provided).

blank

Leaving this field blank indicates there will be no
announcement.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt Group

First Announcement Delay (sec)

Enter the number of seconds that a call remains in queue before the associated
first announcement is given the calling party. The call retains its place in the
queue while the caller is listening to the recorded announcement. If the call hasn’t
been answered after the announcement, the caller hears music (for first
announcement only) if Music-on-Hold is provided or ringing for as long as the
call remains in queue. Appears only if the Queue field is y and the Vector field is
n.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 99

When 0 is entered, the first announcement is provided
immediately to the caller. This value is set automatically to
0 if there is no queue.

blank

This field must be blank if there is no first announcement.

LWC Reception

Defines the destination for Leave Word Calling (LWC) messages left for the hunt
group.
Valid entries

Usage

audix

If LWC is attempted, the messages are stored in AUDIX.
The Audix Name field must be filled in too.

msa

If LWC is attempted, the messages are stored in the system
processing element (spe). The Messaging Server Name field
must be filled in too.

spe
none

Message Center

Enter the type of messaging adjunct for the hunt group. Only one hunt group in
the System can be administered as audix, one as qsig-mwi, one as fp-mwi, one as
rem-audix, and up to 6 as qsig-mwi.
Valid entries

Usage

rem-audix

DCS feature allowing AUDIX to be located on another switch

audix

For AUDIX located on this switch

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

899

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

qsig-mwi

QSIG network allowing AUDIX to be located on another
switch

fp-mwi

Public network allowing AUDIX to be located on another
switch; administrable only when the ISDN Feature Plus field
on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y

none

Indicates the hunt group does not serve as a message hunt
group.

Routing Digits (e.g. AAR/ARS Access Code)

Appears only if the Message Center field is qsig-mwi or fp-mwi. Shows the AAR
(most likely for a Message Center type of qsig-mwi) or ARS (most likely for a
Message Center type of fp-mwi) access code which when prepended to the
AUDIX Complete Number field defines a route to the Message Center switch
hunt group containing the line ports to the AUDIX.
Valid entries

Usage

0-9, *, or #

Enter 1-4 digits.

Second Announcement Delay (sec)

Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n.
Enter the time in seconds before the call in the queue receives a second recorded
announcement or that the second announcement is repeated.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 99

Avaya recommends that, if this split/skill or hunt group is a
coverage point for another split/skill, this delay should not
be more than 15 seconds.

blank

Leave blank if there is no second announcement.

Second Announcement Extension

Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter the extension number
assigned to a recorded
announcement.
blank

900

Issue 5 October 2002

Leaving the field blank indicates there
is no second announcement.

555-233-506

Hunt Group

Second Announcement Recurring

Appears only when the ACD and Queue fields both are y and the Vector field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The second announcement can be repeated.

blank

Leave blank if there is no second announcement.

Voicemail Number

Appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the Basic
Call Setup and Basic Supplementary Services fields are y and the Message Center
field on this screen is qsig-mwi or fp-mwi. The qsig-mwi selection shows the
complete number of the AUDIX hunt group on the Message Center switch for
QSIG MWI. The fp-mwi selection shows the public network number of the
AUDIX hunt group on the Message Center switch.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 17
digits

Enter the complete AUDIX dial-up number.

Field descriptions for pages 4 through X
change hunt-group 4

Page
4 of 39
HUNT GROUP
Group Number: 1
Group Extension: 3001
Group Type: ucd
Member Range Allowed: 1 - 999
Administered Members (min/max): 1 /9
Total Administered Members: 9
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
Name (24 characters)
Ext
Name (24 characters)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

:
:
:8344003_
:8344004
:8344005
:8344006
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Audix
Audix
Audix
Audix

VP
VP
VP
VP

#3
#4
#5
#6

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

More Members Exist

Screen 136. Hunt Group Members screen
NOTE:

Only Pages 1, 2, and 3 appear if the hunt group is skilled.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

901

Screen reference

Administered Members (min/max)

Appears on all member pages. Indicates the minimum and maximum member
number administered for this hunt group.
At End of Member List

This display-only field shows the current page is also the last page.
Group Extension

This display-only field shows the extension of the hunt group.
Group Number

This display-only field shows the number of a hunt group.
Group Type

This display-only field shows the type of the hunt group.
Member Range Allowed

The range of allowed members displays on all member pages. These values vary
depending on the particular system and/or configuration.
More Members Exist

This display-only field shows there are more members than currently displayed
(the current page is not the last page).
Total Administered Members

Appears on all member pages. Indicates the total number of members
administered for this hunt group.
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext

A display-only field if the Controlling Adjunct field is asai. Controlled Agent
extensions must be entered on the Adjunct Controlled Agent Table screen. The
extension cannot be a VDN. The data module cannot be a member of an ACD
split/skill.

902

Valid entries

Usage

Enter the assigned extension for a station or
attendant console.

If the Controlling Adjunct
field is none

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Intercom Group

Name

This display-only field shows the name assigned to the above extension number
when it is administered in the System.

Intercom Group
This screen assigns extensions to intercom groups.

change intercom-group 1

Page 1 of 2
INTERCOM GROUP
Group Number: 1
Length of Dial Code: _

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
DC
1: ________ __
2: ________ __
3: ________ __
4: ________ __
5: ________ __
6: ________ __
7: ________ __
8: ________ __
9: ________ __
10: ________ __
11: ________ __
12: ________ __
13: ________ __
14: ________ __
15: ________ __
16: ________ __

Name

Screen 137. Intercom Group

DC

This field assigns a dial code to an extension. The dial code is the code users must
dial to make intercom calls to the corresponding extension.
Valid entries

Usage

1- or 2-digit
code

The number of digits entered must exactly match the
number assigned in the Length of Dial Code field. For
example, if the Length of Dial Code field is set to 2, you
must type 1 as 01 in the DC field. This field cannot be
blank.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

903

Screen reference

Ext

This field assigns an extension to the group.
Valid entries

Usage

an extension
number

Enter a physical extension number. You may not enter a
VDN in this field.

Group Number

This display-only field shows the group’s ID number.
Length of Dial Code

This field sets the number of digits that users must dial to access an extension in
the group. (On Page 2, this is a display-only field.)
Valid entries

Usage

1

Enter 1 if there are 9 or fewer members.

2

Enter 2 if there are 10 or more members.

Name

Display-only field. The switch fills in this field with the name from the Station
screen.
Related topics

See ‘‘Using phones as intercoms’’ on page 483 for instructions.
See ‘‘Intercom’’ on page 1724 for a description of the feature.

904

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) Codes

Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) Codes
This screen allows identification of the IXC in the CDR record.
Field descriptions for page 1

change ixc-codes

Page 1 of 2

INTER-EXCHANGE CARRIER CODES
IXC Codes Assignments (Enter up to 15)
CDR
IXC
CDR
IXC
IXC
Access
IXC
Access
Code Number
IXC Name
Code Number
1:
_______
_______________
9:
_______
2:
_______
_______________
10:
_______
3:
_______
_______________
11:
_______
4:
_______
_______________
12:
_______
5:
_______
_______________
13:
_______
6:
_______
_______________
14:
_______
7:
_______
_______________
15:
_______
8:
_______
_______________

IXC Name
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________

Screen 138. Inter-Exchange Carrier Codes screen

IXC Access Number
Valid entries

Usage

2 to 11 digits,
0 through 9
and *

Enter the digits dialed or inserted by AAR/ARS into the
outpulsed digit string to access the interexchange carrier. No
duplicate access numbers are allowed in the table.

IXC Name
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 15 characters

Description to identify the IXC

Field descriptions for page 2
change ixc-codes

Page 2 of 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

IXC Prefix
___
___
___
___
___

IXC Code Format
____
____
____
____
____

Screen 139. Inter-Exchange Carrier Codes screen

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

905

Screen reference

IXC Code Format
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 4 digit code format
*
x
X
xxxx

For line 1

xxx

For line 2

IXC Prefix
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 3 digit prefix
*
101

For line 1

10

For line 2

Intra-Switch CDR
This screen administers extensions for which Intra-Switch CDR is to be enabled.
NOTE:

Attendants are not allowed to be optioned for the Intra-Switch CDR feature.
If your system can record more than 100 stations, the system only displays two
pages of extensions (112 per page) at one time. When you enter the add command
to add extensions, the system automatically begins after the last administered
extensions. If you enter the change command, the system display begins with the
first extension. If you enter the change command with an extension number, the
system begins the display with that extension.
When you enter the command list intra-switch-cdr  count x, the
system lists “x” switch extensions administered for Intra-Switch CDR beginning
with the extension specified by . For example, if you enter “list
intra-switch-cdr 81000 count 500,” the system displays extension 81000 (if it is
administered for Intra-Switch CDR) and the next 500 extensions that are
administered for Intra-Switch CDR. The display command functions similarly to
the change command.

906

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Intra-Switch CDR

Capacities

The Intra-Switch CDR extension capacities vary from switch to switch. See the
Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.
Field descriptions for page 1
change intra-switch cdr

Page 1 of 2
INTRA-SWITCH CDR

Assigned Members:
1: 364-0000_ 19:
2: 364-0001_ 20:
3: 364-1000_ 21:
4: 364-2001_ 22:
5: 364-3003_ 23:
6:
_
24:
7:
_
25:
8:
_
26:
9:
_
27:
10:
_
28:
11:
_
29:
12:
_ 30:
13:
_ 31:
14: _
32:
15: _
33:
16:
_
34:
17:
_
35:
18:
_
36:

5

of 1000
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:
54:

administered
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:

73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:
90:

91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100.
101:
102:
103:
104:
105:
106:
107:
108:

Screen 140. Intra-Switch CDR screen

Assigned Members

Displays the number of extensions currently administered for Intra-switch CDR.
1–x
Valid entries

Usage

Any valid extension

Enter the local extensions you want to track with
Intra-Switch CDR. The number of extensions you can
track may vary from one system to the next.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

907

Screen reference

IP Address Mapping
NOTE:

Enter data in either the To IP Address field or the Subnet Mask field.
This screen administers regions and VLANs for a range of station IP addresses.
Field descriptions for page 1

change ip-network-map

Page 1 of x
IP ADDRESS MAPPING

From IP Address
255.255.255.0
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._
___.___.___._

Subnet
(To IP Address) or Mask)
255.255.255.4
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__
___.___.___._
__

Region
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

VLAN
n__
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Screen 141. IP Address Mapping

From IP Address
Defines the starting IP address.

908

Valid entries

Usage

32-bit address
(4 decimal numbers,
each in the range
0-255)

See the Administration for Network Connectivity for
Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more
information.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Address Mapping

To IP Address
Defines the termination of the IP address.
If this field and the Subnet Mask fields are blank when submitted, the address in
the From IP Address field is copied into this field.
The Subnet Mask field data is applied to the From field, created the converted To
IP Address field information.
Valid entries

Usage

32-bit address
(4 decimal numbers,
each in the range
0-255)

See the Administration for Network Connectivity for
Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more
information.

Subnet or Mask
Specifies the mask to be used to obtain the subnetwork identifier from the IP
address.
If this field is non-blank on submit, then:
■

The mask is applied to the From IP Address field, placing zeros in the
non-masked rightmost bits. This becomes the stored “From” address.

■

The mask is applied to the To IP Address field, placing 1’s in the
non-masked rightmost bits. This becomes the stored “To” address.

If this field and the To IP Address fields are blank when submitted, the address in
the From IP Address field is copied into the To IP Address field.
Valid entries

Usage

0-32 or blank
Region

Identifies the network region for the IP address range.
Valid entries

Usage

1-250

Enter the network region number for this interface.

1-80 for DEFINITY
SI (off the switch)

This field must contain a non-blank value if the From
IP Address field on the same row contains a non-blank
value.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

909

Screen reference

VLAN

Sends VLAN instructions to IP endpoints such as IP telephones and softphones.
This field does not send VLAN instructions to the PROCR (S8300 Media Server,
S8700 IP-Connect, and S8700 Multi-Connect), CLAN, and Media Processor
boards.
Valid entries

Usage

0-4094

Specifies the virtual LAN value.

n

Disabled

IP Codec Set
The IP Codec Set screen allows you to specify the type of codec used for voice
encoding and companding (compression/decompression). The main difference
between codecs is in the compression algorithm used; some codecs compress the
voice data more than others. A greater degree of compression results in lower
bandwidth requirements on the network, but may also introduce transmission
delays and lower voice quality.
The default codec is set for G711. The G711 provides the highest voice quality
because it does the least amount of compression, but it uses the most bandwidth.
The G711 default setting can be changed to one of four other codecs if the G711
does not meet your desired voice-quality/bandwidth trade-off specification. Also,
if the far-end switch is a not an Avaya MultiVantage, you may need to change the
codec to match one that is supported by that switch.
The order in which the codecs are listed on this screen is the order of preference of
usage. A trunk call between two DEFINITY switches will be set up to use the first
common codec listed.
NOTE:

The codec ordering must be the same on DEFINITY switches at both ends
of an H.323 trunk connection. The set of codecs listed need not be the same,
but the order of the listed codecs must be the same.
This screen allows you to define the allowed codecs and packet sizes used by each
IP network region. You can also enable silence suppression on a per-codec basis.
This screen will dynamically display the packet size in milliseconds for each
codec in the set, based on the number of frames you administer per packet.

910

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Codec Set

change ip-codec-set 1

Page 1 of 1
IP Codec Set

Codec Set: 1
Audio
Silence
Codec
Suppression
1: G.711MU_______
y
2:_______________
_
3:_______________
_
4:_______________
_
5:_______________
_

Frames
Per Pkt
3
_
_
_
_

Packet
Size (ms)
30

Screen 142. IP Codec Set screen

Audio Codec

Specifies the audio codec used for this codec set.
Valid entries

Usage

G.711A (a-law)
G.711MU (mu-law)
G.723-5.3
G.723-6.3
G.729
G.729A
G.729B
G.729AB

Enter the codec used for this codec set.

Codec Set

A display-only field that identifies the IP codec set.
Frames Per Pkt

Specify the number of frames per packet up to 60 milliseconds.
Valid
entries
1-6 or

blank

Usage

Specify the number of frames per packet up to 60 ms. Note: the
frame size for G.711 and G.729 codecs is 1 (10ms), and for
G.723.1 is 3 (30ms).

Packet Size (ms)

A display-only field showing the packet size in milliseconds.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

911

Screen reference

Silence Suppression

Enables RTP-level silence suppression on the audio stream.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable RTP-level silence suppression on the audio
stream.

IP Interfaces
Use this screen to assign a network region to each IP interface device. Use one
line for each C-LAN, VAL, and IP interface circuit pack.
change ip-interfaces

Page 1 of 4
IP INTERFACES

ON Type
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______

Slot
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Code Sfx Node Name
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________

Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0

Gateway Address
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___

Net
Rgn
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

VLAN
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

Screen 143. IP Interfaces screen

Code/Sfx

Display-only fields that identify the interface.

912

Valid display

Usage

TN799, TN802, TN2302,
2501AP

Displays the circuit pack code
number.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Interfaces

Gateway Address
Valid
entries
0-255

Usage

Enter the address of a network node that serves as the default
gateway for the IP interface. Entering a value in this field poses
a potential security risk. For more information on using a
default gateway, see Administration for Network Connectivity
for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software.

Net Rgn

Identify the network region for the interface on this row.
Valid entries

Usage

1-250

Enter the network region number for this interface.

Node Name

The unique node name for the IP interface. The node name here already must be
administered on the Node Names screen.
Valid entries

Usage

Character string

Enter the name of the node.

ON

Allows use of the ethernet port.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use the ethernet port. Enter n before you make
changes on this screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

913

Screen reference

Slot

Describes the physical port location of the interface on your system. Enter the
necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number that divides the network ID and the
host ID in an IP address.
Valid
entries
255, 254,
252, 248,
240, 224,
192, 128,
0

Usage

Identifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this
IP interface.

Type

Identify the type of IP interface.

914

Valid entries

Usage

c-lan, VAL, or
medpro
procr

Enter the type of IP interface.

Issue 5 October 2002

For S8700 IP-Connect only.

555-233-506

IP Network Region

VLAN

This field sends VLAN instructions to the PROCR (S8300 Media Server, S8700
IP-Connect, and S8700 Multi-Connect), CLAN, and Media Processor boards. It
does not send VLAN instructions to IP endpoints such as IP telephones and
softphones. This field cannot be administered for VAL boards.
Valid entries

Usage

0-4095

Specifies the virtual LAN value.

n

Disabled

IP Network Region
Use this screen to pool devices with LAN-like connectivity. The first page is used
to modify the audio and QoS settings. The Codec Set field on this page reflects the
CODEC set that must be used for connections between phones within this region
or between phones and MedPro/Prowler boards within this region.
Field descriptions for page 1

change ip-network-region 3

Page 1 of 2
IP Network Region

Region: 3
Name: North
Audio Parameters
Codec Set: 2
Location: 1
UPD Port Range
Min: 2048_
Max: 3028
DiffServ/TOS Parameters
Call Control PHB Value: 34_
VoIP Media PHB Value: 46
BBE PHB Value: 43

Call Control 802.1p Priority: 7
VoIP Media 802.1p Priority: 6

Direct IP-IP Audio Connections? y
IP Audio Hairpinning? y
RTCP Enabled? y
RTCP Monitor Server Parameters
Use Default Server Parameters? n
Server IP Address: 1 .2 .3 .4
Server Port: 5005
RTCP Report Period(secs): 5
Resource Reservation Parameters
RSVP Enabled? y
RSVP Refresh Rate(secs): 15
Retry upon RSVP Failure Enabled? y
RSVP Profile: guaranteed-service

Screen 144. IP Network Region screen

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

915

Screen reference

Name

Description of the region.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 20 characters

Describes the region.

Region

A display-only field indicating the number of the region being administered.
Audio Parameters
Codec Set

Specifies the codec assigned to the region.
Valid entries

Usage

1-7

Enter the number for the codec set for the region.

Direct IP-IP Audio Connections

Allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter to y to save on bandwidth resources and improve sound
quality of voice over IP transmissions.

IP Audio Hairpinning

Allows IP endpoints to be connected through the IP circuit pack on the switch.

916

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow IP endpoints to be connected through the IP
circuit pack on the switch in IP format, without going
through the DEFINITY TDM bus.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Network Region

Location

Specifies the location by IP network region allowing correct date and time
information and trunk routing based on IP network region.
Valid entries

Usage

1-44

(For DEFINITY R, CSI, SI only.) Enter the number for the
location for the IP network region. The IP endpoint uses
this as its location number. This applies to IP telephones
and softphones.

1-64

(For Avaya S8300 Media Server, Avaya S8700
Multi-Connect, and Avaya S8700 IP-Connect only.) Enter
the number for the location for the IP network region. The
IP endpoint uses this as its location number. This applies to
IP telephones and softphones.

blank

The location is obtained from the cabinet containing the
CLAN that the endpoint registered through or the media
gateway containing the Internal Call Controller or Local
Spare Processor on an Avaya S8300 Media Server that the
endpoint registered through. This applies to IP telephones
and softphones. Traditional cabinets, Remote Offices, and
the Avaya S8300 Media Server all have their locations
administered on their corresponding screens.

RTCP Enabled
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Specifies whether you want to enable RTCP. If this
field is set to y, then the RTCP Monitor Server
Parameters fields appear.

UDP Port Range
UPD Port Range Max

Specifies the maximum range of the UDP port number used for audio transport.
Valid entries

Usage

3-65535

Enter the highest UDP port number to be used for audio
transport.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

917

Screen reference

UPD Port Range Min

Specifies the minimum range of the UDP port number used for audio transport.
Valid entries

Usage

2-65534

Enter the lowest UDP port number to be used for audio
transport.

RTCP Monitor Server Parameters
RTCP Report Period (secs)

This field only appears when the Use Default Server Parameters field is set to n
and the and the RTCP Enabled field is set to y.
Valid entries

Usage

5-30

Enter the report period for the RTCP Monitor server in
seconds.

Server IP Address

This field only appears when the Use Default Server Parameters field is set to n
and the and the RTCP Enabled field is set to y
Valid entries

Usage

0-255 in
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
format

Enter the IP address for the RTCP Monitor server.

Server Port

This field only appears when the Use Default Server Parameters field is set to n
and the and the RTCP Enabled field is set to y

918

Valid entries

Usage

1-65535

Enter the port for the RTCP Monitor server.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Network Region

Use Default Server Parameters

This field only appears when the RTCP Enabled field is set to y.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to use the default RTCP Monitor server
parameters as defined on the IP Options System
Parameters screen. If set to y, you must complete the
Default Server IP Address field on the IP Options
System Parameters screen.

n

If you enter n, you need to complete the Server IP
Address, Server Port, and RTCP Report Period fields
that appear.

DiffServ/TOS Parameters
BBE PHB Value

This field contains the Better than Best Effort (BBE) PHB value.
Valid entries

Usage

0-63

Enter the decimal equivalent of the DiffServ BBE PHB
value.

Call Control 802.1p Priority

Provides Layer 2 priority for Layer 2 switches.
Valid entries

Usage

0-7

Specifies the 802.1p priority value.

Call Control Value

Provides scalable service discrimination in the Internet without per-flow state and
signaling at every hop. Use the IP TOS field to support the DiffServ codepoint.
Valid entries

Usage

0-63

Enter the decimal equivalent of the Call Control PHB
value.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

919

Screen reference

VoIP Media 802.1p Priority

Provides Lay 2 priority for Layer 2 switches.
Valid
entries

Usage

0-7

Specifies the Audio 802.1p priority value.

VoIP Media PHB Value

Provides scalable service discrimination in the Internet without per-flow state and
signaling at every hop. Use the IP TOS field to support the Audio PHB codepoint.
Valid entries

Usage

0-63

Enter the decimal equivalent of the DiffServ Audio
PHB value.

Resource Reservation Parameters
Retry upon RSVP Failure Enabled

This field only appears if the RSVP Enabled field is set to y.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Specifies whether you to enable retries when RSVP fails.

RSVP Enabled

Controls the appearance of the other fields in this section.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Specifies whether or not you want to enable RSVP.

RSVP Profile

This field only appears if the RSVP Enabled field is set to y. You set this field to
what you have configured on your network.
Valid entries

Usage

guaranteed-service
controlled-load

920

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Network Region

RSVP Refresh Rate (secs)

This field only appears if the RSVP Enabled field is set to y.
Valid
entries

Usage

1-99

Enter the RSVP refresh rate in seconds.

Page 2

This page displays a matrix where each cell in the matrix represents a network
region. If network region x is connected to network region 4, then when change
ip-network-region x is run, 4’s cell contains the CODEC set for the connection
between the two regions. A cell value can be changed to reflect a different
CODEC set or to add or remove connections between network regions. Any
changes made to x’s connection to network region y are reflected automatically in
y’s IP Network Region screen.
To illustrate how the matrix is used, notice that the second row of the matrix is for
network regions 33 through 64 which indicates that the first column in that row
represents network region 33, the second column is for 34, and so on, until the last
column is for 64. So a value of “4” in that row’s second column indicates that the
network region specified in the command (x = 3) has a connection to network
region 34 and the codec set for that connection is 4.
change ip-network-region 3

Page 2 of 2

Inter Network Region Connection Management
Region
001-032
033-064
065-096
097-128
129-160
161-192
193-224
225-250

(Group of 32)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
2
4

Screen 145. Inter Network Region Connection Management screen

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

921

Screen reference

Region (001-500)

This screen does not appear unless the IP Stations, the IP Trunks, or the Remote
Office fields on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen are y.
Valid
entries

Usage

blank

Indicates there is no connectivity between these network
regions.

1-7

Indicates the codec set that will be used between these
network regions.

IP Node Names
change node-names ip

Page 1 of X
IP NODE NAMES

Name
IP Address
Name
1. ______________
___.___.___.___
2. ______________
___.___.___.___
3. ______________
___.___.___.___
4. ______________
___.___.___.___
5. ______________
___.___.___.___
6. ______________
___.___.___.___
7. ______________
___.___.___.___
8. ______________
___.___.___.___
9. ______________
___.___.___.___
10. ______________
___.___.___.___
11. ______________
___.___.___.___
12. ______________
___.___.___.___
13. ______________
___.___.___.___
14. ______________
___.___.___.___
15. ______________
___.___.___.___
16. ______________
___.___.___.___

17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.

IP Address
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________

___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___
___.___.___.___

Screen 146. IP Node Names screen

IP Address

The IP address for the node named in the previous field.

922

Valid entries

Usage

32-bit address
(4 decimal numbers,
each in the range
0-255)

A unique IP address is assigned to each port on any
IP device that is used for a connection.

Issue 5 October 2002

See the Administration for Network Connectivity for
Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more
information.

555-233-506

IP-Options System Parameters

Name

Identifies the name of the adjunct or switch node.
Valid entries

Usage

1-15 alpha-numeric
characters

Used as a label for the associated IP address. The
node names must be unique on each switch.

IP-Options System Parameters
Field descriptions for page 1

display system-parameters ip-options

page 1

IP-OPTIONS SYSTEM PARAMETERS
IP MEDIA PACKET PERFORMANCE THRESHOLDS
Roundtrip Propagation Delay (ms)
High:
Packet Loss (%)
High:
Ping Test Interval
(sec):
Number of Pings Per Measurement Interval:

800
40
20
10

Low: 400
Low: 15

RTCP MONITOR SERVER
Default Server IP Address: 123.123.123.123
Default Server Port: 5005
Default RTCP Report Period(secs): 5
MEDIA GATEWAY ANNOUNCEMENT SERVER PARAMETERS
Announcement Server IP Address: ___.___.___.___ Login:
Password:
Announcement Storage Path Name:

Screen 147. IP-Options System Parameters screen

IP MEDIA PACKET PERFORMANCE
THRESHOLDS
Number of Pings Per Measurement Interval

Specifies the number of test pings that comprise a measurement from which the
performance values (delay and loss) are calculated.
Valid entries

Usage

10-100

Enter the number. Default is 10.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

923

Screen reference

Packet Loss (%)

Specifies thresholds to be applied to packet loss rates (as measured by ping) for
determining activation/deactivation of signaling group bypass.
High
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 100

This value cannot be less than the minimum
value. Default is 40.

Low
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 100

This value cannot be more than the maximum
value. Default is 15.

Ping Test Interval (sec)

Specifies the time between performance test pings for each testable signaling
group.
Valid entries

Usage

10 through 999

Enter the time. Default is 20.

Roundtrip Propagation Delay (ms)

Specifies thresholds to be applied to roundtrip packet propagation delays (as
measured by ping) for use in activating or clearing signaling group bypass.
High
Valid entries

Usage

10 through 9999

This value cannot be less than the minimum
value. Default is 800.

Low

924

Valid entries

Usage

10 through 9999

This value cannot be more than the maximum
value. Default is 400.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP-Options System Parameters

RTCP MONITOR SERVER
Default RTCP Report Period(secs)

In conjunction with the IP address and server port, this value tells the IP phones,
IP softphones and VoIP media modules how often to send the information (RTCP
packets) to the server.
Valid entries

Usage

5 through 99

Default Server IP Address

The default server IP address that can be utilized by the IP Network Region screen
for each administered region.
Valid entries

Usage

0-255 in

A unique IP address is assigned to each port on
any IP device that is used for a connection.

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn format
Default Server Port

The RTCP monitor is a separate computer that receives RTCP packets from many
devices. The MultiVantage software pushes these values to IP phones, IP
softphones and VoIP media modules such that they know where to send the data.
The IP address is that of the RTCP server. The server port is the TCP/IP port of
that RTCP server where the information should be sent.
Valid entries

Usage

1-65535

Enter the port being used as an RTCP monitor.

MEDIA GATEWAY ANNOUNCEMENT SERVER
PARAMETERS (available in December)
Announcement Server IP Address

Identifies the IP address of the Announcement Server.
Valid entries

Usage

0-255

A unique IP address is assigned to each port on
any IP device that is used for a connection.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

925

Screen reference

Announcement Storage Path Name

Indicates the path name on the Announcement Server where the announcements
are stored.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 40 characters or
blank

Enter the directory path name where
announcements are stored.

Login

Indicates the login to be used by the Media Gateway to access the Announcement
Server.
Valid entries

Usage

1-10 characters or blank

Enter a login up to 10 characters.

Password

Indicates the password to be used by the Media Gateway to access the
Announcement Server.
Valid entries

Usage

1-10 characters or blank

Enter a password up to 10 characters.

IP Routing
change ip-route 1

Page 1 of 1
IP ROUTING

Route Number:
Destination Node:
Network Bits:
Gateway:
Board:
Metric:

Subnet Mask:

Screen 148. IP Routing screen

926

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Routing

Board

Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03

(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

Destination Node

The node name of the final destination for this connection.
Valid entries

Usage

The name previously entered on
the Node Names screen.

Enter the name of the final destination
node of the IP route for this connection.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

927

Screen reference

Gateway

The node name of the first intermediate node.
Valid entries

Usage

A name previously entered on the
Node Names screen and is either a
port on the CLAN circuit pack or
is identified as a Destination Node
on another IP route.

If there are one or more intermediate
nodes, the first intermediate node is the
Gateway.
If there are no intermediate nodes
between the local and remote CLAN
ports for this connection, the Gateway is
the local CLAN port.

Metric
Valid entries

Usage

0 or 1

Enter 1 on a switch that has more than one CLAN
circuit pack installed.
See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software for more information.

Network Bits

This field is a 32-bit binary number that divides the network ID and the host ID in
an IP address.
Valid entries

Usage

0-32

Enter the number of Network Bits that corresponds to
the Subnet Mask for the IP Route. If you skip this field
and enter a Subnet Mask, the system automatically sets
the corresponding Network Bits value. For example, if
you set this field to 24, then the system sets the Subnet
Mask field to 255.255.255.0.

Route Number

Identifies the IP route.

928

Valid entries

Usage

1-400

Enter the number of the IP route you want to add or
change, or enter n for the next available number.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Routing

Subnet Mask
Valid entries

Usage

255, 254, 252,
248, 240, 224,
192, 128, 0

Enter the subnet mask associated with this IP route. If you
enter a value in the Network Bits field, the system
automatically completes this field with the corresponding
Subnet Mask. For example, if you set this field to
255.255.255.0, then the system sets the Network Bits
field to 24.

There is one-to-one mapping between the Network Bits and the Subnet Mask
fields; entering a value in one field uniquely determines the other field. A list of
Subnet Mask addresses and their corresponding Network Bits are shown in Table
16).
Table 16. Network Bits and Subnet Mask fields
Network Bits

Subnet Mask

Number of Hosts

Network Type

0

0.0.0.0

4,294,967,294

/0

1

128.0.0.0

2,147,483,646

/1

2

192.0.0.0

1,073,741,822

/2

3

224.0.0.0

536,870,910

/3

4

240.0.0.0

268,435,454

/4

5

248.0.0.0

134,217,726

/5

6

252.0.0.0

67,108,862

/6

7

254.0.0.0

33,554,430

/7

8

255.0.0.0

16,777,214

/8

9

255.128.0.0

8,388,606

/9

10

255.192.0.0

4,194,302

/ 10

11

255.224.0.0

2,097,150

/ 11

12

255.240.0.0

1,048,574

/ 12

13

255.248.0.0

524,286

/ 13

14

255.252.0.0

262,142

/ 14

15

255.254.0.0

131,070

/ 15

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

929

Screen reference

Table 16. Network Bits and Subnet Mask fields (Continued)
Network Bits

Subnet Mask

Number of Hosts

Network Type

16

255.255.0.0

65,534

/ 16

17

255.255.128.0

32,766

/ 17

18

255.255.192.0

16,382

/ 18

19

255.255.224.0

8,190

/ 19

20

255.255.240.0

4,094

/ 20

21

255.255.248.0

2,046

/ 21

22

255.255.252.0

1,022

/ 22

23

255.255.254.0

510

/ 23

24

255.255.255.0

254

/ 24

25

255.255.255.128

126

/ 25

26

255.255.255.192

62

/ 26

27

255.255.255.224

30

/ 27

28

255.255.255.240

14

/ 28

29

255.255.255.248

6

/ 29

30

255.255.255.252

2

/ 30

31

255.255.255.254

1

/31

255.255.255.255

0

/32

Continued on next page

NOTE:

For the Network Bits and Subnet Mask fields, if you put a value into either
field and then press ENTER or TAB to move the cursor to another field, the
other field gets populated automatically with a value corresponding to the
one you just entered.

930

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Routing

IP Services
change ip-services

Service
Type
DLG________
DLG________
DLG________
DLG________
DLG________
DLG________
DLG________
DLG________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________

Enabled
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Page 1 of X
IP SERVICES
Local
Local
Remote
Remote
Node
Port
Node
Port
clan10
5678
___________________ _____
clan2
5678
___________________ _____
clan3
5678
___________________ _____
clan4
5678
___________________ _____
clan5
5678
___________________ _____
clan6
5678
___________________ _____
clan7
5678
___________________ _____
clan1
5678
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____
__________
____
___________________ _____

Screen 149. IP Services screen

Enabled
When the Service Type field is DLG, this field controls whether the co-resident
DLG application listens to the interface to which it is bound.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to enable this IP service.

n

Does not listen over the interface.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

931

Screen reference

Local Node
Specify the node name for the port. When the Service Type field is DLG, there can
be only one entry on this screen with a Service Type field of DLG and the same
Local Node.
Valid entries

Usage

Node names as defined
on the Node Names
screen.

If the link is administered for services over the
C-LAN circuit pack, enter a node name defined
on the Node Name screen. See Administration for
Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™
Software for information on how to administer
node names.

processor

Processor is only available for S8100 Media
Server and S8300 Media Server.

Local Port

Specify the originating port number. When the Service Type field is DLG, this
field becomes 5678 and is read-only.
Valid entries

Usage

5000 to 9999

5111-5117 for SAT applications
5678 for ASAI

0

For client applications, this defaults to zero.

Remote Node

Specify the switch at the far end of the link for SAT. The remote node should not
be defined as a link on the IP Interface or Data Module screens. When the Service
Type field is DLG, this field is cleared and read-only.

932

Valid entries

Usage

Node name as defined
on the Node Names
screen

For SAT, use a node name to provide added
security.

any

Use any available node.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Routing

Remote Port

Specify the port number of the destination. When the Service Type field is DLG,
this field is cleared and read-only.
Valid entries

Usage

5000 to 64500

Use if this service is a client application, such as
CDR or PMS. This must match the port
administered on the adjunct, PC or terminal server
that is at the remote end of this connection.

0

Default for System Management applications.

Service Type

Defines the service provided.
Valid entries

Usage

ALARM1, ALARM2

Available only on DEFINITY R. Use this to
connect send alarms over a TCP/IP link.

cbc

Enter cbc to reserve the trunk for outgoing use
only to enhance Network Call Redirection.

CDR1, CDR2

Use this to connect either the primary or
secondary CDR device over a TCP/IP link.

DAPI

Available only on DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8300
Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect.

DLG

For S8300 Media Server and S8100 Media
Server only.
Can be entered only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Co-Res
DEFINITY LAN Gateway field is y.
Use this service type for co-resident DEFINITY
LAN Gateway. For more information, see the
Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI
Technical Reference.
NOTE:

If DLG is selected, another screen displays.
See ‘‘DLG Administration’’ on page 756.
PMS
PMS_JOURNAL

555-233-506

Use this to connect the PMS journal printer over
a TCP/IP link.

Issue 5 October 2002

933

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

PMS_LOG

Use this to connect the PMS log printer over a
TCP/IP link.

SAT

System administration terminal. Not available on
S8100 Media Server with a CMC1.

SYS_PRINT

Use this to connect the system printer over a
TCP/IP link.

IP Services screen (Session Layer Timers page)

Use this screen to enable reliable protocol for TCP/IP links, and to establish other
session-layer parameters. This screen only appears if you enter CDR1, CDR2,
PMS_JOURNAL, or PMS_LOG in the Service Type field on page 1 or 2.
change ip-services

Service
Type
CDR1

Reliable
Protocol
y

Page
SESSION LAYER TIMERS
Packet Resp
Session Connect
Timer
Message Cntr
3
1

SPDU
Cntr
1

3 of

3

Connectivity
Timer
1

Screen 150. IP Services screen (Session Layer Timer page)

Connectivity Timer
Valid entries

Usage

1–255

Indicates the amount of time (in seconds) that the
link can be idle before the switch sends a
connectivity message to ensure the link is still up.

Packet Resp Timer

934

Valid entries

Usage

1–255

Determines the number of seconds to wait from
the time a packet is sent until a response
(acknowledgement) is received from the far-end,
before trying to resend the packet.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

IP Routing

Reliable Protocol

Indicates whether you want to use reliable protocol over this link.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Use reliable protocol if the adjunct on the far end
of the link supports it.

Service Type

A display-only field that identifies the service type for which you are establishing
parameters.
Valid entries

Usage

CDR1, CDR2

Used to connect either the primary or secondary
CDR device over a TCP/IP link.

PMS_JOURNAL

Used to connect the PMS journal printer over a
TCP/IP link.

PMS_LOG

Used to connect the PMS log printer over a
TCP/IP link.

Session Connect Message Cntr

Valid entries

Usage

1–5

The Session Connect Message counter indicates
the number of times the switch tries to establish a
connection with the far-end adjunct.

SPDU Cntr
Valid entries

Usage

1–5

The Session Protocol Data Unit counter indicates
the number of times the switch transmits a unit of
protocol data before generating an error.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

935

Screen reference

ISDN trunk group
This screen assigns an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk group
that supports the ISDN and Call-by-Call Service Selection service selection
features. The trunk group provides end-to-end digital connectivity and supports a
wide range of services including voice and non-voice services, to which users
have access by a limited set of CCITT-defined, standard multipurpose interfaces.
The ISDN trunk group may contain ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI interfaces. However,
it is not possible to use the two types of interfaces in the same trunk groups. The
type of interface is chosen when the trunk members are assigned to the trunk
group.
When ISDN-PRI interfaces are used on ISDN trunk groups, they may also be used
to support the Wideband Switching feature. This is intended to work with the H0
(384 Kbps), H11 (1536 Kbps), H12 (1920 Kbps), and NXDS0 (128 to 1984 Kbps)
data services, and to support high-speed video conferencing and data applications.
Administration commands

When an ISDN trunk connects two switches, set the trunk options identically at
both ends of the connection, with the exception of the Trunk Hunt fields. When
ISDN-PRI interfaces are used, it is acceptable for both ends to have the Trunk
Hunt fields administered as cyclical, but if one end is administered as ascend, the
other end must be administered as descend. This helps avoid the possibility of
glare conditions. When ISDN-BRI is used, the Trunk Hunt field has to be
cyclical.
Hardware requirements

ISDN-BRI interfaces are supported by the TN2185 Trunk-side BRI circuit pack
(for implementing the user side of the BRI interface) and by the TN556B or
TN556C ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack or the TN2198 ISDN BRI (U-LT) Line
circuit pack (for the network side of the BRI interface). The TN2464 circuit
supports T1 and E1 digital facilities.
ISDN-PRI interfaces are supported by the TN767 circuit pack (for assignment of a
T1 signaling link and up to 24 ISDN-PRI trunk group members), or the TN464C
or later circuit pack (for assignment of a T1 or E1 signaling link and up to 24 or 31
ISDN-PRI trunk group members, respectively). The TN2464 and TN2207 circuit
pack can also be used with ISDN-PRI.

936

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

■

The D-channel for ISDN-PRI interfaces switches through either the TN765
Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack or the TN778 Packet Control
(PACCON) circuit pack. The D-channel for ISDN-BRI interfaces only
switches through the TN778 Packet Control (PACCON) circuit pack.
NOTE:

You cannot use the TN765 circuit pack with ISDN-BRI interfaces.
■

For DEFINITY R configurations, the D-channel switches through the
TN1655 Packet Interface (PKTINT) circuit pack.

■

A TN780 or TN2182 Tone Clock circuit pack provides synchronization for
the DS1 circuit pack.
NOTE:

The TN767 cannot be used to carry the D-channel if either the TN778
(PACCON) or TN1655 (PKTINT) circuit packs are used to switch
the D-channel. However, in these circumstances, the TN767 can be
used for NFAS interfaces carrying only B-channels.
How to administer ISDN trunk groups

The table below shows the screens used to administer the TN765 Processor
Interface (PI) for DEFINITY SI configurations.
Screen

Field

System-Parameters
Customer-Options

Version
ISDN-PRI
QSIG Optional Features

Feature-Related System
Parameters

Send Non-ISDN Trunk Group Name as
Connected Name
Display Connected Name/Number for ISDN
DCS Calls

DS1 Circuit Pack

All

Signaling Group

All

Synchronization Plan

All

Data Module

All
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

937

Screen reference

Screen

Field

Processor Channel
Assignment for DEFINITY
SI

All

Interface Links

All

Trunk Group (ISDN)

All

ISDN Numbering Public/Unknown

All

ISDN Numbering - Private

All

Route Pattern

All

Hunt Groups

ISDN Caller Display

Terminating Extension
Group

ISDN Caller Display

Continued on next page

The table below shows the screens used to administer the TN778 Packet Control
(PACCON) for an DEFINITY SI configurations.
Screen

Field

Feature-Related System Parameters

Send Non-ISDN Trunk Group
Name as Connected Name?
Display Connected Name/Number
for ISDN DCS Calls?

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Version
ISDN-BRI Trunks
ISDN-PRI
QSIG Optional Features

Maintenance-Related System Parameters

Packet Bus Maint

Synchronization Plan

All

Trunk Group (ISDN)

All

ISDN Numbering - Public/Unknown

All

ISDN Numbering - Private

All
Continued on next page

938

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Screen

Field

ISDN-BRI Circuit Pack Screen (if using
ISDN-BRI interfaces) or

All

DS1 Circuit Pack Screen (if using
ISDN-PRI interfaces)

All

Route Pattern

All

Hunt Groups

ISDN Caller Display

Signaling Group (if using ISDN-PRI
interfaces)

All

Terminating Extension Group

ISDN Caller Display
Continued on next page

The table below shows the screens used to administer the TN778 Packet Control
(PACCON) for DEFINITY R, S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, and
S8700 Multi-Connect.
Screen

Field

Feature-Related System
Parameters

Send Non-ISDN Trunk Group Name as
Connected Name?
Display Connected Name/Number for
ISDN DCS Calls?

System-Parameters
Customer-Options

Version
ISDN-BRI Trunks
ISDN-PRI
QSIG Optional Features

Synchronization Plan

All

Trunk Group (ISDN)

All

ISDN Numbering Public/Unknown

All

ISDN-BRI Circuit Pack Screen (if
using ISDN-BRI interfaces) or

All

DS1 Circuit Pack Screen (if using
ISDN-PRI interfaces)

All

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

939

Screen reference

Screen

Field

ISDN Numbering - Private

All

Route Pattern

All

Hunt Groups

ISDN Caller Display

Signaling Group (if using
ISDN-PRI interfaces)

All

Terminating Extension Group

ISDN Caller Display
Continued on next page

Notes for Above Tables
■

System-Parameters Customer-Options — Set the ISDN-BRI Trunks or
ISDN-PRI fields to y. For a TN778 and if using ISDN-PRI interfaces, set
the PRI Over PACCON field to y. The QSIG Optional Features fields may
be enabled to allow appropriate administration for the Supplementary
Service Protocol.

■

Feature-Related System-Parameters — Set the Send Non-ISDN Trunk
Group Name as Connected Name and Display Connected Name/Number
for ISDN DCS Calls fields.

■

ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack — This screen is required if using
ISDN-BRI trunk interfaces. Assign all fields as required.

■

DS1 Circuit Pack — This screen is required if using ISDN-PRI interfaces.
— DS1 (T1) Circuit Pack
Assign all fields as required. For Facility Associated Signaling, up
to 23 ports are available for administration as trunk members in an
associated ISDN-PRI trunk group. The 24th port is used as a
signaling channel. For Non-Facility Associated Signaling, all 24
ports may be used on certain DS1 circuit packs. The D-channel
signaling function for these packs must be provided by a designated
DS1 pack on its 24th channel.
— E1 Circuit Pack
Assign all fields as required. For Facility Associated Signaling, up
to 30 ports are available for administration as trunk members in an
associated ISDN-PRI trunk group. Port number 16 is used as a
signaling channel.

■

940

Maintenance-Related System-Parameters — Use this screen only for a
TN778. Set the Packet Bus Maint field to y.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

■

ISDN Trunk Group — Enter information in all the fields except the trunk
group members. When using ISDN-PRI interfaces, enter the members after
you establish the signaling links.

■

Signaling Group — This screen is required if ISDN-PRI interfaces are
used. Complete all fields. This screen identifies groups of ISDN-PRI DS1
interface B-channels for which a given D-channel (or D-channel pair) will
carry the associated signaling information (supports the Facility and
Non-Facility Associated Signaling feature). Each DS1 board that is
required to have a D-channel must be in a different signaling group by
itself (unless D-channel backup is needed, in which case a second DS1 is
administered as a backup D-channel). You are not required to select a
channel for a trunk group, but if you do, you must have already defined the
trunk group as type ISDN.
NOTE:

The following three screens, Processor Interface Data Module,
Communication Interface Links, and Communication Processor
Channel Assignment are used only to support the ISDN-PRI
interfaces using PI TN765.
■

Processor Interface Data Module — Use this screen only for a TN765.
Assign up to 8 interface links using 8 Processor Interface Data Module
screens for multi-carrier cabinet systems, and up to 4 links for
single-carrier cabinet systems. One Processor Interface Data Module
screen must be completed for each interface link to be assigned.

■

Communication Interface Links — Use this screen only for a TN765.
Assign link numbers 01 to 08 for a multi-carrier cabinet system or links 01
to 04 for a single-carrier cabinet system as required. When first
administering this screen in Avaya MultiVantage for ISDN, do not
administer the Enable field.

■

Communication Processor Channel Assignment — Use this screen only for
a TN765. Enter assigned link numbers and assign associated channel
numbers to each link. Complete all fields of the screen as required. When
first administering this screen in Avaya MultiVantage for ISDN, you need
to:
— First, administer the Interface Links screen, except the Enable field.
— Second, administer the ISDN fields on the Processor Channel
screen.
— Last, go back to the Interface Links screen and administer the
Enable field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

941

Screen reference

■

ISDN Numbering - Public/Unknown — Complete all fields. This screen
supports the ISDN Call Identification Display.

■

ISDN Numbering - Private — Complete all fields. This screen supports the
ISDN Call Identification Display.

■

Routing Pattern — Complete all fields including the Supplemental ISDN
Routing Information fields as required.

■

Hunt Group — Complete the ISDN Caller Display field by entering either
grp-name or mbr-name to specify whether the hunt group name or
member name, respectively, is sent to the originating user (supports the
ISDN Call Identification Display feature).

■

Terminating Extension Group — Complete the ISDN Caller Display field
by entering either grp-name or mbr-name to specify whether the group
name or member name, respectively, is sent to the originating user
(supports the ISDN Call Identification Display feature).

■

Synchronization Plan — Assigns primary and secondary external
synchronization sources for the ISDN-BRI Trunk or DS1 circuit pack.
Complete all screen fields as required.

Design Considerations

ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI interfaces cannot be mixed in the same trunk group.
Therefore, consider the following:
■

The earliest trunk member (the lowest numbered one) administered is
considered correct.

■

If an offending member is subsequently found (meaning the first member
was BRI and a later member was PRI, or vice versa), the cursor positions
on the offending member, and the following error message appears:
Cannot mix BRI and PRI ports in the same trunk group.

942

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Field descriptions for page 1

Many of the fields on the following screens are described in ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on
page 1233. If a field on this screen is unique, it is listed and defined.
add trunk-group next

Page 1 of x
TRUNK GROUP

Group Number: xxx
Group Type: isdn
CDR Reports: y
Group Name: OUTSIDE_CALL_______________ COR: 1_
TN: 1__
TAC: ____
Direction: two-way_
Outgoing Display? n
Carrier Medium: PRI/BRI
Dial Access? n
Busy Threshold: 99_
Night Service: ____
Queue Length: 0__
Service Type: ________________
Auth Code? n
TestCall ITC: rest
Usage Alloc:_________________________Far End Test Line No: _______________
TestCall BCC: 4
TestCall Service: ______________
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Codeset to Send Display: 6
Codeset to Send TCM,Lookahead: 6
Max Message Size to Send: 260
Charge Advice: none_____________
Supplementary Service Protocol: a
Digit Handling(in/out):overlap/overlap
Digit Treatment: insertion
Digits: 1234
Trunk Hunt: cyclical
QSIG Value-Added? n
Digital Loss Group: __
Calling Number - Delete: ___ Insert: _______________ Numbering Format: _______
Bit Rate: 1200_
Synchronization: async
Duplex: full
Disconnect Supervision - In? y Out? n
Answer Supervision Timeout: 0__

Screen 151. ISDN Trunk Group screen

The Calling Number – Delete, Insert, and Numbering Format fields are the
administrable fields for the Calling Line Identification Prefix feature. They appear
when the Direction field is incoming or two-way.
Calling Number – Delete
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 15

Enter the number of digits, if any, to delete from the calling
party number for all incoming calls on this trunk group.

all
blank

Calling Number – Insert
Valid entries

Usage

Enter up to 15
characters (0- 9)

Enter the specific digits, if any, to add to the beginning
of the digit string of incoming calls when the calling
party is a member of this trunk group.

blank

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

943

Screen reference

Calling Number – Numbering Format

This field indicates the TON/NPI encoding applied to CPN information modified
by the CLI Prefix feature. This encoding does not apply to calls originating
locally. The Numbering Format field on page 2 of this screen applies to calls
originated from this switch.
If this field is blank, Avaya MultiVantage passes on the encoding received in the
incoming setup message. If the incoming setup message did not contain CPN
information and digits are added, the outgoing message will contain these digits.
If the Numbering Format field is blank in this case, the value defaults to pub-unk.
If the Numbering Format field on page 2 of this screen is also administered as
unknown, the trunk group is modified to “unk-unk” encoding of the TON/NPI.
Therefore, this field also must contain a value other than unknown.
NOTE:

The values for this field map to the Type of Numbering (TON) and
Numbering Plan Identifier (NPI) values shown below.
Valid entries

944

Type of numbering
(TON)

Numbering plan identifier (NPI)

blank

incoming TON
unmodified

incoming NPI unmodified

natl-pub

national(2)

E.164(1)

intl-pub

international(1)

E.164(1)

locl-pub

local/subscriber(4)

E.164(1)

pub-unk

unknown(0)

E.164(1)

lev0-pvt

local(4)

Private Numbering Plan PNP(9)

lev1-pvt

Regional Level 1(2)

Private Numbering Plan PNP(9)

lev2-pvt

Regional Level 2(1)

Private Numbering Plan PNP(9)

unk-unk

unknown(0)

unknown(0)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Carrier Medium

This field lets you to specify the type of transport medium interface used for the
ISDN trunk group. Appears only when the Group Type field is isdn and, on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, either the Async. Transfer Mode
(ATM) Trunking or H.323 field is y.
Valid
entries
ATM
IP

PRI/BRI

Usage

The trunk is implemented via the ATM Interface circuit pack.
The trunk is implemented via the LAN/WAN
(C-LAN)/MedPro Interface circuit pack as an H.323 trunk
group.
The trunk is implemented as a standard DS1 or BRI interface.

Charge Advice

Use this field to accumulate and access charge information about a call. You
already must have set the CDR Reports field to y or r (ring-intvl) before changing
this field from its default of none. Remember that receiving Advice of Charge
during the call (administered as “automatic” or “during-on-request”) affects
system performance because of the increased ISDN message activity on the
signaling channel, which may reduce the maximum call capacity.
Valid entries

Usage

none

Enter none if you do not want the system to collect Advice
of Charge information for this trunk group.
Enter automatic only if your public network sends Advice of
Charge information automatically.
Enter end-on-request if Avaya MultiVantage must request
charge information with each call, and you want to receive
only the final call charge.
Enter during-on-request if Avaya MultiVantage must
request charge information with each call, and you want
charges to display during and at the end of a call.

automatic
end-onrequest
during-onrequest

Codeset to Send Display

This field defines the codeset for sending the information element for Display.
The value depends on the type of switch to which the user is connected.
Valid entries

Usage

0

CCITT

6

Any other than CCITT or System 85 R2V4, 4E11

7

System 85 R2V4, 4E11

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

945

Screen reference

Codeset to Send National IEs

This field defines the codeset for sending the information element (IE) for
national IEs. National IEs include all IEs previously sent only in code set 6 (such
as DCS IE). Now these national IEs, including Traveling Class Marks (TCMs)
and Lookahead Interflow (LAI), can be sent in code set 6 or 7. The value depends
on the type of switch the user is connected to.
Valid entries

Usage

6

Other types.

7

System 85 R2V4, 4E11, or newer switch types
NOTE:

A Traveling Class Mark (that is, the user’s FRL or the user’s trunk group
FRL) is passed between tandem nodes in an ETN in the setup message only
when the Service Type field is tandem. It then is used by the distant tandem
switch to permit access to facilities consistent with the originating user’s
privileges.
Digit Handling (in/out)

This field defines whether overlap receiving and overlap sending features are
enabled. Set the field to overlap when you want overlap receiving or overlap
sending. Set to enbloc when you do not want these features enabled. The first
field value indicates digit receiving and the second value indicates digit sending.
Valid entries

Usage

enbloc/enbloc
enbloc/overlap
overlap/enbloc
overlap/overlap

Without overlap receiving or sending enabled, the digits on incoming and
outgoing calls are sent enbloc. If the Digit Handling field is overlap/enbloc or
overlap/overlap, the following results:
— Incoming Call Handling Treatment table does not appear
— The Digit Treatment and Digits fields appear
— Warning message indicates that all Incoming Call Handling entries are
removed when screen is submitted
— When screen is submitted with these values, all Incoming Call Handling
entries are removed

946

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Far End Test Line No.

Specifies the number sent to the far-end’s ISDN test line extension. When the test
trunk long command is issued, this exact number is sent to the far-end to establish
a call that tests the integrity of the trunk member under test. The number does not
pass through routing or undergo digit manipulation. The digits entered must be
what the far-end expects. For example, for an ISDN tandem trunk, the far-end test
number should be a 7-digit ETN (Electronic Tandem Network) number.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 15
digits

Enter a code to test signaling channel

blank
Max Message Size to Send

Defines the maximum size of ISDN messages sent by the switch. Currently, the
system can receive 260 byte messages. Valid entries are 128, 244, 256, and 260.
The following table indicates the expected ISDN-PRI message size from several
Avaya products.

Products

Message Length (octets)
Received

4ESS (4E11)

256

4ESS (4E13)

256

4ESS (4E14)

256

5ESS (5E4)

244

5ESS (5E5)

244

5ESS (5E6)

244

System 75 (all)

260

System 85 (R2V4)

128

System 85 (R2V5)

260

System 85 (R2V6)

260

QSIG Value-Added

Provides QSIG-VALU services. This field appears only if the Value-Added
(VALU) field on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y. This field
can be set to y only if the Supplementary Service Protocol field on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is b. Valid entries are y and n. Blank
is not a valid entry.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

947

Screen reference

Service Type

Indicates the service for which this trunk group is dedicated. The following table
provides a listing of predefined entries. In addition to the Services/Features listed
in this table, any user-defined Facility Type of 0 (feature) or 1 (service) on the
Network Facilities screen is allowed.
Up to 10 (DEFINITY SI, CSI) or 200 (DEFINITY R) ISDN trunk groups can
have this field administered as cbc.
Valid entries

Usage

access

A tie trunk giving access to an Electronic Tandem Network.

accunet

ACCUNET Switched Digital Service — part of ACI (AT&T
Communications ISDN) phase 2.

cbc

Call-by-Call service — provides different dial plans for different
services on an ISDN trunk group. Indicates this trunk group is used
by the Call-By-Call Service Selection feature.

dmi-mos

Digital multiplexed interface — message oriented signaling.

i800

International 800 Service — allows a subscriber to receive
international calls without a charge to the call originating party.

inwats

INWATS — provides OUTWATS-like pricing and service for
incoming calls.

lds

Long-Distance Service — part of ACI (AT&T Communications
ISDN) phase 2.

megacom

MEGACOM Service — an AT&T communications service that
provides unbanded long-distance services using special access
(switch to 4ESS switch) from an AT&T communications node.

mega800

MEGACOM 800 Service — an AT&T communications service that
provides unbanded 800 service using special access (4ESS switch to
switch) from an AT&T communications node.

multiquest

AT&T MULTIQUEST Telecommunications Service — dial 700
service. A terminating-user’s service that supports interactive voice
service between callers at switched-access locations and service
provides directly connected to the AT&T Switched Network (ASN).

operator

Network Operator — provides access to the network operator.
Continued on next page

948

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Valid entries

Usage

outwats-bnd

OUTWATS Band — WATS is a voice-grade service providing both
voice and low speed data transmission capabilities from the user
location to defined service areas referred to as bands; the widest band
is 5.

public-ntwrk

Public network calls — It is the equivalent of CO (outgoing), DID, or
DIOD trunk groups. If Service Type is public-ntwrk, Dial Access can
be set to y.

sddn

Software Defined Data Network — provides a virtual private line
connectivity via the AT&T switched network (4ESS switch).
Services include voice, data, and video applications. These services
complement the SDN service. Do not use for DCS with Rerouting.

sdn

Software Defined Network (SDN) — an AT&T communications
offering that provides a virtual private network using the public
switched network. SDN can carry voice and data between customer
locations as well as off-net locations.

sub-operator

Presubscribed Common Carrier Operator — provides access to the
presubscribed common carrier operator.

tandem

Tandem tie trunks integral to an ETN

tie

Tie trunks — general purpose

wats-max-bnd

Maximum Banded Wats — a WATS-like offering for which a user’s
calls are billed at the highest WATS band subscribed to by users.
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

949

Screen reference

Supplementary Service Protocol

Indicates which supplementary service protocol to use for services over this trunk
group. Supplementary Service protocols are mutually exclusive.
Valid entries

Usage

a

National

b

ISO/ETSI QSIG Private Network

c

ETSI public network

d

European Computer Manufacturer’s Association (ECMA)
QSIG private network (supports only Name Identification
and Additional Network Feature Transit Counter (ANF-TC))

e

DCS with Rerouting
— Do not use the Service Type field entry of dmi-mos or
sddn with this option.
— Set the Used for DCS field (on page 2) to y.

f

ISDN Feature Plus
Public network feature plus signaling.

g

ANSI. Available only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI field
is y or the Used for DCS field is y.

Test Call BCC

Indicates the Bearer Capability Code (BCC) used for the ISDN test call.

950

Valid entries

Usage

0

Voice

1

Mode 1

2

Mode 2 Asynchronous

3

Mode 3 Circuit

4

Mode 0

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Testcall ITC

Controls the encoding of the Information Transfer Capability (ITC) codepoint of
the bearer capability Information Element (IE) in the SETUP message when
generating an ISDN test call. Allowed values are rest (restricted) and unre
(unrestricted).
NOTE:

ISDN Testcall feature has no routing, so a testcall is never blocked
due to an incompatible ITC.
Testcall Service

Specifies the call-by-call selection for an ISDN test call. Only appears if the
Service Type field is cbc. Valid entries are all of the services listed in ‘‘Service
Type’’ on page 948, excluding sddn or any new Facility Type of 0 (feature), 1
(service), or 3 (outgoing) that is defined by users on the Network Specific Facility
Encoding screen.
Trunk Hunt

The switch performs a trunk hunt when searching for available channels within a
facility in an ISDN trunk group. With both ascend and descend, all trunks
within an ISDN trunk group are selected based on this field and without regard to
the order in which trunks are administered within the trunk group. When using
ISDN-BRI interfaces, only cyclical is allowed.
Valid entries

Usage

ascend

Enter to enable a linear trunk hunt search from the lowest to
highest numbered channels.

cyclical

Enter to enable a circular trunk hunt based on the sequence
the trunks were administered within the trunk group.

descend

Enter for a linear trunk hunt search from the highest to lowest
numbered channels.

NOTE:

The cyclical option cannot be set if the trunk group using ISDN-PRI
interfaces is to be used for Wideband operations (the Wideband Support
field set to y).
The search can be administered per ISDN-PRI trunk group, but it infers the
direction of search within all ISDN-PRI facilities (or portions of those facilities)
administered within the trunk group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

951

Screen reference

Usage Alloc

Appears when the Service Type field is cbc.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allocate service provided by the trunk group.
Use y to enhance Network Call Redirection.
When you enter y, the CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation
Plans screen and the CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation
Plan Assignment Schedule appear.

Field descriptions for page 2

add trunk-group next
ACA Assignment? n

Page 2 of x
TRUNK FEATURES
Measured: none____
Maintenance Tests? y
Data Restriction? n

Abandoned Call Search? n
Suppress # Outpulsing? n
Charge Conversion: 1
Decimal Point: none
Currency Symbol:
Charge Type: units
Per Call CPN Blocking Code:
Per Call CPN Unblocking Code:
Outgoing ANI:

Ds1 Echo Cancellation? n

Screen 152. ISDN Trunk Group screen

952

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

add trunk-group next

Page 2 of x
TRUNK FEATURES
ACA Assignment? n
Measured: none____ Wideband Support? n
Long Holding Time(hours: _
Internal Alert? _
Maintenance Tests? y
Short Holding Time (sec): _
Data Restriction? n
NCA-TSC Trunk Member: 7
Short Holding Threshold: __
Send Name: n
Send Calling Number: n
Used for DCS? n
Hop Dgt: _
Send Connected Number: n
Suppress # Outpulsing? n
Numbering Format: ______
DCS Signaling: ____
Outgoing Channel ID Encoding: _________
Charge Conversion: 1____
UUI IE Treatment: shared
Decimal Point: none__
Maximum Size of UUI IE Contents: 128
Currency Symbol: ___
Charge Type: units__
Send Called/Busy/Connected Number: n
Send UCID? n
BSR Reply-best DISC Cause Value: 31
Send Codeset 6/7 LAI IE? y

Screen 153. ISDN Trunk Group screen

These fields are unique to the ISDN trunk group screen.
BSR Reply-best DISC Cause Value

Switches that are polled as resources in a Best Service Routing application return
data to the polling switch in the ISDN DISC message. Since some cause values do
not work over some networks, this field sets the cause value that your switch will
return in response to a BSR status poll. If this field is set incorrectly, incoming
status poll calls over this trunk group will be dropped before any data is returned
to the polling switch. This field only appears if the UUI IE Treatment field is set to
shared.
Valid entries

Usage

31 (normal-unspecified)

Enter 31 unless otherwise instructed by Avaya or
your network service provider.

17 (user-busy)
16 (normal-call-clearing)

! CAUTION:
In most cases, this field will be set to the appropriate value during
installation. If you need to change it, your network service provider should
be able to help you choose an appropriate value. Don’t change this field
without the assistance of Avaya or your network service provider.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

953

Screen reference

DCS Signaling

Specifies the means used to send the DCS message. This field only appears if the
Used for DCS field entry is y and the Service Type field is anything except
dmi-mos or sddn.
Valid entries

Usage

bx.25

Enter for the traditional DCS feature.

d-chan

Enter for the DCS over ISDN-PRI D-channel feature.

DCS over D-channel is not supported on trunk groups containing ISDN-BRI
interfaces.
■

Hop Dgt — The Tandem Hop Limitation and QSIG Additional Network
Feature Transit Counter (ANF-TC) features provide a counter that reflects
the number of switches (that is, the number of hops) that a call has gone
through. The counter increments as a call leaves Avaya MultiVantage
using tandem facilities. Valid values are y and n. One or both of the
features can be applied to the trunk group depending on the following:
— If you enter y and the Group Type field is tandem or the Group
Type field is isdn and the Service Type field is tandem, the Tandem
Hop Limitation feature is applied to the trunk group.
— If you enter y and you set the Group Type field to isdn, set the
Service Type field to access, dmi-mos, public-ntwrk, tandem, tie,
or any of the craft-defined services allowed in the field. Set the
Supplementary Service Protocol field to b or d, then the ANF-TC
feature is applied to calls on the trunk group.
NOTE:

The above conditions overlap. If the Group Type field is isdn,
the Service Type field is tandem, and the Supplementary
Service Protocol field is b or d, then both the Tandem Hop
Limitation and ANF-TC features are applied to calls on the
trunk group.
— If both features are applied to calls on the trunk group, ANF-TC
takes precedence. In situations where Avaya MultiVantage is an
Incoming or Outgoing Gateway, either feature uses the hop count
and transit information provided by the other.

954

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Maximum Size of UUI IE Contents

This field appears when the UUI IE Treatment field is shared. Enter the
maximum number of bytes of user information that the network supports.
Valid
entries

Usage

32-128

NCA-TSC Trunk Member

Identifies the trunk member whose D-channel will be used to route tandem
NCA-TSCs or QSIG CISCs. Value range for this field is from 1 to the maximum
number of members per trunk group supported on the switch or blank.
Network (Japan) Needs Connect Before
Disconnect

Sends an ISDN Connect message just prior to the Disconnect message.
Numbering Format

This field appears if the Send Calling Number field is y or r or the Send
Connected Number field is y or r. This specifies the encoding of Numbering Plan
Indicator for identification purposes in the Calling Number and/or Connected
Number IEs, and in the QSIG Party Number. Valid entries are public, unknown,
private, and unk-pvt. Public indicates that the number plan according to CCITT
Recommendation E.164 is used and that the Type of Number is national.
Unknown indicates the Numbering Plan Indicator is unknown and that the Type
of Number is unknown. Private indicates the Numbering Plan Indicator is PNP
and the Type of Number is determined from the ISDN Private-Numbering screen.
An entry of unk-pvt also determines the Type of Number from the ISDN
Private-Numbering screen, but the Numbering Plan Indicator is unknown.
Outgoing Channel ID Encoding

Appears only if the Group Type field is isdn and the Service Type field is
anything except dmi-mos or sddn. Determines whether to encode the Channel ID
IE as preferred or exclusive. Blank is not a valid entry. Defaults are determined as
follows:
If the Group Type field is isdn and the Used for DCS field is y, default is
exclusive.
If the Group Type field is isdn and the Used for DCS field is n, default is
preferred.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

955

Screen reference

If the Group Type field is not isdn or it is isdn, but the Used for DCS field does
not appear, default is preferred.
Path Replacement Method

Appears when either the ISDN-PRI trunk or the ISDN-BRI trunk fields and the
Basic Call Setup and Supplementary Services with Rerouting fields are set to y on
the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen and when the Supplementary
Service Protocol is either b or e and the Group Type field is isdn on the ISDN
trunk group screen.
Valid
entries

Usage

better-route

Uses the most economical route, for example, the
reconfigured call does not use the same trunk group as the
original call.

always

Always reconfigures the call regardless of the trunk group
used.

Replace Restricted Numbers

Appears when the Group Type field is isdn. Indicates whether to replace
restricted numbers with administrable strings for incoming and outgoing calls
assigned to the specified trunk group. This field applies to BRI and PRI trunks.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y for the display to be replaced regardless of the service
type of the trunk.

Replace Unavailable Numbers

Appears when the Group Type field is isdn. Indicates whether to replace
unavailable numbers with administrable strings for incoming and outgoing calls
assigned to the specified trunk group. This field applies to BRI and PRI trunks.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y for the display to be replaced regardless of the service
type of the trunk.

Send Called/Busy/Connected Number

This field appears only if the QSIG Value-Added field on the Trunk Group screen
is y and the Group Type field is isdn. Specifies if the connected party’s number is
sent on incoming or tandemed ISDN calls. Valid entries are y, n, or r (restricted).

956

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

If set to y, the ISDN Numbering - Public/Unknown Format screen is accessed to
construct the actual number sent, or the ISDN Numbering-Private screen (based
on Numbering Format) is used. If set to r, the connected number is sent
“presentation restricted.”
Send Calling Number

Specifies whether the calling party’s number is sent on outgoing or tandemed
ISDN calls. Valid entries are y, n, or r (restricted). If y is entered, the ISDN
Numbering - Public/Unknown Format screen is accessed to construct the actual
number to be sent, or the ISDN Numbering-Private screen (based on the
Numbering Format field) is used. If the value is r, the calling number is sent
“presentation restricted.”
NOTE:

The ISDN Numbering - Public/Unknown Format screen can override the
Send Calling Number field entry for any administrable block of extensions.
Send Codeset 6/7 LAI IE?

Specifies whether the ISDN trunk should transmit information in Codeset 6/7. If
the UUI IE Treatment field is shared, then this field should be n. Otherwise, the
same information will be sent twice and may exceed the message size. Default is y
for pre-DEFINITY 6.3 compatibility.
Send Connected Number

Appears if the QSIG Value-Added field on the Trunk Group screen is n. Specifies
if the connected party’s number is sent on incoming or tandemed ISDN calls.
Valid entries are y, n, or r (restricted). If y is entered, the ISDN Numbering Public/Unknown Format screen is accessed to construct the actual number sent, or
the ISDN Numbering-Private screen (based on the Numbering Format field) is
used. If the value is r, the connected number is sent “presentation restricted.”
NOTE:

The AT&T Switched Network Protocol does not support restricted displays
of connected numbers. Therefore, if you administer the 1a
country-protocol/protocol-version combination on the DS1 screen, you
should not administer the Send Connected Number field to r (restricted) on
the ISDN Trunk Group screen, as this causes display problems.
NOTE:

The ISDN Numbering - Public/Unknown Format screen overrides the Send
Connected Number field entry for any administrable block of extensions.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

957

Screen reference

Network Call Redirection

Administrable if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y, the ISDN Network Call Redirection
field is y, and on the ISDN Trunk Group screen, the Supplementary Service
Protocol field is c or g. Whenever the Supplementary Service Protocol field is
changed, this field resets to none to prevent an inadvertent incorrect value,
Valid entries

Usage

ANSI-transfer

Indicates standard ANSI encoding functionality. Allowed
only if the Supplementary Service Protocol field is g.

Nortel-transfer

Indicates non-standard ENCT functionality. Allowed only
if the Supplementary Service Protocol field is g.

deflect

Indicates network call redirection. Allowed only if the
Supplementary Service Protocol field is c.

none

No redirection (default).

Send Name

Specifies whether the calling/connected/called/busy party’s administered name is
sent to the network on outgoing/incoming calls. Valid entries are y, n, or r
(restricted). The value r indicates that the calling/connected name will be sent by
the switch but will be marked “presentation restricted.” This value is valid only if
the Supplementary Service Protocol field is a (national supplementary service), b
(for called/busy only) or d for the QSIG Global Networking Supplementary
Service Protocol. When the Supplementary Service Protocol field is e (DCS with
Rerouting), only values of y and n are permitted.
NOTE:

If name information is not administered for the calling station or the
connected/called/busy station, the system sends the extension number in
place of the name.
Send UCID

Specifies whether or not the trunk should transmit Universal Call IDs. The valid
entries are y and n.
Send UUI IE

Specifies whether to block sending UUI information on a per trunk group basis.
The valid entries are y and n.

958

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

US NI Delayed Calling Name Update

Administrable if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
ISDN-PRI field is y, and on the Trunk Group screen, the Carrier Medium field is
either PRI/BRI or ATM, and the Supplementary Service Protocol field is a. This
field provides display updates to the terminating phone for delayed calling party
name provided by the network,
Valid entries

Usage

y

If calling name information is received after the incoming
call has been delivered to the terminating phone, there is a
display update.
NOTE:

BRI trunks do not support this value.
n

If calling name information is received after the incoming
call has been delivered to the called phone, there is no
display update to the terminating phone.

UUI IE Treatment

Specifies whether the user Information Element (IE) is shared.
Valid entries

Usage

shared

If the trunk is connected to a DEFINITY 6.3 (or later)
switch.

service-provider

If the trunk is connected to a pre-DEFINITY 6.3
switch or service provider functionality is desired.

Wideband Support

Specifies whether Wideband Switching is supported by this trunk group. Valid
entries are y or n. For ISDN trunk groups containing ISDN-BRI interfaces, the
only valid entry is n. Otherwise you can administer this field only if the Wideband
Switching field is y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. If set to
y, the Wideband Support Options page appears. All trunk members must be from
TN464C (or later) circuit packs.
NOTE:

Wideband trunk calls are treated as a single trunk call when Automatic
Circuit Assurance (ACA) measurements are taken. This way, if an ACA
referral call is generated (for short or long holding time), the wideband call
only triggers a single referral call using the lowest B-channel trunk member
associated with the wideband channel.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

959

Screen reference

Field descriptions for the Shared UUI Feature
Priorities page

The fields in this page show the priorities for each type of information to be
forwarded in the Shared UUI. This page appears only on the ISDN trunk group
screen when all of the following conditions are met:
■

The UUI IE Treatment field is shared.

■

The Supplementary Service Protocol field is set to anything except b.

add trunk-group next

Page y of x
SHARED UUI FEATURE PRIORITIES
ASAI: 1

Universal Call ID: 2
MULTI SITE ROUTING (MSR)
In-VDN Time:
VDN Name:
Collected Digits:
Other LAI Information:

3
4
5
6

Screen 154. Shared UUI Feature Priorities

Changing the priorities in this screen may affect whether certain information will
be sent. For more information about setting priorities, see “Information
Forwarding” in Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call
Centers. These fields are unique to the ISDN trunk group screen.
ASAI

User information from ASAI. Valid entries are 1 to 6 (1 is high) and blank. If
blank, that field’s information is not forwarded.
Collected Digits

Digits collected from caller (not including dial-ahead digits). Valid entries are 1 to
6 (1 is high) and blank. If blank, that field’s information is not forwarded.
In-VDN TIme

Number of seconds the call has spent in vector processing. Valid entries are 1 to 6
(1 is high) and blank. If blank, that field’s information is not forwarded.

960

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Other LAI Information

Includes the time stamp of when the call entered the current queue, the call’s
priority level in its current queue, and the type of interflow. Valid entries are 1 to 6
(1 is high) and blank. If blank, that field’s information is not forwarded.
Universal Call ID

Unique tag to identify each call. Valid entries are 1 to 6 (1 is high) and blank. If
blank, that field’s information is not forwarded.
VDN Name

Name of the active VDN (also called LAI DNIS). Valid entries are 1 to 6 (1 is
high) and blank. If blank, that field’s information is not forwarded.
Field descriptions for the Incoming Call
Handling Treatment page

add trunk-group next
Service/
Feature
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________

Page y of x

INCOMING CALL HANDLING TREATMENT
Called
Called
Del Insert
Len
Number
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________
___ _______________ ___ ______________

Per Call
CPN/BN
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________

Night
Serv
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Screen 155. Incoming Call Handling Treatment
NOTE:

This page does not appear if the Digit Handling (in/out) field is overlap on
the “in” side or if the Direction field is outgoing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

961

Screen reference

The Incoming Call Handling Treatment page can (optionally) provide unique call
treatment for different incoming calls on any ISDN trunk group. The number of
unique treatments that can be specified in this table and the number of pages vary
depending on whether the Usage Allocation Enhancements feature is enabled and
on the amount of available system memory.
Unique digit manipulation capabilities, CPN/BN requests, and night service
destinations are possible for different types of incoming calls. The unique digit
manipulation capabilities can be particularly useful to accommodate different dial
plans for different services on an ISDN trunk type with a Service Type (field
entry) of cbc (Call-by-Call). The table can also be used for ISDN trunk groups
that are not Call-by-Call. For example, an ISDN group with Service Type set to
mega800 could use the Incoming Call Handling Treatment table to distinguish
treatment of calls to different 800 numbers based on the Dialed Number
Identification Service (DNIS) number that is incoming to the switch.
Each row in the table consists of seven columns. The first three columns
(Service/Feature, Called Len, and Called Number) constitute a key that together
select which row or unique treatment should apply for an incoming call on the
group. The remaining four columns (Del, Insert, and so on) specify the treatment
to be provided for a call that matches the key.
If an incoming call is for a service listed in a row on the table, then that row may
specify the treatment for the call, depending on the other two columns of the key.
The Called Len field is used to continue the row determination. If the number of
digits received with the incoming call matches the number of digits in the Called
Len field for calls to the matched service, then this row may apply. If no other row
also contains a matching service and called length, then this row does apply. If
another row does exist with the same service and number length, then the Called
Number field will be used to continue the row determination.
If the leading digits received with the incoming call match the digits specified in
the Called Number field, then this row applies to the call. Therefore, with this
table, a unique treatment can be given to any incoming call, even if these calls are
to the same service or have the same length of digits. The remaining four fields
specify the unique treatment for the call once the row has been determined.
Together, the Del and Insert fields can be used to manipulate the incoming number
that will be used to route the call. The Per Call CPN/BN field can be used to
request CPN/BN from AT&T networks for specific calls incoming on the group.
The Night Serv field is used to have calls of different types routed to different
night destinations when night service is in effect.

962

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

The Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table always automatically rearranges to
show the precedence order the system uses to pick an entry. Thus, you can easily
predict the behavior of the Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table by noting the
order in which the entries display. (The entries rearrange after submitting the trunk
group screen. A subsequent change trunk-group or display trunk-group command
then shows the rearranged order.)
Avaya MultiVantage traverses the table from top to bottom and picks the first
entry that matches all the following criteria:
■

The Service /Feature, if applicable, matches

■

The Called/Length matches

■

The Called Number matches

If the administered Called Length or Called Number is blank, that criterion is
considered successful.
Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table entries with a predefined service/feature
always appear before entries with a user-defined service/feature. To control the
order in which certain entries appear, you must use user-defined services/features
for those entries. For example, you can redefine the predefined mega800
service/feature as an identical user-defined entry with the name m800.
User-defined entries are always listed in the reverse order compared to the way
they appear on the ISDN Network-Facilities screen. See ‘‘Packet Gateway
Board’’ on page 1072. Thus, given two user-defined services/features ABC and
XYZ, you can force XYZ to appear before ABC in an Incoming Call Handling
Treatment Table by putting XYZ after ABC on the Network-Facilities screen.
NOTE:

DCS features that use the remote-tgs button (on the remote switch) do not
work when the local trunk group deletes or inserts digits on the incoming
call. These buttons try to dial a local TAC. Adding or deleting digits defeats
this operation and renders the remote feature inoperable. If digit
manipulation is needed, use it on the outgoing side, based on the routing
pattern. One reason for digit manipulation is insertion of the AAR feature
access code (FAC).
These fields are located on the Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table screen.
Called Len

Specifies the number of digits received for an incoming call. A blank entry is used
as a “wild card” entry and, when used, means that any length of digits associated
with the specified Service/Feature can match in this field. Valid entries are 0 to 21,
or leave blank.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

963

Screen reference

Called Number

Specifies the leading digits received for an incoming call. A blank entry is used as
a “wild card” entry and, when used, means that any number associated with the
specified Service/Feature can match in this field. Valid entries are up to 16 digits,
or leave blank.
Del

Specifies the number of leading digits to be deleted from the incoming Called
Party Number. Calls of a particular type may be administered to be routed to a
single destination by deleting all incoming digits and then administering the Insert
field with the desired extension. Valid entries are 1 to 21, all, or leave blank.
Insert

Specifies the digits to be prepended to the front of the remaining digits after any
(optional) digit deletion has been performed. The resultant number formed from
digit deletion/insertion is used to route the call, provided night service is not in
effect. Valid entries are up to 16 characters consisting of a combination from the
following: 0 to 9, *, #, or leave blank.
Per Call CPN/BN

Specifies when and how to request Calling Party Number (CPN) or Billing
Number (BN) for calls of this type. Leave blank when connected to another
switch, or when connected to a public network outside North America. Within
North America, leave blank when connected to a public network that does not
permit customer equipment to request CPN or BN for individual incoming calls.
The AT&T Switched Network offers this service under the titles “CPN/BN to
Terminating End on a Per-Call Basis” and “ANI (BN) on Request.” An entry of
none indicates the switch will not request either CPN or BN for any incoming
calls of this type. Valid entries are cpn-only, bn-only, bn-pref (prefer BN, but
accepts CPN), cpn-pref (prefer CPN, but accepts BN), none, or leave blank.
Leave blank when connected to another switch or to a network other than the
AT&T Switched Network.
NOTE:

A 4-second delay occurs in terminating the call to the far-end station if the
connecting switch does not respond to the request.

964

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Night Serv

Specifies a night service extension (can be a VDN extension) per Service/Feature.
An entry other than blank overrides Night Service entry on page 1 of the screen.
This entry can be overridden by the Trunk/Member Night Service entry when
provided. Valid entries are an assigned extension, the attendant group access code
(attd), or leave blank.
Service/Feature

Specifies the ISDN Services/Features for an incoming call type. See the Service
Type field description for a list of predefined Services/Features that can be
received. Or, use Type 0, Type 1, and Type 2 user defined services. The identifier
other can be used for any Services/Features not explicitly specified.
Field Descriptions for the CBC Trunk Group
Usage Allocation page

Appears when the Service Type field is cbc and the Usage Alloc field is y.
add trunk-group next

Page y of x
CBC TRUNK GROUP USAGE ALLOCATION
Usage Allocation Plan 1
Usage Allocation Plan 2
Usage Allocation Plan 3
Min# Max#
Min# Max#
Min# Max#
Service/Feature Chan Chan Service/Feature Chan Chan Service/Feature Chan Chan
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__
_______________ __
__

Screen 156. CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation

The CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation screen sets a minimum and maximum
number of members for up to ten different Services/Features for up to three
different Usage Allocation Plans (1–3). See ‘‘Call-by-call service selection’’ on
page 1629 for a detailed description of Usage Allocation Plans.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

965

Screen reference

Max# Chan

Indicates the maximum number of members of a ISDN trunk group with a Service
Type field of cbc that a particular Service/Feature can use at any given time. This
field must be completed if a Service/Feature has been entered in the Incoming
Call Handling Treatment Table screen. Valid values are 0 to 99 or blank.
Min# Chan

Indicates the minimum number of members of an ISDN trunk group with a
Service Type field of cbc that a particular Service/Feature can use at any given
time. The sum of the minimum number of members for all Service/Features must
not exceed the total number of members of the trunk group. Valid values are 0-99
or blank.
Service/Feature

Specifies the ISDN Services/Features that can be requested at call setup time
when using this trunk group. See Service Type description for a list of predefined
Services/Features that can be received on a call by call basis. In addition, the user
defined service types can also be used. The identifier other is used for all
Services/Features not explicitly specified.
Field descriptions for the CBC Service Trunk
Group Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule
page

Appears when the Service Type field is cbc and the Usage Alloc field is y.

add trunk-group next
Page y of x
CBC SERVICE TRUNK GROUP ALLOCATION PLAN ASSIGNMENT SCHEDULE
Usage Method:
Fixed? y
Scheduled? n

Allocation Plan Number: 1

Usage Allocation Plan Activation Schedule:

Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat

Act Plan
Time #
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __

Act Plan
Time #
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __

Act Plan
Time #
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __

Act Plan
Time #
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __

Act Plan
Time #
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __

Act Plan
Time #
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __
__:__ __

Screen 157. CBC Service Trunk Group Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule

966

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

The CBC Service Trunk Group Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule screen
provides for administering a fixed schedule or administering a schedule that can
change up to 6 times a day for each day of the week. This screen determines
which CBC Service Trunk Group Allocation Plan will be in use at any given time.
Act Time

Indicates the time the usage allocation plan administered in the next field (Plan #)
will become effective. Enter the time in military time. There must be at least one
entry per day. Valid entries are 00:00 through 23:59.
Allocation Plan Number

Specifies the CBC Trunk Allocation Plan (1 through 3) that is in effect if a fixed
usage method has been selected. This field must be assigned if the Fixed field is y.
Valid entries are 1–3 or blank.
Fixed

Indicates whether the allocation plan will be fixed. If y is entered, the plan number
entered in the Allocation Plan Number field will be enabled.
Plan #

Specifies the number of the usage allocation plan that will be in effect from the
activation time until the activation time of the next scheduled plan change. Valid
entries are 1 to 3 or blank.
Scheduled

Indicates whether or not the allocation plans will be in effect according to the
schedule found on this page. If y is entered in this field then there must be at least
one entry in the schedule.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

967

Screen reference

Field descriptions for the Wideband Support
Options page

add trunk-group next

Page y of x
Wideband Support Options
H0?
H11?
H12?
NxDS0?

n
n
n
y

Contiguous? n

Screen 158. Wideband Support Options

The Wideband Support Options screen appears immediately before the trunk
group member pages. The actual page number will vary.
NOTE:

All B-channels that comprise the wideband call must reside on the same
ISDN-PRI facility. Also, all trunk members in an ISDN trunk group with the
Wideband Support field set to y must be from a TN464C (or later) circuit
pack.
H0

Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 384-kbps of data, which
is comprised of six B-channels. When a trunk group is administered to support
H0, the trunk/hunt algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 384-kbps of bandwidth
uses a fixed allocation scheme.
H11

Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 1536-kbps of data, which
is comprised of 24 B-channels. When a trunk group is administered to support
H11, the trunk/hunt algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 1536-kbps bandwidth
uses a fixed allocation scheme.
H12

Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 1920-kbps of data, which
is comprised of 30 B-channels. When a trunk group is administered to support
H12, the trunk/hunt algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 1920-kbps bandwidth
uses a fixed allocation scheme.

968

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN trunk group

Contiguous

Specifies whether or not to hunt contiguous NXDS0 channels. This field only
appears if the NxDS0 field is y.
The trunk/hunt algorithm to satisfy an NXDS0 call is as follows:
— Enter y to specify the “floating” scheme. NXDS0 calls are placed on
a contiguous group of B-channels large enough to satisfy the
requested bandwidth without constraint on the starting channel (no
fixed starting point trunk).
NOTE:

H0 and NXDS0 “floating” scheme cannot both be y.
— Enter n to specify the “flexible” scheme. NXDS0 calls are placed on
any set of B-channels on the same facility as long as the requested
bandwidth is satisfied. There are no constraints such as contiguity of
B-channels or fixed starting points.
NxDS0

Enter y to specify the “N by DS-zero” multi-rate service.
Field Descriptions for the Group Member
Assignments page

add trunk-group next

Page y of x
TRUNK GROUP
Administered Members(min/max): xxx/yyy
Total Administered Members: xxx

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Port
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Code
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Sfx
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Name
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________

Night
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Sig Grp
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Screen 159. ISDN Group Member Assignments

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

969

Screen reference

The total number of pages, and the first page of Group Member Assignments, will
vary depending on whether the CBC and Wideband Support pages display.
NOTE:

When supporting DCS, Member Number Assignments must be the same
between nodes (Member #1 must be Member #1 at the far-end trunk group).
Port

When using ISDN-BRI interfaces, B-channel 1 is the port number while B
channel 2 is the port number plus 16. For example, if B channel 1’s port number is
01A1002, then B channel 2’s port number is 01A1018.
When using ISDN-PRI interfaces, the port number will be the one allied with the
B-channel. For example, if the DS1 is located in 01A10, then B channel 1 will be
01A1001, B channel 2 will be 01A1002 and so forth.
Sig Grp

When using ISDN-BRI interfaces, this field becomes unadministrable. Otherwise,
enter the appropriate signaling group number. If a DS1 interface appears in one
signaling group, then the number of that signaling group appears as a default in
the Sig Grp column for any trunk on that interface after the screen is submitted.
This value cannot be altered without adding a DS1 interface to another signaling
group. If a DS1 circuit pack appears in more than one signaling group, then the
Sig Grp field cannot be left blank. One of the signaling group members must be
entered. Enter assigned signaling group number between 1 through 416 or blank.
Related topics

See ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1730 for detailed information about Integrated
Services Digital Network trunks.
See ‘‘DS1 trunk service’’ on page 1659 for detailed information on DS1.

ISDN Numbering — Private
This screen supports Private Numbering Plans (PNP). It allows you to specify the
digits to be put in the Calling Number information element (IE), the Connected
Number IE, and the QSIG Party Number for extensions in the Private Numbering
Plan.
Avaya MultiVantage supports private-network numbers up to 15 digits long. If
the total number — including the level 1 and 2 prefixes, the PBX identifier, and
the extension — is more than 15 digits long, neither QSIG PartyNumbers nor the
information elements are created or sent.

970

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN Numbering — Private

change isdn private-numbering

Page 1 of 1

ISDN NUMBERING - PRIVATE FORMAT

Network Level: _
Level 2 Code: _____
Level 1 Code: _____

PBX Identifier: ____
Deleted Digits: _

Screen 160. ISDN Number — Private Format

Deleted Digits

In some networks, the leading digits of the number you dial internally to reach any
extension are not part of its longer private network number. For example,
extension 35581 might have a private network number of 221-5581. To send this
network number correctly, you must set the Deleted Digits field to 1 (that is, tell
the switch to delete 1 digit before inserting the PBX Identifier of 221).
Valid entries

Usage

0

Enter the number of digits to be deleted from the most
significant digits of a local extension prior to sending it in the
Calling or Connected Number IEs or in the QSIG
PartyNumber. This allows UDP network numbers to be
converted to PNP Complete Numbers.

1
2

Level 1 Code

Enter the switch’s first level regional code in the network. Administer this field
carefully. The system will not check to ensure you have entered a code that
supports your entry in the Network Level field. You cannot enter anything in this
field unless the Network Level field is set to 1 or 2.
Valid
entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter up to 5 digits.

blank

Because blank regional codes are valid, an entry is not
required if the Network Level field is 1 or 2.

In QSIG standards, this level 1 code is called the Level 0 Regional Code.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

971

Screen reference

Level 2 Code

Enter the switch’s second level regional code in the network. Administer this field
carefully. The system will not check to ensure you have entered a code that
supports your entry in the Network Level field. You cannot enter anything in this
field unless the Network Level field is set to 2.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter up to 5 digits.

blank

Because blank regional codes are valid, an entry is not
required if the Network Level field is 2.

In QSIG standards, this level 2 code is called the Level 1 Regional Code.
Network Level

Enter the value of the highest regional level employed by the PNP network. Use
the following table to find the relationship between the network level and the
Numbering Plan Identification/Type of Number (NPI/TON) encoding used in the
QSIG PartyNumber or the Calling Number and Connected Number IEs.
Valid entries

Usage

0

NPI - PNP
TON - local

1

NPI - PNP
TON - Regional Level 1

2

NPI - PNP
TON - Regional Level 2

blank

If this field is blank and the Send Calling Number and/or Send
Connected Number field is y or r with private specified for
the Numbering Format field on the ISDN Trunk Group screen,
the Calling Number and/or Connected Number IEs will not be
sent.
If the field is left blank but private has been specified in the
Numbering Format field on the ISDN Trunk Group screen, the
Identification Number (PartyNumber data type) is sent for
QSIG PartyNumbers encoded in ASN.1-defined APDUs. In
this case, the ASN.1 data type containing the PartyNumber
(PresentedAddressScreened, PresentedAddressUnscreened,
PresentedNumberScreened, or PresentedNumberUnscreened)
is sent marked as “PresentationRestricted” with “NULL” for
the associated digits.

972

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown

PBX Identifier
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9 or
blank

Enter up to 5 digits. Digits entered in this field are added to
the beginning of local extensions. The PBX identifier is
added first, before Level 1 or Level 2 codes. For example, in
private networks with a 7-digit numbering plan, the first 3
digits of the private-network number are often considered
the PBX identifier.

NOTE:

The PBX identifier does not depend on the network level. Therefore, in a
level 0 private network you can use this field to create a level 0 number
longer than 5 digits.

ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown
This screen supports the ISDN Call Identification Display feature. The feature
provides a name/number display for display-equipped stations within an ISDN
network. The system uses the caller’s name and number and displays it on the
called party’s display. Likewise, the called party’s name and number can be
displayed on the caller’s display.
The screen allows you to specify the desired digits for the Calling Number IE and
the Connected Number IE (in addition to the QSIG Party Number) for any
extension in the Public and/or Unknown Number Plans.
Administer these screens if either the Send Calling Number, Send Connected
Number field is specified, or the Supplementary Service Protocol field is b on the
trunk group screen.
NOTE:

If the table is not properly administered and the Send Calling Number or
Send Connected Number field is y or r and the Numbering Format field on
the ISDN Trunk Group screen is public or unknown, the Calling Number
and Connected Number IE are not sent. If the table is not administered, but
the Send Calling Number or Send Connected Number field is public or
unknown, the Identification Number (PartyNumber data type) is not sent
for QSIG PartyNumbers. In this case, the ASN.1 data type containing the
PartyNumber (PresentedAddressScreened, PresentedAddressUnscreened,
PresentedNumberScreened, or PresentedNumberUnscreened) will be sent
marked as “PresentationRestricted” with “NULL” for the associated digits.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

973

Screen reference

change isdn public-unknown-numbering
ISDN NUMBERING - PUBLIC/UNKNOWN FORMAT

Ext Ext
Len Code
5
7

Trk
Grp(s)

4
3646180
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

CPN
Prefix

Total
CPN Ext Ext
Len Len Code

73283__________ 10
210 __________ 10
__________
__________
__________
___________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________

Trk
Grp(s)

Page 1 of 8

Total
CPN
Len

CPN
Prefix
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________

__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Screen 161. ISDN Numbering Public/Unknown

CPN Prefix

Use this field to specify the number that is added to the beginning of the extension
to form a Calling or Connected Number.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 15 digits

Only digits are allowed in the CPN Prefix column. Leading
spaces, or spaces in between the digits, are not allowed.

blank

974

Issue 5 October 2002

■

If the length of the CPN Prefix matches the Total CPN
Length, the extension number is not used to formulate the
CPN number.

■

If the number of digits in the CPN Prefix plus the
extension length exceeds the administered Total CPN
Length, excess leading digits of the extension are deleted
when formulating the CPN number.

■

If the number of CPN Prefix digits plus the extension
length is less than the Total CPN Length, the entry is not
allowed.

■

If the Total CPN Length is 0, no calling party number
information is provided to the called party and no
connected party number information is provided to the
calling party.

If this field is blank, the extension is sent unchanged. This is
useful in countries where the public network is able to insert
the appropriate CPN Prefix to form an external DID number.

555-233-506

ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown

Ext Code

Allows for groups of extensions to be administered.
NOTE:

When 0 alone is entered, the Ext Len field must be 1 and the DDD number
must be 10-digits.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9 or

The Ext Code can be up to 7-digits long depending on the
Ext Len field entry. The entry cannot be greater than the Ext
Len field entry. For example, in the case of a 4-digit Ext Len
field entry, an Ext Code of 12 is the equivalent of all
extensions of the screen 12xx, excluding any explicitly
listed longer codes. If a code of 123 is also listed, the 12
code is equivalent of all extensions of the screen 12xx
except extensions of the screen 123x. The coding precludes
having to list all the applicable 12xx extensions.

blank

attd

For attendant

Ext Len

Specifies the number of digits the extension can have.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 7 or blank

Corresponds to the extension lengths allowed
by the dial plan.

Total CPN Len
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 15 or
blank

Enter the total number of digits to send.

Trk Grp(s)

The switch generates the station’s identification number if there is an entry in the
Ext Code field, and this field is administered with the trunk group number
carrying the call.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 7 digits

Enter the valid administered ISDN trunk-group number or a
range of group numbers. For example, if trunk groups 10
through 24 use the same CPN Prefix, enter 10-24.

blank

The identification numbers are not dependent on which trunk
group the call is carried.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

975

Screen reference

ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack
This screen administers an ISDN-BRI circuit pack. See Avaya MultiVantage™
Solutions Hardware Guide for information on the maximum number of
ISDN-BRI circuit packs that you can administer.

change bri-trunk-board

Page 1 of 1
ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK

Location: 01A09
Interface Companding: a-law_
T3 Timer Length (sec): 15_

Port
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7.
8:

Interface

Side

user_______
network____
user_______
peer-slave_
peer-master
___________
___________
___________

b
a

Name: ______________
DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: 3.1kHz

Cntry/Peer
Protocol
12__
etsi
2___
QSIG
QSIG
____
____
____

TEI

Time Invert Synch
Layer 1
Fill Bits? Source? Stable?
0__ flags
n
n
n
0__ ones_
y
y
y
auto flags
y
n
y
0__ flags
n
y
y
auto ones_
n
n
n
0__ ones_
n
n
y
0__ ones_
n
n
y
0__ ones_
n
n
y

Detect
Slips?
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n

Screen 162. BRI Trunk (using a TN2185 circuit pack)

Cntry/Peer Protocol

Tells call processing software which ISDN protocol standard is applied.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 25

When this field is 10, 12, 13, or etsi, the Protocol Version
field is equivalent to b on the DS1 circuit pack screen. When
the Cntry/Peer Protocol field is set 10, 12, 13, or etsi, set the
Provol Version field to b. For all other administered values,
the Protocol Version sets to a.

etsi

976

QSIG

When the Interface field is peer-slave or peer-master, this
field must be QSIG. The choice QSIG is valid only when the
Interface field is peer-slave.

blank

You cannot leave this field blank if the Interface field is set
to a valid, non-blank value

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack

DCP/Analog Bearer Capability
Valid entries

Usage

3.1kHz

Indicates how to encode the Bearer Capability IE for an
outgoing call originated by a DCP or analog endpoint.

speech

Detect Slips
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Tells maintenance software whether slips reported by the
BRI port should be logged.

Valid entries

Usage

network

Tells call processing software whether a particular port is
connected to a user/network or a peer interface. These
entries are valid for the TN2185. You can enter peer-slave
only if the QSIG Basic Call Setup feature is enabled

Interface

user
peer-master
peer-slave

Interface Companding
Valid entries

Usage

a-law

Indicates the companding algorithm expected by the system
at the far end.

mu-law

Invert Bits
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Layer 1 Stable
Valid entries

Usage

y

Tells call processing and maintenance software whether to
expect the network to drop Layer 1 when the BRI port is idle.
Only the TN2185 may be set to n.

n

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

977

Screen reference

Location

This is a display-only field. It shows the TN2185 circuit pack location (PPCSS)
Name
Valid entries

Usage

1–15
alpha-numeri
c characters

This name is used to identify the circuit pack.

Port

This is a display-only field. It shows the port number to which parameters
administered on the row apply.
Side
Valid entries

Usage

a

Determines how glare conditions are handled when Interface
field is peer-slave.

b

Synch Source
Valid entries

Usage

y
n

T3 Timer Length (sec)
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 127

Tells the TE side how long to wait, in seconds, for an inactive
Layer 1 to become active.

Valid entries

Usage

TEI

auto
0

978

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack

Time Fill

The bit pattern sent on the D-channel between valid LAPD packets.
Valid entries

Usage

flags
ones

Field descriptions for page 1

change bri-trunk-board

Page 1 of 1
ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK

Location: 01A09
Interface Companding: a-law_

Port
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7.
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

Interface

Side

network__
network__
network__
peer-master
peer-master
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________

b
a

Name: ______________
DCP/Analog Bearer Capability: 3.1kHz

Cntry/Peer
Protocol
12__
etsi
2___
QSIG
QSIG
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

TEI

Time Invert
Fill Bits?
0__ flags
n
0__ ones_
y
auto flags
y
0__ flags
n
auto ones_
n
0__ ones_
n
0__ ones_
n
0__ ones_
n
0__ ones_
n
0__ ones_
n
0__ ones_
n
0__ ones_
n

Screen 163. BRI Trunk (with a TN556B or TN2198 circuit pack)

The following field descriptions are unique to the ISDN-BRI Circuit Pack screen
with a TN556B or TN2198 circuit pack. The following fields do not display with
a TN556B or TN2198 circuit pack:

555-233-506

■

T3 Timer Length (sec)

■

Synch Source

■

Layer 1 Stable

■

Detect Slips

Issue 5 October 2002

979

Screen reference

Cntry/Peer Protocol

Tells call processing software which ISDN protocol standard is applied.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 25

When this field is 10, 12, or 13, the Protocol Version field is
equivalent to b on the DS1 circuit pack screen.

etsi

When this field is etsi, the Protocol Version field is
equivalent to b on the DS1 circuit pack screen.

QSIG

When the Interface field is peer-master, this field must be
QSIG.

blank

You cannot leave this field blank if the Interface field is set
to a valid, non-blank value.

Valid entries

Usage

network

Tells call processing software whether a particular port is
connected to a user/network or a peer interface. These
entries are valid for the TN556B. You can enter
peer-master only if the QSIG Basic Call Setup feature is
enabled

Interface

peer-master

Side
Valid entries

Usage

a

Determines how glare conditions are handled when
Interface field is peer-slave. This field is not administrable
when the Interface field is network.

b

980

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack

Field descriptions for page 2
NOTE:

If administering a TN2185 circuit pack, 8 ports appear; otherwise, 12
ports appear.

change bri-trunk-board

Page 2 of 2
ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK

Port
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7.
8:

Interwork XID Endpt
SPID
Endpt
SPID
Endpt Max
Message
Test? Init?
ID
ID
NCA TSC
PROGress
y
n
____________ __
____________ __
0___
ALERTing
y
y
908957200000 __
____________ __
0___
PROGress
y
y
0001________ __
____________ __
0___
PROGress
n
n
____________ __
____________ __
0___
PROGress
n
y
625761449___ 01
____________ __
0___
PROGress
n
n
____________ __
____________ __
0___
PROGress
n
n
____________ __
____________ __
0___
PROGress
n
n
____________ __
____________ __
0___

Port Directory
Number
1:
2:
3:
4:

Directory
Number

Port Directory
Number
5:
6:
7:
8:

Directory
Number

Screen 164. BRI Trunk - Page 2 (using a TN2185 circuit pack)

change bri-trunk-board

Page 2 of 2
ISDN-BRI TRUNK CIRCUIT PACK

Port
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7.
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

Interwork XID Endpt
SPID
Endpt
Message
Test? Init?
ID
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
ALERTing
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __
PROGress
n
y
____________ __

Max
NCA TSC
0___
0___
0___
0___
0___
0___
0___
0___
0___
0___
0___
0___

Screen 165. BRI Trunk - Page 2 (using a TN2198/TN556B circuit pack)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

981

Screen reference

NOTE:

You cannot change the Endpt Init, SPID, or Endpt ID port parameters
unless that port is busied out or unadministered. It is possible to
change all other fields on this page even if the corresponding port is
active.
NOTE:

If the Interface field on page 1 contains a valid value when the screen
is submitted, the contents of the fields on page 2 for that port are
validated. If the Interface field is blank when the screen is submitted,
the fields on this page for that port reset to their default values.
Directory Number

These 10-digit fields contain the directory numbers assigned to the interface,
which it views as being allocated to 2 separate endpoints.
Valid entries

Usage

Any string of
1 to 10 digits

These fields must be administered in pairs. That is, if you enter
a value in one field, you must enter a value in the other.

Endpt ID

A 2-digit field containing the Endpoint Identifier expected by the far end. Avaya
MultiVantage blocks you from changing this field unless the port is busied out or
unadministered.

982

Valid entries

Usage

00 to 62

Leading zeroes considered significant and not ignored.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack

Endpt Init

Indicates whether the far end supports endpoint initialization. Avaya
MultiVantage blocks you from changing this field unless the port is busied out or
unadministered.
Valid entries

Usage

y

If set to y, the SPID field must not be blank. Avaya
MultiVantage blocks you from changing this field and the
SPID field unless that port is busied out or unadministered.
If set to n, the SPID and Endpt ID fields must be blank.

n

Interworking Message

This field determines what message the switch sends when an incoming ISDN
trunk call interworks (is routed over a non-ISDN trunk group).
Valid entries

Usage

PROGress

Normally select this value. PROGress asks the public
network to cut through the B-channel and let the caller hear
tones such as ringback or busy tone provided over the
non-ISDN trunk.
ALERTing causes the public network in many countries to
play ringback tone to the caller. Select this value only if the
DS1 is connected to the public network, and it is determined
that callers hear silence (rather than ringback or busy tone)
when a call incoming over the DS1 interworks to a
non-ISDN trunk.

ALERTing

Max NCA TSC
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 63.

This 2-digit field gives the maximum number of
Non-Call-Associated Temporary Signaling Connections
allowed on this BRI D-channel. This field’s function is the
same as the field with the same name on the Signaling Group
screen.

Port

This is a display-only field. It shows the port number to which parameters
administered on the row apply.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

983

Screen reference

SPID

A 12-digit field containing the SPID expected by the far end. Avaya
MultiVantage blocks you from changing this field unless the port is busied out or
unadministered. The only protocol supported for SPID initialization is Bellcore
(Country Code 1). Trunks will not be put in service if SPID installation is not
successful.
Valid entries

Usage

Any string of 1 to 12
digits

Leading zeroes considered significant and not
ignored

XID Test
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Indicates whether the far end supports the Layer 2 XID test.

Trunk Member Administration

Administer BRI trunk members using the following scheme to address the
individual B-channels:
■

B-channel 1 uses the port address of the BRI Trunk Port.

■

B-channel 2 uses the port address of B-channel 1 incremented by 16.

When adding a BRI trunk to an ISDN trunk-group, Avaya MultiVantage blocks
you from administering a Signaling Group for that trunk member.
Avaya MultiVantage blocks you from administering a BRI trunk member if the
port has not yet been administered on the BRI Trunk screen.
For example, administer the B-channels on a TN2185 circuit pack inserted in slot
01A10 as follows:

984

Port

B-channel 1

B-channel 2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

01A1001
01A1002
01A1003
01A1004
01A1005
01A1006
01A1007
01A1008

01A1017
01A1018
01A1019
01A1020
01A1021
01A1022
01A1023
01A1024

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

Interactions

The add bri-trunk board PPCSS command is rejected if PPCSS identifies a
TN556B circuit pack, and a port on that circuit pack has already been assigned to
a station or data-module. If a TN556B circuit pack has been administered as a BRI
trunk circuit pack, any port on that circuit pack is prevented from being assigned
to a station or data-module.

Language Translations
When you want to use a language other than English, French, Italian, and Spanish
to display messages on your display phones, use the Language Translation screens
to define the messages. Set up your messages using Roman letters, punctuation,
digits and blank spaces. Diacritical marks are not supported.
All button names can be assigned a user-defined name. For more information, see
‘‘Telephone feature buttons’’ on page 131.
NOTE:

If “user-defined” is entered for the display language on the station screen or
attendant screen, and no messages are defined on these screens, a string of
asterisks appears on all display messages.
In this section, the field descriptions are listed before the screens
English

This is a display-only field. It contains the English version of the message on the
display.
Meaning of English term

This is a display-only field. It explains the abbreviated English message.
Translation

Enter the message you want to appear on the phone display in place of the English
message. Remember that a long message may be shortened on phones that display
fewer than 32 characters.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

985

Screen reference

change display-messages ad-programming
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Page

1 of

1

Translation

Press button to program.
1. ****************************************
Change program?
2. ***********************
Yes = 1 No = 2
3. ****************
Enter number:
4. ****************************************
Press # to save.
5. ****************
Number saved.
6. ****************************************
Change label?
7. ***********************
Enter label:
8. ****************************************
Press * to advance; # to save.
9. ******************************
Press * to reenter; # to save. 10. ******************************
Label saved. Hang up to update. 11. ****************************************

Screen 166. Language Translations — AD programming

change display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
1.

English:
AUTO WAKEUP - Ext:
Translation: ********************:

2.

English: WAKEUP ENTRY DENIED
Translation: ************************

3.

English: WAKEUP REQUEST CANCELED
Translation: ****************************************

4.

English: WAKEUP REQUEST CONFIRMED
Translation: ****************************************

5.

English: Wakeup Call
Translation: **************************************

6.

English: Time:
Translation: *****:

Page

1 of

3

Screen 167. Language Translations — Auto-Wakeup-Dn-Dst (Page 1)

986

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
7.

English:
DO NOT DIST - Ext:
Translation: ********************:

8.

English:
DO NOT DIST - Group:
Translation: ***********************:

9.

English: DO NOT DIST ENTRY DENIED
Translation: ************************

Page

10.

English: THANK YOU - DO NOT DIST ENTRY CONFIRMED
Translation: ****************************************

11.

English: THANK YOU - DO NOT DIST REQUEST CANCELED
Translation: ****************************************

2 of

3

Screen 168. Language Translations — Auto-Wakeup-Dn-Dst (Page 2)

change display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page 3 of 3

12.

English: INTERVAL FULL
Translation: *************

13.

English: NO PERMISSION
Translation: *************

14.

English: SYSTEM FULL
Translation: *************

15.

English: TOO SOON
Translation: *************

16.

English: INVALID EXTENSION - TRY AGAIN
Translation: ****************************************

17.

English: INVALID GROUP - TRY AGAIN
Translation: ****************************************

Screen 169. Language Translations — Auto-Wakeup-Dn-Dst (Page 3)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

987

Screen reference

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Abr Mark
Abr Pause
Abr Program
Abr Spec Char
Abr Stop
Abr Suppress
AbRing
Abr Wait
Account
AD
AddBusyInd
AdmConnAlarm
AfterCall
Alert Agent

Page 1 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*****
*************
*************
**********
*************
*************
**********
*************

Screen 170. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 1)

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Alternate FRL
ANI Request
Assist
ASVN Halt
AttQueueCall
AttQueueTime
Auto Callback
Auto Ckt Halt
AutoIC
Auto In
AutoWakeAlarm
Auto Wakeup
AuxWork
Busy

Page 2 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

*************
*************
**********
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*******
**********
*************
*************
********
*****

Screen 171. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 2)

988

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Button Ring
Button View
Caller Info
CFrwd
Call Park
Call Pickup
Call Time
CAS Backup
Cancel LWC
CDR1 Fail
CDR2 Fail
CFBDA
Check In
Check Out

Page 3 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

*************
*************
*************
*****
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*****
*************
*************

Screen 172. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 3)

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

ClkOverride
CO Line
Conf Display
Consult
Cover Msg Ret
CovrCallBack
CPN Block
CPN Unblock
Crisis Alert
Data
Delete Msg
Dial Icom
DID Remove
DID View

Page 4 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

************
***********
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*****
*************
**********
*************
*************

Screen 173. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 4)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

989

Screen reference

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Directory
Dir Pickup
Disp Charges
DoNotDisturb
Exclusion
ExtDoNotDstrb
Far End Mute
Flash
FTC Alarm
Goto Cover
GrpPg
GrpDoNotDstrb
Hunt NS
InCalID

Page 5 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*****
*************
**********
********

Screen 174. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 5)

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Inspect
IntAutoAnswer
License Error
Link Fail
Lock LWC
LSVN Halt
Major Alarm
Make Call
ManOverid
Manual In
MCT Activate
MCT Control
Mj/Mn Alarm

Page 6 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

*************
*************
*************
***********
*************
*************
*************
*************
************
**********
*************
*************
*************

Screen 175. Language Translation - Button Labels (page 6)

990

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

MM Basic
MM Call
MM Call Fwd
MM Data Conf
MM Mult Nbr
MM PC Audio
Msg
Msg Retrieve
MsgW
MsgWaitAct
MsgWaitDeact
MST Debug
Next
Night Service

Page 7 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*****
*************
*****
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************

Screen 176. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 7)

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

NoAnsAltr
OffBoardAlarm
PMS Failure
PMS Ptr Alarm
Priority Call
QueueCall
QueueTime
Release
RemBusyInd
ResetAlert
Ringer Off
Ring Stat
RSVN Halt
SD

Page 8 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

**********
*************
*************
*************
*************
**********
**********
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
**

Screen 177. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 8)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

991

Screen reference

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

SendAllCalls
Send TEG
Service Obsrv
Sgnl
SSVN Halt
Start Bill
Station Lock
Stored Number
Store LWC
Stroke Count
System Alarm
TermGroup
Time/Date
Timer

Page 9 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

*************
*************
*****
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
************
*************
**********
*************
*************

Screen 178. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 9)

change display-messages button-labels
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Toggle Swap :
Trunk ID
Trunk Name
Trunk NS
UUI Info
Verify
VIP Check In
VIP retry
VIP Wakeup
VOA Repeat
VU Display
WhisperAct
WhisperAnbk
WhisperOff
Work Code

Page 10 of 10

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

************
***********
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*************
*****
*************
**********
*************
*************
*************

Screen 179. Language Translations — Button Labels (page 10)

992

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages call identifiers
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
Term
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

sa
ac
tc
an
pc
rc
rt
sc
co
cs
ct
db
da
qf
hc

Page

Meaning of English term

1 of

4

Translated
Term

ACD Supervisor Assistance
Attendant Assistance Call
Attendant Control Of A Trunk Group
Attendant No Answer
Attendant Personal Call
Attendant Recall Call
Attendant Return Call
Attendant Serial Call
Controlled Outward Restriction
Controlled Station To Station Restriction
Controlled Termination Restriction
DID Find Busy Station With CO Tones
DID Recall Go To Attendant
Emergency Queue Full Redirection
Held Call Timed Reminder

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**

Screen 180. Language Translations — Call-Identifiers (Page 1)

change display-messages call identifiers
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
Term
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.

ic
ip
ld
so
na
ACB
callback
park
control
ICOM
OTQ
priority
recall
return
ARS

Page

Meaning of English term

2 of

4

Translated
Term

Intercept
Interposition Call
LDN Calls On DID Trunks
Service Observing
Unanswered Or Incomplete DID Call
Automatic Callback
Callback Call
Call Park
Control
Intercom Call
Outgoing Trunk Queuing
Priority Call
Recall Call
Return Call
Automatic Route Selection

16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:

**
**
**
**
**
********
********
********
********
********
********
********
********
********
********

Screen 181. Language Translations — Call-Identifiers (Page 2)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

993

Screen reference

change display-messages call identifiers
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
Term
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.

forward
cover
DND
p
c
n
B
f
b
d
s
to
VDN
hunt
h

Page

Meaning of English term

3 of

4

Translated
Term

Call Forwarding
Cover
Do Not Disturb
Call Pickup
Cover All Calls
Night Station Service, Including No Answer
All Calls Busy
Call Forwarding
Cover Busy
Cover Don’t Answer
Send All Calls
 to 
Vector Directory Number
Station Hunting, Origination
Station Hunting, Termination

31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:

********
********
********
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
***
********
*

Screen 182. Language Translations — Call-Identifiers (Page 3)

change display-messages call identifiers
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58:
59:
60:

English
Term

Meaning of English term

OPERATOR
EXT
OUTSIDE CALL
UNKNOWN NAME
CONFERENCE
ringing
busy
busy(I)
wait
(I)
Sta
Trk
offered
cl
vm

Operator
Extension
Outside Call
Unknown Name
Conference
Ringing
Busy
Busy With Intrusion Allowed
Wait
Intrusion
Station
Trunk
QSIG call offered to remote endpoint
Controlled Toll Restriction
Call to Attendant Out of Voicemail

Page

4 of

4

Translated
Term
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:
54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:

***************
***************
***************
***************
************
********
********
********
*****
***
*********
*********
********
**
**

Screen 183. Language Translations — Call-Identifiers (Page 4)

994

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages date-time
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********

Page

English
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.

1 of

1

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

SUNDAY
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH

APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER

11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:

20.

English: SORRY, TIME UNAVAILABLE NOW
Translation: ****************************************

***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********
***********

Screen 184. Language Translations — Date-Time (Page 1)

change display-messages leave-word-calling
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page 1 of 2

1.

English:
MESSAGES FOR
Translation: ************************

2.

English: WHOSE MESSAGES? (DIAL EXTENSION NUMBER)
Translation: ****************************************

3.

English: END OF MESSAGES (NEXT TO REPEAT)
Translation: ****************************************

4.

English: MESSAGES UNAVAILABLE - TRY LATER
Translation: ****************************************

5.

English: MESSAGE RETRIEVAL DENIED
Translation: ****************************************

6.

English: MESSAGE RETRIEVAL LOCKED
Translation: ****************************************

Screen 185. Language Translations — Leave-Word-Calling (Page 2)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

995

Screen reference

change display-messages leave-word-calling
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
7.

English: NO MESSAGES
Translation: ****************************************

8.

English: IN PROGRESS
Translation: ****************************************

9.

English: DELETED
Translation: ****************************************

10.

English: GET DIAL TONE, PUSH Cover Msg Retrieval
Translation: ****************************************

11.

English: Message Center (AUDIX) CALL
Translation: ****************************************

12.

English: CANNOT BE DELETED - CALL MESSAGE CENTER
Translation: ****************************************

Page 2 of 2

Screen 186. Language Translations — Leave-Word-Calling (Page 2)

change display-messages mailcious-call-trace
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
1.

English: MALICIOUS CALL TRACE REQUEST
Translation: ****************************************

2.

English: END OF TRACE INFORMATION
Translation: ****************************************

3.

English: original call redirected from:
Translation: *****************************:

4.

English:
voice recorder port:
Translation: *****************************:

5.

English: MCT activated by:
Translation: *****************:

Page

1 of

2

for:
****:

Screen 187. Language Translations — Malicious-Call-Trace (Page 1)

996

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages mailcious-call-trace
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page

6.

English:
party :
Translation: ******** :

(EXTENSION)
***********************

7.

English:
party :
Translation: ******** :

(ISDN SID/CNI)
****************

8.

English:
party :
Translation: ******** :

(PORT ID)
*******************

9.

English:
party :
Translation: ******** :

(ISDN PORT ID)
*******************

2 of

2

Screen 188. Language Translations — Malicious-Call-Trace (Page 2)

change display-messages miscellaneous-features
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

ALL MADE BUSY
BRIDGED
DENIED
INVALID
NO MEMBER
OUT OF SERVICE
RESTRICTED
TERMINATED
TRUNK SEIZED
VERIFIED
CDR OVERLOAD
ANSWERED BY
CALL FROM
Skills

Page

1 of 8

Translation
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:

***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************
***************

Screen 189. Language Translations — Miscellaneous-Features (Page 1)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

997

Screen reference

change display-messages miscellaneous-features
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
Meaning of English term
Term
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.

TOLL
FULL
NONE
ORIG
OTWD
CALL
INTL
Info
p
s
m
p
s
w
W

Toll
Full
None
Origination
Outward
 This Number
International
Information
Primary
Secondary
Mark
Pause
Suppress
Wait For A Specified Time
Wait For Off-Premise Dial Tone

Page

2 of 8

Translated
Term
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:

****
****
****
****
****
****
****
*****
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

Screen 190. Language Translations — Miscellaneous Features (Page 2)

change display-messages miscellaneous-features

Page 3 of 8

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
30.

English: You have adjunct messages
Translation: ****************************************

31.

English: Login Violation
Translation: ****************************************

32.

English: Barrier Code Violation
Translation: ****************************************

33.

English: Authorization Code Violation
Translation: ****************************************

34.

English: DIRECTORY - PLEASE ENTER NAME
Translation: ****************************************

35.

English: DIRECTORY UNAVAILABLE - TRY LATER
Translation: ****************************************

Screen 191. Language Translations — Miscellaneous-Features (Page 3)

998

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages miscellaneous-features

Page 4 of 8

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
36.

English: NO MATCH - TRY AGAIN
Translation: ****************************************

37.

English: NO NUMBER STORED
Translation: ****************************************

38.

English: TRY AGAIN
Translation: ****************************************

39.

English: Ext
Translation: ***

40.

English:
HUNT GROUP
Translation: ****************

41.

English: Q-time
Translation: ******

in EMRG Q
**********
NOT ADMINISTERED
*********************

calls
*****

Screen 192. Language Translations — Miscellaneous-Features (Page 4)

change display-messages miscellaneous-features
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page 5 of 8

42.

English: Add Skill: Enter number, then # sign
Translation: ****************************************

43.

English: Remove Skill: Enter number, then # sign
Translation: ****************************************

44.

English: Enter Skill Level, then # sign
Translation: ****************************************

45.

English: Enter Agent LoginID
Translation: ****************************************

46.

English: Call Type
Translation: ***************

47.

English: Call Charge
Translation: ********************

Screen 193. Language Translations — Miscellaneous-Features (Page 5)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

999

Screen reference

change display-messages miscellaneous-features
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.

English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:

Page 6 of 8

Station Security Code Violation
***************************************
ENTER REASON CODE
***************************************
Whisper From
********************
Whisper To
********************
Press button to remove.
***************************************
Press # to remove.
********************

Screen 194. Language Translations — Miscellaneous-Features (Page 6)

change display-messages miscellaneous-features
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.

English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:

Page 7 of 8

Button removed.
***************************************
Ringer On
***************************************
Ringer Off
***************************************
Ringer Abbreviated
***************************************
Ringer Delayed
***************************************
Select a held party’s line to talk.
***************************************

Screen 195. Language Translations — Miscellaneous-Features (Page 7)

1000

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages property-management
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page

1.

English:
CHECK IN - Ext:
Translation: *********************************:

2.

English: CHECK-IN: ROOM ALREADY OCCUPIED
Translation: ****************************************

3.

English: CHECK IN COMPLETE
Translation: ****************************************

4.

English: CHECK IN FAILED
Translation: ****************************************

5.

English:
CHECK OUT - Ext:
Translation: *********************************:

6.

English: CHECK OUT: ROOM ALREADY VACANT
Translation: ****************************************

1 of

6

2 of

6

Screen 196. Language Translations — Property-Management (Page 1)

change display-messages property-management
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page

7.

English: CHECK OUT FAILED
Translation: ****************************************

8.

English: MESSAGE NOTIFICATION FAILED
Translation: ****************************************

9.

English:
MESSAGE NOTIFICATION ON - Ext:
Translation: ********************************:

10.

English:
MESSAGE NOTIFICATION OFF - Ext:
Translation: ********************************:
11.
English: CHECK OUT COMPLETE: MESSAGE LAMP OFF
Translation: ****************************************
12.

English: CHECK OUT COMPLETE: MESSAGE LAMP ON
Translation: ****************************************

Screen 197. Language Translations — Property-Management (Page 2)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1001

Screen reference

change display-messages property-management
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

13.

English: MESSAGE LAMP ON
Translation: ****************************************

14.

English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:

15.
16.
17.
18.

Page

3 of

6

MESSAGE LAMP OFF
****************************************
Occupied Rooms
****************************************
Enter Room Status (1-6)
****************************************
State, Enter number from 1 - 6
****************************************
DID
*********************

Screen 198. Language Translations — Property-Management (Page 3)

change display-messages property-management
Page 4 of 6
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
19.
English: DID VIEW: EXT?
Translation: ****************************************
20.
English: DID=
CHANGE?
Translation: ****
**********************
21.
English: DID VIEW DONE
Translation: ****************************************
22.
English: NO DID AVAILABLE
Translation: ****************************************
23.
English: CHECK IN COMPLETE, DID=
Translation: *********************************

Screen 199. Language Translations — Property-Management (Page 4)

1002

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages property-management

24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.

English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:
English:
Translation:

Page 5 of 6

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
REMOVE(1), REPLACE(2)?
****************************************
DID REMOVED
****************************************
VIP CHECK IN - Ext:
****************************************
SPECIFY VID DID:
****************************************
CHECK IN COMPLETE, INVALID DID
****************************************
CHECK IN COMPLETE, DID UNAVAILABLE
****************************************

Screen 200. Language Translations — Property-Management (Page 5)

change display-messages property-management

30.

English:
Translation:
31.
English:
Translation:
32.
English:
Translation:
33.
English:
Translation:

Page 6 of 6

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
DID REMOVE - Ext:
****************************************
DID CHANGED
****************************************
AUTOMATIC ASSIGN(1), SELECT(2)?
****************************************
DID UNAVAILABLE
****************************************

Screen 201. Language Translations — Property-Management (Page 6)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1003

Screen reference

change display-messages self-administration

Page 1 of 3

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Translation

SECURITY CODE:
INCORRECT SECURITY CODE
SELECT FEATURE
EXTENSION:
OPTIONAL EXTENSION:
TEL NUM:
PRESS BUTTON TO PROGRAM
BUTTON PROGRAMMED!
INCORRECT BUTTON
BUTTON LIMIT REACHED
BUSY, TRY AGAIN LATER
YOUR PHONE IS BUSY
SECURITY CODE NEEDED
BUTTON NOT CHANGED

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

**************
************************
************************
******************
******************
********
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 202. Language Translations — Self-Administration (page 1)

change display-messages self-administration

Page 2 of 3

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****

CDR Account Code
Automatic Dialing
Call Forwarding
Call Park
Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Group Paging
Send All Calls
Conf/Trans Toggle-Swap
Activate whisper Page
Answerback for Whisper
Whisper Page Off
Blank Button

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Acct
AutoD
CFrwd
CPark
CPkUp
DPkUp
GrpPg
SAC
Swap
WspPg
WspAn
WsOff
Blank

Screen 203. Language Translations — Self-Administration (page 2)

1004

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages self-administration

Page 3 of 3

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Translation

Whisper Page Off 1. *****
Blank Button
2. *****
Done
3. *****
Cont
4. **********
Expl?
5. *****
ShortMode?
6. *****
Next
7. *****
Selct
8. *****
Clear
9. *****
Cancel
10. **********
Delete
11. *****
Replace
12. *****
Bksp
13. *****

Screen 204. Language Translations — Self-Administration (page 3)

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Analog Bridge Appearance
Abbreviated Dial Program
Abbrev Dial Character
Abbreviated Dial
Abrv/Delayed Ring Change
Auto Circuit Assurance
Admin Connection Alarm
CDR Account Code
TSA Administration Mode
ACD After Call Work
ACD Change Alert
Alternate FRL
Supervisor Assist
SVN Auth Code Halt
Attendant Queue Calls
Attendant Queue Time

Page 1 of 9

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 205. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 1)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1005

Screen reference

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Auto Message Waiting
Automatic Call Back
Automatic Dialing
Automatic Intercom
Auto-In Work Mode
Automatic Wakeup
Auxiliary Work Mode
Bridged Appearance
Busy Indicator
Call Appearance
Call Displayed Number
Call Forwarding
Call Park
Call Pickup
Caller Information
CAS (Branch) Backup

Page 2 of 9

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 206. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 2)

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

CDR 1st Printer Alarm
CDR 2nd Printer Alarm
Check In Hotel/Motel
Check Out Hotel/Motel
Call Forwarding Busy/DA
Clocked Override
Consult/Return
Coverage Callback
Cover Message Retrieve
Data Extension
Time of Day/Date Display
Delete LWC Message
Dial Intercom
Integrated Directory
Directed Call Pickup
Normal/Local Mode Toggle

Page 3 of 9

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 207. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 3)

1006

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Do Not Disturb
Drop
Off-Board DS1 Alarm
Manual Exclusion
Do Not Disturb Extension
Flash
Go To Cover
Do Not Disturb Group
Group Paging
Headset On/Off
Hunt Night Service
Coverage Call Identify
Inspect Call Appearance
Internal Auto Answer
Last Number Dialed
Link Failure Alarm

Page 4 of 9

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 208. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 4)

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Login Security Violation
Cancel Leave Word Call
Lockout Leave Word Call
Leave Word Call Message
Major Hardware Alarm
Manual Message Waiting
Manual Override
ACD Manual-In
MCT Call Trace Activate
MCT Call Trace Control
Major/Minor Alarm
Message Retrieve
Message Waiting On
Message Waiting Off
Next
Night Service Activate

Page 5 of 9

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 209. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 5)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1007

Screen reference

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Redirect On No Answer
Normal Display Mode
Personal CO Line
Property Management Fail
Wakeup Printer Alarm
Print Messages
Priority Calling
PMS Printer Alarm
System Printer Alarm
Number of Queued Calls
Oldest Queued Time
ACD Release
Ringer Cut-Off
System Reset Alert
Remote Access Violation
Scroll Mode

Page 6 of 9

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 210. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 6)

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Send All Calls
TEG Send All Calls
Service Observing
Manual Signalling
Station Security Call
Stored Number Display
Stroke Counts
Term Extension Group
Timer
Facility Test Call Alarm
Trunk ID
Trunk Name
Trunk Night Service
UUI Info
Busy Verification
VDN of Origin Announce

Page 7 of 9

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 211. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 7)

1008

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Vu-Stats Displays
Activate Whisper Page
Whisper Page Answerback
Whisper Page Off
Call Work Code
Unassigned Button
View Button
Call Timer
Add Busy Indicator
Remove Busy Indicator
VIP Wakeup
VIP Retry
Crisis Alert
DID View
DID Remove
VIP Check In

Page 8 of 9

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 212. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 8)

change display-messages view-buttons
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Station Lock
License Error
Conference Display
Conf/Trans Toggle-Swap
No Hold Conference
Far End Mute

Page

9 of

9

Translation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

************************
************************
************************
************************
************************
************************

Screen 213. Language Translations — View-buttons (page 9)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1009

Screen reference

change display-messages vustats

Page

1 of

1

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

1.

FORMAT

1. *******

2.
3.

NOT DEFINED
DOES NOT ALLOW OR REQUIRE ID

2. *****************************
3. *****************************

4.
5.
6.
7.

AGENT
SPLIT/SKILL
TRUNK GROUP
VDN

4.
5.
6.
7.

8. NOT ADMINISTERED
9. NOT MEASURED

************
************
************
************

8. *****************
9. *****************

10. AGENT NOT LOGGED IN

10. ****************************************

Screen 214. Language Translations — Vustats

change display-messages softkey-labels

Page

1 of

1

LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
English

Translation

English

Translation

English

Translation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.

17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.

33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.

33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.

Acct
AD
AdBsy
Admin
AutCB
BtnVu
CFrwd
CnfDs
CnLWC
Cnslt
Count
CPark
CPkUp
CTime
Dir
DPkUp

*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****

Drop
Excl
GrpPg
HFAns
IAuto
IDial
Inspt
Last
LWC
Mark
Pause
PCall
Prog
RmBsy
RngOf
SAC

*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****

SFunc
Spres
Stats
Stop
Swap
Timer
TmDay
View
Wait
WspAn
WspPg

*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****

Screen 215. Language Translations — Softkey-Labels

In order to provide unique labeling for abbreviated dialing button types for
softkey-labels, the switch replaces the last two characters with digits for the
12-key 8400 and 15-key 8434D phones.
On the softkey label language translation screen, the digits following the “AD”
are derived from the button position. If the first button is an AD button, then it is
AD1 and the fifteenth button is AD15. All the AD buttons between 1 and 15 have
the position number appended to “AD.”

1010

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages time-of-day-routing
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page

1.

English: ENTER ACTIVATION ROUTE PLAN, DAY & TIME
Translation: ****************************************

2.

English: ENTER DEACTIVATION DAY AND TIME
Translation: ****************************************

3.

English:
OLD ROUTE PLAN:
Translation: *****************:

ENTER NEW PLAN:
*****************:

4.

English:
OLD ROUTE PLAN:
Translation: *****************:

NEW PLAN:
**************:

5.

English: ROUTE PLAN:
Translation: **********:

FOR
****

ACT-TIME:
**********:

6.

English: ROUTE PLAN:
Translation: **********:

FOR
****

DEACT-TIME:
**********:

1 of

1

Screen 216. Language Translations — Time-Of-Day-Routing

change display-messages transfer-conference
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page 1 of 4

1.

English: Transfer completed.
Translation: ********************************

2.

English: Call next party.
Translation: ****************************************

3.

English: Press conference to add party.
Translation: ****************************************

4.

English: ^-party conference in progress.
Translation: ****************************************

5.

English: Conference canceled.
Translation: ****************************************

6.

English: Select line ^ to cancel or another line.
Translation: ****************************************

Screen 217. Language Translations Transfer-conference (page 1)
NOTE:

For Messages 4, 6, 12, you manually must change “~” to “^” in your
user-defined language. The software will not update automatically.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1011

Screen reference

Message 4

The character “^ “is a place holder.
English Text

Replacement Info

^-party conference in progress

“^” is replaced with the number of parties
currently on the conference call.

Message 6

The character “^ “is a place holder.
English Text

Replacement Info

Select line ^ to cancel or another
line.

“ ^ ” is replaced with the letter of the line
that is on soft hold.

change display-messages transfer-conference
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page 2 of 4

7.

English: Dial number.
Translation: ****************************************

8.

English: Press transfer to complete.
Translation: ****************************************

9.

English: Hang-up to complete transfer.
Translation: ****************************************

10.

English: Dial number or select held party.
Translation: ****************************************

11.

English: Select held party to conference.
Translation: ****************************************

12.

English: Select line ^ to add party.
Translation: ****************************************

Screen 218. Language Translations Transfer-conference (page 2)

1012

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Language Translations

change display-messages transfer-conference
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page 3 of 4

13.

English: Select alerting line to answer call.
Translation: ****************************************

14.

English: Transfer canceled.
Translation: ****************************************

15.

English: Connecting to ^.
Translation: ****************************************

16.

English: Called party ^is busy.
Translation: ****************************************

17.

English: Invalid number dialed Translation: ***************************

18.

English: Party ^ is not available.
Translation: ***************************

Screen 219. Language Translations Transfer-conference (page 3)

Message 15, 16, 18

The character “^ “is a place holder.
English Text

Replacement Info

Select line ^ to add party.

“ ^ ” is replaced with the letter of the line
that is on soft hold.

change display-messages transfer-conference
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS
19.

Page 4 of 4

English: Mute.
Translation: ****

Screen 220. Language Translations Transfer-conference (page 4)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1013

Screen reference

Message 12

The character “^ “is a place holder.
English Text

Replacement Info

Select line ^ to add party.

“ ^ ” is replaced with the letter of the line
that is on soft hold.

change display-messages vustats
LANGUAGE TRANSLATIONS

Page

1 of

English

Translations

1.
2.
3.

FORMAT
NOT DEFINED
DOES NOT ALLOW OR REQUIRE ID

1.
2.
3.

*******
*******
*******

4.
5.
6.
7.

AGENT
SPLIT/SKILL
TRUNK GROUP
VND

4.
5.
6.
7.

*****************************
*****************************
*****************************
*****************************

8.
9.

NOT ADMINISTERED
NOT MEASURED

8.
9.

*****************
*****************

10.

AGENT NOT LOGGED IN

10.

1

***********************************

Screen 221. Language Translations — VuStats

1014

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Listed Directory Numbers

Listed Directory Numbers
Allows Direct Inward Dialing (DID) numbers to be treated as public Listed
Directory Numbers (LDNs). When one of these numbers is direct inward dialed,
the calling party is routed to the attendant. The attendant display indicates a Listed
Directory Number call and the name associated with the dialed extension.
The number of Listed Directory Numbers that can be assigned varies depending
on system configuration. See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware
Guide for maximum values.
change listed-directory-number
LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS

Page

1 of

2

Night Destination:
Ext

Name

TN

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Screen 222. Listed Directory Numbers

Ext
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 8 digits

Enter the extension number.

Name
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27
alphanumeric
characters

Enter a name used to identify the Listed Directory
Number

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1015

Screen reference

Night Destination

Enter the valid assigned extension number that will receive calls to these numbers
when Night Service is active.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

(1 to 8 digits)

For DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect. Enter a night
service extension, a recorded announcement extension, a
Vector Directory Number, an individual attendant extension,
or a hunt group extension.

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 100

Enter the Tenant Partition number.

TN

List Usage Report for node-name

list usage node-name inde-e72
LIST USAGE REPORT
Used By
Processor Channel
TFTP Server

Channel Number 4

Destination Node
Local Node

Screen 223. List Usage Report for local node

The node name, inde-e72, displays as Local Node if it was defined as the local
node name on the TFTP Server screen.
Local Node Name

Displays when the node name is used on the TFTP Server screen as the local node
name.
TFTP Server

Displays when the node name is used on the TFTP Server screen as the local or
server node name.

1016

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

List Usage Report for ip-address

list usage node-name inde-e72
LIST USAGE REPORT
Used By
Processor Channel
TFTP Server

Channel Number 4

Destination Node
Server Node Name

Screen 224. List Usage Report for server node name

The node name, inde-e72, displays as Server Node Name if it was defined as the
server node name on the TFTP Server screen.
Server Node Name

Displays when the node name is used on the TFTP Server screen as the TFTP
server node name.
TFTP Server

Displays when the node name is used on the TFTP Server screen as the local or
server node name.

List Usage Report for ip-address

list usage ip-address 135.9.76.72
LIST USAGE REPORT
Used By
IP Route
Node Name
Processor Channel
TFTP Server

Route Number
2
IP Name
Channel Number 4

inde-372

Destination Node
IP Address
Destination Node
Local Node

Screen 225. List Usage Report for local node

The node name, inde-e72, displays as Local Node if it was defined as the local
node name on the TFTP Server screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1017

Screen reference

Local Node Name

Displays when the IP address is used on the TFTP Server screen as the local node.
TFTP Server

Displays when the IP address is used on the TFTP Server screen as the local or
server node name.

list usage ip-address 135.9.76.72
LIST USAGE REPORT
Used By
IP Route
Node Name
Processor Channel
IP Service
TFTP Server

Route Number
IP Name
Channel Number
Service Type

2
inde-372
4
SAT

Destination Node
IP Address
Destination Node
Local Node
Server Node Name

Screen 226. List Usage Report for server node name

The node name, inde-e72, displays as Server Node Name if it was defined as the
TFTP server node name on the TFTP Server screen.
Server Node Name

Displays when the IP address is used on the TFTP Server screen as the server
node name.
TFTP Server

Displays when the IP address is used on the TFTP Server screen as the local or
server node name.

Locations
Use the Locations screen to provide daylight savings time displays to users, to set
the area code for each location, and to administer different location information
for each location. You can administer up to 64 location specifications depending
on the configuration of your switch if the Multiple Locations field is y on the
System Parameters Customer Options screen. Otherwise, information for location
1 applies to all your locations.

1018

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Locations

change locations

Page 1 of 3
LOCATIONS
ARS Prefix 1 Required for 10-Digit NANP Calls? _

Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Name

Timezone
Offset

Daylight-Savings
Rule

Number Plan
Area Code

____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________

_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

Screen 227. Locations screen

ARS Prefix 1 Required for 10-Digit NANP Calls?
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y when a 1 must be dialed before all 10-digit NANP
calls.

Daylight-Savings Rule

This field must be filled in for each administered location.
Valid entries

Usage

0

No Daylight Savings

1 to 15 or
blank

Specifies the number for each Daylight-Savings Rule (set
up on the Daylight Savings Rule screen) that is applied to
this location.

Name

Identifies the switch associated with each location number.
Valid entries

Usage

up to 15
alphanumeric
characters

A name you use for the location. Names are easier to
remember than location numbers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1019

Screen reference

Number

Displays the location number (1 to 44). Corresponding entries in each row define
the numbering plan and daylight savings rule for each location number.
Number Plan Area Code
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the 3-digit numbering plan area code for each
location.

Timezone Offest

Timezone offset is actually 3 fields (+/-, hour, and minute) that specify how much
time each location differs from the system time. This field must be completed for
each administered location. Use +00:00 for the time zone offset for a single
location switch.
Valid entries

Usage

+

Shows that the time set on this location is a certain amount
of time ahead of the system time.

-

Shows that the time set on this location is a certain amount
of time behind the system time.

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 23

Shows the number of hours difference between this location
and system time.

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 59

Shows the number of minutes difference between this
location and system time.

Login Administration
When your Avaya MultiVantage is delivered, one customer super-user login and
password combination is already defined. You must administer additional logins
and passwords, if needed. If you are the super-user, you have full customer
permissions and can customize any login you create. The maximum number of
customer logins is 11.
As super-user, you can establish permissions for the other logins in your system.
You can block access to any object that may compromise switch security. Once
the user login is established, set permissions using the Command Permission
Categories screen.

1020

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Login Administration

Field descriptions for page 1

add login

Page 1 of 2
LOGIN ADMINISTRATION
Password of Login Making Change:

LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED
Login’s Name:xxxxxxx
Login Type:
Service Level:
Disable Following a Security Violation?
Access to INADS Port? _
LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password:
Reenter Login’s Password:
Password Aging Cycle Length (Days):
LOGOFF NOTIFICATION
Facility Test Call Notification?
Remote Access Notification?

Acknowledgment Required?
Acknowledgment Required?

ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
Access Security Gateway?

Screen 228. Login Administration

Password of Login Making Change

You can make changes to any login with permissions less than your own. You
must enter your password to save any changes you make to this screen.
Valid entries

Usage

User
password

Enter your password.

LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED
Access to INADS Port

This field only appears when the Customer Access to INADS Port field is set to y
on the Maintenance-Related System-Parameters screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow a user to access the remote
administration port.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1021

Screen reference

Disable Following a Security Violation

This field only appears when the SVN Login Violation Notification field is set to
y on the Security-Related System-Parameters screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to have the login disabled following a security
violation.

Login’s Name

This display-only field shows the login name specified with the add command.
Login Type
Valid entries

Usage

Customer

Enter customer to indicate the login belongs to
a customer. This is the only valid value for
customer logins.

Service Level
Valid entries

Usage

super-user

Enter super-user to indicate the user is a super-user.
Super-user logins can use the add, change, display, list,
and remove commands for all customer logins and
passwords.

non-super-user

Enter non-super-user to indicate the user is a
non-super-user. Non-super-user logins can change their
own password, but are otherwise limited to permissions
set by super-user.

LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password

Passwords must be 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1 alphabetic
and 1 numeric character. Passwords do not display as you type.

1022

Valid entries

Usage

A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and ! &
*?;’^(),.:-

Enter the initial password for login, assigned by
the super-user.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Login Administration

Password Aging Cycle Length (Days)

For security, you should assign password aging to all passwords. The system
tracks a password from the day the login was created, or the day the user last
changed the password.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 99

Enter the number of days the password
remains valid.

Re-enter Login’s Password

Passwords do not display as you type.
Valid entries

Usage

A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and ! & * ? ;
’ ^ () , . : -

Re-enter the initial password for the login,
assigned by the super-user.

LOGOFF NOTIFICATION
Facility Test Call Notification

For security, this field should be set to y for all logins.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to have the user receive notification at logoff if
Facility Test Notification is still administered.

Facility Test Call Notification —
Acknowledgment Required
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to require the user to acknowledge they want to logoff
while Facility Test Notification is still administered.

Remote Access Notification

For security, this field should be set to y for all logins.
Valid
entries
y/n

555-233-506

Usage

Enter y to have the user receive notification at logoff if remote
access is still administered.

Issue 5 October 2002

1023

Screen reference

Remote Access Notification —
Acknowledgment Required
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to require the user to acknowledge they want to logoff
while remote access is still administered.

ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY
Access Security Gateway

This field appears only if the Access Security Gateway (ASG) field on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is set to y.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to have ASG administered for the login ID.

Field descriptions for page 2

This page only appears if the Access Security Gateway field is set to y on page 1.
add login

Page 2 of 2
ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY LOGIN ADMINISTRATION

Blocked?: n
System Generated Secret Key?: n

Secret Key: ____________________

EXPIRATION CRITERIA
Expiration Date: __/__/____
Number of Sessions: __
RESTRICTION CRITERIA
Restrict Days of Week
Monday? n
Tuesday? n
Saturday? n
Sunday? n
Restrict From Time: __:__

Wednesday? n

Thursday? n

Friday? n

Restrict To Time: __:__

Screen 229. Access Security Gateway Login Administration

1024

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Login Administration

Blocked

Setting the Blocked field to y does not remove the login ID from the system.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to temporarily disable the login ID from accessing the
system through the ASG interface.

Expiration Date

Expiration of the login ID occurs at 23:59:59 of the entered date. This field
consists of three fields separated by forward slashes (for example, 01/01/1999).
Expiration of a login ID does not remove the login ID from the system. The
system accepts administration of year 2000 dates.
If an login ID requiring ASG authentication has expired, the login ID for the
standard login is not available. If an login ID not requiring ASG login has expired,
the login ID still may be active for the standard login as long as expiration criteria
associated with that component of the login has not been satisfied.
Valid entries

Usage

mm = month, dd = day,
and yyyy = year (later

Enter the date when the associated login ID
expires.

than the current date)
Number of Sessions

Expiration of a login ID administered with both Expiration Date and Number of
Sessions expiration criteria is based on whichever criteria is satisfied first.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 999

Enter the number of times the login ID can be
used to access the system via the ASG
interface.

Restrict Days of Week

This field consists of seven subfields that correspond to the seven days of the
week. Each subfield specifies whether the corresponding login ID is restricted
from accessing the system via ASG on the day indicated. Access restrictions
imposed by this field apply to the entire day unless limited by time restrictions.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to restrict the login from accessing the
system on the associated day of the week.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1025

Screen reference

Restrict From Time and Restrict to Time

These two fields are separated by colons, for example, hh:mm where hh = hour
and mm = minute. Periods that span an interval that crosses a day boundary are
specified by setting the Restrict From Time field greater than the Restrict To Time
field. For example, a Restriction From Time of 17:00 and a Restrict To Time of
08:00 limits access to the traditional working hours, 8 to 5.
When used with the Restrict Days of Week field, overnight periods start on the
days where access is not restricted by the Restrict Day of Week field.
If the Restrict Days of Week field is not specified, the restricted time interval
specified by the Restrict From Time to Restrict To Time fields applies to every
day of the week.
Valid entries

Usage

00:00 to 23:59

Enter the time interval each day the login ID is
blocked from accessing the system via the ASG
interface.

Secret Key

The value of this field is only displayed during the initial add or change login
command to allow it to be programmed into any ASG Site Manager, ASG Mobile,
or ASG Pass-Key used to interact with ASG for user authentication.
If the System Generated Secret Key field is set to y, the system generates the
secret key. If the System Generated Secret Key field is set to n, the administrator
is required to enter a 20-digit octal value. It is important to note the value of the
secret key so you can enter it into response generation devices.
Valid entries

Usage

20-digit octal string using
0-7 as possible digits

Enter the 20-digit octal value used by both the
lock and the key to verify user authenticity. The
last digit must be 0 and the second to last digit
must be either 0, 2, 4, or 6.

System Generated Secret Key

1026

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to generate the secret key by the system and display it
to the administrator.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Loudspeaker Paging

Loudspeaker Paging
The Loudspeaker Paging screen administers voice paging, deluxe voice paging,
and chime paging.

change paging loudspeaker

Page

1 of

1

LOUDSPEAKER PAGING
CDR? _
Voice Paging Timeout (sec): ___
Code Calling Playing Cycles: _
PAGING PORT ASSIGNMENTS
Voice Paging
Zone Port
TAC COR TN
1: _______
____ __
_
2: _______
____ __
_
3: _______
____ __
_
4: _______
____ __
_
5: _______
____ __
_
6: _______
____ __
_
7: _______
____ __
_
8: _______
____ __
_
9: _______
____ __
_
ALL: _______
____ __
_

Code
TAC
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Calling
COR TN
__
_
__
_
__
_
__
_
__
_
__
_
__
_
__
_
__
_
__
_

Location:
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________

Screen 230. Loudspeaker Paging

CDR

This field determines whether CDR data is collected for the paging ports.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if you want the switch to collect CDR data on the
paging ports.

Code Calling — COR

This field assigns a Class of Restriction to a paging zone.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 95.

You can assign different classes of restriction to different
zones.

blank

Leave this field blank for unused paging zones.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1027

Screen reference

Code Calling Playing Cycles

This field sets the number of times a chime code will play when a user makes a
chime page. To determine the best setting, consider who your code calling users
are and whether they are likely to hear the code chime the first time.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 3

Enter the number of times you want the chime code to play
when a user makes a page.

blank

The field may not be blank when you administer chime
paging (code calling).

Code Calling — TAC

This field assigns a Trunk Access Code (TAC) to a paging zone. Users dial this
code to make a page to a specific zone. One TAC must be assigned to each zone
you want to use. Two zones cannot have the same TAC. If you enter a TAC in the
ALL field, users may activate speakers in all the zones by dialing that code.
Valid entries

Usage

1- to 4-digits

Enter a Trunk Access Code (TAC) allowed by your dial plan.

*

May be used as first digit.

#

May be used as first digit.

blank

Leave this field blank for unused paging zones.

Code Calling — TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 20

If your system uses Tenant Partitioning, you may use
this field to assign a paging zone to a specific tenant
partition.

(DEFINITY SI,
CSI)
1 to 100

(DEFINITY R,
S8300 Media
Server, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

1028

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Loudspeaker Paging

Location
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 27 characters

Assign a descriptive name for the physical
location corresponding to each zone. Typical
entries might be “conference room A,”
“warehouse,” or “storeroom.”

Port

This field assigns a port on an auxiliary trunk circuit pack to a paging zone. Enter
the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

blank

Leave this field blank for unused paging zones.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1029

Screen reference

Voice Paging — COR

This field assigns a Class of Restriction to a paging zone.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 95.

You can assign different classes of restriction to different
zones.

blank

Leave this field blank for unused paging zones.

Voice Paging — TAC

This field assigns a Trunk Access Code (TAC) to a paging zone. Users dial this
code to make a page to a specific zone. One TAC must be assigned to each zone
you want to use. Two zones cannot have the same TAC. If you enter a TAC in the
ALL field, users may activate speakers in all the zones by dialing that code.
Valid entries

Usage

1- to 4-digits

Enter a Trunk Access Code (TAC) allowed by your dial plan.

*

May be used as first digit.

#

May be used as first digit.

blank

Leave this field blank for unused paging zones.

Voice Paging Timeout (sec)

This field limits the duration of voice pages. When this interval ends, calls are
disconnected. To determine the best setting, time the typical pages you expect to
broadcast and then add another 4 to 5 seconds.
Valid entries

Usage

10 to 600

Enter the maximum number of seconds you want any page to
last.

seconds.
blank

The field may not be blank when you administer voice
paging.
NOTE:

To use a port that has no hardware associated with it, place an ‘X’ in this
field.

1030

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Media-Gateway

Voice Paging — TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 20

If your system uses Tenant Partitioning, you may use
this field to assign a paging zone to a specific tenant
partition.

(DEFINITY SI,
CSI)
1 to 100
(DEFINITY R,
S8300 Media
Server, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)
Related topics

See ‘‘Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers’’ on page 473 or ‘‘Setting up
chime paging over loudspeakers’’ on page 476 for instructions.
See ‘‘Loudspeaker paging’’ on page 1753 for a description of the feature.

Media-Gateway
This screen administers the media gateways and their corresponding ports. It is
required to exist on all Communications Controllers, both external and internal,
that support Media Gateways. This screen does not apply to DEFINITY R.
Field descriptions for page 1

add media-gateway x

Page

1 of 1

MEDIA-GATEWAY
Number:
Name:
IP Address:
Network Region:
Site Data:

___
____________________ Identifier:
_______________
MAC Address:
____
Location:
____________________ Registered?
____________________

_____________________
_________________
__
_

Slot Module Type
V1: # ________
V2: __________
V3: __________
V4: __________

V8: messaging-analog
V9: gateway-announcements

Screen 231. Media-Gateway Administration screen

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1031

Screen reference

Identifier

This field is for the controller to identify the gateway.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 20 characters or blank

Enter the serial number or other alpha-numeric
characters for identification.

IP Address

A display-only field containing the IP address of the media gateway. This field
displays a blank until the media gateway registers for the first time.
Location

This field refers to a time-zone offset, daylight savings rule and number plan area
code.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 10

Enter a number between 1-X or blank where X
is the maximum value for the different
communications controllers.

MAC Address

A display-only field containing the MAC address of the media gateway.
Module Type

Fields V1 through V4 list the Media Gateway media modules.
Valid entries

Usage

analog

Enter the actual hardware media module.

bri
dcp
icc
voip
ds1

Field V8 lists a “virtual” media modules (available in August).
Valid entries

Usage

messaging-analog or

Messaging will be administered in this slot.

blank

1032

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Media-Gateway

Field V9 lists a “virtual” media modules (available in December).
Valid entries

Usage

gateway-announcements

Announcement will be administered in this
slot.

or blank
Name

This field is for customer naming of the gateway.
Valid entries

Usage

1- to 20-alphanumeric character
string or blank

Enter the alpha-numeric characters
for identification.

Network Region

This field is used by the communications controller to allocate resources from the
nearest media gateway.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 80 (DEFINITY

Enter a number between 1-X or blank where X
is the maximum value for the different
communications controllers.

CSI, SI)
1 through 250 (S8300
Media Server, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)
Number

A display-only field showing the assigned media-gateway number.
Registered

A display-only field indicating whether a Media Gateway is registered with a
communications controller.
Valid entries

Usage

1 character

Enter a number between 1-X or blank where X
is the maximum value for the different
communications controllers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1033

Screen reference

Site Data

This field is for general site information.
Valid entries

Usage

2 lines of 20 characters or
blank

Enter the alpha-numeric characters for
identification.

Meet-me Vector Directory Numbers
Field descriptions for page 1

list meet-me-vdn
MEET-ME VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER

Name

Ext

Access
Code COR

Secure Meet-me Conference
4000
Nonsecure Meet-me Conference 4006

*

1
1

TN
1
1

Vec Control
Num
Ext
1
2

84590

Screen 232. Meet-me Vector Directory Numbers screen

If the Access Code field shows an asterisk (*), an access code is assigned. If the
Access Code field is blank, no access code is assigned. The access code displays
for administrators with super-user permissions (such as init).

Mode Code Related System
Parameters
This screen establishes parameters associated with the Mode Code Voice Mail
System Interface.
NOTE:

You can only administer this screen if the Mode Code Interface field on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen is set to y.

1034

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Mode Code Related System Parameters

Field descriptions for page 1

change system-parameters mode-code

Page

1

MODE CODE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
MODE CODES (FROM SWITCH TO
Direct Inside Access:
Direct Dial Access - Trunk:
Internal Coverage:
External Coverage:

VMS)
__
__
__
__

Refresh MW Lamp: __
System In Day Service: __
System In Night Service: __
OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS
DTMF Duration On (msec): __ Off (msec): __ Sending Delay (msec):__
VMS Hunt Group Extension : ____
Remote VMS Extensions - First:
Second:

Screen 233. Mode Code Related System Parameters screen

MODDE CODES (FROM SWITCH TO VMS)
Direct Dial Access - Trunk

This value defines a mode code that the switch sends when an external caller dials
the VMS access number.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9, #, *,
#00

Up to six digits that may include these characters

Direct Inside Access

This value defines a mode code that the switch sends when a caller at an internal
extension dials the Voice Mail System (VMS) access number.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9, #, *,
#00

Up to six digits that may include these characters

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1035

Screen reference

External Coverage

This value defines a mode code that the switch sends when an external caller tries
to reach a user at another extension and the call goes to the user’s voice mail
coverage.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9, #, *,
#00

Up to six digits that may include these characters

Internal Coverage

This value defines a mode code that the switch sends when an internal caller tries
to reach a user at another extension and the call goes to the user’s voice mail
coverage.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9, #, *,
#00

Up to six digits that may include these characters

Refresh MW Lamp

This value defines a mode code that the switch sends during a system level 3 or
higher reset that requests the VMS to refresh the Message Waiting (MW) lamps.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9, #, *,
#00

Up to six digits that may include these characters

System In Day Service

This value indicates to the VMS that the Avaya MultiVantage has changed from
Night to Day Service.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9, #, *,
#11

Up to six digits that may include these characters

System In Night Service

This value indicates to the VMS that the Avaya MultiVantage has changed from
Day to Night Service.

1036

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9, #, *,
#12

Up to six digits that may include these characters

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Mode Code Related System Parameters

OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS
DTMF Duration On
Valid entries

Usage

Between 75 and 500
in multiples of 25

Define in milliseconds the length of mode code digits
sent to the VMS. This field cannot be blank

Off
Valid entries

Usage

Between 75 and
200 in multiples of
25

Define in milliseconds the pause between mode code
digits as they are sent to the VMS. This field cannot be
blank.

Remote VMS Extensions - First

You can administer this field if the Mode Code for Centralized Voice Mail field on
the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is set to y. Specifies the first
remote UDP VMS hunt group extension.
Valid entries

Usage

Remote assigned hunt group
extension

Enter the first UDP VMS hunt group
extension.

Remote VMS Extensions - Second

You can administer this field if the Mode Code for Centralized Voice Mail field on
the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is set to y. Specifies the second
remote UDP VMS hunt group extension.
Valid entries

Usage

Remote assigned hunt
group extension

Enter the second UDP VMS hunt group
extension. This extension cannot be the same as
the first Remote VMS Extension.

Sending Delay
Valid
entries
75 to 1000 in

multiples of
25

555-233-506

Usage

Define in milliseconds the delay between the time the switch
receives answer supervision from the VMS and the time the
first mode code digit is sent. This field cannot be blank.

Issue 5 October 2002

1037

Screen reference

VMS Hunt Group Extension

A check is made to verify that a valid hunt group extension is entered, but a check
is not made to verify that the hunt group members are VMI extensions.
Valid entries

Usage

Extension of a hunt group containing VMI
extensions.

Modem Pool Group
There are two types of conversion resources for Modem Pooling. The first type,
an integrated conversion resource, is a circuit pack that emulates a Trunk Data
Module connected to a 212A-type modem. Two conversion resources are on each
circuit pack.
The second type, a combined conversion resource, is a separate Trunk Data
Module and modem administered as a unit. The Trunk Data Module component of
the conversion resource may be either a Modular Trunk Data Module (MTDM) or
7400A Data Module and connects to a digital port using Digital Communications
Protocol (DCP); the modem connects to an analog port.
Field descriptions for page 1

change modem-pool num

Page 1 of 1
MODEM POOL GROUP

Group Number:
Receiver Responds to Remote Loop?
Send Space Disconnect?
CF-CB Common?
Speed: LOW/300/1200

1
n
y
y

Group Type:
Hold Time (min):
Receive Space Disconnect?
Loss of Carrier Disconnect?

Duplex: full

CIRCUIT PACK ASSIGNMENTS
Circuit Pack
Location
1: ___
2: ___
3: ___
4: ___
5: ___
6: ___
7: ___
8: ___

integrated
5
y
y

Synchronization: a/sync

Circuit Pack
Location
9: ___
10: ___
11: ___
12: ___
13: ___
14: ___
15: ___
16: ___

Screen 234. Modem Pool Group — Integrated screen if Group Type is integrated

1038

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Modem Pool Group

change modem-pool num

Page 1 of 1

Group Number:
Modem Name:
Time Delay:
Answer Supervision Timeout(sec):
Speed: LOW/300/1200___
PORT PAIR ASSIGNMENTS
Analog Digital
1: _____ _____
2: _____ _____
3: _____ _____
4: _____ _____
5: _____ _____
6: _____ _____
7: _____ _____
8: _____ _____

9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

Analog
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

MODEM POOL GROUP
_
Group Type: combined
______ Hold Time (min): 5_
0_
Direction: two-way
_
Duplex: full

Digital
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:

Synchronization: async

Analog
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Digital
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______

25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:

Analog
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Digital
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Screen 235. Modem Pool Group — Combined screen if Group Type is combined
NOTE:

The Speed, Duplex, and Synchronization fields cannot be filled out for the
“integrated” pooled modem screens but can be assigned on the “combined”
pooled modem screen. The integrated conversion resource automatically
will adjust its speed and synchronization to the endpoint it is connected to.
In synchronous mode, the integrated modem pool can operate at 1200 baud.
In asynchronous mode, it can operate at 300 or 1200 baud. Full-duplex
operation is always used.
Answer Supervision Timeout (sec)

Enter the period of time to wait before the far-end answers. This field appears only
when the Group Type field is combined.
Valid
entries

Usage

1–255
0

555-233-506

No answer supervision

Issue 5 October 2002

1039

Screen reference

CF-CB Common

This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate that the CF and CB leads on the
conversion resource are logically connected.

Direction

Enter the direction of the call for which modem pool will operate. This field
appears only when the Group Type field is combined.
Valid entries

Usage

incoming

Converts an analog signal to digital for the data endpoint.

outgoing

Converts analog to digital (or digital to analog) for data
calls.

two-way

Allows incoming and outgoing data communication.

Duplex

Display-only when the Group Type field is integrated. When the Group Type
field is combined, enter the duplex mode of the conversion resources in the
group.
Valid entries

Usage

full

Can talk and listen at the same time.

half

Cannot talk and listen at the same time.

Group Number

A display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command such as add or change.
Group Type

This field designates what physical model pool you are going to.

1040

Valid entries

Usage

integrated

Maps to the Pooled Modem circuit pack.

combined

Maps to an external modem pool (when you have a data
module and a modem).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Modem Pool Group

Hold Time (min)

Enter the maximum number of minutes that a conversion resource in the group
may be held while a call waits in a queue or reserved after Data Call
Preindication.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 99

Loss of Carrier Disconnect

This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to permit conversion resource to disconnect if it
detects a dropped carrier.

Modem Name

Indicates the name of the modem pool. This field appears only when the Group
Type field is combined.
Valid entries

Usage

1- to 6-alphanumeric character string
Receive Space Disconnect

This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the conversion resource to disconnect after
receiving 1.6 seconds of space.

Receiver Responds to Remote Loop

This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the far-end modem to put conversion
resource into loop back mode.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1041

Screen reference

Send Space Disconnect

This field appears only when the Group Type field is integrated.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the conversion resource to send 4 seconds of
space before disconnecting.

Speed

Display-only when the Group Type field is integrated. When the Group Type
field is combined, enter the communication speed in bits per second of the
conversion resources in the group. Enter one to three speeds separated by slashes
(for example, 300/1200/2400) to indicate a maximum of three running speeds.
Valid entries

Usage

LOW

0 to 300 blind sampled

300
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200

Synchronization

Display-only when the Group Type field is integrated. When the Group Type
field is combined, enter the synchronization mode of the conversion resources in
the group.
Valid entries

Usage

sync

Synchronous

async

Asynchronous

CIRCUIT PACK ASSIGNMENTS are optional on “integrated” conversion

resource screens only.

1042

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Modem Pool Group

Time Delay

Enter the time delay in seconds to insert between sending the ringing to the
modem and the off-hook alert to the data module. This field appears only when
the Group Type field is combined.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 255

CIRCUIT PACK ASSIGNMENTS
Circuit Pack Location

Displays when the Group Type field is integrated. Enter the port associated with
the conversion resource on the integrated modem pool circuit pack. Enter the
necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1043

Screen reference

For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit number
(port) 12.
PORT PAIR ASSIGNMENTS are optional on “combined” pooled modem screens

only.
PORT PAIR ASSIGNMENTS
Analog Digital

Displays when the Group Type field is combined. Enter the port numbers of the
modem/TDM pair in a conversion resource.
Two port entries are required.Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

NOTE:

For example, 01A0612 is in cabinet 01, carrier A, slot 06, and circuit
number (port) 12.

1044

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related
System Parameters
This screen sets the system parameters associated with multifrequency signaling.
Screen 236 on page 1045 appears when Incoming Call Type is group-ii-mfc and
Outgoing Call Type is none. Screen 237 on page 1054 appears when both
Incoming Call Type and Outgoing Call Type are group-ii-mfc.
If the field, Use COR for All Group II Responses, is set to y, the Group II Called
Party Category and Use COR for Calling Party Category fields do not appear.
change system-parameters multifrequency-signaling

Page

1 of

4

MULTIFREQUENCY-SIGNALING-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Incoming Call Type:
ANI Prefix:
Outgoing Call Type:
ANI for PBX:
Maintenance Call Type:
NEXT ANI DIGIT
Test Call Extension:
Incoming:
Interdigit Timer (sec):
Outgoing:
Maximum Resend Requests: _
Received Signal Gain (dB): _
Transmitted Signal Gain (dB): Request Incoming ANI (non-AAR/ARS)?
Outgoing Forward Signal Present Timer (sec):
Outgoing Forward Signal Absent Timer (sec):
MF Signaling Intercept Treatment - Incoming? _ Outgoing: ____________ _____
Collect All Digits Before Seizure?
Overlap Sending on Link-to-Link Tandem Calls?
Private Group II Permissions and Public Interworking?
Convert First Digit End-of-ANI To: _
Group
IIAll
Called
Party
Category: _
Use COR
for
Group
II Responses?
Use Group
COR for
Category?
IICalling
Called Party Category:
Outgoing Shuttle
Cycle
Timer
(sec):
Use COR Exchange
for Calling
Party
Category?
Outgoing Shuttle Exchange Cycle Timer (sec):

Screen 236. Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

The ANI Prefix, ANI for PBX, and Collect All Digits Before Seizure fields appear
only when the value of the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or mfe.
If Collect All Digits Before Seizure is y, Overlap Sending on Link-to-Link
Tandem Calls and Convert First Digit End-of-ANI are not displayed.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1045

Screen reference

ANI for PBX

This field appears only when Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc or mfe.
Valid
entries

Usage

2 to 15

Enter the PBX identification number that is sent to the CO
when ANI is requested (by the CO) on a particular call but is
not available, such as on tandem tie trunk calls.

blank

Use for tandeming. If this field is blank, you must enter a value
in the ANI-Not-Available field.

ANI Prefix

This field appears only when Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc or mfe.
Valid
entries

Usage

1 to 6 digits
or blank

Enter the prefix to apply to an extension when ANI is sent to
the CO.

Backward Cycle Timer (sec)

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is mfe.
Valid
entries
1 to 255

Usage

Enter the number of seconds to wait to send the check
frequency after receiving an MFE signal.

Collect All Digits Before Seizure

Appears when the Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc or mfe.

1046

Valid entries

Usage

y

The system collects all the digits before seizing the trunk
and the ANI Req field on the AAR and ARS Digit
Conversion Table does not apply.

n

Enter n to control ANI collection via the ARS screens.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

Convert First Digit End-of-Dial To

Appears when the Private Group II Permissions and Public Interworking field is y.
Valid
entries
0 to 9, #, or

blank

Usage

Enter the digit used when the incoming initial end-of-ani or
end-of-dial MF signal is converted on a per-switch basis.

Forward Cycle Timer (sec)

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is mfe.
Valid
entries
1 to 255

Usage

Enter the number of seconds to wait to receive the check
frequency after sending an MFE signal. The switch drops the
call if the time runs out before it receives check frequency.

Group II Called Party Category

Appears when the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc and the Use COR for
All Group II Responses field is n. Enter the type of group II signals that should be
used on the outgoing R2-MFC call.
NOTE:

For India, the ANI can be requested without the Incoming Call Type
information.
Valid entries

Usage

user-type

The type of phone making the call determines the type of
group II signal that the PBX sends (normal = ordinary phone
set, attendant = attendant console, data-call = data modules
and similar data endpoints).

call-type

The dialed digits determine the type of group II signal that
the PBX sends.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1047

Screen reference

This field defines the signal type that a CO uses to place an incoming call to the
PBX.
Valid entries

Usage

group-ii-mfc

If the value of this field is group-ii-mfc, the second page of
the screen will display entries for all group-I, group-II,
group-A, and group-B signal types with a set of default
values (see page 2 of screen).

non-group-ii-mfc If the value is non-group-ii-mfc, the second page displays

only group-I and group-A signal types.
Use only in Spain (multi-frequency Espanol)

mfe

Incomplete Dial Timer (sec)

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is mfe.
Valid
entries
45 to 255

Usage

Enter the number of seconds to wait from the start of a call
until the end of the check frequency of the last signal. The
switch drops the call if the time runs out before it receives the
check frequency.

Interdigit Timer (sec)

Specify the maximum number of seconds the switch will wait for the first forward
signal (digit) to arrive, and for subsequent digits to arrive. Intercept returns to the
calling party if this timer expires.
Valid
entries
1 to 255

Usage

This number must be less than the number of seconds entered
in the short interdigit timer.

Maintenance Call Type

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or non-group-ii-mfc.
Valid
entries

Usage

1

The Belgium maintenance sequence is indicated when the CO
sends an MFC maintenance tone.

2

The Saudi Arabian sequence is indicated when the CO sends
an MFC maintenance tone.

none

1048

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

Maximum Resent Requests
Valid
entries

Usage

1 to 99

Enter the threshold number of resend type MFC signals your
switch accepts during an outgoing call.

1

The call is dropped if one resend signal is received.

blank

An unlimited number of resend requests is allowed.

MF Signaling Intercept Treatment - Incoming
Valid entries

Usage

y

Send the group B signal for the intercept to the CO and play
intercept tone on the trunk.

n

Use normal DID/TIE/ISDN intercept treatment.

MF Signaling Intercept Treatment - Outgoing

Displays when the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc.
Valid entries

Usage

announcement

Plays a recorded announcement for outgoing calls that
cannot be completed as dialed. You select and record the
message.
Enter the extension number for the announcement in the
associated field.

tone

Plays intercept tone for outgoing calls that cannot be
completed as dialed.

MFE Type

This field only appears when Incoming Call Type is mfe.
Valid entries

Usage

2/5

Determines which public signaling the switch will use.

2/6

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1049

Screen reference

Outgoing Call Type

This field defines the signal type that the PBX uses to place an outgoing call into a
CO.
Valid entries

Usage

group-ii-mfc

If the content of this field is group-ii-mfc, the system displays
the third page of the screen. The third page displays entries for
all group-I, group-II group-A, and group-B signal types with a
set of default values.

mfe

Use only in Spain (multi-frequency Espanol)

none

If the content of this field is none, the system does not display
the third page. In addition, Outgoing Forward Signal Present
Timer, Outgoing Forward Signal Absent Timer, ANI Prefix,
ANI for PBX, Next ANI Digits, and Collect All Digits Before
Seizure will not display on Field descriptions for page 1.

Outgoing Forward Signal Absent Timer (sec)

This field appears only when the content of Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc.
Valid
entries
11 to 255

Usage

Enter the maximum number of seconds to elapse between
forward signals on outgoing calls. The timer starts (and
restarts) when a forward tone is taken off the link and it stops
when the next forward tone is applied to the link.

Outgoing Forward Signal Present Timer (sec)

This field appears only when the value of Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc.
Valid
entries
1 to 255

1050

Usage

Enter the maximum number of seconds to elapse between
signals on a call. This timer runs when MFC tones are being
sent or received on an outgoing call. The timer starts (and
restarts) when the switch begins sending a forward signal and
stops when the switch receives the backward signal.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

Outgoing Start Timer (sec)

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is mfe.
Valid
entries
1 to 255

Usage

Enter the number of seconds to time from seizure until the
beginning of the first Group A signal from the receiving end,
and from the end of the check frequency until the beginning
receipt of the first digit following the Group II signal.

Outgoing Shuttle Exchange Cycle Timer (sec)

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or
non-group-ii-mfc.and the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or none. This
field applies only to calls made from Avaya MultiVantage.
Valid
entries
1 to 25

Usage

Enter the number of seconds to time an exchange cycle (starts
when the far end requests a digit until Avaya MultiVantage
sends the requested digit).

Overlap Sending on Link-to-Link Tandem Calls

Does not appear if the Collect All Digits Before Seizure field is y. An Avaya
MultiVantage with this field set to y, when tandeming calls between switches will
send ANI for PBX to the terminating switch if that switch requests ANI before the
Avaya MultiVantage receives it from the originating switch. The terminating
switch may request ANI before the receipt of the last address digit if it is not an
Avaya MultiVantage or it is an Avaya MultiVantage with the Request Call
Category at Start of Call field set to y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If y, Avaya MultiVantage sends and receives digits one digit
at a time instead of enbloc. (With enbloc, digits are not sent
until the entire group of digits is received).

Private Group II Permissions and Public
Interworking

Displays when the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or non-group-ii-mfc
and the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or none.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1051

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If y, Avaya MultiVantage:
— Sends the category for MFC ANI for the COR of the
originating party for non-private-MFC-trunk to
MFC-private-trunk calls.
— Sends the Group II category received over the incoming
private trunk as the outgoing Group II category on
tandem private MFC calls.
— Applies MFC group II-CPC termination restrictions on
incoming MFC private trunk calls.
— Checks station permissions if you call forward off-net.

Received Signal Gain (dB)
Valid
entries
-15 to 3

Usage

Enter the number for the loss/gain when the MFC port listens
to the trunk port. Your switch listens with a range of -5 to -35
and this value moves the range (for example, a value of -5
provides a range of -10 to -40).

Request Incoming ANI (non-AAR/ARS)

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or mfe and the
Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or mfe. This field only applies if the
incoming call via the R2-MFC trunk is terminating to a local station on this PBX.
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

If y, ANI should be requested on incoming R2-MFC calls.

Test Call Extension

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or non-group-ii-mfc

1052

Valid entries

Usage

An unassigned
extension

Specifies the destination of a call between the CO
and the PBX that tests R2-MFC signaling.

1

A test call extension is the destination.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

Transmitted Signal Gain (dB)
Valid
entries
-15 to 3

Usage

Enter the number for the loss/gain when the trunk port listens
to the MFC port. The MFC port generates at -5 for MFC and -8
for MFE, and this field adds gain or loss to the starting value of
-5.

Use COR for All Group II Responses

Appears if the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the COR administered category to be used
for both the calling party and called party categories.

Use COR for Calling Party Category

Appears when the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc and the Use COR for
All Group II Responses field is n. Indicates the category to send with ANI if
requested on an outgoing R2-MFC call.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Use the calling facility’s COR to determine category.

n

Use the calling party’s user-type COR to determine
category.

NEXT ANI DIGIT
Incoming

Appears when the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc and the Outgoing
Call Type field is group-ii-mfc or mfe.
Valid entries

Usage

next-digit
next_ani_digit
send-ani

Enter a value to determine whether the Next ANI Digit
signal will be the same as the “send-ani” signal or the
“next-digit” signal or another signal defined as “next_ani_
digit.”

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1053

Screen reference

Outgoing

Appears when the Outgoing Call Type field is group-ii-mfc.
Valid entries

Usage

next-digit
next_ani_digit
send-ani

Enter a value to determine whether the Next ANI Digit
signal will be the same as the “send-ani” signal or the
“next-digit” signal or another signal defined as “next_ani_
digit.”

Field descriptions for page 2

The fields on Page 2 define call category and ANI information. For India, the ANI
can be requested without the call category information.
change system-parameters multifrequency-signaling
MULTIFREQUENCY-SIGNALING-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Request Call Category at Start of Call:
Restart ANI from Caller Category?
Number of Incoming ANI Digits:
Number of Outgoing ANI Digits:
Truncate station number in ANI:
Address Digits Include End-of-Digits Signal?
Call Category for Vector ii-digits?
Request CPN at Start of Call?
Do Not Send Group B Signals to CO?
ANI Source for Forwarded & Covered Calls:
INCOMING
ANI Available:
ANI Not Available:

Page

2 of 3

n
y
0
0
no
n
n
y
y
_________

OUTGOING

___
___

___
___

Screen 237. Multifrequency-Signaling-Related Parameters screen

Address Digits Include End-of-Digits Signal

Indicates that an outgoing forward Group I end-of-digit signal is always sent after
completion of address digits upon request from the Central Office for outgoing
calls.
Valid
entries
y/n

1054

Usage

Enter y to send an outgoing forward Group I end-of-digit
signal after completion of address digits upon request from the
Central Office for outgoing calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

ANI Source for Forwarded & Covered Calls
Valid entries

Usage

caller

Send the calling party’s ANI when calls are redirected.

forwarder

Send the forwarding party’s ANI when calls are redirected.

Call Category for Vector ii-digits

Allows you to use the call category digit as the ii-digits on call vector steps.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

If y, the call category digit, which is a part of ANI, is used as
the ii-digits on call vector steps.

Do Not Send Group B Signals to CO

This field appears only if the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc. This field
allows completion of a call without Group-B signals.
Valid
entries

Usage

y

If y, does not send Group-B signals to complete an incoming
call.

n

If n, sends Group-B signals to complete an incoming call.

Number of Incoming ANI Digits
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 15

Enter the number of ANI digits for incoming MFC calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1055

Screen reference

Number of Outgoing ANI Digits

This field applies to Russian shuttle trunks, and MFC and MFE trunks.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 15

Enter the number of ANI digits for outgoing MFC calls.
In India or any country where end-of-ani and end-of-digits are
not defined for Tones to CO on Outgoing Forward Calls –
Group I, Avaya MultiVantage appends ANI-Not-Available
digits to ANI digits if the actual ANI length is less than the
number entered in this field.
If end-of-ani or end-of-digits are defined, this field is used in
conjunction with Truncate Station Number in ANI as a
maximum ANI length.
For India, even if the length of ANI is defined, if the timeout
occurs during the ANI collection, the call is routed with the
ANI digits already collected.

Request Call Category at Start of Call

Indicates that the Send-ANI backward signal requesting for the caller-category
information will be sequenced differently in the MFC signaling flow. The
Caller-category Request backward signal is disjointed from the ANI request.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If y, the Send-ANI backward signal corresponds exclusively to
the caller-category request. In response to this signal, Avaya
MultiVantage sends a forward signal containing the
caller-category information on outgoing calls. On incoming
calls, Avaya MultiVantage sends the Send-ANI backward
signal upon receipt of the first address signal.

Request CPN at Start of Call

This field appears only if the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc. Provides
for the switch to collect ANI and call category immediately after receipt of the
first address digit.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

If y, provides ANI (Calling Party Number (CPN) and call
category) immediately after receiving the first address digit.

Restart ANI from Caller Category

Display-only field.

1056

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If y, Avaya MultiVantage sends the caller-category signal later
again when the signals for Caller-Category and ANI requests
are the same and this signal is received after the Next-Digit
forward signals have been received.

Truncate Station Number in ANI

This field applies to Russian shuttle trunks, and MFC and MFE trunks.
Valid entries

Usage

beginning
ending
no

This field defines the side of the extension number from
which to truncate when station ANI is sent to the CO and the
combined length of the ANI prefix and extension number is
greater than Number of Outgoing ANI Digits. The ANI
prefix (either MFC or COR) is not truncated. There is no
effect if ANI for PBX is sent.

INCOMING / OUTGOING
ANI Available
Valid
entries
1 to 15 or

blank

Usage

Enter the number of incoming and outgoing ANI-Available
signals.

ANI Not Available

You must enter a value if the ANI for PBX field is blank
Valid
entries

Usage

1 to 15 or
blank

Enter the number of the incoming and outgoing
ANI-Not-Available signals.
Your switch outpulses the End-of-Dial backward signal when
the ANI-Not-Available forward signal is received on incoming
calls. Your switch outpulses the ANI-Not-Available forward
signal to the CO on outgoing calls where ANI is not possible.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1057

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 3

The fields shown on Page 3 of the Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System
Parameters screen define the meaning of MFC tones for calls originated at the
CO. See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for more
information. This screen appears only if the Incoming Call Type field is
group-ii-mfc or non-group-ii-mfc.
When the screen initially appears, either of two sets of default values is possible.
One set is for the group II call type; the other set is for non-group II call type. In
each set, the default value for each field is set to the most common value.
Screen 238 shows the defaults when the Incoming Call Type field is group-ii-mfc.
A variation appears if Incoming Call Type is non-group-ii-mfc. When Incoming
Call Type is non-group-ii-mfc, group II and group B columns do not appear.

change system-parameters multifrequency-signaling
Page 3 of 4
MULTIFREQUENCY-SIGNALING-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
INCOMING FORWARD SIGNAL TYPES
(Tones from CO)

11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Group-I
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored

1:
2:
3.
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Group-II
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal

INCOMING BACKWARD SIGNAL TYPES
(Tones to CO)

1:
3:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:

Group-A
next-digit
end-of-dial
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________

1:
2:
4:
7:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:

Group-B
free
busy
congestion
intercept
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________

Screen 238. Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters screen

1058

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

INCOMING FORWARD SIGNAL TYPES (Tones from
CO)

Group I

Message codes 11 to 15 display. (Numbers 1 through 10 are assigned to the digits
of the destination telephone number.) Assign a meaning to each code. See
‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for signal type.
Valid entries

Usage

drop

If Incoming Call Type is group-ii-mfc

ani-avail
end-of-ani
end-of-dial
ignored
maint-call
ani-not-avail
send-congest
drop

If the Incoming Call Type is non-group-ii-mfc

ignored

Group II

Message codes 1 to 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code.
Valid entries

Usage

attendant

See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page
1063 for signal type.

busy-rt-attd
data-call
data-verify
drop
maint-call
send-intercept
toll-auto
toll-operator
normal

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1059

Screen reference

INCOMING BACKWARD SIGNAL TYPES (Tones
to CO)
Group A

Message codes 11 to 15 display. (Numbers 1 through 10 are assigned to the digits
of the destination telephone number.) Assign a meaning to each code.
Valid entries

Usage

conjestion

See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page
1063 for signal type.

end-of-dial
intercept
next-ani-digit
next-digit
send-ani
setup-sppath

1060

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

Group B

This field does not appear if the Do Not Send Group B Signals to CO field is y.
Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code.
Valid entries

Usage

busy

See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page
1063 for signal type.

congestion
free
mct
tariff-free
tie-free
toll-busy
intercept

Field descriptions for page 4

The fields shown on this page define the meaning of MFC tones for calls
originated at the PBX. See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page
1063 for more information.
Page 4 of the Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters screen only
appears if Outgoing Call Type is group-ii-mfc or mfe.

change system-parameters multifrequency-signaling
Page 4 of 4
MULTIFREQUENCY-SIGNALING-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
OUTGOING FORWARD SIGNAL TYPES
(Tones to CO)

11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Group-I
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________

2:
5:
6:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:
__:

Group-II
normal
attendant
data-call
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________

OUTGOING BACKWARD SIGNAL TYPES
(Tones from CO)

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Group-A
next-digit
congestion
end-of-dial
congestion
call-info-ani
congestion
last-2-digits
last-3-digits
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Group-B
free
busy
congestion
congestion
congestion
free
intercept
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion
congestion

Screen 239. Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters screen

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1061

Screen reference

OUTGOING FORWARD SIGNAL TYPES (Tones
to CO)
Group I

Message codes 11 to 15 appear. (Numbers 1 through 10 are assigned to the digits
of the destination telephone number.)
Valid entries

Usage

end-of-digits

Assign a meaning to each code. See ‘‘Definitions of Group I,
II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for signal type.

ani-avail
end-of-ani
ani-not-avail

Group II

Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code. Each
entry can only appear once in the group II column.
Valid entries

Usage

attendant

See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page
1063 for signal type.

data-call
toll-auto
normal

OUTGOING BACKWARD SIGNAL TYPES (Tones
from CO)
Group A

Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code.
Valid entries

Usage

send-ani

See ‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page
1063 for signal type.

congestion
drop
end-of-dial

1062

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

Valid entries

Usage

last-2-digits
last-3-digits
last-digit
next-ani-digit
next-digit
restart
intercept
resend-digit
setup-sppath

Group B

Message codes between 1 and 15 display. Assign a meaning to each code. See
‘‘Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals’’ on page 1063 for signal type.
Valid entries

Usage

busy
congestion
free
mct
tariff-free
toll-busy
intercept

Definitions of Group I, II, A, and B signals
Group I signals

Group I signals are a set of forward signals generated by the originating switch.
ani-avail

Used in Hungary. If this signal is defined and ANI is requested on outgoing
R2-MFC calls, ANI is sent to the CO before ANI caller digits are sent. This signal
is sent after the ANI caller category signal.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1063

Screen reference

ani-not-avail

Used on DOD calls in Brazil and Columbia. The switch sends this signal to the
CO when it receives an ANI request and the caller’s number is not available.
digits 1 to 10

The signals from group I.1 to I.10 are reserved for address digits 0 to 9.
drop

When this signal is received from the CO, the switch starts the disconnect
sequence and drops the call.
end-of-ani

This signal is used on DOD and DID calls. The switch sends this signal to indicate
the end-of-ANI digits when ANI digits are sent to the CO.
end-of-dial

This signal is used when open numbering is used on DID calls. The CO sends this
signal to indicate the end-of-dial digits and the switch responds with a request for
a group II signal.
end-of-digits

This signal is sent by the origination switch that makes outgoing calls, sends
digits, and receives a next-digit group A signal from the destination switch when
there are no more digits to be sent.
This signal is also sent when the switch does not have end-of-ani assigned, makes
an outgoing call, sends ANI, and receives a call-info-ani group A signal from the
destination switch when there are no more ANI digits to be sent.
If both end-of-digits and end-of-ani are assigned, the switch uses end-of-ani after
it sends the last ANI digit and end-of-digits after sending the last called-number
digit.
ignored

If this signal is received from the CO, the switch sends a corresponding signal
(A.1, and so on) but no action is taken in the response and it is not counted as a
digit. In Belgium, this signal is not acknowledged.
maint-call

The CO sends a signal to indicate that a call is a maintenance call and the switch
prepares the special maintenance call sequences for the CO. This signal may be
used on DID calls in Saudi Arabia.

1064

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

send-congestion

When the switch receives this signal from the CO on a DID call, it returns a
congestion signal (group A), in compel (not pulse) mode, to the CO.
Group II signals

Group II signals are a more elaborate set of forward signals generated by the
originating switch.
attendant

If the switch receives this signal on DID calls, the call terminates at an attendant
regardless of the extension dialed. On DOD calls, this signal is sent to the CO if
the CO requests calling-category information and the originating extension is an
attendant. This signal is used on both DID and DOD calls.
busy-rt-attd

If the switch receives this signal on DID calls, the call terminates at an attendant if
the called extension is busy or at the called extension if it is not busy. This signal
is used on DID calls.
data-call

This signal is treated the same as the data-verify signal except that it does not
require a terminating extension to be a data extension.
data-verify

If the switch receives this signal on DID calls and the terminating extension is not
a data extension, it sends intercept treatment. On DOD calls, this signal is sent to
the CO if the CO requests calling-category information and the originating
extension is a data extension. This signal is used on both DID and DOD calls.
drop

When this signal is received from the CO, the switch starts the disconnect
sequence and drops the call.
maint-call

The CO sends a signal to indicate that a call is a maintenance call and the switch
prepares the special maintenance call sequences for the CO.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1065

Screen reference

normal

This signal indicates that the caller is a normal subscriber. If it is received on a
DID call, the call is terminated at the called extension. For an outgoing MF
signaling call that uses group II signaling, this signal is sent to the CO when the
CO requests calling-category information and the originating extension is a
station. This signal is used in both DID and DOD calls.
send-intercept

If the switch receives this signal from the CO on a DID call, it returns group B
intercept signal to the CO.
toll-auto

This signal is used in China. This signal indicates that a call is an automatic toll
call. When the call terminates at a busy station and a special busy signal is
defined, the busy signal is sent to the CO. You can define the special busy signal
by choosing the option toll-busy on the incoming group B signals.
toll-operator

This signal, used in China, is treated as a normal subscriber signal. See the normal
definition.
Group A signals

Group A signals are backward signals generated by the destination switch.
send-ani

The CO sends this signal to request calling-party category and sends additional
signals to request ANI digits. This signal is sent to the CO when Avaya
MultiVantage requests ANI digits on DID calls. This signal is used on both DOD
and DID calls.
congestion

The CO sends this signal to indicate that it is experiencing network congestion.
When the switch receives this signal on DOD calls, the switch drops the trunk and
plays reorder tone to the calling party. This signal is used on DOD calls.
drop

When this signal is sent, the receiving switch starts the disconnect sequence.
end-of-dial

This signal is sent to indicate the end of the address digit string. For MF group II
calls, this signal requests a group II signal and switches the sender over to the
group B signaling mode. This signal is used on both DID and DOD calls.

1066

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters

intercept

The CO sends this signal to indicate the call has been terminated to an invalid
destination. When the switch receives this signal on DOD calls, the switch drops
the trunk and plays intercept tone to the calling party. This signal is used on DOD
calls.
resend-digit

The switch sends this signal to adjust the outpulsing pointer so that the last digit
can be resent again. This signal is used on DOD calls.
last-digit

The switch sends this signal to adjust the outpulsing pointer so that the last 2 digits
can be resent. This signal is used on DOD calls.
last-2-digits

The switch sends this signal to adjust the outpulsing pointer so that the last 3 digits
can be resent. This signal is used on DOD calls.
last-3-digits

The switch sends this signal to adjust the outpulsing pointer so that the last 4 digits
can be resent. This signal is used on DOD calls.
next-digit

The switch sends this signal to request the next digit. This signal is used on both
DID and DOD calls.
next-ani-digit

The switch sends this signal to request the next ANI digit. This signal is used on
DID and DOD calls.
restart

The switch sends this signal to request the whole digit string again. This signal is
used on DOD calls.
setup-sppath

The CO sends this signal to the switch to set up a speech path. This signal is used
on DOD calls and on DID calls in Belgium.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1067

Screen reference

Group B signals

Group B signals enhance group A signals for backward signaling from the
destination switch by providing the status of the called party. In addition, if the
originating switch uses group II signals, the destination switch answers with
group B signals. Group B signals are as follows:
busy

This signal is sent to indicate that the called party is busy. On DID calls, the signal
is sent to the CO if there is no coverage point to terminate the call. If the switch
receives this signal on DOD calls, it plays busy tone to the calling party and drops
the trunk.
congestion

This signal is sent to indicate that the system is congested and the call cannot be
terminated successfully. On DID calls, the signal is sent to the CO to indicate that
a resource is not available. On DOD calls, if the switch receives this signal,
reorder tone is played to the calling party and the trunk is dropped.
free

This signal indicates that the called party is idle. On DID calls, the signal is sent to
the CO to indicate that the called party is idle and the call is terminated
successfully. If the switch receives this signal on DOD calls, it connects the trunk
to the calling party.
intercept

This signal indicates that the called party number is not in service or is not correct.
On DID calls, if intercept treatment is set to provide a tone, tone is sent to the CO
to indicate that the called number is not valid. If the switch receives the signal on
DOD calls, the switch plays intercept tone to the calling party and drops the trunk.
mct

This signal identifies the call as one that needs to be traced by the CO. Avaya
MultiVantage then generates an MFC Call Trace Backward Signal (administered
on the Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System-Parameters screen) during call
setup instead of the “free” signal. If the terminating station’s COR has this feature
set to y, the CO collects trace information before releasing the calling party.
NOTE:

If the station’s COR has MF Incoming Call Trace set to y and the “mct”
signal is not defined, then the “free” signal is sent.

1068

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Music Sources

tariff-free

This signal is sent when the trunk group provides an “800” service. Avaya
MultiVantage generates an MFC tariff-free backward signal (administered on the
System-Parameters Multifrequency-Signaling screen) during call setup instead of
the “free” signal, facilitating CO billing.
NOTE:

If the trunk is administered as a tariff-free trunk and the “tariff-free” signal is
not defined, then the “free” signal is sent.
tie-free

This signal is used only when an incoming call is received and defined and the
incoming facility is a tie trunk. Otherwise, the free signal is used.
toll-busy

This signal, used in China, is sent to indicate that the called party is busy if the call
is an automatic toll call.

Music Sources
This screen defines music sources for Tenant Partitions. Each music source
defined on the screen can be used by one or more Tenant Partitions. However, a
partition may have only one music source.
NOTE:

If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials,
you may be required to obtain a copyright license from, or pay fees to, a
third party such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and
Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). You can
purchase a Magic Hold® system, which does not require such a license,
from Avaya.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1069

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 1

change music-source
Source
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Music Sources
Type
music
tone
music
none
none
none
music
none
none
none
music
none
none
none
none

Page 1 of X

Port

Description

01A1003
01A1004

Easy listening
Tone-on-Hold
Rock

12B1301

Oldies

04C2003

Classical

Screen 240. Music Sources

Description

Enter a description of the administered music source. This field appears only if
you entered music or tone in Type.
NOTE:

When Tenant Partitioning is enabled, Music/Tone on Hold on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen disappears. However, the value
in that field (tone, music, or none) will appear as the first entry on the Music
Sources screen. If the value was music, the port number also appears on the
Music Sources screen. When Tenant partitioning is disabled, Music/Tone on
Hold reappears on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, along
with and the values from the Music Sources screen.
Valid entries

Usage

20 alpha-numeric character (maximum)

1070

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Music Sources

Port

Enter the auxiliary trunk or analog port address of the music source. Duplicates
are not allowed. This field appears only if you entered music in Type. Enter the
necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

Source

Display only field - the number assigned to this source. The maximum number of
music sources is 20 for DEFINITY CSI and SI and 100 for DEFINITY R. This
screen appears with the appropriate pages to accommodate the number of music
sources your system can support.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1071

Screen reference

Type

If you entered a value in Music/Tone on Hold on the Feature-Related System
Parameters screen, that value will appear in this field.
Valid entries

Usage

music

Enter the type of treatment to be provided by the music
source.

tone

Only one music source may use this value.

none

Packet Gateway Board
Use this screen to administer the Packet Gateway (PGATE) circuit pack.
NOTE:

The PGATE screen is used with DEFINITY R configurations.
Field descriptions for page 1
change pgate xxxxx
PACKET GATEWAY BOARD
Page 1 of 1
Board Location: _____
Name: _______________
Application: X.25
External cable type: rs232
Port configuration: 1) rs232 2)rs232 3)rs232 4)rs232

Screen 241. Packet Gateway Board screen

Application

Display-only field that shows the communications protocol used to transmit
messages over the PGATE.
Board Location

Enter the slot location of the PGATE circuit pack.

1072

Valid entries

Usage

1-x

cabinet (Maximum value varies according to switch type)

A- E

carrier

0-20

slot

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Partition Route Table

External Cable Type

Display-only field that shows the type of physical interface between the PGATE
port and the adjunct.
Name
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 15 alphanumeric
characters

Enter the name of the adjunct with which the
PGATE circuit pack communicates.

Port Configuration

Display-only field that shows that the port is configured for “rs232”
communication.

Partition Route Table
Use this table to identify routing for partition groups associated with an ARS
analysis entry.
change partition route-table

Page 1 of X
Partition Routing Table
Routing Patterns

Route
Index
----196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210

PGN 1
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 2
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 3
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 4
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 5
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 6
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 7
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

PGN 8
----____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Screen 242. Partition Route Table

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1073

Screen reference

PGN 1 (through PGN 8)

Enter the routing for each partition group associated with each route index
number.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 640

Specifies the route pattern used to route the call

r1 to r32

Specifies the remote home numbering plan area table used
to route the call

node

Designates node number routing

deny

Blocks the call

Personal CO Line Group
Use this screen to set up a personal central office line trunk group.
add personal-CO-line

Page 1 of x
PERSONAL CO LINE GROUP

Group Number: __
Group Type:_____________ CDR Reports: _
Group Name: _________________
TAC: ____
Security Code: ____
Coverage Path: ____
Data Restriction? _
Outgoing Display? _
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type:
Trunk Port:
Trunk Name:
Outgoing Dial Type:
Prefix-1?
Disconnect Supervision - In?
Answer Supervision Timeout:
Trunk Gain:
Charge Conversion:
Decimal Point:
Currency Symbol:
Charge Type:

_____________
Trunk Direction:
_______
Disconnect Timing(msec):
__________
Trunk Termination:
_________
Analog Loss Group:
_
Digital Loss Group:
_
Call Still Held?
___
Receive Answer Supervision?
____
Country:
_____
DS1 Echo Cancellation:
______
___
_______

________
____
______
___
___
_
_
__
_

Screen 243. Personal CO Line Group

The following fields are unique to this screen.

1074

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Personal CO Line Group

Analog Loss Group

This field determines which administered 2-party row in the loss plan applies to
this trunk group if the call is carried over an analog signaling port in the trunk
group.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 17

Shows the values from the loss plan and tone plan.

Coverage Path
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 9999

Enter the number of the call coverage path you want to use
for incoming calls.

t1 to t999

Enter the number of a time-of-day table.

blank

Assigning a coverage path is optional: leave this field blank
if you do not want to assign one.

Digital Loss Group

This field determines which administered 2-party row in the loss plan applies to
this trunk group if the call is carried over a digital signaling port in the trunk
group.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 17

Shows the values from the loss plan and tone plan.

DS1 Echo Cancellation

Allows you to administer echo cancellation per channel.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to activate echo cancellation capability.

Security Code
Valid entries

Usage

4 digits

Enter a 4-digit code that users must dial to retrieve voice
messages and to use the Demand Print Message feature.

blank

Leave this field blank if you do not want to use a security
code to control access.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1075

Screen reference

Trunk Direction
Valid entries

Usage

incoming

Enter the direction of the traffic on this trunk group. The
entry in this field affects which timers appear on the
Administrable Timers page. For WATS Group Types, only
incoming or outgoing may be entered.

outgoing
two-way

Trunk Name
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 10
characters

Enter a descriptive name for this trunk. Don’t use the group
type (CO, FX, WATS) here. For example, you might use
names that identify the vendor and function of the trunk
group: USWest Local; Sprint Toll, etc.

blank
Trunk Port

Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31

1076

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Personal CO Line Group

Valid entries

Usage

1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

Field descriptions for page 2

add personal-CO-line

Page 1 of x
PERSONAL CO LINE GROUP

ASSIGNED MEMBERS (Stations with a button for this PCOL Group)
Ext

Name

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:

Ext

Name

9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

Screen 244. Personal CO Line Group

Ext

This display-only field shows the extension of phones that have a CO Line button.
Name

This display-only field shows the name assigned to phones that have a CO Line
button.
Field descriptions for page 3

Administrable timers for Personal CO Line groups appear on Field descriptions
for page 3. See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for standard field definitions of the
available timers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1077

Screen reference

Related topics

See ‘‘Adding a PCOL trunk group’’ on page 420 for instructions.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for definitions of all trunk group fields that are
not unique to the PCOL screen.

1078

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Pickup Group

Pickup Group
This screen implements call pickup groups with up to 50 extensions per group. A
pickup group is a group of users authorized to answer calls to a phone extension
within that group of users. A phone extension number can only belong to one
pickup group.
Field descriptions for pages 1 and 2

change pickup-group 1

Page

1 of

2

PICKUP GROUP
Group Number: 1

Extended Group Number: ____

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
1:51001
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:

Name (first 26 characters)
mips 2a1501

Ext
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

Name (first 26 characters)

Screen 245. Pickup Group

Ext

Enter the extension assigned to a station.
Valid entries

Usage

An extension number.

A VDN cannot be assigned to a Call Pickup
group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1079

Screen reference

Extended Group Number

This field appears only when the Group Call Pickup field is set to flexible on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen. The extended group is a collection of
pickup groups that can answer calls from other pickup groups in the same
extended group.
Valid
entries

Usage

1-100

Enter the extended group number or blank.

(DEFINITY
SI, CSI)
1-400

(DEFINITY
R)
Group Number

A display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command such as add or change.
Valid
entries

Usage

Enter a Pickup Group number when completing a paper screen.
Name

This display-only field shows the name assigned to the above extension number
when the users and their associated extensions were administered.

PRI Endpoint
This screen administers PRI Endpoints for the Wideband Switching feature.
NOTE:

A PRI Endpoint with a width greater than 1 may be administered only if the
Wideband Switching feature has been enabled on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.
A PRI Endpoint is an endpoint application connected to line-side ISDN-PRI
facilities and has standard ISDN-PRI signaling interfaces to the system. For
information on endpoint applications connected to line-side non-ISDN T1 or E1
facilities, see ‘‘Access Endpoint’’ on page 593 in this module.

1080

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

PRI Endpoint

A PRI Endpoint is defined as 1–31 adjacent DS0s/B-channels, addressable via a
single extension, and signaled via a D-channel (Signaling Group) over a standard
T1 or E1 ISDN-PRI interface.
add pri-endpoint next

Page

1 of

1

PRI ENDPOINT
Extension:
Name:
(Starting) Port:
Originating Auto Restoration?
COR:
TN:
Maintenance Tests?

300
27 character PRI Endpoint 1
Width: 1
n
Signaling Group:
1
COS: 1
1
Simultaneous Calls? n
y

WIDEBAND SUPPORT OPTIONS
H0?
H11?
H12?
NXDS0?

n
n
n
y

Contiguous? n

Screen 246. PRI Endpoint

COR
Valid
entries
0 to 95

Usage

Enter class of restriction (COR) to determine calling and called
party privileges

COS
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 15

Enter the Class of Service (COS) to determine the features
that can be activated by, or on behalf of, the endpoint.

Extension

A display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command such as change or display.
Valid entries

Usage

This is the extension number used to access the PRI
endpoint. Enter a valid unassigned extension number when
completing a paper screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1081

Screen reference

Maintenance Tests
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to run hourly maintenance tests on this PRI Endpoint.

Name

Identifies the endpoint.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 27 alphanumeric characters.
Originating Auto Restoration
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to automatically restore calls originating from this
PRI Endpoint (while maintaining endpoint call status) in the
case of network failure if the call is over SDDN network
facilities.

Signaling Group
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 416 or blank
(DEFINITY R,
S8300 Media
Server, S8700
IP-Connect,
S8700
Multi-Connect)
1 to 110 or blank
(DEFINITY CSI,
SI)

Enter the D-channel or D-channel pair that will provide
the signaling information for the set of B-channels that
make up the PRI Endpoint.

Simultaneous Calls

1082

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to specify that multiple simultaneous calls can be
placed to/from the PRI Endpoint.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

PRI Endpoint

(Starting) Port

Enter the seven-character starting port of the PRI Endpoint. Enter the necessary
characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31
TN
Valid entries

Usage

1–20 (DEFINITY CSI,
SI)

Enter the Tenant Partition number.

1–100 (DEFINITY R,
S8300 Media Server,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

Width

Enter the number of adjacent DS0 ports beginning with the specified Starting Port,
that make up the PRI Endpoint.This field cannot be blank.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 31

A width of 6 defines a PRI Endpoint that can support data
rates up to 384 Kbps.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1083

Screen reference

WIDEBAND SUPPORT OPTIONS
Contiguous

Specifies whether to hunt contiguous NXDS0 channels. This field only appears if
y is entered in NXDS0. The hunt algorithm to satisfy an NXDS0 call is as follows:
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to specify the “floating” scheme. NXDS0 calls are
placed on a contiguous group of B-channels large enough to
satisfy the requested bandwidth without constraint on the
starting channel (no fixed starting point trunk).

n

Enter n to specify the “flexible” scheme. NXDS0 calls are
placed on any set of B-channels on the same facility as long
as the requested bandwidth is satisfied. There are no
constraints, such as contiguity of B-channels or fixed starting
points.

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 384
Kbps of data, which is comprised of six B-channels. When a
PRI Endpoint is administered to support H0, the hunt
algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 384 Kbps of bandwidth
uses a fixed allocation scheme.

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for 1536
Kbps of data, which is comprised of 24 B-channels. When a
PRI Endpoint is administered to support H11, the hunt
algorithm to satisfy a call requiring 1536 Kbps of bandwidth
uses a fixed allocation scheme.

H0

H11

1084

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway

H12
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to specify the ISDN information transfer rate for
1920 Kbps data, which includes 30 B-channels. When a PE
is administered to support H12, the hunt algorithm to satisfy
a call requiring 1920 Kbps of bandwidth uses a fixed
allocation scheme.

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to specify the NXDS0 multi-rate service.

NXDS0

QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway
The QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen determines when and how to convert
messages from a QSIG NCA-TSC to an administered AUDIX NCA-TSC. This
screen maps the QSIG subscriber number to the appropriate AUDIX signaling
group and TSC index.
This screen only appears if the Interworking with DCS field is y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

change isdn qsig-dcs-tsc-gateway

Page 1 of 1

QSIG TO DCS TSC GATEWAY
Subscriber
Number
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

Sig
GRP
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

TSC
Index
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Subscriber
Number
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________

Sig
GRP
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

TSC
Index
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Screen 247. QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1085

Screen reference

Sig Grp
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 110

Enter the assigned signaling group number for
DEFINITY CSI, SI.

1 through 416

Enter the assigned signaling group number for
DEFINITY R.

1 through 650

Enter the assigned signaling group number for S8300
Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect.

Subscriber Number

You can enter up to 28 subscriber numbers.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9, *, ‘x’, Enter a subscriber number up to 20 characters in
‘X’
length. You can use wildcards ‘x’ and ‘X’ to enter

subscriber numbers.
TSC Index

You must complete the TSC Index field for each machine ID.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 64

Enter the assigned signaling group number for
qsig-mwi application type on the Signaling Group
screen.

Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9, *, #

Enter up to 4-digit access code.

Remote Access
The Remote Access screen is used to implement the Remote Access feature.
Remote Access permits a caller located outside the system to access the system
through the public or private network and then use the features and services of the
system.
Remote Access users can dial into the system using central office (CO), Foreign
Exchange (FX), Wide Area Telecommunications trunks (WATS), and Integrated
Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI) trunks. In addition,
a dedicated Remote Access Direct Inward Dialing number can be provided.

1086

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Remote Access

! SECURITY ALERT:
Avaya designed the Remote Access feature incorporated in this product that,
when properly administered by the customer, enables the customer to
minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network. It
is the customer’s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to properly
implement the features, evaluate and administer the various restriction
levels, protect access codes and distribute them only to individuals who have
been advised of the sensitive nature of the access information. Each
authorized user should be instructed concerning the proper use and
handling of access codes.
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the
telecommunications network through use of remote access features. In such
an event, applicable tariffs require the customer pay all network charges for
traffic. Avaya cannot be responsible for such charges, and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized
access.
To ensure the security of your system, consider the following:
■

Make all remote access facilities unlisted directory telephone numbers.

■

Require users to enter a Barrier Code of at least seven random digits AND
an Authorization Code of at least 13 random digits to make network calls.

■

Make Authorization Codes nonconsecutive (random) and change them, at
least, quarterly.

■

Deactivate Authorization Codes immediately if the user leaves the
company or changes assignments.

■

Assign the minimum level of calling permissions required to each
Authorization Code.

■

Block off-hours and weekend remote access calling, when possible. Use
Alternative Facility Restriction Levels, if available.

■

Use a voice recording, warble tone, or no tone and avoid use of a dial tone
as a prompt when the remote access unit answers.

■

Assign the lowest possible FRL to only allow internal switch calls.

As an additional step to ensure System security, you can permanently disable the
Remote Access feature if you do not intend to use it now or in the future. If you do
decide to permanently disable the feature, it will require Avaya Services
intervention to activate the feature again.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1087

Screen reference

! CAUTION:
Your attempt to disable the Remote Access feature will be lost if the switch is
rebooted without saving translations. Therefore, execute a “save
translation” command after permanently disabling the Remote Access
feature.
To assist you in maintaining the security of your system, Avaya MultiVantage
provides the status remote access command, which provides status and
information on each remote access barrier code and on the remote access feature.
A sample Status Remote Access screen follows the Remote Access screen.
Field descriptions for page 1

change remote-access
REMOTE ACCESS
Remote Access Extension: ________
Barrier Code Length:____
Authorization Code Required? y
Remote Access Dial Tone: n
Barrier
COR TN COS
Expiration
No. of
Calls
Code
COR TN COS
Date
Calls
Used
1:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
2:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
3:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
4:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
5:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
6:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
7:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
8:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
9:________
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
10:_______
1__ 1_ 1__
__/__/__
______
______
Permanently Disable? __ Disable Following A Security Violation? y
(NOTE: You must logoff to effect permanent disabling of Remote Access)

Screen 248. Remote Access

1088

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Remote Access

status remote-access
REMOTE ACCESS STATUS
Remote Access Status: enabled
Date/Time Modified: 01/30/95 17:00
Barrier
Code
1:2374745
2:3374837
3:3285038
4:5738557
5:7764884
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

Date
Modified
01/30/95
01/30/95
01/30/95
01/30/95
01/30/95
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /

Expiration
Date
03/31/95
/ /
01/31/96
07/31/95
05/20/95
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /

No. of
Calls
50
20
20

Calls
Used
50
4
13
20
0

Status Date/Time Expired Cause
expired 02/15/95 20:43
active
/ /
expired 02/10/95 09:32
expired 02/03/95 10:14
active
/ /
:
/ /
:
/ /
:
/ /
:
/ /
:
/ /
:

calls
date
calls

Screen 249. Remote Access Status

Authorization Code Required

When you use an authorization code in conjunction with a barrier codes it
increases the security of the Remote Access feature.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter y to require an authorization code be dialed by Remote
Access users to access the system’s Remote Access facilities.

Barrier Code

You must assign a barrier code that conforms to the number entered in the Barrier
Code Length field. You may enter up to 10 barrier codes per system. Duplicate
entries are not allowed. You must keep your own records regarding the
distribution of these barrier codes to your personnel.
Valid
entries

Usage

0 to 9 or

Enter a 4- to 7-digit number in any combination of digits.

blank
none

555-233-506

Must be specified in the first Barrier Code field, if the Barrier
Code Length field is blank.

Issue 5 October 2002

1089

Screen reference

Barrier Code Length

Assign a barrier code length of 7 to provide maximum security.
Valid entries

Usage

4 to 7 or blank

Enter a number to indicate the length of the barrier code.

Calls Used

This display-only field shows the number of calls placed using the corresponding
barrier code. This field is incremented each time a barrier code is successfully
used to access the Remote Access feature. A usage that exceeds the expected rate
indicates improper use.
COR

Assign the most restrictive class of restriction (COR), that provides only the level
of service required, to provide the maximum security.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 95

Enter the COR number associated with the barrier code that
defines the call restriction features.

COS

Assign the most restrictive class of service (COS), that provides only the level of
service required to provide the maximum security.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 15

Enter the COS number, associated with the barrier code, that
defines access permissions for Call Processing features.

Disable Following a Security Violation

This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Code Violation
Notification Enabled field on the Security-Related System Parameters screen is
set to y.
Valid
entries
y/n

1090

Usage

Enter y to disable the remote access feature following detection of
a remote access security violation. The system administrator can
re-enable Remote Access using the enable remote access
command.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Remote Access

Expiration Date

Assign an expiration date based on the expected length of time the barrier code
will be needed. If it is expected the barrier code is to be used for a 2-week period,
assign a date two weeks from the current date. If the Expiration Date is assigned, a
warning message is displayed on the system copyright screen seven days prior to
the expiration date. The system administer can modify the expiration date to
extend the time interval if needed.
Valid entries

Usage

A date greater than
the current date or
blank

Enter the date you want the barrier code to expire.

No. of Calls

The Expiration Date and No. of Calls fields can be used independently or in
conjunction to provide the maximum security. If both the Expiration Date and No.
of Calls fields are assigned, the corresponding barrier code expires when the first
of these criteria is satisfied.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 9999
or blank

Enter the number of Remote Access calls that can be
placed using the associated barrier code.

Permanently Disable

Reactivation of remote access to the interface requires Avaya Services
intervention.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to permanently block remote access to the
administration interface.

Remote Access Dial Tone

Set this field to n for maximum security. This field appears when the
Authorization Code Required field is set to y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter n so that there is no Remote Access Dial Tone prompt.

Remote Access Extension

The remote access extension is used as if it was a DID extension. Only one DID
extension can be assigned as the remote access extension. Calls to that number are
treated the same as calls on the remote access trunk.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1091

Screen reference

When a trunk group is dedicated to Remote Access, the remote access extension
number is administered on the trunk group’s incoming destination field.
Valid
entries

Extension
number

Usage

Enter the extension number for Remote Access associated
with each trunk that supports the Remote Access feature.
You cannot assign a Vector Directory Number (VDN)
extension as the remote access extension.
May be blank if no barrier codes.

TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 20
(DEFINITY CSI,
SI)

Enter the appropriate Tenant Partition number.

1 to 100
(DEFINITY R,
S8300 Media
Server, S8700
IP-Connect,
S8700
Multi-Connect))

Related Topics

See ‘‘Setting up remote access’’ on page 370 for step-by-step instructions for
configuring remote access.
See ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 1800 for a description of this feature.

Remote Call Coverage Table
The Remote Call Coverage Table allows you to provide automatic redirection of
certain calls to alternate non-local answering positions in a coverage path.
Non-local numbers may be any ARS or AAR number, any number on the public
network, any international number, or a UDP/DCS extension up to 16 digits or
blank, which includes any ARS/AAR facility access code, any trunk dial access
code (TAC), long distance dialing code, or international dial code. Up to 999
remote call coverage points can be entered on the 23 pages of this screen.

1092

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Remote Office

Field descriptions for page 1

change coverage remote
REMOTE CALL COVERAGE TABLE
ENTRIES FROM 1 TO 1000
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________

16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:

________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________

31: ________________
32: ________________
33: ________________
34: ________________
35: ________________
36: ________________
37: ________________
38: ________________
39: ________________
40: ________________
41: ________________
42: ________________
43: ________________
44: ________________
45: ________________

Screen 250. Remote Call Coverage Table

01-1000

Valid
entries
0 to 9 or
blank

Usage

Enter the destination up to 16 digits.

Remote Office
This screen supports an arrangement whereby a user can set up a remote office
without having an on-premises physical desk-set. An R300 is sued to connect
remote DCP and analog phones, IP telephones, and H.323 trunks to the
DEFINITY gatekeeper via IP.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1093

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 1

change remote office x
REMOTE OFFICE
Node Name:
Network Region:
Location:
Site Data:

_______________
___
__
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________

Screen 251. Remote Office

Location

This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Code Violation
Notification Enabled field on the Security-Related System Parameters screen is
set to y. It specifies the location (comprised of the associated time zone and the
appropriate numbering plan).
Valid
entries

Usage

1-64

Network Region

This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Code Violation
Notification Enabled field on the Security-Related System Parameters screen is
set to y. It specifies the network region to be assigned to all stations supported on
this remote office.
Valid entries

Usage

1-250 or

blank
Node Name

This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Code Violation
Notification Enabled field on the Security-Related System Parameters screen is
set to y. It specifies the node name of the remote office.
Valid entries

Usage

character string

1094

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

RHNPA Table

Site Data

This field appears on the screen when the SVN Authorization Code Violation
Notification Enabled field on the Security-Related System Parameters screen is
set to y.
Valid entries

Usage

30 characters
or blank

Any desired information.

RHNPA Table
The RHNPA Table defines route patterns for specific 3-digit codes, usually direct
distance dialing (DDD) prefix numbers. The appearance of the screen is different
slightly depending on the switch type.
change rhnpa

Page 1 of X
RHNPA TABLE: __
CODES: 000-999

1: ___
2: ___

00:
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:

1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__

Code
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:

3: ___
4: ___

Pattern Choices
5: ___
7: ___
9: ___
6: ___
8: ___ 10: ___

- Pattern Choice Assignments (from 1-12
1__ 20: 1__ 30: 1__ 40: 1__ 50: 1__ 60:
1__ 21: 1__ 31: 1__ 41: 1__ 51: 1__ 61:
1__ 22: 1__ 32: 1__ 42: 1__ 52: 1__ 62:
1__ 23: 1__ 33: 1__ 43: 1__ 53: 1__ 63:
1__ 24: 1__ 34: 1__ 44: 1__ 54: 1__ 64:
1__ 25: 1__ 35: 1__ 45: 1__ 55: 1__ 65:
1__ 26: 1__ 36: 1__ 46: 1__ 56: 1__ 66:
1__ 27: 1__ 37: 1__ 47: 1__ 57: 1__ 67:
1__ 28: 1__ 38: 1__ 48: 1__ 58: 1__ 68:
1__ 29: 1__ 39: 1__ 49: 1__ 59: 1__ 69:

11: ___
12: ___

above)
1__ 70:
1__ 71:
1__ 72:
1__ 73:
1__ 74:
1__ 75:
1__ 76:
1__ 77:
1__ 78:
1__ 79:

1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__

80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:

1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__

90:
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:

1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__
1__

Screen 252. RHNPA Table

CODES

Display-only field showing the desired 100-block, for example 000 through 099
or 900 through 999 based upon the change rhnpa command. A separate screen
displays for each 100-block.
Code-Pattern Choice Assignments
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 12

Enter a Pattern Choice number from the list above to choose
the route pattern for each prefix code. For Server R.
For S8700 IP-Connect.

1 through 24

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1095

Screen reference

Pattern Choices

There are 12 pattern choices for DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8100 Media Server with
a G600, and S8100 Media Server with a CMC1; there are 24 pattern choices for
the S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, and S8700 Multi-Connect. Enter the
route pattern number you want associated with each code. The pattern choice you
list on one screen automatically defaults to the other screens of the same table. If
you use one pattern for most of the codes, assign that pattern to choice 1.
Valid
entries
1-640 or

blank
1-999 or

blank
1-254

Usage

For DEFINITY R, S8100 Media Server with a G600, and
S8100 Media Server with a CMC1.
For S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, and S8700
Multi-Connect
For DEFINITY SI and CSI.

RHNPA TABLE

Display-only field indicating the table number.

Route Pattern
The Route Pattern screen defines the route patterns used by your switch. Each
route pattern contains a list of trunk groups that can be used to route the call. The
maximum number of route patterns and trunk groups allowed depends on the
configuration and memory available in your system.
Use this screen to insert or delete digits so AAR or ARS calls route over different
trunk groups. You can convert an AAR number into an international number, and
insert an area code in an AAR number to convert an on-network number to a
public network number. Also, when a call directly accesses a local central office
(CO), if the long-distance carrier provided by your CO is not available, your
switch can insert the dial access code for an alternative carrier into the digit string.

1096

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Route Pattern

change route-pattern 1

Page 1 of X
Pattern Number: 1_

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Grp.
No.
___
___
___
___
___
___

No.
FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll Del
Inserted
Mrk Lmt List Dgts Digits
_ ___ _ __ __
__
_____________________________________
_ ___ _ __ __
__
_____________________________________
_ ___ _ __ __
__
_____________________________________
_ ___ _ __ __
__
_____________________________________
_ ___ _ __ __
__
_____________________________________
_ ___ _ __ __
__
_____________________________________

BCC VALUE TSC CA-TSC
0 1 2 3 4 W
Request
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

y
y
y
y
y
y

y
y
y
y
y
y

y
y
y
y
y
y

y
y
y
y
y
y

y
y
y
y
y
y

n
n
n
n
n
n

y
y
y
y
y
y

none

ITC BCIE Service/Feature BAND

___ both ept outwats-bnd____
rest
_______________
rest
_______________
rest
_______________
rest
_______________
rest
_______________

No.
Dgts
Subaddress
____ _
_
_
_
_
_

DCS/
QSIG IXC
Intw
n
user
n
user
n
user
n
user
n
user
n
user

Numbering LAR
Format
________
________
________
________
________
________

none
next
rehu
none
none
none

Screen 253. Route Pattern

Band

Enter a number that represents the OUTWATS band number (US only).
WATS is a voice-grade service that provides both voice and low-speed data
transmission calls to defined areas (bands) for a flat rate charge.0
This field appears when the Services/Features field is outwats-bnd and when
ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen. Band is required by Call-by-Call Service Selection.
BCC Value

Bearer Capability Class (BCC) identifies the type of call appropriate for this trunk
group, such as voice calls and different types of data calls. This field appears
when the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/ n

Enter y in appropriate BCC column (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or W) if
the BCC is valid for the associated route pattern. A trunk
group preference may have more than one BCC.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1097

Screen reference

The following table explains BCC values:
BCC Value

Description

0

Voice-Grade Data and Voice

1

56-kbps Data (Mode 1)

2

64-kbps Data (Mode 2)

3

64-kbps Data (Mode 3)

4

64-kbps Data (Mode 0)

W

128 to 1984-kbps Data (Wideband)

BCIE (Bearer Capability Information Element)

Use BCIE to determine how to create the ITC codepoint in the setup message.
This field applies to ISDN trunks and appears if ITC is both.
Valid entries

Usage

ept (endpoint)
unr (unrestricted)

CA-TSC Request

Use CA-TSC on ISDN B-channel connections.
Valid
entries

Usage

as-needed

The CA-TSC is set up only when needed. This causes a slight
delay. Avaya recommends this entry for most situations.

at-setup

The CA-TSC is automatically set up for every B-channel call
whether or not it is needed.

none

No CA-TSC is set up. Permits tandeming of NCA-TSC setup
requests0.

DCS/QSIG Intw

This field only appears if the Interworking with DCS field on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is set to y.

1098

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable DCS/QSIG Interworking.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Route Pattern

FRL
Valid
entries
0 to 7

Usage

Enter the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) associated with the
entries on this row (preference). 0 is the least restrictive and 7
is the most restrictive. The calling party’s FRL must be greater
than or equal to this FRL to access the associated trunk-group.

! SECURITY ALERT:
For system security reasons, Avaya recommends using the most restrictive
FRL possible.
Grp No
Valid
entries

Usage

1 to 666

Enter the trunk group number associated with this row
(preference). For DEFINITY R, CSI, SI.

1 to 2000

For S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect.

Hop Lmt

Enter the number of hops for each preference. A hop is when a call tandems
through a switch to another destination. Limiting the number of hops prevents
circular hunting, which ties up trunk facilities without ever completing the call.
Avaya MultiVantage blocks a hop equal to or greater than the number you enter.
Valid entries

Usage

blank

Indicates that there is no limit to the number of hops for this
preference.

1 to 9

To limit the number of hops if using the tandem hop feature.

1 to 32

If using the transit feature.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1099

Screen reference

Inserted Digits

Enter the digits you want inserted for routing. The switch can send up to 52 digits.
This includes up to 36 digits you may enter here plus up to 18-digits originally
dialed. Special symbols count as two digits each.
Valid entries

Usage

(0 to 9)

Enter the digits you want inserted for routing.

0 to 36 digits
*

When * is in the route pattern and the outgoing trunk is signaling
type “mf”, the MFC tone for the “end-of-digits” is sent out to the
CO in place of the *.

#

When # is in the route pattern and the outgoing trunk is signaling
type “mf”, the MFC tone for the “end-of-digits” is sent out to the
CO in place of the #.

‘,’

Use 2 places. Creates a 1.5 second pause between digits being
sent. Do not use as the first character in the string unless
absolutely necessary. Misuse can result in some calls, such as
Abbreviated Dialing or Last Number Dialed, not completing.

+

Wait for dial tone up to the Off Premises Tone Detection Timer
and then send digits or intercept tone based on Out Pulse
Without Tone y/n on the Feature-Related System Parameters
screen.

%

Start End-to-End Signaling.

!

Wait for dial tone without timeout and then send DTMF digits.

&

Wait for ANI (used for Russian pulse trunks)

ITC (Information Transfer Capability)

Use Information Transfer Capability (ITC) to identify the type of data
transmission or traffic that this routing preference can carry. The ITC applies only
to data calls (BCC 1 through 4).
This field must be unre or both if the BCC is y and the BCC value is W

1100

Valid entries

Usage

both

Calls from restricted and unrestricted endpoints can access
the route pattern.

rest(ricted)

Calls from restricted endpoints can access the route pattern.

unre(stricted)

Calls from unrestricted endpoints can access the route
pattern.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Route Pattern

IXC

Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) identifies the carrier, such as AT&T, used for calls
that route via an IXC, and for Call Detail Recording (CDR).
This field appears when the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

Valid carrier
code

Identifies the carrier for IXC calls

user

For presubscribed carrier. Used when an IXC is not
specified.

none

This field must be none for non-ISDN trunk groups and for
Bellcore NI-2 Operator Service Access. If you need to send
an IXC code for a non-ISDN trunk group, enter the IXC code
in the Inserted Digits field.

LAR

Enter the routing-preference for Look Ahead Routing.
Valid entries

Usage

next

Go to the next routing preference and attempt the call again.

rehu

Rehunt within the current routing-preference for another
trunk to attempt the call again.

none

Look Ahead Routing is not enabled for the preference.

No. Del. Digits

Use this field to modify the dialed number so an AAR or ARS call routes over
different trunk groups that terminate in switches with different dial plans
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 28 or
blank

Enter the total number of digits you want the system to delete
before it sends the number out on the trunk. Use for calls that
route:

555-233-506

■

to or through a remote switch

■

over tie trunks to a private network switch

■

over Central Office (CO) trunks to the serving CO

Issue 5 October 2002

1101

Screen reference

No. Dgts Subaddress

Allows a caller to reach a number where switch digit processing deletes the dialed
number and inserts the listed directory number (LDN). The LDN then is sent to
the destination address and the dialed extension is sent in the calling party
subaddress information element (IE). At the receiving end, the call terminates to
the user indicated by the subaddress number instead of the attendant.
Administrable when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Option screen, the
ISDN Feature Plus field is y.
Valid
entries
1 through 5

blank

Usage

Enter the number of dialed digits to send in the calling party
subaddress IE.

NPA

This entry is not required for AAR.
Valid entries

Usage

3-digit
number

Enter the 3-digit Numbering Plan Area (NPA) (or area code)
for the terminating endpoint of the trunk group. Call your
local telephone company to verify this number if you need
help.
For WATS trunks, the terminating NPA is the same as the
home NPA unless the Local Exchange Carrier requires 10
digits for local NPA calls.

blank

For AAR calls and for tie trunks

Numbering Format

This field applies only to ISDN trunk groups. Enter a value from table below. This
field specifies the format of the routing number used for the trunk group for this
preference.
This field appears when the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

1102

Valid entries

Numbering Plan Identifier

Type of Numbering

blank

E.164(1)

1-MAX

natl-pub

E.164(1)

national(2)

intl-pub

E.164(1)

international(1)

locl-pub

E.164(1)

local/subscriber(4)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Route Pattern

Valid entries

Numbering Plan Identifier

Type of Numbering

pub-unk

E.164(1)

unknown(0)

lev0-pvt

Private Numbering Plan PNP(9)

local(4)

lev1-pvt

Private Numbering Plan PNP(9)

Regional Level 1(2)

lev2-pvt

Private Numbering Plan PNP(9)

Regional Level 2(1)

unk-unk

unknown(0)

unknown(0)

levl0-pvt
(enter to allow
Network Call
Redirection/
Transfer

NOTE:

To access Bellcore NI-2 Operator Service Access, the Inserted Digits field
must be unk-unk.
Pattern Number

This display-only field shows the route pattern number (1 to 640).
Prefix Mark

This entry is not required for AAR. For ARS, enter a number from 0 to 4 or blank.
Prefix Marks set the requirements for sending a prefix digit 1, indicating a
long-distance call. Prefix Marks apply to 7- or 10-digit Direct Distance Dialing
(DDD) public network calls. A prefix digit 1 is sent only when call type is foreign
number plan area (FNPA) or home numbering plan area (HNPA) in the ARS Digit
Analysis table.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1103

Screen reference

For a WATS trunk, the Prefix Mark is the same as the local CO trunk.
Valid
entries
0

Usage
■

Suppress a user-dialed prefix digit 1 for 10-digit FNPA calls.

■

Leave a user-dialed prefix digit 1 for 7-digit HNPA calls.

■

Leave a prefix digit 1 on 10-digit calls that are not FNPA or
HNPA calls.

Do not use Prefix Mark 0 in those areas where all long-distance calls
must be dialed as 1+10 digits. Check with your local network
provider.
1

■

Send a 1 on 10-digit calls, but not on 7-digit calls.

Use Prefix Mark 1 for HNPA calls that require a 1 to indicate
long-distance calls.
2

■

Send a 1 on all 10-digit and 7-digit long-distance calls.

Prefix Mark 2 refers to a Toll Table to define long distance codes.
3

■

Send a 1 on all long-distance calls and keep or insert the NPA
(area code) so that all long distance calls are 10-digit calls. The
NPA is inserted when a user dials a Prefix digit 1 plus 7-digits.

Prefix Mark 3 refers to a Toll Table to define long distance codes.
4

■

Always suppress a user-dialed Prefix digit 1.

Use Prefix Mark 4, for example, when ISDN calls route to a switch
that rejects calls with a prefix digit 1.
blank

For tie trunks, leave this field blank.

Service/Feature

Enter up to 15 characters to identify the Service/Feature carried by the
information element (IE) in a call in this route pattern. This field is required by
Call-by-Call Service Selection, and Network Call Redirection and Transfer.
Service/Feature appears when ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks is y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries
accunet

multiquest

sdn (Enter to allow Network

Call Redirection/Transfer)

1104

i800

operator

sub-operator

inwats

oper-lds (operator and

sub-op-lds

lds)

(sub-operator and lds)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Security-Related System Parameters

Valid entries
lds
mega800
megacom

oper-meg

sub-op-meg

(operator and megacon)

(sub-operator and megacom)

oper-sdn

sub-op-sdn

(operator and sdn)

(sub-operator and sdn)

outwats-bnd

wats-max-bnd

Toll List

This entry is not required for AAR.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 32 or
blank

For ARS, enter the number of the ARS Toll Table associated
with the terminating NPA of the trunk group. You must
complete this field if Prefix Mark is 2 or 3.

TSC

Set TSC to y for feature transparency on DCS+ calls and to use QSIG Call
Completion.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow Call-Associated TSCs, and to allow
incoming Non-Call-Associated TSC requests to be tandemed
out for each preference.

Security-Related System Parameters
You use this screen to determine when the switch reports a security violation.
Many of the fields on this screen repeat for each type of security violation. We
have explained them once here, but the usage is the same for all. See ‘‘Security
violations notification’’ on page 1813 for more information on security violations
notification.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1105

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 1

change system-parameters security
SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Page 1 of 2

SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS
SVN Login Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: _____ Referral Destination: _____
Login Threshold: 5_
Time Interval: 0:03
Announcement Extension: _____
SVN Remote Access
Originating
Barrier Code
Announcement

Violation Notification Enabled? y
Extension: _____ Referral Destination: _____
Threshold: 10
Time Interval: 0:03
Extension: _____

SVN Authorization
Originating
Authorization Code
Announcement

Code Violation Notification Enabled? y
Extension: _____ Referral Destination: _____
Threshold: 10
Time Interval: 0:03
Extension: _____

Screen 254. Security-Related System Parameters

SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION
PARAMETERS
SVN Login (Violation Notification, Remote
Access, Authorization Code) Enabled
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Set to y if you want the switch to notify you when a login
violation occurs. If this field is y, the next 5 fields appear so
you can establish the parameters for what is considered a
security violation.

Announcement Extension

If you enter a value in this field, the switch calls the referral destination, then plays
this announcement upon answer.

1106

Valid entries

Usage

Valid extension

The announcement extension where SVN
violation announcement resides.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Security-Related System Parameters

Login (Barrier Code, Authorization Code)
Threshold

The value assigned to this field, in conjunction with Time Interval, determines
whether a security violation has occurred. For example, if this field is 5, and time
interval is 0:03, then five invalid access attempts within three minutes constitutes
a security violation.
Valid entries

Usage

1–99, 1–255

Enter the number of access attempts that are permitted before
a referral call is made. In general, it is good to keep this
number low. If you are doing testing and do not want to
generate alarms, you might change this threshold
temporarily.

for Station
Security code

Originating Extension

The originating extension initiates the referral call in the event of a security
violation. It also sends the appropriate alerting message or display to the referral
destination.
Valid entries

Usage

An unassigned
extension

If you establish notification for more than one type of
security violations, you must assign a different extension to
each one. When the switch generations a referral call, this
extension and the type of violation appear on the display at
the referral destination.

Referral Destination

The referral destination receives the referral call when a security violation occurs.
The referral destination telephone must have a display, unless the you assign an
Announcement Extension.
Valid entries

Usage

An extension

Enter the extension of the telephone, attendant console, or
vector directory number (VDN) that you want to receive the
referral call for each type of violation. This can be the same
extension for all type of violations.
If you use a VDN, you must complete the Announcement
Extension field. You can also use Call Vectoring
Time-of-Day routing to route the referral call to different
destinations based on the time of day or the day of the week.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1107

Screen reference

Time Interval

The value of this field, in conjunction with Threshold, determines whether a
security violation has occurred.
Valid entries

Usage

0:01 to 7:59

The range for the time interval is one minute to eight hours.
Entered in the screen “x:xx.” For example, if you want the time
interval to be one minute, you enter 0:01. If you want the time
interval to be seven and one-half hours, you enter 7:30.

SVN Remote Access Violation Notification
Enabled

Use these fields to establish parameters for remote access security violations. A
remote access violation occurs if a user enters incorrect barrier codes. You cannot
set the system to disable remote access following a security violation unless you
have turned this on here.
SVN Authorization Code Violation Notification
Enabled
Field descriptions for page 2

change system-parameters security
SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Page 2 of 2

SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS
SVN Station Security Code Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: _____
Referral Destination: _____
Station Security Code Threshold: 10
Time Interval: 0:03
Announcement Extension: _____
STATION SECURITY CODE VERIFICATION PARAMETERS
Minimum Station Security Code Length: 4
Security Code for Terminal Self Administration Required? y
ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
SYSAM-LCL? n
SYSAM-RMT? n
MAINT? n
SYS-PORT? n
Translation-ID Number Mismatch Interval (days): _

Screen 255. Security-Related System Parameters for DEFINITY R

1108

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Security-Related System Parameters

change system-parameters security
SECURITY-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Page 2 of 2

SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS
SVN Station Security Code Violation Notification Enabled? y
Originating Extension: _____
Referral Destination: _____
Station Security Code Threshold: 10
Time Interval: 0:03
Announcement Extension: _____
STATION SECURITY CODE VERIFICATION PARAMETERS
Minimum Station Security Code Length: 4
Security Code for Terminal Self Administration Required? y
ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS
MGR1? n
EPN? n

INADS? n
NET? n

Screen 256. Security-Related System Parameters for DEFINITY SI and DEFINITY CSI

SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION
PARAMETERS
SVN Station Security Code Violation
Notification Enabled

Station Security codes are used to validate logins to a particular extension (for
example, a home agent using an extender, or two part-time workers using the
same telephone, but different extensions, through personal station access.) Enter y
here to establish parameters for this.
STATION SECURITY CODE VERIFICATION
PARAMETERS
Minimum Station Security Code Length

This determines the minimum required length of the Station Security Codes that
you enter on the Station screen.
Valid entries

Usage

3–8

Longer codes are more secure. If station security codes are
used for external access to telecommuting features, the
minimum length should be 7 or 8.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1109

Screen reference

Security Code for Terminal Self Administration
Required

Specifies if a Personal Station access code is required to enter the
Self-Administration mode.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate that a security code is required.

ACCESS SECURITY GATEWAY PARAMETERS

These eight fields appear only if the Access Security Gateway (ASG) field on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
The following 4 fields display only for the DEFINITY R version:
MAINT

A direct connection to the EPN maintenance circuit pack RS-232 interface.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge
response.

SYSAM-LCL

A direct cable connection to the SYSAM-LCL G3-MT (local system
administrator’s terminal) port on the System Access and Maintenance circuit pack
on the active DEFINITY R processor carrier. For more information on the circuit
pack, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge
response.

SYS-PORT

A dialed-in (or out) connection to the System Access Port.

1110

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge
response.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Security-Related System Parameters

SYSAM-RMT

A dialed-in (or out) connection to the SYSAM-RMT port on the System Access
and Maintenance circuit pack in the active DEFINITY R processor carrier. For
more information on the circuit pack, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions
Hardware Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge
response.

The following fields display only for the DEFINITY SI and CSI versions:
EPN

A direct connection to the Expansion Port Network.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge
response.

INADS

A direct cable connection to the Initialization and Administration System used to
remotely initialize and administer Avaya MultiVantage.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge
response.

MGR1

The direct connect system administration and maintenance access interface
located on the processor circuit pack. For more information on the circuit pack,
see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge
response.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1111

Screen reference

NET

A dialed-in (or out) connection to the Network Controller circuit pack. For more
information on the circuit pack, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions
Hardware Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Any entry attempt through this port receives a challenge
response.

Translation-ID Number Mismatch Interval (days)

A display-only field for all logins except init; only init logins can change this
field. This field specifies the interval (in days) that the system allows a mismatch
between the translation ID stored in the Processor circuit pack(s) and on the flash
card. Following expiration of this interval, the ability to execute system
administration commands that modify translation data is denied for all logins,
except for init.
Valid entries

Usage

1-90

Enter a number to indicate the number of days the system
allows access to system administration commands.

Signaling Group
Use this screen to establish signaling group parameters for ISDN-PRI, H.323, and
ATM trunks. Because these trunk types vary in the types of parameters needed,
the fields that appear on this screen change depending on the value of the Group
Type field

1112

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Signaling Group

Field descriptions for page 1

Page 1 of 5
SIGNALING GROUP
Group Number

___

Group Type:
Associated Signaling?
Primary D-Channel:

atm___

Name:
Max Number of NCA TSC: ___
Max number of CA TSC: ___
Trunk Group for NCA TSC: ___

Trunk Group for Channel Selection: ___
Supplementary Service Protocol: _
CIRCUIT PARAMETERS
Virtual Path Identifier: 0
Virtual Channel Identifier: 0
Signaling Mode:
Idle Code:
Interface Companding:
Country Protocol:
Protocol Version:

Network Call Transfer? n

isdn-pri
Circuit Type:
11111111
Connect:
mulaw
1
d
DCP/Analog Bearer Capability:
Interworking Message:

T1
network

3.1kHz
PROGress

Screen 257. Signaling Group

Group Number

A display-only field identifying the signaling group.
Group Type

This field describes the signaling group type.
Valid entries

Usage

atm
h.323
isdn-pri
sip

For S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect only.

Name

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter 15 alphanumeric characters for identification.
Associated Signaling

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1113

Screen reference

Appears when the Group Type field is isdn-pri.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to use associated signaling.

n

Enter n to use non-facility associated signaling.

Remote Office

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if the signaling group serves a remote office.

D Channel

Appears when the Group Type field is atm. Enter the necessary characters.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
09 through 32

Primary D Channel

Appears when the Group Type field is isdn-pri.
Valid
entries

Usage

Enter cabinet number (1-44), carrier (A-E), slot (00-20), circuit
(09-32).
Max number of NCA TSC

Appears when the Group Type field is atm, h.323, or isdn-pri.

1114

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Signaling Group

Valid
entries
0-256

Usage

Maximum number of simultaneous non-call-associated
Temporary Signaling Connections. The TSCs carry signaling
for features not associated with a specific call, for example,
signals to turn on Leave Word Calling.

Max number of CA TSC

Appears when the Group Type field is atm, h.323, or isdn-pri.
Valid
entries

Usage

0-619

Maximum number of simultaneous call-associated Temporary
Signaling Connections that can exist in the signaling group.
Typically this is the number of ISDN-PRI trunk group
members controlled by this signaling group.

0-400

For DEFINITY SI only.

Trunk Group for NCA TSC
Valid
entries
1-666 or

blank
1-2000 or

blank
1-99 or
blank

555-233-506

Usage

Enter the ISDN-PRI trunk group number whose incoming
call-handling table will be used to handle incoming NCA-TSCs
through this signaling group. For DEFINITY R.
For S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect.
For DEFINITY SI only.

Issue 5 October 2002

1115

Screen reference

Trunk Group for Channel Selection
Valid
entries
1-666 or

blank

Usage

Enter the trunk group number. If there is more than one trunk
group assigned to this signaling group, the group entered in
this field will be the one that can accept incoming calls. For
DEFINITY R.

1-99 or
blank

For DEFINITY SI only.

1-2000

For S8300 Media Server, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect.

X-Mobility/Wireless Type

Appears when the Group Type field is isdn-pri. This field indicates the type of
X-Mobile endpoints allowed.
Valid
entries
DECT

Usage

Indicates to the switch that the remote end of the trunk group
controlled by the signaling group is a DECT mobility
controller. This allows X-Mobility to work over ISDN-PRI
trunks between the switch and adjunct.

NONE

Supplementary Service Protocol
Valid
entries

Usage

a

AT&T, Bellcore, Nortel.
When the Country Code field on the DS1 screen is 1A, SSA
selects AT&T custom supplementary services.
When the Country Code field on the DS1 screen is 1B, SSA
selects Bellcore Supplementary Services.

b
c
d

1116

When the Country Code field on the DS1 screen is 1C, SSA
selects Nortel Proprietary Supplementary Services.
ISO QSIG
ETSI
ECMA QSIG

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Signaling Group

Valid
entries
e

f
g

Usage

Allows DCS with rerouting. DCS with Rerouting must be y,
and the Used for DCS field on the trunk group screen must be
y.
Feature Plus
ANSI. Available only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI field is
y or the Used for DCS field is y.

Network Call Transfer

Appears when the Group Type field is atm. For more information, see Avaya
MultiVantage™ Network Call Redirection.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to indicate D-channels are supporting
ENCT.

Near-end Node Name

Appears on the DEFINITY R when the Group Type field is atm or sip. Enter the
node name for the C-LAN IP interface on this switch. The node name is
administered on the Node Names screen and the IP Interfaces screen.
Valid entries

Usage

Character string

Describe the near-end node.

Far-end Node Name

Appears when the Group Type field is atm or sip. Enter the node name for the
far-end C-LAN IP interface used for trunks assigned to this signaling group. The
node name is administered on the Node Names screen.
Valid entries

Usage

Match the Node Names screen.

Describe the far-end node.

Circuit Parameters
Virtual Path Identifier

A display-only field that appears when the Group Type field is atm. This field
always sets to 0.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1117

Screen reference

Valid
entries

Usage

32-1023 or

Enter a number between 32-1023 or blank.

blank
Virtual Channel Identifier

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.
Valid
entries

Usage

32-1023 or

Enter a number between 32-1023 or blank.

blank
Near-end Listen Port

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323 or sip.
Valid entries

Usage

1719, 1720,
or 5000-9999

Enter an unused port number. Avaya recommends 1720.
Enter 1719 if LRQ is y.

Far-end Listen Port

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323 or sip.
Valid entries

Usage

1-65535 or

Enter the same number as entered in the Near-end Listen port
field.

blank

Far-end Network Region

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323 or sip. The number of the network
region number that is assigned to the far-end of the trunk group.
Valid
entries
1-250 or

blank

1118

Usage

Enter the network region number that is assigned to the far end
of the trunk group. The region is used to obtain the codec set
used for negotiation of trunk bearer capability. Leave blank to
select the region of the near-end node.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Signaling Group

LRQ Required

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter n if the far-end switch is an Avaya MultiVantage. Enter
y if the far-end switch is a non-DEFINITY and requires a
location request to obtain a signaling address in its signaling
protocol. If y, “Calls Share IP Signaling Connection” must be
n.

Signaling Mode

A display-only field that appears when the Group Type field is atm. This field
always sets to isdn-pri.
Circuit Type

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.
Valid display

Usage

T1

Results in page 2 displaying 24 channels.

E1

Results in page 2 displaying 31 channels.

RRQ Required

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323. This field specifies the signaling
group that serves as a gateway rather than gatekeeper.
Valid display

Usage

y/n

Displays y if the signaling group serves a remote office
(gateway). Displays n if the signaling group serves a
gatekeeper.

Idle Code

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.
Valid entries

Usage

0, 1

Enter an 8-digit string.

Connect

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1119

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

host
network
pbx

Calls Share IP Signaling Connection

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323 or sip.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y for inter-MultiVantage connections. If y, then “LRQ
Required” must be n. Enter n if the local and/or remote
switch is a non-MultiVantage switch.

Interface Companding

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.
Valid entries

Usage

alaw
mulaw

Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323 or sip.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to automatically remove from service trunks assigned
to this signaling group when IP transport performance falls
below limits administered on the Maintenance-Related
System Parameters screen.

Country Protocol

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.
Valid entries

Usage

1-25
etsi

1120

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Signaling Group

Protocol Version

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.
Valid entries

Usage

a
b
c
d

Direct IP-IP Audio Connections

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323. Allows direct audio connections
between IP endpoints.
Valid
entries
y/n

Usage

Enter to y to save on bandwidth resources and improve sound
quality of voice over IP transmissions.

IP Audio Hairpinning

Appears when the Group Type field is h.323. Allows IP endpoints to be connected
through the IP circuit pack on the switch.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow IP endpoints to be connected through the IP
circuit pack on the switch in IP format, without going
through the MultiVantage TDM bus.

DCP/Analog Bearer Capability

Appears when the Group Type field is atm.
Valid entries

Usage

3.1kHz
speech

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1121

Screen reference

Interworking Message

Appears when the Group Type field is atm, h.323, or sip. This field determines
what message the switch sends when an incoming ISDN trunk call interworks (is
routed over a non-ISDN trunk group).
Valid entries

Usage

PROGress

Normally select this value. PROGress asks the public
network to cut through the B-channel and let the caller hear
tones such as ringback or busy tone provided over the
non-ISDN trunk.

ALERTing

ALERTing causes the public network in many countries to
play ringback tone to the caller. Select this value only if the
DS1 is connected to the public network, and it is determined
that callers hear silence (rather than ringback or busy tone)
when a call incoming over the DS1 interworks to a
non-ISDN trunk.

Signaling Group screen (page 2)

Page 2
SIGNALING GROUP
Chan Port Chan Port
1:
17:
2:
18:
3:
19:
4:
20:
5:
21:
6:
22:
7:
23:
8:
24:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

Screen 258. Signaling Group screen (when the Group Type field is atm)

Chan Port

Displays when the Group Type field is atm. If the Circuit Type field on page 1 is
T1, this field displays 24 channels; if you specified E1, it displays 31 channels.
You must fill this screen in for ATM signaling groups. This provides two things:

1122

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Signaling Group

■

It allows you to define fractional T1 and fractional E1 facilities, specifying
how many and which channels to use.

■

It allows you to choose the port numbers to use (port numbers must be
unique for all signaling groups on the same ATM board).

The signaling channel (port 16 for an E1 and port 24 for a T1) must be a port
between 9 and 32. Any port number used on this screen may not be used on any
other ATM signaling group on the same board.
The channels used must match exactly the channels used on the other end of the
signaling group. For example, if your T1 is set up to use channels 1 through 5, 7,
and 24 (the signaling channel), the far end must use channels 1 through 5, 7, and
24.
Valid
entries
009 through
256 or blank

Usage

Enter the port number for non-signaling channels.

Signaling Group screen (page 2)

Page 2 of 5
ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT
Service/Feature: ___________
As-needed Inactivity Time-out (min):_
TSC
Local
Adj.
Mach.
Index
Ext.
Enabled Established
Dest. Digits
Appl.
Name
ID
1:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
2:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
3:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
4:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
5:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
6:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
7:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
8:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
9:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
10:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
11:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
12:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
13:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
14:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__
15:
_____
__
_________
_____________
_______ _______
__

Screen 259. Signaling Group screen (Administered NCA-TSC Assignment Page)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1123

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 2
Service/Feature

These are the encodings that are used in the SETUP messages for the Temporary
Signaling Connections administered on pages 2-5 of this screen.
Valid entries

Usage

accunet
inwats
lds
mega800
megacom
multiquest
operator
sdn
sub-operator
wats-maxbnd

As-needed Inactivity Time-out (min)

This field determines that if you administer any of the TSCs as “as-needed (as
opposed to “permanent”), then the TSC is dropped if no message is sent over the
TSC in the designated number of minutes.
Valid
entries

Usage

10 through
90 or blank

Local Ext
Valid
entries

Usage

Enter the extension of the ISDN interface.

1124

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Signaling Group

Enabled
Valid
entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable the administered NCA-TSC.

Established

Used to indicate the strategy for establishing this administered NCA-TSC.
Valid entries

Usage

permanent

Use permanent so that the administered NCA-TSC can be
established by either the near end or the far end.

as-needed

Use as-needed so that the administered NCA-TSC will be
established the first time the administered NCA-TSC is
needed; it can be set up either by the near end or far end
switch.

Dest. Digits
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 15
characters 0-9,

Enter the extension of the ISDN interface.

*, #

Appl.

Specifies the application for this administered NCA-TSC.
Valid entries

Usage

audix

Use this for ISDN-PRI D-channel DCS Audix feature.

dcs

Use this for the DCS Over ISDN-PRI D-channel feature.

gateway

Use this when the administered NCA-TSC is used as one
end in the gateway channel connecting to a BX.25 link.
If gateway is entered, then the ISDN TSC Gateway
Channel Assignments screen must be completed.

masi

Use this when the NCA-TSC is one end of a multimedia
application server interface.

qsig-mwi

Use this to convert messages from an administered
AUDIX NCA-TSC to a QSIG CISC. If you use this
application type, then you must enter a Machine ID
between 1 and 20.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1125

Screen reference

Mach ID

You can enter up to 20 machine IDs.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 20

Enter a unique machine ID. The system does not
allow you to specify an ID that you already entered
on the Processor Channel screen.

1 through 63 for

For S8700 IP-Connect.

DCS
1 through 99 for

Audix
1 through 15 for

MASI
1 through 20 for

QSIG-MWI
blank

Site Data
Use this screen to enter information about buildings, floors and telephone set
colors. You must supply values on this screen before you can enter information in
the Site Data section of the Station screen.
change site-data
SITE DATA USER DEFINITION
VALID BUILDING FIELDS

_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

Screen 260. Site Data screen

Field descriptions for pages 1, 2 and 3

These pages are available for you to enter descriptive information about the
buildings, floors and phone set colors. You may enter any valid keyboard
character. If you want to indicate that a particular floor is in a particular building,
you must include this in the floor entry, for example, B301-Fl4.

1126

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Station
This section provides descriptions of all of the fields that may appear on Station
screens. Some of the fields are used for specific phone types; others are used for
all phone types. To make it easier to find a specific field, they are listed in
alphabetical order by field name.
change station 1014

Page 1 of X
STATION

Extension: 1014
Type:
Port:
Name:

STATION OPTIONS
Loss Group:
Data Module?
Speakerphone:
Display Language?

Lock Messages? n
Security Code:
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to Station:

2
n
2-way
English

BCC:
TN:
COR:
COS:

0
1
1
1

Personalized Ringing Pattern: 3
Message Lamp Ext: 1014
Mute button enabled? y
Expansion Module?
Media Complex Ext:
IP Softphone? y

Screen 261. Station

change station 1014

Page 1 of X
STATION

Extension: 30016
Type: XMOBILE
Name:

Lock Messages? n
Security Code:
Coverage Path 1:
Coverage Path 2:
Hunt-to Station:

BCC: 0
TN: 1
COR: 1
COS: 1

STATION OPTIONS
XMOBILE Type: EC500
Display Module? n

Message Lamp Ext: 30016
Message Waiting Type: NONE

Mobility Trunk Group:
Configuration Set: 1

Calls Allowed: all

CELL PHONE NUMBER MAPPING
Dial Prefix:
Cell Phone Number:
Mapping Mode: termination

Screen 262. Station when Type field is XMOBILE (page 1)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1127

Screen reference

change station 75001

Page 2 of X
STATION

FEATURE OPTIONS
LWC Reception? msa-spe
LWC Activation? y
LWC Log External Calls? n
CDR Privacy? n
Redirect Notification? y
Per Button Ring Control? n
Bridged Call Alerting? n
Active Station Ringing: single
H.320 Conversion?
Service Link Mode:
Multimedia Mode:
MWI Served User Type:
Automatic Moves:
AUDIX Name:
Messaging Server Name:
Recall Rotary Digit?
IP Emergency Calls:
Emergency Location Ext:

n
as-needed
basic
______

Auto Select Any Idle Appearance? n
Coverage Msg Retrieval? y
Auto Answer: none
Data Restriction? n
Idle Appearance Preference? n
Restrict Last Appearance? y

Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number? _

Display Client Redirection? n
Select Last Used Appearance?
Coverage After Forwarding?
Multimedia Early Answer?
Direct IP-IP Audio Connections?
IP Audio Hairpinning?

______
n
extension
75001

n
_
n
n
n

Screen 263. Station

add station 1014

Page 3 of X
STATION

SITE DATA
Room:
Jack:
Cable:
Floor:
Building:

_______
___
___
_______
_______

ABBREVIATED DIALING
List1: ________
BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1: call-appr
2: call-appr
3: call-appr

Headset?
Speaker?
Mounting:
Cord Length:
Set Color:

List2: _________

n
n
d
0_
_____

List3: _________

4:
5:

Screen 264. Station

1128

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

change station 1014

Page 4 0f 4
STATION

FEATURE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:

Screen 265. Station

If the Expansion Module field is y, a fifth page appears.
change station 1014

Page 5 of 5
STATION

EXPANSION MODULE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:

Screen 266. Station screen

The standard station fields are organized alphabetically for easy access.
1-Step Clearing
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If set to y, the call terminates again at the WCBRI terminal
when the user drops from the call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1129

Screen reference

Abbreviated Dialing List1, List2, List3

You can assign up to 3 abbreviated dialing lists to each phone.
Valid entries

Usage

enhanced

Allows the phone user to access the enhanced system
abbreviated dialing list.

group

Allows the phone user to access the specified group
abbreviated dialing list. If you enter group, you also must
enter a group number.

personal

Allows the phone user to access and program their personal
abbreviated dialing list. If you enter personal, you also must
enter a personal list number.

system

Allows the phone user to access the system abbreviated
dialing list.

Active Station Ringing

Defines how call rings to the phone when it is off-hook. This field does not affect
how calls ring at this phone when the phone is on-hook.

1130

Valid entries

Usage

continuous

Enter continuous to cause all calls to this phone to ring
continuously.

single

Enter single to cause calls to this phone to receive one ring
cycle and then ring silently.

if-busy-single

Enter if-busy-single to cause calls to this phone to ring
continuously when the phone is off-hook and idle and calls to
this phone to receive one ring cycle and then ring silently
when the phone is off-hook and active.

silent

Enter silent to cause all calls to this station to just ring
silently.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Adjunct Supervision

Adjunct Supervision appears when the Type field is 500, 2500, k2500, 8110, ops,
ds1fd, ds1sa, VRU, VRUFD, or VRUSA.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if an analog disconnect signal is sent automatically to
the port after a call terminates. Analog devices (such as
answering machines and speakerphones) use this signal to
turn the devices off after a call terminates.

n

Set this field to n so hunt group agents are alerted to
incoming calls. In a hunt group environment, the disconnect
signal blocks the reception of zip tone and incoming call
notification by an auto-answer station when a call is queued
for the station.

Assigned Member — Ext

The system automatically assigns this extension. This is the extension of the user
who has an associated Data Extension button and shares the module.
Assigned Member — Name

Display-only field that shows the name associated with the extension shown in the
Assigned Member - Ext field.
Att. Call Waiting Indication

Attendant call waiting allows attendant-originated or attendant-extended calls to a
busy single-line phone to wait and sends distinctive call-waiting tone to the
single-line user.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to assign Attendant Call Waiting to the phone.
You should not set this field to y, if the Data Restriction field
is y or the Switchhook Flash field is n, or if Data Privacy is
enabled for the phone’s class of service (COS). If any of
these conditions are true, the phone cannot accept or handle
call waiting calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1131

Screen reference

Audible Message Waiting

The Audible Message Waiting tone indicates that the user has a waiting message.
This field appears only if Audible Message Waiting is set to y on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Note that this field does not control the Message Waiting lamp.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if you want the phone user to receive stutter dial tone
when they have a waiting message and they go off-hook.

Audix Name

Specifies which AUDIX is associated with the station.
Valid entries

Usage

Names
assigned to an
AUDIX
adjunct

Must contain a user-defined adjunct name that was previously
administered in the Node-Names screen.

Auto Answer

In EAS environments, the auto answer setting on the Agent LoginID screen can
override a station’s setting when an agent logs in there.
NOTE:

For analog stations, if Auto Answer is set to acd and the station is off-hook
and idle, only the ACD split/skill calls and direct agent calls auto answer;
non-ACD calls receive busy treatment. If the station is active on an ACD
call and a non-ACD call arrives, the Agent receives call-waiting tone.

1132

Valid entries

Usage

all

Enter all to allow all calls (ACD and non-ACD) terminated to
an idle station to be cut through immediately. Does not allow
automatic hands-free answer for intercom calls.

acd

Enter acd to allow only ACD split /skill calls and direct agent
calls to auto answer. If this field is set to acd, Non-ACD calls
terminated to a station ring audibly.

none

Enter none to cause all calls terminated to this station to receive
an audible ringing treatment.

icom

Enter icom to allow a phone user to answer an intercom call
from the same intercom group without pressing the intercom
button.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Automatic Moves

Automatic Moves allows a phone to be unplugged from one location and moved
to a new location without additional switch administration. The switch
automatically associates the extension to the new port.

! CAUTION:
When a phone is unplugged and moved to another physical location, the
Emergency Location Extension field must be changed for that extension or
the USA Automatic Location Identification data base must be manually
updated. If the Emergency Location Extension field is not changed or if the
USA Automatic Location Identification data base is not updated, the DID
number sent to the Public Safety Network could send emergency response
personnel to the wrong location.

Valid entries

Usage

always

Enter always and the phone can be moved anytime without
additional administration by unplugging from one location and
plugging into a new location.

once

Enter once and the phone can be unplugged and plugged into a
new location once. After a move, the switch sets the field to
done the next time routine maintenance runs on the phone.
Use once when moving a large number of phones so each
extension is removed from the move list. Use once to prevent
automatic maintenance replacement.

no

Enter no to require administration in order to move the phone.

done

Done is a display-only value. The switch sets the field to done
after the phone is moved and routine maintenance runs on the
phone.

error

Error is a display-only value. The switch sets the field to error,
after routine maintenance runs on the phone, when a
non-serialized phone is set as a movable phone.

Auto Select Any Idle Appearance
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow automatic selection of any idle appearance
for transferred or conferenced calls. The system first attempts
to find an idle appearance of the call being transferred or
conferenced. If that attempt fails, the system selects the first
idle appearance.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1133

Screen reference

Automatic Selection of DID Numbers

The switch chooses a 2- to 5-digit extension from a predetermined list of numbers
and assigns the extension to a hotel room phone.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for
Guest Rooms feature.

BCC

Appears when ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks is enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Display-only field set to 0 for
stations (that is, indicates voice or voice-grade data).
See ‘‘Generalized route selection’’ on page 1687 for a detailed description of
Bearer Capability Classes (BCC) and their ability to provide specialized routing
for various types of voice and data calls. The BCC value is used to determine
compatibility when non-ISDN facilities are connected to ISDN facilities (ISDN
Interworking).
Bridged Call Alerting

If Bridged Call Alerting is n and Per Button Ring Control is n, audible ringing is
suppressed for incoming calls on bridged appearances of another phone’s primary
extension.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable audible ringing for TEG, PCOL, bridged
appearances, or Data Extension calls.

Building

Enter a valid building location. See ‘‘Signaling Group screen (page 2)’’ on page
1123 for valid entries.
Busy Auto Callback Without Flash

Appears only if, on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, the Without
Flash field is y. This field then defaults to y for all analog phones that allow
Analog Automatic Callback.

1134

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to provide automatic callback for a calling analog station
without flashing the hook.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Button Assignments

Enter the abbreviated software name to assign a feature button. For a list of
feature buttons, see ‘‘Telephone feature buttons’’ on page 131.
NOTE:

If you want to use Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI), you must assign
a call appearance (call-appr) to the first button position. TTI needs the
button on the first call appearance to get dial tone.
Cable

You can use this field to identify the cable that connects the phone jack to the
system. You also can enter this information in the Blank column on the Port
Assignment Record.
Caller ID Message Waiting Indication

Appears when the Type field is CallrID. For CallrID type phones or analog phones
with Caller ID adjuncts only.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow aliasing of various non-Avaya phones and
adjuncts.
NOTE:

The Caller ID Message Waiting Indication administration is independent of
the administration of LED or NEON lamp Avaya MultiVantage Message
Waiting Indication (MWI). For example, it is possible to administer a Caller
ID phone with the Caller ID Message Waiting Indication field set to n and
the Message Waiting Indicator field set to neon.
Calls Allowed
Appears if the XMOBILE Type field is EC500 and the Mapping Mode field is
termination or both. Used to identify the EC500 call filter type for an XMOBILE
station. This field allows an XMOBILE station to function as a bridge and still be
restricted.
Valid entries

Usage

internal

External calls are blocked. Internal calls terminate to the
XMOBILE station. Attendant-originated and attendant-delivered
calls are not delivered

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1135

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

external

Internal calls are blocked. External calls terminate to the
XMOBILE station.

all

All calls terminate to the XMOBILE station.

none

Prevents calls from terminating to the XMOBILE station. Can be
used to prevent business-related calls from accruing phone
charges on cell phones that are lost, being transferred to a new
user, or being disabled for other business reasons.

NOTE:

Interswitch calls on DCS trunks are treated as internal calls. When the Calls
Allowed field is set to internal or all, DCS calls are delivered to the cell
phone. When the Calls Allowed field is set to external or none, DCS calls
are not delivered.
NOTE:

Incoming calls from other EC500 users are internal if office caller ID is
enabled for the XMOBILE station associated with the cell phone. When the
Calls Allowed field is set to internal or all, calls from other EC500 users are
delivered. When the Calls Allowed field is set to external or none, calls
from other EC500 users are not delivered.
NOTE:

The calling party receives busy treatment when call filtering blocks calls to a
standalone XMOBILE. Calls delivered to standalone XMOBILE stations
that are not answered will follow the call coverage or call forwarding paths
administered for the standalone XMOBILE.
Call Waiting Indication

This allows user, attendant-originated, and outside calls to busy single-line phone
to wait and sends a distinctive call-waiting tone to the single-line user. This
feature is denied if Data Restriction is y or Switchhook Flash is n, or if Data
Privacy is active via the phone COS assignment.

1136

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to activate Call Waiting Termination for the phone.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

CDR Privacy

This option allows digits in the called number field of an outgoing call record to
be blanked, on a per-station basis. You administer the number of blocked digits
system-wide in the Privacy - Digits to Hide field on the CDR System Parameters
screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable Call Privacy for each station.

Cell Phone Number

Contains the unformatted cell phone’s published external number. This field may
contain a 3-digit area code plus the 7-digit main number. If the same Cell Phone
Number is administered on multiple XMOBILE station screens, then the Dial
Prefix associated with each instance of the Cell Phone Number must be the same.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 9

Enter 1-15 digits. Avaya recommends that you enter a full
10-digit Cell Phone Number regardless of whether the cell phone
is local or not. Note that your ARS screen has to be administered
to handle this.

Configuration Set
This field is used to administer the Configuration Set number that contains the call
treatment options desired for the XMOBILE station. This field must be
administered if:
■

The XMOBILE Type field is EC500.

■

The Mobility Trunk Group field is a trunk group number and the
administered trunk group is non-DECT or non-PHS.

■

The Mobility Trunk Group field is aar or ars.

If the Mobility Trunk Group field is a trunk group number and the administered
trunk group is DECT or PHS, this field may be left blank.
Valid entries

Usage

1-10 or blank

Enter any value corresponding to the appropriate
Configuration Set screen.

COR

Enter a Class of Restriction (COR) number to select the desired restriction.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1137

Screen reference

Cord Length

Enter a number to specify the length (in feet) of the cord attached to the receiver.
COS

Enter the desired Class of Service (COS) number to select allowed features.
Country Protocol

Enter the protocol that corresponds to your supported initialization and codesets.
The Country Protocol must match any previously-administered endpoint on the
same port.
Valid entries

Usage

1

United States (Bellcore National ISDN)

2

Australia

etsi

ETSI (Europe)

3

Japan

6

Singapore

Coverage After Forwarding

This field governs whether an unanswered forwarded call is provided coverage
treatment.

1138

Valid entries

Usage

y

Coverage treatment is provided after forwarding regardless
of the value of the Coverage After Forwarding field on the
System Parameters - Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen.

n

No coverage treatment is provided after forwarding
regardless of the value of the Coverage After Forwarding
field on the System Parameters - Call Coverage/Call
Forwarding screen.

s(ystem)

Indicates that call processing uses the Coverage After
Forwarding field on the ‘‘System Parameters Call Coverage /
Call Forwarding’’ screen. To override the system-wide
parameter for a given station, set this field to y or n.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Coverage Msg Retrieval

Applies if the phone is enabled for LWC Reception.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow users in the phone’s Coverage Path to
retrieve Leave Word Calling (LWC) messages for this phone.

Coverage Module
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to indicate that a coverage module is connected to the
station. Once you enter y, the system displays an additional
page that allows you to assign the buttons for the module.

Coverage Path 1 or Coverage Path 2

Enter a coverage-path number or time-of-day table number from a
previously-administered Call Coverage Path screen or Time of Day Coverage
Table screen.
NOTE:

If Modified Misoperation is active (Misoperation Alerting is y on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen), you must assign a Coverage
Path to all stations on the switch.
CRV Length

Only for ASAI stations. Enter 1 or 2 to indicate the length of CRV for each
interface.
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers

Custom Selection of VIP DID numbers allows you to select the DID number
assigned to a room when a guest checks in.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow you to select the DID number assigned to a
room when a guest checks in.

Data Extension

Enter the extension assigned to the data module.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1139

Screen reference

Data Option
Valid entries

Usage

analog
data module
none

Data Restriction

Data restriction provides permanent protection and cannot be changed by the
phone user. Do not assign a Data Restriction if Auto Answer is all or acd. If y,
whisper page to this station is denied.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to prevent tones, such as call-waiting tones, from
interrupting data calls.

Default Dialing Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code

Appears only when the Special Dialing Option is set to default. Enter a list
number associated with the abbreviated dialing list.
When the user goes off-hook for a data call and presses the Return button
following the DIAL prompt, the system dials the AD number. The data call
originator also can perform data-terminal dialing by specifying a dial string that
may or may not contain alphanumeric names.
Dial Prefix

Contains the unformatted sequence of digits or characters that are prepended to
the cell phone’s published cell phone number before dialing. If the same Cell
Phone Number is administered on multiple XMOBILE station screens, then the
Dial Prefix associated with each instance of the Cell Phone Number must be the
same.
Valid entries

Usage

0-9, *, #

Enter 1-4 digits.

Direct IP-IP Audio Connections

Allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints.
Valid
entries
y/n

1140

Usage

Enter y to save on bandwidth resources and improve sound
quality of voice over IP transmissions.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Display Caller ID

Appears when the Type field is CallrID. For CallrID type phones or analog phones
with Caller ID adjuncts only.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow transmission of calling party information to
the Caller ID phone or adjunct.

Display Cartridge

For 7404 D phones only. Enter y to indicate there is a display cartridge associated
with the station. This displays an additional page to allow you to assign display
buttons for the display cartridge.
Display Client Redirection

Only administrable if Hospitality is enabled on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen. This field affects the phone display on calls that
originated from a station with Client Room Class of Service.
NOTE:

For stations with an audix station type, AUDIX Voice Power ports, or ports
for any other type of messaging that needs display information, Display
Client Redirection must be set to y.
Valid entries

Usage

y

When set to y, the redirection information for a call
originating from a Client Room and terminating to this
station displays.

n

When set to n, this station’s display does not show the
redirection information for all calls originating from a Client
Room (even redirected calls) that terminate to this station.
Only the client name and extension (or room, depending on
what is administered on the ‘‘Hospitality’’ screen) display.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1141

Screen reference

Display Language

Specifies the display language.
Valid entries

Usage

english

Enter the language you want users to see on their
displays.

french
italian
spanish
user-defined

Display Module
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if this phone has a display module.

Distinctive Audible Alert
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y so the phone can receive the 3 different types of
ringing patterns which identify the type of incoming calls.
Distinctive ringing may not work properly for off-premises
telephones.

Emergency Location Ext

The Emergency Location Ext field defaults to the phone’s extension. This
extension identifies the street address or nearby location when an emergency call
is made.

1142

Valid entries

Usage

1-8 digits

Enter the Emergency Location Extension for this station

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Endpt ID

Appears only if Endpt Init is y. Enter a unique 2-digit number (00–62) for this
endpoint. Each Endpt ID field must have a unique value for each endpoint on the
same port.
This field provides for multipoint configuration conformance to the Bellcore
Terminal Initialization procedures. In these procedures, a multipoint configuration
requires the last 2 digits of the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) be between 00 and
63 and be binary unique for each endpoint. This field, combined with the SPID,
gives the effective SPID administered into the terminal. Bellcore ISDN-1 requires
the SPID programmed into the endpoint contain at least 9 digits.
For example, if the SPID is 1234, and Endpt ID is 01, then the SPID administered
on the terminal is 000123401. The three leading zeros are necessary to create a
9-digit SPID.
Endpt Init

Endpoint initialization is a procedure, required for multipoint operation, by which
User Service Order Profile (USOP) is associated with an endpoint on the
ISDN-BRI. This association is made via the SPID, administered into the system,
and entered into the ISDN-BRI terminal. For an ISDN-BRI terminal to be
operational in a multipoint configuration, both the administered SPID and the
SPID programmed into the ISDN-BRI terminal must be the same. Therefore, the
SPID of new or reused terminals must be programmed to match the administered
SPID value. Appears only if MIM Support is y and indicates the terminal’s
endpoint initialization capability.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if the terminal supports Bellcore ISDN-1 terminal
initialization procedures.

n

Enter n for all other country protocols.

Expansion Module
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if this phone has an expansion module. This will
enable you to administer the buttons for the expansion
module.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1143

Screen reference

Extension

Displays the extension for this station—this is either the extension you specified
in the station command or the next available extension (if you used add station
next).
For a virtual extension, enter a valid physical extension or a blank. Blank allows
an incoming call to the virtual extension to be redirected to the virtual extension’s
“busy” or “all” coverage path.
Avaya recommends that you consider the display for emergency
notification when you complete the name field on the station screen. Put
the most important identifying information at the beginning of the field.
When an emergency call is made and a crisis alert station with a
27-character display is notified, only 17 characters of the name field appear
on the first display line, followed by the extension. The second line
contains the last 3 characters of the name field, followed by the word
“EMERGENCY.” Characters 18 through 24 of the name field do not
appear at all.
Feature Module

Enter y to indicate the station is connected to a feature module. Entering y
displays an additional page to allow you to assign feature buttons to the module.
Fixed TEI

This field appears only for ISDN-BRI data modules and ASAI links. It indicates
that the endpoint has a fixed Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI).
The TEI identifies a unique access point within a service. You must administer
TEIs for fixed TEI terminals. However, for terminals with the automatic TEI
capability, the system dynamically assigns the TEI.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Entering y displays the TEI field.
For ASAI, enter y.

Floor

Enter a valid floor location. See ‘‘Translation-ID Number Mismatch Interval
(days)’’ on page 1112 for valid entries.

1144

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

H.320 Conversion

Allows H.320 compliant calls made to this phone to be converted to voice-only.
Because the system can only handle a limited number of conversion calls, you
may need to limit the number of telephones with H.320 conversion.
Headset

Enter y if the telephone has a headset.
HOT LINE DESTINATION — Abbreviated Dialing
Dial Code

Appears only when Special Dialing Option is hot-line.
Use Hot Line Service when very fast service is required and when you use a
telephone only for accessing a certain facility. Hot Line Service allows single-line
telephone users, by simply lifting the handset, to automatically place a call to a
preassigned destination (extension, telephone number, or feature access code).
The Hot Line Service destination number is stored in an Abbreviated Dialing List.
When the user goes off-hook on a Data Hot Line call, the system dials the AD
number.
A Direct Department Calling (DDC), a Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), a
Terminating Extension Group (TEG) extension, or any individual extension
within a group can be a Hot Line Service destination. Also, any extension within a
DDC group, UDC group, or TEG can have Hot Line Service assigned.
Loudspeaker Paging Access can be used with Hot Line Service to provide
automatic access to paging equipment.
HOT LINE DESTINATION — Abbreviated Dialing
List Number

Enter the abbreviated dialing list where you stored the hotline destination number.
HOT LINE DESTINATION — Dial Code

Enter the dial code in the specified abbreviated dialing list where you stored the
hotline destination number.
Hunt-to Station

Enter the extension the system should hunt to for this phone when the phone is
busy. This field allows you to create a station hunting chain (by assigning a
hunt-to station to a series of phones).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1145

Screen reference

Idle Appearance Preference

Indicate which call appearance is selected when the user lifts the handset and there
is an incoming call.
Valid entries

Usage

y

If you enter y, the user connects to an idle call appearance
instead of the ringing call.

n

If you enter n, the Alerting Appearance Preference is set and
the user connects to the ringing call appearance.

Ignore Rotary Digits

If this field is y, the short switch hook flash (50 -150) from a 2500-type set is
ignored.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to indicate that rotary digits from the set should be
ignored.

n

Enter n to make sure they are not ignored.

IP Audio Hairpinning

Allows IP endpoints to be connected through the IP circuit pack on the switch.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow IP endpoints to be connected through the IP
circuit pack on the switch in IP format, without going
through the MultiVantage TDM bus.

IP Emergency calls

Use this field to tell the switch how to handle emergency calls from the IP phone.
This field appears when either the IP Softphone field or the Remote Office Station
field is set to y on the Station screen.

! CAUTION:
An Avaya IP endpoint can dial emergency calls (for example, 911 calls in the
U.S.). It only reaches the local emergency service in the Public Safety
Answering Point area where the telephone system has local trunks. Please
be advised that an Avaya IP endpoint cannot dial to and connect with local
emergency service when dialing from remote locations that do not have local
trunks. You should not use an Avaya IP endpoint to dial emergency numbers
for emergency services when dialing from remote locations. Avaya Inc. is not
responsible or liable for any damages resulting from misplaced emergency

1146

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

calls made from an Avaya endpoint. Your use of this product indicates that
you have read this advisory and agree to use an alternative telephone to dial
all emergency calls from remote locations.
Valid entries

Usage

extension

Enter extension to send the extension entered in the
Emergency Location Extension field, to the Public Safety
Answering Point (PSAP).

block

Enter block to prevent the completion of emergency calls.
Use this entry for users who move around but always have a
circuit-switched phone nearby, and for users who are farther
away from the switch than an adjacent area code served by
the same 911 Tandem office.
When users attempt to dial an emergency call from an IP
Telephone and the call is blocked, they can dial 911 from a
nearby circuit-switched phone instead.

cesid

Enter cesid to allow the switch to send the CESID
information supplied by the IP Softphone to the PSAP. The
end user enters the emergency information into the IP
Softphone.
Use this entry for IP Softphones with road warrior service
that are near enough to the switch that an emergency call
routed over the switch’s trunk reaches the PSAP that covers
the switch.
If the switch uses ISDN trunks for emergency calls, the digit
string is the telephone number, provided that the number is a
local direct-dial number with the local area code, at the
physical location of the IP Softphone. If the switch uses
CAMA trunks for emergency calls, the end user enters a
specific digit string for each IP Softphone location, based on
advice from the local emergency response personnel.

option

Enter option to allow the user to select the option
(extension, block, or cesid) that the user selected during
registration and the IP Softphone reported. Use this entry for
extensions that are swapped back and forth between IP
Softphones and a phone with a fixed location.
The user chooses between block and cesid on the
softphone. A DCP or IP phone in the office automatically
selects extension.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1147

Screen reference

IP Softphone

Appears only for DCP station types and IP Telephones.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y indicate that this extension is either a PC-based
multifunction station or part of a telecommuter complex
with a call-back audio connection.

ITC (Information Transfer Capability)

Indicates the type of transmission facilities to be used for ISDN calls originated
from this endpoint. The field does not display for voice-only or BRI stations.
Valid entries

Usage

restricted

If you set to restricted, either restricted or unrestricted
transmission facilities are used to complete the call. A
restricted facility is a transmission facility that enforces 1’s
density digital transmission (that is, a sequence of 8 digital
zeros are converted to a sequence of 7 zeros and a digital 1).

unrestricted

If you set to unrestricted, only unrestricted transmission
facilities are used to complete the call. An unrestricted facility
is a transmission facility that does not enforce 1’s density
digital transmission (that is, digital information is sent exactly
as is).

Lock Messages
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to restrict other users from reading or canceling the
voice messages or retrieving messages via Voice Message
Retrieval.

Loss Group

This field determines which administered 2-party row in the loss plan applies to
each station. Does not appear for stations that do not use loss (for example,
x-mobile stations and MASI terminals).

1148

Valid entries

Usage

1-17

Shows the index into the loss plan and tone plans.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

LWC Activation
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow internal telephone users to leave short LWC
messages for this extension.
If the system has hospitality, enter y for guest-room
telephones if the extension designated to receive failed
wakeup messages should receive LWC messages that indicate
the wakeup calls failed.
Enter y if LWC Reception is audix.

LWC Log External Calls

Appears only where the LWC Reception field is available. When an external call
is not answered, the switch keeps a record of up to 15 calls (provided information
on the caller identification is available) and the phone’s message lamp lights. The
phone set displays the names and numbers of unsuccessful callers.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to make unanswered external call logs available to
end-users. Each record consists of the latest call attempt date
and time.

LWC Reception
Valid
entries
audix

Usage

Enter audix if the messages are stored on the Audio Information
Exchange System.

none
msa-spe

Enter msa-spe if LWC messages are stored in the system or on the
Messaging Server Adjunct - Switch Processor (for DEFINITY SI /
DEFINITY CSI).

spe

Enter spe if LWC messages are stored in the system or on the
Switch Processor (for DEFINITY R).

Mapping Mode
Controls the mode of operation in which the cell phone will operate when mapped
to this XMOBILE extension. An XMOBILE station can be bridged to a deskset.
These restrictions/modes exist because the COR of a bridge is ignored; instead the
principal’s COR is used. This field allows an XMOBILE station to function as a
bridge and still be restricted.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1149

Screen reference

When a cell phone is mapped to more than one XMOBILE station, then only one
of the mapped XMOBILE station may have origination or both as its Mapping
Mode. Therefore, only one of the XMOBILE stations mapped to the cell phone
number is permitted to originate calls.
Valid entries

Usage

both

The cell phone can be used to originate and terminate
calls from its associated XMOBILE extension. This is
the default when the XMOBILE Type field is PHS or
DECT.

none

The XMOBILE station is disabled administratively and
cannot originate and terminate calls from its associated
internal extension.

origination

The cell phone may be used only to originate calls from
its associated internal XMOBILE extension by dialing
into the office switch.

termination

The cell phone may be used only to terminate calls
from its associated internal XMOBILE extension. This
is the default when the XMOBILE Type field is EC500.

Map-to Station

This is the physical phone used for calls to a virtual extension. Do not use an
xmobile, xdid or another virtual extension.
Valid entries

Usage

Valid extension number

Enter the extension of the physical phone used
for calls to a virtual extension.

Media Complex Ext

When used with Multi-media Call Handling, indicates which extension is
assigned to the data module of the multimedia complex. Users can dial this
extension to place either a voice or a data call, and voice conversion, coverage,
and forwarding apply as if the call were made to the 1-number.

1150

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

For an IP Telephone or an IP Softphone, this is the extension already administered
as an H.323 station type. You can administer this field if the IP Station field on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

A valid BRI data For MMCH, enter the extension of the data module that is part of
extension
this multimedia complex.
H.323 station
extension

For 4600 series IP Telephones, enter the corresponding H.323
station.
For IP Softphone, enter the corresponding H.323 station. If you
enter a value in this field, you can register this station for either a
road-warrior or telecommuter/Avaya IP Agent application.

blank

Leave this field blank for single-connect IP applications.

Message Lamp Ext

Enter the extension of the station you want to track with the message waiting
lamp. This field appears only when Type is 7101A, 7103A, 8110, or VRU.
Message Server Name

Specifies which Message Server is associated with the station.
Valid entries

Usage

Names
administered
in
alphabetical
order

Must contain a user-defined adjunct name that was previously
administered in the Node-Names screen.

Message Waiting Indicator

This field appears only for ISDN-BRI data modules and for 500, 2500, K2500,
7104A, 6210, 6218, 6220, 8110, and VRU telephones. (This field is independent
of the administration of the Caller ID Message Waiting Indication for CallrID
phones.)
Valid entries

Usage

led

Enter led if the message waiting indicator is a light-emitting
diode (LED).

neon

Enter neon if the indicator is a neon indicator.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1151

Screen reference

MIM Mtce/Mgt

Indicates if the telephone supports MIM Maintenance and Management
capabilities other then endpoint initialization. Appears only if MIM Support is y.
MIM Support (Management Information
Message Support)

This field appears only for ISDN-BRI data modules and ASAI. This field supports
MIM endpoint initialization (SPID support) and other Maintenance or
Management capabilities.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to display Endpt Init and MIM Mtce/Mgt.

n

Enter n for ASAI.

Mobility Trunk Group
This field associates the XMOBILE station to a trunk.
Valid entries

Usage

1-x (where x is 666)

Enter a valid trunk group number for mobility routing.
This trunk group is used for routing. The
Configuration Set field may be blank if the trunk group
is DECT or PHS. If the trunk group is non-DECT or
non-PHS, administer the Configuration Set field.

for DEFINITY R
2000 for S8700 IP
Connect and S8700
Multi-Connect
99 for DEFINITY
CSI, S8300 Media
Server, and S8100
Media Server with a
CMS1

blank

1152

aar

The routing capabilities of the switch will be used to
direct the call to an ISDN trunk. If no ISDN trunk is
available, the call will not be extended out of the
switch. It will provide ringback to the calling company
and may eventually go to coverage.

ars

The routing capabilities of the switch will be used to
direct the call to an ISDN trunk. If no ISDN trunk is
available, the call will not be extended out of the
switch. It will provide ringback to the calling company
and may eventually go to coverage.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Multimedia Early Answer

Allows you to establish multimedia early answer on a station-by-station basis.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

If this station will receive coverage calls for multimedia
complexes, but is not multimedia-capable, enter y to ensure
that calls are converted and talk path is established before
ringing at this station.

Mute Button Enabled
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the user to use the Mute button on this
phone.

MWI Served User Type

Controls the auditing or interrogation of a served user’s message waiting indicator
(MWI).
Valid entries

Usage

fp-mwi

Use if the station is a served user of an fp-mwi message
center.

qsig-mwi

Use if the station is a served user of a qsig-mwi message
center.

blank

Leave this field blank if you do not want to audit the served
user’s MWI or if the user is not a served user of either an
fp-mwi or qsig-mwi message center.

Name

Enter a name for the person associated with this phone or data module. The
system uses the Name field to create the system Directory.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1153

Screen reference

Off Premises Station

Analog phones only.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if this phone is not located in the same building with
the system. If you enter y, you must complete R Balance
Network.

n

Enter n if the phone is located in the same building with the
system.

PCOL/TEG Call Alerting

Appears only for 510 telephones.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to alert the station for Personal CO Line/Terminating
Extension Group calls.

Per Button Ring Control
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow users to select ring behavior individually for
each call-appr, brdg-appr, or abrdg-appr on the station and to
enable Automatic Abbreviated and Delayed ring transition
for each call-appr on the station.
Also, enter y if you do not want the system to automatically
move the line selection to a silently alerting call unless that
call was audibly ringing earlier.

n

Enter n if you want calls on call-appr buttons to always ring
the station and calls on brdg-appr or abrdg-appr buttons to
always ring or not ring based on the Bridged Call Alerting
field value.
Also, enter n if you want the system to move line selection to
a silently alerting call if there is no call audibly ringing the
station.

1154

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Personalized Ringing Pattern

Personalized Ringing allows users of some telephones to have one of 8 ringing
patterns for incoming calls. Users working closely in the same area can each
specify a different ringing pattern. This enables the users to distinguish their own
ringing telephone from other telephones in the same area. For virtual stations, this
field dictates the ringing pattern on its mapped-to physical phone.
Enter a Personalized Ringing Pattern. (L = 530 Hz, M = 750 Hz, and
H = 1060 Hz)
Valid entries

Usage

1

MMM (standard ringing)

2

HHH

3

LLL

4

LHH

5

HHL

6

HLL

7

HLH

8

LHL

Per Station CPN - Send Calling Number
Valid entries

Usage

y

All outgoing calls from the station will deliver the Calling
Party Number (CPN) information as “Presentation
Allowed.”

n

No CPN information is sent for the call.

r

Outgoing non-DCS network calls from the station will
deliver the Calling Party Number information as
“Presentation Restricted.”

blank

The sending of CPN information for calls is controlled by
any administration on the outgoing trunk group the calls
are carried on.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1155

Screen reference

Port

Enter 7 characters to specify a port, or an x. If this extension is registered as an IP
endpoint, this field will display S00000.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second numbers are the cabinet number

(DEFINITY R)
01 through 03

(DEFINITY SI)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

01 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number

01 through 32

Sixth and seventh characters are the circuit number

x

Indicates that there is no hardware associated with the
port assignment. Use for AWOH and CTI stations.

IP

Automatically entered for IP phones.
For DCP sets, the port can only be assigned once. ISDN-BRI provides a
multipoint configuration capability that allows a previously assigned port
to be specified more than once as follows: 2 stand-alone voice endpoints, 2
stand-alone data endpoints, or 1 integrated voice and data endpoint.
However, for the following cases, the port is assumed to be fully assigned:
— Maximum number of users (currently 2) are assigned on the port.
— One of the users on the port is a fixed TEI station.
— One of the users on the port has B-channel voice and B-channel data
capability.
— One of the users on the port has no SPID assigned, which includes
telephones that have no SPID initialization capability.
— This field is display-only for H.323 set types and 4600 set types.
The system assigns an “IP” when the station is first administered.

1156

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

R Balance Network
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to select the R Balance Capacitor network. In all other
cases except for those listed under n, enter y.

n

Enter n to select the standard resistor capacitor network. You
must complete this field if Off-Premise Station is y. Enter n
when the station port circuit is connected to terminal
equipment (such as SLC carriers or impedance compensators)
optioned for 600-ohm input impedance and the distance to the
equipment from the system is less than 3,000 feet.

Recall Rotary Digit

This field only appears if type is 500 or 2500.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the user of a rotary phone to dial the
administered Recall Rotary Digit to receive recall dial tone.
This will enable this user to perform conference and transfer
operations.
You establish the Recall Rotary Digit on the Feature-Related
System Parameters screen.

Redirect Notification
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to give a half ring at this phone when calls to this
extension are redirected (via Call Forwarding or Call
Coverage).
Enter y if LWC Reception is audix.

Remote Office Phone

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use this station as an endpoint in a remote office
configuration.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1157

Screen reference

Restrict Last Appearance
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to restrict the last idle call appearance for incoming
priority calls and outgoing call originations only.

Valid entries

Usage

Up to 10
characters

To identify the phone location.

Up to 5
characters

To identify the guest room number, if this station is one of
several to be assigned a guest room and the Display Room
Information in Call Display is y on the Hospitality-Related
System Parameters screen.

Room

Security Code

Enter the security code required by users for specific system features and
functions, including Personal Station Access, Redirection of Calls Coverage
Off-Net, Leave Word Calling, Message Retrieval, and Demand Printing. The
required security code length is determined by Minimum Security Code Length
on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Select Last Used Appearance

1158

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to indicate a station’s line selection is not to be
moved from the currently selected line button to a different,
non-alerting line button. If you enter y, the line selection on
an on-hook station only moves from the last used line button
to a line button with an audibly alerting call. If there are no
alerting calls, the line selection remains on the button last
used for a call.

n

Enter n so the line selection on an on-hook station with no
alerting calls can be moved to a different line button, which
may be serving a different extension.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Service Link Mode

The service link is the combined hardware and software multimedia connection
between an Enhanced mode complex’s H.320 DVC system and the Avaya
MultiVantage which terminates the H.320 protocol. When the user receives or
makes a call during a multimedia or IP Softphone or IP Telephone session, a
“service link” is established.
Valid entries

Usage

as-needed

Use this setting for most multimedia, IP Softphone, or IP
Telephone users. Setting the Service Link Mode to as-needed
leaves the service link connected for 10 seconds after the user
ends a call so that they can immediately place or take another
call. After 10 seconds the link is dropped and a new link
would have to be established to place or take another call.

permanent

Use permanent for busy call center agents and other users
who are constantly placing or receiving multimedia, IP
Softphone, or IP Telephone calls. In permanent mode, the
service link stays up for the duration of the multimedia, IP
Softphone, or IP Telephone application session.

Set Color

Enter a valid set color as defined in the Signaling Group screen (page 2) screen.
Valid entries include the following colors: beige, black, blue, brown, burg
(burgundy), gray, green, ivory, orng (orange), red, teak, wal (walnut), white, and
yel (yellow).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1159

Screen reference

Speakerphone

This field controls the behavior of speakerphones.
Valid entries

Usage

1-way

Enter 1-way to indicate that you want the speakerphone to be
listen-only.

2-way

Enter 2-way to indicate that you want the speakerphone to be
both talk and listen.

grp-listen

Group Listen works with only 6400-series and 2420 phones.
Group Listen allows a phone user to talk and listen to another
party with the handset or headset while the phone’s 2-way
speakerphone is in the listen-only mode. Others in the room
can listen, but cannot speak to the other party via the
speakerphone. The person talking on the handset acts as the
spokesperson for the group. Group Listen provides reduced
background noise and improves clarity during a conference
call when a group needs to discuss what is being
communicated to another party.

none

Special Dialing Option

This field identifies the type of dialing for calls when this data module originates
calls.
Valid entries

Usage

hot-line
default

blank

For regular (normal) keyboard dialing.

SPID — (Service Profile Identifier)

Enter a variable length parameter. This field appears only if the Endpt Init field is
y.
The SPID is a numeric string, which means that the value of 00 is different from
000. The SPID must be different for all terminals on the BRI and from the Service
SPID. The SPID should always be assigned. If the SPID is not assigned for the
first BRI on a port, any other BRI assignment to that port are blocked.
NOTE:

If you have set the Port field to X for an ISDN-BRI extension and intend to
use Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) to assign the port, then the
SPID number must equal the station number.

1160

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Station Lock Active
Valid display

Usage

yes/no

Shows the phone’s status of Station Lock.

Switchhook Flash
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow users to use the switchhook flash function to
activate Conference/Transfer/Hold and Call Waiting.

n

Enter n to disable the flash function so that when the
switchhook is pressed while active on a call, the call drops. If
this field is n, you must set Call Waiting Indication to n.

TEI

Appears only when the Fixed TEI field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 63

1- or 2-digit number

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to enable port maintenance tests.

n

If the equipment (dictaphone) connected to the port does not
support these tests, you must enter n.

Tests

TN

Enter the Tenant Partition number.
Type

For each station that you want to add to your system, you must specify the type of
telephone in the Type field. This is how you distinguish between the many
different types of telephones.
The following table lists the telephones, virtual phones, and personal computers
that you can administer on the Avaya MultiVantage. To administer telephones that
are not in the table, use the Alias Station screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1161

Screen reference

NOTE:

You cannot change an analog phone administered with hardware to a virtual
extension if TTI is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Contact your Avaya representative for more information.
Table 17.

Telephones

Telephone type

Model

Administer as

Single-line analog

500

500

2500, 2500 w/ Message
Waiting Adjunct

2500

6210

6210

6211

6210

6218

6218

6219

6218

6220

6220

6221

6220

Analog phone w/Caller ID

CallrID

7101A, 7102A

7101A

7103A Programmable and
Original

7103A

7104A

7104A

8110

8110

DS1FD

DS1FD

7302H, 7303H

7303S

VRU (voice response unit)
with C&D tones

VRU

VRU without C&D tones

2500

DS1 device without forward
disconnect

ops

VRU with forward disconnect
without C&D tones

ds1fd or ds1sa

Single-line DS1/DSO
(Lineside T1/DS1)

Continued on next page

1162

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Table 17.

Telephones (Continued)

Telephone type

Terminals

Multiappearance hybrid

Multiappearance digital

Model

Administer as

VRU with forward disconnect
without C&D tones

VRUFD or VRUSA

510D

510

515BCT

515

7303S

7303S, 7313H

7305H

7305S

7305S

7305S, 7316H, 7317H

7309H

7309H, 7313H

7313H

7313H

7314H

7314H

7315H

7315H

7316H

7316H

7317H

7317H

2420

2420

6402

6402

6402D

6402D

6408

6408

6408+

6408+

6408D

6408D

6408D+

6408D+

6416D+

6416D+

6424D+

6424D+

7401D

7401D

7401+

7401+

7403D

7403D

7404D

7404D

7405D

7405D
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1163

Screen reference

Table 17.

Telephones (Continued)

Telephone type

IP Telephone

Model

Administer as

7406D

7406D

7406+

7406+

7407D

7407D

7407+

7407+

7410D

7410D

7410+

7410+

7434D

7434D

7444D

7444D

8403B

8403B

8405B

8405B

8405B+

8405B+

8405D

8405D

8405D+

8405D+

8410B

8410B

8410D

8410D

8411B

8411B

8411D

8411D

8434D

8434D

CALLMASTER I

602A1

CALLMASTER II, III, IV

603A1, 603D1, 603E1,
603F1

CALLMASTER VI

606A1

IDT1

7403D

IDT2

7406D

4602

4602

4606

4606

4612

4612
Continued on next page

1164

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station

Table 17.

Telephones (Continued)

Telephone type

Model

Administer as

4620

4620

4624

4624

4630

4630

Road-warrior application

H.323 or DCP type

Native H.323

H.323

Single-connect

H.323 or DCP type

—

asai

7505D

7505D

7506D

7506D

7507D

7507D

8503D

8503D

8510T

8510T

8520T

8520T

Personal computer

6300/7300

PC

(voice/data)

6538/9

Constellation

Test Line

ATMS

105TL

IP SoftPhone

ISDN-BRI station

No hardware assigned at
the time of administration.

XDID (use when the
switch later assigns a DID
number to this station)
XDIDVIP (use when the
administrator later assigns
a DID number to this
station)
virtual (use to map this and
other extensions to one
physical phone)

Key phone system
interface

—

K2500

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1165

Screen reference

Table 17.

Telephones (Continued)

Telephone type

Model

Administer as

ASAI

asai link

asai

computer telephony adjunct
link

adjlk

any digital set

same as “Multiappearance
Digital” see table above

CTI station

CTI

CTI

CTI station

CTI

XMOBILE

EC500, DECT, PHS

XMOBILE

ISDN-BRI data module

7500

7500

AWOH

Continued on next page

XID

Appears only for an ISDN-BRI data module or an ASAI link. Used to identify
Layer 2 XID testing capability.
XMOBILE Type
When the Type field is XMOBILE, the Mobility Trunk Group field must be
administered.

1166

Valid entries

Usage

DECT

For the DECT Access System or the AGCS (ROAMEO)
IS-136 (TDMA cellular).

EC500

For any public cellular networks.

PHS

For the DENSO 300M.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding

System Parameters Call Coverage /
Call Forwarding
This screen sets the system-wide parameters for call coverage and call
forwarding.
Field descriptions for page 1

change system-parameters coverage-forwarding

page 1

SYSTEM PARAMETERS -- CALL COVERAGE / CALL FORWARDING
CALL COVERAGE/FORWARDING PARAMETERS
Local Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval (rings):
Off-Net Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval (rings):
Coverage - Caller Response Interval (seconds):
Threshold for Blocking Off-Net Redirection of Incoming Trunks Calls:

_
_
_
1

COVERAGE
Keep Held SBA at Coverage Point?
External Coverage Treatment for Transferred Incoming Trunk Calls?
Immediate Redirection on Receipt of PROGRESS Inband Information?
Maintain SBA At Principal?
QSIG VALU Coverage Overrides QSIG Diversion with Rerouting?
Station Hunt Before Coverage?

_
_
_
_
_
n

FORWARDING
Call Forward Override? _
Coverage After Forwarding? _

Screen 267. System-Parameters — Call Coverage / Call Forwarding

CALL COVERAGE / FORWARDING
PARAMETERS
Coverage - Caller Response Interval (seconds)

The time in seconds the caller (internal caller only) has before a call redirects to
the called party’s first coverage point. The calling party either can hang up, use
Leave Word Calling, or press the GO TO COVER button during this time interval.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 10

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1167

Screen reference

Local Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No
Ans Interval (rings)

This field specifies:
■

the number of rings applied at a local coverage point before a call redirects
to the next coverage point

■

the number of rings applied at the principal before a call forwards when
Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer is activated.

Valid entries

Usage

1–99

See note below.

Off-Net Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No
Ans Interval (rings)

This field specifies:
■

the number of rings applied at an off-net coverage point before a call is
redirected to the next coverage point

■

the number of rings applied at an off-net forwarded-to destination before
the call is redirected to coverage.

Valid entries

Usage

1–99

See note below.
NOTE:

When ringing local destinations (say in an office environment), a short
interval often is appropriate because the intended party either is near the
phone or not present. However, when ringing off-net locations, you cannot
assume how near the intended party is to the phone. If the call is left at an
off-net destination for only a short interval, the call may be redirected to the
next destination before the intended party has any real chance of answering
the call.

1168

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding

Threshold for Blocking Off-Net Redirection of
Incoming Trunk Calls

This field applies for those occasions when an incoming call to a station redirects
off-net. At that time, the Call Forward timer activates to block any further
incoming calls to that station from being redirected off-net until the timer expires.
Valid entries

Usage

1-7

The number of allowed calls to be routed off-net before
blocking commences.

n (all)

Call processing never activates the Call Forward timer.
Therefore, any number of calls to a principal may be
redirected off-net.

COVERAGE
External Coverage Treatment for Transferred
Incoming Trunk Calls

This field governs how an transferred incoming trunk call is handled if the call
redirects to coverage.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow external coverage treatment for incoming
trunk calls that redirect to coverage.

n

Enter n to allow internal coverage treatment for incoming
trunk calls that redirect to coverage

Immediate Redirection on Receipt of
PROGRESS Inband Information

This field appears only if one of the following is true:
■

The Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field on the System
Parameters Coverage/Forwarding screen is y.

■

The Value-Added Avaya (VALU) field on the System Parameters
Customer Options, Page 6, screen is y.

This field pertains only to CCRON and QSIG VALU coverage calls redirected
over end-to-end ISDN facilities. Some cellular phone providers send an ISDN
PROGRESS message with the Progress Indicator field set to ‘inband information’
when a cellular phone is unavailable to receive a call. In these circumstances, the
message indicates that an announcement is being played to the originating party
and we should move the call immediately to the next available coverage point.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1169

Screen reference

However, a PROGRESS message with a Progress Indicator of ‘inband
information’ may be received for reasons other than an unavailable cellular
phone. In this case, you probably do not want to redirect the call to the next
coverage point.
There is no way for the Avaya MultiVantage to know the actual intent of such a
PROGRESS message, yet you may choose how the system should handle this
message. It is essentially an educated, but blind, choice and you should be aware
that there will be instances when this choice leads to inappropriate call handling.
Avaya MultiVantage queries this field on receipt of a qualifying PROGRESS
message and acts according to your instruction on how to treat it.
As a guide, users in European countries following the ETSI standard and
redirecting to GSM cellular phones may want to consider setting this field to y.
In the United States, PROGRESS messages with the Progress Indicator field set to
‘inband information’ are sent for a variety of reasons not associated with
unavailable cell phones and you should set this field to n.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Immediately redirect an off-net coverage/forwarded call to
the next coverage point.

n

Do not immediately redirect an off-net coverage/forwarded
call to the next coverage point.

Keep Held SBA at Coverage Point

This field governs how a covering user who has placed an answered coverage call
on hold is treated if the original principal bridges onto the call.

1170

Valid entries

Usage

y

Keeps the coverage party on the call. The coverage party
remains on hold, but may enter the call along with the
principal and the calling party.

n

Drops the coverage party from the call.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding

Maintain SBA At Principal

Allows a user to maintain a simulated bridged appearance when a call redirects to
coverage.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to maintain a simulated bridged appearance (SBA) on
the principal’s phone when a call redirects to coverage. DCS
with rerouting will not be attempted after coverage.

n

When set to n, no SBA is maintained on the principal’s
phone. DCS with rerouting will be attempted, and if
successful, the principal will lose the bridged appearance and
the ability to bridge onto the coverage call.

QSIG VALU Coverage Overrides QSIG Diversion
with Rerouting

This field appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
Basic Supplementary Services and Supplementary Services with Rerouting fields
are y.
This field specifies whether, with both QSIG Diversion with Rerouting and QSIG
VALU turned on, the Coverage After Forwarding option on the Station screen will
work for a user for calls that go to remote coverage. Normally, with QSIG
Diversion with Rerouting turned on, the local system passes control of a
forwarded call to the remote QSIG switch on which the forwarding destination
resides. In this case, the forwarded call cannot return to coverage for the user who
originally received the call, even when the remote destination is busy or does not
answer.
However, you can enter y in this field to have QSIG VALU call coverage take
precedence. In this case, if the Coverage After Forwarding option on the Station
screen is enabled for a user, then QSIG Diversion with Rerouting is not be
attempted.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow Coverage After Forwarding to work when it
is activated on a user’s Station screen and Diversion with
Rerouting is also turned on.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1171

Screen reference

Station Hunt Before Coverage

This field allows you to choose whether a call to a busy station performs station
hunting before going to coverage.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to use Station Hunt Before Coverage.

FORWARDING
Call Forward Override

This field specifies how to treat a call from a forwarded-to party to the
forwarded-from party.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Overrides the Call Forwarding feature by allowing a
forwarded-to station to complete a call to the
forwarded-from station.

n

Directs the system to forward calls to a station even when
they are from the forwarded-to party.

Coverage After Forwarding

This field governs whether an unanswered forwarded call is provided coverage
treatment.

1172

Valid entries

Usage

y

Coverage treatment is provided to unanswered forwarded
calls.

n

No coverage treatment is provided to unanswered forwarded
calls. The call remains at the forwarded-to destination.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding

Field descriptions for page 2

change system-parameters coverage-forwarding

page 2

SYSTEM PARAMETERS -- CALL COVERAGE / CALL FORWARDING
COVERAGE OF CALLS REDIRECTED OFF-NET (CCRON)
Coverage Of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled?
Activate Answer Detection (Preserves SBA) On Final CCRON Cvg Point?
Ignore Network Answer Supervision?
Disable call classifier for CCRON over ISDN trunks?

y
y
y
n

Screen 268. System-Parameters Coverage-Forwarding

COVERAGE OF CALLS REDIRECTED OFF-NET
(CCRON)
Activate Answer Detection (Preserves SBA) On
Final CCRON Cvg Point

This field appears only if the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field
on this screen is y.
When the system redirects a call off-net at the final coverage point in a coverage
path, the system can apply no further coverage treatment even if the call is
unanswered. The only reason for activating answer detection on such a call is to
maintain the simulated bridged appearance (SBA) on the principal’s phone that
allows the principal to answer or bridge onto the call. However, when the system
monitors the call through use of a call classifier port, there is an inherent
cut-through delay following the detection of answer at the far end. This field has
no consequence when the off-net call is carried end-to-end by ISDN facilities; the
SBA is maintained and there is no cut-through delay.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Directs the system to maintain a simulated bridged
appearance on the principal when redirecting to a final
off-net coverage point.

n

Allows the system to drop the SBA on the principal’s phone
when the call redirects off-net at the last coverage point,
eliminating the cut-through delay inherent in CCRON calls,
but sacrificing the principal’s ability to answer the call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1173

Screen reference

Coverage Of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled

This field allows you to enable/disable the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net
(CCRON) feature. This field provides a quick means of disabling this feature if
the demand on the call classifier port resources degrades other services provided
by the switch.
To set this field to y, first set the Cvg Of Calls Redirected Off-net field on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen to y. The Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net field on this screen must be y to administer this field.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Avaya MultiVantage monitors off-net coverage/forwarded
calls and provides further coverage treatment for
unanswered calls.

n

Avaya MultiVantage does not monitor offnet
coverage/forwarded calls. No further coverage treatment is
provided if such calls are unanswered.

Disable call classifier for CCRON over ISDN
trunks

When a CCRON call routes offnet over ISDN end-to-end facilities, no call
classifier is attached to the call. If, subsequently during the call, an ISDN
PROGRESS or ALERT message is received that indicates that interworking has
occurred, a call classifier is normally attached to the call and assumes precedences
over ISDN trunk signalling. This field provides a customer the means of directing
the switch to dispense with the call classifier on interworked calls and rely on the
ISDN trunk signalling messages.
Valid
entries

Usage

y

Use y to disable the call classifier for CCRON calls over
interworked trunk facilities.

n

Use n to enable the call classifier for CCRON calls over
interworked trunk facilities.

Ignore Network Answer Supervision

This field appears only if the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field
on this screen is y.
CCRON may use a call classifier port to determine whether an off-net coverage or
forwarded call has been answered, discarding other information that may indicate
an answered state. However, some customers pay the operating company to

1174

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Country-Options

provide network answer supervision on their trunks and desire that CCRON not
discard that information. They may preserve this service by setting this field to n.
On the other hand, beware when you tandem a call over a tie trunk through
another switch node from where it redirects to the public network over non-ISDN
facilities. If the trunk on the far-end node sends a timed answer supervision, that
may get tandemed back to the originating switch as a network answer. In such a
scenario, the originating switch interprets the call as answered, leading to some
undesirable behavior. To avoid these calls from mistakenly be treated as
answered, set this field to y. An unfortunate consequence is that a short
cut-through delay that is inherent to call classification is introduced when the call
is answered.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Ignore network answer supervision and rely on the call
classifier to determine when a call is answered.

n

Treat network answer supervision as a true answer.

System Parameters Country-Options
This screen implements parameters associated with certain international
(including North American) call characteristics. You cannot change this screen.
See your Avaya representative if you want to modify any of the values here.
See the following table for country codes throughout this screen.
Country code table

Code

Country

1

United States, Canada

2

Australia, New Zealand

3

Japan

4

Italy

5

Netherlands

6

Singapore

7

Mexico

8

Belgium, Luxembourg

9

Saudi Arabia

10

United Kingdom

11

Spain

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1175

Screen reference

Code

Country

12

France

13

Germany

14

Czech Republic, Slovakia

15

Russia (CIS)

16

Argentina

17

Greece

18

China

19

Hong Kong

20

Thailand

21

Macedonia

22

Poland

23

Brazil

24

Nordic

25

South Africa

Field descriptions for page 1

change system-parameters country-options

Page 1 of 7

SYSTEM PARAMETERS COUNTRY-OPTIONS

Companding Mode:
440Hz PBX-dial Tone?
Analog Ringing Cadence:
Analog Line Transmission:
Display Character Set?
Howler Tone After Busy:
Enable Busy Tone

Mu-Law
Base Tone Generation Set: 1
n
440Hz Secondary-dial Tone? n
1
Set Layer 1 timer T1 to 30 seconds? n
1
Roman
y Disconnect on No Answer by Call Type: y
Disconnect for Analog Loop-start Trunks?

TONE DETECTION PARAMETERS
Tone Detection Mode: 5
Interdigit Pause: short

Dial Tone Validation Timer:

Screen 269. System Parameters Country-Options

1176

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Country-Options

440Hz PBX-dial Tone

Specifies whether the switch (primary) dial tone will be changed to a continuous
440Hz/-17 tone.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

A value of n implies the tone will either be administered on a
later page of this screen or, if no individual definition is
administered, as defined in Base Tone Generation Set.

440Hz Secondary-dial Tone

Specifies whether the Secondary (CO) dial tone will be changed to a continuous
440Hz/-17 tone.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

A value of n implies the tone will either be administered on a
later page of this screen or, if no individual definition is
administered, as defined in Base Tone Generation Set.

Analog Ringing Cadence

The country code identifies the ringing cadence to be used by analog phones in the
system.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 25

See the Country code table at the beginning of this screen
description. For more information on, see Audible Ringing
Patterns in Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware
Guide.

NOTE:

If the Analog Ringing Cadence is set to 3, 10, 11, or 25, then the Message
Waiting Indicator on K2500 phones does not flash.
Analog Line Transmission

The country code identifies the transmission and signaling parameters.
Valid entries

Usage

1–25

See the Country code table at the beginning of this screen
description.

Base Tone Generation Set

The country code identifies the base tone generation set to be used. This field is
meaningful only if the system tone detector is a TN780, vintage 4 or a TN2182.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1177

Screen reference

A TN780 vintage 5 or greater or a TN2182 is required if Belgian Tones (Country
code 8) are specified.
Valid entries

Usage

1–25

See the Country code table at the beginning of this screen
description.

Companding Mode

Identifies the companding algorithm to be used by system hardware.
Valid entries

Usage

A-law

Generally used outside the US

Mu-law

Generally used in the US

Disconnect on No Answer by Call Type

Drops outgoing trunk calls (except DCS and AAR) that users leave unanswered
too long.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enables the system to disconnect calls that are not answered.

Display Character Set

Appears only for 607, 46xx, 64xx, and 84xx telephone sets.
Valid entries

Usage

cyrillic

Indicate the enhanced character set to display. See Enhanced
Telephone Display for more information.

katakana
roman

NOTE:

ukranian

Cyrillic, Roman, and Ukranian map to the
Eurofont character set.

Enable Busy Tone Disconnect for Analog
Loop-start Trunks

This field allows the switch to recognize a busy tone from the central office as a
disconnect signal.

1178

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the switch to disconnect the trunk when a busy
tone is received from the central office.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Country-Options

Howler After Busy

Plays howler tone when users leave their analog phone off-hook too long.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enables howler tone.

Set Layer 1 timer T1 to 30 seconds

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Specifies whether the Layer 1 timer is set to 30 seconds.

TONE DETECTION PARAMETERS
Dial Tone Validation Timer

Displays number of milliseconds that the dial tone validation routine will use to
sample transmissions. This field appears only when Tone Detection Mode is equal
to 4 or 5. (Valid with TN420C or later Tone Detector circuit pack.)
Valid entries

Usage

0–6375 in increments of 25

Interdigit Pause

Specifies the maximum length of the inter-digit pause. Breaks lasting less than
this range will be bridged or ignored. (Valid with TN420C or later Tone Detector
circuit pack.)
Valid entries

Usage

short

5 to 30ms

long

20 to 40ms

Tone Detection Mode

The country code specifies the type of tone detection used on a TN420B (or later)
tone-detection circuit pack.
Valid entries

Usage

1

Precise Italian tone detection algorithm

2

Precise Australian tone detection algorithm

3

Precise UK tone detection algorithm

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1179

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

4

Imprecise normal broadband filter algorithm (valid with
TN420C or later Tone Detector circuit pack)

5

Imprecise wideband filter algorithm (valid with TN420C or
later Tone Detector circuit pack)

6

Field descriptions for page 2

display system-parameters country-otpions
OPTIONAL FEATURES
2 PARTY LOSS PLAN

Page Page
1 of
2 of 57

G3 Version:
Digital Loss
Plan: 1 V6

MaximumCustomize?
Ports: 300
n
TO
Abbreviated
List?
CAS 16
Main?
1
2 Dialing
3
4 Enhanced
5
6
7
8 n 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 n
Security
Of
Off-net?
1: -1
0Access
0
0
3
0Gateway?
0
0 n Cvg
0
3 Calls
0
6Redirected
6
6
0
3
3n
Incoming
2: Analog
0
0 Trunk
0
0
0
3Call3 ID?2 n 2
3
0
6
6
6DCS 2(Basic)?
3
3 n
A/D 3:
Grp/Sys
List
DCS
Call
0
0
0Dialing
0
0Start
3 at3 01?3 n 2
3
0
6
6
6
0Coverage?
3
3 n
Answer
DCS
with
n0
4: Supervision
15
0
0 by 0Call6 Classifier?
0
0
0 n 0
3
0
6Rerouting?
6
6
3
3
Network
Admin?
5:
0 -3 -3
0
0 -3 -3ARS?
-3 y -3
0 -3 DEFINITY
3
0
0 -3
3
3 n
ARS/AAR
Partitioning?
6:
0
3
3
0
0
6
8
6 y 5
5
5
9
9
9DS1 5MSP?3 n 3
F
7:
0
3
3
0 ASAI
0 Interface?
8
8
6 n 5
5
5
9
9
9
5
3
3
to
R
8: ASAI
0 Proprietary
3
3
0 Adjunct
0
6 Links?
6
6 n 3 Emergency
5
3
9Access
6
6 Attendant?
3
3
3 y
O
9: Async.
0
2Transfer
2
0 Mode
0 (ATM)
5
5PNC?3 n 0
0
2 Extended
3
3 Cvg/Fwd
3
9 Admin?
3
3 n
Transfer
Trunking?
M Async.
10:
3
3
3Mode3 (ATM)
3
5
5
5 n 0
0External
3
3 Device
3
3Alarm
3 Admin?
3
3 n
ATMS?
Flexible
11:
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
3 n 2
3
0
6
6
3
0Billing?
3
3 n
of
12:
0
0Audible
0
0Message
0
3Waiting?
3
3 n -3 Forced
-3
0 Entry
0
0 Account
0
0 Codes?
3
3 n
13:
0
0
0Authorization
0
0
3 Codes?
3
3 n -3 -3 Global
0
0Call0 Classification?
0
0
3
3 n
y3
14:
0
0
0
0
0 CAS3 Branch?
3
3 n -3 -3 -3 Hospitality
0
0
0 (Basic)?
0
3
15:
0
2
0
0
0
5
5
3
0
3
0
6
6
6
0
3
3
16:
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
17:
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Screen 270. System Parameters Country-Options

Customize

Display-only field that appears when the Digital Loss Plan Modification field is
enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

1180

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enables customization on the 2-party loss table.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Country-Options

Digital Loss Plan

Provides the default values for digital loss plan and n-party conference loss.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 25

See the Country code table at the beginning of this screen
description.

FROM / TO

Display-only fields that identify the variable digital loss values.
Valid entries

Usage

-3 through 15

An unsigned number is a loss, while a number preceded with
a minus sign is a gain.

Field descriptions for page 3

display system-parameters country-options
OPTIONAL FEATURES
TONE & CONFERENCE LOSS PLANS

Page Page
1 of
3 of 57

G3 Version:
Digital Tone
Plan: 1 V6

MaximumCustomize?
Ports: 300
n
TO
Abbreviated1 Dialing
2
3 Enhanced
4
5 List?
6
7n 8
9 10 11 12 13 CAS
14 Main?
15 16n 17
Access
Gateway?
Redirected
n0
Dial:
0
3 Security
3
0
0
6
6n Cvg
6 Of5 Calls
0
6
5
5 Off-net?
5
5
0
Analog 0Trunk
Call
DCS
(Basic)?
Confirm:
0 Incoming
0
0
0
0ID? 0n 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0n 0
A/DReorder:
Grp/Sys List
Dialing
Start
Coverage?
0
0
0
0
0 at 001? 0n 0
0
0
0 DCS
0 Call
0
0
0
0 n 0
Answer Busy:
Supervision
Rerouting?
0
0by Call
0
0Classifier?
0
0
0n 0 DCS
0 with
0
0
0
0 n0
0
0
0
ARS?
Ringing:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0y 0
0
0 DEFINITY
0
0 Network
0
0 Admin?
0
0 n 0
DS1
MSP?
Spec Ring:
0 ARS/AAR
0
0 Partitioning?
0
0
0
0y 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0n 0
0
Intercept:
0
0
0ASAI0 Interface?
0
0
0n 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ASAI Proprietary
Access
Waiting:
0
0
0 Adjunct
0
0 Links?
0
0n 0 Emergency
0
0
0
0 to0 Attendant?
0
0
0y 0
Async. Transfer
PNC?
Verify:
0
0
0Mode0 (ATM)
0
0
0n 0
0
0Extended
0
0 Cvg/Fwd
0
0 Admin?
0
0n 0
Async.
Transfer
Mode
External
Alarm
Intrude:
0
0
0(ATM)
0 Trunking?
0
0
0n 0
0
0
0Device
0
0
0 Admin?
0
0n 0
Billing?
Zip:
3
3
3 -3 -3 ATMS?
-3 -3n -3 -3 -3 -3 Flexible
-3 -3 -3
-3
0n 0
Audible
Message
Waiting?
Music:
0
3
3
0
0
6
6n 6 Forced
3
0Entry
6 of3 Account
3
3 Codes?
3
0n 0
Authorization Codes? n
Global Call Classification? n
CAS Branch? n
Hospitality (Basic)? y
End-to-End total loss (dB) in a n-party conference:
3:____
4:____
5:____
6:____

Screen 271. System Parameters Country-Options

Customize

Display-only field that appears when, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Digital Loss Plan Modification field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enables customization on the 2-party loss table.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1181

Screen reference

Digital Tone Plan

Provides the default values for tone loss for the selected country.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through 25

See the Country code table at the beginning of this screen
description.

End-to-End total loss (dB) in a n-party
conference

Provides total loss for a conference call with the designated number of parties.
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 99

The higher the number listed for a call with a fixed display
number of parties, the more loss the switch adds into a
conference call with that number of parties; therefore, the
conference call is quieter.

FROM / TO

Display-only fields that identify the variable digital tone values.
Valid entries

Usage

-3 through 15

An unsigned number is a loss, while a number preceded with
a minus sign is a gain.

Field descriptions for pages 4–7

change system-parameters country-options
SYSTEM PARAMETERS COUNTRY-OPTIONS
Tone Name
Cadence
Tone
Step
(Frequency/Level)
busy____________
1:
440/-17.25___
Duration
2:
silence______
Duration
3:
440/-17.25___
Duration
4:
silence______
Duration
5:
440/-17.25___
Duration
6:
goto_________
7:
_____________
8:
_____________
9:
_____________
10:
_____________
11:
_____________
12:
_____________
13:
_____________
14:
_____________
15:
_____________

Page 4 of 7

(msec):
(msec):
(msec):
(msec):
(msec):
step:

200__
200__
200__
200__
200__
3_

Screen 272. System Parameters Country-Options

1182

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Country-Options

Cadence Step

Display-only fields that identify the number of each tone cadence step.
Valid entries

Usage

1–15

Identifies the number of each tone cadence step.

Duration (msec)

There is one dynamic Duration field associated with each of the 15 Tone
(Frequency/Level) fields on each screen page. Initially, when Tone is blank, this
field does not appear. However, when a non-blank value other than goto is
entered in a Tone field, the associated Duration field appears, and must be used to
specify the duration (in milliseconds) of the specified tone.
Valid entries

Usage

50 through 12750 in

To describe the duration of each administered
tone.

increments of 50
Step

There is one dynamic Step field associated with each of the 15 Tone
(Frequency/Level) fields shown on a screen page. Initially, when Tone is blank,
this field does not appear. However, when goto is entered in a Tone field, the
associated Step field appears, and must be used to specify the cadence step to
begin repeating from
Valid entries

Usage

Cadence Step (1–14)

Beginning the repeated sequence for a “goto” entry.

Tone Name

Each entry uses one of the keywords below to indicate which of the individually
administrable tones this screen modifies. This field (with its associated Tone
(Frequency/Level), Duration, and Step fields) is meaningful only if the system
tone detector is a TN780, vintage 4 or greater, or a TN2182.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1183

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

blank

If this field is blank, all entries in the
corresponding Frequency and Duration fields are
ignored.

1-call-wait
2-call-wait
3-call-wait
busy
busy-verify
call-wait-ringback
conference
confirmation
disable-dial
hold
hold-recall
immed-ringback
intercept
intrusion
PBX-dial
recall-dial
recall-dont-ans
redirect
reorder
rep-confirmation
reset-shift
ringback
secondary-dial
special-dial
whisper-page
zip

1184

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters Country-Options

Tone (Frequency/Level)
Valid entries

Usage

silence

An entry of silence means no tone. A final step of silence
with an infinite duration will be added internally to any
tone sequence that does not end in a goto.

goto

An entry of goto means to repeat all or part of the
sequence, beginning at the specified cadence step.

350/-17.25
350+425/-4.0
350+440/-13.75
375+425/-15.0
404/-11.0
404/-16.0
404+425/-11.0
404+450/-11.0
425/-4.0
425/-11.0
425/-17.25
440/-17.25
440+480/-19.0
450/-10
480/-17.25
480+620/-24.0
525/-11.0
620/-17.25
697/-8.5
770/-8.5
852/-8.5
941/-8.5
1000/0.0
1000/+3.0
1004/0.0
1004/-16.0
1209/-7.5
1336/-7.5
1400/-11.0
1477/-7.5
1633/-7.5
2025/-12.1
2100/-12.1
2225/-12.1
2804/-16.0

Specifies the frequency and level of the tone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1185

Screen reference

System-Parameters
Customer-Options
This screen shows you which optional features are enabled for your system as
determined by the installed license file. If you have any questions about disabling
or enabling one of these features contact your Avaya representative.
Field descriptions for page 1

display system-parameters customer-options
OPTIONAL FEATURES
G3 Version: V10
Location: 1
Platform:

page 1

Maximum Ports: 2800
Maximum XMOBILE Stations: 0

Used
1041
0

IP PORT CAPACITIES
Maximum Administered IP Trunks:
Maximum Concurrently Registered IP Stations:
Maximum Administered Remote Office Trunks:
Maximum Concurrently Registered Remote Office Stations:
Maximum Concurrently Registered IP eCons:

100
10
0
0
0

96
10
0
0
0

Maximum Number of DS1 Boards with Echo Cancellation: 0
0
Maximum VAL Boards: 1
0
(NOTE: You must logoff & login to effect the permission changes.)

Screen 273. System Parameters Customer-Options

G3 Version

Identifies the version of Avaya MultiVantage being used.
Location

Indicates the location of this switch. 1 indicates Canada or the United States. 2
indicates any other location, and allows the use of International Consolidation
circuit packs and telephones.
Maximum Ports

Number of ports active, per contract.
Maximum XMOBILE Stations

Specifies the maximum number of allowable XMOBILE stations. In general, each
XMOBILE station is assigned to a wireless handset. Each XMOBILE station
counts as a station and a port in terms of system configuration.

1186

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Platform

A display-only field that identifies, via a number mapping, the platform being
used for a specific customer.
IP PORT CAPACITIES
Maximum Administered IP Trunks

Defines limits of the number of IP trunks administered.
Maximum Administered Remote Office Trunks

Defines limits of the number of IP endpoints based on the endpoint. Use the
smaller of this number or the number based on product ID on page 7 of this
screen.
Maximum Concurrently IP eCons

Specifies the maximum number of IP SoftConsoles that may be registered at one
time. The maximum number depends on the type of system.
Maximum Concurrently Registered IP Stations

Specifies the maximum number of IP stations that may be registered at one time.
Must be less than or equal to the Maximum Ports field on this page. The switch
will use the smaller of this number or the number based on product ID on page 7
of this screen.
Maximum Concurrently Registered Remote
Office Stations

Specifies the maximum number of remote office stations that may be registered at
one time. Must be less than or equal to the Maximum Ports field on this page. The
switch will use the smaller of this number or the number based on product ID on
page 7 of this screen.
Maximum Number of DS1 Boards with Echo
Cancellation

Shows the number of DS1 circuit packs that can have echo cancellation.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1187

Screen reference

Maximum VAL Boards
Valid entries

Usage

This display-only field indicates the maximum number of
(DEFINITY R TN2501AP (Voice Announcement over LAN) boards allowed
in this system.
and S8700
Media Servers)
■ For values greater than 1, the Val Full 1-Hour Capacity
0-5
field on page 4 of the System-Parameters
(DEFINITY SI
Customer-Options screen must be set to y.
and CSI, S8100
Media Servers, ■ This field updates the System Limit field on the System
Capacity report.
and S8300
Media Server)
0–10

Field descriptions for page 2

display system-parameters customer-options
OPTIONAL FEATURES
Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List?
Access Security Gateway (ASG)?
Analog Trunk Incoming Call ID?
A/D Grp/Sys List Dialing Start at 01?
Answer Supervision by Call Classifier?
ARS?
ARS/AAR Partitioning?
ARS/AAR Dialing without FAC?
ASAI Link Core Capabilities?
ASAI Link Plus Capabilities?
Async. Transfer Mode (ATM) PNC?
Async. Transfer Mode (ATM) Trunking?
ATMS?
Attendant Vectoring?

page 2

Audible Message Waiting?
Authorization Codes?
CAS Branch?
CAS Main?
Change COR by FAC?
Computer Telephony Adjunct Links?
Co-Res DEFINITY LAN Gateway?
Cvg Of Calls Redirected Off-net?
DCS (Basic)?
DCS Call Coverage?
DCS with Rerouting?
Digital Loss Plan Modification?
DS1 MSP?
DS1 Echo Cancellation?

Screen 274. System Parameters Customer-Options

Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List

Provides the capability to store and retrieve dialing lists that simplify or eliminate
dialing. You dial an abbreviated code or depress an assigned button. The stored
entries are organized in number lists. There are three types of number lists:
personal, group, and enhanced.
Access Security Gateway (ASG)

Provides an additional level of security for remote administration of the switch.

1188

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

A/D Grp/Sys List Dialing Start at 01

Allows you to number Abbreviated Dialing group or system lists starting with 01,
rather than simply 1. This allows Avaya MultiVantage Abbreviated Dialing to
operate like it does with the DEFINITY G2 system.
Analog Trunk Incoming Call ID

This field allows collection and display the name and number of an incoming call
information on analog trunks.
Answer Supervision by Call Classifier

This circuit pack detects tones and voice-frequency signals on the line and
determines whether a call has been answered. This field is set to y if the system
contains a call-classifier circuit pack.
ARS

Provides access to public and private communications networks. Long-distance
calls can be routed over the best available and most economical routes. Provides
partitioning of ARS routing patterns.
ARS/AAR Partitioning

Provides the ability to partition AAR and ARS into 8 user groups within a single
Avaya MultiVantage. Can establish individual routing treatment for each group.
ARS/AAR Dialing without FAC

Provides for Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) calls without dialing a Feature Access Code (FAC).
ASAI Link Core Capabilities

Provides linkage between Avaya MultiVantage and adjuncts. CallVisor ASAI
improves the call handling efficiency of ACD agents and other system users by
allowing an adjunct to monitor, initiate, control, and terminate calls on the switch.
NOTE:

ASAI Link Core Capabilities only applies to links administered as type asai.
This field was previously named ASAI Interface.
If the ASAI Link Core Capabilities field is administered to y then it will be
associated with the following ASAI capability groups:
■

555-233-506

Adjunct Control

Issue 5 October 2002

1189

Screen reference

■

Domain Control

■

Event Notification

■

Single Step Conference

■

Request Feature

■

II Digits

■

Set Value

■

Value Query

For more information, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical
Reference.
ASAI Link Plus Capabilities

Provides linkage between Avaya MultiVantage and adjuncts. If the ASAI Link
Plus Capabilities field is administered to y, then the following ASAI
capability groups are enabled:
■

Adjunct Routing

■

Answering Machine Detection

■

Selective Listening

■

Switch Classified Outbound Calls

■

ISDN Redirecting Number Information - the original dialed number
information is provided within the ASAI messages if it arrives in ISDN
SETUP messages from the public networks as either Original Dialed
Number or Redirecting Party Number.
NOTE:

ASAI Link Plus Capabilities only applies to links administered as type asai.
For more information, see the Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical
Reference.
Asynch. Transfer Mode (ATM) PNC

ATM PNC can be enabled only if:

1190

■

all prior fiber-link administration has been removed

■

all “switch-node” and “dup-switch-node” carrier types have been removed

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Asynch. Transfer Mode (ATM) Trunking

If ATM trunking is enabled, multiple ISDN-PRI T1 or E1 trunks can be emulated
on one ATM pipe. Can only be enabled if the ISDN-PRI field is set to y. Enables
circuit emulation service (CES).
ATM WAN Spare Processor

Appears on DEFINITY R only. An ATM WAN spare processor acts as a PPN in
the event of network failure, and can function as an SPE if the main PPN is not
functional. Cannot be set to y if the Async. Transfer Mode (ATM) Trunking field
is n.
ATMS

Provides for voice and data trunk facilities to be measured for satisfactory
transmission performance.
Attendant Vectoring

Allows you to use attendant vectoring. Cannot be set to y if the CAS Main and
CAS Branch fields are y.
Audible Message Waiting

Provides audible message waiting.
Authorization Codes

Permits you to selectively specify levels of calling privileges that override
in-place restrictions. In addition to facilities access, authorization codes are used
for unique identification for billing security purposes.
CAS Branch

Provides Centralized Attendant Service - Branch. See CAS Main for more
information. Cannot be set to y if the Attendant Vectoring and Centralized
Attendant fields are y.
CAS Main

Provides multi-location switch customers served by separate switching vehicles to
concentrate attendant positions at a single main Avaya MultiVantage location.
The main Avaya MultiVantage is served by an attendant queue that collects calls
from all locations (main and branch). Each branch location switches all of its
incoming calls to the centralized attendant positions over release link trunks
(RLTs). The calls are then extended back to the requested extension at the branch

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1191

Screen reference

switch over the same RLT. When the call is answered, the trunks to the main
switch are dropped and can be used for another call. Cannot be set to y if the
Centralized Attendant and CAS Branch fields are y.
Change COR by FAC

Provides certain users the ability to change the class of restriction of local
extensions and local attendants via a phone by using a feature access code (FAC).
Cannot be set to y if the Tenant Partitioning field is y.
Co-Res DEFINITY LAN Gateway

(For S8100 Media Servers and S8300 Media Server only.) Provides
communications between TCP/IP clients and MultiVantage call processing.
Cannot be set to y if the ASAI Link Core Capabilities and Computer Telephony
Adjunct Links fields are n.
For more information see the Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical
Reference.
Computer Telephony Adjunct Links

Provides linkage between Avaya MultiVantage and adjuncts. Includes both the
ASAI Link Core and ASAI Link Plus capabilities, plus the Phantom Calls and
CTI Stations.
NOTE:

Computer Telephony Adjunct Links only applies to links administered as
type adjlk. This field was previously named ASAI Proprietary Adjunct
Links.
For more information see the Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical
Reference.
Cvg Of Calls Redirected Off-net

Provides continued monitoring for calls redirected to off-network (remote)
coverage points. Uses call classification via call classifier circuit pack or ISDN
trunk signaling.
DCS (Basic)

Provides transparent operation of selected features across a Distributed
Communications System (DCS). Users on one switch can use features located on
another switch. Includes 4- and 5-digit uniform dialing and 1–4 digit steering.
Does not support a 6/7-digit dial plan.

1192

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

DCS Call Coverage

Provides DCS-based transparency of the call coverage feature across a DCS
network of switches.
DCS with Rerouting

Provides for rerouting calls transferred among DCS nodes, enabling rerouting of
the call for more effective use of facilities. Cannot be set to y if the ISDN PRI
field is n.
Digital Loss Plan Modification

Allows you to customize the digital loss and digital tone plans.
DS1 MSP

Provides the ability to change fields on DS1 circuit pack screen without removing
the related translations of all trunks from the trunk group.
DS1 Echo Cancellation

Removes perceivable echo from the system.
Field descriptions for page 3
display system-parameters customer-options
OPTIONAL FEATURES
Emergency Access to Attendant?
Enable ‘dadmin’ login?
Enhanced Conferencing?
Enhanced EC500?
Extended Cvg/Fwd Admin?
External Device Alarm Admin?
Five Port Networks Max Per MCC?
Flexible Billing?
Forced Entry of Account Codes?
Global Call Classification?
Hospitality (Basic)?
Hospitality (G3V3 Enhancements)?
H.323 Trunks?

(page 3)

ISDN Feature Plus?
ISDN Network Call Redirection?
ISDN-BRI Trunks?
ISDN-PRI?
Local Spare Processor?
Malicious Call Trace?
Mode Code for Centralized Voice Mail?
Multifrequency Signaling?
Multimedia Appl.Server Interface(MASI)?
Multimedia Call Handling (Basic)?
Multimedia Call Handling(Enhanced)?
Multiple Locations?
Personal Station Access (PSA?)?

IP Attendant Consoles?
IP Stations?

Screen 275. System Parameters Customer-Options

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1193

Screen reference

Emergency Access to Attendant

Provides for emergency calls to be placed to an attendant. These calls can be
placed automatically by Avaya MultiVantage or dialed by users.
Enable ‘dadmin’ Login

Provides business partners the ability to install, administer, and maintain
DEFINITY switches.
Enhanced Conferencing

Enhanced Conferencing allows the customer to use the Meet-me Conference,
Selective Conference Party Display, Drop, and Mute, and No Hold Conference
features. Must be y for Enhanced Conferencing.
Enhanced EC500

Provides mobile call services including “Anytime Anywhere” accessibility with
One Number availability and Origination mapping.
Extended Cvg/Fwd Admin

Provides basic telecommuting package capability for Extended User
Administration of Redirected Calls.
External Device Alarm Admin

Provides for analog line ports to be used for external alarm interfaces. Allows
identification of port location, adjunct associated with port location, and the alarm
level to report.
Five Port Networks Max Per MCC

Available only for DEFINITY R and S8700 Multi-Connect. Allows system
administration to create five port networks in a multi-carrier cabinet. If there are
any cabinets with more than 2 PNs assigned, this field cannot be set to n.
Flexible Billing

Provides an internationally accepted standard interface for end-to-end digital
connectivity. Used with a T1 interface and supports twenty-three 64-KBPS voice
or data B-Channels and one 64-Kbps signaling D Channel for total bandwidth of
1.544 Mbps.

1194

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Forced Entry of Account Codes

Allows system administration to force account users to enter account codes based
on user or trunk class of restriction, or by an option on the Toll Analysis table.
FEAC provides an easy method of allocating the costs of specific calls to the
correct project, department, etc.
Global Call Classification

Provides call classification outside of North America. Listens for tones and
classifies tones detected. Required for Call Coverage Off Net and Outgoing Call
Management.
Hospitality (Basic)

Provides access to basic features including: Attendant Crisis Alert, Attendant
Room Status, Automatic Wakeup, Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers, Do
Not Disturb, Names Registration, Single-Digit Dialing, and Mixed Station
Numbering.
Hospitality (G3V3 Enhancements)

Software required for Property Management System and Automatic Wakeup.
Property Management System Interface activates Forward PMS Messages to
INTUITY Lodging and PMS Protocol Mode (transmit in ASCII mode). Cannot be
set to y if the Hospitality (Basic) field is n.
Usage Note: standard hospitality features are included in basic system software.
Internet Protocol (IP) PNC

This field is only for the Avaya S8700 IP-Connect and then should be set to y.
This field cannot be administered if:
■

the Asynch. Transfer Mode (ATM) PNC field is y

■

the PNC Duplication field is y

■

If fiber is administered

IP Trunks

Controls permission to administer H.323 trunks. Must be y for IP trunks.
IP Attendant Consoles

Controls permission to administer the IP Attendant Console.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1195

Screen reference

IP Stations

Controls permission to administer H.323 and/or SoftPhone stations. Must be y for
IP phones.
ISDN Feature Plus

Provides ISDN Feature Plus signaling. This option is enabled when either the
ISDN-BRI Trunks field or the ISDN-PRI field is y.
ISDN Network Call Redirection

Administrable if the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunk field is y. Network Call
Redirection (NCR) redirects an incoming ISDN call from an Avaya MultiVantage
system to another PSTN endpoint. Used in Call Centers with Best Service
Routing and Lookahead Interflow. For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage
Network Call Redirection.
ISDN-BRI Trunks

Provides the capability to add ISDN-BRI trunks to the switch. If enabled, can add
isdn trunk groups and the following screens are accessible:
■

network-facilities

■

private-numbering

■

public-unknown- numbering

ISDN-PRI

Provides Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN-PRI) software for either a
switch-hardware platform migration only or a switch-hardware platform
migration in combination with a software version upgrade. Also provides
signaling support for H.323 signaling. Must be y for IP trunks.
Local Spare Processor

A display-only field that indicates that the switch is a Local Spare Processor
(LSP). If y, the S8300 Media Server is configured to provide standby call
processing in case the primary media server is unavailable.
Malicious Call Trace

Provides ability to retrieve certain information related to a malicious call.

1196

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Mode Code for Centralized Voice Mail

This feature provides the ability to share a Voice Mail System among several
switches using the Mode Code - Voice Mail System Interface.
Multifrequency Signaling

Provides for a screen of number signaling used between the switch and the central
office.
Multimedia Appl. Server Interface (MASI)

Allows users of the Multimedia Communications Exchange (MMCX) to take
advantage of certain Avaya MultiVantage telephony features.
Multimedia Call Handling (Basic)

Allows administration of desktop video-conferencing systems as data modules
associated with Avaya MultiVantage voice stations in a multimedia complex.
Users can dial one number to reach either endpoint (voice or data) in the complex.
Also provides support for IP SoftPhones.
Multimedia Call Handling (Enhanced)

Allows a multifunction phone to control a multimedia call like a standard voice
call.
Multiple Locations

Allows you to establish numbering plans and time zone and daylight savings plans
that are specific for each cabinet in a port network.
Personal Station Access (PSA)

Provides basic telecommuting package capability for Personal Station Access.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1197

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 4

display system-parameters customer-options
OPTIONAL FEATURES
PNC Duplication? n
Port Network Support? y
Processor and System MSP? n
Private Networking? y

Remote Office?
Restrict Call Forward Off Net?
Secondary Data Module?
Station and Trunk MSP?
Station as Virtual Extension?
Survivable Remote Processor?
System Management Data Transfer?

page 4

Tenant Partitioning?
Terminal Trans. Init. (TTI)?
Time of Day Routing?
Uniform Dialing Plan?
Usage Allocation Enhancements?
VAL Full 1-Hour Capacity?

n
y
y
n
n
n
n

n
y
y
y
y
y

Wideband Switching? y
Wireless? n

Screen 276. System Parameters Customer-Options

PNC Duplication

This field only appears on Avaya DEFINITY R. If set to y, the Enable Operation
of PNC (Port Network Connectivity) Duplication field appears on the System
Parameters Duplication screen. The Enable Operation of PNC Duplication field is
set with the Enable Operation of SPE (Switch Processing Element) Duplication
field to provide non-standard reliability levels (high, critical, or ATM PNC
Network Duplication).
Port Network Support

Indicates that the switch is operating as a stand-alone Internal Communications
Controller (ICC) when set to n and is used to disable traditional port networking.
Set to y to indicate that traditional DEFINITY port networks are in use.
Processor and System MSP

Allows the customer administrator or technician to maintain processor and system
circuit packs.
Private Networking

Upgrades PNA or ETN software RTU purchased with earlier systems.

1198

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Processor Ethernet

Appears only on S8100 Media Server with a CMC1, S8100 Media Server with a
G600, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect, and S8300 Media Server. Used
to enable use of the ethernet card resident in the processor cabinet for use by the
DEFINITY Call Processing software in place of a C-LAN card (located in a port
network).
VAL Full 1-Hour Capacity

If this is enabled, you have the Enhanced offer, which allows up to 60 minutes
storage capacity per pack and multiple integrated announcement circuit packs.
Remote Office

Allows administration of a remote office.
Restrict Call Forward Off Net

The system can monitor the disposition of an off-call and, if it detects busy, bring
the call back for further processing, including call coverage.
Secondary Data Module

Provides ability to use any data module as a secondary data module.
Station and Trunk MSP

Provides the customer administrator or technician to maintain station and trunk
circuit packs.
Station as Virtual Extension

Allows virtual to be entered in the type field of the station screen, which allows
multiple virtual extensions to be mapped to a single physical analog phone. The
user can also administer a specific ringing pattern for each virtual extension.
Useful in environments such as college dormitories, where three occupants can
have three different extensions for one physical phone.
Survivable Remote Processor

This field can be set to y only if, on the System-Parameters Maintenance screen,
the CPE Alarm Activation Level field is none. This applies only to DEFINITY SI
systems.
System Management Data Transfer

Indicates the switch is accessible by Network Administration.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1199

Screen reference

Tenant Partitioning

Provides for partitioning of attendant groups and/or stations and trunk groups.
Typically this is used for multiple tenants in a building or multiple departments
within a company or organization.
Terminal Trans. Init. (TTI)

Allows administrators of Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) to merge an
station administered with X in the Port field, to a valid port by dialing a
system-wide TTI security code and the extension from a terminal connected to
that port. Must be set to y for Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement.
Time of Day Routing

Provides AAR and ARS routing of calls based on the time of day and day of the
week. You can take advantage of lower calling rates during specific times.
Uniform Dialing Plan

Provides 3- to 7–digit Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) and 1–7 digit steering. Also
allows you to use Extended Trunk Access and Extension Number Portability
features.
Usage Allocation Enhancements

Provides for assigning ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Services/Features for Usage
Allocation Plans. To use this enhancement, first set either the ISDN-PRI or
ISDN-BRI Trunks fields to y.
Wideband Switching

Provides wideband data software for switching video or high-speed data. You can
aggregate DSO channels up to the capacity of the span. Wideband supports H0,
H11, and H12 standards, where applicable, as well as customer-defined data rates.
Wireless

Provides right to use for wireless applications in certain Network Systems sales.
You may purchase it from Avaya Network Wireless Systems.

1200

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Field descriptions for Call Center Optional
Features
display system-parameters customer-options

page 5

CALL CENTER OPTIONAL FEATURES
Call Center Release:
ACD? y
BCMS (Basic)? y
BCMS/VuStats Service Level?
Business Advocate?
Call Work Codes?
DTMF Feedback Signals For VRU?
Dynamic Advocate?
Expert Agent Selection (EAS)?
EAS-PHD?
Forced ACD Calls?
Least Occupied Agent?
Lookahead Interflow (LAI)?
Multiple Call Handling (On Request)?
Multiple Call Handling (Forced)?

n
n
y
y
n
y
n
n

n
n

PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)? n
Reason Codes? n
Service Observing (Basic)?
Service Observing (Remote/By FAC)?
Service Observing (VDNs)?
Timed ACW?
Vectoring (Basic)?
Vectoring (Prompting)?
Vectoring (G3V4 Enhanced)?
Vectoring (ANI/II-Digits Routing)?
Vectoring (G3V4 Advanced Routing)?
Vectoring (CINFO)?
Vectoring (Best Service Routing)?
Vectoring (Holidays)?

y
n

y
y
n
n
n
n

Screen 277. Call Center Optional Features

ACD

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) automatically distributes incoming calls to
specified splits or skills. Provides the software required for the Call Center Basic,
Plus, Deluxe, and Elite features for the number of agents specified. Cannot be set
to n if the Call Work Codes field is y.
BCMS (Basic)

Provides real-time and historical reports about agent, ACD split, Vector Directory
Number (VDN) and trunk group activity.
BCMS/VuStats Service Level

Allows you to set up hunt groups or Vector Directory Numbers (VDNs) with an
acceptable service level. An acceptable service level defines the number of
seconds within which a call must be answered to be considered acceptable.
Business Advocate

Software that provides an integrated set of advanced features to optimize call
center performance. If set to n, the Least Occupied Agent field displays. For
information on CentreVu® Advocate, contact your Account Executive.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1201

Screen reference

Call Center Release

Displays the call center release installed on the system.
Call Work Codes

Allows agents to enter digits for an ACD call to record customer-defined events
such as account codes or social security numbers. Cannot be set to y if the ACD
field is n.
DTMF Feedback Signals For VRU

Provides support for the use of C and D Tones to VRUs.
Dynamic Advocate

Software that provides an integrated set of advanced features to optimize call
center performance.
EAS-PHD

Increases the number of skills an agent can log in to from four to 20. Increases the
number of agent skill preference levels from two to 16.
Expert Agent Selection (EAS)

Provides skills-based routing of calls to the best-qualified agent.
Forced ACD Calls

See Multiple Call Handling.
Least Occupied Agent

Appears only if the Business Advocate field is n. Allows call center calls to be
routed to the agent who has been the least busy, regardless of when the agent last
answered a call. Cannot be set to y if the Expert Agent Selection (EAS) field is n.
Lookahead Interflow (LAI)

Provides Look-Ahead Interflow to balance the load of ACD calls across multiple
locations. Cannot be set to y if the Vectoring (Basic) field is n.
Multiple Call Handling (On Request)

Allows agents to request additional calls when active on a call.

1202

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Multiple Call Handling (Forced)

Forces an agent to be interrupted with an additional ACD call while active on an
ACD call. Splits or skills can be one forced, one per skill, or many forced. Cannot
be set to y if the ACD field is n and the Forced ACD Calls field is y.
PASTE (Display PBX Data on Phone)

Provides an interface between the display of a DCP telephone set and PC-based
applications.
Reason Codes

Allows agents to enter a numeric code that describes their reason for entering the
AUX work state or for logging out of the system. Cannot be set to y if the Expert
Agent Selection (EAS) field is n.
Service Observing (Basic)

Allows a specified user to observe an in-progress call on a listen-only or
listen-and-talk basis.
Service Observing (Remote/By FAC)

Allows users to service observe calls from a remote location or a local station
using this feature’s access codes.
Service Observing (VDNs)

Provides the option of observing and/or monitoring another user’s calls.
Timed ACW

Places an auto-in agent in ACW for an administered length of time after
completion of the currently active ACD call.
Vectoring (Basic)

Provides basic call vectoring capability.
Vectoring (Prompting)

Allows flexible handling of incoming calls based on information collected from
the calling party or from an ISDN-PRI message.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1203

Screen reference

Vectoring (G3V4 Enhanced)

Allows the use of enhanced comparators, wildcards in digit strings for matching
on collected digits and ANI or II-digits, use of Vector Routing Tables, multiple
audio/music sources for use with wait-time command and priority level with the
oldest-call-wait conditional.
Vectoring (ANI/II-Digits Routing)

Provides for ANI and II-Digits vector routing.
Vectoring (G3V4 Advanced Routing)

Provides for Rolling Average Speed of Answer Routing, Expected Wait Time
Routing, and VDN Calls Routing.
Vectoring (CINFO)

Provides the ability to collect ced and cdpd from the network for vector routing.
To use this enhancement, first set either the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks fields
to y.
Vectoring (Best Service Routing)

Enables the Best Service Routing™ feature. Through special vector commands,
Best Service Routing allows you to compare splits or skills at local and remote
locations and queue a call to the resource that will give the caller the best service.
Vectoring (Holidays)

Enables the Holiday Vectoring feature. It simplifies vector writing for holidays.

1204

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Field descriptions for Call Center Optional
Features

display system-parameters customer-options
CALL CENTER OPTIONAL FEATURES
VDN of Origin Announcement? n
VDN Return Destination? n

Page 6 of X

VuStats? n
VuStats (G3V4 Enhanced)? n

Used
Logged-In ACD Agents: 500
Logged-In Advocate Agents: 500
Logged-In IP Softphone Agents: 500

Screen 278. Call Center Optional Features

Logged-In ACD Agents

Number of ACD Agents contracted for. This field limits the number of logged-in
ACD agents to a number no more than the maximum purchased. The value of this
field indicates the total of ACD agents that can be logged-in simultaneously.
The limit applies to ACD agents on ACD and EAS calls. Auto-Available Split
(AAS) agent ports are counted when they are assigned. AAS split or skill
members are also counted. If the port for an AAS split/skill member is logged out,
(for example, when a ringing call is redirected) the logged-in agent count is not
updated. These counts are updated only during administration.
Logged-In Advocate Agents

Appears when the CentreVu Advocate field is y. Number of CentreVu Advocate
Agents contracted for.
The total number of logged-in CentreVu Advocate agents must be equal to or less
than the number allowed in the Logged-In ACD Agents field. The number of
logged-in CentreVu Advocate agents counts towards the total number of
logged-in ACD agents.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1205

Screen reference

Logged-In IP Softphone Agents

Number of IP Softphone Agents contracted for. This field limits the number of
logged-in IP Softphone agents to a number no more than the maximum purchased.
The value of this field indicates the total of IP Softphone agents that can be
logged-in simultaneously.
VDN of Origin Announcement

Provides a short voice message to an agent indicating the city of origin of the
caller or the service requested by the caller based on the VDN used to process the
call.
VDN Return Destination

Allows an incoming trunk call to be placed back in vector processing after all
parties, except the originator, drop.
VuStats

Allows you to present BCMS statistics on phone displays.
VuStats (G3V4 Enhanced)

Allows you to use the G3V4 VuStats enhancements including historical data and
thresholds.
Field descriptions for QSIG Optional Features

display system-parameters customer-options
QSIG OPTIONAL FEATURES
Basic Call Setup?
Basic Supplementary Services?
Centralized Attendant?
Interworking with DCS?
Supplementary Services with Rerouting?
Transfer into QSIG Voice Mail?
Value-Added (VALU)?

Page 7 of X

n
n
n
n
n
n
n

Screen 279. QSIG Optional Features

Basic Call Setup

Provides basic QSIG services: basic connectivity and calling line ID number. To
use this enhancement, either the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks fields must be y.

1206

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Basic Supplementary Services

To use this enhancement, either the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks fields must
be y. Provides the following QSIG Supplementary Services:
■

Name ID

■

Transit Capabilities; that is, the ability to tandem QSIG information
elements

■

Support of Notification Information Elements for interworking between
QSIG and non-QSIG tandemed connections

■

Call Forwarding (Diversion) by forward switching. No reroute capabilities
are provided

■

Call Transfer by join. No path replacement capabilities are provided.

■

Call Completion (also known as Automatic Callback)

Centralized Attendant

Can be enabled only if the Supplementary Services with Rerouting field is y.
Cannot be set to y if the CAS Main and CAS Branch fields are y. Allows all
attendants in one location to serve users in multi locations. All signaling is done
over QSIG ISDN lines. If this field is y, the IAS fields on the Console Parameters
screen do not display.
Interworking with DCS

Allows the following features to work between a user on a DCS-enabled switch in
a network and a QSIG-enabled switch:
■

Called/calling party name display

■

Called/calling party number display

This field cannot be set to y if the DCS (Basic) field is n.
Supplementary Services with Rerouting

Provides the following QSIG Supplementary Services:

555-233-506

■

Transit Capabilities; that is, the ability to tandem QSIG information
elements.

■

Support of Notification Information Elements for interworking between
QSIG and non-QSIG tandemed connections.

■

Call Forwarding (Diversion) by forward switching. In addition, reroute
capabilities are provided.

■

Call Transfer by join. In addition, path replacement capabilities are
provided.

Issue 5 October 2002

1207

Screen reference

Transfer Into QSIG Voice Mail

Can be enabled only if the Basic Supplementary Services field is y and either the
ISDN-PRI Trunk or ISDN-BRI Trunk field is y. Allows transfer directly into the
voicemail box on the voicemail system when a QSIG link connects Avaya
MultiVantage and the voice mail.
Value Added (VALU)

Provides additional QSIG functionality, including the ability to send and display
calling party information during call alerting. See Administration for Network
Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information.
Field descriptions for ASAI (page 8)

change system-parameters customer options

Page 8 of X

ASAI FEATURES
CTI Stations? n
Phantom Calls? n

ASAI PROPRIETARY FEATURES
Agent States? n

Screen 280. ASAI Features when the ASAI Link Plus Capabilities field is y

Agent States

Appears when the Computer Telephony Adjunct Links field is y. The Agent States
field provides proprietary information used by Avaya applications. For more
information, contact your Avaya representative.
NOTE:

The Agent States field only applies to links administered as type adjlk. This
field was previously named Proprietary Applications.
CTI Stations

Appears when the ASAI Link Plus Capabilities field is y. This field needs to be
enabled for any application (using a link of Type ASAI) that uses a CTI station to
receive calls.
For more information see the Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical
Reference.

1208

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System-Parameters Customer-Options

Phantom Calls

Appears when the ASAI Link Plus Capabilities field is y. Enables phantom calls.
The Phantom Calls field only applies to links administered as type ASAI.
For more information see the Avaya MultiVantage™ CallVisor® ASAI Technical
Reference.
Field descriptions for Maximum IP
Registrations by Product ID

Page 8 of X
MAXIMUM IP REGISTRATIONS BY PRODUCT ID
Product ID_Rel.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.

Limit
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Product ID_Rel.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.

Limit
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Product ID_Rel.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.
__________ ___.

Limit
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Screen 281. Maximum IP Registrations by Product ID

Limit

Maximum number of IP registrations allowed.
Valid
displays

Usage

1000 or 5000
depending on
switch
configuration

Maximum number of IP registrations allowed. For Avaya
R300 Remote Office Communicator, defaults to the
maximum allowed value for the Concurrently Registered
Remote Office Stations on page 1 of this screen.

Product ID

Identifies the product using the IP (internet protocol) registration.
Valid
displays

Usage

IP_Phone

IP Telephones

IP_Soft

IP Softphones

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1209

Screen reference

Valid
displays

Usage

IP_Agent

IP Agents

IP_eCons

SoftConsole IP attendant

IP_ROMax

R300 Remote Office phones

Rel

Release number of the IP endpoint.
Valid
displays

0 to 99 or
blank

Usage

Release number of the IP endpoint

System Parameters OCM Call
Classification
This screen enters the tone characteristics for your country for Outbound Call
Management (OCM) applications. It is not required for United States OCM
applications. If you cannot access this screen, contact your Avaya representative.
This screen appears when Global Call Classification field on the System
Parameters Customer Options screen is set to y, or when the Enable Busy Tone
Disconnect for Analog loop-start Trunks field on the System Parameters Country
Options screen is set to y. This screen defines the busy tone and cadence and can
be administered with up to 4 on and off steps, which is four valid cycles to
determine busy tone.
Avaya recommends that you use a minimum of two on and off steps to determine
a valid busy tone. If the cadence is administered with one on and off step, any time
the classifier hears the cadence it is considered BTD signal.

1210

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

System Parameters OCM Call Classification

Field descriptions for page 1

Page 1 of 2
SYSTEM PARAMETERS OCM CALL CLASSIFICATION

TONE DETECTION PARAMETERS
Global Classifier Adjustment (dB): ___
USA Default Algorithm? _n_
USA SIT Algorithm? ___

Screen 282. System Parameters OCM Call Classification screen

Global Classifier Adjustment (dB)

Enter a number to specify the dB loss adjustment.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 15

0 is the least and 15 the most adjustment.

USA Default Algorithm
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

To use the default United States tone detection, set this field
to y. If you enter n, the US Special Information Tones (SIT)
Algorithm field appears.

USA SIT Algorithm
Valid
entries

Usage

y

To use the United States (SIT) tone characteristics for SIT tone
detection.

n

The system treats tones with the administered tone name
“intercept” as if they were SIT VACANT, and treats tones with the
administered tone name “information” as if they were SIT
UNKNOWN.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1211

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 2

Page 2 of 9
SYSTEM PARAMETERS OCM CALL CLASSIFICATION
Tone Name
_________

Instance

Tone
Continuous
___

_____

Cadence
Step
1. on
2. off
3. on
4. off
5. on
6. off
7. on
8. off

Duration
Minimum
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Duration
Maximum
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Screen 283. System Parameters OCM Call Classification screen

Cadence Step

A display-only field identifying the number of each tone cadence step and
indicating whether the tone is on or off during this cadence step.
Duration Maximum

Specifies the upper limit in milliseconds of the tone duration.
NOTE:

On the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, set the Off-Premises
Tone Detect Timeout Interval field to its maximum value.
Valid entries

Usage

75 – 6375

Enter in increments of 25 msec.

Duration Minimum

Specifies the lower limit in milliseconds (msec) of the tone duration.

1212

Valid entries

Usage

75 – 6375

Enter in increments of 25 msec.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telecommuting Access

Instance

Enter the instance number of the tone. If the system identifies a tone that matches
the characteristics defined on more than one page of this screen the system applies
the tone definition from the earlier page.
Valid entries

Usage

1–8

The number distinguishes tones that have the same name but
more than one definition of silence and tone-on
characteristics.

Tone Continuous
Valid entries

Usage

y

Indicates a continuous tone. If you enter y, you cannot enter
data in the Duration Minimum or Duration Maximum fields.

n

Indicates a non-continuous tone.

Tone Name

This field is required for tone definition outside of the U.S. and Canada.
If the Global Call Classification field on the System Parameters Customer Options
screen is n, only busy can be entered into this Tone Name field. If Busy Tone
Disconnect is enabled, only busy can be entered into this field.
Valid entries

Usage

busy
information
intercept
reorder
ringback

Enter the name of the tone that you are adding or modifying.
Enter busy for Busy Tone Disconnect.

Telecommuting Access
This screen allows the System Administrator to administer the extension which
allows remote users to use the feature.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1213

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 1
add telecommuting-access
TELECOMMUTING ACCESS
Telecommuting Access Extension: ________

Screen 284. Telecommuting Access

Telecommuting Access Extension

This only allows remote access to the Telecommuting Access feature.
Valid entries

Usage

Unassigned
extension of
1-7 digits or
blank

Enter an extension that conforms to your system’s dial plan
and is not assigned to any other system object.

Related Topics

See ‘‘Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting’’ on page 357 for
information about setting up telecommuting.

Tenant
This screen defines tenants to the system. If your switch uses tenant partitioning,
see ‘‘Tenant Partitioning’’ on page 1870 for more information.

1214

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tenant

Field descriptions for page 1

change tenant 18
Tenant 18
Tenant Description: ________________________________________
Attendant Group: 1
Ext Alert Port (TAAS): _______ Ext Alert (TAAS) Extension: ____
Night Destination: _____
Music Source: 1
Attendant Vectoring VDN:
Emergency Number:

Screen 285. Tenant screen

Attendant Group

This required information relates a tenant to an attendant group.
NOTE:

The default for the system is that all attendant groups exist. However, the
attendant group will be empty if no consoles are assigned to it.
Valid entries

Usage

1–28

See Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide, for
your system’s range of allowable attendant group numbers.

Attendant Vectoring VDN

This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen,
the Attendant Vectoring field is y and the Tenant Partitioning field is n. Enter the
assigned Attendant VDN extension or blank. When set to y, the VDN and Vector
screens display.
Emergency Number

Enter the phone number you want to use for this tenant’s emergency calls. If your
system is in a No-License mode, these will be the only numbers that the tenant can
dial. The number may contain the feature access code for Emergency Access to
the Attendant, trunk access codes, or any number, *, or #.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1215

Screen reference

Ext Alert Port (TAAS)

Enter the necessary characters. Enter Trunk Answer Any Station (TAAS) alert
port information, if any. The port type and the object type must be consistent, and
the port can be assigned to only one tenant.
Valid entries

Usage

A valid port address or X

First and second characters are the cabinet
number

01 through 44

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth character are the slot number

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31

Gateway

1 through 80

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

01 through 31

Circuit

Ext Alert (TAAS) Extension

This field appears only if you entered an X in Ext Alert Port (TAAS).

1216

Valid entries

Usage

A valid
extension

If you entered an X in Ext Alert Port (TAAS), you must enter
extension information in this field.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tenant

Music Source
Valid entries

Usage

1–20

Enter the music/tone source for this partition. These sources
are defined on the Music Sources screen.

Night Destination
Valid entries

Usage

A valid
extension

Enter the night service station extension, if you want night
service for this tenant.

Tenant

This is a display only field. It contains the tenant number that you entered on the
command line.
Tenant Description
Valid entries

Usage

40 alpha-numeric
characters or blank

You may leave the description field blank, but
future administration will be easier if you
provide descriptive information.

Field descriptions for page 2

change tenant 18
Tenant 18

CALLING PERMISSION (Enter y to grant permission to call specified Tenant)

1?
2?
3?
4?
5?
6?
7?
8?
9?
10?

y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

11?
12?
13?
14?
15?
16?
17?
18?
19?
20?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
y
n
n

21?
22?
23?
24?
25?
26?
27?
28?
29?
30?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

31?
32?
33?
34?
35?
36?
37?
38?
39?
40?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

41?
42?
43?
44?
45?
46?
47?
48?
49?
50?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

51?
52?
53?
54?
55?
56?
57?
58?
59?
60?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

61?
62?
63?
64?
65?
66?
67?
68?
69?
70?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

71?
72?
73?
74?
75?
76?
77?
78?
79?
80?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

81?
82?
83?
84?
85?
86?
87?
88?
89?
90?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

91?
92?
93?
94?
95?
96?
97?
98?
99?
100?

n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

Screen 286. Tenant

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1217

Screen reference

Calling permissions

The system default allows each tenant to call only itself and Tenant 1. If you want
to change that, you can do that on this screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to establish calling permission between the tenant
number that you entered on the command line and any other
tenant.

Tenant

This is a display only field. It contains the tenant number that you entered on the
command line.

Terminal Parameters
This screen administers system-level parameters and audio levels for the 603
CALLMASTER telephones and the 4600-series, 6400-series, 8403, 8405B,
8405B+, 8405D, 8405D+, 8410B, 8410D, 8411B, 8411D, 8434D, and 2420
phones.
NOTE:

Only authorized Avaya personnel can administer this screen.

change terminal-parameters 8400
8400-TYPE TERMINAL PARAMETERS
Default Parameter Set: __

Page 1 of 1

Customize Parameters? _

OPTIONS*
Display Mode: _*
PRIMARY LEVELS*
Voice Transmit
Voice Receive
Touch Tone Transmit
ADJUNCT LEVELS*+
Voice Transmit
Voice Sidetone
BUILT-IN SPEAKER LEVELS
Voice Transmit

(dB): _____*
(dB): _____*
(dB): _____*

DLI Voltage Level: _________*

Voice Sidetone (dB): _____*
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB): _____*

(dB): _____*
(dB): _____*

Voice Receive (dB): _____*
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB): _____*

(dB): _____*

Voice Receive (dB): _____*
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB): _____*

8403 BUILT-IN SPEAKER LEVELS
Voice Receive (dB): _____*

Touch Tone Sidetone (dB): _____*

Screen 287. 8400-Series Terminal Parameters

1218

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Terminal Parameters

* This field appears only if Customize Parameters is y.
change terminal-parameters 302/603
302/603 TERMINAL PARAMETERS
Default Parameter Set: __

Page 1 of 1

Customize Parameters? _

OPTIONS*
Display Mode: _*

PRIMARY LEVELS*
Voice Transmit (dB): _____*
Voice Receive (dB): _____*
Touch Tone Transmit (dB): _____*

DLI Voltage Level: _________*

Voice Sidetone (dB): _____*
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB): _____*

Screen 288. 603/302 Terminal Parameters

change terminal-parameters 6400/607A1/4600/2420

Page 1 of 1

6400/607A1/4600/2420-TYPE TERMINAL PARAMETERS
Default Parameter Set: 1
Customize Parameters? y
Note: LEVELS do not apply to the 4600 terminals.*
OPTIONS*
Display Mode:_*
Handset Expander Enabled?
Volume for DCP Types:_*
Volume for IP Types:_*
PRIMARY LEVELS*
Voice Transmit (dB):__*
Voice Sidetone (dB):__*
Voice Receive (dB):__*
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB):__*
Touch Tone Transmit (dB):__*

BUILT-IN SPEAKER LEVELS*
Voice Transmit (dB):__*
6402 BUILT-IN SPEAKER LEVELS*
Voice Receive (dB):__*

Voice Receive (dB):__*
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB):__*
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB):__*

Screen 289. 6400/607A1/4600/2420 Type Terminal Parameters

* This field appears only if the Customize Parameters field is y
Default Parameter Set

Determines which default set of telephone options and levels will be used. This
field corresponds to the country codes. See ‘‘System Parameters
Country-Options’’ on page 1175 for the country code listing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1219

Screen reference

Customize Parameters

Indicates whether the administrator wishes to change one or more of the default
parameters.
Valid entries

Usage

y

If this field is y (yes), the OPTION and LEVEL fields appear
and all fields can be edited.

n

If this field is n (no), the system uses all default parameters
associated with the Default Parameter Set field and all fields
are display-only.

OPTIONS
Display Mode

Determines how the #) and ~ characters appear on the phone’s display.This field
only appears if Customize Parameters is y.
Valid entries

Usage

1

If this field is set to 1, the # and ~ do not change.

2

If this field is set to 2, the phone displays a # as a British
pound sterling symbol and a ~ as a straight overbar.

DLI Voltage Level

Determines whether DCP Line Voltage used by the telephones is forced high,
forced low, or allowed to automatically adjust. This field only appears if
Customize Parameters is y.
Handset Expander Enabled

Determines whether the telephone will reduce noise on the handset. This field
appears only if Customize Parameters is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y

If the field is y, the telephone reduces background noise.

Primary levels

The following fields only appear if Customize Parameters is set to y. In each case,
if the field is blank, the system uses the default setting from the Default Parameter
Set. Also, these fields all require the same input; valid entries are from -44.0 db
through +14.0 db in 0.5 increments (for example, -44.0, -43.5, -43.0 and son on).

1220

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Terminal Parameters

Volume for DCP Types

This field allows the DCP phone volume to be adjusted while the call is in
progress.
Valid entries

Usage

default speaker, handset
unchangeable

The speaker resets to the default settings
while the adjusted handset setting is retained.

default settings used to
begin each call

No adjusted handset and speaker settings are
retained.

retain handset and speaker
between calls

The adjusted handset and speaker settings
are retained.

retain speaker, handset
unchangeable

Only the adjusted speaker setting is retained.

Volume for IP Types

This field allows the IP phone volume to be adjusted while the call is in progress.
NOTE:

If you use this field, Avaya recommends that you not change any values in
the PRIMARY LEVELS or BUILT-IN SPEAKER LEVELS areas.

Valid entries

Usage

default speaker, handset
unchangeable

The speaker resets to the default settings
while the adjusted handset setting is retained.

default settings used to
begin each call

No adjusted handset and speaker settings are
retained.

retain handset and speaker
between calls

The adjusted handset and speaker settings
are retained.

retain speaker, handset
unchangeable

Only the adjusted speaker setting is retained.

PRIMARY LEVELS
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB)

Determines the touchtone volume fed back from the telephone when a users
presses a button.
Touch Tone Transmit (dB) —

Determines the touchtone volume fed outbound from the telephone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1221

Screen reference

Voice Receive (dB)

Determines the volume of voice inbound to the telephone.
Voice Sidetone (dB)

Determines the volume of voice fed back from the handset voice microphone to
the user’s ear.
Voice Transmit (dB)

Determines the volume of voice outbound from the telephone.
NOTE:

You cannot administer all five of the Primary Level fields to +14.0 dB. If
you attempt to submit the Terminal Parameters screen with all Primary
Levels set to +14.0 dB, you receive an error message.
ADJUNCT LEVELS

The following fields appear only if you are administering 8400-series telephones
and if Customize Parameters is y. In each case, if the field is blank, the system
uses the default setting from the Default Parameter Set. Also, these fields all
require the same input; valid input is listed in “Primary levels” above.
Touch Tone Sidetone (dB)

Determines the touchtone volume fed back from the telephone when a users
presses a button.
Voice Receive (dB)

Determines the volume of voice inbound to the adjunct.
Voice Sidetone (dB)

Determines the volume of voice fed back from the handset voice microphone to
the user’s ear.
Voice Transmit (dB)

Determines the volume of voice outbound from the adjunct.

1222

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Terminating Extension Group

Terminating Extension Group
This screen defines a Terminating Extension Group (TEG). Any phone can be
assigned as a TEG member; however, only a multi-appearance phone can be
assigned a TEG button with associated status lamp. The TEG button allows the
phone user to select a TEG call appearance for answering or for bridging onto an
existing call.
The TEG members are assigned on an extension number basis. Call reception
restrictions applicable to the group are specified by the group class of restriction
(COR). The group COR takes precedence over an individual member’s COR. The
members could all be termination restricted but still receive calls if the group is
not restricted.
The system allows for as many as 32 TEGs with up to 4 members each. An
extension number can be assigned to more than one TEG but can have only one
appearance of each group.
Field descriptions for page 1

change term-ext-group 1

Page

1 of

1

TERMINATING EXTENSION GROUP
Group Number: 1
Group Name:
Security Code:

Group Extension:
Coverage Path:
COR: 1
TN: 1
LWC Reception: none
Messaging Server Name:

ISDN Caller Disp:
AUDIX Name:
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext
1: 51001
2:

Name (first 26 characters)
26 character name sta 51001

Ext
3:
4: 51002

Name (first 26 characters)
26 character name sta 51002

Screen 290. Terminating Extension Group

AUDIX Name

Name of the AUDIX machine as it appears in the Node Names screen. Only
appears for an DEFINITY R configuration.
Valid entries

Usage

Unique identifiers for adjunct equipment.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1223

Screen reference

COR
Valid entries

Usage

0 through 95

Enter the class of restriction (COR) number that reflects the
desired restrictions.

Coverage Path

Enter a number for the call coverage path for this group. A TEG cannot serve as a
coverage point; however, calls to a TEG can redirect to coverage.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 9999

path number

t1 to t999

time of day table

blank
Group Extension

Enter the extension of the terminating extension group.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 7 digits

Unused extension number (may not be a VDN extension).
Do not leave blank.

Group Name

Enter the name used to identify the terminating extension group.
Group Number

A display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command such as add or change.

1224

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Terminating Extension Group

ISDN Caller Disp

This field is required if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

grp-name

Specify whether the TEG group name or member name
(member of TEG where call terminated) will be sent to the
originating user.

mbr-name

Specify whether the TEG group name or member name
(member of TEG where call terminated) will be sent to the
originating user.

blank

If the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI Trunks field is n, leave
blank.

LWC Reception

Defines the source for Leave Word Calling (LWC) messages.
Valid entries

Usage

audix

For G3i systems, if LWC is attempted, the messages are
stored in AUDIX.

msa-spe

For G3i systems, if LWC is attempted, the messages are
stored in the system processing element (spe).

none

For G3i systems, if LWC is attempted, the messages are not
stored.

audix

For DEFINITY R systems and S8700 IP-Connect, if LWC
is attempted, the messages are stored in AUDIX.

msa

For DEFINITY R systems and S8700 IP-Connect, if LWC
is attempted, the messages are stored in the Message Server
Adjunct - Switch Processor.

spe

For DEFINITY R systems and S8700 IP-Connect, if LWC
is attempted, the messages are stored in the system
processing element (spe).

none

For DEFINITY R systems and S8700 IP-Connect, if LWC
is attempted, the messages are not stored.

Messaging Server Name
NOTE:

You first must administer the ‘‘IP Node Names’’ screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1225

Screen reference

Name of the server as it appears in the Node Names screen. Only appears for
DEFINITY R and S8700 IP-Connect configurations.
Valid entries

Usage

Unique identifiers for messaging server equipment.
Security Code
Valid entries

Usage

4-digit security code

This code is used for the Demand Print feature.

TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 100

Enter the Tenant Partition number.

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Ext

Enter the extension number (may not be a VDN extension) assigned to a station.
Valid entries

Usage

An extension number of 1-7 digits.
Name

This display-only field shows the name assigned to the preceding extension
number when the TEG member’s phone is administered.

1226

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

TFTP Server

TFTP Server
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol screen allows specification of the TFTP server
the Avaya Call Processing engine uses to get download files.
change tftp-server

Page 1 of 1
TFTP Server Configuration

Local Node Name:
TFTP Server Node Name:
TFTP Server Port: 69
File to Retrieve:
File Status:
File Size:
Filename in Memory:

Screen 291. TFTP Server screen

Filename in Memory

A display-only field showing the name of the file currently in ACP memory.
File Size

A display-only field showing the number of bytes transferred.
File Status

A display-only field showing Download In Progress, Download Failed, File Not
Found, or Download Completed.
File to Retrieve
Valid entries

Usage

Enter the name of the file you are going to retrieve using up
to 32 alpha-numeric, case sensitive, characters for
identification.
Local Node Name

The local node name must be a valid entry from the IP Node Names screen. The
node must be assigned to a CLAN ip-interface or procr (processor CLAN).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1227

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

1-15 characters
procr

Processor CLAN for S8300 Media Server, S8700
Multi-Connect, and S8700 IP-Connect.

TFTP Server Node Name

The TFTP server node name must be a valid entry from the IP Node Names
screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1-15
characters
TFTP Server Port
Valid entries

Usage

1-64500

Enter a number for the remote TCP port.

Time of Day Coverage Table
This screen allows up to five different coverage paths, associated with five
different time ranges, for each day of the week. Only one coverage path can be in
effect at any one time.
Field descriptions for page 1

change coverage time-of-day 3
TIME OF DAY COVERAGE TABLE 3___

Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

Act
Time

CVG
PATH

00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00

____
____
____
____
____
____
____

__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

____
____
____
____
____
____
____

__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

____
____
____
____
____
____
____

__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

____
____
____
____
____
____
____

__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Screen 292. Time of Day Coverage Table

1228

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Time of Day Routing Plan

Act Time

Specify the activation time of the coverage path administered in the next CVG
PATH field. Enter the information in 24-hour time format.
Valid entries

Usage

00:01 to
23:59

If there are time gaps in the table, there will be no coverage
path in effect during those periods. The first activation time
for a day is set to 00:00 and cannot be changed. Activation
times for a day must be in ascending order from left to right.

CVG Path

Enter the coverage path number.
Valid entries

Usage

1 through
9999 or blank

For the DEFINITY R configurations and S8700 IP-Connect

1 through 999

For the DEFINITY SI configurations

Time of Day Coverage Table

A display-only field when the screen is accessed using an administration
command. Specifies the Time of Day Coverage Table number. Up to 999 can be
administered.

Time of Day Routing Plan
Use this screen to set up Time of Day Routing Plans. You can route AAR and
ARS calls based on the time of day each call is made. You can design up to 8 Time
of Day Routing Plans, each scheduled to change up to 6 times a day for each day
in the week.
Match the Time of Day Routing Plan PGN# with the PGN# field on the Partition
Routing Table for the route pattern you want to use.
NOTE:

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) or Private Networking, AAR/ARS
Partitioning, and Time of Day Routing must be enabled on the

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1229

Screen reference

System-Parameters Customer-Options screen before you can use Time of
Day Routing.
change time-of-day
Act
Time
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00

Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat

PGN
#
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Act
Time
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

TIME OF DAY ROUTING PLAN ___
PGN
Act
PGN
Act
PGN
#
Time
#
Time
#
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
_
__:__
_
__:__
_

Act
Time
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__
__:__

PGN
#
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Page 1 of 1
Act
PGN
Time
#
__:__
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
__:__
_
__:__
_

Screen 293. Time Of Day Routing Plan

Act Time

Specifies the time of day the route pattern (identified by PGN) begins.
Valid entries

Usage

00:00 to
23:59

Time is represented using a 24 hour clock. List times for the
same day in increasing order. There must be at least one
entry for each day.

PGN #

Identifies the route pattern for activation time listed.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 8

Enter a PGN that matches the PGN and route pattern on the
Partition Routing Table. There must be at least one entry for
each day.

Time of Day Routing Plan

Displays the Time of Day Routing Plan number (1 through 8).

Toll Analysis
NOTE:

The Toll List field on this screen does not interact with or relate to the ARS Toll Table.
This screen associates dialed strings to the system’s Restricted Call List (RCL),
Unrestricted Call List (UCL), and Toll List. You can force users to dial an account
code if you associate dialed strings with CDR Forced Entry of Account Codes.

1230

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Toll Analysis

To maximize System security, Avaya recommends that toll calling areas be
restricted as much as possible through the use of the RCL (Restricted Call List)
and Toll List fields on this screen.
change toll 1

Dialed String
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________

Page 1 of 1
TOLL ANALYSIS
Percent Full:_
Location:
Total
Toll CDR <--Unrestricted Call List-->
Min Max RCL List FEAC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
___ ___
_
_
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Screen 294. Toll Analysis

CDR FEAC
Valid entries

Usage

x

Enter x to require an account code from a call whose facility
COR requires a Forced Entry of Account Code.

Dialed String
Valid entries

Usage

digits 0 to 9

Enter the dialed string you want the switch to
analyze.

(up to 18 characters)
*, x, X

wildcard characters

Location

Display-only field. Values other than all appear if the Multiple Locations field on
the System Parameters Customer Options is y.
Valid
display

Usage

1 to 44

Defines the switch location for this Toll Analysis Table.

all

Indicates that this Toll Analysis Table is the default for all port
network (cabinet) locations.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1231

Screen reference

Max
Valid entries

Usage

Min to 28

Enter the maximum number of user-dialed digits the
system collects to match to this dialed string.

Valid entries

Usage

1 to Max

Enter the minimum number of user-dialed digits the
system collects to match to this dialed string.

Min

Percent Full

Display-only field showing the percentage (0 to 100) of the system’s memory
resources that have been used by AAR/ARS. If the figure is close to 100%, you
can free-up memory resources.
RCL

Enter x to assign the Dialed String to the Restricted Call List (RCL).
Valid entries

Usage

x

All entries of x and their associated dialed strings are
referred to as the System’s Restricted Call List. The RCL
can be assigned to any COR. A call attempt from a facility
whose COR is marked as being associated with the RCL and
whose dialed string matches a RCL dialed string field will
be denied. The caller receives intercept treatment.

Valid entries

Usage

x

Enter x to assign the Dialed String to the Toll List.

Toll List

1232

Dialed String

Min

Max

Toll List

0

1

23

x

1

4

23

x

20

10

10

x

21

10

10

x

30

10

10

x

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Dialed String

Min

Max

Toll List

31

10

10

x

40

10

10

x

41

10

10

x

50

10

10

x

51

10

10

x

60

10

10

x

61

10

10

x

70

10

10

x

71

10

10

x

80

10

10

x

81

10

10

x

90

10

10

x

91

10

10

x

Unrestricted Call List
Valid entries

Usage

x

Enter x to assign the dialed string to one of the system’s
Unrestricted Call Lists (UCL).

Trunk Group
Use the Trunk Group screen to set basic characteristics for every type of trunk
group and to assign ports to the group. This section lists and describes all the
fields you might see on the screen. Many fields are dependent on the settings of
other fields and only appear when certain values are entered in other fields on the
screen. For example, the entry in the Group Type field may significantly change
the content and appearance of the Trunk Group screen.
For descriptions of the unique fields used with ISDN trunks, see ‘‘ISDN trunk
group’’ on page 936.
Field descriptions for page 1

The figure below shows a common configuration for page 1 of the Trunk Group
screen when the Group Type field is tie. This screen is only an example, and the
fields shown below may change or disappear according to specific field settings.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1233

Screen reference

add trunk-group next

Page 1 of x
TRUNK GROUP

Group Number:
Group Name:
Direction:
Dial Access?
Queue Length:
Comm Type:

___
Group Type: ________
CDR Reports: _
___________________________ COR: __
TN: ___
TAC: ____
________
Outgoing Display? _
Trunk Signaling Type: ____
_
Busy Threshold: ___
Night Service: ________
___
Incoming Destination: ________
_____
Auth Code? _
Trunk Flash? _
BCC: _
ITC? ____
TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type (in/out): ____________
Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec): __
Outgoing Dial Type: _________
Incoming Dial Type: ________
Disconnect Timing(msec): ____
Digit Treatment: __________
Digits: ____
Sig Bit Inversion: none
Analog Loss Group: ___
Digital Loss Group: ___
Incoming Dial Tone? _
Bit Rate: _____
Synchronization: _____
Duplex: ____
Disconnect Supervision - In? _ Out? _
Answer Supervision Timeout: ___
Receive Answer Supervision? _

Screen 295. Tie Trunk Group

Analog Gain

Use this field to reduce the strength of incoming signals on TN2199 ports if users
regularly experience echo, distortion, or unpleasantly loud volume. Experiment to
find the best setting for your situation. This field appears if the Country field is 15
and the Trunk Type (in/out) field is 2-wire-ac, 2-wire-dc, or 3-wire.
Valid entries

Usage

a

Reduces the incoming signal by -3dB.

b

Reduces the incoming signal by -6dB.

c

Reduces the incoming signal by -8dB.

none

No reduction. Don’t change this setting unless the trunk
group’s sound quality is unacceptable.

Analog Loss Group

This field determines which administered 2-party row in the loss plan applies to
this trunk group if the call is carried over an analog signaling port in the trunk
group.

1234

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 17

Shows the index into the loss plan and tone plan.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Answer Supervision Timeout

If the Receive Answer Supervision field is n, use this field to set the answer
supervision timer for outgoing and two-way trunks. During a cut-through
operation, timing begins after each outgoing digit is sent by the switch and timing
ceases after the far-end sends answer supervision. If the timer expires, the switch
acts as if it had received answer supervision. On senderized operation, the timer
begins after the last digit collected is sent by the switch.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 250

Enter the number of seconds you want the switch to wait
before it acts as though answer supervision has been received
from the far-end. Set this field to 0 if Receive Answer
Supervision is y.

NOTE:

This field’s setting does not override answer supervision sent from the
network or from DS1 port circuit timers. To control answer supervision sent
by DS1 firmware, set the Outgoing End of Dial (sec) field on the
Administrable Timers page of the trunk group screen.
Auth Code

This field affects the level of security for tandemed outgoing calls at your switch.
This field appears if the Direction field is incoming or two-way, and it can only be
y if the Authorization Codes field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to require callers to enter an authorization code in
order to tandem a call through an AAR or ARS route pattern.
The code will be required even if the facility restriction level
of the incoming trunk group is normally sufficient to send the
call out over the route pattern.

Auto Guard

This field appears if the Group Type field is co or fx. This field controls ports only
on TN438B, TN465B, and TN2147 circuit packs. TN438B ports have hardware
support for detecting a defective trunk. TN465B and TN2147 ports consider a
trunk defective if no dial tone is detected on an outgoing call, and the Outpulse
Without Tone field is n on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to prevent repeated seizures of a defective trunk. The
switch will do a maintenance busy-out on these trunks.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1235

Screen reference

BCC

Generalized Route Selection uses the BCC to select the appropriate facilities for
routing voice and data calls. Far-end tandem switches also use the BCC to select
outgoing routing facilities with equivalent BCC classes.The entry in the Bearer
Capability Class field is used to select the appropriate facilities for incoming
ISDN calls. Avaya MultiVantage compares the entry in the BCC field to the value
of the Bearer Capability information element for the incoming call and routes the
call over appropriate facilities. For example, a call with BCC 4 will only be
connected through facilities that support 64 kbps data transmission.
The Bearer Capability Class field appears when all of the following are true:
■

Either the ISDN-BRI Trunks field or the ISDN-PRI field on the System
Parameters Customer-Options screen is y.

■

The Group Type field is access, co, fx, tandem, tie, or wats.

■

The Comm Type field is data, avd, or rbavd.

Valid entries

Usage

0

For voice and voice-grade data

1

For 56 kbps synchronous data transmitted with robbed-bit
signaling

2

Less than 19.2 kbps synchronous or asynchronous data

3

For 64 kbps data and LAPD protocol

4

For 64 kbps data on unrestricted channels

Bit Rate

This field specifies the baud rate to be used by pooled modems. This field appears
when the Comm Type field is avd or rbavd. It also appears if the Comm Type
field is data, but only if the ISDN-PRI field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen.
Valid entries

Usage

300

Enter the speed of the fastest modem that will use this trunk
group.

1200
2400
4800
9600
19200

1236

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Busy Threshold

Use this field if you want attendants to control access to outgoing and two-way
trunk groups during periods of high use. When the threshold is reached and the
warning lamp for that trunk group lights, the attendant can activate trunk group
control: internal callers who dial out using a trunk access code will be connected
to the attendant, and the attendant can prioritize outgoing calls for the last
remaining trunks. Calls handled by AAR and ARS route patterns go out normally.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 99
(DEFINITY SI,

Enter the number of trunks that must be busy in order to
light the warning lamp on the Attendant Console. For
example, if there are 30 trunks in the group and you
want to alert the attendant whenever 25 or more are in
use, enter 25.

CSI)
1 to 255

(DEFINITY R,
S8700
IP-Connect)
Call Still Held

This field appears if the Group Type field is co or fx. This field is used when the
receiving switch initiates the disconnection of incoming calls. It effectively
extends the Incoming Glare Guard timer by 140 seconds. This field affects only
TN438B, TN465B, and TN2147 ports and is used primarily when the Country
Code field is 2.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to prevent glare by delaying an outgoing seizure of a
trunk for at least 140 seconds after it is released from an
incoming call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1237

Screen reference

CDR Reports
Valid entries

Usage

y

All outgoing calls on this trunk group will generate call detail
records. If the Record Outgoing Calls Only field on the CDR
System Parameters screen is n, then incoming calls on this
trunk group will also generate call detail records.

n

Calls over this trunk group will not generate call detail
records.

r (ring-intvl)

CDR records will be generated for both incoming and
outgoing calls. In addition, the following ringing interval
CDR records are generated:
■

Abandoned calls: The system creates a record with a
condition code of “H,” indicating the time until the call
was abandoned.

■

Answered calls: The system creates a record with a
condition code of “G,” indicating the interval from start
of ring to answer.

■

Calls to busy stations: The system creates a record with a
condition code of “I,” indicating a recorded interval of 0.

NOTE:

For ISDN trunk groups, the Charge Advice field affects CDR information.
For CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups, the Analog PPM field affects
CDR information.
CESID I Digits Sent

For emergency 911 service, your switch may send Caller’s Emergency Service
Identification (CESID) information to the central office or E911 tandem switch.
This digit string is part of the E911 signaling protocol. This field appears when
Group Type is cama.

1238

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 3 digits

Determine the correct entry for this field by talking to your
E911 provider.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Comm Type

Use this field to define whether the trunk group carries voice, data, or both.
NOTE:

Comm Types of avd, rbavd and data require trunk member ports on a DS1
circuit pack.
Valid
entries
avd

Usage

Enter avd for applications that mix voice and Digital Communication Protocol
data, such as video conferencing applications. The receiving switch
discriminates voice calls from data calls and directs each to an appropriate
endpoint. Neither originating nor terminating switches insert a modem poll for
any calls when Comm Type is avd.
The Signaling Mode field on the DS1 circuit pack screen must be set for either
common-chan or CAS signaling.

data

Enter data only when all calls across the trunk group originate and terminate at
Avaya MultiVantage digital data endpoints. Public networks don’t support
data: supported by Avaya’s DCP protocol, this entry is used almost
exclusively for the data trunk group supporting DCS signaling channels.
The Signaling Mode field on the DS1 circuit pack may be set to robbed-bit or
common-chan.

rbavd

For digital trunk groups that carry voice and data with robbed-bit signaling.
The Signaling Mode field on the DS1 circuit pack screen must be set to
robbed-bit unless mixed mode signaling is allowed on the DS1 circuit pack.
In that case, the Signaling Mode field may be isdn-ext or isdn-pri.

voice

For trunk groups that carry only voice traffic and voice-grade data (that is, data
transmitted by modem). Analog trunk groups must use voice.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1239

Screen reference

COR
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 95

Enter a class of restriction (COR). Classes of restriction
control access to trunk groups, including trunk-to-trunk
transfers.

Tip:

Remember that facility restriction levels (FRL) are assigned to classes of
restriction. Even if 2 trunk groups have classes of restriction that allow a
connection, different facility restriction levels may prevent operations such
as off-net call forwarding or outgoing calls by remote access users.
CO Type

This field appears when the Country field is 14 and is used only by trunk group
members administered on a TN464D vintage 2 or later DS1 circuit pack.
Valid entries

Usage

analog

This field specifies whether the trunk group is connected to
analog or digital facilities at the central office.

digital

Country

This field is administered at installation and sets numerous parameters to
appropriate values for the public network in which the switch operates. For
example, the value of this field, with the values of the Trunk Termination and the
Trunk Gain fields, determines the input and trans-hybrid balance impedance
requirements for ports on TN465B, TN2146, and TN2147 circuit packs.
This field appears for the trunk groups that connect Avaya MultiVantage to a
central office in the public network — CO, DID, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk
groups.

! CAUTION:
Don’t change this field. If you have questions, contact your Avaya
representative.
Valid entriesUsage
1 to 25
11
14

1240

Set at installation.
If the Country field is 11, Avaya MultiVantage is administered for
Public Network Call Priority (Call Retention and Rering).
If the Country field is 14 and the Group Type is DID or DIOD, the
CO Type field appears.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Valid entriesUsage
15

If the Country field is 15, Avaya MultiVantage is administered for
Public Network Call Priority (Intrusion and Rering). Also, the
Protocol Type field appears for Group Type DID or DIOD.
If the Country field is 18, Avaya MultiVantage can be administered
for Public Network Call Priority (Mode of Release Control, Forced
Disconnect, and Rering).
If the Country field is 23 and the Group Type field is either CO or
DID, Avaya MultiVantage is administered for Block Collect Calls.

18

23

Cut-Through

This field appears when the Outgoing Dial Type field is either rotary or tone.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Entering y in this field will reduce your ability to prevent toll fraud.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow users to get dial tone directly from the
central office. Outgoing calls over this trunk group will
bypass AAR/ARS (if you’re using it) and any of your
administered restrictions (such as COR or FRL).

n

Enter n and the user will receive switch dial tone. Instead of
digits being sent to the central office, they will be collected
and checked against administered restrictions. If no
restrictions apply, the digits are sent to the central office.

Cyclical Hunt

When a call is offered to a trunk group, the switch searches for an available trunk.
This field, which appears when the Direction field is two-way and the Trunk Type
field is loop-start, controls the starting point of the search.
You can change this field from n to y at any time. To change from y to n, however,
all the trunks in the group must be idle or busied out.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to have the switch start its search from the last trunk
seized. This method is faster, and thus better suited for
high-traffic trunk groups.

n

Enter n to have the switch start each search at member 1 (the
first trunk administered on the Group Member Assignments
page).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1241

Screen reference

Dial Access

This field controls whether users can route outgoing calls through an outgoing or
two-way trunk group by dialing its trunk access code. Allowing dial access does
not interfere with the operation of AAR/ARS.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Calls dialed with a trunk access code over WATS trunks bypass
AAR/ARS and aren’t restricted by facility restriction levels. For
security, you may want to leave the field set to n unless you need dial
access to test the trunk group.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Allows users to access the trunk group by dialing its access
code.

n

Does not allow users to access the trunk group by dialing its
access code. Attendants can still select this trunk group with
a Trunk Group Select button.

Dial Detection

Applies only to TN2199 ports. The Country field must be 15.
Valid entries

Usage

A-wire
B-wire

Digit Absorption List

This field assigns a digit absorption list, when used, to a trunk group that
terminates at a step-by-step central office.

1242

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 4 or blank

Enter the number of the digit absorption list this trunk group
should use.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Digits

This field is used with the Digit Treatment field, and its meaning depends on the
entry in that field. If the Digit Treatment field is absorption, this field specifies
how many digits are deleted. If the Digit Treatment field is insertion, this field
identifies the specific digits that are added.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 5

Enter the number of digits to be deleted (absorbed).

Up to 4
digits,
including *
and #

Enter the actual digits to be added (inserted).

blank

This field can be blank only if the Digit Treatment field is
blank.

Digit Treatment

Use this field to modify an incoming digit string (as on DID and tie trunks, for
example) by adding or deleting digits. You’ll need to do this if the number of
digits you receive doesn’t match your dial plan.
Valid entries

Usage

blank

The incoming digit string is not changed.

absorption

Deletes digits, starting at the beginning of the string.

insertion

Adds digits, starting at the beginning of the string.

If you enter absorption or insertion, then you must enter a value in the Digits field.
NOTE:

In a DCS network, DCS features that use the remote-tgs button (on phones
at a remote switch) do not work when the incoming trunk group at your
switch deletes or inserts digits on incoming calls. The remote-tgs button on a
remote switch, for example, tries to dial a TAC on your switch. If your
switch adds or deletes digits, it defeats this operation. If you need to
manipulate digits in a DCS network (for example, to insert an AAR feature
access code), do it on the outgoing side based on the routing pattern.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1243

Screen reference

Digital Loss Group

This field determines which administered 2-party row in the loss plan applies to
this trunk group if the call is carried over a digital signaling port in the trunk
group.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 17

Shows the index into the loss plan and tone plan.

Direction

Enter the direction of the traffic on this trunk group. The entry in this field affects
which timers appear on the Administrable Timers page. This field appears for all
trunk groups except DID and CPE.
Valid entries

Usage

incoming
outgoing
two-way

Enter two-way for Network Call Redirection.

Disconnect Supervision-In

This field indicates whether the switch receives disconnect supervision for
incoming calls over this trunk group. It appears when the Direction field is
incoming or two-way. (If the Direction field is outgoing, the switch internally
sets this field to n.)
The entry in this field is crucial if you allow trunk-to-trunk transfers. (To allow
trunk-to-trunk transfers involving trunks in this group, this field must be y and the
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer field on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen
must be y). If a user connects 2 trunks through conference or transfer, and neither
far-end switch on the resulting connection provides disconnect supervision, the
trunks involved will not be released because Avaya MultiVantage can’t detect the
end of the call. Avaya MultiVantage will not allow trunk-to-trunk transfers unless
it believes that at least one party on the call can provide disconnect supervision.

1244

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Therefore, setting this field incorrectly may cause trunks to become unusable until
the problem is detected and the trunks are reset.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow trunk-to-trunk transfers involving trunks in
this group.
Enter y if the far-end switch sends a release signal when the
calling party releases an incoming call, and you want to make
the far-end switch responsible for releasing the trunk.
Enter y to enhance Network Call Redirection.

n

Enter n if the far-end switch doesn’t provide a release signal,
if your hardware can’t recognize a release signal, or if you
prefer to use timers for disconnect supervision on incoming
calls. Entering n prevents trunk-to-trunk transfers involving
trunks in this group.

! CAUTION:
In general, U.S. central offices provide disconnect supervision for incoming
calls but not for outgoing calls. Public networks in most other countries do
not provide disconnect supervision for incoming or outgoing calls. Check
with your network services provider.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1245

Screen reference

Disconnect Supervision-Out

This field indicates whether the switch receives disconnect supervision for
outgoing calls over this trunk group. It appears when the Direction field is either
outgoing or two-way. (If the Direction field is incoming, the switch internally
sets this field to n.)
The entry in this field is crucial if you allow trunk-to-trunk transfers. (To allow
trunk-to-trunk transfers involving trunks in this group, this field must be y and the
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer field on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen
must be y). If a user connects 2 trunks through conference or transfer, and neither
far-end switch on the resulting connection provides disconnect supervision, the
trunks involved will not be released because Avaya MultiVantage can’t detect the
end of the call. Avaya MultiVantage will not allow trunk-to-trunk transfers unless
it believes that at least one party on the call can provide disconnect supervision.
Therefore, setting this field incorrectly may cause trunks to become unusable until
the problem is detected and the trunks are reset.
Also, remember that Avaya MultiVantage must receive answer supervision on
outgoing analog CO, FX, WATS, Tie, Tandem, and Access trunks before it will
recognize a disconnect signal. If this trunk group does not receive answer
supervision from the far-end switch, and you enter y in this field, Avaya
MultiVantage will internally set the field to n.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to allow trunk-to-trunk transfers involving trunks in
this group.
Enter y if the far-end switch sends a release signal when the
called party releases a call an outgoing call, and you want to
make the far-end switch responsible for releasing the trunk.
The Answer Supervision Timeout field must be 0 and the
Receive Answer Supervision field must be y for the switch to
recognize a y entry.
Enter y to enhance Network Call Redirection.
Enter n if the far-end switch doesn’t provide a release signal,
if your hardware can’t recognize a release signal, or if you
prefer to use timers for disconnect supervision on outgoing
calls. Entering n prevents trunk-to-trunk transfers involving
trunks in this group.

n

! CAUTION:
Do not set this field to y unless you are certain that the far-end switch will
provide answer supervision and disconnect supervision. Most public
networks do not provide disconnect supervision over analog trunks. Check
with your network services provider.

1246

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Disconnect Timing (msec)

This field specifies the minimum time in milliseconds that the central office or
far-end switch requires to recognize that your switch has disconnected from a call.
This timer does not affect ports on a circuit pack that uses the administrable
Incoming Disconnect and Outgoing Disconnect timers; in fact, settings on those
two timers override this field.
Valid entries

Usage

140 to 2550

The default of 500 is an industry standard and you shouldn’t
change it. If you set this field too high, your switch won’t
disconnect sometimes when it should; too low, and it will
disconnect when it shouldn’t.

ms in
increments of
10
Disconnect Type

This field indicates which side or user controls the disconnect, where A refers to
the calling party and B refers to the called party. Appears only if the Country field
is 15 and the Trunk Type field is 2-wire-ac, 2-wire-dc, or 3-wire.
This applies only to the TN2199 port.
Valid entries

Usage

AandB
AorB

Drop Treatment

This field only applies to DID trunks. It determines what the calling party hears
when the called party terminates an incoming call.
Valid entries

Usage

intercept

Select one. For security reasons, it’s better to apply a tone:
silence could provide an opening for hackers.

busy
silence
NOTE:

In Italy, the Drop Treatment field must be administered as intercept for all
DID trunk groups.
Duplex

This field specifies whether a two-way trunk group allows simultaneous
transmission in both directions. This field appears when the Comm Type field is
avd or rbavd. It also appears if the Comm Type field is data, but only if the
ISDN-PRI field is enabled on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1247

Screen reference

NOTE:

Even if the trunk group supports full-duplex transmission, other equipment
in a circuit may not.
Valid entries

Usage

full

Enter full in most cases: this allows simultaneous two-way
transmission, which is most efficient.

half

Enter half to support only one transmission direction at a time.

End-to-End Signaling

Auxiliary equipment such as paging equipment and music sources may be
connected to Avaya MultiVantage by auxiliary trunks. The switch may send
DTMF signals (touch tones) to these devices. This field, which appears when the
Group Type field is cpe (customer-provided equipment trunk groups), sets the
duration of these tones.
Valid entries

Usage

60 to 360 ms
in increments
of 10

Use this field to set the duration in milliseconds of the
touch-tone signal that is sent to the connected equipment.

NOTE:

For trunks that do not receive real answer supervision, a “connect” Event
report is sent when the Answer Supervision Timeout occurs.
Expected Digits
NOTE:

Set this field to blank if the Digit Treatment field is set to insert and
the Digits field contains a feature access code (for example, AAR or
ARS) followed by digits. In this case, the number of digits expected
are set on the AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table and AAR and ARS
Digit Conversion Table.

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 18

Enter the number of digits that the far-end switch sends for
an incoming connection. If your switch is absorbing digits on
this trunk group, the entry in this field must be larger than the
entry in the Digits field.
If you leave this field blank, you cannot administer digit
absorption.

1248

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Extended Loop Range

This field appears only for a DID trunk group and is used only with the TN459A
circuit pack. Enter y or n depending on the distance between the central office and
the switch. If greater than the required distance, then the field should be y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Group Name
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 27
characters

Enter a unique name that provides information about the
trunk group. Don’t use the default entry or the group type
(DID, WATS) here. For example, you might use names that
identify the vendor and function of the trunk group: USWest
Local; Sprint Toll, etc.

Group Number

This field displays the group number assigned when the trunk group was added.
NOTE:

For trunk groups connecting 2 switches in Distributed Communication
System networks, Avaya recommends that you assign the same group
number on both switches.
Group Type

Enter the type of trunk group.
Busy-out the trunk group before you change the group type. Release the trunk
group after you make the change. For more information about busying out and
releasing trunk groups, see your system’s Maintenance manual.
Valid entries

Usage

Access

Use access trunks to connect satellite switches to the main
switch in Electronic Tandem Networks (ETN). Access trunks
do not carry traveling class marks (TCM) and thus allow
satellite callers unrestricted access to out-dial trunks on the
main switch. Allows Inband ANI.

APLT

Advanced Private Line Termination (APLT) trunks are used
in private networks. APLT trunks allow inband ANI.

CAMA

CAMA trunks route emergency calls to the local
community’s Enhanced 911 systems.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1249

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

CO

CO trunks typically connect your switch to the local central
office, but they can also connect adjuncts such as external
paging systems and data modules.

CPE

Use CPE trunks to connect adjuncts, such as paging systems
and announcement or music sources, to the switch.

DID

Use DID trunks when you want people calling your
organization to dial individual users directly without going
through an attendant or some other central point. Allows
Inband ANI.

DIOD

DIOD trunks are two-way trunks that transmit dialed digits in
both directions. In North America, use tie trunks for
applications that require two-way transmission of dialed
digits. Allows Inband ANI.

DMI-BOS

Digital Multiplexed Interface – Bit-Oriented Signaling
(DMI-BOS) trunks allow communication with systems using
DMI-BOS protocol. DMI-BOS trunks allow inband ANI.

FX

An FX trunk is essentially a CO trunk that connects your
switch directly to a central office outside your local exchange
area. Use FX trunks to reduce long distance charges if your
organization averages a high volume of long-distance calls to
a specific area code.

ISDN

Use ISDN trunks when you need digital trunks that can
integrate voice, data, and video signals and provide the
bandwidth needed for applications such as high-speed data
transfer and video conferencing. ISDN trunks can also
efficiently combine multiple services on one trunk group.
Use ISDN for Network Call Transfer. For more information,
see Avaya MultiVantage™ Network Call Redirection.
You cannot enter isdn unless the ISDN-PRI field, the
ISDN-BRI Trunks field, or both have been enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

RLT

1250

Release Link trunks work with Centralized Attendant Service
in a private network.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Valid entries

Usage

Tandem

Tandem trunks connect tandem nodes in a private network.
Tandem trunks allow inband ANI.

Tie

Use tie trunks to connect a switch to a central office or to
another switch in a private network. Tie trunks transmit
dialed digits with both outgoing and incoming calls, and
allow inband ANI.

WATS

Use WATS trunks to reduce long-distance bills when your
organization regularly places many calls to a specific
geographical area in North America. Outgoing WATS
service allows calls to certain areas (“WATS bands”) for a
flat monthly charge. Incoming WATS trunks allow you to
offer toll-free calling to customers and employees.

Incoming Destination

Use this field to set the destination for all incoming calls on trunk groups such as
CO, FX, and WATS that must terminate at a single destination. The destination
you enter here is also the default night service destination unless you enter a
different destination in the Night Service field. Appears when the Direction field
is incoming or two-way.
Valid entries

blank

Usage

Leave this field blank if the Trunk Type (in/out) field is not
auto/….

an extension
number

Calls go to the extension you enter. You may enter any type
of extension, though typically the extension entered here
identifies a VDN, a voice response unit, or a voice messaging
system. Night service overrides this setting when it’s active.

attd

Calls go to the attendant and are recorded as Listed Directory
Number (LDN) calls on call detail records.

Incoming Dial Tone

Indicates whether or not your switch will give dial tone in response to far-end
seizures of the trunk group.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if the incoming trunk group transmits digits. For
example, you would enter y for two-way, dial-repeating tie
trunks that users select by dialing a trunk access code.

n

Enter n for trunks that aren’t sending digits, such as tandem
or incoming CO trunks.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1251

Screen reference

Incoming Dial Type

Indicates the type of pulses required on an incoming trunk group. Usually, you
should match what your central office provides. See ‘‘Types of address
transmission’’ on page 1911 for more information. This field appears for Access,
APLT, DID, DIOD, DMI-BOS, FX, RLT, Tandem, and WATS trunk groups. It
also appears for Tie trunk groups when the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank,
cont, or dis.
Valid entries

Usage

tone

Enter tone to use Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
addressing, also known as “touch tone” in the U.S. Entering
tone actually allows the trunk group to support both DTMF
and rotary signals. Also, if you’re using the Inband ANI
feature, enter tone.
For pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and for
discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary, use tone.

rotary

Enter rotary if you only want to allow the dial pulse
addressing method used by non-touch tone phones. Though
the tone entry supports rotary dialing as well, it’s inefficient
to reserve touch tone registers for calls that don’t use DTMF.

mf

Enter mf if the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank. The
Multifrequency Signaling field must be enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen in order for
you to enter mf here.
You may not enter mf if the Used for DCS field (Field
descriptions for page 2) is y.
For pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and for
discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary, use mf.

Incoming Rotary Timeout (sec)

Call setup at central offices that still use older switching equipment, such as
step-by-step technology, is considerably longer then at central offices with more
modern switches. If you’re receiving digits with incoming calls from a central
office that uses less efficient switching technology, your switch needs to allow
more time to ensure it receives all the incoming digits. When the Incoming Dial
Type field is rotary, use this field to set the maximum time your switch will wait
to receive all incoming digits from the far-end switch.
Valid entries

Usage

5 to 99 or

If the system is connected to a step-by-step central office, or
any CO using older switching technology, enter at least 18
seconds; if not, enter at least 5 seconds.

blank

1252

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

ITC

The Generalized Route Selection feature, part of the automatic routing technology
used in Avaya MultiVantage, compares the line coding of available digital
facilities and selects appropriate routes for voice and data calls. The Information
Transfer Capability field appears when the Comm Type field is data, avd, or
rbavd and the BCC field is not 0.
Valid entries

Usage

rest(ricted)

Restricted trunks use ami-basic or ami-zcs line coding and can
carry only restricted calls.

unre(stricted)

Unrestricted trunks use b8zs, hdb3, or cmi line coding and can
carry restricted or unrestricted calls. A trunk group with an
unrestricted ITC may have only unrestricted trunks as members.

Line Length

This field appears only when the Group Type field is tie and the Trunk Signaling
Type field is tge, tgi, or tgu.
Valid entries

Usage

short
long
NOTE:

Unless one or more trunk members are administered, the administered value
is not saved when you submit the screen (press ENTER).
Night Service

This field sets the destination to which incoming calls go when Night Service is in
operation. If a Night field on the Group Member Assignments page is
administered with a different destination, that entry will override the group
destination for that trunk. CPE, DID, and DIOD trunk groups do not support night
service.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1253

Screen reference

Tip:

Whenever possible, use a night service destination on your switch:
otherwise some features won’t work correctly, even over a DCS network.
Valid entries

Usage

blank

Leave this field blank if the Trunk Type (in/out) field
is not auto/….

An extension number
(can be a VDN)

Enter the extension of your night service destination.

attd

Calls go to the attendant and are recorded as Listed
Directory Number (LDN) calls on call detail records.

Outgoing Dial Type

This field sets the method used to transmit digits for an outgoing call. Usually, you
should match what your central office provides. See ‘‘Types of address
transmission’’ on page 1911 for more information. This field appears for Access,
APLT, CO, DIOD, DMI-BOS, FX, RLT, and WATS trunk groups. It also appears
for Tie trunk groups when the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank, cont, or dis.
DIOD trunks support pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and
discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary.
Valid entries

Usage

tone

Enter tone to use Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
addressing, also known as “touch tone” in the U.S. Entering
tone actually allows the trunk group to support both DTMF
and rotary signals.
For pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and for
discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary, use tone or mf.

rotary

Enter rotary if you only want to allow the dial pulse
addressing method used by non-touch tone phones. If you
have a full touch tone system internally and a connection to a
central office that only supports rotary dialing, for example,
it would be appropriate to enter rotary.

r1mf

Enter r1mf for CAMA trunk groups. It is the only outgoing
dial type allowed on CAMA trunk groups.
Enter r1mf to allow Russian MF Packet Signaling on
outgoing trunks. Russian MF Packet Signaling carries calling
party number and dialed number information. Group type
field must be set to co.

1254

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Valid entries

Usage

mf

Enter mf if the Trunk Signaling Type field is blank. The
Multifrequency Signaling field must be enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options screen in order for
you to enter mf here.
You may not enter mf if the Used for DCS field (Field
descriptions for page 2) is y.
For pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and for
discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary, use tone or mf.

automatic

Enter automatic for tie trunks if the Trunk Signaling Type
field is blank. This provides “cut-through” operation to
outgoing callers who dial a trunk access code, connecting
them directly to central office dial tone and bypassing any
toll restrictions administered on your switch.

Outgoing Display

This field allows display phones to show the name and number of the trunk group
used for an outgoing call before the call is connected. This information may be
useful to you when you’re trying to diagnose trunking problems.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Displays the trunk group name and number.

n

Displays the digits the caller dials.

Prefix-1

Use this field for outgoing and two-way trunk groups handling long distance
service. This field appears for CO, FX, and DIOD trunk groups.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to add the prefix “1” to the beginning of the digit
string for outgoing calls. Do not enter y for trunk groups in
AAR or ARS route patterns.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1255

Screen reference

Protocol Type

This field specifies the type of line signaling protocol used for DID and DIOD
trunk groups. This field appears when the Country field is 15 and is used only by
trunk group members administered on a TN2199 or TN464D vintage 3 or later
circuit pack.
Valid entries

Usage

inloc (Incoming local)

Enter the protocol the central office is using for
this trunk group. Only the inloc protocol provides
ANI.

intol (Incoming toll)

Queue Length

Outgoing calls can wait in a queue, in the order in which they were made, when all
trunks in a trunk group are busy. If you enter 0, callers receive a busy signal when
no trunks are available. If you enter a higher number, a caller hears confirmation
tone when no trunk is available for the outgoing call. The caller can then hang up
and wait: when a trunk becomes available, the switch will call the extension that
placed the original call. The caller will hear 3 short, quick rings. The caller
doesn’t need to do anything but pick up the handset and wait: the switch
remembers the number the caller dialed and automatically completes the call.
This field appears when the Direction field is outgoing or two-way.
Valid entries
0 to 100
0

Usage

Enter the number of outgoing calls that you want to be held
waiting when all trunks are busy.
Enter 0 for DCS trunks.

Receive Answer Supervision

Use this field to specify whether the network provides answer supervision for a
trunk group.
For Outbound Call Management applications, set this field to y for trunks
supporting network answer supervision. For trunks that do not receive a real
answer, this field determines when the CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application
Interface (ASAI) connect event is sent.

1256

Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y if the network provides answer supervision. Set the
Answer Supervision Timeout field to 0.

n

Enter n if the network does not provide answer supervision,
and set the Answer Supervision Timeout field. Also enter n
for incoming trunk groups.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

NOTE:

When you set this field to y, the Outgoing End of Dial (sec) field is not
displayed. The firmware timeout on circuit packs controlled by the
Outgoing End of Dial (sec) field is automatically set to 0.
Receive Release Ack

This field appears when the Trunk Signaling Type field is cont or dis and only
applies to TN2140 ports (used for Italian and Hungarian tie trunks).
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if the switch will receive a release acknowledgment
in response to a forward or backward release signal.

Send Answer Supervision

This field appears when the Trunk Signaling Type field is cont or dis and only
applies to TN2140 ports.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to make your switch signal the calling switch when
an incoming call is answered. You can only set this field to y
if the Direction field is incoming or two-way.

Send Release Ack

This field appears when the Trunk Signaling Type field is cont or dis and only
applies to TN2140 ports (used for Italian and Hungarian tie trunks).
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to send a release acknowledgment in response to a
forward or backward release signal.

Sig Bit Inversion

When transmission facilities use bit-oriented signaling (such as CAS), 2 bits are
used to transmit seizure and release signals for calls. Called the A-bit and the
B-bit, their meaning can vary. For example, in the A-bit a “1” might mean
on-hook and a “0” might mean off-hook. The entry in the Country Protocol field
on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen sets the default meaning of these bits.
For trunk ports on TN2242 and TN464B and later circuit packs, this field allows
you to invert the A- and B-bits as necessary so that the far-end switch can
understand your switch’s seizure and release signals. If the far-end switch, such as
a central office, on this trunk group interprets the A- and B-bits differently from

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1257

Screen reference

the default, you may need to invert one or both bits — to change “1” to “0” and
vice-versa in the A-bit, for example.
Valid entries

Usage

A

For the TN464B and later circuit packs, indicate which bits,
if any, should be inverted.

B
A&B
none

A and none

For the Japanese 2Mbit trunk circuit pack, indicate which
bits, if any, should be inverted.

Supplementary Service Protocol

Appears only when trunk group Type is ISDN.
Valid
entries

Usage

a

Allows ASAI Flexible Billing.
AT&T, Bellcore, Nortel.
When the Country Code field on the DS1 screen is 1A, SSA
selects AT&T custom supplementary services.
When the Country Code field on the DS1 screen is 1B, SSA
selects Bellcore Supplementary Services.
When the Country Code field on the DS1 screen is 1C, SSA
selects Nortel Proprietary Supplementary Services.

b

Q-SIG

c

ETSI
Use c protocol for Network Call Deflection. For more
information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Network Call
Redirection.

d

1258

ECMA QSIG

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Valid
entries

Usage

e

Allows ASAI Flexible Billing.
Allows DCS with rerouting. DCS with Rerouting must be y,
and the Used for DCS field on the trunk group screen must be
y.

f

Feature Plus

g

ANSI. Available only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the ISDN-PRI or ISDN-BRI field is
y or the Used for DCS field is y.
Use g protocol for Network Call Transfer. For more
information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Network Call
Redirection.

Synchronization

This field determines whether the trunk group will use synchronous or
asynchronous communications. This field appears if:
■

the Group Type field is dmi-bos or isdn, or

■

the Group Type field is access, co, fx, tandem, tie, or wats and the
Comm Type field is avd or rbavd, or

■

the Group Type field is access, co, fx, tandem, tie, or wats, the Comm
Type field is data, and the ISDN-PRI field or the ISDN-BRI Trunks field is
y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen.

Valid entries

Usage

async

Do not change this field without the assistance of Avaya or
your network service provider.

sync

TAC

Enter the trunk access code (TAC) that must be dialed to access the trunk group. A
different TAC must be assigned to each trunk group. CDR reports use the TAC to
identify each trunk group.
Valid entries

Usage

1-4 digit
number

Enter any number that fits the format for trunk access codes
or dial access codes defined in your dial plan.

*, #

* and # may be used as the first character in a TAC.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1259

Screen reference

TN
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 20

Enter a Tenant Partition number to assign this trunk
group to the partition.

(DEFINITY SI,
CSI)
1 to 100

(DEFINITY R,
S8700
IP-Connect)
Tip:

Double-check your entry. If you accidentally enter an unassigned tenant
partition number, the system will accept the entry but no calls will go to the
trunk group.
Toll Restricted
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y to prevent toll-restricted users from using a trunk
access code to make restricted outgoing calls over this trunk
group.

n

Enter n if the field is automatic or if you don’t want to restrict
access.
Tip:

To find out what kind of line coding a trunk group member uses, check the
Line Coding field on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen for the DS1 port to which
the member is assigned.
Trunk Flash

Trunk Flash enables multifunction telephones located directly behind the
DEFINITY System to access central office customized services that are provided
by the far-end or Central Office (CO). These central office customized services
are electronic features, such as conference and transfer, that are accessed by a
sequence of flash signal and dial signals from the MultiVantage system telephone
on an active trunk call.

1260

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow trunk flash.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Trunk Gain

This field specifies the amplification applied to the trunks in this group. With the
values of the Trunk Termination and Country fields, the value in this field also
determines the input and trans-hybrid balance impedance for TN465B, TN2146,
TN2147, and TN2184 ports. All other CO and DID circuit packs are set
automatically to high
Valid entries

Usage

high

Enter high if users complain of low volume.

low

Enter low if users complain of squeal or feedback.

Trunk Signaling Type

This field controls the signaling used by members in private network trunk
groups, mainly in Italy, Brazil, and Hungary. This field also controls the signaling
used by members in public network digital trunk groups. This field displays if the
Group Type field is access, aplt, rlt, tandem, or tie. Entries in this field affect
which timers appear on the Administrable Timers page.
Valid entries

Usage

cont

E&M trunks in Italy, Brazil, and Hungary can use either
continuous or discontinuous signaling. Each entry specifies a
set of signals and available timers used in the process of
setting up and releasing connections. The type of signaling
you select on your switch must match the signaling type
administered on the far-end switch. Use these values only
when all trunk group members are assigned to ports on a
TN464F, TN2464, or TN2140 circuit pack. Entering one of
these values causes the Send Release Ack, Receive Release
Ack, and Send Answer Supervision fields to appear. See
‘‘Trunk Type (in/out)’’ on page 1264 for more information.

(continuous)
dis

(discontinuous)

Use the following entries for tie trunks in Main-Satellite/Tributary networks. Each
entry defines a function of the trunk group in the network. Use these values only
when all trunk group members are assigned to a TN497 circuit pack.
tgu

(for outgoing
trunks)
tge

(for incoming
trunks)

555-233-506

Enter tgu at the main switch to administer a tie trunk group
connected to a satellite switch. (This same group should be
administered as tge at the satellite.)
Enter tge at a satellite switch to administer a tie trunk group
connected to the main switch. (This same group should be
administered as tgu at the main switch.)

Issue 5 October 2002

1261

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

tgi

Enter tgi at to administer a two-way tie trunk group between 2
satellites or between the main switch and a satellite. (This
trunk group should be administered as tgi on both switches.)

(for internal
trunks)

DIOD trunks support pulsed and continuous E&M signaling in Brazil and
discontinuous E&M signaling in Hungary. Use the following entries for DIOD
trunks. Use these values only when all trunk group members are assigned to a
TN464F (or later version) or TN2464 circuit pack.
cont

Enter cont for continuous E&M signaling.

pulsed

Enter pulsed for pulsed E&M signaling.

discont

Leave blank forR2 signaling.
Hungary uses discontinuous E&M signaling when this field is
dis. Brazil E&M trunks use continuous and pulsed E&M.

Trunk Termination

This field adjusts the impedance of the trunk group for optimal transmission
quality. Check with your service provider if you’re not sure of the distance to your
central office.
Valid entries

Usage

600ohm

Enter 600ohm when the distance to the central office or the
switch at the other end of the trunk is less than 3,000 feet.

rc

Enter rc when the distance to the central office or the switch
at the other end of the trunk is more than 3,000 feet.

Trunk Type

Use this field to control the seizure and start-dial signaling used on this trunk
group. Entries in this field vary according to the function of the trunk group and
must match the corresponding setting on the far-end switch. This field appears for
CO, DID, FX, and WATS trunk groups.

1262

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

See ‘‘Transmission and supervisory signaling’’ on page 1908 for more
information. Procedures in ‘‘Managing trunks’’ on page 411 give specific
suggestions for signaling to use with different types of trunk groups.
Valid entries

Usage

ground-start

Use ground-start signaling for two-way trunks whenever
possible: ground-start signaling avoids glare and provides
answer supervision from the far end.

loop-start

In general, try to use loop-start signaling only for one-way
trunks. Loop-start signaling is susceptible to glare and does
not provide answer supervision.

auto/auto

The term before the slash tells the switch how and when it
will receive incoming digits. The term after the slash tells the
switch how and when it should send outgoing digits.

auto/delay
auto/immed

■

auto — Used for immediate connection to a single preset
destination (incoming CO trunks, for example). No
digits are sent, because all calls terminate at the same
place.

■

delay — The sending switch does not send digits until it
receives a delay dial signal (an off-hook signal followed
by an on-hook signal) from the far-end switch, indicating
that it’s ready to receive the digits.

■

wink — The sending switch does not send digits until it
receives a a wink start (momentary off-hook) signal from
the far-end switch, indicating that it’s ready to receive
the digits.

■

immed — The sending switch sends digits without
waiting for a signal from the far-end switch.

auto/wink

2-wire-ac
2-wire-dc
3-wire

555-233-506

These entries are used with CO trunks in Russia: enter the
type of connection to your central office. Check with you
network service provider if you don’t know what type of
connection they’re using. To use these entries, the Country
field must be 15 and the CO trunks must use ports on a
TN2199 circuit board.

Issue 5 October 2002

1263

Screen reference

Trunk Type (in/out)

Use this field to control the seizure and start-dial signaling used on this trunk
group. The setting of the Trunk Signaling Type field can affect the entries allowed
in this field. In addition, settings may differ for incoming and outgoing trunks.
Valid entries

Usage

auto

There are numerous valid entries for this field: use the online help in the
switch administration software to view all the possible combinations. Here
are what the elements used in those combinations mean:

cont
delay

■

auto — Used for immediate connection to a single preset destination
(incoming CO trunks, for example). No digits are sent, because all
calls terminate at the same place.

■

cont — Continuous signaling is used with Italian E&M tie trunks. The
switch seizes a trunk by sending a continuous seizure signal for at least
the duration specified by the Incoming Seizure Timer. See ‘‘Trunk
Signaling Type’’ on page 1261 for more information.

■

delay — The sending switch does not send digits until it receives a
delay dial signal (an off-hook signal followed by an on-hook signal)
from the far-end switch, indicating that it’s ready to receive the digits.

■

disc —Discontinuous signaling is used with Italian tie trunks that use
E&M signaling. The switch can seize a trunk by sending a single, short
signal for the duration specified by the Normal Outgoing Seize Send
field. However, with the Three-Way Seizure option the calling switch
can also send routing information to the called switch by sending one
or a series of brief seizure signals.

■

wink — The sending switch does not send digits until it receives a a
wink start (momentary off-hook) signal from the far-end switch,
indicating that it’s ready to receive the digits.

■

immed — The sending switch sends digits without waiting for a signal
from the far-end switch.

disc
immed
wink

2-wire-ac
2-wire-dc
3-wire

These entries are used with CO trunks in Russia: enter the type of
connection to your central office. Check with you network service
provider if you don’t know what type of connection they’re using. To use
these entries, the Country field must be 15 and the CO trunks must use
ports on a TN2199 circuit board.
Tip:

When incoming trunks use the setting immed/immed, the far-end switch
seizes the trunk and sends digits without waiting for acknowledgment from
the receiving switch. When traffic is heavy, the receiving switch may not
immediately attach a Touch Tone Receiver to a call and therefore lose digits.
Use wink-start trunks or increase the dial-guard timer value on the far-end
switch to avoid this problem.

1264

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

NOTE:

The value in this field affects the appearance of the Incoming Partial Dial
(sec) field on the Administrable Timer Page.
Version

Use this field to adjust the signaling on multi-country CO trunk circuit packs.
Entries in this field adjust signaling characteristics on these circuit packs to match
the signaling characteristics of the public network in a specific country. The field
appears only for CO, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the Country field is 5, 16,
or 23.
Valid entries

Usage

If the Country field is 5, the Version field only controls TN2147 ports.
a

Enter a to use standard signaling for the Netherlands public
network.

b

Enter b to use country 1 (U.S.) signaling. The value b is
appropriate if your switch is connected to a central office
using an Ericcson AXE-10 switch.

If the Country field is 16 or 23, the Version field sets the input impedance
value and only controls TN465C (vintage 2 or later) ports.
a

Enter a to set input impedance to 600 Ohms.

b

Enter b to set input impedance to 900 Ohms. The value b is
appropriate in Brazil.

Wink Timer (msec)

This field allows you to reduce the risk of glare by controlling part of call setup.
Requirements for the United States domestic network specify that the wink signal
for wink-start trunks must begin within 5 seconds after a trunk is seized. For
trunks with a delay-dial start, the wink must not last longer than 5 seconds. While
some circuit packs are hard-coded to allow the full 5 seconds in both cases, other
circuit packs allow you reduce the allowed start time and duration, thus reducing
the window in which glare could occur.
Unlike other fields on this screen, the Wink Timer field therefore controls 2
different variables. What your entry does depends on the outgoing value in the
Trunk Type (in/out) field.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1265

Screen reference

.

Setting of the Trunk
Type (in/out) field

What the Wink Timer field sets

…/wink

Maximum duration of the wink signal
(wait-for-wink-to-end)

…/delay

Maximum interval after trunk seizure for the wink to
begin (wait-for-wink-to-start)

This field appears when the “out” side of the entry in the Trunk Type (in/out) field
is …/wink or …/delay and the Group Type is tie, access, aplt, dmi-bos, rlt, or
tandem. The setting in this field only affects trunks administered to ports on
TN760C (vintage 4 or later), TN767, TN464C (or later), and TN2242 circuit
packs. If the trunk group also contains trunks assigned to ports on other types of
circuit packs, those trunks are unaffected.
Valid entries

Usage

300 to 5000

In general, Avaya recommends that you not change this field.
If you do, remember that your switch’s timing must be
compatible with the timing on the far-end switch.

in increments
of 50

Field descriptions for page 2

The figure below shows a common configuration for page 2 of the Trunk Group
screen when the Group Type field is co. This screen is only an example, and the
fields shown below may change or disappear according to specific field settings.

1266

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

add trunk-group next

Page 2 of x
TRUNK FEATURES
Measured: ____

ACA Assignment? _
Wideband Support? _
Long Holding Time(hours): _
Maintenance Tests? _
Short Holding Time(sec): _ Data Restriction? _
NCA-TSC Trunk Member: _
Short Holding Threshold: __
Send Name: _
Send Calling Number: _
Used for DCS? _
Suppress # Outpulsing? _ Numbering Format: _______
Outgoing Channel ID Encoding: _________
UUI IE Treatment: ______
Maximum Size of UUI IE Contents: ___
Replace Restricted Numbers? _
Replace Unavailable Numbers? _
Send Connected Number: _
Send UUI IE? _
Send UCID? _

BRS Reply-best DISC Cause Value: __
Ds1 Echo Cancellation? _
US NI Delayed Calling Name Update? _

Network (Japan) Needs Connect Before Disconnect? _

Screen 296. CO Trunk Group

! CAUTION:
Customers: Do not change fields on this page without assistance from Avaya
or your network service provider.
Abandoned Call Search

Use this field when the Trunk Type field is ground-start. Abandoned Call Search
is designed to work with analog ground-start CO trunks that do not provide
disconnect supervision. Your central office must support Abandoned Call Search
for the feature to work properly. If your central office provides disconnect
supervision, you do not need to use the Abandoned Call Search feature.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if this trunk group will conduct an Abandoned Call
Search to identify ghost calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1267

Screen reference

ACA Assignment
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if you want Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA)
measurements to be taken for this trunk group. If y is entered,
complete the Long Holding Time, Short Holding Time, and
Short Holding Threshold fields.

Charge Conversion

Avaya MultiVantage multiplies the number of charge units by the value of this
field and displays it as a currency amount. If there is no value in this field, Avaya
MultiVantage displays the number of charge units without converting it to
currency. This field appears for CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the
Direction field is outgoing or two-way. For ISDN trunk groups, it appears when
the Charge Advice field is not none.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 64,500

Enter the value of a charge unit in terms of the currency you
use.

Charge Type

Entries in this field are text strings you use to describe charges related to a phone
call. This field appears for CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the
Direction field is outgoing or two-way. For ISDN trunk groups, it appears when
the Charge Advice field is not none.
Valid entries

Usage

1–7
characters
(embedded
spaces count
as characters)
or blank

Enter the words or characters you want to appear on phone
displays after the charge amount. Most likely you will use
either the currency symbol or the charge type, bur not both.

Connected to CO

This field appears when the Group Type field is tie.

1268

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow overlap sending to a Central Office.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Currency Symbol

This field appears for CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the Direction
field is outgoing or two-way. For ISDN trunk groups, it appears when the Charge
Advice field is not none.
Valid entries

Usage

1–3
characters
(leading and
embedded
spaces count
as characters)
or blank

Enter the symbol you want to appear on phone displays
before the charge amount.

Data Restriction

If y, whisper page is denied on this trunk.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to prevent features from generating tones on a data
call that would cause erroneous data transmission.

Decimal Point

This field appears for CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups when the Direction
field is outgoing or two-way. For ISDN trunk groups, it appears when the Charge
Advice field is not none.
Valid entries

Usage

comma

Chose the appropriate representation for a decimal point as it
will appear on phone displays. Entering comma or period in
this field divides the charge value by 100.

period
none

DS1 Echo Cancellation

Reduces voice call echo.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow echo cancellation on a per port basis.

Glare Handling

This field determines what the switch will do when glare occurs. This field
appears when the Direction field is two-way and the outgoing side of the Trunk
Type field is either …/wink or …/delay.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1269

Screen reference

If you enter control or backoff, and ports for the trunk group are not capable of
detecting glare, warnings are generated. The following circuit packs can detect
glare: TN767 (all releases), TN760C (or later releases), and TN464C (or later
releases).
Valid entries

Usage

control

Your switch will seize the trunk and proceed with call setup.
The other switch will find another trunk.

backoff

The other switch will seize the trunk proceed with call setup.
Your switch will find another trunk.

none

Incoming Tone (DTMF) ANI

This field appears only when the Incoming Dial Type field is tone. Digits
received through Automatic Number Identification (ANI) are printed on a CDR
record, passed to the Intuity AUDIX and ASAI interfaces, and displayed on the
phone (and on tandem calls if the outgoing trunk requires ANI). Then the digits
are sent to the outgoing trunk.
Valid entries

Usage

*ANI*DNIS*

If 555-3800 calls extension 81120, the trunk group receives
*55538000*81120*. The phone displays Call from
555-3800.

ANI*DNIS*

If 555-3800 calls extension 81120, the trunk group receives
55538000*81120*. The phone displays Call from 555-3800.

no
Internal Alert
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if internal ringing and coverage will be used for
incoming calls.

Long Holding Time (hours)

This field appears only when the ACA Assignment field is y.

1270

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 10

Enter the length of time (in hours) that the system will
consider as being a long holding time. If you enter 0, the
system will not consider long holding calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Maintenance Tests

Appears when the Group Type field is aplt or tie.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if hourly maintenance tests will be made on this
trunk group. Your entry is not saved when the screen is
submitted unless one or more trunk members are
administered.

Measured

Indicates if the system will transmit data for this trunk group to the Call
Management System (CMS). You cannot use internal and both unless either the
BCMS (Basic) or the VuStats field is y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen. If the ATM field is set to y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Option screen, this field accepts only internal or none. If this field
contains a value other than internal or none when ATM is y, none appears.
Valid entries

Usage

internal

Enter internal if the data can be sent to the Basic Call
Management System (BCMS), the VuStats data display, or
both.

external

Enter external to send the data to the CMS.

both

Enter both to collect data internally and to send it to the
CMS.

none

Enter none if trunk group measurement reports are not
required.

MF Tariff Free

This field appears for Access, APLT, DID, DIOD, DMI-BOS, and Tandem trunk
groups when the Incoming Dial Type field is mf or the Group Type field is tie, the
Trunk Signaling Type field is blank, cont, or dis, and the Incoming Dial Type
field is mf.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to make the switch generate an MFC Tariff-Free
Backward Signal (administered on the
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related-System- Parameters
screen) during call setup instead of the “free” signal. This
aids CO billing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1271

Screen reference

Network Call Redirection

For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Network Call Redirection.
Valid entries

Usage

deflect

Use to allow Network Call Deflection.

ANSI-transfer

Use to allow Network Call Transfer for MCI DEX 600
ISDN trunks.

Nortel-transfer

Use to allow Network Call Transfer for MCI DMS 250
switches.

telcordia-tbct

Use to allow Network Call Transfer for Lucent 5ESS or
Nortel DMS100 switches.

Outgoing ANI

If this trunk group is used for an outgoing call with ANI, the entry in this field
overrides the normal ANI. The ANI is sent exactly as administered, except for the
normal truncation to 7 digits for Russian ANI. This ANI override works both for
calls originated in Avaya MultiVantage and calls tandemed through it. This field
appears for CO, DIOD, FX, and WATS trunk groups.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 15 digits

Enter the digit string to be sent in place of normal ANI.

blank

Leave this field blank to allow ANI to work normally.

Path Replacement Method

Appears when the following fields are set on the Trunk Group screen: trunk group
Type is ISDN, Supplementary Service Protocol is b or e, the Path Replacement
with Retention is n, and the Supplementary Services with Rerouting field or the
DCS with Rerouting field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is
y.

1272

Valid entries

Usage

always

Use any QSIG (SSB) trunk group as the replacement trunk
group. A new call is always originated, even when the
original trunk group is determined to be the replacement
trunk group.

BR
(better route)

Route pattern preferences help determine trunk group path
replacement. The original trunk group is retained if the Path
Replacement with Retention field is y. Path replacement fails
(and the original trunk group is retained) if the Path
Replacement with Retention field is n.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Path Replacement with Retention

Appears when the following fields are set on the Trunk Group screen: trunk group
Type is ISDN, Supplementary Service Protocol is b or e, and the Supplementary
Services with Rerouting field or the DCS with Rerouting field on the System
Parameters Customer Options screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to retain the original trunk group. Set to n to allow
path replacement according to setting on the Path
Replacement Method field.

PBX ID

Appears when the Used for DCS field is y. This field identifies the remote switch
in the network with which the trunk will communicate on a DCS signaling link.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 63 or
blank

Enter the ID of the switch at the other end of this trunk.

Per Call CPN Blocking Code

For Access, APLT, CO, DIOD, FX, tandem, tie, and WATS trunk groups only.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 4 digit
number or
blank
*, #

May be used as the first digit

Per Call CPN Unblocking Code

For access, APLT, CO, DIOD, FX, tandem, tie, and WATS trunk groups only.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 4 digit number or
blank
*, #

555-233-506

May be used as the first digit

Issue 5 October 2002

1273

Screen reference

Receive Analog Incoming Call ID

Your switch stores and displays 15 characters of name and number information
associated with an incoming call on analog trunks (ICLID, or incoming call line
identification information). This field appears for CO, DID, and DIOD trunk
groups when the Analog Trunk Incoming Call ID field on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen is y and the Direction field is incoming or two-way.
Valid
entries

Usage

Bellcore

Used to collect ICLID information in the U.S.

NTT

Used to collect ICLID information in Japan.

disabled

Stops the collection of ICLID information on analog trunks.

Request Category

This field appears when the Country field is 15 and the Shuttle field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if the switch should request a call category from the
central office.

Seize When Maintenance Busy

This field only affects ports on TN760C (or later release), TN767, and TN464C
(or later release) circuit packs. It indicates whether this switch generates an
outgoing seizure when a trunk in this trunk group is maintenance busied and
whether the far-end switch is administered to do likewise. This supports the
Electronic Tandem Network Busyout feature, which is intended to prevent a
far-end switch from reporting problems with a trunk that has been removed from
service on your switch. This field’s setting does not affect the behavior of the
far-end switch; it controls the behavior of this switch and defines the expected
far-end behavior.

1274

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

For DIOD trunks using TN464F (or later release) or TN2464, displays only when
the Group Type field is diod and the Trunk Signaling Type field is pulsed, cont,
or dis.
Valid entries

Usage

near-end

Enter near-end if this switch generates an outgoing seizure
when a trunk is maintenance busied but the far-end switch
does not. The seizure is maintained until the maintenance
busyout is released.

far-end

Enter far-end if the far-end switch generates an outgoing
seizure when a trunk is maintenance busied but this switch
does not.

both-ends

Enter both-ends if both this switch and the far-end switch
generate an outgoing seizure when a trunk is maintenance
busied.

If a switch generates an outgoing seizure when a trunk is busied out, the seizure
will probably cause alarms at the far-end switch, perhaps leading to a far-end
maintenance busy out, unless the far-end switch is administered to expect this
behavior.
If the administered value of this field is either far-end or both-ends, any
abnormally long incoming seizure (including failure to drop from a completed
call) is assumed to be the result of a far-end maintenance busy condition. Note
that this assumption may be incorrect, since the abnormally long seizure may
actually be due to failure of the trunk circuit. Regardless of the cause of the
abnormally long seizure, your switch does the following things:
1. Generates a warning alarm indicating that the trunk is assumed to be
maintenance busy at the far-end
2. Removes the trunk from service
3. Keeps the trunk out of service until a far-end disconnect is received
Allowable values depend on the entry in the Direction field: check the online help
in the switch administration software.
Short Holding Threshold

This field appears when the ACA Assignment field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 30

Enter the number of times the system will record a short
holding call before alerting an attendant to the possibility of
a faulty trunk. Enter 0 for no short holding calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1275

Screen reference

Short Holding Time (seconds)

This field appears when the ACA Assignment field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 160

Enter the length of time (in seconds) that the system
considers as being a short holding time. If 0 is entered, the
system will not consider short holding calls.

Shuttle

This field appears when the Group Type field is co, fx, or wats, the Country field
is 15, and the Outgoing Dial Type field is rotary. It can be administered on
TN464D (or later release) or TN2199 circuit packs.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable MF shuttle signaling.

Start B Signal

This field appears when the Country field is 15 and the Shuttle field is y. Enter
1–3 to indicate which B-signal should be used to start a call. The value
administered in this field must be coordinated with your central office. See ‘‘Start
Position’’ on page 1276.
Valid entries

Usage

1

Start calls with signal B1 (first digit)

2

Start calls with signal B2 (next digit)

3

Start calls with signal B3 (previous digit)

Start Position

The value administered in this field must be coordinated with your central office.
This field appears when the Country field is 15 and the Shuttle field is y.

1276

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 9

Indicate which digit in the digit string is considered to be the
“previously sent” digit (see ‘‘Start B Signal’’ on page 1276).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Suppress # Outpulsing
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if end-to-end signaling begins with (and includes)
“#”. The final “#” is suppressed in cases where the system
would normally outpulse it. This field should be y when the
Central Office (for example, rotary) or any other facility
treats “#” as an error.

Time (sec) to Drop Call on No Answer

This field appears if the Group Type field is co or diod and the Outgoing Dial
Type field is mf, or if the Group Type field is co, diod, fx, wats, and the Country
field is 15.
Valid entries

Usage

0–1200

Enter the duration (in seconds) the switch should wait for
outgoing calls to be answered. If the call is not answered in
the specified number of seconds, the call drops. If this field
is 0, the timer is not set and no calls drop.

Used for DCS
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if this trunk group will send and receive messages on
a DCS signaling link.
NOTE:

This field cannot be activated if the trunk group number is greater than 255
or if the Trunk Access code is more than 3-digits long.
If this field is y, you can administer ISDN-BRI trunk groups unless the DCS
Signaling field is d-chan. In that case, remove the BRI trunks or set the DCS
Signaling field to bx.25 before submitting the screen.
Field descriptions for page 3

The figure below shows a common configuration for page 3 of the Trunk Group
screen when the Group Type field is co. This screen is only an example, and the
fields shown below may change or disappear according to specific field settings.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1277

Screen reference

add trunk-group next

Page 3 of x
ADMINISTRABLE TIMERS
Send Incoming/Outgoing Disconnect Timers to TN465 Ports? _
Outgoing Dial Guard(msec): _____
Incoming Glare Guard(msec): _____
Outgoing Glare Guard(msec): _____

Ringing Monitor(msec):
Outgoing End of Dial(sec):
Programmed Dial Pause(msec):
Flash Length(msec):

END TO END SIGNALING
Tone (msec): ____

Outgoing Rotary Dial Interdigit (msec):
_____
Incoming Seizure(msec):
___
Outgoing Seizure Response(sec):
_____
Disconnect Signal Error(sec):
____
Busy Tone Disconnect?

____
____
___
___

Pause (msec): 150

OUTPULSING INFORMATION
PPS: 10
Make(msec): 40

Break(msec): 60

PPM? y

Frequency: 50/12k

Screen 297. Administrable Timers for Trunk Group

! CAUTION:
Customers: Do not change fields on this page without assistance from Avaya
or your network service provider.
Answer Send (msec)

This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is dis and the trunk group
Direction field is incoming or two-way. Only TN2140 and TN2199 ports receive
this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

10 to 2550 in

Enter the duration of the answer signal pulse.

increments of
10
Busy Tone Disconnect

The field appears when Enable Busy Tone Disconnect for Analog loop-start
Trunks is y on the System Parameters Country-Options screen.

1278

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow the switch to recognize a busy tone signal as a
disconnect on this trunk group.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Cama Outgoing Dial Guard (msec)

This field appears when Group Type is cama (the trunk group type used for
emergency 911 service).
Valid entries

Usage

25 to 6375 in
increments of
25

Enter the minimum interval between the receiving switch’s
seizure acknowledgment and the outpulsing of digits by this
switch.

Cama Wink Start Time (msec)

This field appears when Group Type is cama.
Valid entries

Usage

20 to 5100 in

Specifies the duration (the wait-for-wink-to-end time) for a
wink-start CAMA trunk. The wink must begin before the
Outgoing Seizure Response timer expires.

increments of
20

Disconnect Signal Error (sec)

This field appears for ground-start trunk groups.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 255 in
increments of
1

Enter the maximum interval that the switch will wait to
receive a disconnect signal from the far-end switch after the
local party (a phone or tie trunk) goes on-hook. If the timer
expires, the system assumes a disconnect failure and take
appropriate action such as creating an error message.

Flash Length (msec)

This timer is sent to TN436B, TN459B, TN464C (or later), TN465B (or later),
(TN753 if Country is 23), TN2146, TN2147, TN2184, and TN2199 circuit
boards.
Valid entries

Usage

10 to 2550 in
increments of
10

Enter the duration of a flash signal generated toward the
central office.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1279

Screen reference

Glare

This field is only administrable if the Trunk Type field is cont and the trunk group
Direction field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

40 to 100 in
increments of
10

Enter the minimum acceptable interval (in msec) between the
moment your switch sends an outgoing seizure and the
moment it receives a seizure acknowledgment. If
acknowledgment is received before the timer expires, glare is
assumed.

Incoming Dial Guard (msec)
Valid entries

Usage

10 to 2550 in
increments of
10

Enter the minimum acceptable interval between the detection
of an incoming seizure and the acceptance of the first digit.
The switch will not accept digits before this timer expires.

NOTE:

This timer is never sent to TN429 ports.
Incoming Disconnect (msec)

The field appears only when the Direction field is incoming or two-way and the
Trunk Type field is either blank or cont.
Valid entries

Usage

50 to 2550 in

Enter the minimum valid duration of a disconnect signal for
an incoming call. The switch will not recognize shorter
disconnect signals. This field cannot be blank. For Brazil
pulsed E&M signaling, use 600.

increments of
10

Incoming Disconnect Send (msec)

This field is only administrable if the Trunk Type field is dis and the trunk group
Direction field is incoming or two-way. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer.

1280

Valid entries

Usage

500 to 1200
in increments
of 100

Enter the duration of the backward release signal your switch
sends at the end of an incoming call.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Incoming Glare Guard (msec)

This field only appears when the trunk group Direction field is two-way.
Valid entries

Usage

100 to 25500

Enter the minimum interval that must elapse between a
trunk’s release from an incoming call and its seizure for an
outgoing call. This field cannot be blank. This delay gives the
far-end time to release all equipment after the trunk is
released.

in increments
of 100

Incoming Incomplete Dial Alarm (sec)

Only the TN436 (all), TN459 (all), TN464C (or later), TN767, TN2140, TN2146,
TN2184, TN2199, and TN2242 circuit packs use this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 255 in
increments of
1

Enter the maximum acceptable interval between an incoming
seizure and receipt of all digits. Intervals greater than this
limit generate an inline error.

Incoming Partial Dial (sec)

This timer appears only if the Incoming Dial Type field is rotary.
Valid entries

Usage

5 to 255 in
increments of
1

Enter the maximum time allowed between incoming rotary
digits.

NOTE:

This timer is never sent to TN429 ports.
Incoming Seizure (msec)

This field appears when the Direction field is incoming or two-way, and, when
applicable, the Trunk Type field is cont. Only TN429, TN438 (any release), TN
447, TN464C (or later), TN465 (any release), TN767, TN2138, TN2140,
TN2147, TN2184, and TN2199 ports receive this timer. For DID trunks, only
TN2199 and TN429D (or later) receive this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

20 to 2550 in
increments of
10

Enter the duration of the shortest incoming seizure signal
your switch can recognize. For ICLID, set this field to 120.
The field cannot be blank.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1281

Screen reference

Normal Outgoing Seize Send (msec)

This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is dis and the trunk group Direction
field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

10 to 990 in
increments of
10

Enter the duration of the signal your switch sends for an
outgoing seizure.

Outgoing Dial Guard (msec)
Valid entries

Usage

100 to 25500

Enter the minimum interval between seizure
acknowledgment of a trunk and the outpulsing of digits. This
field cannot be blank. For trunks that do not provide seizure
acknowledgment, the timer specifies the minimum time
between seizure and the outpulsing of digits. Any digit the
caller dials after they lift the receiver, but before the timer
expires, is not outpulsed until the timer expires.

in increments
of 100

Outgoing Disconnect (msec)
Valid entries

Usage

50 to 2550 in
increments of
10

Enter the minimum valid duration of a disconnect signal for
an outgoing call. The switch will not recognize shorter
disconnect signals. This field cannot be blank. This timer
begins timing when a disconnect signal is detected on an
outgoing call and resets when the signal is no longer
detected. If the timer expires, the trunk drops. For Brazil
pulsed E&M signaling, use 600.

Outgoing Disconnect Send (msec)

This field is administrable only if the Trunk Type field is dis and the trunk group
Direction field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer.

1282

Valid entries

Usage

100 to 9900
in increments
of 100

Enter the duration of the forward release signal your switch
sends at the end of outgoing calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Outgoing End of Dial (sec)

This field controls firmware answer supervision timers on circuit packs that have
them. It appears when the Direction field is outgoing or two-way and the Receive
Answer Supervision field is n. If the Receive Answer Supervision field is y, this
field does not appear and the firmware timer on the appropriate circuit pack is
automatically disabled.
NOTE:

The Answer Supervision Timeout field on the Trunk Group screen provides
timed answer supervision for circuit packs without administrable timers.
Since trunk groups may contain ports on more than one circuit pack, it’s
possible you may need to use both timers with the same trunk group. If so,
set the Outgoing End of Dial field and the Answer Supervision Timeout
field to the same value.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 254 in
increments of
1

Enter the maximum time, in seconds, that the switch will
wait to receive answer supervision for outgoing calls on the
ports controlled by firmware timers. For Brazil pulsed E&M
signaling, use 40.

During a cut-through operation, timing begins after the switch sends each
outgoing digit and ceases when answer supervision is received. If the timer
expires, the switch acts as if it has received answer supervision. On senderized
operation, the timer begins after the switch sends the last digit collected. The timer
ceases when answer supervision is received. If the timer expires, the switch acts as
if it has received answer supervision.
Outgoing Glare Guard (msec)

This field only appears for outgoing and two-way trunk groups.
Valid entries

Usage

100 to 25500

Enter the minimum interval that must elapse between a
trunk’s release from an outgoing call and its seizure for
another outgoing call. This field cannot be blank. This delay
gives the far-end time to release all equipment after the
outgoing trunk is released.

in increments
of 100

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1283

Screen reference

Outgoing Last Digit (sec)

This field is only administrable if the Trunk Type field is dis or cont and the trunk
group Direction field is two-way or outgoing. Only TN497 and TN2140 ports
receive this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 40 in
increments of
1

Enter the maximum time that the switch will wait for the next
digit dialed. After the timer expires, no more digits are
accepted by the circuit pack.

Outgoing Rotary Dial Interdigit (msec)

This field only appears when:
1. the trunk group Group Type field is access, aplt, co, diod, dmi-bos, fx,
rlt, tandem, or wats and the Outgoing Dial Type field is rotary
2. the Group Type field is tie, the Trunk Type field is blank, cont, or dis, and
the Outgoing Dial Type field is rotary
3. the Group Type field is tie, and the Trunk Type field is tge, tgi, or tru (the
Outgoing Dial Type field does not appear but is implied to be rotary).
Valid entries

Usage

150 to 2550
in increments
of 10

Enter the minimum time between outpulsed digits on
outgoing rotary trunks.

Outgoing Seizure (msec)

Appears when the Country field is 15, the Direction field is outgoing or two-way,
and the Trunk Type field is 2-wire-ac, 2-wire-dc, or 3-wire. This timer is sent
only to the TN2199 circuit pack.

1284

Valid entries

Usage

20 to 2550 in
increments of
10

Enter the duration of the outgoing seizure signal.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Outgoing Seizure Response (sec)

This timer is sent to the TN438B, TN439, TN447, TN458, TN464B (or later),
TN465B (or later), TN767, TN2140, TN2147, TN2184, TN2199, and TN2242
circuit packs.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 255 in
increments of
1

Enter the maximum interval that the switch should wait after
sending a seizure signal to receive seizure acknowledgment
from the far-end. If the acknowledgment is not received in
this time, a seizure failure response is uplinked. For Brazil
pulsed E&M signaling, use 255.

Programmed Dial Pause (msec)

This timer is administrable for all outgoing and two-way trunk groups. This timer
works with the TN464B (or later), TN767, TN458, TN2140, and TN2242 tie
circuit packs. All CO circuit packs that accept administrable timers accept this
timer.
Valid entries

Usage

100 to 25500

Set the exact duration of pauses used during abbreviated
dialing, ARS outpulsing, and terminal dialing operations.

in increments
of 100

Release Ack Send (msec)

After your switch receives a forward release signal, it must send a forward release
acknowledgment signal. This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is dis and
the trunk group Direction field is incoming or two-way. Only TN2140 ports
receive this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

500 to 1200

Enter the duration of the signal your switch sends for a
forward release acknowledgment.

in increments
of 100

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1285

Screen reference

Ringing Monitor (msec)

This timer is sent to TN464C (or later), TN767, TN438 (all), TN447, TN465 (all),
TN2138, TN2147, TN2184, and TN2199 CO circuit packs.
Valid entries

Usage

200 to 51000

Enter the minimum time the switch requires to determine if a
trunk disconnects. The field cannot be blank. If the ringing
signal disappears for a duration longer than the time specified
in this field, the switch assumes the call has been
disconnected.

in increments
of 200

Seize Ack Delay (msec)

This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is dis and the trunk group Direction
field is incoming or two-way. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

40 to 120 in
increments of
10

Enter the maximum interval your switch will wait after
receipt of an incoming seizure to send seizure
acknowledgment.

Seize Ack Send (msec)

This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is dis and the trunk group Direction
field is incoming or two-way. Only TN2140 ports receive this timer.
Valid entries

Usage

10 to 990 in
increments of
10

Enter the duration of the seizure acknowledgment signal your
switch sends in response to an incoming seizure.

Send Incoming/Outgoing Disconnect Timers to
TN465 Ports

The field appears only for a co, fx, or wats trunk group.

1286

Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if you want to send the incoming disconnect and
outgoing disconnect timer values to the trunk group ports that
are on a TN465 board.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

END TO END SIGNALING
Pause (msec)

THis field is administrable only if the Trunk Type field is blank. All CO, DIOD,
and tie circuit packs that accept administrable timers accept this timer. However,
this timer is sent only to the following circuit packs: TN464B (or later), TN767,
TN436B, TN459B, TN2146, TN2199, and TN2242, and TN429 and TN2184
ports in a DID trunk group.
Valid entries

Usage

20 to 2550 in

Enter the minimum acceptable interval (pause) between
DTMF tones sent from a hybrid phone.

increments of
10
Tone (msec)

This field appears only if the Trunk Type field is blank. All CO, DIOD, and Tie
circuit packs that accept administrable timers accept this timer. This timer is also
sent to the following circuit packs: TN464B (or later), TN767, TN436B, TN459B,
TN2146, TN2199, TN429, TN2184 ports in a DID trunk group.
Valid entries

Usage

20 to 2550 in
increments of
10

Enter the duration of a DTMF tone sent when a button on a
hybrid phone is pressed.

OUTPULSING INFORMATION
Break (msec)
Valid entries

Usage

Enter the duration of the break interval (the pulse duration) while the system is
outpulsing digits using dial pulse signaling. The field cannot be blank.
20 to 80 in
If PPS field is 10, the sum of the Make (msec) and Break
increments of
(msec) fields must equal 100.
5
10 to 40 in
If the PPS field is 20, the sum of the Make (msec) and Break
increments of
(msec) fields must equal 50.
5.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1287

Screen reference

Frequency

This field identifies the PPM pulse frequency(ies) sent by the public network. It
appears if the Direction field is outgoing or two-way and PPM is y. Circuit packs
can detect up to three different frequencies, (12kHz, 16kHz, and 50Hz), plus two
frequency combinations, (50Hz/12kHz and 50Hz/16kHz). This field controls
TN465B, TN2138, and TN2184 circuit packs.
Valid entries

Usage

12k

The TN465B (or later) and TN2184 can only detect 12k and
16kHz PPM. Therefore, if 12k is administered, the circuit
pack will be set to detect 12kHz.

16k

The TN465B (or later) and TN2184 can only detect 12k and
16kHz PPM. Therefore, if 16k is administered, the circuit
pack will be set to detect 16kHz.

50

The TN465B (or later) and TN2184 can only detect 12k and
16kHz PPM. Therefore, if 50 is administered, the circuit
pack will be set to detect 16kHz.

50/12k

The TN465B (or later) and TN2184 can only detect 12k and
16kHz PPM. Therefore, if 50/12k is administered, the circuit
pack will be set to detect 12kHz.

50/16k

The TN465B (or later) and TN2184 can only detect 12k and
16kHz PPM. Therefore, if 50/16k is administered, the circuit
pack will be set to detect 16kHz.

Make (msec)
Valid entries

Usage

Enter the duration of the make interval (the pause between pulses) while the
system is outpulsing digits using dial pulse signaling. The field cannot be
blank.
20 to 80 in
increments of
5

If the PPS field is 10, the sum of the Make (msec) and Break
(msec) fields must equal 100.

10 to 40 in

If the PPS field is 20, the sum of the Make (msec) and Break
(msec) fields must equal 50.

increments of
5

1288

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

PPM

For CO, DIOD, FX, PCOL, and WATS trunks. This field appears when the
Direction field is outgoing or two-way.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y if Periodical Pulse Metering (PPM) pulses should be
collected from the public network to determine call cost. If
this field is y, the Frequency field appears.

Valid entries

Usage

10

Enter the rate (pulses per second) at which outgoing rotary
pulses are sent over this trunk group.

PPS

20
NOTE:

The TN439, TN458, TN497, TN747Bv12 (or later), and TN767 circuit
packs only send rotary pulses at 10 pps.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1289

Screen reference

Field descriptions for page 4

This screen appears when the Direction field on Page 1 is outgoing or two-way
and the ATMS field is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
The figure below shows a common configuration for page 4 of the Trunk Group
screen when the Group Type field is co. This screen is only an example, and the
fields shown below may change or disappear according to specific field settings.
add trunk-group next

Page 4 of x
ATMS THRESHOLDS
TTL Type: _________
Far End Test No: __________________
TTL Vendor: ______________
TTL Contact: ______________________
Trunk Vendor: ____________
Trunk Contact: ___________________
Trunk Length: _____
MARGINAL
UNACCEPTABLE
Min
Max
Min
Max
1004 Hz Loss: __
__
__
__

404 Hz Loss:
2804 Hz Loss:
Maximum C Message Noise:
Maximum C Notched Noise:
Minimum SRL-HI:
Minimum SRL-LO:
Minimum ERL:

-Dev
_
_

+Dev
_
_

-Dev
_
_

__
__
__
__
__

+Dev
_
_
__
__
__
__
__

Allow ATMS Busyout, Error Logging and Alarming? _
Maximum Percentage of Trunks Which Can Be Removed from Service by ATMS: __

Screen 298. CO Trunk Group ATMS Thresholds

! CAUTION:
Customers: Do not change fields on this page without assistance from Avaya
or your network service provider.
Far-End Test No.

1290

Valid entries

Usage

1 to 16 digits

Enter the access number dialed to reach the terminating test
line (TTL).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Trunk Contact
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 25
alphanumeric
characters

Enter the name and/or telephone number of someone from
the trunk vendor who can be contacted in the event of
problems with the trunks.

Trunk Length

This field is not required. Since noise on a trunk increases with the length of the
trunk, however, this information may be useful,
Valid entries

Usage

Use this field to record the length of the trunk group in kilometers or miles.
0–4 digits
followed by k

Shows the length in kilometers.

0–4 digits
followed m

Shows the length in miles.

Trunk Vendor
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 22
alphanumeric
characters

Enter the name of the vendor providing service over this
trunk group (the company to notify in the event of problems
with the trunks in this trunk group).

TTL Contact
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 25
alphanumeric
characters

Enter the name and/or telephone number of someone from
the TTL vendor who can be contacted in the event of
problems with the terminating test line.

TTL Type

Specifies the type of terminating test line (TTL) selected for testing trunks. The
TTL type determines what ATMS tests can be completed and thus which
threshold values need to be administered.
Valid entries

Usage

105-w-rl

105 with return loss
105 without return loss
high-level tone source

105-wo-rl
high-lts

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1291

Screen reference

Valid entries

Usage

low-lts

low-level tone source
100 type
102 type

100
102

The following table explains the differences between types of terminating test
lines:
Type TTL

Description

Example

105-w-rl

Full range of 18
measurements or some
defaults for return loss used
(56A)

TN771B, ZLC12 and
SN261B circuit packs
and new 56A
mini-responder

105-wo-rl

Cannot return default values
for far-end return loss

Older 56A
mini-responder

high-level-tone

Sends a fixed sequence of
tones at 0 dBm

ZLC12 and SN261B
circuit packs

low-level-tone

Sends a fixed sequence of
tones at -16dBm

SN261B circuit pack

100

Up to 5 measurements that
sends a 1004 Hz tone then a
quiet termination

102

One measurement that
sends a 1004 Hz tone

The far-end switch containing the TTL may be any of the following:
■

System 85 R2 switch, equipped with the Maintenance/Test Board
(TN771B)

■

System 75 R1V2 and beyond, all of which contain the circuitry required to
perform the TTL function

■

System 85 R2 switch, equipped with the Analog/Digital Facility Test
Circuit (ADFTC, SN261)

■

DIMENSION FP8, equipped with the Analog Facility Test Circuit (AFTC,
ZLC-12)

■

Central Office switches, equipped with various TTL equipment that
provide 100, 102, or 105 test line capabilities (56A)

Other vendors’ switches may be supported if compatible test lines are provided by
these switches.

1292

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Four different versions of the ATMS Threshold Administration page can appear
depending upon the measurements allowed by the TTL type selected. The four
possibilities are:
1. 105-w-rl and 105-wo-rl — All thresholds appear.
2. high-lts and low-lts — All thresholds (except maximum C-notched noise)
appear.
3. 100 — All thresholds (except maximum c-notched noise, 404Hz loss, and
2804 Hz loss) appear.
4. 102 — Only 1004 Hz loss threshold appears.
TTL Vendor
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 22
alphanumeric
characters

Enter the name of the vendor supplying the terminating test
line (TTL).

MARGINAL / UNACCEPTABLE
Allow ATMS Busyout, Error Logging and
Alarming
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow ATMS error logging and alarming (subject
to filtering depending on the service organization used to
deal with alarms).

Marginal Threshold - -Dev - 404 Hz Loss
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the maximum negative deviation of measured loss at
404 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone noise level (in dB)
allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Smaller
dB values are more restrictive.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1293

Screen reference

Marginal Threshold - +Dev - 404 Hz Loss
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the maximum positive deviation of measured loss at
404 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB) allowed
before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Smaller dB
values are more restrictive.

Marginal Threshold - -Dev - 2804 Hz
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the maximum negative deviation of measured loss at
2804 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB)
allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Smaller
dB values are more restrictive.

Marginal Threshold - +Dev - 2804 Hz
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the maximum positive deviation of measured loss at
2804 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB)
allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance.
Smaller dB values are more restrictive.

Marginal Threshold - Max - 1004 Hz Loss
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 21

Enter the maximum signal loss allowed for a 1004 Hz test
tone (in dB) before a trunk is reported as out of tolerance. A
smaller dB value is more restrictive.

Marginal Threshold - Min -1004 Hz Loss

1294

Valid entries

Usage

-2 to 21

Enter the minimum signal loss allowed for a 1004 Hz test
tone (in dB) before a trunk is reported as out of tolerance. A
larger dB value is more restrictive.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Marginal Threshold - Minimum ERL
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 40

Enter the minimum low-frequency echo return loss in dB
allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Larger
values are more restrictive.

Marginal Threshold - Maximum C Message
Noise
Valid entries

Usage

15 to 55

Enter the maximum C-message noise phone as measured
within the voice band frequency range (500 to 2500 Hz)
allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Smaller
values are more restrictive.

Marginal Threshold - Maximum C Notched
Noise
Valid entries

Usage

34 to 74

Enter the maximum C-notched signal dependent noise
interference in dBmC allowed before reporting a trunk as out
of tolerance. Smaller values are more restrictive.

Marginal Threshold - Minimum SRL-HI
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 40

Enter the minimum high-frequency signaling return loss in
dB allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance.
Larger values are more restrictive.

Marginal Threshold - Minimum SRL-LO
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 40

Enter the minimum low-frequency signaling return loss in dB
allowed before reporting a trunk as out of tolerance. Larger
values are more restrictive.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1295

Screen reference

Maximum Percentage of Trunks Which Can Be
Removed From Service by ATMS

Appears when the Allow ATMS Busyout, Error Logging and Alarming field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

0, 25, 50, 75,
100

Enter the highest percentage of trunks from the trunk group
that can be removed from service at one time because of
unacceptable transmission measurement results.

Unacceptable Threshold - -Dev - 404 Hz
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the maximum negative deviation of measured loss at
404 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB)
allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Smaller
dB values are more restrictive.

Unacceptable Threshold - +Dev - 404 Hz
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the maximum positive deviation of measured loss at
404 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB) allowed
before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Smaller dB values
are more restrictive.

Unacceptable Threshold - -Dev - 2804 Hz
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the maximum negative deviation of measured loss at
2804 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB)
allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Smaller
dB values are more restrictive.

Unacceptable Threshold - +Dev - 2804 Hz

1296

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the maximum positive deviation of measured loss at
2804 Hz from the 1004 Hz test tone loss level (in dB)
allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Smaller
dB values are more restrictive.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Unacceptable Threshold - Max - 1004 Hz Loss
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 21

Enter the maximum signal loss allowed for a 1004 Hz test
tone (in dB) before a trunk is reported as unacceptable. A
smaller dB value is more restrictive.

Unacceptable Threshold - Min - 1004 Hz Loss
Valid entries

Usage

-2 to 21

Enter the minimum signal loss allowed for a 1004 Hz test
tone (in dB) before a trunk is reported as unacceptable. A
larger dB value is more restrictive.

Unacceptable Threshold - Maximum C Message
Noise
Valid entries

Usage

15 to 55

Enter the maximum C-message noise interference in dBmC
above reference noise terminating on a phone as measured
within the voice band frequency range (500 to 2500 Hz)
allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Smaller
values are more restrictive.

Unacceptable Threshold - Maximum C Notched
Noise
Valid entries

Usage

34 to 74

Enter the maximum C-notched signal dependent noise
interference in dBmC allowed before reporting a trunk as
unacceptable. Smaller values are more restrictive.

Unacceptable Threshold - Minimum ERL
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 40

Enter the minimum low-frequency echo return loss in dB
allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Larger
values are more restrictive.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1297

Screen reference

Unacceptable Threshold - Minimum SRL-HI
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 40

Enter the minimum high-frequency signaling return loss in
dB allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Larger
values are more restrictive.

Unacceptable Threshold - Minimum SRL-LO
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 40

Enter the minimum low-frequency signaling return loss in
dB allowed before reporting a trunk as unacceptable. Larger
values are more restrictive.

Field descriptions for page 5

The total number of pages, and the first page of Group Member Assignments,
vary depending on whether the Administrable Timers and ATMS Thresholds
pages display.

add trunk-group next
TRUNK GROUP
Administered Members(min/max): xxx/yyy
Total Administered Members: xxx
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Port
Code Sfx
1: _______
2: _______
3: _______
4: _______
5: _______
6: _______
7: _______
8: _______
9: _______
10: _______
11: _______
12: _______
13: _______
14: _______
15: _______

Name
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________

Night
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Mode
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________

Type
Ans Delay
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____
_______ ____

Screen 299. Group Member Assignments

Administered Members (min/max)

This display-only field shows the minimum and maximum member numbers that
have been administered for this trunk group.

1298

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Ans Delay

! CAUTION:
Customers should not attempt to administer this field. Please contact your
Avaya representative for assistance
Valid entries

Usage

20 to 5100 in

Specifies the length of time (in ms) your switch will wait
before it sends answer supervision for incoming calls on tie
trunks using the TN722A or later, TN760 (B, C, or D),
TN767, TN464 (any suffix), TN437, TN439, TN458, or
TN2140 circuit packs.

increments of
20

blank

Same as setting the field to zero.

This delay serves two purposes:
■

It ensures that the answer supervision signal is valid and not a secondary
delay-dial or wink-start signal.

■

It ignores momentary off-hook signals resulting from connections made
off-network through certain No. 5 Crossbar CCSA switches as the
connection is being established. Therefore, calls aren’t dropped
inappropriately.

Code

This display-only field shows the type of circuit pack physically installed or
logically administered at the location to which this member is assigned. If no
circuit pack is installed or administered at the port address you enter, the field is
blank.
Mode

This field specifies the signaling mode used on tie trunks with TN722A or later,
TN760B or later, TN767, TN464 (any suffix), TN437, TN439, TN458, or
TN2140 circuit packs. This entry must correspond to associated dip switch
settings on the circuit pack.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1299

Screen reference

! CAUTION:
Customers should not attempt to administer this field. Please contact your
Avaya representative for assistance.
Valid
entries

Usage

e&m

Enter e&m for 6-wire connections that pair 2 signaling wires
with 4 voice wires. You’ll use e&m in the vast majority of
systems in the U.S.

simplex

Enter simplex for 4-wire connections that do not use an
additional signaling pair. This configuration is very rare in the
U.S.

protected

Name

Your vendor, as well as Avaya technical staff, sometimes need to identify specific
trunks to work with your system. Therefore, the name you give to a trunk should
identify the trunk unambiguously.
Valid entries

Usage

Up to 10
characters

Examples of good names:
■

The phone number assigned to incoming trunks

■

The Trunk Circuit Identification number assigned by
your service provider

Night

Use this field only if you want to assign a night service destination to individual
trunks that is different from the group destination entered in the Night Service
field on page 1. Incoming calls are routed to this destination when the system is
placed in night service mode.
Valid entries

Usage

a valid
extension

Enter the extension of the night destination for the trunk.

attd

Enter attd if you want calls to go to the attendant when night
service is active.

blank

1300

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Group

Port

If this trunk is registered as an endpoint in an IP application, this field will display
T00000.
Valid entries

Usage

01 through 44

First and second characters are the cabinet
number.

(DEFINITY R) or
01 through 03
(DEFINITY CSI, SI) or
1 through 64

(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
A through E

Third character is the carrier.

0 through 20

Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number.

01 through 04

Six and seventh characters are the circuit
number.

(Analog TIE trunks)
01 through 31 (R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)
1 through 80

Gateway

(DEFINITY R, CSI) or
1 through 10 (DEFINITY
CSI, SI) or
1 through 250
(S8700 IP-Connect /
S8700 Multi-Connect /
S8300 Media Server)
V1 through V9

Module

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)
01 through 31

Circuit

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)
NOTE:

In DCS networks, trunks must be assigned the same member number at both
nodes.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1301

Screen reference

NOTE:

Members assigned to IP trunk groups will display a value of “T00001.”
Sfx

This display-only field shows the model suffix for the type of circuit pack
physically installed at the location to which this member is assigned. If no circuit
pack is installed at the port address you enter, the field is blank.
Total Administered Members

This display-only field shows the total number of members administered in the
trunk group.
Type

The Type column appears when the Trunk Type field is blank or cont. The Type
column does not display if the Trunk Type field is dis.
This field specifies the signaling type to be used with TN760B (or later release),
TN722 (with any suffix), TN767, TN2140 (when the Trunk Type field is cont),
TN437, TN439, TN464 with any suffix, or TN458 circuit packs.

! CAUTION:
Customers should not attempt to administer this field. Please contact your
Avaya representative for assistance.
Valid entries

Usage

t1-stan

t1-stan (DEFINITY, S8700 IP-Connect)

t1-comp

t1-comp (DEFINITY, S8700 IP-Connect)

t5-rev

(DEFINITY, S8700 IP-Connect) The value of t5 rev is
allowed only for the TN760D vintage 10 or later. When Type
is t5 rev, Mode must be e&m.

type-5

type-5 (DEFINITY, S8700 IP-Connect)

Related topics

See ‘‘Managing trunks’’ on page 411 for instructions on adding and managing
trunk groups.
See ‘‘Trunks and trunk groups’’ on page 1903 for detailed information about all
types of trunk groups except ISDN.

1302

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Uniform Dial Plan Report

See ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1730 for detailed information on Integrated Services
Digital Network.

Uniform Dial Plan Report
.
list uniform-dialplan
UNIFORM DIAL PLAN REPORT
Matching Pattern
2
4
43659
6
73012
74100

Len
4
5
5
6
5
5

Del
0
1
1
1
1
0

Insert Digits
817
334
928

81

Net
aar
aar
aar
ext
enp
ars

Conv
n
n
y
n
n
y

Node Num

31

Screen 300. Uniform Dial Plan Report screen

Matching Pattern
The number you want the switch to match to dialed numbers.
Len
The number of user-dialed digits the system collects to match to the dialed string.
Del
The number of digits deleted before routing the call.
Insert Digits
The digits that will be inserted at the beginning of the dialed number.
Net
The switch network used to analyze the converted number.
Conv
Indicates whether additional digit conversion is allowed.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1303

Screen reference

Node Num
The Extension Number Portability (ENP) node number.

Uniform Dial Plan Table
The Uniform Dialing Plan field must be y on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen before you can administer this table.
The UDP provides a common 3- to 7-digit dial plan length — or a combination of
extension lengths — that can be shared among a group of switches. Additionally,
UDP can be used alone to provide uniform dialing between two or more private
switching systems without ETN, DCS, or Main/Satellite/Tributary configurations.
See ‘‘Uniform Dial Plan’’ on page 1913 for more information on Uniform Dial
Plans.

change uniform-dialplan 0

Page 1 of 2
UNIFORM DIAL PLAN TABLE
Percent Full:

Matching
Pattern Len Del
2
4
0
4
5
1
43659
5
1
623
3
3
73012
5
1
74100
5
0
8
5
0
911
3
0
_____
_
_
_____
_
_
_____
_
_
_____
_
_
_____
_
_
_____
_
_

Insert
Digits
817
334
928
5380
81

____
____
____
____
____
____

Node
Net Conv Num
aar n
aar n
aar y
aar n
enp n
31
ars y
ext n
ars n
___ _
__
___ _
__
___ _
__
___ _
__
___ _
__
___ _
__

2

Matching
Insert
Node
Pattern Len Del Digits Net Conv Num

Screen 301. Uniform Dial Plan Table

1304

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Uniform Dial Plan Table

Conv
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to allow additional digit conversion

Valid entries

Usage

0–3

Enter the number of digits to delete before routing the
call. This number must be less than or equal to the
number entered in the Len field.

Del

Insert Digits
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9

Enter the digits that replace the deleted portion of the
dialed number. Leave this field blank to simply delete the
digits.

(1 to 4 digits)

Len
Valid entries

Usage

3–7

Enter the number of user-dialed digits the system
collects to match to this Matching Pattern. This number
must be greater than or equal to the number entered in
the Matching Pattern field.

Matching Pattern
Valid entries

Usage

0–9

Enter the number you want the switch to match to dialed
numbers.

(1 to 7 digits)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1305

Screen reference

Net

Enter the switch network used to analyze the converted number.
Valid entries

Usage

aar, ars, enp, ext

The converted digit-string will be routed either as an
extension number or via its converted AAR address, its
converted ARS address, or its ENP node number.
If you enter enp, you must enter the ENP node number in
the Node Num field. The Insert Digits field must be blank,
and Conv must be n.

Node Num

This is the ENP (Extension Number Portability) Node Number.
Valid entries

Usage

1–999

Enter the ENP node number.

Percent Full

Displays the percentage (0 to 100) of the memory resources allocated for the
uniform dial plan data that are currently being used.

Vector Directory Number
This screen defines vector directory numbers (VDN) for the Call Vectoring
feature. A VDN is an extension number used to access a call vector. Each VDN is
mapped to one call vector.
VDNs are software extension numbers (that is, not assigned to physical
equipment). A VDN is accessed via direct dial CO trunks mapped to the VDN
(incoming destination or night service extension), DID trunks, and LDN calls.
The VDN may be Night Destination for LDN.
See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert
Agent Selection (EAS) Guide for more information.

1306

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Vector Directory Number

Field descriptions for page 1

change vdn 5000

Page

1 of

1

VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER
Extension:
Name:
Vector Number:
Attendant Vectoring:
Meet-me Conferencing?
Allow VDN Override?
COR:
TN:
Measured:
Acceptable Service Level (sec):
VDN of Origin Annc. Extension:
1st Skill:
2nd Skill:
3rd Skill:

5000
234
n
n
n
59
1
none
301

Screen 302. Vector Directory Number

1st/2nd/3rd Skill

Only appears when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
Expert Agent Selection (EAS) field is y and if, on this screen, the Meet-me
Conferencing field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 999 or
blank

Enter the desired Skill numbers in each field.

Acceptable Service Level (sec)

Only appears when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
BCMS/VuStats Service Level field is y and the Measured field is internal or
both.
Valid entries

Usage

0 to 9999 seconds

Enter the number of seconds within which calls to this
VDN should be answered. This will allow BCMS to
print out a percentage of calls that were answered
within the specified time.

Allow VDN Override

This field appears if the Meet-me Conferencing field is n. This entry affects the
operation of an agent’s display and certain options/data assigned to the VDN
when a call is routed through several VDNs.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1307

Screen reference

For Expert Agent Selection (EAS), if this field is y on the original VDN, the Skills
of the new VDN will be used. If this field is n on the original VDN, the Skills of
the original VDN will be used.
For Best Service Routing (BSR), if this field is y on the original VDN, the BSR
Application and Available Agent Strategy of the new VDN will be used. If this
field is n on the original VDN, the BSR Application and Available Agent Strategy
of the original VDN will be used.
Valid entries

Usage

y

The name of the VDN appearing on the terminating display
depends on the administration and chaining of the
subsequent VDNs and the AUDIX mail for the last VDN is
accessed.

n

The name of this VDN appears on the agent’s display and
the VDN’s AUDIX mail is accessed. If any subsequent
VDNs are used to process this call, their names will not
appear on the terminating display and the AUDIX mail for
the original VDN is accessed.

Attendant Vectoring

This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen,
the Attendant Vectoring is y and if, on this screen, the Meet-me Conferencing
field is n. This field identifies if the vector you are defining is an attendant
vectoring VDN.
Valid entries

Usage

y

Enter y so the vector is an attendant vector. This entry will
dynamically change the rest of the screen to eliminate field
options available with other types of vectors. Default when,
on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, both
the Vectoring (Basic) and Vectoring (Prompting) fields are
n. No changes allowed to this field.

n

Default when, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options
screen, the Vectoring (Basic) and/or Vectoring (Prompting)
fields are y.

COR

Specifies the class of restriction (COR) of the VDN.

1308

Valid entries

Usage

0 to 95

Enter a 1- or 2-digit number. This field cannot be blank.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Vector Directory Number

Extension

This is a display-only field when using an administration command such as add or
change to access the screen. The extension is a 1- to 7-digit number that starts
with a valid first digit and length as defined by the System’s dial plan.
Measured

This field appears if the Meet-me Conferencing field is n. Used to collect
measurement data for this VDN. Data may be collected for reporting by BCMS or
CMS.
NOTE:

On the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the BCMS field
must be y for the Measured field to be set to internal or both. In
addition, the appropriate CMS release must be administered on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen if this field is being
changed to external or both.
Valid entries

Usage

internal

Data will be measured internally by BCMS.

external

Data will be measured internally by CMS.

both

Data will be measured internally by both BCMS and CMS.

none

Data will not be measured.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1309

Screen reference

Meet-me Conference

This field appears only if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen,
the Enhanced Conferencing field is y. This field determines if the VDN is a
Meet-me Conference VDN.
NOTE:

If the VDN extension is part of your DID block, external users will be able
to access the conference VDN. If the VDN extension is not part of your DID
block, only internal callers on the your network (including DCS or QSIG) or
remote access callers can access the conference VDN.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Enter y to enable Meet-me Conference for this VDN. If
Meet-me Conference is y, only Extension, Name, Vector
Number, Meet-me Conference, COR, and TN fields display
and the fields for page 2 change.
Both Attendant Vectoring and Meet-me Conference cannot be
enabled at the same time.
If Enhanced Conferencing is y, but no other vectoring options
are enabled, only Meet-me Conference vectors can be assigned.

Name

This is an optional field that need not contain any data. It is the name associated
with the VDN.
Valid entries

Usage

Enter up to a 27-character
alphanumeric name that
identifies the VDN.

The name may be truncated on agents’ displays
depending on the application. When
information is forwarded with an interflowed
call, only the first 15 characters are sent

Service Objective

Appears when Skill and Centre Vu Advocate are y on the Feature Related System
Parameters screen.

1310

Valid entries

Usage

1-9999

Enter the service objective.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Vector Directory Number

TN

Specifies the Tenant Partition number for this VDN.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 20

For R servers.

1 to 100

For S8700 IP-Connect.

VDN of Origin Annc. Extension

Data for this field appears only when, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the VDN of Origin Announcement field is y and, on
this screen, the Meet-me Conferencing field is n.
Valid entries

Usage

VDN
extension

Enter the extension number of the VDN of Origin
announcement.

Vector Number

Identification number that specifies a particular call vector that is accessed
through the VDN.
Valid entries

Usage

1 to 999

Enter a 1- to 3-digit vector number. This field cannot be
blank.

Field descriptions for page 2

change vdn 5000

Page

2 of

2

VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER
AUDIX Name:
Messaging Server Name:
Return Destination:
VDN Timed ACW Interval:
BSR Application:
BSR Available Agent Strategy: 1st-found

Display VDN for Route-To DAC?
VDN Override for ISDN Trunk ASAI Messages?

Screen 303. Vector Directory Number

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1311

Screen reference

AUDIX Name

Only appears for DEFINITY R and S8700 IP-Connect configurations. If this
VDN is associated with the AUDIX vector, enter the name of the AUDIX
machine as it appears in the Node Names screen.
BSR Application

To use multi-site Best Service Routing with this VDN, specify an application plan
for the VDN. This field appears if, on the System Parameters Customer-Options
screen, the Lookahead Interflow (LAI) and Vectoring (Best Service Routing)
fields are y.
Valid entries

Usage

1-255 or

Enter a 1- to 3-digit number. For DEFINITY R, CSI, SI.

blank
1-511 or

blank

Enter a 1- to 3-digit number. For S8300 Media Server,
S8700 IP-Connect, and S8700 Multi-Connect.

BSR Available Agent Strategy

The available agent strategy determines how Best Service Routing identifies the
“best” split or skill to service a call in an agent surplus situation. To use Best
Service Routing with this VDN, enter an agent selection strategy in this field.
This field only appears if, on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen,
the Vectoring (Best Service Routing) field is y.
Valid entries

Usage

1st-found
UCD-LOA

Can be set only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Agent Allocation field is y.

UCD-MIA
EAD-LOA

Can be set only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Agent Allocation field is y.

EAD-MIA

Can be set only if, on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen, the Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
field is y.

Display VDN for Route-To DAC

This field addresses situations where one of the following conditions is in effect:
■

1312

A route-to number or route-to digits vector command routes an EAS
direct agent call, with coverage option set to y

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Vector Directory Number

■

An adjunct routing step routes a direct agent call, with the coverage option
set to y

For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call
Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Messaging Server Name

Only appears for R and S8700 IP-Connect configurations. Enter the name of the
AUDIX machine as it appears on the Node Names screen.
Observe an Agent Answer

This field allows for a service observer to start observing a call to the VDN when
the call is delivered to the agent/station.
Valid entries

Usage

y/n

Return Destination
Valid entries

Usage

VDN
extension or
blank

Enter the VDN extension number to which an incoming
trunk call will be routed if it returns to vector processing
after the agent drops the call.

VDN Override for ISDN Trunk ASAI Messages
This field appears if, on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, the
ASAI Link Core Capabilities field is y. This field can be set to y only when the
Allow VDN Override field on this screen is y.
Valid entries

Usage

y

When an incoming call is routed, the “Called Number”
information sent in the “Call Offered,” “Altering,” “Queued,”
and “Connect” ASAI events and the “Adjunct Route Request”
ASAI message, is the “active VDN” extension associated with
the call.

n

The “Called Number” information sent for the ASAI event
notification and adjunct-request messages does not change for a
ISDN-PRI trunk. It is always the number in the Called Number
IE sent in the incoming ISDN call’s SETUP message.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1313

Screen reference

VDN Timed ACW Interval

When a value is entered in this field, an agent in auto-in work mode who receives
a call from this VDN is automatically placed into After Call Work (ACW) when
the call drops. When the administered time is over, the agent automatically
becomes available. This field has priority over the Timed ACW Interval field on
the Hunt Group screen.
Valid entries

Usage

1-9999 or

Enter the number of seconds the agent should remain in
ACW following the call.

blank

Field descriptions for page 2

change vdn 5000

Page

2 of 2

VECTOR DIRECTORY NUMBER
MEET-ME CONFERENCE PARAMETERS
Conference Access Code:
Conference Controller:

Screen 304. Vector Directory Number (if the Meet-me Conference field is y)

Conference Access Code

This field appears only if the Meet-me Conference field is y.

! SECURITY ALERT:
You should always assign an access code to a Meet-me Conference VDN.

1314

Valid entries

Usage

6-digit
number or
blank

Enter a 6-digit access code for the Meet-me Conference
VDN. If you do not want an access code, leave blank.
Once an access code is assigned, an asterisk displays in this
field for subsequent change, display, or remove operations
by all users except the “init” superuser login.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Vector Directory Number

Conference Controller

This field appears only if the Meet-me Conference field is y. This field controls
which user is allowed to change the access code for a Meet-me Conference VDN
using a feature access code. This can be a local user or someone dialing in via
remote access trunks.
Valid entries

Usage

extension
number or
blank

If an extension number is entered, only a user at that
extension can change the access code for that VDN using a
feature access code.
If this field is blank, any station user that is assigned with
console permissions can change the access code for that
VDN using a feature access code.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1315

Screen reference

1316

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Command reference

Before you start
MultiVantage software utilizes the following command syntax:
action object qualifier

Use the commands in the tables below to access each administration screen.
Brackets [ ] indicate the qualifier is optional. Single quotes (‘ ’) indicate the text
inside the quote must be entered exactly as shown or an abbreviated form of the
word may be entered. MAX is the maximum number available in your system
configuration. Some qualifiers aren’t available on all systems.
The display capacity command is listed in the Maintenance Manual.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 1317

Command reference

AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table

1318

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

aar analysis

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’
[‘min’(1-MAX)]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

change

ars analysis

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’
[‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’)] [‘min’(1-MAX)]
(DEFINITY R)

display

aar analysis

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’,
[‘min’ (1-MAX)] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

ars analysis

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’
[‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’)] [‘min’(1-MAX)]
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

list

aar analysis

Enter [‘start’ string] [‘count’ 1-MAX]
[‘route’(1-MAX or r1-r32)], [‘node’ (1-MAX)],
[‘to-node’ (1-MAX), [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

ars analysis

Enter [‘start’ string], [‘route’(1-MAX or r1-r32
or p1-p2000)], [‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’],
[‘node’ (1-MAX)], [‘to-node’ (1-MAX),
[‘count’ 1-MAX], [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect / S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

aar route-chosen

Enter dialed number, [‘location’ (1-MAX or
‘all’], [‘partition’ (1-8)], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

ars route-chosen

Enter dialed number, [‘location’ (1-MAX or
‘all’], [‘partition’ (1-8)], [‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

aar digit-conversion

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

change

aar digit-conversion

Enter [‘start’ matching pattern] [‘count’
(1-MAX)] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect, S8700
IP-Connect)

change

ars digit-conversion

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’,
[‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’)]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

change

ars digit-conversion

Enter digits between 0 to 9, [‘location’
(1-MAX or ‘all’)]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

aar digit-conversion

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

aar digit-conversion

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

ars digit-conversion

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’,
[‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’)] [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

ars digit-conversion

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’
[‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’)]
(S8700 IP-Connect)

display

ars digit-conversion

Enter digits between 0 to 9, ‘*’, ‘x’ or ‘X’
[‘location’ (1-MAX or ‘all’)] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1319

Command reference

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

aar digit-conversion

Enter [‘start’ matching pattern] [‘count’
(1-MAX)] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

ars digit-conversion

Enter [‘start’ matching pattern] [‘count’
(1-MAX)], [‘location (1-MAX or ‘all’)],
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

ars digit-conversion

Enter [‘start’ matching pattern]
[‘count’ (1-MAX)], [‘location (1-MAX or
‘all’)], [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Abbreviated Dialing Lists

1320

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter dial code first digit(s): (3
digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

add

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter dial code first digit(s): (3
digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99
[‘list’ 1-2]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter dial code first digit(s): (3
digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99
(DEFINITY R)

change

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter dial code first digit(s): (3
digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99
[‘list’ 1-2]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter dial code first digit(s): (3
digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Action

Object

Qualifier

display

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter dial code first digit(s): (3
digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99
[‘list’ 1-2] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter dial code first digit(s): (3
digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

remove

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter dial code first digit(s): (3
digit list) 0-9, (4 digit list) 00-99
[‘list’ 1-2] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect)

remove

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

Enter form number dial code
first digit(s): (3 dgt) 0-9, (4 dgt)
00-99 [‘list’ 1-2]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

abbreviated-dialing group

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

abbreviated-dialing group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY RCSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

abbreviated-dialing group

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

abbreviated-dialing group

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1321

Command reference

1322

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

abbreviated-dialing group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

abbreviated-dialing group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

abbreviated-dialing group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

abbreviated-dialing personal

Extension with personal list and
‘list’ (1-3)
(DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

abbreviated-dialing personal

Extension with personal list and
‘list’ (1-3) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

abbreviated-dialing personal

Extension with personal list and
‘list’ (1-3) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

list

abbreviated-dialing personal

[‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

abbreviated-dialing personal

[‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

abbreviated-dialing system

change

abbreviated-dialing system

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Action

Object

Qualifier

display

abbreviated-dialing system

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]

display

abbreviated-dialing system

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

abbreviated-dialing system

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons

— (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

change

abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons

— (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons

— (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1323

Command reference

Access Endpoint

1324

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

access-endpoint

xxxx (ext. or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

access-endpoint

xxxx (assigned ext.)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

change

access-endpoint

xxxx (ext.)
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

access-endpoint

xxxx (assigned ext.) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

access-endpoint

xxxx (ext.) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

duplicate

access-endpoint

xxxx (ext.)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

remove

access-endpoint

xxxx (ext.)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

access-endpoint

xxxx (starting ext.) [‘count’ 1-MAX] [‘print’
or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

access-endpoint

xxxx [‘count’ 1-MAX] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Administered Connection
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

administered-connection

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

administered-connection

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

administered-connection

1-MAX (or ‘all’) [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

administered-connection

1-MAX (or ‘all’) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

duplicate

administered-connection

administered-connection number,
[‘count’ (1-MAX]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

administered-connection

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

administered-connection

starting number, [‘count’ 1-MAX]
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

administered-connection

[‘count’ 1-MAX] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Administration Change Notification

Action

Object

Qualifier

notify

history

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1325

Command reference

Alias Station
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

alias station

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

alias station

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

alias station

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Alphanumeric Dialing Table

1326

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

alphanumeric-dial-table

[‘entry ], [‘next’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

alphanumeric-dial-table

[‘entry ], [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

alphanumeric-dial-table

[‘entry ], [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Announcements/Audio Sources
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

announcements

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

integ-annc-brd-loc

(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

announcements

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

announcements

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

integrated-annc-boards

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

integrated-annc-boards

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

erase

announcements

board-location [cabinet (1-3); carrier
(A-E); slot (0-20) OR
gateway (1-10); module (V1-V9)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

integrated-annc-boards

board-location [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)
board-location [cabinet (1-3); carrier
(A-E); slot (0-20) OR
gateway (1-10); module (V1-V9) [‘print’
or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

555-233-506

integrated-annc-boards

board-location
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

1327

Command reference

Action

Object

Qualifier

copy

announcements

[‘SPE-A’, or ‘SPE-B’] [‘target device,
[‘disk’ or ‘removable-media’]]
(DEFINITY R)

restore

announcements

[[‘to cabinet (1-44]; carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20), [‘disk’ or ‘removable-media’]]
(DEFINITY R)
[[‘to cabinet (1-3]; carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20)] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

save

announcements

[‘SPE-A’, ‘SPE-B’, ‘active’, ‘standby’,
‘either’, ‘both’] [‘disk’ or
‘removable-media’], [‘from’ [cabinet
(1-44); carrier (A-E); slot (00-20)]
(DEFINITY R)
[‘spe-active’, ‘spe-standby’] [‘from’
[cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20)] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

1328

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

ARS Toll Table
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

ars toll

n:xxx (1–MAX:office code) n:xyy: n(1-MAX); ‘:’;
x(2-MAX;y(0-MAX);y(0-MAX)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

ars toll

n:xxx (1–MAX:office code) n:xyy: n(1-MAX); ‘:’;
x(2-MAX;y(0-MAX);y(0-MAX) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

ars toll

n:xxx (1–MAX:office code) n:xyy: n(1-MAX); ‘:’;
x(2-MAX;y(0-MAX);y(0-MAX) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

ATM Board
Action

Object

Qualifier

status

atm board

board location [‘print’]
(DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

Attendant Console
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

attendant

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect))

change

attendant

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect))

display

attendant

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

attendant

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

attendant

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1329

Command reference

Authorization Code — COR Mapping
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

authorization-code

auth (4-13 digit number)
(DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

authorization-code

auth (4-13 digit number), [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

authorization-code

auth (4-13 digit number) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

authorization-code

none
(DEFINITY R)

list

authorization-code

[‘start’ code], [‘count’ n], [‘cor’ x], [‘to-cor’
x], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

authorization-code

[‘start’ code], [‘count’ n], [‘cor’ x], [‘to-cor’
x], [‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

Best Service Routing

1330

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

best-service-routing

1-MAX (or ‘next’) (DEFINITY R, SI, CSI)

change

best-service-routing

1-MAX (DEFINITY R, SI, CSI)

display

best-service-routing

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, SI, CSI)

list

best-service-routing

Enter starting number, [‘count’ (1-MAX)],
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, SI, CSI)

remove

best-service-routing

1-MAX (DEFINITY R, SI, CSI)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Boot Image
Action

Object

Qualifier

get

boot-image

The physical location of the circuit pack
[cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20)
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

get

boot-image

Board location [cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20), [‘print’]
DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

set

boot-image

Board [cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20),
‘image’ (1 or 2)
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

set

boot-image

The physical location of the circuit pack
[cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot (0-20),
‘image’ (1 or 2)
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)
1 (Directs the system to use the Image 1
firmware file)
2 (Directs the system to use the Image 2
firmware file)

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

bulletin-board

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

bulletin-board

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

bulletin-board

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Bulletin Board

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1331

Command reference

Button Type
Action

Object

Qualifier

list usage

button-type

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

list usage

button-type crss-alert

[‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list usage

button-type hunt-ns

[hunt-grp’ x], [‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list usage

button-type night-serv

[‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list usage

button-type trunk-ns

[‘trunk-grp’ x], [‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700
Multi-Connect) (not for S8700
IP-Connect)

Call Vector

1332

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

vector

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

vector

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

vector

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

CAMA Numbering Format
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

cama-numbering

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SIR, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

cama-numbering

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

cama-numbering

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

CDR System Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters cdr

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters cdr

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters cdr

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Class of Restriction
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

cor

0-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SIR, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

cor

0-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

cor

0-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

cor

[‘cor’ x] [‘to-cor’], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

cor

[‘cor’ x] [‘to-cor’], [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1333

Command reference

Class of Service
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

cos

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

cos

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

cos

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect S8700 Multi-Connect)

Code Calling IDs
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

paging code-calling-ids

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

paging code-calling-ids

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

paging code-calling-ids

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Command Permission Categories

1334

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

permissions

login-id
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) (not for S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

permissions

login-id [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

permissions

login-id [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Console-Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

console-parameters

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

console-parameters

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

console-parameters

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Coverage Answer Group
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

coverage answer-group

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

coverage answer-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

coverage answer-group

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

coverage answer-group

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

list

coverage answer-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x] [‘name’ x]
[‘count’ n][‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

coverage answer-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x] [‘name’ x]
[‘count’ n][‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

coverage answer-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1335

Command reference

Coverage Path
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

coverage path

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

change

coverage path

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

display

coverage path

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

coverage path

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect)

list

coverage path

[‘path’ x] [‘to-path’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

coverage path

[‘path’ x] [‘to-path’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘schedule’] (
S8700 IP-Connect)

remove

coverage path

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

Coverage Time of Day
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

change

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

remove

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

List Crm-Features

1336

Action

Object

list

crm-features

Issue 5 October 2002

Qualifier

555-233-506

Before you start

CTI-Link
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

cti-link

 (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

busyout

cti-link

 (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

change

cti-link


(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

display

cti-link

 [‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

display

cti-link

 [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

cti-link

[cti-link number 1-MAX], [‘count’ n], [print or
schedule]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

cti-link

[cti-link number 1-MAX], [‘count n],
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

usage cti-link

[cti-link number 1-MAX], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

usage cti-link

1-MAX
(not for DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect)

remove

cti-link


(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

test

cti-link

 [‘long’ or ‘short’] [‘repeat’
(1-100) or ‘clear’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1337

Command reference

Data Modules
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

data-module

extension (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

data-module

extension
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

data-module

extension [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

data-module

extension [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

data-module

[‘ext’ x] [‘to-ext’ x][‘name’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

data-module

[‘ext’ x] [‘to-ext’ x][‘name’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

set

time

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)

display

time

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

time

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect)

Date and Time

1338

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Daylight Savings Rules
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

daylight-savings-rules

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

daylight-savings-rules

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

daylight-savings-rules

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

isdn
dcs-qsig-tsc-gateway

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

isdn
dcs-qsig-tsc-gateway

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

isdn
dcs-qsig-tsc-gateway

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Dial Plan Analysis Table
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

dialplan analysis

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

dialplan analysis

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

dialplan analysis

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1339

Command reference

Dial Plan Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

dialplan parameters

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

dialplan parameters

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)*

display

dialplan parameters

[‘schedule’]**
S8700 IP-Connect), S8700 Multi-Connect

*The print option is not valid on S8100, S8300, and S8700 Media Servers.
**The schedule option is not valid on S8100 Media Servers.

1340

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Digit Absorption
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

digit-absorption

0-4
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect),
S8700 Multi-Connect

display

digit-absorption

0-4 [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

digit-absorption

0-4 [‘schedule’] (
S8700 IP-Connect), S8700 Multi-Connect

Digit String
Action

Object

Qualifier

list usage

digit-string

Enter string (0-9, +?*#~prwWms)
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list usage

digit-string

Enter string (0-9, +?*#~prwWms)
[‘schedule’] (
S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Display-Messages Button Labels
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

display-message button-labels

(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

display-message button-labels

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

DLG CTI Link
Action

Object

Qualifier

status

dlg cti-link

[‘print’]

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1341

Command reference

DLG Interface
Action

Object

Qualifier

status

dlg interface

[‘print’]

DS1 Circuit Pack

1342

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

ds1

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9)
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

add

ds1

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9)
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

change

ds1

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9)
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

ds1

[cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-10)];
module (V1-V9)
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

ds1

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9) [‘print’ or
‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R)

display

ds1

[cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-10)];
module (V1-V9) [‘print’ or
‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

ds1

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

measurements ds1 summary

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9), [‘local’,
‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’], [‘print’
or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R)

list

measurements ds1 summary

[cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-10)];
module (V1-V9), [‘local’,
‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’], [‘print’
or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

measurements ds1 summary

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9), [‘local’,
‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’],
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

list

measurements ds1 log

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9), [‘local’,
‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’], [‘print’
or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R)

list

measurements ds1 log

[cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-10)];
module (V1-V9), [‘local’,
‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’], [‘print’
or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1343

Command reference

1344

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

measurements ds1 log

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9), [‘local’,
‘carrier-local’, or ‘remote’],
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

ds1

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-80)];
module (V1-V9)
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

ds1

[cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot
(00-20); OR [gateway (1-10)];
module (V1-V9)
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Ethernet Option
Action

Object

Qualifier

get

ethernet-option

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20)
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

get

ethernet-option

[cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20),
[‘print’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

set

boot-image

[cabinet (1-44)]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20),
‘image’ (1 or 2)
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Extended Pickup Group
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

extended-pickup
-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

extended-pickup
-group

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

extended-pickup
-group

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

extended-pickup
-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n] [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

extended-pickup
-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1345

Command reference

Extension
Action

Object

Qualifier

list usage

extension

Assigned extension [‘vector’],
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list usage

extension

Assigned extension [‘vector’],
[‘schedule’]
S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Extensions Administered to have an
MCT-Control Button
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

mct-group-extensions

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

extension-type

[extension (starting number)][‘type’ x]
[‘cor’ x][‘to-cor’ x][‘cos’ x]
[‘to-cos’ x][‘count’ n] [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

extension-type

[extension (starting number)][‘type’ x]
[‘cor’ x][‘to-cor’ x][‘cos’ x]
[‘to-cos’ x][‘count’ n] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Extension Type

1346

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Feature Access Code
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

feature-access-codes

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

feature-access-codes

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

feature-access-codes

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Feature-Related System Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters features

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters features

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters features

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Group Paging
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

group-page

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

group-page

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

group-page

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

group-page

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1347

Command reference

History
Action

Object

Qualifier

list

history

Enter [‘date’ MM or MM/DD][‘time’ HH
or HH:MM][‘login’ x][‘action’ x][‘object’
x][‘qualifier’ x], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

history

Enter [‘date’ MM or MM/DD][‘time’ HH
or HH:MM][‘login’ x][‘action’ x][‘object’
x][‘qualifier’ x], [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Holiday Table

1348

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

holiday-table

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

holiday-table

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

holiday-table

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect)

list usage

holiday-table

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list usage

holiday-table

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Hospitality
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters hospitality

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters hospitality

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters hospitality

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Hunt Group
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

hunt-group

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

hunt-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

hunt-group

1-MAX, [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x]
[‘count’ n][‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

hunt-group

1-MAX, [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x]
[‘count’ n][‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

list

hunt-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x] [‘name’
x][‘type’ x][‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’
x][‘count’ n][‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

hunt-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x] [‘name’
x][‘type’ x][‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’
x][‘count’ n][‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

hunt-group

1-MAX (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1349

Command reference

1350

Action

Object

Qualifier

remove

hunt-group

1-MAX
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

list usage

hunt-group

Assigned group (1-MAX),
[‘vector’][‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list usage

hunt-group

Assigned group (1-MAX),
[‘vector’][‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

list

members hunt-group

Assigned hunt group number, [‘ext’
x], [‘to-ext’ x], [‘name’ x], [‘loginid’
x], [‘to-loginid’], [‘logname x],
[‘count’ n], [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

members hunt-group

Assigned hunt group number, [‘ext’
x], [‘to-ext’ x], [‘name’ x], [‘loginid’
x], [‘to-loginid’], [‘logname x],
[‘count’ n], [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Intercom Group
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

intercom-group

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

intercom-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

intercom-group

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI,
SI)

display

intercom-group

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

intercom-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n][‘print’ or
‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

intercom-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

intercom-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) codes
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

ixc-codes

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

ixc-codes

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

ixc-codes

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1351

Command reference

Intra-Switch CDR
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

intra-switch-cdr

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

intra-switch-cdr

extension,
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

intra-switch-cdr

extension, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

intra-switch-cdr

extension, [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

intra-switch-cdr

extension, [‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

intra-switch-cdr

extension, [‘count’ n]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

IP Address
Action

Object

Qualifier

list usage

ip-address

IP address, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list usage

ip-address

IP address, [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

IP Codec Set

1352

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

ip-codec-set

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

ip-codec-set

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

ip-codec-set

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

IP Interfaces
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

ip-interfaces

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

ip-interfaces

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

ip-interfaces

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

IP Network Map
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

ip-network-map

(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

ip-network-map

[‘print’ or “schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

IP Network Regions
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

ip-network
- region

Enter region number (1-MAX)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

ip-network
- region

1-MAX, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

ip-network
- region

1-MAX, [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1353

Command reference

IP Node Name
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

node-name ip

Enter [node-name (up to 15
characters)]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list-usage

node-name

node name, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list-usage

node-name

node name, [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

IP Options System Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

display

system-parameters
ip-options

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters
ip-options

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

ip-route

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

ip-route

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

ip-route

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

ip-route

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

IP Route

1354

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

IP Services
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

ip-services

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

ip-services

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

ip-services

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

ISDN Numbering — Private
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

isdn private-numbering

(DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

isdn private-numbering

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

isdn private-numbering

(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

isdn
public-unknown-numbering

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

isdn
public-unknown-numbering

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

isdn
public-unknown-numbering

(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1355

Command reference

ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack

1356

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-44); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-80)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(DEFINITY R)

add

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-10)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

add

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-250)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-44); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-80)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(DEFINITY R)

change

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-10)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

change

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-250)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

bri-trunk-board

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

display

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Action

Object

Qualifier

remove

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-44); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-80)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(DEFINITY R)

remove

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-3); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-10)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

remove

bri-trunk-board

[cabinet (1-64); carrier (A-E); slot
(0-20) or [gateway (1-250)];
[module (V1-V9)]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1357

Command reference

Language Translations (Display Messages)

1358

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages auto-wakeup-dn-dst

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

display-messages call-identifiers

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages call-identifiers

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages call-identifiers

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

display-messages date-time

—
(DEFINITY R, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages date-time

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages date-time

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

display-messages leave-word-calling

—
(DEFINITY R, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages leave-word-calling

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages leave-word-calling

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

display-messages malicious-call-trace

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages malicious-call-trace

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages malicious-call-trace

[‘schedule’] (
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

display-messages
miscellaneous-features

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages
miscellaneous-features

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages
miscellaneous-features

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

display-messages property-management

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages property-management

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages property-management

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

display-messages softkey-labels

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages softkey-labels

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages softkey-labels

[‘schedule’] (
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1359

Command reference

1360

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

display-messages time-of-day-routing

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages time-of-day-routing

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages time-of-day-routing

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

display-messages transfer-conference

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages transfer-conference

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages transfer-conference

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

display-messages view-buttons

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI,
S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

display-messages view-buttons

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

display-messages view-buttons

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Listed Directory Numbers
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

listed-directory-numbers

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

listed-directory-numbers

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

listed-directory-numbers

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

locations

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

locations

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

locations

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Locations

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1361

Command reference

Login Administration
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

login

login-id
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) (not on S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

login

login-id
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) (not on S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

login

login-id [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI) (not on S8700
Multi-Connect)

Loudspeaker Paging
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

paging loudspeaker

—
(DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

paging loudspeaker

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

paging loudspeaker

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

Measurements Announcements

1362

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

measurements announcements all

[‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’
or ‘last-hour’]
(DEFINITY R, S8700
Multi-Connect)

list

measurements announcements all

[‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’
or ‘last-hour’] [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

measurements announcements
integ-all

[‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’
or ‘last-hour’]
(DEFINITY R, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

measurements announcements
integ-all

[‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’
or ‘last-hour’] [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

measurements-announcementsboard

[‘to cabinet (1-44]; carrier
(A-E); slot (0-20), or [‘disk’ or
[gateway (1-80)]; V9
‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’
or ‘last-hour’ [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

list

measurements-announcementsboard

[‘to cabinet (1-3]; carrier (A-E);
slot (0-20), or [‘disk’ or
[gateway (1-10)]; V9
‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’
or ‘last-hour’ [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

measurements-announcementsboard-loc

[‘to cabinet (1-64]; carrier
(A-E); slot (0-20), or [‘disk’ or
[gateway (1-250)]; V9
‘yesterday-peak’, ‘today-peak’
or ‘last-hour’ [‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1363

Command reference

Media Gateway
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

media-gateway

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

media-gateway

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]

list

media-gateway

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

media-gateway

1-MAX
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

Mode Code Related System Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters mode-code

—
(DEFINITY R, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters mode-code

[‘print’]
(DEFINITY R, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Modem Pool Group

1364

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

modem-pool num

[1-MAX]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

modem-pool num

[1-MAX]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

modem-pool num

[1-MAX] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

modem-pool num

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

modem-pool num

[1-MAX]
(DEFINITY R CSI, SI, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System
Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters multifrequency-signaling

(DEFINITY R, CSI,
SI, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters multifrequency-signaling

[‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI,
SI)

display

system-parameters multifrequency-signaling

[‘schedule’]
(S8700
Multi-Connect)

Music Sources
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

music-sources

[1-MAX]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

music-sources

[1-MAX] [‘print or schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1365

Command reference

Packet Gateway Board
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

pgate

Enter the circuit pack cabinet, carrier, and slot
(DEFINITY R only)

change

pgate

Enter the circuit pack cabinet, carrier, and slot
(DEFINITY R only)

display

pgate

Enter the circuit pack cabinet, carrier, and slot
(DEFINITY R only)

remove

pgate

Enter the circuit pack cabinet, carrier, and slot
(DEFINITY R only)

Partition Route Table
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

partition-route-table

[‘index’ (1-MAX)]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

partition-route-table

[‘index’ (1-MAX)] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

partition-route-table

[‘index’ (1-MAX)] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Pickup Group

1366

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

pickup-group

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

pickup-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Action

Object

Qualifier

display

pickup-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n] [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

pickup-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

pickup-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1367

Command reference

Port
Action

Object

Qualifier

display

port

[[‘to cabinet (1-44]; carrier (A-E); slot (00-20); port
(pp or ppp)]
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

port

 [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY
CSI, SI)

PRI Endpoint

1368

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

pri-endpoint

extension or ‘next’
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

pri-endpoint

extension
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

pri-endpoint

extension [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

pri-endpoint

extension [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

pri-endpoint

extension [‘count’ 1-MAX][‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

pri-endpoint

extension [‘count’ 1-MAX][‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

pri-endpoint

extension
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

isdn
qsig-dcs-tsc-gateway

—
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

isdn
qsig-dcs-tsc-gateway

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

display

isdn
qsig-dcs-tsc-gateway

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Remote Access
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

remote-access

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

remote-access

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

remote-access

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

status

remote-access

[‘print’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

status

remote-access

(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Remote Call Coverage Table
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

coverage remote

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

coverage remote

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect)
(not for S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1369

Command reference

Remote Office

1370

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

remote-office

1-MAX or ‘next’
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) (not
for S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

remote-office

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) (not
for S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

remote-office

1-MAX, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

remote-office

1-MAX, [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect) (not for S8700
Multi-Connect)

list

remote-office

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

remote-office

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect) (not for S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

remote-office

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect) (not
for S8700 Multi-Connect)

status

remote-office

1-MAX [‘print’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

status

remote-office

1-MAX
(S8700 IP-Connect) (not for S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

RHNPA Table
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

rhnpa

Enter RHNPA and code n:xxx n(1-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-MAX)
x(0-MAX)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

rhnpa

Enter RHNPA and code n:xxx n(1-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-MAX)
x(0-9) [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

rhnpa

Enter RHNPA and code n:xxx n(1-MAX) x(0-MAX) x(0-MAX)
x(0-9) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Route Pattern
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

route-pattern

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

route-pattern

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

route-pattern

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

route-pattern

Enter [‘trunk’ (1-MAX)] [‘service’/feature
name-string] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

route-pattern

Enter [‘trunk’ (1-MAX)] [‘service’/feature
name-string] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1371

Command reference

Security-Related System Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters security

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters security

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters security

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Signaling Group

1372

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

signaling-group

1-MAX or ‘next’
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

signaling-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

signaling-group

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

signaling-group

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

signaling-group

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

signaling-group

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

signaling-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Site Data
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

site-data

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

site-data

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

site-data

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

station

extension (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

station

extension
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

station

[‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘count’ n],
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

station

[‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘count’ n],
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

duplicate

station

extension [‘start’ extension],
[‘board’ board location, ‘x’, ‘w’, or
‘i’], [‘count’ (1-16)], [‘one-ep’]
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect, S8300
Media Server))

list

station

[‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘port’ x][‘type’
x][‘movable’ x][‘count’ n], [‘print’
or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

Station

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1373

Command reference

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

station

[‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘port’ x][‘type’
x][‘movable’ x][‘count’ n],
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

status

station

extension [‘print’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

status

station

extension
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

System Parameters Call Coverage/Call
Forwarding
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters coverage-forwarding

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI,
SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters coverage-forwarding

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI,
SI)

display

system-parameters coverage-forwarding

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

System Parameters Country-Options

1374

Action

Object

Qualifier

display

system-parameters country-options

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters country-options

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

System Parameters Crisis Alert
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters crisis-alert

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters crisis-alert

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters crisis-alert

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

System Parameters Customer-Options
Action

Object

Qualifier

display

system-parameters customer-options

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters customer-options

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1375

Command reference

System Parameters IP Options
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

system-parameters ip-options

—
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

system-parameters ip-options

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

system-parameters ip-options

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Telecommuting Access
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

telecommuting-access

(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

telecommuting-access

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

telecommuting-access

[‘schedule’]
S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

tenant

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, S8700 Multi-Connect) (not on S8700
IP-Connect)

display

tenant

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

display

tenant

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect) (not on S8700 IP-Connect)

Tenant

1376

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Terminal Parameters
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

terminal-parameters
6400/607A1/4600/2420

(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

terminal-parameters 302/603/606

(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

terminal-parameters 8400

(S8700 IP-Connect)

display

terminal-parameters 302/603/606

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

terminal-parameters
6400/607A1/4600/2420

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

terminal-parameters 8400

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1377

Command reference

Terminating Extension Group

1378

Action

Object

Qualifier

add

term-ext-group

1-MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

term-ext-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

term-ext-group

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

term-ext-group

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

term-ext-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x] [‘name’ x]
[‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

term-ext-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x] [‘name’ x]
[‘ext’ x][‘to-ext’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

term-ext-group

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

TFTP Server
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

tftp-server

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

change

tftp-server

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

tftp-server

[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

tftp-server

[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1379

Command reference

Time of Day Routing Plan
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX 9 (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

change

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

remove

coverage time-of-day

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700
IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Time of Day Routing Plan

1380

Action

Object

Qualifier

change

time-of-day

1-MAX (routing plan number)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 Multi-Connect) (not
on S8700 IP-Connect)

display

time-of-day

1-MAX (routing plan number) [‘print’ or
‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

time-of-day

1-MAX (routing plan number) [‘schedule’]
(S8700 Multi-Connect) (not on S8700 IP-Connect)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Toll Analysis
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

toll

Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’
(1-44 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-23]
(DEFINITY R)

change

toll

Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’
(1-10 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-28]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

change

toll

Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’
(1-64 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-23]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

toll

Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’
(1-44 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-23] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

display

toll

Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’
(1-10 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-28] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

display

toll

Enter digits between 0-9, ‘*’, ‘x’, or ‘X’ [‘location’
(1-64 or ‘all’] [‘min’ 1-23] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

toll toll-list

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-44 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

list

toll toll-list

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-10 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

toll toll-list

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-64 or ‘all’] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

toll all

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-64 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

list

toll all

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-64 or ‘all’] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

toll all

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-10 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1381

Command reference

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

toll
restricted-call

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-44 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

list

toll
restricted-call

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-10 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSAI, SI)

list

toll
restricted-call

[‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-64 or ‘all’] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

toll
unrestrictedcall

[1-MAX] [‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-44 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R)

list

toll
unrestrictedcall

[1-MAX] [‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-10 or ‘all’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

toll
unrestrictedcall

[1-MAX] [‘start’ dialed-string] [‘count’ (1-MAX)]
[‘location’ (1-64 or ‘all’] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

trace station

Station number [or ext/a (atm), q(qsig), ext 1-40
(button#)], [‘print’] (DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

trace station

Station number [or ext 1/40 (button#)]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

trace tac

Trunk access code [or tac/a(atm) or tac/d(digits),
q(qsig), [‘print’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

trace tac

Trunk access code [or tac/a(atm) or tac/d(digits)
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

Trace

1382

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

Trunk Groups
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

trunk-group

1–MAX (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

trunk-group

1–MAX or TAC X...
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

trunk-group

1–MAX [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘tac’ assigned TAC][‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

trunk-group

1–MAX [‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘count’ n]
[‘tac’ assigned TAC][‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

list

trunk-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘name’ x]
[‘type’ x][‘count’ n] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

list

trunk-group

[‘number’ x][‘to-number’ x][‘name’ x]
[‘type’ x][‘count’ n] [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

remove

trunk-group

1–MAX or TAC X...
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

Uniform Dial Plan
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

uniform-dialplan

Enter 1-7 digits between 0-9
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

display

uniform-dialplan

Enter 1-7 digits between 0-9 [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI)

display

uniform-dialplan

Enter 1-7 digits between 0-9 [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1383

Command reference

Action

Object

Qualifier

list

uniform-dialplan

start , count  [‘print’ or
‘schedule’]*

list

uniform-dialplan

[‘start’ matching-pattern] [‘len’ (3-7)]
[‘insert’ (0-MAX)] [‘net’ x] [‘node’
(1-MAX)] [‘to-node’ (1-MAX)] [‘count’ n],
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

list

uniform-dialplan

[‘start’ matching-pattern] [‘len’ (3-7)]
[‘insert’ (0-MAX)] [‘net’ x] [‘node’
(1-MAX)] [‘to-node’ (1-MAX)] [‘count’ n],
[‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

*The print option is not valid on S8100, S8300, and S8700 Media Servers. The
schedule option is not valid on S8100 Media Servers.

1384

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Before you start

List Usage CTI-Link
Action

Object

Qualifier

list

usage cti-link


[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

List Usage Extension
Action

Object

Qualifier

list

usage extension

 [‘vector’],
[‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY CSI, SI)

Vector
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

vector

1-MAX
(DEFINITY CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect,
S8700 Multi-Connect)

list usage

vector

1-MAX
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1385

Command reference

Vector Directory Numbers
Action

Object

Qualifier

add

vdn

extension (or ‘next’)
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

change

vdn

extension
(DEFINITY R, CSI, SI, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect)

display

vdn

extension, [‘print’ or ‘schedule’] (DEFINITY R,
CSI, SI)

display

vdn

extension, [‘schedule’]
(S8700 IP-Connect, S8700 Multi-Connect)

XMOBILE Configuration Set
Action

Object

Qualifier

change

xmobile configuration-set

Enter digits between 1 to 10

display

xmobile configuration-set

Enter digits between 1 to 10

XMOBILE Station to Cell Phone Mapping
Action

Object

Qualifier

list

xmobile mapping

, ,
 [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]
(DEFINITY R, S8700 IP-Connect, S8700
Multi-Connect, S8300 Media Server)

*Partial string of a cell phone number followed by the wildcard “*”.

1386

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Phone reference

This reference section describes many of the telephones and adjuncts that you can
connect to Avaya MultiVantage systems.
Use this section to:
■

determine where to connect a phone—is it analog, digital, hybrid, or IP? Is
it designed for a 2-wire or 4-wire environment?

■

determine whether a phone will fit your users’ needs—does it
accommodate enough feature buttons? does it include a display?

■

understand how to assign the user’s feature buttons—how do the buttons
on the Station screen map to buttons on the physical phone.

Because you need to know how the physical buttons on the phone relate to your
button assignments on the Station screen, this section includes figures for those
phones to which you can assign feature buttons.
This section includes descriptions of the following telephones:

555-233-506

■

500 telephones (page 1388)

■

2420 telephones (page 1388)

■

2500-series telephones (page 1388)

■

4600-series telephones (digital IP telephones) (page 1389)

■

6200-series telephones (page 1391)

■

6400-series telephones (page 1395)

■

7100-series telephones (page 1399)

■

7300-series telephones (page 1399)

Issue 5 October 2002 1387

Phone reference

■

731x-series hybrid telephones (page 1403)

■

7400-series telephones (page 1408)

■

ISDN telephones (7500-series & 8500-series) (page 1425)

■

8110 telephones (page 1430)

■

8400-series telephones (page 1430)

■

CALLMASTER telephones (page 1437)

■

Cordless telephones (page 1441)

■

Internet Protocol (IP) SoftPhones (page 1444)

500 telephones
The 500 telephones are single appearance analog rotary-dial telephones which
provides cost-effective service wherever it is located. It provides limited access to
features because the rotary dial has no * or # positions.

2420 telephones
The 2420 telephone is a digital phone with an optional feature expansion module
and downloadable call appearance/feature buttons information. The 2420 Digital
Communications Protocol (DCP) phone does not need paper labels. The button
information appears on a screen on the phone. The firmware for the 2420 can be
upgraded over its DCP connection to the switch. A new firmware image first must
be downloaded into switch memory from a local trivial file transfer protocol
(TFTP) server.
Avaya recommends that you administer call appears only on the first 8 call
appearance/feature buttons on the 2420 phone.

2500-series telephones
The 2500-series telephones consist of single appearance analog telephones with
conventional touch-tone dialing. You can allow 2500-series phones users to
access features by giving them the appropriate feature access codes. For more
information about providing feature access codes to your users, see ‘‘Changing
feature access codes’’ on page 74.

1388

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

4600-series IP telephones

4600-series IP telephones
The 4600-series telephones are DCP telephones that use Internet Protocol (IP)
technology with Ethernet line interfaces. Firmware for these phones can be
downloaded from the internet. The 4600 series includes a 2-button set, 6-button
sets, a 12-button set, and a 24-button set.
Each of the 4600-series phones includes 6 standard feature buttons:
■

SPEAKER button, which can access a 2-way speakerphone or allow group
listen

■

MUTE button, which mutes the handset or speakerphone microphone

■

HOLD button

■

REDIAL button

■

TRANSFER/TEST button for transferring a call or testing the lights and
display on the telephone

■

CONF/RING button for setting up a conference call and for selecting a
personalized ringing pattern.

The 4604, 4612, and 4624 phones do not have a standard Drop button, but you can
assign a drop button to any feature button. The 4600-series display phones show
the date and time in Normal mode, so you do not have to assign a Date/Time
button to these phones.
4602 IP telephone

The 4602 IP telephone has separate LEDs to indicate the on/off status of the
speakerphone and mute buttons. The 4602 has a 2x24 display. The 4602 has no
administrable feature buttons, 2 fixed call appearance buttons, one-way
speakerphone or no speakerphone option, a fixed Drop button, a listen-only
Speaker button, a redial button, and a fixed voice mail retrieval button that
provides automatic access to voice mail.
4606 IP telephones

The 4606 IP telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with six call
appearance/feature buttons: a red Hold button, a Redial button, a Transfer button
that can also be used for the Test feature, and a Conference button that can also be
used to select a personalized ringing pattern, a red Message light, and a Volume
control button.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1389

Phone reference

4612 IP telephone

The 4612 IP telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 12 call
appearance/feature buttons. With the 4612 IP telephone the end-user can access
12 features with the softkeys and display control buttons.
4620 IP telephone

The 4620 IP telephone has an optional feature expansion module and
downloadable call appearance/feature button information. It also includes features
such as speed dial, call log, and Web browsing using the Wireless Markup
Language (WML). The 4620 IP phone does not need paper labels. The button
information appears on a screen on the phone.
The 4620 uses icons to indicate the status of call appearances, bridge call
appearances and features. The phone maintains a call log with calling party and
called party information. The 4620 has a local button for headset on/off. The
button label information for the 4620 is downloaded automatically to the phone
when a link is established between the switch and the phone. There are three
speakerphone options on the 4620. Labels on the 4620 can be downloaded in
English, French, Italian, Spanish, and user-defined languages.
4624 IP telephone

The 4624 IP telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 24 call
appearance/feature buttons. With the 4624 telephone the end-user can access 12
features with the softkeys and display control buttons. These 12 features can be
used in addition to the features you assign to the call appearance/feature buttons.
4630 IP screenphone

The 4630 IP Screenphone uses a single connection. A large, color, touch-sensitive
screen is used to operate the telephone functions. Avaya recommends that you use
the default settings on the 4630 IP Screenphone administrable feature buttons with
status indication.

1390

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

6200-series telephones

Figure 18.

The 4630 IP Screenphone

6200-series telephones
6210 telephone

The 6210 telephones are single-line analog models. They have fixed Flash,
Redial, and Hold feature buttons and a message waiting light.
6218 telephone

The 6218 telephones are single-line analog models. They have 10 programmable
dialing buttons. These phones also have fixed Flash, Redial, and Hold feature
buttons and a message waiting light.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1391

Phone reference

6220 telephone

The 6220 telephones are single-line analog models. These phones also have fixed
Flash, Redial, Hold, Mute, and Speakerphone (Spkr) feature buttons and a
message waiting light. They also have handset volume control, ringer volume
control, timed switch-hook disconnect, 10 programmable dialing buttons,
repertory keylock, set personalized ring, and system hold.

6

1

7

6210

8

2

9

3
4

ABC

DEF

1

2

3

4

JKL

GHI

Flash

7

PQRS

Redial

MNO

5

6

TUV

WXYZ

8

9

0

#

*
5

Hold

10

11

Figure Notes

1. Handset

7. Ringer volume control

2. Handset cord jack

8. Message light

3. Flash button

9. Handset volume control

4. Redial button

10. Dial pad

5. Hold button

11. LINE jack (on bottom of phone)

6. DATA jack
Figure 19.

1392

The 6210 telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

6200-series telephones

1

10

2

11
12
6220

3

Program

13

Pause

Tel.#

4

14
5
Mute

Spkr

15

6
ABC

7

Flash

8

Redial

9

Hold

DEF

1

2

3

GHI

4

JKL

MNO

5

6

7

TUV

WXYZ

8

9

0

#

PQRS

*

16

17

Figure Notes

1. Handset parking tab

9. Personalized ring

2. Handset

10. Ringer volume control

3. Program button

11. 10 programmable dialing buttons

4. Handset cord jack

12. Pause button

5. Flash button

13. Message light

6. Redial button

14. Handset/speakerphone volume
control

7. Hold button
8. Data jack

15. Dial pad
16. LINE jack (on bottom of phone)

Figure 20.

555-233-506

The 6218 telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1393

Phone reference

1

10

2

11
12
6220

3

Program

13
13

Pause

Tel.#

4

14

5
Mute

Spkr

15

6
ABC

7

Flash

8

Redial

9

Hold

DEF

1

2

3

GHI

4

JKL

MNO

5

6

7

TUV

WXYZ

8

9

0

#

PQRS

*

16

17

Figure Notes

1. DATA jack
2. Handset

10. Personalized ring

3. Program button

11. Ringer volume control

4. Mute button

12. 10 programmable dialing buttons

5. Handset cord jack

13. Pause button

6. Handset/speakerphone volume
control

14. Message light

7. Flash button
8. Redial button

Figure 21.

1394

9. Hold button

15. Speakerphone button
16. Dial pad
17. LINE jack (on bottom of phone)

The 6220 telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

6400-series telephones

6400-series telephones
The 6400-series telephones are DCP 2-wire telephones that work with Avaya
MultiVantage. The last two digits of the 6400-series model number identify the
number of call appearances (2-lamp buttons) for that model. For example, the
6424D has 24 call appearances. The 6400 series includes two single-line sets
(6402 and 6402D), 8-button sets, a 16-button set, a 24-button set, and a 24-button
expansion module (for the 6416D+ and 6424D+ telephones).
Each of the 6400-series phones includes 6 standard feature buttons:
■

SPEAKER button, which can access a 2-way speakerphone or allow group
listen

■

MUTE button, which mutes the handset or speakerphone microphone

■

HOLD button

■

REDIAL button

■

TRANSFER/TEST button for transferring a call or testing the lights and
display on the telephone

■

CONF/RING button for setting up a conference call and for selecting a
personalized ringing pattern.

These phones do not have a standard Drop button, but you can assign a drop
button to any feature button. The 6400-series display phones show the date and
time in Normal mode, so you do not have to assign a Date/Time button to these
phones.
6402 telephones

The 6402 is a single-line telephone with six fixed feature buttons: a listen-only
Speaker button, a Feature button that allows you to use the dial pad keys for up to
12 features assigned by the system manager, a red Hold button, a Redial button, a
Transfer button that can also be used for the Test feature, and a Conference button
that can also be used to select a personalized ringing pattern, a red Message light,
and a Volume control button.
The 6402D is the same as a 6402, but also has a 2-line by 16-character LCD
display.
The 6402 and 6402D can be used in only a 2-wire environment.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1395

Phone reference

6408 telephones

The 6408 is a multi-appearance digital telephone with eight call
appearance/feature buttons.
The 6408 telephone is available in the following four models:
■

6408 telephone—includes a 1-way, listen-only speaker, and no display

■

6408+ telephone—includes a 2-way speakerphone, and no display

■

6408D telephone—includes a 1-way, listen-only speaker, and a 2-line by
24-character display

■

6408D+ telephone—includes a 2-way speakerphone, and a 2-line by
24-character display.

With the 6408D and 6408D+ telephones, the end-user can access 12 features with
the softkeys and display control buttons. These 12 features can be used in addition
to the features you assign to the call appearance/feature buttons.
The 6408, 6408+, 6408D, and 6408D+ telephones can work only in 2-wire
environments.
6416D+ telephone

The 6416D+ telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 16 call
appearance/feature buttons.
With the 6416D+ telephone the end-user can access 12 features with the softkeys
and display control buttons. These 12 features can be used in addition to the
features you assign to the call appearance/feature buttons.
NOTE:

You can connect an XM24 expansion module to the 6416D+ telephone to
expand the number of buttons you can assign. However, when the expansion
module is connected, you must connect an auxiliary power supply to the
telephone.
6424D+ telephone

The 6424D+ telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 24 call
appearance/feature buttons. With the 6424D+ telephone the end-user can access
12 features with the softkeys and display control buttons. These 12 features can be
used in addition to the features you assign to the call appearance/feature buttons.

1396

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

6400-series telephones

The 6424D+ telephone can work in both 4-wire and 2-wire environments.
NOTE:

You can connect an XM24 expansion module to a 6424D+ phone to expand
the number of buttons you can assign. However, when the expansion module
is connected, you must connect an auxiliary power supply to the telephone.

1
12

Tel #

2
11

Speaker

Feature

Hold

3

10

Redial

Transfer

Conf

4

Test

Ring

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

4

5

1

2

5

3

6
6

PQRS

TUV

7

8

*

O

WXYZ

9

#
7

Volume

8

9

Figure Notes

1. Display

8. Message light

2. Feature button

9. Tray handle (includes reference
cards)

3. Hold button
4. Transfer/Test button
5. Conf/Ring button
6. Dial pad

10. Redial button
11. Speaker button
12. Handset

7. Volume control button
Figure 22.

555-233-506

6402D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1397

Phone reference

1

2
14

Menu

Exit

13
12

Tel #

Spkr

Mute

Hold

Redial

Trnsfr
Test

Conf
Ring

11
10

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

*

O

#

1
4

9

7

8

Prev

2
5

8

Next

3
4

3

6

5

9

Volume

6
7

Figure Notes

1. Display

8. Volume control button

2. Softkeys

9. Dial pad

3. Display control buttons

10. Conf/Ring button

4. Hold

11. Redial button

5. Call appearance/feature buttons

12. Transfer/Test button

6. Message light

13. Speaker button

7. Tray handle (includes reference cards)

14. Mute button

Figure 23.

1398

6408D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7100-series telephones

7100-series telephones
7101A telephone

The 7101A telephone is a single-line analog model that is equipped with a
Message Waiting light and a handy Recall button for activating the system’s
special features. It cannot be physically bridged to the same analog line port due
to the message waiting and loop current circuitry.
7102A telephone

The 7102A (7102A01A) and 7102+ (7102A01B), called the 7102 Plus. The front
of the two sets is exactly the same in appearance. The only difference is that the
7102A01B is equipped with an adjunct jack. This jack allows
speakerphone/headset capability.
7103A telephone

The 7103A fixed feature phone is a single-line analog model which has been
discontinued. The feature buttons on this phone must be programmed by the
system manager. It cannot be physically bridged to the same analog line port due
to the message waiting and loop current circuitry.
7104A telephone

The 7104A telephone is a single-line analog model that is equipped with a display
that is used to display stored numbers. It cannot be physically bridged to the same
analog line port due to the message waiting and loop current circuitry.

7300-series telephones
7302H MERLIN telephone

The 7302H is a 5-button telephone that can be desk or wall mounted. This set can
no longer be ordered.
Administer 7302H telephones (5-Button) as a 7303S model.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1399

Phone reference

7303H MERLIN telephone

The 7303H is a 10-button telephone that can be desk or wall mounted.
Administer 7303H telephones (10-Button) as a 7305S model. You can administer
only the first 12 feature function buttons. Of these 12 buttons, 8 have two lamps
and 4 have no lamps. However, the system treats the 8 double-lamp buttons as
though they have a single (green) lamp. Administer the 4 buttons (with no lamps)
with features that do not require status indications.
7303S telephone

The 7303S is a multi-appearance hybrid telephone which provides access to 10
line appearances or selected programmable features. The 7303S telephone is also
equipped with six fixed feature buttons. It requires 3-pair wiring for operation.
One wire pair is used for analog voice, while the other two pairs are used for
digital control and signaling.
7305H MERLIN telephone

The 7305H series is a 34-button telephone. This telephone can be equipped with
or without different features such as built-in speakerphone or display. Some
versions of the 34-button series can be ordered using PEC code 3162 and the
appropriate suffix.
Administer 7305H telephones (34-Button) as a 7305S model. The system treats
the telephone’s 24 feature function buttons (two lamps each) as single (green)
lamp function buttons.
7305S telephone

The 7305S telephone is a multi-appearance hybrid telephone which provides
access to 10 line appearances. The 10 line appearance buttons can also be used as
programmable feature buttons. The 7305S telephone is also equipped with 24
programmable feature buttons and six fixed feature buttons. It requires 3-pair
wiring for operation. One wire pair is used for analog voice, while the other two
pairs are used for digital control and signaling.

1400

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7300-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad
Figure 24.

555-233-506

7303S telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1401

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 24 feature buttons

Figure 25.

1402

7305S telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

731x-series hybrid telephones

731x-series hybrid telephones
You should note that the following restrictions apply to administering hybrid
telephones in the system:

555-233-506

■

Hybrid telephones equipped with displays cannot be used as Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) agents and do not allow your end-users to access
the Directory.

■

The following fixed feature buttons do not operate on Hybrid telephones:
STOP, PAUSE, RECALL, MESSAGE, HFAI, and HFAI/MIC. If you want
users to have Hands Free Automatic Answer on Intercom (HFAI), assign
Internal Automatic Answer (IAA) to a lamp button.

■

These telephones support Leave Word Calling (LWC), but users cannot
retrieve messages with the display.

Issue 5 October 2002

1403

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad
Figure 26.

1404

7313H telephone (BIS 10)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

731x-series hybrid telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 12 feature buttons

Figure 27.

555-233-506

7314H telephone (BIS 22)

Issue 5 October 2002

1405

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 12 feature buttons

Figure 28.

1406

7315H telephone (BIS 22D)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

731x-series hybrid telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 24 feature buttons

Figure 29.

555-233-506

7316H telephone (BIS 34)

Issue 5 October 2002

1407

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 24 feature buttons

Figure 30.

7317H telephone (BIS 34D)

7400-series telephones
7401D telephone

The 7401D (7401D01A) and the 7401+ (7401D02A) are both single appearance
digital phones which have no call appearance buttons or lights, but have two
virtual call appearances. Depending on how the 7401D or the 7401+ telephone is
administered, the second call appearance may be restricted to incoming priority
calls and outgoing calls only.

1408

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7400-series telephones

7403D telephone

The 7403D is a multi-appearance digital telephone which has 10 buttons available
for line appearances, one-touch feature access, or Speed Dialing. In addition, the
7403D telephone may be equipped with a Digital Terminal Data Module (DTDM)
which attaches to the right side and allows the connection of a EIA RS-232C data
terminal.
7404D telephone

The 7404D is a multi-appearance digital telephone which provides simultaneous
voice/asynchronous data transmission. All the transmission is done over the same
two pairs of wire.
7405D telephone

The 7405D telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone which allows
features to be added as the user needs them. The Digital Display can be added to
provide access to the Message Center. A Digital Terminal Data Module or 7400B
can be added to enable the user of a 7405D telephone to transmit or receive data
with an associated data terminal.
The basic 7405D provides 10 call appearance/feature buttons with lights that can
be assigned to call appearances or system features. It has 24 programmable
feature buttons and six fixed-feature buttons. The 7405D can also have a function
key module which adds 24 feature buttons and a call coverage module (when no
display module is used) which adds 20 call appearance/feature buttons.
7406 telephones

The 7406D telephone (7406D01A, 7406D02A, 7406D03A, and 7406D04A
models) has five call appearance/feature buttons, each with a red in-use light and a
green status light, seven shiftable (2-level) programmable feature buttons with no
lights, four programmable feature buttons with a green light, four fixed feature
buttons (CONFERENCE, TRANSFER, DROP, and HOLD), a SHIFT button with
a green light, a SPEAKER button, and a green Message light.
The 7406BIS telephone (7406D05A and 7406D06A models) has five call
appearance/feature buttons, each with a red in-use light and a green status light,
seven shiftable (2-level) programmable buttons with no lights, two programmable
feature buttons with a green light, four fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE,
TRANSFER, DROP, and HOLD), a SHIFT button with a green light, a
SPEAKER button with a green light, a MUTE button with a red light, a
SPEAKER VOLUME “arrow” button, and a red Message light.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1409

Phone reference

The 7406+ telephone (7406D07A and 7406D08A models) has five call
appearance/feature buttons, each with a red in-use light and a green status light,
three shiftable (2-level) programmable feature buttons with a green light, six
shiftable (2-level) programmable feature buttons without lights, four fixed feature
buttons (CONFERENCE, TRANSFER, DROP, and HOLD), a SELECT button
with a green light, a SPEAKER/RESET SPKR button with a green light, a MUTE
button with a red light, a VOLUME “arrow” button, and a red Message light.
7407+ telephone

The 7407D, Enhanced 7407D, and 7407+ telephones are multi-appearance digital
telephones which provide digital voice, display, and data capabilities (the latter
with the 7400B+ Data Module).
There are three versions of the 7407D telephone:

1410

■

7407+ (7407D02D) — offers 10 call appearance buttons, each with a red
in-use light and a green status light, four standard fixed feature buttons
(CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), three fixed feature
buttons with one light each (SELECT, SPEAKER/RESET SPKR, and
MUTE), nine feature buttons with one light each (the uppermost two
buttons can be used for voice or display features, the lower seven buttons
for display features), 22 flexible feature buttons with no lights, a Message
light, personalized ringing, a built-in speakerphone with a reset and
listen-only option, and a built-in 2-line by 40-character display.

■

The 7407D (the 7407D01B)—offers 10 call appearance/feature buttons,
each with a red in-use light and a green status light, four standard fixed
feature buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), three
fixed feature buttons with an associated light (CALCULATOR/SELECT
RING, SPEAKERPHONE, and MICROPHONE), nine programmable
feature buttons with lights (the two uppermost buttons can be used for
voice or display features, the lower seven for display features), 11
dual-function buttons, 22 programmable feature-only buttons without
lights, a Message light, a DISPLAY button that turns the display on and off,
personalized ringing, a built-in speakerphone, a 2-line by 40-character
liquid crystal display, and a built-in calculator. This set is AC powered.

■

Enhanced 7407D (the 7407D02C)—offers 10 call appearance buttons, each
with a red in-use light and green status light, four standard fixed feature
buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), three fixed
feature buttons with an associated light (SELECT RING, SPEAKER, and
MUTE), 22 programmable feature-only buttons without lights, nine
programmable feature buttons with one light each (the uppermost two
buttons can be used for voice or display features, the lower seven for
display features), a Message light, personalized ringing, a built-in

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7400-series telephones

speakerphone, a connection for an adjunct speakerphone or headset, a
speakerphone with spokesman, and Mute option, and a 2-line by
40-character display.
7410D and 7410+ telephones

The 7410D (7410D01A) and 7410+ (7410D02A) are both multi-appearance
digital telephones with 10 line appearances, four standard fixed feature buttons
and a Select Ring button. The 7410D and 7410+ telephones also provide a
Message light, Ringer Volume control, a Speakerphone/headset adapter jack. You
can activate a Self-Test feature to test the lights and tone ringer on the telephone.
In addition, the 7410+ provides a Speaker for listening-only functions.
7434D telephone

The 7434D is a multi-appearance digital telephone that offers 34 call
appearance/feature buttons, each with a red in-use light and a green status light,
four standard fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and
TRANSFER), three fixed feature buttons with one light each (SELECT,
SPEAKER/RESET SPKR, and MUTE), seven display feature buttons with one
light each, a Message light, personalized ringing, a built-in speakerphone with a
reset option, and a built-in 2-line by 40-character display. You can connect this
phone to a digital line port. The 7434D telephone supports an adjunct display
module or a call coverage module.
7444D telephone

The 7444 telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone that offers 34 call
appearance/feature buttons, each with a red in-use light and a green status light,
four standard fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and
TRANSFER), three fixed feature buttons with one light each (SELECT,
SPEAKER/RESET SPKR, and MUTE), seven display feature buttons with one
light each, a Message light, personalized ringing, a built-in speakerphone with a
reset option, and a built-in 2-line by 40-character display. You can connect this
telephone to a digital line port. It is powered from the switch.
NOTE:

The 7444 is powered by the switch, however, to use the display, you must
connect an auxiliary power supply to the telephone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1411

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. Access codes card

2. Dial pad
Figure 31.

1412

7401D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7400-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 6 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad
Figure 32.

555-233-506

7404D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1413

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 24 feature buttons

Figure 33.

1414

7405D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7400-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 24 feature buttons
5. Function key module with 24 feature module buttons

Figure 34.

555-233-506

7405D telephone with optional function key module

Issue 5 October 2002

1415

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. Digital display module with 7 display buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 10 programmable buttons
5. 24 feature buttons

Figure 35.

1416

7405D telephone with optional digital display module

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7400-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset
2. Dial pad

3. Call coverage module with 20 coverage module buttons
and status lamps
4. 10 programmable buttons
5. 24 feature buttons

Figure 36.

555-233-506

7405D telephone with optional call coverage module

Issue 5 October 2002

1417

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 24 feature buttons
5. Digital terminal data module

Figure 37.

1418

7405D telephone with optional digital terminal data module

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7400-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 5 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 18 feature buttons (feature buttons F2, F4, and
F12 to F18 are enabled with the Shift key)

Figure 38.

555-233-506

7406D+ telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1419

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 5 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 18 feature buttons (feature buttons F12 to F18 are
enabled with the Shift key)

Figure 39.

1420

7406D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7400-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 7 display buttons
5. 24 feature buttons

Figure 40.

555-233-506

7407D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1421

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34)

Figure 41.

1422

7434D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

7400-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset
2. Dial pad

3. Call coverage module with 20 coverage module
buttons and status lamps
4. 10 programmable buttons
5. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34)

Figure 42.

555-233-506

7434D telephone with optional call coverage module

Issue 5 October 2002

1423

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. Digital display module with 7 display buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 10 programmable buttons
5. 24 feature buttons (11 to 34)

Figure 43.

1424

7434D telephone with optional digital display module

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s)

ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s)
The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) phones include both the
7500-series and the 8500-series telephones. Each of these phones uses the ISDN
communications through a 4-wire “T”-interface.
7505D ISDN-BRI telephone

The 7505D telephone serves as a telephone if it is equipped with a Voice Only
Module (VOM). As a telephone, it offers programmable buttons, fixed feature
buttons, a Message light, touch-tone dialing, and a built-in, programmable
speakerphone or SPOKESMAN loudspeaker.
The 7505 can be equipped with an optional Asynchronous Data Module (ADM)
that provides the user with simultaneous voice and data capabilities. The 7505
equipped with the ADM offers the same voice capabilities as the 7505 equipped
with the VOM, plus it allows you to attach data terminals or personal computers
to send and receive data through the digital network.
7506D ISDN-BRI telephone

The 7506D serves as a telephone if it is equipped with a VOM. As a telephone, it
offers programmable buttons, fixed feature buttons, a Message light, touch-tone
dialing, and a built-in, programmable speakerphone or SPOKESMAN
loudspeaker.
The 7506 can be equipped with an optional Asynchronous Data Module that
provides the user with simultaneous voice and data capabilities. The 7506
equipped with the ADM offers the same voice capabilities as the 7506 equipped
with the VOM, plus it allows you to attach data terminals or personal computers
to send and receive asynchronous data through the digital network.
7507D ISDN-BRI telephone

The 7507D serves as a telephone if it is equipped with a VOM. As a telephone it
offers programmable buttons, fixed feature buttons, Message light, touch-tone
dialing, and a built-in, programmable speakerphone or SPOKESMAN
loudspeaker.
The 7507 can be equipped with an optional Asynchronous Data Module that
provides the user with simultaneous voice and data capabilities. The 7507
equipped with the ADM offers the same voice capabilities as the 7507 equipped
with the VOM, plus it allows you to attach data terminals or personal computers
to send and receive data through the digital network.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1425

Phone reference

8503D ISDN-BRI telephones

The 8503T telephone offers: four standard fixed feature buttons, a Message light,
three call appearance/flexible feature buttons, each with a red and green light, 12
programmable memory-dialing locations on the dial pad keys, a PROGRAM
button for storing numbers at the memory-dialing locations and a MEMORY
button for dialing these programmed numbers or codes, the Redial feature, the
Mute feature.
8510T ISDN-BRI telephone

The 8510T voice/data telephone offers: 10 call appearance/feature buttons, each
with a red and green status light, buttons for the Mute, Redial, Conference, Drop,
Transfer, and Hold features (the MUTE, SPEAKER, CONF, and TRANSFER
buttons have a red light next to them), a Speakerphone, a Volume control, and an
Adjunct jack. You can administer the softkey buttons. Four softkeys and display
control buttons below the a 2-line by 24-character display can be used to access
such features as a personal Directory, a Call Log, the Self-Test feature, and a
personalized ringing pattern for the telephone.
8520T ISDN-BRI telephones

The 8520T voice/data telephone offers the following: 20 call appearance/feature
buttons, each with a red and green status light, buttons for the Mute, Redial,
Conference, Drop, Transfer, and Hold features (the MUTE, SPEAKER, CONF,
and TRANSFER buttons have a red light next to them), a Speakerphone, a
Volume control, and an Adjunct jack. Ten softkeys and four display control
buttons located on either side of the 7-line by 24-character display can be used to
access such features as a personal Directory, a Call Log, the Self-Test feature, and
a personalized ringing pattern for the telephone.

1426

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s)

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 3 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad
Figure 44.

555-233-506

8503D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1427

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad
Figure 45.

1428

8510T telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN telephones (7500s & 8500s)

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 10 programmable buttons (11 to 20)

Figure 46.

8520T telephone

NOTE:

The 8520T telephone supports 20 call appearances. The system maximum
of 10 call appearance buttons still applies. You can administer the buttons
that are not used as call appearance buttons as bridged appearances.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1429

Phone reference

8110 telephones
The basic 8110 (8110A01A, 8110A01B, and 811A01C) and the modified 8110M
(8110A01D) telephones are single-line analog telephones. These telephones are
exactly the same in appearance: each contains 12 programmable dialing buttons
with PROGRAM and PAUSE buttons, automatic redial, a flashing red Message
light, and a Hold button. They also have built-in speakerphones with Mute
capability and the Automatic Answer feature.

8400-series telephones
8403B telephones

The 8403 telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with three call
appearance buttons, Conference, Transfer, Drop, and Hold buttons, a TEST
button, a blue FEATURE button which allows you to access 12 system features
assigned by the System Manager and to choose from among eight different
ringing patterns, a MUTE button, a SPEAKER button which accesses a 1-way,
listen-only speaker, a red Message light, and a Volume control button.
The 8403 can be used in either a 4-wire or 2-wire environment.
8405B telephone

There are four varieties of the 8405 telephone: the 8405B and 8405B+, the 8405D
and 8405D+. All four varieties are multi-appearance digital telephones with five
call appearance/feature buttons.The 8405 telephones also have four standard fixed
feature buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), a MUTE
button, a SPEAKER button, a TEST button, and a Volume control button. The
8405D and 8405D+ allow you to administer 12 softkey feature buttons in addition
to the call appearance and feature buttons.
The four 8405 variations have the following differences:
■

The 8405B has a 1-way, listen-only speaker, with NO display.

■

The 8405B+ has a 2-way speakerphone, without a display

■

The 8405D has a 1-way, listen-only speaker and a 2-line by 24-character
display.

■

The 8405D+ has a 2-way speakerphone and a 2-line by 24-character
display.

The 8405 telephones work in 4-wire or 2-wire environments.

1430

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

8400-series telephones

8410B telephone

The 8410 telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 10 call
appearance/feature buttons, four standard fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE,
DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), a MUTE button, a SPEAKER button which
can access either a 2-way speakerphone or a 1-way, listen-only speaker, a TEST
button, and a Volume control button.
■

The 8410B is the basic set, without a display.

■

The 8410D (8410D03A) has a built-in 2-line by 24-character display.
Those users who have an 8410D with display can access 12 features with
the softkeys and display control buttons. These 12 features can be used in
addition to the features on the call appearance/feature buttons.

The 8410 telephone can work in both 4-wire and 2-wire environments.
8411B and 8411D telephones

The 8411 telephone is a multi-appearance digital telephone with 10 call
appearance/feature buttons, four standard fixed feature buttons (CONFERENCE,
DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), a blue SHIFT button, a MUTE button, a
SPEAKER button which can access either a 2-way speakerphone or a 1-way,
listen-only speaker, a TEST button, and a Volume control button.
The rear of the 8411 telephone has two jacks: The Analog Adjunct jack can be
used for connecting answering machines, fax machines, PC or laptop data/fax
modem cards, data sets or modems, audio teleconferencing equipment, and TTY
machines commonly used by the hearing impaired. The RS-232-D Jack can be
used for connecting the telephone to a COM port on an IBM®-compatible
personal computer on which you can load PassageWay Solution software.
There are two varieties of the 8411 telephone: the 8411B (8411D02A) is the basic
set, without a display; the 8411D (8411D01A) has a built-in 2-line by 24-character
display. Those users who have an 8411D with display can access 12 features with
the softkeys and display control buttons. These 12 features can be used in addition
to the features on the call appearance/feature buttons.
The 8411 telephone can work in both 4-wire and 2-wire environments.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1431

Phone reference

8434D telephone

The basic 8434 (8434D01A) and the enhanced 8434DX (8434D02A) telephones
are multi-appearance digital telephones which offer 34 call appearance/feature
buttons, each with a red light and a green status light, four standard fixed feature
buttons (CONFERENCE, DROP, HOLD, and TRANSFER), a MUTE button, a
SPEAKER button which accesses either a 2-way speakerphone or a 1-way
listen-only speaker, a TEST button, a SHIFT button (some 8434DX telephones
will have a RING button instead), a red Message light, personalized ringing, a
built-in speakerphone with a reset option, and a built-in 2-line by 40-character
VFD display. The 8434 and 8434DX also have five softkeys and four display
control buttons which allow the user to access 15 features. These softkey features
can be used in addition to the features on the call appearance/feature buttons.
The 8434 and 8434DX telephones can be used in both a 4-wire and a 2-wire
environment.
NOTE:

In order to use the display on the 8434 or 8434DX telephone and to use an
801A expansion module connected to the 8434DX, you must connect an
auxiliary power supply to the telephone.
You can connect an 801A Expansion Module to the 8434DX telephone to provide
24 additional call appearance/feature buttons.

1432

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

8400-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 3 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad
Figure 47.

555-233-506

8403B telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1433

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad
Figure 48.

8410B telephone

NOTE:

The 8405B and 8405B+ look like the 8410B with the exception that the
8405 series do not have the second column of line appearances.

1434

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

8400-series telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad
Figure 49.

8410D telephone

NOTE:

The 8405D and 8405D+ look like the 8410D with the exception that the
8405 series do not have the second column of line appearances.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1435

Phone reference

Figure Notes

Figure 50.

1436

1. Handset

3. 10 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 24 feature buttons

8434D telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CALLMASTER telephones

CALLMASTER telephones
There are several types of CALLMASTER telephones:
■

602A and 602D CALLMASTER
The 602 CALLMASTER models have a display, a Message light, a Mute
button, and four fixed feature buttons: Conference, Drop, Hold, and
Transfer. You can administer its 10 call appearance/feature (2-lamp)
buttons and its 17 feature-only (1-lamp) buttons.

■

603D (CALLMASTER II)
The CALLMASTER II model has a display, a Message light, and the Mute,
Select, Log In, and Release buttons. It also has four fixed features:
Conference, Drop, Hold, and Transfer. You can administer its 6 call
appearance/feature (2-lamp) buttons and its 15 feature-only (1-lamp)
buttons.

■

603E (CALLMASTER III)
The CALLMASTER III model has a display, a Message light, and the
Select, Mute, Log In, and Release buttons. It also has four fixed features:
Conference, Drop, Hold, and Transfer. You can administer its 6 call
appearance/feature (2-lamp) buttons and its 15 feature-only (1-lamp)
buttons. Note that you can assign any feature to the Log In and Release
buttons.
You can connect the CALLMASTER III to either a standard 4-wire DCP or
a 2-wire circuit pack.

■

603F (CALLMASTER IV)
The CALLMASTER IV model has a display, a Message light, and the
Select, Mute, Log In, and Release buttons. It also has four fixed features:
Conference, Drop, Hold, and Transfer. You can administer its 6 call
appearance/feature (2-lamp) buttons and its 15 feature-only (1-lamp)
buttons. Note that you can assign any feature to the Log In and Release
buttons.
You can connect the CALLMASTER IV to either a standard 4-wire DCP
or a 2-wire circuit pack.

■

606A (CALLMASTER VI)
The CALLMASTER VI model is a miniature, 8-button, 2-headset jack,
digital telephone that is controlled by the user’s personal computer (PC)
through an RS-232 serial-port connection.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1437

Phone reference

■

607A (CALLMASTER V)
The CALLMASTER V model has a display, softkeys, and the display
control buttons (Menu, Exit, Previous, and Next). This model does not
have a standard handset, but you can connect a handset to one of its headset
jacks. The CALLMASTER V has six fixed feature buttons: Speaker, Mute,
Hold, Redial, Conference, and Transfer. You can administer its 16 call
appearance/feature (2-lamp) buttons, however, one of these buttons must
be administered as a Headset On/Off button and a second one must be
administered as a Release button. You can also administer the 12 softkey
buttons.

Figure Notes

Figure 51.

1438

1. Handset

3. 6 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 18 feature buttons

CALLMASTER II/CALLMASTER III digital telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CALLMASTER telephones

Figure Notes

1. Handset

3. 6 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

4. 15 feature buttons

Figure 52.

555-233-506

CALLMASTER IV digital telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

1439

Phone reference

2

3
Menu

Exit

Prev

Next

Tel #
Speaker

Mute

Hold

Redial

Transfer

Conf

Test
ABC

1

2

3

GHI

JKL

MNO

4

1

PQRS

CALLMASTER V

Ring
DEF

5
TUV

6
WXYZ

7

8

9

*

O

#

4

Volume

Figure Notes

1. Dial pad

3. 4 softkey buttons

2. Display

4. 16 call appearance/feature buttons

Figure 53.

1440

CALLMASTER V digital telephone

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Cordless telephone

Cordless telephone
MDC9000 cordless telephone

The MDC 9000 Cordless Telephone has two basic parts, the handset and the
charging base.
■

The handset has line/programmable feature/intercom buttons, Conference,
Drop, Hold, Transfer, Status, and Feature buttons, Headset On/Off and
Handset On/Off buttons, a LCD display, an earpiece volume control
switch, battery charging contacts, a directory card, and a headset jack.

■

The charging base has a handset hook, ringer volume controls, battery
charging contacts, a Talk indicator, a Charge indicator, a Message indicator,
and a base ringer.

MDW9000 cordless telephone

The MDW 9000 Wireless Telephone is part of the TransTalk™ 9000 Digital
Wireless System family of telephones. This wireless telephone has three basic
parts, the handset the charging cradle, and the radio module.

555-233-506

■

The handset has line/programmable feature/intercom buttons, Drop, Mute,
Hold, Conference, and Transfer buttons, a Headset On/Off button and a
Handset On/Off button, a LCD display, a Volume control switch, battery
charging contacts, a flexible antenna, and a Headset jack.

■

The charging cradle has a handset hook, a spare battery cover, a spare
battery.

■

The radio module has Power, Pass, and Radio indicator lights, a top hook,
card edge, and snap lock which connect the radio module to the carrier
assembly/backplane, an antenna, and power plug and line connectors.

Issue 5 October 2002

1441

Phone reference

Figure Notes

1. 6 programmable buttons

1. 6 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

2. Dial pad

Figure 54.

1442

MDC9000 and MDW9000 cordless telephones

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Cordless telephone

Figure Notes

1. 6 programmable buttons

1. 6 programmable buttons

2. Dial pad

2. Dial pad

Figure 55.

555-233-506

MDC9000 and MDW9000 cordless telephones

Issue 5 October 2002

1443

Phone reference

Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones
IP Softphones extend the level of MultiVantage services. They turn a PC or a
laptop into an advanced telephone. IP Softphones allow you to send voice and fax
from the MultiVantage through an Internet Protocol (IP) network to other
MultiVantage systems that have this feature. You can place calls, take calls, and
handle multiple calls on your PC.
IP Softphones extend MultiVantage multifunction, multiline features support to
IP-connected endpoints (typically user PCs). With certain exceptions, every
feature available for wired-endpoint voice calling is available for IP-based calling;
it supports full internetworking with conventional circuit-switched stations and
trunks.
There are three IP Softphone applications available: the road-warrior,
telecommuter, and the stand-alone H.323. Avaya IP Agent is a modified
telecommuter configuration that uses the Avaya IP Agent interface, rather than the
Avaya IP Softphone interface.
Road-warrior application

The road-warrior application enables travelers to use MultiVantage features from
temporary remote locations, such as a hotel room. The road-warrior configuration
uses two separate software applications running on a user’s PC that is connected
to a MultiVantage system over an IP network. The single network connection
carries two channels: one for call control signaling and one for voice. IP
Softphone software handles the call signaling and an H.323 V2-compliant audio
application (such as Microsoft® NetMeeting®) handles the voice
communications.
Telecommuter application

The telecommuter application enables remote workers to use MultiVantage
features from a remote location, such while telecommuting from a home office.
The telecommuter configuration uses two connections to the MultiVantage
system: a connection to the PC over the IP network and a connection to the
telephone over the public-switched telephone network (PSTN). The PC user
places and takes calls with the IP Softphone interface and uses the telephone
handset to speak and listen.
You can also use a variation of the telecommuter application for call center agents:
Avaya IP Agent. This application uses the Avaya IP Agent interface instead of the
IP Softphone interface to emulate a remote CallMaster phone.

1444

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Internet Protocol (IP) Softphones

Stand-alone H.323

The stand-alone H.323 application enables travelers to use some MultiVantage
features from a remote location. This application uses a PC running an H.323
v2-compliant audio application, such as Microsoft NetMeeting. The H.323
application controls the call signaling and the voice path. However, since it does
not use the IP Softphone interface, this configuration is capable of operating only
as a single-line telephone without any additional assigned features. You can
provide stand-alone H.323 users only features that can they can activate with dial
access codes.
Related topics

For instructions on how to administer an IP Softphone on your system, see
‘‘Adding an IP Softphone’’ on page 115.
You can also find information on the IP Softphone CD (see DEFINITY® IP
Softphone Overview and Troubleshooting and DEFINITY® IP Softphone Getting
Started).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1445

Phone reference

1446

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Features and technical reference

AAR and ARS partitioning
You can use Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) partitioning to change the call routing plan for up to 8 different user groups
within a single MultiVantage system. You assign a Partition Group Number
(PGN) to each user group and identify different call routing treatment for each
PGN.
For example, you can partition hotel employees and guests into separate groups
(PGN) and route the calls differently. When a guest makes a long-distance call,
the guest’s PGN and digit analysis tables route the call to a telephone-billing
system that allocates long-distance charges. A similar call placed by an employee
routes over a direct-distance dialing (DDD) trunk.
Detailed description

Partition user groups are used only with AAR, and ARS, and Uniform Dial Plan
(UDP). You can assign AAR and ARS partitioning to phones, attendant consoles,
remote-access users, data endpoints, and incoming trunks.
Use partitioning for:

555-233-506

■

groups with different routing due to special billing needs

■

groups that have dedicated use of a particular network facility

■

groups in different businesses serviced by a single system

■

data users who require special facility types on outgoing calls

Issue 5 October 2002 1447

Features and technical reference

You can assign a route pattern to just one partitioned user group or you can assign
a route pattern to all your partitioned user groups.
You assign the PGN on the Class of Restriction (COR) screen, and then assign the
COR on each station screen. When a user dials an AAR or ARS feature access
code and a number, the switch uses the PGN of the caller’s COR to determine the
route pattern. The PGN field appears on the COR screen only if Time of Day
Routing is n on the System Parameters Customer Options screen.
If Time of Day Routing is y on System Parameters Customer Options, you specify
the PGN on the Time of Day Routing Plan screen. See ‘‘Time of Day Routing’’ on
page 1887 for more information.
Interactions
■

Bridged Call Appearance
If a Bridged Call Appearance is used for an AAR or ARS call, the system
uses the bridged extension’s PGN instead of the caller’s PGN.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
When a call routes over DCS, the far-end switch uses the incoming trunk’s
PGN to route the call.

■

Remote Access
When a remote-access user dials barrier code or authorization code and an
ARS feature access code, the barrier code or authorization code’s COR
determines the PGN.

■

Straightforward Outward Completion and Through Dialing
If the attendant assists or extends a call and dials an ARS feature access
code, the attendant’s COR determines the PGN if the individual extension
is assigned. Otherwise, the COR set on the console parameter determines
the PGN.

Related topics

See ‘‘Defining ARS Partitions’’ on page 265 to see how to set up an ARS partition
group.
See ‘‘Setting up time of day routing’’ on page 268 to see how to set up Time of
day routing.

1448

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Abbreviated dialing

Abbreviated dialing
Abbreviated Dialing (AD) provides easy access to selected numbers by reducing
the number of digits users have to dial to place a call. Instead of dialing the entire
number, the user dials a short code to access the number. The system then dials the
stored number automatically. You can assign abbreviated dialing buttons to
phones, so users can dial frequently-called numbers by pressing a single button.
You can also assign privileged numbers to abbreviated dialing lists, so you can
allow a user to place calls to numbers that might otherwise be restricted.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Privileged group-number, system-number, and enhanced-number lists
provide access to numbers that typically would be restricted.
List types

You can store phone numbers in 4 different types of abbreviated dialing lists:
■

personal

■

group

■

system

■

enhanced

Your switch type and version determines which lists you have available and how
many entries you can have on each list. You can assign up to 3 AD lists to each
user (extension). The 3 lists can be made up of any combination of a system list,
an enhanced list, up to 3 personal lists, or up to 3 group lists. Each abbreviated
dialing entry can have up to 24 characters.
Personal lists

You can provide personal lists to phone users who need their own set of
stored numbers. You determine which users have access to a personal list
and the size of each list. Either you or the user can assign phone numbers to
personal lists. A personal list is created automatically when you assign the
list to an individual phone. Each user can have up to 3 personal lists. Note
that you cannot assign personal list to the attendant.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1449

Features and technical reference

Group lists

You can define group lists for groups or departments, such as purchasing or
human resources, where members of the group have the need to frequently
dial the same numbers. You determine which users have access to group
lists and each user may have access to up to 3 group lists. You can program
the list or you can designate a user in each group to program the list. You
specify this designated user on the Abbreviated Dialing Group List screen.
System lists

You can define one system list for the entire organization. Most
administrators assign this list to every phone and allows everyone in the
organization to use the list. If you choose to let everyone use the system
list, you should only add numbers to the list that anyone in your
organization may call. For example, you may want to add an emergency
phone number or phone numbers for other office locations to this list.
The system list can contain up to 100 entries and can only be changed by a
system administrator.
Enhanced lists

Enhanced-number lists are used by telephone users, data-terminal users,
and attendants who need more list entries than those allowed in
group-number and system-number lists. One enhanced-number list is
allowed per system in addition to the system-number list. The
enhanced-number list can contain any number or dial-access code. You
administer the enhanced-number lists and determine which users can
access the list.

Considerations

1450

■

You cannot remove a telephone or attendant if it is designated as the
extension number that is permitted to program a group-number list.

■

When using an AD button to access a messaging system, the user’s login
and password should not be assigned to the button. The system ignores
button entries after the messaging access number.

■

You can use an abbreviated dialing list at any time during incoming or
outgoing calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Abbreviated dialing

Interactions
■

Last Number Dialed
The Last Number Dialed feature redials the same number a user just dialed,
even if the user accessed an abbreviated dialing list for the previous call.
However, if the last dialed string includes any special characters (such as
indefinite wait, mark, pause, suppress, or wait) these characters are ignored
by last-number-dialed call.
If the previously-called number was in an AD privileged list, and if the user
is not normally allowed to dial the number because of his or her class of
restriction, they cannot redial the number using Last Number Dialed. To
redial the number, the user must again access the AD privileged list.

Related topics

See ‘‘Adding abbreviated dialing lists’’ on page 153 for instructions on creating
abbreviated dialing lists.
See ‘‘Abbreviated Dialing List’’ on page 585 for detailed descriptions of the fields
on the abbreviated dialing screens.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1451

Features and technical reference

Access Security Gateway
Access Security Gateway (ASG) prevents unauthorized access by requiring the
use of the ASG Key for logging into the system. The ASG Key can be:
■

a hand-held device, or

■

a software module you load on the PC you use for accessing the system.

Detailed Description

Authentication is successful only when MultiVantage and ASG communicate with
a compatible key. The challenge/response negotiation starts after establishing an
RS-232 session and you enter a valid MultiVantage login ID. The authentication
transaction consists of a challenge, issued by MultiVantage and based on the login
ID entered by you, followed by the expected response, again entered by you. The
core of this transaction is a secret key, which is information-possessed by both the
lock (ASG) and the key. Interception of either the challenge or response during
transmission does not compromise the security of the system. The relevance of the
authentication token used to perform the challenge/response is limited to the
current challenge/response exchange (session).
NOTE:

ASG does not protect login access to a Multiple Application Platform for
DEFINITY (MAPD).
The supported key consists of a hand-held encryption-generating device (ASG
Key). The key (response generator) device is pre-programmed with the
appropriate secret key to communicate with corresponding ASG protected login
IDs on MultiVantage.
The Avaya Products Security Handbook contains information about:

1452

■

toll fraud and what you can do to prevent it.

■

methods people use to gain access to your system, how to detect toll fraud,
and what to do if you suspect that your system has been compromised.

■

security information for many Avaya products, so you can be sure that all
of your telecommunications equipment is secure.

■

security checklists for each of these products. You should go through these
with your Avaya representative for each piece of equipment you use.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Access Security Gateway

Interactions
■

Customer Access to Initialization and Administration System (INADS)
Port
If access to the INADS port is disabled on a system-wide basis,
administering access to the SYSAM-RMT or INADS port, through ASG,
does not override the INADS port restriction. Administration does not
prohibit assignment of ASG to the SYSAM-RMT or INADS port.
However, in a configuration where this method of access is blocked, you
will be denied access to the system through the SYSAM-RMT or INADS
port even if you attempt to access the port using a valid ASG login ID.
If access to the INADS port has been disabled on a login basis,
administering access to the SYSAM-RMT or INADS port, via ASG, will
not override the INADS port restriction.

■

Login Administration
The standard user interface for MultiVantage login administration has not
been modified by ASG. Also, the standard MultiVantage login user
interface is maintained in cases where ASG parameters have not been
administered for the login and/or port.

■

Security Violation Notification (SVN)
ASG does not support an interface to SVN. Session rejection events do not
appear in the monitor security-violations login report and referral calls are
not spawned in the event that the number of rejected ASG sessions exceeds
the threshold/time interval criteria imposed by SVN.

■

Security Measurements
ASG session establishment or reject events do not increment the Successful
Logins, Invalid Attempts, Invalid IDs, Forced Disconnects, Login Security
Violations or Trivial Attempts counters maintained for the list
measurements security-violations detail report. Additionally, login specific
information maintained by the measurements security-violations summary
report does not include ASG related data.

Related topics

See ‘‘Using access security gateway’’ on page 393 for instructions.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1453

Features and technical reference

Administered connections
An Administered Connection (AC) is a connection between 2 access or data
endpoints. MultiVantage automatically establishes the connection based on the
attributes you administer. An AC provides the following capabilities:
■

Support of both permanent and scheduled connections

■

Auto Restoration (preserving the active session) for connections routed
over Software Defined Data Network (SDDN) trunks

■

Administrable retry interval (from 1 to 60 minutes) per AC

■

Administrable alarm strategy per AC

■

Establishment/retry/auto restoration order based on administered priority

Detailed description

The SDDN provides virtual private-line connectivity using the AT&T Switched
Network. Access to the service is provided via an Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN) trunk group whose Service Type field is SDDN. The system uses
the Destination field on the Administered Connection screen to route calls when
AC is active, based on associated authorized time-of-day fields.
Establish an AC between the following:
■

Two endpoints on the same switch

■

Two endpoints in the same private network, but on different switches

■

One endpoint on the controlling switch and another endpoint off the private
network

In all configurations, administer the AC on the switch that has the originating
endpoint. For an AC in a private network, if the two endpoints are on two different
switches, normally the connection routes via AAR through tie trunks (ISDN, DS1,
or analog tie trunks) and intermediate switches. If required, route the connection
via ARS and Generalized Route Selection (GRS) through the public network. The
call routes over associated ISDN trunks. When the far-end answers, a connection
occurs between the far-end and the near-end extension in the Originator field on
the Administered Connection screen.
Access endpoints

Access endpoints are non-signaling trunk ports. They neither generate signaling to
the far-end of the trunk nor respond to signaling from the far-end. Designate an
access endpoint as the originating endpoint or destination endpoint in an AC.

1454

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administered connections

Typical AC applications

The following are typical AC applications:
■

A local data endpoint connection to a local or remote-access endpoint.
Examples: a modular processor data module (MPDM) ACCUNET digital
service connecting to SDDN via an ISDN trunk-group DS1 port; an
MPDM ACCUNET digital service connecting to an ACCUNET Switched
56 Service via a DS1 port.

■

A local-access endpoint connecting to a local or remote-access endpoint.
Examples: a DSO cross-connect and a 4-wire leased-line modem to a
4-wire modem connection via an analog tie trunk.

■

A local data endpoint connecting to a local or remote data endpoint such as
a connection between two 3270 data modules.
NOTE:

The following guidelines do not include AAR and ARS, or GRS
administration information for routing AC calls over trunk groups.
See the respective feature elsewhere in this book for that information.
Establishing Administered Connections

The originating switch attempts to establish an AC only if one of the following
conditions exist:
■

AC is active.

■

AC is due to be active (either a permanent AC or time-of-day requirements
are satisfied if it is a scheduled AC).

■

Originating endpoint is in-service or idle state.

If the originating endpoint is not in service or is idle, no activity takes place for the
AC until the endpoint transitions to the desired state. The originating switch uses
the destination address to route the call to the desired endpoint. When the switch
establishes 2 or more ACs at the same time, the switch arranges the connections in
order of priority.
AC attempts can fail for the following reasons:

555-233-506

■

Resources are unavailable to route to the destination.

■

A required conversion resource is not available.

■

Access is denied by COR, facilities restriction level (FRL), or Bearer
Capability Class (BCC). Or, an attempt is made to route voice-band-data
over SDDN trunks in the public switch network.

■

Destination address is incorrect.

■

Destination endpoint is busy.

■

Other network or signaling failures occur.

Issue 5 October 2002

1455

Features and technical reference

In the event of a failure, an error is entered into the error log, which generates an
alarm, if it is warranted by your alarming strategy. You can display AC failures via
the status administered-connection command.
As long as an AC is due to be active, the originating switch continues to establish
an AC unless the attempt fails because of an administrative error (for example, a
wrong number) or service-blocking condition (for example, outgoing calls
barred).
■

The frequency with which failed attempts are retried is determined by the
administered retry interval (1 to 60 minutes) for each AC.

■

Retries are made after the retry interval has elapsed regardless of the
restorable attribute of the AC.

■

ACs are retried in priority order.

■

When you change the time of day on the switch, an attempt is made to
establish all ACs in the waiting-for-retry state.

Dropping Administered Connections

An AC remains active until one of the following occurs:
■

The AC is changed, disabled, or removed.

■

The time-of-day requirements of a scheduled AC are no longer satisfied.

■

One of the endpoints drops the connection. This could be because of user
action (in the case of a data endpoint), maintenance activity resulting from
an endpoint failure, busying out of the endpoint, or handshake failure. If
the endpoints are incompatible, the connection is successful until
handshake failure occurs.
NOTE:

An AC between access endpoints remains connected even if the
attached access equipment fails to handshake.
■

An interruption (for example, facility failure) occurs between the
endpoints.

If an AC drops because it was disabled/removed or is no longer due to be active,
no action is taken. If an AC drops because of changed AC attributes, an immediate
attempt is made to establish the connection with the changed attributes if it is still
due to be active. Existing entries in the error/alarm log are resolved if they no
longer apply. If handshake failure resulted in the dropping of the connection, in
the case of an AC involving at least one data endpoint, no action is taken for that
AC until the change administered-connection command is executed.

1456

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administered connections

Administered Connections failure: Auto
Restoration and Fast Retry

When an active AC drops prematurely, you must invoke either auto restoration or
fast retry to determine whether auto restoration is attempted for an active AC.
If you option AC for auto restoration and the connection was routed over SDDN
trunks, auto restoration is attempted. During restoration, connections are
maintained between the switch and both endpoints. In addition to allowing the
active session to be maintained, AC also provides a high level of security by
prohibiting other connections from intervening in active sessions. Auto
restoration generally completes before the 60-second endpoint holdover interval.
If auto restoration is successful, the call might be maintained (no guarantee). The
restoration is transparent to the user with the exception of a temporary disruption
of service while restoration is in progress. A successful restoration is reflected by
the restored state on the status Administered Connection screen. Although the
restoration was successful, the data session may not have been preserved.
If auto restoration is not active or if the AC is not routed over SDDN trunks, the
switch immediately attempts to reestablish the connection (fast retry). The switch
also attempts a retry if the originating endpoint initiated the drop. With fast retry,
connections are not maintained on both ends. Fast retry is not attempted for an AC
that was last established via fast retry, unless the AC is active for at least two
minutes.
If auto restoration or fast retry fails to restore or reestablish the connection, the
call drops and the AC goes into retry mode. Retry attempts continue, at the
administered retry interval, as long as the AC is due to be active.
Interactions
■

Abbreviated Dialing
Use Abbreviated Dialing entries in the Destination field on the
Administered Connection screen. Entries must comply with restrictions.

■

Busy Verification of Stations and Trunks
This feature does not apply to access endpoints because they are used only
for data.

■

Call Detail Recording (CDR)
For an AC that uses a trunk when CDR is active, the origination extension
is the originator of the call.
CDR is not available for access endpoints.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1457

Features and technical reference

■

Class of Restriction
Reserve a COR for AC endpoints and SDDN trunks. This restricts
endpoints that are not involved in AC from connecting to SDDN trunks or
endpoints involved in AC.

■

Class of Service/Call Forwarding
Assign to an AC endpoint a COS that blocks Call Forwarding activation at
the endpoint.

■

Data Call Setup
Do not assign a default dialing destination to a data module when it is used
in an AC.

■

Data Hotline
Do not assign a hotline destination to a data module that is used in an AC.

■

Digital Multiplexed Interface (DMI)
Use DMI endpoints as the destination in an AC. DMI endpoints do not
have associated extensions, so do not use them as the originator in an AC.

■

Facility Test Calls
The feature does not apply to access endpoints because an access endpoint
acts as an endpoint rather than as a trunk.

■

Hunting
Do not use a hunt-group extension as the origination extension of an AC.

■

Modem Pooling
If you require a modem in an AC, one is inserted automatically. If no
modem is available, the connection drops.

■

Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) and D-Channel Backup
Auto restoration for an AC that initially is routed over an NFAS facility
may fail if the only backup route is over the facility on which the backup
D-channel is administered. The backup D-channel may not come into
service in time to handle the restoration attempt.

■

Set Time Command
When you change the system time via the set time command, all scheduled
AC are examined. If the time change causes an active AC to be outside its
scheduled period, the AC drops. If the time change causes an inactive AC
to be within its scheduled period, the switch attempts to establish the AC.
If any AC (scheduled or continuous) is in retry mode and the system time
changes, the switch attempts to establish the AC.

1458

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Administration change notification

■

System Measurements
Access endpoints are not measured. All other trunks in an AC are measured
as usual.

■

Terminal Dialing
Turn off terminal dialing for data modules involved in an AC. This
prevents display of call-processing messages (INCOMING CALL,...) on
the terminal.

■

Trunk Groups
To invoke auto restoration, route an AC over SDDN trunks. Because a
successful restoration depends on a SDDN path, keep some SDDN trunks
idle.

Administration change notification
You can use Administration Change Notification to notify adjunct systems when
MultiVantage administration data is changed. This is intended to keep a client
application running on an adjunct, such as Enterprise Directory Gateway, in sync
with changes in the switch.
You can request notification of any changes to MultiVantage administration by
entering the command notify history from the client application. MultiVantage
will continue to send notification to the adjunct over the Operations Support
System Interface (OSSI) link until the command is cancelled.
Detailed description

Administration Change Notification tracks changes made via the System Access
Terminal (SAT), INADS port, Property Management System (PMS), Call
Management System (CMS), Avaya Site Administration (ASA), Avaya Network
Administration, or Avaya Directory Gateway. It also tracks any changes made
through a telephone interface, such as Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI),
Personal Station Access (PSA), and Terminal Self Administration.
The MultiVantage System only notifies the adjunct that a data object has been
changed, but does not provide details of the change. In order to obtain these
details, the adjunct must request this information from the switch over a separate
link.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1459

Features and technical reference

Administrable language displays
You can display messages in English, French, Italian, Spanish, or a user-defined
language on attendant consoles and phones that have 40-character displays.
Detailed description

You can select a language for messages that appear on phones and attendant
consoles that have 40-character displays. You can choose one of five languages:
English, French, Italian, Spanish, or “user-defined.” The meanings of the
messages do not change, only the language.
If your company uses 32-character display phones, you cannot choose a display
language. These phones, including the hybrid MERLIN 7315H and 7317H
phones, default to English.
Related topics

You can display the following types of information in English, French, Italian and
Spanish:

1460

■

Automatic Wakeup

■

ASAI

■

Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks

■

Call Appearance buttons

■

Call Detail Recording

■

Call Progress Feedback Displays

■

Class of Restriction

■

Date-Time Mode - Time Not Available

■

Days of the Week

■

Months of the Year

■

Do Not Disturb

■

Enhanced Abbreviated Dialing

■

Integrated Directory

■

ISDN

■

Leave Word Calling

■

Malicious Call Trace

■

Emergency Access to Attendant

■

Queue Status

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Alternate facility restriction levels

■

Miscellaneous Call Identifiers

■

Party Identifiers

■

Property Management Interface

■

Security Violation Notification

■

Stored numbers

■

Station hunting

■

Time-of-day Routing

■

Transfer messages

Alternate facility restriction levels
Alternate Facility Restriction Levels (AFRL) allows a second set of facility
restriction levels within a route pattern or for lines or trunks. Attendants and
system administrators can activate the alternate FRLs and change users’ access to
lines and trunks. For example, a company can use AFRL to disable long-distance
calling at night to prevent unauthorized staff from making long-distance calls.
AFRL alters the route patterns for originating phones, originating trunks, and
dialed authorization codes. If AFRL is active, Travelling Class Mark (TCM) is
also set to a new FRL value and the TCM information recorded in the billing data
(CDR) is the AFRL value, not the original TCM.

! CAUTION:
AFRL impacts AAR and ARS call routing because it may change routing
preferences. Using AFRL on tandem and tie-trunk applications affects entire
networks. Calls that are part of a cross-country private network and may
have to be routed further may be blocked.
Detailed description

You can administer an ALT-FRL button to any attendant console or any station to
activate and deactivate the AFRL. Pressing the ALT-FRL button may affect the
status of other buttons.
When AFRL is active, the user may notice a change in calling privileges.
Consider notifying users of the changes, and prepare your telecommunications
department to handle inquiries.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1461

Features and technical reference

Authorization codes

Authorization codes prevent unauthorized access to various facilities. When a
user dials an authorization code, your system checks the code. If it is not valid, the
call is intercepted. If the code is valid, the system determines an associated COR
and FRL. If AFRL is activated, the AFRL level is used.
For example, a user whose FRL is 1 attempts a long-distance call. AFRL is active
and maps to AFRL 3. The desired trunk has an FRL of 7, and the call is blocked.
In the example below, an Authorization Code set to1234567 has a COR of 3 with
an FRL 5, which is still not high enough to access the desired trunk. However,
AFRL is active and FRL 5 maps to FRL 7. The call is allowed.

Authorization code to COR Table

COR to FRL Table

Authorization Code

COR

COR

FRL

FRL

AFRL

1234567

3

1

1

0

3

1234568

2

2

3

1

3

1234569

3

3

5

2

3

2222222

3

7

3

3

4

7

5

7

6

7

7

7

4

Originator COR is 1
Trunk Desired COR is 4

Figure 56.

1462

FRL to AFRL Table

Example of authorization codes with AFRLs

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Analog busy automatic callback without flash

Analog busy automatic callback
without flash
This is an automatic callback for analog stations without flashing the hook. It will
be applied only when the called station is busy and has no other coverage path or
call forwarding. The caller can enable the automatic callback without flashing the
hook or entering the feature access code.
Detailed description

With Analog Busy Automatic Callback without Flash, when the caller places a
call through an analog station, and the called station is busy and has no coverage
path or forwarding, the caller hears an announcement and is presented with
options. Depending on the caller’s selection, the call is queued to Automatic
Callback, routed to an extension, or dropped.
Configurations

This feature will be available on the following platforms:
S8100 Media Server with a G600
S8100 Media Server with a CMC1
MultiVantage on a DEFINITY CSI
DEFINITY SI with an SCC1 Media Gateway
DEFINITY with an SCC1 Media Gateway
Related topics

‘‘Automatic callback’’ on page 1486

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1463

Features and technical reference

Announcements
You can record announcements for people to hear when they call in to your office.
For example, you can let callers know that their call cannot be completed as
dialed, that their call is in queue, or that all the lines are busy.
Announcements can be integrated or external. Integrated announcements reside
on a circuit pack in the switch carrier. Your system can store multiple
announcements on each circuit pack up to the system capacity.
For MultiVantage software release R11 or later, multiple telephone sessions are
allowed, with one session associated with each active integrated announcement
circuit pack.
External announcements are stored and played back from adjunct equipment. For
more information on external announcements, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call
Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers.
Any announcement stored on a circuit pack can play through any port on the
circuit pack. Any announcement (not administered for “barge-in”) can play
simultaneously through multiple ports. All ports can play the same announcement
at the same time, and the system can connect multiple users to each of these
announcements.
Three types of announcements are:
■

delay announcement — explains the reason for the delay and encourages
caller to wait

■

forced announcement — explains an emergency or service problem. Use
when you anticipate a large number of calls about a specific issue.

■

information announcement — gives the caller instructions on how to
proceed, information about the number called, or information that the caller
wants

TN2501AP announcements

The TN2501AP is an integrated announcement circuit pack that allows you to
store and manage announcements over a Local Area Network (LAN). For this
reason, it is sometimes referred to as the Voice Announcements over the LAN
(VAL) circuit pack.
The TN2501AP can make use of a separate announcement management tool, VAL
Manager. VAL Manager provides a PC interface from which you can add, change,
delete, save, and restore announcements. For more information, see ‘‘VAL
Manager’’ on page 466.

1464

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Announcements

Despite the name, announcements are not actually played over the LAN, but can
be transferred to and from the TN2501AP circuit pack over the LAN.
The TN2501AP
■

is available with both Offer Category A (ECS and ProLogix Solutions) and
Category B (BCS and GuestWorks).

■

works with DEFINITY R, SI, CSI, S8100 Media Server with a CMC1,
S8100 Media Server with a G600 platforms.

■

can be updated with firmware files downloaded directly over the LAN. The
files are downloaded through the TN2501AP’s 10/100Mb ethernet
interface, not through the TN799 C-LAN circuit pack.

■

has a 10/100MB ethernet LAN connection through the Backplane Adapter.

■

has up to 31 ports for announcement playback, with an additional port for
recording announcements directly to the TN2501AP circuit pack through a
system telephone.

You cannot save or restore announcements to a TN2501AP circuit pack to/from
■

a TN750C circuit pack

■

flash cards

■

tape

■

magneto optical disks

Administration options for TN2501AP
announcements

If you use the TN2501AP circuit pack, you can manage announcements through
■

the System Access Terminal (SAT).

■

Avaya Site Administration (ASA)

■

a PC running the VAL Manager application. VAL Manager is the easiest
way for you to manage your TN2501AP announcements. For more
information, see your Avaya representative.

You can record VAL announcements

555-233-506

■

from a system phone.

■

on a computer or any device that supports recording .wav files in a
VAL-compatible format (CCITT µ-Law or A-Law, 8KHz, 8-bit mono).

■

at a professional recording studio.

Issue 5 October 2002

1465

Features and technical reference

See ‘‘Announcement file format requirements’’ on page 455 for more
information about recording parameters.
The following table shows the VAL administration tasks and which interface you
can use to complete each task. The TN2501AP circuit pack was designed with
your efficiency and flexibility in mind, so try combining methods to accommodate
your particular installation. See ‘‘Getting started with the TN2501AP or G700
Virtual VAL’’ on page 451 and ‘‘Managing VAL Announcements Using FTP’’ on
page 459 for instructions for performing these tasks.
Table 18. VAL administration tasks
Methods
Tasks

SAT

Adding announcement extensions

X

Deleting VAL announcements

X

FTP

VAL
Manager

X
X

X

Saving or backing up announcements

X

X

Restoring an announcement

X

X

X

X

Moving announcement files or administration
Recording announcements

X

Professional or computer recordings
or system phone
Continued on next page

System restarts - TN750

When someone powers up the system or inserts or resets an announcement circuit
pack, the system checks the circuit pack for announcements. If the system finds no
announcements on the circuit pack, and there are recorded announcements stored
in system memory, the system restores the announcements from system memory
to the announcement circuit pack.

! CAUTION:
The announcements that are automatically restored are the last
announcements saved to system memory. If multiple circuit packs are used,
system memory might not contain the announcement for the B or A circuit
pack.

1466

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Announcements

The system automatically restores announcements to only one announcement
circuit pack. The system does not restore to announcement circuit packs that have
built-in memory.
About barge-in

You can allow callers to begin listening to an announcement after the system has
begun playing the message. This is called “barge-in.” Use barge-in with auxiliary
trunk announcements, DS1 announcements, and integrated announcements.
With barge-in, only one port plays the announcement at any one time. The system
routes a call to the announcement, immediately connects the call to the port, and
the caller hears the announcement as it is playing. You can set up barge-in
announcements to repeat continually while callers are connected to the port. The
caller listens until the system plays the entire announcement.
Interactions
■

Automatic Wakeup
Recorded Announcement allows Automatic Wakeup to use the built-in
announcement circuit pack in place of an Audichron adjunct.
If you use an integrated, multiple-integrated, or external type of
announcement for Automatic Wakeup, you can also administer the
announcement to repeat and to allow “barge-in” as a queue type. The
benefit of repeating announcements and “barge-in” queues is that you do
not need a separate port for each wakeup announcement. When guests pick
up an announcement at a particular time, they use only one port and the
message repeats until the last guest hangs up and the message ends.

Related topics

See ‘‘Managing announcements’’ on page 439 for information on how to
administer announcements on your switch.
See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for more information
on the TN2501AP and the TN750-series announcement circuit packs.
See the Made Easy Tool for DEFINITY Media Server Configurations for
information related to installing and upgrading a system with the TN2501AP.
See ‘‘Managing vectors and VDNs’’ on page 230 for information on how to play
an announcement for a call in a queue.
See ‘‘Announcement Type’’ on page 868 for information on setting up
announcements for hotel guests.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1467

Features and technical reference

Answer detection
For proper CDR and accurate billing, you need to know when your outgoing calls
are answered. Answer detection means the method a switch uses to determine
whether an outgoing call has been answered.
Brief description

MultiVantage provides 3 ways to determine whether the called party has answered
a call.
Call classification

A call-classifier circuit pack detects tones and voice-frequency signals on the line
to determine whether a call has been answered. This method is fairly accurate:
calls that are answered normally are usually classified correctly. But there are
exceptions:
■

Miscellaneous tones, such as confirmation tones, may be classified as
answers.

■

Loud background noise may activate answer detection, causing a call to be
classified as answered even if the call is not connected.

■

Some calls that are answered may be incorrectly classified as fast busy
signals.

■

Call classifier circuit packs also don’t recognize Special Information Tones
(SIT) as answers.

Of course, the system generates a call record for any call that is classified as
answered whether the classification is correct or not. If Call Classification
incorrectly classifies a call as answered, and then the call is subsequently
answered, the call duration reported by CDR includes the both time between the
incorrect classification and the actual answer and the remaining duration of the
call.
If you want to use call classification, on the System Parameter Customer-Options
screen verify the Answer Supervision by Call Classifier field is y. If not, contact
your Avaya representative. You also must have a call classifier circuit pack of the
correct type. To find out what circuit packs you need, see Avaya MultiVantage™
Solutions Hardware Guide.

1468

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Answer detection

Network answer supervision

The central office sends a signal to the originating switch to indicate that the far
end has answered. If a call traveled over a private network before reaching the
central office, the signal is transmitted back over the private network to the
originating switch. This method is extremely accurate, but it is not available over
most loop-start trunks (for example, central office (CO), foreign exchange (FX)
and Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS) trunks in the US).
Network answer supervision does not override answer supervision by timeout.
Answer supervision by timeout

You set a timer for each trunk group, using the Answer Supervision Timeout field
on the Trunk Group screen. Or you set a circuit pack timer for the ports on that
circuit pack, using the Outgoing End of Dial (sec) field on the Trunk Group
screen. If the caller is off-hook when the timer expires, the system assumes that
the outgoing call has been answered. This is the least accurate method. Calls that
are shorter than the timer duration do not generate call records, and calls that ring
for a long time produce call records whether they are answered.
If network answer supervision is received, it overrides answer supervision by
timeout.
Interactions
■

Call Detail Recording
Answer Detection provides more accurate call records where tone
detection is possible and Network Answer Supervision is not received.

■

Call Prompting
Call classification competes with Call Prompting for ports on the call
classifier circuit pack.

■

CallVisor ASAI
Call classification competes with CallVisor ASAI switch-classified calls
for ports on the call classifier circuit pack. Answer Detection triggers
reporting of a connect event to ASAI.

Related topics

See ‘‘Administering answer detection’’ on page 436 for instructions.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for definitions of the fields used to administer
answer detection.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1469

Features and technical reference

Attendant Features
This section describes the following MultiVantage features that you may want to
administer for your console operators:
■

‘‘Attendant Call Waiting’’ on page 1470

■

‘‘Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access’’ on page 1472

■

‘‘Attendant Direct Extension Selection’’ on page 1473

■

‘‘Attendant Intrusion’’ on page 1474

■

‘‘Attendant Override of Diversion Features’’ on page 1474

■

‘‘Attendant Serial Calling’’ on page 1475

■

‘‘Auto Start and Don’t Split’’ on page 1475

■

‘‘Attendant Timers’’ on page 1476

■

‘‘Visually Impaired Attendant Service’’ on page 1478

Each feature indicates how to administer the Attendant Console screen, Console
Parameters screen, and other system-wide screens to enable the feature.
Attendant Call Waiting

Attendant Call Waiting allows an attendant-originated or attendant-extended call
to a busy single-line telephone to wait at the called telephone so that the attendant
can handle other calls.
If you want the attendant to be able to send calls to busy single-line phones, set the
Att. Call Waiting Indication field to Y on the Station screen for each single-line
phone.
When the single-line phone receives a waiting call, the phone user hears a
call-waiting signal. You can administer the number of bursts (1, 2, or 3) in the
call-waiting signal by changing the Attendant Originated Calls field on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
If the attendant activates Attendant Call Waiting, and the Timed Reminder on
Hold interval or the Return Call Timeout interval expires without the call being
answered, the call returns to the console. You can modify these intervals on the
Console Parameters screen.

1470

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Features

Interactions
■

Automatic Callback
Activating Automatic Callback at the called telephone denies Attendant
Call Waiting.

■

Call Coverage
Attendant Call Waiting calls redirect to coverage if the called phone has
Data Privacy or Data Restriction activated. If one of these conditions
exists, and you assign call coverage to a telephone, and the user activates
Send All Calls or coverage criteria is met, the call redirects to coverage.
— The Coverage Don’t Answer interval specifies how long a call
remains directed to the called telephone before redirecting to
coverage. Attendant Call Waiting if applicable on the call, is active
for the duration of the Don’t Answer interval only. At the end of this
interval, the call redirects to coverage.
— If the Return Call Timeout (Timed Reminder) interval expires
before the Don’t Answer interval expires, the call does not go to
coverage, but returns to an attendant console. If the Don’t Answer
interval expires first, the call redirects to coverage, but can still
return to the console if a coverage point does not answer the call
before the Return Call Timeout.
— If the Station Hunting field is assigned and the called telephone is
busy, the call redirects to the Hunt To Station Assignment.

■

Data Privacy, Data Restriction
Activating Data Privacy or Data Restriction at the called telephone denies
Attendant Call Waiting.

■

Direct Department Calling (DDC) and Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Calls to a DDC or UCD group do not wait. However, they can enter the
group queue, if provided.

■

Loudspeaker Paging Access
Activating Loudspeaker Paging Access at the called telephone denies
Attendant Call Waiting.

■

Music-on-Hold Access
The calling party hears music if the call is a trunk-transferred call
administered to receive Music-on-Hold. Otherwise, the calling party hears
ringing.

■

Recorded Telephone Dictation Access
Activating Recorded Telephone Dictation Access at the called telephone
denies Attendant Call Waiting.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1471

Features and technical reference

Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access

Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access allows the attendant to control trunk
groups, and prevents telephone users from directly accessing a controlled trunk
group. The attendant gains direct access to an outgoing trunk group by pressing
the button assigned to that trunk group.
Each attendant console has 12 designated Trunk Hundreds Select buttons that can
be administered for Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access. You can also
administer each console with up to 12 feature buttons for Trunk Hundreds Select
buttons, which gives you up to a total of 24 buttons.
Each Trunk Hundreds Select button has busy lamps that light when all the
members of the associated trunk group are busy. If you administer one of the
2-lamp feature buttons on a basic console as a Trunk Hundreds Select button, use
the bottom lamp as the busy lamp. These buttons have 2 additional lamps for
Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access. The 2 lamps are:
■

Warn (warning) lamp
Lights when the administered number of trunks are busy in the associated
trunk group. You administer the Busy Threshold field on the associated
Trunk Group screen to determine when to light this warning lamp.

■

Cont (control) lamp
Lights when the attendant activates Attendant Control of Trunk Group
Access for the associated trunk group. Assign act-tr-grp and deact-tr-g
buttons on the Attendant Console screen to allow the attendant to activate
and deactivate control of the trunk group access.

Interactions
■

Authorization Codes
Authorization codes do not collect when a trunk group has an incoming
destination set to the attendant.

■

Automatic Route Selection and Automatic Alternate Routing (ARS/AAR)
Activating Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access removes the
controlled trunk groups from the ARS and AAR patterns. Deactivating the
feature reinserts the groups into the patterns. ARS calls do not route to the
attendant.

■

QSIG
QSIG trunks do not support Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access.

■

Uniform Dial Plan
Activating Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access removes the
controlled trunk groups from preferences. Deactivating the feature enables
the UDP to access the trunk groups.

1472

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Features

Attendant Direct Extension Selection

Attendant Direct Extension Selection (DXS) with busy lamp field allows the
attendant to track extension status (idle or busy) and to place or extend calls to
extension numbers without having to dial the extension.
Standard DXS Tracking

The basic selector console has 8 Hundreds Select buttons and 100 DXS buttons.
The enhanced selector console has 20 Hundreds Select buttons and 100 DXS
buttons. You can assign 12 additional Hundreds Select buttons to feature buttons
on the attendant console.
However, as you assign these feature buttons, note that the total number of
Hundreds Select buttons per attendant (including both attendant-console feature
buttons and selector-console buttons) cannot exceed 20.
Enhanced DXS Tracking

Enhanced DXS Tracking can help you if you have more than 100 telephones, but
you use a console that does not have Hundreds Select buttons administered. It can
also help if you have more telephones than you do Hundreds Select buttons (and
thus have hundreds groups that are administered with Hundreds Select buttons).
To use Enhanced DXS, assign a Group Select button on the Attendant Console
screen. This button allows the attendant to track and extend calls to telephones
that do not have associated Hundreds Select buttons. You can not use Enhanced
DXS Tracking if your extensions have fewer than three digits.
Group Display button

You can administer a Group Display button on the Attendant Console screen to
help the attendant track extension status. When the attendant presses this button,
the system displays the range of extensions currently tracked by the selector
console. Administer the Group Display button for either the feature area or the
display area of the console.
If the attendant selects this button, the system identifies the digits associated with
a Hundreds Select button — unless it finds no Hundreds Select button is lit, in
which case it identifies the digits last entered with the Group Select button. The
system continues to track the selected group of extensions until the attendant
selects a new group of extensions.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1473

Features and technical reference

Attendant Intrusion

The attendant intrusion (Call Offer) button allows an attendant to intrude on an
existing call to offer a new call or message to the intruded party.
When the attendant releases the intruded call, the source party waits at the
intruded party’s analog telephone or holds on an available line appearance on a
digital telephone.
Interactions
■

Intrusion is denied in the following cases:
— A telephone is on a conference call with administered maximum
number of conferees
— A call is established with Data Privacy activated
— Establish a call with Data Restriction activated
— A telephone is a forward-to point of another telephone
— A telephone is busy talking to another attendant

■

If a call is already call waiting for the intruded party, the source (split from
attendant) party cannot wait for the intruded party using Call Waiting.

■

The attendant display shows the character ‘1 wait’ or ‘1 busy’ if an
intrusion is possible. Otherwise, the display shows ‘wait’ or ‘busy’.

■

The system provides Attendant Intrusion on remote telephones via
TGU/TGE trunks (Italy only).

Attendant Override of Diversion Features

Attendant Override of Diversion Features (override button) allows an attendant to
bypass call-diversion features activated by a called extension. A diversion feature
is any feature that, when activated, causes a call to redirect from the called
telephone. Send All Calls, Call Coverage, and Call Forwarding are diversion
features.
You should explain to your attendants that they can use this feature with the
Attendant Intrusion to place an emergency or urgent call to a telephone user.

1474

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Features

Attendant Serial Calling

Attendant Serial Calling enables the attendant to transfer trunk calls that return to
the same attendant after the called party hangs up. Once outside callers reach an
attendant, they can use the same line into the switch for multiple calls. Attendant
Serial Calling is useful if trunks are scarce and Direct Inward Dialing services are
unavailable.
To allow your attendant to use serial calling, assign a serial-cal button on the
Attendant Console screen. The Attendant Serial Calling feature is valid only on
calls that have only one trunk on the connection.
You can define a priority queue for Serial Calls on the Console Parameters screen.
Interactions
■

Centralized Attendant Services
Attendant Serial Calling does not work with Centralized Attendant
Services.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Attendant Serial Calling works in a DCS environment only if the attendant
activates it on the same node as the trunk to which the attendant is
connected. Do not conference the incoming trunk call with a DCS party
when activating. This would put two trunks on the connection.

Attendant Vectoring

Attendant Vectoring allows you to establish an attendant vector directory number
(VDN) and send attendant group calls through vector processing. This is useful
when you want more flexibility with how calls are routed when the system is in
Night Service mode. For more information, see Avaya MultiVantage™ Call
Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide.
Auto Start and Don’t Split

Auto Start allows the attendant to initiate a call by pressing any key on the keypad
without having to first press the Start button.
If an attendant enables Auto Start and dials an AAR number where the min and
max in the AAR analysis table are not equal, the attendant must dial a # after the
digit string or the call cannot process.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1475

Features and technical reference

You can assign a dont-split button on the Attendant Console screen which allows
attendants to deactivate Auto Start. To deactivate auto start, the attendant presses
the Don’t Split button. When Don’t Split is active, keys pressed on the keypad are
heard by the parties on the call.
To reactivate Auto Start, and allow end-to-end signaling, the attendant again
presses the Don’t Split button, presses Cancel, or lets the current call terminate.
Interactions
■

CDR — Account Code Dialing
If the system is using Call Detail Recording Account Code Dialing, Auto
Start and Don’t Split is not activated.

■

Visually Impaired Attendant Service
If VIAS is activated or deactivated while Don’t Split is active, Don’t Split
deactivates.

Attendant Timers

Attendant timers automatically alert the attendant after an administered time
interval. The attendant can reenter the call and decide whether to terminate the
call or permit the waiting to continue. You administer the timers on the Console
Parameters screen.
Attendant Timers include:

1476

■

Unanswered DID Call Timer — Specifies how long a direct inward dialing
(DID) call can go unanswered before it routes to the administered
DID/TIE/ISDN Intercept Treatment.

■

Attendant Return Call Timer — For unanswered calls that were extended
by the attendant, they are returned to the same attendant who released them
if the attendant is available. Otherwise they return to the attendant-group
queue. The Attendant Return Call Timer is not set for calls extended from
one attendant to another individual attendant. A transferred call that times
out redirects to an attendant after an interval equal to the Attendant Return
Call timer.

■

Attendant Timed Reminder of Held Call Timer — Specifies how long a
call is held. When the timer expires, the held call alerts the attendant. The
message hc appears on the attendant display. You can administer either a
high-pitched ring or a primary alert.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Attendant Features

■

Attendant No-Answer Timer — Specifies how long a call that terminates at
an attendant console can ring with primary alerting. When the call reaches
this interval setting, it rings with a secondary, higher-pitch ring. A disabled
Attendant No Answer Timer’s ringing pattern does not change over from
the primary to the secondary pattern. If the call remains unanswered during
this interval, it routes to the attendant group and console where the call was
placed in a Position Busy state. This feature does not apply to calls placed
to the attendant’s extension or to calls originated by the attendant.

■

Attendant Alerting Interval (Timed Reminder) — Specifies how long a call
that terminates at an attendant console can ring with secondary alerting.
When the call reaches this interval, the attendant console is placed into
position busy mode and the call forwards to the attendant group. If the
console where the alerting interval is reached is the last active day console,
then the system goes into night service if night service is enabled. This
feature does not apply to calls placed to the attendant’s extension or to calls
originated by the attendant.
You can disable the alerting interval. In this case, a call continues to ring at
the original attendant’s extension until the caller hangs up or another
feature disconnects the call (for example, reaching the timeout limit for
unanswered DID calls during night service.)

■

Line Intercept Tone Timer — Specifies how long line intercept can be. For
example: LITT:10 seconds means that line intercept stops after 10 seconds.

■

Call Coverage

Interactions

If a telephone user transfers a call to an on-premises telephone and the call
remains unanswered at the expiration of the Timed Reminder Interval, the
call redirects to an attendant. Redirection occurs even if the call redirects
via Call Coverage or Call Forwarding from the transferred-to telephone.
An attendant-extended call redirects to coverage instead of returning to an
attendant if the coverage criteria are met before the Timed Reminder
Interval expires. However, unanswered calls return to an attendant at the
expiration of the interval.
If a call alerts an attendant as a coverage call (unanswered station-to-station
call with the “attd” (attendant) in the called telephone’s coverage path
screen), the secondary alerting tone does not sound.
■

Centralized Attendant Service
If an attendant at the main location transfers a call from a branch location to
an extension at the main location, the timed reminder does not apply and
the call does not return to the attendant if unanswered.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1477

Features and technical reference

Visually Impaired Attendant Service

Visually Impaired Attendant Service (VIAS) allows a visually-impaired attendant
to listen to an audio description of each feature button in Inspect mode. It provides
the description in either British English or Italian.
The attendant presses the Inspect mode to locate each button and then presses a
feature button to determine the feature assigned to the button without actually
executing the feature.
The six VIAS attendant buttons are:
■

Visually Impaired Service Activation/Deactivation button: activates or
deactivates the feature. All ringers previously disabled (for example, recall
and incoming calls) become reenabled.

■

Console Status button: voices whether the console is in Position Available
or Position Busy state, whether the console is a night console, the status of
the attendant queue, and the status of system alarms.

■

Display Status button: voices what is shown on the console display. VIAS
support is not available for all display features (for example,
class-of-restriction information, personal names, and some call purposes).

■

Last Operation button: voices the last operation performed.

■

Last Voiced Message button: repeats the last voiced message.

■

Direct Trunk Group Selection Status button: voices the status of an
attendant-monitored trunk group.

Some changes on the attendant console are automatically voiced (for example,
alarms reported, night service activated, and call thresholds reached).

Audible message waiting
Audible Message Waiting places a stutter at the beginning of a station dial tone on
a station that has a message waiting. Audible Message Waiting is particularly
useful for visually impaired people who may not be able to see a message light.
Messages for a station can be waiting in system memory (to be accessed via
display or voice synthesizer), Property Management System (PMS) or AUDIX.
When the system loses synchronization between telephones and message-status
data, use Clear Message Waiting Indicators to turn off message-waiting indicators.
You typically assign Audible Message Waiting on phones without
message-waiting lights, such as analog telephones.

1478

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Authorization codes

Audible Message Waiting requires a separate software right-to-use fee. Audible
Message Waiting may not be applicable in countries that restrict the
characteristics of dial tones provided to users.
Related topics

See ‘‘System-Parameters Customer-Options’’ on page 1186 for information about
and fields descriptions on the System Parameters Customer-Options screen.
Complete the Audible Message Waiting field on this screen to administer audible
message waiting.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about and fields descriptions on the
Station screen. Complete the Audible Message Waiting field on this screen to
administer audible message waiting.

Authorization codes
Authorization codes provide the means for extending control of system users’
calling privileges. They extend calling-privilege control and enhance security for
remote-access callers.
NOTE:

To maintain system security, Avaya recommends you use
authorization codes.
Authorization codes may be used to:
■

Override an FRL assigned to an originating station or trunk

■

Restrict individual incoming tie trunks and remote-access trunks

■

Track Call Detail Recording calls for cost-allocation purposes

■

Provide additional security control

You can make authorization codes mandatory by setting, on the trunk group
screen, the Auth Code field to y. See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for more
information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1479

Features and technical reference

More information

When you dial an authorization code, the FRL assigned to the extension number,
attendant console, incoming trunk group, or remote access trunk group being used
for the call is replaced by the FRL assigned to the authorization code. The new
FRL functions the same as the one it replaces; however, the new FRL may
represent greater or lesser calling privileges than the FRL that it replaces. Access
to any given facility depends on the restrictions associated with the authorization
code FRL.
Example

A supervisor is at a desk of an employee and wants to make a call that is not
normally allowed by the FRL assigned to that employee’s extension. The
supervisor, however, can still make the call by dialing an authorization code that is
assigned an FRL that is not restricted from making that type of call.
For security reasons, authorization codes range from 4 to 13 digits. The number of
digits in the codes must be a fixed length for a particular MultiVantage system.
NOTE:

Once established, the number of digits (4 to 13) in the authorization
code remains fixed unless all codes are removed and re-entered. All
authorization codes used in the system must be the same length.
Incoming trunk groups within a system may be administered to always require an
authorization code. The system applies recall dial tone to a call when the user
must dial an authorization code. If the user dials a correct authorization code
within 10 seconds (interdigit timeout), the call completes as dialed. If the user
does not dial an authorization code or dials an incorrect authorization code, the
call routes to the attendant, or routes to intercept tone, depending on system
administration.
Normally, Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks should not require authorization
codes. However, it can be done and care should be taken when administering DID
trunks to require an authorization code, because different type calls could
terminate at different endpoints, and requiring an authorization code could be
confusing to the caller.

1480

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Authorization codes

A Cancellation of Authorization Code Request (CACR) digit may be
administered. The CACR digit cancels the 10-second interval between dialing.
When the CACR digit is dialed, the call immediately routes according to system
administration. (Incoming trunk calls receive intercept treatment or go to the
attendant.) Other calls receive intercept treatment unless the user’s FRL is high
enough to route the call. A CACR digit from an off-premises extension over
DID/Tie trunks use DID/Tie trunk intercept treatment. Internal calls receive
intercept tone.

! CAUTION:
Do not program passwords or authorization codes onto auto dial buttons.
Display telephones display the programmed buttons, providing internal
abusers access to the auto dial buttons to originate unauthorized calls. If
passwords or authorization codes must be programmed onto auto dial
buttons, use the ~s (suppress) character to prevent displaying the codes.
For more information, see BCS Products Security Handbook.
AAR and ARS Calls

Each authorization code is assigned a COR that contains an associated FRL.
Within a system, access privileges are determined by the FRL assigned to the
facility where the call is originated. When an AAR/ARS call is dialed, the system
allows or denies the call based on the FRL of the originating station. COR is used
to restrict internal or non-AAR/ARS calls.
Authorization codes are given to individual users and provide a method of
specifying the level of calling privileges for that user regardless of the originating
facility. Once an authorization code is required and dialed on an AAR/ARS call,
the FRL assigned to the authorization code replaces the originating FRL and
controls and defines the user’s privileges.
An AAR or ARS call originated by a system user or routed over an incoming tie
trunk may require a dialed authorization code to continue routing.
Extreme care should be taken when administering authorization codes, so that a
user does not have to dial the authorization code more than once. For example, if a
user makes an AAR or ARS call and the user’s FRL is not high enough to access
any of the trunks in the routing pattern, the system prompts the user for an
authorization code. If the FRL assigned to the authorization code is high enough
to access the next trunk group in the routing pattern, the user is not prompted to
dial the code again. If the call is routed through another switch, the user may be
required to dial an authorization code again. This type of situation can be avoided
through careful administration.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1481

Features and technical reference

When an authorization code is required on some, but not all, trunk groups, the
system prompts for an authorization code when the originating FRL is not
adequate to access the next available trunk group in the routing pattern.
Considerations
■

From remote locations users typically access authorization from touch-tone
stations. However they can also do so from rotary dialing stations at
specified authorization-code-forced locations that follow appropriate trunk
administration practices. Rotary station users access attendants via Listed
Directory Numbers (LDN) or remote access numbers and can experience a
10-second timeout.

■

The use of Authorization Codes does not limit other call-control methods
such as Toll Restriction, Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction, and Outward
Restriction.

■

For security reasons, do not assign authorization codes in sequential order.
Assign random number barrier codes and authorization codes to users so if
a hacker deciphers one code, it will not lead to the next code.

■

If timeout to attendant does not occur or CACR digit codes are dialed
instead of authorization codes, the system assumes that invalid
authorization codes were dialed and the caller is given intercept tones.

■

Authorization codes impact calling privileges by:
— Changing an outgoing-call FRL when it is insufficient to access
preferred routing patterns assigned by AAR/ARS. An FRL is
assigned to a COR associated with user authorization codes. No
additional COR data is assigned.
— Overriding COR for remote access calls assigned to barrier codes,
when required. For remote-access calls, if an authorization code is
required, the user is assigned the COR of the dialed authorization
code, with all connected data, such as the FRL. This COR overrides
the COR assigned to any required barrier code.

■

1482

Incoming trunk calls that require authorization codes do not change user
privileges.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Authorization codes

Interactions
■

AAR/ARS Partitioning
Partitioned group numbers are assigned by COR and Authorization Codes
can change Classes of Restriction. Therefore, Partitioned Group Numbers
can be changed on incoming remote access calls by authorization codes.
For originating calls, user Classes of Restrictions determine Partitioned
Group Numbers.

■

Cancellation of Authorization Code Request
If

■

Then

CACR =1

■

Authorization ≠ 1

Network = DEFG1, DEFG3 or DEF
ECSR5

■

CACR can be #

Network - S85s, DIM switch

■

CACR = 1 (default)

COR and FRL
Authorization codes used for AAR/ARS calls override associated FRL.
Associated Classes of Restriction determine remote-access user privileges.

■

Forced Entry of Account Codes and Call Detail Recording
For 94A LSU (no longer supported) and 3B2 CDRU (no longer supported)
18-word records, authorization codes are output if administered
account-code lengths are fewer than six digits. For 59-character records,
authorization codes are never recorded.
Authorization codes are recorded after destination addresses are dialed.
Invalidly-dialed authorization codes are recorded, and patterns can be
traced using CDR printouts.

Related topics

See ‘‘Barrier codes’’ on page 1504 to use barrier codes to prevent unauthorized
system access.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for setting a class of restriction on a station phone.
See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 to set a facility restriction level on a
phone.
See ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 for information concerning the sequence of
trunk groups in which an attempt is made to route a call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1483

Features and technical reference

See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on page 1085 to permit authorized
callers from remote locations to access your system.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 to require an authorization code be dialed to
complete incoming calls on a trunk group.
See ‘‘Setting up authorization codes’’ on page 404 for instructions.

Automated attendant
Automated Attendant uses vector commands to allow a caller to enter the
extension of the party that he or she would like to reach. The call is routed by the
vector to that extension.
See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent
Selection (EAS) Guide for a detailed description of Automated Attendant and for a
sample vector that can be used for Automated Attendant. The guide contains
information that is critical to the effective and efficient use of Automated
Attendant.
You can administer any display-equipped phone or attendant console with a Caller
Information CALLR-INFO button. The button displays digits collected for the
last collect digits command.
Automated Attendant competes with several features for ports on the call
classifier — detector circuit pack or equivalent.
Interactions
■

AUDIX
Automated Attendant gives the caller the option of leaving a message or
waiting in queue for an attendant. See “Message Collection” in Chapter 5
of the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and
Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide.

■

Authorization Codes
If authorization codes are enabled, and a route-to command in a prompting
vector accesses AAR or ARS, if the Vector Directory Number’s (VDN’s)
FRL does not have the permission to use the chosen routing preference,
then the system does not prompt for an authorization code and the route-to
command fails.

1484

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automated attendant

■

CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI)
ASAI-provided digits can be collected by the Call Vectoring feature via the
collect vector command as dial-ahead digits. CINFO is passed to CallVisor
ASAI.

■

Hold
If a call is put on hold during the processing of a collect command, the
command restarts, beginning with the announcement prompt, when the call
is taken off hold. All dialed-ahead digits are lost. Similarly, if a call to a
vector is put on hold, vector processing is suspended when a collect
command is encountered. When the call becomes active, the collect
command resumes.

■

Inbound Call Management (ICM)
You can use Automated Attendant to collect information that may later be
used by an adjunct to handle a call.

■

Transfer
If a call to a VDN is transferred during a collect command, the collect
command restarts when the transfer is complete, and all dialed-ahead digits
are lost. Similarly, if a call to a vector is transferred, vector processing is
suspended when a collect command is encountered. When the transfer is
complete, the collect command resumes. Attendant extended calls do
suspend vector processing in the same way as transferred calls.

Related topics

See ‘‘System-Parameters Customer-Options’’ on page 1186 for information about
creating an automated attendant.
See ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795 for information on the
number of seconds before the Collect Digits command times out.
See ‘‘Vector Directory Number’’ on page 1306 for information about and field
descriptions on the Vector Directory Number screen.
See ‘‘Announcements/Audio Sources’’ on page 606 for information on providing
an automated attendant announcement.
See ‘‘Call Vector’’ on page 638 for information on completing a new screen for
each automated attendant vector.
See ‘‘Hunt Group’’ on page 875 for information on whether a hunt group will be
vector controlled.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1485

Features and technical reference

See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information on button assignments.
See ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for information on button assignments.

Automatic callback
Automatic Callback allows internal users who placed a call to a busy or
unanswered internal telephone to be called back automatically when the called
telephone becomes available.
When a user activates automatic callback, the system monitors the called
telephone. When the called telephone becomes available to receive a call, the
system originates the automatic callback call. The originating party receives
priority ringing. The calling party then lifts the handset and the called party
receives the same ringing provided on the original call.
A single-line telephone user activates this feature by pressing the Recall button or
flashing the switchhook and then dialing the automatic callback access code. A
single-line user can activate automatic callback for only one call at a time.
A multi-appearance telephone user can activate automatic callback for the number
of automatic callback buttons assigned to the telephone. After placing a call to a
telephone that is busy or that is not answered, the caller simply presses an idle
automatic callback button and hangs up.
If the calling telephone user answers an automatic callback call, and for some
reason the called extension cannot accept a new call, the calling user hears
confirmation tone and then silence. The call is still queued.
Users cannot activate automatic callback for calls to:

1486

■

A telephone assigned Termination Restriction

■

An extension with automatic callback already activated toward it

■

A data terminal (or data module)

■

An attendant console group

■

A Terminating Extension Group

■

An extension for a hunt group, split, or skill

■

An EAS agent’s Login ID

■

A VDN Extension

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic callback

Automatic callback for busy trunks

You can administer your system to call users back if they try to place an outgoing
call over a trunk group where all trunks are busy. This is sometimes called
Ringback Queueing.
If a multiappearance telephone user has an idle Automatic Callback button and
tries to access an all-trunks-busy trunk group, the call is queued automatically.
The lamp associated with the Automatic Callback button lights and confirmation
tone is heard.
Ringback Queuing is automatic for a single-line telephone. After dialing is
complete, the user hears confirmation tone if the queue is available. No action is
required.
The system will queue as many calls as allowed based on the Queue Length
field on the each trunk group screen. The system checks the busy/idle status of

the trunk group just once. If all trunks are busy, the call queues, even if a trunk has
become available by the time the caller has completed dialing. This occasionally
results in the caller being called back immediately after receiving confirmation
tone and going on-hook.
Considerations
■

The system cancels an automatic callback request for any of the following
reasons:
— The called party is not available within 30 minutes.
— The calling party does not answer the callback call within the
administered interval (2–9 ringing cycles set in the Automatic
Callback-No Answer Timeout Interval field on the Feature-Related
System Parameters screen).
— The calling party decides not to wait and presses the same automatic
callback button a second time (multi-appearance telephone) or dials
the automatic callback cancellation code (single-line telephone).

■

555-233-506

automatic callback is administered to individual telephones by their COS
and cannot be assigned to the attendant(s). Multi-appearance telephones
must have an automatic callback button to activate the feature.

Issue 5 October 2002

1487

Features and technical reference

■

automatic callback works differently depending on if the called party was
busy or did not answer the call. For a busy call, automatic callback takes
place as soon as the called party hangs up. If the called party did not
answer, the telephone must be used for another call and then hung up
before automatic callback is activated.
NOTE:

If the automatic callback originator has all line appearances occupied
when the automatic callback call comes in, the user will hear priority
ringing once, and the automatic callback lamp will blink. However, if
the user presses the automatic callback button to answer the
automatic callback call, one of the other calls will drop.
Interactions
■

Attendant Call Waiting and Call Waiting Termination
If a user activates automatic callback to or from a single-line telephone,
Call Waiting Termination is denied.

■

Attendant Intrusion
Attendant Intrusion does not work if a user has activated automatic
callback.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
Users cannot activate automatic callback from a bridged call appearance. If
a user activates automatic callback from a primary extension number, the
return-call notification rings at all bridged call appearances.

■

Busy Verification
If a telephone has activated automatic callback, you cannot perform Busy
Verification of that telephone.

■

Call Coverage
Automatic callback calls do not redirect to coverage.

■

Call Forwarding
If the called telephone has Call Forwarding activated, the calling party
cannot activate automatic callback. However, if automatic callback was
activated before the called telephone user activated Call Forwarding, the
system redirects the callback call attempt toward the forwarded-to party.

■

Call Pickup
A group member cannot answer a callback call for another group member.

■

Class of Restriction
Telephones with origination restriction cannot activate automatic callback.

1488

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic callback

■

Conference and Transfer
A single-line telephone user cannot activate conference or transfer if
automatic callback is active.

■

DCS
Automatic callback operates over a DCS network as if it were on a local
switch.

■

Expert Agent Selection
Users can’t activate Automatic Callback to an EAS agent’s Login ID. They
can activate Automatic CallBack to the phone where the agent is logged in.

■

Hold
A single-line telephone cannot receive automatic callback calls if the user
has placed a call on hold.

■

Hot Line Service
Telephones administered for Hot Line Service cannot activate automatic
callback.

■

Intercom - Automatic and Dial
Intercom calls are not eligible for automatic callback.

■

Internal Automatic Answer (IAA)
IAA does not automatically answer automatic callback calls.

■

Manual Originating Line Service
Telephones with Manual Originating Line Service cannot activate
automatic callback.

■

Ringback Queuing
Users can press an automatic callback button to activate Ringback
Queuing.

■

Telephone Display
When the system generates an automatic callback call, the display of the
originating telephone displays automatic callback (or the equivalent for
Administrable Language Displays).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1489

Features and technical reference

Automatic circuit assurance
Automatic circuit assurance (ACA) helps you identify possible trunk
malfunctions. With ACA enabled, the system measures the holding time of each
trunk call. If the measurements show calls with either extremely long or extremely
short holding times, MultiVantage places a referral call to an attendant or
telephone.
The system records holding time from when a trunk is accessed to when it is
released. You set short-holding-time and long-holding-time limits for each trunk
group. The system then compares the recorded holding times against these limits.
You enable ACA for the entire system, and administer thresholds for individual
trunk groups. You can have all trunks or only certain trunks measured.
MultiVantage deals with long-holding and short-holding calls differently. For
every call that is shorter than the administered short-holding time, the system
increases the short-holding counter by 1. For calls over the same trunk that are
within the normal range, it decreases the short-holding counter by 1. Thus, trunks
that handle a normal variety of call lengths are not singled out as faulty. If the
counter reaches the administered short-holding threshold, the system places a
referral call.
If one long call exceeds the long-holding time, the system makes a referral call.
You cannot measure personal CO lines, out-of-service trunks, or trunks
undergoing maintenance testing.
The referral call

The display or voice-synthesized message that accompanies an ACA call contains
the following information:
■

The fact that this is an ACA call

■

The trunk access code, trunk group number, and trunk group member
number

■

The type of referral (short or long holding time)

Once the referral call is answered, this information is displayed and remains
displayed until the call is released. If the call is not answered within three minutes,
the call stops. The system places the call again after one hour, and continues to
place the call hourly until someone answers.
The attendant or telephone user who receives the referral call can stop further calls
by pressing the aca-halt button, if one is provided. This is a toggle button, and
turns off the feature until the user presses the button again.

1490

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic circuit assurance

The audit trail

Each time a referral call is necessary, the system also adds a record to an audit
trail. Audit trail records are available on the ACA Measurements Report. Each
record contains the following information:
■

Time and date of referral

■

Trunk group number, trunk access code, and trunk group member

■

The type of referral (short or long holding time)

■

Administrable Language Displays

Interactions

You cannot administer languages for ACA messages.
■

AUDIX
Do not set the referral-call extension to a telephone that covers to AUDIX.
AUDIX could potentially overload with the volume of calls, because ACA
calls remain active for up to three minutes.

■

Busy Verification
Once you have identified a potentially defective trunk, you can use Busy
Verification to check it.

■

Centralized Attendant Services (CAS)
When CAS is activated, the referral-call destination must be on the local
switch. The system interprets a referral destination of 0 as the local
attendant, if one exists. The CAS attendant cannot activate or deactivate
ACA referral calls at a branch location.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Referral calls may be placed across a DCS network. One switch (the
primary) is administered to receive ACA referred calls from remote nodes
for all switches within the network. You must administer the ACA Remote
PBX Identification field on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen
with the PBX ID of the node that is designated as primary.
If ACA referral calls are sent off the switch that generates the referral, the
display and voicing information indicating the failed trunk is lost, even if
the referral call is made over a DCS network.

■

Night Service
Referral calls to the attendant are not placed if the system is in Night
Service mode.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1491

Features and technical reference

■

Visually Impaired Attendant Service (VIAS)
If the attendant presses the Display Status button and an ACA call has not
been answered, then the words Automatic Circuit Assurance are voiced.
If a visually-impaired attendant presses the Display Status button and the
ACA call has been answered, then the words Automatic Circuit Assurance
and the extension assigned to the ACA call are voiced.
If your switch contains a voice-synthesis board, ACA referral calls are
accompanied by an audible message identifying the type of ACA infraction
encountered. The message is “Automatic circuit assurance  or
 holding time threshold has been exceeded for trunk group <#>
member number <#>.”

■

Voice Message Retrieval
If you use Voice Message Retrieval, you can assign a nondisplay telephone
as a referral destination.

■

Wideband Switching
ACA treats wideband-trunk calls as a single-trunk call and therefore
triggers a single referral call. The call information shows the lowest
B-channel trunk member associated with the wideband channel.

Automatic customer telephone
rearrangement
Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement (ACTR) allows a phone to be
unplugged from one location and moved to a new location without additional
switch administration. The switch automatically associates the extension to the
new port. ACTR works with 6400 Serialized phones. The 6400 Serialized phone
is stamped with the word “Serialized” on the faceplate for easy identification. The
6400 Serialized phone memory electronically stores its own part ID (comcode)
and serial number. ACTR uses the stored information and associates the phone
with new port when the phone is moved.
ACTR is an enhancement to TTI, PSA, Customer Telephone Activation (CTA).
ACTR makes it easy to identify and move phones.

! CAUTION:
When a phone is unplugged and moved to another physical location, the
Emergency Location Extension field must be changed for that extension or
the USA Automatic Location Identification data base must be manually
updated. If the Emergency Location Extension field is not changed or if the
USA Automatic Location Identification data base is not updated, the DID
number sent to the Public Safety Network could send emergency response
personnel to the wrong location.

1492

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic customer telephone rearrangement

Detailed description

On the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, set the Terminal Translation
Initialization (TTI) Enabled field to y and the TTI State field to voice.
NOTE:

When a phone is moved, if there is any local auxiliary power (a power
supply plugged into a local AC outlet), the phone must be plugged into an
AC outlet at the phone’s new location. A phone with remote auxiliary power
must be supplied remote auxiliary power at its new location. If you do not
supply auxiliary power in either case after a phone is moved, some optional
adjuncts (for example, an expansion module) do not operate.
When you enter always or once in the Automatic Moves field on the station
screen, the switch adds the extension to its ACTR Move List database. When the
phone is plugged in, the switch asks the phone for its serial number and records
the serial number on the ACTR Move List. If you change the entry in the
Automatic Moves field from always or once to no, the switch removes the
extension from the Move List.
Call processing

When a phone is unplugged while on a call, and a 6400 Serialized phone that is
administered for automatic moves is plugged into the port within 60 seconds:
■

both extensions are placed in idle state

■

active calls on either extension are dropped, unless the call is active on a
bridged appearance at some other phone

■

held calls remain in a hold state

■

any calls ringing on either extension instantly proceed to the next point in
coverage or station hunting path, unless the call is ringing on a bridged
appearance at some other phone

■

user actions that were pending when the new phone was plugged in are
aborted

Design considerations

You can use the list station movable command to keep track of extensions on the
move list. Once you reach the maximum number, the switch does not allow
additional extensions.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1493

Features and technical reference

Considerations

Unless you are careful, ACTR can get in the way of your troubleshooting of
phone problems. Here is how to prevent that.
You can unplug a movable 6400 Serialized phone and plug in a maintenance
replacement that does not have move permission. If you are able to place and
receive calls from the replacement phone, the problem could be with the original
phone.
To troubleshoot phone problems with a 6400 Serialized phone using ACTR, one
movable phone and one unassigned phone of the same model:
1. Type change station nnnn, where nnnn is the extension of the 6400
Serialized phone that is not working and press RETURN.
The Station screen appears.
2. Set the Automatic Moves field to always or no and press ENTER.
3. Unplug the phone.
4. In the same jack, plug in a phone that does not have move permission of the
same model and series into the same jack.
The switch treats the new phone as a maintenance replacement and does
not change the extension and move list administration.
5. Try to place and receive calls from the new phone.
The first phone is the problem if the replacement phone works properly.
The circuit pack is the problem if the replacement phone works incorrectly and
experiences the same problems as the first phone.
If you do not have an unassigned phone:
■

Change the Automatic Moves field on the Station screen to no for the
suspect phone and plug it into a different jack.

■

Change the Automatic Moves field on the Station screen to no for a
different phone, then plug it into the suspect jack.

Remember to change the field back when you are done, and reassociate the phone
with CTA, TTI, or at the switch. If you try either test without changing the field,
the extensions move to the new port.

1494

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic customer telephone rearrangement

Interactions
Attendant Console

If the attendant console is unplugged and another Digital Communications
Protocol (DCP) phone with move permissions is plugged into the port, the new
DCP phone’s extension do not move to the port. The port keeps the attendant
console’s extension.
Backup Console

Queue threshold warning tone signals every 10 seconds to certain stations. If the
set is ACTR moved while the extension is receiving warning tone, or if it becomes
eligible to receive the tone by the time it is plugged in, the tone sounds within 10
seconds of the phone being plugged into new port.
Distributed Communications Systems, Uniform Dial Plan

ACTR is not transparent across switches in DCS or UDP. The extension number is
not carried along when a phone is moved from one switch and plugged into a
different switch.
Emergency Access to the Attendant

If the emergency access redirection extension phone is unplugged and another
DCP phone with move permissions is plugged into the port, the new DCP phone
does not have dial tone. The DCP phone’s extension does not move to the port.
The port keeps the emergency access redirection extension.
Expert Agent Selection (EAS)

If an ACTR move takes place, a logged-in EAS agent is automatically logged off.
Night Service

If the night service phone is unplugged and another DCP phone with move
permissions is plugged into the port, the new DCP phone does not have dial tone.
The DCP phone’s extension does not move to the port.The port keeps night
service extension.
Outgoing trunk Queuing (automatic callback, ringback queuing)

If a station ACTR moves before the callback occurs, the callback rings at the new
port. If the extension is in x-port (still being moved), the outgoing call attempt is
removed from the queue.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1495

Features and technical reference

Person Station Access (PSA)

If you use PSA to disassociate an extension that is on the move list, the extension
stays on the move list, but the serial number for that set is removed the port is
X-port.
If you use PSA to associate an extension with a new set, and the extension is on
the move list, the serial number on the move list changes to the serial number for
the new set.
If you use PSA to associate an extension with a non-ACTR phone the extension is
removed from the move list.
Survivable Remote EPN (SREPN)

An ACTR move made under PPN control is recorded in switch translations, but
not in the SREPN and vice versa. Do not use ACTR when the switch is running
under control of SREPN. SREPN records need to be updated to reflect any ACTR
moves made on the PPN.
Terminal Self Administration (TSA)

If a phone in TSA mode is unplugged and another DCP phone with move
permissions is plugged into the port, the new DCP phone is idle, not in TSA
mode.
Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI)

You can administer an extension, port, or X-port, and add them to the move list,
without a port assignment, or a physical phone connected to the port. If a
non-serialized 6400 phone is later plugged into the port or associated with that
extension, the extension is removed from the move list and the “Automatic
Moves” field is set to no. If a 6400 Serialized phone is later associated with that
extension that phone’s serial number and port are added to the move list for that
extension.
Wan Spare Processor (WSP)

An ACTR move made under processor port network (PPN) control is recorded in
switch translations, but not in the WSP, and vice versa. Do not use ACTR when
the switch is running under control of WSP. WSP records need to be updated to
reflect any ACTR moves made on the PPN.

1496

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic number identification

Automatic number identification
Inband Automatic Number Identification

Your switch uses Inband Automatic Number Identification (ANI) to interpret
calling party information, such as a calling party number or a billing number.
Inband signaling is when information such as the address digits for the called
party is delivered over the same trunk circuit used for the voice or data
connection. (Out-of-band or ISDN signaling is when signaling information passes
through a different signaling path than the one used for the voice or data
connection.)
When a call is made from 555-3800 to your display phone at 81120, and the
Incoming Tone (DTMF) ANI field is set to *ANI*DNIS*, your trunk group receives
*5553800*81120*. If the field is set to ANI*DNIS*, your trunk group receives
5553800*81120*. In both cases, Call From 555-3800 appears on your display.
If you do not use Inband ANI, the incoming trunk group name appears on your
phone display.
Related topics

See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information about setting Inband ANI on
the trunk group screen.
Outgoing Automatic Number Identification

Outgoing ANI applies to outgoing Russian multi-frequency (MF) ANI, R2-MFC
ANI and Spain Multi Frequency Espana (MFE) ANI trunks only.
Use Outgoing ANI to specify the type of ANI to send on outgoing calls. You can
define MF ANI (the calling party number, sent via multi-frequency signaling)
prefixes by COR. This allows a switch to send different ANIs to different central
offices.
For a tandem call that uses different types of incoming and outgoing trunks, the
switch uses:

555-233-506

■

the incoming trunk’s COR -assigned call type for Russian or R2-MFC
outgoing trunks

■

ARS call types for MFE outgoing trunks

Issue 5 October 2002

1497

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Attendant Console
If an attendant extends a call, the attendant’s COR is used to select ANI.

■

Authorization Codes
The authorization code COR is not used to select the ANI. The extension’s
ANI is used if an extension originates the call, and the ANI for the switch is
used if the originating endpoint is an incoming trunk.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
A call from a bridged call appearance uses the ANI of the primary
extension.

■

Call Vectoring
The ANI of the originating party is used, not the ANI of the call vector,
when a call vectoring route-to command routes a call over an outgoing
trunk.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
In a DCS, the ANI sent to the CO is determined by the ANI for PBX on
PBX_B, but the category sent to the CO is determined by the Category for
MF ANI field on the Class of Restriction screen for the incoming DCS
trunk or by the type of call.

■

Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
The EAS agent’s login extension and COR is used to determine ANI.

■

Hunt Groups and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Splits
The phone’s extension and COR is used to determine ANI for a hunt group
or ACD split.

■

Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)
For call origination, multimedia complexes use the COR assigned to their
phones.

■

Personal Station Access (PSA)
For ANI, the PSA extension and COR overrides the phone’s extension and
COR.

■

Remote Access
A remote access barrier code COR is not used for ANI. The extension’s
ANI is used if an extension originates the call, and the ANI for the switch is
used if the originating endpoint is an incoming trunk.

1498

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic routing — general

Related topics

See ‘‘Displaying ANI calling party information’’ on page 181 for instructions on
setting up ANI display in the U.S.
See ‘‘Multifrequency signaling’’ on page 1772 for more information on signaling.
See ‘‘CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support’’ on page 1637 for
more information on Class of Restriction.

Automatic routing — general
MultiVantage automatically routes outgoing calls using the most preferred
(normally the least expensive) route available at the time the call is placed.
Generally, AAR routes calls over a private network and ARS routes calls using
the public network numbering plan. However, both AAR and ARS support public
and private networks.
Figure 57 shows you an overview of automatic routing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1499

Features and technical reference

Figure Notes

1. Input from phone, public network
trunk, or private network trunk
2. Analyze digits to determine address
type (Dial Plan Analysis Table)
3. Direct to AAR/ARS
4. Direct to Uniform Dial Plan (UDP)
5. Analyze digits using UDP to determine
route
6. Delete and insert digits (AAR and ARS
Digit Conversion Tables)

Figure 57.

1500

7. Terminate call at phone
8. Analyze digits (AAR and ARS
Digit Analysis Tables) and
determine route pattern (Route
Pattern, Node Number Routing,
Extended Trunk Access screens)
9. Select outgoing trunk group and
delete and insert digits
10. Output to public network trunk
or private network trunk

Automatic Routing

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic routing — general

AAR

AAR routes calls over private networks. When a user dials the AAR feature
access code (normally 8 in North America) and phone number, AAR selects the
least expensive route for the call in the private network and performs any digit
conversion. If the first-choice route is not available, another route is chosen
automatically.
AAR routes private-network numbers, public-network numbers, service codes, an
international number, operator access code, or an operator-assisted dialing
number. AAR routes calls route as far as possible over the private network, and
then accesses the public network. This saves long-distance charges and allows you
to use your private network as much as possible.
ARS

ARS routes calls over the public network. When a user dials the ARS feature
access code (normally 9 in the US and 0 outside of the US) and phone number,
ARS selects the least expensive route for the call when there are one or more
long-distance carriers or services.
ARS, like AAR, routes private-network numbers, public-network numbers,
service codes, an international number, operator access code, or an
operator-assisted dialing number, and also routes to Inter-exchange carriers (IXC).
These are your long-distance providers.
You can route ARS calls to a variety of types of public-network and
private-network trunk groups including CO, FX, ISDN, Tie, and WATS. See
‘‘Managing trunks’’ on page 411 for more information.
AAR and ARS digit analysis default
translations

Your switch contains built-in AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Default Translations.
These default translations are used for call processing whether or not AAR or
ARS is enabled on your switch.
Any 7-digit dialed string that begins with any number 2 through 9 is processed as
an AAR call. Exceptions are listed in the ARS Digit Analysis Default Translations
Table. The translations shown on the ARS digit analysis default translations table
are displayed in sorted order (including additions) on each of the 8 possible ARS
Digit Analysis Tables.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1501

Features and technical reference

NOTE:

For service outside of North America, these defaults should be deleted. You
can delete the defaults by entering change ARS analysis 0. Then use
spaces to blank out all of the Dialed String entries.

Table 19. ARS digit analysis default translations
Total Digits
Dialed String

Min.

Max.

Route Pattern

Call Type

0

1

1

deny

op

0

8

8

deny

op

0

11

11

deny

op

00

2

2

deny

op

01

9

17

deny

iop

011

10

18

deny

intl

1010XXX0

8

8

deny

op

1010XXX0

18

18

deny

op

1010XXX01

16

24

deny

iop

1010XXX011

17

25

deny

intl

1XXX555

11

11

deny

fnpa

1XXX976

11

11

deny

fnpa

18000555

11

11

deny

fnpa

1809

11

11

deny

fnpa

1900555

11

11

deny

fnpa

411

3

3

deny

svc

555

7

7

deny

hnpa

611

3

3

1

svc

811

3

3

1

svc

911

3

3

1

svc

976

7

7

deny

hnpa

N

7

7

2

hnpa
Continued on next page

1502

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Automatic routing — general

Table 19. ARS digit analysis default translations (Continued)
Total Digits
Dialed String

Min.

Max.

Route Pattern

Call Type

1N00

11

11

deny

fnpa

1NX

11

11

deny

fnpa

Legend:
N - 2 through 9
X - any digit (0 - 9)
deny - deny
fnpa - foreign number plan area (10-digit call)
hnpa - home number plan area (7-digit call)
intl - international
iop - international operator
op - operator
svc - service
Continued on next page

Trunking facilities

MultiVantage can serve as an electronic tandem network (ETN). An ETN is a
network of privately-owned trunk and switching facilities that provide a
cost-effective alternative to long-distance calling between locations. Each
switching facility in an ETN has a unique private-network office code consisting
of 1–8 digits.
Traveling Class Marks (TCM) represent the caller’s Facility Restriction Level
(FRL) or the FRL of the caller’s access trunk group, and are sent with AAR and
ARS numbers sent on ETNs.
Routing with ISDN and overlap sending

You can turn on overlap sending to work on AAR and ARS calls that are routed
over ISDN trunk groups. Overlap sending sends ISDN call-address information
one digit at a time instead of all the address information going out in one block.
This significantly decreases call setup time in countries with complex
public-network numbering plans, and is most useful for tandemed calls. See
ISDN-PRI Trunk Group and ISDN-BRI Trunk group screens for information on
how to set up overlap sending.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1503

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Abbreviated Dialing
The switch does not check the FRL on an AAR or ARS call that uses a
privileged Abbreviated Dialing Group List.

Related topics
■

AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table

■

AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table

■

AAR and ARS partitioning

■

ARS Toll Table (ARS only)

■

Class of Restriction

■

Dial Plan Analysis Table

■

Feature Access Codes

■

Generalized Route Selection

■

Look-Ahead Routing

■

Node Number Routing

■

Route Pattern

■

Remote Home Number Plan Area

■

Time of Day Routing Plan

■

Toll Analysis (ARS only)

Barrier codes
A barrier code is a security code used with Remote Access to prevent
unauthorized access to your system.
Brief description

Each barrier code must have a COR and Class of Service (COS) assigned. Remote
Access has inherent risks; it can lead to large-scale unauthorized long-distance
use. To increase your system’s security use a 7-digit barrier code with Remote
Access Barrier Code Aging. You can administer Remote Access Barrier Code
Aging to:

1504

■

Limit the length of time an access code remains valid and/or

■

Limit the number of times an access code can be used

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bridged call appearance

A barrier code automatically expires if an expiration date or number of accesses
has exceeded the limits you set. If both a time interval and access limits are
administered for a barrier code, the barrier code expires when one of the
conditions is satisfied.
You determine the barrier code length, the actual barrier code, and the barrier code
expiration date on the Remote Access screen. You must administer expiration
dates and access limits for each of the possible 10 barrier codes. If your system
has more than 10 Remote Access users, they must share codes.
When you no longer need a barrier code, remove it from the system. Barrier codes
should be safeguarded both by you and their users. If you use barrier codes for
outside calls, change them often.
If barrier codes are administered, a special answer-back tone causes a calling
modem to leave dial mode. A modem’s dialer is sometimes used to gain access
(this tone also cancels echo suppressors in the network, preventing dual-tone
multifrequency (DTMF) tones from breaking dial tone from a switch). Barrier
codes can be used alone or with authorization codes.
Use the status remote-access command to view the status of a Remote Access
barrier code.
NOTE:

Barrier codes are not tracked by CDR. Barrier codes are incoming access
codes, whereas, authorization codes are primarily outgoing access codes.
Related topics

See ‘‘Remote Access’’ on page 1800 for more information.

Bridged call appearance
Bridged Call Appearance allows single-line and multiappearance telephone users
to have an appearance of another user’s primary extension number. The bridged
call appearance can be used to originate, answer, and bridge onto calls to or from
the other user’s primary extension number.
An appearance of a telephone’s primary extension number at another telephone is
called a bridged call appearance. A bridged call appearance can be used to
originate, answer, or bridge onto an existing call to or from the primary telephone
user’s extension number. A virtual extension cannot be a bridged call appearance.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1505

Features and technical reference

On single-line telephones, Bridged Call Appearance is used by going off-hook.
On multiappearance telephones, Bridged Call Appearance is used by going
off-hook and pressing the bridged appearance button. In both cases, the user is
then bridged onto the primary telephone’s extension number and can handle calls
on that extension number.
An incoming call rings the primary extension number’s telephone and all
telephones that have a bridged call appearance of the telephone’s primary
extension number. Each telephone is visually alerted for all bridged appearances
on the telephone, but has the option of audible ringing.
On multiappearance telephones, a bridged call appearance can be assigned to any
2-lamp button. It does not require the use of a regular call appearance.
A bridged call appearance can be used just like a regular call appearance for most
features. For example, Conference, Transfer, Hold, Drop, and Priority Calling can
be used from a bridged appearance, just as they are used from a regular call
appearance.
You can administer a telephone with zero call appearances of its primary
extension. In this way, a telephone can be administered to have only bridged
appearances.
Extension administrable buttons and lamps for
multiappearance telephones

You can administer the message lamp and some feature buttons to apply to a
specified extension rather than the extension of the telephone they reside on.

1506

■

You can administer the message lamp to light when messages are waiting
for the extension specified on the Station screen. In this way, the bridged
user’s telephone can be set up to indicate when messages are waiting for
the primary extension.

■

You can administer the call forwarding all calls and call forwarding
busy/don’t answer buttons to activate Call Forwarding for any extension
that is on the telephone, even if this extension is a bridged appearance. In
addition, you can administer the lamp associated with the call forwarding
button to track the call forwarding status of any extension. In this way, a
bridged user can activate or deactivate Call Forwarding for all primary and
bridged appearances of the extension from the bridged appearance
telephone, and the bridged appearance telephone shows the call forwarding
status of the specified extension.

■

You can administer the send all calls button to activate Send All Calls for
any administered extension. The lamp associated with Send All Calls
tracks the status of the administered extension. In this way, a bridged user
can activate Send All Calls for the primary extension user.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bridged call appearance

Considerations for single-line telephones

555-233-506

■

The number of bridged call appearances allowed varies by system. See
Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for those numbers. A
bridging user cannot have more than one bridged appearance for a
particular primary telephone. However, a multiappearance bridging user
can have appearances of more than one analog telephone on their telephone
(a multiappearance bridging user, by use of different buttons, can bridge
onto several different primary telephones).

■

The number of bridged appearances allowed on a multiappearance bridging
user’s telephone is limited only by the number of 2-lamp buttons available
on the telephone.

■

If the primary single-line telephone is correctly administered, but not in
service, calls can still be placed by the bridging users, and received on the
bridged appearances of the telephone. The primary telephone can be out of
service for several reasons, such as an unplugged telephone, a nonexistent
telephone system technician busyout command, etc.

■

If more than one user goes off-hook on a bridged appearance at the same
time, only the user who was the first to go off-hook can dial.

■

If a bridging user is not active on a call, and bridges onto the appearance of
an active call, the user is bridged onto the active call. If a multiappearance
bridging user is active on a call, and bridges onto the appearance of an
active call, the previously selected call is dropped and the user is bridged
onto the active call.

■

The Privacy-Manual Exclusion feature can be activated by the bridging
user only, while active on a call, to prevent accidental bridging of an active
call.

■

If a call terminates at a telephone on an extension number other than the
primary extension number (for example, terminating extension group
(TEG), UCD group, call coverage answer group, or DDC group extension
number), a bridged call appearance is not maintained. Therefore, the
primary telephone should not be made a member of such a group (even
though administration of this is not prohibited).

■

The Bridged Call Appearance feature should not be considered as a
replacement for Call Coverage or any other similar features.

■

If two parties are bridged together on an active call with a third party, and if
the conference tone feature is enabled, conference tone is heard.

Issue 5 October 2002

1507

Features and technical reference

Considerations for multiappearance telephones
■

The number of bridged call appearances allowed at each telephone is
limited only by the number of 2-lamp buttons available on the telephone.
The number of appearances per primary extension varies by system. See
Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for this information.

■

Up to six parties can be off-hook and involved in a conversation on a
bridged appearance of an extension.

■

A bridging telephone should have a bridged call appearance corresponding
to each call appearance of the primary extension number at the bridged
telephone. For example, if a primary telephone has three call appearances,
a bridging telephone should have three bridged call appearances of that
primary extension. This allows users to refer to the individual call
appearances when talking about a specific call.

■

Bridged call appearances may result in the reduction of available feature
buttons, thereby reducing a user’s capabilities. A Call Coverage module or
expansion module can be used to provide up to 20 bridged call
appearances. This leaves the other 2-lamp buttons as call appearances, or
with other features such as Centralized Attendant Service (CAS).

■

If a call terminates at a telephone on an extension number other than the
primary extension number (for example, TEG, UCD group, call coverage
answer group, or DDC group extension number), a bridged call appearance
is not maintained. Therefore, the primary telephone should not be made a
member of such a group (even though administration of this is not
prohibited).

■

Bridged Call Appearance should not be considered a replacement for Call
Coverage.

■

You can administer conference tone, which, when enabled, is heard when
two parties are bridged together on an active call with a third party.

■

Abbreviated Dialing

Interactions

A user, accessing Abbreviated Dialing while on a bridged call appearance,
accesses their own Abbreviated Dialing lists. The user does not access the
Abbreviated Dialing lists of the primary extension associated with the
bridged call appearance.
A user cannot use an abbreviated dialing feature access code (FAC) after
using a priority calling FAC.

1508

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bridged call appearance

■

Adjunct Switch Applications Interface (ASAI)
If you are using ASAI, do not administer more than 16 bridged
appearances.

■

Attendant Display and telephone Display
A call from the primary extension number or from a bridged call
appearance of the primary extension number is displayed as a call from the
primary extension number (the call is displayed as coming from the
primary extension number regardless of which appearance placed the call).
On multiappearance telephones, the display at a principal shows the same
information for a bridged call appearance as it does for a nonbridged call.
For calls to the principal’s extension number, the display at a zero call
appearance bridging telephone shows a call from the originator to the
principal with no “redirection reason” character. As telephones bridge onto
the call, the display updates to show the number of parties in the
conference.

■

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Bridged appearances cannot be accessed via non-ACD hunt groups
(although administrable).

■

Automatic Callback
Automatic Callback calls cannot originate from a bridged call appearance.
However, when Automatic Callback is activated from the principal user’s
telephone, the callback call rings (with priority call distinctive ringing
signal) at all bridged appearances of the extension as well as at the
principal user’s telephone. Displays at all telephones (principal and bridged
users) show that it is a callback call.

■

Busy Indicator (multiappearance telephones only)
The call is placed to the resource from the first available bridged call
appearance for zero primary call appearance telephones.

■

Call Coverage
— Single-line telephones
When an analog telephone is administered as a bridged call
appearance, the telephone user cannot invoke Send All Calls for the
extension of their telephone. The user does not have a send all calls
button, and the call appearance is associated with another extension.
When the user dials a FAC, Send All Calls is activated for the
extension associated with the call appearance.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1509

Features and technical reference

— Multiappearance telephones
Coverage criteria for bridged call appearances is based entirely on
the criteria of the primary extension associated with bridged
appearance. A call to the primary extension that requires call
coverage treatment follows the coverage path of the primary
extension and not the path of any of the bridged appearances.
Bridged call appearances do not receive redirection notification.
A user with bridged call appearances can activate or deactivate Send
All Calls for a principal’s primary call appearance if they are on the
bridged appearance.
The primary telephone should not be a member of a call coverage
group, because calls to the primary telephone as a member of the
group are not bridged.
You can administer the system so that a call can appear at a
telephone as both a bridged call and a redirected call. In this way, if
the bridged user is the first coverage point, the call redirects to that
telephone when the coverage criteria are met.
If the principal is an analog telephone with a bridged call appearance
on a multiappearance telephone, an incoming call to the analog
telephone that goes to coverage terminates at a primary call
appearance on the bridging user’s telephone as a coverage call. If
the bridging user is a zero primary call appearance telephone, the
call cannot redirect to the bridging user since there are no primary
call appearances. Therefore, the call redirects to the next available
coverage point.
■

Call Detail Recording (CDR)
If a bridging user originates or answers a call on a bridged appearance, the
extension of the bridge is recorded as the calling/called telephone. A
conference or transfer by a bridging user also appears as though it was
performed by the telephone user.
On multiappearance telephones, when a call originated from a bridged call
appearance on a telephone administered for zero primary call appearance is
recorded by CDR, the extension number associated with the appearance is
recorded as the calling party. A conference or transfer by a bridged call
appearance on a zero primary call appearances telephone also appears as
though it were performed by the extension associated with the appearance.

1510

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bridged call appearance

■

Call Forwarding All Calls, Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding can be activated or canceled for the primary extension
number from any bridged call appearance of that number. When activated,
calls to the primary extension number do not terminate at the bridged call
appearances, but go to the designated forwarding destination. Bridged call
appearances do not receive redirection notification of the call to the
primary extension when it is forwarded unless Ringing — Abbreviated and
Delayed is administered.

■

Call Park
When a call is parked from a bridged call appearance, it is parked on the
primary extension number.

■

Call Pickup
— Single-line telephones
Calls to the primary telephone, alerting at bridged appearances of
the primary telephone, can be picked up by member’s of the
bridging user’s call pickup group. This causes all bridged
appearances of the call to be dropped.
Calls ringing at a primary telephone can be picked up by members
of the primary telephone’s call pickup group. However, if the
primary telephone and the bridging user’s telephone are not in the
same call pickup group, the bridging user cannot pick up calls to
other members of the primary telephone’s call pickup group.
Originating on a bridged appearance and dialing the call pickup
FAC is interpreted as an attempt to pick up a call from the primary
telephone’s call pickup group.
A bridging user can use Call Pickup to pick up a call that is alerting
at a bridged appearance, instead of selecting the bridged appearance
button. This causes the call at the primary telephone and all bridged
appearances of the call to be dropped.
If the bridging user has appearances of numerous single-line
(primary) telephones (for example, sales, service, and warehouse),
and it is not desired that the calls be answered by anyone other than
the primary telephone user or the bridging users, the bridging user(s)
should not be assigned to a pick up group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1511

Features and technical reference

— Multiappearance telephones
If a telephone receives ringing on a bridged call appearance, the
incoming call can be picked up by members of that telephone’s call
pickup group. This causes all bridged call appearances to be
dropped. Calls ringing at a primary telephone can be picked up by
members of the telephone’s call pickup group. However, if the
primary telephone and the bridging user’s primary telephone are not
in the same call pickup group, the bridging user cannot pick up calls
to other members of the primary telephone’s call pickup group.
Originating on a bridged appearance and dialing the call pickup
FAC is interpreted as an attempt to pick up a call from the primary
telephone’s call pickup group.
A bridging user can use Call Pickup to pick up a call that is alerting
at a bridged appearance, instead of selecting the bridged appearance
button. This causes the call to terminate on the bridging user’s
primary extension button, and the primary telephone and all bridged
appearances of the call are dropped.
If the bridging user has appearances of numerous telephones (for
example, sales, service, and warehouse), and it is not desired that the
calls be answered by anyone other than the telephone user or the
bridging users, the bridging users should not be assigned to a pick
up group.
A telephone with zero primary call appearances can be assigned to a
call pickup group.
■

Call Waiting Termination (single-line telephones only)
Call Waiting Termination applies only to an active call on the primary
telephone that has no one else bridged on. If one or more bridging users are
active on a call, call waiting calls are denied whether or not the primary
user is also off-hook on the call. A bridging user can bridge onto a call with
the primary user if there is also a call waiting.

■

Class of Restriction (multiappearance telephone users only)
The COR assigned to a telephone’s primary extension also applies to calls
originated from a bridged call appearance.

1512

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bridged call appearance

■

Conference — Attendant, Conference
— Single-line telephones
A bridged call cannot be conferenced if more than one user is active
on that call. This is because the bridging user has no access to the
call after the primary telephone user places the call on soft hold, and
the primary telephone user has no access to the bridging user’s call
appearance used for conference/transfer attempts.
If a bridging user is active on a bridged call and the primary analog
telephone user attempts a conference, the attempt is ignored. The
same is true if an analog bridging user attempts a conference when
the primary telephone user and another bridging user is active on a
call.
When the primary telephone user is active on a call, and no other
bridging user is active on the call, that call can be placed on hold by
the primary telephone user utilizing normal single-line conference
procedures. Any attempt by a bridging user to bridge onto the call
during a successful conference attempt is denied.
A bridging user, alone on a bridged call, can conference the call
utilizing the normal multiappearance telephone conference
procedures. Any attempt by the analog primary telephone user to
bridge onto the call during a successful conference attempt is
ignored. Any attempt by other bridging users is denied (standard
denial response is returned to the bridged appearance).
If a conference is not allowed because of the preceding limitations,
the user can accomplish a transfer by asking an internal nonbridged
party in the connection to create the conference, or asking the
remaining bridging users and primary user to disconnect so that the
conference can be completed. At completion of the conference, the
parties that left the call can reenter the call if control of the
conference remains with the primary telephone. If control of the
conference does not remain with the primary telephone, the bridging
user must conference the primary telephone and the bridging user
back into the call as required.
If the bridging user has no other available bridged appearances of
the primary extension (other than the one he or she is currently on),
the bridging user, after pressing the conference/transfer button, must
select a call appearance to be used for the conference, before dialing
the number.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1513

Features and technical reference

— Multiappearance telephones
Call Waiting Termination applies only to an active call on the
primary telephone that has no one else bridged on. If one or more
bridging users are active on a call, Call Waiting calls are denied
whether or not the primary user is also off-hook on the call. A
bridging user cannot bridge onto a call with the primary user if there
is also a call waiting.
Conferences can be set up on bridged appearances using the usual
conference operations. Either a primary extension button or a
bridged appearance button can be used to make the calls for adding
to the conference.
You can administer the system to automatically select the first idle
appearance if there is no idle appearance with an extension matching
the extension that is conferencing the call.
When the user presses the conference button (the second time) to
connect the parties together, the newly formed conference call
appears on the primary or bridged appearance to which the user was
connected at the time of that last conference button depression. The
other appearance is disassociated from the conference call.
Therefore, if the original call is on a bridged appearance, and the
conference is formed on an appearance of the bridged user’s own
primary extension, the bridged extension becomes disassociated
from the conference call and the principal user of that bridged
extension can no longer bridge onto the conference.
This disassociation of the conference from the bridged extension can
be avoided by setting up the conference in the opposite order. To do
this, the user:
1. Presses the hold button to hold the original call on the
bridged appearance
2. Selects a call appearance and calls the party to be added
3. Presses the conference or transfer button
4. Selects the held bridged appearance
5. Presses the conference button (again)
When this procedure is used, the conference is formed on the
bridged appearance so that the primary user of the bridged extension
can still bridge onto the conference call.

1514

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bridged call appearance

If the primary user and the bridged user are both on the call when
one user transfers the call, the user performing the transfer becomes
the controlling user for the participation of both users on the
conference. To disassociate the appearance from the call, the
controlling user must be the latter of the two users to hang up from
the call. If the controlling user hangs up first, the appearance goes on
soft hold when the noncontrolling party hangs up. In this case, one
of two things must occur to disassociate the appearance from the
call: all other parties on the call hang up, or the controlling user
rejoins the call and hangs up again.
The display shows the number of other active parties in a call,
including active bridged appearances.
■

Consult (multiappearance telephones only)
Bridged call appearances of the primary extension do not ring on a consult
call to the primary extension.

■

Coverage Answer Group
— Single-line telephones
The primary (analog) telephone is not a member of a call coverage
answer group, because calls to the primary telephone as a member
of the group are not bridged.
If the primary telephone is made a member of a coverage group,
coverage criteria is based entirely on the criteria of the primary
telephone. This means that a call to the primary telephone that
requires call coverage treatment follows the path of the primary
telephone and not the path of any of the telephones with bridged
appearances of the primary telephones. In this case, it is desirable to
have the bridging user in the coverage path of the primary
telephone. Then, when a call to the primary telephone requires
coverage treatment, it follows the coverage path to the bridging
user’s telephone, call appearances of the call are dropped, and the
call terminates at the bridging user’s telephone as a coverage call.
— Multiappearance telephones
Bridged call appearances of a primary extension do not ring when
there is a Coverage Answer Group (CAG) call to the primary
extension. Bridged call appearances cannot bridge onto the call.

■

Data Privacy, Data Restriction
When Data Privacy is activated or Data Restriction is assigned to a
telephone involved in a bridged call and the primary telephone and/or
bridging user attempts to bridge onto the call, Data Privacy and Data
Restriction are automatically overridden (or deactivated in the case of Data
Privacy).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1515

Features and technical reference

■

Emergency calls
If a user dials an emergency call from a bridged appearance, the Calling
Party Number that is sent to the public safety answering point for US E911
location is the bridged extension, not the extension of the physical phone
from which the call is made. If the physical phone is located far from the
phone to which it is bridged, the emergency response team may not be able
to locate the caller. It is preferable to place E911 calls from an actual call
appearance, rather than a bridged appearance.

■

Hold — Automatic
— Single-line telephones
A call cannot be put on hold if more than one user is active on that
call.
The primary telephone user, when no other bridges are active on the
call, can put the call on hold, using normal single-line hold
procedures. If the primary telephone user successfully soft holds the
call, the status lamp at all of the bridged appearances shows the hold
indication; and then the call can be put on hard hold by dialing the
hard hold FAC. The hard held call is no longer accessible to the
bridging users until it is taken off hold by the primary telephone
user. After the call is put on hard hold, any new call to the primary
telephone is tracked by the bridged appearances.
A bridging user can place an active call on hold (if the primary
telephone or any other bridges are not active on the call) by using
normal multiappearance hold procedures. Any attempt to enter the
held call returns it to the status of an active call that can then be
accessed using bridging procedures.
If hold is not allowed because of the preceding reasons, the user can
just go on-hook and then reenter the call as required, because the
call remains accessible as long as the primary telephone or any
bridging user is active on it.
— Multiappearance telephones
Any user (primary or bridged appearance) can place an active call
on hold. If only one user is active on a call and places that call on
hold, the indicator lamp at both the principal’s appearance button
and the bridged party’s appearance button shows that the call is on
hold. If more than one user is bridged onto the active call, and one of
the users activates Hold, the activator receives “hold” indication for
the call and status lamp of all other bridged users remains active.

1516

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bridged call appearance

■

Hotline Service (single-line telephones)
If a single-line telephone is administered for Hotline Service, bridged
appearances of that telephone’s extension also places a hot line call
automatically when a user goes off-hook on that bridged appearance.

■

Hunt Group (DDC or UCD)
Bridged call appearances cannot be used in conjunction with DDC or UCD
hunt groups.
Although you can assign a bridged extension to a hunt group, Avaya does
not recommend such assignment because DDC/UCD calls do not terminate
at any bridged appearances of that extension on other telephones.

■

Intercom — Automatic and Intercom — Dial (multiappearance telephones
only)
Bridged appearances of a primary extension number are not rung for
intercom calls. Furthermore, if a telephone has no primary call appearances
it can never be rung for an intercom call. Therefore, if a secretary is
screening all calls for the principal, and is indicating who is calling via
intercom, the principal must have a call appearance on which to receive
and send intercom calls.

■

Internal Automatic Answer (IAA)
Calls terminating to a bridged appearance of an IAA-eligible telephone are
not eligible for IAA.

■

Last Number Dialed (LND)
Activation of the LND feature causes the last number dialed from the
activating telephone to be redialed, regardless of the extension number
used (primary or bridged call appearance).

■

Leave Word Calling (LWC)
A LWC message left by a user on a bridged call appearance leaves a
message for the called party to call the primary extension number assigned
to the bridged call appearance.
When a user calls a primary extension, and activates LWC, the message is
left for the primary extension, even if the call was answered at a bridged
call appearance.
LWC messages left by the primary user can be canceled by a bridged
appearance user (for example, a secretary can cancel a LWC message left
by a boss).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1517

Features and technical reference

■

Personal Central Office Line
— Single-line telephones
A single-line primary telephone cannot be a member of a Personal
Central Office Line (PCOL) group.
— Multiappearance telephones
If a user is active on his or her primary extension number on a
PCOL call, bridged call appearances of that extension number
cannot be used to bridge onto the call. The call can only be bridged
onto the call if another telephone is a member of the same PCOL
group and has a PCOL button.

■

Preference
Ringing Line Preference selects an alerting bridged appearance; Idle Line
Preference does not.

■

Priority Calling
The primary telephone user or the bridging user can make a priority call. If
a priority call is made to an idle telephone, the primary telephone and all
bridging users are alerted by priority alerting.
A user cannot use an abbreviated dialing FAC after using a priority calling
FAC.

■

Privacy-Manual Exclusion
Exclusion prevents any other user from bridging onto the call. Activation
of exclusion by any user (primary or bridged appearance) before placing a
call, prevents any other user from bridging onto the call. Activation of
exclusion by any user active on a call, while the primary user and/or any
other bridging users are active on the call, drops all other users from the
call (including the primary user), leaving only the activator and the
calling/called party on the call.

■

Redirection Notification (multiappearance telephones only)
Redirection Notification is not provided at telephones with a bridged
appearance of a primary extension number unless Ringing — Abbreviated
and Delayed is administered to give notification.

■

Ringback Queuing
Ringback Queuing is not provided on calls originated from a bridged call
appearance. However, after the principal user of the bridged extension has
activated Ringback Queueing, the resulting callback call alerts at bridged
appearances as well as at the principal user’s telephone. The call can be
answered from the primary user’s telephone or from any bridged
appearance.

1518

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Bridged call appearance

■

Ringer Cutoff (multiappearance telephones only)
Ringer Cutoff prevents any nonpriority (or nonintercom) incoming call
from ringing at that telephone. This is independent of whether the call is to
the telephone’s primary extension or to any of the bridged appearance’s’
extensions.

■

Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed
See Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed, for other bridged appearance
alerting options.

■

Service Observing
The telephone user or bridging user can bridge onto a service observed call
at any time. If the telephone is being service observed and an incoming call
is answered by the bridging user, the call is not observed unless or until the
telephone user bridges onto the call. Conversely, if the bridging user is
being service observed and an incoming call is answered by the telephone
user, the call is not observed unless or until the bridging user bridges onto
the call.
If the bridging user activates Service Observing using a bridged
appearance, Service Observing is activated for the bridging user.

■

Terminating Extension Group (TEG)
TEG calls to the primary extension do not ring at the associated bridged
appearances. TEG calls cannot be answered or bridged onto from a bridged
appearance of the TEG member’s primary extension. The primary
telephone should not be assigned to a TEG.

■

Transfer
— Single-line telephones
A call cannot be transferred by an analog telephone if more than one
user is active on that call.
The primary telephone user, when no other bridges are active on the
call, can transfer the call using normal single-line transfer
procedures. Any attempt by a bridging user to bridge onto this call
during a successful transfer attempt is denied (a standard denial
response is returned to the bridged appearance).
An analog bridging user, alone on a bridged call, can transfer the
call, using normal transfer procedures. Any attempt by the primary
telephone user to bridge onto this call during a successful transfer
attempt is ignored; and any attempt to bridge on by a bridging user
is denied.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1519

Features and technical reference

If the bridging user has no other available bridged appearances of
the primary extension (other than the one he or she is currently on),
the bridging user, after pressing the conference/transfer button, must
select a call appearance to be used for the transfer, before dialing the
number.
■

Multiappearance telephones
If the bridging user has at least one available bridged appearance of the
primary extension (other than the one he or she is currently on), the system
automatically selects a bridged call appearance for the transfer when the
conference/transfer button is pressed.
You can administer the system to automatically select the first idle
appearance if there is no idle appearance with an extension matching the
extension that is transferring the call.
If the primary user and the bridged user are both on the call when one user
transfers the call, the user performing the transfer becomes the controlling
user for the participation of both users on the conference. The controlling
user is immediately dropped from the call. When the noncontrolling user
hangs up, the appearance goes on soft hold. In this case, one of two things
must occur to disassociate the appearance from the call: all other parties on
the call hang up, or the controlling user rejoins the call and hangs up again.

■

Videophone 2500 (single-line telephones)
A user may not use an analog bridge to a Videophone 2500 principal that is
on a video call.

■

Voice Message Retrieval
A voice message to the primary extension can be retrieved on a bridged
appearance by the bridged appearance user. If a security code is required to
retrieve the message, the bridging user must use the security code of the
primary telephone.

■

Voice Paging
The use of Voice Paging automatically invokes exclusion. Therefore,
interactions for this feature are the same as for Privacy-Manual Exclusion.

1520

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Busy indicator

Busy indicator
The Busy Indicator button provides multiappearance telephone users and
attendants with a visual indicator of the busy or idle status of one of the following
system resources:
■

An extension number

■

A trunk group

■

A terminating extension group

■

A hunt group—either DDC or UCD

■

Any loudspeaker paging zone, including all zones

The Busy Indicator button provides the attendant or user with direct access to the
extension number, trunk group, or paging zone.
You can assign extension numbers, trunk group access codes, and Loudspeaker
Paging access codes to a Busy Indicator button.
The Facility Busy lamp indication for a VDN does not light when the VDN is
being used. The associated button may be used to place a call to a VDN.

Busy tone disconnect
In some regions of the world the CO sends a busy tone for the disconnect
message. With Busy Tone Disconnect (BTD), the switch disconnects analog
loop-start CO trunks when a busy tone is sent from the CO.
A call that is originated from or terminated to a phone using a BTD enabled trunk
has a Call Classifier port connected to the trunk. The Classifier port connects, then
the call is answered and stays connected on the trunk until the station hangs up or
a BTD signal is received from the CO. If there is only one BTD trunk on a call
when the BTD signal is received, the call is dropped. If it is a conference call, only
the trunk is dropped and the rest of the parties stay connected.
Interactions
■

Answer supervision
If Answer supervision is enabled, set the Answer supervision timeout field
to 0 (zero).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1521

Features and technical reference

Busy verification
Busy Verification (Verify button) allows attendants and specified multiappearance
telephone users to make test calls to trunks, telephones, and hunt DDC and UCD
groups. Attendants and multiappearance telephone users can distinguish between
a telephone that is truly busy and one that only appears busy because of some
trouble condition. They can also use this feature to quickly identify faulty trunks.
An attendant or multiappearance telephone user can activate Busy Verify by
pressing the Verify button. If they want to verify a telephone or hunt group, they
enter an extension number. If they want to verify a trunk, they dial a trunk-access
code, followed by the 2- or 3-digit number of the trunk-group member to be
verified. If the trunk-group member number is less than 10, the system requires a
leading zero (01 or 001 rather than 1).
NOTE:

For DEFINITY SI or DEFINITY CSI, the member number is a 2-digit
number; for DEFINITY R, the member number is a 3-digit number.
After an attendant or multiappearance telephone user has activated Busy
Verification, the system checks the validity of the extension or trunk-access code
and member number. If the number is not a telephone extension, DDC/ UCD
group-extension, ACD split number, or trunk access code with a valid member
number, the system denies Verify and returns intercept tone.
When you use Verify to check a valid telephone extension (one that is in the dial
plan and assigned to a telephone), the system initiates a priority call to that
extension. Table 20 on page 1523 describes the process.

1522

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Busy verification

Table 20. Verification of a telephone
Telephone Status

Idle

System Response
■

Generates priority ringing at
the telephone

■

Processes the call as a
normal telephone-originated
or attendant-originated call

Active on a call and
has an idle call
appearance

■

Generates priority ringing at
the first idle appearance

■

Processes the call as a
normal attendant-originated
call

Active on a call and
has no idle call
appearances or has
only one line
appearance

■

Bridges the attendant onto
the call

■

Generates a warning tone to
all active parties and repeats
the tone every 15 seconds
while the attendant remains
bridged onto the call

Out of service

■

Generates reorder tone

Result
■

Verification is complete.

■

Anyone can place a call to
the telephone.

■

Verification is complete.

■

Anyone can place a call to
the telephone extension.

■

Verification is complete.

■

The attendant can determine
if the telephone is actually in
use.

■

Verification is denied.

When you use Verify to check a valid ACD split, UCD group, or DDC group, the
system initiates a priority call to that group. (Valid in this case means the split or
group is translated and at lease one member is logged in.) Table 21 on page 1524
describes the process.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1523

Features and technical reference

Table 21. Verification of an ACD Split, UCD Group, or DDC Group r
Split or Group
Member Status

Available for an
incoming call

System Response
■

Generates priority ringing at
the member’s telephone

■

Processes the call as a
normal attendant-originated
call

All activated Make
Busy

■

Not available for
incoming calls

Result
■

Verification is complete.

■

Anyone can place a call to
the member’s telephone.

Generates reorder tone

■

Verification is denied.

■

The system does not queue
the call even if a queue is
available.

■

Verification is denied.

■

Generates reorder tone

When you use Verify to check a valid trunk, the system checks the status of that
trunk. (Valid in this case means the trunk is translated with members and is not in
an out-of-service state.) Table 22 describes the process.
Table 22. Verification of a Trunk
Trunk Status

System Response

The trunk is idle
and incoming.

■

The trunk is idle
and outgoing.

■

The trunk is busy
with an active call.

The trunk is out of
service.

1524

Result

The system generates
confirmation tone.

■

Verification is complete.

■

Anyone can use the trunk.

The system generates dial
tone.

■

Verification is complete.

■

Anyone can use the trunk.

■

The system bridges the Verify
originator onto the call.

■

Verification is complete.

■

The trunk is in use.

■

The system generates a
warning tone to all active
parties and repeats the tone
every 15 seconds while the
Verify originator remains
bridged onto the call.

■

The system generates reorder
tone.

■

Verification is denied.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Busy verification

Considerations
■

A busy verification cannot be made to an analog extension that is waiting
to be answered at another extension. A call must be answered before it can
be verified.

■

If your country requires a tone other than 440 Hz, use the Intrusion feature
rather than Verify to verify telephones.

■

The system does not provide bridging when you verify UCD and DDC
groups or RLTs.

■

You cannot make outgoing test calls on DID trunks.

■

You can verify an extension that is administered without hardware
(X-ported). In this case, the system generates reorder tone.

■

Automatic Callback

Interactions

Once the called party in an Automatic Callback call hangs up, neither
extension can be busy-verified until both the calling and called parties are
connected or the callback attempt is canceled (by the activating party or by
time-out of the callback interval).
■

Call Coverage
Since the busy-verification call to an extension is originated as a priority
call, the call does not go to coverage.

■

Call Forwarding
Busy verification made to an extension with call forwarding activated, does
not busy verify the forwarded-to extension. Only the called extension is
busy verified.

■

Call Waiting Termination
You cannot verify an extension that called an active telephone and is
receiving call-waiting ringback tone unless the extension has an idle call
appearance.

■

Conference
The system denies busy verification of any extension involved in a
conference call of more than five people. However, the system does allow a
busy verification of any extension involved in a conference call of 5 or
fewer parties. The system also denies busy verification of a trunk on a
6-party call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1525

Features and technical reference

■

Data Privacy
Busy verification is denied if it would cause a bridging attempt on a
telephone that has activated Data Privacy.

■

Data Restriction
The system denies Verify if Data Restriction is active on a call, and a busy
verification bridging attempt is made on that call.

■

Hold
Busy verification of a multiappearance telephone is denied if all call
appearances have calls on hold.

■

Individual Attendant Access
An attendant cannot make a busy verification of another individual
attendant console or of the attendant group.

■

Loudspeaker Paging Access
The system denies busy verification if the telephone or trunk to be verified
is connected to paging equipment.

■

Transfer
Once the originator of busy verification has bridged onto a call, any
attempt to transfer the call is denied until the originator drops from the call.

■

telephone Origination Restriction
A telephone that is origination restricted can be assigned a Busy Verify
button. However, the button cannot be used.

■

telephone Termination Restriction
The system denies busy verification of telephones that are termination
restricted.

Related topics
■

Attendant Console screen
Feature Button Assignments
— verify
— Display Language

■

Station screen (multiappearance phones)
Button/Feature Button Assignments
— verify
— Display Language

1526

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call charge information

Call charge information
Avaya MultiVantage provides two ways to know the approximate charge for calls
made on outgoing trunks:
■

Advice of Charge — for ISDN trunks
Advice of Charge (AOC) collects charge information from the public
network for each outgoing call. Charge advice is a number representing the
cost of a call; it is recorded as either a charging or currency unit.

■

Periodic Pulse Metering — for non-ISDN trunks
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) accumulates pulses transmitted from the
public network at periodic intervals during an outgoing trunk call. At the
end of the call, the number of pulses collected is the basis for determining
charges.

Call-charge information helps you to account for the cost of outgoing calls
without waiting for the next bill from your network provider. This is especially
important in countries where telephone bills are not itemized. You can also use
this information to let employees know the cost of their phone calls, and so
encourage them to help manage the company’s telecommunications expenses.
Note, however, that you cannot necessarily use this information to dispute
telephone bills with the network provider.
You need to request either AOC or PPM service from your network provider. In
some areas, your choice may be limited. Your Avaya representative can help you
determine the type of service you need.
NOTE:

This service is not offered by the public network in some countries,
including the US.
Detailed description

The availability of AOC and PPM varies from one country to the next. In some
countries, AOC information is received automatically for each call. In others, the
system must request AOC information for each call.
In some countries, the public network sends call-charge information only at the
end of a call. In others, the public network sends information during a call as well.
PPM is available over the following trunk types:

555-233-506

■

Central Office (CO)

■

Direct Inward and Outward Dialing (DIOD)

■

Foreign Exchange (FX)

■

Personal Central Office Line (PCOL)

■

Wide Area Telecommunication Service (WATS)

Issue 5 October 2002

1527

Features and technical reference

CDR Output

The ISDN Call Charge or PPM field contains the last cumulative charge received
from the network. If Call Splitting or Attendant Call Recording is enabled, and a
call has been transferred for the first time, the ISDN Call Charge field contains the
cumulative charge most recently received from the network.
For all subsequent transfers, the ISDN Call Charge field contains the difference
between the cumulative charge most recently received and the value generated in
the previous CDR record for the same call.
A zero appears in the Call Charge field when: no AOC information is received; a
value of zero is the last charge information received; or the outgoing trunk group
is not administered for AOC or PPM.
Charge Display and CDR

Avaya MultiVantage provides two ways for you to view call-charge information:
on a display or as part of the CDR report.
From a display, you can see the cost of an outgoing call, both while the call is in
progress and at the end of the call. If you want end users to control when they
view this information, you can assign a display button that they can press to see
the current call charges. If you want call charges to display automatically
whenever a user places an outgoing call, you can set the Automatic Charge
Display field to y on the user’s COR screen.
You can administer the system so that call charges appear on CDR reports. You
can also allow users to view call charges on phone displays. For information on
how to set this up, see ‘‘Viewing call charge information’’ on page 547.
Considerations

The Primary (or Secondary) Output Format for the CDR report must be one of the
following types.

1528

■

Customized — You must also include either the ISDN-CC or PPM fields in
your record design. If you use both types of call-charge information, you
need both fields.

■

Expanded (Enhanced 24-word standard ASCII)

■

Int-direct

■

Int-ISDN (International ISDN expanded)

■

Int-process

■

Unformatted (Enhanced 24-word standard ASCII)

■

If you want call charges to restart at 0 for calls that are forwarded or
transferred, administer Outg Trk Call Splitting.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call charge information

Attendant consoles

Automatic Charge Display Mode does not apply to attendant consoles. The
attendant must always press a button to enter display mode.
Performance impact

Call Charge Information can impact system performance in several ways. The
information coming in over ISDN trunks takes up bandwidth, and reduces the
maximum amount of traffic the ISDN D-channel can handle. This is especially
true in countries such as Germany and France, where the network sends charging
information updates as often as every 3 to 10 seconds for each active international
call.
The number of sets that display charge information and the frequency of updates
also affect performance. Normally, the update frequency should match the average
rate at which call charge updates are received from the public network.

! CAUTION:
Updating displays too frequently can cause unnecessary system
performance degradation. If performance slows to an unacceptable rate,
you may need to lengthen the amount of time between updates.
Button operations

If you administer a button for charge display, the display-set user can press the
disp-chrg button at any time during the call to see the current charges. If your
public network sends charge information only at the end of a call, display-set
users must have this button and press it just before they hang up. After the call
drops, the charge will appear.
Other display functions

If a user invokes the elapsed-timer display, the timer may overwrite part of the
charge display. If the user has a local directory (Dir button), and presses this
button while a call is in charge display mode, the call-charge information will
overwrite the directory any time an update comes in. To avoid this, the user must
press Exit or Normal.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1529

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Attendant Features
Attendant consoles cannot have automatic charge display. If you want the
attendant to see call charges, you must assign a disp-chrg button to the
attendant console. If the attendant moves to transfer an outgoing call, the
display returns to normal mode. If the transfer does not complete, or the
call remains at the attendant console for whatever reason, the attendant
must press the disp-chrg button again to view call charges.

■

Automatic Incoming Call Display
If a user has charges displayed for an existing call and a second call rings
on another line appearance, the display returns to normal mode for a short
time to show the identity of the caller. The user must press disp-chrg again
to view call charges, or if automatic charge display is enabled, must wait
for the Charge Update Frequency Timer to expire.

■

Bridged Appearance
If a user makes a call using a bridged appearance, the call charges display
on the telephone from which the call is made. If that telephone has
Automatic Charge Display as part of its COR, the charges will appear
automatically. The actual charge for the call appears on the CDR report as
if the call had been made from the principal’s extension, not the bridged
appearance.

■

Call Coverage or Forwarding — Off Net
Call charges for a call to an extension whose calls are redirected over a
public-network trunk are charged to the called extension, not the calling
extension. However, if the call is placed from an internal phone that has
charge display capability, the caller will see the charges for the redirected
call.

■

Call Park
When a user parks a call, the display mode returns to Normal. If a user
retrieves a parked, outgoing call from another display telephone, the
display on that set shows the current call charges if the user presses a
disp-chrg button, or if the user’s COR allows Automatic Charge Display. If
call splitting is enabled, the display shows the charges accumulated since
the user unparked the call.

1530

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call charge information

■

Call Transfer
For Advice of Charge, if a transferred call is routed over a public-network
ISDN-PRI trunk group, AOC administration for the outgoing trunk group
controls whether AOC information is requested or recorded for the call. If
two or more outgoing trunks are connected together via trunk-to-trunk
transfer, the Avaya MultiVantage may receive AOC information from the
network for each outgoing trunk involved in the call.

■

CDR Adjuncts
Avaya MultiVantage does not tandem AOC information through a private
network to other switches. Therefore, the CDR adjunct that records AOC
information must receive its input from Avaya MultiVantage directly
connected to the public network.

■

CDR Call Splitting
If you use CDR Call Splitting for outgoing trunks, each time a call is
transferred, the system generates a separate record. Attendant Call
Recording, a form of Call Splitting, generates a CDR record when an
attendant drops from a call. Incoming Trunk Call Splitting has no effect on
charge information.
If you rely on Call Splitting or Attendant Call Recording, you should
request call charge information during the call. However, for AOC, this
increases message activity on the signaling channel and reduces Busy Hour
Call Capacity of the MultiVantage System.
In some countries, or with specific protocols, AOC information during a
call is not available. In this case, you can use the Elapsed Time in the CDR
records to allocate the charges among the parties on the call.
You must use CDR Call Splitting if you want the charge display to restart
at 0 when a call is transferred.

■

Centralized Attendant Services
In any configuration where a branch system has no direct connection to the
public network, the private network does not pass call-charge information
to these branches.

■

Conference
If a user adds a third party to a call in charge-display mode, the display
returns to normal. Call charges will not appear as long as there are more
than two parties on the call.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
In any configuration where a branch system has no direct connection to the
public network, the private network does not pass call-charge information
to these branches.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1531

Features and technical reference

■

Electronic Tandem Network (ETN)
In any configuration where a branch system has no direct connection to the
public network, the private network does not pass call-charge information
to these branches.

■

Hold
If a user places a call on hold, the display returns to normal mode. The user
must press disp-chrg again to view call charges, or if automatic charge
display is enabled, must wait for the display to refresh.

■

Last Number Dialed
Users can view the dialed number while active on a call by pressing the
stored-numb button, then the last-numb button. To view call charges again,
the user must then press the disp-chrg button, or (if Automatic Charge
Display is part of the user’s COR) the Normal button.

■

QSIG
In any configuration where a branch system has no direct connection to the
public network, the private network does not pass call charge information
to these branches.

■

System Resets
If you perform a warm reset while calls are active with charge display, the
charge display will freeze. To resume call charge updates, users must press
the Normal button.

Call coverage
Call Coverage provides automatic redirection of calls to alternate answering
positions in a Call Coverage path. Call Coverage allows you to:

1532

■

Establish coverage paths with up to 6 alternate answering positions

■

Establish redirection criteria that govern when a call redirects

■

Redirect calls to a local switch location

■

Redirect calls to a remote (off-net) location

■

Redirect calls based on time-of-day

■

Allow users to change back and forth between two coverage choices (either
specific lead coverage paths or time-of-day tables). See ‘‘Extended user
administration of redirected calls’’ on page 1673 for more information.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

Hardware requirement

The Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net (CCRON) generally requires call
classification hardware. Both the Call Classifier - Detector and Tone Clock/Call
Classifier - Detector circuit packs provide tone detection ports including the
capability to do call classification. There are 8 ports on each circuit pack.
For countries using the USA tone plan, a Call Classifier - Detector or Tone
Clock/Call Classifier - Detector circuit pack is sufficient to provide call
classification.
For countries not using the USA tone plan, the Call Classifier - Detector and Tone
Clock with Call Classifier - Tone Detector circuit packs must be configured
appropriately to provide call classification.
The number of simultaneous monitored calls depends on the:
■

total amount of outbound call traffic,

■

number of call classification ports available, and

■

use of other switch applications that make use of call classification ports.

Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with the following switch
applications for ports on the Call Classifier - Detector and Tone Clock with Call
Classifier - Tone Detector circuit packs:
■

Answer Detection

■

Call Prompting

■

CallVisor ASAI

■

Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) signaling

Serious degradation of switch performance, including the inability to launch new
calls, can result from an insufficient resource of call classifier ports.
Detailed description

When a call meets the redirection criteria of the principal, the call attempts to
route to one of up to 6 points in the coverage path. If no coverage points are
available, the call may revert to the called principal or group. If any point in the
path is available, the call either rings the individual phone or member of a group
specified for that point or queues on the group. Once a call is ringing or queued at
any point in a coverage path, the call never reverts to the called principal or group,
or to the previous point. A call remains at a coverage point for the Coverage
Subsequent Redirection interval. At the end of this interval, the call attempts to
route to any remaining points in the coverage path. If no other point is available to
accept the call, the call remains queued or continues ringing the current coverage
point.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1533

Features and technical reference

Call Classification

Classifying a call means determining the state of the call at its final destination.
That means whether the call was answered, received busy, reorder, intercept,
special information tone (SIT), or other treatment.
Call classification is accomplished by the Integrated Services Digital Network
(ISDN) protocol or ports on the:
■

Tone Clock with Call Classifier - Tone Detector circuit pack

■

Call Classifier - Detector circuit pack

Coverage Path

A Call Coverage path is a list of up to six alternate answering positions (covering
users/points) that are accessed, in sequence, when the called party or group is not
available to answer the call.
You can assign any of the following entities a coverage path so they are eligible to
have calls redirected to coverage:
■

ACD split

■

Agent LoginID

■

PCOL group

■

TEG

■

Hunt group

■

Phone (on-net or off-net)

You establish the coverage paths and set the redirection criteria. If a coverage path
is not assigned to a particular facility, calls are not redirected from that facility,
unless another feature is assigned. A coverage path can include any of the
following:

1534

■

Announcement

■

Attendant group

■

AUDIX

■

Coverage answer group

■

Hunt group

■

Public network number (off-net)

■

VDN

■

Phone (on-net or off-net)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

Avaya MultiVantage allows for multiple coverage paths. However, for any
particular call only one coverage path is used. The “lead” coverage path is the first
coverage path in a chain that is considered when a call redirects to coverage. The
chain is defined in the Next Path Name field on the Coverage Path screen.
When a call redirects to coverage, the lead coverage path at that time is checked to
determine whether its coverage redirection criteria match the call status. If there is
a match the lead coverage path is used. If the lead coverage path’s redirection
criteria does not match, the system moves down the path chain until it finds a
coverage path with redirection criteria that matches the call status. If the chain is
exhausted before the system finds a match, the call does not redirect to coverage.
Once a coverage path is selected, it is used exclusively through the duration of the
call.
You can assign lead coverage paths directly in the Coverage Path 1 or Coverage
Path 2 fields on the appropriate screens. For example, to assign a lead path for a
TEG, set the Coverage Path field on the Terminating Extension Group screen. You
can also assign the lead paths indirectly by assigning a Time-of-Day Coverage
Table to the Coverage Path 1 and Coverage Path 2 fields. Then, the system selects
the lead path according to the time of day.
Subsequent redirection interval

The number of times a call rings at a particular coverage point before the switch
moves the call to the next coverage point depends on the type of ringing coverage
point (for example, local, DCS, CCRON, and so forth). For each type of coverage
point, the following table shows which subsequent redirection interval on the
System-Parameters Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen is used.
Type of Coverage

Subsequent Redirection Interval

local

local

remote

*

CCRON

off-net

DCS

local

555-233-506

■

Local — On the System-Parameters Coverage/Forwarding screen, the
Local Subsequent Redirection/CFWD Don’t Answer Interval field.

■

Off-net — On the System-Parameters Coverage/Forwarding screen, the
Offnet Subsequent Redirection/CFWD Don’t Answer Interval field.

■

* — The call is left off-net.

Issue 5 October 2002

1535

Features and technical reference

Call redirection criteria

Redirection criteria determine the conditions under which a call redirects from the
principal (called) extension to the first position in the coverage path. The criteria
and conditions that apply are as follows:
■

Active
Redirects calls to coverage immediately when the principal is active on at
least one call appearance. For a phone with only one appearance or a
single-line extension, assign the Busy criterion (discussed below) instead
of the Active criterion.

■

Busy
Redirects calls to coverage when all available call appearances at the
principal extension are in use. For multiappearance phones, one call
appearance can be reserved for outgoing calls or incoming priority calls
(discussed later). The remaining assigned call appearances are available for
other incoming calls. An incoming call (other than a priority call) redirects
to coverage only when all of these unreserved call appearances are in use.
If at least one unreserved call appearance is idle at the principal extension,
the call remains at that idle appearance.
A TEG is considered busy if any phone in the group is active on a call.
Each phone in a UCD or DDC group must be active on at least one call
appearance for the call to redirect to coverage. If any phone in the group is
idle the call directs to that phone. If no phone is available, the call can
queue if queuing is provided. If queuing is not provided, then the call
routes to coverage. If the queue is full or all agents are in an auxiliary state,
the group is considered busy and the call routes to coverage. Queued calls
remain in queue for the Don’t Answer Interval.
A call will not cover to a hunt group if no agents are logged in, or if all
agents are in AuxWork mode.

■

Don’t Answer
Redirects calls to coverage if unanswered during the assigned Don’t
Answer Interval. A call rings for the Don’t Answer Interval and then
redirects to coverage.

■

Cover All Calls
Redirects all incoming calls to coverage. This criterion has precedence
over any other criterion previously assigned.

■

Send All Calls/Go to Cover
Allows users to activate Send All Calls or Go to Cover as an overriding
coverage criteria. This redirection criteria must be assigned before a user
can activate Send All Calls or Go to Cover (discussed later).

1536

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

■

No Coverage
Occurs when none of the above criteria are assigned. Calls redirect to
coverage only when the principal has activated Send All Calls or the caller
has activated Go to Cover. Both of these overriding criteria are discussed
later.

Redirection criteria can be assigned in combinations. For example, you can
combine Active/Don’t Answer and Busy/Don’t Answer. Other combinations are
not possible or do not provide any useful function. For example, Active/Busy does
not accomplish anything. A busy phone is always active.
Redirection criteria are assigned separately for internal and external calls. By
linking the coverage paths, Busy/Don’t Answer can be assigned for internal calls
and Active can be assigned for external calls. Similarly, Busy/Don’t Answer can
apply for external calls and No Coverage can apply for internal calls. In the latter
case, internal calls remain directed to the called phone or group.
All calls extended by the attendant are treated as external.
Warning users if their calls are redirected

You can warn analog phone users if they have features active that may redirect
calls. For example, if the user has activated send all calls or call forwarding, you
can administer a setting to play a special dial tone when the user goes off-hook.
See ‘‘DISTINCTIVE AUDIBLE ALERTING’’ on page 826 for more
information.
Features that override Call Coverage

Some system features override Call Coverage criteria; they are checked before the
redirection criteria are checked. These features are:
■

Call Forwarding All Calls
Call Forwarding provides a temporary override of the redirection criteria, if
Send All Calls is not active. The call attempts to complete to the
forwarded-to extension before redirecting to coverage. If the principal’s
redirection criteria are met at the forwarded-to extension, the call redirects
to the principal’s coverage path.

■

Go to Cover
Go to Cover allows users, when calling to another internal extension, to
send the call directly to coverage. This is optionally assigned to a button on
a phone and is activated by the internal calling party. Use of Go to Cover is
discussed later.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1537

Features and technical reference

■

Send All Calls
Send All Calls allows principals to temporarily direct all incoming calls to
coverage regardless of the assigned redirection criteria. For example, if the
redirection criteria are administered so that no calls redirect, all incoming
calls terminate at the principal’s phone unless Send All Calls is activated.
Also, Send All Calls allows covering users to temporarily remove their
phones from another user’s coverage path.
Send All Calls is activated by pressing the Send All Calls button or by
dialing the Send All Calls access code. It is deactivated by pressing the
button a second time or by dialing the deactivate code.
A user who is not assigned a coverage path with Send All Calls or Cover
All Calls redirection criteria, cannot activate Send All Calls.
Any attempt to activate Send All Calls is denied if the currently active
coverage path does not allow it in its coverage criteria. However, if the user
activates Send All Calls for a coverage path that does allow it, and then the
user’s coverage path is changed by the system to a coverage path that does
not allow Send All Calls:
— The Send All Calls button remains lit.
— Send All Calls automatically resumes when the user is changed back
to a coverage path that does allow it.
If a user has activated Send All Calls and has only one coverage point, and
receives a call from that coverage point, the call rings silently at the user’s
phone, because the coverage point is already on the call.
Send All Calls is similar to Cover All Calls, discussed previously.
However, you set Cover All Calls and it is used for screening the
principal’s call. The principal may or may not be rung on an incoming call,
depending on how this function is assigned. Send All Calls is controlled by
the principal and is normally used when the principal is away temporarily.
TEG calls are not affected by Send All Calls.

■

Send Term
Send Term is the Send All Calls equivalent for TEG. Since a TEG cannot
be in a coverage path, Send Term applies only to a directly called TEG.

1538

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

Conditions that override Call Coverage

Call Coverage provides redirection of calls from the called principal or group to
alternate answering positions when certain criteria are met. Certain provisions
allow calls to direct to and/or be answered by the principal even though the
redirection or overriding criteria are met. These provisions are:

555-233-506

■

If no answering positions are available in the Coverage Path, the call rings
the called phone, if possible; otherwise, the calling party receives busy
tone. This applies even if the Cover All Calls redirection criterion or the
Send All Calls overriding criterion is active.

■

Similarly, calls directed to a UCD or DDC group are queued, if queuing is
available, when no group members are available to answer the call. The
call remains in queue for the Don’t Answer Interval before routing
according to the coverage path. If no points on the path are available, the
call remains in queue. The worst case is when group queuing and the
coverage points both are unavailable. In this case, the caller receives busy
tone or ringback, depending on the type of trunk carrying the call.

■

If the redirection criterion is Active or Cover All Calls, a called principal
can receive a redirection notification signal (a short burst of ringing) when
the call routes to coverage. (Redirection Notification is optional on a
per-phone basis.) Note that in the Active, Cover All Calls, and Don’t
Answer cases, the principal could answer the call. Busy means no call
appearances are available to answer the call. Redirected calls maintain an
appearance on the called phone, if possible. The call appearance status
lamp flashes to indicate an incoming call before the call redirects. When
the call does redirect, the status lamp continues to flash (when redirecting
to AUDIX, the lamp goes out). The user can answer the call by pressing the
call appearance button. If the call has already been answered by a covering
user, the principal may bridge onto the call. This provision is called
Simulated Bridged Appearance. If a covering user answers the call, the
status lamp on the principal’s phone lights steadily.

■

A phone user can use Directed Call Pickup to pick up a principal’s call or a
call alerting at a coverage point. Directed Call Pickup allows a phone user
to answer an alerting call from any station on the Avaya MultiVantage.
That is, the alerting and answering stations do not need to be members of
the same Call Pickup group. You enable and disable Directed Call Pickup
on a system-wide base. However, permission to use the feature can be
allowed or disallowed based on COR.

■

Priority Calling, Dial Intercom, and Automatic Intercom Calls always route
directly to the principal’s phone until the calling party activates Go to
Cover. These calls take precedence over the redirection criteria and can
seize the call appearance normally reserved for outgoing calls, if no other
call appearances are available.

Issue 5 October 2002

1539

Features and technical reference

An internal calling party is informed that a call is redirecting to coverage by a
single, short burst of ringing, called a Call Coverage tone. This tone is followed
by an optional period of silence, called a Caller Response Interval (administered
on the System-Parameters Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen). This interval
allows the calling party time to decide what to do: hang up or activate Leave Word
Calling, Automatic Callback, or Go to Cover. Activating Go to Cover cancels the
remaining interval.
Covering-user options

For specific Call Coverage needs, the following options are available to phone
users:
■

Consult
Allows the covering user, by first pressing the Transfer button and then the
Consult button, to call the principal (called party) for private consultation.
These two actions place the caller on hold and establish a connection
between the principal and the covering user. If the principal wishes, the
covering user can complete the conference and add the calling party to the
conversation. Similarly, the call can be transferred to the principal. Consult
calls use the Simulated Bridged Appearance maintained on the call, if there
is one. If not, the Consult call seizes any idle call appearance. If there is no
idle call appearance, the Consult call is denied.

■

Coverage Callback
Allows a covering user, by pressing the Cover Callback button, to leave a
message for the principal to call the calling party. Coverage Callback uses
Implied Principal Addressing to infer both extensions so that the covering
user does not have to dial either the principal’s or the caller’s number. The
caller must be an internal caller. The principal receives no indication that
the covering user handled the call.
Alternatively, if the covering user presses the Leave Word Calling button, a
“call me” message is left for the principal. The principal calls the covering
user to get the message. This method is used when an external call is
received or when an internal caller wants to leave a message but is not
available for a return call.

1540

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

■

Coverage Answer Group
A Coverage Answer Group can have up to eight members. When a call is
redirected to a Coverage Answer Group, all phones in the group ring
simultaneously. Anyone in the group can answer the call. Note that a
bridged appearance of a coverage answer group member does not ring
when calls cover to the group. A Coverage Answer Group member already
handling a group call is rung when another call is redirected to that
Coverage Answer Group. If a Coverage Answer Group member is also a
member of another Coverage Answer Group, he or she can also receive
calls for the other group. A second call directed to a Coverage Answer
Group lights a Coverage Incoming Call Identification (ICI) lamp, if
administered.

■

Coverage Incoming Call Identification
A Coverage ICI button can be assigned to multiappearance phone users
without a display in a Coverage Answer Group.
The Coverage ICI status lamp identifies a call incoming to that Coverage
Answer Group. If a Coverage Answer Group is assigned to more than one
Call Coverage path, the path number cannot be identified. Likewise, if a
given path is assigned to more than one principal, the individual principals
cannot be identified. To provide unique path and principal identification,
you must establish a unique path for each principal and a unique Coverage
Answer Group to be included in the path. A second coverage call takes
control of the Coverage ICI lamp and does not return control to the
previous call when the second call is released.

Time-of-Day Coverage

The Time-of-Day Coverage Table allows you to redirect calls to different
lead-coverage paths at different times of the day and on different days of the
week.
For example, an employee may want incoming calls to cover to a co-worker
(office) during normal business hours, to cover to an off-net destination (home) in
the early evening, and to cover to AUDIX at all other times. By specifying the
appropriate lead-coverage paths in the Time-of-Day Coverage Table, the
employee can have the call redirection flexibility shown in the following table. (If
you were actually administering a Time-of-Day Coverage Table, you would
provide the lead-coverage path numbers that redirect the calls to the employee’s
office, to their home, and to AUDIX.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1541

Features and technical reference

Day of the
Week

Time 1
Directed To

Time 2
Directed To

Time 3
Directed To

Time 4
Directed To

Monday

00:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

08:00
CovPath1
(Office)

17:30
CovPath2
(Home)

20:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

Tuesday

00:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

08:00
CovPath1
(Office)

17:30
CovPath2
(Home)

20:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

Wednesday

00:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

08:00
CovPath1
(Office)

17:30
CovPath2
(Home)

20:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

Thursday

00:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

08:00
CovPath1
(Office)

17:30
CovPath2
(Home)

20:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

Friday

00:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

08:00
CovPath1
(Office)

17:30
CovPath2
(Home)

Saturday

00:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

Sunday

00:00
CovPath3
(AUDIX)

Time is represented in 24-hour format and activation times are ascending from the
earliest to the latest. There are no gaps in the activation times; the entire day is
covered. If you do not assign a lead-coverage path to a specific time interval, there
is no coverage from that time until the next activation time with an assigned
lead-coverage path.
When a call arrives at a principal, the system queries for the lead coverage path in
effect at that time and uses that information to determine call redirection. If call
coverage is changed via administration while the call is in progress, the
administration changes do not affect that call.
Off-Net Call Coverage

Call Coverage allows a call to be redirected to a destination on the public network.
The remote (off-net) number is administered on the Remote Call Coverage Table
screen and may have up to 16 digits including either the outgoing trunk access
code (TAC) or the FAC specifying ARS or AAR. Any coverage point can be an
off-net destination.

1542

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

Whenever an incoming trunk call is redirected off-net (coverage or forwarded), a
timer is set that precludes any other incoming trunk call from redirecting off-net
until the timer either expires or is cancelled. The rationale for this mechanism is to
prevent calls that were redirected off-net from being re-routed back to the original
principal from the off-net destination, effectively creating a round-robin loop that
continuously seizes trunks until they are exhausted.
Avaya MultiVantage provides the means of performing call classification on an
off-net coverage call to determine its disposition. If the off-net call is carried
completely over ISDN facilities to its final destination, then ISDN trunk signaling
is used to monitor the call. Otherwise, the system uses a call classifier port.
When the Avaya MultiVantage tries to classify an off-net coverage call (CCRON)
using a call classifier port, the system introduces an unavoidable cut-through
delay while the call classifier port attempts to identify an answered call. Neither
the originating nor the answering party can hear each other during this delay of up
to 1 second. A call classifier is attached to all off-net coverage calls made over
analog facilities and also over ISDN facilities if the call is interworked to
non-ISDN facilities on the public network.
When the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled field on the
System-Parameters Coverage-Forwarding screen is y:

555-233-506

■

The system monitors off-net calls (call classification) and brings them back
to the switch if they are not answered within the defined time interval. (Set
this interval in the Off-Net Cvg Subsequent Redirection/CFWD No Ans
Interval field on the System-Parameters Coverage-Forwarding screen.)
Calls also return to the switch if the system detects a call progress tone,
such as busy or reorder.

■

A simulated bridge appearance (SBA) is put on the principal and the green
lamp is put in flashing mode; the principal can pick up the call at any time.
You have the option of dispensing with call classification (and
consequently the SBA) on a final CCRON coverage point.

■

When a call classifier port is used to classify the call, the switch plays local
ringback tone to the caller while the off-net call is being classified,
concealing from the caller what is happening on the public network. When
the call is answered off-net, it is likely that the first few syllables spoken by
the answering party will not be heard by the calling party.

■

If any party on the call is on HOLD when the call routes off net, the call
classifier is removed from the call. The call behaves in the same manner as
off-net calls when the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is n.

Issue 5 October 2002

1543

Features and technical reference

■

While an off-net call is undergoing call classification, any party who is not
already on the call will be unable to bridge onto the call. Also, the
originating party cannot release the call, conference anyone else onto the
call, or transfer the call to a new party. Once the call is answered off-net or
the call is returned to the switch for further call processing, then these
restrictions are removed.

■

If the last point in a coverage path is an off-net destination and no trunks
are available to route the call, the switch attempts to re-terminate the call to
the principal.

■

Avaya MultiVantage has no control over any redirection of the call that
may take place at an off-net destination. However, further coverage
treatment will be provided if the Off-Net Cvg Subsequent
Redirection/CFWD No Ans Interval field expires before the call is
answered off-net.

If the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is not activated, the system does
not monitor off-net calls and bring them back for additional call-coverage
processing. In this case, once a call is directed to the remote call-coverage point,
the principal is dropped from the call. Effectively, the off-net coverage point is the
last coverage point in the coverage path.
VDN in a Call Coverage path

Assigning a VDN extension as the last point in a Call Coverage path allows the
functionality of Call Vectoring to be applied to a coverage point. The
programmable vector associated with the VDN effectively can provide great
flexibility in call handling. The integration of the Call Vectoring and Call
Coverage features can drive powerful AUDIX and Message Server applications.
For example, you can program the vector assigned to the VDN in the coverage
path to queue a redirected call to a messaging split for call answer operation and to
allow the caller to leave a message for the called principal. The same VDN also
can be used to retrieve messages. The vector program may also be varied by time
of day or split status to provide different types of coverage.
When a redirected call covers to a VDN, the principal’s simulated bridged
appearance is removed when vector processing begins.
When covered or direct calls are connected to AUDIX or a messaging split via
call vectoring, the original reason for redirection and the called principal must be
passed to the adjunct over the Switch Communication Interface (SCI) link.

1544

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

Use of a VDN as a coverage point provides integration to Centralized Messaging.
That is, the DCS message sent to the remote switch with AUDIX includes the
original reason for redirection and called principal.
An administration change is required to allow an extension that is assigned as a
VDN to be entered as the last point in the coverage path. See Avaya
MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection
(EAS) Guide for more information.
Extended User Administration of
Redirected Calls

The Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls feature (also called
telecommuting access) allows system users to change their lead-coverage path (or
time of day table) or their call-forwarding designated destination from any on-site
or off-site location. See ‘‘Extended user administration of redirected calls’’ on
page 1673 for more information.
Measurements and reports

Three reports provide measurement information about Call Coverage:
■

The Coverage Path Measurement Report describes coverage activity as it
relates to the coverage paths.

■

The Principal Coverage Measurement Report describes coverage activity
as it relates to the principal extensions.

■

The CDR shows the outgoing trunk calls.

For each report, a selection form lists the specific coverage paths or principal
extensions to be measured. For more detailed information on these reports and
their associated commands, see Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software.
Considerations
■

555-233-506

Incoming tie-trunk calls can be administered as either internal or external
and are redirected to Call Coverage accordingly.

Issue 5 October 2002

1545

Features and technical reference

Guidelines and examples of Call Coverage

Call Coverage is an extremely flexible feature and allows several combinations of
coverage points. To illustrate the usefulness of Call Coverage, three typical
coverage arrangements are given below.
■

Executive Coverage
Provides a principal with call redirection to covering users having a close
working relationship with the principal. Because of the status of the
principal, personalized answering should be provided. Also, the principal
may or may not choose to answer his or her own calls.
Redirection of a principal’s calls to a secretary is a typical example of this
form of coverage. The secretary would be informed of the principal’s daily
schedule and other useful information such as the importance of certain
calls. The secretary could provide personalized answering by answering
calls with the principal’s name.
If the secretary is unavailable to answer the coverage call for the principal,
the call redirects to a backup answering position. Personalized answering
should also be provided at the backup position.

■

Middle Manager Coverage
Provides a group of principals with call redirection to one or more covering
users (such as a secretary). The secretary should have some knowledge of
the principal’s daily schedule. A backup answering position should be
provided in case the secretary is unavailable.

■

General User Coverage
Provides less-personal coverage for a broader spectrum of users. Covering
users typically consist of a group or pooled answering arrangement.
Coverage calls may be distributed among the members of the answering
group.

Following is an example of how to provide an Executive Coverage arrangement.
1. Establish a unique Call Coverage Path for the executive.
— If the secretary screens calls, specify Cover All Calls as the
redirection criteria.
— If the executive answers calls, specify Active, Busy, Don’t Answer,
Active/Don’t Answer, or Busy/Don’t Answer as desired.
— Specify the secretary and the backup position (or the Coverage
Answer Groups containing the secretary’s and backup position’s
extensions) as the coverage points in the path.

1546

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

2. If a Coverage Answer Group has been chosen as a coverage point, expect
the following behavior:
— Note that, if the secretary and/or backup answering position are in a
Coverage Answer Group, each receives only one redirected call for
the executive at any given time.
— Only one call may cover and ring at a time.
— Calls do ring a Coverage Answer Group member already busy on a
call to the group.
3. Optionally, specify a Send All Calls button on the executive’s phone. If
someone else answers the executive’s calls via bridging, the button is not
needed.
4. Specify a Send All Calls button and a Consult button on the secretary’s
phone. Specify a Coverage ICI button if the secretary does not have a call
display. Send All Calls is needed if the secretary is unavailable for a period
of time. Consult is needed to enable private consultation with the executive
during an established call. Coverage ICI is needed to identify the call as a
call to the executive rather than a personal call to the secretary.
5. Specify a Consult button and a Coverage ICI button on the backup
position’s phone for the same reasons that these buttons were specified for
the secretary.
Interactions
■

Agent Call Handling
Do not assign Cover All Calls to agents with the Automatic Answer option.
Any call (ACD or non-ACD), to an extension that has Automatic Answer
enabled and has its coverage redirection criteria administered as Cover All
Calls does not go to coverage but to the called extension. Cover All Calls
redirection criteria have no effect on an incoming call when a user is in the
Auto-Answer mode.

■

Answer Detection
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with Answer Detection for
call classifier ports.

■

Automatic Callback and Ringback Queuing
Callback calls do not redirect to coverage. The caller can activate
Automatic Callback when ringing, redirection notification signal, or busy
signal is heard.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1547

Features and technical reference

■

Automatic Intercom, Dial Intercom, and Priority Calling
Calls using these features are not redirected to coverage unless the caller
presses the Go to Cover button.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
Coverage criteria for bridged call appearances are based entirely on the
criteria of the primary extension associated with the bridged call
appearance.
If a phone user has activated Send All Calls on the primary extension,
incoming calls still ring bridged call appearances of that extension as long
as a simulated bridged appearance of the call is maintained at the primary
extension.
The switch blocks a user from bridging onto a call that has routed off-net
while the call is undergoing call classification.

■

Call Detail Recording
When the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is y, a CDR record is
generated only after the call has actually been answered off-net. The dialed
number in the record is the off-net number to which the call covers. The
calling number is the station that is covered to the off-net location.

■

Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding provides a temporary override of the redirection criteria.
Normally, calls forward instead of redirecting to coverage. When a
forwarding extension’s redirection criteria are met at the designated
(forwarded-to) extension, the call redirects to the forwarding extension’s
coverage path.
The system allows calls forwarded off-net to be tracked for busy or
no-answer conditions and to return for further call-coverage processing
under those conditions. However, if the principal does not have a coverage
path, the system does not track the call and it is left at the off-net
destination regardless of whether it is answered or busy.
If an extension has both Send All Calls and Call Forwarding activated,
most calls to that extension are immediately redirected to coverage.
However, Priority Calls, are forwarded to the designated forwarding
destination.
If Cover All Calls is part of the coverage redirection criteria and if Call
Forwarding is active at an extension, most calls to that extension are
immediately redirected to coverage. However, Priority Calls, are forwarded
to the designated forwarding destination.
Activation of Send All Calls at the forwarded-to extension does not affect
calls forwarded to that extension.

1548

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

■

Call Pickup
Any call redirected to a covering user who is a member of a Call Pickup
group can be answered by other members of the group.

■

Call Prompting
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with the Call Prompting
feature for call classifier ports.

■

CallVisor ASAI
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with CallVisor for call
classifier ports.

■

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
If an incoming CAS call is directed to a hunt group, the call is not
redirected to the hunt group’s coverage path.

■

Class of Restriction and Controlled Restrictions
Users who normally may be restricted from receiving calls still can receive
calls directed to them via Call Coverage.

■

Conference
The switch blocks users from conferencing another party onto a call which
has routed off-net while that call is undergoing call classification. If any
party on the call is on hold, the call routes off-net, but without undergoing
call classification, even when the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net
field is y.
A call that covers to a VDN cannot be added to a conference while the call
is in vector processing. For example, say user A calls user B. B wants to
have a three-way conference call and calls C. C doesn’t answer, the call
covers to a VDN, and from there enters a vector. Until vector processing
has completed this call to some destination, the conference cannot be
established.

■

Direct Department Calling (DDC), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), and
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
If a user has an Auxiliary Work button, and activates or deactivates Send
All Calls, the Auxiliary Work function associated with DDC or UCD is
activated or deactivated simultaneously.
If a user has no Auxiliary Work button, activating or deactivating Send All
Calls still makes the user unavailable or available, respectively, for DDC
and UCD calls, but Auxiliary Work is not activated or deactivated. The
Auxiliary Work mode may be activated or deactivated using a feature
access code.
Activating or deactivating the Auxiliary Work function does not activate or
deactivate Send All Calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1549

Features and technical reference

■

Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with DOD for call
classifier ports when DOD uses MFC signaling. The Call Classifier Detector port provides the MFC tones. Non-MFC DOD calls do not need
the Call Classifier - Detector port for this purpose.

■

Global Call Classification
To classify tones in countries not using the USA tone plan, time cadences
and frequencies must be administered so they can be downloaded to the
call classification circuit packs. You need a Call Classifier - Detector or
Tone Clock with Call Classifier - Tone Detector circuit pack.

■

Hold
If a covering user puts a call on hold, and the principal picks up on the call,
the coverage appearance may or may not be dropped, depending on
administration.
If any party is on hold when a coverage call routes off-net, that call does
not undergo call classification, even when the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net field is y.

■

Internal Automatic Answer (IAA)
If an internal call is redirected to another phone by a Call Coverage
redirection criteria, then that call is eligible for IAA at that phone.
IAA does not apply to calls to the original called extension when:
— The called phone has activated Do Not Disturb, Send All Calls, or
Cover All Calls
— The calling phone has selected Go To Cover before placing the call
Calls directed to a Coverage Answering Group are not eligible for IAA.

■

ISDN End-to-End Calls
When ISDN facilities carry an off-net coverage call entirely (end-to-end),
call classification is accomplished through the ISDN protocol rather than
by a call classifier port.

■

Leave Word Calling (LWC)
Call Coverage can be used with or without LWC. However, the two
features complement each other. When a covering user activates LWC
during a coverage call, a message is left for the principal to call the
covering user. When a covering user activates Coverage Callback during a
coverage call, a message is left for the principal to call the internal caller.

1550

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call coverage

■

Night Service
Calls routed to the night station via Night Service follow the coverage path
of the night extension under all coverage criteria except Send All Calls.

■

Privacy — Manual Exclusion
When the primary or principal user bridges onto a call that went to
coverage and has been answered at the coverage point, the user is not
dropped when Privacy — Manual Exclusion is activated.

■

R2-MFC Signaling
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net competes with the R2-MFC
Signaling feature for Call Classifier - Detector ports.

■

Simulated Bridged Appearance (SBA)
Calls redirected to coverage maintain an appearance on the called phone if
a call appearance is available to handle the call. The called party can bridge
onto the call at any time. The system can be administered to allow an SBA
of the call to either remain at or be removed from the covering phone after
the principal bridges onto the call.
An SBA is maintained for calls covered by an off-net coverage point if the
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net feature is enabled. An SBA cannot
be maintained for calls if the coverage point is linked to AUDIX.
Consult calls use the SBA maintained on the call. At the conclusion of a
consult call, the bridged appearance is no longer maintained. If the
principal chooses not to talk with the calling party, the principal cannot
bridge onto the call later.
If a call that has, or has had, an SBA is conferenced or transferred, and
redirects to coverage again, an SBA is not maintained at the conferenced-to
or transferred-to extension.

■

Tenant Partitioning
The caller and called party must be able to access a coverage point. The
caller is considered to be the covering user and the called party is
considered to be the covered user. Both parties must be able to access the
coverage point.

■

Transfer
The switch blocks a user from transferring a call which has routed off-net
to another party while that call is undergoing call classification. If any
party on a call that has routed off-net is on hold, the call does route off-net
without undergoing call classification, even when the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net field is y.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1551

Features and technical reference

Transfers with Call Coverage as listed in the following table.
Source

Transfer initiator

Destination

Coverage type

External

Local station
Local station
Remote station
Remote station
Attendant
Attendant

Local station
Remote station
Local station
Remote station
Local station
Remote station

External
External
Internal
Internal
External
External

Internal

Local station
Local station
Remote station
Remote station
Attendant
Attendant

Local station
Remote station
Local station
Remote station
Local station
Remote station

Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
External
External

NOTE:

The coverage criteria for transferred DID calls depends upon the
External Treatment For Transferred Incoming Calls field on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Related topics

See ‘‘Coverage Answer Group’’ on page 694 for information about and field
descriptions on the Coverage Answer Group screen.
See ‘‘Coverage Path’’ on page 696 for information about and field descriptions on
the Coverage Path screen.
See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for information on activating or
deactivating sending calls to coverage.
See ‘‘System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding’’ on page 1167 for
information on setting the system-wide parameters for call coverage and call
forwarding.
See ‘‘Hunt Group’’ on page 875 for information on sending calls to a hunt group
extension.
See ‘‘Remote Call Coverage Table’’ on page 1092 for information about and field
descriptions on the Remote Call Coverage Table screen.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information on assigning feature buttons.

1552

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

See ‘‘Terminating Extension Group’’ on page 1223 for information on assigning a
coverage path to a Terminating Extension Group.
See ‘‘Time of Day Coverage Table’’ on page 1228 for information about and field
descriptions on the Time of Day Coverage Table screen.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information on specifying internal ringing
and coverage for incoming calls.
See ‘‘Setting up basic call coverage’’ on page 189 for instructions on
administering basic call coverage.
See ‘‘Setting up advanced call coverage’’ on page 193 for instructions on
administering advanced call coverage.

Call detail recording
Call Detail Recording (CDR) tracks call information on a per-trunk-group or
station-to-station basis. For every trunk group (including auxiliary trunks) that
you administer for CDR reports, the system keeps track of incoming, outgoing
and tandem calls. You can also receive reports on temporary signaling
connections (TSCs) that involve trunks, and calls made using loudspeaker paging
or code calling access.
Detailed description

You can also ask the system to report on ineffective call attempts. This may
greatly increase the number of calls recorded, but may also help you to increase
security, since the system records call attempts that are blocked because of
insufficient calling privileges. This can also let you know if your users are not able
to make calls because all trunks are busy.
CDR tracks the audio service link calls that the switch uses for IP softphones set
up as telecommuter. An IP softphone may use one audio service link to make
many short calls, but this appears as one long call on the CDR reports.
Some call accounting systems do not support all of the information offered by
CDR. See your Avaya representative for details.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1553

Features and technical reference

Account Code Dialing

Account Code Dialing allows certain calls to be associated with a particular
project or account number. To do this, users enter account codes when they place
certain types of outgoing calls. These account codes then appear on the call
record, which you can use for accounting or billing purposes. Account code
dialing can be optional or mandatory (forced).
To associate an account code with a particular call, a user first dials the CDR
account code access code that you have established, then dials the desired account
code. Next, the user dials the desired trunk access code, or ARS access code,
followed by the phone number.
The call record contains the account code, Trunk Access Code (TAC) or
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code, and the phone number. It does not
contain the account code feature access code (FAC).
Forced Entry of Account Codes

You can force your users to enter account codes on a system-wide, per-trunk or
per-user basis, or on the basis of the digit string the user dials. If you have this
feature in place, the system rejects any call that requires an account code where
one is not supplied. To maximize system security, Avaya recommends that you
use Forced Entry of Account Codes (FEAC).

! SECURITY ALERT:
Avaya MultiVantage does not verify account codes. As long as the user
enters a digit string of the appropriate length, the system allows the call. You
must use Authorization Codes if you want the system to determine if the user
is authorized to make the call.
You can assign FEAC in the following ways:
■

All calls marked for FEAC on the Toll Analysis table
If you activate this CDR system parameter, all users must dial an account
code when the digits dialed match a digit string with FEAC=y. This
includes calls made by ARS or TAC.

■

Toll calls made by users with a specific COR
If FEAC is assigned to a specific COR, any telephone user assigned that
COR must dial an account code before making calls that are administered
forced entry of account codes.

1554

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

■

All calls made over a trunk group with FEAC in COR (TAC calls)
Users cannot access a trunk group that is assigned a COR with FEAC until
they dial an account code. If a call is routed via ARS, the system does not
check for FEAC in the trunk group’s COR. Therefore, if you want your
users to enter account codes for ARS calls, you must administer this in the
Toll Analysis table.

If an account code is required for a call and the user does not enter one, the system
responds with intercept tone.
The following types of calls never require an account code:
■

Attendant originated call

■

Busy verification of a trunk by an attendant or telephone user

■

DCS (unless required by the trunk group’s COR)

■

PCOL

■

Remote access without barrier codes

■

Trunk-to-trunk connections

Call Splitting

Call splitting keeps track of calls where more than two parties are involved. These
can be calls that are transferred, conferenced, or where an attendant becomes
involved. If you have call splitting activated and any of these situations arise,
CDR produces a separate record for each new party on the call.
You can administer call splitting for both incoming and outgoing trunks, and both
can have attendant calls recorded separately.
Incoming trunk call splitting

If incoming trunk call splitting is enabled, CDR starts a new record whenever an
incoming trunk call is conferenced or transferred. Whenever a user drops from the
call or the call is successfully transferred, CDR produces a record relevant to this
user’s participation. These call records show the amount of time each party was on
the call, the incoming trunk access code, the dialed number and the condition
code, as well as the other fields specified in the record format.
For incoming trunk calls that are conferenced, CDR creates a new record
whenever a new party comes on the call. The duration field in these records shows
how long each party participated on the call. Conference calls produce records
with duration fields that overlap. The duration of a transferred call begins when
the transferring party presses the TRANSFER button for the second time, so there is
no overlap.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1555

Features and technical reference

If ITCS is enabled and an incoming trunk call is conferenced or transferred to a
local extension that is optioned for Intraswitch CDR, the call produces an
incoming trunk call record. It does not produce an Intraswitch record.
To enable this option, set the Incoming Call Splitting field to y on the CDR
System Parameters screen, and make sure that Record Outgoing Calls Only = n.
ITCS examples

The following scenarios depict calls made with ITCS active. The tables that
follow do not show all fields, only those that may change due to call splitting. Call
durations are approximate.
Caller A (TAC 123) makes an incoming trunk call to switch party B (5657890).
They talk for 2 minutes. B then conferences in C (ext. 54321), and D (ext. 59876).
The entire group talks for another 8 minutes, at which point B drops off the call.
This produces a record for segment A–B.
A, C and D continue to talk for another 5 minutes. All remaining parties drop,
producing two more records; A–C and A–D. Note that each record shows the
incoming trunk ID as the calling number.
Table 23.

ITCS conference

Segment

Duration

Condition
Code

A–B

0:10:0

A–C
A–D

Access
Code Used

Calling
Number

Dialed
Number

C

123

5657890

0:13:0

C

123

54321

0:13:0

C

123

59876

A (TAC 123) calls Station B (5657890). They talk for 1 minute, then B transfers
the call to C (54321). CDR generates a record for segment A–B. A and C talk for
5 minutes. CDR generates a record for segment A–C.
Table 24.

ITCS transfer

Segment

Duration

Condition
Code

A–B

0:01:0

A–C

0:05:0

1556

Issue 5 October 2002

Access Code
Used

Calling
Number

Dialed
Number

9

123

5657890

9

123

54321

555-233-506

Call detail recording

A (TAC 123) calls switch party B (5657890), they talk for one minute. B transfers
the call to public-network party C (5665555), they talk for 4 minutes. Note that
the duration of the original incoming trunk call includes the time after the call was
transferred to an outgoing trunk, until all trunk parties drop.
Table 25.

ITCS transfer to outgoing trunk

Segment

Duration

Condition
Code

A–B

0:05:0

9

A–C

0:04:0

9

Access Code
Used

345

Calling
Number

Dialed
Number

123

5657890

123

5665555

Outgoing trunk call splitting

If outgoing trunk call splitting is active, CDR creates records of transferred
outgoing calls as described above for incoming trunk call splitting. For
conferenced calls, the originator of the conference will be charged until he or she
drops from the call, at which point CDR begins a second record for the
conferenced user. Records for parties on a conference do not overlap; they are
split. To enable this option, set the Outgoing Call Splitting field to y on the CDR
System Parameters screen.
OTCS examples

In the next example, switch party A (57890) calls B(7771234), talks for 5
minutes, then conferences in C (7775678). They all talk for another 5 minutes, at
which point all parties drop.
Table 26.

OTCS conference

Segment

Duration

Condition
Code

Access Code
Used

Calling
Number

Dialed
Number

A–B

0:10:0

C

345

57890

7771234

A–C

0:05:0

C

345

57890

7775678

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1557

Features and technical reference

Switch party A (51234) calls public-network party B (5659999). They talk for 5
minutes. A then transfers the call to switch party C (54444).
Table 27.

OTCS transfer

Segment

Duration

Condition
Code

Access Code
Used

Calling
Number

Dialed
Number

A–B

0:01:0

A

345

51234

5659999

C–B

0:05:0

A

345

54444

5659999

Attendant call recording

Both incoming and outgoing call splitting give you the option of recording the
attendant portion of calls that are transferred. To enable this option, set the
Incoming and/or Outgoing Attendant Call Record field to y.
If either incoming or outgoing trunk call splitting is enabled, the attendant portion
of a conference call always produces a separate record.
Attendant call recording examples

Public-network party A (TAC 123) calls the attendant (Attd), and asks to be
transferred to switch party B (58888).
Table 28.

Attendant transfer incoming trunk

Segment

Duration

Condition
Code

A–Attd

0:01:0

A–B

0:05:0

Access
Code Used

Calling
Number

Dialed
Number

9

123

Attd

9

123

58888

The attendant (Attd) dials switch party A (59999), then transfers the call to
public-network party B (4445678).
Table 29.

Attendant transfer outgoing trunk

Segment

Duration

Condition
Code

Access Code
Used

Calling
Number

Dialed
Number

Attd–B

0:01:0

A

345

Attd

4445678

A–B

0:05:0

A

345

59999

4445678

1558

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Intraswitch CDR

Intraswitch CDR generates call records for calls to and from users on the local
switch. For the system to generate an intraswitch CDR record, one of the
extensions involved in a call must have intraswitch CDR assigned.
If a station is optioned for Intraswitch CDR, and ITCS is also enabled, ITCS
overrides Intraswitch CDR. That is, incoming trunk calls involving the station
produce trunk call records, not Intraswitch CDR records.
The output for intraswitch CDR follows the same format you have established for
other call records. Certain fields do not appear on intraswitch call records, because
they do not pertain to internal calls. For example, an intraswitch record does not
contain trunk access codes or circuit IDs, since these do not apply.
Some calls may seem to be intraswitch CDR calls, but actually result in trunk
calls. For example, a station-to-station call to an extension that is forwarded to an
outgoing trunk produces only a trunk CDR record, regardless of whether or not
either station has intraswitch CDR assigned.
You can assign intraswitch CDR to TEGs, stations, data modules, VDNs, Primary
Rate Interface (PRI) endpoints, access endpoints, or hunt groups. The number that
appears in the dialed number field depends on whether you have administered
CDR System Parameters to record hunt group/member or VDN information. You
cannot assign intraswitch CDR to attendant consoles or CallVisor ASAI stations.
NOTE:

If an extension with intraswitch CDR is neither the originator of the call nor
the dialed number of the call, the system does not produce a call record,
even though the extension might be a party on the call (via Call Pickup, Call
Forwarding, etc.).
Privacy

CDR Privacy allows you to administer the system to blank a given number of
dialed digits from a CDR report. This is useful when it is necessary to know
details of a person’s calls for accounting purposes, but it is not necessary or
desirable to know the exact number called.
You can administer the number of digits to hide, up to 7. The value in Privacy
Digits to Hide determines how many digits do not appear on the call record. This
parameter is system-wide. Whether or not an individual’s calls receive Privacy
treatment is determined by the CDR Privacy field on the Station screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1559

Features and technical reference

When an adjunct-originated call is made on behalf of a hunt group and the CDR
system parameter option is set to group-ext, then CDR privacy does not apply. If
this field is set to member-ext, privacy does apply.
NOTE:

Certain countries have requirements that a certain number of digits must be
blanked from every call. Also, certain report processors do not support this
option.
CDR output

If your system uses two CDR output formats, one is administered as the primary
CDR output format; the other is administered as the secondary CDR output
format. The secondary output format is typically used for a local storage format
(CDRU) to provide CDR data to NCOSS for assessing network performance or
helping to find network problems.
The primary and secondary ports work independently. Each port will work even if
the link to the other port is down. If a link is down for more than a minute, some
data may be lost. However, the most recent 500 (Release 5vs/si/csi and later), or
1,900 (Release 5r and later) records are stored for the primary port even when a
loss of records occurs. When the link comes back up, these records are output on a
first-in, first-out basis.
If the CDR buffer is full, you can select a call record handling option to determine
which of the following occurs:
■
■
■

Calls are blocked with a reorder tone
Overwrite old CDR records with new ones
Calls are routed to an attendant as non-CDR calls

The following information applies to the port used for the secondary CDR output
device:

1560

■

Data going to the secondary port should be the same as that going to the
primary port. You can use the following record types for secondary output:
LSU, Int-Direct, Int-Process, and Unformatted.

■

If the system experiences problems in sending records to the primary CDR
Output Device, the system discontinues sending records to the secondary
port for 2 minutes. The secondary port should be run at the highest possible
speed in order to prevent loss of information.

■

If the output buffer is full, the system busies out the secondary port for 2
minutes. This makes system resources available to send data to the primary
CDR port before the data is lost. The system continues to busy out the
secondary port for 2-minute intervals until less than 400 records (1800 for
Release 5r and later) remain in the buffer.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

CDR Record formats

Two types of formats are sent to the CDR output device, date record and call
detail formats.
Date record format

CDR sends date information to the CDR device once a day (at midnight), or when
the device is connected. This is a non-call record, and contains only the
information shown in the date record formats below.
Several formats are available for date records: one for CDRUs, one for the printer,
and one for the TELESEER. The records sent to the TELESEER and printer
contain the date only while the records sent to the CDRU contain time. See Table
30, Table 31, and Table 32.
NOTE:

The date can be in month/day or day/month format, as selected on the CDR
System Parameters screen. The date/time may also be reversed for
international standards.
Table 30.

Date record format to LSU, LSU-Expand, Unformatted, and
Customized

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Hour (leading 0 added if needed)

3

Colon (:)

4–5

Minute (leading 0 added if needed)

6

Blank

7–8

Month (Leading Zero Added if Needed)

9

Slash (/)

10–11

Day (leading 0 added if needed)

12

Carriage return

13

Line feed

14–16

Null

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1561

Features and technical reference

Table 31.

Date record format for Printer and Expanded

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Month (leading 0 added if needed)

3

Space

4–5

Day (leading 0 added if needed)

6

Carriage return

7

Line feed

8–10

Null

Table 32.

Date record format for TELESEER 59 Character, Int-Proc,
Int-Direct, and Int-ISDN

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Month (leading 0 added if needed)

3–4

Day

5

Carriage return

6

Line feed

7–9

Null

Call Detail Record formats
Customized format

You can use the customized record format to make up your own call record. You
can determine the data elements you want and their positions in the record. This
method may be necessary if you want to include certain data elements that are not
available on the standard formats.

1562

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

However, whatever device you use to interpret the CDR data needs to be
programmed to accept these formats. Consult your Avaya representative before
using a custom record format.
Table 33.

CDR data format — TELESEER

Position

Data Field Description

1–3

Space

4–5

Time of day-hours

6–7

Time of day-minutes

8

Duration-hours

9–10

Duration-minutes

11

Duration-tenths of minutes

12

Condition code

13–15

Access code dialed

16–18

Access code used

19–33

Dialed number

34–38

Calling number

39–53

Account code

54

FRL

55

IXC

56–58

Incoming circuit ID

59–61

Outgoing circuit ID

62

Feature flag

63–69

Authorization code

70–76

Space

77

Carriage return

78

Line feed

79–81

Null

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1563

Features and technical reference

Table 34.

1564

CDR data format — ISDN TELESEER

Position

Data Field Description

1–3

Space

4–5

Time of day-hours

6–7

Time of day-minutes

8

Duration-hours

9–10

Duration-minutes

11

Duration-tenths of minutes

12

Condition code

13–15

IXC

16–18

Access code used

19–33

Dialed number

34–38

Calling number

39–53

Account code

54

INS (units)

55

FRL

56–58

Incoming circuit ID

59–61

Outgoing circuit ID

62

Feature flag

63–69

Authorization code

70–71

INS (hundreds, tens)

72–76

Space

77

Line feed

78–80

Null

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 35.

CDR data format — Enhanced TELESEER

Position

Data Field Description

1–3

Space

4–5

Time of day-hours

6–7

Time of day-minutes

8

Duration-hours

9–10

Duration-minutes

11

Duration-tenths of minutes

12

Condition code

13–16

IXC code

17–19

Access code used

20–34

Dialed number

35–39

Calling number

40–54

Account code

55

ISDN NSV (units)

56

FRL

57–59

Incoming circuit ID

60–62

Outgoing circuit ID

63

Feature flag

64–70

Authorization code

71–72

ISDN NSV (hundreds, tens)

73–76

Space

77

Carriage return

78

Line feed

79–81

Null

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1565

Features and technical reference

Table 36.

1566

CDR data format — 59 character

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Duration-hours

6–7

Duration-minutes

8

Duration-tenths of minutes

9

Condition code

10–12

Access code dialed

13–15

Access code used

16–30

Dialed number

31–35

Calling number

36–50

Account code

51

FRL

52

IXC

53–55

Incoming circuit ID

56–58

Outgoing circuit ID

59

Carriage return

60

Line feed

61–63

Null

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 37.

CDR data format — printer

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Space

6

Duration-hours

7–8

Duration-minutes

9

Duration-tenths of minutes

10

Space

11

Condition code

12

Space

13–15

Access code dialed

16

Space

17–19

Access code used

20

Space

21–35

Dialed number

36

Space

37–41

Calling number

42

Space

43–57

Account code

58

Space

59–65

Authorization code

66–69

Space

70

FRL

71

Space

72

IXC

73

Space

74–76

Incoming circuit ID

77

Space
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1567

Features and technical reference

Table 37.

CDR data format — printer (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

78–80

Outgoing circuit ID

81

Space

82

Feature flag

83

Carriage return

84

Line feed
Continued on next page

Table 38.

CDR data format — ISDN printer

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Space

6

Duration-hours

7–8

Duration-minutes

9

Duration-tenths of minutes

10

Space

11

Condition code

12

Space

13–15

IXC

16

Space

17–19

Access code used

20

Space

21–35

Dialed number

36

Space

37–41

Calling number

42

Space
Continued on next page

1568

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 38.

CDR data format — ISDN printer (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

43–57

Account code

58

Space

59–65

Authorization code

66

Space

67–68

INS (hundreds, tens)

69

Space

70

INS (units)

71

Space

72

FRL

73

Space

74–76

Incoming circuit ID

77

Space

78–80

Outgoing circuit ID

81

Space

82

Feature flag

83

Carriage return

84

Line feed
Continued on next page

Table 39.

CDR data format — Enhanced Printer

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Space

6

Duration-hours

7–8

Duration-minutes
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1569

Features and technical reference

Table 39.

CDR data format — Enhanced Printer (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

9

Duration-tenths of minutes

10

Space

11

Condition code

12

Space

13–16

IXC code

17

Space

18–21

Access code used

22

Space

23–37

Dialed number

38

Space

39–43

Calling number

44

Space

45–59

Account code

60

Space

61–67

Authorization code

68

Space

69–71

ISDN NSV

72

Space

73

FRL

74

Space

75–77

Incoming circuit ID

78

Space

79–81

Outgoing circuit ID

82

Space

83

Feature flag

84

Carriage return

85

Line feed
Continued on next page

1570

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 40.

CDR data format — LSU-Expand

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Space

6

Duration-hours

7–8

Duration-minutes

9

Duration-tenths of minutes

10

Space

11

Condition code

12

Space

13–15

Access code dialed

16–18

Access code used

19

Space

20–34

Dialed number

35

Space

36–39

Calling number

40

Space

41–45

Account code

46

Space

47–53

Authorization code

54–57

Space

58

FRL

59

Space

60

Calling number (1st digit)

61

Space

62–63

Incoming circuit ID (tens, units)

64

Space

65

Feature flag
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1571

Features and technical reference

Table 40.

CDR data format — LSU-Expand (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

66

Space

67–68

Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units)

69

Space

70

Outgoing circuit ID (hundreds)

71

Space

72

Incoming circuit ID (hundreds)

73

IXC

74

Carriage return

75

Line feed

76–78

Null
Continued on next page

Table 41.

CDR data format — LSU

Position

Data Field Description

1

Duration-hours

2-3

Duration-minutes

4

Duration-tenths of minutes

5

Condition code

6–8

Access code dialed

9–11

Access code used

12–26

Dialed number

27–30

Calling number (digits 2–5 for 5-digit dial plan)

31–35

Account code (first 5 digits)

36–42

Authorization code or digits 6–12 of account
code

43–44

Space or digits 13–14 of account code

45

FRL or digit 15 of account code
Continued on next page

1572

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 41.

CDR data format — LSU (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

46

Calling number (1st digit)

47–48

Incoming circuit ID (tens, units)

49

Feature flag

50–52

Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units, hundreds)

53

Incoming circuit ID (hundreds)

54

IXC

55

Carriage return

56

Line feed

57–59

Null
Continued on next page

Table 42.

CDR data format — ISDN LSU

Position

Data Field Description

1

Duration-hours

2–3

Duration-minutes

4

Duration-tenths of minutes

5

Condition code

6–8

IXC

9–11

Access code used

12–26

Dialed number

27–30

Calling number (digits 2–5 for 5-digit dial plan)

31–35

Account code (digits 1–5)

36–42

Authorization code or digits 6–12 of account code

43–44

INS or digits 13–14 of account code

45

INS (3rd digit), FRL, or digit 15 of account code

46

Calling number (1st digit of 5-digit calling number)
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1573

Features and technical reference

Table 42.

CDR data format — ISDN LSU (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

47–48

Incoming circuit ID (tens, units)

49

Feature flag

50–52

Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units, hundreds)

53

Incoming circuit ID (hundreds)

54

FRL

55

Carriage return

56

Line feed

57–59

Null
Continued on next page

Table 43.

CDR data format — Enhanced LSU

Position

Data Field Description

1

Duration-hours

2–3

Duration-minutes

4

Duration-tenths of minutes

5

Condition code

6–9

IXC code

10–12

Access code used

13–27

Dialed number

28–31

Calling number

32–35

Account code (digits 1–4)

36–42

Authorization code or digits 6–12 of account code

43–45

ISDN NSV

46

1st digit of a 5-digit calling number

47–48

Incoming circuit ID (tens, units)
Continued on next page

1574

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 43.

CDR data format — Enhanced LSU (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

49

Feature flag

50–52

Outgoing circuit ID (tens, units, hundreds)

53

Incoming circuit ID (hundreds)

54

FRL

55

Carriage return

56

Line feed

57–59

Null
Continued on next page

Table 44.

CDR data format — Expanded

Position

Data Field Description

1–2, 3–4

Time of day-hours, -minutes

5

Space

6, 7–8, 9

Duration-hours, minutes, tenths of minute

10

Space

11

Condition code

12

Space

13–16

Access code dialed

17

Space

18–21

Access code used

22

Space

23–37

Dialed number

38

Space

39–48

Calling number

49

Space

50–64

Account code
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1575

Features and technical reference

Table 44.

CDR data format — Expanded (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

65

Space

66–72

Authorization code

73-76

Space

77

FRL

78

Space

79–81

Incoming circuit ID

82

Space

83–85

Outgoing circuit ID

86

Space

87

Feature flag

88

Space

89–90

Attendant console

91

Space

92–95

Incoming trunk access code

96

Space

97–98

Node number

99

Space

100–102

INS

103

Space

104–106

IXC

107

Space

108

BCC

109

Space

110

MA-UUI

111

Space

112

Resource flag

113

Space
Continued on next page

1576

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 44.

CDR data format — Expanded (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

114–117

Packet count

118

Space

119

TSC flag

120

Space

121–129

Reserved

130

Space

131

Carriage return

132

Line feed

133–135

Null
Continued on next page

Table 45.

CDR data format — Enhanced Expanded

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Space

6

Duration-hours

7–8

Duration-minutes

9

Duration-tenths of minutes

10

Space

11

Condition code

12

Space

13–16

Access code dialed

17

Space

18–21

Access code used

22

Space
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1577

Features and technical reference

Table 45.

CDR data format — Enhanced Expanded (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

23–37

Dialed number

38

Space

39–48

Calling number

49

Space

50–64

Account code

65

Space

66–72

Authorization code

73

Space

74–75

Time in queue

76

Space

77

FRL

78

Space

79–81

Incoming circuit ID

82

Space

83–85

Outgoing circuit ID

86

Space

87

Feature flag

88

Space

89–90

Attendant console

91

Space

92–95

Incoming TAC

96

Space

97–98

Node number

99

Space

100–102

ISDN NSV

103

Space

104–107

IXC code
Continued on next page

1578

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 45.

CDR data format — Enhanced Expanded (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

108

Space

109

BCC

110

Space

111

MA-UUI

112

Space

113

Resource flag

114

Space

115–118

Packet count

119

Space

120

TSC flag

121

Space

122–123

Bandwidth

124

Space

125–130

ISDN CC (digits 1–6)

131–135

ISDN CC (digits 7–11)/PPM count (1–5)

136–146

Reserved for future use

147

Carriage return

148

Line feed

149–151

Null
Continued on next page

Table 46.

CDR data format — Unformatted

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Duration-hours
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1579

Features and technical reference

Table 46.

CDR data format — Unformatted (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

6–7

Duration-minutes

8

Duration-tenths of minutes

9

Condition code

10–13

Access code dialed

14–17

Access code used

18–32

Dialed number

33–42

Calling number

43–57

Account code

58–64

Authorization code

65–66

Space

67

FRL

68–70

Incoming circuit ID (hundreds, tens, units)

71–73

Outgoing circuit ID (hundreds, tens, units)

74

Feature flag

75–76

Attendant console

77–80

Incoming TAC

81–82

Node number

83–85

INS

86–88

IXC

89

BCC

90

MA-UUI

91

Resource flag

92–95

Packet count

96

TSC flag

97–100

Reserved
Continued on next page

1580

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 46.

CDR data format — Unformatted (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

101

Carriage return

102

Line feed

103–105

Null
Continued on next page

Table 47.

CDR data format — Enhanced Unformatted

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Duration-hours

6–7

Duration-minutes

8

Duration-tenths of minutes

9

Condition code

10–13

Access code dialed

14–17

Access code used

18–32

Dialed number

33–42

Calling number

43–57

Account code

58–64

Authorization code

65–66

Time in queue

67

FRL

68–70

Incoming circuit ID

71–73

Outgoing circuit ID

74

Feature flag

75–76

Attendant console number
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1581

Features and technical reference

Table 47.

CDR data format — Enhanced Unformatted (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

77–80

Incoming TAC

81–82

Node number

83–87

ISDN NSV

88–89

IXC code

90

BCC

91

MA-UUI

92

Resource flag

93–96

Packet count

97

TSC flag

98–99

Bandwidth

100–105

ISDN CC (digits 1–6)

106–110

ISDN CC (digits 7–11)/PPM count (1–5)

111–114

Reserved for future use

115

Carriage return

116

Line feed

117–119

Null
Continued on next page

Table 48.

CDR data format — Int process

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Format code

3–4

Time of day-hours

5–6

Time of day-minutes

7

Duration-hours

8–9

Duration-minutes

10

Duration-tenths of minutes
Continued on next page

1582

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 48.

CDR data format — Int process (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

11

Space

12

Condition code

13

Space

14–16

Access code dialed

17–19

Access code used

20

Space

21–38

Dialed number (digits 1–18)

39–43

Calling number (digits 1–5)

44

Space

45–59

Account code (digits 1–15)

60

Space

61

IXC

62

FRL

63–65

Space

66–67

Incoming circuit ID (digits 1–2)

68–70

Space

71–72

Outgoing circuit ID (digits 1–2)

73

Space

74–78

PPM count (digits 1–5)

79

Carriage return

80

Line feed

81–83

Null
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1583

Features and technical reference

Table 49.

CDR data format — Int-Direct

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Day of month

3–4

Month

5–6

Year

7

Space

8–9

Time of day-hours

10–11

Time of day-minutes

12

Space

13

Duration-hours

14–15

Duration-minutes

16

Duration-tenths of minutes

17

Space

18

Condition code

19

Space

20–22

Access code dialed

23–25

Access code used

26

Space

27–44

Dialed number used

45

Space

46–50

Calling number

51

Space

52–66

Account code

67

Space

68–72

PPM count

73

Space

74–75

Incoming circuit ID

76

Space
Continued on next page

1584

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 49.

CDR data format — Int-Direct (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

77–78

Outgoing circuit ID

79

Carriage return

80

Line feed
Continued on next page

Table 50.

CDR data format — Int-ISDN

Position

Data Field Description

1–2

Time of day-hours

3–4

Time of day-minutes

5

Space

6

Duration-hours

7–8

Duration-minutes

9

Duration-tenths of minutes

10

Space

11

Condition code

12

Space

13–16

Access code dialed

17

Space

18–21

Access code used

22

Space

23–37

Dialed number

38

Space

39–48

Calling number

49

Space

50–64

Account code
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1585

Features and technical reference

Table 50.

CDR data format — Int-ISDN (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

65

Space

66–72

Authorization code

73

Space

74

Line feed

75

Space

76

FRL

77

Space

78

Incoming circuit ID (hundreds)

79

Incoming circuit ID (tens)

80

Incoming circuit ID (units)

81

Space

82–84

Outgoing circuit ID

85

Space

86

Feature flag

87

Space

88–89

Attendant console (1st digit)

90

Space

91–94

Incoming trunk access code

95

Space

96–97

Node number

98

Space

99–101

INS

102

Space

103–106

IXC

107

Space

108

BCC

109

Space
Continued on next page

1586

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 50.

CDR data format — Int-ISDN (Continued)

Position

Data Field Description

110

MA-UUI

111

Space

112

Resource flag

113

Space

114–119

Reserved

120–124

PPM or reserved

125–131

Space

132

Carriage return

133

Line feed

134–136

Null
Continued on next page

Call detail record field descriptions

The following list describes the CDR data collected for each call and the number
of digits in each field. All information is right adjusted in the respective field,
unless otherwise indicated. Where the field name for customized records is
different from the standard, the custom field name appears in parentheses.
■

Access Code Dialed (code-dial) — 3 or 4 digits

The access code the user dialed to place an outgoing call. This can be the
ARS access code, AAR access code, or the access code of a specific trunk
group. This field is also used to record the X.25 Feature Access Code of an
outgoing X.25-addressed call.
■

Access Code Used (code-used) — 3 or 4 digits

This field is used only for outgoing calls when the trunk group used is
different from the access code dialed. It is not used when a TAC is dialed.
For example, your system may use a feature access code for ARS. This
field contains the access code of the actual trunk group that the call was
routed over. When the dialed and used access code are the same, this field
will be blank.
If you use ISDN or enhanced formats with TELESEER, LSU, or Printer
record types, this field always shows the access code of the trunk group,
even if it is the same as the access code dialed.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1587

Features and technical reference

■

Account Code (acct-code) — up to 15 digits

This field may contain a number to associate call information with projects
or account numbers. For some formats, a long account code overwrites
spaces on the record that are assigned to other fields.
■

Attendant Console (attd-console) — 2 digits

This field contains the attendant console number of the attendant that
handled the call in a record that is marked as being attendant handled.
■

Authorization Code (auth-code) — 4–13 digits

This field contains the authorization code used to make the call. For all
formats except the custom format, codes longer than 7 digits are truncated,
keeping only the first 7 digits. For non-ISDN and ISDN LSU formats, the
authorization code is fewer than 6 digits in length. It is 5 for Enhanced
LSU. On the 59-character record, the authorization code is never recorded.
■

Bandwidth — 2 digits

Used to capture the bandwidth of the wideband calls to support H0, H11,
H12, and N x 64 kbps data rates. For Enhanced Expanded, Enhanced
Unformatted and customized record formats, this value is expressed as the
number of DSOs of 64 Kbps channels comprising a call.
■

Bearer Capability Class (bcc) — 1 digit

This field contains the BCC for ISDN calls, identifying the type of an
ISDN call. It will distinguish between voice and different types of data.
The BCC is a single digit. Any one of the following may appear in this
field.
— 0 = Voice Grade Data and Voice
— 1 = Mode 1 (56 kbps synchronous data)
— 2 = Mode 2 (less than 19.2 kbps synchronous or asynchronous data)
— 3 = Mode 3 (64 kbps data for LAPD protocol)
— 4 = Mode 0 (64 kbps data clear)
— w = Wideband
Intraswitch CDR outputs a value in this field for Wideband calls
only.

1588

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

■

Calling Number (calling-num) — up to 10 digits (15 for customized

records)
For outgoing or intraswitch calls, this field contains the extension number
of the originating telephone user. For incoming and tandem calls, this field
contains the TAC in standard formats. The fifth digit is the first digit of a
5-digit dialing plan. In formats where the field is less than 7 digits, this also
shows the TAC of the incoming call.
This field shows the calling party number in Unformatted or Expanded
records. If the CPN is not available, this field is blank for both formats.
This field contains the local extension of the noncall-associated/
temporary-signaling connection (NCA-TSC) endpoint when the CDR
record is for an outgoing (or originating) NCA-TSC. This field is blank for
other NCA-TSC CDR records (that is, terminating, tandem, or
unsuccessful).
■

Calling Number/Incoming TAC (clg-num/in-tac)

You can use this field on a customized record to display the calling number
if it is available. If calling party number is not available, this field contains
the Incoming TAC. For outgoing calls, this field contains the calling
extension.
■

Carriage Return (return)

The ASCII carriage return character followed by a line feed indicates the
end of a call record.
■

Condition Code — 1 character

The condition code indicates what type of call this record describes. For
example, condition code C indicates a conference call, 7 indicates an ARS
call, etc.
Table 51 shows condition codes for most record formats. The 59-character
format uses different condition codes from those used for other record
types. The codes that apply to 59-character records appear in parentheses in
the table.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1589

Features and technical reference

Table 51.

Condition codes

Condition
Codes

Description

0

Identifies an intraswitch call (a call that originates and terminates on the
switch).

1 (A)

Identifies an attendant-handled call or an attendant-assisted call (except
conference calls).

4 (D)

Identifies an extremely long call (10 hours or more) or an extremely high
message count TSC (9999 messages or more). On a call exceeding 10 hours,
a call record with this condition code and a duration entry of 9 hours, 59
minutes, and 1–9 tenths of a minute is produced after the first period. A
similar call record with this condition code is produced after each succeeding
10-hour period. When the call does terminate, a final call record with a
different condition code identifying the call type is produced.

6 (E)

Identifies calls that are not recorded because of resource exhaustion. A
record with this condition code is generated for calls that are routed to the
attendant or calls that require CDR to overwrite records. This also includes
ISDN calls that did not complete at the far end, for which the Q.931 message
included a cause value. It does not include ISDN calls that receive inband
tones.
The record includes the time and duration of the outage.

7 (G)

Identifies calls served by the AAR or ARS Selection feature.

8 (H)

Identifies calls which have been served on a delayed basis via the Ringback
Queuing feature.

9 (I)

Identifies an incoming or tandem call, or an incoming or tandem NCA-TSC.

A

Identifies an outgoing call.

B

Identifies an adjunct-placed outgoing call.

C (L)

Identifies a conference call. For trunk CDR, a separate call record with this
condition code is produced for each incoming or outgoing trunk serving the
conference connection. The only extension recorded for a conference call is
the conference call originator, provided ITCS and OTCS are disabled. For
intraswitch CDR, if the originator is optioned for intraswitch, each time the
originator dials a non-trunk party a separate call record is produced with this
condition code, provided ITCS is disabled. If the originator is not optioned
for intraswitch CDR, a separate record with this condition code is produced
for each intraswitch party dialed.
Continued on next page

1590

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 51.

Condition codes (Continued)

Condition
Codes

Description

E (N)

An ineffective call attempt due to facilities not being available, such as all
trunks are busy and either no queuing exists or the queue is full on an
outgoing call, or the called extension is busy or unassigned for an incoming
call attempt. This also means an ISDN Call By Call Service Selection call
was unsuccessful because of an administered trunk usage allocation plan.
Incoming trunk calls to a busy terminal do not generate a CDR record.

F

Identifies an ineffective call attempt because of either insufficient calling
privileges of the originator (assigned per FRL), ISDN calls rejected by the
switch due to an NSF mismatch, or an authorization mismatch which
prevents the completion of a data call.

G

Indicates a call terminating to a ringing station.

H

Indicates that a ringing call has been abandoned.

I

Indicates a call terminated to a busy station.

J

Indicates an incoming trunk call that is a new connection using ANF-PR
(Additional Network Feature–Path Replacement, see QSIG) or DCS with
Rerouting.

K

Indicates an outgoing trunk call that is a new connection using ANF-PR
(Additional Network Feature–Path Replacement, see QSIG) or DCS with
Rerouting.
Continued on next page

If the trunk-group CDR Reports field is set to ring, CDR records the ring
time to answer or abandon for incoming calls originated by the trunk
group. In addition, CDR indicates if the incoming destination is busy. This
record is separate from the normal call duration record printed for an
answered call. This information is indicated by the condition code.
When an incoming call originated by a trunk group with this option set is
terminated to an internal destination, the call is tracked from the time
ringing feedback is given to the originator. If the call is answered, a CDR
record is printed with the condition code “G” and the duration reflects the
time between the start of ringing and the answer of the call. If the call is
abandoned before being answered, the system prints a record with the
condition code “H” and the duration reflects the time between the start of
ringing and the time the call was abandoned. If the destination is busy, a
CDR record is printed with the condition code “I” and a duration of 0.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1591

Features and technical reference

■

Condition Code overrides
If two condition codes apply to the same call, one code overrides the other.
The matrix below, Table 52 on page 1592, defines the overrides. To use this
matrix, assume that condition codes 7 and A apply to the same call. To find
the condition code that overrides, look at the point of where row 7
intersects column A (or where row A intersects column 7). In this case,
condition code 7 overrides.

Table 52.

Condition code override matrix

CONDITION CODE
0

1

4

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

E

F

J

K

0

N
A

0

4

6

0

N
A

N
A

N
A

B

C

N
A

N
A

N
A

N
A

1

0

N
A

4

6

1

N
A

9

1

B

C

E

N
A

J

K

4

4

4

N
A

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

N
A

N
A

J

K

6

6

6

6

N
A

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

7

0

1

4

6

N
A

7

9

7

B

C

E

F

J

K

8

N
A

N
A

4

6

7

N
A

N
A

8

B

C

E

N
A

N
A

K

9

N
A

9

4

6

9

N
A

N
A

N
A

N
A

C

E

F

N
A

N
A

A

N
A

1

4

6

7

8

N
A

N
A

B

C

E

F

N
A

N
A

B

B

B

4

6

B

B

N
A

B

N
A

B

E

F

N
A

K

C

C

C

4

6

C

C

C

C

B

N
A

N
A

N
A

J

K

E

N
A

E

N
A

6

E

E

E

E

E

N
A

N
A

N
A

E

E

F

N
A

N
A

N
A

6

F

N
A

F

F

F

N
A

N
A

N
A

F

F

J

N
A

J

J

6

J

N
A

N
A

N
A

N
A

J

E

F

N
A

N
A

K

N
A

K

K

6

K

K

N
A

N
A

N
A

K

E

F

N
A

N
A

1592

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

■

Date

You can include the date in customized records only. The format is based
on the value of the CDR Date Format field on the CDR System Parameters
screen.
■

Dialed Number (dialed-num) — up to 23 digits

This field contains the number dialed. If it is an outgoing call, the field
contains the number dialed by a system user. If it is an incoming call, the
field contains the extension that was dialed (or implied, as in Dialed
Number Identification System). If more than 18 digits are dialed, the least
significant digits (starting from the right) are truncated.
If CDR Privacy is active for the calling number and this is an outgoing call,
the trailing digits of the dialed number are blank in the call record. If more
than 18 digits are dialed, the system truncates the dialed number to 18
digits, then blanks the administered number of digits.
For an outgoing (or originating) NCA-TSC or tandem NCA-TSC, this field
contains the dialed digits used to establish a route to a far-end switch. It
contains the extension of the local extension used as the NCA-TSC
endpoint when it is for a terminating NCA-TSC. For an unsuccessful
NCA-TSC, this field is blank.
The # sign (or E for some formats) may appear in this field in the following
cases for both ARS and TAC calls.
— When the user dials # at the end of digit dialing
— If an outgoing call experiences an interdigit-timeout interaction with
the ARS Analysis table
— When a user dials a TAC for a Look Ahead Interflow (LAI). For
example: A successful LAI to  1001 where 1001 is the
remote VDN extension will yield 1001E or 1001# in the Dialed
Number field. The # or E is used by the vector processing software
to indicate the end of dialing.
You can eliminate the # or E as the last digit of the CDR record using the
CDR System Parameters screen.
■

Duration (duration or sec-dur) — 4 digits

This is the duration of the call, recorded in hours (0–9), minutes (00–59),
and to tenths of minutes (0–9). Calls are rounded down in 6-second
increments. Therefore, a call of 5-second duration will be indicated as 0
duration. If 9999 appears in this field, this call was in progress when a time
change was made in the switch.
You can use the customized record format to have the duration reported in
hours/minutes/seconds. This field is called sec_dur.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1593

Features and technical reference

■

Feature Flag (feat-flag) — 1 digit

The feature flag indicates whether a call received network answer
supervision, and if the call was interworked in the network. The call
duration starts at the point of receiving the network answer.
You can administer the feature flag (on the CDR System Parameters
screen) to reflect whether an outgoing ISDN call was reported as
interworked by the network.
— A 0 in this field indicates a voice call without network answer
supervision, or NCA-TSC not established.
— A 1 in this field indicates a data call without network answer
supervision.
— A 2 in this field indicates a voice call with network answer
supervision, but interworked.
— A 3 in this field indicates a data call with network answer
supervision, but interworked.
— A 4 in this field indicates a voice call with network answer
supervision.
— A 5 in this field indicates a data call with network answer
supervision.
If the feature flag indicates that the call received network answer
supervision, then the time of answer is accurate, and the recorded duration
is also accurate. If a call does not receive network answer supervision, or
receives answer supervision but is interworked with non-ISDN trunks, the
time of answer is not necessarily accurate. Therefore the recorded duration
for these calls may also not be entirely accurate.
Calls are considered data calls if they use a conversion resource (such as a
modem) and/or originate or terminate on a data module.
■

Format Code — 2 digits

This field contains 2 values: 00 is no PPM; 03 denotes a PPM count in the
digits record.
■

FRL — 1 digit

FRLs, numbered 0–7, are associated with the AAR and ARS features and
define calling privileges. The information contained in this field is as
follows:
— If the call is an outgoing call and an authorization code is not used to
make the call, this field contains the originating telephone user’s
FRL.

1594

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

— If the call is an outgoing call and an authorization code is used to
make the call, this field contains the FRL associated with the dialed
authorization code.
— If the call is an incoming or tandem call, this field contains the FRL
assigned to the incoming trunk group.
— If the call is an incoming tandem tie trunk call, this field contains
either the FRL assigned to the tandem tie trunk or the TCM sent
with the tandem tie trunk call, depending on which was used to
complete the call. On ISDN calls, this field always contains the
TCM, if it was received.
You can administer CDR so that disconnect information appears in this
field in place of the FRL. If you do this, for trunk CDR, the following
disconnect information appears:
Data

Meaning

0

Cannot determine who dropped first

1

Switch party dropped first

2

CO dropped first

3

Maintenance seized the trunk

For intraswitch CDR, the following call disconnect data appears in this
field in place of the FRL data:

■

Data

Meaning

0

Cannot determine who dropped first

1

Calling number dropped first

2

Dialed number dropped first

Incoming Circuit Identification (in-crt-id) — 3 digits

This field contains the member number of a trunk within a trunk group
used for an incoming call. For outgoing calls, this field is blank. Tandem
calls contain both incoming and outgoing circuit id-numbers.
The format of this field varies from record to record. For printer, Teleseer
and 59-character formats, the numbers appear inverted on the record. For
example, the circuit ID 123 appears as 231 (tens, units, hundreds). If you
want to change this to appear in hundreds, tens, units format (123), use the
Modified Circuit ID Display field on the CDR System Parameters screen.
■

Incoming TAC (in-trk-code) — 4 digits

This field contains the access code of the incoming trunk group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1595

Features and technical reference

■

INS (3 digits)

This field specifies the ISDN Network Service requested for a call. This
field applies only to ISDN calls. Each Network Specific Facility has a
corresponding INS value, shown in Table 53.
This field also appears as ISDN NSV (Network Service Value).
Table 53.

Network specific facility to INS mapping

Network Specific Facility

INS Value

OUTWATS Band 0

33

OUTWATS Band 1–255

34–288

Network Operator

324

Presubscribed Common Carrier Operator

325

Software Defined Network (SDN)

352

MEGACOM 800

353

MEGACOM

354

INWATS

355

Maximum Banded WATS

356

ACCUNET Digital Service

357

AT&T Long Distance Service

358

International 800

359

Multiquest

367

■

ISDN CC

The call charge supplied by the ISDN advice of charge function (see
‘‘Receiving call-charge information’’ on page 544).
■

ISDN NSV

See INS.
■

IXC Code

— Non-ISDN Formats — 1 digit hexadecimal
Interexchange Carrier (IXC) codes,1–F hexadecimal, indicate the
carrier used on the call. This information is sent to the CDR output
device in ASCII code as a hexadecimal representation (for example,
ASCII “F” equals “15”).

1596

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Users must dial an IXC access number to access a specific common
carrier for a call. In the US, this number is in the form 10XXX, 950
— 1XXX, or any 8–11 digit number. The IXC access numbers
applicable at a given location are associated with an IXC code on the
Inter-Exchange Carrier Codes screen.
When ARS is used, and a route pattern inserts one of the
administered IXC codes, the report contains the associated IXC
code. If no IXC access number is used, or the carrier is selected at
the CO, the report contains a 0.
— ISDN formats — 3 or 4 digits
With an ISDN record format, this field is a 3 or 4-digit field that
identifies the actual IXC used on an ISDN call. This information is
determined from the route pattern administration. For AAR and
ARS calls, the 3-digit IXC value is administered in the route pattern
for all ISDN calls. If a user dials an IXC code with a 10XXX format
as administered on the Inter-Exchange Carrier Codes screen, the
CDR record contains only the last 3 digits (4 for Enhanced). If a user
dials a 7-digit IXC code, this field contains a 0.
■

Line Feed — 1 character

The ASCII line feed character follows a carriage return to terminate CDR
records.
■

MA-UUI — 1 digit

Message Associated User-to-User Signaling shows the number of ISDN
messages containing user data sent on an outgoing call. Data in this field
can range from 0 to 9.
■

Node Number (node-num) — 2 digits

This field identifies the DCS node number of a switch within a DCS
arrangement. The number output is the same as the node number on the
Dial Plan screen (the local id).
■

Null — 1 character

The NULL is used to terminate and divide CDR Records (usually in
triplets) when needed by the receiving adjunct.
■

Outgoing Circuit Identification (out-crt-id) — 3 digits

For outgoing calls, this field contains the member number of the trunk
within a trunk group used. This field is blank for incoming calls. Tandem
calls include both incoming and outgoing circuit id numbers. For outgoing
and tandem NCA-TSCs, this field contains the signaling group used to
carry the NCA-TSC.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1597

Features and technical reference

The format of this field varies from record to record. For printer, Teleseer
and 59-character formats, and the ISDN and enhanced forms of those
records, the numbers appear inverted on the record. For example, the
circuit ID 123 appears as 231 (tens, units, hundreds). If you want to change
this to appear in hundreds, tens, units format (123), use the Modified
Circuit ID Display field on the CDR System Parameters screen.
■

Packet Count (tsc_ct) — 4 digits

For ISDN TSCs, this field contains the number of ISDN-PRI USER INFO
messages sent, received, or (for tandem TSCs) passing through the switch.
■

PPM

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) contains pulse counts transmitted over the
trunk line from the serving CO. These are used to determine call charges.
■

Resource Flag (res_flag) — 1 digit

Indicates whether the call was circuit switched or packet switched, whether
a conversion resource was used, or if the call involved a MASI terminal or
trunk.
— 0 — circuit switched, no conversion device used
— 1 — packet switched, no conversion device used
— 2 — circuit switched, conversion device used
— 3 — packet switched, conversion device used
— 8 — MASI call
■

Sec-dur

For customized records only, this field allows you to set the duration field
to display seconds instead of tenths of minutes.
■

Space — up to 40 characters

The ASCII space character separates other CDR fields or fills unused
record locations.
■

TSC-Count (tsc_ct)

This is the customized name for Packet Count. See Packet Count.
■

TSC Flag (tsc_flag) — 1 digit

This field describes call records that pertain to temporary signalling
connections. When not equal to 0, this field will indicate the status of the
TSC. Table 54 on page 1599 presents the TSC Flag encoding.

1598

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

Table 54.

Encoding for TSC flag

Encoding

Meaning

0

Circuit-switched call without TSC requests

1–3

Reserved

4

Call Associated TSC requested and accepted in response to SETUP, no
congestion control (applicable to originating node). Call Associated
TSC received and accepted via SETUP, no congestion control
(applicable to terminating node).

5

Call Associated TSC received and accepted via SETUP, congestion
control (applicable to terminating node).

6

Call Associated TSC requested, accepted after SETUP, no congestion
control (applicable to originating node). Call Associated TSC received
and accepted after SETUP, no congestion control (applicable to
terminating node).

7

Call Associated TSC received and accepted after SETUP, congestion
control (applicable to terminating node).

8

Call Associated TSC requested, rejected (rejection came from outside
the local switch).

9

Call Associated TSC requested, rejected (rejection came from the local
switch, that is, lack of resource).

A

Non Call Associated TSC received, accepted, no congestion control
(applicable to terminating node). Non Call Associated TSC received,
accepted, no congestion control (applicable to terminating node).

B

Non Call Associated TSC requested, accepted, congestion control
(applicable to originating node). Non Call Associated TSC received,
accepted, congestion control (applicable to terminating node).

C

Non Call Associated TSC requested, rejected (rejection came from
outside the local switch).

D

Non Call Associated TSC requested, rejected (rejection came from the
local switch, that is, lack of resource).

E

Reserved for future use.

F

Reserved for future use.
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1599

Features and technical reference

■

Time

This fields contains the time that the call ended, or the time that a user
dropped from a multiparty call, if Call Splitting is active.
■

VDN (vdn) — 5 digits

This field is only available on customized records. The call record contains
the VDN extension number. If VDN Return Destination is active, this field
contains the first VDN the caller accessed.
Security

Monitor call detail records daily for unusual calling patterns, long calls,
international calls, calls outside of normal business hours, and other indications of
toll fraud. Call accounting systems are available that automatically monitor CDR
output for fraudulent calling patterns.
Considerations
■

Date and Time
If a time of day is not administered in the system, Avaya MultiVantage
does not generate CDR records. If the time is changed while a call is in
progress, the actual duration for that call is not reflected in the CDR record.
Instead, a special sequence of 9999 is recorded in the CDR record to
indicate that the call was in progress during a time change.

■

Dial plan
If the dial plan supports 6/7 digit extensions, only the formats that already
support Calling Numbers longer than 7 digits (expanded, Unformatted,
customized, and international ISDN) support 6 or 7 digits. All other
formats send only 5 digits and when a 6 or 7 digit extension is involved, the
last 5 digits are sent.

Interactions
■

Abbreviated Dialing
When a user places a call using Abbreviated Dialing or a Facility Busy
Indicator button, all outpulsed digits appear on the record.

■

Answer Detection
The Avaya MultiVantage provides Answer Detection using a Call
Classifier circuit pack. This feature is an option for your system and
requires an 8-port call classifier circuit pack. CDR starts recording call
duration at the time the answer is detected by the circuit pack.

1600

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

■

Attendant Console
If an attendant-assisted call involves an outgoing trunk, the primary
extension of the user who requests attendant service is recorded as the
calling number, even if the attendant dialed the outside number. Condition
Code 1 indicates the call was assisted by the attendant.
If the attendant allows through dialing, the primary extension of the user
who dialed the number is recorded as the calling party. Condition Code 1
indicates that a trunk access code was extended by the attendant. Condition
Code 7 indicates that a feature access code was extended by the attendant.
If Incoming or Outgoing Attendant Call Record is enabled, the system
produces a separate record for the attendant portion of incoming or
outgoing calls that are transferred.
On attendant-assisted calls that require an account code, the account code
must be entered before the trunk access code.
If the attendant is redirecting an incoming call to an extension, the
attendant may dial an account code before dialing the extension number.
It is not possible to option the attendant for intraswitch calls. Intraswitch
records are produced for an intraswitch-optioned extension calling the
attendant or for a call from the attendant to an intraswitch-optioned
extension. In the case of an attendant-assisted call involving an intraswitch
extension, the calling number recorded is the extension of the party who
called the attendant, and the dialed number recorded is the extension that
the attendant extended the call to. The record has a Condition Code 0.

■

AUDIX
For remote AUDIX over DCS, if station A on node 1 forwards its calls to
AUDIX on node 2, each switch produces a call record. The record from
node 1 contains A as the dialed number. The record from node 2 contains
AUDIX as the dialed number.
If the calling number is on a different switch within the DCS network, or
the call comes in over ISDN, the actual calling number is recorded in the
Calling Number field, and the TAC of the trunk bringing the call into the
local switch is recorded in the Incoming Trunk Access Code field of
24-word records.
If the forwarded call is an incoming call, then, as in all cases (other than
vectoring) in which an incoming call is forwarded, transferred, or
conferenced using an outgoing trunk, two separate CDR records are
produced, one for incoming and one for outgoing trunk usage. The
outgoing trunk usage record lists AUDIX as the Calling Number.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1601

Features and technical reference

■

AUDIX - Transfer out of
If Incoming Trunk Call Splitting is enabled, and Transfer out of AUDIX is
used, CDR generates two records. The first contains the AUDIX, the
second contains the transferred-to party.

■

Authorization Codes
Authorization codes are recorded on CDR records provided account codes
do not exceed 5 digits for non-ISDN and ISDN LSU formats, or 4 digits for
Enhanced LSU formats. On the 59-character CDR International Processing
and International Direct records, the authorization code is never recorded.
When account codes are dialed, for the non-ISDN and the ISDN LSU
formats, authorization codes are recorded on CDR printouts if the account
code length does not exceed 6 digits. For Enhanced LSU, the account code
length must not exceed 6 digits.

■

Automatic Selection of DID Numbers
Incoming calls, if recorded at all, are recorded for the DID extension
number, not the room extension number.

■

Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and ARS
CDR records contain the following information for ARS:
— Fact that an ARS call was made
— Calling extension number
— FRL of the calling extension
— Called number
— TAC of trunk group used for the ARS call
— Time of call completion
— Call duration (how long the parties talked)
— IXC code, if any
If CDR is suppressed for the trunk group actually used on an ARS call, a
CDR record is not generated; otherwise, Condition Code 7 applies. The
ARS access code is recorded in the Access Code Dialed field and the trunk
access code for the trunk group actually used is recorded in the Access
Code Used field.
If an AAR call is placed to a busy trunk group and CDR is suppressed for
that trunk group, the user hears reorder tone and the CDR output shows an
ineffective call attempt.

1602

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

If an ARS call is an attendant-assisted call, the CDR record shows the call
with a Condition Code of 7 (ARS call) instead of a Condition Code of 1
(attendant-assisted call). This occurs because CDR is not notified until
after the trunk is seized and, in this case, the trunk is not seized until the
user dials the number.
For FEAC, if a trunk group is accessed via ARS, the trunk group’s COR is
not used to determine if an account code needs to be entered.
■

Automatic Callback
When the Automatic Callback feature is used for an intraswitch call, no
CDR record is generated for the first call attempt or the ringback. However,
if the caller or extension being called is optioned for intraswitch CDR, a
record of the actual call is output provided the call is answered and
completed.

■

Automatic Circuit Assurance
ACA calls generate intraswitch CDR if the terminating extension is
monitored by CDR. The originating extension for ACA calls cannot be
administered for intraswitch monitoring.

■

Automatic Wakeup
No CDR intraswitch records are generated for wakeup calls.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
CDR does not record any information on the party who bridges onto a call.
Instead, the number that was called appears in the Dialed Number field of
the CDR record. The duration of the call is recorded when the last party
drops off the call. This also applies for intraswitch calls.
If the user originates a call over a bridged appearance, the call record
contains the calling number of the bridged appearance extension and not
the extension number of the original, calling station.

■

Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks
An attendant or user is never required to enter an account code when
making a busy verification.

■

Call-by-Call Service Selection
When a successful call is made on a Call-by-Call Service Selection trunk,
the network specific facility used on the call is translated into an INS
number and recorded in the INS field of the call record. If a Call-by-Call
Service Selection call is unsuccessful because of an administered trunk
usage allocation plan, the INS number is recorded in the INS field of the
report with a condition code of “E.”

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1603

Features and technical reference

■

Call Coverage
When an incoming or intraswitch call is answered by a covering extension,
the extension number dialed by the originating party is recorded as the
dialed number. If a call is covered to an off-net location, the dialed number
is the number of the off-net location, the calling number is the number of
the station that is covered to the remote location.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
When a call is forwarded to another extension, the extension number dialed
by the calling party is recorded as the dialed number. If a call is forwarded
to an off-net location, the dialed number is the number of the off-net
location, the calling number is the number of the station that is forwarded
to the remote location.
CDR generates one record for a forwarded intraswitch call. In this record,
the dialed number is the same as the extension dialed by the originating
party.
For a trunk call to a station that is forwarded to a trunk, CDR generates two
records. The first record shows an incoming trunk call to the station. The
second record shows an outgoing trunk call from the station.
For FEAC, calls cannot be forwarded to a destination where a user is
required to enter an account code.

■

Call Park
When a user parks an incoming or intraswitch call, that user’s extension is
recorded as the dialed number in the CDR record. Call duration in CDR
reflects the entire time the incoming trunk is busy (incoming) or until the
call ends (intraswitch).

■

Call Pickup
When an incoming or intraswitch call is answered by another user in the
pickup group, the extension number dialed by the calling party is recorded
as the dialed number.

■

Call Vectoring
The CDR System Parameters screen can be administered so that the VDN
extension is used in place of the Hunt Group or Member extension. If
administered to do so, this overrides the Calls to Hunt Group - Record
option of CDR for incoming Call Vectoring calls.
Outgoing vector calls generate ordinary outgoing CDR records with the
originating extension as the calling number.

1604

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

For incoming calls to a VDN, the duration of the call is recorded from the
time answer supervision is returned.
— If answer supervision is returned by the vector (via an
announcement, collect, disconnect, or wait with music command),
and the call never goes to another extension, the VDN extension is
recorded as the called number in the CDR record.
— If the call terminates to a hunt group, the VDN, hunt group, or agent
extension is recorded as the called number as per the administration
discussed above.
— If the call terminates to a trunk, CDR generates the following two
records:
■

An incoming record with the incoming TAC as the dialed
number.

■

An outgoing record with the incoming TAC as the calling
number and the digits dialed through the vector step as the
dialed number.

If “member extensions” is administered on the CDR System Parameters
screen and the call successfully completes to a station via the “route-to”
command, the call record shows an incoming call to that station.
Call Vectoring “route to” commands that are unsuccessful do not generate
ineffective call attempt records.
If a vector interacts with an extension or group that has Call Forwarding
All Calls active, normal Call Forwarding/CDR interactions apply.
Some calls may originally look like intraswitch calls, but result in trunk
calls (for example, a call from a station administered for intraswitch CDR
to a VDN, which ends up an outgoing call on an outgoing trunk). Such calls
will not generate intraswitch CDR records; the CDR record will have a
condition code A - outgoing.
■

Call Waiting Termination
Call duration timing starts when the user answers an incoming call.

■

Centralized Attendant Services
If a CAS attendant extends a call for a user, and CDR is not assigned to the
RLT trunk group, the user’s extension is recorded as the originator of the
call. If the RLT trunk group does have CDR administered, the RLT trunk is
recorded. If a CAS attendant answers a call but does not extend the call, no
CDR records are made.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1605

Features and technical reference

■

CO Trunks
All incoming and outgoing calls on a CO trunk group are recorded, if CDR
is assigned to the trunk group and CDR is administered to record incoming
calls.

■

Conference
For the purpose of CDR, a call is considered a conference call if it contains
at least one trunk that is eligible for CDR plus two or more parties, or if it
contains at least one party optioned for intraswitch CDR. Condition Code
C applies to each CDR record made for a conference call.
For a conference call, a separate CDR record is produced for each
outgoing/incoming trunk serving the conference call. If ITCS or OTCS is
enabled, CDR produces a separate record for each internal party on the call
as well.
For the outgoing portion of a conference call involving multiple
extensions, the extension that requested outside dial tone to bring an
outside party into the conference is recorded as the calling party.
For the outgoing/incoming portion of a conference call, the call duration in
CDR reflects the entire time the trunk is on the conference call.
A separate CDR record is produced for each trunk used in a trunk-to-trunk
transfer. If ITCS is active, the incoming trunk record shows the duration of
the entire call.
If the originator of the conference call is optioned for intraswitch CDR,
each time the originator dials a non-trunk party, a new CDR record is
started. For example, Station A is optioned for intraswitch CDR and calls
Station B. Station A conferences in Station C. Station A drops from the
call. Station B or C drops from the call. Two CDR records are output with
Condition Code C: one for the A to B call and one for the A to C call.
If the originator is not optioned for intraswitch CDR, but one or more
parties brought into the conference are, one record with Condition Code C
is generated for each dialed intraswitch party. For example, Station A calls
Station B, which is optioned for intraswitch CDR. Station A conferences
Station C. Station A drops from the call. Station B or C drops from the call.
One CDR record is output with condition code C for the A to B call.
Intraswitch conference call CDR records are output when both the calling
number (originator) and dialed number (terminator) of the call drop. The
duration of the call will be from the time the terminator answers until both
the originator and terminator drop from the call.
If the attendant originates the conference, only the dialed numbers
corresponding to intraswitch optioned extensions stimulate the creation of
CDR records.

1606

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

■

DCS
Station information is not passed throughout the DCS network for CDR
purposes.

■

DID trunks
All incoming calls on the DID trunk group will be recorded if administered
to record incoming CDR and if CDR is administered for this trunk group.

■

Emergency Access to the Attendant
CDR does not generate intraswitch records for Emergency Access calls.

■

Expert Agent Selection
A logical extension can be assigned to an agent who can log into a phone
using that extension number. On the CDR System Parameters screen, you
can chose to record the agent’s logical extension as the called number
rather than the hunt-group extension or hunt-group-member extension.

■

Foreign Exchange (FX) Trunks
All calls made on an FX trunk group are recorded if administered to record
CDR and if CDR is administered for this trunk group.

■

Hotline Service
The stored number used on an outgoing or intraswitch Hotline call is
recorded by CDR the same as if it was manually dialed.

■

Hunt Groups
Either the hunt group extension number or individual hunt group member
extension number is recorded as the called number. This is administrable
on the CDR System Parameters screen.

■

Intercept Treatment
If an outgoing or tandem call is routed to Intercept Treatment, the number
dialed by the calling party is recorded as the dialed number, and Condition
Code F is recorded.

■

Inter-PBX Attendant Calls
If a user calls an Inter-PBX attendant and the trunk group used has CDR
assigned, call records contain the following information:
— Condition Code — A
— Access Code Dialed — Blank
— Access Code Used — Trunk access code of trunk used
— Dialed Digits — Inter-PBX attendant access code

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1607

Features and technical reference

■

ISDN
When true answer supervision is received from the network, an indication
is sent to the CDR device to this effect. If an ISDN call has been
interworked, the call record shows this, and answer supervision may or
may not be accurate. If you use unformatted or expanded record formats,
the SID/ANI appears in the record, if sent.

■

Last Number Dialed
The CDR access code and account code dialed are stored as part of the Last
Number Dialed. However, some digits may be lost due to the limit on the
number of digits stored for this feature.

■

Manual Originating Line Service
If an attendant establishes an outgoing call for a user, designated as a
Manual Originating Line, the CDR record for the call is the same as for any
attendant-assisted outgoing call. The calling extension is recorded as the
calling number, and Condition Code 1 applies.

■

Multiple Listed Directory Numbers (LDNs)
If incoming call information is recorded, the called number recorded for
LDN calls is the extension number or trunk group access code to which the
attendant completes the call. If the call terminates at the attendant console
only, the dialed number is the attendant extension. The attendant extension
number is administrable (the default is 0).
LDNs cannot be administered for intraswitch CDR. However, a call from
an intraswitch optioned extension to a LDN produces an intraswitch CDR.

■

Night Service
The extension number assigned to the attendants is recorded as the dialed
number. The attendant extension number is administrable (the default is 0).

■

Off-Premises Station
CDR data is recorded if the extension is involved in an outgoing/incoming
trunk call or it (or the other terminal involved in the call) is optioned for
intraswitch CDR.

■

PCOL trunks
An outgoing PCOL call shows the dialed number in the Dialed Number
field of the CDR record rather than a TAC. An outgoing PCOL call is
recorded as a call from the originating extension number via the trunk
group associated with the PCOL. On incoming PCOL calls the answering
extension’s primary extension is recorded as the called number if incoming
calls are recorded.

1608

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

■

Planned Interchange
When a planned interchange occurs (either demand or scheduled), it is
possible for the CDR records on calls ending within 10–20 seconds after
the interchange to report as “invalid long duration calls” (duration of 9:59:9
and Condition Code other than 4). This is caused by deviations in the
clocks between the two processors and the short duration of the calls.
Consider these records invalid.

■

Private Network Access
Private Network Access calls are recorded if CDR is assigned for incoming
or outgoing tie trunks.

■

Remote Access
Remote Access calls are recorded if Remote Access is provided on a per
trunk group basis (incoming destination is the remote access number), and
those trunks are administered for CDR. The call record gives no indication
that this is a remote access call, other than the trunk group access code.

■

Ringback Queuing
Condition Code 8 is recorded for an outgoing call which is queued for a
trunk before completion. The length of time the call is queued is not
recorded.
When an outgoing call is queued for a trunk and is unsuccessful (the queue
times out or the calling party does not answer the callback) a CDR record is
not generated for the call.

■

Security Violation Notification (SVN)
SVN calls generate intraswitch CDR if the terminating extension is
monitored. You cannot administer the originating extension for intraswitch
monitoring.

■

Service Observing
No CDR records are generated for Service Observing calls. Tandem
Tie-Trunk Switching
The calling party on an incoming trunk can dial the CDR account code.
The Calling Number field in CDR is the trunk access code for the
incoming trunk group, the called number is the number dialed.

■

Temporary Bridged Appearance
A CDR record is not affected by any second or subsequent use bridging a
call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1609

Features and technical reference

■

Temporary Signaling Connections (TSCs)
Call-associated TSCs and TSC requests appear in the call record, provided
the switch is administered to use ISDN layouts. Non-call-associated TSCs
and TSC requests generate separate CDR records if the switch is
administered to record them. In either case, the TSC Flag and Packet
Count fields of the call record contain TSC data.

■

Tie Trunk Access
Tie-trunk calls are recorded if CDR is administered to record the trunk
group and to record incoming calls.

■

Transfer
If a user originates a call on an outgoing trunk and then transfers the call to
another extension, the originating extension is recorded as the calling party.
If a user receives a call on an incoming trunk and then transfers the call to
another extension, the extension that originally received the call is recorded
as the dialed number.
If a user receives an intraswitch call and then transfers it to another
extension, the extension that originally received the call is recorded as the
dialed number.
If call splitting is active, when a user receives or originates a trunk call and
then transfers the call to another extension, two records are generated.
Intraswitch CDR records are generated for each call to or from an
intraswitch optioned extension. For example, Station A, which is
intraswitch optioned, calls Station B. Station A then transfers the call to
Station C. When either Station B or C drops, two CDR records with
Condition Code 0 are output: one for the A to B call, and the second for the
A to C call.
Intraswitch CDR transfer records are output when both the calling number
(originator) and dialed number (terminator) drop from the call. The
duration of the call is from the time the terminator answers until both the
originator and terminator have dropped from the call.
If ITCS is enabled and an incoming trunk call is transferred to a local
extension that is optioned for Intraswitch CDR, the call produces an
incoming trunk call record. It does not produce an Intraswitch record.
Users cannot dial an account code when transferring a call to another
extension, unless they have console permissions. However, a user
transferring a call to a trunk can dial an account code before dialing the
ARS or TAC.

1610

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call detail recording

■

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Although they are not really conference calls, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
connections are treated as such for CDR purposes. A separate CDR record
is generated for each trunk in the connection.
Unanswered Trunk Calls may or may not be recorded depending on
administration. You can administer each trunk group so that unanswered
calls are recorded if they remain unanswered for a specified period of time.
If Incoming Trunk Call Splitting is active, a trunk-to-trunk transfer
produces a record of the incoming call, and a record of the outgoing call.
The outgoing call record shows the duration from the time the call was
transferred until both parties drop. The incoming call record shows the
duration from the time the station receives the incoming trunk call until
both parties drop.

■

Uniform Dial Plan (UDP)
If one user calls another user via a UDP extension number, and the trunk
group used has CDR assigned, CDR records the following information:
— Condition Code — 7
— Access Code Dialed — blank
— Access Code Used — trunk access code of trunk used
— Dialed Digits — Uniform Dial Plan extension

■

VDN Return Destination
An incoming call does not generate a CDR record until the originator drops
from the call. CDR creates a record when a call goes to the return
destination VDN, the originator has not dropped, and vector processing —
that is, the return destination VDN — routes the call to an outgoing trunk.
CDR does not create a record if vector processing routes a call from the
return destination VDN to an internal call. The call record shows only the
first VDN that the caller accessed, no matter how many other extensions
are involved in the call.
If an incoming VDN call is routed to a station, CDR includes the station in
the record. If an incoming VDN call is routed to an outgoing trunk, CDR
includes the VDN in the record.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1611

Features and technical reference

Call forwarding
Call Forwarding allows users to redirect calls to designated destinations. The
forwarded-to destination can be an internal extension, external (off-net) number,
an attendant group, or a specific attendant.
Call Forwarding provides five functions:
■

Call Forwarding-All Calls — Allows a user to redirect every incoming call
to the forwarded-to destination.

■

Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer — Allows a user to redirect incoming
calls to a forwarded-to destination only when the user is busy or when the
call is not answered after an administrable interval. If the extension is busy,
the call forwards immediately. If the extension is not busy, the incoming
call rings the called extension, then forwards only if it remains unanswered
longer than the administered interval.

■

Call Forwarding Off Net— Allows a user to forward calls to an off-net
destination.

■

When the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is activated, calls can
be monitored for call progress tones, and if a call is not answered, it returns
to the Avaya MultiVantage for call coverage processing in some
circumstances.

■

Call Forwarding Override — Allows the user at the forwarded-to extension
to override Call Forwarding at the forwarded-from extension on a per-call
basis so the user can initiate a call or transfer a call back to the
forwarded-from extension.

Detailed description

You assign Call Forwarding All Calls and Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer to
extensions on a Class of Service basis. You assign Call Forwarding Override and
Call Forwarding Off-Net on a system-wide basis. You can also restrict Call
Forwarding Off-Net with the Class of Service.
Call Forwarding All Calls

Phone users and data-terminal users can activate or deactivate Call Forwarding
All Calls for their own terminals with a feature-access code or Call Forward-All
feature button. Virtual extension users cannot activate or deactivate Call
Forwarding All Calls. An attendant or phone user with console permission can
activate or deactivate the feature for another extension, virtual extensions, TEG,
DDC, UCD group, or ACD split (but not vector-controlled splits).

1612

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call forwarding

Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer

The feature is activated or deactivated with a feature-access code or Call Forward
Busy/Don’t Answer feature button. An attendant or phone with console
permission can also activate or deactivate the feature for another extension by
using a feature-access code. Virtual extension users cannot activate or deactivate
Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer.
Call Forward Busy/Don't Answer cannot be activated for hunt groups, data
extensions, or TEG. Calls to an attendant or Expert Agent Selection (EAS) agent
cannot be forwarded.
Call Forwarding Off Net

When a call is forwarded off net, the forwarded-to number can have up to 18
digits. When counting the 18-digit limit, count the digits in the Trunk Access
Code or Automatic Alternate Routing/Automatic Route Selection (AAR/ARS)
feature access code. Do not count the “#” used to terminate a forwarded-to
number if the “#” is used.
If the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field on the System Parameters
Customer-Options screen and the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net Enabled
field on the System Parameters - Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen are both
set to y, the system allows calls forwarded off-net to be monitored for busy or
no-answer conditions. The system may bring the call back for call-coverage
processing if the principal’s coverage criteria are satisfied at the forwarded-to
destination. However, if the principal does not have a coverage path, the system
does not monitor the call. It is left at the off-net destination regardless of whether
it is answered or busy.
Calls forwarding off net require an available outgoing trunk. Additionally, when
the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is y, a call-classifier port may be
required. If there are no call-classifier ports available when needed, the call still
routes off net, but it is not monitored for call progress tones and cannot be
returned to the switch for further call coverage processing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1613

Features and technical reference

Whenever an incoming trunk call is redirected off-net, a timer is set that precludes
any other incoming trunk call from redirecting off-net until the timer either
expires or is cancelled. The rationale for this mechanism is to prevent calls that
were redirected off-net from being re-routed back to the original principal from
the off-net destination, effectively creating a round-robin loop that continuously
seizes trunks until they are exhausted. The blocked call receives busy tone or
redirects to coverage.
NOTE:

If you send calls off-net and use the Call Classifier - Detector or the
Tone-Clock (with Call Classifier-Tone Detector) circuit pack (the
international version) for call classification and do not use the American
tone plan, use the System-Parameters Country-Options screen to define
specific country tones. If you use the Call Classifier - Detector or the
Tone-Clock (with Call Classifier-Tone Detector) circuit pack (the
international version) and do not use the System-Parameters
Country-Options screen, your system will download the American tone plan
regardless of your geographical location.
Call Forwarding — Override

You can administer Call Forwarding Override on a system-wide basis to allow a
forwarded-to party to override Call Forwarding when placing a call to the
forwarded-from party. Call Forwarding Override is invoked automatically if the
system-wide override option is set.
Call Forwarding Override cannot be used when calls forward to an external
number. Call Forwarding All Calls from a data user or a hunt group cannot be
overridden with Call Forwarding Override.
Warning users if their calls are redirected

You can warn analog phone users if they have features active that may redirect
calls. For example, if the user has activated call forwarding, you can administer a
setting to play a special dial tone when the user goes off-hook. See
‘‘DISTINCTIVE AUDIBLE ALERTING’’ on page 826 for more information.
Security

Use the list call-forwarding command to get general information and to identify
unauthorized Call Forwarding feature activation. The list shows the station name,
station number, and forwarded-to destination number.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Users who do not have permission to call out of the building may not do so
with Call Forwarding.

1614

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call forwarding

Considerations

Calls can be forwarded only once. Consider the following scenario. Extension A
forwards its calls to extension B. Extension B forwards its calls to extension C.
Calls made to extension A:
■

Ring at A, if possible

■

Ring at B, if possible

■

Redirect to extension A’s coverage path, if available and A’s coverage
criteria are satisfied when applied at B

■

Are not forwarded to extension C

There is no maximum number of calls that can be forwarded simultaneously.
You can administer a phone to receive a redirection notification signal when a call
is forwarded.
The system restricts users from forwarding calls to a number that they are not
allowed to call.
If save translation is run after call forwarding is activated for a phone,
forwarding status and destination number are saved to tape.
Attendant

Calls to attendants cannot be forwarded. However, calls can be forwarded to the
attendant group.
The attendant cannot have a Call Forwarding button.
Only the attendant or phone user with console permission can activate Call
Forwarding All Calls for TEGs, UCD groups, DDC, and data modules.
Number of rings provided to a forwarded call

The following table shows the field used to specify the number of rings provided a
forwarded call before the call redirects to coverage.
Type of
Forwarding

Forwarding All

Forwarding Busy/Don’t
Answer

local

coverage path

local

remote

*

*

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1615

Features and technical reference

Type of
Forwarding

Forwarding All

Forwarding Busy/Don’t
Answer

CCRON

off-net

off-net

DCS (CCRON off)

coverage path

local

DCS (CCRON on)

off-net

off-net

■

Coverage path —- On the Coverage Path screen, the Number of Rings
field.

■

Local — On the System-Parameters Coverage/Forwarding screen, the
Local Subsequent Redirection/CFWD Don’t Answer Interval field.

■

Off-net — On the System-Parameters Coverage/Forwarding screen, the
Offnet Subsequent Redirection/CFWD Don’t Answer Interval field.

■

* — No coverage treatment applied (rings until answered).

Example

If you forward all calls to a local site, the switch checks the Number of Rings field
on the ‘‘Coverage Path’’ screen.
If you forward busy/don’t answer calls to a local site, the switch checks the Local
Subsequent Redirection/CFWD Don’t Answer Interval field on the ‘‘System
Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding’’ screen.
Interactions
■

Answer Detection
This feature shares call-classifier resources with the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net feature.

■

Attendant Override of Diversion Features
If an attendant uses redirection override to call a user who has Call
Forwarding active, the call does not forward and remains at the user’s
phone.

■

Automatic Callback and Ringback Queuing
Automatic Callback cannot be activated toward a phone that has Call
Forwarding active. If Automatic Callback was activated first, the callback
call attempt is redirected to the forwarded-to party.

1616

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call forwarding

■

Bridging
Calls do not terminate to bridged appearances when Call Forward
Busy/Don’t Answer is active.
The switch blocks users from bridging onto a call that has routed off net
while the call is undergoing call classification.

■

Call Coverage
If the principal’s (forwarding extension) redirection criteria are met at the
designated (forwarded-to) destination, the forwarded call redirects to the
principal’s coverage path; the designated destination gets a temporary
bridged appearance (except when it is off net), which remains active after
the call is answered so that the designated extension can bridge onto the
call if desired. The temporary bridge appearance remains until the caller
hangs up.
If Cover All Calls is part of the coverage redirection criteria and if Call
Forwarding or Call Forwarding Off-Net is active at a phone, incoming
priority calls forward to the designated destination; all other calls redirect
according to the Call Coverage path. Non-priority calls are not directed off
net.
When a covering user has activated Call Forwarding, a coverage redirected
call does not forward to the designated extension number. Instead, the call
is redirected to the next point in the principal’s coverage path, if available.
If no other coverage point is available, the call remains at the principal’s
phone.

■

Call Detail Recording (CDR)
When a call is forwarded to an off-net number, the call is recorded in CDR
records as a call from the forwarding station. When the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net field is y, a CDR record is generated only after the call
has actually been answered off net.
If forced entry of account codes is required, calls cannot be forwarded to
off-net destinations.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls and Call Forward Busy/Don’t Answer
Call Forwarding All Calls and Call Forward Busy/Don't Answer cannot be
active for the same phone at the same time.

■

Call Park
Calls can be parked on a forwarded-from extension even though Call
Forwarding is active for that extension. If a forwarded-to extension user
parks a call that had been forwarded to that extension, the call is normally
parked on the forwarded-to extension, not the forwarded-from extension.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1617

Features and technical reference

■

Call Pickup/Directed Call Pickup
If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is set to y on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen, a Temporary Bridged
Appearance is maintained if the forwarded-to destination is a member of
the same call pickup group as that of the forwarded from station. If the
Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is set to n, a
Temporary Bridged Appearance is not maintained.

■

Call Prompting
This feature shares call-classifier resources with the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net feature.

■

Call Visor ASAI
This feature shares call-classifier resources with the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net feature.

■

Conference
The switch blocks users from conferencing another party onto a call which
has routed off net while the call is undergoing call classification. If any
party on a call that has forwarded off net is on hold (due to the initiation of
a conference), the call routes off net without undergoing call classification.
This occurs even when the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is y.

■

Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
Agents logged in with EAS enabled cannot activate or deactivate Call
Forwarding. The physical extension where the EAS agent is logged in can
be forwarded, but the EAS agent must first log out. Then, the phone can be
forwarded.

■

Hold
If any party is on hold when a forwarded-to call routes off net, that call
does not undergo call classification, even when the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net field is y.

■

Intercom—Automatic
When a phone with Intercom—Automatic is call forwarded to another
phone, the auto-icom feature also forwards. Intercom—Automatic is not
forwarded if a call forwards off-net.

■

Interflow
The Interflow feature allows ACD calls to be redirected from one split to a
split on another switch or to another external location. This is
accomplished by forwarding calls that are directed to the split extension to
an off-notify-net location via the Call Forwarding All Calls feature.

1618

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call forwarding

■

Intraflow
Call forwarding can be used to unconditionally redirect ACD calls from a
split to another destination on the same switch.

■

Leave Word Calling (LWC)
LWC cannot be activated toward a phone that has Call Forwarding
activated. If LWC was activated before the called phone user activated Call
Forwarding, the callback call attempt is redirected to the forwarded-to
party.

■

Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) Signaling
This feature shares call classification resources with the Coverage of Calls
Redirected Off-Net feature.

■

Personal Central Office Line (PCOL)
PCOL calls cannot be forwarded.

■

QSIG
If a call is forwarded over an ISDN-PRI trunk administered with
supplementary service protocol “b” (QSIG), then additional call
information may be displayed.

■

Send All Calls
If an extension has both Send All Calls and Call Forwarding All Calls
activated, calls to that extension that can immediately be redirected to
coverage are redirected. However, other calls, such as Priority Calls, are
forwarded to the designated extension.
Activation of Send All Calls at the forwarded-to extension does not affect
calls forwarded to that extension.

■

Temporary Bridged Appearance
The system maintains a Temporary Bridged Appearance for on-net calls
after the call is answered or until the caller hangs up. However, for calls
forwarded off-net, the system cannot maintain a Temporary Bridged
Appearance. Once the call is redirected to the principal’s coverage path, the
trunk to the off-net, forwarded-to, number is released.

■

Traffic Reports Removed
The list measurement tone-receiver traffic reports provide port usage for
this feature.

■

Transfer
The switch blocks a user from transferring a call which has routed off net to
another party while the call is undergoing call classification. If any party on
a call that has routed off net is on hold (due to the initiation of a transfer),
the call routes off net without undergoing call classification. This occurs
even when the Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net field is y.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1619

Features and technical reference

Related topics

See ‘‘System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding’’ on page 1167 for
information on setting the number of times an extension rings before the system
redirects the call or to determine whether the forwarded-to phone can override call
forwarding to allow calls to the forwarded-from phone.
See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for information on forwarding calls to
an administered number.
See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for information about assigning extensions a
Class of Service (COS) that allows call forwarding.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about button assignments.
See ‘‘Setting up call forwarding’’ on page 199 for instructions on administering
various types of automatic call forwarding.

Call park
Call Park allows users to put a call on hold and then retrieve the call from any
other telephone within the system.
You can set a system-wide expiration interval for parked calls. If a call is not
answered within the interval, the parked call redirects to an attendant or to the user
who activated Call Park (the parking user). Calls redirect to the attendant if the
default “Loudspeaker Paging” option is assigned and to the parking user if the
Deluxe Paging and Call Park Timeout to Originator option is assigned.
If no attendant or night service extension is administered, and if Night Service —
Trunk Answer from Any Station is not administered, the expiration interval is
ignored and the call remains parked.
If two parties are connected on a parked call, a third party can also answer the call
before the interval expires, creating a 3-way conference.
The attendant console group can have common, shared extensions used
exclusively for Call Park. These extensions are not assigned to a telephone, but
are stored in system translations and used to park a call. The extensions are
particularly useful when one party is paged at the request of another party. The
caller is parked on a common shared extension and the extension is announced.
The status lamp associated with the extension identifies “call parked” or “no call
parked” (instead of active or idle status).

1620

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call park

Call Park allows telephone users to answer a call at one extension, but complete
the call at another extension. Call Park also allows users to answer a call at any
telephone after being paged by a telephone user or an attendant.
To retrieve parked calls, either:
■

Depress the lit Call Park button on the user’s extension, or

■

If other than the user’s extension, type the FAC for the Answer Back
Access Code field assigned the Feature Access Code screen

Considerations
■

Only one call per extension can be parked at a time, even if the extension
has multiple call appearances. Conference calls with up to five parties can
be parked; the sixth position must remain open for the retrieving party.

■

Calls cannot be parked on a group extension. If a group member places a
call in Call Park, the call is parked on the member’s extension. Group
members can belong to the following:
— A coverage answer group
— A DDC group
— A TEG
— A UCD group

■

If all appearances on a parked telephone are busy and no attendant or
night-service extensions are configured when the call park timeout expires:
— A parked call is dropped if no coverage path is assigned
— A parked call is not dropped if a coverage path is assigned.

Interactions
■

Abbreviated Dialing
This button allows users to park calls or retrieve parked calls by pressing a
button, instead of using the buttons and access codes separately.

■

Automatic Wakeup
Automatic Wakeup calls cannot be parked.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
If a user, active on a bridged call appearance, activates Call Park, the call is
parked on the primary extension associated with the bridged call
appearance.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1621

Features and technical reference

■

Call Vectoring
A call cannot be parked on a vector directory number (VDN) extension.
Also, a call that is undergoing vector processing cannot be parked.

■

Code Calling Access
When a paging party dials the Code Calling Access code and the paged
user’s extension, the paging party is automatically parked on the paged
party’s extension.

■

Common Shared Extensions
If an attendant parks a call on a shared extension and tenant partitioning is
not active, then when the call park timeout occurs, the call returns to the
attendant group.
If an attendant parks a call on a shared extension and tenant partitioning is
active, then when call park timeout occurs, the call returns to the attendant
who parked the call.
The setting of the Deluxe Paging and Call Park Timeout to Originator field
of the Feature-Related System-Parameters screen does not effect this
behavior.

■

Conference
Conference calls can be parked.

■

Data Privacy and Data Restriction
These features are automatically deactivated when a call is parked.

■

Drop
If a digital-telephone user parks a call and then pushes the drop button, the
call is unparked. If the parked call is from an internal digital-telephone
user, pushing the drop button does not drop the call. The parking user must
hang up to drop the call.

■

Loudspeaker Paging Access
Calls to paging zones cannot be parked.

■

Music-on-Hold
If a parked call involves only one party, the parked user hears
music-on-hold. The parking user also hears music after first parking the
call and hearing confirmation tone.

■

Remote Access
A Remote Access caller cannot park a call. However, the Code Calling
Access feature, an answering attendant, or a telephone user can park an
incoming Remote Access call.

1622

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call Pickup

Related topics
■

Feature Access Code (FAC) screen

■

Feature-Related System Parameters screen

■

Station screen (multiappearance phones)

■

Console-Parameters screen

Call Pickup
Call Pickup and Directed Call Pickup allow a telephone user to answer calls that
alert at other extension numbers within the user’s specified call pickup group.
Directed Call Pickup allows telephone users to pick up any call on the Avaya
MultiVantage system.
Call Pickup

Establish a call pickup group so that when one member of a group is away, other
members can answer the absent member’s calls. A call pickup group usually
consists of users who are located in the same area or who have similar functions.
To pick up another user’s call, a user goes off-hook and dials the Call Pickup
access code or presses a Call Pickup button.
If a user’s telephone has a Call Pickup button and status lamp, then:
■

The status lamp lights steadily when Call Pickup is used.

■

If Call Pickup Alerting is activated, members’ status lamps flash when a
call comes in to any extension in the call pickup group. Group members
other than the called party, can answer using Call Pickup. The called party
can answer on the ringing call or bridged appearance.
NOTE:

Call Pickup Alerting for a telephone takes effect only when the Call
Pickup status lamp is not lit. If Call Pickup is used to answer a call,
the status lamp lights steadily and does not flash if there are
additional calls to the call pickup group.
Both Call Pickup and Call Appearance status buttons flash at the
called party’s telephone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1623

Features and technical reference

If calls ring at 2 or more telephones in a call pickup group and a group member
presses the Call Pickup button, a distribution algorithm determines which call is
answered. Thus, all call pickup group members are treated equally. Specifically,
when a Call Pickup button is pressed, the system searches the group extension
numbers until reaching an extension with a call eligible for Call Pickup. The next
time a Call Pickup button is pressed, the system searches from the next extension
number.
For example, if extension A has 2 calls ringing and extension B has 1 call ringing,
and one of extension A’s calls is answered with Call Pickup, then extension B’s
call is answered the next time Call Pickup is used. After extension B’s call is
answered, a user can answer the second call to extension A.
When multiple calls ring on a telephone and a group member activates Call
Pickup, the call with the lowest call-appearance number is answered. For
example, if calls ring on the second and fourth call-appearance button on a
telephone and a user at another telephone activates Call Pickup, the call on the
second call-appearance button is answered.
Directed Call Pickup

Directed Call Pickup functions like Call Pickup, except for the following:
■

A user can answer an alerting call at any telephone on the system — the
alerting and answering telephones need not be members of the same call
pickup group.

■

You grant users permission to have their calls answered or to answer
others’ calls with Directed Call Pickup on a per-telephone basis on the
Class of Restriction screen.

Considerations
■

A telephone can be a member of only one call pickup group.

■

When a call pickup group member is away from his or her telephone and
receives a call, other call pickup group members’ telephones do not ring.
Therefore Call Pickup is only useful if either:
— Call Pickup Alerting is enabled and call pickup group members have
telephones with Call Pickup buttons and status lamps.
— Call pickup group members are in close proximity and can hear each
other’s telephones ring.

■

1624

Exclusion is not supported for pickup calls.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call Pickup

Interactions
■

Abbreviated Dialing
A user can store:
— The Directed Call Pickup feature access code (FAC) plus a
telephone address in an Abbreviated Dial button
— The Directed Call Pickup FAC. (The user then dials each extension.)

■

Attendant
Attendant can use Directed Call Pickup, but other users cannot use the
feature to answer a call alerting at an attendant’s telephone.

■

Automatic Callback and Ringback Queuing
Neither call pickup group members or Directed Call Pickup users can
answer Callback calls.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
— If Call Pickup Alerting is activated and a bridged call appearance
rings on a call pickup group member’s telephone, other group
members cannot pick up the call.
— If Call Pickup Alerting is not activated and a telephone rings on a
bridged call appearance, group members can pick up the call.
— If Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup is enabled, a
temporary-bridged appearance is maintained at the called telephone.
This allows the called party to bridge onto the call after it has been
picked up by another call pickup group member.
— Directed Call Pickup cannot be used to pick up a call alerting at a
bridged call appearance.

■

Call Coverage
You can use Directed Call Pickup to answer a redirected call alerting at a
covering user’s telephone if there is a call-coverage temporary bridged
appearance.

■

Call Detail Recording (CDR)
The extension number dialed by the caller is recorded as the dialed number
in CDR.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1625

Features and technical reference

■

Call Forwarding
If Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup is enabled, a temporary
bridged appearance is maintained if the forwarded-to telephone belongs to
the same call pickup group as the forwarded-from telephone. If Temporary
Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup is not enabled, a temporary bridged
appearance is not maintained.

■

Call Pickup Alerting
If a user who is a member of a ringing telephone’s pickup group uses the
Direct Call Pickup to answer a call and the call is the only call ringing for
any member of the pickup group, the Call Pickup Alerting lamp goes dark
when the user picks up the call.
If a user who is not a member of a pickup group uses Direct Call Pickup to
answer a call, then Call Pickup Alerting does not apply.

■

Call Waiting Termination
You cannot use Call Pickup to pick up a Call Waiting call.

■

Conference
If the Call Pickup Alerting field is enabled and a call is picked up and
conferenced into a conference call, the Call Pickup status lamp flashes if
additional calls are available for Call Pickup.

■

Consult
If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is not enabled,
the consult call from the covering user appears as an idle-call appearance.

■

Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
EAS agents can use Directed Call Pickup to pick up a call or have their
calls picked up. The agent’s COR overrides the class of restriction (COR)
of the telephone where the agent is logged in.
If both the telephone’s COR and the logged-in agent’s COR allow Directed
Call Pickup, the user picking up the call can use either the telephone’s
extension or the agent’s loginID.

1626

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call Pickup

■

Hold
If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call Pickup field is not enabled
and a user puts a call answered with Directed Call Pickup on hold, the
called party cannot answer the call because a temporary bridged
appearance is maintained. If the Temporary Bridged Appearance on Call
Pickup field is enabled, then:
— A call picked up and placed on hold at an extension remains on that
extension, even if the called party answers the call.
— If the Call Pickup Alerting field is enabled and a call is picked up
and placed on hold, the Call Pickup status lamp flashes if additional
calls are available for Call Pickup.

■

Hot Line Service and Manual Originating Line Service
Telephones assigned these features can be members of a call pickup group
and have calls picked up, but they cannot answer calls for other pickup
group members.

■

Intercom  Automatic/Dial
If Call Pickup on Intercom Calls is activated, you can use Call Pickup and
Directed Call Pickup to pick up Automatic Intercom calls. If it is not
activated, Automatic Intercom calls cannot be picked up and the calls are
not included in the call-pickup-alerting-count.

■

Internal Automatic Answer (IAA)
Internal calls to a telephone in a call pickup group are eligible for IAA. If
the called extension in a call pickup group has IAA activated, the call is
answered automatically. An extension that has IAA cannot automatically
answer calls to other telephones in its call pickup group.
IAA-eligible calls to an IAA extension cannot be answered with Call
Pickup because they are automatically answered at the called telephone.
Any non-IAA-eligible calls, such as external calls that ring the IAA-active
telephone, can be answered by members of that telephone’s call pickup
group.

■

Malicious Call Trace (MCT)
You cannot use Directed Call Pickup to pick up an alerting MCT call at the
MCT-Controller telephone.

■

Multimedia Call Handling
Do not use Call Pickup or Directed Call Pickup with a Multimedia data
endpoint. However, calls alerting at the voice component of a multimedia
complex can be picked up with Call Pickup or Directed Call Pickup.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1627

Features and technical reference

■

Privacy — Manual Exclusion
In the following case, the called party is not dropped when Privacy —
Manual Exclusion is activated.
A call is made to Station A and Station B picks it up using Call Pickup.
Station A bridges onto the call by going off-hook on its call appearance.
Station B activates Privacy — Manual Exclusion.

■

Tenant Partitioning
Directed Call Pickup follows existing Tenant Partitioning. The feature does
not function across tenant partitions unless specifically administered to
do so.

■

Terminating Extension (TEG)
You cannot use Directed Call Pickup to pick up a call alerting at a TEG
extension number.

■

Transfer
If the Call Pickup Alerting field is enabled and a call is picked up and
transferred, the Call Pickup status lamp flashes if additional calls are
available for Call Pickup.

Call waiting termination
Call Waiting Termination notifies a user with a single-line telephone who is active
on one call that a second call is waiting. Single-line telephone users can place a
call on hold to answer a waiting call. After answering the waiting call, they can
return to the held call or toggle back and forth between the two calls. A
single-line, telephone user can connect to only one call at a time.
Generally, the single-line telephone user hears one quick burst of tone when a call
from another telephone user is waiting, 2 quick bursts of tone when an
attendant-handled or an outside call is waiting, and 3 quick bursts of tone when a
Priority Call is waiting.
NOTE:

Special ring tones are not supported over DID facilities.
A priority call can wait for the telephone to become idle even if Call Waiting
Termination is not activated. However, an attendant-handled call receives busy
tone unless the Attendant Call Waiting Indication field is set to y.
You assign Call Waiting Termination on a per-telephone basis. For a virtual
extension, call waiting is assigned on the physical station.

1628

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call-by-call service selection

Considerations
■

An analog telephone user must place the active call on soft hold and dial
the Answer Hold-Unhold feature access code to answer the waiting call.

■

If an analog single-line telephone has Call Waiting enabled and has
initiated a conference call, Call Waiting is denied. For example, caller A
(on an analog telephone) is talking to caller B, then flashes and is talking to
caller C, and then flashes to conference B and C. Then, if caller D attempts
to call caller A, Call Wait is denied.

Interactions

Call Waiting is denied when the following features are activated at the single-line
telephone:
■

Another Call Waiting Call

■

Automatic Callback (to or from the telephone)

■

Data Privacy

■

Data Restriction

A Call Waiting call cannot be picked up by a Call Pickup group member or by
directed call pick-up.

Call-by-call service selection
Call-by-Call Service Selection enables a single ISDN trunk group to carry calls to
a variety of services. It does not require that each trunk group be dedicated to a
specific service. It allows you to set up various voice and data services and
features for a particular call.
Call-by-Call Service Selection provides the following benefits:

555-233-506

■

Cost reduction — Since many services share the same trunks, the total
number of trunks can be reduced.

■

Improved service — Features and services are less likely to be blocked.

■

Simplified Networking — Network engineering is simplified because
analysis of trunking needs can be done based on total traffic instead of on a
per-service basis.

■

Timely response to changes — With Usage Allocation Plans (UAPs), the
network does not have to be consulted.

■

Measurement of Call-by-Call Service Selection calls

Issue 5 October 2002

1629

Features and technical reference

Brief description

Call-by-Call Service Selection uses the same route patterns and route preferences
that are used by AAR, ARS, and GRS. The service or facility used on an outgoing
Call-by-Call Service Selection call is determined by information assigned in the
AAR/ARS/GRS route patterns.
You can allow a variety of services to use a single trunk group. The system obtains
trunking efficiency by distributing traffic over all the available trunks. Then you
can assign services that are used on incoming and outgoing Call-by-Call Service
Selection calls. The system provides traffic measurements for each individual
service administered for an ISDN Call-by-Call Service Selection trunk group.
A Call-by-Call Service Selection example is shown below.

r773197 CJL 060396

Figure Notes

1. Avaya Media Server
2. Megacom trunk group
3. Megacom 800 trunk group
4. SDN trunk group
5. OUTWATS trunk group

1630

Issue 5 October 2002

6. Call-by-Call Service Selection trunk
group
7. Public-switched network
8. Without Call-by-Call Service Selection
9. With Call-by-Call Service Selection

555-233-506

Call-by-call service selection

Using Country Protocol 1, you integrate services and features such as
MEGACOM, ACCUNET, and INWATS onto a single ISDN-PRI trunk group
with flexible assignment of trunks to each service or feature. Calls such as an
incoming 800 Service call that requires through-switching as an Outgoing WATS
call can be routed via the same facility. See the ISDN trunk group screen on page
‘‘ISDN trunk group’’ on page 936 for a listing of available services.
NOTE:

When the Avaya Media Server is connected to 5ESS, all of the services
supported under the Avaya and NI-2 country options are available.
Screens used to administer Call-by-Call Service
Selection

You administer Call-by-Call Service Selection on a per trunk group basis. The
following list shows the required screens and the fields you must use on each
screen:
■

System-Parameters Customer-Options
— Version
— ISDN-PRI
— ISDN-BRI Trunks
— Usage Allocation Enhancements

■

ISDN trunk group
— Service Type
— Usage Alloc
— all fields on the Incoming Call Handling Treatment (ICHT) Table

■

Route Pattern
— IXC
— Service/Feature
— Band

You can administer trunk Usage Allocation for multiple called numbers within a
given Service/Feature, or you can administer trunk Usage Allocation for incoming
or outgoing calls independent of Service/Feature.
■

System-Parameters Customer-Options
— Version
— ISDN-PRI Trunks
— ISDN-BRI Trunks
— Usage Allocation Enhancements

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1631

Features and technical reference

■

Network-Facilities (See the DEFINTY services documentation for
information about the Network Facilities screen.)
— All

ISDN messages and information elements for
usage allocation

Understanding the technical details of ISDN messages and information elements
may help you implement ISDN.
Call-by-Call Service Selection allows the system to specify one of the preceding
service types on a call-by-call basis. You can specify service types by classifying
incoming calls to an ISDN Call-By-Call trunk group using the called-party’s
number.
You can also specify service types with a SETUP message that indicates the intent
of the originating system to initiate a call using the specified service or facility.
The SETUP message may contain units called information elements (IE) that
specify call-related information. The IE used with Call-by-Call Service Selection
are:
■

Network-Specific Facility (NSF) — Indicates which facilities or services
are to be used to complete the call (typically not used outside the US and
Canada).
The system also checks all incoming ISDN trunk calls for the presence of
an NSF IE. If an NSF IE is present, the system makes sure that the
requested service is compatible with the trunk administration before it
accepts a call.
For an outgoing call on a Call-By-Call trunk group, the NSF IE is
constructed using the Service/Feature specified on the routing-pattern
preference selected for the call.
If the Service/Feature specified does not have an associated NSF, an NSF
IE is not sent. For example, SETUP messages for incoming and outgoing
calls classified only by a called-party number do not contain an NSF IE.

■

Transit Network Selection — Indicates which interexchange carrier is to be
used on an inter-LATA call.
If a call requires both the Service/Feature and the interexchange carrier to
be specified, the interexchange carrier information is sent in the NSF IE
rather than the Transit Network Selection IE.

1632

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Call-by-call service selection

Usage allocation plans

Optional UAPs may be assigned to provide more control over a Call-by-Call
Service Selection trunk group. You can allocate a minimum and maximum
number of channels for incoming and outgoing called numbers, privileged users,
and voice and data calls.
A UAP allows the customer to set the following options:
■

Maximum number of trunks that each service can use at any given
time.The sum for all services may exceed the total number of trunk-group
members. For example, for a15-member trunk group, you could administer
a maximum of seven MEGACOM service calls, six MEGACOM 800
service calls, and eight SDN calls. This ensures that all trunk-group
members are not dominated by a specific service, yet allows for
fluctuations in demand.

■

Minimum number of trunks that always must be available for each service.
The sum for all services may not exceed the total number of trunk-group
members. For example, for a 10-member trunk group that provides access
to MEGACOM service, MEGACOM 800 service, and SDN, the minimum
number of trunks to be used for each of these services cannot add up to
more than 10.

When these UAP limits are exceeded, the system rejects the call, even if a trunk is
available. On outgoing calls, the calling party receives a reorder tone unless other
preferences are available.
You can assign either fixed or scheduled UAP for each Call-by-Call Service
Selection trunk group.
■

With a fixed UAP, one plan applies at all times.

■

With a scheduled UAP, different plans can be administered to apply at
different times of day and different days of the week. As many as 6
activation times and associated plans can be assigned for each day of the
week.

You can have anything from a simple fixed UAP to a very flexible UAP with
many scheduling options. You can even start out with no UAP and build one as
the need arises.
Incoming call-handling treatment

Call-by-Call Service Selection provides special incoming call-handling treatment
for ISDN trunk groups. An incoming call on an ISDN trunk is handled according
to a treatment table administered for the trunk group. Depending on the platform
you use, the table allows for a different number of combinations of call
treatments.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1633

Features and technical reference

The treatment for an incoming call is selected based on the first 3 columns in the
ICHT on the ISDN Trunk Group screen. When the attributes of an incoming call
match these specifications, the call is treated according to the corresponding
following 4 columns. If an incoming call matches more than one set of
specifications, the most restrictive case applies. The following table lists the
possible cases from most restrictive to least restrictive.

Most
restrictive

Least
restrictive

Service /
Feature

Called Len

Called Number

Specified

Specified

x leading digits specified

Specified

Specified

y leading digits specified, where y <
x

Specified

Specified

not specified

Specified

Not specified

not specified

“other”

Specified

x leading digits specified

“other”

Specified

y leading digits specified, where y <
x

“other”

Specified

Not specified

“other”

Not specified

Not specified

Call detail recording

On successful call attempts using ISDN Call-By-Call trunk groups, CDR records
the NSF specified by the call’s NSF IE. CDR refers to this information as the
ISDN Network Service (INS). The value passed to CDR is the 3-digit equivalent
of NSF IE. NSF information for Facility Type 2 calls (used with ISDN-Pri
Call-by-Call trunk groups) also is recorded if the NSF is available in the incoming
SETUP message.
If an outgoing Call-by-Call Service Selection call uses an interexchange carrier
other than the presubscribed common carrier, CDR records the 3-digit or 4-digit
Interexchange Carrier Code (IXC). CDR may not record the IXC properly if the
dialed-code format differs from the US IXC formats.
When a Call-by-Call Service Selection call is rejected because of a UAP, CDR
records the cause as an ineffective call attempt. The NSF recording takes place
also for the user-defined Facility Type 2. However, the NSF recording takes place
only if the NSF is available in the incoming SETUP message.

1634

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Calling party/billing number

Interactions
■

Multiquest Flexible Billing
Do not use a Service/Facility with the Facility Type field set to 2 or 3. NSF
processing is not performed for Facility Type 2. An NSF is not included in
the outgoing SETUP message for Facility Type 3.

■

Time-of-Day Routing
Any Time-of-Day Routing administration that affects routing preference
also affects Call-by-Call Service Selection. Use Time-of-Day Routing to
vary the IXC based on the time of day and day of the week.

Calling party/billing number
Calling Party Number/Billing Number (CPN/BN) allows the system to request
CPN/BN information from an AT&T network. The CPN is the calling party’s
telephone number. BN is the calling party’s billing number. The CPN/BN may
contain international country codes. CPN/BN can be used with an adjunct
application.
Brief Description

The following list shows the screens used to administer CPN/BN and the fields
you must use on each screen:
■

ISDN trunk group
— All fields including Per Call CPN/BN

■

ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown or ISDN Numbering — Private
— All

■

Processor Channel Assignment (See the DEFINTY services documentation
for information about this screen.)
— All

On the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Trunk Group screen, assign
all fields needed to provide an ISDN-PRI link between the system and the adjunct.
Set the Per Call CPN/BN field to can-only, can-pref, bn-only, or bn-pref as
required to make sure that CPN/BN information is sent with a call-offered event
report to the adjunct.
On the Processor Channel screen, assign all fields for one data link. The system
can support only one interface.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1635

Features and technical reference

Related topics

See ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1730 for an overview of ISDN capabilities.
See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers
for information on using Calling Party Number and Billing Number with
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Inbound Call Management. Complete all
screens required to administer ACD.
See the DEFINTY services documentation for information about the
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System parameters screen.

Calling party number restriction
With Calling Party Number (CPN) Restriction, you can administer individual
phones to restrict sending CPN information on outgoing calls (per call restriction).
Also, phone users can use a phone button or a FAC to restrict CPN information on
individual outgoing calls (per line restriction). CPN Restriction works on any
trunk that supports MFC signaling.
Per Line CPN Restriction overrides any outgoing trunk group CPN
administration. Per Call CPN Restriction overrides any Per Line CPN Restriction
for the phone, and it also overrides any Trunk Group administration for sending
the calling number. For a tandemed ISDN call, only the Tandem Trunk Group’s
“sending calling number” administration applies.
Interactions

CPN Restriction is not supported on:

1636

■

local switch station-to-station calls

■

calls originated from attendant console or data module

■

DCS calls (DCS CPN information is not affected by CPN Restriction)

■

UDP calls

■

TAC calls where the Per Line CPN Restriction field on the * screen is y or
r, or when the Per Call CPN Restriction FAC is dialed before the TAC

■

non-ISDN calls that must be tandemed

■

Per Call CPN Restriction over ASAI and CTI interfaces

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support

CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and
CIDR support
Previous IP packet addressing and routing procedures for the TN799
Control-LAN circuit pack have not always been compatible with Avaya
MultiVantage customers’ evolved networks. Quality of Service (QoS) features are
necessary to provide superior call quality for voice-over-IP (VoIP) signaling.
Although classful IP addressing structures were used in the beginning of VoIP
development, enhancing C-LAN support of Classless Inter-Domain Routing
(CIDR) and the closely-related Variable Length Subnet Mask (VLSM) paradigms
provide the Avaya MultiVantage platforms with enhanced IP addressing and
routing flexibility, while ensuring customer-network compatibility.
Configurations/Platforms

To use CIDR and IP QoS, the TN799DP Control-LAN circuit pack is required for:
■

Avaya Media gateways (DEFINITY CSI, DEFINITY SI, DEFINITY R,
S8700 Media Server, and S8700 Media Server)

■

Avaya™ S8100 Media Servers

To use CIDR and IP QoS, the TN799DP C-LAN circuit pack is not required for:
■

S8300 Media Server

The S8300 Media Server uses the its processor CLAN feature. The S8100 Media
Server with a CMC1 and S8100 Media Server with a G600 can use either its
processor CLAN feature or a TN799DP Control-LAN circuit pack.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1637

Features and technical reference

Windows Operating System

Whether the TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack tags frames with VLAN and
user-priority values is administered on the IP Network Region screen. However,
for the processor CLAN function on S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 and
S8100 Media Server with a G600, the operating system also controls tagging.
■

If the IP Network Region screen is administered to tag, but the Windows
operating system is set to not tag, then the processor CLAN function will
not tag.

■

If the Windows operating system is set to tag, but the IP Network Region
screen is administered to not tag, then the S8100 Media Server with a
CMC1 or S8100 Media Server with a G600 fill in the VLAN_ID and
802.1p fields of the extended ethernet header, but with the VLAN_ID to 0,
and the priority to 0.

Tagging is administered on S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 and S8100 Media
Server with a G600 as follows:
1. Log on to S8100 Media Server with a G600 Media Gateway/ S8100 Media
Server with a CMC1 using the Windows log-in.
2. Double-click the Intel PROSet icon in the Control Panel or in the system
tray.
3. Select the first adapter from the list and right click on it.
There are three adapters; PCLAN uses the first one.
4. In the menu that appears, click Add VLAN.
You may see a dialog regarding 802.1 tagging. This tagging must be
enabled for VLAN support.
5. Enter the VLAN ID and VLAN Name.
The VLAN Name is for information only and does not have to match the
name on the switch.
6. Click OK.

1638

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

CLAN and processor CLAN QoS and CIDR support

Linux Operating System

Whether the TN799 Control-LAN circuit pack tags frames with VLAN and
user-priority values is administered on the IP Network Region screen. However,
for the processor CLAN function on the S8300 Media Server with a G700, the
operating system also controls tagging. The IP Network Region screen and the
bash command under the Linux operating system both set the same entries in a
configuration file. There is no difference between setting them through one user
interface versus the other.
Tagging is administered through the bash command line as follows:
vlanconfig -c -d device -v vlan_id [-i ip_address] [-g gw_address] [-m netmask]
[-e on|off] [-f]
vlanconfig -r -d device -v vlan_id [-nf]
vlanconfig -q [-d device] [-v vlan_id]
-c

will create/change an interface

-r

will remove an interface

-q

will query an interface

-d device

create/change, remove, or query this device
(valid with the -c, -r, and -q options)

-e on|off

enable or disable the interface
(valid only with the -c option)

-f

force the command to execute
(valid only with the -c and -r options)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1639

Features and technical reference

Interactions

Signaling to other switches or adjuncts can be done through the CLAN and the
processor CLAN function.
If you have an R11 connected to an older system that does not support 802.1p and
802.1Q VLANs on their signaling channels, you can administer it to be in a
network region where these things are administered to no.
If you decide to ignore the above advice and attempt signaling from a new system
that is using 802.1p and 802.1Q VLANs on their signaling channels to an older
system that does not support these protocols, then whether signaling information
would:
■

Reach the destination, with the network using the frames’ VLAN and
priority information, or

■

Reach the destination, but without having been given VLAN or priority
treatment, or

■

Be dropped, either by the destination or by an intermediate device, depends
on the capabilities of the switches or hubs used in the data network and
how they are configured.

The third possibility, “all frames dropped,” means no signals get through between
the MultiVantage switch and the other device.

1640

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of restriction

Class of restriction
You use COR to define the types of calls your users can place and receive. Your
system may have only a single COR, a COR with no restrictions, or as many
CORs as necessary to effect the desired restrictions.
You will see the COR field in many different places throughout the MultiVantage
System - when administering phones, trunks, agent logins, and data modules, to
name a few. You must enter a COR on these screens, although you control the
level of restriction the COR provides. You must administer a COR for the
following objects:

555-233-506

■

Agent LoginID

■

Access Endpoint

■

Announcements/Audio Sources

■

Attendant Console

■

Authorization Code — COR Mapping

■

Console-Parameters

■

Hunt Groups

■

Loudspeaker Paging

■

Data Modules

■

Remote Access (each barrier code has a COR)

■

Station

■

Terminating Extension Group

■

Trunk Groups

■

Vector Directory Number

Issue 5 October 2002

1641

Features and technical reference

Called-party and calling-party restrictions

Called-party and calling-party restrictions are the basis for all CORs. When no
restrictions are needed, assign a single COR with called-party and calling-party
restrictions set to none. You can use this COR for unrestricted telephones, trunk
groups, TEGs, UCD groups, DDC groups, data modules, attendant groups, and
individual attendant extensions.
The called-party restriction is checked only at the called terminal, module,
attendant console, zone, or group, even if a call redirects from one telephone to
another. For example, if a called terminal (with no terminal restrictions) has Call
Forwarding active to a restricted terminal, the call still completes.
Inward restrictions

You can use inward restrictions to permit users to receive only internal calls.
Inward restrictions prohibit users at assigned telephones from receiving
public-network, attendant-originated, and attendant-extended calls.
The COR of the originally-called extension is the only one checked unless you
administer 3-way COR check on conference and transfer calls. Denied calls are
routed to intercept tone, a recorded announcement, or the attendant for Direct
Inward Dialing (DID) calls.
Manual terminating line restrictions

You can use manual terminating line restrictions to allow users to receive calls
only from an attendant or that were extended by an attendant. Calls can redirect to
a manual terminating line-restricted telephone. The COR of the originally-called
extension is the only one checked.
Local Central Office (CO), foreign exchange (FX), and Wide Area
Telecommunications Service (WATS) calls are routed to the attendant. DID calls
are routed to an announcement or the attendant. Telephone calls are routed to
intercept treatment.
Origination restrictions

You can use origination restrictions to prohibit users from originating calls. These
users can still receive calls.

1642

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of restriction

Outward restrictions

You can use outward restrictions to prevent users from placing calls to the public
network. These users can still place calls to other telephone users, to the attendant,
and over tie trunks. If necessary, an attendant or an unrestricted telephone user can
extend a call to an outside number for an outward-restricted telephone user.
When outward restriction is applied to the Calling Party Restriction field on the
Class of Restriction screen, calls coming into a trunk with that COR will be
denied if they make use of the AAR/ARS feature.
Public restrictions

Public restrictions prohibit users from receiving public-network calls. Denied
calls are routed to an intercept tone, a recorded announcement, or the attendant.
Public restrictions still allow users to receive internal calls from other telephones
or calls that were extended from the attendant.
Termination restrictions

You can use termination restrictions to prohibit users from receiving any calls.
These users can still originate calls. DID or Advanced Private-Line Termination
calls route to a recorded announcement or the attendant.
Fully restricted service

Fully restricted service prevents specific users from making or receiving
public-network calls. Fully-restricted users cannot use authorization codes to
deactivate this feature.
Calls from the public network to a fully-restricted extension redirect to intercept
treatment or to the attendant. If the call redirects to the attendant, the attendant’s
display indicates the call was redirected because of fully restricted service
(FULL).
There are circumstances where an extension with fully restricted service can
access or be accessed by the public network.
Miscellaneous terminal restrictions

You can use miscellaneous terminal restrictions to prohibit users from accessing
other specific terminals. Restricted calls are routed to intercept tone.
Miscellaneous restriction groups apply on a per-COR basis. However, you can
assign the same COR to more than one facility. Facilities with the same COR may
be like facilities (such as two telephones) or different facilities (such as a
telephone and a trunk group)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1643

Features and technical reference

Miscellaneous trunk restrictions

You can use miscellaneous trunk restrictions to prohibit users from accessing
specific trunk groups, such as WATS or CO trunk groups. Any or all trunk groups
can be in a miscellaneous-trunk-restriction group. Restricted calls are routed to
intercept tone.
Toll and TAC-Toll restrictions

Toll restrictions prevent users from placing public-network calls to certain
toll-call numbers. Toll restriction is not a COR; you assign Toll restrictions to
outgoing trunk groups on the Trunk Group screen. You disable TAC-toll
restrictions for specific outgoing trunk groups on the Trunk Group screen.
Interactions
■

AAR/ARS
Originating FRLs are assigned via a COR. Termination and Miscellaneous
Restrictions do not apply to ARS/AAR calls.

■

AAR/ARS Partitioning
Partition Group Numbers are assigned via a COR.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
The COR assigned to a telephone’s primary extension also applies to calls
originated from a bridged call appearance of that extension on another
terminal.

■

Call Coverage
Users who normally are restricted from calls can still receive calls directed
to them via Call Coverage. When a call goes to coverage, the called party’s
(not the covering party’s) restrictions are used.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
If a call is restricted between the forwarding and forwarded-to extensions,
Call Forwarding is denied. Restrictions are always checked when Call
Forwarding is activated, but not when a call is forwarded.

■

Call Vectoring
When a call is directed to a VDN extension, the COR of the caller and the
VDN are compared to determine if the caller can access the associated call
vector.

1644

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Class of restriction

■

Class of Service (COS)
In some cases, the COR can be overridden by the COS. See the Trk-to-Trk
Restriction Override field documented with the ‘‘Class of Service’’ on
page 672.

■

Controlled Restriction
Restrictions assigned via Controlled Restriction override COR restriction.

■

Emergency Access to Attendant
Emergency Access to Attendant calls are not restricted by COR.

Interactions for called-party and calling-party restrictions
■

Night Service
Night Service and Night Station — Trunk Answer From Any Station
override Inward, Manual Terminating Line, and Public Restrictions.

■

Tie-Trunk Access
Incoming dial-repeating tie-trunk calls can be completed directly to an
inward-restricted or public-restricted extension but cannot be extended by
an attendant to an inward-restricted telephone.

■

Transfer
Incoming trunk calls cannot be transferred to an inward-restricted
extension when a 3-way COR check is made.
Incoming trunk calls can be transferred from an unrestricted extension to
an inward-restricted or public-restricted extension if the 3-way COR check
on Conference is overridden.

Interactions for fully restricted service restrictions
■

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
Since COR information is not passed over Release Link Trunks (RLT),
fully restricted service allows all CAS calls. Therefore, CAS allows a
public network call to complete to a fully-restricted station.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Fully Restricted Service allows all DCS calls because COR information is
not transparent for DCS. DCS can allow a public network call to be
completed to a Fully Restricted station.

■

Power Failure Transfer
All authorization features are bypassed when the switch is in Emergency
Transfer Mode.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1645

Features and technical reference

■

Hunt Group
The COR assigned to the Hunt Group is checked on calls redirected by the
DDC or UCD of the hunt group. Extensions in the hunt group that have
Fully Restricted Service can receive calls from the public network (via the
hunt group) if the COR of the Hunt Group does not have Fully Restricted
Service.

■

Personal Central Office Line
Do not assign fully restricted service to users who have a personal CO line.
If you do, you will be paying for a CO line that no one can use!

■

Remote Access
If a barrier code is entered during connection to remote access, the code’s
associated COR is used for authorization checks. If remote access does not
require a barrier code, then the default barrier code’s COR is used. Remote
Access can require an authorization code instead of or in addition to the
barrier code. If an authorization code is required, the authorization code’s
associated COR overrides the barrier code’s COR.

Do not assign fully restricted service to a station with the following features or
conditions:
■

Abbreviated Dialing

■

Bridged Call Appearance

■

Attendant stations

■

Night Service stations

■

Stations that are Call Coverage or Send All Calls points

■

Stations that are Call Forward destinations

■

Stations that are Call Pickup points

Interactions for miscellaneous terminal and trunk restrictions
■

AAR/ARS
AAR or ARS access to a trunk group overrides miscellaneous trunk
restrictions.

■

Abbreviated Dialing Privileged Group Number List
A telephone user with authorization to access an Abbreviated Dialing
Privileged Group Number List can place calls to any number on that list.
COR assignments are not checked.

■

Privileged System Number List
A telephone user with authorization to access a Privileged System Number
List can place calls to any number on that list. COR assignments are not
checked.

1646

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Conference

Conference
The Conference button allows multiappearance telephone users to make up to six
party conference calls without attendant assistance. This button also allows
single-line telephone users to make up to three party conference calls without
attendant assistance.
Considerations
■

A single-line telephone can have up to 6 parties on a conference call, if
each conferee adds another conferee. For example, one user can add a
party, who then adds a third party, and so on.

■

If you do not allow trunk-to-trunk connections and a telephone releases
from a conference call (where all of the other parties were connected to the
conference via trunks), then all parties are disconnected.

■

If an analog single-line set has Call Wait active and creates a conference
call, Call Wait is rendered inactive as long as the single-line set is on the
call. For example, caller A on an analog set talks to caller B, flashes to talk
to caller C, and flashes to conference B and C. Then, if caller D calls caller
A, Call Wait is denied.

■

Users of Digital Communications Protocol (DCP), Hybrid, and wireless
phones can conference a call on hold. If there is only one call on hold, no
active call appearances, and an available call appearance for the
conference, a user can initiate the conference process without taking the
call out of hold. When the Conference button is pressed, Avaya
MultiVantage assumes the conference is for the call on hold, and the
conference feature works as usual.
If there is more than one call on hold, the user must make a call active in
order to include it in a conference. If the user presses the Conference button
with two or more calls on hold, Avaya MultiVantage will ignore the
conference attempt since it will not know which call the user wants to
conference. If there are calls on hold and an active call, pressing the
Conference button will start the conference process for the active call.

■

555-233-506

You can allow users to abort a conference operation that is in progress by
hanging up the phone. You set this parameter with the Abort Conference on
Hang-Up field on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. When a
user hangs up the phone while trying to conference a call, the existing call
is placed on hold, and the conference operation is aborted.

Issue 5 October 2002

1647

Features and technical reference

Conference/Transfer Toggle/Swap

Conference/Transfer Toggle/Swap allows users to toggle between two parties in
the middle of setting up a conference prior to connecting all parties together or to
consult with both parties prior to transferring a call. The display also toggles
between the two parties. This is not available on attendant consoles.
Selective Conference Party Display, Drop, and
Mute

Selective Conference Party Display, Drop, and Mute allows any user on a digital
station with display or on an attendant console to use the display to identify all of
the other parties on a two-party or conference call. The user presses a feature
button while on the call that puts the station or console into conference display
mode. The user then can scroll through the display of each party currently on the
call by repeatedly pressing the feature button. The display shows the party’s
number and name (when available).
The user then could do either of the following:
■

The user can selectively drop the party currently shown on the display with
a single button push. This can be useful during conference calls when
adding a party that does not answer and the call goes to voice mail.

■

The user can selectively mute the party currently shown on the display with
a single button push. This puts the selected party in “listen-only” mode.
This can be useful during conference calls when a party puts the conference
call on hold and everyone on the call is forced to listen to music-on-hold.
The user can mute that party so the conference call can continue without
interruption. The muted party can then rejoin the call by pressing the # key
on their telephone.

Meet-me Conference

Meet-me Conference allows users to set up a dial-in conference of up to six
parties. Meet-me Conference uses Call Vectoring to process the setup of the
conference call. Meet-me Conference can be assigned optionally to require an
access code. If an access code is assigned, and if the vector is programmed to
expect an access code, each user dialing in to the conference call must enter the
correct access code to be added to the call. The Meet-me Conference extension
can be dialed by any internal or remote access users, and by external parties if the
extension number is part of the customer’s Direct Inward Dialing (DID) block.

1648

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Conference

No Hold Conference

No Hold Conference allows a user that is actively on a call to call another party
and set up a conference call without interrupting the current call. The called party
is added to the conference call as soon as they answer. Once the conference call is
established, the call proceeds like a normal conference call. This feature can be
used on a multiple-line digital telephones.
Interactions
■

Bridged Call Appearance
A bridged call appearance can be used to make conference calls. A bridged
appearance can bridge onto a conference call only if there were never 6
parties on the conference.

■

Call Vectoring
A call to a VDN can be included as a party in a conference call only after
vector processing terminates for that call (for example, after a successful
route-to command).

■

Class of Restriction (COR)
If the Restriction Override field is set to all, the COR of the party being
added is always checked against the COR of the party controlling the
add-on, but the new party’s COR is not checked against any other
conferee’s CORs.

■

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
When a multifunction telephone (BRI/Digital/Hybrid) dials sufficient
digits to route a call, but could route differently if additional digits were
dialed, the telephone does not recognize the Conference or Transfer
buttons. The user must delay dialing for 3 seconds or dial # to indicate that
the call can be routed based on the digits already dialed. The Conference or
Transfer buttons are then recognized and the switch completes the call.

■

VDN in a Coverage Path
Calls in an established conference will not cover to a VDN.
Once a call covers to a VDN, a conference cannot be established until the
call is delivered to an extension and vector processing ends.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1649

Features and technical reference

Related Topics

See the ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795 screen for the
following conference-related fields:
Public Network Trunks on Conference Call
Conference Parties With Public Network Trunks
Conference Parties Without Public Network Trunks
Conference Tone
Abort Conference Upon Hang-Up

Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area
Network Gateway
Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network (LAN) Gateway (DLG) is
application software that is part of the MultiVantage software on the MultiVantage
server. It provides the functionality of the Adjunct/Switch Application Interface
(ASAI) using an Ethernet transport instead of a Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
transport. In the S8300 Media Server with a G700, connectivity is provided
through the processor’s Ethernet.
How it works

DLG listens for client connections over a well-known TCP port (5678) at a
specified IP address.
The client receives the DLG’s services by connecting to TCP port 5678 at the IP
address.
The client then exchanges TCP Tunnel Protocol messages with the DLG to
request a connection to a specific CTI link.
DLG authenticates the client based on its administration and then establishes or
refuses the connection.
Once the connection is established, the actual ASAI layer 3 messages are passed
transparently through the DLG. Each TCP connection to the DLG has a
one-to-one correspondence with a CTI link.

1650

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network Gateway

Hardware specifications
CallVisor ASAI
The CallVisor ASAI CTI link requires the following hardware components:
■

An Ethernet interface for connectivity to adjunct. The platform
configuration determines the Ethernet interface.
— The following platforms rely on the TN801B MAPD-based
DEFINITY LAN Gateway (DLG) as the Ethernet interface.
■

DEFINITY CSI

■

DEFINITY SI

■

DEFINITY R

■

S8100 Media Server configurations use the MAPD for
CVLAN applications only

— For S8100 Media Server configurations, the Co-Resident DLG can
use the C-LAN (TN799), the Processor Card (TN2314) or both the
C-LAN and Processor Card as its Ethernet interfaces.
— For S8300 Media Server with a G700 (with an Internal
Communications Controller, or ICC) the Co-Resident DLG relies on
the S8300 Media Server as its Ethernet interface.
■

Packet Controller circuit pack (for internal communications)

■

Packet Maintenance circuit pack

Co-Resident DLG

Supported by the following platforms:
■

S8300 Media Server with a G700

■

S8100 Media Servers

The Co-Resident DLG is not available for any of the following platforms:

555-233-506

■

DEFINITY CSI

■

DEFINITY SI

■

DEFINITY R

■

S8700 IP-Connect

■

S8700 Multi-Connect

Issue 5 October 2002

1651

Features and technical reference

Restriction — controlled
Controlled Restrictions allow a telephone user with console permission to activate
or deactivate specific restrictions.
Detailed description

Use Controlled Restriction to administer the following restrictions:
■

Outward — The telephone cannot place calls to the public network.

■

Total — The telephone cannot place or receive calls. (Allowed calls
include calls to a remote-access extension, terminating-trunk transmission
tests, and Emergency Access to Attendant calls.)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls are routed to the attendant or a recorded
announcement. All other calls receive intercept tone.

■

Termination — The telephone cannot receive any calls. Incoming calls are
routed to the attendant, are redirected via Call Coverage, or receive
intercept treatment.

■

Station-to-Station — The telephone cannot place or receive
station-to-station calls.

■

Toll — The telephone cannot place toll calls but can place free local calls.
NOTE:

Toll Restriction may be substituted for either the outward or
station-to-station restrictions. Administer this option on the
‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795.
To activate Controlled Restriction:
1. Dial the group or extension feature access code.
2. Dial the number for the type of restriction desired:
— 1 for outward/toll
— 2 for total
— 3 for termination
— 4 for station-to-station/toll
3. Dial the extension (Attendant Control — Extension) or the Class of
Restriction (COR) for a group of telephones (Attendant Control — COR).

1652

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Crisis Alert

Interactions
■

Call Coverage
Controlled Restrictions are not checked for covering users.

■

Call Forwarding
Controlled Restrictions for the forwarded-to extension are checked when
Call Forwarding All Calls is active.

■

Class of Restriction
All telephones with the same COR are affected by a group restriction.
When a call is placed, both individual and group restrictions are checked.

■

Priority Call
If a a station user or a Station-to-Station Restricted user activates priority
calling before they dial another station, they receive intercept tone. They
receive this tone whether you set Controlled Station to Station Restriction
on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen to y or to n.

■

Uniform Call Distribution
Calls dialed through the UDP are not restricted by Outward Restriction.

Crisis Alert
Crisis Alert notifies designated extensions when an emergency call is made, and
indicates the origin of the emergency call. This information allows the attendant
or other user to direct emergency-service response to the caller.
When a user places an emergency call, the system notifies the designated
extensions with audible and visual alerting. Audible alerting sounds like an
ambulance siren. Visual alerting consists of flashing of the CRSS-ALERT button
lamp and display of the caller name and extension.
When crisis alerting is active at the attendant console, the console is in
position-busy mode so that no other incoming calls interfere with the emergency
call. The console can still originate calls. The attendant must press the
POSITION-BUSY button to unbusy the console and then the CRSS-ALERT button to
deactivate audible and visual alerting.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1653

Features and technical reference

Multiple emergency calls

If an emergency call is made while another crisis alert is still active, the call will
be placed in queue. If you have administered the system so that all users must
respond, then every user must respond to every call. The calls may not necessarily
queue in the order in which they were made.
If you have administered the system so that only one user must respond, the first
crisis alert remains active at the phone where it was acknowledged. Any
subsequent calls are queued to the next available station in the order in which they
were made.
Alerting a digital pager

Crisis Alert to a Digital Pager allows users to receive crisis alert messages on a
pager. When a crisis alert call is originated in an emergency situation, a message
of 7 to 22 digits is sent to the pager and displays a crisis alert code, an extension or
room number, and a main number (if one is entered) so the pager knows the
location from which the emergency call originated. At the same time, an
emergency call connects over a Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
(CAMA) trunk.
To receive a crisis alert message, you need to administer at least one attendant or
digital set with a CRSS-ALRT button. With the Alert Pager field set to y, any station
with a CRSS-ALRT button and a pager receives the correct alert.
NOTE:

The crisis alert call uses 2-4 trunks; 1 trunk for the actual call and 1-3
trunks to notify the pager(s) depending on the number of
administered pagers.
Information about the alert can be viewed on the history report printed at the
journal printer and the emergency log.
Considerations

1654

■

Only one crss-alert button is allowed per attendant console or digital
station.

■

Consoles without a crss-alert button do not receive emergency notification.

■

If a user attempts to make an emergency call, but all trunks are busy, this
call will not generate an alert. If Outgoing Trunk Queuing is enabled for a
trunk group, the call will queue, but will not generate an alert.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Crisis Alert

Interactions
■

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
If CAS is enabled, the alert still goes to the local attendant.

■

Phone Display
When an emergency call is made and a crisis alert station with a
27-character display is notified, only 17 characters of the name field appear
on the first display line, followed by the extension. The second line
contains the last 3 characters of the name field, followed by the word
“EMERGENCY.” Characters 18 through 24 of the name field do not
appear at all.
Avaya recommends that you consider the display for emergency
notification when you complete the name field on the station screen. Put
the most important identifying information at the beginning of the field.

■

Tenant Partitioning
If tenant partitioning is active, attendants only receive emergency
notification from callers within their partition. If there is no attendant
assigned to a partition from which an emergency call originates, the switch
still sends a record of the call to the journal printer.

■

Terminal Self Administration
Those users who have the ability to administer their own phones do not
have the ability to disable a crisis alert button.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1655

Features and technical reference

Dial plan
The dial plan provides information to the switch on what to do with dialed digits.
A table defines the intended use of a code beginning with a specific first digit or
pair of digits. These digits tell the system how many digits to collect before
processing the full digit string. For example, a digit string beginning with 8 may
tell the system to wait for 4 more digits because this is the first digit of a 5-digit
internal extension.
All feature access codes, extensions and trunk access codes must be consistent
with the dial plan.
Detailed description

The dial plan provides information to the switch on what to do with dialed digits.
A table defines the intended use of a code beginning with a specific first digit or
pair of digits. These digits tell the system how many digits to collect before
processing the full digit string.For example, a digit string beginning with 8 may
tell the system to wait for 4 more digits because this is the first digit of a 5-digit
internal extension. For more information about the tables that define the dial plan,
see:
■

Dial Plan Analysis Table

■

Dial Plan Parameters

You can also administer a UDP as part of the dial plan to be shared among a group
of switches. For more information, see Uniform Dial Plan. So that calls route to
the desired switch, a UDP requires the following information:

1656

■

A PBX code, which represents the first 1 to 5 digits of an extension and can
range from 0 to 9xxxxxx with a maximum of 50,000 PBX codes on
DEFINITY R or 20,000 PBX codes on DEFINITY SI/DEFINITY CSI.

■

An RNX, which is associated with the PBX code and is used to select an
AAR pattern for the call. This information is required for each PBX code.
The 3-digit RNX can be an AAR location code or, for ENP calls, an ENP
code.

■

A PBX ID (1 to 63), which represents a specific switch (optional).

■

Whether or not the PBX code is local to this system (optional).

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Dial plan

Considerations
■

You cannot assign prefixed extensions longer than five digits (including
prefix) to intercom lists.

■

A TAC and an extension can share a first digit only if the extension is
shorter than the TAC.

■

Although extensions with the same first digit can have different lengths,
data-channel extensions must have the maximum number of digits to avoid
timeout problems for data calls that the switch automatically sets up, for
example, the CDR link.

■

An extension and a FAC can share the same first digit only if the extension
is longer as long as they are not used for AAR/ARS faxes. These
extensions work only within the switch; they do not work as remote UDP
extensions.

■

When you design your dial plan or add new information to your dial plan,
be careful if you assign the same first digit to more than one FAC. Your
system may need to distinguish between FACs with the same first digit by
using the Short Interdigit Timer field on the Feature Related System
Parameters screen.

Interactions

All dial-access features and services provided by the system require the dial plan.
■

Attendant Display and Telephone (Voice Terminal) Display
Prefixed extensions display without the prefix. The return call button
causes the prefix to dial, even though it does not display.

■

Integrated Services Digital Network-Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI)
When an ISDN-BRI station dials sufficient digits to route a call, but the
call could route differently if additional digits were dialed, the station does
not recognize the Conference or Transfer buttons. The user must delay
dialing for 3 seconds or dial # to indicate that the call can be routed based
on the digits already dialed. The Conference or Transfer buttons then are
recognized and the switch completes the operation.

■

Multifrequency (MF) Signaling
Flexible numbering is supported in countries using R2-MFC trunk
signaling without Group II tones. Different-length extensions can exist as
long as the extensions have different first digits.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1657

Features and technical reference

■

Property Management System (PMS)
PMS products accept only extensions of 5 digits or shorter. Therefore, a
customer using PMS cannot use 6/7-digit extensions.

■

Uniform Dial Plan
The following limitations apply to a DCS environment:
— Extensions that differ in length from the UDP do not distribute to
other switches.
— You can use only a single length in your UDP.

■

Single-Digit Dialing
■

A prefixed extension is still made up of a prefix and an extension of
up to five digits.

■

Mixed station numbering extensions can have 1 - 7 digits.

Distinctive ringing
Distinctive Ringing provides several ringing cycles to help telephone users and
attendants distinguish between incoming call types. Administer Distinctive
Audible Alerting on Feature-Related System Parameters for internal, external,
priority, and attendant originated calls. If the phone is a single-line analog, you
have to set this on the Station screen for each user.
Detailed description

You can administer system-wide distinctive-ringing cycles for the three basic call
types. Most installations use 1-burst for internal calls, 2-burst for external calls,
and 3-burst for priority calls. There are also non-administrable ringing signals for
Automatic and Dial Intercom calls, Manual Signaling, and Redirect Notification.
Normally if an internal phone user transfers an external call, the call rings as
internal. You can set a feature parameter (Update Transferred Ringing Pattern) to
make the call ring as an external call.

1658

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 trunk service

Considerations
■

If Distinctive Ringing is disabled, the system generates a 1-burst repetitive
tone for all incoming calls. This is useful for equipment interfaced by
analog lines, especially if you use off-premises station.

■

A single distinctive ring cycle is used for each new incoming call to an
off-hook telephone or headset. The system alerts a CALLMASTER
terminal with a single ring cycle whenever either the headset or the handset
is plugged into the headset jack.

■

Personalized Ringing

Interactions

The called party hears the user-selected ringing pattern for the distinctive
ring cycles.

DS1 trunk service
Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) trunk service uses bit-oriented signaling (BOS) and
multiplexes 24 channels (T1 service) or 32 channels (E1 service) into a single data
stream. DS1 can be used for voice or voice-grade data and for data-transmission
protocols. T1 trunk service multiplexes 24 channels into a single 1.544-Mbps data
stream. E1 trunk service multiplexes 32 channels into a single 2.048-Mbps
stream. Both T1 and E1 provide a digital interface for trunk groups.
For information about how to administer DS1 with enhanced administration, see
‘‘Signaling modes’’ on page 1662.
Brief description

DS1 trunk service provides a digital interface for the following trunks.

555-233-506

■

Voice-grade DS1 tie trunks

■

Alternate voice/data (AVD) DS1 tie trunks

■

Robbed-bit AVD (RBAVD) DS1 tie trunks

■

Digital Multiplexed Interface (DMI) tie trunks

■

Integrated Services Digital Network-Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI)
trunks

■

Central Office (CO) trunks

■

Foreign Exchange (FX) trunks

■

Remote-access trunks

Issue 5 October 2002

1659

Features and technical reference

■

Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS) trunks

■

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks

■

Main/Satellite tie trunks

■

Tie trunks that link Common-Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA) or
Enhanced Private Switched Communications Service (EPSCS) networks

■

Release-link trunks for Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)

■

Access trunks

■

Off-premises stations (also known as station-side DS1)

■

Access endpoints

DS1 also provides the following functions in public and private networks:
■

Electronic tandem networks (ETN) or tandem tie-trunk networks (TTTN)

■

Direct access to local exchange carriers

DS1 operational and signaling parameters

The table below provides the recommended combination of parameters for each
DS1 interface.
DS1 Circuit
Packs

# Trunk
Members

Bit Rate
Mbps

Companding

Signaling
Mode

TN722

1-23

1.544

mulaw

common-chan

Tie,
DMI-BOS,
CO2

robbed-bit

Tie

common-chan

Tie,
DMI-BOS,
CO2

robbed-bit

CO/DID/Tie

common-chan

Tie,
DMI-BOS,
C02

1-24

robbed-bit

CO/DID/Tie

1-23 (24th
is D-chan)

isdn-pri4

ISDN

1-24

isdn-ext4

ISDN

1-24
TN722B

1-23

1.544

mulaw

1-24
TN767D,
E3

1-23

1.544

mulaw

Trunk Type1

Continued on next page

1660

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 trunk service

DS1 Circuit
Packs

# Trunk
Members

Bit Rate
Mbps

Companding

Signaling
Mode

Trunk Type1

TN464B5

1-30

2.048

alaw/mulaw6

CAS

CO/DID/Tie

alaw

isdn-pri4

ISDN

isdn-ext4

ISDN

common-chan

Tie,
DMI-BOS,
CO2

robbed-bit

CO/DID/Tie

isdn-pri4

ISDN

1-31
1-31
1-23

TN464C,
D, E, F3,
and
TN2464

TN2242

1.544

mulaw

1-24
1-23 (24th
is D-chan)

1.5444

1-31 (16th
is D-chan)

2.048

1-24

1.5444

1-31

2.048

1-30

alaw/mulaw

ISDN
alaw/mulaw

isdn-ext4

ISDN

2.048

alaw/mulaw

CAS

CO/DID/Tie

1-30

2.048

alaw/mulaw

CAS

Tie

1-307

2.048

alaw/mulaw

isdn-pri

ISDN

Continued on next page

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

CO is any of the following trunk types: CO, FX, WATS.
Tie is any of the following trunk types: access, tie, tandem, RLT, APLT.
Common-channel DS1 circuit packs used in CO trunk groups must have a trunk type of auto.
Integrated CSU functionality is available only with the TN767D and TN464E or later-suffix DS1
circuit packs. Enhanced ICSU functionality is available only with TN767E, TN464F, and
later-suffix DS1 circuit packs.
Mixed-mode signaling is allowed. This means that if the signaling mode is isdn-ext or isdn-pri, a
port from that circuit pack may be used in any trunk group that allows robbed-bit signaling.
The TN464B’s companding is based upon the system companding that you administer.
ISDN-PRI calls are not guaranteed to work for the TN464B if the system’s companding is set to
mu-law.
The administered D-channel on the DS1 screen for ISDN-PRI cannot be a trunk group member.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1661

Features and technical reference

Signaling modes

Common-channel signaling (CCS) is an industry-standard technique where any
one of a group of channels carries the signals for the other channels. Avaya uses
the 24th channel of a group for signaling. This signaling technique differs from
24-channel signaling. When the system is configured for Facility-Associated
Signaling, 24-channel signaling uses the 24th channel in a DS1 facility to carry
signals. This technique also is called clear channel, out-of-band, or alternate voice
data (AVD) signaling.
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is similar to common-channel signaling and
is used only when the Bit Rate is 2.048 Mbps (the trunk is used with an E1
interface). Signaling is carried on the 16th channel.
Common-channel signaling and channel associated signaling provide a maximum
transmission rate of 64 Kbps for bearer channels.
Robbed-bit signaling is a per-channel signaling technique for transmitting
signaling bits on each channel in a DS1 facility. The least-significant bit in every
6th transmitted information frame is removed and replaced by a signaling bit. This
technique is also called in-band signaling. The maximum transmission rate for
each bearer channel with robbed-bit signaling is 56 Kbps.
ISDN-PRI signaling is carried on the 24th channel for a 1.544 Mbps connection
and on the 16th channel for a 2.048 Mbps connection.
Public network signaling administration for ISDN-PRI Layer 3

The table below shows Avaya MultiVantage public network access connections
for ISDN-PRI Layer 3.
Admin
value

B-channel
mtce msg

Country

Protocol supported

1-a

United States,
Canada

AT&T TR 41449/ 41459 (tested with AT&T
network, Canadian network, and MCI
network)

Service

1-b

United States

Bellcore TR 1268;
NIUF.302; ANSI T1.607

Restart

1-c

United States

NORTEL DMS-250 BCS36/IEC01

Service

1-d

United States

Telecordia SR-4287

Service
Continued on next page

1662

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

DS1 trunk service

Admin
value

Country

Protocol supported

B-channel
mtce msg

2a

Australia

AUSTEL TS014.1;
Telecom Australia TPH 1856 National ISDN
protocol

Restart

2b

Australia

ETSI ISDN protocol

Restart

3

Japan

NTT INS-NET

Restart

4

Italy

ETS 300 102

Restart

5

Netherlands

ETS 300 102

Restart

6

Singapore

ETS 300 102

Restart

7

Mexico

ETS 300 102

Restart

8

Belgium

ETS 300 102

Restart

9

Saudi Arabia

ETS 300 102

Restart

10 - a

United
Kingdom

ETS 300 102 (for connection to DASS
II/DPNSS through external converter)

Restart

10 - b

United
Kingdom,
Ireland

ETS 300 102 (Mercury); British Telecom
ISDN 30; Telecom Eireann SWD 109

none

11

Spain

Telefonica ISDN Specification

Restart

12 - a

France

VN4 (French National PRI)

None

12 - b

France

ETS 300 102 modified according to P10-20,
called Euronumeris

None

13 - a

Germany

FTZ 1 TR 6 (German National PRI)

None

13 - b

Germany

ETS 300 102

Restart

14

Czech
Republic,
Slovakia

ETS 300 102

Restart

15

Russia (CIS)

ETS 300 102

Restart

16

Argentina

ETS 300 102

Restart

17

Greece

ETS 300 102

Restart

18

China

ETS 300 102

Restart

19

Hong Kong

ETS 300 102

Restart

20

Thailand

ETS 300 102

Restart

21

Macedonia

ETS 300 102

Restart

22

Poland

ETS 300 102

Restart
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1663

Features and technical reference

Admin
value

Country

Protocol supported

B-channel
mtce msg

23

Brazil

ETS 300 102

Restart

24

Nordic

ETS 300 102

Restart

25

South Africa

ETS 300 102

Restart

ETSI - a

Europe, New
Zealand, etc.

ETS 300 102

Restart

ETS 300 102

None

ETSI - b

Continued on next page

EC500 Extension to Cellular
EC500 is an integrated mobility solution that offers users the freedom to work
anywhere, anytime, using any type of cellular or wireless phone. With EC500,
calls to an office number are extended to a cellular phone, allowing users to
receive work-related calls wherever they are and whenever needed. Additionally,
the cellular phone can be administered so that when an individual calls into the
office, the individual’s name and office phone number appear in the caller ID
display of the phone being called.
Capabilities of EC500
Office Caller ID

Depending on the XMOBILE Station administration, the EC500 cell phone gains
the identity of the user’s office extension when calling into the office switch.
When the EC500 user is administered to send the office caller ID and calls into the
office, the person receiving the call sees the office name and number of the caller,
not the cell phone caller ID. This type of administration provides both in-house
Caller Identification at the destination phone and allows the user to bridge onto
the office phone.
When the EC500 cell phone is administered to send office caller ID, this behavior
is in effect whether the EC500 extensions are enabled or disabled. However, while
someone else is using the line appearance on the office phone that is the same as
that administered for the EC500 cell phone call to send office caller ID, the office
caller ID is temporarily not available.

1664

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

EC500 Extension to Cellular

Call Waiting, Call Identification, and Voice Mail

EC500 allows use of standard cellular features such as incoming call waiting and
caller identification.
■

If the cell phone (and network) supports calling number identification, the
Avaya Communications Server delivers the calling number to it. For
internally originated calls, the calling number may be presented in either
the national numbering plan format (i.e. 10 digits) or as a less than 10 digit
extension, depending upon how it is administered. Some cellular phone
networks only pass calling number information in the national format while
others are more flexible.

■

If the cell phone (and network) supports call waiting, EC500 can be
administered to deliver a second call to the cell phone while it is busy on
another call. The cell phone features (i.e. swapping calls, conferencing the
calls) may then be used to answer the second call and manipulate the two
calls at the cell phone.

Since the cell phone is treated as a local extension on the Avaya Communications
Server, it can be completely integrated with the Corporate voice mail system
while retaining its own Cellular Service Provider voice mail. The office number
retains the primary extension on the Avaya Communications Server. Calls to the
office number simultaneously ring the office number and the cell phone. If neither
answer then standard coverage arrangements take effect. As needed, EC500 can
be disabled when not in use in order to ensure the use of the Corporate voice mail.
The System Administrator can control in-service and out-of-service status of the
bridged extensions through a busy out and release maintenance capability.
Receiving Calls

EC500 is a solution for delivering office calls to a cell phone through the Avaya
Communications Server.
With EC500, when a call is made to an office number with a mapped XMOBILE
bridge, the call is extended out of the Avaya Communications Server to alert a cell
phone. If the Avaya Communications Server is administered to send calling
number information, then it is presented to the cell phone. When the cell phone
answers the call, the Avaya Communications Server treats it like a local answer of
a physically connected station, and the following is true:

555-233-506

■

Status station of the XMOBILE station shows it off-hook. It shows both the
port used on the outbound loop back trunk group and the other connected
port.

■

Any office number busy indicators tracking the XMOBILE station light up
to show that it is busy.

Issue 5 October 2002

1665

Features and technical reference

■

Any other station linked to the call as part of a bridge or temporary bridge
is able to bridge on to that call.

Making Calls

Calls can be made to any number from the EC500 cell phone. Depending on how
the EC500 XMOBILE stations are administered, the EC500 cell phone can
function both as a standard cell phone and as an office extension when the calls
are made into the user’s office switch. Administering an EC500 cell phone to send
office caller ID allows the EC500 cell phone call to the switch to appear as a local
extension on the switch.
Feature Interactions

Generally, an XMOBILE station may be administered (and used) like an analog
station. The following are exceptions:
Cellular Service Provider Voice Mail

While XMOBILE stations may have standard Avaya Communications Server
voice mail coverage (i.e. AUDIX®), cell phones usually have voice mail coverage
from the Service Provider. Although there is no way to indicate a preference for
use of a specific system, there is a way to coordinate the two systems.
It is generally possible to set up the number of don’t answer rings so that one or
the other always answer first. However, there are coverage options in both the
Avaya Communications Server (busy, active, send-all-calls) and the network (cell
phone unavailable, network congested) that causes a call to immediately go to the
respective voice mail. Users should realize that an unanswered call might result in
a voice mail message in either mailbox.
Distinctive Alerting

Cell phones do not receive distinct rings for different types of calls.
Feature Access Codes

The cell phone can activate Avaya Communications Server features accessible via
the Avaya EC500 Access Number (Avaya Communications Server
Telecommuting Access number).
Message Waiting Indication

The cell phones cannot receive any form of message waiting indication directly
from the Avaya Communications Server.

1666

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

EC500 Extension to Cellular

Additional information

For additional information, see the EC500 documentation:
1. Access the Avaya website at http://avaya.com
2. Click Support.
3. Click Online Services.
4. Click Documentation.
5. Click Recent Documents.
6. Scroll down to the Wireless section.
7. Select EC500 Extension to Cellular.
You now can select from:
■

Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular Release 3 Troubleshooting
Guide, Issue 3, 210-100-102

■

Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular Release 3 Installation and
Administration Guide, Issue 4, 210-100-500
NOTE:

This document also provides end-user procedures, for
example, how users can enable or disable their EC500
capability.
■

555-233-506

Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular Release 3 User Guide, Issue 3,
210-100-700

Issue 5 October 2002

1667

Features and technical reference

Emergency Access to the Attendant
Emergency Access to the Attendant alerts an attendant if a telephone remains
off-hook for more than the administered period of time. It also enables a user to
place an emergency call to an attendant.
Detailed description

Emergency calls can be placed automatically by the system or dialed by system
users. Such calls can receive priority handling by the attendant.
Place emergency calls to the attendant in the following ways:
■

Automatically by the system
Assign a telephone the Off-Hook Alert option via COS. If the terminal is
left off-hook until intercept timeout, the (administrable) off-hook alerting
timer starts. If the terminal is still off-hook when the timer expires, an
emergency call is automatically placed to the attendant.

■

Dial access by a system user
A user can place an emergency call to the attendant by dialing the
Emergency Access to the Attendant feature-access code.

When an emergency call is placed, one of the available attendants receives visual
and audible notification of the call. If all attendants are busy, the call enters a
queue for emergency calls. Calls can be administered to redirect to another
extension if the queue is full.
An emergency call causes the following to occur:
1. The system selects the first available attendant to receive the call.
2. The attendant hears the emergency tone and sees the lamp associated with
the Emergency button, if assigned, light. If the console does not have
emergency-tone capability, the attendant hears normal ringing and sees the
display flash.
3. The attendant display shows:
— Calling-party identification
— Calling-party extension
— How many emergency calls remain in queue
An audit record is created for each emergency call. This record includes:

1668

■

Extension where the call originated

■

The attendant or attendant group that answered the call

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Emergency Access to the Attendant

■

Time of the call

■

The following known call results:
— Call Completed — Call answered at attendant or listed directory
number (LDN) night extension.
— Queue Full — Emergency-access queue is full; tries to redirect the
call to an emergency-access redirection extension.
— No Attd — No active attendants are available to receive the call;
tries to redirect the call to an emergency-access redirection
extension.
— Redirected Answered — Call is answered by the emergency-access
redirection extension.
— No Redirection Ext. — Could not redirect the call to the
emergency-access redirection extension because none are
administered.
— Attd Night Service — System is in night service. Will try to redirect
the call to attendant night service.
— Failed — Caller drops the call before it can be answered. Call was
either waiting in the attendant emergency queue, ringing at an
attendant console, or ringing at the LDN night extension.
— Redirected Abandoned — Caller drops the call before it can be
answered. Call had been redirected to the emergency-access
redirection extension.

You can generate an Emergency Access Summary Report of the emergency audit
records. Schedule the report for printing once a day at a designated printer. If the
switch has a journal printer Emergency Access to the Attendant audit records print
as the calls occur.
You can monitor emergency-access calls by displaying them at the administration
terminal. The command for listing emergency call events is list emergency. You
can use a from and to time option with the command. For example, if you enter
the command list emergency 8:00am 12:00pm, the report shows emergency call
events that occurred during that interval.
Considerations

555-233-506

■

The emergency tone cannot be silenced except by answering the
emergency call.

■

The system should have at least one day and one night attendant (or night
service station) for this feature to be useful at all times.

Issue 5 October 2002

1669

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
For a branch with CAS in effect, an emergency call reroutes to the branch
attendant group. If the branch does not have an attendant or if the branch is
not in CAS Backup Service, the call is denied.
If the branch PBX is in CAS Backup Service, an emergency call routes to
the backup position and is handled as any other non-emergency call.

■

Class of Restriction (COR)
An emergency call to the Attendant overrides all restrictions on the COR.

■

Individual Attendant Access
An emergency call cannot be placed to an individual attendant.
Emergency calls have priority over other calls to an individual attendant,
only if they are assigned a higher priority on the Console Parameters
screen.

■

Inter-PBX Attendant Service
For branches with Inter-PBX Attendant Service in effect, an emergency
call reroutes to the local attendant group. If the branch does not have an
attendant or if the attendant is not on duty, the call is denied.

■

Night Service
When Night Service is in effect, emergency calls route to the night
destination. Such calls are included on the Emergency Audit Record, and
the call is designated as Emergency Night in the audit trail.
When an attendant is in night service, you must assign either a night station
or a redirect extension. Otherwise emergency calls to the night attendant
hear a busy tone.

■

Off-Hook Alerting automatically places an emergency call to the attendant.

■

Priority Queue
You can change the priority of emergency calls to equal or lower than that
of other types of calls.

■

Remote Access
An emergency call cannot be placed through Remote Access.

■

Restriction — Controlled
An emergency call overrides any controlled restriction.

1670

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Emergency calls

Related screens
■

Class of Service (Off-Hook Alert)

■

Console Parameters
— Queue Priorities

■

Feature-Related System Parameters
— Reserved Slots for Attendant Priority Queue
— Time before Off-Hook Alert
— Emergency Access Redirection Extension

■

Hospitality
— Extension of Journal/Schedule Printer
— Time of Scheduled Emergency Access Summary Report

■

Attendant Console - Feature Button Assignments
— em-acc-att

■

Feature Access Code (FAC)
— Emergency Access To Attendant Access Code

Emergency calls
Enhancement to E911 includes the ability to report the Emergency Location
Extension as the CPN by manually correlating the CPN with the phone location,
even if the phone is moved.
Detailed description

If the IP Emergency Calls field on the Station screen is set to extension, the
MultiVantage system uses the Emergency Location Extension as the E911 CPN
instead of the IP phone’s extension.
The Enhanced 911 (E911) systems installed in many jurisdictions in the U.S. are
equipped so that by dialing a service code (911 in the U.S.), a victim of a fire,
accident, crime, or medical emergency may quickly access a public safety agency
that will dispatch the appropriate response. The public E911 system maintains a
database that stores location and background information to aid public safety
agencies in responding quickly with the appropriate assistance. Information about
the calling party can be triggered by the transmission of a Caller’s Emergency
Service Identification (CESID) number over Centralized Automatic Message
Accounting (CAMA) trunks when the call originates from behind a PBX. 911

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1671

Features and technical reference

calls from a station on a PBX not equipped with CAMA trunks (or an adjunct
computer system associated with CAMA trunks) will not provide the E911 system
with the information required to identify the location of the person placing the
call. Instead, the E911 system will only be able to identify the location of the trunk
termination at the PBX.
This feature allows transmission of identifying information in the form of the
CESID over CAMA trunks as to the extension number of a DID station associated
with the calling party. The calling party may be at or near a station on a remote
port network, or may be at a remote location served by an off-premises station.
Considerations
■

Emergency response personnel might go to the wrong location when
extensions and IP phones are moved without notifying the system
administrator.

■

The ANI that is sent to the CO might not be the same extension as that of
the phone used to dial emergency personnel. If the call is disconnected and
emergency personnel call back they will call the ANI and may not be able
to reach the person who placed the call. However, if the emergency
location phone had a crisis alert button, the return call would be answered
by someone who was notified of the extension making the emergency call.
That person could forward the return call from the emergency personnel to
the extension that made the emergency call. See “Crisis Alert”.

■

Emergency response personnel can be sent to the wrong location during the
time between an IP phone registering after a move and the time that the
system administrator updates the emergency location extension field.

■

Enhancements to E911 only applies to emergency calls on CAMA and
ISDN trunks.

■

Several call appearances should be provided on the last phone in the
Emergency Location Extension’s coverage path and station hunting path.

■

Emergency Location Extensions should not include voice mail, automated
attendant or announcement extensions.

Emergency Transfer
Emergency Transfer provides service to and from the local telephone company
CO during a power failure or when service is impaired. Emergency Transfer is
also called Power Failure Transfer; the terms are synonymous.

1672

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Extended user administration of redirected calls

Detailed description

Emergency Transfer allows analog telephones (500- or 2500-type) to access the
local CO and to answer incoming calls during a power failure.
Each DEFINITY server cabinet supports Emergency Transfer panels via the AUX
connectors on the rear panel. The transfer is initiated when:
■

a transfer panel or associated cabinet loses power.

■

someone manually activates the Emergency Transfer switch on the
associated maintenance circuit pack

■

the software determines that service for that cabinet is severely impaired

You cannot activate any other system features during a complete system power
failure.
Emergency Transfer panels are available in multiples of five telephones, which
may be pulse-dialing or touch-tone phones. You must use pulse dialing if the CO
accepts dial pulses only. Each telephone can be connected to a separate CO.
When your system is not in Emergency Transfer mode, transfer phones can be
used as regular telephone.
Interactions
■

Night Service
If a power failure occurs when the system is in night service, the system
automatically returns to night service when power returns.

Extended user administration of
redirected calls
Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls allows you to change your
lead-coverage path or your call forwarding from any local (on-site) or remote
(off-site) location.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Invalid extensions and invalid station security codes are logged as security
violations. The extension or incoming trunk from which the command
sequence was dialed, the FAC, and the dialed command string appear on the
Monitor Security-Violations Station Security Codes screen or report if
Security Violation Notification is enabled.
For administration information about tracking security violations, see ‘‘Setting up
security violations notification’’ on page 401.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1673

Features and technical reference

Detailed description

This feature does not change Call Coverage, nor does it change Call Forwarding
All Calls or the Call Forwarding Busy/Don’t Answer. It merely allows you to
select between one of two previously administered coverage paths or to change
your forwarding from any on-site or off-site location.
Telecommuting access extension

The telecommuting access extension allows you to use Extended User
Administration of Redirected Calls from off-site. If you want to quickly disable
the feature for all users, change the Telecommuting Access Extension to blank.
If you are operating in a DCS environment, you need to assign a different
telecommuting-access extension to each switch and tell your users which
extension they should use. You can use Extended User Administration of
Redirected Calls from any of the DCS nodes, but you need to dial the
telecommuting-access extension of the node on which your station is defined
before using the feature access code.
Extended User Administration of Redirected
Calls and COS

The following table shows the relationship between COS and a your ability to use
call forwarding at the your station without a security code or from any on-site or
off-site location with a security code.
Table 55. COS and Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls of Call
Forwarding

If the user’s COS are set to these values

Then the user’s call forwarding capability
is

Call
Fwd
All
COS

Call
Fwd
B/DA
COS

Extended
Call Fwd
Activate
All COS

Extended
Call Fwd
Activate
Busy D/A
COS

Users can
forward calls
from their station
without a
security code

Users can forward
calls from their
station or from
another location with
a security code

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

1674

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Extended user administration of redirected calls

COR

The COR controls the use of the change coverage option of Extended User
Administration of Redirected Calls. This means that, if the Can Change Coverage
field on the COR screen is set to y, you can use the Change Coverage FAC to
change your coverage option.
How to use from an attendant or
console-permissions station

To use Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls from an attendant or
console-permissions station is the same as that described for a user, except
console-permissions stations and attendants do not need to enter a station security
code, nor do they need to press the pound key (#).
How to use from an off-site location

To use Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls from off-site, you must
first access the telecommuting-access extension. If you make the request via
Direct Inward Dialing (DID), you must precede the extension with the correct
public-network prefix. If you make the request via a trunk group dedicated to
remote access of this feature, you must dial the public-network number for the
trunk group.
The system provides dial tone after you access the telecommuting access
extension. At that point you can enter only one of the four FACs associated with
this feature. The 4 FACs associated with Extended User Administration of
Redirected Calls are:
■

Extended Call Fwd All Activate

■

Extended Call Fwd Busy D/A Activate

■

Extended Call Fwd Deactivation

■

Change Coverage

When the system provides dial tone, you can proceed with the steps outlined for
on-site use of the feature in ‘‘Training users’’ on page 373.
How to interrupt the command sequence

To interrupt the command sequence and begin again, you can enter an asterisk (*)
at any point before the second pound sign. The system provides dial tone, and you
can begin the command sequence at the point of entering your extension. (You
should not enter the FAC again.) The interrupted command sequence is not
recorded as an invalid attempt.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1675

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Bridged Appearance
When the pound key (#) is pressed from a bridged appearance immediately
following any of this feature’s four FACs, the system assumes the currently
active bridged extension will be administered. The station security code of
the currently active bridged extension must be entered after the initial # to
successfully complete the command sequence.
If the station has only bridged appearances, the station’s extension must be
dialed after the FAC to successfully complete the command sequence,
since the station’s extension is not associated with any appearances.

■

Call Coverage
Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls interacts with this
feature only in that system users can change their lead-coverage path.
An attempt to activate Send All Calls is denied if the currently active
coverage path does not allow Send All Calls in its coverage criteria.
However, if you activate Send All Calls when it is allowed, and then
change your coverage path to one that does not allow Send All Calls, the
Send All Calls button remains lit and Send All Calls automatically resumes
if you change back to the coverage path that allows it.

■

Call Forwarding
When Call Forwarding is active, the status lamps for the active features for
that extension are lit. When Call Forwarding is deactivated, the status
lamps for both Call Forward All and Call Forward Busy/DA buttons for
that extension are extinguished. Off-net forward destinations are not
allowed.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Assign a different telecommuting access extension for each switch. You
can use Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls from any of the
DCS nodes, but you must dial the extension of the node on which your
station is defined before dialing the FAC.

■

Security Violation Notification (SVN)
Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls security violations are
tracked and reported by SVN for station security codes, if it is enabled.

1676

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Extended user administration of redirected calls

■

Tenant Partitioning
The telecommuting access extension is always automatically assigned to
Tenant Partition 1, so it can be accessed by all tenants.
The tenant number of the extension administered must be accessible by the
tenant number from which the Extended User Administration of Redirected
Calls FAC is dialed or the request is denied. If the FAC is being dialed on
site, the tenant number of the station or attendant must have access to the
tenant number of the extension administered. If the FAC is dialed off site,
the tenant number of the incoming trunk must have access to the tenant
number of the extension administered.

Related topics

See ‘‘Setting up telecommuting’’ on page 357 for information about configuring
telecommuting.
See ‘‘Telecommuting Access’’ on page 1213 for information about and field
descriptions on the telecommuting screen.
See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on page 1085 for information about
and field descriptions on the Remote Access screen.
See ‘‘Setting up remote access’’ on page 370 for information about configuring
remote access.
See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for information about and field
descriptions on the Feature Access Code screen.
See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for information about and field descriptions
on the Class of Service screen.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about and field descriptions on the
Station screen.
See ‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658 for information about and field
descriptions on the Class of Restriction screen.
See ‘‘Setting up call forwarding’’ on page 364 for information about configuring
call forwarding.
See ‘‘Assigning coverage options’’ on page 363 for information about assigning
two coverage options.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1677

Features and technical reference

Facility and Non-Facility Associated
Signaling
Facility Associated Signaling (FAS) allows an ISDN-PRI T1/E1 interface
D-channel to carry signaling information for all the bearer (B) channels on its
associated span.
Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) allows 1 ISDN-PRI T1/E1 interface
D-channel to carry signaling information for up to 300 bearer (B) channels on its
associated spans. In other words, a D-channel can carry signaling information for
numerous B-channels located on different DS1 circuit packs.
NOTE:

NFAS is only valid for T1/E1 Country Protocol 1. Digital T1 service is also
sometimes called “DS1” to distinguish it from analog T1 service.
ISDN-BRI trunks don’t support Non-Facility Associated Signaling.
Brief Description
D-Channel Backup with NFAS

When NFAS is used, a backup D-channel can be administered to improve
reliability. The system switches to the backup D-channel if a signaling link failure
occurs on the primary D-channel span.
One D-channel is administered as the Primary D-channel and another D-channel
is administered as the Secondary D-channel. These assignments ensure that both
D-channels are in the same state at the same time and neither can be used to carry
B-channel traffic at any time. The Primary D-channel is given precedence over the
Secondary D-channel.
When D-Channel Backup is activated, all calls that have been answered are
preserved. However, some call-related information may be lost. Calls that are not
answered when D-channels are switched also may lose call-related information.
The figure below shows a possible configuration involving 3 ISDN-PRIs between
a DEFINITY Server and another DEFINITY Server or the public network.

1678

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling

r781799 CJL 060996

Figure Notes

1. Avaya Media Server

4. ISDN-PRI controlled by D-Channel

2. Secondary D-Channel

5. Network Far-End Switch DEFINITY
Server

3. Primary D-Channel

Figure 58.

ISDN-PRI Configuration

With T1 (24 channel) interfaces, 2 of the ISDN-PRIs contain a D-channel and 23
B-channels, while the other ISDN-PRI contains 24 B-channels. One of the
D-channels is the Primary D-channel, and the other is the Secondary D-channel.
Together, this pair of D-channels signals for all 70 (23+24+23) B-channels in the
3 Primary Rate Interfaces.
Since the D-channels are signaling for more than one ISDN-PRI facility,
D-Channel Backup requires the use of NFAS. At any given time, one of the two
D-channels is carrying Layer 3 signaling messages, while the other D-channel is
active at layer 2, but in standby mode only. Any layer 3 messages received over
the standby D-channel are ignored. Since only one of the D-channels can be active
at a time, load sharing between the two D-channels is not possible. The two
D-channels can provide signaling for only a predefined set of B-channels and
cannot dynamically backup other D-channels on other interfaces.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1679

Features and technical reference

D-Channel Backup activation
■

D-Channel Failure
If the signaling link fails on the active D-channel (D1) or the hardware
carrying D1 fails, the system sends a message over the standby D-channel
(D2). D2 then becomes the active D-channel and carries all subsequent
signaling messages. When the signaling link or hardware on D1 recovers
from the failure, D1 becomes the standby D-channel.

■

System Technician Commands
If a system technician commands that a D-channel switchover take place,
the first action taken by the system is to tear down the signaling link on D1.
After this is completed, a message is sent on D2 to request that D2 become
the active D-channel. D2 then becomes the active D-channel and the
switchover is complete.

Screens used to administer FAS and NFAS

The following list shows the required screens and the fields you must use on each
screen:
■

Signaling Group (Also see the DEFINTY services documentation for
information about this screen.)
— all

■

ISDN trunk group
— Port
— Sig Grp

■

DS1 Circuit Pack
— Signaling Mode

Guidelines for administering FAS and NFAS

Coordinate the following when implementing FAS and NFAS:

1680

■

Decide which T1/E1 facilities will use FAS.

■

Decide which of the remaining T1/E1 facilities carries D-channel signaling
information on the 16th (E1) or 24th (T1) channel. For those channels that
have a D-Channel Backup, D-channel pairs must be allocated.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling

■

Define Signaling Groups. A Signaling Group is a group of B-channels for
which a given D-channel (or D-channel pair) carries the signaling
information. Each Signaling Group must be designated as either a FAS or
NFAS Signaling Group.
— A FAS Signaling Group must contain all the ISDN B-Channels on
the T1/E1 interface associated with the group’s D-channel, and
cannot contain B-channels from any other DS1 circuit pack. For
24-channel DS1 boards, some of the DS1 ports may use in-band
(robbed-bit) signaling and be members in a tie trunk group rather
than an ISDN trunk group. These tie trunks cannot be members of a
Signaling Group.
— There is no restriction on which T1/E1 ports can belong to an NFAS
Signaling Group. Normally, an NFAS Signaling Group consists of
one or two D-channels and several complete T1/E1 interfaces.
— If a Signaling Group contains only a subset of a T1/E1’s B-channels
(ports 1–12, for example), it is considered an NFAS Signaling
Group, not a FAS Signaling Group. The remaining B-channels on
the T1/E1 are then assigned as members of another NFAS Signaling
Group.

■

An Interface ID must be assigned to each T1/E1 facility in an NFAS
Signaling Group. For example, if the B-channels in a Signaling Group span
3 T1/E1 facilities, a unique Interface ID must be assigned to each of the 3
facilities. This designation is required to uniquely identify the same
B-channel (port) number on each of the T1/E1 facilities in the Signaling
Group. Therefore, this interface must be agreed upon by both sides of the
interface and administered prior to initialization.

■

Primary and Secondary D-Channel Backup must be agreed upon by both
sides of the interface and administered prior to initialization. If the IDs do
not match, the signaling group will come up but calls will fail.

The following screens show the DS1 interface configuration for NFAS. When
implementing FAS and NFAS, the DS1 screen must be submitted first, followed
by the Interface Link and associated forms, followed by the ISDN-PRI trunk
group, Signaling Group, and Trunk Group Members screens.
The Interface Link and associated screens may be administered at any time after
the DS1 screens have been administered, with the following restrictions:

555-233-506

■

A D-channel cannot be assigned on a Signaling Group screen unless the
associated link is disabled.

■

A trunk member cannot be assigned unless its associated Signaling Group
has been administered.

Issue 5 October 2002

1681

Features and technical reference

The Signaling Mode field must be specified for each DS1 circuit pack. Because
this circuit pack has the Signaling Mode field set to isdn-ext, all trunks on this
circuit pack are signaled using either inband robbed-bit signaling or a D-channel
on another DS1 circuit pack.

DS1 CIRCUIT PACK
Location: 1B17
Bit Rate: 2.048
Signaling Mode: isdn-ext
Interface Companding: 5law
Idle Code: 11111111
MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
Slip Detection? n

Name: _______________
Line Coding: hdb3

Remote Loop-Around Test? n

Screen 305. DS1 Circuit Pack screen

Next, Signaling Groups are administered using Signaling Group screens.

SIGNALING GROUP
Associated Signaling? n
Max number of NCA TSC: 0
Primary D-Channel: 1B1524
Max number of CA TSC: 0
Secondary D-Channel: 1B1624 Trunk Group for NCA TSC: __
Trunk Group for Channel Selection: _____
Trunk Brd
Interface ID
Trunk Brd
Interface ID
1:
1B15
0
11:
____
__
2:
1B16
1
12:
____
__
3:
1B17
2
13:
____
__
4:
____
__
14:
____
__
5:
____
__
15:
____
__

Group Number : 1

Screen 306. Signaling Group screen (Group 1) — D-channel Backup, Three
DS1 Interfaces

SIGNALING GROUP
Associated Signaling? n
Max number of NCA TSC: 0
Primary D-Channel: 1B1824
Max number of CA TSC: 0
Secondary D-Channel: ______ Trunk Group for NCA TSC: __
Trunk Group for Channel Selection: _____
Trunk Brd
Interface ID
Trunk Brd
Interface ID
1:
1B17
0
11:
____
__
2:
1B18
1
12:
____
__
3:
____
__
13:
____
__
4:
____
__
14:
____
__
5:
____
__
15:
____
__

Group Number : 2

Screen 307. Signaling Group screen (Group 2) — No D-channel Backup,
Two DS1 Interfaces

1682

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling

SIGNALING GROUP
Associated Signaling? y
Max number of NCA TSC: 0
Primary D-Channel: 1B1924
Max number of CA TSC: 0
Trunk Group for NCA TSC: __
Trunk Group for Channel Selection: _____

Group Number : 3

Screen 308. Signaling Group screen (Group 3) — Facility Associated
Signaling

Note the following details in the Signaling Group screens shown above:
■

Signaling Group 1 B-channels on DS1 circuit packs (boards) B0 and B1 are
signaled by D-channel pair B1524 (see the Primary D-channel field) and
B1624 (see the Secondary D-channel field).

■

Signaling Group 2 B-channels on board B1 are signaled by D-channel
B1824.

■

Board B0 has no D-channel. The B-channels on board B0 can be signaled
by either D-channel pair B1524/B1624 (Signaling Group 1) or D-channel
B1824 (Signaling Group 2).

■

The DS1 interface on board B19 (Signaling Group 3) is a Facility
Associated Signaling case. Note that the Secondary D-channel and Trunk
Board/Interface ID fields are not displayed when the Associated Signaling
field is y.

The following 2 communications-interface screens must be completed for the
ISDN-PRI interface on DEFINITY SI configurations if the D-channel is switched
through the TN765 Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack:
■

Interface Links screen — Used to create an association between the
D-channel on a DSI circuit pack and the port on a TN765 Processor
Interface circuit pack used for this link.

■

Processor Channels screen — Used to assign processor channels to the link
administered on the Interface Links screen.

Finally, trunk ports are added to the ISDN-PRI trunk group and to Signaling
Groups.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1683

Features and technical reference

.

Page Y of X
TRUNK GROUP
Administered Members (min/max): xxx/yyy
Total Administered Members: xxx
GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Port
Code
Sfx
Name
Night
1: 1B1501___
___________
_________
2: 1B1523___
___________
_________
3: 1B1601___
___________
_________
4: 1B1623___
___________
_________
5: 1B1701___
___________
_________
6: 1B1709___
___________
_________
7: 1B1716___
___________
_________
8: 1B1724___
___________
_________
9: 1B1801___
___________
_________
10: 1B1823___
___________
_________
11: 1B1901___
___________
_________
12: 1B1923___
___________
_________
13: _________
___________
_________
14: _________
___________
_________
15: _________
___________
_________

Sig Grp
_
_
_
_
1
1
2
2
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Screen 309. ISDN-PRI Trunk Group screen — Trunk Members with
Required Signaling Group

The Sig Grp column on the above trunk group screen is completed as follows:
■

If a DS1 interface appears in one and only one Signaling Group, then Sig
Grp may be left blank because the system automatically populates the field
with the correct Signaling Group.

■

If a DS1 circuit pack appears in more than one Signaling Group, then the
Signaling Group numbers must be entered in the appropriate fields before
submitting the screen.

Related topics

See ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1730 for an overview of ISDN capabilities.

Facility restriction levels and
traveling class marks
Facility Restriction Levels (FRL) and Travelling Class Marks (TCM) allow
certain calls to specific users, and deny the same calls to other users. For example,
you can give certain users access to CO trunks to other corporate locations, and
you can restrict other users to less expensive, private-network lines.

1684

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Facility restriction levels and traveling class marks

Detailed Description
FRL

The switch compares the FRL of the outgoing phone to the FRL of either the
terminating trunk group or, for AAR and ARS, the routing preference specified on
the Routing Pattern Table. If the FRL of the originator is equal to or greater than
the terminating or route pattern FRL, the call continues. Otherwise, the call is
blocked.
TCM

If an intertandem tie-trunk group is used for a call, then a TCM is outpulsed as the
last digit. If the intertandem tie-trunk FRL is equal to or greater than the
terminating FRL, the call continues. If the originating FRL is less than the
terminating FRL, the TCM is compared with the tie-trunk’s FRL. If the TCM is
greater than or equal to the FRL, the call continues.
Call-originating facilities

Any of the following can originate an AAR or ARS call. Each is assigned an FRL
via an associated COR.
■

attendant

■

data terminal capable of keyboard dialing

■

incoming tie-trunk group from a subtending location

■

incoming intertandem tie-trunk group (at a tandem switch)

■

incoming access tie-trunk group (links a remote main switch to a tandem
switch)

■

phone

■

remote access user

Phones and all incoming tie-trunk groups use the FRL of their COR. On
attendant-extended calls, the attendant-group FRL is used. If Individual Attendant
Access assigned, the individual attendant’s COR FRL is used. Data terminals use
the FRL of the COR assigned to the associated data module.
A remote access call uses the FRL of the COR assigned to the dialed barrier code.
If a barrier code is not required on remote access calls, there is no FRL.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1685

Features and technical reference

Call terminating facilities

Any of the following trunk types can serve as the termination point for an AAR or
ARS call:
■

Tie trunk — excluding RLT, but including CCSA and Enhanced Private
Switched Communications Services (EPSCS) access trunks

■

WATS

■

CO

■

FX

■

ISDN-PRI

Each of these outgoing trunk groups has an assigned COR that contains an FRL.
However, this FRL is never used in an AAR or ARS call. A terminating-side FRL
for AAR/ARS calls is assigned in the route pattern, not to the outgoing trunk
group.
FRL guidelines

You assign the FRL to the trunk group within the route pattern. You can use the
same trunk group in more than one route pattern, and the same trunk group can
have a different FRL in a different pattern. You can assign the same FRL to more
than one trunk group.
Be consistent in FRL assignments. For ease of assignments, always use FRL 0 or
1 for a trunk group that everyone can access. If you use a range of 0–5 in one
pattern, use the same range in another pattern if all users can access the
first-choice route.
Assign a COR with an FRL of 0 to a group of users to restrict them from making
outgoing calls. Use any other number for the FRL on your first choice route
pattern. This denies access to any trunk group for the users, because all
trunk-group FRLs are greater than 0.
You assign FRLs for remote access users through the remote-access barrier codes.
You can assign up to 10 barrier codes, each with its own COR and FRL. The
simplest way to assign these FRLs is to duplicate the on-premises FRLs, then
relate the appropriate barrier code to users who need remote access.

1686

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Generalized route selection

Example

The following is an example of how FRLs can be assigned in a COR:
■

FRL0 — 911 access only

■

FRL1 — Local calls only

■

FRL2 — FRL1 plus home area-code calls using WATS

■

FRL3 — FRL2 plus use of local lines for all calls in the home area code

■

FRL4 — FRL3 plus calls to all the USA, using WATS only

■

FRL5 — FRL4 plus calls to all the USA, using local lines

■

FRL6 — FRL5 plus international calls

■

FRL7 — Reserved

■

Call Detail Recording

Interactions

If 15-digit CDR account codes are used, the FRL field in the CDR record is
overwritten with the account code.
Related topics

See ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 to find more information on fields on the route
pattern screen.

Generalized route selection
Generalized Route Selection (GRS) is built into AAR and ARS. This switch uses
GRS to look at various route patterns and preferences and decide which
preference is most appropriate at the time. With GRS, voice and data calls can be
sent along separate routes or be integrated on the same trunk group. If the type of
transmission is incompatible with the endpoint (for example, a digital data call is
sent to an analog phone), GRS provides a conversion resource such as a modem
from a modem pool to complete the call.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1687

Features and technical reference

Detailed description

GRS recognizes one or more BCC for each trunk group preference in the route
pattern. BCC defines the type of information being sent as voice or data. The
switch checks the BCC for all trunk groups to see if the route selected and type of
call are compatible. The BCC is assigned to the route preference on the Route
Pattern screen.
GRS chooses a preference with BCC set to yes in this order: BCC 2, BCC 1, BCC
3, BCC 4.
When an exact match is not found in any route-pattern preference, calls with
originating BCCs listed are treated as follows:
■

BCC of 0 (such as voice or analog modem)
GRS routes a BCC 0-originated call with no match. This allows voice
transfer to data when making a data call.
Since BCC 0 (voice) has no Information Transfer Capability (ITC), the
switch selects an ITC from the route pattern when a BCC 0 call is routed as
a data call. Table 56 shows how the ITC codepoint in the Bearer Capability
IE is determined.

Table 56. Determination of ITC codepoint
Originating
Endpoint’s
ITC

Routing Preference’s ITC
restricted

voice

both
endpoint

both unrestricted

x

voice

unrestricted
x

voice

ITC
codepoint
in BC IE

restricted
x

voice

■

unrestricted

unrestricted
x

unrestricted

BCC 2
If there is no preference with BCC 2 yes, GRS chooses a preference with
BCC 0 yes. If BCC 0 yes does not exist, the call is blocked.

■

BCC 1, 3, or 4
BCC 4 (DCP/DMI Mode 0), BCC 1 (Mode 1), and BCC 3 (Mode 3) calls
requires an exact match in order for the call to complete. ITCs must also
match.

1688

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Generalized route selection

Example

Assume a route pattern is set up with BCC 0 and BCC 2 set to yes in preference 1,
and BCC 1, BCC 3, and BCC 4 set to yes in preference 2.
A voice or Mode 2 data call accessing this pattern uses preference 1. A Mode 1,
Mode 3, or Mode 0 data call uses preference 2, regardless of what trunks are
available in the first preference.
Data modules and GRS

For all endpoints, the switch automatically determines its current operating mode
when a data module begins operations. The default is Mode 2.
Because call origination from a data module determines the mode used on the call,
you should press the Originate/Disconnect button if you change data options. This
way, the right mode is assigned to the next call.
Table 57 lists the BCC for different types of information and endpoints.
Table 57. BCC assignment
Endpoint

Voice/Data Mode

BCC

Phone

Voice

0

Data Line Circuit Pack

2

2

Voice Data Set

2

2

Modular Processor Data Module

0,1,2

1,2,4

Modular Processor Data Module-M1
(For ACCUNET Switched 56 kbps Service)

1

1

Modular Trunk /Data Module

2

2

Digital Terminal/ Data Module

2

2

510D Personal Terminal

2

2

Digital Communications Protocol Interface

0,2,3

2,3,4

7400A Data Module

2

2

3270T Data Module

3

3

3270C Data Module

3

3

3270A Data Module

2,3

2,3

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1689

Features and technical reference

Legend
BCC

Type

DCP/DM
I Mode

0

Voice-Grade Data and Voice

None

1

56 kbps Data (Mode 1)

1

2

64 kbps Data (Mode 2)

2

3

64 kbps Data (Mode 3)

3

4

64 kbps Data (Mode 0)

0

Related topics

See ‘‘Route Pattern’’ on page 1096 for information on how to set up route
patterns.

Group paging
Group paging allows users to make an announcement over a group of digital
speakerphones.
■

You can create up to 32 paging groups on one DEFINITY server.

■

Each group can have up to 32 extensions in it.

■

It’s OK to assign the same extension to different groups.

Brief description

You, the switch administrator, create paging groups and assign extensions as
members to the appropriate groups. Each group is assigned its own identifying
extension, and users page the group by dialing this extension. When a user dials
the group’s extension, the switch activates the speakers on all the phones in the
group. Speakerphone paging is one-way communication: group members hear the
person placing the page but cannot respond directly.
Restrictions

Pages aren’t always heard on every phone in a group. An extension does not
transmit a group page if it has an active or ringing call or if it is off-hook.
Listeners may drop a page by disconnecting. See ‘‘Interactions’’ on page 1691 for
features that block group pages.

1690

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Group paging

Controlling access to paging groups

Each paging group is assigned a class of restriction, so you can provide or deny
access to different classes of users by setting calling permissions appropriately.
Note that you can administer classes of restriction so remote callers can make
speakerphone pages. If you don’t want to allow remote users to page, you may
want to set calling permissions (on the Class of Restriction screen) for VDNs and
trunk groups so that neither can initiate pages.
Interactions
■

Attendant Intrusion
Attendants cannot intrude on group pages. If the attendant tries to intrude
on the paging originator, the intrusion attempt succeeds. However, all
group page members are able to hear both the paging originator and the
attendant.

■

Auto Exclusion and Manual Exclusion
Bridged appearances are not allowed on the page. Therefore, the Auto
Exclusion and Manual Exclusion features are disabled. Auto Exclusion is
not activated because there are no bridged appearances to alert when the
page terminates.

■

Auto Hold
Auto Hold does not put a group page on hold.The page is dropped and the
incoming call is answered.

■

Automatic Callback
Automatic Callback is disabled when calling an active page group.

■

Bridging
Bridging is disabled on this feature. A bridged appearance of a group
member does not receive any indication of a call when the page arrives.
The bridged appearance cannot bridge onto the page.

■

Call Coverage
Pages do not follow group members’ coverage paths. A page group cannot
be a coverage point.

■

Call Park
Group members who receive a page cannot park the call.

■

Call Pickup/Direct Call Pickup
Other extensions cannot pick up a group page.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1691

Features and technical reference

■

Call Forwarding
Group pages cannot be forwarded.

■

Conference
Neither group members receiving a page nor the originator of the page can
conference the page to other extensions.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Page groups cannot be administered across DCS switches. DCS is not
supported.

■

Do Not Disturb
If a member of a page group activates Do Not Disturb, that member does
not receive pages.

■

Go to Cover
The Go to Cover feature is ignored because group pages do not follow
coverage.

■

Hold
The originator of a group page can put the page on hold, but group
members cannot.

■

Leave Word Calling
Leave Word Calling (LWC) is disabled. A page group cannot receive
messages.

■

Manual Signaling
The Manual Signaling feature cannot be assigned to a page group.

■

Send All Calls
If a member of a page group activates Send All Calls (SAC), that member
does not receive pages.

■

Service Observing
Group page members and page originators cannot be observed while active
on a page.

■

Transfer
Group members cannot transfer a page.

■

Trunks
Trunks cannot be added to a page group.

1692

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

Vectoring

■

Paging groups cannot be explicitly added to a vector path.
NOTE:

If a vector has a collect digits step and a route-to digits step, a person
who uses the vector can enter a page group extension. Ensure that the
COR of the vector restricts the vector from calling the page group if
this action is not desired.
Related topics

See ‘‘Paging over speakerphones’’ on page 479 to administer group paging.

Hospitality features
This section describes the following Avaya MultiVantage features that are tailored
to hospitality applications:
■

‘‘Attendant Room Status’’ on page 1693

■

‘‘Automatic Selection of DID Numbers to Guest Rooms’’ on page 1694

■

‘‘Automatic Wakeup’’ on page 1695

■

‘‘Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers’’ on page 1701

■

‘‘Do Not Disturb’’ on page 1701

■

‘‘Names Registration’’ on page 1704

■

‘‘Property Management System Interface’’ on page 1707

■

‘‘Suite Check-in’’ on page 1714

Each feature indicates how to administer the Attendant Console screen and
Hospitality screen to enable the hospitality features.
Attendant Room Status

Attendant Room Status allows the attendant to see whether a room is occupied
and each room’s housekeeping status.
NOTE:

This feature is available only if you have Enhanced Hospitality enabled on
the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen and you have the DXS
lamp field on the console. (Contact your Avaya account representative for
information.)

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1693

Features and technical reference

Check In/Check Out Status

You can allow the attendant to review the check-in/check-out status by assigning
an occ-rooms (occupied rooms) button on the Attendant Console screen.
When the attendant activates check-in/check-out mode, the DXS lamps light for
every occupied room.
Maid Status

You can allow the attendant to review the maid status by assigning a maid-stat
button on the Attendant Console screen.
When the attendant activates the maid status mode, the system prompts the
attendant to enter the room status number (1 to 6) that they want to review. You
can define these six room states on the Hospitality screen. Once they enter a room
state, the display shows the definition of the room state and lights the DXS lamps
for every room in that state.
While the console is in maid status mode, the attendant can review another room
state by entering the room status number.
NOTE:

The attendant cannot make outgoing calls via the keypad while the console
is in maid status mode; they must return to normal mode.
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers to Guest
Rooms

Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for Guest Rooms allows you to give guests,
upon check-in, phone numbers that provide direct dial access to their room. The
switch automatically chooses a number from a rotating list of available DID
numbers to be assigned to a guest’s room. This provides a measure of privacy to
your guests because providing the phone number does not give away the room
number.
Callers would use a 7- to 10-digit number from outside of the hotel. For calls from
inside the hotel, callers would use either the room/extension number or the 2- to
5-digit DID number.
For example, when a check-in is done from the switch (via the CHECK-IN button on
the console) or remotely via a Property Management System (PMS) system, the
switch assigns a DID number to the checked-in room from a list that is assigned at
the switch. All calls made to the DID number are directed to the room as if the
room was called directly.
NOTE:

The following process presumes you have established a dial plan and
administered all DID numbers to their extensions (on the Station
screen) as XDID station types.

1694

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

Interactions
■

Coverage
XDID ports perform hunt-to before coverage. After hunting, coverage
criteria for these calls is based upon the DID, but the coverage points are
based upon the hunted-to phone (room).

■

Coverage
Do not assign a Class of Service (COS) with Client Room enabled for the
XDID station types.

Automatic Wakeup

Automatic Wakeup allows attendants, front desk users, and guests to request an
automatic wakeup call at a later time.
If the Dual Wakeup field on the Hospitality screen is y, each extension is allowed
two wakeup call requests within one 24-hour time period. If the Room Activated
Wakeup with Tones field is y, wakeup calls can be activated via tones that prompt
users for the time they want to be called.
Detailed description

Wakeup requests may be placed from 5 minutes to 23 hours and 55 minutes in
advance of a wakeup call.
Depending on how automatic wakeup is administered, when a user answers a
wakeup call, the system can provide:
■

a recorded announcement

■

a speech-synthesis announcement

■

music

■

silence

All wakeup times entered into the system round to the nearest five minutes. For
example, a requested time of 6:58 am stores in the system as 7:00 am. The switch
bases time-validity checks on the rounded figure.
Wakeup calls are placed within two and one-half minutes of the requested time,
and never reroute, forward, or go to coverage. Before placing the wakeup call, the
system overrides Do Not Disturb for the extension.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1695

Features and technical reference

If a wakeup-call attempt is not answered or if the extension is busy, the system
tries two more times at 5-minute intervals. If the call does not complete after 3
attempts, the switch leaves an LWC message for a designated extension (usually
assigned to a button on the attendant console or backup phone). The system
maintains a complete record of all wakeup-call activity for the past 24 hours.
Users with touch-tone dialing can enter a wakeup request (if they have a speech
synthesizer circuit pack and no display set or if Wakeup Activation via Tone is
enabled) or can have the front desk set a wakeup time. Users with rotary-dial
phones call the front desk to request a wakeup call.
Activate Automatic Wakeup either by dialing the FAC or by pressing the
automatic wakeup entry button. If the system has a speech synthesizer circuit
pack, the system provides voice prompting. If the user has a display set, the
system provides display prompting.
■

Voice Prompting with Room Activated with Tones Off
A guest enters his or her own wakeup-call request. The request is entered
only for the extension where the call originates.
After the user dials the Automatic Wakeup FAC, the system generates
voice prompts (the system must have a voice synthesizer circuit pack).
These prompts tell the user when to enter information and what
information is needed. Use touch-tone buttons to enter the information. The
system accepts 24-hour or standard time. The user dials the automatic
wakeup FAC again to change or delete a wakeup request.
If the user makes invalid entries, a standard message generates that notifies
the user of the error. The system then repeats the original prompt for input.
If invalid entries occur on the second try, the system informs the user to
dial the attendant for assistance.

■

Voice Prompting with Room Activated with Tones On
A guest enters his or her own wakeup-call request. The request is entered
only for the extension where the call originates.
After the user dials the Automatic Wakeup FAC, the system generates
recall dial tone (the system does not need a voice synthesizer). This dial
tone prompts the user to enter the time in a 24-hour, 4-digit format.
Confirmation tone means that the wakeup request is successful.

■

Display Prompting with Dual Wakeup Off
Display prompting is provided to attendants, front-desk users, and other
users with display-equipped phones. Administer front-desk users (or any
other phones you want to grant permissions to) with a console permission
COS to perform the same actions as the attendant. Other users can enter a
wakeup request only for the extension where the call originates.

1696

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

The attendant presses the automatic wakeup entry button to activate the
feature. If the attendant is on an active call with a system user, the user’s
extension displays as the default extension after pressing the pound sign
(#). If the displayed extension is not the extension of the user requesting the
wakeup call, the attendant can change it. Display prompting continues until
the attendant enters all necessary information and the request for the
wakeup call is confirmed.
If a condition exists that does not allow the system to accept the wakeup
request, the system displays the reason for denial. Wakeup requests are
denied for one of the following reasons:
— Too Soon — Indicates that the requested wakeup time is within the
current five-minute wakeup interval
— System Full — Indicates that the maximum number of wakeup calls
is reached
— Interval Full — Indicates that the maximum number of wakeup calls
in any 15-minute interval is reached
The attendant can change or cancel a wakeup call request at any time.
■

Display Prompting with Dual Wakeup On
Display prompting with Dual Wakeup works the same as Display
Prompting with Dual Wakeup off (described in the previous text), except
that after the first wakeup request is entered, the user is prompted for the
second wakeup request.

When the system places a wakeup call, one of the following occurs:
— Extension Is Busy — The wakeup call is placed again later.
— No Answer — The extension rings for 30 seconds. If the call is not
answered, the system tries again later.
— Ringing Blockage — If four or more ports on the same
analog-circuit pack are already ringing, the system waits 16 seconds
and tries again. If the second attempt is blocked, the call has failed
and the system waits 5 minutes before trying again.
— Call Is Answered — The guest answers the wakeup call and hears
either music, a recorded announcement, the speech-synthesizer
announcement, or silence.
— System Reset — indicates that a system reset level 1 or system reset
level 2 occurred while the system attempted to place the wakeup
call. Calls affected by these conditions are treated as other wakeup
attempts.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1697

Features and technical reference

If a wakeup call is incomplete because of a busy, no answer, ringing blockage, or
system reset, the system attempts to place the call 2 more times at 5-minute
intervals. If the call is not completed after 3 attempts, the system leaves an LWC
message to account for the failed attempt.
A special extension, called the Extension to Receive Failed Wakeup LWC
Messages, is administered exclusively for receiving failed wakeup-call LWC
messages. When a failed message is retrieved, the display shows the date, time,
and extension for the failed wakeup-call attempt.
Assign an automatic-message waiting (AMW) button and associated lamp to
attendant consoles or front-desk terminals. The number associated with the button
can be the wakeup-messages extension. The AMW lamp lights when a failed
wakeup message is waiting. The user retrieves the message by invoking
coverage-message retrieval on the wakeup-message extension. The user presses
the AMW button to place the console or phone in coverage-retrieval mode. The
user then retrieves the failed wakeup-call attempt messages. Only attendants and
specified phone users can retrieve and delete failed wakeup messages.
The system maintains an audit-trail record of wakeup-call activity for the past 24
hours. The wakeup-call buffer can only hold a number of records equal to the
maximum number of stations administrable on the switch. For example, if a
maximum of 200 stations is administrable, only 200 automatic-wakeup records
are stored.
You can display wakeup events at the management terminal, or print to a
designated printer. If the system has a journal printer, wakeup events print as they
occur.
The audit trail record contains the following information:
■

Type of event:
— Request — A new wakeup-call request is made.
— Change — The time is changed on an existing wakeup-call request.
— Cancel — A wakeup request is canceled.
— Move To — The wakeup request for this room moves to another
room.
— Move From — The wakeup request for another room moves from
the old room to the new room.
— Move-Cancel — A wakeup request from another room replaces the
request for this room.

1698

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

— Swap — A room swap occurs and at least one of the rooms has a
wakeup request. Wakeup calls swap when a room swap is
performed. A journal entry is made for each room. If the room
receives a wakeup call as the result of the swap, the time of the call
is provided in the entry. If the room loses a wakeup call as the result
of the swap (and has not received another), the time is not present in
the entry.
— Completed — The wakeup call completes successfully.
— Not Completed — The wakeup call failed.
— Skip — The wakeup call is skipped. This event occurs if the system
time advances past the requested time of a wakeup call.
■

Time of the event

■

Extension number receiving the call

■

Time of the wakeup request

■

Extension (or 0 for the attendant) where the event took place

■

Number of call attempts that were placed

■

An indication of why a wakeup-call attempt failed

In addition, all wakeup-time changes are recorded. This record shows the original
time requested and the changed time. The audit-trail record is not backed up and
all wakeup data is lost if a system failure occurs.
Schedule the following reports for printing on a daily basis:
■

■

Wakeup Activity report – summarizes wakeup activity for each extension
that had any wakeup activity over the past 24 hours.
Wakeup Summary report — gives an hour-by-hour summary of the
number of scheduled wakeup calls, the number of wakeup calls completed,
and a list of extensions. The report covers all automatic-wakeup events for
each hour over a 24-hour period.

With VDNs and multiple announcements, you can choose as the announcement
extension a VDN that reaches one announcement if the system clock is less than
12:00 and another if the system clock is greater than 12:00. The hotel guest hears
“good morning” before noon and “good evening” after noon. Or, a business
customer can choose as the announcement extension a VDN that points to an
extension assigned to a quorum bridge, with the wakeup time as a scheduled
teleconference time. When the wakeup call is completed, the customer
automatically connects to the teleconference bridge.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1699

Features and technical reference

You can administer a multiple announcement to repeat. To enable repeating
announcements, enter announcement type integ-rep command on the Recorded
Announcement screen. With repeating integrated-message functionality, the
announcement keeps repeating from when the first guest (of a group of guests
receiving the same wakeup announcement at the same time) goes off-hook until
the last guest goes on-hook.
If the announcement type is either an externally-recorded announcement or is
integrated-repeating, you can administer the wakeup-call queue for barge-in.
Barge-in means that the guest receiving the wakeup call hears the announcement
as soon as he or she is off-hook, even if the announcement is not at the beginning.
This provides the capability of many users being bridged onto the same
announcement port, eliminating the need for a separate port for each wakeup call.
See ‘‘Recording announcements’’ on page 442 for additional information.
Considerations
■

Up to 10 attendant consoles and/or front desk terminals may be in the
wakeup display mode at any one time.

■

Wakeup call attempts are not rerouted, forwarded, or sent to coverage.

■

Attendant or Phone Display

Interactions

If the console or phone is in automatic-wakeup mode and the user presses
another display-mode button, wakeup mode aborts and the wakeup request
is not entered, changed, or deleted.
■

Do Not Disturb
If Do Not Disturb is active at a phone, Automatic Wakeup deactivates Do
Not Disturb for that terminal, and the system places the wakeup call.

■

PMS Interface
A Check-Out request cancels an active-wakeup call request for the guest
room. Room Change/Room Swap requests through PMS cause a wakeup
request to change or swap.

■

Speech Synthesizer Circuit Pack
Auto Wakeup competes with the following features for use of the
speech-synthesizer circuit pack.
— Do Not Disturb
— Leave Word Calling Message Retrieval
— Visually Impaired Attendant Service
If the Wakeup Activation via Tone is enabled, the auto wakeup interface
from the Speech Synthesizer circuit pack is disabled. The Do Not Disturb
interface still operates.

1700

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers

Custom Selection of VIP DID numbers allows you to select the DID number
assigned to a room when a guest checks in. It also provides buttons on display sets
that allow you to check-in a VIP (the vip-chkin button), to view and change XDID
and XDIDVIP numbers (the did-view button), and to disassociate XDID and
XDIDVIP numbers outside of the normal guest check-out procedure (the
did-remove button).
Make sure the following fields are administered in order to use Custom Selection
of VIP DID Numbers:
■

the Basic Hospitality field on the Feature Related System Parameters
Customer Options screen is y

■

the Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers field on the Feature Related
System Parameters Hospitality screen is y

■

the Automatic Selection of DID Numbers field on the Feature Related
System Parameters Hospitality screen is y

You also need to set up a number of stations as xdidvip (enter xdidvip in the Type
field on the Station screen).
When you use the vip-chkin button on a display phone to check in a guest, you
receive prompts to enter the room extension number and the VIP DID number.
Use the did-view button to change a DID number that is automatically assigned by
the switch (XDID), or one you select yourself (XDIDVIP).
Use list station to see which VIP DID numbers are administered. Check the
hunt-to station field to see if an XDIDVIP number is available or is assigned to a
guest room.
Do Not Disturb

Do Not Disturb allows guests, attendants, and authorized front-desk phone users
(those with console permission) to request that no calls, other than priority calls,
terminate at a particular extension until a specified time. At the specified time, the
system automatically deactivates the feature and allows calls to terminate
normally at the extension.
Do Not Disturb is a form of termination restriction associated with an automatic
deactivate time. When Do Not Disturb is active, the user receives only those calls
associated with Automatic Callback, Automatic Wakeup, and Priority Calling,
and those calls that are redirected to that extension via the Call Coverage and Call
Forwarding All Calls. All other calls redirect to a recorded announcement, an
attendant, or intercept tone. You can administer the switch to provide a special dial
tone whenever an analog set goes off-hook when Do Not Disturb is active.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1701

Features and technical reference

Phone users with touch-tone dialing can activate this feature themselves or ask the
front desk to do it for them. Users with rotary-dial phones must call the attendant
or front-desk user to request Do Not Disturb.
Activation by phone users

Phone users can activate Do Not Disturb by dial access or by button access. If
users have a speech-synthesizer circuit pack, they can activate Do Not Disturb
themselves, without attendant assistance.
■

Dial Access
When a user dials a Do Not Disturb FAC, the system prompts the user to
enter a deactivate time. The user may later change or delete the request by
dialing the Do Not Disturb FAC again and entering the required
information.
If the user makes invalid entries or if system conditions prevent entry of the
request, the system informs the user to dial the attendant or front desk for
assistance, if the user has a speech-synthesizer circuit pack.

■

Button Access
If a phone has a Do Not Disturb button, the user can press the button to
activate the feature. The handset may be on-hook or off-hook. The user
presses the button a second time to deactivate the feature.
The lamp associated with the Do Not Disturb button lights until the feature
is deactivated with the button. An automatic-deactivate time is not
provided.

Activation by Attendant

The attendant can activate the feature for a user or a group of users. (The assigned
COR determines which users are in the group.) The attendant presses the Do Not
Disturb — Extension button followed by the extension, or the Do Not Disturb —
Group button. The extension followed by the appropriate COR number.
The attendant can cancel a Do Not Disturb request by activating the feature,
entering the desired extension or group COR number, and pressing the delete
button.
Activation via a PMS

The system provides an interface to a PMS. This interface allows activation and
deactivation of controlled restrictions. Activation of Do Not Disturb through a
PMS is similar to activation of termination restriction. A scheduled deactivate
time cannot be specified.

1702

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

Audit Trail Reports

The system keeps a record of all phones that are in Do Not Disturb mode. You can
display or print this information.
Administer the following reports for printing on a daily basis:
■

Do Not Disturb Status Report — This report lists all extensions with Do
Not Disturb active and the specified deactivate time for each.

■

Do Not Disturb Plus COR Status Report — This report lists all extensions,
plus those whose controlled-restriction level is termination restriction. (The
attendant activates termination restriction for a specific extension or COR.
A deactivate time is not associated with termination restriction.)

Records do not include Do Not Disturb information for extensions that are both
termination and outward restricted.
Considerations
■

Do Not Disturb lessens the attendant’s workload when phone users with
speech-synthesizer circuit packs activate the feature themselves.

■

A front-desk user must have a console-permission COS to activate this
feature.

■

The number of available speech-synthesis ports is the only limit on the
number of users receiving voice prompting.

■

Automatic Callback

Interactions

Do Not Disturb does not block an Automatic Callback call. Return calls
terminate at a phone in the normal way.
■

Automatic Wakeup
An Automatic Wakeup call deactivates Do Not Disturb and alerts the guest
at the specified time.
If the Wakeup Activation via Tone is enabled, the auto wakeup interface
from the Speech Synthesizer circuit pack is disabled. The Do Not Disturb
interface still operates.

■

Call Coverage
If a point in a coverage path has Do Not Disturb active, calls covering to
that extension alert the extension unless the extension has
controlled-restriction termination active. When Do Not Disturb is active
and a phone does not have a coverage path, calls are routed to the attendant.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1703

Features and technical reference

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
If Do Not Disturb is active at the forwarding extension, the caller receives
intercept treatment. If Do Not Disturb is active at the forwarded-to
extension, the call alerts the forwarded-to extension.

■

Controlled Restriction
When a phone has total-controlled restriction, it cannot receive or place
any calls. However, it can receive a call if another station has an auto-icom
button pointing to the controlled-restriction station.

■

Internal Automatic Answer (IAA)
Activation of Do Not Disturb at the called phone preempts IAA.

■

PC Console
You cannot implement Do Not Disturb at a PC Console.

■

PMS Interface

Checkout from either a PMS or the switch automatically deactivates Do Not
Disturb for the specified extension.
Names Registration

Names Registration automatically sends a guest’s name and room extension from
the PMS to the switch at check-in, and automatically removes this information at
checkout.
Detailed description

The information provided by Names Registration displays on any attendant
console or display-equipped phone (as might be used for example, by Room
Service, Security, and others). The information allows hotel personnel to provide
personalized greetings to calling guests. For example, if John Smith calls room
service, personnel with a display-equipped phone, see John’s name and room
extension and can answer with a personalized greeting.
The name of the calling or called party can display on display-equipped phones.
To maintain necessary guest security, hotels do not divulge guests’ room numbers
to other guests or callers. For this reason, do not assign display-equipped phones
to guest rooms.
Check In

The switch performs the following procedures at check-in:
1. Information about the guest is obtained and stored in the hotel’s PMS.
2. The PMS sends a check-in message to the switch.

1704

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

3. The switch stores the guest’s name and coverage path.
4. The switch removes the outward restriction on the telephone in the guest
room. The switch removes all LWC messages.
5. The switch changes the status of the room from unoccupied to occupied.
At check-in, update the PBX names internal table and the call-coverage
path for the guest phone. Name Registration automatically sends a guest’s
name, extension (room), and preferred call-coverage path to the switch.
Check Out

1. The switch clears any previous wakeup calls.
2. The switch clears message-waiting lamp indications.
3. The switch activates controlled outward restriction, removes the guest’s
name, and identifies any unopened messages.
At checkout, Name Registration automatically changes the call-coverage path to
the administered Default Coverage Path for Client Rooms.
Guest Information Input/Change

Use Guest Information Input/Change to change the guest name associated with an
extension, input a guest name after check-in, or change a call-coverage path. For
example, hotel may check in airline personnel before their arrival to guarantee
their reservation. However, hotel personnel may be unaware of the guests’ names
and so wait until their arrival to update the names.
Name Registration Information Format

For both Name Registration and Guest Information Input/Change, a guest name
may consist of as many as 15 characters, including spaces and commas. Do not
use periods.
The name may be in all upper case letters, all lower case letters, or a mixture of
upper case and lower case letters. To use Integrated Directory, enter the name
using one of the following methods.

555-233-506

■

Last name, comma, first name (for example, Jones, Fred)

■

Last name, comma, first name, space, title/middle initial/name (for
example, Jones, Fred Mr)

■

Last name only (for example, Jones)

Issue 5 October 2002

1705

Features and technical reference

Call Coverage

Both Names Registration and Guest Information Input/Change messages contain
call-coverage path numbers. These numbers do not display but are used to
configure the appropriate call-coverage arrangements for guest extensions.
Arrangements can be for voice mail, text messages, any available coverage point,
or no coverage at all.
Administer call-coverage paths on the switch, and use the associated path
numbers to establish coverage arrangements at check-in. For suites, administer
paths to allow one room in the suite to be the coverage point for the other. To
make customized arrangements at time of check-in (such as coverage from one
guest room to another), manually administer the path attributes at the switch.
Considerations
■

■
■

■

Call-coverage path numbers sent by PMS to the switch for automatic
reconfiguration are limited to those administered in the switch and stored in
PMS.
A guest room extension can have a maximum of 5 digits.
An input in PMS of the name displayed on display-equipped phones
updates the switch.
The Name and Room Number/Extension is not overwritten with a
redirection reason unless the call is an emergency call or the station always
is administered to have redirection. Also, certain redirection displays will
not be shown (for example, priority, intercom dialing).

Interactions
■

Call Coverage
Call-coverage arrangements are not limited to automatic update during
check-in messages sent from PMS. Hotel personnel require coverage
points other than those designated for guests. Call-coverage paths can be
manually administered at the switch via the management terminal.

■

COS
If an extension has a client room COS, the save translation operation clears
the station name and sets the coverage path to the default coverage path for
client room when stored on tape. This does not affect the existing
information in memory. However, if the translations are read in, it affects
existing extensions until a database swap synchronizes the switch and
PMS.

■

Name Character Length
The switch supports 27-character names, but the PMS interface supports
only 15-character names.

1706

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

■

PMS Interface
During a Room Change/Room Swap, the name originally associated with
the first terminal is changed or swapped to the second terminal along with
call-coverage path, automatic wake-up entries, message-waiting status, and
controlled restrictions.

Property Management System Interface

Property Management System (PMS) Interface provides a communications link
between the switch and a customer-owned PMS. The PMS allows a customer to
control certain features in a hospital and hotel/motel environments. See
GuestWorks® and Avaya® MultiVantage Enterprise Communications Server
Property Management Interface Specifications.
Detailed description

Table 58 summarizes how the hospitality features are activated when you use only
the switch and when you use the PMS.
Table 58. PMS/Switch links
Feature

Switch Only

With PMS

Automatic Wakeup

Activated via console
button

N/A

Call Coverage

Activated via
administration

Activated via PMS
terminal — Transparent or
ASCII mode

Check-In/Check-out

Activated via console
button

Activated via PMS
terminal — Normal,
Transparent, or ASCII
mode

Controlled
Restriction

Activated via console
button

Activated via PMS
terminal — Normal,
Transparent, or ASCII
mode

Do Not Disturb

Activated via console
button

Activated via PMS
terminal — Normal,
Transparent, or ASCII
mode
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1707

Features and technical reference

Table 58. PMS/Switch links (Continued)
Feature

Switch Only

With PMS

Emergency Access
to Attendant

Activated by guest
action

N/A

Housekeeping
Status

Activated via console
button

Activated via PMS
terminal — Normal,
Transparent, or ASCII
mode

Message Waiting
Notification

Activated via console
button

Activated via PMS
terminal — Normal,
Transparent, or ASCII
mode

Names Registration

Activated via
administration

Activated via PMS
terminal — Transparent or
ASCII mode

Room Change/Swap
and Guest
Information
Input/Change

Activated via
administration

Activated via PMS
terminal — Normal,
Transparent, or ASCII
mode

Room Occupancy

Activated via console
button

Activated via PMS
terminal — Normal,
Transparent, or ASCII
mode
Continued on next page

The PMS Interface provides the following:
■

A communications protocol for controlling message exchange between the
switch and a PMS

■

An application module for controlling the operation of PMS features

■

Status data on all guest/patient rooms for selected features

The protocol is full-duplex asynchronous and provides the mechanisms for setting
up a data session with PMS, message-exchange control, error identification, and
recovery. The interface supports standard data rates.
Two protocol modes are provided: the normal-protocol mode as described above,
and transparent-protocol mode. Normal-protocol mode supports a character set
that has a combination of Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) characters and ASCII
characters. Transparent-protocol mode supports a complete ASCII-character set.

1708

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

The application module of the PMS Interface implements requested features and
provides backup if the PMS link is down. Whether or not the link is down, the
switch always maintains the following data for each room:
■

Whether the room is vacant or occupied

■

Whether the phone’s message lamp is on or off

■

Whether a controlled restriction is active at the phone and, if so, which one

■

The guest’s name and coverage path

When the PMS link is down, the switch automatically activates
Check-In/Check-Out for the attendant console and front-desk terminal with
display capability, and continues to support PMS features activated from
guest/patient-room phones.
When the PMS link is up again, the switch sends one of the following messages to
PMS:
■

No room-status changes occurred during loss of communications.

■

Room-status changes did occur during loss of communications; therefore, a
data exchange is needed to synchronize the switch and the PMS databases.

■

The system failed momentarily, destroying its record of room status;
therefore, a data exchange is needed to synchronize the switch and the
PMS databases.

When the PMS link is down or not used, the switch maintains an audit-trail report
of all events that are normally sent to the PMS. The audit-trail report (accessed via
the management terminal) is a sequential listing of all PMS transactions executed
by the switch when the PMS link is down. Included are error events that occur
when the link is up or down.
If you have a PMS printer and the PMS link is down, the following status changes
print as changes occur:
■

Room number

■

FAC dialed

■

Any additional information digits that were dialed

■

Reason for the entry (error message)

■

Time that the error occurred

Additional reports print to the PMS Journal/Schedule printer. These include
Automatic Wakeup activity, Emergency Access to the Attendant activity, and
scheduled reports.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1709

Features and technical reference

A supporting function called Room Data Image synchronizes the switch and PMS
databases after a PMS link goes down and comes back up. Information exchanged
includes:
■

Room extension

■

Whether the room is occupied or vacant

■

Message Waiting lamp status

■

Controlled Restriction status

■

Guest’s name

■

Call Coverage path

Message Waiting Notification

Message Waiting Notification requests originate from attendant consoles,
front-desk terminals, or PMS terminals. When a request is entered, PMS sends a
message to the switch to change the state of the Message Waiting lamp. If the
lamp is activated by AUDIX, INTUITY Lodging, or LWC, the PMS cannot
deactivate the lamp. PMS cannot turn LWC or AUDIC messages on or off; these
are controlled by the switch.
Assign a console permissions COS to any console or terminal as part of the
“System Wide Retrieval Stations” to retrieve requests for another station. Assign a
client room COS to the extensions for which Message Notification is to be made.
Controlled Restriction

When Controlled Restriction is activated through the PMS, the PMS sends a
message to the switch to assign one of the following restrictions to the phone in a
guest/patient room:
■

No restriction

■

Outward restriction

■

Total restriction

■

Station-to-station restriction

■

Termination restriction

■

Combined outward and termination restriction

■

Combined outward and station-to-station restriction

■

Combined termination and station-to-station restriction

The attendant can still set Controlled Restriction for a phone whether the PMS
link is up or down.

1710

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

PMS-Down Log

The pms-down log records only those User Controller Restriction events that are
for stations having a COS where:
■

the Client Room field is y

■

the Controlled Restriction Configuration field is act-pms

■

the pms link is not up

■

the pms log extension is valid

Housekeeping Status

Your housekeeping staff enters status information from phones in guest/patient
rooms or from designated terminals. You can assign up to 10 Housekeeping Status
access codes within two different types:
■

Room phone access code type
Staff members dial up to six access codes that represent room status plus up
to six additional digits for items such as maid identification.

■

Designated phone access code type
Staff members dial up to four access codes that represent room status plus
the room extension and then up to six additional digits for items such as
maid identification.

The switch notifies PMS when Housekeeping Status information is entered. If the
PMS is unavailable, the switch writes this information to a log. The log is
accessible at the switch management terminal, and is sent to the log printer, if
administered.
Check In/Check Out

A Check-In request deactivates the outward-controlled restriction on the phone in
a guest/patient room. A Check-Out request deactivates any controlled restrictions
and changes the controlled-restriction level to outward restriction, checks for any
messages, clears the wakeup request, and deactivates Do Not Disturb.
If you do not use PMS or if the PMS link is down, the attendant can activate
Check-In and Check-Out from an attendant console or a front-desk phone with
display capability and console permission. This requires two buttons, Check-In
and Check-Out. Pressing either button places the display in the respective mode
and allows use of the touch-tone or DTMF buttons for entering data (rather than
for placing calls).
The attendant exits Check-In or Check-Out mode by pressing any other button
associated with the display (for example, the Normal Mode button). This restores
the display and the touch-tone or DTMF buttons to normal operation.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1711

Features and technical reference

A Check-In/Check-Out request sends information for Names Registration to the
switch. This information includes the guest’s name, room extension, and
call-coverage path. If the PMS link is down and check-in is done from an
attendant console or display-equipped front-desk phone, the guest’s name and
coverage-path information is not automatically updated.
If a guest/patient room has both a voice and a data extension, the checkout request
applies only to the voice extension.
Room Change/Room Swap

Room Change/Room Swap is provided only through PMS and activated from a
PMS terminal. With Room Change, data pertaining to the old room — including a
pending wakeup request, the guest’s name (transparent/ASCII mode), and the
guest’s call-coverage path (transparent/ASCII mode) — moves to the new room.
With Room Swap, data pertaining to the two rooms swap. With either feature, if
the occupancy status is inconsistent, the system sends an error message to PMS.
Names Registration

Names Registration automatically sends a guest’s name and room extension from
PMS to the switch at check-in, and removes this information at checkout. The
guest’s call-coverage path is sent to the switch during check-in and set to the
administered Default Call Coverage Path for Client Rooms at checkout.
Guest Information Input/Change

Guest Information Input/Change allows the attendant to enter or alter guest
information (name or coverage path). Information changed at the PMS is sent
automatically to the switch.
PMS/INTUITY Link Integration

PMS/INTUITY Link Integration allows the following PMS administrative
messages to tandem through the switch to the INTUITY Lodging adjunct. This
eliminates the need for the INTUITY-to-PMS voice messaging link. This does not
remove the need for the INTUITY-to-PMS call accounting link.

1712

■

Check-in

■

Check-out

■

Room-data-image (database synchronization)

■

Modify (guest-information)

■

Add/Remote Text/Fax Notification Message (message-waiting status)

■

Transfer/Merge Mailbox (room change/swap)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hospitality features

When the messaging link is down and the PMS/MultiVantage link is up, the
switch buffer holds up to 100 PMS messages. The switch updates the Intuity
Lodging adjunct once the link is up. If the buffer overflows before the link is up,
the database resync among PMS/MultiVantage/Intuity initiates by demand or by a
routine database update from PMS.
Considerations
■

You can use Leave Word Calling (LWC) or Integrated Message Center
Service for the hospital or hotel/motel staff and Message Waiting
Notification for guests/patients. However, if you do not use Message
Waiting Notification, Integrated Message Center Service is used for both.

■

Do not remove an extension while the PMS link is active.

■

Normal-protocol mode allows extensions of up to four digits.
Transparent/ASCII-protocol mode allows extensions of up to five digits.

■

When save translations is done when transparent/ASCII-protocol mode is
active, station names with client-room COS save as blank and coverage
paths save as the default coverage path for client rooms.

■

The PMS link may not work correctly when multiple p-extensions have the
same leading digit and adjacent lengths. For example, 3 and 4 p-extensions
with the same leading digit may cause problems. The same applies to 4 and
5, and 5 and 6.

■

A room extension may begin with 0 only if the PMS sends a prefix digit or
a fixed number of digits.

■

Attendant Console or Front Desk Terminal

Interactions

Activate Controlled Restriction, Check-In/Check-Out, and Message
Waiting Notification at an attendant console or a front-desk phone with
console permission. The attendant console receives visual notification of
the status of the PMS link between the system and the PMS.
■

AUDIX Interface
Message lamps activated by this feature cannot deactivate with feature
buttons or with feature messages from the PMS.

■

Automatic Wakeup
Set or cancel an Automatic Wakeup request for a guest room as a result of
Room Change/Room Swap or Check-Out.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1713

Features and technical reference

■

Do Not Disturb
Set or cancel a Do Not Disturb request for a guest room as a result of a
different Controlled Restriction, Room Change/Room Swap, or
Check-Out.

■

Leave Word Calling (LWC)
Message lamps activated by this feature cannot deactivate with Manual
Message Waiting feature buttons.
If Room Change is active, LWC messages for the old room do not move to
the new room. If Room Swap is active, LWC messages for the two rooms
do not swap. Therefore, do not encourage use of LWC in guest rooms.

■

Restriction — Controlled
Controlled Restriction for a group of user extensions, when activated from
the switch, is not conveyed to the PMS. The PMS is not able to add or
remove such restrictions by sending feature messages.

Suite Check-in

Suite Check-in allows you to have the switch automatically check in more than
one phone with one check-in command (whether from your PMS or from the
switch).
When a room phone is checked in, the switch looks for a hunt-to extension
associated with that station. If it finds one, the switch also checks in the station
found in the hunt-to field. The switch also:
■

removes controlled outward restriction

■

adds the guest’s name to the station record for that extension

■

stores the call coverage path

■

removes any Leave Word Calling (LWC) messages

■

marks the room as “occupied”

If the hunt-to (second or subsequent) station has an extension in its hunt-to field,
that station also is checked in. The switch continues checking in stations until it
meets a station in the chain with a blank hunt-to field.

1714

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt groups

Interactions
■

Automatic Selection of DID Numbers for Guest Rooms
If Automatic Selection of DID numbers is active, then a DID number is
assigned only to the initial extension (the one that appears in the check-in
message), not to all of the hunt-to extensions.

■

Dial By Name
Since the secondary phones that are checked-in insert a "*" before the
name, they do not appear when Dial By Name is used. However, the name
(with the "*" in front of it) appears when the phone dials the attendant or
another display set.

■

Do Not Disturb
When Do Not Disturb is activated for a phone, it is active for just that
phone and not other phones in the hunt-to chain.

■

Housekeeping Status Change
When a room status feature access code is dialed, the room status is
updated only for the extension from which the code was dialed (not the
hunt-to phones as well). Housekeeping should be instructed to dial the
room status changes from the primary phone.

Hunt groups
A hunt group is a group of extensions that can handle multiple calls
simultaneously to a single phone number. For each call to the phone number, the
system hunts for an available extension in the group and connects the call to that
extension.
A hunt group is especially useful when you expect a high number of calls to a
particular phone number. A hunt group might consist of people trained to handle
calls on specific topics. For example, the group might be:

555-233-506

■

A benefits department within your company

■

A service department for products you sell

■

A travel reservations service

■

A pool of attendants

Issue 5 October 2002

1715

Features and technical reference

In addition, a hunt group might consist of a group of shared telecommunications
facilities. For example, the group might be:
■

A modem pool

■

A group of data-line circuit ports

■

A group of data modules
NOTE:

You may also assign ACD to a hunt group. In this case, the hunt
group is known as an ACD split. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call
Center Software Guide to ACD Call Centers for more details about
ACD splits.
Detailed description

The following sections describe how a hunt group works.
Hunting methods

The system uses one of two types of hunting method to distribute calls:
Direct
department
calling

The system hunts for an available extension in the hunt group, always
starting with the first extension in the group. If the first extension is
busy, the system checks the second extension. If the second extension is
busy, the system checks the third, and so on. When an extension is
available, the system rings that extension to connect the call.

Uniform
call
distribution

The system hunts for the extension that has been available for the
longest time. The system then rings that extension to connect the call.
This type of hunting provides the most equitable distribution of calls.
Also, this type of hunting is required for a modem pool, data-line circuit
ports, and data modules.

Circular

Enter circ when the call should be routed in a “round-robin” order. The
order in which the participating extensions are administered is the order
in which calls are directed. The switch keeps track of the last extension
in the hunt group to which a call was connected. The next call
terminating on the hunt group is offered to the next station in the circular
list independent of how long that station has been idle. The switch does
not start searching at the same place each time.
NOTE:

Expert Agent Selection uses uniform call distribution and expert agent
distribution. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD
Call Centers.

1716

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt groups

Hunt group queues

You can set up a queue for a hunt group. When all extensions in the group are
busy, calls wait in queue for the next available extension. You determine how
many calls can wait in queue by setting the queue length.
If all hunt-group members are unavailable or the queue is full, the system treats
the call as follows:
■

If the call is internal or is carried on a DID, DS1, or tie trunk, the caller
hears busy tone.

■

If the call is on a central office trunk, the caller hears ringing, but gets no
answer.

■

If the hunt group has call coverage, the system sends the call to a coverage
point.

See ‘‘How hunt group extensions become unavailable’’ on page 1719.
Queue warning level

You can set up a queue warning level and an associated queue warning indicator
lamp. When the queue reaches this level, the lamp lights and remains lit until the
queue drops below this level. You can have one lamp for each hunt-group queue.
Install the lamp so the members of the hunt group can see it.
Call coverage

You can set up call coverage for a hunt group. Then, if a hunt-group queue is full,
the system sends new calls to the coverage point.
If a call goes into a hunt group queue, it stays in queue for the Coverage Don't
Answer interval, then redirects to the coverage point. A call coverage point can be
another hunt group.
Announcements

You can record and assign one delay announcement to each hunt-group queue. An
announcement can be shared among hunt groups. Normally, the announcement
should tell the caller to wait and say the call will be answered in the order in which
it was received.
A call that connects to a delay announcement remains in queue while the
announcement plays. If the call has not been answered by the time the
announcement completes, the caller hears music (if provided) or silence. When
the call begins ringing a member of the hunt group, the caller hears ringing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1717

Features and technical reference

Delay announcement interval

You also define for each hunt group a delay announcement interval. When a call
enters the queue, the interval starts. This interval (0 to 99 seconds) indicates how
long a call remains in queue before the call connects to a recorded announcement.
If Call Coverage is provided, the Don’t Answer interval (one to 99 ringing cycles)
may also begin when the call enters the queue. After these intervals begin, one of
the following occurs:
■

If the Don’t Answer interval expires before the delay announcement
interval expires, the call redirects to coverage.

■

If no coverage point is available to handle the call, the call remains in
queue and may connect to the delay announcement.

■

If the delay announcement interval expires before the Don’t Answer
interval, the call connects to a delay announcement. If the announcement is
already in use, the delay announcement interval is reset.

This process continues until the call is answered, goes to coverage, connects to an
announcement, or ends because the caller hangs up.
If you set the delay announcement interval to 0 seconds, a call automatically
connects to the announcement. The result is a “forced first announcement.” In this
case, the call does not connect to a hunt-group member until after the
announcement. The caller does not hear music.
If a call redirects to another hunt group via Call Coverage, the caller does not hear
either hunt group’s forced first announcement. However, the caller may hear the
first or second announcement of the covering hunt group.
Analog, aux-trunk, or integrated announcements

Delay announcements may be analog, aux-trunk, or integrated (digital). For an
analog or aux-trunk announcement, callers who enter the queue hear the
associated announcement the next time the system plays it. Callers who enter the
queue after the announcement begins do not hear it until it starts again. For an
integrated announcement, multiple callers can be connected to the same
announcement at different times, depending on the availability of ports. See
‘‘Recording announcements’’ on page 442 for more information.
Example

Assume that a hunt group has the following parameters.

1718

■

Queue length is 10 calls.

■

Queue warning level is 5 calls.

■

Recorded announcement delay is 20 seconds.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt groups

All hunt-group members are busy. A call enters the queue as the fifth call, which
causes the queue warning level lamp to light. Hunt-group members see the lamp
and try to quickly complete their present calls. Meanwhile, the call waits in the
queue for 20 seconds and hears the recorded announcement. When a hunt-group
member becomes available, the first call in queue connects to that group member.
The queue warning-level lamp turns off because the number of calls in queue fell
to four.
How hunt group extensions become
unavailable

An extension in a hunt group becomes unavailable to receive calls if the hunt
group member is already handling a call. This rule is true even if the call is not a
hunt-group call and even if the extension’s phone is a multiappearance phone.
An extension also becomes unavailable if the member presses one of the
following buttons:
■

Hunt Group Busy

■

Send All Calls

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
NOTE:

If a member is also an ACD agent, pressing the AUX work button
also makes the member unavailable. On the other hand, if an agent
presses the ACW (after call work) button, the system considers the
agent to be available and still will queue calls.
■

Hunt Group member dials the Hunt Group Busy Activate feature access
code

Hunt Group Busy

If you turn on the Hunt Group Busy option, a hunt group member can dial the
Hunt Group Busy code followed by the hunt group number. The extension is
unavailable for calls until the group member dials the Hunt Group Busy
deactivation code or presses the button again.
If the last available member of a hunt group tries to activate the Hunt Group Busy
option, the following occurs:

555-233-506

■

New calls to the hunt group receive busy tone or go to coverage.

■

Calls already in the queue continue to route to the last available extension.

Issue 5 October 2002

1719

Features and technical reference

■

When the queue is empty, Hunt Group Busy activates. At the last available
extension, the status lamp associated with the AUXILIARY WORK button, if
provided, flashes until the queue is empty. When no more calls remain in
the queue, Hunt Group Busy activates and the status lamp, if provided,
lights steadily.
NOTE:

If an extension is an ACD split agent as well as a hunt-group member,
the split agent normally has an AUX-WORK button that also
activates/deactivates Hunt Group Busy. If an agent is the last
available member and they push AUX-WORK, the button’s light flashes
until the queue is empty. This means the agent is still available. When
the queue finally empties, the button lights steadily and Hunt Group
Busy takes effect.
Send All Calls

If a station activates Send All Calls with the Send All Calls button, then calls to
the hunt group extension go in queue if there is a queue, otherwise callers get a
busy treatment if all the agents have their Send All Calls pushed.
NOTE:

If an extension is an ACD split agent as well as a hunt-group member, the
split agent normally has an AUX-WORK button that also activates/deactivates
Hunt Group Busy. If an agent presses the SEND ALL CALLS button, the agent
becomes unavailable for hunt-group calls. The agent then can become
available for calls again by pressing the SEND ALL CALLS button again.
Call Forwarding All Calls

With Call Forwarding All Calls active, an extension within a hunt group is
unavailable for hunt-group calls. Callers hear the hunt group’s forced first
announcement, if administered, before the system forwards the call.
Considerations
■

Members assigned to multiple hunt groups
An extension can be a member of more than one hunt-group. However, a
phone, even a multiappearance phone, can receive only one hunt group call
at a time. On a multiappearance phone, all appearances must be idle to
receive a hunt-group call.
You can assign a COVERAGE INCOMING CALL INDICATOR (ICI) button to a
multiappearance phone or attendant console. When a member receives a
call for the hunt group associated with the ICI button, the button's status
lamp lights.

1720

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Hunt groups

■

ACD agents as hunt group members
Do not include ACD split agents in non-ACD hunt groups if they also
receive ACD split calls. The system distributes all ACD calls to split agents
before it distributes hunt-group calls.
When you change an ACD split to a non-ACD hunt group, each split agent
must enter the Hunt Group Busy deactivation code in order to receive calls
in that hunt group. If the agent has an AUX-WORK button, the button lamp
lights when you make the change. The agent can then press the button to
become available for hunt-group calls.

■

Hunt group for communications devices
Members of a hunt group used for shared data communications must be of
the same type. Thus, you can put data modules or analog modems in a hunt
group, but not both. Option settings must be the same for all group
members.
A caller can still use the DATA EXTENSION button to access the associated
data module, even if the module is in a hunt group. Individual data modules
or modems can originate and receive calls.

■

Access restrictions
You can restrict, via the Class of Restrictions (COR), any extension in a
hunt group from receiving calls other than those to its assigned hunt group.
You can also restrict extensions on your switch from calling the hunt
group’s extension.

■

System limits
The size of your system determines how many hunt groups you can set up
and how many extensions you can assign to each group.

■

Trunk signaling
A hunt group always has its own extension. Therefore, a caller with a
phone on the switch can call the hunt group by dialing only that extension.
If a trunk group has the ability to pass digits from the CO to the switch (for
example, a DS1 trunk group), a caller can also call the hunt group by
dialing a 7-digit phone number that consists of a specified prefix and the
hunt group’s extension.
If a trunk group cannot pass digits from the Central Office (CO) to the
switch, incoming calls on that trunk group can connect to a hunt group only
if the trunk group has the hunt-group extension as its primary destination.
This includes trunk groups for incoming listed directory number (LDN)
calls, international exchange calls, 800 service calls, and automatic
tie-trunk calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1721

Features and technical reference

■

Answer supervision
The switch sends answer supervision to the central office when a call
connects to an extension in the hunt group or an announcement. Charging
for the call, if applicable, then begins.

Interactions
■

Attendant Call Waiting
Attendant Call Waiting does not work for calls that the attendant sends to a
hunt group. It does work for calls to individual hunt-group members.

■

Attendant Return Call
Attendant Return Call does not work for calls that the attendant sends to a
hunt group.

■

Automatic Callback
Automatic Callback does not work on calls to a hunt group.

■

Automatic Call Distribution
ACD does not work with circular station hunting.

■

Call Detail Recording
For each call, the system can record the associated hunt-group extension or
member extension that answered.

■

Internal Automatic Answer
Internal calls to a hunt-group member are eligible for IAA.

■

Leave Word Calling

■

A hunt group can receive and store LWC messages. The following people
can retrieve LWC messages:
— One member of the hunt group
— A covering user of the group
— A system-wide message retriever
The message retriever must have a phone display and proper authorization.
If the message retriever is a member of the hunt group, you can assign to
that member a remote Automatic Message Waiting lamp to indicate when
the hunt group has an LWC message.
Night Service — Hunt Group

1722

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Incoming Call Line Identification

When Night Service is active for a hunt group and the night service
destination is another hunt group, the caller hears the forced announcement
of the first hunt group, if administered. The system then redirects the call to
the night-service hunt group.
■

Priority Calling
The system treats a priority call to a hunt group the same as a nonpriority
call, except that the extension receives a distinctive 3-burst ring.

■

Queuing
Queuing does not work with circular station hunting.

■

Terminating Extension Group
A Terminating Extension Group cannot be a member of a hunt group.

■

Vectoring
Call vectoring does not work with circular station hunting.

Related topics

See ‘‘Announcements/Audio Sources’’ on page 606 to assign analog, DS1,
auxiliary trunk, or integrated announcements, audio/music sources, or any desired
combination of announcements and audio sources.
See ‘‘Data modules’’ on page 707 for information about and field descriptions on
the Announcement circuit pack.
See ‘‘Coverage Path’’ on page 696 for information on automatic redirection of
calls to answering positions.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information about where incoming calls
terminate or assigning an extension number to night service.
See ‘‘Setting up hunt groups’’ on page 224 for information on how to set up hunt
groups.

Incoming Call Line Identification
Your switch collects the calling party name and number (Incoming Call Line
Identification, or ICLID) received from the CO on analog trunks.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1723

Features and technical reference

Detailed description

Your switch stores and displays up to 15 characters of ICLID information received
on analog trunks. If the information is longer than 15 characters, it truncates to 15
characters. If the caller ID information is not received, the trunk group name and
trunk access code appear on the display.
Calling party information appears on all Avaya MultiVantage digital phones with
40-character or 32-character displays. In the US, the CO sends both calling party
name and number, if they are available. In Japan, the CO sends only the calling
party number.
Interactions
■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
If the Avaya MultiVantage has both DCS and Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN) displays, the ICLID information displays in DCS formats.

Intercom
If you have users who call each other frequently, you can help them communicate
more quickly. With the intercom feature, you can allow one user to call another
user in a predefined group just by pressing a couple of buttons. You can even
administer a button that always calls a predefined extension when pressed.
Brief description

You control which phones can make intercom calls to each other by putting them
in groups called “intercom groups.” Once a set of phones have been added to the
group, you allow users to make intercom calls by administering one or both of the
following feature buttons on their phones:
Automatic
Intercom

This button always calls one predefined phone in the
same intercom group when pressed. You specify the
destination extension for this button.

Dial Intercom

This button allows users in an intercom group to call
anyone else in the same group. The caller lifts the
handset, presses the Dial Intercom button, then dials a 1or 2- digit code for the extension they want to reach.

Phones with one or both of these features can belong to the same group.

1724

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Intercom

Intercom groups
■

You can create up to 32 intercom groups on one DEFINITY server.

■

Each group can have up to 32 extensions in it.

■

It’s OK to assign the same extension to different groups.

■

Intercom calls are only possible between extensions in the same group.

■

Any group member with a feature button for dial intercom can make an
intercom call to any other member in the group.

■

You can assign any type of phone to an intercom group. However, only
multiappearance phones can make and receive intercom calls. Single-line
phones can only receive intercom calls. Multiappearance phones must have
at least one open or available call appearance to receive intercom calls.

■

Phones receiving an intercom call make a unique alerting sound. If the
phone has an intercom button with a status lamp, the lamp flashes.

■

You can administer an automatic intercom connection between 2 phones
even if their classes of restriction don’t allow other calls between them.

■

Bridged Appearances

Phones

Interactions

Bridged appearances can’t receive intercom calls.
■

Call Coverage
Intercom calls do not follow a coverage path unless the caller activates Go
To Cover.

■

Call Forwarding
Intercom calls cannot be forwarded off-net.

■

Call Pickup/Directed Call Pickup
Intercom calls are not included in the call pickup alerting count.

■

Data Privacy and Data Restriction
Extensions with either of these features active cannot originate intercom
calls.

Related topics

See ‘‘Using phones as intercoms’’ on page 483 to administer intercom capabilities
on phones.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1725

Features and technical reference

Internal Automatic Answer
Internal Automatic Answer (IAA) provides convenient hands-free answering of
internal calls to users on multifunction stations with a speakerphone or a
headphone.
Detailed description

An eligible call can be answered automatically via IAA if the user activates IAA
at the answering telephone and the user is able to accept an incoming call. A
telephone is unable to accept an incoming call if it is off-hook, is in the process of
dialing digits, or has a call on hold.
The following internal calls are eligible for IAA, depending on how you
administer the Internal Auto-Answer of Attd-Extended/Transferred Calls field on
the Feature-Related System Parameters screen:
■

Station-to-station voice calls, with both telephones on the same switch
(includes redirected intraswitch calls). Set the Internal Auto-Answer of
Attd-Extended/Transferred Calls field to transferred or both.

■

Internal call from another switch node in a Distributed Communications
System (DCS) configuration when the origin of the call is known to be an
internal, non-attendant telephone on that switch (includes redirected
inter-DCS calls). Set the Internal Auto-Answer of
Attd-Extended/Transferred Calls field to transferred or both.

■

Attendant-extended external calls. Set the Internal Auto-Answer of
Attd-Extended/Transferred Calls field to attd-extended or both.

The following calls are not eligible for IAA:
■

Calls from public-network trunks (including PCOL)

■

Calls from non-DCS tie trunks

■

Automatic Callback calls

■

Automatic Circuit Assurance calls

■

Data calls

■

Attendant-extended external calls if the Internal Auto-Answer for Attd
Extended/Transferred Calls field is set to transferred or none

■

Calls that the system redirects because of a queue overflow of Emergency
Access to the Attendant calls

■

Calls when the receiving station’s Active Station Ringing field is set to
continuous

1726

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Internal Automatic Answer

IAA Feature Operations

With IAA, you can assign a single programmable feature button (IAA) to
telephones. When the user presses the IAA feature button, the button lamp lights
and the system activates IAA. Pressing the same button again deactivates IAA and
turns off the status lamp. (Pressing the feature button has no effect on a
currently-active call or a ringing call.) The IAA button may be toggled on or off at
any time, regardless of the state of the telephone. Using the speakerphone to place
calls does not affect the state of IAA.
The calling telephone receives a tone when its call is answered automatically by a
telephone with IAA. The called telephone receives a tone (a ring ping) and then
goes off-hook when automatically answering an IAA-eligible call. The answering
telephone’s speaker and microphone are both turned on.
If a user has IAA active and is currently busy on a call or is in the process of
dialing digits, subsequent incoming calls are treated as if IAA were not activated.
Considerations
■

Users should always deactivate IAA when leaving the work area.
Otherwise, incoming calls are unintentionally answered by the unattended
station, and do not go to coverage.

■

A 602A terminal is off-hook when the headset or speakerphone is
connected. Therefore IAA answers a call if all other call appearances are
idle.

■

Attendant Console

Interactions

IAA is not available with Attendant Console.
■

Automatic Answer
You cannot administer both IAA and Automatic Answer simultaneously on
the same telephone.

■

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Calls directed to an ACD split are eligible for IAA.

■

Automatic Callback
Callback calls via Automatic Callback are not answered automatically
by IAA.

■

Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA)
Calls generated by ACA are not eligible for IAA.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1727

Features and technical reference

■

Bridged Call Appearance — Multiappearance Telephone
Calls terminating on a bridged call appearance are not eligible for IAA at
the bridged station, even if the bridged station has IAA active. (IAA can be
used by the principal station to answer the call.)

■

Bridged Call Appearance — Single-Line Telephone
Calls terminating to a bridged call appearance are not eligible for IAA at
the bridged station, even if the bridged station has IAA active.

■

Call Coverage
If an internal call is redirected to another telephone by Call Coverage
redirection criteria, then that call is eligible for IAA at the redirected
telephone.
IAA does not apply to calls to the original called extension when:
— The called telephone has activated Send All Calls
— The calling telephone has selected Go to Cover before placing the
call
Calls directed to a coverage answering group are not eligible for IAA.
NOTE:

If you set the coverage path for a station to All Calls and that station
activates IAA, the first coverage point hears a ring, the principal
station automatically answers, and the coverage-simulated bridge is
dropped. The coverage station rings, but is not able to answer the call
because the coverage-simulated bridge has been dropped.
■

Call Forwarding
Calls to a station with IAA and Call Forwarding active are forwarded and
are not answered by the station dialed.
NOTE:

If the forwarded-to station is internal and has IAA active, it
automatically answers the redirected call.
■

Call Park
If you are using Deluxe Paging and Call Park times out, the call returns to
the originating station that parked the call and is eligible for IAA.

■

Call Pickup
Internal calls to a telephone in a Call Pickup group are eligible for IAA. If
the called extension in a Call Pickup group has IAA-active, the call is
automatically answered. A telephone with IAA active is not able to
automatically answer calls to other telephones in its Call Pickup group.

1728

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Internal Automatic Answer

■

Conference
Internal conference calls can be answered automatically via IAA. If more
than one party has joined a conference call through automatic answer, the
parties remain connected until they disconnect or the controlling party
drops the call.

■

Data Call Setup
Data calls are not eligible for IAA.

■

Direct Department Calling (DDC) and Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Internal calls to a DDC or UCD group member are eligible for IAA.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
If a call is from an internal telephone on another switch in a DCS
configuration, then that call is considered internal and is eligible for
automatic answer.

■

Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb preempts IAA at the called telephone.

■

Go to Cover
IAA does not apply to calls to the original called extension when the
calling telephone has selected Go to Cover before placing a call.

■

ISDN-BRI
IAA is not available with ISDN-BRI terminals.

■

Loudspeaker Paging — Deluxe Paging
When you are using Deluxe Paging and Call Park times out, the call returns
to the originating station that parked the call and is eligible for IAA.

■

Ringback Queuing
Automatic calls generated by Ringback Queuing are not eligible for IAA.

■

Send All Calls
IAA does not apply to calls to extensions with Send All Calls is active.

■

Terminating Extension Group
Calls to a Terminating Extension Group extension are not eligible for IAA.
However, calls placed to an individual extension are eligible.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1729

Features and technical reference

ISDN service
The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) provides a message-oriented
signaling method that allows information to be sent along with a call and gives
you access to a variety of public and private network services and facilities. The
ISDN standard consists of layers 1, 2, and 3 of the Open System Interconnect
(OSI) model. Avaya MultiVantage can be connected to an Integrated Services
Digital Network using standard frame formats: the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and
the Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
An Integrated Services Digital Network provides end-to-end digital connections
and uses a high-speed interface that provides service-independent access to
switched services. Through internationally accepted standard interfaces, an
Integrated Services Digital Network provides circuit or packet-switched
connections within a network and can link to other ISDN-supported interfaces to
provide national and international digital connections.
NOTE:

This manual does not contain procedures for working with ISDN trunk
groups. Due to the complexity of ISDN technology and the potential
consequences of errors, ask your Avaya representative to assist you in
planning, installing, and administering ISDN trunks.
Brief description

ISDN supports the following:
■

Call-by-Call Service Selection (CBC)

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS). (Only ISDN-PRI supports
DCS+ and DCS with Rerouting)

■

Electronic Tandem Networks (ETN)

■

Facility Associated Signaling (FAS) and Non-Facility Associated
Signaling (NFAS) (Only ISDN-PRI supports this.)

■

Generalized Route Selection (GRS)

■

1730

Call Identification Display — Calling Party Number (CPN) and Billing
Number (BN)

■

Administered Connections and Access Endpoints

■

Interworking (a mixture of ISDN and non-ISDN trunks and stations)

■

Wideband Switching (H0, H11, H12, and NxDS0 — only ISDN-PRI
supports this.)

■

QSIG Multivendor Connectivity

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN service

■

Lookahead Inteflow

■

Lookahead Routing

■

Usage Allocation

Screens used to administer ISDN

See Access Endpoint to administer Access Endpoints and Wideband Access
endpoints.
See ISDN trunk group for detailed information on the fields used to administer:
— Supplementary Service Protocol (supports public network
connection)
— Calling Number (supports CPN)
— Incoming Call Handling Treatment Table (supports digit
manipulation, CPN or BN requests, and night service destinations)
— CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation screen (supports Call-by-Call
Service Selection Usage Allocation Plans)
— CBC Trunk Group Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule (supports
Call-by-Call Service Selection Usage Allocation Plans)
— Wideband Support Options (supports Wideband Switching)
See ‘‘ISDN Numbering — Private’’ to administer private numbering plans.
See ‘‘ISDN Numbering — Public/ Unknown’’ to administer ISDN call
identification displays.
See the DEFINTY services documentation for information about the following
screens: ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignments, Network Facilities (supports
usage allocation used in Call-by-Call Service Selection), and Signaling Group
(used to define a group of B-channels for which a given D-channel or D-channel
pair carries signaling information).
Transmission rate and protocols

In ISDN-PRI, the transmission standard for layer 1 (the physical layer) is either
DS1 T1 or E1. The DS1 T1 (used in North America and Japan) is a
digital-transmission standard that carries traffic at the rate of 1.544 Mbps, and the
E1 (used in Europe) carries traffic at a rate of 2.048 Mbps. The “D” (data) channel
multiplexes signaling messages for the “B” (bearer) channels carrying voice or
data. In a T1, when a D-channel is present, it occupies Channel 24. In an E1, when
a D-channel is present, it occupies channel 16.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1731

Features and technical reference

Avaya MultiVantage offers several administrable protocols, each of which
provides a different set of ISDN services. See ‘‘DS1 trunk service’’ on page 1659
for more information. These protocols are discussed in detail later in this section.
The following combination of services, including but not limited to Basic Call,
Basic Supplementary Services, Supplementary Services with Rerouting, Display,
and QSIG Networking are supported on the ISDN-PRI interface. Available
services outside the United States vary from country to country.
With ISDN, Avaya MultiVantage interfaces with a wide range of other products
including switches, network switches, and host computers. These products
include earlier MultiVantage systems, public network switches (for example,
4ESS, 5ESS, and Northern Telecom DMS250), and other products that adhere to
the ISDN signaling protocol.
As an example of how ISDN is used in private- and public-network
configurations , see the following figures. For example, ISDN can be used to
connect a switch to a public-switched network, to other switches, and to
computers:

Figure Notes

1. Avaya Media Server

3. Public switched network

2. ISDN trunk

4. Host computer

Figure 59.

1732

ISDN network configuration

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN service

AT&T Switched Network Protocol

Avaya MultiVantage supports the AT&T Switched Network Protocol described in
the TR41449 (for 4ESS to common carrier) and TR41459 (for 5ESS to CO) ISDN
protocol standards as defined by AT&T. This protocol is used when the DS1
circuit pack is administered for Country Code 1, Protocol Version a. The AT&T
Switched Network provides you with the following services.
Access to AT&T Switched Network Services

ISDN provides access to AT&T Switched Network Services. The definition of the
Service Type field on the ISDN Trunk Group screen includes a table that outlines
these switched-network services. An ISDN trunk group may be dedicated to a
particular feature. Alternately, an ISDN call-by-call trunk group may provide
access to several features. For a description of the services accessible via ISDN
(either via dedicated or call-by-call trunk groups), see ‘‘Call-by-call service
selection’’ on page 1629.
Call Identification Display

ISDN Call Identification Display provides a transparent name and number display
for all display-equipped telephones within an ISDN network. The feature is
transparent in that the same information can be provided at all ISDN facilities.
Telephones using this feature should be digital telephones with a 40-character
alphanumeric display. The Merlin hybrid sets with 32-character displays (7315H
and 7317H) also support this feature.
ISDN Call Identification Display is provided in addition to the normal Telephone
Display and Attendant Display features when the network supports end-to-end
ISDN connectivity. When both ISDN and DCS display information are received,
the switch can display either the DCS or ISDN call identification information. If
only ISDN display information is received, information displays in ISDN format.
The display fields that may be used for ISDN are: Name, Number, Miscellaneous
Call Identification, and Reason for Call Redirection. The display information
varies, depending on the type of call, how the call is handled (for example,
whether it is redirected or not), and the information is available on the call.
CPN/BN to Host Call Identification

The CPN/BN to Host Call Identification enables CPN and BN information to be
passed from the switch to the ISDN Gateway, so that the ISDN Gateway can
forward the information to a host for data-screen delivery to agents in an ACD
split.
By delivering call-identification information such as CPN/BN and switch
information such as the answering-agent’s extension to an adjunct network (ISDN
Gateway), the adjunct automatically delivers data screens to agents for new calls
and call transfers.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1733

Features and technical reference

The figure below shows a simplified diagram of a CPN- and BN-to-host
arrangement. The ISDN Gateway is a UNIX or MSDOS computer connected to
the switch on one side and to a host computer on the other side. The connection to
the switch is over a synchronous interface with BX.25 protocol.

r781861 CJL 060996

Figure Notes

1. ISDN trunk

6. Existing interface

2. SID/ANI

7. Host computer

3. Avaya Media Server

8. Telephone

4. BX.25

9. ACD agent position

5. ISDN Gateway
Figure 60.

10. Data terminal

CPN- and BN-to-host configuration

Private network services

In addition to providing access to switched-public networks, ISDN provides
private-network services by connecting Avaya MultiVantage in an ETN, DCS, or
QSIG Network. This gives you more efficient private networks that support new
integrated voice and data services. ETN, DCS, and QSIG networking services are
provided as follows.
ETN services

Avaya Media Servers that function as tandem nodes in an ETN can be
interconnected using DS1 trunking facilities with ISDN. All signaling between
the tandem switches is done with ISDN D-channel and normal ISDN protocol.

1734

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN service

The ISDN can also be used to connect ETN tandem and main switches. In this
case, the main switch collects all of the address digits from local users as well as
users at other satellite and tributary switches, and originates a call over ISDN to
the tandem switch.
Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) and Automatic Route Selection (ARS) are
used with ISDN and DS1 trunking facilities to access ETN facilities. AAR and
ARS are used to collect the dialing information for the call that is originated from
the main switch.
DCS services

ISDN-PRI facilities can be used in a DCS arrangement whenever tie trunks are
used to connect the DCS nodes. Most DCS features are not affected by ISDN-PRI.
However, there is a minor impact on a few of the DCS features, as far as the
functions that the local and remote switches perform.
QSIG services

QSIG networking provides compliance to the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) ISDN private-networking specifications. The QSIG
Networking platform is supported over the ISDN Basic Call setup protocol. Avaya
MultiVantage supports QSIG Supplementary Services.
Wideband Switching (ISDN-PRI only)

Wideband Switching provides support for services that require large bandwidth,
such as high-speed video conferencing. Wideband also supports multiple channel
calls end-to-end. These services have traditionally been handled by dedicated
facilities. With Wideband Switching, dedicated facilities are no longer a
requirement for these large bandwidth services.
Call-by-Call Service Selection

Call-by-Call Service Selection allows the same ISDN trunk group to carry calls to
a variety of services or facilities. Embodied in this feature is the ability to allocate
usage. It provides significant flexibility for creating user-defined incoming and
outgoing services and is used on any ISDN trunk group.
Access to Software Defined Data Network

With ISDN, the SDDN service may be accessed. SDDN provides virtual
private-line connectivity via the switched public network. The services provided
by SDDN include voice, data, and video applications. SDDN services
complement the ISDN voice services.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1735

Features and technical reference

Access to Switched Digital International

Switched Digital International (SDI) provides 64 kbps of unrestricted connectivity
to international locations via the AT&T Switched Network. It is also the backbone
for the AT&T International ISDN network. SDI complements the ACCUNET
digital service already available to United States locations. This service can be
accessed using Call-by-Call Service Selection. SDI provides economical
high-speed data transfer to international locations.
National ISDN-2 Services

Avaya MultiVantage supports National ISDN-2 (NI-2), which offers many of the
same services as the AT&T Switched Network protocol. The NI-2 protocol is used
when the DS1 circuit pack is administered for Country Code 1, Protocol
Version b.
NI-2 provides users with the following services:
■

Calling Line Identification

■

Non-Facility Associated Signaling (ISDN-PRI only)

■

D-Channel Backup (ISDN-PRI only)

■

Wideband Switching (ISDN-PRI only)

■

Call-by-Call Service Selection

Calling Line Identification

Calling Line Identification for NI-2 is essentially CPN identification, as
previously described.
Non-Facility Associated Signaling (ISDN-PRI only)

NFAS allows an ISDN-PRI T1 or E1 Interface D-channel (signaling channel) to
convey signaling information for B-channels (voice and data) on ISDN-PRI T1 or
E1 facilities other than the one containing the D-channel. See ‘‘Facility and
Non-Facility Associated Signaling’’ on page 1678 for more information.
D-Channel Backup (ISDN-PRI only)

D-Channel Backup is provided to improve reliability in the event of a
signaling-link failure. See ‘‘Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling’’ on
page 1678 for more information.
Wideband Switching (ISDN-PRI only)

Wideband Switching for NI-2 is essentially the same as that of the AT&T
Switched Network ISDN-PRI protocol.

1736

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN service

Call-by-Call Service Selection

Call-by-Call Service Selection for NI-2 is essentially the same as that for the
AT&T Switched Network ISDN-PRI protocol.
ISDN interworking

ISDN interworking allows calls to use a combination of both ISDN and non-ISDN
trunking and station facilities. A non-ISDN trunking facility is any trunk facility
supported by the system that does not use the ITU-T recommended Q.931
message set for signaling. Non-ISDN trunking facilities include facilities such as
analog trunks, AVD DS1 trunks, and DS1 trunks with bit-oriented signaling
(robbed-bit or common channel).
Avaya MultiVantage supports the conversion of ISDN signaling to non-ISDN
in-band signaling and the conversion of non-ISDN in-band signaling to ISDN
signaling for interworking purposes.
A mixture of ISDN and non-ISDN signaling is required in order to provide
end-to-end signaling when using different types of trunk or station facilities on a
call. See the figure below for an example of interworking.

Figure Notes

1. Call from network to Switch B

4. Non-ISDN trunk

2. ISDN trunk

5. Switch B

3. Switch A
Figure 61.

ISDN and non-ISDN interworking

In this example, a call for someone at Switch B comes into Switch A.
Interworking allows the ISDN signaling of the call to be converted at Switch A to
non-ISDN in-band signaling before the call forwards to Switch B. Even though
the call comes into Switch A on an ISDN trunk, Switch A can send the call to
Switch B over a non-ISDN trunk by converting the signaling information.
The system provides accurate CDR billing information on calls that are not
interworked. Accuracy of CDR billing information on interworked calls is
equivalent to the accuracy provided by the public network.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1737

Features and technical reference

Avaya MultiVantage supports sending a non-ISDN trunk name as the connected
name. Therefore, a non-ISDN trunk name can be sent as the connected name even
when a call starts out as an ISDN call but is interworked over non-ISDN trunks.
Call Identification Display

Two types of identification numbers are provided with ISDN and may be used in
the various types of displays used with ISDN. The two types of identification
numbers are as follows:
■

Calling Party Number (CPN): A 0–15 digit DDD number associated with a
specific station. When a system user makes a call that uses ISDN, that
user’s CPN is provided by the system for ISDN. ISDN public-unknown
numbering or ISDN private numbering screens are administered to create a
0–15 digit CPN from a local station number.

■

Billing Number (BN): The calling party’s billing number, which is
provided to an inter-exchange network via Equal Access or CAMA. This
number is stored at either a local or network switch. If a customer is
connected directly to the AT&T Switched Network, the BN is the
customer’s billing number stored in that network. If the CPN is not
provided on an incoming ISDN call, the network uses the BN for the
station identification number.

The following types of display information are provided with ISDN:
■

Calling Party’s Number
The calling party’s number appears on the called party’s display. This
number is provided only if the outgoing ISDN trunk group is administered
to send the CPN, and if ISDN public-unknown numbering or ISDN private
numbering screens are administered to create a CPN. On calls incoming to
a system, the network may provide either the CPN or BN as the calling
party’s number. Extensions and 12-digit international numbers display
without dashes. Dashes are only used for 7-digit and 10-digit numbers
when North American Area Code is enabled on the Dial Plan screen.

1738

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN service

■

Calling Party’s Name
The calling party’s name appears on the called party’s display. On calls
generated from a DEFINITY server, the caller’s name is provided if the
ISDN trunk group is administered to send the name to the network. On
calls incoming to a DEFINITY server, the (public or private) network may
provide the caller’s name. If the caller’s name is not available, the called
party’s display shows “CALL FROM” instead, followed by the calling
party’s number (if available).

■

Connected Party’s Number
The connected party’s number appears on the caller’s display. On calls
generated from a DEFINITY server, callers’ displays may show the digits
dialed as the call is made. If the (public or private) ISDN network provides
the connected party’s number, the calling party’s display is updated to show
the connected party’s number. The format of the connected party’s number
is the same as that of the calling party’s number described previously on
calls incoming to a DEFINITY server. The 0–15 digit number of the party
who answers the call is provided to the ISDN network only if the incoming
ISDN trunk group is administered to send connected number to the
network and ISDN public-unknown numbering or ISDN private numbering
screens are administered to create a CPN.
NOTE:

The connected party may be the party actually called, in the event the
call is transferred before the connected party answers the call.
■

Connected Party’s Name
The connected party’s name appears on the calling party’s display. On calls
generated from a DEFINITY server, the (public or private) ISDN network
may provide the connected party’s name to the Avaya MultiVantage, when
the call is answered. If the connected party’s name is not available, the
calling party’s display shows ANSWERED BY, followed by the connected
party’s number (if available).
On calls incoming to a DEFINITY server, the connected party’s name is
provided if the incoming ISDN trunk group is administered to send the
name to the network.

Depending on how the switches involved in a call are configured, parties may see
none, some, or all the information described above.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1739

Features and technical reference

Displays for redirected calls

Features such as Call Coverage, Call Forwarding All Calls, Bridged Call
Appearance, or Call Pickup redirect calls from the called party’s extension to
some other destination. Once the redirected call has been connected at its new
destination, the displays for the calling, called, and connected parties are as
follows:
— Calling Party Display
a= CONNECTED NAME CONNECTED NUM

MISCID

— Called Party Display
This is the display of the party the caller originally dialed. If this party
bridges onto the redirected call after it has been answered, they see:
a= CONFERENCE 2
In this situation, the connected party’s display (see below) shows the same
information. The calling party’s display is also updated if the calling and
called parties are on the same switch.
— Connected Party Display
The connected party is the party who answers the redirected call.
a= CALLING ID

to

CALLED ID

R

The R indicates the reason for redirection. The CALLING ID and the
CALLED ID may be the name or the number, depending on the
information received from the far end.
Displays for conference calls

Both terminal and attendant conference calls are identified as calls with “n”
number of conferees. This display information generates locally and does not
change the display on another switch. If the conference call eventually drops back
to a two-party call, the original display information is restored. However, when
two DCS and/or ISDN calls (or any possible combination of each) are
conferenced and revert to a two-party call, the trunk group of the remaining call
displays.
Displays for calls to hunt groups

On ISDN calls to a hunt group extension, the caller’s display identifies either the
name of the hunt group or the name of the group member who answers the call,
depending on hunt group administration.
Displays for calls to Terminating Extension Groups (TEG)

On ISDN calls to a TEG, the caller’s display identifies either the group or the
group member who answers the call, depending on administration.

1740

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN service

Caller Information Forwarding

With CINFO you can use a vector collect digits step to retrieve caller entered
digits (ced) and customer database-provided digits (cdpd) supplied by the network
in an incoming call’s ISDN SET UP message. ISDN is required if the CINFO
comes from the network.
Facility Restriction Level (FRL) and Traveling
Class Mark (TCM)

The TCM used to pass on the originating facility’s FRL is sent by ISDN facilities
in the SETUP message only if the trunk services type is tandem.
Information Indicator Digits (II-digits)

With II-digits you can make vector-routing decisions based on the type of the
originating line. II-digits are provided for an incoming call by ISDN-PRI. It is a
generally available ISDN AT&T Network service.
Malicious Call Trace (MCT)

ISDN calling number identification is sent when MCT notification is activated on
an ISDN trunk.
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) - Limited

The ISDN standard MSN feature lets you assign multiple extensions to a single
BRI endpoint. A side effect of supporting the NT interface is the MSN feature
works with BRI endpoints allowing the Channel ID IE to be encoded as
“preferred.” The endpoint must be administered as the far end of an NT-side
ISDN-BRI trunk group. Also, you must use the Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) feature
to assign the desired extensions to the “node” at the far end of the trunk group.
Overlap Sending

You can administer overlap sending on AAR and ARS calls routed over ISDN
trunk groups. This allows you to send and receive digits one digit at a time instead
of enbloc. (With enbloc, digits are not sent until the entire group of digits is
received).
Interworking between TGU/TGE trunks and
ISDN (Italy)

This feature modifies ISDN messaging operations in systems that use TGE/TGU
trunks to network satellite switches. Messaging from the Avaya MultiVantage
provides appropriate ringback or busy tone to the calling party.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1741

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Australia Malicious Call Trace
Avaya MultiVantage with a BRI connection to the Australian public
network is able to notify the network if a user in a private network invokes
the Malicious Call Trace feature. This works on Australian national
connections.

■

Direct Inward Dialing
Some public network operators may not offer full DID service on BRI
trunks, but instead may offer the BRI equivalent, which typically is called
MSN. This is the case if the public network treats the BRI as an endpoint
interface rather than a trunk group interface.
In such a case, the network only routes up to 10 public numbers to a
particular pair of BRI trunks. Furthermore, the network may not let calls
overflow from one BRI trunk to another.

■

D-Channel Backup
D-Channel Backup is not supported on BRI connections.

■

Distributed Communications System
If both DCS and ISDN features are provided over the same facility with a
DEFINITY server, DCS displays generally override ISDN displays.
However, with Avaya MultiVantage, the ISDN connected name and
number can override the DCS called name and number if the Display
Connected Name/Number for ISDN DCS Calls field is y on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
BRI trunks support DCS if using a BX.25 link to transport the DCS
messages. DCS+, also known as DCS Over ISDN D-Channel, according to
the AT&T protocol, is not supported on BRI trunks.

■

Facility Test Calls
Neither BRI or PRI trunks support Facility Test Calls.

■

France VN4 Protocol
The France national VN4 protocol is supported on BRI trunks as ETSI.

■

Generalized Route Selection
BRI trunks are capable of carrying 56Kbps or 64Kbps data calls. The link
coding that restricts certain PRI trunks to 56Kbps only does not apply to
BRI trunks.

■

German 1TR6 Protocol
The German national 1TR6 protocol is not supported over BRI trunks.

1742

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

ISDN service

■

Message Sequence Tracer
ISDN-BRI trunks support Message Sequence Tracer. However, certain
filtering capabilities available for PRI trunks are not available. Specifically,
it is not possible to filter BRI trunk messages based on incoming/outgoing
calling/called number.

■

Network Access - Public (LEC/AT&T/Other Carriers)
Public-network access using BRI trunks is available but only in those
countries that support point-to-point BRI connections. In the U.S., BRI
access is offered only by the Local Exchange Carriers and not by
Interexchange Carriers such as AT&T.

■

Network Access - Private Premises Based
Full support for private-network connections using BRI trunks is available.

■

Non-Facility Associated Signaling
Non-Facility Associated Signaling is not supported on BRI connections.

■

Temporary Signaling Connections
Avaya MultiVantage does not support Temporary Signaling Connections
according to the AT&T protocol on BRI trunk interfaces. Only the QSIG
NCA TSC protocol is supported on these interfaces

■

Wideband Switching (NxDS0)
Avaya MultiVantage does not support wideband switching on BRI
connections.

Related topics

See Administered Connections ‘‘Administered connections’’ on page 1454 for
detailed information on this feature.
See ‘‘Call-by-call service selection’’ on page 1629 for detailed information on this
feature.
See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software
for information on Distributed Communications System (DCS) networks and on
QSIG and QSIG features such as Call Diversion, Call Transfer, Name
Identification, and Path Replacement.
See ‘‘Facility and Non-Facility Associated Signaling’’ on page 1678 for
information on assigning data channels to bearer channels on one or more circuit
packs.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1743

Features and technical reference

See ‘‘Generalized route selection’’ on page 1687 for information on this feature
that matches calls to appropriate transmission facilities based on the endpoints and
the type of call (for example, voice or data).
See ‘‘Look-ahead routing’’ on page 1750 for information on balancing call
volume across a network by automatically rerouting ISDN calls to other switches
in the network.
See ‘‘Wideband Switching’’ on page 1931 for information on providing
high-speed end-to-end connectivity for applications (such as video conferencing)
that require high bandwidth.

Leave Word Calling
Leave Word Calling (LWC) allows internal system users to leave a short
preprogrammed message for other internal users. When the message is stored, the
Automatic Message Waiting lamp on the called telephone lights. Users can
retrieve LWC messages using a telephone display, Voice Messaging Retrieval, or
AUDIX. Messages may be retrieved in English, French, Italian, Spanish, or a
user-defined language.
Avaya MultiVantage also provides voice synthesis (either English or Italian) for
LWC, depending on which voice-synthesis circuit pack is installed in the system.
The system can indicate that one telephone received a LWC message on a second
telephone. The system lights a remote Automatic Message Waiting lamp at the
remote telephone and the Automatic Message Waiting lamp lights at the called
telephone. The Remote Automatic Message Waiting lamp is a status lamp
associated with a button assigned for this purpose. Thus, an assistant’s telephone
could light when an executive receives a LWC message. If the executive calls to
retrieve messages, the assistant knows at a glance if any messages have been left.
Users without telephone Display can have their messages retrieved by a
system-wide message retriever or by covering users in their Call Coverage path.
They can also use Voice Message Retrieval.
The system restricts unauthorized users from displaying, canceling, or deleting
messages. The Lock function restricts a telephone and the Unlock function
releases the restriction. Users activate Lock by dialing a system-wide access code.
They cancel Lock by first dialing a system-wide access code and then an Unlock
security code unique to the telephone. These functions apply only to the telephone
where the function is active. You can assign a status lamp to show the lock status
of the telephone.

1744

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Leave Word Calling

Leave Word Calling Log External Calls allows the switch to monitor when an
external call is not answered. The switch keeps a record of up to 15 calls, provided
information on the caller identification is available, and the phone’s message lamp
lights. The phone set displays the names and numbers of unsuccessful callers.
Considerations
■

You can administer up to 10 telephones (or nine telephones and the
attendant console group) as system-wide message retrievers.

■

If the stored-message level reaches 95 percent of capacity, the status lamps
associated with all Coverage Message Retrieval buttons in the system
flash. These lamps continue to flash until the stored-message level falls
below 85 percent. Authorized retrievers can selectively delete messages to
gain storage space. Old messages are not purged automatically by the
system.

■

LWC messages cannot be stored, canceled, or retrieved for Vector
Directory Number extensions.

■

AUDIX Interface

Interactions

LWC Cancel cannot be used to cancel an AUDIX message.
■

Bridged Call Appearance
A LWC message left by a user on a bridged call appearance leaves a
message for the called party to call the primary extension for the bridged
call appearance. When a user calls a primary extension and activates LWC,
the message is left for the primary extension, even if the call was answered
at a bridged call appearance.

■

Call Coverage
You can use LWC with or without Call Coverage. However, the two
features complement each other. The Coverage Callback option of Call
Coverage is provided by LWC. Also, a caller can activate LWC for the
called party even if the call has been answered by a covering user.

■

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
LWC Message Retrieval does not work with CAS.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1745

Features and technical reference

■

Conference
A member of a conference call cannot activate LWC because the user
cannot be uniquely identified. After LWC has been activated for a party on
a conference or transfer, the conference or transfer originator cannot press
Conference/Transfer a second time to return to the original call. The
originator must select the call appearance button to return to the
previously-held call.

■

Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
When an EAS agent is logged into a telephone, the agent can only retrieve
LWC messages left for that agent’s login ID. To retrieve LWC messages
left for that telephone, the agent must log out.
When an EAS agent is logged into a telephone, its Message lamp defaults
to tracking the status of LWC messages waiting for the telephone.
However, you can assign the Message lamp to track the status of LWC
messages waiting for the agent’s login ID.

■

Vector Directory Number (VDN)
LWC messages cannot be stored, cancelled, or retrieved through VDN.

Line Lockout
Line Lockout removes single-line extensions from service when users do not hang
up after receiving dial tone or intercept tone for an administered length of time.
You can administer the system to play a special “howler” tone before locking an
analog extension by setting the Station Tone Forward Disconnect field to busy on
the ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ screen. For the howler tone to play, an
Avaya representative must also enable the Howler After Busy field on the
‘‘System Parameters Country-Options’’ screen.
If you want the system to disconnect and optionally lock out users who have let an
outgoing public network trunk call ring for an extended period of time, you can
have Avaya enable the Disconnect on No Answer by Call Type field, also on the
‘‘System Parameters Country-Options’’ screen.

1746

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Listed Directory Numbers

Line Lockout occurs when:
■

A user does not hang up after the other party on a call is disconnected.
The user receives the dial tone for 10 seconds and then receives the
intercept tone for the length of time administered in Line Intercept Tone
Timer on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. If the handset
remains off-hook, the telephone is taken out of service.

■

A user pauses for 10 seconds between digits while dialing.
The user receives intercept tone for 30 seconds. If the handset remains
off-hook, the telephone is taken out of service.

The out-of-service condition remains in effect until the user hangs up.
Considerations
■

The out-of-service condition provided by Line Lockout does not tie up
switching facilities.

■

Line Lockout does not apply to multiappearance telephones.

Related topics

See ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795, Time Before Off-hook
Alert for more information.

Listed Directory Numbers
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) has two capabilities that allow outside callers to
access your attendant group, depending on the type of trunk used for the incoming
call. You use one capability to allow attendant group access via incoming DID
trunks. You use another capability to allow attendant group access via incoming
CO and FX trunks.
Brief description

The system routes both incoming DID calls and incoming FX and CO calls to an
attendant group, depending on how you administer the trunks.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1747

Features and technical reference

How the system routes incoming DID trunk
calls to the attendant group

Incoming DID calls route only to an extension. The LDN feature allows you to
assign one or more extensions to an attendant group. The system uses the LDN
extension, or extensions, to route calls to an attendant group.
How the system routes incoming FX and CO
trunk calls to the attendant group

Incoming FX and CO trunks can terminate at an attendant group, although you
administer your system to terminate the calls elsewhere. You can administer the
system to terminate an incoming FX or CO trunk to one of the following:
■

Attendant group

■

Extension (This could be a VDN, an ACD split, a DDC group, a UCD
group, a remote access extension, or any system extension.)

If you decide to terminate the call at the attendant group, the system treats the call
as an LDN call.
Considerations

The number of listed directory numbers that you can assign depends on your
system’s configuration.
Interactions
■

Night Service
If you activate night-service capability and a night console is not assigned
or is not operational, incoming LDN calls route as follows:
— DID LDN calls route to a designated DID LDN night extension. If
no DID LDN night extension is designated, DID LDN calls route to
the attendant.
— Incoming CO or FX trunk calls route to the night destination
specified for the trunk group. If no night destination is specified for
the trunk group, the calls route to the normal incoming destination
for that trunk group.
— Internal calls and coverage calls to the attendant route to the DID
LDN night extension during night service.

1748

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Location by region

Location by region
Location by Region provides a way to administer location by IP network region.
This allows for the correct date and time information and trunk routing based on
the IP network region.
Detailed description

Location by Region allows you the ability to have an IP phone registered with a
DEFINITY server, but located at a site with a S8300 Media Server with a G700 or
Remote Office endpoints, to display the correct time and date worldwide. The IP
phone can be administered in a different network region from other Avaya
MultiVantage endpoints, and in the same “location” as the S8300 Media Server or
Remote Office users. It allows IP endpoint users the ability to move from location
to location and always have correct display information. Remote users are
identified in a network region and location that routes them to correct 911 services
or notifies them via announcements, that they are in a different 911 jurisdiction
than the DEFINITY they are registered to.
Alerts/Interactions
911 Call Handling

Location by Region attempts to overcome a limitation in the emergency response
system - USA Public Safety Answering Points (PSAPs) currently have no good
way to contact each other. Even if you are able to speak, and you explain to a
PSAP in one part of the country that you need help in another part of the country,
the 911 staff that you are talking to have no fast way to relay your comments to a
PSAP near where you are located. If you describe your location as out-of-state,
you likely will to be told to hang up and find a local phone.
Earlier 911 call handling features were unable to handle IP telephones because
there was no way to pop up a window on an IP telephone to let the IP telephone
user know why their 911 call was blocked and advise them on the right thing to
do. Now, you can choose to dedicate one location to handle such roaming IP
telephones. That special location could have corresponding ARS routing tables
that route all 911 calls to a repeating announcement saying something like “You
are too far away from the switch for the [name of the home location]’s public
safety office to be able to help you. Please call 911 from a local circuit switched
phone.”

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1749

Features and technical reference

Look-ahead routing
Look-Ahead Routing (LAR) allows the switch to reroute an outgoing ISDN call
that is not completing. The switch attempts to complete the call along a different
routing preference, or it tries the current routing preference a second time. If the
current preference fails twice, the next routing preference is tried.
LAR can be administered at an origination switch or a tandem switch. It can be
turned off at different points in the network to reduce network load. You use LAR
with AAR and ARS, GRS, and UDP) You can also use it with a FAC ISDN
Access Code. A LAR field is administered on the Route Pattern screen.
NOTE:

When LAR is used in a mixed network of Avaya MultiVantage Systems and
DEFINITY ECS switches, LAR ends at the DEFINITY ECS switch and
calls are rejected the normal way. However, if a LAR-triggering cause value
is passed back in the network to a DEFINITY server that is enabled for
LAR, LAR is attempted from that switch again.
Detailed description

LAR can be administered for each ISDN route preference in each Pattern Number.
The maximum number of LAR attempts per call per switch is 2 times the number
of route preferences in the route pattern. LAR can be administered at each
intermediate node that the call may be tandemed through to allow the attempt of
all possible routes.
You can control LAR by:

1750

■

administering it on a per route-preference basis

■

partitioning trunks

■

limiting the number of hop counts

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Look-ahead routing

LAR activation

LAR is active when a call is rejected with a cause value in the range of #34–#47
and #3 (no route to destination). The range of #34–#47 indicates congestion and
that resources are unavailable. The following cause values activate LAR:
Cause Value

Cause Description

3

no route to destination

34

no circuit/channel available

38

network out of order

41

temporary failure

42

switching equipment congestion

43

access information discarded

44

requested circuit or channel not available

47

resources unavailable
NOTE:

When country code 13, protocol version a, is administered on the DS1
Circuit Pack screen, only the cause values #10 and #89 activate LAR.
LAR terminates when:
■

call is successfully routed

■

call is rejected with a non-LAR-triggering cause value

■

no further route preference can be used to route the call

LAR measurement

You can measure the number of attempted and successful LAR reroutes. The
Measurements LAR Route Pattern screen displays LAR measurements for a
particular route pattern. See Avaya MultiVantage™ System Monitoring and
Reporting for more information.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1751

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Automatic Circuit Assurance
LAR rerouting attempts are recorded as short holding time calls.

■

Distributed Communications Systems (DCS)
If a non-DCS trunk preference is selected for rerouting a DCS call, DCS
feature transparency is lost. If LAR for a DCS call is done within the same
DCS trunk group, feature transparency is not lost.

■

QSIG Networks
If a non-Supplementary Services B (SSB) trunk preference is selected for
rerouting a SSB call, QSIG feature transparency is lost. If LAR for a QSIG
call is done through either the same or another SS B trunk group, feature
transparency is not lost.

■

Ringback Queuing
When a call originates and queues at the trunk group queue, the call can be
placed in queue multiple times if LAR is active. The call originator can be
called back each time the call is continued automatically.

■

Satellite Hop Limit
Satellite Hop Limit always takes precedence over LAR. When the
maximum hop limit is reached for a route preference, the last call routing
attempt is denied and the call is rejected with a cause value of #28 —
invalid number format. This value does not activate LAR.

■

System Measurements
System resource use during LAR attempts are included in existing system
measurements and performance reports. For more information about LAR
system measurements, see Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software.

Related Topics

See Route Pattern for information on the Route Pattern screen.

1752

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Loss plans

Loss plans
Loss plans determine the amount of loss (quieter) or gain (louder) applied on
calls. Usually, your system uses a pre-defined loss plan that is based on the
administered country code. In some circumstances, you may be able to change the
loss plan used by your system on a per trunk or per phone basis.

! CAUTION:
The values in the loss plan can significantly affect the quality of service that
your users experience. Therefore, in order to change the loss plan you must
thoroughly understand loss plans and your particular configuration. Avaya
recommends that you seek technical assistance from Avaya before making
any modifications to the loss plan.
In order to be able to modify your loss plan, the Digital Loss Plan Modification
field must be set to y on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen, and the
Customize field must also be y on the System Parameters Country-Options
screen. An Avaya representative must enable these fields for you.
The 2 Party Loss Plan page of the System Parameters Country-Options screen
allows you to set the gain or loss levels (in dB) between two parties on a call. Each
row on this screen is considered a different loss group. You can assign a loss
group to a particular phone or trunk by administering a value for the Loss Group
fields on the Station and Trunk Group screens. This allows you to use different
loss plans for different types of phones or different trunk groups.
The Tone and Conference Loss Plans page of the System Parameters
Country-Options screen allows you to set the gain or loss levels (in dB) between
all parties on a conference call, as well as the total gain or loss in a conference
based on the number of parties.
IP endpoints connected via hairpinning or direct IP–IP are not under the control of
the administrable loss plan.

Loudspeaker paging
You can connect Avaya MultiVantage to loudspeaker systems and allow users to
page from their phones. You can administer up to 9 separate zones (sets of
loudspeakers) on Avaya MultiVantage, so an announcement can be made to one
group or location without disturbing people who don’t need to hear the
announcement. Auxiliary trunks connect the speakers in each zone to ports on an
auxiliary trunk circuit pack.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1753

Features and technical reference

Brief description

Avaya MultiVantage offers 2 types of loudspeaker paging. You can use each
separately, and you can also use both together.
Voice paging

Voice paging allows users to make announcements over a
loudspeaker system from their phones. You can integrate
voice paging and Call Park by enabling deluxe paging.

Chime paging

If frequent voice pages are undesirable, you can assign a
unique series of chimes (a chime code) to each extension. The
chime code assigned to that extension plays over the speakers
whenever that extension is paged.
Chime paging is sometimes called Code Calling Access.

How users place voice pages

With standard voice paging, users page by dialing the trunk access code assigned
to the zone they wish to page. If users have an active call, they must manually put
the call on hold or park it before they dial the trunk access code.
When deluxe paging is enabled, users can automatically park an active call when
they page, as described below.
Users with multi-appearance phones

The following description only applies to systems with deluxe paging. To page
and park an active call simultaneously, users with a multi-appearance phone press
Transfer, dial the trunk access code + an extension number where the call will be
parked, make the announcement, and press Transfer again. The paged party dials
the answer back feature access code + the extension number and is connected
directly to the parked call. If the paging user ends the page by pressing
Conference instead of Transfer, they are conferenced with the parked caller and
both are connected in a 3-way conference with the paged user when he or she
responds. This is called “Meet-Me Conferencing.”
If the paging user doesn’t want to park the active call, deluxe paging also allows
“Meet-Me Paging.” Paging users can put an active call on hold and make their
page, announcing their own extension. When the paged party calls, the paging
user can conference the call on hold or transfer it to the paged party.

1754

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Loudspeaker paging

Users with single-line phones

This description only applies to systems with deluxe paging. To page and park an
active call simultaneously, users with a single-line phone press Recall or flash the
switch hook, dial the trunk access code + an extension where the call will be
parked, and press Recall again. The paging user is conferenced with the parked
caller and both are connected in a 3-way conference with the paged user when he
or she responds. In other words, Meet-Me conferencing is standard operation for
users with single-line phones. The paged party dials the answer back feature
access code + the extension number and is connected directly to the parked call.
If the paging user does not press Recall until the loudspeaker paging time-out
interval expires, they hear confirmation tone and the active call is automatically
parked on their extension. When the paged party answers the call, they are
connected to the paging party who can then transfer the call to the calling party.
How users place chime pages

Users page by dialing the trunk access code for a zone followed by the extension
of the person they want to page. The system matches the extension dialed to its
assigned code and plays the code over the loudspeakers. If users have an active
call when they start to page, the call is automatically parked on the extension
dialed in the page. Paged parties may retrieve the parked call normally.
Auxiliary paging systems

Avaya MultiVantage requires a separate port for each paging zone and supports a
maximum of 9 zones. If you have more than 9 zones or don’t want to allot that
many ports for paging, Avaya can provide auxiliary paging systems. These
systems can support many zones from 1 port. They can also provide additional
capabilities such as two-way communication through the loudspeaker system (the
person paged can speak directly to the pager over the loudspeaker).
For more information, contact your Avaya representative.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1755

Features and technical reference

Restrictions on loudspeaker paging

These restrictions apply to both voice, deluxe voice, and chime paging:
■

A paging call can’t be placed on hold, included in a conference call, or
transferred. Ringback queuing doesn’t work with loudspeaker paging calls
either.

■

Users with any of the following restrictions cannot page:
—
—
—
—

Controlled restriction
Manual originating line service
Origination restriction
Miscellaneous trunk restriction

■

A user with a single-line phone will not hear a call-waiting tone if they get
a call while they’re paging.

■

Listed directory number and direct inward dialing calls cannot access the
paging system. However, attendants can park incoming calls and page.

■

Remote users (such as remote access users and tie-trunk users) who are
paging cannot use # to park calls on their own extensions.

■

Bridged Call Appearance

Interactions

If a parked call includes a shared terminating extension group, a shared
PCOL, or a redirected call with a temporary bridged appearance, the
maximum number of off-hook parties on the call is five, instead of six. The
sixth position is reserved for the answer-back call.
■

Call Coverage
If a coverage call is parked by deluxe paging, the temporary bridged
appearance at the principal extension is maintained as long as the covering
user remains off-hook or places the call on hold.

■

Call Park
If a call is parked by deluxe paging and the time-out interval expires, the
call normally returns to the paging user. However, with remote access and
tie trunk access, the call returns to the attendant. If unanswered, the call
follows the coverage path of the paging user.

■

Call Pickup
If you use call pickup or directed call pickup to answer a call and then park
it by deluxe paging, a temporary bridged appearance at the principal
extension is maintained if you remain off-hook or place the call on hold.

1756

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Loudspeaker paging

■

Conference — Attendant and Terminal
Paging calls cannot be conferenced.

■

Data Call Setup
If the Data button has been pressed for modem pooling, access to paging is
denied.

■

Data Privacy
If a call has Data Privacy activated and you park it by deluxe paging, Data
Privacy for that call is automatically deactivated.

■

Hunt Groups
If a hunt-group member parks a call using deluxe paging, the call is parked
on the member’s own extension, not the hunt-group extension. You cannot
park calls on a group extension by dialing the extension as a call-park
destination.

■

Night Service
If a night-station user parks a Night Service call with deluxe paging, the
call is parked on the night station’s primary extension.

■

Personal Central Office Line (PCOL)
If a PCOL call is parked by deluxe paging, the temporary bridged
appearance of the call is maintained at the PCOL extension until the call is
disconnected.

■

Terminating Extension Group (TEG)
If a TEG member parks a call using deluxe paging, the call is parked on the
member’s extension, not the group extension. You cannot park calls on a
group extension by dialing the extension as a call-park destination.

■

Transfer
Paging calls can’t be transferred.

Chime paging
■

Abbreviated Dialing
Don’t use special characters in abbreviated dialing lists used with chime
paging.

■

Conference — Attendant
A call cannot be conference while the attendant is accessing paging
equipment. The attendant can, however, release the call after paging the
called party.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1757

Features and technical reference

■

Conference — Terminal
A call cannot be conferenced while the user is accessing paging equipment.

■

PagePac Paging Systems
If you use chime code paging with a PagePac system, you can only page
one zone at a time. PagePac systems expect a 2-digit code to access a
particular zone. The system, however, immediately plays the chime code
once a connection is established.

■

Transfer
A call cannot be transferred while the attendant is accessing paging
equipment.

Related topics

See ‘‘Setting up voice paging over loudspeakers’’ on page 473 to administer voice
paging.
See ‘‘Setting up chime paging over loudspeakers’’ on page 476 to administer
chime paging.

1758

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Malicious Call Trace

Malicious Call Trace
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) allows you to trace malicious calls. MCT allows you
to define a group of telephone users who can notify others in the group when they
receive a malicious call. These users then can retrieve information related to the
call. Using this information, you can identify the malicious call source or provide
information to personnel at an adjacent switch to complete the trace. MCT also
allows you to record the malicious call.
You allow users in the group to activate MCT and/or to control malicious call
trace. The controlling telephone user, or controller, receives the information that
MCT collects on the call.
NOTE:

MCT does not work with the S8300 Media Server at this time.
MCT Voice Recorder

The MCT Voice Recorder is any type of audio recorder (for example, a standard
audio cassette player) that you can control via the Avaya Auxiliary Trunk board.
To record the call, manually place the MCT Voice Recorder in Record mode. The
telephone user then activates the MCT feature which applies power to the recorder
(via the connected Auxiliary Trunk’s control signal interface).
Activating MCT

To activate MCT while on an active malicious call, perform one of the following:
■

Push an MCT-Activate feature button

■

Place the call on hold, get a second call appearance, and dial an
MCT-Activate FAC. After the dial tone, the user then dials their own
extension, presses #, or waits for a 10-second time-out.

■

Signal another user in the defined group to activate MCT. The co-worker
activates MCT, waits for the dial tone, and dials the call recipient’s
extension.

■

Inform a controller, who can request that another switch continue tracing
the call.
The switches must be tandemed. The controller on the first switch supplies
the trunk member port id to be traced. The controller on the second switch
activates MCT and presses *, followed by the trunk port id. The letters A
through E of a port id are entered as 1 through 5 on the station keypad. For
example, trunk port id 01C0401 would be entered as 0130401.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1759

Features and technical reference

Once MCT is activated, information on the call is collected and alerts users in the
group. The alert is not a call, so it is not affected by queues at the user’s terminal.
If an MCT Voice Recorder is connected, it begins recording the conversation.
NOTE:

Any Bridging, Conference, or Intrusion tone connected to parties on the
connection are temporarily removed while the MCT Voice Recorder
connects.
Controlling MCT

The first controlling terminal to respond to an MCT alert becomes the controller
for the call. Alerting on any other controlling terminals stops.
To begin trace of an incoming call using the Malicious Call Trace feature, the
controller dials the 3-digit equipment location of the incoming trunk.
During alerting, the controller’s display shows the message “MALICIOUS CALL
TRACE REQUEST.” While this message displays, no information on incoming
calls displays.
When the controller pushes the MCT-Control button, information displays
identifying the called party. When the controller pushes the button again the
remaining MCT information displays.
MCT collects and displays three types of information, calling information as
follows:
■

If the call originated inside the system or on the same node within a DCS
network, the calling number displays.

■

If the call originates outside the system and an Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN) calling number identification is available on the incoming
trunk, then the calling number displays. Otherwise, the incoming
trunk-equipment location displays. In this case, the user must call the
connecting switch.

For all calls, the system displays the called number, the activating number,
whether the call is active, and identification of any other parties on the call.
Deactivating MCT

The controller deactivates MCT by dialing the MCT-Deactivate FAC.
Deactivation frees resources involved in the trace that were blocked. When all
parties hang up, the MCT Voice Recorder disconnects.

1760

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Malicious Call Trace

Administering MCT for ISDN notification

The following describes how to administer the ISDN MCT notification for an
ISDN trunk group (public-ntwrk, tandem, tie, or access).
Display the System-Parameter Customer-Options screen and ensure that ISDN is
enabled.
One of the following must be set on the DS1 screen:
■

If the DS1 is connected to the public network in Australia, set Country
Protocol field to 2.

■

For a private network of MultiVantage systems, set Country Protocol
to 1 and Protocol Version to a. Avaya recommends this if DCS
features are used in the private network.

■

For a private network of MultiVantage systems, set Peer Protocol to
q-sig. (Peer Protocol appears on the DS1 screen when Signaling
Mode field is isdn-pri, Connect field is pbx, and Interface field is
peer-master or peer-slave.)

One of the following must be set on the ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack screen:
■

If the ISDN-BRI is connected to the public network in Australia, set
Country Protocol field to 2.

■

For a private network of MultiVantage systems, set Interface to
peer-master or peer-slave.

Considerations
■

If the originator of the call disconnects, MCT drops; if the recipient of the
call disconnects, MCT does not drop.

■

Except for Emergency Access to the Attendant, features that normally
display information do not do so on a controlling telephone. Otherwise,
these features function normally until MCT deactivates.

■

Do not use FACs to activate MCT because the process takes users too long.

■

Visually Impaired Attendant Service (VIAS) voices-out display
information for MCT activation, but not for MCT control.

■

MCT information on an active malicious call is lost during a switch failure.

■

When directing a trace to an adjacent switch, consider the following:
— The malicious caller may hear a warning tone as a result of the
intrusion.
— You may lose continuity on the trace because the person activating
MCT on the second switch may not be the MCT controller.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1761

Features and technical reference

■

If a malicious call comes in on a non-ISDN trunk, the controller needs the
telephone number for the connecting switch and a cross-reference of
system-trunk port numbers (including DS1 channel number, if appropriate)
not the trunk equipment locations at the connecting switch. Be sure that
they have this information.

■

The following are the system initiated operations for MCT:
— Conversation Recording — After the user activates MCT, the
system attaches a MCT Voice Recorder, if available, to record the
conversation, if available.
— Historical Recording — After the user activates MCT, the system
records the MCT-information that you can subsequently retrieve via
the MCT History report.

Interactions
■

Bridged Call Appearance
If a user at a primary extension receives an indication call, then a telephone
with a bridged call appearance of this extension can bridge on to the call.
For an MCT-Activate button push, if the currently active extension is a
bridged appearance, the system records the primary extension as the MCT
recipient.
For an MCT-Activate FAC, the user dials the number of the telephone with
the bridged call appearance that is actually on the call, instead of the
bridged number. However, the system logs the primary extension as the
recipient. Likewise, for self-originated MCT activations via FAC, the
system logs the primary extension as the MCT recipient provided that the
recently held appearance is a bridged call appearance. When you activate
MCT for yourself, dial # or wait for interdigit time-out.

■

Conference
A user can use conferencing to place a malicious caller on hold. The user
can initiate conferencing and enter the MCT-Activate FAC, then stop
conferencing and return to the malicious caller’s appearance.
MCT-Activate can be generated for a member of a conference and is not
affected by the number of parties on the conference.

■

Centralized Attendant Service
MCT-Activate, MCT-Control, and MCT-Deactivate must be performed by
telephones within the same PBX.

1762

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Malicious Call Trace

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
If a telephone in a DCS network is involved in a malicious call, the
extension is recorded and displayed with the MCT information. MCT
notification passes over ISDN-PRI DCS trunks but MCT-Activate,
MCT-Control, and MCT-Deactivate must be performed by telephones
within the same DCS node.

■

Emergency Access to the Attendant
Ordinarily, during MCT-Control no other feature can access the controlling
telephone’s display. However, MCT gives up control of the display until
the Emergency Access call has completed.

■

ISDN
ISDN notification of an MCT activation takes place if either the originator
of the call is an ISDN trunk group with Country Protocol 2 or any trunk on
the call is an ISDN private network trunk with Country Protocol 1 and
Protocol Version “a” or Peer Protocol q-sig. When the ISDN trunk group is
Country Protocol 2, notification is sent only to the public network.

■

Make-Busy/Position-Busy/Send All Calls
The switch attempts to activate Make-Busy or Position-Busy for
telephones or consoles that activate MCT-Control. If a user has a SAC
button administered but not active for the primary extension on the phone,
SAC activates when the user activates MCT-Control. When the user
deactivates MCT, SAC stays active unit it is deactivated by the user.

■

Music-On-Hold
If an agent places a malicious call on hold that is being recorded and the
call goes to music-on-hold, the music-on-hold port and the MCT Voice
Recorder port can lock. In this case, the MCT Voice Recorder continues to
record the music-on-hold and is unavailable for recording subsequent
malicious calls. You must perform a busy-out/release on the MCT Voice
Recorder port to drop the connection.

■

Priority Calling
A priority call to an MCT recipient is denied.

■

QSIG Global Networking
MCT notification passes over the following ISDN QSIG trunk groups:
tandem, tie, access, and DMI-BOS. QSIG supplementary services name
and number ID provide a malicious caller’s name and telephone number.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1763

Features and technical reference

■

Transfer
If a user transfers a malicious call, the MCT information displayed on the
controlling telephone identifies the transferring party as the MCT recipient.
A user transfers a malicious caller to hold. The user initiates a Transfer,
receives the second dial tone, enters the MCT-Activate FAC, then halts the
remainder of the Transfer operation and returns to the malicious caller’s
appearance.

■

Trunk Access Code
To activate MCT for a TAC, a user must have an MCT-Control button
administered. The user hears a dial tone and enters the trunk-member
number for the trunk group that the TAC identified. The user then becomes
the MCT controller for a call involving the identified trunk member. This
TAC operation is useful when users need to trace a call that has tandemed
through their switch to terminate on another switch.

■

Trunk Groups
If a PCOL is involved in an MCT, then the switch may hold up the trunk
until the MCT deactivates.

Misoperation Handling
Misoperation Handling defines how calls are handled when a misoperation
occurs. A misoperation can occur either:
■

When a user with a call on hold goes on-hook before an operation
completes. In some cases, going on-hook completes the operation, as in
call transfer.

■

When the system enters Night Service while attendant consoles have calls
on hold.

You can alter standard Misoperation Handling to ensure that callers are not left on
hold indefinitely with no way to reach someone for assistance or that callers are
not dropped by the system. See Misoperation Alerting and Intercept Treatment on
Failed Trunk Transfers on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen for more
information.
Contact an Avaya representative for instructions on administering Misoperation
Handling for use in France.
Detailed description

Misoperation handling varies considerably, depending on how it is administered
and what conditions are in effect when a call is placed on hold.

1764

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Misoperation Handling

Standard operation

Standard misoperation handling is in effect when you set the Intercept Treatment
on Failed Trunk Transfers field to y and set the Misoperation Alerting field to n.
The type of telephone that is in use when the misoperation occurs (analog
single-line or digital multiappearance) affects standard misoperation handling.
The following scenario describes a typical misoperation on an analog terminal.
1. While connected to an incoming external call, an analog-terminal user
flashes with the intent of transferring the call to another terminal.
2. The user hears dial tone, dials an invalid extension, and hangs up.
3. A misoperation occurs. The analog-terminal user receives priority ringback
indefinitely.
The following scenario describes a typical misoperation on a digital terminal.
1. While connected to an incoming external call, a digital-terminal user with a
call on hold goes on-hook during another feature operation before
completing the operation.
2. The user hears dial tone, dials an invalid extension, and hangs up.
3. A misoperation occurs unless going on-hook completes the operation (for
example, call transfer). The held call remains on hold indefinitely with a
flashing call-appearance lamp.
Enhanced operation

Once you enable Misoperation Alerting, calls are handled depending upon the
type of call placed on hold and the type of telephone (digital multiappearance,
analog single-line, or attendant console) in use when the misoperation occurs. The
following list describes the 3 call types that determine misoperation handling.

555-233-506

■

Call Type 1 — An outgoing public-network call is classified as Type 1
when answer supervision is received or when the trunk group’s Answer
Supervision Timer expires, even if the trunk is still ringing. An incoming
call is classified as Type 1 when it is answered.

■

Call Type 2 — An incoming external-public-network call is classified as
Type 2 before it is answered. A misoperation cannot occur with a Type 2
call because an unanswered incoming call cannot be placed on hold
without first being answered.

■

Call Type 3 — All internal calls, conference calls, and tie-trunk calls are
classified as Type 3.

Issue 5 October 2002

1765

Features and technical reference

Analog terminal misoperation

The following 2 scenarios describe typical misoperations on an analog terminal.
Scenario 1.

1. While connected to an incoming external call (Type 1), an analog-terminal
user flashes to transfer the call to another terminal.
2. The user hears dial tone, dials an invalid extension, then hears intercept
tone.
3. When the user hangs up, the call re-alerts the user for 15 seconds and
eventually routes to the attendant.
Scenario 2.

1. While connected to an incoming external call (Type 1), an analog station
user flashes to place the call on hold while calling another extension.
2. The user hears dial tone and dials the CAS Remote Hold/Answer
Hold/unhold access code.
3. The user dials an extension and talks with the user at the extension and
hangs up.
4. A misoperation occurs because the first call is still left on hold.
5. The terminal is alerted for 15 seconds and the call routes to an attendant.
6. If the first call is not answered before the timer expires, the call drops.
Digital terminal misoperation

The following scenario describes a typical misoperation on a digital terminal.
1. While connected to an incoming external call (Type 1), a digital-terminal
user places the call on hold to transfer the call to another terminal.
2. The user hears dial tone, dials an invalid extension, and hangs up.
3. A misoperation occurs. The call on hold rings the terminal again (not
priority ringing) for the number of rings administered for call coverage.
4. The call then routes to the terminal’s coverage path, which directs the call
to an announcement and/or disconnects.
Attendant console misoperation

A misoperation occurs on an attendant console with calls on hold only when the
system enters Night Service.
1. The system enters Night Service with calls on hold at an attendant console.
2. All calls on hold re-alert (as if the Held-Call Timed-Reminder had
expired).

1766

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Modem pooling

3. When the calls start re-alerting, a timer starts. The timer is set to the value
assigned in the Alerting (sec) field on the Console-Parameters screen.
4. If the attendant does not answer the calls before the timer expires, calls
route to the system Night Service destination. Calls that are not answered at
the night service destination before the night-service-disconnect timer
expires are dropped.
Interactions
■

Attendant Lockout
Attendant Lockout is temporarily disabled on calls that re-alert the
attendant console following a misoperation. This allows an attendant to
answer the calls.

■

Bridged Appearances
Misoperation Alerting calls do not re-alert on bridged call appearances.

■

Voice Response Integration
Do not use Misoperations Handling with this feature if you are using
analog boards with Conversant.

Modem pooling
(Not available with Offer B) Modem Pooling allows switched connections
between digital-data endpoints (data modules) and analog-data endpoints via pods
of acoustic-coupled modems. The analog-data endpoint is either a trunk or a line
circuit.
Detailed description

Data transmission between a digital data endpoint and an analog endpoint requires
conversion via a modem, because the DCP format used by the data module is not
compatible with the modulated signals of an analog modem. A modem translates
DCP format into modulated signals and vice versa.
Modem Pooling feature provides pools of integrated-conversion modems and
combined-conversion modems.
Integrated-conversion modem pools have functionality integrated on the Pooled
Modem circuit pack, providing two modems. Each one emulates a time-division
multiplexing (TDM) cabled to a 212 modem. Integrated are modem pools not
available in countries that use A-law companding.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1767

Features and technical reference

Combined-conversion modem pools are TDMs cabled to any TDM-compatible
modem. Combined-conversion modem pools can be used with all systems.
When the system needs a modem, it queries the digital-data module associated
with the call to determine if the module’s options are compatible with those
supported by the modem pools. If the options are not compatible, the originating
user receives intercept treatment. If the options are compatible, the system obtains
a modem from the appropriate pool. If a modem is not available, the user receives
reorder treatment.
The system can detect the needs for a modem. Data calls from an analog-data
endpoint require that the user indicate the need for a modem, because the system
considers such calls to be voice calls. Users indicate this need by dialing the
data-origination access code before dialing the digital-data endpoint.
The system provides a Hold Time parameter to specify the maximum time any
modem can be held but not used (while a data call is in queue).
The integrated-conversion modems support the following options:
■

Receiver responds to remote loop

■

Loss of carrier disconnect

■

Send space disconnect

■

Receive space disconnect

■

CF-CB common

■

Speed, duplex, and synch (administered)

Combined-conversion modems support the following:

1768

■

IBM bisynchronous protocols typically used in 3270 and 2780/3780
applications. Both require 2400 or 4800 bps, half-duplex, synchronous
transmission.

■

Interactive IBM-TSO applications using 1200 bps, half-duplex,
asynchronous transmissions

■

DATAPHONE II switched-network modems supporting asynchronous and
synchronous communications, and autobaud at 300, 1200, or 2400 bps

■

The Avaya MultiVantage system operating at up to 19.2 kbps

■

Different pools with different data-transmission characteristics

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Modem pooling

Considerations
■

On data calls between a data module and an analog-data endpoint,
Return-to-Voice releases the modem and returns it to the pool. The phone
user connects to the analog-data endpoint.

■

For traffic purposes, the system accumulates data on modem-pooling calls
separate from voice calls. Measurements on the pools also accumulate.

■

When a phone user places a data call to a digital-data endpoint, does not
transfer the call to another digital-data endpoint, and uses a modem or
acoustically-coupled modem, the user dials the data-origination access
code before dialing the distant endpoint.

■

Modem Pooling is not restricted. Queuing for modems is not provided,
although calls queued on a hunt group retain reserved modems.

■

Avoid mixing modems from different vendors within a combined pool
because such modems may differ in transmission characteristics.

■

When you administer data-transmission characteristics (speed, duplex, and
synchronization mode), they must be identical to the TDM and optional
modem selections made by the customer.

■

Each data call that uses Modem Pooling uses four time slots (not just two).
As a result, heavy usage of Modem Pooling could affect TDM
bus-blocking characteristics.

■

Tandem switches do not insert a pooled modem. The originating switch
inserts a pooled modem.

■

Call Detail Recording (CDR)

Interactions

Data call CDR records the use of modem pools on trunk calls.
■

Data Call Setup
Data calls to or from a TDM cannot use Modem Pooling.

■

Data Privacy and Data Restriction
The insertion of a modem pool does not turn off Data Privacy or Data
Restriction.

■

Data-Only Off-Premises Extensions
Calls to or from a Data-Only Off-Premises Extension cannot use Modem
Pooling, when this type of digital-data endpoint uses a TDM.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1769

Features and technical reference

■

Digital-multiplexed Interface Trunks
If you place a data call from a local analog-data endpoint to a DMI trunk,
you must dial the data-origination access code to obtain a modem. Data
calls on DMI trunks to local analog-data endpoints automatically obtain
modems.

■

DS1 Tie Trunk Service
Connect modems used for Modem Pooling to AVD DS1 tie trunks via Data
Terminal Dialing or by dialing the feature-access code for data origination.

Related topics

To set up modem pooling for single-carrier cabinets, see the Made Easy Tool for
DEFINITY Media Server Configurations.
To set up modem pooling for compact modular cabinets, see Installation,
Upgrades and Additions for Avaya CMC1 Media Gateways.
To set up modem pooling for multi-carrier cabinets, see Made Easy Tool for
DEFINITY Media Server Configurations.
To set up modem pooling for DEFINITY SI cabinets, see Made Easy Tool for
DEFINITY Media Server Configurations.

Multiappearance Preselection and
Preference
Multiappearance Preselection and Preference selects the call appearances you use
to connect to when you lift the handset.
Multiappearance Preselection and Preference provides multiappearance telephone
users with the following options for placing or answering calls on selected call
appearances.
■

Ringing Appearance Preference
When a user lifts the handset to answer a call, the system automatically
connects them to the ringing call appearance. If there is more than one call,
the user automatically connects to the oldest (first-in) ringing call
appearance. The in-use (red) lamp tracks the ringing appearance and the
answered appearance.

1770

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multiappearance Preselection and Preference

■

Idle Appearance Preference
When a user lifts the handset to place a call, the system automatically
connects them to an idle appearance even if an incoming call is ringing at
another appearance. The in-use (red) lamp tracks an idle appearance when
the user lifts the handset.

■

Last Appearance Preference
When a user lifts the handset, they connect to the call appearance or
bridged appearance last used for a call, unless an audibly ringing call on a
different appearance caused the line selection to move. If the line selection
moves, a call may be originated, answered, or unheld, depending on the
state of that appearance.

■

Preselection
Before lifting the handset to place or answer a call, the user can press a call
appearance button or a feature button to select an appearance when the
in-use lamp is dark. Preselection reenters a held call or activates a feature
or the speakerphone if the telephone is so equipped.
Preselection overrides both Preference options. If the user does not lift the
handset within 5 seconds after using Preselection, the selected appearance
returns to idle.
You can assign a preselection feature button. For example, if a user presses
an Abbreviated Dialing button, a call appearance is automatically selected.
If the user lifts the handset within 5 seconds, the system automatically
places the call.
Preference dictates whether a user connects to the ringing call appearance
or to an idle call appearance. If there is no call, users automatically connect
to an idle call appearance when they lift the handset, regardless of which
Preference option is assigned.

Considerations

555-233-506

■

Multiappearance telephones can have from 2 to 10 call appearances. One
of these call appearances is reserved for placing calls or for receiving a
Priority Calling call. If a telephone has 2 call appearances and one of them
is active, a nonpriority call cannot access the other call appearance, even if
the call appearance is idle. The default number of call appearances is 3.

■

The reserved call appearance is not a fixed-position button; it is just the
last-idle call appearance. For example, if a telephone has 10 call
appearances, any 9 can be in use, but the tenth (last) is reserved.

Issue 5 October 2002

1771

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Automatic Incoming Call Display
Incoming calls are not displayed if Idle Appearance Preference is activated.

■

Call Coverage
If you administer Cover All Calls as the redirection criterion for a
telephone, administer Idle Appearance Preference for the telephone. The
called party can then lift the handset without accidentally connecting to a
call that should be screened.

■

Integrated Services Digital Network — Basic Rate Interface
When an Integrated Services Digital Network-Basic Rate Interface
(ISDN-BRI) telephone (with Select Last Used Appearance enabled)
transfers a call while off-hook by using the handset, the user hears dial tone
on the last-used call appearance. Users of other telephone types hear
silence in this case.

Related Topics

For more information, see ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127. You administer this feature
with the following two fields:
■

Idle Appearance Preference

■

Select Last Used Appearance

Multifrequency signaling
Multifrequency (MF) signaling is a form of address signaling used between
switches and the CO. It is similar to DTMF signaling in that tones convey the
dialed number.
With MF signaling, the signal is typically a combination of two frequencies from
a group of 5 or 6 frequencies (2/5 or 2/6). The origination switch and destination
switch exchange tones that have specific meanings according to the MF protocol.
Detailed description

Avaya MultiVantage supports two frequency groups:

1772

■

R2-multifrequency compelled signaling (R2-MFC) frequency

■

R1 frequency (for Spain and Russia)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency signaling

R2-MFC is a version of MFC recommended by the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU). It provides signaling between a CO and a
switch over analog or digital CO, DID, or DIOD trunks. It also provides signaling
between 2 MultiVantage switches.
Avaya MultiVantage provides MF signaling that complies with ITU regulations
and national regulations for specific countries. It provides these types of MF
signaling: MFE) MF Shuttle, and multifrequency compelled (R2-MFC). These
protocols signal the called number, the calling party’s number (ANI), and
information about the type of call or type of caller (category).
Avaya MultiVantage allows prefix digits for ANI sent on outgoing calls to be
defined per PBX or per the originator’s class of restriction.
If a call is a tandem call and the incoming and outgoing trunk use different
protocols, the switch makes no attempt to convert between the various protocol’s
meanings for category. Instead,
■

the PBX uses the incoming trunk’s COR assigned category if the outgoing
trunk is Russian or R2-MFC, and

■

the PBX uses ARS call types if the outgoing trunk is MFE.

Avaya MultiVantage provides the incoming ANI to all features on the switch that
need to identify the calling party.
MFE

MFE, for Country code 11 (Spain), uses R1 frequency and compelled signaling. It
is available on CO and DID trunk groups. There are four kinds of MFE signaling:
■

Public 2/5

■

Public 2/6

■

Ibercom 2/5

■

Ibercom 2/6

MF Shuttle

MF shuttle signaling, for country code 15 (Russia), uses R1 frequency and
noncompelled signaling. With MF shuttle signaling, it is possible to change to
decadic rotary pulse in the middle of address signal exchange. MF shuttle
signaling is available on CO, DID, and DIOD trunk groups.
Also, ANI transmission, for Country code 15, uses a gapless R1 MF signal and is
completed within 800ms. This is available on an outgoing CO trunk group.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1773

Features and technical reference

R2-MFC

R2-MFC permits each country to define the meanings of the R2 frequency
combinations.
R2-MFC Considerations

1774

■

Both non-group II signaling and group II signaling are supported on
incoming MF signaling calls. The group II signaling protocol has an extra
signal that provides caller-category information. Only group II signaling is
supported on outgoing MF signaling calls.

■

MF signaling also can be used in tandem trunk groups. After address
signals are collected from an incoming group II MF signaling call, the call
can route to a group II MF signaling trunk.

■

Both incoming and outgoing MF signaling calls support ANI. The terminal
displays ANI information and the CDR record records it.

■

When Avaya MultiVantage uses an open numbering plan, the end-of-dial
signal must be defined in the incoming Group I signal administration. After
sending all address digits, the CO sends the end-of-dial signal to Avaya
MultiVantage.

■

If Avaya MultiVantage makes an outgoing call to the CO that uses an open
numbering plan, the CO should send the signal A.1 to Avaya MultiVantage
after sending the last address digit to the CO. Then, the CO should time-out
and send a pulsed signal A.3 to Avaya MultiVantage requesting the Group
II signal.

■

Avaya MultiVantage offers the option to record the Calling Party Category
in the CDR. For incoming external calls, this comes from the Group II
signal. For internal calls and station-originated external calls, this comes
from the COR of the originating station. For tandem calls, this value comes
from the Group II signal, determined by the COR of the originating trunk
group. The CDR device must be capable of receiving this information. See
‘‘CDR System Parameters’’ on page 646 for more information.

■

You can assign Calling Party Category and Called Party Category on a
trunk-by-trunk basis. See ‘‘Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System
Parameters’’ on page 1045 for more information.

■

You can record and announcement to play when outgoing R2-MFC trunk
calls do not complete. This applies when Avaya MultiVantage receives
either group A or B signals from the called Central Office or other switch.
See ‘‘Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters’’ on page
1045 for more information.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency signaling

Guidelines for administering MF signaling

To administer MF signaling, first you identify the origination switch and the
destination switch. (The switch making the call is the origination switch; the
switch answering the call is the destination switch.)
■

The origination switch creates forward signals, classified as group I and
group II signals.

■

The destination switch creates backward signals, classified as group A and
group B signals.

Group I and group A signals comprise the basic signaling for the dialed number.
More elaborate signaling requires Group II and group B signals. Signal meanings
and timer values can be administered.
The sequence below shows a typical interaction between the origination (forward
group I and group II signals) and destination switch (backward group A and group
B signals).
Forward

Group I

Group II

555-233-506

Backward

digit

-->

<--

A.1

digit

-->

<--

A.1

digit

-->

<--

A.1

digit

-->

<--

A.1

digit

-->

<--

A.3

II.2

-->

<--

B.x

Group A

End of dial

Group B

Issue 5 October 2002

1775

Features and technical reference

Second, you assign the correlation between signal codes and their meanings.
1. Assign a code to every message. The code consists of a group category, like
group II or A, and a number.
■

For example, you might assign code A.1 to the message
“next-digit.”

2. Assign a signal to each identifying code.
■

In every country, the frequencies (levels may differ by country)
assigned to the identifying codes are the same. However, the
messages assigned to the identifying codes may be different.
For example, in Switzerland the B.6 code and its associated signal
convey the free message, while in Thailand, free is conveyed by the
B.1 code and its associated signal. But in both Switzerland and
Thailand, the frequency associated with the B.1 code is the same.
As another example, you might assign the signal “busy” to the B.1
code.

To receive Russian incoming ANI:
■

On the DID or DIOD trunk group screen, set the Country field to 15 and
the Protocol Type field to inloc.

■

On AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table screen, set the ANI Req field to y
or on AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table screen, set the ANI Req field
to y.

■

ASAI

Interactions

ANI collected from incoming R2-MFC signaling can be used with ASAI.
■

Abbreviated Dialing
Although calls dialed automatically from an abbreviated dialing privileged
list complete without COR checking, ANI prefix and ANI truncation still
apply.

■

Attendant Console
If the attendant assists or extends a call for a station via Straightforward
Outward Completion and Through Dialing, and if the attendant has not yet
released the call when the request for ANI comes in from the far end, the
attendant’s COR is used to select the ANI for the call. If the attendant has
already released the call when the request for ANI comes in from the far
end, the attendant’s COR is used to select the ANI for the call.

1776

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Multifrequency signaling

■

Authorization Codes
The COR of the authorization code as administered on the
authorization-code screen is not used for ANI prefix determination, even if
the originating endpoint enters an authorization code before call processing
for an outgoing call seizes an outgoing trunk. If the originating endpoint is
an extension, the extension’s ANI is used. If the originating endpoint is an
incoming trunk, the ANI for PBX is used.

■

Bridging
The ANI of a telephone’s primary extension also applies to calls originated
from a bridged call appearance of that extension on another terminal. ANI
prefix and ANI truncation will still apply to the primary extension number
of bridged call appearances.

■

Call Detail Recording (CDR)
CDR records ANI collected from incoming MF signaling.
For India MFC, on incoming calls, ANI digits may be appended with

zeroes if the actual ANI digits are less than the administered ANI-length; in
those cases, the zero-digits appear on CDR.
■

Call Redirection
A call is redirected if any of the following are active: Call Forwarding, Call
Coverage, Send All Calls, or Night Service.

■

Call Vectoring
Call Vectoring can now use ANI collected from incoming MFC signaling.
The ANI of a call vector is not used when a call vectoring route-to
command routes a call over an outgoing trunk. Instead, the ANI of the
originating party is sent.

■

DID No Answer Timer
DID No Answer Timer is applied to MF signaling DID calls.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
In a DCS arrangement, the ANI sent to the CO is determined by the ANI
for PBX on PBX_B, but the category sent to the CO is determined by the
Category for MF ANI field on the Class of Restriction screen for the
incoming DCS trunk or by the type of call.

■

Expert Agent Select (EAS)
For ANI, the EAS agent’s login extension number and COR overrides the
extension number and COR of the physical terminal where the agent is
logged in. ANI prefix and ANI truncation apply to logged in EAS agents.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1777

Features and technical reference

■

Hunt Groups and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Splits
For ANI, a physical terminal’s extension number and COR overrides the
extension number and COR of the hunt group or ACD split that the
terminal is a member of or logged into. ANI prefix and ANI truncation
apply to terminals that are members of hunt groups or logged into ACD
splits.

■

Intercept treatment
For DID MF signaling calls that are denied, you can administer whether the
corresponding B.x signal or intercept tone should be sent to the CO. The
default is to send the administered DID/TIE/ISDN Intercept Treatment. If
the option to send the B.x signal is set, then:
— For Group II calls, the B.x signal for the intercept is sent to the CO.
— For non-Group II calls, if the CO dials an invalid number, the trunk
is locked (regardless of this option). If the CO dials a number that is
valid but not assigned, intercept tone is sent to the CO.

■

Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)
For call origination, multimedia complexes use the COR assigned to their
telephones. ANI prefix and ANI truncation will apply to the telephones
assigned to multimedia complexes.

■

Off-Net Call Coverage or Call Forwarding
If the originating endpoint is an extension, the extension’s ANI is used. If
the originating endpoint is an incoming trunk that can supply ANI, the ANI
received from the incoming trunk is used. If the originating endpoint is
neither of the above, the ANI for PBX is used.

■

Personal Station Access (PSA)
For ANI, the PSA extension number and COR overrides the extension
number and COR of the physical terminal where the PSA extension
number is associated. ANI prefix and ANI truncation will apply to
associated PSA extension numbers.

■

Remote Access
The COR of a remote access barrier code is not used for ANI prefix
determination when the originating end point dials a remote access
extension and then places a call. If the originating endpoint is an extension,
the extension’s ANI is used. If the originating endpoint is an incoming
trunk, the ANI for PBX is used.

1778

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Night Service

■

Station Set Displays
When no ANI is possible, if station sets are equipped with display option,
they do not display the ANI digits. Instead, the trunk group name displays.
When ANI is possible, ANI displays on the station set.
For India Only. If ANI digits are padded with “zero,” then zeroes also are
displayed along with ANI digits.

■

Tandem / Offnet Calls
If ANI digits are received on incoming MFC calls, the ANI digits are sent
to outgoing tandem/off-net calls.
For Russia Only. The ANI is requested on incoming trunks only when all

the address digits have been collected. When the incoming trunk on a
tandem call is a Russian incoming local trunk administered to collect ANI,
the PBX collects all ANI digits before seizing the outgoing tandem trunk.
This happens even if ARS is administered with a “min” value low enough
that it would be possible to determine an outgoing route through digit
analysis.
For India Only. On an outgoing tandem-call, the default operation is to

send the ANI-Not-Available forward signal if ANI is not available from the
incoming trunk. However, in order to support this operation, leave the ANI
for PBX field blank, and define the ANI-Not-Available signal.
Related topics

For administration settings, see ‘‘Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System
Parameters’’ on page 1045.
To establish MF Signaling for a trunk group, see ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233,
(CO, DID, DIOC, TIE) - Incoming and Outgoing Dial Type.
To set up MFC ANI, see ‘‘AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table’’ on page 577,
‘‘AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table’’ on page 582, and ‘‘Class of
Restriction’’ on page 658.

Night Service
Avaya MultiVantage provides the following Night Service features:

555-233-506

■

Hunt Group Night Service

■

Night Console Service

■

Night Station Service

■

Trunk Answer from Any Station

■

Trunk Group Night Service

Issue 5 October 2002

1779

Features and technical reference

Hunt Group Night Service

Hunt Group Night Service allows an attendant or a split supervisor to assign a
hunt group or split to Night Service mode. All calls for the hunt group then are
redirected to the hunt group’s designated Night Service extension (NSE). When a
user activates Hunt Group Night Service, the associated button lamp lights.
Night Console Service

Night Console Service directs all calls for primary and daytime attendant consoles
to a night console. When a user activates Night Console Service, the Night
Service button for each attendant lights and all attendant-seeking calls (and calls
waiting) in the queue are directed to the night console.
To activate and deactivate this feature, the attendant typically presses the Night
button on the principal attendant console or designated console.
Night Station Service

Night Station Service directs incoming calls for the attendant to designated
extensions. Attendants can activate Night Station Service by pressing the Night
button on the principle console if there is not an active night console. If the night
station is busy, calls (including emergency attendant calls) receive busy tone.
They do not queue for the attendant.
When Night Station Service is active, incoming calls to the attendant route as
follows:
■

DID Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls route to a designated DID-LDN
night extension.

■

Internal calls route to the DID-LDN night extension (unless you administer
the system so only DID-LDN calls can route to the LDN night extension).

■

Non-DID calls route to the night destination that you specify for the trunk
group or for the individual trunk. If you do not specify a night destination,
the calls route to the DID-LDN night extension.

You can assign a unique extension as the night destination for each incoming
central-office, foreign-exchange, or 800-Service trunk group. Both the extension
assigned as a trunk group’s night destination and the DID-LDN night extension
can be phones or answering groups (such as DDC group, UCD group, or TEG).

1780

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Night Service

Trunk Answer from Any Station

Trunk Answer from Any Station (TAAS) allows phone users to answer all
incoming calls to the attendant when the attendant is not on duty and when other
phones have not been designated to answer the calls. The incoming call activates a
gong, bell, or chime and a phone user dials an access code to answer the call.
Users can activate TAAS if each of the following conditions is met:
■

The attendant has pressed the Night button on the primary console or a user
(if the switch has no attendant) pressed the Night Service button on the
designated Night Service phone.

■

A night console is not assigned or is not operational.

■

Night Station Service is not active.

Trunk Group Night Service

Trunk Group Night Service allows an attendant or a designated Night Service
phone user to assign one or all trunk groups to Night Service mode. When a user
activates Night Service, trunk groups that are assigned a Trunk Group Night
Service termination change to Individual Trunk Night Service mode so that calls
coming into the trunk group are redirected to the group’s designated NSE.
Incoming calls on trunk groups that are not assigned to Trunk Group Night
Service are queued in the attendant queue. If the call remains unanswered during
the Night Service Disconnect Timer interval, the incoming trunk disconnects.
In addition, a user can assign all the trunk groups to the night service mode at the
same time. Then all the trunk groups are in the System Night Service mode. Any
incoming calls made on the trunk groups are redirected to their designated NSE.
To assign all the trunk groups to System Night Service, the user presses the
System Night Service button on the principal attendant console or the Night
Service button on a designated phone. You can assign a Night Service button to
only one phone.
You can activate Night Service for specific trunk groups (Trunk Group Night
Service) by pressing the individual Trunk Night Service buttons on the attendant
console or on a phone. You can assign Trunk Night Service buttons on more than
one phone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1781

Features and technical reference

Considerations
Considerations for Hunt Group Night Service
■

Both Hunt Group Night Service and Trunk Group Night Service can be
active at the same time. An incoming trunk call is redirected to the trunk
group’s designated NSE. If this NSE is a hunt group or split that is in Hunt
Group Night Service mode, the call is redirected to the Hunt Group NSE.

■

Calls in progress (such as talking, on hold, or waiting in queue) on the hunt
group or split are not affected when the hunt group or split is put in Hunt
Group Night Service mode.

■

When a hunt-group queue becomes empty, all idle members are placed in a
busy condition.

■

If Night Service is activated for a hunt group or split and a power failure
occurs, the hunt group or split automatically returns to the Night Service
mode.

Considerations for Night Console Service
■

The night console must be identical to and have the same features as the
primary console. A daytime console can double as the night console.

■

Night Console Service calls to the attendant group are still handled by an
attendant, even though the primary and daytime attendant consoles are out
of service.

■

Only one night console is allowed in the system. The night console can be
activated only when the primary and daytime consoles have been
deactivated.

■

If Night Console Service is active and a power failure occurs, the system
automatically returns to Night Console Service mode when it is
powered up.

Considerations for Night Station Service

1782

■

When Night Station Service is active but you have not established Night
Station extensions, a user can activate TAAS.

■

You can assign a Night-Serv button to either an attendant extension or a
phone extension. An individual trunk group or hunt group can be put into
night service by either an attendant extension or a phone extension with the
necessary button. When a user presses this button to activate Night Station
Service, all calls to that particular trunk group or hunt group are routed to
the Night Service extension assigned to that group.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Night Service

■

If a trunk without disconnect supervision goes to Night Service, the system
drops the trunk after a period of time to avoid locking up the trunk. The call
is not routed to the DID-LDN night extension.

Considerations for TAAS
■

If Night Service is active and a power failure occurs, the system, when
brought back up, automatically returns to Night Service mode.

Considerations for Trunk Group Night Service
■

All incoming calls on Night Service trunk groups go to the trunk group’s
NSE unless the trunk group member has its own Trunk Group Member
Night Destination, in which case the calls are redirected to that destination
instead of the trunk group’s NSE.

■

Calls already in progress on a trunk group (such as talking, on hold, or
waiting in queue), are not affected when the individual Trunk Group Night
Service or System Night Service is activated.

■

Trunk Group Night Service and System Night Service work independently
of one another.
— When a user activates System Night Service, any trunks that are
controlled by individual Trunk Group Night Service buttons remain
in day service. Trunk groups that are not currently assigned to Trunk
Group Night Service are assigned to System Night Service.
— Trunks with individual Trunk Group Night Service can be removed
from Night Service even though the rest of the system remains in
Night Service.
— When a user deactivates System Night Service, any trunks that have
individual Trunk Group Night Service still active remain in night
service.
— Trunks with individual Trunk Group Night Service can be placed
into Night Service even though the rest of the system remains in day
service.

555-233-506

■

If a trunk is added to a trunk group while that trunk group is in Trunk
Group Night Service, the trunk is brought up in night service.

■

Individual Trunk Group Night Service does not apply to DID trunk groups.

■

If Night Service is activated for a trunk group, and a power failure occurs,
the trunk group automatically returns to the Night Service mode.

Issue 5 October 2002

1783

Features and technical reference

■

If for some reason, a phone with a trunk-ns button remains out-of-service
after a system reboot and later comes back in service, the trunk-ns lamp
shows the trunk status within 10 seconds of coming back in service. For
example, a phone with a trunk-ns button may be unplugged when the
system is rebooted. If the phone is plugged back in later, the trunk status is
shown on the trunk-ns button within 10 seconds.

Interactions
Interactions for Hunt Group Night Service
■

ACD
When Hunt Group Night Service is active for a split and the night-service
destination is a hunt group, the caller hears the first forced announcement
for the original split. The system then redirects the call to the Night Service
destination hunt group. When an agent in the Night Service hunt group
becomes available, the call goes to that agent. If all agents in the hunt group
are busy, the caller hears the following: forced or delayed first
announcement, ringback, music-on-hold or silence, and a second
announcement.

■

Call Coverage
Coverage takes precedence over Night Service. When Hunt Group Night
Service is active, the NSE’s normal coverage criteria and path apply. If the
coverage path destination is AUDIX, AUDIX answers with the mail of the
original hunt group. If the NSE is a hunt group or split of any type, the hunt
group or split’s call coverage criteria and coverage path apply. The
coverage criteria and path can be different from that assigned to the phones
that are members of that hunt group or split.
If a coverage point is a hunt group or split in Night Service, the system
considers the point to be unavailable and does not forward the call to the
coverage point’s NSE.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
If a hunt group or split is in Hunt Group Night Service mode and the hunt
group or split’s NSE has Call Forwarding — All Calls active, the system
forwards night-service calls terminating to that NSE to its designated
call-forward extension.
If the forwarded-to destination is a hunt group or split in Night Service
mode, the system terminates the call at the forwarding extension.

1784

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Night Service

Interactions for Night Console Service
■

Trunk Group Night Service
Activation of Night Console Service for the attendant consoles also puts
trunk groups into night service, except those trunk groups for which you
administered a Trunk Group Night Service button.

Interactions for Night Station Service
■

Call Coverage
Calls routed to the night extension via Night Station Service follow the
coverage path of the night extension under all coverage criteria except
Send All Calls.
If a night extension has a coverage path in which Cover All Calls is
administered, all attendant-seeking calls redirect to coverage. Changes to
the protocol for handling DID-LDN calls (that is, forwarding
attendant-seeking calls on or off premise from the night extension) do not
work.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
Calls redirected to the attendant via Call Forwarding All Calls do not route
to the DID-LDN extension.

■

Inward Restriction
Inward-restricted phones can be administered for Night Station Service.
Night Service features override Inward Restriction.

■

Night Console Service
Do not provide Night Console Service with this Night Station Service.

■

Remote Access
A Remote Access extension can be specified as the Night Station extension
on an incoming, non-DID, trunk group.

■

Tenant Partitioning
Each tenant may have a designated night-service station. The system
directs calls to an attendant group in night service to the night-service
station of the appropriate tenant (when a night attendant is not available).
When someone places an attendant group into night service, all trunk
groups and hunt groups that belong to tenants served by that attendant
group go into night service. In this case, the system routes incoming calls to
the night-service destination of the appropriate tenant.
Each tenant can have its own LDN night destination, TAAS port, or night
attendant.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1785

Features and technical reference

■

Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder calls returning to a console that has been placed in Night
Service and has an assigned DID-LDN night extension are not redirected to
the DID-LDN night extension. Rather, they are dropped.

■

Trunk Answer from Any Station
TAAS and Night Station Service can both be assigned within the same
system, but cannot be assigned to the same trunk group.

Interactions for TAAS
■

Call Coverage
If Night Station Service is active, calls that are redirected to the attendant
via Call Coverage can be answered via TAAS.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
If Night Station Service is active, calls that are redirected to the attendant
via Call Forwarding All Calls can be answered via TAAS.

■

Inward Restriction
Inward-restricted phones can activate TAAS for incoming trunk calls.
Night Service features override Inward Restriction.

■

Night Console Service
Do not provide a Night Console Service with TAAS.

■

Night Station Service
TAAS and Night Station Service can both be assigned within the same
system, but cannot be assigned to the same trunk group. Activating Night
Station Service also activates Night Service — Trunk Group for any trunk
group without an individual trunk-group Night Service button.

■

Tenant Partitioning
Each tenant can have its own LDN night destination, TAAS port, or night
attendant.

1786

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Night Service

Interactions for Trunk Group Night Service
■

Call Forwarding All Calls
If the individual Trunk Group Night Service mode and the trunk group’s
NSE have Call Forwarding All Calls activated, the night service calls
terminating to that NSE are forwarded to the designated extension.

■

Forced First Announcements
An interaction occurs with System Night Service and Forced First
Announcement. For example, if hunt group A has a forced first
announcement, assign the incoming CO trunk to terminate at hunt group A.
Assign the incoming trunk’s night-service destination to be another hunt
group (hunt group B). Assign a Night Service button to the attendant.
With night service active on the attendant, the incoming CO call routes to
the night-service destination hunt group B and does not play the Forced
First Announcement of the incoming destination’s hunt group A.

■

Listed Directory Number
In System Night Service mode, all incoming LDN calls (except those using
DID trunks) which have activated night service are redirected to their
corresponding trunk group’s NSE. Incoming LDN calls using DID trunks
are directed to the Night Console Service, Night Station Service, or Trunk
Answer From Any Station, respectively, whichever applies first. Non-LDN
DID trunk calls terminate at the dialed extension.

Related topics
For Hunt Group Night Service

See ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for administering feature button
assignments on an attendant console.
See ‘‘Hunt Group’’ on page 875 for information on assigning the destination for
calls when in a night service mode.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for administering feature button assignments on
stations.
See ‘‘Setting up night service for hunt groups’’ on page 216 for instructions.
For Night Console Service

See ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for information for administering feature
button assignments on the attendant console.
See ‘‘Setting up night console service’’ on page 208 for instructions.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1787

Features and technical reference

For Night Station Service

See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information on assigning an extension
number to night service.
See ‘‘Listed Directory Numbers’’ on page 1015 for information on assigning an
extension number to night service.
See ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for information on administering feature
button assignments on an attendant console.
See ‘‘Hunt Group’’ on page 875 for information on night service destination.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for administering feature button assignments on
stations.
See ‘‘Setting up night station service’’ on page 209 for instructions.
For Trunk Group Night Service

See ‘‘Listed Directory Numbers’’ on page 1015 for night service destination.
See ‘‘Attendant Console’’ on page 614 for administering feature button
assignments on an attendant console.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for administering feature button assignments on
stations.
See ‘‘Setting up trunk group night service’’ on page 215 for instructions.
For Trunk Answer from Any Station

See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for assignment of a blank extension number to
night service.
See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for information on assigning a TAAS
feature access code.
See ‘‘Console Parameters’’ on page 683 for information on assigning an external
alerting device.
See ‘‘Setting up trunk answer from any station’’ on page 211 for instructions.

1788

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Off-Premises Station

Off-Premises Station
Off-Premises Station allows a phone located outside of the building where the
switch is located to be connected to the system. If CO trunk circuits are used, the
voice terminal must be analog and must be FCC-registered or, outside the US,
registered by the appropriate governmental agency. Digital communications
protocol (DCP) sets can be used as off-premises terminals with the addition of the
DEFINITY extender. IP stations can be set up off-premises using PPP
connections. DS1 trunk service provides a digital interface for off-premises
stations (also known as station-side DS1).
Off-premises stations are useful when it is necessary to have a voice terminal
located away from the main location. The maximum loop distance for analog
off-premises stations is 20,000 feet (6093.34 meters) without repeaters. For
cabling distance information for the various voice terminal types, see the user
guide for the appropriate telephone.
Detailed description

Off-Premises Station requires cross-connecting capabilities and one port on a
Analog Line or DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack for each interface to be provided. Not
all analog lines can support an off-premises station. For information about user
guide for the appropriate telephone.
NOTE:

The use of a message waiting indicator lamp on an off-premises station is
not supported.
Interactions

The Distinctive Ringing feature might function improperly at an off-premises
station due to the distance. However, the Distinctive Ringing feature can be
disabled when the Off-Premises Station field is administered. If the Distinctive
Ringing feature is not used with an off-premises station, the terminal receives
1-burst ringing for all calls.
Related topics

See ‘‘Installing home equipment’’ on page 368 for information about setting up
your off-premises station.
See ‘‘Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting’’ on page 357 for
information about setting up telecommuting.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about and field descriptions on the
Station screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1789

Features and technical reference

PC Interface
The PC Interface consists of the PC/ISDN Platform product family. These
products are used with Avaya MultiVantage to provide users of IBM-compatible
PCs fully-integrated voice and data workstation capabilities.
Detailed description

Two groups of different configurations are available for PC Interface: group 1
uses DCP and group 2 uses the ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) protocol.
The group 1 configurations consist of DCP configurations that use a PC/PBX
Interface card (formerly DCP expansion card) in the PC to link to the switch.
Group 1 (shown in Figure 62 on page 1791) uses the following connections:

1790

■

The PC Interface card plugs into an expansion slot on the PC. The card has
2 standard 8-pin modular jacks (line and phone).

■

The digital phone plugs into the phone jack on the PC Interface card.

■

The line jack on the card provides a digital port connection to Avaya
MultiVantage.

■

The distance between the PC Interface card and the PBX should be no
more than 1524m for 24-gauge wire or 1219m for 26-gauge wire.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

PC Interface

Figure Notes

1. IBM-compatible PC with DCP
Interface card
2. IBM-compatible PC with DCP
Interface card

4. DCP phone
5. Avaya Media Server (Digital Line
circuit pack)
6. Host

3. DCP
Figure 62.

DCP PC interface configuration (Group 1)

The group 2 configurations link to the switch using a PC/ISDN Interface card
installed in the PC. This group can include a stand-alone PC terminal, or up to 4
phones, handsets, or headsets. Group 2 (shown in Figure 63 on page 1792) uses
PC/ISDN Interface cards (up to four cards) which plug into expansion slots on the
PC. These cards each provide 2 standard 8-pin modular-jack connections for both
line connections (to the switch) and phone connections. A standard 4-pin modular
jack is also available for use with a handset or headset.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1791

Features and technical reference

Figure Notes

Figure 63.

1. ISDN phone

7. Avaya Media Server

2. PC with application

8. PRI trunks

3. Handset or Headset

9. BRI stations

4. BRI Interface card

10. Interworking

5. 2B + D

11. DMI

6. ISDN-BRI Line, 4-wire S/T-NT,
interface circuit pack

12. Switch features

ISDN—BRI PC interface configuration (Group 2)

PC Interface users have multiple appearances (depending on the software
application used) for their assigned extension. Designate one or more of these
appearances for use with data calls. With the ISDN-BRI version, you can use up
to 4 separate PC/ISDN Interface cards on the same PC. Assign each card a
separate extension, and assign each extension one or more appearances. The
availability of specific features depends on the COS of the extension and the COS
for the switch. Modem Pooling is provided to ensure general availability of off-net
data-calling services.

1792

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

PC Interface

Security

There are two areas where unauthorized use may occur with this feature:
unauthorized local use and remote access.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Unauthorized local use involves unauthorized users who attempt to make
calls from a PC. The PC software has a security setting so users can place
the PC in Security Mode when it is unattended. You can also assign
Automatic Security so that the administration program on the PC is always
active and runs in Security Mode. This mode is password-protected.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Remote access involves remote access to the PC over a data extension.
Remote users can delete or copy PC files with this feature. You can
password-protect this feature. Consult the Avaya Products Security
Handbook for additional steps to secure your system and to find out about
obtaining information regularly about security developments.
Considerations
■

Use the Function Key Module of the 7405D with PC Interface.

■

BRI terminals normally are initializing terminals and require you to assign
an Service Profile Identifier (SPID). The PC/ISDN Platform (Group 2), in a
stand-alone configuration, is a noninitializing BRI terminal and does not
require you to assign a SPID.
— Set a locally-defined terminal type with General Terminal
Administration
— Define the terminal type as a noninitializing terminal that does not
support Management Information Messages (MIM).
— Assign the PC/ISDN Platform with an associated (initializing)
ISDN-BRI phone (such as an ISDN 7505) using a SPID.
— Assign the station (using a locally-defined terminal type) to take full
advantage of the capabilities of the PC Interface. This terminal type
is also noninitializing with no support of MIMs.

■

555-233-506

Do not use phones with data modules with the PC Interface. (You can still
use 3270 Data Modules if you also use 3270 emulation). If you attach a
DCP data module or ISDN data module to a phone that is connected to a
PC Interface card, the data module is bypassed (not used). All the interface
functions are performed by the interface card even if a data module is
present.

Issue 5 October 2002

1793

Features and technical reference

■

The 7404D phone with messaging cartridge cannot be used with PC
Interface. However, the 7404D with PC cartridge can be used, but only
with Group 1 configurations.

■

Data Communications Access

Interactions

PC Interface uses a digital interface and is not directly compatible with
Data Communications Access, which uses an analog interface. Apply
Modem Pooling conversion if you use these features together.
■

Data Protection
Assign Data Protection—Permanent for use with PC Interface for data
communications.

■

Host Computer Access
Both PC Interface and Host Computer Access use digital interfaces. These
features are compatible and Modem Pooling conversion is unnecessary.

■

ISDN-BRI
Each card can have its own separate phone or voice-calling device. A
phone does not require special application software on the PC. However, a
handset or headset alone requires special application software.

■

Modem Pooling
Use Modem Pooling if you use PC Interface to place calls to, or receive
calls from, off-premises stations over analog trunks.

Personal Station Access
Personal Station Access (PSA) allows users to associate the preferences and
permissions of their telephone with any other telephone of the same type.
PSA makes it convenient for different users to use the same bank of phones at
different times. For example, several telecommuting or hoteling employees can
use the same office on different days of the week. The employees use PSA to
“associate” with the office phone — that is, make the terminal “theirs” for the day.
Calls an employee originates from the station are recognized and displayed as the
employee’s calls, and calls routed to the employee’s extension route to the voice
terminal “associated” with that extension.

1794

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Personal Station Access

A telecommuting or hoteling employee can also use PSA when working at home.
For example, the employee installs a DCP terminal and a DEFINITY Extender at
home, calls into the system, and uses PSA to associate the remote phone with their
extension. The system associates the home terminal — that is, recognizes the
home terminal as having the employee’s preferences and permissions. When
someone calls the employee’s extension, the call rings at the employee’s home.
When the employee no longer needs to use the office, they “dissociate” from the
terminal.
PSA requires users to enter a security code and can be used on-site or off-site.
PSA-invalid attempts generate referral calls and are recorded by SVN software, if
that feature is enabled. If a user interrupts the PSA dialing sequence by pressing
the release button or by hanging up, the system does not log the action as an
invalid attempt.
Detailed description

The preferences and permissions that are retained with PSA include the definition
of terminal buttons, abbreviated dial lists, and COS and COR permissions
assigned to the your station. Extensions that do not have a COS, such as EAS
agents or hunt groups, cannot use PSA.
PSA functions only on analog, hybrid, and DCP terminals. Many types of DCP
terminals exist, and these terminals have different types and numbers of buttons.
If you attempt to associate DCP stations with DCP terminals that have
incompatible buttons, button mapping is unpredictable. This is also true of hybrid
terminals. If you want a user to be able to use the terminal buttons and to have
consistent displays, associate stations with terminals of the same type.
Stations and ports on different switches cannot be PSA associated. This includes
stations on different switches (or nodes) within Distributed Communications The
system does not limit the number of stations that can use PSA. However, heavy
use of the associate and dissociate functions may temporarily impact system
performance.
When a call that goes to coverage from a PSA-disassociated extension, the switch
sends a message to the coverage point indicating that the call was not answered. If
the coverage point is a display phone, the display shows “da” for “don't answer.”
If the coverage point is a voice messaging system, the VM system receives an
indication from the switch that this call was not answered, and treats the call
accordingly.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1795

Features and technical reference

Dissociated telephones

When a user requests to associate a telephone with PSA, any other telephone
using that extension is automatically dissociated. It is possible to place emergency
calls from a dissociated telephone, provided a COR has been assigned to
dissociated phones on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
PSA allows a dissociate request from a bridged appearance. However, when you
execute a dissociate command from Terminal B, even if you are on a bridged
appearance of an extension belonging to Terminal A, you dissociate the station
belonging to Terminal B.
The dissociate function within PSA allows a user to restrict the features available
to a phone. When a phone has been dissociated using PSA, it can be used only to
call an attendant, to place an emergency call, or to accept a TTI or PSA request.
To enable users to make other types of calls from dissociated sets, you must
establish a class of restriction for these phones. See ‘‘Setting up Personal Station
Access’’ on page 360 for more information.
NOTE:

Once a station has been associated with a terminal, anyone using the
terminal has the capabilities of the associated station. Be sure to execute a
dissociate request if the terminal can be accessed by unauthorized users.
This is particularly important if you use PSA and DCP extenders to permit
remote DCP access.
Interactions
■

Adjunct/Switch Application Interface
An ASAI link cannot use this feature because ASAI uses a BRI port. Do
not assign to an ASAI link a Class of Service that allows PSA.

■

Bridged Appearance
When you execute a PSA dissociate request for the principal station, its
bridged appearances remain active if the stations on which they appear
have not been dissociated. When a call is made to the principal extension,
any of its bridged appearances that can be alerted are alerted. Otherwise,
the call follows the principal extension’s coverage path.
PSA dissociate requests executed at a bridged appearance dissociates the
station that the bridged appearance is on.

■

Call Management
PSA dissociate automatically logs out an ACD agent.

1796

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Personal Station Access

■

Coverage
PSA does not change coverage path operations. If a station is dissociated,
its calls still go to coverage unless they are forwarded.

■

Property Management System
A station assigned to a room, rather than to a person who needs to work in
multiple locations, should not use PSA. Such a station should not have PSA
in its COS.

■

Save Translations
PSA commands cannot be successfully executed during a save translations.
When a reset 3 or greater (reset 4, reset 5, and so on) occurs on the system,
all associations revert to their state as of the last save translations.

■

Security Violation Notification (SVN)
PSA security violations are tracked and reported by SVN, if it is active.

■

Tenant Partitioning
If a terminal is already associated, a user attempting a PSA associate
request at that terminal must specify a station in the same partition as the
station already associated with the terminal.
However, anyone, in any partition, can execute a PSA dissociate request at
the terminal (if the associated station has PSA in its COS) and then execute
a PSA associate request for a station in any tenant partition.

Related topics

See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for information about and field descriptions
on the Class of Service screen.
See ‘‘Configuring Avaya MultiVantage for telecommuting’’ on page 357 for
information about setting up telecommuting.
See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for information about and field
descriptions on the Feature Access Code screen.
See ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795 for information about and
field descriptions on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
See ‘‘Setting up Personal Station Access’’ on page 360 for information about
associating the preferences and permissions on your station with any other
compatible terminal.
See ‘‘Setting up remote access’’ on page 370 for information about access the
system from a remote location.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about and field descriptions on the
Station screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1797

Features and technical reference

Priority Calling
Priority Calling provides a special type of call alerting between internal telephone
users, including the attendant. The called party receives a distinctive ring when
the calling party uses Priority Calling.
You administer the priority-calling ringing-pattern system wide. Default is a
3-burst alerting signal. You allow feature use for each telephone user by
administering the user’s class of service.
The following types of calls are always priority-calling calls:
■

Call coverage consult

■

Automatic callback

■

Ringback queuing

■

Attendant intrusion

■

Security violation notification

The system generates the call waiting ringback tone that a single-line telephone
user hears even if the user is active on a call. In contrast, the system does not
generate the pattern for a multiappearance telephone if there are no idle call
appearances. In this case the caller hears busy tone. However, the system does
generate the pattern if the telephone has an idle call appearance, including the one
reserved for call origination.
Interactions
■

Abbreviated Dialing
If a user wants to make a priority call to a number in an abbreviated dial
list, the Priority Calling access code and the AD code must be programmed
on one button. If a user attempts to use Abbreviated Dialing (either by
button or FAC after dialing the Priority Access Code, the system denies the
call.

■

Call Coverage
Priority Calling calls do not redirect to coverage unless the caller activates
Go to Cover. If the call redirects, it remains a priority call, and the covering
user receives a distinctive (default is three-burst) ringing signal.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
Priority Calling calls (except callback calls) are forwarded, and the
forwarded call remains a priority call.

1798

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Priority Calling

■

Call Vectoring
The system generates intercept tone when someone attempts to activate
Priority Calling toward a VDN.

■

Call Waiting
A Priority Calling call waits on an active single-line telephone even if Call
Waiting is not assigned to the telephone. The active, single-line telephone
user receiving the call hears a distinctive (default is three-burst) priority
Call Waiting tone.

■

Consult
A Consult call acts as a priority call and waits at a single-line telephone,
even if the telephone does not have Call Waiting Indication assigned.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
On a DCS tandem call to a single-line telephone, the called party does not
receive priority ringing if the caller activates Priority Calling by pressing
the priority button after making a call.

■

Last Number Dialed
If a priority call is to be made to the last number dialed, the Last Number
Dialed button must be used. The Last Number Dialed feature access code is
not valid after Priority Calling has been activated.
Single-line telephones (2500 series) can be administered so that distinctive
signals are not provided. In this case, 1-burst ringing is provided for
priority calls.

Related topics

To administer Distinctive Audible Alerting settings, see ‘‘Feature-Related System
Parameters’’ on page 795.
To allow Priority Calling, see ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1799

Features and technical reference

Recorded Telephone Dictation
Access
Recorded Telephone Dictation Access permits phone users, including Remote
Access and incoming tie-trunk users, to access dictation equipment.
Users start by dialing an access code or extension. Start/stop is controlled by voice
or dialing. Initial activation and playback are controlled by dial codes.
Recorded Telephone Dictation Access cannot be used with the following features:
■

Automatic Route Selection

■

Conference

Related topics

See ‘‘Audible message waiting’’ on page 1478 for information about letting users
know they have messages.
See ‘‘Announcements’’ on page 1464 for information about the messaging server
interface.
See ‘‘Voice Message Retrieval’’ on page 1919 for information about retrieving
messages.
See ‘‘Voice messaging systems’’ on page 1921 for more information about voice
messaging systems.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information about and field descriptions on
the CPE Trunk Group screen. Complete all fields on this screen to administer the
recorded telephone dictation access.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about and field descriptions on the
2500 Analog phones screen. Complete all fields on this screen to administer the
recorded telephone dictation access.

Remote Access
Remote Access permits authorized callers to access the system via the public
network from remote locations and then use its features and services. The Remote
Access caller must use a touch-tone phone or equivalent equipment. Since the
system does not have access to the calling (outside) number, Ringback Queuing
and Automatic Callback cannot be used on a Remote Access call. Also, any
feature requiring recall dial tone (for example, Hold and Transfer) cannot be
accessed remotely.

1800

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Remote Access

Read the information in ‘‘Security’’ on page 1802 before administering this
feature.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Avaya has designed the Remote Access feature incorporated in this product
that, when properly administered by the customer, enables the customer to
minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain access to the network. It
is the customer’s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to properly
implement the features, evaluate and administer the various restriction
levels, protect access codes, and distribute them only to individuals who
have been advised of the sensitive nature of the access information. Each
authorized user should be instructed on the proper use and handling of
access codes.
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the
telecommunications network through use of remote-access features. In such
an event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network
charges for traffic. Avaya cannot be responsible for such charges, and does
not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from
unauthorized access.
Detailed description

Remote Access provides you with access to the system and its features from the
public network. This allows you to make business calls from home or use
Recorded Telephone Dictation Access to dictate a letter. If authorized, you can
also access system features from any on-site extension.
With Remote Access, you can dial into the system using DID, CO, FX, or 800
Service trunks. When a call comes in on a trunk group dedicated to Remote
Access, the system routes the call to the Remote Access extension you have
assigned. If DID is provided and the Remote Access extension is within the range
of numbers that can be accessed by DID, Remote Access is accessed through
DID.
Upon access to the feature, you hear system dial tone. If you have administered
your system to require a barrier code or authorization code, the system requires
you to enter it now. When you enter the required codes, the system generates dial
tone. You can now place local or long-distance calls as allowed.
Barrier codes provide your system security and define calling privileges through
the administered COR. You can administer up to 10 barrier codes, each with a
different COR and COS. Barrier codes can be from 4 to 7 digits, but all codes
must be the same length. You can also require that users enter an authorization
code to use this feature. Both barrier codes and authorization codes are described
under ‘‘Security’’ on page 1802.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1801

Features and technical reference

The destination of incoming non-DID trunk calls can be an attendant or an
extension. The destination is specified on each individual trunk group. When the
trunk group is dedicated to Remote Access, the Remote Access extension is
specified. In this case, you do all dialing. If an attendant is needed on a call, you
dial the public network telephone number assigned, the barrier code, and the
attendant access code. You can administer your system to provide
attendant-assisted calling during the day but Remote Access after normal business
hours. You do this by setting the trunk group Incoming Destination field to the
attendant (attd), and specifying the Remote Access extension as the Night
Service extension .
After a Digital Terminal Data Module’s (DTDM) baud rate is changed from 9600
to 1200, the DTDM cannot be accessed by Remote Access until an internal call is
made to the DTDM.
Security

The system provides the ability to check the status of the remote access feature
and barrier codes. The status remote-access command displays information that
can help in determining why and when use of Remote Access or a particular
barrier code was denied. The display indicates if Remote Access is:
■

Not administered

■

Enabled

■

Disabled

■

Disabled following detection of a security violation

It also gives the date and time Remote Access was last modified.
For each barrier code, the command displays:
■

Date the code was administered, reactivated, or modified

■

Expiration date

■

Number of calls that can be placed with the code

■

Number of calls that have been placed using the code

■

Whether the code is active or expired

■

Date and reason a code expired

For a detailed description of the status remote-access command and display, see
BCS Products Security Handbook.

1802

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Remote Access

Barrier Codes

Remote Access has inherent risks; it can lead to large-scale unauthorized
long-distance use. To increase your system’s security, use a 7-digit barrier code
with Remote Access Barrier Code Aging. You can administer the Remote Access
Barrier Code Aging feature to:
■

Limit the length of time an access code remains valid

■

Limit the number of times an access code can be used

■

Both of the above

You must administer expiration dates and access limits for each of the possible 10
barrier codes. If your system has more than 10 Remote Access users, they must
share codes. A barrier code automatically expires if an expiration date or number
of accesses has exceeded the limits you set. If both a time interval and access
limits are administered for a barrier code, the barrier code expires when one of the
conditions is satisfied.
If barrier codes are administered, a special answer-back tone causes a calling
modem to leave dial mode. A modem’s dialer is sometimes used to gain access
(this tone also cancels echo suppressors in the network, preventing DTMF tones
from breaking dial tone from a switch). Barrier codes can be used alone or with
authorization codes.
To view the status of a Remote Access barrier code, use the status remote-access
command.
NOTE:

Barrier codes are not tracked by Call Detail Recording (CDR). Barrier codes
are incoming access codes, whereas, authorization codes are primarily
outgoing access codes.
When you no longer need a barrier code, remove it from the system. Barrier codes
should be safeguarded both by you and their users.
Authorization Codes

You can also administer authorization codes to manage access to your system.
You can then use CDR to track this code use. Use these guidelines to manage your
system’s authorization codes.

555-233-506

■

Assigning codes — Create random codes; do not allow them to follow a
predictable pattern. Use the maximum code length allowed and assign a
unique code to each person responsible for protecting the code.

■

Changing codes — Change codes often.

■

Deleting codes — Delete codes when they are no longer needed.

■

Monitoring codes — Use CDR reports to analyze code use.

Issue 5 October 2002

1803

Features and technical reference

Alternate Facility Restriction Levels

Consider changing FRLs with AFRLs after normal business hours to restrict
where calls can be made over your facilities. Take care not to restrict callers from
summoning emergency services after hours.
Class of Restriction

The COR of an authorization code supersedes that of a barrier code.
■

Time of Day Routing — Controlled by the time-of-day entries in COR or
by the partition.

■

Toll Restriction and Analysis — Controlled by COR.

■

Trunk Access Code — Interacts with toll restriction. You can translate your
switch so users can make toll calls via ARS without using a trunk access
code.

■

Trunk Administration — Remote Access trunks can be restricted.

For additional steps to secure your system and to find out about obtaining security
information on a regular basis, see the BCS Products Security Handbook.
Logoff Notification

Use Logoff Notification when Remote Access is enabled, but not actively used.
Logoff Notification notifies you at logoff that Remote Access is enabled. It guards
against inadvertently leaving Remote Access active and can also alert you to
unauthorized feature activation. Logoff Notification is administered by login ID.
Interactions
■

Authorization Codes
When a Remote Access caller dials the assigned Remote Access extension
and connects to the system, the system may request the caller to dial an
authorization code in addition to a barrier code. Dial Tone between the
barrier code and authorization code is optional. Calling privileges
associated with the COR assigned to the authorization code supersede
those assigned to the barrier code.

■

Class of Restriction
COR restrictions do not block access to the Remote Access feature.

■

Night Service
The Remote Access extension can be specified as the Night Service
extension on an incoming, non-DID, trunk group.

1804

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Reset Shift Call

Related topics

See ‘‘QSIG to DCS TSC Gateway screen’’ on page 1085 for information about
and field descriptions on the Remote Access screen.
See ‘‘Setting up remote access’’ on page 370 for step-by-step instructions for
configuring remote access.
See ‘‘Authorization Code — COR Mapping’’ on page 631 for information about
and field descriptions on the Authorization Code screen.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information about and field descriptions on
the Trunk Group screen.

Reset Shift Call
Reset Shift Call allows users to redial a local or private network call by pressing a
single digit. The switch plays reset shift dial tone on busy calls if:
■

A station or attendant originates a call

■

The dialed endpoint is in the dial plan and is one of the following types:

■

■

Extension (local or UDP)

■

Prefixed extension (local or UDP)

■

AAR

The destination is on the same switch as the originator, or is connected via
an ISDN trunk to the originating switch

When the caller hears reset shift dial tone, they can press a single digit that
replaces the last digit of the originally-dialed destination and the call transfers to
the new destination. This feature is useful, for example, where extensions are
assigned sequentially to functional organizations.
The originator and destination of the call both must be connected to Avaya
MultiVantage. In DCS or QSIG environments, both must be on the same DCS or
QSIG networks, but do not need to be connected to the same Avaya MultiVantage.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1805

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR)
If a user dials the AAR feature access code followed by destination digits
to place a call and the destination is busy, reset shift dial tones is heard. If
the user then dials a new destination last digit, a new call is placed and the
display updates as if the AAR feature access code, followed by the new
destination, was dialed originally.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
If set A has a bridged appearance on set B, and both users A and B are
off-hook on that bridged appearance, and set A calls set C, and set C is
busy, both A and B hear reset shift dial tone. If set B then presses a single
digit, the digit is ignored and both A and B continue to hear reset shift dial
tone. Set A must dial the new destination last digit.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Reset shift call works in a DCS network over ISDN trunks. DCS+ and
QSIG networks always support reset shift calls.

■

Forwarding
If the called destination is forwarded to station A and station A is busy, the
switch applies reset shift dial tone.
If a user dials to a forwarded set and then gets reset shift dial tone, and
enters a digit, the number dialed by the reset shift call feature is 1 digit off
from the original user-dialed number, not the forwarded-to number.

■

Hot Line Service
If a station set user with hot line service reaches a busy endpoint, the user
hears busy tone and not reset shift dial tone.

■

Intercom
■

Dial
If a user lifts the handset, presses the DIAL INTERCOM button, dials the
1-digit or 2-digit intercom code assigned to another set, and reaches
a busy set, the switch plays busy tone, not reset shift dial tone.

■

Automatic
If a user lifts the handset, presses the AUTOMATIC INTERCOM button,
and reaches a busy set, the switch plays busy tone, not reset shift
dial tone.

1806

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Remotely readable electronic phone IDs

■

Last Number Dialed
If a user hits a LAST NUMBER DIALED button while listening to reset shift dial
tone, the button press is denied.
If a user uses last number dialed after having used reset shift call on the last
call, the switch re-attempts the last special-dialed call.

■

Line Lockout
An analog user listening to reset shift dial tone is not subject to the line
intercept tone timer.

■

Line Side DS1
A call originated from a line side DS1 station (ds1fd, ds1sa, ops, vrufd,
vrusa) is considered a station originated call.

■

Multimedia Call Handling
If a user at a multimedia complex presses the MM-CALL button or dials the
multimedia-origination feature access code after receiving dial tone, and
then reaches a busy set and uses the reset shift call feature, the resulting
new call attempt will be a multimedia call attempt.

■

Priority Calling
If a user dials the priority calling feature access code or presses a priority
call button, dials a busy station, and then uses the reset shift call feature, the
switch makes a priority call to the substituted destination.

■

QSIG
Reset shift call does work in a QSIG network if the QSIG network
configuration allows the ISDN busy signaling to always propagate back to
the originating switch, which may not be the case if the network includes
non-Avaya trunks and/or switches.

■

Remote Access
A call originated from a remote access extension does not receive reset
shift dial tone.

Remotely readable electronic phone
IDs
Remotely readable electronic identification allows the switch to read a serialized
DCP telephone’s part number (comcode) and serial number. Avaya can use this
information to determine the proper maintenance replacement unit or the date of
manufacture for warranty or QPPCN status.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1807

Features and technical reference

The remotely readable electronic identification is currently only available with the
6400 Serialized DCP telephones. The 6400 Serialized phone is stamped with the
word “Serialized” on the faceplate for easy identification.
The remotely readable electronic ID allows both you and Avaya service personnel
to obtain more accurate information about the phone, thus simplifying the repair
process. With this new functionality, the serial numbers for phones can be entered
into trouble tickets manually so that Avaya can identify the problem more easily.
In addition, this feature enables the switch to read the model number of DCP
phone types whose electronic IDs are not remotely readable.
Phones with remotely readable IDs show whatever information is available for
phones connected to a DEFINITY Extender, provided that the Extender has an
active connection with the switch.

Ringer Cutoff
Ringer Cutoff allows multiappearance telephone users to turn audible ringing
signals on and off. This feature does not affect visual alerting.
When this feature is enabled, only Priority ring (by default 3-burst), Redirect
Notification, Intercom ring, and manual signaling ring at the telephone. Internal
and external calls do not ring.
The following table summarizes which calls are affected by Ringer Cutoff.
Redirect notification is
Call Type

Inactive

Active

telephone to telephone

no

ring ping

Attendant to telephone

no

ring ping

Internal tie to telephone

no

ring ping

APLT trunk to telephone

no

ring ping

Trunk to telephone

no

ring ping

Priority call to telephone

yes

yes

Intercom call to telephone

yes

yes

Manual signaling

yes

yes

NOTE:

If Call Coverage is set to Cover All and Ringer Cutoff and Redirect
Notification are both active, then Redirect Notification is received. If
Redirect Notification is not active, no audible alerting is received.

1808

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Ringer Cutoff

A user may not wish to be disturbed by the arrival of incoming calls, yet not want
calls to be redirected immediately to coverage. For example, an executive may
want a secretary to answer calls before they redirect to coverage. The bridging
user (the secretary) is not affected by the executive’s activation of Ringer Cutoff.
If a primary extension and all other users with bridged appearances of the primary
extension activate Ringer Cutoff, an incoming call silently alerts all of the
telephones and then redirects to coverage.
Interactions
■

Automatic Callback
If Ringer Cutoff is active, an Automatic Callback call returns to the user’s
telephone with the normal 3-burst ring.

■

Bridging
A bridging user is not affected by a primary extension’s activation of
Ringer Cutoff. Nor is the primary extension affected by the bridging user’s
activation of Ringer Cutoff.

■

Call Forwarding All Calls
If Ringer Cutoff and Call Forwarding All Calls are active, the user receives
redirect notification, if you set Redirection Notification to y for the
extension.

■

Distinctive Ringing
Ringer Cutoff turns off only the distinctive ringing of internal and external
calls. Intercom ringing, priority ringing, redirect notification, and manual
signaling are not turned off.

■

Intercom
If Ringer Cutoff is active, intercom calls still ring the user’s telephone.

■

Manual Signaling
If Ringer Cutoff is active, Manual Signaling still rings the user’s telephone.

■

Ringback Queuing
If Ringer Cutoff is active, the return call for Ringback Queuing still rings
the user’s telephone with a 3-burst alerting signal.

■

Priority Calling
If Ringer Cutoff is active, priority calls still ring at the user’s telephone.

■

Send All Calls
When Ringer Cutoff and Send All Calls are both active, the user receives
redirect notification, when Redirection Notification is set to y for that
extension.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1809

Features and technical reference

Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed
Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed allows you to assign one of four ring types
to each call appearance on a telephone. Whatever treatment is assigned to a call
appearance is automatically assigned to each of its bridged call appearances.
Detailed description

Ring types fall into two categories:
■

Those that alert consistently and don’t change:
— Ringing, in which the lamp flashes and audible ringing occurs
— Silent ringing, in which the lamp flashes and audible ringing does
not occur

■

Those that transition from one ringing state to another:
— Abbreviated ringing, in which ringing continues for as many cycles
as specified by the automatic abbreviated/delayed transition interval
and then changes to silent alerting
— Delayed ringing, in which visual alerting continues for as many
cycles as specified by the automatic abbreviated/delayed transition
interval and then changes to ringing

For a station with call appearances that have either abbreviated or delayed ringing,
an abbreviated-ring button associated with that station’s extension can be assigned
on a different station. When one of those call appearances is being alerted,
pressing the button forces immediate transition of the alerting — that is, from
ringing to silence or from silence to ringing.
This feature is most useful in bridging situations in which some users want to be:
■

Audibly alerted to a call immediately upon its arrival

■

Audibly notified if the call has not been answered within a specified
number of rings or if they have indicated.

■

Able to stop the audible alerting if the call is not being answered by the
principal and the user is not able to answer the call.

Because ring type can be specified on a per-station basis, mixing ring-type
specifications within a station’s access to a particular extension is possible.

1810

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed

For Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed, each call appearance must be:
■

Assigned a ring type

■

Administered to transition when the:
— Abbreviated/delayed transition interval is reached or when the user
presses the abbreviated ring button
— user presses the abbreviated ring button, regardless of the
abbreviated/delayed transition interval

Considerations
■

You cannot assign Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed to an attendant
console.

■

You can assign Abbreviated and Delayed Ringing to analog stations.
However, because analog stations cannot visually alert, a user may
unexpectedly answer an incoming call while intending to originate a call.

■

Call Coverage

Interactions

If the number-of-rings interval for coverage is shorter than the automatic
transition interval, a call redirects to coverage before audibly alerting a call
appearance that has delayed ringing. However, timing continues for the
automatic transition interval in case no coverage point is available and the
call continues to alert at the station.
When a call is immediately redirected to coverage, the Abbreviated and
Delayed ringing has no effect.
■

Call Forwarding — Busy/Don’t Answer
When a call is forwarded because it is not answered in the specified time,
the call stops alerting the station and is not affected by the Ringing —
Abbreviated and Delayed feature. However, timing continues for the
automatic transition interval in case forwarding fails and the call continues
to alert at the station.
If the call forward don’t answer interval is shorter than the automatic
transition interval, the call redirects to the forwarded-to extension before
ringing a station with a ring type of delayed ringing.

■

Call Vectoring — Expert Agent Selection — Logical Agents
Calls routed to a logical agent use the translations for the Ringing —
Abbreviated and Delayed feature of the station being used by the agent.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1811

Features and technical reference

■

Data Extension Calls
Data Extension calls are not affected by the ring values, but continue to be
directed by the bridged call alerting administration.

■

Hospitality Features — Do Not Disturb
The Do Not Disturb feature takes precedence over the Ringing —
Abbreviated and Delayed feature in blocking ringing to the station.

■

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) — World Class Basic Rate
Interface
Several of the protocol variations supported by the World Class BRI
feature do not permit the messaging required for control of the station’s
ringer by Ringing — Abbreviated and Delayed. In this case, ring type is
forced to a value of ring.

■

Multiappearance Preselection and Preference
The system automatically selects any alerting call on a station whether or
not it is ringing if the Per Button Ring Control field is set to n. If the field is
set to y, it selects only audibly ringing calls.

■

Off-Premises Station and Off-Premises Extension Lines
You must use ring type of “ring” for OPS and OPX lines.

■

Personal Central Office Line (PCOL) Calls
PCOL calls are not affected by the ring values, but continue to be directed
by the bridged call alerting administration.

■

Redirection Notification
If Redirection Notification is enabled, terminals only receive redirection
notification if the alerting button or the first call appearance has an
assigned ring value of ring or abbreviated ring.

■

Terminating Extension Group (TEG) Calls
TEG calls are not affected by the ring values, but continue to be directed by
the bridged call alerting administration.

■

Voice Mail Systems
Voice mail systems may look for ringing applied to a port to trigger call
answer. Undesirable adjunct operation may result if ring-type translations
are inappropriately set for ports serving these adjuncts.

1812

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Security violations notification

Security violations notification
When a security violation occurs, security violations notification (SVN) notifies a
designated referral point. This can be an attendant console, a display-equipped
phone, or a phone without display for SVN referral calls with announcements.
The system monitors and reports on the following types of security violations:
■

Login violations

■

Remote access barrier code violations

■

Authorization code violations

■

Station security code violations

Avaya MultiVantage provides the option to log a major alarm if a security
violation occurs involving an Avaya services login ID. Avaya is responsible for
retiring the alarm.
See Reports for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for more information on how to
run reports, and respond to security violations.
To effectively monitor the security of your system, you need to know how often
both valid and invalid attempts at system entry are normally made. Then you will
know if the number of invalid attempts is unusually high. A significant increase in
such attempts can mean the system is being compromised.
NOTE:

Avaya recommends that you print and clear the security-violation
measurement reports at least once a month. In a busy system, once a week is
not too frequent.
Security violation thresholds and notification

As an example, you may determine that during a forty-hour week, it’s normal for
users to submit about 1,000 valid barrier codes and 150 invalid barrier codes; that
is, about 3.75 invalid barrier codes are submitted per hour.
With this information, you may decide to declare that a security violation occurs
during any hour in which 8 invalid barrier codes are submitted. If you know that
during an 8-hour period, about 30 invalid codes are submitted, you might set the
threshold to count a security violation when 40 invalid codes are submitted within
eight hours.
You can administer SVN to place a referral call to the location of your choice
whenever the established thresholds are reached. All SVN referral calls are
priority calls.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1813

Features and technical reference

Invalid attempts accumulate at different rates in the various security arenas (login,
authorization code, remote access, and station security code), depending on
feature usage and the number of users on a server. For this reason, you administer
thresholds separately for each type of violation.
Sequence of events

The following is the sequence of events that occur when an SVN is enabled and a
detects a security violation:
1. SVN parameters are exceeded (the number of invalid attempts permitted in
a specified time interval is exceeded).
2. An SVN referral call (with announcements, if assigned) is placed to a
designated point, and SVN provides an audit trail containing information
about each attempt to access the switch.
3. SVN disables a login ID or Remote Access following the security
violation.
4. The login ID or Remote Access remains disabled until re-enabled by an
authorized login ID, with the correct permissions.
Reporting

The system reports information about security violations in the following ways:
■

In real time — you can use the monitor security-violations command to

monitor security violations as they may be occurring. Enter this command,
followed by the type of security violation you want to monitor (logins,
remote-access, authorization-codes, or station-security-codes).
■

On an immediate basis — when a security violation occurs, the system

sends a priority call to a designated referral point (attendant console or
phone). Thus, there is some chance of apprehending the violator during the
attempted violation.
Upon notification, you can request the Security Violations Status Reports ,
which show details of the last 16 security violations of each type. The
Barrier Code and Authorization Code reports also include the calling party
number from which the attempt was made, where available.
■

On a historical basis — the number of security violations of each type, as

well as other security measurements, are collected and displayed in the
Security Violations Summary and Detail reports. These reports show
summary information since the counters were reset by the clear
measurements security-violations command or since system
initialization. They do not show all aspects of the individual security
violations.

1814

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Security violations notification

SVN- halt buttons

You can administer buttons for the notification extension to stop notification calls.
However, this may pose a security risk. Do not use these buttons if you do not
really need them.
To find out what svn-halt buttons exist in the system, type display
svn-button-location and press RETURN.
The SVN Button Locations screen appears.
SVN BUTTON LOCATIONS
LOGIN SECURITY VIOLATIONS
Name: Administrator______________
Extension: 81234____
REMOTE ACCESS SECURITY VIOLATIONS
Name: Administrator______________
Extension: 81234____
AUTHORIZATION CODE SECURITY VIOLATIONS
Name: Administrator II___________
Extension: 81235____
STATION SECURITY CODE VIOLATIONS
Name: Administrator II___________
Extension: 81235____
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SVN Referral Call With Announcement

The SVN Referral Call with Announcement option has the capacity to provide a
recorded message identifying the type of violation accompanying the SVN
referral call. Using Call Forwarding, Call Coverage, or Call Vector Time-of-Day
Routing (to route to an extension or a number off the switch), SVN referral calls
with announcements can terminate to a point on or off the switch.
Use of other means to route SVN referral calls to alternate destinations are not
supported at this time. An attempt to use an alternate method to route SVN
referral calls may result in a failure to receive the call or to hear the
announcement.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1815

Features and technical reference

Considerations
■

You may only administer one referral destination per system for each type
of violation.

■

Exercise caution when administering bridged appearances for stations that
are used as SVN referral destinations. SVN referral calls terminating to
bridged appearances must be accompanied by an announcement message
or must route to bridge appearances equipped with a display module. SVN
referral calls that do not have an announcement and terminate to a bridged
appearance not having a display will not provide an indication of the nature
of the call.

■

An authorization code violation with remote access generates two SVNs -one displaying “authorization code violation” and one displaying “barrier
code violation,” even though the correct barrier code was input. These two
displays help you determine that the violation took place in the context of a
remote access attempt, not an attempt to place an outgoing call to an ARS
trunk.

■

Call Coverage, Call Forwarding, and Call Pickup

Interactions

These items are supported for SVN only if you use recorded
announcements.
■

Centralized Attendant Services (CAS)
CAS attendants cannot receive referral calls from branch locations.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
SVN does not support referral calls across a DCS network.

Related topics

See ‘‘Monitoring the Access Security Gateway history log’’ on page 396
See ‘‘Login Administration’’ on page 1020 to disable a login following a security
violation.
See ‘‘Setting up security violations notification’’ on page 401 for instructions.
See ‘‘Recording announcements’’ on page 442 to record announcements.

1816

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Service observing

Service observing
Designated users, normally supervisors, can listen to other users’ calls. This
capability is often used to train agents and monitor service quality in call centers
and other environments where employees serve customers over the phone. On
MultiVantage, this is called “service observing” and the user observing calls is the
“observer.”
This section describes service observing in environments without ACD or call
vectoring. See Avaya MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Guide to ACD Call
Centers to use service observing in those environments.
Brief description

Observers can monitor calls to any of the following:
■

an extension

■

a VDN (on systems with call vectoring)

■

a logical agent ID (on systems with Expert Agent Selection)

Note that service observing allows you to observe calls to one particular
extension, not all calls to all extensions at a terminal.
Observers can monitor calls in one of two modes: “listen-only” or
“listen-and-talk.” The latter permits an observer to hear and speak with all parties
on a call. The person being monitored doesn’t know an observer is listening to the
call unless you administer Avaya MultiVantage to provide a monitoring tone.

!

WARNING:
Listening to someone else’s calls may be subject to federal, state, or
local laws, rules, or regulations. It may require the consent of one or
both of the parties on the call. Familiarize yourself with all
applicable laws, rules, and regulations and comply with them when
you use this feature.

Observers can use remote access to monitor calls when they’re off-site. In systems
with call vectoring, a vector can control access to service observing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1817

Features and technical reference

How to observe calls

Observers press the service observing button on their phone or dial a feature
access code, and then dial the extension they want to observe. When using a
service observing button, observers start in listen-only mode and can toggle
between listen-only and listen/talk mode by pressing the button. The button lamp
indicates which mode the observer is in.
If a service observer is in the wait state (waiting for an eligible call), the only
visual indication the station/agent is observing is if the observing station has a
Service Observe button administered. When this happens, the Service Observe
button flutters while the observer is waiting, and the button is lit steady when the
observer is actively observing a call.
If service observing is activated via the Service Observing feature access code,
and there is no Service Observe button administered on the set, there will be no
call appearance reserved while the call remains in the wait state. An idle call
appearance must be available for the user to go to the observing state when a new
eligible call arrives.
By contrast, there are different feature access codes for listen-only and
listen-and-talk modes. When observers initiate sessions with a feature access
code, they must choose one of the two modes at the start of the session. They
cannot switch to the other mode without ending the session and beginning
another. The feature access codes for service observing are:
■

Service Observing Listen Only Access Code

■

Service Observing Listen/Talk Access Code
NOTE:

Feature access codes are required for remote observing.
An observer can observe an agent who is not active on a call. The observer is in
wait state until the agent receives a call, and then the observer is bridged onto the
call.
To deactivate Service Observing, the observer hangs up, selects another call
appearance, or presses the disconnect or release button.
Restrictions

Two observers can’t monitor the same extension or the same call simultaneously.
If user A is observing an extension and user B tries to observe it, B gets a busy
signal. If 2 extensions are being observed independently and one calls the other,
only the observer of the calling extension observes the call. The observer of the
called extension goes into wait state until the call is over.

1818

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Service observing

Phone displays

A local observer’s phone display shows exactly what is displayed on the observed
phone’s display, followed by the letters “so”.
Trunk calls

If a user makes a trunk-call, observation starts after the user finishes dialing. On
central office (CO) trunks, dialing is considered complete when answer
supervision is returned or when answer supervision timeout occurs.
Service observing cannot be activated over trunks without disconnect supervision.
Any attempt is denied.
Warning and conference tones

If you administer a tone to notify the parties on a call when they are being
observed, you can choose between a warning tone and conference tone. If you
select warning tone, a unique 2-second, 440-Hz warning tone plays before an
observer connects to the call. While the call is observed, a shorter version of this
tone repeats every 12 seconds. If you select conference tone, all parties will hear
conference tone before an observer connects to the call. However, unlike warning
tone the conference tone is not repeated.
Interactions
■

Attendants
An attendant can be observed but cannot be an observer.

■

Bridged Appearances
You can only observe calls on primary extensions, not on bridged
appearances. For example, let’s say you’re observing extension 3082 and
this phone also has a bridged appearance for extension 3282. You can’t
observe calls to 3282.

■

Busy-Verification
You can’t observe an extension that’s being busy-verified. You can’t
busy-verify an extension that’s being observed.

■

Call Coverage/Call Pickup
An observer cannot observe a call answered by a covering agent or a
member of a pickup group unless the called agent bridges onto the call.

■

Call Park
An observer cannot park the call they are observing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1819

Features and technical reference

■

Call Waiting
Incoming calls cannot wait on a single-line phone that is being observed.

■

Conference
Observers cannot initiate a conference while observing.
If an observed user starts a conference or enters a conference with fewer
than 6 parties, the observer is placed in wait state until the call is connected.
Then the observer observes the conference and is counted as one party in
the conference. (Conference members are observed during a conference
regardless of their Class of Restriction (COR) setting.) In addition, the
observer is bridged onto any calls the user makes or receives before the
conference is complete. When the user leaves the conference, the observer
also leaves and returns to observing the original call.

■

Data Privacy
You can’t observe an extension on which Data Privacy is active. You also
can’t observe an extension while it’s on a conference call with another
extension using Data Privacy.

■

Data Restriction
You can’t observe an extension on which Data Restriction is active. You
also can’t observe an extension while it’s on a conference call with another
extension using Data Restriction.

■

Integrated Directory
Observers do not hear users dialing when the latter use this feature.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
To observe stations on another node (a DCS station extension), you must
set up remote-access service observing. Service observing displays are not
transmitted across DCS networks.

■

Hold
Observers cannot place calls on hold while they’re observing. If a user
places a call on hold, the observer enters wait state.

■

IP Solutions
If you service observe into an ip-ip direct call, the people on the call may
hear a break in conversation of about 200 ms.

■

Leave Word Calling (LWC)
Parties on an observed call cannot use LWC.

■

Music-on-Delay/Music-on-Hold
If an observer is in listen/talk mode, neither caller nor observer hears
music-on-hold. If an observer is in listen-only mode, the caller hears
music-on-hold but the observer does not.

1820

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering

■

Privacy — Manual Exclusion
You can’t observe an extension on which Privacy — Manual Exclusion is
active. You also can’t observe an extension while it’s on a conference call
with another extension using Privacy — Manual Exclusion.

■

Transfer
Observers cannot initiate a transfer while observing.
If a user transfers a call, the observer is placed in wait state. The observer is
bridged onto the call when the transfer is complete.

Related topics

See ‘‘Setting up automatic answer intercom calls’’ on page 486 to administer
service observing.

Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed
Station Numbering
Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering allows easy guest access to
internal hotel/motel services and provides the capability to associate room
numbers with guest-room telephones.
Detailed description

You must create a dial plan for hotel/motel services and room numbers. (See
‘‘Dial Plan Analysis Table’’ on page 748 for more information about creating a
dial plan.)
Some suggestions follow.
■

Assign a single-digit extension to internal hotel/motel services such as
room service. Assign single-digit extensions to individual-telephones or to
a group of telephones (for example, to service the front desk).

■

Assign a prefixed extension to guest rooms.
A prefixed extension is still made up of a prefix and an extension up to five
digits. The prefix identifies the call type. The switch collects dialed digits,
removes the prefix digit, and uses the extension for further processing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1821

Features and technical reference

■

Mixed station numbering extensions can have from one to seven digits and
can begin with any digit from 0 to 9.
The first digit, in combination with the number of digits dialed, defines the
call type. To differentiate between two numbers with the same leading digit
but different lengths, the system monitors the interval after a digit is dialed
and before the next digit is dialed. If the interval extends past the
administered interdigit timeout, the system assumes that dialing is
complete and calculates the number of digits dialed up to that point.

Examples

change dialplan analysis

Page

1 of

3

SPE A

DIAL PLAN ANALYSIS TABLE
Percent Full:

Dialed
String
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
*
#

Total
Length
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
1
2
2

Call
Type
attd
dac
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
pext
ext
pext
dac
dac
fac
fac

Dialed
String

Total Call
Length Type

Dialed
String

9

Total Call
Length Type

Dial plan 1 allows the following dial access:
■

Single-digit access to the hotel/motel attendant (0)

■

Ten dial-access codes (DACs) beginning with the digit 1 (10 through 19)

■

Single-digit access to five hotel/motel services (2, 3, 4, 6 and 7)

■

Nonprefixed access to as many as 100 hotel/motel staff extensions
(500 through 599)

■

Guest room extensions for as many as 100 floors
— Access to floors 1 through 9 (prefix digit 6 + [100 through 999])
— Access to floors 10 through 99 (prefix digit 7 + [1000 through
9999])

■

1822

Toll-call access via DAC 8

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed Station Numbering

■

Local calling via ARS DAC 9

■

2-digit feature-access codes (FACs) [* or # plus another digit

]

change dialplan analysis

Page

1 of

3

SPE A

DIAL PLAN ANALYSIS TABLE
Percent Full:

Dialed
String
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5

Total
Length
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1

Call
Type
attd
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext

Dialed
String
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
9
*
#

Total
Length
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
1
2
2

Call
Type
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
ext
dac
dac
fac
fac
ext
ext

Dialed
String

9

Total Call
Length Type

Dial plan 2 allows the following dial access:
■

Single-digit access to the hotel/motel attendant (0)

■

Single-digit access to seven hotel/motel services (extensions 1 through 7)

■

2-digit access to 70 hotel/motel services (extensions 10 through 79)

■

Guest-room extensions for floors 1 through 7 (extensions 100 through 799)

■

Toll-calling access via DAC 8

■

Toll-calling access via ARS feature access code 9

■

2-digit FACs (* or # plus another digit)

Cancel timeout intervals if the user dials # after dialing all required digits.
When using prefixed extension numbers, it is not necessary to include an entry for
the "real" extension number in the dial plan. The server is able to complete a call
using the prefixed extension number. When dialing 7345 (where 7 is the prefix),
the communications server will ring extension 345.
When using a dial plan like the one above, which includes both prefixed and
non-prefixed extensions, dialing 567 instead of 4567 will ring an administrative
extension instead of a room.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1823

Features and technical reference

The dialing delays, which may not be perceived by hotel guests, will occur when
dialing 6 and 7. The server must wait for the 3- to 9-second interdigit timeout to
expire before the call will be sent. The user can preempt the timer by pressing the
# key after the number has been dialed.
NOTE:

When using prefixed extensions, the extension that shows up on a
display phone does not show the prefix. The prefix will not show up
on CDR reports. If extension number 3315 is prefixed with a 6 and
the dial plan shows 3xxx for extensions, it is possible to dial either
3315 or 63315 to reach extension 3315. If the dial plan was changed
to remove the entry for extensions in the 3xxx block, then 3315 could
be reached only by dialing 63315.
Considerations
■

Mixed Station Numbering allows guest room numbers and room
extensions to be the same.

■

You cannot assign prefixed extensions longer than seven digits (including
prefix) to intercom lists.

■

A TAC and an extension can share a first digit only if the extension is
shorter than the TAC.

■

Although extensions with the same first digit can have different lengths,
data-channel extensions must have the maximum number of digits to avoid
timeout problems for data calls that the switch automatically sets up, for
example, via the CDR link.

■

An extension and a FAC can share the same first digit only if the extension
is longer as long as they are not used for AAR/ARS faxes. These
extensions work only within the switch; they do not work as remote UDP
extensions.

■

You should administer the Short Interdigit Timeout on the Feature-Related
System Parameters screen to ensure that the delay between the end of
dialing and call completion is not too long.

■

Attendant Display and Telephone Display

Interactions

Prefixed extensions display without the prefix. The return call button
causes the prefix to dial, even though it does not display.
■

1824

Property Management System (PMS)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station Hunting

■

PMS products accept only extensions of 5 digits or shorter. Therefore, a
customer using PMS cannot use 6/7-digit extensions

■

.Uniform Dial Plan (UDP)
The following limitations apply to a DCS environment:
— Extensions that differ in length from the UDP do not distribute to
other switches.
— If the first two digits of an extension correspond to the floor number,
floors cannot be serviced by more than one switch.

Station Hunting
Station Hunting routes calls made to a busy station down a chain of stations until
one is found that is not active.
Detailed description

To use Station Hunting, you create a station hunting chain that governs the order
in which a call routes from one station to the next when the called station is busy.
Each station in the chain links to only one subsequent station. However, any
number of stations may link to one station.
The system updates the calling party’s display with “h” when the system begins
checking the station-hunting chain. Likewise, the system updates the display of
the station that is hunted-to (the station that takes the call) with an “h.”
Calls route through the chain as follows.
Table 59. Station hunting characteristics
Condition

Response

Encounters an idle extension

Rings extension

Encounters an active extension

Routes to next extension in chain

Encounters an extension with a blank
hunt-to station field

Returns busy tone if no station was
idle

Encounters any station a second time

Returns busy tone

Has checked 30 stations in the chain,
without finding an idle one

Returns busy tone

There is no limit to the number of extensions that can be in a station-hunting
chain.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1825

Features and technical reference

Station Hunting examples

In this example (Table 60), extension 2 is the called extension. Because extension
2 is busy, the system follows the station-hunting chain to find an idle extension.
The system cannot find an idle extension so it returns busy tone to the caller. Note
that the chain terminates with extension 5. This means that the system cannot
route the call to extension 1 even though it is an idle extension in the chain.
Table 60. Station-Hunting chain — Example 1
Extension

State

Rings on extension

1

Idle

2

2

Busy

3

3

Active

4

4

Active

5

5

Busy

In this example (Table 61), extension 2 is the called extension. Because extension
2 is busy, the system follows the station-hunting chain to find an idle extension.
The call is answered at extension 1.
Table 61. Station-Hunting chain — Example 2

Extension

State

Rings on
extension

1

Idle

2

2

Busy

3

3

Busy

4

4

Active

5

5

Active

1

In this example (Table 62), extension 2 is the called extension. Because extension
2 is busy, the system follows the station-hunting chain to find an idle extension.
The system encounters extension 3 a second time without finding an idle station.
The system stops checking the station-hunting chain and returns busy tone to the
caller. Notice that both extensions 5 and 2 link to extension 3.

1826

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station Hunting

Table 62. Station-Hunting chain — Example 3

Extension

State

Rings on
extension

1

Idle

2

2

Busy

3

3

Busy

4

4

Busy

5

5

Busy

3

Station hunting options

You can administer the system to perform station hunting prior to sending calls to
coverage. The Station Hunt Before Coverage option on the System-Parameters
Call Coverage/Call Forwarding screen provides that when a call is made to a busy
station, the switch checks to see if there is a hunt-to station assigned to the busy
station. If there is, the switch tries to connect to the hunt-to station before going to
coverage. If the hunt-to station is also busy, the switch continues hunting down the
hunt-to chain. If all stations in the hunt-to chain are busy, the call goes to the
dialed station’s coverage.
Administration commands

When you remove a station, the system attempts to maintain a station-hunting
chain. Consider the following examples:
■

Station 1 links to 2 and 2 links to 3. If you remove station 2, the system
links 1 to 3.

■

Station 1 links to 2. Station 2 does not link to another extension. If you
remove station 2, 1 no longer links to another extension.

When you duplicate a station, the extension in the hunt-to station field is not
copied into the duplicated station.
When you execute “list usage extension xxxxx,” the system displays all stations
that contain the station’s extension as their hunt-to station.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1827

Features and technical reference

Interactions

Remember that the system checks the station-hunting chain only for idle and
available extensions.
■

Adjunct Switch Applications Interface (ASAI)
The system attempts Station Hunting when ASAI routes to an extension
with a hunt-to station.

■

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
An agent extension can be part of a station-hunting chain. The system
hunts the agent’s chain only when the call is made directly to the agent’s
extension. Calls distributed through hunt groups to an ACD agent do not
hunt the agent’s station-hunting chain. Calls made to an extension for
logical agents do not hunt the agent’s station-hunting chain.

■

Automatic Callback
The system does not hunt the chain of the called extension when the call is
a callback-return call.

■

Bridged Appearance
The system hunts the extension’s station-hunting chain if the principal
station has no call appearance at which the call can terminate, even though
it may have available bridged appearances on other stations.

■

Busy Verification
The system does not attempt Station Hunting for busy-verify calls.

■

Call Coverage
Call Coverage has precedence over Station Hunting.
Station Hunting is applied to the final coverage point following the final
coverage point’s hunt-to chain when the following conditions occur:
— The Call Coverage screen’s Hunt After Coverage field is y.
— The last coverage point is unavailable (busy or no answer).
— The last coverage point is a station with an assigned hunt-to station.
— No one in the coverage path answered the call.
Coverage — Don’t Answer will cover the call after hunt if the call can
terminate, but no one answers.
If Station Hunt Before Coverage is active, a call to a busy station tries to
terminate to the hunt-to phone before going to coverage. If the call does go
to coverage, it is the coverage of the dialed extension (unless the phone is
an XDID, and then the call goes to the coverage of the non-XDID phone
found in the XDID’s hunt-to field).

1828

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station Hunting

■

Call Detail Recording (CDR)
CDR records the called extension, not the answering extension.

■

Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding has precedence over Station Hunting.
If an idle station has Call Forwarding active, the system forwards the call.
If a busy station has Call Forwarding active, a call to the station forwards.
If the forwarded-to station is busy, the call follows that forwarded-to
station’s hunting chain.
If the system finds Call Forwarding active at one of the stations in a
station-hunting chain, it considers the station busy and bypasses it. The call
goes to the next station in the chain.

■

Call Park
The system does not attempt Station Hunting on callpark-return calls.

■

Call Pickup
Call Pickup functions the same for calls terminating at a point in a
station-hunting chain as it does for a regular calls.

■

Call Vectoring
You cannot assign a VDN as a hunt-to station.
If a route-to command’s with cov y directs a call to a busy station, the call
follows the station’s hunt-to chain and not its coverage path. See Avaya
MultiVantage™ Call Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent
Selection (EAS) Guide for more information.

■

Call Waiting/Attendant Call Waiting
Station Hunting has precedence over Call Waiting.
If a called extension has Call Waiting active, and the extension is already
busy on a call, the system hunts the station-hunting chain. If the system
cannot terminate the call to a member of the chain, then the call waits at the
called extension.
If the system finds Call Waiting active at an extension in a station-hunting
chain, it considers the extension busy and bypasses it.

■

Class of Restriction (COR)
The system checks the COR of the called extension; it does not check the
COR of the hunt-to stations in the chain.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Station Hunting is not a DCS feature. All members of a station-hunting
chain must be on the same switch.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1829

Features and technical reference

■

Do Not Disturb
When a phone has Do Not Disturb activated, a call to that phone goes to
intercept treatment and not to station hunting.

■

Extension Number Portability (ENP)
You cannot assign a remote ENP extension as a hunt-to station.

■

Hunting/Hunting Group
You cannot assign a direct departmental calling or Uniform Call
Distribution extension as a hunt-to station.

■

Intercom Call
The system denies Station Hunting for intercom calls to a busy extension.

■

Leave Word Calling (LWC)
If a caller initiates LWC, the LWC message is left at the called extension
even if the system uses Station Hunting in an attempt to complete the call.

■

Multimedia
Calls to multimedia endpoints must convert to voice before station hunting.

■

Night Service
The system denies Station Hunting when a night service call is made to a
busy night-console extension.

■

Outgoing Trunk Queueing
The system does not attempt Station Hunting for an OTQ callback-return
call.

■

Personal Central Office Line (PCOL)
The system does not attempt Station Hunting for a PCOL call.

■

Personal Station Access (PSA)
The system considers a station with PSA dissociated as busy and bypasses
it in the station-hunting chain.

■

Priority Call
The system denies Station Hunting for priority calls.

■

Restriction
The system applies proper intercept treatment to a restricted, called
extension. However, the system does not check restrictions on hunt-to
stations.

■

Send All Calls
Send All Calls coverage takes precedence over Station Hunting.

1830

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Station Lock

■

Tenant Partitioning
The system applies normal tenant restrictions to a call to the called
extension. However, the system does not check tenant restrictions on
hunt-to stations.

■

Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI)
The system considers a station with TTI separation as busy and bypasses it
in the station-hunting chain.

■

Terminating Extension Group (TEG)
You cannot assign a TEG as a hunt-to station.

■

Uniform Dial Plan (UDP)
You cannot assign a remote UDP extension as a hunt-to station.

■

X-ported extension
You can assign a hunt-to station to a station administered with X in the port
field. It is treated as unavailable and skipped.

Related topics

See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information to administer a Hunt-to-Station
button.
See ‘‘Coverage Path’’ on page 696 for information about station hunting after
coverage.

Station Lock
Station Lock provides users with the capability to manually lock their stations,
using a button or feature access code, in order to prevent unauthorized external
calls from being placed.
Station Lock can prevent unauthorized external calls. Phones can be remotely
locked and unlocked. Station Lock allows users to:
■

lock their phones to prevent unauthorized outgoing calls.

■

block outgoing calls and still receive incoming calls.

■

block all outgoing calls except for emergency calls.

Station Lock is activated by pressing a phone button, which lights the button
indicator, or dialing a FAC.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1831

Features and technical reference

Analog and XMOBILE stations must dial a FAC to activate the feature. The user
hears a special dial tone on subsequent origination attempts from the telephone to
indicate that the lock feature is active.
Digital stations (including DCP, BRI, IP hardphones and softphones) access
Station Lock with a feature button or via a FAC. If a digital station has a Station
Lock button but activates the feature with the FAC, the LED for the button lights
and no special dial tone is provided. However, if a digital station does not have a
Station Lock button and activates the feature with the FAC, a special dial tone is
provided.
A station can be locked or unlocked from any other station if the FAC is used and
the Station Security Code is known. The attendant console can never be locked
but can be used to lock or unlock other stations. A station also can be locked or
unlocked via a remote access trunk.
Interactions
■

Attendant Console
Station Lock cannot be used for attendant consoles but it can be assigned to
regular digital stations that might also have console permissions. The FAC
cannot be used to activate Station Lock for the attendant console, but the
FAC can be dialed from the attendant console in an attempt to remotely
activate or deactivate Station Lock for another station.

■

Personal Station Access (PSA)
Station Lock can be used for PSA stations as long as they are associated
with an extension. When stations are disassociated, Station Lock cannot be
activated.

■

Remote Access
After a remote user dials a valid barrier code, the user receives system dial
tone. To activate/deactivate Station Lock, the user must dial the FAC, then
the extension number, then the security code number.

Station security codes
Station security codes (SSC) provide security to you by preventing other users
from accessing functions associated with your station. Each station user can
change their own SSC if they know the station’s current settings.
You must create a system-wide SSC change FAC before users can change their
SSC. You must also provide users with their individual SSC. A user cannot
change a blank SSC.

1832

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Interactions

Users need a station security code to use the following system capabilities:
■

Demand printing

■

Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls

■

Leave Word Calling

■

Personal Station Access

■

Voice Message Retrieval

Related topics

See ‘‘Assigning an extender password’’ on page 366 for information about
creating a station security code.
See ‘‘Training users’’ on page 373 for information about changing your station
security code.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about and field descriptions on the
Station screen.
See ‘‘Security-Related System Parameters’’ on page 1105 for information about
and field descriptions on the Security-Related System Parameters screen.
See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for information about and field
descriptions on the Feature Access Code screen.

Telephone displays
Telephone displays provide multi-appearance phone users with current call and
message information. The information that appears depends on the type of display
the user selects with the buttons on the phone.
Retrieving stored information, such as messages and directory information, is
easy and convenient. Users can select English, French, Italian, Spanish, or a
user-defined language for their display.
With Enhanced Telephone Display, you can choose the types of characters that
appear on user’s phone displays. You can administer the switch to display
standard Roman (European) characters, or Cyrillic (Russian), Katakana
(Japanese), or Ukrainian characters. The character set displayed is determined by
the phones your company uses.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1833

Features and technical reference

Button display modes

You can assign several display modes to phone buttons. Users access these modes
by pressing the assigned button on the phone. All the buttons are administrable.

Button Mode

Displays

Normal

Call-related information for the active call appearance, including
the call appearance, calling- or called-party name and number,
depending on the type of call.
Elapsed Time can be invoked anytime the display is in normal
mode. It displays elapsed time in hours, minutes, and seconds.
Timing starts and stops when the button is pressed.

Inspect

Call-related information for an incoming call when the user is
active on a different call appearance. You must reset the mode
manually for each call.

Stored Number

One of the following numbers:
■

the last number that the user dialed (Last Number Dialed)

■

the number stored in an Abbreviated Dialing button
administered to the phone

■

a number stored in an Abbreviated Dialing list

■

a number assigned to a button that was administered by Facility
Busy Indication

Date and Time

Current date and time of day

Integrated
Directory

Turns off the touch-tone signals and allows the user to use the
touch-tone buttons to enter the name of a system user. After a name
is entered, the display shows the name and extension.
Integrated Directory can use 1 additional button:
■

1834

Call-Disp - automatically returns the call requested by the
currently-displayed message or the currently-displayed name
and extension.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Button Mode

Displays

Message
Retrieval

Retrieves messages for phone users. If no messages are stored,
display shows NO MESSAGES. Messages can be retrieved even if the
retriever is active on a call.
Message Retrieval can use 3 additional related buttons:

Coverage
Message
Retrieval Mode

■

Next Message - retrieves the next message or displays END OF
FILE, PUSH Next TO REPEAT when in Retrieval mode.

■

Delete - deletes the currently displayed message.

■

Call-Disp - automatically returns the call requested by the
currently-displayed message or the currently-displayed name
and extension.

Retrieves messages for phone users who do not have a display
module assigned to their phone. You must administer retrieval
permission for a user to be able to retrieve another user’s messages.
The retriever does not need to lift the handset to retrieve messages.
Messages can be retrieved even if the retriever is active on a call.
Coverage Message Retrieval can use 3 additional related buttons:
■

Next Message - retrieves the next message or displays END OF
FILE, PUSH Next TO REPEAT when in Retrieval mode.

■

Delete - deletes the currently displayed message.

■

Call-Disp - automatically returns the call requested by the
currently-displayed message or the currently-displayed name
and extension.

Information on the display

Avaya MultiVantage provides the following call-related information:
■

Call Appearance Identification
The call appearance buttons are designated on the display by a lowercase
letter. The display shows a= for a call incoming on the first button, b= for a
call incoming on the second button, and so on.
The system may omit the call-appearance information so that the Call Log
find capability in the PC/PBX Connection software works properly.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1835

Features and technical reference

■

Calling Party Identification
When a call is from inside the system, the display shows the caller’s name
or a unique identification administered for the phone being used, along
with the calling party’s extension. When the call is from outside the system,
the display shows the trunk group name (such as CHICAGO) and the trunk
access code assigned to the trunk group used for the call. If a user is active
on a call and receives a subsequent call, the display automatically shows
the identification of the subsequent caller for a few seconds, then
automatically restores the display associated with the active call
appearance.
For example:
Outgoing trunk call
b=87843541

8 is the trunk access code and 784-3541 is the number dialed
then
b=OUTSIDE CALL

8

or
b=WATS

101

NOTE:

Due to space limitations, some name displays are shortened to 15
characters. These include displays for transferred or covered calls,
non-DCS, ISDN-PRI call displays, VDN service observing displays,
and LWC messages or the queue status of an agent.
■

Called Party Identification
On calls to a system user, the digits appear on the display as they are dialed.
After dialing is complete, the called party’s name and extension appears. If
no name is accessed, the dialed digits remain on the display.
On outgoing calls, the digits appear on the display as they are dialed. After
dialing is complete, the display shows the name and trunk access code
assigned to the trunk group being called. Optionally on a trunk-group basis,
the display can show only the dialed digits, not the trunk group name and
trunk access code.

1836

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

For example:
dialed digits
a=3602

then
a=TOM BROWN

3062

or, if no name is available
a=EXT 3602
■

3062

Call Purpose
This identifies the reason for an incoming call or a redirected call. (A
normal incoming call is not identified by a call purpose.) The following
identifiers sometimes appear on the display:

Display

Meaning

b — (Busy)

The called user is active on a call, and has a
temporary bridged appearance of the call.

c — (Cover All)

The called user has Cover All assigned.

callback

The call is an Automatic Callback call from the
system.

d — (Coverage on
Don’t Answer)

The call was redirected because the called phone was
not answered. Also indicates that the called user has
a temporary bridged appearance of the call.

f — (Call Forwarding)

Another user has forwarded calls to this phone.

h — (Station hunt)

The called user is active on a call and station hunt
was used to route the call.

ICOM

The call is an Intercom call.

p — (Pickup)

The user answered a Call Pickup group member’s
call.

park

The user parked a call.

priority

The call has priority status.

s — (Send All Calls)

The called user is temporarily sending all calls to
coverage and the call has been redirected to this
phone.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1837

Features and technical reference

Message retrieval

Certain phones and the attendant groups can be designated for system-wide
message retrieval. Users of these phones or consoles can retrieve LWC and Call
Coverage messages for other phone users, including DDC groups, UCD groups,
and TEG. They can also retrieve external call logs. You can assign system-wide
retrieving phones or consoles on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
Messages for a phone user can be retrieved at selected phones or any attendant
console if the retriever is in the user’s Call Coverage path and if permission to
retrieve messages is assigned for the user’s phone.
Enhanced Telephone Display

With Enhanced Telephone Display, you can choose the types of characters that
appear on your phone displays. You can choose standard Roman characters, or
Cyrillic, Katakana, or Ukrainian characters. Your Avaya representative sets the
character type on the System Parameters Country-Options screen. The character set
displayed is also determined by the phones your company uses.
You can choose one of the following character sets for messages on your display
phones:
■

Cyrillic contains the characters required to display the Russian language. All
Russian characters appear in capital letters.

■

Katakana contains the characters to display the Japanese language as well as
some European characters and other symbols. All Japanese characters
appear in capital letters.

■

Roman contains two character sets:
— US English contains the Roman alphabet, numerals, and special
characters found on the standard US English keyboard. US English
characters appear in capital and lowercase letters.
— European contains characters for many European languages. All
European characters appear in capital letters.

■

Ukrainian contains the characters required to display the Ukrainian
language. All Ukrainian characters appear in capital letters.

The type of phones your company uses must support the characters you want to
display. Each character set requires specific firmware in the phone. Make sure you
use phones with the same firmware type across your entire system, or the displays
do not appear as expected. Your Avaya representative can make sure that you have
the correct phone types for the characters you want to display.

1838

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Interactions
■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Trunk group and attendant information associated with a DCS call can be
translated. If the displays are not associated with a DCS call, the name that
appears is the name administered on the form used to administer the trunk
group.

■

Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed-Station Numbering
If prefixed extensions are used in the system’s dial plan, the prefix is not
displayed when the extension is displayed. The Return Call button can be
used to dial prefixed extensions, because the system dials the prefix, even
though it is not displayed.

Interactions (Enhanced)
■

ASAI and related adjuncts
Information sent from the switch to any adjunct is the literal value of the
field, not the enhanced characters. The display appears as a string of
random characters — for example, as “2<@^.“

■

AUDIX Voice Power/Audix Voice Power Lodging
Not supported.

■

Data Call Setup
Not supported.

■

DCS
All switches in a DCS network must have must have the same software
load installed on each server, must have the enhanced characters enabled,
and must have phones with the same firmware type.

■

ECMA and QSIG Networking
Information must be sent between Avaya MultiVantage systems.

■

Leave Word Calling - Adjunct
Not supported.

■

Message Retrieval - Print Messages (Demand Print)
Not supported.

■

Monitor 1 and OneVision
Monitor 1 and OneVision receive ASCII characters.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1839

Features and technical reference

■

OSSI
OSSI displays the literal value of the display field, not the enhanced
characters.

■

Passageway Direct Connect
Not supported.

■

VUStats
Use phones that support enhanced characters or screens may clear and
displays will be incorrect.

Feature information displays

Phone displays provide information about the activity on individual phones and
consoles, including confirmation that a certain feature is being used. The language
used for messages is administered on the station screen for each phone.
This section shows the English, French, Italian, and Spanish message for each
feature. When time is displayed, the English language uses AM and PM. All other
languages use 24-hour time.
Table 63. Automatic Wakeup
English

French

Italian

Spanish

AUTO WAKEUP
- Ext: xxxxx Time:
--:-- xM

REVEIL AUTO. POSTE: xxxxx
HEURE: --:--

SERVIZIO
SVEGLIA - Tel:
xxxxx Ora: --:--

DESPERT
AUTOMA - EXT:
xxxxx HORA: --:--

INVALID
EXTENSION TRY AGAIN

NUMERO DE
POSTE EST
ERRONE REESSAYER

NUMERO
ERRATO RIPETERE

EXTENSION NO
VALIDO INTENTE DE
NUEVO

WAKEUP ENTRY
DENIED INTERVAL FULL

DEM. REVEIL
REFUSEE INTERVALLE
PLEIN

SVEGLIA NON
ATTIVATA ORARIO OCCUP

ENTRADA
DENEGADA INTERVALO
COMPLETO

WAKEUP ENTRY
DENIED - NO
PERMISSION

DEM. REVEIL
REFUSEE - SANS
AUTORISATION

SVEGLIA NON
ATTIVATA - NON
PERMESSO

ENTRADA
DENEGADA SIN PERMISO

Continued on next page

1840

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 63. Automatic Wakeup (Continued)
English

French

Italian

Spanish

WAKEUP ENTRY
DENIED SYSTEM FULL

DEM. REVEIL
REFUSEE ENCOMBREMENT

SVEGLIA NON
ATTIVATA CONGESTIONE

ENTRADA
DENEGADA SISTEMA
COMPLETO

WAKEUP ENTRY
DENIED - TOO
SOON

DEM. REVEIL
REFUSEE - TROP
TOT

SVEGLIA NON
ATTIVATA TROPPO
PRESTO

ENTRADA
DENEGADA MUY PRONTO

WAKEUP
REQUEST
CANCELED

DEMANDE DE
REVEIL EST
ANNULEE

RICHIESTA
SVEGLIA
CANENTRYATA

SOLICITUD DE
DESPERTADOR
CANCELADA

WAKEUP
REQUEST
CONFIRMED

DEMANDE DE
REVEIL EST
CONFIRMEE

RICHIESTA
SVEGLIA
CONFERMATA

SOLICITUD DE
DESPERTADOR
CONFIRMADA

Wakeup Call

APPEL DE
REVEIL

Serv. Sveglia

Despierte

Continued on next page

Table 64. ASAI
English

French

Italian

Spanish

You have adjunct
messages

MESSAGES
SUPPLEMENTAIRES

MESSAGGI
AGGIUNTIVI

TIENE
MENSAJES
ADICIONALES

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1841

Features and technical reference

Table 65. Busy verification of terminals and trunks
English

French

Italian

Spanish

ALL MADE
BUSY

TOUS OCC.

TUTTI
OCCUPATI

TODAS
OCUPADAS

BRIDGED

EN
DERIVATION

OCCUPATO

PUENTEADA

DENIED

INTERDIT

NON PERMESSO

DENEGADO

INVALID

ERRONE

NON VALIDO

NO VALIDO

NO MEMBER

AUCUN
MEMBRE

NESSUN
ELEMENTO

NINGUN
MIEMBRO

OUT OF
SERVICE

HORS
SERVICE

FUORI SERVIZIO

FUERA
SERVICIO

RESTRICTED

RESTREINT

RISTRETTO

RESTRINGIDO

TERMINATED

TERMINE

TERMINATO

TERMINADO

TRUNK
SEIZED

CIRCUIT SAISI

GIUNZIONE IMP.

ENLACE
OCUPADO

VERIFIED

VERIFIE

VERIFICATO

VERIFICADO

Table 66. Call Appearance

For each language, the active call appearance appears as:
“a =” (English)

Call-appearance buttons are shown on the display by a lower-case letter (a
through z for the first 26 call appearances), followed by “=.” Lower-case letters A
through Z, followed by “=” are used for additional call appearances.
Table 67. Call Detail Recording

1842

English

French

Italian

Spanish

CDR
OVERLOAD"

SURCHARGE
EDA

SVRACCARICO
DAC

SOBRECAR
GA DAT

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 68. Call progress feedback displays
English

French

Italian

Spanish

busy
(Extension Busy,
Intrusion Not
Allowed, Call
Waiting Not
Allowed)

OCCUPE
(Occupe)

occ
(Occupato)

OCUPADA
(Ocupada)

busy(I)
(Extension Busy,
Intrusion
Allowed, Call
Waiting Not
Allowed)

OCC.(E)
(Entree ligne
occupe)

occ(I)
(OccupatoIntrusione)

OCUP(I)
(Ocupadaintrusion)

ringing
(Extension
Ringing)

SONNE
(Libre)

libero
(Libero)

LIBRE
(Libero)

wait
(Extension Busy,
Intrusion Not
Allowed, Call
Waiting Allowed)

ATTENTE
(Attente)

auat
(Autoattesa)

ESPERA
(Espera)

(I) wait
(Extension Busy,
Intrusion
Allowed, Call
Waiting Allowed)

(E) ATTENTE
(Entree ligne
attente)

(I) auat
(IntrusioneAutoattesa)

(I) ESPERA
(Intrusion, en
espera)

Table 69. Class of Restriction displays
Restriction

English

French

Italian

Spanish

Toll

TOLL

INT.

TASS

TARF

Full

FULL

COM.

DISB

LLEN

No
Restrictions

NONE

AUC.

ABIL

NING

Origination

ORIG

DEP.

ORIG

ORIG

Outward

OTWD

SOR.

USCN

SALI

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1843

Features and technical reference

Use the following screens to translate time messages, if appropriate.














:
1-12 (hour of day, no leading zeroes)
00-59 (minute of hour)
“am” or “pm”
,
Day of week, upper case, unabbreviated
Month of year, upper case, unabbreviated
1-31 (day of month, no leading zeroes)
Year in 4 digits
Blank

Screen 310. Date/Time Mode and Formats – English













:
0-23 (hour of day, no leading zeroes)
00-59 (minute of hour)
,
Day of week, upper case, unabbreviated
1-31 (day of month, no leading zeroes)
Month of year, upper case, unabbreviated
Year in 4 digits
Blank

Screen 311. Date/Time Mode and Formats – French, Italian, Spanish, and
User-Defined
Table 70. Days of the week format

1844

English

French

Italian

Spanish

SUNDAY

DIMANCHE

DOMENICA

DOMINGO

MONDAY

LUNDI

LUNEDI

LUNES

TUESDAY

MARDI

MARTEDI

MARTES

WEDNESDAY

MERCREDI

MERCOLEDI

MIERCOLES

THURSDAY

JEUDI

GIOVEDI

JUEVES

FRIDAY

VENDREDI

VENERDI

VIERNES

SATURDAY

SAMEDI

SABATO

SABADO

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 71. Date/Time mode — time not available
English

French

Italian

Spanish

SORRY, TIME
UNAVAILABLE
NOW

HEURE ET DATE
INDISPONIBLES

ORA E DATA
TEMPON
DISPONIBILI

HORA Y
FECHA NO
DISPONIBL
ES AHORA

Table 72. Months of the year format
English

French

Italian

Spanish

JANUARY

JANVIER

GENNAIO

ENERO

FEBRUARY

FEVRIER

FEBBRAIO

FEBRERO

MARCH

MARS

MARZO

MARZO

APRIL

AVRIL

APRILE

ABRIL

MAY

MAI

MAGGIO

MAYO

JUNE

JUIN

GIUGNO

JUNIO

JULY

JUILLET

LUGLIO

JULIO

AUGUST

AOUT

AGOSTO

AGOSTO

SEPTEMBER

SEPTEMBRE

SETTEMBRE

SEPTIEMBRE

OCTOBER

OCTOBRE

OTTOBRE

OCTUBRE

NOVEMBER

NOVEMBRE

NOVEMBRE

NOVIEMBRE

DECEMBER

DECEMBRE

DICEMBRE

DICIEMBRE

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1845

Features and technical reference

Table 73. Do Not Disturb (Hotel/Motel feature)
English

French

Italian

Spanish

DO NOT DIST Group: xx Time:
--:-- xM

NE PAS DERANGER
GROUPE: xx
HEURE: --:--

NON DISTURBARE Grp: xx
Ora: --:--

NO MOLESTAR
- GRUPO: xx
HORA: --:--

DO NOT DIST Ext: xxxxx Time:
--:-- xM

NE PAS DERANGER
POSTE:xxxxx
HEURE: --:--

NON DISTURBARE Tel: xxxxx Ora: --:--

NO MOLESTAR
- EXT: xxxxx
HORA: --:--

DO NOT DIST
ENTRY DENIED
- INTERVAL
FULL

DEMANDE EST
REFUSEE INTERVALLE PLEIN

SERVIZIO NON
ATTIVATO - ORARIO
OCCUP

ENTRADA
DENEGADA INTERVALO
COMPLETO

DO NOT DIST
ENTRY DENIED
- NO
PERMISSION

DEMANDE EST
REFUSEE - SANS
AUTORISATION

SERVIZIO NON
ATTIVATO - NON
PERMESSO

ENTRADA
DENEGADA SIN PERMISO

DO NOT DIST
ENTRY DENIED
- SYSTEM FULL

DEMANDE EST
REFUSEE ENCOMBREMENT

SERVIZIO NON
ATTIVATO CONGESTIONE

ENTRADA
DENEGADA SISTEMA
COMPLETO

DO NOT DIST
ENTRY DENIED
- TOO SOON

DEMANDE EST
REFUSEE - TROP
TOT

SERVIZIO NON
ATTIVATO - TROPPO
PRESTO

ENTRADA
DENEGADA MUY PRONTO

INVALID
GROUP - TRY
AGAIN

GROUPE ERRONE REESSAYER

GRUPPO NON
VALIDO - RIPETERE

GRUPO NO
VALIDO INTENTE DE
NUEVO

THANK YOU DO NOT DIST
ENTRY
CONFIRMED

MERCI - DEMANDE
EST CONFIRMEE

NON DISTURBARE RICHIESTA
CONFERMATA

NO MOLESTAR
- ENTRADA
CONFIRMADA

THANK YOU DO NOT DIST
REQUEST
CANCELED

MERCI - DEMANDE
EST ANNULEE

NON DISTURBARE RICHIESTA
CANENTRYATA

MUCHAS
GRACIAS SOLICITUD
CANCELADA

Continued on next page

1846

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Enhanced Abbreviated Dialing -user defined
display display-messages ad-programming
Language Translations

Page 1 of 1

English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Press button to program.
1. ****************************************
Change number?
2. ***********************
Yes=1 No=2
3. ****************
Enter number:
4. ****************************************
Press # to save.
5. ****************
Number saved.
6. ****************************************
Change label?
7. ***********************
Enter label:
8. ****************************************
Press * to advance; # to save. 9. ******************************
Press * to reenter; # to save. 10. ******************************
Label saved.
11. ****************************************

Table 74. Field separator
English

French

Italian

Spanish


"to" 


"a" 


"a" 

 "a"


Table 75. Integrated directory display model
English

French

Italian

Spanish

DIRECTORY PLEASE ENTER
NAME

ANNUAIRE ENTRER LE
NOM

ELENCO
UTENTI INTRODURRE
NOME

GUIA
TELEFONICA INTRODUZCA
NOMBRE

DIRECTORY
UNAVAILABLE TRY LATER

ANNUAIRE
INDISPONIBLE
- REESSAYER

ELENCO
UTENTI TEMP.
NON
DISPONIBILE

GUIA TEL
INDISPONIBLE
- INTENTE
DESPUES

NO MATCH TRY AGAIN

INTROUVABLE
- REESSAYER

NESSUNA
CORRISPONDE
NZA - RIPETERE

NO
CORRESPONDE
- INTENTE DE
NUEVO

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1847

Features and technical reference

Table 76. ISDN
English

French

Italian

Spanish

ANSWERED BY

REPONDU PAR

RISPOSTA DA

RESPONDIDO
POR

CALL FROM

APPEL DE

CHIAMATA DA

LLAMADA DE

INTL

INTL

INTL

INTL

Leave Word Calling

CALL












The calling identifier, up to 15 characters
/
1-12 (month of year, no leading zeroes)
1-31 (day of month, no leading zeroes)
:
1-12 (hour of day, no leading zeroes)
00-59 (minute of hour)
"a" or "p"
Number of calls received, 1 digit *
Calling extension number, up to 7 digits
blank

Screen 312. Leave Word Calling Format – English

APPL










The calling identifier, up to 15 characters
/
1-31 (day of month, no leading zeroes)
1-12 (month of year, no leading zeroes)
:
0-23 (hour of day, no leading zeroes)
00-59 (minute of hour)
Number of calls received, 1 digit *
Calling extension number, up to 5 digits

Screen 313. Leave Word Calling Formats – French, Italian, Spanish, and
User-Defined

1848

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 77. Leave Word Calling messages
English

French

Italian

Spanish

CANNOT BE
DELETED CALL MESSAGE
CENTER

NE PEUT ETRE
SUPP./APPELER
RECEP. MESS.

NON
CANENTRYATO.
CHIAMARE
CENTRO
MESSAGGI

NO
ELIMINADO-LLA
MA CENTRO DE
MENSAJES

DELETED

SUPPRIME

MESSAGGIO
CANENTRYATO

ELIMINADO

END OF
MESSAGES
(NEXT TO
REPEAT)

FIN DES
MESSAGES
(SUIVANT POUR
REPETER)

FINE
MESSAGGI.

PER RIPETERE

FIN DE
MENSAJES
(SIGUIENTE
PARA REPITIR)

GET DIAL
TONE, PUSH
Cover Msg
Retrieval

TONALITE
D’ENVOI 

 DOPO
IL TONO DI
CENTR

OBTENGA TONO
OPRIMA


IN PROGRESS

EN COURS

ATTENDERE...

EN CURSO

MESSAGE
RETRIEVAL
DENIED

LECTURE DE
MESSAGES
INTERDITE

LETTURA
MESSAGGIO
NON
PERMESSA

RECUPERACION
DE MENSAJES
DENEGADA

MESSAGE
RETRIEVAL
LOCKED

LECTURE DE
MESSAGES
BLOQUEE

LETTURA
MESSAGGIO
BLOCCATA

RECUPERACION
DE MENSAJES
BLOQUEADA

MESSAGES FOR

MESSAGES
POUR

MESSAGGI PER

MENSAJES PARA

MESSAGES
UNAVAILABLE TRY LATER

MESSAGES
INDISPONIBLES
- REESSAYER

MESSAGGI
TEMPORANEA
MENTE NON
DISPONIBILI

MENSAJES NO
DISPONIBLES,
INTENTE
DESPUES

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1849

Features and technical reference

Table 77. Leave Word Calling messages (Continued)
English

French

Italian

Spanish

Message Center
(AUDIX) CALL

APPEL DE LA
RECEPTION DE
MESS. (AUDIX)

Chiamata dal
Centro Messaggi
(AUDIX)

LLAMADA DEL
CENTRO DE
MENSAJES
(AUDIX)

NO MESSAGES

PAS DE
MESSAGES

NESSUN
MESSAGGIO

NINGUN
MENSAJE

WHOSE
MESSAGES?
(DIAL
EXTENSION
NUMBER)

MESSAGES DE
QUEL NO.?
(ENTRER NO.
POSTE)

LETTURA
MESSAGGI.
INTRODURRE
NUMERO TEL.

MENSAJES DE
QUIEN?
(MARCAR
EXTENSION)

Continued on next page
Table 78. Malicious Call Trace
English

French

Italian

Spanish

MALICIOUS
CALL TRACE
REQUEST

DEPISTAGE
D’APPELS
MALVEILLANTS

RICHIESTA
RINTRACCIO
CHIAMATE
MALEVOLE

RASTREO DE
LLAMADA
MALINTENCIO
NADA

MCT activated
by: for:

DAM ACTIVE
par: pour:

RCM attivato da:
per:

RLM activada
por: para:

original call
redirected from:

redirection appel
initial de:
(EXTENSION)

chiamata iniziale
rinviata da:

llamada orig.
transferida de:

party:
(EXTENSION)

demandeur:
(EXTENSION)

utente:
(INTERNO)

usuario:
(EXTENSION)

party: (ISDN
SID/CNI)

demandeur:
(NIP/INA ISDN)

utente: (NIC/INC
ISDN)

usuario: (ISDN
NIE/INU)

party: (PORT ID)

demandeur:
(REF. PORT
ISDN)

utente: (ID
DELLA PORTA
ISDN)

usuario: (ID
DEL PUERTO
ISDN)

Continued on next page

1850

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 78. Malicious Call Trace
English

French

Italian

Spanish

party: (ISDN
PORT ID)

demandeur:
(REF. PORT)

utente: (ID
DELLA PORTA)

usuario: (ID
DEL PUERTO)

END OF TRACE
INFORMATION

FIN DES INFO
DE DEPISTAGE

INFORMAZIONI
FINALI SUL
RINTRACCIO

FIN DE
INFORMACION
DE RASTREO

voice recorder
port:

port enregistreur
vocal:

porta del
registratore:

puerto de
grabado de voz:
Continued on next page

Table 79. Caller information
English

French

Italian

Spanish

Info:

INFO.:

Info:

INFORM:

Table 80. Emergency access to attendant
English

French

Italian

Spanish

a=xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Ext xxxxx xx in
EMRG Q

a=xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xx POSTE xxxxx
xx FIL URG

a=xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xx Der xxxxx xx in
C EMRG

a=xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxx EXT
xxxxx xx EN
C EMRG

Table 81. Queue status
English

French

Italian

Spanish

HUNT GROUP
 NOT
ADMINISTERED

GROUPE DE
DIST.  NON
ADMINISTRE

GRUPPO 
NON
AMMINISTRATO

GRUPO
BUSQUEDA 
NO
ADMINISTRADO

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1851

Features and technical reference

Table 82. Queue status indication
English

French

Italian

Spanish

<15 chrs> Q-time
xx:xx calls xx

<15 chrs>
TEMPS-F xx:xx
APPELS xx

<15 chrs> T-coda
xx:xx chiam xx

<15 chrs>
HORA-C
xx:xx
LLAMADAS
xx

Table 83. Miscellaneous call identifier
English

French

Italian

Spanish

sa
(ACD Supervisor
Assistance)

AS
(Assistance
surveillant)

as
(Assistenza
Supervisoree)

AS
(Ayuda de
supervisor)

ac
(Attd Assistance
Call)

AA
(Appel
assistance)

ao
(Assistenza
Operatore)

AO
(Ayuda de
operadora)

tc
(Attd Control Of
A Trunk Group)

CF
(Commande
faisceau)

fc
(Fascio
Controllato)

CE
(Control enlaces)

an
(Attd No
Answer)

TR
(Telephoniste
sans reponse)

on
(Operatore Non
Risponde)

ON
(Operadora no
responde)

pc
(Attd Personal
Call)

AP
(Appel
personnel)

cp
(Chiamata
Personale)

LP
(Llamada
personal)

rc
(Attd Recall
Call)

RA
(Rappel)

rc
(Richiamata)

RL
(Rellamada)

rt
(Attd Return
Call)

RE
(Retour)

rt
(Ritornata)

RT
(Retorno)

sc
(Attd Serial Call)

AS
(Appel en serie)

ic
(Inoltro a Catena)

LS
(Llamada en
serie)

Continued on next page

1852

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 83. Miscellaneous call identifier (Continued)
English

French

Italian

Spanish

co
(Controlled
Outward
Restriction)

RD
(Restriction de
depart)

cu
(Controllata
Uscente)

RS
(Restriccion
saliente)

cs
(Controlled
Station to Station
Restriction)

RP
(Restriction vers
postes)

cd
(Controllata
Derivati)

CS
(Control
estacion)

ct
(Controlled
Termination
Restriction)

AR
(Restriction
d’arrivee)

ct
(Controllata
Terminante)

RE
(Restriccion
entrante)

db
(DID Find Busy
Station With CO
Tones)

OP
(Occupation du
poste)

po
(Passante
Occupata)

EO
(Estacion
occupada)

da
(DID Recall Go
To Attd)

RT
(Rappel
telephoniste)

pr
(Richiamata su
Passante)

RD
(Rellamada
directa)

qf
(Emerg. Queue
Full Redirection)

FP
(File d’urgence
pleine deviation)

de
(Deviata
Emergenza)

DE
(Desvio de
emergencia)

hc
(Held Call Timed
Reminder)

AG
(Indicatif d’appel
en garde)

at
(Avviso
Chiamata in
tenuta)

LR
(Recordatorio de
llamada retenida)

ic
(Intercept)

IN
(Interception)

in
(Intercettata)

IN
(Intercepcion)

ip
(Interposition
Call)

AI
(Appel
interposition)

ip
(Interposizione)

EP
(Entre
posiciones)

ld
(LDN Calls on
DID Trunks)

SD
(Selection
directe)

pd
(Diretta
Passante)

LD
(Larga distancia)

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1853

Features and technical reference

Table 83. Miscellaneous call identifier (Continued)
English

French

Italian

Spanish

so
(Service
Observing)

ES
(ecoute du
service)

is
(Inclusione
Supervisore)

SS
(Supervision del
servicio)

na
(Unanswered or
Incomplete DID
Call)

SR
(Sans reponse)

pn
(Passante Non
Risposta)

SR
(Sin respuesta)

ACB
(Automatic
Callback)

R. AUTO.
(Rappel
automatique)

PRN
(Prenotazione
Automatica)

RA
(Rellamada
automatica)

callback
(Callback Call)

RAPPEL
(Rappel)

prenotaz
(Prenotazione)

RELLAM
(Rellamada)

park
(Call Park)

G. I.
(garde par)
indicatif

parch.
(Parcheggiata)

ESTAC
(Estacionamiento
de llamada)

control
(Control)

CONTROLE
(Controle)

cntr.op.
(Controllo
Operatore)

CONTROL
(Control)

ICOM
(Intercom Call)

INTERCOM
(Intercommunica
tion)

ICOM
(Intercom)

INTERF
(Llamda
interfono)

OTQ
(Outgoing Trunk
Queuing)

FFD
(File faisceaux de
depart)

RFO
(Richiamata su
Fascio Occupato)

EES
(Espera de enlace
de salida)

priority
(Priority Call)

PRIORITE
(Appel
prioritaire)

priorita
(Priorita’)

PRIORIT
(Llamada
prioritaria)

recall
(Recall Call)

APP.RAP.
(Appel rappel)

richiam
(Richiamata)

REPET
(Rellamada)

return
(Return Call)

RETOUR
(Retour)

ritorno
(Chiamata
Ritornata)

RETORNO
(Llamada de
retorno)
Continued on next page

1854

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 83. Miscellaneous call identifier (Continued)
English

French

Italian

Spanish

ARS
(Automatic
Route Selection)

SAA
(Selection de
l’acheminement
automatiqe)

SAI
(Selez. Autom.
Instradam.)

SAR
(Seleccion
automatica de
rutas)

forward
(Call
Forwarding)

RENVOI
(Renvoi)

deviata
(Deviata)

REENVIO
(Reenvio de
llamada)

cover
(Cover)

SUPPL.
(Suppleance)

copert.
(Copertura)

COBER
(Cobertura)

DND
(Do Not Disturb)

NPD
(Ne pas
deranger)

nd
(Non Disturbare)

NM
(No molestar)

p
(Call Pickup)

P
(Prise)

a
(Assente)

C
(Captura de
llamada)

c
(Cover All Calls)

s
(Suppleance)

c
(Copertura)

c
(Cobertura de
toda llamada

n
(Night Sta. Serv.,
Incoming No
Answer)

N
(Service nuit,
entrant pas
reponse)

n
(Serv. Notte,
Esterna Non
Risposta)

N
(Servicion noct.
ext. no responde)

B
(All Calls Busy)

O
(Tous occupes)

O
(Tutte Occupate)

O
(Todas ocupadas)

f
(Call
Forwarding)

R
(Renvoi)

d
(Deviata)

R
(Reenvio de
llamada)
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1855

Features and technical reference

Table 83. Miscellaneous call identifier (Continued)
English

French

Italian

Spanish

b
(Cover Busy)

o
(Suppleance
occupee)

o
(Copertura per
Occupato)

o
(Cobertura
ocupada)

d
(Cover Don’t
Answer)

n
(Suppleance pas
de reponse)

n
(Copertura per
Non Risposta)

n
(Cobertura sin
respuesta)

s
(Send All Calls)

E
(Envoi tous
appels)

r
(Rinvio)

E
(Envio de toda
llamada)
Continued on next page

Table 84. User identifiers
English

French

Italian

Spanish

Identifier

OPERATOR

TELEPHONISTE

OPERATORE

OPERADORA

Attendant

CONFERENCE

CONFERENCE

CONFERENZA

CONFERENCIA

Conference
Call

EXT

POSTE

DER

EXTENSION

Extension

PAGING

PAGING

PAGING

PAGING

Paging
(cannot be
transplated)

OUTSIDE
CALL

APPEL EXT.

ESTERNA

LLAMADA
EXT.

Trunk Group

UNKNOWN
NAME

INTROUVABLE

NOME
SCONOSC.

DESCONOCIDO

Unknown

1856

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 85. Property Management System interface
English

French

Italian

Spanish

CHECK IN - Ext:

ENREGISTREM
ENT - POSTE:

CHECK IN - Tel:

REGISTRARSE EXTENSION:

CHECK IN:
ROOM
ALREADY
OCCUPIED

ENREGISTREM
ENT: CHAMBRE
OCCUPEE

CHECK IN:
CAMERA
OCCUPATA

REGISTRARSE:
HABITACION
OCUPADA

CHECK IN
COMPLETE

ENREGISTREM
ENT EFFECTUE

CHECK IN
COMPLETATO

REGISTRO
TERMINADO

CHECK IN
FAILED

ECHEC
D’ENREGISTRE
MENT

CHECK IN
ERRATO

REGISTRARSE:
FALLIDO

CHECK OUT Ext:

DEPART POSTE:

CHECK OUT Tel:

PAGAR LA
CUENTA EXTENSION:

CHECK OUT
COMPLETE:
MESSAGE
LAMP OFF

DEPART: PAS
DE MESSAGES

CHECK OUT
COMPLETATO:
NESSUN
MESSAGGIO

PAGO
TERMINADO:
NINGUN
MENSAJE

CHECK OUT
COMPLETE:
MESSAGE
LAMP ON

DEPART:
MESSAGES

CHECK OUT
COMPLETATO:
MESSAGGI IN
ATTESA

PAGO DE
CUENTA
TERMINADO:
MENSAJES

CHECK OUT
FAILED

ECHEC
PROCEDURE
DE DEPART

CHECK OUT
ERRATO

PAGAR LA
CUENTA:
FALLIDO

CHECK OUT:
ROOM
ALREADY
VACANT

DEPART CHAMBRE
INOCCUPEE

CHECK OUT:
CAMERA NON
OCCUPATA

PAGAR LA
CUENTA:
HABITACION
VACANTE

MESSAGE
LAMP OFF

PAS DE
MESSAGES

NESSUN
MESSAGGIO IN
ATTESA

LUZ DE
MENSAJE
APAGADA

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1857

Features and technical reference

Table 85. Property Management System interface (Continued)
English

French

Italian

Spanish

MESSAGE
LAMP ON

MESSAGES

MESSAGGI IN
ATTESA

LUZ DE
MENSAJE
ENCENDIDA

MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
FAILED

ECHEC D’AVIS
MESSAGES

NOTIFICA
MESSAGGI
ERRATA

AVISO DE
MENSAJE
FALLIDO

MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
OFF - Ext: xxxxx

AVIS DE
MESSAGES
DESACTIVE POSTE:xxxxx

NOTIFICA
MESSAGGI
DISABIL. - Tel:
xxxxx

AVISO DE
MENSAJE
APAGADO EXT: xxxxx

MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
ON - Ext: xxxxx

AVIS DE
MESSAGES
ACTIVE POSTE:xxxxx

NOTIFICA
MESSAGGI
ABILITATA Tel: xxxxx

AVISO DE
MENSAJE
ENCENDIDO EXT: xxxxx

Continued on next page

Table 86. Security Violation Notification
English

French

Italian

Spanish

Barrier Code
Violation

VIOLATION DU
CODE D’ENTREE

VIOLAZIONE DI
CODICI DE TAGLIO

VIOLACIAON
CONDIGO
LIMITE

Login Violation

VIOLATION DE
L’ACCES A
L’ADMINISTRATION

IOLAZIONE DI INIZIO
DI REGISTRAZIONE

VIOLACION
CLAVE ACCESO

Station Security
Code Violation

VIOLATION DE
CODE D’ACCESS
DE SECURITE

VIOLAZIONE DI
CODICE DE
SICUREZZA UTENTE

VIOLACION DE
SEGURIDAD DE
LA ESTACION

Authorization
Code Violation

VIOLATION DEU
CODE ACCES

VIOLAZION DEL
CODICE
D’AUTHORIZZAZIONE

VIOLACION DE
CODIGO DE
AUTORIZACION

Continued on next page

1858

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 87. Stored number
English

French

Italian

Spanish

NO NUMBER
STORED

AUCUN
NUMERO EN
MEMOIRE

NESSUN
NUMERO IN
MEMORIA

NINGUN
NUMERO
ALMACENADO

Table 88. Special codes
English

French

Italian

Spanish

m
(Mark)

M
(Marquer)

m
(Marcato)

M
(Marca)

p
(Pause)

P
(Pause)

p
(Pausa)

P
(Pausa)

s
(Suppress)

S
(Supprimer)

s
(Soppresso)

S
(Suprimir)

w
(Wait)

A
(Attendre)

a
(Attesa)

E
(Espera)

W
(Indefinite Wait)

a
(Attendre)

A
(Attesa)

e
(Espera)

Station Hunting
Table 89. Calling party display
English

French

Italian

Spanish

HUNT

Routage

Ricerca

Busqueda

Table 90. Hunt-to station display
English

French

Italian

Spanish

h

r

r

b

In the following displays, x and y denote the Route Plan Number (RPN 1-8), yyy
is a 3-letter abbreviation for the day of the week, and zz:zz is the activation time
(24-hour time). Also below is the table that lists the 3-letter abbreviations for the
day of the week.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1859

Features and technical reference

Table 91. Time-of-Day routing messages
English

French

Italian

Spanish

ENTER
ACTIVATION
ROUTE PLAN,
DAY & TIME

ENTRER PLAN
D’ACTIVATION,
JOUR ET HEURE

INTRODURRE
PIANO DA
ATTIV., GIORNO
E ORA

INTRODUZCA PLAN
ACT DE RUTAS, DIA
Y HORA

ENTER
DEACTIVATION
DAY AND TIME

ENTRER JOUR
ET HEURE DE
DESACTIVATION

INTRODURRE
GIORNO E ORA
DI DISATTIVAZ

INTRODUZCA DIA Y
HORA DE
DESACTIVACION

OLD ROUTE
PLAN: x ENTER
NEW PLAN:

ACHEMINEMEN
T ANT.: x
ENTRER
NOUVEAU:

INSTRADAMENT
O PREC: x
INTROD IL
NUOVO:

PLAN RUTAS ANT: x
INTRODUZCA EL
NUEVO:

OLD ROUTE
PLAN: x NEW
PLAN: y

ACHEMINEMEN
T ANT.: x
NOUVEAU
PLAN: y

INSTRADAMEN
TO PREC: x
NUOVO PIANO:
y

PLAN RUTAS ANT: x
NUEVO PLAN: y

ROUTE PLAN: x
FOR yyy
ACT-TIME: zz:zz

ACHEM.: x POUR
yyy ACT-HEURE:
zz:zz

INSTRADAMENT
O: x PER yyy
ATTIV ORE:zz:zz

PLAN RUTAS: x PARA
yyy HORA-ACT: zz:zz

ROUTE PLAN: x
FOR yyy
DEACT-TIME:
zz:zz

ACHEM.: x POUR
yyy
DESACT-HEURE:
zz:zz

INSTRADAM.: x
PER yyy
DISATTIV
ORE:zz:zz

PLAN RUTAS: x PARA
yyy
HORA-DESACT:zz:zz

Continued on next page

1860

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

To enter the day of the week, the user dials 1 for Sunday, 2 for Monday, and so on.
Table 92. Time-of-Day routing days of the week
English

French

Italian

Spanish

Mon

LUN

Lun

LUN

Tue

MAR

Mar

MAR

Wed

MER

Mer

MIE

Thu

JEU

Gio

JUE

Fri

VEN

Ven

VIE

Sat

SAM

Sab

SAB

Sun

DIM

Dom

DOM

Table 93. Transfer messages
English

French

Italian

Spanish

TRANSFER
COMPLETED

TRANSFERT
EFFECTU

TRASFERIMEN
TO
COMPLETATO

TRANSFEREN
CIA
REALIZADA

Mapping enhanced display characters

Use the tables below to map US English characters to Russian, Japanese,
European, or Ukrainian characters. Characters appear on the display terminal in
the order in which you enter them. If you want the display to read right to left,
enter the characters in reverse order on the screen.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1861

Features and technical reference

US English to Russian characters
Table 94. US English to Russian characters
Russian

US English

Russian

US English

space

space

…

Q

‘

A

þ

R

»

B

¤

S

—

C

Ý

T

¬

D

Ð

U

”

E

Ã

V

¿

F

÷

W

÷

G

Þ

X

–

H

Õ

Y

ÿ

I

?

Z

Œ

J

X

{

À

K

⁄

}

ƒ

L

ý

:

‹

M

›

“

“

N

¡

<

Ÿ

O

?

>

«

P

US English to Japanese characters
Table 95. US English to Japanese characters
Japanese

US English

Japanese

US English

space

space



8

€

!

Ã

9

Î

“

Á

:

Ð

#

·

;
Continued on next page

1862

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

Table 95. US English to Japanese characters (Continued)
Japanese

US English

Japanese

US English



$

 

<

Ÿ

%

c

=



&

µ

>

d

‘

b

?

¹

(

j

@

e

)

i

A

¶

*

k

B

¸

+

m

C

½

,

l

D

º

-

n

E

»

.

•

F

¼

/

o

G

Ë

0

q

H

f

1

p

I

À

2

r

J

¾

3

s

K

¿

4

u

L

¡

5

t

M

g

6

v

N

Ò

7

w

O

Ì

P

ρ

f

x

Q

g

g

z

R

√

h

y

S

−1

i

{

T

j

j

}

U

∗

k

|

V

¢

l
Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1863

Features and technical reference

Table 95. US English to Japanese characters (Continued)
Japanese

US English

Japanese

US English

ª

W

£

m

–

X

ñ

n



Y

ö

o

~

Z

p

p

Â

[

q

q

h

\

θ

r

Í

]

∞

s

Ï

^

Ω

t

‰

_

ü

u

α

‘

Σ

v

ä

a

π

w

β

b

x

x

µ

d

y

y

σ

e

÷

}
Continued on next page

For Japanese, the z, {, and | characters map to Kanji characters as follows:
z—symbol for 1,000
{—symbol for 10,000
|—symbol for Yen

1864

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

US English to European characters

Some of the characters in the following map appear in only upper- or lower-case
— for example, , Ê, ø, and others.
Table 96. US English to European characters
European

US English

European

US English

Ì

space

»

8

Ô

!

Ë

9

„

“

£

:

·

#

š

;

‡

$

›

<

%

¯

=

&

Ê

>

È

‘

”

?

Ë

(

Ó

@

Ê

)

Â

A

Š

*

¼

B

œ

+

‚

C

″

,

°

D

z°

-

E

.

Í

F

Ú

/

³

G

Õ

0

Í

H

œ

1

«

I

Ð

2

¯

J

¡

3

–

K

¿

4

ÿ

L

⁄

5

Ò

M

Ÿ

6

ý

N

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1865

Features and technical reference

Table 96. US English to European characters (Continued)
European

US English

European

US English

…

7

O

Œ

P

š

h

Ý

Q

ä

i

Ð

R

?

j

¬

S

ø

k

¤

T

z¥

l

Ÿ

U

Ú

m

þ

V

Ò

n

ð

W

ˆ

o

þ

X

Ã

p

å

Y

ƒ

q

ÿ

Z

„

r

¥

[

Ð

s

Ÿ

\

¤

t

—

]

¸

u

—

^

Ã

v

‘

_

À

w

Ï

‘

–

x

‰

a

½

y

?

b

ç

z

°

d

‹

e

ø

|

Ï

f

“

}

Î

g

{

Continued on next page

1866

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Telephone displays

US English to Ukrainian characters
Table 97. US English to Ukrainian characters
Ukrainian

US English

Ukrainian

US English

space

space

…

Q

‘

A

þ

R

»

B

¶

S

—

C

Ý

T

¬

D

Ð

U

”

E

Ã

V

¿

F

÷

W

÷

G

Þ

X

–

H

Õ

Y

ÿ

I

?

Z

Œ

J

X

{

À

K

ð

}

ƒ

L

ý

:

‹

M

™

“

“

N

¡

<

Ÿ

O

?

>

«

P

Related Topics

See System Parameters Country-Options for more information about and field
descriptions on the System Parameters Country-Option screen.
See Changing the display language for information about displaying the Russian,
Japanese, European, and Ukrainian character sets.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1867

Features and technical reference

Temporary Bridged Appearance
Temporary Bridged Appearance allows multiappearance telephone users in a TEG
or PCOL group to bridge onto an existing group call. If a call has been answered
using the Call Pickup feature, the originally called party can bridge onto the call.
This feature also allows a called party to bridge onto a call that redirects to
coverage before the called party can answer it.
Detailed description

An incoming call to a TEG or PCOL group is not a call to an individual, although
one particular member of the group can be the most qualified person to handle the
given call. If this individual did not answer the call originally, this individual can
bridge onto the call; the call does not have to be transferred.
A call to an individual can be answered by a call pickup group member. If the
called party returns while the call is still connected, the called party bridges onto
the call and the answering party hangs up.
Call Coverage provides redirection of calls to alternate answering positions
(covering users). A temporary bridged appearance is maintained at the called
telephone.
The called party can answer the call at any time, even if it is already answered by
a covering user. If the called party does not bridge onto the call, the covering user
can use the Consult function of Call Coverage to determine if the called party
wants to accept the call. The Consult function uses the temporary bridged
appearance maintained on the call. When the consult call is finished, the
temporary bridged appearance is removed.
Stations that normally have a temporary bridged appearance with their coverage
point do not have a temporary bridged appearance if the coverage point is
AUDIX.

1868

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Temporary Bridged Appearance

Considerations
■

Temporary Bridged Appearance allows the desired party to bridge onto a
call without manually transferring the call, providing convenience of
operation and saving time.

■

Temporary Bridged Appearance does not provide any call originating
capability or the capability to answer another party’s calls. These
capabilities are provided by the Bridged Call Appearance feature.

■

If two parties are bridged together on an active call with a third party, and if
the Conference Tone feature is enabled, conference tone is heard.

■

The Bridged Call Appearance feature enhances Temporary Bridged
Appearance by allowing more than one call to an extension to be bridged
and by allowing calls to be originated from bridged appearances.

■

Call Coverage

Interactions

Calls redirected to Call Coverage maintain a temporary bridged appearance
on the called telephone if a call appearance is available to handle the call.
The called party can bridge onto the call at any time. The system can be
administered to allow a temporary bridged appearance of the call to either
remain at or be removed from the covering telephone after the principal
bridges onto the call. If two parties are bridged together on an active call
with a third party, and the bridging tone is administered to yes, all three
parties hear the bridging tone.
■

Consult
Consult calls use the temporary bridged appearance maintained on the call.
At the conclusion of a consult call, the bridged appearance is no longer
maintained. If the principal chooses not to talk with the calling party, the
principal cannot bridge onto the call later.

■

Conference and Transfer
If a call has, or has had, a temporary bridged appearance; is conferenced or
transferred; and redirects to coverage again; a temporary bridged
appearance is not maintained at the conferenced-to or transferred-to
extension.

■

Privacy — Manual Exclusion
When Privacy — Manual Exclusion is activated, other users are prevented
from bridging onto a call. A user who attempts to bridge onto a call when
this feature is active is dropped.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1869

Features and technical reference

Tenant Partitioning
(Not available with Offer B) Tenant Partitioning provides telecommunications
services to multiple independent groups of users through a single Avaya
MultiVantage. Most commonly, Tenant Partitioning provides these services from
a single provider to multiple tenants of an office complex. This eliminates the
need for each tenant to purchase services separately, while still giving each tenant
the appearance of a dedicated Avaya MultiVantage. You can also use this feature
to provide group services, such as departmental attendants, on a single-customer
Avaya MultiVantage. Tenant Partitioning also allows you to assign a unique music
source for each tenant partition for callers who are put on hold.
NOTE:

If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials,
you may be required to obtain a copyright license from, or pay fees to, a
third party such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and
Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). You can
purchase a Magic-on-Hold® system, which does not require such a license.
Detailed description

Tenants are defined and assigned by you, the system administrator. You must have
the same authorization as that required for COR administration.
Because some features are not partitioned, you must take care to administer these
features to prevent inter-tenant access. See ‘‘Interactions’’ on page 1876 for a list
of these features.
You must ensure that:
■

All tenants can call and be called by partition 1. This is the system default.
If you change this default some call types fail. For example, dial 0 fails, as
do SVN calls, ACA calls, etc.

■

All stations in a call-pickup group are under control of the same tenant

■

All stations with bridged appearances are under control of the same tenant

■

Stations in different departments (for the purposes of attendant services)
can call each other

You must assign a tenant partition number to each object (endpoint, virtual
endpoint, or other entity) that has an assigned COR. The exceptions are
authorization codes and fixed-assignment virtual endpoints.

1870

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tenant Partitioning

You administer Tenant Partitioning via the Tenant Partitioning screen; you need to
administer one screen for each tenant partition. Begin the initial administration of
the Tenant Partitioning feature by completing the tenant partitioning screen. Keep
in mind that you must specify an attendant group for each tenant that you define,
even if there are no consoles assigned to the attendant group. You must also assign
an attendant console to a tenant partition and you must assign a group number to
the Attendant Console screen.
Tenant Partitioning capabilities

Tenant Partitioning can provide the following services to tenants: telephone
equipment, building wiring, public and private network access, and attendant
services. In addition, the feature can provide a full range of Avaya MultiVantage
capabilities to even the smallest tenant office, including Call Coverage, Remote
Access, Night Service Routing, and others. Tenants can also purchase Avaya
MultiVantage adjuncts available on the switch, such as CMS activity reporting.
Tenant Partitioning provides advantages to both the telecommunications service
provider and individual tenants:
■

Shared resources offer enhanced services at lower cost to the tenant, with
increased profit for the service provider.

■

The tenant has the appearance of a dedicated Avaya MultiVantage without
the expense.

■

All tenants can have attendant services.

■

A trained, full-time system administrator can install, administer, and
maintain the switch.

With proper administration, tenant resources, including trunking facilities, and all
other switch endpoints can be protected from access by other tenants.
Partitioning tenants

The default for Tenant Partitioning is one universal tenant for the system. This
tenant, partition 1, is usually reserved for the service provider. By default it has
access to all facilities and any other tenant can access it.
The service provider creates additional partitions based on tenant requirements.
When deciding which tenant partitions to create, remember:
■

555-233-506

You can assign each switch endpoint to one and only one tenant partition.
And, you must pass each switch endpoint to a partition. For example, you
must assign each telephone, attendant console, trunk, and virtual endpoint,
such as an LDN or VDN, to a tenant partition.

Issue 5 October 2002

1871

Features and technical reference

■

Most tenant partitions are discrete, separate units. By default, the system
prevents all tenants, except partition 1, from accessing stations or trunking
facilities belonging to other tenants. However, you can change this default.
You can give explicit permission for one tenant to access another. For
example, you can allow tenant 6 to call tenants 9 and 16 only.
NOTE:

If a tenant has permission to call another tenant, it has access to every
endpoint belonging to that tenant. For example, if tenant 6 has
permission to call tenant 9, tenant 6 can also use any trunking
facilities present in tenant partition 9.
■

Even if two extensions are blocked from calling each other by Tenant
Partitioning restrictions, either extension can still reach the other by dialing
the extension’s Direct Inward Dialing (DID) number via the public
network.

■

If any facilities are to be shared among tenants who do not want complete
access to each other’s facilities, you must group the shared facilities in a
separate partition. For example, if two tenants share a trunk, but do not
have direct access to each other’s telephones, that trunk will need to be
placed in its own partition so that both tenants can access it.

It is also important to consider the following constraints and requirements of
access control, attendant services, music sources on hold, and network route
selection when you establish or assign partitions.
Access control

Features such as call coverage are limited by tenant-to-tenant access restrictions.
For example, suppose tenant 1 includes a telephone from tenant 2 in its coverage
path. If tenant 3 has permission to call tenant 1 but not tenant 2, a call from tenant
3 to tenant 1 skips the tenant 2 coverage point.
You may also want to set up tenants with special access privileges. For example,
you might give a restaurant in an office complex permission to be called by any
other tenant. Likewise, permission to call or be called by other tenants is helpful
for building security or Avaya MultiVantage administration or troubleshooting.
You can also assign all CO trunks to one tenant partition that can then be accessed
by all other tenants.
Attendant services

Tenant Partitioning allows you to provide personalized attendant services to each
tenant.

1872

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tenant Partitioning

The system provides one principal and one night or day/night attendant per
attendant group. You assign each tenant an attendant group for service. Each
attendant group has a separate queue. Queue warning lamps remain dark when
Tenant Partitioning is active. However, information displayed when someone
presses a queue-status button reflects the status of the attendant-group queue. The
total number of calls queued for all tenants cannot exceed the system limit.
Attendant groups may serve more than one tenant. In this case, the attendant
group cannot extend a call from one tenant via facilities belonging to another
tenant, unless the former tenant has permission to access the other’s facilities.
Each tenant may have a designated night-service station. The system directs calls
to an attendant group in night service to the night-service station of the
appropriate tenant (when a night attendant is not available). When someone places
an attendant group into night service, all trunk groups and hunt groups that belong
to tenants served by that attendant group go into night service. In this case, the
system routes incoming calls to the night-service destination of the appropriate
tenant. Each tenant can have its own LDN night destination, trunk answer on any
station (TAAS) port, or night attendant.
An attendant can specify that access to a trunk group is under attendant control if
the trunk group is assigned to a tenant served by that attendant’s group. The
system directs any valid user attempt to access the trunk group to the attendant
group serving the tenant.
Network route selection

You can place trunk groups belonging to different tenants in the same route
pattern. Calls routing to that pattern select the first trunk group in the pattern with
access permission by the calling tenant (subject to normal constraints).
Tenant partitioning examples

The following is a simple example of how you might administer Tenant
Partitioning in an office complex.
You assign tenant partition 1, the universal tenant, as the service provider. All
other tenants can call and be called by the service provider.
You assign tenant partitions 2–15 to individual businesses in the complex. You
maintain the system-default restrictions for these tenants. That is, tenants cannot
access telephones, trunking facilities, or other switch endpoints belonging to other
tenants.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1873

Features and technical reference

You assign tenant partition 16 to the restaurant in the building complex. You give
all tenants permission to call this tenant. However, to prevent the restaurant from
accessing trunks and other facilities belonging to tenants, you do not permit the
restaurant to call any other tenants.
You assign tenant partition 17 to all CO trunk groups. You give all tenants
permission to call this tenant.
You assign tenant partition 18 to a trunk group that tenants 3 and 7 want to share.
You give Tenants 3 and 7 access to this partition; you deny all other tenants
access. To prevent toll fraud, you do not allow tenant 18 to call itself.
The Automatic Route Selection (ARS) route pattern can be the same for all
tenants. In this example, the trunk for tenant partition 18 (the private trunk shared
by tenants 3 and 7) is first in the route pattern. Tenant partition 17 is second.
Tenants 3 and 7 route first to partition 18 and then as a second choice to
partition 17. You deny all other tenants access to partition 18 and so the system
routes them directly to partition 17.
All facilities that are not shared, including trunk groups, VDNs, telephones,
attendant consoles, and other endpoints, are assigned to the tenant partition that
they serve.
Table 98 on page 1874 summarizes the calling permissions for the different
partitions. Yes indicates that the partitions have permission to call and be called by
each other; no indicates that partitions cannot call or be called by each other.
Table 98. Calling permissions for partitions
Calling
tenant
partition
number

Called tenant partition number

1

2, 4—6, 8—15

3,7

16

17

18

1

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

2, 4-6,
8-15

yes

Each partition
can call itself
but not the
others

no

yes

yes

no

3,7

yes

no

Each partition
can call itself
but not the
others

yes

yes

yes

Continued on next page

1874

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tenant Partitioning

Table 98. Calling permissions for partitions (Continued)
Calling
tenant
partition
number

Called tenant partition number

1

2, 4—6, 8—15

3,7

16

17

18

16

yes

no

no

yes

yes

no

17

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

18

yes

no

yes

no

no

no

Continued on next page

Detailed description of Multiple Music-on-Hold

Tenant Partitioning allows you to assign each tenant a music source, unique to
each tenant partition, to be heard when a call is placed on hold. The tenant number
assigned to the destination extension usually determines which music source is
heard. This capability allows you to tailor the music or messages for the business
needs of each tenant partition.
If the COR of the extension that places the call on hold permits music-on-hold, a
caller on hold hears the music source assigned to the partition at which the call
initially terminates. For example, if calls coming into the Avaya MultiVantage
route first to an INTUITY automated attendant that then routes the call to the
appropriate tenant partition, the caller on hold hears the music source of the
INTUITY automated attendant, not the tenant partition to which it is routed.
Likewise, if a caller in tenant partition 2 makes an out-going call using tenant
partition 1’s trunk groups, the caller will hear the music source assigned to tenant
partition 1. If the COR of the called extension does not permit music on hold,
however, the caller hears nothing.
The maximum number of music sources allowed is the same as the maximum
number of tenant partitions allowed; each music source can be used by one or
more tenant partitions.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1875

Features and technical reference

You can assign one of the following music-on-hold types to each tenant partition.
Table 99. Music-on-Hold types
Type

System Response for a caller placed on hold

none

silence

tone

system-wide administered tone

music

the music associated with the administered port. The number of
possible music sources equals the number of possible tenant
partitions. Each partition can have its own music source.

Interactions

Tenant-partition identification is not passed between switches. A network of
Avaya MultiVantage systems does not enforce Tenant Partitioning restrictions
without special administration. For example, Tenant Partitioning on a network of
Avaya MultiVantage systems does not enforce tenant-specific tie trunks.
Administration of the following features requires special care to avoid undesired
intertenant access.

1876

■

Bridging

■

Call Pickup

■

Call Vectoring

■

Controlled Restriction

■

Facility Busy Indication

■

Facility Test Calls

■

Integrated Directory

■

Inter-PBX Attendant Calls

■

Main/Satellite/Tributary

■

Malicious Call Trace

■

Personal CO line

■

Private Networking (AAR)

■

Service Observing

■

Uniform Dial Plan

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tenant Partitioning

The function of any feature that specifies a tenant partition is affected by
tenant-to-tenant restrictions, as follows.
■

Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR)/ARS
Do not confuse tenant partitions with Time-of-Day Plan Numbers and
Partition Groups in AAR/ARS. You can still use Time-of-Day Plan
Numbers and Partition Groups can still be used to select one of eight route
patterns for AAR/ARS routing when Tenant Partitioning is in effect.

■

Attendant and Attendant Group Features
Tenant Partitioning creates multiple attendant groups. Attendant operations
such as direct-station or trunk-group select (DCS/DTGS) are subject to
tenant-to-tenant restrictions, both at selection time and at split time.
All calls put on hold by an attendant from the attendant group hear the
music source from the attendant group.

■

Attendant Control of Trunk-Group Access
An attendant group controls access only to trunk groups that belong to
tenants that are served by that attendant group.

■

AUDIX, embedded AUDIX, and AUDIX Voice Power
AUDIX voice and data ports are subject to the same tenant-to-tenant
restrictions as any other endpoint.
AUDIX can restrict one group of subscribers from sending voice mail to
another group. The tenant-partitioning provider can create up to 10
different communities within each AUDIX that either have or do not have
permission to send voice messages across community boundaries.

■

Authorization Codes
Authorization codes are associated with classes of restriction. If you want
to have a set of authorization codes that is unique to a given tenant, you
could select a group of CORs for a that tenant and only assign those CORs
to objects in that partition.

■

Automatic Wakeup
Wakeup music will be the music source assigned to the wakeup station’s
tenant partition.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
All stations with bridged call appearances should be administered to be
under control of the same tenant.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1877

Features and technical reference

■

Call Coverage
Tenant-to-Tenant access restrictions apply to coverage paths. If a tenant
cannot access a particular tenant, it cannot access that tenant as part of
another tenant’s coverage point.
When an attendant is specified as part of a coverage path, the attendant
group of the called tenant, not the calling tenant, is accessed.
When a call goes to coverage, is answered, and is put on hold, the music on
hold is the music source assigned to the tenant partition of the terminal that
was originally called.

■

Call Detail Record (CDR)
CDR does not report the tenant partition number of the extension or trunk
group used. You must infer the tenant partition number from the extension
or trunk-group number.

■

Call Pickup
Administer all stations in a call-pickup group to be under control of the
same tenant. The system supports Call Pickup only if the caller and the
called party can both call the pickup user. The caller and the called party do
not need to be in the same pickup group.

■

Call Vectoring/VDN
A caller routed to a new destination by a vector step hears the music
assigned to the last active VDN. While a call is in vector processing, the
tenant number (TN) assigned to the active VDN (as determined by VDN
Override) determines the music source heard by callers on hold in most
circumstances. Note the following exception, however.
If you use a wait-time  hearing  then 
command where the  is a music source (assigned on the
Announcements/Audios Sources screen), that music source will play
instead of the music source associated with the active VDN.
The COR assigned to the VDN must permit music-on-hold.

■

CMS
You can administer CMS to provide CMS reports to each tenant. You can
restrict each CMS login to control, on a permission basis, only those
entities that are assigned to a particular tenant. Outputs to separate printers
allow any tenant to print their own CMS reports. The tenant-partitioning
provider must administer CMS to provide this separation of tenant
permissions.

■

Dial Access to Attendant
When a tenant dials an attendant, it accesses its own assigned attendant
group.

1878

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Tenant Partitioning

■

Emergency Access to the Attendant
When a tenant dials emergency access, it accesses its own assigned
attendant group.

■

Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
For agents in an EAS system, the COR assigned to the logical agent ID (not
the physical extension) determines whether callers on hold can hear music.

■

Hunt groups
The tenant number assigned to the hunt group extension determines the
music source callers to the hunt group hear while they’re in queue or on
hold.

■

Intercept Treatment
When access to the attendant is designated as intercept treatment, the caller
accesses their assigned attendant group.

■

Malicious Call Trace (MCT)
By default, MCT extensions are assigned to tenant partition 1. Therefore, if
Malicious Call Trace is enabled, any telephone with permission to call
tenant partition 1 can use it.

■

Multiple Listed Directory Numbers
Each Listed Directory Number is assigned to a tenant partition.

■

Multiple Audio/Music Sources for Vector Delay
When an audio source is specified by a wait-time  hearing
 vector step, the audio source assigned to the tenant number of
the active VDN is the one that plays.
If you use a wait-time  hearing  then 
command where the  is an audio source (assigned on the
Announcements/Audios Sources screen), that audio source will play
instead of the one associated with the active VDN. For information on
administering multiple audio sources see the Avaya MultiVantage™ Call
Center Software Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide.

■

Music-on-Hold Access
When Tenant Partitioning is enabled, you can assign a unique source for
music to each tenant. If Tenant Partitioning on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options screen is set to y, you must use the Music Sources
screen to administer music-on-hold.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1879

Features and technical reference

■

Night Service
Each tenant can have its own LDN night destination, TAAS port, or night
attendant.

■

PC Interfaces
You must assign each PC interface to a tenant partition.

■

PC/PBX Connections
You must assign each PC/PBX Connection to a tenant partition.

■

PC/(ISDN
You must assign each PC/ISDN to a tenant partition.

■

Remote Access
You must assign each Remote Access barrier code to a tenant.

■

Traffic Studies
Traffic studies do not report the tenant partition number of the extension or
trunk group used. You must infer the tenant partition number must be
inferred from the extension or trunk-group number.

■

Uniform Dial Plan
If a Uniform Dial Plan is in place between switches, tenant partition
identification is not passed between the switches, and so tenant-partition
restrictions are not enforced between the switches without special
administration.
NOTE:

Tenant Partitioning restrictions do not override COR restrictions.
COR restrictions are independent of tenant partitions.

Terminal Translation Initialization
Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) allows you to merge an x-ported
extension to a valid port by dialing a system-wide TTI security code and the
extension from a telephone connected to that port. TTI also allows you to separate
an extension from its port by dialing a similar separate digit sequence. This action
causes the extension to be administered as an X port.
When TTI is enabled for voice, all voice ports (except BRI ports) become TTI
ports or ports from which a TTI merge sequence can occur.
TTI is usually used to move phones, however, it also supports connecting and
moving attendants, data modules, voice/data telephones, and ISDN-BRI
telephones.

1880

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Terminal Translation Initialization

Attendants

In order for attendants to use TTI, you must assign an extension to the attendant
console. TTI port translations are the same for digital telephones and attendant
consoles. To merge a digital TTI voice port and an attendant, you must first
administer the attendant as an X port. Then a digital telephone must be plugged
into the jack assigned to the attendant console, and the TTI merge digit sequence
must be entered on the digital telephone. Once the TTI merge has been completed
for the attendant console, the digital telephone must be unplugged and the
attendant plugged into the jack.
An attendant console can be separated from its port only through administration.
A TTI separate request from an attendant console gives the user intercept
treatment.
Data modules

Data modules have different tones and digit sequences.
In the merge and separate control flow, different tones are given to the telephone
user to give the current status of the TTI operation. Instead of audible tones, status
messages are displayed on a telephone connected to a data module when
activating the TTI sequence through keyboard dialing. If the TTI State field is set
to data, you see the data display messages. If the TTI State field is set to voice,
you hear the tones.
For a stand alone data module, the TTI merge/separate digit sequence is entered in
one line at a dial prompt:
■

DIAL: 

Separate prompts are not given for the TTI security code and extension.
Voice/data telephones

A telephone with a data terminal (DTDM) is treated as a telephone in the TTI
merge and separation sequence. The DTDM is merged with and separated from its
hardware translation at the same time the telephone is merged or separated. The
TTI merge and separate sequence can only be initiated through the telephone for
DTDMs; it cannot be initiated through the data port.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1881

Features and technical reference

ISDN BRI telephones

The TTI separation sequence for Automatic-TEI SPID-initializing BRI telephones
is identical to the sequence used for telephones. However, the merge sequence is
different.
■

Separation sequence
1. Feature Access Code
2. Security Code
3. Extension

■

Merge sequence
1. Connect the telephone to any port to get power.
2. Program the service profile identifier (SPID) to the extension with
which it will be merged.
3. Unplug the telephone (this is necessary even if the telephone is
connected to its intended port).
4. Connect the telephone to its intended port (this port should indicate
Equipment Type: TTI Port).
5. Receive dial tone.
— If there is dial tone, the merge is complete.
— If there is no dial tone, the telephone’s SPID is not an
available extension.

You can dial the TTI merge sequence for BRI sets only if a user separates a BRI
extension from its set and then wants to undo the process by reassociating the set
to the same extension. Note that you cannot use the SAT to put an X in the port
field of a BRI set that is still connected to the switch. You must use the TTI
separation sequence from the set.
Analog Queue Warning Ports and External Alert
Ports

The analog queue warning port (used for hunt groups) and the external alert port
may be administered with an X in the Port field. These extensions can be merged
to an analog port via TTI. The merge must be done by an analog set, and then the
analog set is unplugged from the port. These extensions cannot be separated from
their port location with the TTI feature. A TTI separate request from one of these
ports gives you intercept treatment.

1882

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Terminal Translation Initialization

Security measures

! SECURITY ALERT:
If you do not manage this feature carefully, its unauthorized use may cause
you security problems. For example, someone who knows the TTI security
code could disrupt normal business functions by separating telephones or
data terminals. You can help protect against this action by frequently
changing the TTI security code. You can further enhance system security by
removing the FAC from the system when it does not need to be used (for
example, there are no moves going on at present). Consult the Avaya
Products Security Handbook for additional steps to secure your system and
find out about obtaining information regularly about security developments.
Interactions
■

Attendant
It is possible to have the attendant in Position Available Mode and still
separate. Any calls queued, held, or seen as active for the attendant prevent
separation.

■

Attendant Night Service
The night service station cannot be separated while in night service.

■

Attendant Release Loop Operation
If the attendant separates before the attendant-timed reminder-interval
expires, all calls held with the release loop operation by the attendant are
reclassified as attendant group calls.

■

Automatic Callback
If a telephone has Automatic Callback active for another telephone,
executing TTI separate for either telephone breaks the automatic callback
sequence.

■

Call Coverage
If a telephone separates while Send All Calls or Goto Coverage is active,
these features remain active while the telephone has no associated
hardware.
You can separate a telephone that is the target of Send All Calls or Goto
Coverage; the features function as if the telephone were busy.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1883

Features and technical reference

■

Call Coverage Answer Group
If a extension was an X port, then rejoins the group as a result of a TTI
merge, a PSA associate, or a port assignment, that telephone is excluded
from all transactions already active in the call coverage answer group.

■

Call Forwarding
A telephone can separate while Call Forwarding is active. If a destination
extension for call forwarding separates, Call Forwarding to that extension
remains active. Calls forwarded while the telephone is separated hear a
busy signal.

■

Call Pickup
If a line appearance is available, a member of a call pickup group may
separate at any time. If a call is attempting to terminate, and a member of a
group associates, that member does not join the group for the call that is
currently in progress, but is available for all subsequent calls to that group.

■

Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
Station user records cannot be shared between TTI ports and EAS login ID
extensions. This reduces the number of possible TTI ports your system
provides, depending on the number of administered EAS login IDs. For
example, if you administer 2,000 EAS login IDs, the maximum number of
TTI ports that the system can provide is reduced by 2,000.

■

Hunt Group Uniform Call Distribution/Direct Department Calling
The system excludes telephones previously X-ported as a result of a TTI
separate, a PSA dissociate, or administration from all transactions already
active in the hunt group when the telephone is merged.

■

Site Data
If Terminal Translation Initialization is enabled, a warning message
displays when you tab off the Site Data fields.
If Terminal Translation Initialization is enabled, and you change the Port
field on the Station screen from “x” to a real port number and change the
Room, Jack, or Cable fields in the Site Data section, a warning message
displays when you tab off the fields.

■

Terminating Extension Group (TEG)
If any member of the TEG (that was previously an X port as a result of TTI,
PSA or telephone administration) is merged, that member is excluded from
all transactions already taking place in the TEG when that member is
merged. The member is able to join in all subsequent calls to the group.

1884

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Terminating Extension Group

Related topics

For more information about configuring the TTI system-wide fields, see
‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795.
For more information about setting the TTI feature access codes, see ‘‘Feature
Access Code’’ on page 781.

Terminating Extension Group
A TEG allows an incoming call to ring as many as 4 phones at one time. Any user
in the group can answer the call.

Detailed description

You can administer any phone as a TEG member; however, only a
multiappearance phone can be assigned a TEG button with merged-status lamp.
The TEG button allows the user to select a TEG call appearance for answering or
bridging onto an existing call but not for call origination.
When a TEG members answers an incoming call, a temporary bridged appearance
is maintained at the multiappearance phones in the group. However, this
appearance is not visible. Any TEG members can bridge onto the call by pressing
the TEG button.
Considerations
■

A phone user can be a member of more than one TEG, but can have only
one TEG button for each group.

■

A TEG can handle only one TEG call at a time. Additional calls do not
reach the TEG. If a coverage path is assigned to the TEG, the additional
calls route accordingly.

■

Automatic Callback

Interactions

This feature cannot be active for a TEG.
■

Bridged Call Appearance
Calls to a TEG cannot be bridged, except via a Temporary Bridged
Appearance.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1885

Features and technical reference

■

Call Coverage
A TEG can have a Call Coverage path assigned, but cannot be a point in a
Call Coverage path.
A Send Term button for the TEG can be assigned to group members who
have multiappearance phones. When a user presses Send Term, calls to the
TEG redirect to coverage. The merged status lamp lights on all phones with
a Send Term button. Any member with a Send Term button can deactivate
Send Term by pressing the button. Incoming calls are directed to the group.

■

Call Park
A TEG call cannot be parked on the group extension. However, a group
member answering a call can park a TEG call on their own extension.

■

Direct Department Calling (DDC) and Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
A TEG cannot be a member of a DDC or UCD group.

■

Internal Automatic Answer
TEG calls are not eligible for Internal Automatic Answer; however, calls
placed to an individual extension are eligible.

■

Leave Word Calling
Leave Word Calling messages can be stored for a TEG and can be retrieved
by a member of the group, a covering user of the group, or a system-wide
message retriever. Phone Display and proper authorization can be assigned
to the message retriever. Also, a remote Automatic Message Waiting lamp
can be assigned to a group member to provide a visual indication that a
message has been stored for the group. One indicator is allowed per TEG.

■

Privacy — Manual Exclusion
Privacy — Manual Exclusion can be assigned to any of the phones in a
TEG to prohibit bridging by other group members. A TEG member who
attempts to bridge onto a call with Privacy — Manual Exclusion active is
dropped.

■

Temporary Bridged Appearance
At multiappearance phones in the TEG, a temporary bridged appearance is
maintained after a call is answered. Thus, other members of the group can
bridge onto the call.

Related topics

See ‘‘Terminating Extension Group’’ on page 1223 for information about and
fields descriptions on the Terminating Extension Group screen.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information on button assignments.
See ‘‘Assigning a terminating extension group’’ on page 244 for instructions.

1886

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Time of Day Routing

Time of Day Routing
You can use Time of Day Routing to select route patterns for calls according to the
time of day and day of the week. You need to define the route pattern you want to
use before you set up time of day routing.
You can route calls based on the least expensive route, and you can deny outgoing
long-distance calls after business hours to help prevent toll fraud. You can use
partition groups to assign different time of day route plans for different groups of
users.
Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR) or Automatic Route Selection (ARS) must
be administered on your switch before you use Time of Day Routing. Time of Day
Routing applies to all AAR or ARS outgoing calls and trunks used for call
forwarding to external numbers.
Interactions
■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
Be careful when you make Time of Day Routing assignments in a DCS
environment. The user’s COR Time of Day Plan Number determines
whether or not the call is routed to a DCS trunk group. The call loses
feature transparency if it is not routed to a DCS trunk group.
When a call routes over a DCS trunk, the switch at the far end routes the
call according to the COR Time of Day Plan Number of the incoming
trunk.

■

Remote Access
When remote access is used and an authorization code or barrier code is
dialed for an AAR or ARS call, the COR Time of Day Plan Number of the
barrier code or authorization code is used to route the call.

Related topics

555-233-506

■

See ‘‘Setting up time of day routing’’ on page 268 for information on
setting up Time of Day routing.

■

See ‘‘Defining ARS Partitions’’ on page 265 if you want to set up different
Time of Day routing for different partition groups.

■

See ‘‘Automatic routing — general’’ on page 1499 for information on
AAR and ARS

Issue 5 October 2002

1887

Features and technical reference

Time of Day Clock Synchronization
Time of Day Clock Synchronization provides you with the capability of
synchronizing your MultiVantage system clock(s) with Internet servers providing
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Time of Day Clock Synchronization enables a switch to synchronize its internal
clock to UTC time provided by Internet time servers. The LINUX or Windows
2000 platforms, running NTP or SNTP software, poll the time servers for the UTC
time. UTC time is then converted to the local time of the switch. The platform
system clock then provides the synchronized time to MultiVantage.
Detailed description

UTC time is received from time servers connected to the Internet.
LINUX/Windows 2000 connect, through an Ethernet port, to these time servers
using NTP or SNTP software. UTC time then is converted to the local time of the
switch.
ORYX/PECOS and Legacy DEFINITY

The existing design of legacy DEFINITY uses a software clock to keep track of
the time of day. A MultiVantage SAT command is used to set and display this
time. A hardware clock also is provided to maintain the system when power is
lost.
The software and hardware clocks are set whenever a manual change is made on
the Set Time SAT screen or when local time changes because of daylight savings
time adjustment. These adjustments can have significant delays (more than a
minute) in a heavily loaded system because of process priorities so the accuracy of
the time actually can be compromised by a manual set of the time.
The software clock is not synchronized with an external timing source so this time
will draft over time. Corrections for the drift of the software and hardware clocks
can be made by software on LINUX but not on Oryx/Pecos.
S8100 Media Server and Windows 2000

The system time is maintained by the operating system at UTC. Library functions
are provided to obtain local time. The time zone and use of daylight savings time
are set from the time/date dialog box on the desktop.
SNTP compliant software is available on Windows 2000. This software runs a
system service that can be started up at system boot time. Windows 2000 uses
Registry entries to set SNTP parameters. Avaya will not support the optional use
of a Microsoft network domain controller as the primary time server.

1888

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Time of Day Clock Synchronization

Use of Time of Day information by MultiVantage

MultiVantage features use the time of day information for a variety of reasons.
■

Time stamp data elements (CDR records, error logs, Message Sequence
Trace data, MCT records, BCMS, and CMS data)

■

Set time-out intervals (Automatic wakeup messages, Do no disturb
intervals)

■

Schedule tasks (scheduled maintenance, moving CDR data to the output
file)

■

Synchronize time of day information with other processors (periodic TOD
messages sent to the 860 processor on the S8100 Media Server processor
circuit pack)

The time of day value used for the MultiVantage system time is essentially local
time with or without daylight savings time adjustments.
S8100 Media Server uses the Windows 2000 and S8700 Multi-Connect uses
LINUX as the platform operating system. The use of the system clock from the
platform OS is transparent. Both Windows and LINUX use UTC for the system
(software) clock. Library functions and APIs are used to express the time in local
time. MultiVantage code still uses local time. However, the daylight savings rule
for system time is controlled by the OS. This is accounted for by using the time
adjustments from the OS for Daylight Savings Rule 1. The display of this rule on
the System Access Terminal Daylight Savings Rules screen is display-only. The
values displayed for the time adjustments are read from the operating system.
In legacy DEFINITY when a change is made to the system time because of a
manual change on the Set Time SAT screen or because of an adjustment for
daylight savings time, certain DEFINITY applications that need to know about
the change are notified before the change is made to the system clock.
If you do not have Internet access, you can continue to manually set the time of
day.

! CAUTION:
Avoid setting the time manually while the TOD clock sync feature is enabled.
Manually setting the time, while NTP/SNTP is running, defeats the purpose
of synching the UTC time and could cause problems depending on the
difference between the system time and UTC.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1889

Features and technical reference

Setting time of day clock synchronization

The recommended configuration for ASA PC and time synchronization:
1. The PC clock is to be set to the local time including applying the local
daylight savings time (DST) rule.
2. The offset for each switch is to be set based on the difference between the
local ASA PC standard time and the switch standard time (for example, use
offset of “plus 1 hour” if ASA PC standard time is 02:00 when the switch
standard time is 03:00 per existing operation.
3. Schedule the task to occur no more often than every 24 hours at a low
traffic time period based on the local time at the switch and in the middle of
a BCMS/CMS interval being used at the switch (for example, 11:07 PM or
3:07 AM). Also the time picked should not be set to a time period when
MultiVantage nightly maintenance is scheduled to be run or the BCMS
next day period starts. Note that the time ASA uses to decide when to send
the time change is based on the local PC time including DST when
applicable. Therefore the start time and interval entered for a switch must
be based on the switch local time converted to the PC local time.
Running the task more frequently (for example, every 12 hours) makes it
more difficult to have it run during a low traffic period or it could cause the
scheduled time to occur at different times during the day as time goes on
(for example, picking any entry other than Every 24 hours or 12 hours will
make the scheduled time “creep” over the day by the selected time interval
since only the start date-time and repeat interval can be specified). The use
of the Weekly or Monthly Recurrence Patterns does not have the “creep”
problem.
4. Note that ASA must be running and OSSI connectivity to the switches
must be available (via LAN or dialup) during the scheduled times for
synchronizing the MultiVantage switches that it manages.

1890

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Time of Day Clock Synchronization

The recommended configuration for each MultiVantage switch time
synchronization:
1. The system clock may be set to either local time using automatic DST
changes, local standard time (without DST changes - DST Rule set to 0) or
GMT time (without DST changes). In the case where automatic DST
changes is not assigned to the system clock (that is, the DST rule is set to 0
on the Date and Time screen), you can use the Multiple Locations feature
to display DST (and local time in the case where the system time is set to
GMT) on the station sets homed on the local port networks. However, all
switch reports (including BCMS), CMS/Supervisor reports, TOD routing
and scheduled events will be based on the system clock time not the
location time. It is expected that in most cases the system clock will be set
to local time with DST change. In each case, the ASA assigned offset for
the switch will provide the proper conversion from PC time to the desired
system clock standard time.
2. In all cases the Multiple Locations feature provides local time display on
station sets based on the local time zone and DST rule in effect at the
remote port network (EPN) site. The time determined by the location
assignments also applies to do-not-disturb, Automatic Wakeup
programming and execution (however, the announced time is the system
time). Use the Locations screen to define the time zone offset from the
standard time local to the switch location (the PPN location) and the DST
rule to be used for any remote EPNs that are located in different time
zones. The location numbers established in the Locations screen then are
assigned to the appropriate EPN cabinets using the cabinet description
screen. The same location number can be assigned to more than one
cabinet that are in the same time zone. Note that only DEFINITY R (Mips)
configurations can be assigned locations other than 1 (the DEFINITY
CSI/SI configuration defaults to location 1).
3. Each of the configuration possibilities is summarized as follows:
a. System time set to local time with automatic DST changes
(when observed in that area) - Use the Date and Time screen to set
the time for the local time zone and the DST rule defined on the
‘‘Daylight Savings Rules’’ screen. The time initially can be set
manually to the local standard time during fall/winter/spring or to
the local DST time in the summer. If DST is not observed then the
following configuration b would be used. All reports and display
station sets will show the local time with the DST rule applied. TOD
routing/scheduled events occur based on the system clock (which
will be in the local standard time or local DST depending on the
time of the year). Use the Multiple Locations feature to display local
time on station sets at remote sites.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1891

Features and technical reference

b. System time set to local time without DST rules - the Date and
Time screen has the standard time for the local time zone set and the
DST rule field is set to 0. All reports and TOD routing/scheduled
events are all based on local standard time regardless of whether
DST is being observed or not. Display station sets at the local PPN
and remote EPN sites can have actual local time (with DST applied)
via the Multiple Locations feature.
c. System time set to GMT (UTC) - the Date and Time screen has
GMT standard time set with the DST rule set to 0. All reports and
TOD routing/scheduled events are all based on GMT time. Display
station sets at the local PPN and remote EPN sites can have actual
local time (with DST applied) via the Multiple Locations feature.
The ASA offset for this MultiVantage switch will be the offset of the
ASA PC local standard time from GMT/UTC time (for example if
the ASA PC is in Denver, the offset for any switch using GMT time
is +7).
NOTE:

When NTP starts up, there will be a gap of possibly several minutes between
MultiVantage time and the time provided by NTP. NTP reduces this gap to
milliseconds over a period of hours.

Transfer
Transfer allows telephone users to transfer trunk or internal calls to other
telephones or trunks without attendant assistance.
Considerations

1892

■

You can administer transferred-trunk calls to receive either music or silence
if the first part of the transfer places the call on hold.

■

Multi-appearance telephones must have an idle appearance to transfer a
call.

■

Single-line telephone users momentarily flash the switchhook or press the
RECALL button, dial the desired extension, and hang up. Multi-appearance
telephone users press the TRANSFER button, dial the desired extension, and
press the TRANSFER button again.

■

If, on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, the Transfer Upon
Hang-up field is y, users can transfer a call by pressing the TRANSFER
button, dialing the desired extension, and then hanging up. The user can
hang up while the desired extension is ringing or after the party has picked
up. The user also can still press the TRANSFER button a second time to
complete the transfer process.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Transfer

■

If, on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen, the Abort Transfer
field is y, users can abort the transfer a call by pressing the TRANSFER
button, dialing the desired extension, and then hanging up or selecting any
non-idle call appearance. The user must press the Transfer button again to
complete the process (see Note). If the user selects an idle call appearance,
the transfer still is active.
NOTE:

If both the Abort Transfer and Transfer Upon Hang-Up fields are y
and you press the TRANSFER button and then dial the complete
transfer-to number, hanging up the phone transfers the call.
■

Users of Digital Communications Protocol (DCP), Hybrid, and wireless
phones can transfer a call on hold without removing the call from hold. If
there is only one call on hold, no active call appearances, and an available
call appearance for the transfer, the user can transfer the call simply by
pressing the Transfer button. Avaya MultiVantage assumes the transfer is
for the call on hold, and the transfer feature works as usual.
If there is more than one call on hold, the user must make a call active in
order to transfer it. If the user presses the Transfer button with two or more
calls on hold, Avaya MultiVantage will ignore the transfer attempt since it
will not know which call the user wants to transfer. If there are calls on
hold and an active call, pressing the Transfer button will start the transfer
process for the active call.

555-233-506

■

Avaya MultiVantage can be administered to display a confirmation
message to users upon successful call transfers. The confirmation message
will only be visible to users with DCP, Hybrid, wireless (except for 9601),
or Integrated Services Digital Network-Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI)
display phones. All of these phones, except for the Hybrids, can display the
confirmation message in English, Spanish, French, Italian, or a language
you define. Hybrid phones only display the message in English.

■

You can administer the system to return a transferred call to the originator
if the transferred-to party does not answer within a set time limit. To do
this, enter a value in the Station Call Transfer Recall Timer field on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen.

Issue 5 October 2002

1893

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

Attendant Conference
This may not operate properly if the CO does not provide answer
supervision. In that case, the Answer Supervision Timeout and Outgoing
End of Dial fields (on the CO Trunk Group screen) must be set to the same
non-zero number. The Receive Answer Supervision field must be set to n.
If the CO does provide answer supervision, the Answer Supervision
Timeout and Outgoing End of Dial field must be set to 0 and the Receive
Answer Supervision field must be set to y.

■

Bridged Call Appearance
A bridged call appearance can be used to transfer calls.

■

CentreVu Agent
CentreVu Agent supports the conference and transfer of calls on hold, but it
does not display the confirmation message for transferred calls.

■

Class of Restriction (COR)
Set the Block Transfer Display field on the COR screen to y if you do not
want users to receive a confirmation message for call transfers.

■

Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI)
When an ISDN-BRI telephone, assigned with the Select Last Used
Appearance field set to y, completes a transfer while off-hook using the
handset, the user is left listening to dial tone on the last-used appearance.

■

Internal Automatic Answer
Transferred calls can be answered automatically via IAA.

■

QSIG Networking
If calls over an ISDN-PRI trunk are administered for Supplementary QSIG,
then additional call information may display.

■

Station
When a multifunction telephone dials enough digits to route a call, but the
call could route differently if additional digits were dialed, the telephone
does not recognize the Conference or Transfer buttons. The user must delay
dialing for 3 seconds or dial # to indicate that the call can be routed based
on the digits already dialed. The Conference or Transfer buttons then are
recognized and the switch completes the operation.

1894

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Transfer

Pull Transfer

Pull Transfer allows either the transferring or transferred-to party to press the
Transfer button to complete the transfer operation.
When attendants control calls, called parties cannot use Pull Transfer. Attendants
who are called parties cannot use Pull Transfer. When attendants have parties on
hold they are transferred with the standard transfer process.
To use Pull Transfer, calling parties and called parties must be on the same switch,
or called parties must be reached via Italian TGU/TGE tie trunks.
Called parties using analog telephones flash the switchhook or press the flash key
or recall button to transfer calls. Called parties using digital phones press the
transfer key to complete transfers.
Interactions
■

Analog Station Recall Operation and Feature Activation
When called parties initiate either analog-telephone recall or feature
activation, callers are not put on hold for transfer, they are transferred via
Pull Transfer.

■

BRI telephones
Callers using BRI Stations reach desired parties through an intermediate
step by calling a party who calls a final destination. Intermediate parties
activate pull transfer to complete transfers. Final called parties go off hook
as if a new transfer was originated.

■

Call Detail Recording
The switch checks to ensure that calls are correctly recorded with CDR
when Pull Transfer is completed.

■

Digital Station Transfer Operation
When called parties initiate transfer operations, callers are not put on hold
for transfer; they are transferred via Pull Transfer.

■

Non-BRI telephones:
Callers using Non-BRI telephones reach desired parties through an
intermediate step by calling a party who calls a final destination. Each
called party activates pull transfer.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1895

Features and technical reference

Related topics
■

‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795
— Music on Transferred Trunk Calls field
— Intercept Treatment on Failed Trunk Transfers field
— Abort Transfer
— Transfer Upon Hang-Up

■

‘‘Class of Restriction’’ on page 658
— Block Transfer Display field

Transfer — Outgoing Trunk to
Outgoing Trunk
Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk Transfer (OTTOTT) permits a controlling
party (such as a station user or attendant) to initiate two or more outgoing trunk
calls and then connect the trunks. This operation removes the controlling party
from the connection and conferences the outgoing trunks. Alternatively, the
controlling party can establish a conference call with the outgoing trunks and then
drop out of the conference, leaving only the outgoing trunks on the conference.
NOTE:

This is an optional enhancement to Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and requires
careful administration and use. The DCS Trunk Turnaround may be an
acceptable and safer alternative to this feature.
OTTOTT allows calls to be established in which the only parties involved are
external to the switch and are on outgoing trunks. This type of call can result in
locked-up trunks, such as trunks that cannot be disconnected except by
busying-out and releasing the affected trunk circuit. To clear the lockup, a service
technician must reseat the trunk board, or busy-out and release the affected trunk.
Detailed description

This feature is enabled by administering the Disconnect Supervision Out field to y
on at least one outgoing trunk group screen, and enabling Trunk-to-trunk transfer
on the Feature Related System Parameters screen. In addition, the network must
provide answer supervision. The answer supervision test increases the probability,
but does not guarantee, that a disconnect signal is received from the remote end of
the trunk. To mitigate problems associated with its accidental use, this feature is
administrable only on trunk groups on the Trunk Group screen. It is not a system
option.

1896

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Transfer — Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk

DCS networks provide a similar but more restrictive version of this feature, called
DCS Trunk Turnaround, which permits two outgoing trunks to be connected when
the switch at the remote end of one of the trunks agrees to turn around the logical
direction of the trunk. DCS trunk turnaround is permitted, when some other party
involved in the call (at the remote switch) can provide disconnect supervision.
Without OTTOTT or DCS, a conference involving two or more outgoing trunks is
permitted only when at least one remaining conference party is an attendant,
incoming trunk, or station.
Considerations
■

OTTOTT is not intended for use in DCS networks, since DCS Trunk
Turnaround provides comparable capabilities much more safely. However,
use of OTTOTT with DCS is not prohibited, and may be useful when one
or more of the trunks goes off the DCS network.

Security Measures

! SECURITY ALERT:
This feature can be used to transfer an outside party to a trunk over which
toll calls might be made, and enabling it poses significant security risks.
Since trunks have to be specifically administered for OTTOTT, you should
examine the COR and FRL of that trunk group to determine if they are
appropriate.

! SECURITY ALERT:
OTTOTT is not a system-wide parameter. It is administered on a trunk-group
basis. You must enable the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer field on the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen for this feature to work. If you
deem that the feature is not relevant to your business practices, do not
enable it. Alternately, if a temporary need presents itself, you can
temporarily enable this feature and then turn it off.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1897

Features and technical reference

Interactions
■

DCS Trunk Turnaround
OTTOTT increases the set of cases in which DCS Trunk Turnaround may
be accepted. However, use of OTTOTT in combination with a DCS
network is strongly discouraged. The following algorithm describes the
DCS Trunk Turnaround request process.
a. If any party on the call receives a local-dial, busy, intercept, or
reorder tone, deny turnaround.
b. If any remaining party is an answered station or attendant, accept
turnaround.
c. If any remaining party is on an incoming trunk, accept turnaround.
For the purposes of this check, an outgoing DCS trunk that has been
turned around an odd number of times via a DCS trunk turnaround
is considered an incoming trunk with disconnect supervision.
Similarly, an incoming DCS trunk that has been turned around an
odd number of times is considered an outgoing trunk.
d. If any remaining party is an outgoing trunk administered for
OTTOTT that has received answer supervision, accept turnaround.
e. If any remaining party is an outgoing DCS trunk, forward the
turnaround request.
f. Otherwise, deny turnaround.

■

Incoming Disconnect Supervision
Outside of the U.S., incoming disconnect supervision is a switch capability
that restricts transfers or conferences for certain incoming trunks. In the
U.S., all incoming trunks are assumed to provide disconnect supervision. In
some countries this assumption is not valid, so administer whether or not
an incoming trunk provides disconnect supervision for each trunk group.

■

Personal Central Office Lines (PCOLs)
Transfer of PCOLs is not subject to the normal restrictions applied to
transfer of other trunks. These transfers are allowed since the PCOL
appearance remains on one or more stations as a feature button. System
users must be aware that the DROP button cannot be used to disconnect the
transferred-to party from the call. Hence, if an outgoing PCOL is
transferred to an outgoing trunk and neither of the trunks can supply a
disconnect signal, the two trunks lock up.

■

QSIG Global Networking
If either call is over an ISDN-PRI trunk administered with Supplementary
Service Protocol b (QSIG), additional call information may display.

1898

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Transfer — Trunk-to-Trunk

■

Release Link Trunks (RLT)
RLTs are used by CAS. An outgoing RLT at a remote branch is used to
access an attendant at the main. The attendant at the main can transfer the
incoming caller to a station or trunk at the branch. The RLT is typically
used only for a short period of time and is usually idled after the transfer is
established.
A station at a branch can transfer an outgoing trunk to the attendant at the
main. This transfer could be viewed as an OTTOTT (the attendant is
accessed via an outgoing RLT). Since administering outgoing disconnect
supervision for RLT trunks provides no additional capability, this
administration is not provided for RLT trunks.

■

Restriction
Restrictions on the transferring party may block a transfer or drop
operation even when Outgoing Disconnect Supervision is provided.

■

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
If this feature-related system parameter is set to restricted, all
trunk-to-trunk transfer/release/drop operations for public trunks (CO, CPE,
CAS, DID, DIOD, FX, and WATS) have calls terminated or receive denial.
If the parameter is set to none, all trunk-to-trunk transfers (except CAS and
DCS) have calls terminated or receive denial.
Hence, this option must be set to all to enable OTTOTT operation for these
types of trunks. The number of public-network trunks allowed on a
conference call is administrable. This number defaults to 1, so if OTTOTT
is being used to connect two or more public network trunks, you must
increase this limit on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.

■

Trunks (CO, FX, and WATS)
You cannot have two CO, FX, or WATS trunks in a OTTOTT connection,
even if the Disconnect Supervision - Out field is set to y.

Transfer — Trunk-to-Trunk
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer allows the attendant or user to connect an incoming
trunk call to an outgoing trunk.

! SECURITY ALERT:
Trunk-to-trunk transfer poses a significant security risk. Use this feature
only with extreme caution.
The system provides three levels of administration for this feature: system-wide,
COR-to-COR, and COS.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1899

Features and technical reference

To administer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer system-wide, complete the
Feature-Related System Parameters screen. To restrict Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
on a trunk-group basis, assign COR-to-COR calling-party restrictions on the Class
of Restriction screen. To allow individual users to control Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfers, assign capabilities on the Class of Service screen.
Considerations
■

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is particularly useful when a caller outside the
system calls a user or attendant and requests a transfer to another outside
number. For example, a worker, away on business, can call in and have the
call transferred elsewhere.

■

Transferred trunk calls can be administered to receive either music or
silence.

■

Some CO trunks do not signal the PBX when the CO user disconnects from
a call. The system ensures that incoming CO trunks without Disconnect
Supervision are not transferred to outgoing trunks or to other incoming CO
trunks without Disconnect Supervision.

■

An attendant-assisted call connecting an outgoing trunk or incoming trunk
without Disconnect Supervision to an outgoing trunk must be held on the
console. The system does not allow the attendant to release the call. The
attendant can, however, use the Forced Release button and disconnect all
parties associated with the call.

■

If a user has connected two outgoing trunks or an outgoing call and an
incoming call without Disconnect Supervision, the user must remain on the
call. Otherwise, the call is dropped. An incoming trunk with Disconnect
Supervision can be connected to an outgoing trunk without the user
remaining on the call. An incoming trunk can also be connected to another
incoming trunk without the user remaining on the call if one of the
incoming trunks has Disconnect Supervision.

■

Attendant Lockout

Interactions

Attendant Lockout does not function on Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
■

Call Vectoring
Station control of Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer does not affect routing of
incoming trunks to a vector directory number (VDN) that ultimately routes
to a destination off-net.
A route to a number off the switch does not require you to enable
trunk-to-trunk transfer.

1900

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunk Flash

■

Tenant Partitioning
Station control of Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is prohibited between trunks in
different tenant partitions if those partitions are restricted.

Trunk Flash
Trunk Flash allows a feature or function button on a multifunction telephone or
attendant console to be assigned as a Flash button. Pressing this button while
connected to a trunk (which must have been administered to allow trunk flash)
causes the System to send a flash signal out over the connected trunk.
Trunk Flash enables multifunction telephones to access central office customized
services that are provided by the far-end or CO located directly behind the
MultiVantage System. These central office customized services are electronic
features, such as conference and transfer, that are accessed by a sequence of flash
signal and dial signals from the MultiVantage system telephone on an active trunk
call. The Trunk Flash feature can help to reduce the number of trunk lines
connected to the MultiVantage switch by:
■

Performing trunk-to-trunk call transfers at the far-end or CO, which
eliminates the use of a second trunk line for the duration of the call and
frees the original trunk line for the duration of the call.

■

Performing a conference call with a second outside call party, which
eliminates the need for a second trunk line for the duration of the call.
NOTE:

Some analog DTMF telephone sets used in Italy and the United
Kingdom are equipped with a FLASH button that, when pressed,
generates a rotary digit 1. When an analog telephone which is
administered as a DTMF telephone (for example, as a 2500 or
71nn-type telephone) transmits a rotary digit 1, the system treats the
signal as a recall signal from the telephone set to the Avaya
MultiVantage.
When used by a CAS attendant connected to an RLT, the flash controls certain
CAS features at the branch. When used by a multifunction telephone or non-CAS
attendant connected to a CO, FX, or WATS trunk, the flash controls certain
features (such as add-on) at the connected CO.
Trunk Flash is not available on PCOL groups.
The system supports the Trunk Flash signal for incoming, outgoing, or 2-way call
directions on selected 2-wire analog (ground-start or loop-start) or digital (DS1)
trunks or Tie trunks on DS1.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1901

Features and technical reference

If the trunk group is a DS1 trunk in Italy, the Trunk Flash feature applies only to
outgoing calls.
If the trunk is not directly connected to the far end or CO providing the
customized services, use of the Trunk Flash signal may cause the call to be
disconnected by the far end or CO.
Calls made after the Flash are not recorded in CDR records.
Considerations
NOTE:

The Trunk Flash feature allows the telephone user to receive central office
dial tone, and place a call that is not monitored by the MultiVantage system,
and is not subject to restrictions (toll, facilities restriction level (FRL), class
of restriction (COR), etc.). Therefore you should enable this feature with
caution.

1902

■

A Trunk Flash button can be assigned on CAS attendant consoles,
non-CAS attendant consoles, and multifunction telephones. For CAS
attendants, use of this button is limited to certain CAS features via RLT
trunks. For multifunction and non-CAS attendant consoles, this button is
used for the Trunk Flash feature.

■

FAC activation of the trunk flash feature is allowed.

■

The Flash button is used by the Trunk Flash and CAS features.

■

System features (such as internal conference call, transfer, and call park)
may be combined with custom services (that is, CO-based features that are
activated/controlled by sending a flash signal over the trunk to the CO).
However, mixing Avaya MultiVantage features with custom services
causes complications for the user when tracking a call. MultiVantage
Systems cannot give the local telephone user status information on the
custom services.

■

The Trunk Flash feature may only be accessed if the call has only one
trunk, the trunk must be outgoing from the PBX’s perspective, and the
trunk group of that trunk has Trunk Flash enabled. The Trunk Flash feature
is disabled when the call involves more than one trunk, even if all the
trunks have Trunk Flash enabled.

■

Any Avaya MultiVantage telephone can flash and dial a FAC to access the
Trunk Flash feature; any Avaya MultiVantage telephone with a flash button
can access the Trunk Flash feature by hitting the flash button. The system
allows as many as five telephones to participate in a conference call with
the trunk line party. However, to access the Trunk Flash feature, at least one
of the telephones must have a Flash button.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunks and trunk groups

■

In a call involving more than one telephone, one of the telephones may
press the Flash button, and another telephone may dial the phone number.
The telephone that dials the phone number is not required to have a Flash
button.

■

If the far-end/CO does not support custom services, the call may be
dropped by the far-end/CO on sending the flash signal or the signal may be
ignored and a click-click sound is heard.

Trunks and trunk groups
Trunks connect Avaya MultiVantage to other pieces of equipment (adjuncts) and
to other switches. In general, trunks connect your switch to one of four things:
■

the public telephone network

■

a private telephone network

■

the Internet or a private intranet

■

switch adjuncts, such as a loudspeaker paging system or a source for music
or announcements

When trunks of the same type are used for the same application, assign them to
the same trunk group. A trunk group allows you to assign service characteristics
to the group rather than administering each trunk individually.
NOTE:

Trunks and access endpoints consume the same resource. The sum of trunks
and access endpoints cannot exceed the total number of trunks allowed on
your system.
This chapter contains information about the most common analog and digital
trunks. Specialized trunks such as Advanced Private-Line Termination (APLT),
tandem, release-link, and DMI-BOS trunks are not covered in this manual. See
Overview for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software and Administration for Network
Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™ Software for information on these trunks.
Brief description

Avaya MultiVantage supports the following basic trunk types.
Access

Used in ETN, access trunks connect satellite switches to the main switch. Unlike
tandem trunks, access trunks do not carry TCMs and thus allow satellite callers
unrestricted access to out-dial trunks on the main switch.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1903

Features and technical reference

CAMA — Centralized Automatic Message
Accounting (E911)

CAMA trunks route emergency calls to the local community’s Enhanced 911
systems and provide CESID information to the system. Public Service Answering
Points (PSAP) use CAMA trunks to determine the caller’s physical address.
NOTE:

Avaya does not recommend tandeming 911 calls.
When the CAMA feature is administered and a 911 call is placed from an Avaya
MultiVantage station, MultiVantage software searches for the proper CAMA
Touch-Tone Receiver (TTR) resource in the port network (PN) where the CAMA
trunk group is located. If the proper CAMA TTR resource is not available in that
port network, the software checks any other available port networks for the
CAMA TTR. If none is found in the entire system, a busy tone is returned to the
calling party. However, if another trunk group is in the same routing pattern as the
CAMA trunk group, the call routes to the next available trunk group in the pattern.
For example, if a CO trunk group is used, then any available TTR resource can be
used and the call routes as a normal call over the CO trunk and the public switched
telephone network.
E911 systems use CESID information to identify the location of the calling phone.
The following features can cause incorrect CESID information to be sent with a
911 call.
Bridged stations

911 calls from a bridged extension will report the CESID of the principle station.
EAS agents

911 calls from an agent in an EAS skill will report the CESID of the physical
station, not the logical agent.
Personal Station Access/Terminal Translation Initialization

When you use PSA or TTI to associate a phone with another extension, the switch
will report the CESID of the extension — not the physical phone associated with
it.

1904

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunks and trunk groups

CO — Central Office

CO trunks transmit dialed digits for outgoing calls but not for incoming calls. Use
CO trunks when you want all incoming calls go to the same destination, such as
an attendant or a voice menu system. Individual users can place outgoing calls
without attendant assistance. CO trunks typically connect your switch to the local
central office, but they can also connect adjuncts such as external paging systems
and data modules.
CPE — Customer-Provided Equipment

Use CPE trunks to connect adjuncts, such as paging systems and announcement or
music sources, to the switch.
NOTE:

You can connect some types of equipment to the switch by trunks without
administering a CPE trunk group. For example, trunk port interfaces can be
assigned on system screens for Music-on-Hold Access (Feature-Related
System Parameters screen) or voice and chime paging (Loudspeaker Paging
and Code Calling Access screen).
DID — Direct Inward Dialing

DID trunks carry incoming calls directly from the local central office to your
switch. These trunks transmit the digits your switch needs to route incoming calls
to specific extensions. Use DID trunks when you want people calling your
organization to dial individual users directly without going through an attendant
or some other central point.
DIOD — Direct Inward/Outward Dialing

DIOD trunks are two-way trunks that transmit dialed digits in both directions.
Thus, use DIOD trunks when you want a two-way trunk group with the
convenience of direct inward dialing for incoming calls. DIOD trunks are used
mostly outside North America, and typically they connect the switch to a local
central office.
In North America, use tie trunks for applications that require two-way
transmission of dialed digits. In the U.S., trunks that transmit digits in both
directions are sometimes called “smart trunks” and are administered as T1 tie
trunks.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1905

Features and technical reference

FX — Foreign Exchange

An FX trunk is essentially a CO trunk that connects your switch directly to a
central office outside your local exchange area. Use FX trunks to reduce long
distance charges if your organization averages a high volume of long-distance
calls to a specific area code.
IP Trunks — Internet Protocol Trunks

IP trunks allow Avaya MultiVantage to route voice calls and faxes over a local- or
wide-area TCP/IP network. Use IP trunks to reduce long-distance charges by
routing calls over the Internet or your intranet.
NOTE:

The origin and destination switches must both have the special hardware and
software needed to route telephone calls over IP networks. See the
Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage™
Software for more information.
ISDN — Integrated Services Digital Network

ISDN trunks are digital trunks that can integrate voice, data, and video signals and
provide the bandwidth needed for applications such as high-speed data transfer
and video conferencing. ISDN provides end-to-end digital connectivity and uses a
high-speed interface that provides service-independent access to switched
services. Through internationally accepted standard interfaces, an ISDN provides
circuit or packet-switched connectivity within a network and can link to other
ISDN-supported interfaces to provide national and international digital
communications. ISDN trunks can also efficiently combine multiple services on
one trunk group.
PCOL — Personal Central Office Line

A personal central office line is one dedicated trunk that links a group of phones to
the local central office or to another switch in a private network. A PCOL group
can have 1–16 phones, and each phone can have one or more appearances for the
personal central office line. You may administer a PCOL group as a CO, FX, or
WATS trunk group. Use a PCOL line when one or more users need a direct,
dedicated connection to the public network or to another switch.

1906

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunks and trunk groups

Tie

Tie trunks connect a switch to a central office or to another switch in a private
network. These trunks transmit dialed digits with both outgoing and incoming
calls. Thus, incoming calls over a tie trunk can be routed directly to the extension
the caller dialed. Tie trunks are frequently used in private networks; in addition,
use tie trunks when you want a two-way trunk group with the convenience of
direct inward dialing for incoming calls.
Tie trunks that connect private network switches are “universal. “This means that
the trunks can be administered with a variety of translation encodes. The
originating switch can recognize any start dial signal (precise dial tone, wink start,
or delay dial) that the terminating switch sends. If the originating switch does not
receive one of these start dial signals, it can be administered to send digits after an
administered interval. (This time-out interval is the amount of time that the
originating switch waits before sending digits.)
Analog tie trunks

The number of tie trunks in a connection and the technology of any multiplex
systems used in the facilities affect the maximum data transfer rate. Generally, for
transfer rates up to 300 bps, a connection can have 5 tie trunks in tandem. For data
rates of 301–2,400 bps, a connection can have up to 3 tie trunks in tandem. For
data rates of 2,401–4,800 bps, a connection can have up to 2 tie trunks in tandem.
Analog tie trunks used in unswitched connections can support up to 9,600 bps.
Digital tie trunks

The digital tie trunk is a high-speed and high-volume trunk interface to a T1 or E1
carrier. It uses a digital signal level 1 (DS1) protocol. By multiplexing 24 64-kbps
digital channels onto a single 1.544-Mbps T1 carrier, or 32 64-kbps digital
channels onto a single 2.048-Mbps E1 carrier, DS1 offers an economical
alternative to the analog tie trunk as well as a high-speed fully digital (without
modems) connection between the switches.
The maximum per-channel data rate for DS1 is 64 Kbps, and DS1 trunks can carry
voice, voiceband data, or high-speed data communications.
WATS — Wide Area Telecommunications
Service

Outgoing WATS service allows calls to certain areas (“WATS bands”) for a flat
monthly charge. Incoming WATS trunks allow you to offer toll-free calling to
customers and employees.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1907

Features and technical reference

Applications for different trunk types

To help you select the right type of trunk for a specific application, the following
table gives you an overview of key characteristics of different trunk groups.
Remember that all analog trunks can carry only voice and voice-grade data.

Type of trunk

Direction

Analog or
Digital?

CO, FX, WATS

Incoming

Either

Any kind of voice or
data traffic.

No

Outgoing

Traffic supported

Transmits
digits?

Two-way
CPE

N.A.

Either

Any kind of voice or
data traffic.

No

DID

Incoming

Either

Only voice and
voice-grade data.

Yes

DIOD

Incoming

Either

Any kind of voice or
data traffic.

Only for
incoming calls

Analog
only

Only voice and
voice-grade data.

No

Either

Any kind of voice or
data traffic.

Yes

Outgoing
Two-way
PCOL

Incoming
Outgoing
Two-way

Tie, Access

Incoming
Outgoing
Two-way

Transmission and supervisory signaling

A trunk is named for its transmission characteristics. For example, trunks are
always classified by the direction of the traffic they allow:
■

■

■

1908

One-way incoming trunk — A local trunk that can be selected (seized) by
the far-end connected switch.
One-way outgoing trunk — A trunk that can be seized by the local switch
to call the far-end switch.
Two-way trunk — A trunk that can be seized by either of the connected
switches.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunks and trunk groups

Another transmission characteristic is signaling, which is the transmission of
supervision, address, alerting, or other switching information. Supervisory
signaling establishes or sets up the connection of the local switch to the distant
switch. In general, supervisory signaling has 2 phases:
■

■

Seizure signal — The originating office’s signal for a request for service
from the distant office.
Start-dial signal — The distant office’s acknowledgment that it is ready to
accept dialing from the originating office.

Seizure signals
Ear & Mouth (E&M) supervision

E&M supervision is a symmetric signaling scheme used on private network
trunks. DC voltage levels are sent over E&M leads, which are separate from the
transmission path. E & M signals indicate on-hook and off-hook states for each
end of the connection path.
Ear & Mouth (E&M) supervision on digital trunks

DIOD trunk groups support Continuous and Pulsed E&M Signaling that allows
you to make and receive calls over Brazil pulsed or continuous E&M signaling
trunks and Hungarian pulsed E&M signaling trunks.
Ground-start (GS) supervision

Ground-start signaling is a supervisory signaling scheme used on public network
trunks in which ground is applied on the tip (T) lead by the CO and on the ring (R)
lead by the switch. For example, the calling switch on a call to a CO seizes the
outgoing trunk by placing a ground on the trunk interface R lead. The CO
recognizes the trunk seizure as a request for service and grounds the trunk T lead
to indicate to the calling switch that the CO is ready to receive digits. Ground-start
signaling is superior to loop-start signaling (described below) for the following
reasons:
■

555-233-506

The switch can make trunks busy to outgoing calls almost immediately,
because the tip ground seizure by the distant switch minimizes the interval
during which a two-way trunk can be seized from both ends (called glare).

Issue 5 October 2002

1909

Features and technical reference

■

Ground-start signaling allows answer supervision, a positive indication that
a distant switch has disconnected from a call. Answer supervision has 2
benefits:
— Callers who remain off-hook after completing a call won’t be
connected to central office dial tone. For example, this prevents a
restricted station from making an unauthorized call after placing an
authorized call using the attendant.
— By holding the trunk busy until the central office disconnects,
another switch cannot seize the trunk and be connected to the CO
party of the previous call.

■

Loop-start (LS) supervision — A supervisory signaling scheme used

between a telephone and a switch in which the telephone or far-end office
completes the current path formed by the trunk wires. The circuit provides
one signaling state when it is open and another when it is closed. A third
signaling state is achieved by changing the direction or magnitude of
current in the loop. The preferred method of loop-start signaling is reverse
battery signaling. Disconnect times when using loop-start signaling can
result in delays of up to 10–20 seconds. Glare, as described in ground-start,
is possible.
Loop-start signaling does not provide answer supervision. This lack can
open a potential for toll fraud in some situations, especially when incoming
calls are forwarded off-net. Loop-start is used with analog DIOD trunks,
but in general try to use loop start only with one-way trunks.
■

Reverse Battery (RB) supervision — A supervisory technique on
one-way trunks that uses open and closure signals from the originating end
and reversals of battery and ground from the terminating end (normally
used on direct inward dialing trunks).

Start-dial signals

Network trunks operate as automatic, immediate start, dial tone, wink start, or
delay dial according to the type of start-dial signal (alerting) the switch sends out
or expects to receive. The different transmissions of alerting are:
■

■

■

1910

Automatic — The originating switch sends no digits or start dial signal
and expects the terminating switch to complete the call. The call usually is
completed by the attendant or other service such as Centralized Attendant
Service (CAS).
Immediate start — The originating switch sends digits immediately
without waiting for a start dial signal from the terminating switch.
Dial tone — The terminating switch sends precise dial tone to the
originating switch. This indicates that the terminating switch is ready to
receive digits.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Trunks and trunk groups

■

Wink start — The terminating switch sends a wink start (momentary

off-hook) signal to the originating switch. This indicates that the
terminating switch is ready to receive digits.
■

Delay dial — The terminating switch sends a delay dial signal (an
off-hook signal followed by an on-hook signal) to the originating switch.
This indicates that the terminating switch is ready to receive digits.

Types of address transmission

In addition to seizure and start dial signals, switches have to transmit the digits
and characters for telephone numbers. This is called address transmission. Three
types of signaling are available:
■

Dial Pulse (DP) addressing — A method of signaling that consists of

regular momentary interruptions of a direct or alternating current at the
sending end. The number of interruptions corresponds to the value of a
digit or character (alternating current is not used by switches). The
interruptions usually are produced by a rotary telephone dial, or may be
produced by a sender in a switching system.
■

■

Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) addressing — Signaling
arrangements (commonly known as touch-tone) that consist of two,
simultaneous, dialing signals. One tone is from a low group of four
frequencies. The other tone is from a high group of four frequencies. Both
tones correspond to digits, letters, or characters (0–9, A–Y, or * and #). One
of the tones (1,633 Hz) from the high group is a spare.
Multifrequency (MF) addressing — Signaling arrangements that make
use of only 2 frequencies out of 6 to represent 10 decimal digits (0– 9) and
5 auxiliary signals. MF signals are used for called number addressing,
calling number identification. They also report whether the far end is
ringing or busy.

Analog vs. digital trunks

Analog trunks carry voice and voiceband data communication. “Voice” means
that sound of any kind is transformed into electrical waveforms and transmitted
within an approximate bandwidth of 300 Hz to 3,400 Hz. “Voiceband data” means
that data is transmitted within the voiceband and requires a conversion resource
(modem) at both ends of the connection. The data-transmission rate for analog
trunks depends on the data-handling capability of the modems in the connection.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1911

Features and technical reference

Digital trunks represent both sound and data as 0’s and 1’s and can be configured
to carry any kind of voice or data traffic. Digital trunks connect to a DS1 circuit
pack and provide a T1 or E1 carrier. DS1 service provides an interface for CO,
FX, DID, tie, and WATS trunks. The DS1 interface supports incoming and
outgoing dial types of ground-start, loop-start, auto/auto, auto/delay, auto/immed,
and auto/wink. Signaling may be robbed-bit or common-channel depending on
the trunk type and whether the dial-type is incoming or outgoing. The interface
may be used to connect the switch to a toll office directly using wink-start tie
trunks for two-way access to the toll network.
Supervision, addressing, and alerting methods have been carried over to digital
trunks, which use basically the same signaling scheme as analog trunks when
establishing a call. These schemes are handled in a variety of ways to indicate
particular calling states, such as on-hook, off-hook, ringing, not ringing, and so
on, by using A and B bit-timed signaling. A and B bits carry a 0 or 1 depending on
the type of trunk, the near-end channel unit type, far-end channel type, the
condition of the trunk (open loop, loop closure, reverse battery, and so on), and
whether it is transmit or receive signaling. In addition to the above, see ‘‘DS1
Circuit Pack’’ on page 757 for trunk-related terms associated with DS1 trunk
interfaces.
Interactions
■

Brazil Block Collect Call
In both continuous and pulsed E&M signaling, Block Collect Call is not
included.

■

Personal Central Office Line (PCOL)
PCOL trunks cannot use continuous, pulsed, or discontinuous E&M.

Related topics

See the Avaya MultiVantage™ Solutions Hardware Guide for information on the
types of circuit packs available and their capacities. This manual also lists the
maximum number of trunks and trunk groups for each system configuration.
See ‘‘Managing trunks’’ on page 411 for administration procedures.
See ‘‘DS1 trunk service’’ on page 1659 for detailed information on Digital Signal
Level 1 trunk service.
See ‘‘ISDN service’’ on page 1730 for detailed information about Integrated
Services Digital Network trunks.

1912

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Uniform Dial Plan

Uniform Dial Plan
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) provides a common 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7-digit dial plan - or
even a combination of these - that can be shared among a group of switches. The
UDP applies interswitch dialing and intraswitch dialing. UDP can be used with an
ETN; main, satellite, and tributary switches; and DCS. In a nutshell, UDP
provides extension-to-extension dialing among 2 or more private-switching
systems. Note that for DCS, a uniform 4 or 5-digit dialing plan must be used.
Administering UDP

Following is a list of the forms and fields you need to consider when
administering UDP
Screen

Field

Dial Plan Analysis Table

■

All

Dial Plan Parameters screen

■

UDP Extension Search Order

Uniform Dial Plan Table

■

All

AAR and ARS Digit Analysis
Table

■

All

AAR and ARS Digit Conversion
Table

■

All

Node Number Routing

■

Route Pat

Extension Number Portability
Numbering Plan

■

All

Route Pattern

■

All

Detailed description

UDP routes calls off the local switch by converting the extension number into a
private-network or public-network number. The extension initially dialed by the
user can be 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 digits. The private-network or public-network number
is formed by deleting digits from and then inserting digits to the front of the
extension. Three types of conversion are supported: AAR, ARS, extension
number portability (ENP) and EXT.
■

555-233-506

For AAR and ARS, the resulting number is analyzed and routed as a
private-network (AAR) or public-network (ARS) number. If you wish to
block further digit conversion by AAR or ARS, you can enter n(o) in the
Conv(ersion) column.

Issue 5 October 2002

1913

Features and technical reference

■

For ENP, a node number must be entered. Node-number routing uses this
number to determine which route pattern should be used to route the call. If
the original extension is 4, 5, or 6 digits, an ENP code is chosen based on
the first 1 or 2 digits of the dialed string. Because it is not used for routing,
the ENP code can be independent of location.

■

If EXT is entered, the resulting number (which may be unchanged from the
dialed extensions) is routed over again as an extension. If you wish to block
further digit conversion by UDP, you can enter n(o) in the Conv(ersion)
column.

■

If no UDP entry exists for a particular extension or range of extensions,
those extensions are considered local.

UDP conversion is specified for individual extensions or groups of extensions
sharing the same leading digits, via the UDP screen and the matching pattern. A
matching pattern is the desired leading digits of an extension. For example, with a
5-digit UDP “123” is the matching pattern for all 100 possible 5-digit extensions
beginning with “123”. By contrast, “12345” would be a matching pattern
specifying a single extension.
Each extension code can be assigned to 1 of 6 possible treatments.
■

UDPCode — Conversion to AAR with given location code, further
conversion suppressed

■

AARCode — Conversion to AAR with given location code, further
conversion allowed

■

ENPCode — Conversion to private network number (via ENP screen),
route to given node number routing

■

TempOOS — Temporarily out of service, give reorder

■

Local — Local range of extensions

■

blank — Similar to local; however, this extension is not chosen when the
system is asked to “add a station”

When a user at a switch that is included in a UDP dials an extension, Avaya
MultiVantage first checks to see if the extension is assigned to a local station on
that switch. If so, the call is routed to the station, and UDP is not invoked. If the
extension is not found locally, the system checks to see if the extension matches
an assigned extension code. If the extension matches an assigned extension code,
the system performs the specified conversion into a private network number and
routes the call as specified. If more than one extension code matches, the “best”
match (most explicit digits) is used. For example, 1234 is chosen over 123 if
12345 is dialed. However, 123 is chosen if 12355 is dialed. If no matching
extension code is found, the user receives intercept treatment. Or, if Extended
Trunk Access (ETA) is enabled, the call routes via ETA.

1914

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Uniform Dial Plan

Example of how UDP works

To administer, assign each UDP code:
■

To a private network location code (RNX) or node number. (The RNX is
equivalent to an office code of a central office in a public network. This
RNX determines how a UDP call is routed.)

■

Assign each UDP code as either local or remote to the switch.

To understand the function of a UDP, review the following example.
A given station is called using the same 5-digit extension regardless of where in
the ETN the call originates. Three switches are included in the example. Each has
been assigned a list of RNX and UDP codes. See Figure 64 on page 1916.
SWITCH

RNX

UDP CODE

A

224

41

C

223

51

C

223

52

B

222

60

B

222

61

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1915

Features and technical reference

2

1

5

4

6

3
7

8
r764905 CJL 062296

1. Switch A
Dial Plan for extensions is
RNX=224
2. Switch B:
Dial Plan for Extensions is
and 61 RNX=222

41

3. Switch C:
Dial Plan for extensions is
and 52 RNX=223

51

4. Extension 41000
60

5. Extension 61234
6. Extension 60123
7. Extension 51234

Figure 64.

UDP Example

If a user at extension 41000 wants to call extension 61234, there are two choices:
■

Dial 61234

■

Dial the AAR access code followed by 222-1234

If 61234 is dialed, the system recognizes 61 as a remote UDP, determines the
associated RNX (222), and uses AAR to route the call to 222-1234.

1916

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Uniform Dial Plan

If the AAR access code and 222-1234 are dialed, the system finds the route
pattern for RNX 222 and routes the call to the switch associated with that RNX.
Whenever UDP is used to route a call to another switch, the correct digit deletion
and insertion must be specified within the route pattern so that the receiving
switch gets digits in the format it expects. Avaya MultiVantage can be configured
in several different ways.
■

If AAR is available on the receiving switch, Subnet Trunking can be used
to insert the AAR feature access code on the originating switch or digit
insertion may be used to insert it on the receiving switch. The receiving
switch then uses AAR digit conversion to convert 222 with 7 digits to an
extension by deleting 3 digits and inserting a 6.

■

If AAR is not available on the receiving switch, Subnet Trunking must be
used on the originating switch to delete the 222 and insert the digit 6 at the
beginning of the extension number so that the receiving switch can
continue to route correctly.

If the user at extension 51234 on Switch C dials extension 61234, the call must
first go through Switch A before proceeding to Switch B. When 61234 is dialed,
the system recognizes 61 as a UDP code, determines the associated RNX (222),
and uses AAR to route the call. The AAR feature access code plus 222-1234 are
outpulsed to Switch A. Switch A then recognizes the RNX 222 as a remote switch
and routes the call to Switch B and extension 61234. This same type of call
routing occurs when an extension at Switch B calls an extension at Switch C.
If extension 61234 on Switch B calls extension 61235, the system recognizes 61
as a local UDP code and routes the call directly to extension 61235.
Considerations

555-233-506

■

In North American network environments, extensions beginning with 0
may route to an attendant. You are encouraged to use another number as the
leading digit when assigning extensions.

■

When you call an extension on another switch, there may be a slight delay
before call-progress tones are applied. This delay is due to the trunk
signaling necessary to complete the call to the remote switch.

■

When you select the option to look at the UDP table first, calls that might
otherwise terminate at a local extension route over the network. This is
easily reversed. When you remove the extensions from the UDP table, the
local extension can be dialed again.

Issue 5 October 2002

1917

Features and technical reference

■

If AAR is active, facility restriction levels (FRLs) and Traveling Class
Marks (TCMs) can be sent along with the private network number.
UDPCode and AARCode conversions use the FRL assigned to the caller.
ENPNode conversion always raises the FRL to the maximum (7).
If an FRL is insufficient to access the facility, access is denied. There is no
prompt for an authorization code even if authorization codes are enabled
and administered.

■

If AAR is not active, tandem-tie trunks should not be used to transport
UDP numbers. The TCM is not recognized at the terminating switch.
NOTE:

Never use tandem-tie trunks to transport UDP numbers (the TCM and Hop
count will not be recognized as such following the extension received at the
receiving switch).
Interactions
■

Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR)
AAR routes UDP calls. (Included with UDP is the required AAR subset.) If
AAR is enabled in addition to UDP, then the 7-digit AAR number provides
the same routing as UDP.

■

Dial Plan
— All of the extension numbers on a switch are not necessarily part of
UDP. Any that do not belong to UDP are handled by a regular,
non-UDP Dial Plan associated with the switch.
— When administering the Dial Plan screen and designating a group of
extensions as UDP non-local, you can specify whether you want to
search for local extensions first or last. This allows flexibility to
change extensions from local to non-local and vice-versa.

■

DID Trunk Group
DID calls to a UDP extension number may require that the DID trunk
group insert enough digits to create the full extension number. For
example, if the DID trunk provides 4 digits, but a 5-digit UDP is in place,
then the appropriate leading digit must be inserted.

■

Distributed Communications System (DCS)
UDP is required when DCS is provided. The necessary UDP software is
provided with the DCS software.

■

Extension Number Portability (ENP)
If an extension code is administered to use ENP node routing, ENP routes
the call to the correct switch. If AAR is enabled in addition to UDP, the
7-digit AAR number provides the same routing as UDP (that is, via ENP).

1918

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Voice Message Retrieval

Voice Message Retrieval
Voice Message Retrieval allows attendants, phone users, and remote-access users
to retrieve Leave Word Calling (LWC) and Call Coverage messages.
Detailed description

Voice Message Retrieval is only used for the retrieval of messages. When a
terminal is in Voice Message Retrieval mode, it cannot be used to make calls or
access other features. Voice Message Retrieval can be used to retrieve your own
messages or messages for another user. However, a different user’s messages can
only be retrieved by a user at a phone or attendant console in the coverage path, by
an administered system-wide message retriever, or by a remote-access user when
the extension and associated security code are known. The number of
simultaneous Voice Message Retrieval users possible depends on the number of
speech-synthesizer circuit packs used in the system.
Certain phones and attendants can be designated for system-wide message
retrieval. These system-wide retrievers are the same as those used for Display
Message Retrieval and have the same privileges. Voice Message Retrieval cannot
be accessed from rotary phones.
You can use the system to restrict unauthorized users from retrieving messages.
Use the Lock function to restrict a phone and the Unlock function to release the
restriction. Users activate Lock by dialing a system-wide access code. They
cancel Lock by dialing a system-wide access code and then an Unlock security
code unique to the phone. These functions only apply to the phone where the
function is active. The system-wide access codes and security code used for the
Lock and Unlock functions are the same as those used for LWC message retrieval
by display. You can assign a status lamp to show the lock status of the phone.
Interactions
■

AUDIX Interface
Retrieval of LWC messages via Voice Message Retrieval is separate and
distinct from retrieval of messages via INTUITY. LWC messages left for a
principal on AUDIX cannot be accessed via Voice Message Retrieval.
However, the caller of Voice Message Retrieval is informed of any new
messages for the principal on AUDIX:
— The Voice Message Retrieval voices that there are AUDIX
messages.
— The Display Message Retrieval displays “Message Center AUDIX
Call.”

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1919

Features and technical reference

If your system has a voice-synthesizer circuit pack and LWC Activation is
active, users can retrieve messages from two locations:
— Users can retrieve LWC messages with Voice Message Retrieval.
— Users can retrieve all other messages with AUDIX.
If you do not have a TN725B speech-synthesizer board, non-display phone
users cannot retrieve LWC messages sent via the LWC button on a phone.
■

Bridged Call Appearance
Voice Message Retrieval on a Bridged Call Appearance functions the same
as if it were activated by the primary extension associated with the bridged
call appearance.

■

Leave Word Calling
Voice Message Retrieval enhances LWC by allowing any authorized
touch-tone phone user to retrieve messages.

Related topics

See ‘‘Audible message waiting’’ on page 1478 for information about letting users
know they have messages.
See ‘‘Feature Access Code’’ on page 781 for information about and field
descriptions on the Feature Access Code screen. Complete the LWC Message
Retrieval Lock, LWC Message Retrieval Unlock, Voice Coverage Message
Retrieval Access Code, and Voice Principal Message Retrieval Access Code fields
on this screen to administer voice message retrieval.
See ‘‘Feature-Related System Parameters’’ on page 795 for information about and
field descriptions on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. Complete the
Stations With System-Wide Retrieval Permission and Message Waiting Lamp
Indicates Status For fields on this screen to administer voice message retrieval.
See ‘‘Station’’ on page 1127 for information about and field descriptions on the
Station screen. Complete the Security Code field on this screen to administer
voice message retrieval.

1920

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Voice messaging systems

Voice messaging systems
Avaya MultiVantage supports several Avaya voice or multimedia messaging
systems. These systems allow users to send, retrieve, store, and forward messages,
as well as perform many other tasks associated with messages. In addition to
supporting multiple AUDIX systems, MultiVantage can have multiple hunt
groups associated with a single AUDIX system. This allows partitioning of the
voice ports into different hunt groups and different coverage paths to cover
different voice ports. Thus voice ports can be reserved for particular users or
groups of users (for example, those that use unique coverage paths).
The following features do not use coverage paths:
■

Transfer into AUDIX with the feature access code or the GOTO COVER
button

■

Last Call

If a local AUDIX and a remote AUDIX use the same hunt-group numbers, calls
route to the local hunt group.
Avaya MultiVantage supports the following systems:
INTUITY
AUDIX

INTUITY AUDIX runs on a separate MAP/5, MAP/40, or
MAP/100 PC. The switch communicates with INTUITY AUDIX
via analog voice ports and a data link. The switch can also
communicate with INTUITY AUDIX without the data link. In
this case, the switch and INTUITY AUDIX communicate by
sending and receiving special strings of touch-tone codes (dual
tone multifrequency tones) via analog voice ports. These
touch-tone codes are called mode codes and carry data such as
calling party ID, called party ID, and type of call.
INTUITY AUDIX allows up to 64 ports. This means up to 64
people can be simultaneously retrieving or leaving messages.
INTUITY AUDIX also supports fax and e-mail messaging.
For more information, see INTUITY AUDIX System Description
or INTUITY AUDIX Administration, and INTUITY Messaging
Solutions Integration with System 75, Generic 1 and 3, and
R5/6.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1921

Features and technical reference

Embedded
AUDIX

(Not available with GuestWorks) Embedded AUDIX runs on a
multifunction circuit pack assembly. This assembly fits into 2
contiguous slots in the MultiVantage switch. Embedded
AUDIX communicates with the switch via analog voice ports
with a data link. Embedded AUDIX can also communicate
exclusively via analog voice ports when set up to emulate a
digital phone set.
Embedded AUDIX allows up to 16 ports.
For more information, see DEFINITY AUDIX System Feature
Descriptions, DEFINITY AUDIX System Administration,
Switch Administration for DEFINITY AUDIX System, or
DEFINITY AUDIX System Forms Reference.

Octel
Serenade

Octel Serenade is a voice messaging system that supports
MultiVantage systems via QSIG signaling protocols.

Octel 100

Octel 100 runs on personal computer running the OS2
operating system.

Other non-Avaya messaging systems may also use mode codes to work with
Avaya MultiVantage.
Centralized Voice Mail

You can use a single voice mail system to support multiple MultiVantage systems
in a DCS network. In addition, you can use a voice mail system to support
multiple MultiVantage systems and Merlin Legend in a network via mode code.
For more information, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage™ Software.
Security Measures

! SECURITY ALERT:
Fraudulent long-distance calls can be placed through INTUITY
AUDIX, embedded AUDIX, and AUDIX R1 if proper security
precautions are not implemented.
The following actions help secure your system from unauthorized use.
■

For Intuity AUDIX, embedded AUDIX, and AUDIX R1
— Remove any unused or unassigned mail to help prevent exchange of
information through unassigned Voice Mail.
— Secure system lines that serve AUDIX and control where calls can
be placed.

1922

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Voice messaging systems

— Assign a restrictive COR, COS, and FRL to the station lines and
trunks serving AUDIX.
— Use switch CDR reports to determine if the lines are being used for
calls that are normally not within your sphere of business.
— Change default passwords on voice mailboxes immediately after
installation and use random numbers for passwords.
— Require passwords with at least 5 digits.
— Change system administration passwords to alphanumeric codes.
— INTUITY AUDIX, AUDIX R1, and embedded AUDIX provide a
maintenance/administration port. A remote port security device
provides an added layer of security to prevent unauthorized access
to this port.
■

For INTUITY AUDIX and embedded AUDIX
— Determine whether to only allow transfers to other AUDIX
subscribers or to any extension of the correct length. The most
secure approach is to only allow transfers to other AUDIX
subscribers. If you decide to allow transfers to any extension,
administer the COR on the AUDIX ports to prevent calls outside the
PBX or immediate Distributed Communications System (DCS) site
network.

■

For AUDIX only
— Activate Enhanced Call Transfer (ECT) to help prevent having
billable calls placed from unauthorized transfers outside of the
system. ECT performs call transfer over the data link between
AUDIX and the Avaya MultiVantage. (The destination extensions
must be administered on the switch dial plan.)

Interactions
■

Attendant Conference
An attendant who has split a call can conference the call with AUDIX by
dialing the Transfer Into AUDIX access code. The attendant presses
Release to drop out of the conference call.

■

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (external AUDIX only)
You can administer a hunt group as an AUDIX ACD split. You can then
obtain AUDIX traffic measurements with the ACD Call Management
System (CMS). Login occurs when AUDIX signals the switch to make a
voice port available for AUDIX service. Logout occurs when AUDIX
signals the switch to disable the port.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1923

Features and technical reference

AUDIX and ACD CMS must be connected to the same switch. If AUDIX
in the DCS feature is active, a CMS located on a switch other than the host
switch (AUDIX location) does not provide measurements for the AUDIX
ports.
Because AUDIX frequently takes voice ports in and out of service for
maintenance testing, high login activity may be seen for the AUDIX split
in the measurement reports.
On CMS reports that display an agent’s login ID, AUDIX voice ports
always show a login ID that is the same as the extension, even if you have
not administered login IDs on the switch.
■

Call Coverage
When a coverage call successfully completes to AUDIX or routes from a
remote switch to the host switch because of coverage, the principal is
dropped from the call (no temporary bridge appearance is maintained).
Coverage calls from a remote switch that fail to reach AUDIX as a
coverage point cannot be returned to the original coverage path on the
remote switch.

■

Call Forwarding
An AUDIX user can forward calls to a remote AUDIX hunt group or to the
host AUDIX hunt group. You must correctly administer the AUDIX
destination for the remote AUDIX hunt group.

■

Call Monitoring
Call Monitoring allows users to pick up the handset after the call goes to
AUDIX to listen to the message being left by the caller. This allows the
user to determine whether they want to talk to the caller or let them
complete their message.

■

Call Transfer
A call transfer out of AUDIX can be to a UDP extension. If the UDP
extension is on a remote switch, the call is treated as a direct call.
Additional trunks are used for calls transferred between DCS nodes.
Calls may be transferred into AUDIX by users handling redirected calls for
principals who are AUDIX subscribers.

■

Class of Restriction (COR)
A high FRL assigned in the COR allows callers to transfer to long-distance
numbers.
To prevent toll fraud, assign a low FRL to the AUDIX system ports.

1924

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Voice messaging systems

■

DCS — Leave Word Calling (external only)
In a DCS network, the called party may be on a different switch than the
calling party. If the DCS link is down, attempts to store Leave Word Cancel
messages are denied and intercept tone is returned. LWC requests are
always denied for principals with AUDIX LWC; in some instances, the
request to cancel LWC may appear to be active when it actually is not.
When the local switch communicates with INTUITY AUDIX via mode
codes, INTUITY AUDIX cannot support remote DCS switches.

■

Facility Test Call
Unauthorized calls can be placed using the facility test-call access code.
To prevent toll fraud, remove the facility test call access code.

■

Leave Word Calling (LWC)
You can have a principal’s LWC messages kept by AUDIX. The principal
can retrieve a message by calling AUDIX. The principal cannot retrieve the
message using other retrieval methods, but is notified of its existence by
AUDIX.
For other messaging services, you can have AUDIX report the existence of
waiting LWC messages for the principal, but not the message content. The
principal can retrieve the message using other retrieval methods, but is still
notified of the existence of AUDIX messages.
If the data link between the system and AUDIX is down, attempts to
activate LWC for an AUDIX-covered principal are denied and reorder tone
is returned.
If a caller attempts to cancel a LWC message sent to AUDIX, the caller
receives intercept tone if the called party is on the same switch. The caller
receives confirmation tone if the called party is on another switch in the
DCS network as long as the DCS data link to the called party’s switch is
operational, even though the message is not actually canceled.
When the local switch communicates with INTUITY AUDIX via mode
codes, INTUITY AUDIX does not accept or store LWC messages in user
mailboxes.

■

Ringback Queueing
Ringback Queueing does not apply to AUDIX calls. On direct calls to a
remote AUDIX, if all trunks to the host AUDIX are busy, busy tone is
returned. On coverage calls, if all trunks are busy, AUDIX is treated as a
busy coverage point. If there are coverage points after AUDIX, then the
call terminates at those points.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1925

Features and technical reference

■

Single-Digit Dialing and Mixed-Station Numbering
AUDIX is designed for use with a Uniform Dial Plan. It supports only one
extension length (3-, 4-, or 5-digit) that is used by AUDIX subscribers.
Single-Digit and Mixed Station Numbering cannot be used. However,
nothing prohibits connecting a switch to AUDIX that provides these
features, as long as all AUDIX subscribers have the same extension length.

■

Temporary Bridged Appearance
Stations that normally have a temporary bridged appearance with their
coverage point do not have that appearance if the coverage point is
AUDIX.

Related topics

See ‘‘Audible message waiting’’ on page 1478 for information about letting users
know they have messages.
See ‘‘Voice Message Retrieval’’ on page 1919 for information about retrieving
messages.
See INTUITY Integration with System 75 and DEFINITY Communications System
for the procedures on how to administer the switch for voice messaging for Intuity
AUDIX.
See Switch Administration for the embedded AUDIX System for the procedures on
how to administer the switch for voice messaging for embedded AUDIX.
See Switch Administration for AUDIX Voice Messaging for the procedures on
how to administer the switch for voice messaging for AUDIX R1.
See ‘‘Data modules’’ on page 707 for information about and field descriptions on
the Data Modules screen. Complete this screen (for one AUDIX link) to
administer the switch for voice messaging.
See ‘‘Packet Gateway Board’’ on page 1072 for information about and field
descriptions on the Packet Gateway Board screen. Complete all fields on this
screen to administer the switch for voice messaging.
See ‘‘Mode Code Related System Parameters’’ on page 1034 for information
about and field descriptions on the Mode Code Related System Parameters screen.
Complete all fields on this screen to administer the switch for voice messaging.
See ‘‘Hunt Group’’ on page 875 for information about and field descriptions on
the Hunt Group screen. Complete all fields (as required) on this screen to
administer the switch for voice messaging.

1926

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Whisper paging

See ‘‘Class of Service’’ on page 672 for information about and field descriptions
on the Class of Service screen. Complete the Call Fwd-All Calls field on this
screen to administer the switch for voice messaging.
See ‘‘Coverage Path’’ on page 696 for information about and field descriptions on
the Coverage Path screen. Complete all fields on this screen to administer the
switch for voice messaging.
See ‘‘Trunk Group’’ on page 1233 for information about and field descriptions on
the Trunk Group screen. Complete all fields on this screen to administer voice
messaging for a DCS configuration.

Whisper paging
Whisper paging allows one user to interrupt or “barge in” on another user’s call
and make an announcement. The paging user dials a feature access code or
presses a feature button, then dials the extension they want to call.
Only the person on the paged extension can hear the page: other parties on the call
cannot hear it, and the person making the page cannot hear anyone on the call. If
the paged user has a display phone, he or she can see who is making the whisper
page.
For example, let’s say users A and B are on a call. C has an urgent message for A
and makes a whisper page. All 3 users hear the tone that signals the page, but only
A hears the page itself. The person making the page, C, cannot hear A or B.
Brief description
Allowing users to make whisper pages

To make a whisper page users dial a feature access code or press a feature button,
then dial the extension of the user they are trying to reach.

555-233-506

■

To assign a feature access code, enter a code in the Whisper Page
Activation Access Code field on the Feature Access Code screen.

■

To give users a feature button for making a whisper page, use the Station
screen and administer a Whisper Page Activation button on users’ phones.

Issue 5 October 2002

1927

Features and technical reference

Allowing users to answer whisper pages
quickly

To give users a feature button for answering a whisper page, use the Station screen
and administer an Answerback button on users’ phones.
NOTE:

You cannot administer an Answerback button on an attendant console.
Attendants can make whisper pages but cannot receive them.
Normally, before a paged user can answer a whisper page he or she must complete
the active call or put it on hold. However, you can give users the ability to put an
active call on hold and speak directly to the person making a whisper page simply
by pushing a feature button. Once the Answerback button is pressed, the user can
treat both the paging call and the original call as separate calls and all call-related
features (conference, transfer, etc.) operate normally.
Allowing users to block whisper pages

To give users a feature button to block incoming whisper pages, use the Station
screen and administer a Whisper Page Off button on users’ phones.
Administer this function on a feature button with a lamp so that users can tell
whether or not blocking is active. Users can activate blocking even when they’re
on a call.
NOTE:

You cannot administer a Whisper Page Off button on a soft key.
Two features, Do Not Disturb and Privacy — Attendant Lockout, also block
incoming whisper pages.
Call redirection overrides

If a paged user is not on an active call, a whisper page is converted to a priority
call that overrides any of the following call redirection features:

1928

■

Call Forward All Calls

■

Call Forward Busy

■

Call Forward Don’t Answer

■

Send All Calls

■

Go To Cover

■

Call Coverage

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Whisper paging

For example, let’s say Call Forwarding — All Calls is activated on a phone. If
there are no active calls, a whisper page to that phone will ring at that phone as a
priority call. For information on blocking incoming whisper pages, see ‘‘Allowing
users to block whisper pages’’.
Group answering environments

Whisper paging does not work with extensions assigned to a group answering
environment. You cannot place a whisper page to the main extension assigned to a
hunt group, split, skill, or terminating extension group. You cannot place a
whisper page to any extension that is a member of one of these groups.
Network restrictions

Whisper paging does not work across networks (such as Distributed
Communication System networks or Electronic Tandem Networks): both the
paging user and paged user must be on the same switch.
Speakerphones

When a call is on the speaker, an incoming whisper page is heard over the speaker
too. When the group listening feature on a 6400-series phone is active, an
incoming whisper page is heard on both the handset and the speaker.
Interactions
■

Attendant
Attendants cannot intrude on a whisper page. If an attendant is using
intrusion to talk to a user, that user cannot receive a whisper page.
An attendant may initiate a whisper page while a call is split away using
auto-manual splitting. However, they cannot use Release, Hold, or Split
after the page is made.

■

Bridged Call Appearances
Whisper pages are designed to reach a specific user associated with a
specific extension.
— When an extension and one or more of its bridged appearances are
in use, parties on the bridged appearances hear the tone that signals
an incoming whisper page but only the user on the principle
extension hears the announcement. Only the display on the principle
extension shows the whisper page message.
— When all appearances are idle or only a bridged appearance is in
use, a whisper page rings the principal extension with priority
ringing.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1929

Features and technical reference

— If a user makes a whisper page on a call appearance that is a member
of a bridge group, then no others users in the bridge group can
connect to the call while the whisper page intrusion is active.
■

Busy Verification
You can’t make a whisper page to an extension while it’s being
busy-verified. You can’t busy-verify an extension while it’s making or
receiving a whisper page.

■

Calling Restrictions — Origination
Phones with this restriction cannot make whisper pages.

■

Calling Restrictions — Termination
Phones with this restriction cannot receive whisper pages.

■

Class of Restriction (COR)
A station user must have a COR that allows for station-to-station calling in
order to perform Whisper Paging to a member outside of their own COR.
Calling and called party restrictions also determine which extensions can
make and receive whisper pages.

■

Conference
Everyone on a conference call hears the tone that signals an incoming
whisper page. But only the owner of the paged extension hears the page,
and only the display on that phone shows the whisper page message.
If a conference call already has the maximum number of parties and trunks
allowed, you cannot make a whisper page to any of the participants. Parties
cannot be added to a conference call if an active whisper page is on the call.

■

Data Privacy — Permanent or Temporary
Any station that has Data Privacy activated cannot make a whisper page.

■

Data Restriction
A whisper page to a station is denied when Data Restriction is enabled on a
station or trunk.

■

Expert Agent Selection
You can’t make a whisper page by dialing an agent’s Logical Agent ID.
Pages must be made to a physical extension.

■

Go to Cover
If you make a whisper page and then press your Go To Cover button while
the page is in progress, the Go To Cover button doesn’t work. The opposite
is true as well. If you activate Go to Cover and then press the whisper page
activation button, you aren’t able to make a whisper page.

1930

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

■

Last Number Dialed
When you make a whisper page, it’s tracked as the last number dialed.

■

QSIG
This feature does not operate in a QSIG environment.

■

Remote access
You can’t make a whisper page by remote access. Both the paging party
and paged party must be on the same switch or the attempt is denied.

■

Tenant Partitioning
Whisper paging is permitted across tenant partitions if the assigned classes
of restriction allow for intercom calling between members of different
partitions. This feature is especially useful to attendants who serve multiple
partitions.
NOTE:

It is important for system administrators to ensure that this feature is
managed appropriately in systems with tenant partitioning. Some
tenants may not want other tenants to interrupt their calls.
■

Transfer
A call cannot be transferred during an active whisper page.

■

Vector Directory Number (VDN)
You can’t make a whisper page to a VDN. Pages must be made to a
physical extension.

Related topics

See ‘‘Paging users who are on active calls’’ on page 481 to administer whisper
paging.

Wideband Switching
(Not available with Offer B) Wideband Switching provides the ability to dedicate
2 or more ISDN-PRI B-channels or DS0 endpoints for applications that require
large bandwidth. It provides high-speed end-to-end connectivity between
endpoints where dedicated facilities are not economic or appropriate. ISDN-BRI
trunks do not support wideband switching.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1931

Features and technical reference

Brief description

ISDN-PRI (and the emulation of it by Asynchronous Transfer Mode-Circuit
Emulation Service (ATM-CES)) divides a T1 or E1 trunk into 24 (31 for E1)
information channels and one signaling channel for standard narrowband
communication. Certain applications, like video conferencing, require greater
bandwidth. You can combine several narrowband channels into one wideband
channel to accommodate the extra bandwidth requirement. Avaya MultiVantage
serves as a gateway to many types of high-bandwidth traffic. Wideband switching
is also supported by the Expansion Interface (EI) circuit pack and the DS1
Converter circuit pack (for Center Stage Switching or directly connected port
networks) and the ATM-EI circuit pack (for Asynchronous Transfer Mode
connected port networks). ATM-CES supports wideband switching only for
access, tie, and tandem trunks, not for line-side connections.
Wideband Switching supports:
■

High-speed video conferencing

■

WAN disaster recovery

■

Scheduled batch processing (for example, nightly file transfers)

■

LAN interconnections and imaging

■

Other high bandwidth applications involving high-speed data transmission,
video transmission, etc.

How to administer Wideband Switching

The following list shows the required screens you must to set up Wideband
Switching:

1932

■

Access Endpoint

■

PRI Endpoint

■

ISDN trunk group

■

Route Pattern

■

Fiber Link Administration (Optional: see the DEFINTY services
documentation for information about this screen.)

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Channel allocation

For standard narrowband communication, ISDN-PRI divides a T1 or E1 trunk as
follows:
■

T1 trunks are divided into 23 information channels and 1 signaling channel

■

E1 trunks are divided into 30 information channels, 1 signaling channel,
and 1 framing channel

Certain applications, like video conferencing, require greater bandwidth. You can
combine several narrowband channels into one wideband channel to
accommodate the extra bandwidth requirement. Avaya MultiVantage serves as a
gateway to many types of high-bandwidth traffic. In addition, DS1 converters are
used for wideband switching at remote locations.
The following table provides information on Wideband Switching channel types.
Channel Type

Number of Channels

Data Rate

H0

6

384 Kbps

H11

24

1536 Kbps

H12

30

1920 Kbps

NXDS0 (T1)

2-24

128–1536 Kbps

NXDS0 (E1)

2-31

128–1984 Kbps

Perform wideband line-side channel allocation using one of three allocation
algorithms: fixed, flexible, or floating.

555-233-506

■

Fixed allocation — Provides contiguous-channel aggregation. The starting
channel is constrained to a predetermined starting point. (Used only for H0,
H11, and H12 calls.)

■

Flexible allocation — Allows a wideband call to occupy noncontiguous
positions within a single T1 or E1 facility.

■

Floating allocation — Enforces contiguous-channel aggregation. The
starting channel is not constrained to a predetermined starting point.

Issue 5 October 2002

1933

Features and technical reference

Typical uses

A typical video application uses an ISDN-PRI interface to DS0 1 through 6 of the
line-side facility. See the following figure.

wdbndex CJL 061996

Figure Notes

1. Video application

8. Network

2. Port 1

9. DS0 24 D-channel

3. Port 2

10. DS0 23 unused

4. ISDN terminal adaptor

11. DS0 1–6 wideband

5. Line-side ISDN-PRI

12. DS0 24 D-channel

6. Avaya Media Server

13. DS0 7–23 narrow bands

7. ISDN or ATM-CES trunk

14. DS0 1–6 wideband

Figure 65.

Typical video broadband application

Endpoint applications with signaling

An endpoint application is the origination or destination point of a wideband call.
Endpoint applications can be any number of data applications based on the
customer’s particular needs.

1934

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

ISDN-PRI terminal adapters

For wideband switching with non-ISDN-PRI equipment, you can use an
ISDN-PRI terminal adapter. ISDN-PRI terminal adapters translate standard ISDN
signaling into a form that can be used by the endpoint application and vice versa.
The terminal adapter also must adhere to the PRI-endpoint boundaries as
administered on the Avaya MultiVantage switch when handling both incoming (to
the endpoint) applications and outgoing calls.
The terminal adapter passes calls to and receives calls from the line-side
ISDN-SETUP messages indicating the data rate and specific B-channels (DS0) to
be used and communicates all other call status information via standard ISDN
messages. See DEFINITY Line-Side ISDN Primary Rate Interface Technical
Reference for more information.
Line-side (T1 or E1) ISDN-PRI facility

A line-side ISDN-PRI (T1 or E1) facility is comprised of a group of DS0s (24 for
a T1 facility and 32 for an E1 facility). In this context, these DS0s are also called
channels. T1 facilities have 23 B-channels and a single D-channel. E1 facilities
have 30 B-channels, 1 D-channel, and a framing channel. Data flows
bi-directionally across the facility between the switch and the ISDN-PRI terminal
adapter.
PRI-endpoints

A PRI-endpoint (PE) is a combination of DS0 B-channels on a line-side
ISDN-PRI facility that has been assigned an extension.
A PRI-endpoint can support calls of lower bandwidth. In other words, a PE having
a width 6 (six DS0s) can handle a call of one channel (64 Kbps) up to and
including six channels (384 Kbps). Also, a PE can support calls on non-adjacent
channels. For example, an endpoint application connected to a PE defined as
using B-channels 1 through 6 of an ISDN-PRI facility could originate a call using
B-channels 1, 3, and 5 successfully. If the PE has been administered to use
flexible channel allocation, the algorithm for offering a call to the PE starts from
the first DS0 administered to the PE. Since only one active call is permitted on a
PE, contiguous B-channels are always selected unless one or more B-channels are
not in service.
A PE remains in service unless all of its B-channels are out of service. In other
words, if B-channel 1 is out of service and the PE is five B-channels wide, the PE
could still handle a wideband call of up to four B-channels in width. A PE can
only be active on a single call at any given time; that is, it is either considered idle,
active (busy), or out of service.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1935

Features and technical reference

One facility can support multiple separate and distinct PRI-endpoints (several
extensions) within a single facility. Non-overlapping contiguous sets of DS0s
(B-channels) are associated with each PE.
Universal digital signal level 1 board

The UDS1 board is the interface for line-side and network facilities carrying
wideband calls.
Non-signaling endpoint applications

Wideband can also support configurations using non-signaling (non-ISDN-PRI)
line-side T1 or E1 facilities. The endpoint applications are the same as those
defined for configurations with signaling.
Data service unit/channel service unit

This unit simply passes the call to the endpoint application. Unlike terminal
adapters, the device service unit (DSU)/channel service unit (CSU) does not have
signaling capability.
NOTE:

No DSU/CSU is needed if the endpoint application has a fractional T1
interface.
Line-side (T1 or E1) facility

This facility, like the ISDN-PRI facility, is composed of a group of DS0s (23 for a
T1 facility and 30 for an E1 facility). Line-side facilities are controlled solely
from the switch. Through the access-endpoint command, a specific DS0 or group
of DS0s is assigned an extension. This individual DS0 or group, along with the
extension, is known as a wideband access endpoint (WAE).
Wideband access endpoint

WAEs have no signaling interface to the switch. These endpoints simply transmit
and receive wideband data when the connection is active.
NOTE:

The switch can determine if the connection is active, but this does not
necessarily mean that data is actually coming across the connection.
A WAE is treated as a single endpoint and can support only one call. If all DS0s
comprising a wideband access endpoint are in service, then the wideband access
endpoint is considered in service. Otherwise, the wideband access endpoint is
considered out of service. If an in-service wideband access endpoint has no active
calls on its DS0s, it is considered idle. Otherwise, the wideband access endpoint is
considered busy.

1936

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Multiple WAEs are separate and distinct within the facility and endpoint
applications must be administered to send and receive the correct data rate over
the correct DS0s. An incoming call at the incorrect data rate is blocked.
Guidelines and examples

This section examines wideband and its components in relation to the following
specific customer usage scenarios:
■

High-speed video conferencing

■

Data backup connection

■

Scheduled batch processing

■

Primary data connectivity

■

Networking

High-speed video conferencing

All data rates are multiples of 64 Kbps; from 128 Kbps to 1,536 Kbps (T1) and
1,984 Kbps (E1) are supported. Key customer data rates are listed below.
Channel Type

Number of Channels

Data Rate

H0

6

384 Kbps

H11

24

1536 Kbps

H12

30

1920 Kbps

NXDS0 (T1)

2-24

128–1536 Kbps

NXDS0 (E1)

2-31

128–1984 Kbps

Data backup connection

Using wideband for data transmission backup provides customers with alternate
transmission paths for critical data in the event of primary transmission path
failure.
Scheduled batch processing. Scheduled batch processing applications are used

for periodic database updates (for example, retail inventory) or distributions (for
example, airline fare schedules). These updates are primarily done after business
hours and are often referred to as nightly file transfers. Wideband meets the high
bandwidth requirements at low cost for scheduled batch processing. In addition,
wideband allows the dedicated-access bandwidth for busy-hour switch traffic to
be used for these applications after business hours; no additional bandwidth costs
are incurred.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1937

Features and technical reference

The non-ISDN backup data connection is also appropriate for scheduled batch
processing applications. Administered Connections are used to schedule daily or
weekly sessions originating from this application.
Primary data connectivity. Permanent data connections (those always active

during business hours), such as interconnections between local area networks
(LANs), are well suited for Avaya MultiVantage when ISDN-PRI endpoints are
used. The ISDN end-to-end monitoring and the endpoint’s ability to react to
failures provide for critical data availability needs. With ISDN, endpoints can
detect network failures and initiate backup connections through the switch; ISDN
endpoints can also establish additional calls when extra bandwidth is needed.
Any failures not automatically restored by Avaya MultiVantage are signaled to the
endpoint application, which can initiate backup data connections over the same
PRI endpoint. Avaya MultiVantage routes the backup data connections over
alternate facilities if necessary.
Networking

All of the wideband networking is over ISDN-PRI facilities (and the emulation of
them by ATM-CES) but may connect to a variety of networks, other domestic
interexchange carriers’ services, private line, RBOC services, and services in
other countries.
ISDN-PRI trunk groups and channel
allocation

Only ISDN-PRI trunks (and the emulation of them by ATM-CES) support
wideband calls to the network. Wideband’s bandwidth requirements have
necessitated modification of the algorithms by which trunks look for clear
channels. The following section describes the search methods and their
relationship to the available wideband data services.
Facility lists

A wideband call accessing the network must reside on a single ISDN-PRI facility.
Trunks within a trunk group must be organized based on the facility on which they
reside. This is accomplished by compiling a facility list as trunks are administered
to a trunk group; if a trunk is added to a trunk group from a facility not already on
that trunk group’s list, that facility is added to the list in an order based on the
facility’s signaling group number and interface identifier. In other words, the
facility list is compiled in an ascending order based first on signaling group
number and second on the interface identifier assigned to the facility within the
signaling group. For example, if three facilities having signaling group/interface
identifier combinations of 1/1, 1/2, and 2/1 were associated with a trunk group,
then a call offered to that trunk group would search those facilities in the order as
they were just listed. Also note that since trunks within a given facility can span
several trunk groups, a single facility can be associated with several different
trunk groups.

1938

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Given this facility list concept, the algorithms have the ability to search for trunks,
by facility, in an attempt to satisfy the bandwidth requirements of a given
wideband call. If one facility does not have enough available bandwidth to
support a given call, or it is not used for a given call due to the constraints
presented in the following section, then the algorithm searches the next facility in
the trunk group for the required bandwidth (if there is more than one facility in the
trunk group).
In addition to searching for channels based on facilities and required bandwidth,
Port Network (PN) preferential trunk routing is also employed. This PN routing
applies within each algorithm at a higher priority than the constraints put on the
algorithm by the parameters listed later in this section. In short, all facilities that
reside on the same PN as the originating endpoint are searched in an attempt to
satisfy the bandwidth of a given call, prior to searching any facilities on another
PN.
Direction of trunk/hunting within facilities

The algorithms have the ability to select trunks from low B-channel to high
B-channel or from high B-channel to low B-channel with an ISDN facility. This is
a per ISDN trunk group option, but infers the direction of search within all ISDN
facilities (or portions of those facilities) administered within that trunk group.
This is necessary so the selection of trunks are not prone to as much glare as they
otherwise would be if trunks were chosen in the same direction by both user and
network sides of the ISDN interface. Note that in previous Avaya MultiVantage
releases, the order in which trunks were selected, whether through linear or
circular hunting, would always be with respect to the order in which trunks were
administered within the trunk group. Now, with the support of wideband services,
all trunks within an ISDN trunk group optioned for wideband are ordered based
on this new “direction of trunk/hunt with facilities” parameter, and without regard
to the order in which trunks are administered within the trunk group. If an ISDN
trunk group is not optioned for wideband, then a cyclical trunk hunt based on the
administration of trunks within the trunk group is still available.
H11

When a trunk group is administered to support H11, the algorithm to satisfy a call
requiring 1,536 Kbps of bandwidth uses a fixed allocation scheme. That is, the
algorithm searches for an available facility using the following facility-specific
channel definitions.

555-233-506

■

T1: H11 can only be carried on a facility without a D-channel being
signaled in a nonfacility-associated signaling (NFAS) arrangement
(B-channels 1-24 are used).

■

E1: Although the 1,536-kbps bandwidth could be satisfied using a number
of fixed starting points (for example, 1, 2, 3, etc.) the only fixed starting
point being supported is 1. Hence, B-channels 1–15 and 17–25 are always
used to carry an H11 call on an E1 facility.

Issue 5 October 2002

1939

Features and technical reference

If the algorithm cannot find an available facility within the trunk group that meets
these constraints, then the call is blocked from using this trunk group. In this case,
the call may be routed to a different trunk group preference via Generalized Route
Selection (GRS), at which time, based on the wideband options administered on
that trunk group, the call would be subject to another hunt algorithm (that is, either
the same H11 algorithm or perhaps an N x DS0 algorithm described in a later
paragraph).
This same hunt algorithm, when offered any other call (other than a 1,920-kbps
call) attempts to preserve idle facilities by selecting trunk(s) in a partially
contaminated facility if one exists. If the bandwidth required by this call cannot be
satisfied by any partially contaminated facility, then the call is placed on available
trunk(s) within an idle facility, thus contaminating the facility. Again, facilities are
selected via the trunk group’s facility list and with PN preference, and trunk(s)
within a facility are selected based on the direction of channel search
administered. Note that on a T1 facility, a D-channel is not considered a busy
trunk and results in a facility with a D-channel always being partially
contaminated. On an E1 facility, however, a D-channel is not considered a busy
trunk because H11 and H12 calls may still be placed on that facility; an E1 facility
with a D-channel and idle B-channels is considered an idle facility.
H12

Since H12 is 1,920 Kbps which is comprised of 30 B-channels, a 1,920-kbps call
can only be carried on an E1 facility. As with H11, the hunt algorithm uses a fixed
allocation scheme with channel 1 being the fixed starting point. Hence, an H12
call always is carried on B-channels 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 on an E1 facility (as
illustrated in the following table). When offered any other call (other than a
1,536-kbps call), the algorithm behaves as it does when H11 is optioned.

DS0s Comprising Each Channel

1940

Facility

ISDN
Interface

H11

H12

T1

23B + D

-

-

T1

24B (NFAS)

1-24

-

E1

30B + D

1-15, 17-25

1-15, 17-31

E1

31B (NFAS)

1-15, 17-25

1-15, 17-31

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

H0

When a trunk group is administered to support H0, the algorithm to satisfy a call
requiring 384 Kbps of bandwidth also uses a fixed allocation scheme. Unlike the
H11 fixed scheme which only supports a single fixed starting point, the H0 fixed
scheme supports four (T1) or five (E1) fixed starting points. The H0 algorithm
searches for an available quadrant within a facility based on the direction of trunk
or hunt administered. If the algorithm cannot find an available quadrant within
any facility allocated to this trunk group, then the call is blocked from using this
trunk group. Again, based on GRS administration, the call may route to a different
trunk group preference and be subject to another algorithm based on the wideband
options administered.
This same trunk or hunt algorithm, when offered any narrowband or N x DS0 call,
attempts to preserve idle quadrants by choosing a trunk(s) in a partially
contaminated quadrant if one exists. If a partially contaminated quadrant capable
of carrying the call does not exist, then the call is placed on available trunk(s)
within an idle quadrant, thus contaminating the quadrant. Again, facilities are
selected via the trunk group’s facility list and with PN preference, and a trunk(s)
within a facility is selected based on the direction administered. Note that a
D-channel is considered a busy trunk and results in the top most quadrant of a T1,
B-channels 19 to 24, always being partially contaminated. This is not true for
NFAS.
If this H0 optioned trunk group is also administered to support H11, H12, or N x
DS0, then this algorithm also attempts to preserve idle facilities. In other words,
when offered a narrowband, H0, or N x DS0 call, the algorithm searches
partially-contaminated facilities before it searches to idle facilities.
N x DS0

For the N x DS0 multi-rate service, a trunk group parameter determines whether a
floating or a flexible trunk allocation scheme is to be used. The algorithm to
satisfy an N x DS0 call is either floating or flexible.

555-233-506

■

Floating (Contiguous) — In the floating scheme, an N x DS0 call is placed
on a contiguous group of B-channels large enough to satisfy the requested
bandwidth without any constraint being put on the starting channel (that is,
no fixed starting point trunk).

■

Flexible — In the flexible scheme, an N x DS0 call is placed on any set of
B-channels as long as the requested bandwidth is satisfied. There is
absolutely no constraint such as contiguity of B-channels or fixed starting
points. Of course, as with all wideband calls, all the B-channels comprising
the wideband call must reside on the same ISDN facility.

Issue 5 October 2002

1941

Features and technical reference

Regardless of the allocation scheme employed, the N x DS0 algorithm, like
the H11 and H12 algorithms, attempts to preserve idle facilities when
offered B, H0, and N x DS0 calls. This is important so that N x DS0 calls,
for large values of N, have a better chance of being satisfied by a given
trunk group. However, if one of these calls cannot be satisfied by a
partially-contaminated facility and an idle facility exists, a trunk on that
idle facility is selected, thus contaminating that facility.
There are additional factors to note regarding specific values of N and the
N x DS0 service:
— N = 1 — this is considered a narrowband call and is treated as any
other voice or narrowband-data (B-channel) call.
— N = 6 — if a trunk group is optioned for both H0 and N x DS0
service, a 384-kbps call offered to that trunk group is treated as an
H0 call and the H0 constraints apply. If the H0 constraints cannot be
met, then the call is blocked.
— N = 24 — if a trunk group is optioned for both H11 and N x DS0
service, a 384-kbps call offered to that trunk group is treated as an
H0 call and the H0 constraints apply. If the H0 constraints cannot be
met, then the call is blocked.
— N = 24 — if a trunk group is optioned for both H11 and N x DS0
service, a 1,536-kbps call offered to that trunk group is treated as an
H11 call and the H11 trunk allocation constraints apply.
— N = 30 — if a trunk group is optioned for both H12 and N x DS0
service, a 1,920-kbps call offered to that trunk group is treated as an
H12 call and the H12 trunk allocation constraints apply.
Glare prevention

Glare occurs when both sides of an ISDN interface select the same B-channel for
call initiation. For example, a user side of an interface selects the B-channel for an
outgoing call and, before the switch receives and processes the SETUP message,
the switch selects the same B-channel for call origination. Since wideband calls
use more channels, the chances of glare are greater. Glare conditions can be
limited with proper channel administration, but they may never be eliminated and
some calls may still be dropped.
Some glare situations might not be resolvable. In one case, the network and the
user side may send SETUP messages simultaneously or nearly simultaneously.
Another glare scenario can occur in the brief window after the SETUP message
has been sent but before the first response is received from the switch at the other
side of the interface. If an incoming SETUP arrive during this window, the
incoming SETUP message is allowed to proceed and the outgoing call is dropped.
Various glare situations and their resolution are described in the following table.

1942

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Avaya MultiVantage does not negotiate channels for wideband calls.
GLARE RESOLUTION
Outgoing
Call Type

Incoming
Call Type

Switch-Supporting
User Protocol

Switch-Supporting
Network Protocol

B-channel

B-channel

No negotiation

Negotiation is attempted

Incoming call (from
network) wins

Incoming call (from user)
dropped if negotiation is
unsuccessful

Outgoing call (to network)
retried on another trunk

Outgoing call (to user) stays
up

No negotiation

No negotiation

Incoming call (from
network) dropped

Incoming call (from user)
dropped

Outgoing calls (to network)
stay up but likely are
dropped by network
because channels are in use,
although there is a
possibility some switches
might negotiate these calls.

Outgoing calls (to user) stay
up and possibly stay up if
other side lets the network
call win.

No negotiation

Negotiation is attempted

Incoming call (from
network) wins

Incoming call (from user)
dropped if negotiation is
unsuccessful

Outgoing call (to network)
retried on another trunk

Outgoing call (to user) stays
up

No negotiation

No negotiation

Incoming call (from
network) dropped

Incoming call (from user)
dropped

Outgoing call (to network)
stays up but likely are
dropped by network
because channels are in use.

Outgoing call (to user) stays
up and may not be dropped
by other side because other
side, if it is not an Avaya
MultiVantage, may let the
network call win.

B-channel(s)

Wide

Wide

Wide

B-channel(s)

Wide

Continued on next page

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1943

Features and technical reference

To reduce glare probability, the network needs to be administered so both sides of
the interface select channels from opposite ends of facilities. For example, on a
23B+D trunk group, the user side could be administered to select B-channels
starting at channel 23 while the network side would be administered to start
selecting at channel 1. Using the same example, if channel 22 is active but channel
23 is idle, the user side should select channel 23 for re-use. This is known as linear
trunk hunt and is the hunt option used by Avaya MultiVantage for wideband.
Blocking prevention

Blocking occurs when insufficient B-channels required to make a call are
available. Narrowband calls require only one channel so blocking is less likely
than with wideband calls that require multiple B-channels. Blocking also occurs
for wideband calls when bandwidth is not available in the appropriate format (that
is, fixed, floating, or flexible).
To reduce blocking, the switch selects trunks for both wideband and narrowband
calls to maximize availability of idle fixed channels for H0, H11, and H12 calls
and idle floating channels for N x DS0 calls that require a contiguous bandwidth.
The strategy for preserving idle channels depends on the channel type. The
chances for blocking are reduced if you use a flexible algorithm, assuming it is
supported on the other end.

Channel Type

Blocking Minimization Strategy

H0

Preserve idle quadrants

H11

Preserve idle facilities

H12

Preserve idle facilities

Flexible NxDS0

Preserve idle facilities

Floating NxDS0

Preserve idle facilities as first priority

Considerations
■

1944

For example, if the user side is provisioned to start at the high side (DS0
23) and DS0 22 is idle but DS0 23 is active, reselect DS0 22 for the next
call. This is known as linear trunk hunting. Only the direction of hunt is
administrable.

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Wideband Switching

Interactions
■

Administered Connections
Provides call initiation for WAEs. All Administered Connections that
originate from WAEs use the entire bandwidth administered for WAE. The
destination of an Administered Connection can be a PRI endpoint.

■

Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA)
Treats wideband calls as single-trunk calls so that a single ACA-referral
call is made if an ACA-referral call is required. The call is on the lowest
B-channel associated with the wideband call.

■

Call Coverage
A wideband endpoint extension cannot be administered as a coverage point
in a call-coverage path.

■

Call Detail Recording (CDR)
When CDR is active for the trunk group, all wideband calls generate CDR
records. The feature flag indicates a data call and CDR records contain
bandwidth and Bearer Capability Class (BCC).

■

Call Forwarding
You must block Call Forwarding through Class of Service.

■

Call Management System (CMS) and Basic Call Management System
(BCMS)
Wideband calls can be carried over trunks that are measured by CMS and
BCMS. Wideband endpoints are not measured by CMS and BCMS.

■

Call Vectoring
PRI endpoints use a vector-directory number when dialing. For example,
PRI endpoint 1001 dials VDN 500. VDN 500 points to Vector 1. Vector 1
can point to other PRI endpoints such as route-to 1002, or route-to 1003, or
busy.
Call Vectoring is used by certain applications. When an incoming
wideband call hunts for an available wideband endpoint, the call can route
to a VDN, that sends the call to the first available PRI endpoint.

■

Class of Restriction (COR)
COR identifies caller and called-party privileges for PRI endpoints.
Administer the COR so that account codes are not required. Forced entry of
account codes is turned off for wideband endpoints.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1945

Features and technical reference

■

Class of Service (COS)
COS determines the class of features that a wideband endpoint can
activate.

■

Facility Associated Signaling (FAS) and Non-Facility Associated
Signaling (NFAS)
FAS and NFAS with or without D-Channel Backup requires administration
via signaling groups for trunk-side wideband interfaces.

■

Facility Busy Indication
You can administer a busy-indicator button for a wideband-endpoint
extension, but the button does not accurately track endpoint status.

■

Facility Test Calls
Use Facility Test Calls to perform loop-back testing of the wideband call
facility.

■

Generalized Route Selection (GRS)
GRS supports wideband BCC to identify wideband calls. GRS searches a
route pattern for a preference that has wideband BCC. Route preferences
that support wideband BCC also support other BCCs to allow different call
types to share the same trunk group.

■

CO Trunk (TTC - Japan) Circuit Pack
The CO Trunk (TTC - Japan) circuit pack cannot perform wideband
switching. No member of the circuit pack should be a member of a
wideband group.

World-Class Tone Detection and
Generation
World-Class Tone Detection allows Avaya MultiVantage to identify and handle
different types of call-progress tones. The tone detector and identification is used
to display on Data Terminal Dialing and for deciding when to send digits on trunk
calls through Abbreviated Dialing, ARS, AAR, and Data Terminal Dialing.
World-Class Tone Generation allows you to define call-progress tones. You can
select values for frequency and cadence. If you do not define a call-progress tone,
Avaya MultiVantage sends silence. Brief call-waiting tones are optimal because,
while a tone is sounding, speech cannot be heard.
An Avaya representative must administer tone detection and tone generation when
establishing country-specific system parameters.

1946

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

World-Class Tone Detection and Generation

Interactions
■

Data Modules
Multiline Data Terminal Dialing is disabled if the Multiple-line Level of
Tone Detection field is medium or broadband. It is enabled if the Level of
Tone Detection field is precise.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1947

Features and technical reference

1948

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Glossary
GL
and abbreviations

Numerics
800 service
A service in the United States that allows incoming calls from certain areas to an assigned number for a
flat-rate charge based on usage.

A
AA

Archangel. See angel.
AAC

ATM access concentrator
AAR

Automatic Alternate Routing
abandoned call
An incoming call in which the caller hangs up before the call is answered.
Abbreviated Dialing (AD)
A feature that allows callers to place calls by dialing just one or two digits.
AC

1. Alternating current.
2. See Administered Connection (AC).
ACA
See Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA).
ACB
See Automatic Callback (ACB).
ACD
See Automatic Call Distribution (ACD).
ACD agent

See agent.
ACU

See Automatic calling unit (ACU)
ACW

See after-call work (ACW) mode.
access code
A 1-, 2-, or 3-digit dial code used to activate or cancel a feature, or access an outgoing trunk.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002 1949

Glossary and abbreviations

access endpoint
Either a nonsignaling channel on a DS1 interface or a nonsignaling port on an analog tie-trunk circuit pack
that is assigned a unique extension.
access tie trunk
A trunk that connects a main communications system with a tandem communications system in an electronic
tandem network (ETN). An access tie trunk can also be used to connect a system or tandem to a serving office
or service node. Also called access trunk.
access trunk
See access tie trunk.
ACCUNET
A trademarked name for a family of digital services offered by AT&T in the United States.
ACD

See Automatic Call Distribution (ACD). ACD also refers to a work state in which an agent is on an
ACD call.
ACD work mode
See work mode.
active-notification association
A link that is initiated by an adjunct, allowing it to receive event reports for a specific switch entity, such as an
outgoing call.
active-notification call
A call for which event reports are sent over an active-notification association (communication channel) to the
adjunct. Sometimes referred to as a monitored call.
active notification domain
VDN or ACD split extension for which event notification has been requested.
ACTR
Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement
ACU

See Automatic calling unit (ACU).
AD

See Abbreviated Dialing (AD).
ADAP

AUDIX Data Acquisition Package
ADC

See analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
adjunct
A processor that does one or more tasks for another processor and that is optional in the configuration of the
other processor. See also application.
adjunct-control association
A relationship initiated by an application via Third Party Make Call, the Third Party Take Control, or Domain
(Station) Control capabilities to set up calls and control calls already in progress.
adjunct-controlled call
Call that can be controlled using an adjunct-control association. Call must have been originated via Third
Party Make Call or Domain (Station) Control capabilities or must have been taken control of via Third Party
Take Control or Domain (Station) Control capabilities.

1950

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

A

adjunct-controlled split
An ACD split that is administered to be under adjunct control. Agents logged into such splits must do all telephony work, ACD login/ logout, and changes of work mode through the adjunct (except for auto-available
adjunct-controlled splits, whose agents may not log in/out or change work mode).
adjunct-monitored call
An adjunct-controlled call, active-notification call, or call that provides event reporting over a domain-control
association.
Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI)
A recommendation for interfacing adjuncts and communications systems, based on the CCITT Q.932 specification for layer 3.
ADM

Asynchronous data module
administer
To access and change parameters associated with the services or features of a system.
Administered Connection (AC)
A feature that allows the switch to automatically establish and maintain end-to-end connections between
access endpoints (trunks) and/or data endpoints (data modules).
administration group
See capability group.
administration terminal
A terminal that is used to administer and maintain a system. See also terminal.
Administration Without Hardware (AWOH)
A feature that allows administration of ports without associated terminals or other hardware.
ADU

See asynchronous data unit (ADU).
AE

See access endpoint.
AFRL
Alternate Facility Restriction Levels
after-call work (ACW) mode
A mode in which agents are unavailable to receive ACD calls. Agents enter the ACW mode to perform
ACD-related activities such as filling out a form after an ACD call.
AG

ASAI Gateway
agent
A person who receives calls directed to a split. A member of an ACD hunt group or ACD split. Also called an
ACD agent.
agent report
A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured agents.
AIM

Asynchronous interface module
AIOD

Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1951

Glossary and abbreviations

ALBO

Automatic Line Build Out
All trunks busy (ATB)
The state in which no trunks are available for call handling.
ALM-ACK

Alarm acknowledge
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
See ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange).
AMW

Automatic Message Waiting
AN

Analog
analog
The representation of information by continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude, frequency,
and phase. See also digital.
analog data
Data that is transmitted over a digital facility in analog (PCM) form. The data must pass through a modem
either at both ends or at a modem pool at the distant end.
analog telephone
A telephone that receives acoustic voice signals and sends analog electrical signals along the telephone line.
Analog telephones are usually served by a single wire pair (tip and ring). The model-2500 telephone set is a
typical example of an analog telephone.
analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
A device that converts an analog signal to digital form. See also digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
angel
A microprocessor located on each port card in a processor port network (PPN). The angel uses the control-channel message set (CCMS) to manage communications between the port card and the archangel on the
controlling switch-processing element (SPE). The angel also monitors the status of other microprocessors on
a port card and maintains error counters and thresholds.
ANI

See Automatic Number Identification (ANI).
ANSI
American National Standards Institute. A United States professional/technical association supporting a variety of standards.
answerback code
A number used to respond to a page from a code-calling or loudspeaker-paging system, or to retrieve a parked
call.
AOC
Advice of Charge
AOL

Attendant-offered load
AP

Applications processor

1952

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

A

API
Application programming interface
APLT

Advanced Private-Line Termination
appearance
A software process that is associated with an extension and whose purpose is to supervise a call. An extension
can have multiple appearances. Also called call appearance, line appearance, and occurrence. See also call
appearance.
application
An adjunct that requests and receives ASAI services or capabilities. One or more applications can reside on a
single adjunct. However, the switch cannot distinguish among several applications residing on the same
adjunct and treats the adjunct, and all resident applications, as a single application. The terms application and
adjunct are used interchangeably throughout this document.
applications processor
A micro-computer based, program controlled computer providing application services for the DEFINITY
switch. The processor is used with several user-controlled applications such as traffic analysis and electronic
documentation.
application service element
See capability group.
architecture
The organizational structure of a system, including hardware and software.
ARS

See Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
ASA
Avaya Site Administration.
ASAI

See Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI)
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)
The standard code for representing characters in digital form. Each character is represented by an 8-bit code
(including parity bit).
ASG
Access Security Gateway.
association
A communication channel between adjunct and switch for messaging purposes. An active association is one
that applies to an existing call on the switch or to an extension on the call.
asynchronous data transmission
A method of transmitting data in which each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit,
thus permitting data characters to be transmitted at irregular intervals. This type transmission is advantageous
when transmission is not regular (characters typed at a keyboard). Also called asynchronous transmission.
See also synchronous data transmission.
asynchronous data unit (ADU)
A device that allows direct connection between RS-232C equipment and a digital switch.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1953

Glossary and abbreviations

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)
A packet-like switching technology in which data is transmitted in fixed-size (53-byte) cells. ATM provides
high-speed access for data communication in LAN, campus, and WAN environments.
ATB

See All trunks busy (ATB).
ATD

See Attention dial (ATD).
attendant
A person at a console who provides personalized service for incoming callers and voice-services users by performing switching and signaling operations. See also ATM-CES.
ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).
ATM-CES

Asynchronous Transfer Mode-Circuit Emulation Service
attendant console
The workstation used by an attendant. The attendant console allows the attendant to originate a call, answer
an incoming call, transfer a call to another extension or trunk, put a call on hold, and remove a call from hold.
Attendants using the console can also manage and monitor some system operations. Also called console. See
also attendant.
Attention dial (ATD)
A command in the Hayes modem command set for asynchronous modems.
Audio Information Exchange (AUDIX)
A fully integrated voice-mail system. Can be used with a variety of communications systems to provide
call-history data, such as subscriber identification and reason for redirection.
AUDIX

See Audio Information Exchange (AUDIX).
auto-in trunk group
Trunk group for which the CO processes all of the digits for an incoming call. When a CO seizes a trunk from
an auto-in trunk group, the switch automatically connects the trunk to the destination — typically an ACD
split where, if no agents are available, the call goes into a queue in which callers are answered in the order in
which they arrive.
Auto-In Work mode
One of four agent work modes: the mode in which an agent is ready to process another call as soon as the current call is completed.
Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR)
A feature that routes calls to other than the first-choice route when facilities are unavailable.
Automatic Callback (ACB)
A feature that enables internal callers, upon reaching a busy extension, to have the system automatically connect and ring both parties when the called party becomes available.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
A feature that answers calls, and then, depending on administered instructions, delivers messages appropriate
for the caller and routes the call to an agent when one becomes available.

1954

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

A

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) split
A method of routing calls of a similar type among agents in a call center. Also, a group of extensions that are
staffed by agents trained to handle a certain type of incoming call.
Automatic calling unit (ACU)
A device that places a telephone call.
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA)
A feature that tracks calls of unusual duration to facilitate troubleshooting. A high number of very short calls
or a low number of very long calls may signify a faulty trunk.
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
Representation of the calling number, for display or for further use to access information about the caller.
automatic restoration
A service that restores disrupted connections between access endpoints (nonsignaling trunks) and data endpoints (devices that connect the switch to data terminal and/or communications equipment). Restoration is
done within seconds of a service disruption so that critical data applications can remain operational.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
A feature that allows the system to automatically choose the least-cost way to send a toll call.
automatic trunk
A trunk that does not require addressing information because the destination is predetermined. A request for
service on the trunk, called a seizure, is sufficient to route the call. The normal destination of an automatic
trunk is the communications-system attendant group. Also called automatic incoming trunk and automatic tie
trunk.
AUX

Auxiliary
auxiliary equipment
Equipment used for optional system features, such as Loudspeaker Paging and Music-on-Hold.
auxiliary trunk
A trunk used to connect auxiliary equipment, such as radio-paging equipment, to a communications system.
Aux-Work mode
A work mode in which agents are unavailable to receive ACD calls. Agents enter Aux-Work mode when
involved in non-ACD activities such as taking a break, going to lunch, or placing an outgoing call.
AVD

Alternate voice/data
AWOH

See Administration Without Hardware (AWOH).
AWG

American Wire Gauge
AWT

Average work time

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1955

Glossary and abbreviations

B
B8ZS

Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution.
bandwidth
The difference, expressed in hertz, between the defined highest and lowest frequencies in a range.
barrier code
A security code used with the Remote Access feature to prevent unauthorized access to the system.
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems. BRI runs at 192 Mbps and provides two 64-kbps B-channels (voice and data) and one 16-kbps D-channel (signaling). The D-channel connects, monitors, and disconnects all calls. It also can carry low-speed
packet data at 9.6 kbps.
baud
A unit of transmission rate equal to the number of signal events per second. See also bit rate and bits per second (bps).
BCC
See Bearer capability class (BCC).
BCD
Binary coded decimal
BCMS

Basic Call Management System
BCT

See business communications terminal (BCT).
Bearer capability class (BCC)
Code that identifies the type of a call (for example, voice and different types of data). Determination of BCC
is based on the caller’s characteristics for non-ISDN endpoints and on the Bearer Capability and Low-Layer
Compatibility Information Elements of an ISDN endpoint. Current BCCs are 0 (voice-grade data and voice),
1 (DMI mode 1, 56 kbps data transmission), 2 (DMI mode 2, synchronous/asynchronous data transmission up
to 19.2 kbps) 3 (DMI mode 3, 64 kbps circuit/packet data transmission), 4 (DMI mode 0, 64 kbps synchronous data), 5 (temporary signaling connection, and 6 (wideband call, 128–1984 kbps synchronous data).
BER

Bit error rate
BHCC

Busy-hour call completions
bit (binary digit)
One unit of information in binary notation, having two possible values: 0 or 1.
bits per second (bps)
The number of binary units of information that are transmitted or received per second. See also baud and bit
rate.
bit rate
The speed at which bits are transmitted, usually expressed in bits per second. Also called data rate. See also
baud and bits per second (bps).

1956

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

B

BLF

Busy Lamp Field
BN

Billing number
BOS

Bit-oriented signaling
BPN

Billed-party number
bps

See bits per second (bps).
bridge (bridging)
The appearance of a voice terminal’s extension at one or more other voice terminals.
BRI
The ISDN Basic Rate Interface specification.
bridged appearance
A call appearance on a voice terminal that matches a call appearance on another voice terminal for the duration of a call.
BTD
Busy Tone Disconnect
BTU

British Thermal Unit
buffer
1. In hardware, a circuit or component that isolates one electrical circuit from another. Typically, a buffer
holds data from one circuit or process until another circuit or process is ready to accept the data.
2. In software, an area of memory that is used for temporary storage.
bus
A multiconductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several
sources to any of several destinations.
business communications terminal (BCT)
A digital data terminal used for business applications. A BCT can function via a data module as a special-purpose terminal for services provided by a processor or as a terminal for data entry and retrieval.
BX.25
A version of the CCITT X.25 protocol for data communications. BX.25 adds a fourth level to the standard
X.25 interface. This uppermost level combines levels 4, 5, and 6 of the ISO reference model.
bypass tie trunks
A 1-way, outgoing tie trunk from a tandem switch to a main switch in an ETN. Bypass tie trunks, provided in
limited quantities, are used as a last-choice route when all trunks to another tandem switch are busy. Bypass
tie trunks are used only if all applicable intertandem trunks are busy.
byte
A sequence of (usually eight) bits processed together.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1957

Glossary and abbreviations

C
cabinet
Housing for racks, shelves, or carriers that hold electronic equipment.
cable
Physical connection between two pieces of equipment (for example, data terminal and modem) or between a
piece of equipment and a termination field.
cable connector
A jack (female) or plug (male) on the end of a cable. A cable connector connects wires on a cable to specific
leads on telephone or data equipment.
CACR

Cancellation of Authorization Code Request
CAG

Coverage answer group
call appearance
1. For the attendant console, six buttons, labeled a–f, used to originate, receive, and hold calls. Two lights next
to the button show the status of the call appearance.
2. For the voice terminal, a button labeled with an extension and used to place outgoing calls, receive incoming calls, or hold calls. Two lights next to the button show the status of the call appearance.
call-control capabilities
Capabilities (Third Party Selective Hold, Third Party Reconnect, Third Party Merge) that can be used in
either of the Third Party Call Control ASE (cluster) subsets (Call Control and Domain Control).
Call Detail Recording (CDR)
A feature that uses software and hardware to record call data (same as CDRU).
Call Detail Recording utility (CDRU)
Software that collects, stores, optionally filters, and outputs call-detail records.
Call Management System (CMS)
An application, running on an adjunct processor, that collects information from an ACD unit. CMS enables
customers to monitor and manage telemarketing centers by generating reports on the status of agents, splits,
trunks, trunk groups, vectors, and VDNs, and enables customers to partially administer the ACD feature for a
communications system.
call-reference value (CRV)
An identifier present in ISDN messages that associates a related sequence of messages. In ASAI, CRVs distinguish between associations.
call vector
A set of up to 15 vector commands to be performed for an incoming or internal call.
callback call
A call that automatically returns to a voice-terminal user who activated the Automatic Callback or Ringback
Queuing feature.
call-waiting ringback tone
A low-pitched tone identical to ringback tone except that the tone decreases in the last 0.2 seconds (in the
United States). Call-waiting ringback tone notifies the attendant that the Attendant Call Waiting feature is
activated and that the called party is aware of the waiting call. Tones in international countries may sound different.

1958

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

C

call work code
A number, up to 16 digits, entered by ACD agents to record the occurrence of customer-defined events (such
as account codes, social security numbers, or phone numbers) on ACD calls.
CAMA

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
carrier
An enclosed shelf containing vertical slots that hold circuit packs.
carried load
The amount of traffic served by traffic-sensitive facilities during a given interval.
CARR-POW

Carrier Port and Power Unit for AC Powered Systems
CAS

Centralized Attendant Service or Call Accounting System
capability
A request or indication of an operation. For example, Third Party Make Call is a request for setting up a call;
event report is an indication that an event has occurred.
capability group
Set of capabilities, determined by switch administration, that can be requested by an application. Capability
groups denote association types. For example, Call Control is a type of association that allows certain functions (the ones in the capability group) to be performed over this type of association. Also referred to as
administration groups or application service elements (ASEs).
CA-TSC

Call-Associated Temporary Signaling Connection
cause value
A value is returned in response to requests or in event reports when a denial or unexpected condition occurs.
ASAI cause values fall into two coding standards: Coding Standard 0 includes any cause values that are part
of AT&T and CCITT ISDN specifications; Coding standard 3 includes any other ASAI cause values. This
document uses a notation for cause value where the coding standard for the cause is given first, then a slash,
then the cause value. Example: CS0/100 is coding standard 0, cause value 100.
CBC

Call-by-call or coupled bonding conductor
CC

Country code
CCIS

Common-Channel Interoffice Signaling
CCITT
CCITT (Comitte Consultatif International Telephonique et Telegraphique), now called International Telecommunications Union (ITU). See International Telecommunications Union (ITU).
CCMS

Control-Channel Message Set
CCRON
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off-Net

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1959

Glossary and abbreviations

CCS

See capability.
CCS or hundred call seconds
A unit of call traffic. Call traffic for a facility is scanned every 100 seconds. If the facility is busy, it is
assumed to have been busy for the entire scan interval. There are 3600 seconds per hour. The Roman numeral
for 100 is the capital letter C. The abbreviation for call seconds is CS. Therefore, 100 call seconds is abbreviated CCS. If a facility is busy for an entire hour, then it is said to have been busy for 36 CCS. See also
Erlang.
CCSA

Common-Control Switching Arrangement
CDM

Channel-division multiplexing
CDOS

Customer-dialed and operator serviced
CDPD

Customer database-provided digits
CDR

See Call Detail Recording (CDR).
CDRP

Call Detail Record Poller
CDRR

Call Detail Recording and Reporting
CDRU

See Call Detail Recording utility (CDRU).
CED

Caller entered digits
CEM

Channel-expansion multiplexing
center-stage switch (CSS)
The central interface between the processor port network and expansion port networks in a CSS-connected
system.
central office (CO)
The location housing telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll
facilities for long-distance calling.
central office (CO) codes
The first three digits of a 7-digit public-network telephone number in the United States.
central office (CO) trunk
A telecommunications channel that provides access from the system to the public network through the local
CO.
CEPT1

European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Rate 1

1960

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

C

CESID

Caller’s Emergency Service Identification
channel
1. A circuit-switched call.
2. A communications path for transmitting voice and data.
3. In wideband, all of the time slots (contiguous or noncontiguous) necessary to support a call. Example: an
H0-channel uses six 64-kbps time slots.
4. A DS0 on a T1 or E1 facility not specifically associated with a logical circuit-switched call; analogous to a
single trunk.
channel negotiation
The process by which the channel offered in the Channel Identification Information Element (CIIE) in the
SETUP message is negotiated to be another channel acceptable to the switch that receives the SETUP message and ultimately to the switch that sent the SETUP. Negotiation is attempted only if the CIIE is encoded as
Preferred. Channel negotiation is not attempted for wideband calls.
CI

Clock input
circuit
1. An arrangement of electrical elements through which electric current flows.
2. A channel or transmission path between two or more points.
circuit pack
A card on which electrical circuits are printed, and IC chips and electrical components are installed. A circuit
pack is installed in a switch carrier.
CISPR

International Special Committee on Radio Interference
Class of Restriction (COR)
A feature that allows up to 96 classes of call-origination and call-termination restrictions for voice terminals,
voice-terminal groups, data modules, and trunk groups. See also Class of Service (COS).
Class of Service (COS)
A feature that uses a number to specify if voice-terminal users can activate the Automatic Callback, Call Forwarding All Calls, Data Privacy, or Priority Calling features. See also Class of Restriction (COR).
CLI
command-line interface
cm

Centimeter
CM

Connection Manager
CMC

Compact Modular Cabinet
CMDR

Centralized Message Detail Recording
CMS

Call Management System
CO

See central office (CO).

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1961

Glossary and abbreviations

common-control switching arrangement (CCSA)
A private telecommunications network using dedicated trunks and a shared switching center for interconnecting company locations.
communications system
The software-controlled processor complex that interprets dialing pulses, tones, and keyboard characters and
makes the proper connections both within the system and external to the system. The communications system
itself consists of a digital computer, software, storage device, and carriers with special hardware to perform
the connections. A communications system provides voice and data communications services, including
access to public and private networks, for telephones and data terminals on a customer’s premises. See also
switch.
confirmation tone
A tone confirming that feature activation, deactivation, or cancellation has been accepted.
connectivity
The connection of disparate devices within a single system.
console
See ATM-CES.
contiguous
Adjacent DS0s within one T1 or E1 facility or adjacent TDM or fiber time slots. The first and last TDM bus,
DS0, or fiber time slots are not considered contiguous (no wraparound). For an E1 facility with a D-channel,
DS0s 15 and 17 are considered contiguous.
control cabinet
See control carrier.
control carrier
A carrier in a multi-carrier cabinet that contains the SPE circuit packs and, unlike an G3r control carrier, port
circuit packs. Also called control cabinet in a single-carrier cabinet. See also switch-processing element
(SPE).
controlled station
A station that is monitored and controlled via a domain-control association.
COR

See Class of Restriction (COR).
COS

See Class of Service (COS).
coverage answer group
A group of up to eight voice terminals that ring simultaneously when a call is redirected to it by Call Coverage. Any one of the group can answer the call.
coverage call
A call that is automatically redirected from the called party’s extension to an alternate answering position
when certain coverage criteria are met.
coverage path
The order in which calls are redirected to alternate answering positions.
coverage point
An extension or attendant group, VDN, or ACD split designated as an alternate answering position in a coverage path.
covering user
A person at a coverage point who answers a redirected call.

1962

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

C

CP

Circuit pack
CPE

Customer-premises equipment
CPN

Called-party number
CPN/BN

Calling-party number/billing number
CPTR

Call-progress-tone receiver
CRC

Cyclical Redundancy Checking
critical-reliability system
A system that has the following duplicated items: control carriers, tone clocks, EI circuit packs, and cabling
between port networks and center-stage switch in a CSS-connected system. See also duplicated common control, and duplication.
CSA

Canadian Safety Association or Customer Software Administrator
CSCC

Compact single-carrier cabinet
CSCN

Center-stage control network
CSD

Customer-service document
CSM

Centralized System Management
CSS

See center-stage switch (CSS).
CSSO

Customer Services Support Organization
CSU

Channel service unit
CTA
Customer Telephone Activation
CTI Station

CTI Stations are AWOH stations that allow applications to originate and receive calls. CTI
Stations support ASAI call control features such as hold, answer, drop, conference etc. Calls on a
CTI station operate the same way as they would on a real phone. CTI Stations can also be used to
originate phantom calls.
CTS

Clear to Send

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1963

Glossary and abbreviations

CWC

See call work code.

D
DAC

1. Dial access code or Direct Agent Calling
2. See digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
data channel
A communications path between two points used to transmit digital signals.
data-communications equipment (DCE)
The equipment (usually a modem, data module, or packet assembler/disassembler) on the network side of a
communications link that makes the binary serial data from the source or transmitter compatible with the
communications channel.
data link
The configuration of physical facilities enabling end terminals to communicate directly with each other.
data module
An interconnection device between a BRI or DCP interface of the switch and data terminal equipment or data
communications equipment.
data path
The end-to-end connection used for a data communications link. A data path is the combination of all elements of an interprocessor communication in a DCS.
data port
A point of access to a computer that uses trunks or lines for transmitting or receiving data.
data rate
See bit rate.
data service unit (DSU)
A device that transmits digital data on transmission facilities.
data terminal
An input/output (I/O) device that has either switched or direct access to a host computer or to a processor
interface.
data terminal equipment (DTE)
Equipment consisting of the endpoints in a connection over a data circuit. In a connection between a data terminal and host, the terminal, the host, and their associated modems or data modules make up the DTE.
dB

Decibel
dBA

Decibels in reference to amperes.
dBrnC

Decibels above reference noise with C filter.
DC

Direct current

1964

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

D

DCE

Data-communications equipment
D-channel backup
Type of backup used with Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS). A primary D-channel provides signaling for an NFAS D-channel group (two or more PRI facilities). A second D-channel, on a separate PRI facility of the NFAS D-channel group, is designated as backup for the D-channel. Failure of the primary
D-channel causes automatic transfer of call-control signaling to the backup D-channel. The backup becomes
the primary D-channel. When the failed channel returns to service, it becomes the backup D-channel.
DCO

Digital central office
DCP

Digital Communications Protocol
DCS

Distributed Communications System
DDC

Direct Department Calling
DDD

Direct Distance Dialing
delay-dial trunk
A trunk that allows dialing directly into a communications system (digits are received as they are dialed).
denying a request
Sending a negative acknowledgment (NAK), done by sending an FIE with a return error component (and a
cause value). It should not be confused with the denial event report that applies to calls.
designated voice terminal
The specific voice terminal to which calls, originally directed to a certain extension, are redirected. Commonly used to mean the forwarded-to terminal when Call Forwarding All Calls is active.
dial-repeating trunks
A PBX tie trunk that is capable of handling PBX station-signaling information without attendant assistance.
dial-repeating tie trunk
A tie trunk that transmits called-party addressing information between two communications systems.
DID

Direct Inward Dialing
digit conversion
A process used to convert specific dialed numbers into other dialed numbers.
digital
The representation of information by discrete steps. See also analog.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1965

Glossary and abbreviations

digital communications protocol (DCP)
A proprietary protocol used to transmit both digitized voice and digitized data over the same communications
link. A DCP link is made up of two 64-kbps information (I-) channels and one 8-kbps signaling (S-) channel.
The DCP protocol supports two information-bearing channels, and thus two telephones/data modules. The I1
channel is the DCP channel assigned on the first page of the 8411 station form. The I2 channel is the DCP
channel assigned on the analog adjunct page of the 8411 station form or on the data module page.
Digital Communications Protocol. The DCP protocol supports two information-bearing channels, and thus
two telephones/data modules. The I1 channel is the DCP channel assigned on the first page of the 8411 station
form. The I2 channel is the DCP channel assigned on the analog adjunct page of the 8411 station form or on
the data module page.
digital data endpoints
In DEFINITY ECS, devices such as the 510D terminal or the 515-type business communications terminal
(BCT).
digital multiplexed interface (DMI)
An interface that provides connectivity between a communications system and a host computer or between
two communications systems using DS1 24th-channel signaling. DMI provides 23 64-kbps data channels and
1 common-signaling channel over a twisted-pair connection. DMI is offered through two capabilities: bit-oriented signaling (DMI-BOS) and message-oriented signaling (DMI-MOS).
digital signal level 0 (DS0)
A single 64-kbps voice channel. A DS0 is a single 64-kbps channel in a T1 or E1 facility and consists of eight
bits in a T1 or E1 frame every 125 microseconds.
digital signal level 1 (DS1)
A single 1.544-Mbps (United States) or 2.048-Mbps (outside the United States) digital signal carried on a T1
transmission facility. A DS1 converter complex consists of a pair, one at each end, of DS1 converter circuit
packs and the associated T1/E1 facilities.
digital terminal data module (DTDM)
An integrated or adjunct data module that shares with a digital telephone the same physical port for connection to a communications system. The function of a DTDM is similar to that of a PDM and MPDM in that it
converts RS-232C signals to DCP signals.
digital-to-analog converter (DAC)
A device that converts data in digital form to the corresponding analog signals. See also analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
digital transmission
A mode of transmission in which information to be transmitted is first converted to digital form and then
transmitted as a serial stream of pulses.
digital trunk
A circuit that carries digital voice and/or digital data in a telecommunications channel.
DIOD

Direct Inward and Outward Dialing
direct agent
A feature, accessed only via ASAI, that allows a call to be placed in a split queue but routed only to a specific
agent in that split. The call receives normal ACD call treatment (for example, announcements) and is measured as an ACD call while ensuring that a particular agent answers.
Direct Extension Selection (DXS)
A feature on an attendant console that allows an attendant direct access to voice terminals by pressing a
group-select button and a DXS button.

1966

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

D

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
A feature that allows an incoming call from the public network (not FX or WATS) to reach a specific telephone without attendant assistance.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk
An incoming trunk used for dialing directly from the public network into a communications system without
help from the attendant.
disk drive
An electromechanical device that stores data on and retrieves data from one or more disks.
distributed communications system (DCS)
A network configuration linking two or more communications systems in such a way that selected features
appear to operate as if the network were one system.
DIVA

Data In/Voice Answer
DLC

Data line circuit
DLDM

Data-line data module
DMI

Digital-multiplexed interface
DND

Do not disturb
DNIS

Dialed-Number Identification Service
DNS
Domain name service
DOD

Direct Outward Dialing
domain
VDNs, ACD splits, and stations. The VDN domain is used for active-notification associations. The ACD-split
domain is for active-notification associations and domain-control associations. The station domain is used for
the domain-control associations.
domain-control association
A Third Party Domain Control Request capability initiates a unique CRV/link number combination, which is
referred to as a domain-control association.
domain-controlled split
A split for which Third Party Domain Control request has been accepted. A domain-controlled split provides
an event report for logout.
domain-controlled station
A station for which a Third_Party_Domain_Control request has been accepted. A domain-controlled station
provides event reports for calls that are alerting, connected, or held at the station.
domain-controlled station on a call
A station that is active on a call, and which provides event reports over one or two domain-control associations.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1967

Glossary and abbreviations

DOSS

Delivery Operations Support System
DOT

Duplication Option Terminal
DPM

Dial Plan Manager
DPR

Dual-port RAM
DS1

Digital Signal Level 1
DS1C

Digital Signal Level-1 protocol C
DS1 CONV

Digital Signal Level-1 converter
DSI

Digital signal interface
DSU

Data service unit
DTDM

Digital-terminal data module
DTE

Data-terminal equipment
DTGS

Direct Trunk Group Select
DTMF

Dual-tone multifrequency
DTS

Disk-tape system
duplicated common control
Two processors ensuring continuous operation of a communications system. While one processor is online,
the other functions as a backup. The backup processor goes online periodically or when a problem occurs.
duplication
The use of redundant components to improve availability. When a duplicated subsystem fails, its backup
redundant system automatically takes over.
duplication option
A system option that duplicates the following: control carrier containing the SPE, EI circuit packs in carriers,
fiber-optic cabling between port networks, and center-stage switch in a CSS-connected system.
DWBS

DEFINITY Wireless Business System
DXS

Direct extension selection

1968

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

E

E
E1
A digital transmission standard that carries traffic at 2.048 Mbps. The E1 facility is divided into 32 channels
(DS0s) of 64 kbps information. Channel 0 is reserved for framing and synchronization information. A
D-channel occupies channel 16.
E&M

Ear and mouth (receive and transmit)
EA

Expansion archangel
EAL

Expansion archangel link
ear and mouth (E & M) signaling
Trunk supervisory signaling, used between two communications systems, whereby signaling information is
transferred through 2-state voltage conditions (on the E and M leads) for analog applications and through a
single bit for digital applications.
EAS
See "Expert Agent Selection".
ECC

Error Correct Code
ECMA

European Computer Manufacturers Association
ECT
Enhanced Call Transfer
EEBCDIC

Extended Binary-Coded Decimal Interexchange Code
EFP

Electronic power feed
EI

Expansion interface
EIA

Electronic Industries Association
EIA-232
A physical interface specified by the EIA. EIA-232 transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up
to 19.2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet. EIA-232 replaces RS-232 protocol in some DEFINITY
applications.
electronic tandem network (ETN)
A tandem tie-trunk network that has automatic call-routing capabilities based on the number dialed and the
most preferred route available. Each switch in the network is assigned a unique private network office code
(RNX), and each voice terminal is assigned a unique extension.
Electronics Industries Association (EIA)
A trade association of the electronics industry that establishes electrical and functional standards.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1969

Glossary and abbreviations

emergency transfer
If a major system failure occurs, automatic transfer is initiated to a group of telephones capable of making
outgoing calls. The system operates in this mode until the failure is repaired and the system automatically
returns to normal operation. Also called power-failure transfer.
EMI

Electromagnetic interference
end-to-end signaling
The transmission of touch-tone signals generated by dialing from a voice terminal to remote computer equipment. These digits are sent over the trunk as DTMF digits whether the trunk signaling type is marked as tone
or rotary and whether the originating station is tone or rotary. Example: a call to a voice-mail machine or
automated-attendant service. A connection is first established over an outgoing trunk. Then additional digits
are dialed to transmit information to be processed by the computer equipment.
enhanced private-switched communications service (EPSCS)
An analog private telecommunications network based on the No. 5 crossbar and 1A ESS that provides
advanced voice and data telecommunications services to companies with many locations.
ENP
Extension number portability
EPN

Expansion-port network
EPROM

Erasable programmable read-only memory
EPSCS

Enhanced Private Switched Communications Services
ERL

Echo return loss
Erlang
A unit of traffic intensity, or load, used to express the amount of traffic needed to keep one facility busy for
one hour. One Erlang is equal to 36 CCS. See also capability.
ESF

Extended superframe format
ESPA

European Standard Paging Access
ETA

Extended Trunk Access; also Enhanced Terminal Administration
ETN

Electronic tandem network
ETSI

European Telecommunications Standards Institute
expansion archangel (EAA)
A network-control microprocessor located on an expansion interface (EI) port circuit pack in an expansion
port network. The EA provides an interface between the EPN and its controlling switch-processing element.

1970

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

F

expansion-archangel link (EAL)
A link-access function on the D-channel (LAPD) logical link that exists between a switch-processing element
and an expansion archangel (EA). The EAL carries control messages from the SPE to the EA and to port circuit packs in an expansion port network.
expansion control cabinet
See expansion control carrier.
expansion control carrier
A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet that contains extra port circuit packs and a maintenance interface. Also
called expansion control cabinet in a single-carrier cabinet.
expansion interface (EI)
A port circuit pack in a port network that provides the interface between a PN’s TDM bus/ packet bus and a
fiber-optic link. The EI carries circuit-switched data, packet-switched data, network control, timing control,
and DS1 control. In addition, an EI in an expansion port network communicates with the master maintenance
circuit pack to provide the EPN’s environmental and alarm status to the switch-processing element.
expansion port network (EPN)
A port network (PN) that is connected to the TDM bus and packet bus of a processor port network (PPN).
Control is achieved by indirect connection of the EPN to the PPN via a port-network link (PNL). See also port
network (PN).
Expert Agent Selection
A feature allowing incoming calls to be routed to specialized groups of agents within a larger pool of agents.
extension-in
Extension-In (ExtIn) is the work state agents go into when they answer (receive) a non-ACD call. If the agent
is in Manual-In or Auto-In and receives an extension-in call, it is recorded by CMS as an AUX-In call.
extension-out
The work state that agents go into when they place (originate) a non-ACD call.
external measurements
Those ACD measurements that are made by the External CMS adjunct.
extension
A 1- to 5-digit number by which calls are routed through a communications system or, with a Uniform Dial
Plan (UDP) or main-satellite dialing plan, through a private network.
external call
A connection between a communications system user and a party on the public network or on another communications system in a private network.

F
FAC

Feature Access Code
facility
A telecommunications transmission pathway and associated equipment.
facility-associated signaling (FAS)
Signaling for which a D-channel carries signaling only for those channels on the same physical interface.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1971

Glossary and abbreviations

FAS

Facility-associated signaling
FAT

Facility access trunk
FAX

Facsimile
FCC

Federal Communications Commission
FEAC

Forced Entry of Account Codes
feature
A specifically defined function or service provided by the system.
feature button
A labeled button on a telephone or attendant console used to access a specific feature.
FEP

Front-end processor
fiber optics
A technology using materials that transmit ultra wideband electromagnetic light-frequency ranges for
high-capacity carrier systems.
FIC

Facility interface codes
FIE
Facility Information Element
fixed
A trunk allocation term. In the fixed allocation scheme, the time slots necessary to support a wideband call are
contiguous, and the first time slot is constrained to certain starting points.
flexible
A trunk allocation term. In the flexible allocation scheme, the time slots of a wideband call can occupy noncontiguous positions within a single T1 or E1 facility.
floating
A trunk allocation term. In the floating allocation scheme, the time slots of a wideband call are contiguous,
but the position of the first time slot is not fixed.
FNPA

Foreign Numbering-Plan Area
foreign-exchange (FX)
A CO other than the one providing local access to the public telephone network.
foreign-exchange trunk
A telecommunications channel that directly connects the system to a CO other than its local CO.
foreign numbering-plan area code (FNPAC)
An area code other than the local area code, that must be dialed to call outside the local geographical area.
FRL

Facilities Restriction Level

1972

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

G

FTC
Facility Test Call
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FX

Foreign exchange

G
G3-MA

Generic 3 Management Applications
G3-MT

Generic 3 Management Terminal
G3r

Generic 3, RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer)
generalized route selection (GRS)
An enhancement to Automatic Alternate Routing/Automatic Route Selection (AAR/ARS) that performs routing based on call attributes, such as Bearer Capability Classes (BCCs), in addition to the address and facilities
restriction level (FRL), thus facilitating a Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) that is independent of the type of call
being placed.
glare
The simultaneous seizure of a 2-way trunk by two communications systems, resulting in a standoff.
GM

Group manager
GPTR

General-purpose tone receiver
grade of service
The number of call attempts that fail to receive service immediately. Grade of service is also expressed as the
quantity of all calls that are blocked or delayed.
ground-start trunk
A trunk on which, for outgoing calls, the system transmits a request for services to a distant switching system
by grounding the trunk ring lead. To receive the digits of the called number, that system grounds the trunk tip
lead. When the system detects this ground, the digits are sent.
GRS

Generalized Route Selection
GUI
graphical user interface

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1973

Glossary and abbreviations

H
H0
An ISDN information transfer rate for 384-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards.
H11
An ISDN information transfer rate for 1536-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards.
H12
An ISDN information transfer rate for 1920-kbps data defined by CCITT and ANSI standards.
handshaking logic
A format used to initiate a data connection between two data module devices.
hertz (Hz)
A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
HFAI
Hands Free Automatic Answer on Intercom
high-reliability system
A system having the following: two control carriers, duplicate expansion interface (EI) circuit packs in the
PPN (in G3r with CSS), and duplicate switch node clock circuit packs in the switch node (SN) carriers. See
also duplicated common control, duplication, duplication option, and critical-reliability system.
HNPA

See home numbering-plan area code (HNPA).
holding time
The total length of time in minutes and seconds that a facility is used during a call.
home numbering-plan area code (HNPA)
The local area code. The area code does not have to be dialed to call numbers within the local geographical
area.
hop
Nondirect communication between two switch communications interfaces (SCI) where the SCI message
passes automatically without intermediate processing through one or more intermediate SCIs.
host computer
A computer, connected to a network, that processes data from data-entry devices.
hunt group
A group of extensions that are assigned the Station Hunting feature so that a call to a busy extension reroutes
to an idle extension in the group. See also ACD work mode.
Hz

See hertz (Hz).

I
I1
The first information channel of DCP.

1974

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

I

I2
The second information channel of DCP.
I2 Interface
A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the radio-controller circuit
packs. Each interface provides communication between the radio-controller circuit pack and up to two wireless fixed bases.
I3 Interface
A proprietary interface used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business System for the cell antenna units. Each
wireless fixed base can communicate to up to four cell antenna units.
IAA
Internal Automatic Answer
IAS

Inter-PBX Attendant Service
ICC

Intercabinet cable or intercarrier cable
ICD

Inbound Call Director
ICDOS

International Customer-Dialed Operator Service
ICHT

Incoming call-handling table
ICI

Incoming call identifier
ICLID
Incoming Call Line Identification
ICM

Inbound Call Management
IDDD

International Direct Distance Dialing
IDF

Intermediate distribution frame
IE

Information element
immediate-start tie trunk
A trunk on which, after making a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call, the system
waits a nominal 65 ms before sending the digits of the called number. This allows time for the distant system
to prepare to receive digits. On an incoming call, the system has less than 65 ms to prepare to receive the digits.
IMT

Intermachine trunk
in

Inch

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1975

Glossary and abbreviations

INADS

Initialization and Administration System
ICLID

Incoming Caller ID
incoming gateway
A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B to a
trunk not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B.
information exchange
The exchange of data between users of two different systems, such as the switch and a host computer, over a
LAN.
Information Systems Network (ISN)
A WAN and LAN with an open architecture combining host computers, minicomputers, word processors,
storage devices, PCs, high-speed printers, and nonintelligent terminals into a single packet-switching system.
INS

ISDN Network Service
inside call
A call placed from one telephone to another within the local communications system.
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
A public or private network that provides end-to-end digital communications for all services to which users
have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user-network interfaces defined by the CCITT. Through
internationally accepted standard interfaces, ISDN provides digital circuit-switched or packet-switched communications within the network and links to other ISDNs to provide national and international digital communications. See also Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI) and Integrated
Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI).
Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI)
The interface between a communications system and terminal that includes two 64-kbps B-channels for transmitting voice or data and one 16-kbps D-channel for transmitting associated B-channel call control and
out-of-band signaling information. ISDN-BRI also includes 48 kbps for transmitting framing and D-channel
contention information, for a total interface speed of 192 kbps. ISDN-BRI serves ISDN terminals and digital
terminals fitted with ISDN terminal adapters. See also Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) andIntegrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI).
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface (ISDN-PRI)
The interface between multiple communications systems that in North America includes 24 64-kbps channels, corresponding to the North American digital signal level-1 (DS1) standard rate of 1.544 Mbps. The most
common arrangement of channels in ISDN-PRI is 23 64-kbps B-channels for transmitting voice and data and
1 64-kbps D-channel for transmitting associated B-channel call control and out-of-band signaling information. With nonfacility-associated signaling (NFAS), ISDN-PRI can include 24 B-channels and no D-channel.
See alsoIntegrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) andIntegrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate
Interface (ISDN-BRI).
intercept tone
A tone that indicates a dialing error or denial of the service requested.
interface
A common boundary between two systems or pieces of equipment.
internal call
A connection between two users within a system.

1976

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

I

International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
Formerly known as International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT), ITU is an international organization that sets universal standards for data communications, including ISDN. ITU members
are from telecommunications companies and organizations around the world. See alsoBX.25.
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
See International Telecommunications Union (ITU).
interflow
The ability for calls to forward to other splits on the same PBX or a different PBX using the Call Forward All
Calls feature.
intraflow
The ability for calls to redirect to other splits on the same PBX on a conditional or unconditional basis using
call coverage busy, don’t answer, or all criteria.
internal measurements
BCMS measurements that are made by the system. ACD measurements that are made external to the system
(via External CMS) are referred to as external measurements.
in-use lamp
A red light on a multiappearance voice terminal that lights to show which call appearance will be selected
when the handset is lifted or which call appearance is active when a user is off-hook.
INWATS

Inward Wide Area Telephone Service
IO

Information outlet
IP
Internet Protocol
ISDN

See Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).
ISDN-BRI
Integrated Services Digital Network-Basic Rate Interface
ISDN Gateway (IG)
A feature allowing integration of the switch and a host-based telemarketing application via a link to a gateway
adjunct. The gateway adjunct is a 3B-based product that notifies the host-based telemarketing application of
call events.
ISDN-PRI
Integrated Services Digital Network-Primary Rate Interface
ISDN trunk
A trunk administered for use with ISDN-PRI. Also called ISDN facility.
ISDN-PRI terminal adapter
An interface between endpoint applications and an ISDN PRI facility. ISDN-PRI terminal adapters are currently available from other vendors and are primarily designed for video conferencing applications. Accordingly, currently available terminal adapters adapt the two pairs of video codec data (V.35) and dialing
(RS-366) ports to an ISDN PRI facility.
IS/DTT

Integrated Services/digital tie trunk

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1977

Glossary and abbreviations

ISN

Information Systems Network
ISO

International Standards Organization
ISV

Independent software vendor
ITC
Information transfer capability
ITP

Installation test procedure
ITU

International Telecommunications Union
IXC

Interexchange carrier code

K
kHz

Kilohertz
kbps

Kilobits per second
kbyte

Kilobyte
kg

Kilogram

L
LAN

Local area network
LAP-D

Link Access Procedure on the D-channel
LAPD

Link Access Procedure data
LATA

Local access and transport area
lb

Pound

1978

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

L

LBO

Line buildout
LDN

Listed directory number
LDS

Long-distance service
LEC

Local exchange carrier
LED

See light-emitting diode (LED).
light-emitting diode (LED)
A semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied. LEDs provide a visual indication of the
operational status of hardware components, the results of maintenance tests, the alarm status of circuit packs,
and the activation of telephone features.
lightwave transceiver
Hardware that provides an interface to fiber-optic cable from port circuit packs and DS1 converter circuit
packs. Lightwave transceivers convert electrical signals to light signals and vice versa.
line
A transmission path between a communications system or CO switching system and a voice terminal or other
terminal.
line appearance
See appearance.
line buildout
A selectable output attenuation is generally required of DTE equipment because T1 circuits require the last
span to lose 15–22.5 dB.
line port
Hardware that provides the access point to a communications system for each circuit associated with a telephone or data terminal.
link
A transmitter-receiver channel that connects two systems.
link-access procedure on the D-channel (LAPD)
A link-layer protocol on the ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI data-link layer (level 2). LAPD provides data transfer
between two devices, and error and flow control on multiple logical links. LAPD is used for signaling and
low-speed packet data (X.25 and mode 3) on the signaling (D-) channel and for mode-3 data communications
on a bearer (B-) channel.
LINL

Local indirect neighbor link
local area network (LAN)
A networking arrangement designed for a limited geographical area. Generally, a LAN is limited in range to a
maximum of 6.2 miles and provides high-speed carrier service with low error rates. Common configurations
include daisy chain, star (including circuit-switched), ring, and bus.
logical link
The communications path between a processor and a BRI terminal.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1979

Glossary and abbreviations

loop-start trunk
A trunk on which, after establishing a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call, the
system waits for a signal on the loop formed by the trunk leads before sending the digits of the called number.
loss plan
The overall plan, used in network design and management, for creating and maintaining consistent signal
strength across the network. The term also applies to local management of signal strength to achieve appropriate levels for specific applications.
LSP
Local Survivable Processor
LSU

Local storage unit
LWC

Leave Word Calling

M
MAC

Medium access
MADU

Modular asynchronous data unit
main distribution frame (MDF)
A device that mounts to the wall inside the system equipment room. The MDF provides a connection point
from outside telephone lines to the PBX switch and to the inside telephone stations.
main-satellite-tributary
A private network configuration that can either stand alone or access an ETN. A main switch provides interconnection, via tie trunks, with one or more subtending switches, called satellites; all attendant positions for
the main/satellite configuration; and access to and from the public network. To a user outside the complex, a
main/satellite configuration appears as one switch, with one listed directory number (LDN). A tributary
switch is connected to the main switch via tie trunks, but has its own attendant positions and LDN.
maintenance
Activities involved in keeping a telecommunications system in proper working condition: the detection and
isolation of software and hardware faults, and automatic and manual recovery from these faults.
management terminal
The terminal that is used by the system administrator to administer the switch. The terminal may also be used
to access the BCMS feature.
major alarm
An indication of a failure that has caused critical degradation of service and requires immediate attention.
Major alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack, logged to the alarm log, and reported to a remote maintenance facility, if applicable.
Manual-In work mode
One of four agent work modes: the mode in which an agent is ready to process another call manually. See
Auto-In Work mode for a contrast.
MAP

Maintenance action process

1980

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

M

MAPD

Multiapplication platform for DEFINITY
MASI
Multimedia Applications Server Interface
MA-UUI

Message-Associated User-to-User Signaling
Mbps

Megabits per second
M-Bus

Memory bus
Mbyte

Megabyte
MCC

Multicarrier cabinet
MCS

Message Center Service
MCT

Malicious Call Trace
MCU

Multipoint control unit
MDF

Main distribution frame
MDM

Modular data module
MDR

Message detail record
MEM

Memory
memory
A device into which information can be copied and held, and from which information can later be obtained.
memory shadowing link
An operating-system condition that provides a method for memory-resident programs to be more quickly
accessed, allowing a system to reboot faster.
message center
An answering service that supplies agents to and stores messages for later retrieval.
message center agent
A member of a message-center hunt group who takes and retrieves messages for voice-terminal users.
MF

Multifrequency
MFB

Multifunction board

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1981

Glossary and abbreviations

MFC

1. Multifrequency code
2. Multi-Frequency Compelled
MFE
Multifrequency Espana
MGP
Media Gateway Processor
MHz

Megahertz
MIM

Management information message
minor alarm
An indication of a failure that could affect customer service. Minor alarms are automatically displayed on
LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack, sent to the alarm log, and reported
to a remote maintenance facility, if applicable.
MIPS

Million instructions per second
MIS

Management information system
MISCID

Miscellaneous identification
MMCS

Multimedia Call Server
MMCH

Multimedia call handling
MMCX
Multimedia Communications Exchange
MMI

Multimedia interface
MMS

Material Management Services
MO

Maintenance object
modem
A device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over telephone circuits. The analog signals are converted back to the original digital data signals by another modem at the other end of the circuit.
modem pooling
A capability that provides shared conversion resources (modems and data modules) for cost-effective access
to analog facilities by data terminals. When needed, modem pooling inserts a conversion resource into the
path of a data call. Modem pooling serves both outgoing and incoming calls.

1982

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

M

modular processor data module (MPDM)
A processor data module (PDM) that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces (RS-232C,
RS-449, and V.35) to customer-provided data terminal equipment (DTE). See also processor data module
(PDM).
modular trunk data module (MTDM)
A trunk data module that can be configured to provide several kinds of interfaces (RS-232, RS-449, and V.35)
to customer-provided data terminal equipment.
modulator-demodulator
See modem.
monitored call
See active-notification call.
MOS
Message-oriented signaling
MPDM
Modular processor data module
MS
Message server
ms
Millisecond
MS/T
Main satellite/tributary
MSG
Message service
MSI
Manufacturer Specific Information allows for vendor-specific messages to be passed in the QSIG enterprise
network.
MSL
Material stocking location
MSM
Modular System Management
MSS
Mass storage system
MSSNET
Mass storage/network control
MT
Management terminal
MTDM
Modular trunk data module
MTP
Maintenance tape processor
MTT
Multitasking terminal

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1983

Glossary and abbreviations

multiappearance voice terminal
A terminal equipped with several call-appearance buttons for the same extension, allowing the user to handle
more than one call on that same extension at the same time.
Multicarrier cabinet
A structure that holds one to five carriers. See also single-carrier cabinet.
Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) Release 2 (R2) signaling
A signal consisting of two frequency components, such that when a signal is transmitted from a switch,
another signal acknowledging the transmitted signal is received by the switch. R2 designates signaling used
in the United States and in countries outside the United States.
multiplexer
A device used to combine a number of individual channels into a single common bit stream for transmission.
multiplexing
A process whereby a transmission facility is divided into two or more channels, either by splitting the frequency band into a number of narrower bands or by dividing the transmission channel into successive time
slots. See also time-division multiplexing (TDM).
multirate
The new N x DS0 service (see N x DS0).
MWL

Message-waiting lamp

N
N+1
Method of determining redundant backup requirements. Example: if four rectifier modules are required for a
DC-powered single-carrier cabinet, a fifth rectifier module is installed for backup.
N x DS0
N x DS0, equivalently referred to as N x 64 kbps, is an emerging standard for wideband calls separate from
H0, H11, and H12 ISDN channels. The emerging N x DS0 ISDN multirate circuit mode bearer service will
provide circuit-switched calls with data-rate multiples of 64 kbps up to 1536 kbps on a T1 facility or up to
1920 kbps on an E1 facility. In the switch, N x DS0 channels will range up to 1984 kbps using NFAS E1 interfaces.
NANP

North American Numbering Plan
narrowband
A circuit-switched call at a data rate up to and including 64 kbps. All nonwideband switch calls are considered narrowband.
native terminal support
A predefined terminal type exists in switch software, eliminating the need to alias the terminal (that is, manually map call appearances and feature buttons onto some other natively supported terminal type).
NAU

Network access unit
NCA/TSC

Noncall-associated/temporary-signaling connection

1984

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

N

NCOSS

Network Control Operations Support Center
NCSO

National Customer Support Organization
NEC

National Engineering Center
NEMA

National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
NETCON

Network-control circuit pack
network
A series of points, nodes, or stations connected by communications channels.
network-specific facility (NSF)
An information element in an ISDN-PRI message that specifies which public-network service is used. NSF
applies only when Call-by-Call Service Selection is used to access a public-network service.
network interface
A common boundary between two systems in an interconnected group of systems.
NFAS

See Nonfacility-associated signaling (NFAS).
NI

Network interface
NID

Network Inward Dialing
NM

Network management
NMS
Network Management System
NN

National number
node
A switching or control point for a network. Nodes are either tandem (they receive signals and pass them on)
or terminal (they originate or terminate a transmission path).
Nonfacility-associated signaling (NFAS)
A method that allows multiple T1 and/or E1 facilities to share a single D-channel to form an ISDN-PRI. If
D-channel backup is not used, one facility is configured with a D-channel, and the other facilities that share
the D-channel are configured without D-channels. If D-channel backup is used, two facilities are configured
to have D-channels (one D-channel on each facility), and the other facilities that share the D-channels are
configured without D-channels.
NPA

Numbering-plan area
NPE

Network processing element

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1985

Glossary and abbreviations

NQC

Number of queued calls
NSE

Night-service extension
NSF
Network-specific facility
NSU

Network sharing unit
null modem cable
Special wiring of an RS-232-C cable such that a computer can talk to another computer (or to a printer) without a modem.
NXX

Public-network office code

O
OA

Operator assisted
occurrence
See appearance.
OCM

Outbound Call Management
offered load
The traffic that would be generated by all the requests for service occurring within a monitored interval, usually one hour.
ONS

On-premises station
OPS

Off-premises station
OPX

Off-premises extension
OQT

Oldest queued time
OSHA

Occupational Safety and Health Act
OSI

Open Systems Interconnect
OSS

Operations Support System

1986

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

P

OSSI

Operational Support System Interface
OTDR

Optical time-domain reflectometer
othersplit
The work state that indicates that an agent is currently active on another split’s call, or in ACW for another
split.
OTL

Originating Test Line
OTQ

Outgoing trunk queuing
OTTOTT
Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk Transfer
outgoing gateway
A PBX that routes an incoming call on a trunk administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B to a trunk
not administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B.

P
PACCON

Packet control
packet
A group of bits (including a message element, which is the data, and a control information element (IE),
which is the header) used in packet switching and transmitted as a discrete unit. In each packet, the message
element and control IE are arranged in a specified format. See also packet bus and packet switching.
packet bus
A wide-bandwidth bus that transmits packets.
packet switching
A data-transmission technique whereby user information is segmented and routed in discrete data envelopes
called packets, each with its own appended control information, for routing, sequencing, and error checking.
Packet switching allows a channel to be occupied only during the transmission of a packet. On completion of
the transmission, the channel is made available for the transfer of other packets. See also BX.25and packet.
PAD

Packet assembly/disassembly
paging trunk
A telecommunications channel used to access an amplifier for loudspeaker paging.
party/extension active on call
A party is on the call if he or she is actually connected to the call (in active talk or in held state). An originator
of a call is always a party on the call. Alerting parties, busy parties, and tones are not parties on the call.
PBX

Private branch exchange

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1987

Glossary and abbreviations

PC

See personal computer (PC).
PCM

See pulse-code modulation (PCM).
PCOL
Personal central-office line
PCOLG

Personal central-office line group
PCS

Permanent switched calls
PDM

See processor data module (PDM).
PDS

Premises Distribution System
PE

Processing element
PEC

Price element code
PEI

Processor element interchange
personal computer (PC)
A personally controllable microcomputer.
PGATE

Packet gateway
PGN

Partitioned group number
Phantom Calls

A feature that allows a call to originate either from a station AWOH or from a non-hunt group
made up of AWOH stations.
PI

Processor interface
PIB

Processor interface board
pickup group
A group of individuals authorized to answer any call directed to an extension within the group.
PIDB

Product image database
PKTINT

Packet interface
PL

Private line

1988

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

P

PLS

Premises Lightwave System
PMS

Property Management System
PN

Port network
PNA

Private network access
POE

Processor occupancy evaluation
POP

Point of presence
port
A data- or voice-transmission access point on a device that is used for communicating with other devices.
port carrier
A carrier in a multicarrier cabinet or a single-carrier cabinet containing port circuit packs, power units, and
service circuits. Also called a port cabinet in a single-carrier cabinet.
port network (PN)
A cabinet containing a TDM bus and packet bus to which the following components are connected: port circuit packs, one or two tone-clock circuit packs, a maintenance circuit pack, service circuit packs, and (optionally) up to four expansion interface (EI) circuit packs in DEFINITY ECS. Each PN is controlled either locally
or remotely by a switch processing element (SPE). See also expansion port network (EPN) and processor port
network (PPN).
port-network connectivity
The interconnection of port networks (PNs), regardless of whether the configuration uses direct or switched
connectivity.
PPM

1. Parts per million
2. Periodic pulse metering
PPN

See processor port network (PPN).
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PRI

See Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
primary extension
The main extension associated with the physical voice or data terminal.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems. PRI runs at 1.544 Mbps and, as used in North America, provides 23 64-kbps B-channels (voice or data)
and one 64-kbps D-channel (signaling). The D-channel is the 24th channel of the interface and contains multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1989

Glossary and abbreviations

PRI endpoint (PE)
The wideband switching capability introduces PRI endpoints on switch line-side interfaces. A PRI endpoint
consists of one or more contiguous B-channels on a line-side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility and has an extension. Endpoint applications have call-control capabilities over PRI endpoints.
principal
A terminal that has its primary extension bridged on one or more other terminals.
principal (user)
A person to whom a telephone is assigned and who has message-center coverage.
private network
A network used exclusively for the telecommunications needs of a particular customer.
private network office code (RNX)
The first three digits of a 7-digit private network number.
processor carrier
See control carrier.
processor data module (PDM)
A device that provides an RS-232C DCE interface for connecting to data terminals, applications processors
(APs), and host computers, and provides a DCP interface for connection to a communications system. See
also modular processor data module (MPDM).
processor port network (PPN)
A port network controlled by a switch-processing element that is directly connected to that PN’s TDM bus
and LAN bus. See also port network (PN).
processor port network (PPN) control carrier
A carrier containing the maintenance circuit pack, tone/clock circuit pack, and SPE circuit packs for a processor port network (PPN) and, optionally, port circuit packs.
PROCR

Processor
Property Management System (PMS)
A stand-alone computer used by lodging and health-services organizations for services such as reservations,
housekeeping, and billing.
protocol
A set of conventions or rules governing the format and timing of message exchanges to control data movement and correction of errors.
PSA
Personal Station Access
PSAP
Public Safety Answering Points
PSC

Premises service consultant
PSDN

Packet-switch public data network
PSTN
Public switched telephone network

1990

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Q

PT

Personal terminal
PTC

Positive temperature coefficient
PTT

Postal Telephone and Telegraph
public network
The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local and long-distance calling.
pulse-code modulation (PCM)
An extension of pulse-amplitude modulation (PAM) in which carrier-signal pulses modulated by an analog
signal, such as speech, are quantized and encoded to a digital, usually binary, format.

Q
QoS
Quality of Service
QPPCN

Quality Protection Plan Change Notice
quadrant
A group of six contiguous DS0s in fixed locations on an ISDN-PRI facility. Note that this term comes from
T1 terminology (one-fourth of a T1), but there are five quadrants on an E1 ISDN-PRI facility (30B + D).
queue
An ordered sequence of calls waiting to be processed.
queuing
The process of holding calls in order of their arrival to await connection to an attendant, to an answering
group, or to an idle trunk. Calls are automatically connected in first-in, first-out sequence.

R
RAM

See random-access memory (RAM).
random-access memory (RAM)
A storage arrangement whereby information can be retrieved at a speed independent of the location of the
stored information.
RBS

Robbed-bit signaling
RBVD
Robbed-bit AVD
RC

Radio controller

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1991

Glossary and abbreviations

RCL

Restricted call list
read-only memory (ROM)
A storage arrangement primarily for information-retrieval applications.
recall dial tone
Tones signalling that the system has completed a function (such as holding a call) and is ready to accept dialing.
redirection criteria
Information administered for each voice terminal’s coverage path that determines when an incoming call is
redirected to coverage.
Redirection on No Answer
An optional feature that redirects an unanswered ringing ACD call after an administered number of rings. The
call is then redirected back to the agent.
release
To release a call is to initiate its disconnection.
release signal
The signal one switch sends to another to disconnect a call. If the calling switch ends the call, it sends a “forward” release signal. If the receiving switch ends the call, it sends a “backward” release signal.
remote home numbering-plan area code (RHNPA)
A foreign numbering-plan area code that is treated as a home area code by the Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) feature. Calls can be allowed or denied based on the area code and the dialed CO code rather than just
the area code. If the call is allowed, the ARS pattern used for the call is determined by these six digits.
Remote Operations Service Element (ROSE)
A CCITT and ISO standard that defines a notation and services that support interactions between the various
entities that make up a distributed application.
REN

Ringer equivalency number
reorder tone
A tone to signal that at least one of the facilities, such as a trunk or a digit transmitter, needed for the call was
not available.
report scheduler
Software that is used in conjunction with the system printer to schedule the days of the week and time of day
that the desired reports are to be printed.
RFP

Request for proposal
RHNPA

See remote home numbering-plan area code (RHNPA).
RINL

Remote indirect neighbor link
RISC

Reduced-instruction-set computer
RLT

Release-link trunk

1992

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

S

RMATS

Remote Maintenance, Administration, and Traffic System
RNX

Route-number index (private network office code)
ROM

See read-only memory (ROM).
ROSE
See Remote Operations Service Element (ROSE).
RPN

Routing-plan number
RS-232C
A physical interface specified by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). RS-232C transmits and
receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19.2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet.
RS-449

Recommended Standard 449
RSC

Regional Support Center
RTCP
Real-time control protocol

S
S1
The first logical signalling channel of DCP. The channel is used to provide signaling information for DCP’s I1
channel.
S2
The second logical signaling channel of DCP. The channel is used to provide signaling information for DCP’s
I2 channel.
SABM

Set Asynchronous Balance Mode
SAC

Send All Calls
SAKI

See sanity and control interface (SAKI).
sanity and control interface (SAKI)
A custom VLSI microchip located on each port circuit pack. The SAKI provides address recognition, buffering, and synchronization between the angel and the five control time slots that make up the control channel.
The SAKI also scans and collects status information for the angel on its port circuit pack and, when polled,
transmits this information to the archangel.
SAT

System access terminal

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1993

Glossary and abbreviations

SBA

Simulated bridged appearance
SCC

1. See single-carrier cabinet.
2. Serial communications controller
SCD

Switch-control driver
SCI

Switch communications interface
SCO

System control office
SCOTCH

Switch Conferencing for TDM Bus in Concentration Highway
SCSI

See small computer system interface (SCSI).
SDDN

Software-Defined Data Network
SDI

Switched Digital International
SDLC

Synchronous data-link control
SDN

Software-defined network
SFRL

Single-frequency return loss
SID

Station-identification number
simplex system
A system that has no redundant hardware.
simulated bridged appearance
The same as a temporary bridged appearance; allows the terminal user (usually the principal) to bridge onto a
call that had been answered by another party on his or her behalf.
single-carrier cabinet
A combined cabinet and carrier unit that contains one carrier. See also Multicarrier cabinet.
single-line voice terminal
A voice terminal served by a single-line tip and ring circuit (models 500, 2500, 7101A, 7103A).
SIT

Special-information tones
SLS

Service Level Supervisor

1994

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

S

small computer system interface (SCSI)
An ANSI bus standard that provides a high-level command interface between host computers and peripheral
devices.
SMDR

Station Message Detail Recording
SN

Switch Node
SNA

Systems Network Architecture
SNC

Switch Node Clock
SNI

Switch Node Interface
SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol
software
A set of computer programs that perform one or more tasks.
SPE

Switch Processing Element
SPID

Service Profile Identifier
split
See ACD work mode.
split condition
A condition whereby a caller is temporarily separated from a connection with an attendant. A split condition
automatically occurs when the attendant, active on a call, presses the start button.
split number
The split’s identity to the switch and BCMS.
split report
A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured splits.
split (agent) status report
A report that provides real-time status and measurement data for internally measured agents and the split to
which they are assigned.
SREPN
Survivable Remote EPN
SSC
Station Security Code
SSI

Standard serial interface
SSM

Single-site management

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1995

Glossary and abbreviations

SSV

Station service
ST3

Stratum 3 clock board
staffed
Indicates that an agent position is logged in. A staffed agent functions in one of four work modes: Auto-In,
Manual-In, ACW, or AUX-Work.
STARLAN

Star-Based Local Area Network
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
An obsolete term now called CDR — a switch feature that uses software and hardware to record call data. See
Call Detail Recording (CDR).
standard serial interface (SSI)
A communications protocol developed for use with 500-type business communications terminals (BCTs) and
400-series printers.
status lamp
A green light that shows the status of a call appearance or a feature button by the state of the light (lit, flashing, fluttering, broken flutter, or unlit).
stroke counts
A method used by ACD agents to record up to nine customer-defined events per call when CMS is active.
SVN

Security-violation notification
switch
Any kind of telephone switching system. See also communications system.
switchhook
The buttons located under the receiver on a voice terminal.
switch-node (SN) carrier
A carrier containing a single switch node, power units, and, optionally, one or two DS1 converter circuit
packs. An SN carrier is located in a center-stage switch.
switch-node (SN) clock
The circuit pack in an SN carrier that provides clock and maintenance alarm functions and environmental
monitors.
switch-node interface (SNI)
The basic building block of a switch node. An SNI circuit pack controls the routing of circuit, packet, and
control messages.
switch-node link (SNL)
The hardware that provides a bridge between two or more switch nodes. The SNL consists of the two SNI circuit packs residing on the switch nodes and the hardware connecting the SNIs. This hardware can include
lightwave transceivers that convert the SNI’s electrical signals to light signals, the copper wire that connects
the SNIs to the lightwave transceivers, a full-duplex fiber-optic cable, DS1 converter circuit cards and DS1
facilities if a company does not have rights to lay cable, and appropriate connectors.
switch-processing element (SPE)
A complex of circuit packs (processor, memory, disk controller, and bus-interface cards) mounted in a PPN
control carrier. The SPE serves as the control element for that PPN and, optionally, for one or more EPNs.

1996

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

T

SXS

Step-by-step
synchronous data transmission
A method of sending data in which discrete signal elements are sent at a fixed and continuous rate and specified times. See also association.
SYSAM

System Access and Administration
system administrator
The person who maintains overall customer responsibility for system administration. Generally, all administration functions are performed from the Management Terminal. The switch requires a special login, referred
to as the system administrator login, to gain access to system-administration capabilities.
system printer
An optional printer that may be used to print scheduled reports via the report scheduler.
system report
A report that provides historical traffic information for internally measured splits.
system-status report
A report that provides real-time status information for internally measured splits.
system manager
A person responsible for specifying and administering features and services for a system.
system reload
A process that allows stored data to be written from a tape into the system memory (normally after a power
outage).

T
T1
A digital transmission standard that in North America carries traffic at the DS1 rate of 1.544 Mbps. A T1
facility is divided into 24 channels (DS0s) of 64 kbps. These 24 channels, with an overall digital rate of 1.536
Mbps, and an 8-kbps framing and synchronization channel make up the 1.544-Mbps transmission. When a
D-channel is present, it occupies channel 24. T1 facilities are also used in Japan and some Middle-Eastern
countries.
TAAS

Trunk Answer from Any Station
TABS

Telemetry asynchronous block serial
TAC
Trunk-access code
tandem switch
A switch within an electronic tandem network (ETN) that provides the logic to determine the best route for a
network call, possibly modifies the digits outpulsed, and allows or denies certain calls to certain users.
tandem through
The switched connection of an incoming trunk to an outgoing trunk without human intervention.

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1997

Glossary and abbreviations

tandem tie-trunk network (TTTN)
A private network that interconnects several customer switching systems.
TC

Technical consultant
TCM

Traveling class mark
TDM

See time-division multiplexing (TDM).
TDR

Time-of-day routing
TEG
Terminating extension group
terminal
A device that sends and receives data within a system. See also administration terminal.
TFTP
Trivial file transfer protocol
tie trunk
A telecommunications channel that directly connects two private switching systems.
time-division multiplex (TDM) bus
A bus that is time-shared regularly by preallocating short time slots to each transmitter. In a PBX, all port circuits are connected to the TDM bus, permitting any port to send a signal to any other port.
time-division multiplexing (TDM)
Multiplexing that divides a transmission channel into successive time slots. See also multiplexing.
time interval
The period of time, either one hour or one-half hour, that BCMS measurements are collected for a reports.
time slice
See time interval.
time slot
64 kbps of digital information structured as eight bits every 125 microseconds. In the switch, a time slot refers
to either a DS0 on a T1 or E1 facility or a 64-kbps unit on the TDM bus or fiber connection between port networks.
time slot sequence integrity
The situation whereby the N octets of a wideband call that are transmitted in one T1 or E1 frame arrive at the
output in the same order that they were introduced.
to control
An application can invoke Third Party Call Control capabilities using either an adjunct-control or
domain-control association.
to monitor
An application can receive event reports on an active-notification, adjunct-control, or domain-control association.
TOD

Time of day

1998

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

U

tone ringer
A device with a speaker, used in electronic voice terminals to alert the user.
TOP

Task-oriented protocol
trunk
A dedicated telecommunications channel between two communications systems or COs.
trunk allocation
The manner in which trunks are selected to form wideband channels.
trunk-data module
A device that connects off-premises private-line trunk facilities and DEFINITY ECS. The trunk-data module
converts between the RS-232C and the DCP, and can connect to DDD modems as the DCP member of a
modem pool.
trunk group
Telecommunications channels assigned as a group for certain functions that can be used interchangeably
between two communications systems or COs.
TSA
Terminal Self-Administration
TSAPI
Telephony Services Application Programming Interface
TSC

Technical Service Center
TTI

Terminal translation initialization
TTR

Touch-tone receiver
TTT

Terminating trunk transmission
TTTN

See tandem tie-trunk network (TTTN).
TTY

Teletypewriter

U
UAP

Usage-allocation plan
UART

Universal asynchronous transmitter
UCD

Uniform call distribution

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

1999

Glossary and abbreviations

UCL

Unrestricted call list
UDP
1. User Datagram Protocol - Transport layer; connectionless, unreliable, fast.
2. Uniform Dial Plan -A feature that allows a unique 4- or 5-digit number assignment for each terminal in a
multiswitch configuration such as a DCS or main-satellite-tributary system.
UL
Underwriter Laboratories
UM

User manager
UNMA

Unified Network Management Architecture
UNP

Uniform numbering plan
UPS

Uninterruptible power supply
USOP

User service-order profile
UUCP

UNIX-to-UNIX Communications Protocol
UUI

User-to-user information

V
VAL
Voice Announcements over the LAN
VAR

Value-added reseller
VDN

See vector directory number (VDN).
vector directory number (VDN)
An extension that provides access to the Vectoring feature on the switch. Vectoring allows a customer to specify the treatment of incoming calls based on the dialed number.
vector-controlled split
A hunt group or ACD split administered with the vector field enabled. Access to such a split is possible only
by dialing a VDN extension.
VIAS
Visually Impaired Attendant Service

2000

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

W

Virtual Private Network
Private network functionality supported in the PSTN.
VIS

Voice Information System
VLAN
Virtual local area network
VLSI

Very-large-scale integration
VLSM
Variable Length Subnet Mask
VM

Voltmeter
VMON
Voice over Internet Protocol Monitoring Manager
VNI

Virtual nodepoint identifier
VOA

VDN of origin announcement
voice terminal
A single-line or multiappearance telephone.
VOM
Voice Only Module
VPN
See Virtual Private Network.

W
WAE
Wideband Access Endpoint
WATS

See Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS).
WCC

World-Class Core
WCR

World-Class Routing
WCTD

World-Class Tone Detection
WFB

Wireless fixed base

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

2001

Glossary and abbreviations

Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS)
A service in the United States that allows calls to certain areas for a flat-rate charge based on expected usage.
wideband
A circuit-switched call at a data rate greater than 64 kbps. A circuit-switched call on a single T1 or E1 facility
with a bandwidth between 128 and 1536 (T1) or 1984 (E1) kbps in multiples of 64 kbps. H0, H11, H12, and
N x DS0 calls are wideband.
wideband access endpoint
Access endpoints, extended with wideband switching to include wideband access endpoints. A wideband
access endpoint consists of one or more contiguous DS0s on a line-side T1 or E1 facility and has an extension. The Administered Connections feature provides call control for calls originating from wideband access
endpoints.
wink-start tie trunk
A trunk with which, after making a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call, the system waits for a momentary signal (wink) before sending the digits of the called number. Similarly, on an
incoming call, the system sends the wink signal when ready to receive digits.
WML
Wireless Makeup Language
work mode
One of four states (Auto-In, Manual-In, ACW, AUX-Work) that an ACD agent can be in. Upon logging in, an
agent enters AUX-Work mode. To become available to receive ACD calls, the agent enters Auto-In or Manual-In mode. To do work associated with a completed ACD call, an agent enters ACW mode.
work state
An ACD agent may be a member of up to three different splits. Each ACD agent continuously exhibits a work
state for every split of which it is a member. Valid work states are Avail, Unstaffed, AUX-Work, ACW, ACD
(answering an ACD call), ExtIn, ExtOut, and OtherSpl. An agent’s work state for a particular split may
change for a variety of reasons (example: when a call is answered or abandoned, or the agent changes work
modes). The BCMS feature monitors work states and uses this information to provide BCMS reports.
write operation
The process of putting information onto a storage medium, such as a hard disk.
WSA

Waiting session accept
WSP
WAN spare processor
WSS

Wireless Subscriber System

Z
ZCS

Zero Code Suppression

2002

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506

Index

Numerics
3-burst ringing, 1798
7-digit barrier codes, 1504
32-character display stations, 1460
40-character display stations, 1460
2420 DCP phone
downloading firmware, 127
file download, 128
302D console, 167
302A attendant console, 164
302B attendant console, 164
302C attendant console, 165
4600 telephones, 1389
6200 phones, 1391
6400 Serialized phone
Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement
(ACTR), 102, 1492
remotely readable electronic ID, 1808
7400A data module, 505
7400A/7400B data module, 505
7400C High Speed Link, 506
group 4 fax applications, 506
LAN interconnect applications, 506
video teleconferencing, 506
7400D data module, 505
7500 and World Class BRI Data Module screen, see Data Module
screen
7500 data module, 504, 506
data-communications equipment, 506
data-terminal equipment, 506
EIA 232C interface, 506
RS-366 automatic-calling unit interface, 506
V35 interface, 506
8400B data module, 505

A
AAR and ARS
digit analysis default translations, 1501
Digit Analysis Table, commands, 1318
Digit Analysis Table, screen, 577
Digit Conversion Table, commands, 1319
Digit Conversion Table, screen, 582
overlap sending, 1503
AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table
commands, 1318
AAR and ARS features
interactions
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP), 1918
AAS (Auto Available Split)

555-233-506

abandoned call search, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
Abbreviated Dialing (AD)
adding AD lists, 153
button, 131
commands, 1320
description, 1449
end user operations, 1450
enhanced lists, 1450
enhanced number lists, 1450
fixing problems, 155
group lists, 1450
group number lists, 1450
list types, 1449, 1450
personal lists, 1449
program button, 131
screen, 585, 630
security alerts, 153, 1449
special character button, 131
special lists, 1450
system number lists, 1450
Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List screen, see Abbreviated
Dialing screen
Abbreviated Dialing Group List screen, see Abbreviated Dialing
screen
Abbreviated Dialing Personal List screen, see Abbreviated Dialing
screen
Abbreviated Dialing System List screen, see Abbreviated Dialing
screen
abbreviated ring button, 131
abbreviated ringing, 1810
Abort Transfer, 1893
absorbing digits, 435
ACA Measurements Report, 1491
Access Endpoints, 1454
administered connection, 508
commands, 1324
screen, 593
Access Security Gateway (ASG), 37
ASG Key, 396, 1452
ASG Login Administration screen, see Login Administration
screen
description, 393, 1452
disabling, 395
monitoring the ASG history log, 396
multiple application platform for DEFINITY (MAPD), 1452
restarting temporarily disabled ASG, 395
setting up, 393
Access trunks
adding, 423
description, 1903
account button, 132
account codes
forcing users to enter, 542
tracking calls, 541
ACCUNET, 1631
ACD stroke count button, 150
ACD, see Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
acoustic coupled modems, 1767
activate malicious call trace button, 145

Issue 5 October 2002

2003

Index

activate night service button, 147
ACW (After Call Work), see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
AD programming
screen, 986
Add/Remove Skills, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
Administered Connections (AC), 507
access endpoints, 508, 1454
administering, 511
alarm button, 132
applications, 1455
commands, 1325
description, 507, 1454
dropping, 509
dropping administered connections, 1456
errors, 509, 1456
establishing, 508
establishing a connection, 1455
establishing administered connections, 1455
failures, 509, 1456, 1457
fast retries, 1457
screen, 598
SDDN ISDN–PRI trunk groups, 1454
typical AC applications, 508
Administering CTI Links, 536
Administrable Language Displays
description, 1460
enhanced phone displays, 1865
feature information displays, 1840
France, 1460
Italy, 1460
Spain, 1460
user-defined, 1460
Administration Change Notification, 1459
Administration without hardware, see swapping phones
After Call Work (ACW), see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
after call work button, 132
Agent Call Handling, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
Agent LoginID
duplicate agent, 97
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Guide to
ACD Call Centers
agents, 1720
aging login passwords, 390
alarm buttons
administered connection, 132
automatic wakeup, 148
CDR link, 137
DS1, 148
facility test call, 151
link, 144
major alarm, 144
minor/major alarms, 146
PMS link, 148
PMS printer, 148
system printer, 148

2004

Issue 5 October 2002

alarms, security violations, 1813
alert agent, 132
alerting
alerting phones, see ringing
silent, 1810
timers, 1476
algorithms, call pickup distribution, 1624
alias, 98
Alias Station
commands, 1326
screen, 603
alphanumeric dialing, 498
Alphanumeric Dialing Table
commands, 1326
screen, 604
Alternate Facility Restriction Levels (AFRL)
authorization codes, 1462
button, 133
description, 1461
toll fraud prevention, 1461
alternate voice data (AVD) signaling, 1662
analog
phones, 94
tie trunk description, 1907
ANI calling party information, displaying, 181
announcement data module, 439, 504
announcements
adding extensions, 441
backing up, 445, 461
bad file formats, 468
barge-in capability, 1467
changing, 443
changing announcement name, 471
continuous-play, 450, 1464
copying, 446, 461
definition, 439
deleting, 448, 457, 462
description, 1464
erasing, 448
fixing problems, 448
for a hunt group, 1717
moving to another circuit pack, 463
playing, 233
queues, 1464
recording, 442
recording—at a system phone, 455
recording—parameters, 455
restoring, 447
saving, 445
VAL, 466
Announcements/Audio Sources
commands, 1327
screen, 606
Answer Detection
administering, 436
answer supervision by timeout, 1469
call classification answer detection, 1468
description, 1468
network answer supervision, 1469

555-233-506

Index

Answer Supervision
answer detection, 1469
telecommuting, 358
tests, 1896
timer detection, 1469
answerback paging, 482
applications
administered connections, 508, 1455
endpoint, wideband switching, 522
area codes
adding, 262
restricted, 254
ARS partitioning, 265
ARS Toll Table
commands, 1329
screen, 613
ASA
installing, 35
installing from ASA CD, 37
installing from S8700 Media Server, 37
logging in, 35
ASAI, 533
ASG History Log, monitoring, 396
ASG Key, loss, 396
ASG, see Access Security Gateway (ASG)
assistance button, 133
associating
office phone number to home station, 369
asynchronous data module, 506
ATMS Trunk Test Schedule
screen, see Maintenance for Avaya MultiVantage and
DEFINITY Server
Attendant
call categories, 691
Emergency Access to Attendant, 1668
Pull Transfer description, 1895
Attendant Backup Alerting, 178
Attendant Call Waiting, 1470
Attendant Calling of Inward Restricted Stations, see Class of
Restriction (Restriction Override field)
Attendant Console
302A and 302B, 164
302C, 165
adding, 168
commands, 1329
feature buttons, 170
PC Console, 167
providing backup, 178
removing, 176
screen, 614
Attendant Console Data Module, see Attendant Console screen
Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access, 1472
attendant crisis alert, 139
Attendant Direct Extension Selection (DXS), 1473
Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection, 171
Attendant Intrusion, 1474

555-233-506

Attendant Override of Diversion Features, 1474
Attendant Priority Queue, 691
attendant queue calls, 133
attendant queue time, 133
Attendant Room Status, 1693
Attendant Serial Calling, 1475
attendant timers, 1476
audible alerting, 1653
Audible Message Waiting, 1478
audit trails, 1491
Authorization Code — COR Mapping
commands, 1330
screen, 631
authorization codes, 1479, 1801
AAR and ARS calls, 1481
creating, 265
in alternate facility restriction levels (AFRL), 1462
security violation button, 133
setting up, 404
using to override call restrictions, 264
Auto Available Split (AAS), see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
Auto Start and Don’t Split, 1475
autodial button, 134
auto-in mode, 134
Automated Attendant
description, 237, 1484
see also Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release 11
Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide
Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR), 247
AAR analysis tables, 1502
AAR trunking facilities, 1503
authorization codes, 1481
digit analysis table commands, 1318
digit conversion table commands, 1319
partitioning, 1447
private networks, 1501
toll table commands, 1329
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
description, 243
enhancing an ACD system, 243
Automatic Callback (ACB), 134, 1486
automatic circuit assurance (ACA)
audit trail records, 1491
button, 132
description, 1490
drop, 1490
message information, 1490
referral calls, 1490
Automatic Customer Telephone Rearrangement (ACTR), 102
Automatic Hold, 89
automatic intercom, 134, 484
automatic message waiting, 133
automatic number identification (ANI), 133, 1497, 1774

Issue 5 October 2002

2005

Index

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
allow local information calls, 256
ARS analysis tables, digit analysis default translations, 1502
ARS trunking facilities, 1503
assigning FAC, 249
authorization codes, 1481
defining partitions, 265
digit analysis table commands, 1318
digit conversion table commands, 1319
displaying analysis information, 249
inter-exchange carrier calls (IXC), 253
modifying call routing, 261
operator assisted calls, 252
overriding call restrictions, 264
partitioning, 1447
private networks, 1501
restricted area codes, 254
restricting calls, 263
time of day routing plan commands, 1380
understanding, 250
Automatic Routing
AAR, 1501
AAR and ARS digit analysis default translations, 1501
AAR and ARS overlap sending, 1503
ARS, 1501
ARS digit analysis default translations, 1502
description, 1499
Facility Restriction Levels (FRL), 1684
feature access code (FAC), 247
Generalized Route Selection (GRS), 1687
Look Ahead Routing (LAR), 1750
Time of Day (TOD) Routing, 268, 1887
Traveling Class Marks (TCM), 1684
trunking facilities, 1503
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers to Guest Rooms, 1694
Automatic Wakeup, 134, 1695
printer alarm button, 148
Auto-Wakeup-Dn-Dst screen, 986
aux work button, 134
AUX work reason codes, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
Avaya
National Customer Care Center support line, 377
Technical Service Center, 377
Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline, 377
Avaya IP agent, 115

B
backing up
announcements, 445
system, 55
system,S8100 Media Server, 58
barge-in, 1467
recorded announcements, 450, 1464

2006

Issue 5 October 2002

barging in with whisper paging, 1927
barrier codes, 329, 1801
7-digit barrier codes, 1504
description, 1504
basic multimedia complex, 305
BCMS/VuStats Login ID
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release
11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
bearer capability class (BCC), 1688
Best Service Routing, 633
commands, 1330
Best Service Routing Application Plan
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Guide to
ACD Call Centers
blocking prevention, 529, 1944
Boot Image
commands, 1331
bridged appearance button
analog phone, 131
digital phone, 135
Bridged Call Appearance
creating, 157
description, 157, 1505
extension administrable buttons and lights, 1506
multiappearance phones, 1506
Bulletin Board, 53
commands, 1331, 1345
screen, 636
busy indicator, 136, 1521
busy verification
phone verification, 1522
using, 400
verification, 1524
UCD groups, 1524
busy verify button, 151
button assignments, phone displays, 1834
Button Type
commands, 1332
button view, 135
BX.25 protocols, 1734

C
call appearance button, 136
Call by Call (CBC) Service Selection
call detail recording, 1634
description, 1629
incoming call handling treatment, 1633
information elements (IE), 1632
ISDN–PRI messages and information elements, 1632
usage allocation plans (UAP), 1633
Call Center Optional Features screen, see System Parameters
Customer-Options screen
Call Center System Parameters screen, see Feature-Related
System Parameters screen

555-233-506

Index

Call Charge Information
administering AOC, 545
administering PPM, 546
advice of charge (AOC) description, 1527
Call Detail Recording (CDR) reports, 1528
charge displays, 1528
collecting information about calls, 537
description, 1527
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM), 544, 1527
viewing, 547, 1528
call classification answer detection, 1468
Call Coverage
adding to a coverage path, 195
administering system-wide characteristics, 190
advanced, 193
assigning coverage paths, 192
basic, 189
call classification, 1534
call forwarding, 199
conditions that override, 1539
Consult, 1540
coverage answer groups, 198, 1541
Coverage Callback, 1540
Coverage Incoming Call Identification (ICI), 1541
coverage paths, 1534
coverage subsequent redirection intervals, 1533
covering user options, 1540
defining coverage for calls redirected to external, 194
defining time-of-day coverage, 196
description, 1533
directed call pickup, 1539
Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls, 1545
features that override, 1537
for a hunt group, 1717
guidelines, 1546
hardware requirement, 1533
redirecting calls to an off-net location, 193
remote off net call coverage, 1542
setting up a time-of-day coverage plan, 197
subsequent redirection interval, 1535
switch communication interface (SCI) links, 1544
time of day coverage table, 1541
typical coverage arrangements, 1546
VDN in a Coverage Path (VICP), 1544
Call Coverage / Call Forwarding System Parameters
commands, 1374
screen, 1167
Call Detail Recording (CDR), 1553, 1634
account code dialing description, 1554
alarm button, 137
call charge information reports, 1528
call disconnect data, 1595
call splitting examples, 1557
call splitting for incoming and outgoing trunks, 1558
CDR Privacy, 1559
collecting information about calls, 537
condition code override matrix, 1592
condition codes, 1589
customized formats, 1562

555-233-506

Call Detail Recording (CDR), (continued)
data format—59 character, 1566
data format—enhanced expanded, 1577
data format—enhanced LSU, 1574
data format—enhanced printer, 1569
data format—enhanced TELESEER data format, 1565
data format—enhanced unformatted, 1581
data format—expanded, 1575
data format—Int process, 1582
data format—Int-direct, 1584
data format—Int-ISDN, 1585
data format—ISDN LSU, 1573
data format—ISDN printer, 1568
data format—ISDN TELESEER, 1564
data format—LSU, 1572
data format—LSU-expand, 1571
data format—printer, 1567
data format—TELESEER, 1563
data format—unformatted, 1579
date record formats, 1561
description, 1553
encoding for TSC flags, 1599
establishing, 538
example, 1616
forced entry of account codes (FEAC), 542, 1554
incoming trunk call splitting, 1555
incoming trunk examples, 1556
intraswitch CDR, 540, 1559
output, 1560
PCOL trunks, 422
record field descriptions, 1587
security, 1554
System Parameters, 646
commands, 1333
call display button, 136
call forward button, 136, 137
Call Forwarding
call forwarding—all calls description, 1612, 1720
call forwarding busy/don’t answer description, 1612, 1613
call forwarding off net description, 1612, 1613
call forwarding override, 1612, 1614
description, 1612
setting up, 199, 202
Call Identification, 1665
call identification displays, 1835
call appearance identification, 1835
call purpose identifiers, 1837
called party identification, 1836
calling party identification, 1836
Call Park, 136, 1620
Call Pickup
alerting, 1623
button, 136
call distribution algorithms, 1624
call pickup alerting, 1623
call pickup groups, 1623
description, 218
directed call pickup, 220, 1623, 1624

Issue 5 October 2002

2007

Index

Call Pickup, (continued)
extended pickup groups, 220, 222
groups, 1623
pickup groups, 219
call progress
tones, 1543, 1946
call restrictions, overriding, 264
call routing, modifying, 261
call splitting, see Call Detail Recording (CDR)
call timer button, 136
Call Vector
commands, 1332
screen, 638
Call Waiting Termination, 1628
call waiting tones, 1946
call work button, 152
callback, automatic, 134
Caller ID, 1665
caller information
button, 136
displaying, 181
forwarding (CINFO) routing ISDN, 1741
Call-Identifiers screen, 993
calling party number, 138
Calling Party Number Restriction, 1636
Calling Party Number/Billing Number (CPN/BN)
description, 1635
calling privilege
controls, 1461
managing, 248
Callmaster telephones, 1437
call-originating facilities for FRL and TCM, 1685
calls
data setup, 490
observing, 486, 487
operator assisted, 252
override restrictions, 264
restricting, 75
call-terminating facilities for FRL and TCM, 1686
CallVisor Adjunct-Switch Applications Interface (ASAI)
description, 532
setting up, 534
CAMA Numbering Format
commands, 1333
CAMA trunks
CAMA Numbering Format, 644, 1333
description, 1904
CAS backup button, 137
Caution, meaning of, 27
CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation Plan Assignment Schedule
screen, see ISDN Trunk Group screen
CBC Trunk Group Usage Allocation screen, see ISDN Trunk
Group screen
CDR, see Call Detail Recording
CE marks, 4
CentreVu IP Agent, 1444
changing the name of the announcement, 471
changing the name of the file on the VAL, 471
channel allocation for wideband switching, 520

2008

Issue 5 October 2002

characters used in data call setup, 491
charge displays for call charge information, 1528
check in button, 137
check in/check out status, 1694
check out button, 137
chime codes, 478
chime paging
setting up, 476
chime paging over loudspeakers
fixing problems, 479
Circuit Pack
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
circuit pack configuration, 69
circular hunt group, 1716
Class of Restriction (COR), 75
changing, 248
Changing COR by FAC, 75
commands, 1333
description, 1641
fully restricted service restrictions, 1643
inward restrictions, 1642
manual terminating line restrictions, 1642
origination restrictions, 1642
outward restrictions, 1643
public restrictions, 1643
screen, 658
security measures, 1923
terminal and trunk restrictions, 1643
termination restrictions, 1643
toll and TAC toll restrictions, 1644
Class of Service (COS), 77
commands, 1334
screen, 672
security measures, 1923
CO trunks
adding, 414
description, 1905
Code Calling IDs
commands, 1334
screen, 675
collecting information about calls, 537
combined conversion modems, 1767
Command Permission Categories
commands, 1334
DS1 trunks, 429
screen, 676
Command Permission Categories—Restricted Object List screen,
see Command Permission Categories screen
command permissions, setting, 40
commands
AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table, 1318, 1319
Abbreviated Dialing (AD), 1320
Access Endpoints, 1324
Administered Connections, 1325
Alias Station, 1326
Alphanumeric Dialing Table, 1326
Announcements/Audio Sources, 1327
ARS Toll Table, 1329

555-233-506

Index

commands, (continued)
Attendant Console, 1329
Authorization Code — COR Mapping, 1330
Best SErvice Routing, 1330
Boot Image, 1331
Bulletin Board, 1331
Button Type, 1332
Call Coverage / Call Forwarding, 1374
Call Vector, 1332
CAMA Numbering Format, 1333
CDR System Parameters, 1333
Class of Restriction (COR), 1333
Class of Service (COS), 1334
Code Calling IDs, 1334
Command Permission Categories, 1334
Console Parameters, 1335
Coverage Answer Group, 1335
Coverage Path, 1336
Coverage Time of Day, 1336
CTI-Link, 1337
Customer Options, 1375
Data Modules, 1338
Date and Time, 1338
Daylight Savings Rules, 1339
DCS to QSIG Gateway, 1339
Dial Plan Analysis Table, 1339
Digit Absorption, 1341
Digit Analysis Table, 1318
Digit Conversion Table, 1319
Digit String, 1341
display capacity, 1317
Display Messages, 1358
Display Messages Button Labels, 1341
DLG CTI Link, 1341
DLG Interface, 1342
DS1 Circuit Pack, 1342
Ethernet Option, 1345
Extended Pickup Group, 1345
Extension, 1346
Extension Administered to have an MCT-Control
Button, 1346
Extension Type, 1346
Feature Access Code (FAC), 1347
Feature-Related System Parameters, 1347
Group Paging, 1347
History, 1348
Holiday Table, 1348
Hospitality, 1349
Intercom Group, 1351
Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC), 1351
Intra-Switch CDR, 1352
IP Address, 1352
IP Codec Set, 1352
IP Interfaces, 1353
IP Network Regions, 1353
IP Node Names, 1354
IP Options System Parameters, 1354, 1376
IP Route, 1354
IP Services, 1355

555-233-506

commands, (continued)
ISDN Numbering — Private, 1355
ISDN Numbering — Public/Unknown, 1355
ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack, 1356
Language Translations, 1358
List CRM-Features, 1336
List Usage CTI-Link, 1385
List Usage Extension, 1385
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN), 1361
Locations, 1361
Login Administration, 1362
Loudspeaker Paging, 1362
Measurements Announcements, 1362
Media Gateway, 1364
Mode Code Related System Parameters, 1364
Modem Pooling, 1364
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters, 1365
Music Sources, 1365
Packet Gateway Board, 1366
Partition Route Table, 1366
Pickup Group, 1366
Port, 1368
PRI Endpoints (PE), 1368
QSIG to DCS TSC, 1369
Remote Access, 1369
Remote Call Coverage Table, 1369
Remote Office, 1370
RHNPA Table, 1371
Route Pattern, 1371
Security-Related System Parameters, 1372
Signaling Group, 1372
Site Data, 1373
Station, 1373
System Parameters Country-Options, 1374
System Parameters Crisis Alert, 1375
System Parameters Customer-Options, 1375
System Parameters IP Options, 1376
Telecommuting Access, 1376
Tenant, 1376
Terminal Parameters, 1377
Terminating Extension Group (TEG), 1378
TFTP Server, 1379
Time of Day Coverage, 1380
Time of Day Routing, 1380
Toll Analysis, 1381
Trace, 1382
Trunk Groups, 1383
Uniform Dial Plan, 1383
Vector, 1385
Vectors and VDNs, 1332, 1386
XMOBILE Configuration Set, 1386
XMOBILE Station to Cell Phone Mapping, 1386
common-channel signaling (CCS), 1662
condition codes
for CDR, 1589
override matrix for CDR, 1592

Issue 5 October 2002

2009

Index

Conference
Meet-me, 1648
No Hold Conference, 1649
Selective Conference Party Display, Drop, and Mute, 1648
Transfer Toggle/Swap, 1648
conference, 1647
Configuration Set
screen, 680
Console Parameters
commands, 1335
screen, 683
setting, 177
Console Parameters — Default Attendant Group, see Console
Parameters screen
console permissions, 673
consult button, 138
consult, Call Coverage, 1540
control malicious call trace button, 146
conventions used in this book, 26
Caution, 27
Danger, 27
Note, 27
Security Alert, 27
Tip, 27
Warning, 27
CONVERSANT phones, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
copying announcements, 446
COR, see Class of Restriction (COR)
Cordless telephones, 1441
Co-Resident DEFINITY Local Area Network Gateway, 1650
country codes, 1175
Country Options System Parameters
screen, 1175
country protocol options, 1631
coverage
callback, 138
message retrieval, 138
options, assigning, 363
user options, 1540
Coverage Answer Group, 1541
adding, 198
commands, 1335
determining extensions having call forwarding activated, 200
screen, 694
Coverage Callback, Call Coverage, 1540
Coverage Incoming Call Identification (ICI)
Call Coverage, 1541
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off Net (CCRON), 1612
telecommuting, 357
Coverage Path, 1534
assigning to users, 192
commands, 1336
creating, 190
screen, 696
Coverage Time of Day
commands, 1336

2010

Issue 5 October 2002

CPE trunk, description, 1905
crisis alert, 1653
button, 139
Crisis Alert System Parameters
commands, 1375
screen, 700
CTI Link
screen, 703
CTI-Link
commands, 1337
Custom Selection of VIP DID Numbers, 1701
Customer Options
commands, 1375
screen, 1186
customizing phones, 99

D
DAC, see Dial Access Codes
Danger, meaning of, 27
data call setup, administering, 490
data connection types, 489
data extension button, 139
data hotline, 499
Data Line Data Module, 504
Data Module
7400A, 505
7400A/7400B, 505
7400D, 505
7500, 504, 506
8400B, 505
announcement, 504
asynchronous, 506
commands, 1338
data line, 504
description, 505
digital data endpoints, 1767
Ethernet, 504
ISDN-BRI, 495
PPPI, 504
processor, 504
processor/trunk, 504
screen, 707
system port, 504
types, 504
world class BRI, 504
X.25, 504
data origination access codes, 1768
data privacy, administering, 500
data restriction, administering, 501
data terminal (keyboard) dialing
alphanumeric, 498
default dialing, 497
ISDN-BRI data modules, 495
data-only off-premises extensions, 502
DATAPHONE II switched network modems, 1768

555-233-506

Index

Date and Time
button, 139
commands, 1338
displaying, 45
screen, 741
setting, 43
Date-Time screen, 995
daylight savings
displaying rules, 43
establishing rules, 41
Daylight Savings Rules
commands, 1339
screen, 744
DCP data modules, 493
data-terminal dialing, 493
telephone dialing, 494
DCS
interactions with Uniform Dial Plan, 1918
see also Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
trunk turnarounds, 1897
DCS to QSIG TSC Gateway
commands, 1339
dealing with security violations, 409
default dialing, 497
DEFINITY announcement synchronicity, 470
DEFINITY LAN Gateway, 1650
DEFINITY LAN Gateway (DLG)
setting up, 535
delayed ring button, 131
delayed ringing, 1810
delete message button, 139
demand print button, 149
denied calls, rerouting, 79
Denied Events Log
announcement failure, 467
determining extensions having call forwarding activated, 200
Device Manager
accessing from a web browser, 554
accessing through MultiService Network Manager, 554
using to administer G700 components, 553
diagnosing a vector problem, 239
dial access codes (DAC), 72
dial intercom, 139, 483
Dial Plan Analysis Table
commands, 1339
screen, 748
Dial Plan feature
interactions
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP), 1918
Dial Plan Parameters
commands, 1340
screen, 751
dial plans, 71, 1656
adding feature access codes, 73
dialed number identification service (DNIS)

555-233-506

dialing
alphanumeric, 498
default, 497
dictation equipment, 1800
DID trunks
adding, 417
description, 1905
DID view button, 139
Digit Absorption
commands, 1341
screen, 754
Digit String
commands, 1341
digital communications protocol (DCP)
data module formats, 1767
PC Interface configurations, 1790
digital data endpoints, 1767
digital tie trunk, description, 1907
digital trunks
enhanced DS1 administration, 428
digits
absorbing, 435
inserting, 434
DIOD trunks
adding, 419
description, 1905
security alert, 419
direct department calling (DDC)
busy verification, 1524
test calls, 1522
direct inward dialing (DID)
trunk groups, 1918
direct inward dialing (DID), DID-LDN night extensions, 1783
Directed Call Pickup, 140, 219, 1539, 1623, 1624
directory button, 140, 187
disabling
Access Security Gateway (ASG), 395
login IDs, 409
remote access, 372, 409
disassociating
home stations, 369
display capacity
commands, 1317
display charge button, 140
Display Messages
commands, 1358
Display Messages Button Labels
commands, 1341
displaying
ANI calling party information, 181
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) analysis information, 249
Bulletin Board messages, 53
caller information, 181
daylight savings time rules, 43
ICLID information, 182
logins, 392
system date and time, 45

Issue 5 October 2002

2011

Index

displays
ISDN calls, 1740
phones, 1387
distinctive ringing, 1658
Distributed Communications System (DCS) feature
interactions
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP), 1918
Distributed Communications System, see DCS
DLG, 1650
DLG CTI Link
command, 1341
commands, 1341
DLG Interface
command, 1342
commands, 1342
DND button, 140
Do Not Disturb (DND), 1701
do not disturb button, 140
drop button, 140
dropping administered connections, 509, 1456
DS1 alarm button, 148
DS1 Circuit Pack
commands, 1342
screen, 756, 757
DS1 Trunk Service
alternate voice data (AVD) signaling, 1662
Command Permission Categories, 429
common channel signaling (CCS), 1662
DS1 field implementation guidelines, 429
DS1 operational and signaling parameters, 1660
enhanced DS1 administration, 428
public network signaling administration, 768, 1662
recommended E1/T1 settings, 428
setting up, 426
signaling modes, 1662
duplicate command (phone), 97
Duplication-Related System Parameters, see Maintenance for
Avaya MultiVantage and DEFINITY® Server

enhanced multimedia complex, 306
enhanced phone displays, 1833, 1838
enhancing an ACD system, 243
Enterprise Directory Gateway, 1459
Ethernet data module, 504
Ethernet Option
commands, 1345
Expert Agent Selection (EAS) in an ACD system, 243
Extended Pickup Group, 220, 778
commands, 1345
Extended Trunk Access Call Screening
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
Extended User Administration of Redirected Calls, 1545, 1673
extender passwords, assigning, 366
Extension
commands, 1346
Extension Administered to have an MCT-Control Button
commands, 1346
screen, 780
Extension Number Portability (ENP) feature
interactions
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP), 1918
Extension Number Portability Plan
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
extension ranges, adding, 73
Extension Type
commands, 1346
extensions (ext), 72, 94
adding announcement, 441
data-only, off-premises, 502
External Device Alarm
screen, see Maintenance for Avaya MultiVantage and
DEFINITY Server

E

FAC, see Feature Access Code
Facility and Nonfacility Associated Signaling (FAS and
NFAS), 1678
Facility Restriction Level (FRL), 248
call-originating facilities, 1685
call-terminating facilities, 1686
description, 1685
ISDN, 1741
security measures, 1923
facility test call alarm button, 151
failed logins, 33
failures, power, 1672
fax, adding a, 109
Feature Access Code (FAC), 72, 73
assigning to Automatic Route Selection (ARS), 249
changing on dial plans, 74
commands, 1347
screen, 781

E1
recommended settings for digital trunks, 428
EC500 Extension to Cellular, 1664
additional information, 1667
eConsole IP Attendant, 168
electromagnetic compatibility standards, 3
Emergency Access to Attendant, 1668
emergency calls, 84, 87, 1474, 1671
endpoint software applications, 309, 1934
English, Leave Word Calling (LWC), 1744
enhanced
phone displays, group 1 to group 2b character maps, 1865
enhanced AD lists, 1450
Enhanced Call Transfer (ECT), 378, 1923
enhanced Misoperation Handling, 1765

2012

Issue 5 October 2002

F

555-233-506

Index

feature buttons
adding, 129
attendant console, 170
Feature Interactions, 1666
Cellular Service Provider, 1666
Distinctive Alerting, 1666
Feature Access Codes, 1666
Message Waiting Indication, 1666
Feature-Related System Parameters
commands, 1347
screen, 795
fiber link administration, 89
File download, 128
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
backing up announcements, 461
copying announcements, 461
deleting announcements, 462
initiating session, 459
moving announcements, 463
terminating session, 466
Firmware download, 127
fixing problems
abbreviated dialing buttons, 155
announcements, 448
chime paging over loudspeakers, 479
Terminal Self Administration (TSA), 162
voice paging over loudspeakers, 475
flash button, 142
forcing users to enter account codes, 542
foreign language displays, 1833
France
Administrable Language Displays, 1460
Leave Word Calling (LWC), 1744
phone displays, 1833
FTP, see File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
FX trunks
adding, 414
description, 1906

G
G700 Media Gateway
administering, 549
media module description, 551
physical design, 550
using Device Manager, 553
G700 media module description, 551
Generalized Route Selection (GRS), 1687
glare prevention and resolution, 529, 1942
go to cover button, 142
group communication, 473
group do not disturb button, 142
group number lists, 1450
group page button, 142

555-233-506

Group Paging, 479, 1690
commands, 1347
Group Paging Using Speakerphone, 858

H
H.320 calls, 305
H0 channels, 527, 1941
H11 channels, 526, 1939
H12 channels, 527, 1940
hands-free answering, 1726
Hayes command set, 505
headset button, 142
help
numbers to call, 28
History
commands, 1348
History report, system security, 378
Hold Time parameters, 1768
Hold, automatic, 89
Holiday Table
commands, 1348
home equipment, installing, 368
Hop Channel Assignments
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
Hospitality
Attendant Room Status, 1693
Automatic Selection of DID Numbers to Guest Rooms, 1694
Automatic Wakeup, 1695
commands, 1348, 1349
Custom selection of VIP DID numbers, 1701
Do Not Disturb (DND), 1701
names registration, 1704
Property Management System (PMS) Interface, 1707
screen, 862
Station Hunt Before Coverage, 1827
Suite Check-in, 1714
hoteling, 1794
hotline, data, 499
hunt group buttons
night service, 142
queue calls, 149
queue time, 149
Hunt Groups, 1715
adding announcements, 228
announcements, 1717
call coverage, 1717
changing, 226
circular, 1716
commands, 1349
delay announcement intervals, 1718
description, 224
example, 1718

Issue 5 October 2002

2013

Index

Hunt Groups, (continued)
hunt group busy options, 1719
hunt group queues, 1717
hunting methods, 1716
queue warning levels, 1717
screen, 875
Send All Calls, 1720
setting up, 224
setting up a queue, 227
setting up night service, 216

I
IAA, see Internal Automatic Answer (IAA)
ICI button, 143
ICLID, see Incoming Call Line Identification (ICLID)
ICLID, see Incoming Call Line Identification on Analog Trunks
Inbound Call Management (ICM), see Avaya MultiVantage Call
Center Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
Incoming Call Handling Treatment screen, see ISDN Trunk Group
screen
incoming call ID button, 143
Incoming Call Line Identification (ICLID) on Analog Trunks
description, 1724
displaying ICLID information, 182
incoming call-handling treatment, 1633
Individual Attendant Access, 1685
information
elements (IE), 1632
transfer capabilities (ITC), 1688
inserting vector or VDN steps, 238
inspect button, 143
installing ASA, 35
from ASA CD, 37
from S8700 Media Server, 37
installing home equipment, 368
Installing phones, 91
integrated announcement board, see Announcements/Audio
Sources screen
integrated conversion modems, 1767
integrated directory button, 140
Integrated Services Digital Network, see ISDN service
intercom, 134, 483, 484
automatic, 484
screen, 903
Intercom Group
commands, 1351
Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) codes
commands, 1351
example, 253
screen, 905
Interface Links
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software

2014

Issue 5 October 2002

Internal Automatic Answer (IAA)
button, 143
description, 1726
Inter-PBX Attendant Service (IAS), see Avaya MultiVantage Call
Center Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
Intra-Switch CDR
commands, 1352
screen, 906, 910, 912
invalid calls, rerouting, 79
inward wide area telecommunications service (INWATS), 1631
IP Address
commands, 1352
IP Address Mapping
screen, 908
IP Codec Set
commands, 1352
IP Hairpinning, 1753
IP Interfaces
commands, 1353
IP network mapping
command, 1353
IP Network Region
screen, 915
IP Network Regions
commands, 1353
IP Node Names
commands, 1354
screen, 922
IP Options System Parameters
commands, 1354, 1376
IP Route
commands, 1354
IP Routing
screen, 926
IP Services
commands, 1355
screen, 931
IP Softphone
adding, 115
IP Softphones, 115, 1444
IP Telephone, 1389
IP telephone
adding, 110, 111
IP trunks
description, 1906
ISDN Group Member Assignments screen, see ISDN Trunk Group
screen
ISDN Numbering — Private
commands, 1355
ISDN Numbering — Public/Unknown
commands, 1355
ISDN service
access codes, 1750
call identification displays, 1733, 1738
caller information forwarding (CINFO) routing, 1741
CPN/BN-to-host call identification, 1733
description, 1730

555-233-506

Index

ISDN service, (continued)
displays, 1740
Facility Restriction Levels (FRL), 1741
identification numbers, 1738
ISDN gateway, 1733
ISDN Number — Private, 970, 1355
ISDN Number — Public/Unknown, 973
ISDN Number — Public/Unknown commands, 1355
ISDN-BRI, 1790
ISDN-BRI commands, 1356
ISDN-BRI data modules, 495
ISDN-PRI, 1730, 1737
ISDN-PRI overlap sending, 1503
ISDN-PRI terminal adapters, 522
Malicious Call Trace (MCT), 1741
multiple subscriber number (MSN) – limited, 1741
overlap sending, 1741
private networks, 1732
public networks, 1732
see also Trunks and trunk groups
transmission rate and protocols, 1731
Traveling Class Marks (TCM), 1741
types of information, 1738
ISDN TELESEER data format, 1564
ISDN Trunk Group
commands, 1383
description, 1906
screen, 936
ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignments
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
ISDN-BRI Trunk Circuit Pack
commands, 1356
screen, 976
Italy
Administrable Language Displays, 1460
Leave Word Calling (LWC), 1744
phone displays, 1833
trunk flash, 1901, 1902
ITU, 1773
IXC, see Inter-Exchange Carrier (IXC) codes

L
language displays, 1840
enhanced phone displays, 1865
Language Translations
AD programming screen, 986
Auto-Wakeup-Dn-Dst, 986
Button Labels screen, 988
Call-Identifiers, 993
commands, 1358
Date-Time, 995
Leave-Word-Calling, 995
Malicious-Call-Trace, 996
Miscellaneous-Features, 997

555-233-506

Language Translations, (continued)
Property-Management, 1001
screens, 985
Self-Administration, 1004
Softkey-labels, 1010
Time-of-Day-Routing, 1011
Transfer-conference, 1011
View-buttons, 1005
VuStats, 1014
last number dialed button, 143
Leave Word Calling (LWC), 1744
leave word calling buttons
cancel, 144
lock, 144
message retrieval, 147
store, 144
Leave-Word-Calling
screen, 995
license file major alarm button, 143
license-error button, 143
Line Lockout, 1746
link alarm button, 144
List CRM-Feature
commands, 1336
list multimedia endpoints command, 356
list multimedia H.320-stations command, 356
list of options, 237
List Usage CTI-Link
commands, 1385
List Usage Extension
commands, 1385
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN)
administering, 437
commands, 1361
description, 1747
routing incoming FX and CO trunk calls to attendant
groups, 1748
routing of incoming DID trunk calls to attendant groups, 1748
screen, 1015
local button, 140
local survivable processor configuration, 552
Location by Region, 271, 1749
Locations
commands, 1361
screen, 1018
lock functions, 1919
logging
off the system, 39
logging in
for remote administration, 32
remotely over the network, 35
to the system, 31
using ASA, 35
with Access Security Gateway (ASG), 37
Login Administration
commands, 1362

Issue 5 October 2002

2015

Index

logins
adding, 387
adding login names, 390
changing, 390
changing permissions, 397
displaying, 392
failed, 33
login administration commands, 1362
name parameters, 387
removing, 392
screen, 1020
security violations notification (SVN), 144, 409
system security, 379
Look Ahead Routing (LAR), 1750
loss of ASG Key, 396
Loss plan
administering, 1753
Loudspeaker Paging
auxiliary paging systems, 1755
commands, 1362
description, 1753
Meet-Me, 1754
multiappearance phones, 1754
placing chime pages, 1755
placing voice pages, 1754
restrictions, 1756
screen, 1027
single-line phones, 1755

M
Magic-on-Hold system, 1870
maid status, 1694
Maintenance-Related System Parameters, see Maintenance for
Avaya MultiVantage and DEFINITY® Server
major alarm button, 144
making calls, 1666
Malicious Call Trace (MCT), 1346
description, 1759
ISDN service, 1741
MCT Voice Recorder, 1759
screen, 780
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) feature
MCT-Activate feature buttons, 1759
Malicious-Call-Trace
screen, 996
manual in button, 145
manual message waiting button, 144
manual override, 137, 145
manual signaling, see phones, feature button description
MAPD, see Multiple Application Platform for DEFINITY
(MAPD)
mass storage system (MSS), 57

2016

Issue 5 October 2002

Master Agent
start/stop, 574
mct button
activate, 145
control, 146
Measurements Announcements
commands, 1362
Media Gateway
commands, 1364
Media Server web interface tasks
backup and restore data, 558
copy files to the server, 559
SNMP administration, 559
upgrade software and configuration, 558
Meet-Me, 1754
Meet-me Conference, 1648
MEGACOM, 1631
message retrieval, 147, 1838
message waiting, 133, 147
Message Waiting Indication Subscriber Number Prefixes
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release
11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
messages, 235
MF Espana (MFE), 1773
MF Signaling, 1772
dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF), 1772
minor/major alarms button, 146
Miscellaneous-Features
screen, 997
Misoperation Handling, 1764
Mixed Station Numbering, 1821
Mode Code Related System Parameters
commands, 1364
screen, 1034
Modem Pooling, 513
administering, 514
combined conversion modems, 1767
commands, 1364
description, 1767
integrated conversion modems, 1767
screen, 1038
modem, adding a, 109
modifying
call routing, 261
modules, DCP data, 493
monitoring the ASG history log, 396
move phones, using tti, 104
MSS, see mass storage system (MSS)
multiappearance preselection and preference, 1770
multifrequency Espana, see Spain
Multifrequency-Signaling-Related System Parameters
commands, 1365
screen, 1045

555-233-506

Index

Multimedia Applications Server Interface (MASI) feature
AAR and ARS, 297
administration terminal requirements, 277
autonomous MMCX features, 275
basic features not supported, 300
Call Center features not supported, 300
Call Detail Recording (CDR), 297
call redirection, 298
command permissions, 297
conferencing, 299
configurations, 279
DEFINITY/MASI features, 276
detailed feature description, 297
error conditions, 303
features not supported, 299
forms, 283
planning for MASI, 278
status tracking, terminals and trunk, 299
terms, 277
transferring, 299
trunk groups, 299
voice messaging access, 298
multimedia buttons
basic, 146
call, 147
call forward, 147
data conference, 147
multi-number, 147
PC audio, 147
Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) feature
1-number access, 323, 337
authorization, 329
call association (routing), 335, 351
call redirection, 329
conferencing, 330
endpoint software packages, 309
list commands, 356
monitor commands, 354
multimedia complexes, 305
status commands, 355
Multiple Application Platform for DEFINITY (MAPD), see
Access Security Gateway (ASG)
Multiple Call Handling (MCH), see Network Facilities
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
multiple locations, 257
Multiple Music-on-Hold, 1875
multiple subscriber number (MSN) – limited
ISDN service, 1741
Music Sources, 1875
commands, 1365
screen, 1069
music-on-hold, 80

555-233-506

N
N x DS0 channels, 528, 1941
names registration, 1704
narrowband calls, 1944
National Customer Care Center support line, 377
netcon
channels, see Administration for Network Connectivity for
Avaya MultiVantage Software
network answer supervision, 1469, 1896
Network Call Redirection, 933, 935, 952, 1104, 1196, 1244,
1245, 1246, 1272
Network Facilities
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release
11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
network specific facilities (NSF), 1632
new product names, 23
next button, 147
Night Service
activate button, 147
disconnect timers, 1781
hunt group button, 142
hunt group night service, 1780
night console service, 1780
night station service, 1780
setting up for hunt groups, 216
setting up trunk answer from any station (TAAS), 211
setting up trunk group night service, 215
trunk answer from any station (TAAS), 1781
trunk group button, 151
trunk group night service, 1781
No Hold Conference, 1649
Node Number Routing
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
non-superuser, 41
non-volatile storage of announcements on VAL, 470
normal button, 140, 148
Note, meaning of, 27
Notify History command, 1325

O
observing button, 150
observing calls, 486, 487
Octel messaging systems, 820
off-premises extensions, data-only, 502
Off-Premises Station, 1789
open system interconnect (OSI) models, 1730
operator assisted calls, 252

Issue 5 October 2002

2017

Index

Optional Features
commands, 1375
screen, 1186
origin announcement, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center
Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
origination, 1666
Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk Transfer (OTTOTT), 1896
outward restrictions, see Restriction—Controlled
overlap sending over ISDN, 1741
overriding call restrictions, Automatic Route Selection
(ARS), 264

P
Packet Gateway Board
commands, 1366
screen, 1072
pager, crisis alert, 1654
paging, 479
parameters, login names, 387, 390
partition group, 265
Partition Route Table
commands, 1366
screen, 1073
passwords
adding, 387
aging, 390
changing, 399
encryption, 378
PC Console description, 167
PC Interface, 514
DCP PC configurations (Group 1), 1791
description, 1790
ISDN-BRI PC configuration, 517, 1792
security, 518, 1793
PCOL trunks
adding, 420
call detail recording (CDR), 422
description, 1906
restrictions, 422
Personal CO Line Group
screen, 1074
personal lists, 1449
Personal Station Access (PSA)
description, 1794
detailed information, 361
setting up, 360
telecommuting, 358
PGATE, see Packet Gateway Board screen
phantom extension, 101

2018

Issue 5 October 2002

phone displays, 1833
button assignments, 1834
call appearance identification, 1835
call purpose identifiers, 1837
called party identification, 1836
calling party identification, 1836
enhanced phone displays, 1838
mapping enhanced display characters, 1861
message retrieval, 1838
U.S. English to European, 1865
U.S. English to Japanese, 1862
U.S. English to Russian, 1862
U.S. English to Ukrainian, 1867
phones
adding, 93
alias, 98
analog, 94, 158
associating office number to home station, 369
busy verification, 1522
changing, 101
customizing, 99
digital, 158
disassociating home stations, 369
duplicating, 97
extension, 94
feature button descriptions, 131
inward restriction overrides, 667
ISDN call identification displays, 1733
lock functions, 1919
move using tti, 104
multiappearance, 1506
power failure transfer terminals, 1673
removing, 108, 112
swapping, 101
Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) separation, 106
test calls, 1522
Trunk Flash, 1901
unlock functions, 1919
upgrading, 100
using as intercoms, 483
physical security, 381
Pickup Group
commands, 1366
Pickup Groups
creating, 219
screen, 1079
pickup groups
flexible, 222
PictureTel, 309
placing
chime pages on Loudspeaker Paging, 1755
voice pages on Loudspeaker Paging, 1754
PMS alarm button, 148
PMS printer alarm button, 148

555-233-506

Index

Point-to-Point Protocol data module, see PPP data module
Port
commands, 1368
port address, 69, 94
port network (PN), preferential trunk routing, 526
posting Bulletin Board messages, 54
Power Failure Transfer, see emergency transfer
PPM, 546
PPP data module, 504
preferential trunk routing, port network (PN), 526
Prefixed Station Numbering, 1822
prefixes, adding, 263
preventing toll fraud, 379
PRI Endpoints (PE)
commands, 1368
screen, 1080
wideband switching, 522
print messages button, 149
printing on demand, see phones, feature button descriptions
Priority Calling
priority call waiting tones, 1628
types of priority calling calls, 1798
priority calling button, 149
privacy, see Console Parameters screen
Private Networking features
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP), 1913
private networks, 1501
Processor Channel Assignment for G3r
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
Processor Channel Assignment for G3si
screen, see DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network
Connectivity
processor interface data module, 504
processor/trunk data module (P/TDM), 504
product names, 23
Property Management System (PMS) Interface
description, 1707
Property-Management
screen, 1001
Proshare, 309
public networks
numbering plans, 1503
signaling administration, 768, 1662

Q
QSIG Optional Features screen, see System Parameters
Customer-Options screen
QSIG to DCS TSC
commands, 1369
QSIG, see DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network
Connectivity
queue call button, 149

555-233-506

queue time button, 149
queues
announcement, 1464
calls, 232
hunt groups, 1717
warning levels in hunt groups, 1717

R
R2 multifrequency compelled (MFC) signaling, 1497, 1774
Reason Code Names
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release
11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
recall rotary digit, 1157
Recorded Announcements, 442
barge-in capability, 450, 1464
Recorded Announcements screen, see Announcements/Audio
Sources screen
Recorded Telephone Dictation Access, description, 1800
redial button, 143
redirecting
calls, 236
calls to an off-net location, 193
redirection on no answer button, 148
referral calls, 1490
release agent button, 149
remote
off-net call coverage, 1542
port security devices (RPSD), 1923
Remote Access
authorization codes, 1801
barrier codes, 1504, 1801
commands, 1369
description, 370, 1800
disabling, 409
disabling permanently, 372
enabling, 409
extensions, 1802
night service extensions (NSE), 1802
screen, 1086
security alerts, 1801
security violation, 149
setting up, 371
Remote Access Numbers (RAN), 1482
Remote Access Status screen, see Remote Access screen
remote administration, logging in, 32
Remote Call Coverage Table
commands, 1369
screen, 1092
Remote Office, 119
commands, 1370
Network regions, 124
screen, 1093

Issue 5 October 2002

2019

Index

removing
attendant console, 176
logins, 392
trunks groups, 433
trunks to a trunk group, 432
removing phones, 112
Report Scheduler, see Reports for Avaya MultiVantage Software
reports
ACA Measurements Report, 1491
Call Detail Recording (CDR), 1545
Coverage Path Measurement Report, 1545
Principal Coverage Measurement Report, 1545
Security Violations Status, 1814
rerouting denied calls, 79
rerouting invalid calls, 79
Reset Shift Call, 1805
restarting temporarily disabled Access Security Gateway
(ASG), 395
restoring
announcements, 447
translations, see Maintenance for Avaya MultiVantage and
DEFINITY Server R, SI, or CSI
restricting
area codes, 254
calls, 75
outgoing calls using Automatic Route Selection (ARS), 263
Restriction—Controlled, description, 1652
restrictions
on Loudspeaker Paging, 1756
on PCOL trunks, 422
RHNPA Table
commands, 1371
screen, 1095
ringback queueing, 1487
ringer cutoff, 149, 1808
ringing, 1810
3-burst ringing, 1798
alerting, 1810
assigning, 158
call appearances, 1811
description, 1810
preferences, 1770
ring types, 1810
road-warrior application, 115, 1444
adding, 116
RONA button, 148
Route Pattern
commands, 1371
screen, 1096
routing, 234
changing, 261
incoming DID trunk calls to attendant groups, 1748
incoming FX and CO trunk calls to attendant groups, 1748
Russia
MF shuttle signaling, 1773
multifrequency (MF), 1497

2020

Issue 5 October 2002

S
S8100 Media Server Configurations
setting up for, 535
S8300 Media Server
accessing web interface, 556
adding trap destinations, 564
administering ACP log-in permissions, 575
administering SNMP agents, 566
administration, 555
call processing administration, 560
downloadable programs, 559
faceplate, 551
local survivable processor configuration, 552
screen and command changes, 561
SNMP Agents, 564
start/stop Master Agent, 574
web interface main menu, 558
S8300 Media Server Configurations
setting up for, 536
S8700 Media Server
adding trap destinations, 564
administering ACP log-in permissions, 575
administering SNMP agents, 566
administration, 555
SNMP Agents, 564
start/stop Master Agent, 574
S8700 Media Server, logging in remotely over the network, 35
saving
announcements, 445
translations, 57
Scheduler, see DEFINITY ECS Reports
SDDN, see software defined data networks (SDDN)
SDN, see DEFINITY ECS Administration for Network
Connectivity
Security Alert, meaning of, 27
security alerts
Abbreviated Dialing (AD), 153, 1449
Call Detail Recording (CDR), 1554
DIOD trunks, 419
PC Interface, 1793
PC interface, 518
Remote Access, 1801
Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI), 1883
trunks, 413
Vectors and VDNs, 230, 241
Security Lock
instructions, 407
security violation button
authorization code, 133
login, 144
remote access, 149
station security code, 150
security violations notification, 1813

555-233-506

Index

Security Violations Notification (SVN), 401, 1814
description, 1813
disable login IDs, 409
enable login IDs, 409
security violation thresholds and notification, 1813
Security Violations Status report, 1814
SVN referral calls with announcements, 1815
system reporting, 1814
system security, 378
security violations, dealing with, 409
Security-Related System Parameters
commands, 1372
screen, 1105
seizure signals, 1909
Selective Conference Party Display, Drop, and Mute, 1648
Self-Administration screen, 1004
send all calls button, 150
service calls, see local information calls
Service Observing, 1817
description, 1817
observing calls, 1818
phone displays, 1819
restrictions, 1818
setting up, 488
trunk calls, 1819
warning and conference tones, 1819
service observing button, 150
Service Observing, see observing calls
Setting time of day clock synchronization, 45
Shared UUI Feature Priorities screen, see ISDN Trunk Group
screen
signal button, 150
Signaling Group
commands, 1372
screen, 284, 1112
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
silent ringing, 1810
Single-Digit Dialing, 1821, 1822
SIT Treatment for Call Classification
screen, see DEFINITY ECS Guide to ACD Call Centers
Site Data
commands, 1373
screen, 1126
slot address, description, 69
SNMP administration, 559
Softkey-labels
screen, 1010
software defined data networks (SDDN), 1454
software defined networks (SDN), see DEFINITY ECS
Administration for Network Connectivity
Spain
Administrable Language Displays, 1460
Leave Word Calling (LWC), 1744
MF Espana (MFE), 1773
Multi Frequency Espana (MFE), 1497
phone displays, 1833
speakerphone paging, 479
special characters, 491

555-233-506

special dial tone, 89
special information tones (SIT), see Avaya MultiVantage Call
Center Software Release 11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
speed dialing, see Abbreviated Dialing (AD)
splits, 1524, 1720
stand-alone H.323 application, 1445
standards
electromagnetic compatibility, 3
start-dial signals, 1909
Station
commands, 1373
screen, 1127
station hunting, 1825, 1827
Station Lock
using, 407
station lock
description, 1831
station security codes
creating, 362
description, 1832
violation, 150
station to station restrictions, see Restriction—Controlled
station, adding, 93
stored number button, 150
stroke buttons, 150
subsequent call coverage redirection interval, 1535
Suite Check-in, 1714
Super-retriever extensions, 806
superuser, 41
supervisor button, 133
swapping phones, 101
switch communication interface (SCI) links, 1544
Synchronization Plan
screen, see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya
MultiVantage Software
system administration
logging in, 31
logging in remotely, 32
logging in using ASA, 35
logging off, 39
passwords, 1923
system number lists, 1450
System Parameters Call Coverage / Call Forwarding
commands, 1374
screen, 1167
System Parameters Country-Options
commands, 1374
screen, 1175
System Parameters Crisis Alert
commands, 1375
screen, 700
System Parameters Customer-Options
commands, 1375
screen, 1186
System Parameters IP Options
commands, 1376
screen, 923
System Parameters OCM Call Classification
screen, 1210

Issue 5 October 2002

2021

Index

system parameters, changing, 78
system port data module, 504
system printer alarm button, 148
system printer, see Reports for Avaya MultiVantage Software
system security, 378
aging login passwords, 390
authorization codes, 1479
changing login permissions, 397
changing passwords, 399
checklist, 382
disabling a login ID, 409
disabling Remote Access, 370, 409
enabling Remote Access, 409
enhanced call transfers (ECT), 378
History report, 378
logins, 379
passwords, 378
physical security, 378, 381
securing trunks, 378
Security Violations Notification (SVN), 378, 1813
setting up authorization codes, 404
system administration passwords, 1923
Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI), 1883
unauthorized use, 1922
system-wide settings, 77

T
T.120 calls, 305
T1
recommended settings for DS1 trunks, 428
TCM, see Traveling Class Marks (TCM)
Technical Service Center, 377
TEG button, 150
telecommuter application, 115, 118, 1444
telecommuting, 1794
Answer Supervision, 358
Coverage of Calls Redirected Off Net (CCRON), 357
Personal Station Access, 358
Telecommuting Access
commands, 1376
screen, 1213
telephone dialing
data call preindication, 494
DCP data modules, 494
one-button transfer to data, 494
return-to-voice, 494
Telephone Displays, 1833
TELESEER, 1561, 1563
templates, using to add phones, 96
Temporary Bridged Appearance, 1868
Tenant
commands, 1376
screen, 1214
Tenant Partitioning, 1870
tenant partitioning, 82, 1870

2022

Issue 5 October 2002

terminal and trunk restrictions, 1643
Terminal Parameters
commands, 1377
screen, 1218
Terminal Self Administration (TSA)
assigning a security code, 160
description, 160
fixing problems, 162
Terminal Translation Initialization, 1880
Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI), 105, 1880
Terminating Extension Group (TEG)
assigning, 244
commands, 1378
description, 1885
screen, 1223
Termination Extension Group, 1885
termination restrictions
see also Restriction—Controlled
TFTP Server
commands, 1379
screen, 1227
Tie trunks, 423, 1907
time button, 139
time division multiplexing (TDM), 1768
Time of Day Clock Synchronization, 1888
setting, 45, 1890
Time of Day Coverage, 1541
defining, 196
screen, 1228
Time of Day Coverage Table
commands, 1380
Time of Day Routing, 1887
commands, 1380
description, 1887
screen, 1229
time, setting, 43
Time-of-Day-Routing
screen, 1011
timer button, 150
timers, attendant, 1476
Tip, meaning of, 27
TOD routing override button, 137, 145
Toll Analysis
commands, 1381
screen, 1230
toll fraud, 377, 1600, 1922
15 tips to prevent, 379
prevention, 1461
Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline, 377
toll restrictions, see Restriction—Controlled
tones
call progress, 1543, 1946
call waiting, 1946
conference, 1819
priority call waiting, 1628
reset shift dial tone, 1805
special ringing, 1628
warning, 1819

555-233-506

Index

total restrictions, see Restriction—Controlled
Trace
commands, 1382
tracing calls, see Malicious Call Trace (MCT)
tracking calls by account codes, 541
trademarks, 28
Transfer, 1892
Transfer - Outgoing Trunk to Outgoing Trunk, 1896
Transfer- Trunk to Trunk, 1899
Transfer Upon Hang-up, 1892
Transfer-conference
screen, 1011
transit network selections, 1632
translations
copy protection, 55
restoring, see Maintenance for Avaya MultiVantage and
DEFINITY Server R, SI, or CSI
saving, 55
translations, DEFINITY One
saving,S8100 Media Server, 58
transmission and supervisory signaling for trunks and trunk
groups, 1908
Traveling Class Marks (TCM)
call-originating facilities, 1685
call-terminating facilities, 1686
description, 1685
ISDN, 1741
security measures, 1923
trunk answer from any station (TAAS), 211
Trunk Flash, 142, 1901
Trunk Group
adding trunks, 430
malfunctions, 1490
night service, setting up, 215
removing trunk groups, 433
removing trunks, 432
screen, 1233
test calls, 1522
Trunk Group Administration
Call by Call (CBC) Service Selection, 1629
DS1 Trunk Service, 1659
Facility and Nonfacility Associated Signaling (FAS and
NFAS), 1678
Wideband Switching, 1931
trunk group night service button, 151
trunk ID button, 151
Trunk to Trunk Transfer, 1899
trunking facilities, 1503
trunks
security alert, 413
turnarounds, 1896
Trunks and Trunk Groups, 1903
trunks and trunk groups, 1383, 1903
transmission and supervisory signaling, 1908
TTI, see Terminal Translation Initialization

555-233-506

U
uniform call distribution (UCD)
busy verification, 1524
test calls, 1522
Uniform Dial Plan
commands, 1383
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP), 1913
considerations, 1917
detailed description, 1913
examples, 1916
interactions
Dial Plan, 1918
DID trunk groups, 1918
Distributed Communications System (DCS), 1918
Extension Number Portability (ENP), 1918
UDP codes, 1915
Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) feature
forms, 1913
interactions
AAR and ARS, 1918
Uniform Dial Plan Report, 1303
Uniform Dial Plan Table, 1304
United Kingdom trunk flash, 1901
universal digital signaling level 1 circuit pack, wideband
switching, 522
unlock functions, 1919
upgrading phones, 100
usage allocation plans (UAP), 1633
user defined language displays, 1460
user-defined language
Leave Word Calling (LWC), 1744
users
non-superuser, 41
superuser, 41
Using Station Lock, 407

V
VAL
changing the name of the file, 471
VDN in a Coverage Path (VICP), call coverage, 1544
Vector
commands, 1385
Vector Directory Number (VDN), 240
Vector Routing Table
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release
11 Guide to ACD Call Centers
Vector Routing Table, see VuStats Display Format
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release
11 Guide to ACD Call Centers

Issue 5 October 2002

2023

Index

Vectors and VDNs
adding a VDN, 241
commands, 1332
deleting a step, 239
description, 240
diagnosing a vector problem, 239
inserting a step, 238
list of options, 237
managing, 230
messages, 235
playing an announcement, 233
queueing calls, 232
redirecting calls, 236
routing
based on time of day, 234
screen, 1306
security alert, 230, 241
VDN commands, 1386
viewing VDNs, 242
VIAS, see Visually Impaired Attendant Service
video conferencing, 305
view button, 135
View-buttons
screen, 1005
VIP check-in button, 151
visual alerting, 1653
Visually Impaired Attendant Service (VIAS), 1478
Voice Announcements over LAN (VAL)
FTP—starting a session, 460
non-volatile storage of announcements, 470
recording announcements—at a system phone, 455
recording announcements—professional or computer
recording parameters, 455
troubleshooting, 467
VAL Manager, 466
voice mail, 1665
cellular service provider, 1666
voice mail security, 1922
voice mailbox passwords, 1923
Voice Message Retrieval, 1919
voice message retrieval, description, 1919
Voice Messaging Systems, 1921
voice messaging systems, 1921
voice paging over loudspeakers
fixing problems, 475
setting up, 473
voice terminals, see phones
VuStats
screen, 1014
VuStats button, 152
VuStats Display Format
screen, see Avaya MultiVantage Call Center Software Release
11 Guide to ACD Call Centers

2024

Issue 5 October 2002

W
warning and conference tones, 1819
Warning, meaning of, 27
WATS trunks
adding, 414
description, 1907
Whisper Paging, 1927
whisper paging, 152, 482, 1927
Wideband Support Options
screen, 968
Wideband Switching, 1931
administering, 530, 1932
applications, 1932
blocking prevention, 529, 1944
channel allocation, 520, 1933
channel service unit, 523
data backup connection, 524, 1937
data service unit, 523
description, 519, 1931
direction of trunk/hunting within facilities, 526, 1939
endpoint applications, 522, 1934
examples, 1937
facility lists, 525, 1938
glare prevention and resolution, 529, 1942
H0 channels, 527, 1941
H11 channels, 1939
H11channels, 526
H12 channels, 527, 1940
high-speed video conferencing, 1937
ISDN-PRI terminal adapters, 522
ISDN-PRI trunk groups and channel allocation, 525
ISDN–PRI trunk groups and channel allocations, 1938
line-side (T1 or E1) facility, 523
N x DS0 channels, 528, 1941
networking, 525
nonsignaling configurations, 1936
port network (PN) preferential trunk routing, 1939
PRI-endpoints, 522
primary data connectivity, 524
scheduled batch processing, 524
typical uses, 521, 1934
universal digital signaling level 1 circuit pack, 522
wideband access endpoint, 523
work code button, 152
world class BRI data module, 504
World Class Tone Detection, 1946
World Class Tone Generation, 1946

555-233-506

Index

X
X.25 Adjunct Data Module screen, see Data Module screen
X.25 data module, 504
XMOBILE Configuration Set
commands, 1386
XMOBILE Configuration Set commands, 1386
XMOBILE Station to Cell Phone Mapping
commands, 1386

555-233-506

Issue 5 October 2002

2025

Index

2026

Issue 5 October 2002

555-233-506



File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2002:08:28 12:35:37Z
Creator                         : FrameMaker 5.5.6p145
Modify Date                     : 2003:04:03 09:39:03-07:00
Page Count                      : 2026
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Creation Date                   : 2002:08:28 12:35:37Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Mod Date                        : 2003:04:03 09:39:03-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2003:04:03 09:39:03-07:00
Title                           : Administrator's Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software